JP7420297B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for notifying lottery results, a system has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the performance by operating an operation means that the player can operate. There is.

JP2013-090780A

However, there was a problem in that the interest in playing the game decreased.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a determining means capable of performing determination, a display means capable of displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means, and a display means displaying identification information on the display means. dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information to be displayed; and a dynamic display mode capable of determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. comprising: a determining means; and a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means; It has an operating means that can be displaced to a first state and a second state different from the first state, and an operation effect execution means that can execute an operation effect, and the operation means that can be displaced to the second state. The operating means that has been operated is configured to be able to be displaced to the first state in response to the fact that the operating means is not operated, and the gaming machine is configured to be able to change the operating means to the first state at least during a specific period in which the operation of the operating means is not determined to be valid. If a predetermined event occurs under a situation where the operating means is in the first state, and the operating means is in the first state at a predetermined timing after the predetermined event occurs, the operation is performed as the operation effect. A first effect of a first operation mode corresponding to the means being in the first state is configured to be executable , and the operating means is displaced from the second state toward the first state during the specific period. The predetermined event occurs under a situation in which an action to be performed is obstructed, and the operating means attempts to displace from the second state toward the first state at a predetermined timing after the predetermined event occurs. If the operation to perform the operation is prevented, a second effect in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode is configured to be executable as the operation effect, and the operation means changes from the second state to the first operation mode. Even if the predetermined event occurs under a situation in which the operation of displacing in the direction of the state is prevented, if the operating means is in the first state at the predetermined timing, the The first effect is configured to be executed, and the first effect can be executed even during a period when the dynamic display of the identification information is not being executed, and the operation means is configured to execute the first effect at the predetermined timing. The operation of displacing from the second state in the direction of the first state is prevented, and the operating means changes to the second state during the period from the predetermined timing until the second performance is executed. The second effect is configured to be executed even if the situation that prevents the movement from moving toward the first state is resolved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, there is provided a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means capable of displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the identification information displayed on the display means. dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information; dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, and a first state; a second state different from the first state, an operating means capable of being displaced to the second state, and an operating effect executing means capable of executing an operating effect, the operating means being displaced to the second state. is configured to be able to be displaced to the first state in response to the fact that the operating means is not operated, and the gaming machine is configured such that the operating means is in the first state at least during a specific period in which the operation of the operating means is not determined to be valid. If a predetermined event occurs under a situation where the predetermined event is in the first state, and the operating means is in the first state at a predetermined timing after the predetermined event occurs, the operating means is in the first state as the operation effect. A first effect of a first operation mode corresponding to the state is configured to be executable , and the operation means prevents an operation of displacing the operating means from the second state toward the first state during the specific period. The predetermined event occurs under a situation where the predetermined event occurs, and the operation means is prevented from displacing from the second state toward the first state at a predetermined timing after the predetermined event occurs. In the case where the operation effect is a second effect in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the operation means is configured to move from the second state toward the first state. Even if the predetermined event occurs under a situation in which the movement of displacement is obstructed, if the operating means is in the first state at the predetermined timing, the first effect is executed. The first effect can be executed even during a period when the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed, and the operating means changes from the second state to the first effect at the predetermined timing. 1 state is prevented, and the operation means changes from the second state to the first state during the period from the predetermined timing until the second effect is executed. The second effect is configured to be executed even if the situation in which the movement of displacing in the direction of is obstructed is resolved .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7(a). 7 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. (a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and (c) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the tilting device along line XIVc. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the tilting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. 17(a) is a front view of the drive device, and FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the drive device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (a) is a side view of the left disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 18. (a) and (b) are front views of a release member and a rotating claw member. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). FIG. (a) is a side view of a slide claw member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a release member. (a) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). It is a side view of the tilting device in a 3rd embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. It is a side view of the tilting device in a 4th embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of an operating device in a fifth embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibrating device. (a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and (c) is a side view of the lower frame member in FIG. 59(a). FIG. 3 is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibrating device taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device. (a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (a) is a front view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disk cam along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a sectional view of the right disk cam taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). (a) is a front view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disk cam along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). (a) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). It is. (a) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). It is. It is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device in a 6th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member, the ring member, and the 2nd transmission member of the left disk cam. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along the line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74(a), and (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). It is. (a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). 77(a) is a front view of the engaging member, and FIG. 77(b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in Fig. 78 (a), and (c) is a side view of the right disc cam. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c), (e) is a front view of the right disc cam, and (f) is a front view of the right disc cam. 78(e) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e). (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is opened (developed) with respect to the outer frame. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is opened to the outer frame and the back pack is opened to the inner frame (deployed). It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is closed with respect to the outer frame and the front frame is opened (expanded). It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window portion of the front frame are shown exploded. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window portion of the front frame are shown exploded. (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member are illustrated side by side. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94(a). (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). (a) is a rear schematic diagram schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and (c) is a schematic diagram of the movable binding member and the harness. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c); FIG. (a) and (b) are top schematic views of a front frame, an inner frame, a movable binding member, and a harness, schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness. FIG. 3 is a front view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115(a). FIG. 3 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. (a) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along the CXXIVb-CXXIVb line in FIG. 124(a), and (c) is a rear view of the speaker assembly in FIG. 124(a). FIG. 124(d) is a top view of the speaker assembly as seen in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124(d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly as seen in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a). (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, the rear assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame, and the upper side plate member taken along the CXXVa-CXXVa line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, rear assembly, upper frame member, main body frame, and upper side plate member taken along the line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (a) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame along the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line in FIG. 127(b). (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) is a front perspective view of the board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit. (a) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the ball firing unit showing the ball sending situation by the ball sending device in chronological order. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (a) is a front view of the ball firing unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball firing unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). 147(a) is a front view of the ball firing unit, and FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the ball firing unit, inner rail, and outer rail after firing the ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal motion device taken along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of a flower petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device, the driving arm member, and the driven arm member. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd presentation member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide board, and a 2nd performance member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, a forward-backward movement unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and a forward-backward movement unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, a forward-backward movement unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and a forward-backward movement unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, a forward-backward movement unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and a forward-backward movement unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central axis rotation device omitted and the petal operating device seen through. FIG. 3(d) is a front view of the slit member and the rotary plate. (a) is a front view of the rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of the petal and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear view of the petal operating device. FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central axis rotation device omitted and the petal operating device seen through. FIG. 3(d) is a front view of the slit member and the rotary plate. (a) is a front view of the rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of the petal and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear view of the petal operating device. FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central axis rotation device omitted and the petal operating device seen through. FIG. 3(d) is a front view of the slit member and the rotary plate. (a) is a front view of the rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of the petal and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear view of the petal operating device. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the ball firing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the ball firing unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage forming member in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. (a) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device in 12th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal operating device. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal operating device. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operating device in a 13th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the operating device. (a) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operating device, (d) is a partial sectional view of the operating device taken along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203(a), and (e) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along the line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a). (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a); FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206(a), and (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 17th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front view of a front frame. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along the line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along the line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. (a) is a front perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and right front cover. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a schematic sectional view of the right reinforcing rib, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of the left reinforcing rib. (a) is a top view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a front view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a right view of the lower plate unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (b) is a left view of the lower plate unit as viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower pan unit along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower pan unit along the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229(a), (c) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along the line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). 229(a) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit taken along the line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper direction device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper direction device. (a) is a front view of the rear unit, and (b) is a front view of the illumination board. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear unit. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illumination board, the back support member, and the acoustic device taken along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. It is a partial sectional view of a decorative board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illumination board, the back support member, and the acoustic device taken along the line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. It is a partial sectional view of a decorative board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. (a) is a partial sectional view of the partition member, the illumination board, the back support member, and the acoustic device taken along the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line in FIG. 241, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the electrical It is a partial sectional view of a decorative board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the upper presentation device. 241(a) is a sectional view of the rear unit taken along the line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit. (a) is a front view of the division unit and the guided unit, and (b) is a rear view of the division unit and the guided unit. (a) is a front view of the division unit, and (b) is a rear view of the division unit. (a) is a front view of the plate guide unit, and (b) is a rear view of the plate guide unit. (a) is a sectional view of the division unit and the guided unit taken along the CCLIVa-CCLIVa line in FIG. 251(b), and (b) is a sectional view of the division unit and the guided unit taken along the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line in FIG. 251(b). 251(c) is a sectional view of the partition unit and the guided unit along the CCLIVc-CCLIVc line of FIG. 251(b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit. (a) is a front view of the transparent cylindrical member, (b) is a top view of the transparent cylindrical member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent cylindrical member, and (d) is It is a right view of a transparent cylindrical member as seen in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the transparent cylindrical member. (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is the optical transmission unit. FIG. 3(e) is a right view of the optical transmission unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L; FIG. 242 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit, the acoustic device, and the optical transmission unit taken along line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. 241. FIG. (a) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the arrangement of the first illumination unit, and (b) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the arrangement of light visible through the optical transmission unit. . It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal presentation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal presentation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal presentation device. (a) is a front view of the base member and the illumination board, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is 269(e) is a top view of the base member, (e) is a bottom view of the base member, and (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member and the illumination board taken along line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf in FIG. 269(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a front view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in range CCLXXIIIa in FIG. 272(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in range CCLXXIIIb in FIG. 272(b). (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal direction device taken along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light receiving member taken along the line CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb in FIG. 274(b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the illumination board, and the light-receiving member taken along the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line in FIG. 272(b), and (b) is a sectional view of the base member taken along the CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb line in FIG. 272(b), 272(c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the illuminated substrate, and the light-receiving member taken along the line CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc in FIG. 272(b). FIG. FIG. 280 is a schematic diagram of a base member, an illumination board, and a light receiving member schematically showing the cross section of FIG. 280(a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 18th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a sectional view of the effect device taken along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the illumination board of the effect device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb in FIG. 284(a). It is a side view of the cover in a 19th embodiment. 230 is a sectional view of the lower tray unit in the 20th embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229. FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame, an operation device, and a lower tray unit in a 21st embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor and the covering member. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor and the covering member. It is a front perspective view of a covering member. FIG. 3 is a front view of the covered cover member. 296(a) is a top view of the lower pan unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit taken along the line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG. 296(a). FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower tray unit. 296(a) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along the line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII in FIG. 296(a). (a) is a partial top schematic diagram of the lower pan unit schematically illustrating the lower pan unit, and (b) is a partial side schematic diagram of the lower pan unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a). be. (a) is a partial top schematic view of the lower tray unit schematically illustrating the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial side schematic diagram of the lower tray unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb in FIG. 300(a). be. FIG. 3 is a schematic partial top view of the lower tray unit, schematically illustrating the lower tray unit. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 22nd embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the front frame is opened (developed) with respect to the inner frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. (a) is an enlarged front view of the game board in range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307(b) is a partial sectional view of the game board taken along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lottery unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit. 312(a) is a side view of the engaging member viewed from the direction of the rotation axis, and FIG. 312(b) is a front view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312(a). c) is a sectional view of the engagement member taken along the line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in FIG. 312(b). FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member, the engagement member, and the drive device unit. (a) and (b) are side views of an electric accessory, an engaging member, and an electromagnetic solenoid. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit along a line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line in FIG. 312(b). (a) is a top view of the operating unit, and (b) is a side view of the operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302. It is a back view of a game board and an operation unit. 303 is a partial sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII line in FIG. 302. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front cover. (a) is a front view of the illuminated board and the board fixing plate, and (b) is a sectional view of the illuminated board and the board fixing plate taken along the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb line in FIG. 331(a). (a) is a front view of the illuminated substrate and the substrate fixing plate, and (b) is a sectional view of the illuminated substrate and the substrate fixing plate taken along the CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb line in FIG. 332(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front side unit and a rear side unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit and the rear unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit and rear unit of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit and rear unit of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line in FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG. 344(a). be. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operating unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of a gear with a pin and the same phase member, and (b) is a front perspective view of the gear with a pin and the same phase member on the left side, and a front perspective view of the gear with a pin and the same phase member on the right side. It is a rear perspective view. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rear unit. FIG. 356 is a sectional view of the rear unit taken along the line CCCLIX-CCCLIX in FIG. 356(a). It is a schematic diagram which shows the rotation angle of the gear with a pin and the same phase member on the basis of an initial angle. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit and the rear case. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a production unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a production unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body of the production unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body of the production unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first rotating member. (a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support part, and (b) is a front exploded perspective view of the second support part. (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the support part, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the second support part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper lid part and a box-shaped part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper lid part and a box-shaped part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. It is an exploded front perspective view of a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (a) is a top view of an upper lid part, a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism, and (b) is a front view of an upper lid part, a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(a), and (c) is a top view of the first rotating member. 376(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(a), and (c) is a top view of the first rotating member. 377(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(a), and (c) is a top view of the first rotating member. 378(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(a), and (c) is a top view of the first rotating member. FIG. 379(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(c). (a) is a front view of the production unit, (b) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Fig. 380 (a), and (c) is a front view of the production unit; (d) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(c). (a) is a front view of the production unit, (b) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Fig. 381 (a), and (c) is a front view of the production unit; (d) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(c). FIG. 3 is a front view of the annular front cover and the rotating body. FIG. 7 is a schematic top view schematically showing a first rotating member in a twenty-third embodiment. It is a back view of the front side unit in 24th embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit in the twenty-fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line in FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view along the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit along a line corresponding to FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a displacement device in a twenty-sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rear unit. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the back mode in which the expectation level of the probability change state is low among the back modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; It is a figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the back mode with high expectations of a probability change state among the back modes displayed on the 3rd pattern display device in the 1st control example. Among the back modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, an example of the display mode of the back mode is shown in which the continuation of the variable probability state is determined at least until all the reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation are exhausted. It is a diagram. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the start of the probability change continuation suggestion performance displayed on the 3rd pattern display device in the 1st example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an attack pattern with a low expectation level in the probability change continuation suggestion performance displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a highly anticipated attack pattern in a probability change continuation suggestion performance displayed on the third symbol display device in a control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the transition of the state after the end of the probability variable jackpot in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the press stop effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during execution of the third symbol display device in the first control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when a player performs a first operation (press) on a PUSH button during execution of a press stop effect displayed on a display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the chance charge inciting effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; In the symbol display device, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of a chance charge performance that is executed after the chance charge symbol is stopped. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the chance charge effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol in the first control example. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when the spirit gauge is consumed, which is displayed on the display device. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the performance mode during execution of the variable display performance in which the press stop performance is set in the first control example. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating the output mode of audio while the PUSH button is being repeatedly pressed during execution of the interrupt repeated press effect in the first control example; FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the execution timing of the repeated hit operation and the subtracted number of monsters during execution of the interrupt repeated hit effect in the example. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the performance mode of the variable display performance in which the interrupt continuous hit performance is set in the first control example. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the pending batch change effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when the player presses the PUSH button during execution of the pending batch change effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. be. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in a first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the normal win random number table in the first control example. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the fall lottery table in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram of the special figure 1 jackpot table in the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation content of the special chart 2 jackpot table in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram configuring the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a normal table. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a probability change/time saving table that constitutes a variation pattern selection table in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method in a first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. be. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the back mode lottery table in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the pending change lottery table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the change point calculation table in the first control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the batch change lottery table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the chance charge lottery table in the first control example. It is a diagram. It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the continuation suggestion effect selection table in the first control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically illustrating the prescribed contents of the interrupt consecutive hit lottery table in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating power-on images in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces B to D in the first control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in a first control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device in a first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting prize winning process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows abnormality processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the press stop production process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption continuous hit production process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the batch change production process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows charge consumption processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the press detection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop operation detection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous tap operation detection process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the change operation detection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation notice lottery process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the win related command process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the variable production setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation suggestion production setting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the back mode lottery process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows V interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows interruption command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st example of control. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing several command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed display setting processing performed by MPU in a display device in a 1st example of control. (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing commands executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous tap sound command process performed by MPU in an audio output device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the interruption command processing performed by MPU in an audio output device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the audio setting process performed by MPU in an audio output device in a 1st example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the temple search mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the temple search mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of winning small win A while searching for a temple to be displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example at the time of winning a jackpot during probability change, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol display in the second control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the device when a probability variable medium/small win A is won. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the lost child mode predetermined timing (99th rotation after jackpot) performance displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the pattern which falls and wins during the lost child mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a control example. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the dialogue mode displayed by the 3rd pattern display device in the 2nd control example. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the dialogue mode displayed by the 3rd pattern display device in the 2nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the press-down effect among the variable operation effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the press-down effect in the second control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the push-up effect among the variable operation effects displayed on the 3-symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of touch production among the variable operation production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 2nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a pending change standby effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol display in the second control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in a pending change post-standby effect displayed on the device. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the performance mode of the variable performance (special figure winning pattern during the first period) in the second control example. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the performance mode of the variable performance (special figure winning pattern during the second period) in the second control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method in a second control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in a second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the jackpot type selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation content of the 2 tables for special figure 2 jackpots in the second control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the small hit random number 2 table in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the small hit type selection 2 table in the second control example. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the time-saving termination condition selection table in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example. be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence of each symbol in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the dialogue mode related table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a block diagram showing the configuration, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the dialogue state setting table in the second control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a character selection table in a second control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a line selection table in a second control example. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the operation production switching table in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the off-time variation process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable operation production process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd period setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press detection process 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable operation detection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable production management process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable operation means management process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation notice lottery process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the execution timing setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable effect setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal effect setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the dialogue mode setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the back mode lottery process 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the back mode setting process after time saving completion|finish performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 3rd example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the volume level selection screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode when an error occurs. It is. (a) is a diagram showing a display example of original image data in the third control example, (b) is a diagram showing in the third control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a display example of original image data in the third control example. FIG. 3D is a diagram showing a display example of low resolution image data in the third control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of original image data displayed on the third symbol display device in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the original image data displayed on the third symbol display device in the third control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of low-resolution image data to be displayed. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the third control example. be. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st winning type selection table set to RAM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd example of control. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a third control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in a third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process 3 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing 3 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the image point discrimination process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the press stop production process 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the batch change production process 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the press detection process 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the volume adjustment process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation notice lottery process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the variable effect setting process 3 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the image point setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the simple image creation process 3 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the image switching process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command process 3 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. 3 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 12 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a third control example. (a) is a diagram showing image layers, (b) is a diagram showing a background A image, (c) is a diagram showing a background B image, and (d) is an inverted diagram. It is a figure showing an image, and (e) is a figure showing an accessory image. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for virtual effects in a 4th example of control. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list A in a fourth control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list B in a fourth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents corresponding to the display data table A in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents corresponding to the display data table B in the fourth control example. FIG. (c) is a diagram schematically showing contents corresponding to display data tables C and D alternately displayed in the fourth control example, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing contents corresponding to display data table E in the fourth control example. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 4 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 4th example of control. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 5th control example. It is a partially enlarged view of the right side area of the pachinko machine in a fifth control example. It is a partially enlarged view showing how the electric accessory is opened and the game ball passes the sensor in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the third symbol display device in the fifth control example prompts the player to win a ball during the winning of a common symbol; FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode for suppressing winning of balls. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in a state where driving scenario A is set in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a state where drive scenario C is set. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a fifth control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in a fifth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a type selection table per ordinary figure set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the ordinary figure type selection table in the fifth control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory based on the winning type and the game state. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the heartbeat scenario selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the drive scenario in the fifth control example. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. be. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows main processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the normal pattern hit control process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning-related process per common figure performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 6th example of control. It is a partially enlarged view of the right side area of the pachinko machine in a sixth control example. It is a partially enlarged view of the distribution winning device in the case where game balls are stored in the storage valve of the distribution winning device in the sixth control example. It is an enlarged view of the prize distribution device when the storage valve of the prize distribution device is driven in the sixth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the drive scenario in the sixth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of 6 tables for special drawing 1 jackpot set in the ROM of the main control device in the 6th control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the 6 tables for 1 jackpot in the main control device in the 6th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of 6 tables for special drawing 2 jackpot set in the ROM of the control device, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the 6 tables for special drawing 2 jackpot set in the ROM of the control device, and (c) is the figure for the normal drawing set in the ROM of the main control device in the 6th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory based on the type and the game state. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a seventh control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a seventh control example. It is a back view of the pachinko machine in a 7th control example. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable prize winning device. (a) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line La-La in FIG. 577(b), and (b) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb in FIG. 577(c). (c) is a top view of the variable prize winning device 65. (a) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the switching member is activated so that game balls are sorted into the special discharge flow path, and (b) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the flow path solenoid is inactive and the special FIG. 7 is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the guiding piece of the switching member is blocking the opening surface of the entrance of the discharge flow path. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot when a ball enters the second ball entrance during a jackpot. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when . (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display mode of the door breakthrough mode effect executed with the start of the ending period after all rounds of the jackpot have ended in the seventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode when the first door is broken through in the door breaking mode performance. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when breaking through the fourth door fails in the door breaking mode performance displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example; b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when all the doors are successfully broken through in the door breakthrough mode performance displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the display mode and the state of the specific winning hole when transitioning to the fixed variable mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the display mode and the state of the specific winning hole when shifting to the fixed variable mode, and (b) is the second reserved ball of the second special symbol. is a jackpot F and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the display mode and the state of the specific winning hole when the mode is shifted to the normal mode. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example, and (b) is a block diagram of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of regulations. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulation contents of the first winning type selection table in the seventh control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a second winning random number table set in the ROM of the device. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the stipulated contents of the table for per special figure 1. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the table for special drawing 1 deviation (normal), and (d) is a diagram showing the regulation of the table for special drawing 1 deviation (probable variation). FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the contents. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the table for special drawing 2 jackpots (4 fluctuations or less), and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the table for special drawing 2 jackpots (5 fluctuations or more) (c) is a diagram schematically showing the provisions of the table for special drawings 2 out (4 fluctuations or less), and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the provisions of the table for special drawing 2 out (4 fluctuations or less). ) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a table for FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in a seventh control example. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the main control device in a 7th example of control. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method in a seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. be. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a seventh control example. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in a seventh control example. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in a seventh control example. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in a seventh control example. It is a flow chart which shows timer interrupt processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows abnormality processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit prize winning process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the end of a small hit performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 7th control example. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 7th control example. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. 3 is a flowchart showing several command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 7th control example. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. 3 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed display setting processing performed by MPU in a display device in a 7th example of control. It is a flowchart which showed warning image setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 7th example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control device in a 7th control example. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. 3 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 12 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in a seventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control device in a 7th example of control. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in an eighth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the eighth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the main controller in the eighth control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of the main control device in the 8th control example. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the main control device in the 8th example of control. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method in an eighth control example. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the audio lamp control device in the 8th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process 2 performed by MPU in a main control device in an 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state command setting process performed by MPU in a main control device in an 8th control example. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in an 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state determination process at the time of turning on performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the breakthrough mode selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in an 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in an 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in an 8th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 8th control example. (a) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve is in a protruding state (a state in which three balls, which is the upper limit number, are stored above the storage valve) in a modification of the eighth control example. (b) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve is in a buried state in a modification of the eighth control example. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method in a modification of the eighth control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the jackpot opening displayed on the third symbol display device in the ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the opening of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in the ninth control example. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode during one round of the jackpot displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of one round of jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in the ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol in the ninth control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode during an interval after one round of a jackpot displayed on a display device. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the ninth control example, and (b) is the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth control example. FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the open scenario selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the open scenario selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the ninth control example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example, and (b) is a promotion effect lottery table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example. FIG. 12(c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the release scenario selection process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in a 9th control example. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth control example. It is a flow chart showing jackpot operation setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 3 executed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 9th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the winning command process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command process 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the promotion effect lottery process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the out-of-reach opening of a jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in a modification of the ninth control example; (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the reach is out of reach. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first round of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in the modification of the example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing changes over time in the performance mode in the case of a jackpot in a modification of the ninth control example; FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a change over time in the performance mode when the game is out of reach. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st winning type selection table set to ROM of the main control device in the 10th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 10th control example, and (b) is a block diagram of the special winning after winning table in the 10th control example. It is a figure which showed the regulation content typically, and (c) is a figure which showed the regulation content of the table for special hit and miss in the 10th control example typically. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the main control device in a 10th control example. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 variation start process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 10th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 10th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 variation start process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 10th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 11th control example. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing the operation contents of the distribution member in the eleventh control example. In the case of a small hit in the 11th control example, the correspondence relationship between the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door of the V winning device and the switching of the flow path through which the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the V winning device is guided is schematically shown. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode with the highest expectation of the pullback mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example; It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on a 3-symbol display device in which the expectation level of the pullback mode is medium. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 11th control example, and the expectation level of the pullback mode being the lowest. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a block diagram of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the eleventh control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of regulations. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulation contents of the first winning type selection table in the eleventh control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the small winning type selection table set in the ROM of the device, and (c) is the regulation of the time saving number selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 11th control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the contents. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 11th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 11th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 winning table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 winning table that is set in the ROM of the main controller in the 11th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the table, and (d) schematically shows the stipulated contents of the table for special drawing 2 missing (consecutive hits) set in the ROM of the main controller in the 11th control example. FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the general figure fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 11th control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the main control in the 11th control example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the device. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a mode transition method in an eleventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example, and (b) is an expectation selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example. FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in an eleventh control example. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in an eleventh control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving frequency update process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process 5 performed by MPU in a main control device in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows V passing detection processing performed by MPU in a main control device in an 11th control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in an eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 5 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation update process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a small hit is won in the normal mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the twelfth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the twelfth control example, and (b) is a block diagram of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the twelfth control example. It is a figure which showed the regulation content typically, and (c) is a figure which showed the regulation content of the 1st winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 12th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the small winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the twelfth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the main control device in the twelfth control example. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a time saving number selection table set in the ROM of the present invention. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a small winning specified number selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the twelfth control example. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the main control device in a 12th example of control. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing a mode transition method in a twelfth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the twelfth control example, and (b) is a rank up lottery table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the twelfth control example. FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in a twelfth control example. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the number of time saving number update process 6 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start process 6 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which shows state command processing 6 executed by MPU in a sound ramp control device in a 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the back setting process after completion|finish performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation update process 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing a mode transition method in a thirteenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 13th control example when a small hit is won in the super consecutive chance mode, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when winning a small hit in the super consecutive chance mode. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode when the number of remaining winnings in the super consecutive chance mode is small, displayed on the third symbol display device in the example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example, and (b) is the first random number 13 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example. FIG. 12(c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the small hit random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the thirteenth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection 13 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 13th control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulation contents of the 1st winning type selection 13 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 13th control example. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a probability change/time saving frequency selection table set in a ROM of a control device. (a) is a block diagram showing the structure of the small winning type selection 13 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the small winning type selection 13 table in the 13th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the winning type selection table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the probability change/potential probability table in the thirteenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example, and (b) is a block diagram of the special figure 2 per hit table in the 13th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation content of the special figure 2 off (normal) table in the 13th control example, and (d) 13 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a table for special drawing 2 deviation (probability change, time saving, potential probability) in the No. 13 control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the general figure fluctuation pattern selection 13 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 11th control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the general figure fluctuation pattern selection 13 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 11th control example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the control device. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start process 13 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. It is a flow chart which shows start-up processing 13 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 13th example of control. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows small hit control processing 13 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pullback transition process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 13th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 13 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows small hit related processing 13 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 13th control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, Figures 1 to 4
4, the present invention will be described as a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply "pachinko machine") as a first embodiment.
10) will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12.
An inner frame 12 is supported as an opening/closing axis on the side where the inner frame 12 is provided so as to be openable/closeable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15,
(See Fig. 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side, and the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 are supported as opening/closing shafts on the side where the hinges 19 are installed so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side. ing. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is, for example, the third symbol display device 81 (FIG.
It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the performance displayed in (see) or changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Around the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are illumination portions 29 to 3 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs.
3 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. In addition, a front view of the front frame 14 (Fig. 1
(See) In the upper left part, there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 1
When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) placed on the side of the ball, balls will be rented according to the operation. It will be done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. Return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card etc. inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly from a ball lending device etc. to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300, which are operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13, are arranged. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, and a firing stop switch 51 that stops firing the ball during the period of being pressed.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding the ball, there are rails 61, 62, general prize opening 63, first prize opening 64, second prize opening 640, variable prize winning device 330, and a through hole. gate 67,
It is constructed by assembling a variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
It can be attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. General winning hole 63, first winning hole 64, second winning hole 640, variable display unit 8
0 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 is connected to the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1).
can be visually recognized from the front side. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
is erected, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a band-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected at the inner side of the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The gaming area is the area in front of the gaming board 13 that is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a winning opening etc. is arranged,
(area in which the fired ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 61 (Fig. 2
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the game board 13 to prevent a ball that has been guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B display whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or not.
It is configured so that it can be used depending on whether a prize is won in the prize opening 640. in particular,
When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and on the other hand,
When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. In addition, multiple L
The ED is configured such that the LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B include
Not only does the stop symbol after the fluctuation indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot,
In the case of a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R regular jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15,
This is a jackpot in which the game moves to a low probability state and is in a time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time-saving state among the "low probability states"

(Time saving medium) is a game state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, making it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. say. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in normal mode, it means that the gaming state (
Neither the jackpot probability nor the second symbol's probability of winning has increased).

During probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the second prize opening 64
The time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is released is also changed, and a longer time than normal is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released than usual. Also, during the probability change and time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol will not change, and the second winning hole 640
It is also possible to change at least one of the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the game is released and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per win. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 has first symbol display devices 37A, 37B triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640.
A third symbol display device 81 is configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the third symbol, and the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is used as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640
is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so that more winning lots can be drawn than during normal times.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to have the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, you can also enter the second prize opening 640 during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the open time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a per win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device.
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second
The symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Also, through gate 67
The number of assemblies is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, the first symbol display device 37A
, 37B indicate the number of reserved balls, so the second symbol retention lamp may not be lit.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main controller 110 (See Figure 4) A jackpot lottery is held, and the display according to the lottery result is the first one.
It is shown by the symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. Note that in this embodiment,
Although the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same, The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the prize and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 are different numbers, for example, the prize paid out when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball enters the second winning hole 6.
It will be easy to win to 40.

As mentioned above, during fixed change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal.
Also, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, a state can be created in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 640, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, so it is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting").
), it is more advantageous for the player to obtain many opportunities for jackpot drawings by winning the first winning slot 64 and aiming for a jackpot.

On the other hand, during the probability change or time saving period, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second prize opening 64
Since the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in the open state and it is easy to win in the second winning opening 640, the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640. It is better to aim for a 15R jackpot by firing the ball at the right hand (so-called "right-handed hit"), letting it pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory, and winning the second prize opening 640. , it is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 by "hitting the right hand" and aiming at the second winning hole 640 by "hitting the left hand". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state,
The specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out openings 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are housed in substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100-10
4 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel it off to open the board boxes 100, 102,
If an attempt is made to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, they will be cut into a box base side and a box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the dispensing control device 111
2 is provided with an operating knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM203
In addition, various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
7A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing of display results on the second symbol display device, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. The work area where the values are stored (
work area). Note that the RAM 203 is supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and retains data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 has
Payout control device 111, audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol holding lamp, drive to open and close to the front side around the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large-opening solenoid for driving, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a power supply device 1.
A RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in 15 is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/Os, etc. are stored. have. RAM213 is pachinko machine 10
The configuration is such that data can be retained (backed up) by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 receives a power outage signal SG from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc.
1 is input, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing at the time of power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. In addition, the prize ball detection switch is the payout control device 1.
11, but is not connected to the main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
This is to control a. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
(not being operated), the firing solenoid is energized in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). Display control device 114 such as display) and preview presentation
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, etc. performed in . The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. Input/output port 22
5, the main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected, respectively. Other equipment 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and to change the presentation content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the audio lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio output device 226 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and also outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Controls turning on and off of the lamp display device 227.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and controls the third symbol display device 81 based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.
This controls the display of the variation effect of the third symbol, etc. In addition, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby controlling the third symbol display device 8.
1 display and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (Fig.
(see) RAM erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 is an AC 2
It takes in a voltage of 4 volts and is used for various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20.
Generates 12 volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motors, etc., 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and uses these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage. Necessary voltage is supplied to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like.
201 and each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and detects a power outage (when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts).
A power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be successfully executed and completed.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operating device 3
00 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 when viewed from the front (that is, the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operating device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that can be tilted when pushed by a player, and is located in an area formed by a housing recess 17a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. will be placed. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a, such that at least the fingers of a hand can comfortably fit therein. Thereby, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by placing his fingertips on the back side of the top surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Note that since the player holds the operating handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the premise that the player operates the tilting device 310 with his left hand.

6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6(b) is a VI of FIG. 6(a).
7(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along line b-VIb, and FIG.
FIG. 7(b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7(a).

6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state (initial state in this embodiment) with the operation surface 312a1 facing in the vertical direction, and FIG. A state in which the operating surface 312a1 is placed in a second state in which it faces upward and backward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 7, an example of the player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be able to automatically operate between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. Note that details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by, for example, displaying a specific display (for example, a display of "Press the button") on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
This is what the player does when the appears.

Here, if the tilting device 310 is pushed in by dropping the hand forcefully downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 will move toward the front depending on the degree of tilting. This causes the palm of the hand to easily rub against the operating surface 312a1. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing a pushing operation in a manner in which the hand is dropped forcefully downward.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertips near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm of the hand using the fingertips as a fulcrum, the palm of the hand remains integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pressed and operated comfortably.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand using the fingertips as a fulcrum, rather than forcing the player to forcefully drop the hand downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 will be damaged can be reduced.

With reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, differences in how the tilting device 310 looks from the player's perspective will be described. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 as seen in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 as seen in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's viewpoint, but in the second state, the area is reduced to such an extent that it becomes invisible. (the operation surface 312a1 is directed outside the player's viewpoint). This allows the first
The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the state and the second state.

In this embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protective lens member 31
1i is configured in such a manner that the area thereof gradually increases, and accordingly, the amount of light of the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) disposed inside the operation device 300 becomes gradually larger.
The difference in the amount of light visible to the player (degree of brightness) becomes large between the first state and the second state, and the way the tilting device 310 is seen can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state. .

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side of the little finger near the shaft 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and lowering the palm downward using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating around the wrist), The tilting device 310 can be pressed and operated comfortably while the palm of the hand is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform an operation by lowering the palm of the hand using the outer side surface of the little finger as a fulcrum and not allowing the player to forcefully drop the hand downward.
Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 will be damaged can be reduced.

Next, the operating device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. Figure 10
is a front perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 on which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rear end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 applies an impact in a straight direction to the tilting device 310, and detection sensors 324L and 32 detect a push operation from the first state.
4R is arranged on the outside of the lower frame member 320 that surrounds the tilting device 310 from below.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that provides the driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner area of the lower frame member 320 is largely used, and the tilting device 310 can be tilted. The device 310 can be housed in a lower frame member 320. This results in
A large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300.
0 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vehicle. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operating device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including a ring member BR1 disposed at the left and right ends at the rear end (the end on the back side of the paper in FIG. 12), and A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing part 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. A member having a large opening in the center and having a recessed part arranged opposite to the lower frame member 320, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is disposed between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. together with the tilting device 3
A driving force is applied to the tilting device 310 through an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the device in the second state of the device 10, and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and forms a link mechanism with the tilting device 310. A transmitting drive device 340, and a protective cover device 3 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and protects the drive device 340 by covering it from three sides, left and right and rearward.
Mainly equipped with 50.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member in which the left and right portions of the bottom slope downward toward the front, and includes a bottom plate portion 321 that slopes downward toward the front; A horizontal part 3 composed of a plate-like member horizontally arranged at the upper end on the back side of the horizontal part 3
22, a lower bearing part 323 which is a semicircular receiving part opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal part 322 and receives the shaft part 314 of the tilting device 310 from below, and a bottom part 321 of the bottom plate part 321. A left side detection sensor 324L and a right side detection sensor 324R are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides.
and an opening 325, which is an opening created by cutting a portion disposed below the horizontal portion 322 at the center position of the bottom plate portion 321 in the left-right direction.

The bottom plate portion 321 determines the end of movement of the tilting device 310 by coming into contact with the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which the portion of the tilting device 310 is connected to the bottom plate portion 3.
21.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L, 324R, and an opening 325.
It mainly includes insertion holes 321c that are drilled symmetrically on the left and right sides.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass therethrough. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 extends below the bottom plate portion 321, driving force in the linear direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b includes detection pieces 311gL and 311 protruding from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
This is a through hole configured to allow insertion of gR. Detection piece 31 protruding from detection hole 321b
1gL and 311gR are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, so that the attitude of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted therethrough, and also allows the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted when the drive device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a plane for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. Note that the detection sensors 324L and 324R are connected to the bottom plate portion 32 of the lower frame member 320.
1 (the position of the detection groove) is arranged at a position where the left and right sides are the same.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor is equipped with a light emitting part that emits light and a light receiving part that receives the light from the light emitting part, and has a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the detection part can be inserted. This means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, etc. to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, its horizontal width is made larger than the horizontal width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the driving device 340 has a configuration in which the LED device 341f is arranged so as to protrude to the upper front side (see FIG. 17(b)), the LED device 341f is arranged in the opening 325.
By pushing up the driving device 340 after passing through the LED device 341
f can be placed above the opening 325, and the rotary claw member 34 can be connected from the LED device 341f to
The vertical width of the opening 325 can be shortened compared to the vertical width including up to 7.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face an opening 331 that is large enough to catch the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and a lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. The tilting device 310 mainly includes an upper bearing portion 332 that is configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be vertically divisible so that three directions except the front side are covered. A voice coil motor 352 supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side with its vibrating surface directed diagonally forward and upward; a left detection sensor 353L which is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351; and a right side detection sensor 352. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially torn in order to make visible the right side detection sensor 353R, which is disposed on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the left-right center.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the voice coil motor 352 has a vibration surface aligned with the lower frame member 3.
It is disposed in an attitude substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of No. 20. Thereby, by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 extends the protruding convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. Disc cam 344L, 3 of drive device 340
44R is arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
Detection holes 344eL, 344eR of disc cams 344L, 344R are detection sensors 353L, 3
It is possible to detect whether or not the disc cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection groove of 53R, and to detect that the disc cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the left and right disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL, 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L, 35
There are two types of specific phases that can be detected by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. Figure 14(a
) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. 14(c) is a front view of the tilting device 310. ) of XIVc
FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the tilting device 310 taken along the line -XIVc. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 that is a box-like body with fan-shaped sides and openings at the top and bottom, and a lid on the upper opening of the case body 311. A lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hanging downward, and sandwiched between the case main body 311 and the rear end of the lid 312. A shaft portion 314 disposed in
11 and a lid 312 inseparably.

The case body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a that is tilted downward from the back side toward the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened at the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and a left and right side of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extends from a flange extending downward along the edge toward the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d is a recess with a semicircular cross section that supports the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. , an insertion groove 311e that is a groove arranged in a position where both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f that is formed in a hook shape and that locks the center portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , a pair of left-side detection pieces 311gL and a right-side detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending below the bottom plate part 311a by a predetermined amount toward the front side. a protective lens member 311i arranged above the front end of the bottom plate part 311a and shaped along an arc centered on the shaft part 314 and made of a light-transmitting material; and a bottom plate part 311h. It mainly includes an overhanging protrusion 311j that protrudes downward from the center in the left-right direction at the front end of 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is configured to support the lower frame member 3 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player.
This is a portion that makes surface contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of 20.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is connected to the guide hole 3 of the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 17(b)).
45b, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to and from the drive device 340.

The left side detection piece 311gL and the right side detection piece 311gR are parts that are inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311gL is The overhang length is made longer than that of the right detection piece 311gR.

In this embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311gL about the shaft portion 314 is about 3 degrees (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the pushing end (see FIG. 22). The left side detection piece 311gL is jutted out compared to the right side detection piece 311gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates up to the rotation angle (see 23).

The extension portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and extends to a position where it is locked in the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). It consists of aspects.

The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from above (FIG. 14(a)
In addition, since the tilting device 310 is curved in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 14(c)), the tilting device 310 is easily released from the load when the player presses the tilting device 310.
Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The protruding convex portion 311j protrudes from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a at right angles, and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320, so that the player can
When pushed in (see FIG. 29), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a, and the tip is extended below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 31.
2b to the top plate member 312a and the LED device 34 in the first state (see FIG. 6).
It mainly includes a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape with a size surrounding 1f.

The cylindrical member 312c maintains the lid 312 in the first state while improving the strength of the lid 312 due to its axial rigidity.

(see FIG. 6), the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 is kept inside the cylindrical member 312c due to the positional relationship, while in the second state (see FIG. 7), such light is The LED device 341f is disposed in such a manner that the restriction is lifted and light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated over a wide range.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmissive material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has an extended end having a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape is provided at the center.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right twisted portions, and includes both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , is provided.

Next, the drive device 340 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17(a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the drive device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. 18 is a front view of the drive device 340. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (non-rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343).
left disc cam 344L, right disc cam 344R) and connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344
an arm member 345 that is pivotally supported by the arm member 345; and a release member 346 that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341 and abuts the first projecting portion 344c1 and the second projecting portion 344c3 of the disc cam 344 in the rotational direction. , a rotating claw member 347 that is coaxially supported with the release member 346 and moves relative to the release member 346 as the release member 346 rotates, and a coil spring-like member that generates a biasing force in a direction to cause the rotating claw member 347 to fall down. The first spring SP1, which is a spring member, and the release member 34
6 and the rotary claw member 347, the second spring SP2 is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in a direction that causes the rotary claw member 347 to move away from each other.

The main body member 341 has a motor accommodating portion 3 which is bent rearward on the left and right sides and formed into a U-shape when viewed from above.
41a, and a shaft support hole 341b that is bored at the same position in the opposing plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a and that pivotally supports the disc cam 344, and a shaft that is parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. a shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position offset from the shaft support hole 341b to the front side; an extension portion 341d that extends from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c; A lighting support portion 341 extending from the housing portion 341a toward the front and upper direction.
e, and an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and having an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on its upper surface that refracts light (
(a part that refracts light). Thereby, the light from the LED device 341f can be evenly irradiated upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 is attached to the motor housing part 34 inside the U-shape of the motor housing part 341a.
A fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to 1a is provided.

The fixed member 342a pivotally supports the rotating gear of the drive motor 342, and also supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotating gear.

The arm member 345 has a shaft support hole 345a formed in a perfect circle shape at one end and pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and a rectangular shape formed at the other end. It also mainly includes a guide hole 345b into which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end opposite to the shaft support hole 345a abuts the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end is formed at a position where the disc cam 344 rotates for more than one rotation. formed in a position sufficient to allow rotation.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be explained with reference to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 includes a cylindrical member 343a to which a disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a drive motor 342 that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
A transmission gear 343b that meshes with the rotating gear of the transmission gear 343b, a movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction, and the movable clutch 343c. It mainly includes a coil spring 343d that presses the transmission gear 343b against the transmission gear 343b.

The cylindrical member 343a has a fixing part 3 with a D-shaped cross section that fixes the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof.
43a1 and 343a2, and the right side fixing part 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left side fixing part 343a1. Here, in detail, the fixed part 343a2 is the movable clutch 3
It is formed with a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the coil spring 43c moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b has a perfectly circular insertion hole 343b1 into which the columnar member 343a is inserted;
The clutch portion 343b2 includes a clutch portion 343b2 in which unevenness along the axial direction is formed at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface facing the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle rotation) relative to the columnar member 343a even when the columnar member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section into which the columnar member 343a is inserted.
43c1, and a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to have an unevenness along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface facing the transmission gear 343b, and is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the clutch parts 343b2 and 343c2 have an angle of about 100 at the top.
It consists of a chevron-shaped convex part and a concave part.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a, so the clutch portion 343b of the transmission gear 343b
2 and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transferred to the columnar member 34 via the movable clutch 343c.
3a. As a result, by rotating the drive motor 342, the disc cam 3
44 (see FIG. 18).

Note that the movable clutch 343c normally moves the transmission gear 3 by the urging force of the coil spring 343d.
43b, and the engagement relationship between the clutch parts 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3
43a2, it is configured to be movable in a manner away from the transmission gear 343b.

The disc cam 344 will be explained with reference to FIG. 20. Note that the disc cam 344 has a shape in which the left disc cam 344L and the right disc cam 344R are roughly mirror images, and the only difference is the detection hole 3.
Since only the positions 44eL and 344eR are shown, only the left disc cam 344L will be explained, and the description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

20(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as seen in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as seen in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. be. Note that FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b) illustrate a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG. 18.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions that protrude from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and is located at the center position of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a that protrudes inwardly in a cylindrical shape; a circular rib 344b that protrudes inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a; The ribs are lower in height than the circular ribs 344b and protrude inwardly.
An engagement rib 344c having a portion projecting outward in the radial direction at a location, and a circular rib 344b
The arm member 3 is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding outwardly between the engagement rib 344c and the engagement rib 344c.
45 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL drilled near the outer periphery.

The right disc cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other difference is that the right disc cam 344R has a shape that mirrors the shape of the left disc cam 344L. .

The central shaft portion 344a has a cross section D in which the inner periphery engages both ends of the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 19).
The outer periphery is configured to fit into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the support hole 341b.

The circular diameter rib 344b is provided in a protruding manner to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c has a first rib that extends outward in the radial direction at a position shifted by 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20(a)) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed. An overhanging portion 344c1, a first retracting portion 344c2 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a position offset from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50° in this embodiment), and a first retracting portion 344c2 that retracts inward in the radial direction from the first overhanging portion 344c1. At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in this embodiment), the second projecting portion 344c3 extends outward in the radial direction again, and the second projecting portion 344c
3, and a second retracting portion 344c4 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a position shifted by an angle θ3 (angle θ3=20° in the present embodiment) from the second retracting portion 344c4.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position with the longest distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

With reference to FIG. 21, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described. Note that the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged as a pair on the left and right, and since their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. Note that FIG. 21(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 has rotated to the final position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. In contrast, a small angle state is shown in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2.

Note that the state in which the release member 346 rotates when it comes into contact with the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the release member 346 is formed from a generally rectangular plate member, and includes a shaft support hole 346a that is supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). A convex pin 346b that has an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a and is provided in the plate thickness direction, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and a shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting out at its maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is connected to the engaging rib 34 of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10).
4c (see FIG. 20). In this embodiment, the engaging portion 346
By forming the outer circumference of d to be curved, contact with the engagement rib 344 can be made smoothly.

The rotating claw member 347 is formed from a generally rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide elongated hole 347b (drilled with a size that includes the locus of movement of the protruding pin 346b inside) is drilled to guide the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346, and a second spring SP2.
an insertion hole 347c through which the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18) is inserted, a hook-shaped portion 347d projecting downward in a hook shape at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a, and an end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). It mainly includes a pull-down hole 347e that is inserted through the hole 347e.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21(a), the release member 346 is disposed at the end position in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21(a)) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, when a load is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the downward direction in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the backward rotation direction as a unit, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion 346d When a load is applied in the upward direction to 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 can be maintained until the angle reaches the small angle state shown in FIG. 21(b).

Next, an example of the operation of the operating device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of the operation when the player performs a pushing operation with the tilting device 310 placed in the first state will be described. Note that in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for ease of understanding.

22 to 24 show the operating device 300 along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).
FIG. Note that FIG. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 22, and FIG. Here, the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state shown in FIG. 23 to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 by repeatedly hitting the tilting device 310 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is rotated by the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347.
can be hooked to. Thereby, the attitude of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left side detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L.
It is placed in front of the 4R detection groove (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an action of pushing in the tilting device 310, the tilting device 31
0 is rotated approximately 3° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 3
11gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection states of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pressed by the player from the first state.

Here, when operating the tilting device 310 repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated.
5, the tilting device 310 is not returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this could be solved by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in this embodiment, increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 causes the tilting device 310 to resist the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) that pushes down, and there is a need to increase the size of the drive motor 342. Therefore, there were problems such as an increase in product cost and an inability to save space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing effects through vibration motion is disposed at a position facing the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving this voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG.
The return operation to 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, if the voice coil motor 352 is driven whenever the tilting device 310 is pressed, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player Since this imposes an unnecessary load, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state during a predetermined period is calculated, and if the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil By driving the motor 352, it is possible to increase the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hitting operation. This results in
The player can comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down from the first state (a tilting operation) will be described. Figures 25 to 3
0 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).

Note that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 26 shows that the tilting device 310 is in the first state.
A state in which the disk cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25 and the rotating claw member 347 changes its posture is illustrated, and in FIG. 27, the disk cam 344 rotates a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 28 shows a state in which the rotary claw member 347 has returned to its original position after rotating in the forward rotation direction.
The state in which the tilting device 310 rotates back and forth is illustrated, and FIG. 29 illustrates a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the final position, and FIG. When the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount, the engagement rib 34
The figure shows a state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 of the release member 346 reaches a second initial state in which it comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. In addition, in FIG. 28, the tilting device 3 in the state of FIG.
10 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of the player's hand pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312
The upper end (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the LED device 2c. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, it is possible to ensure a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c can have the effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the irradiation intensity of the light from the LED device 341f when the tilting device 310 is in the first state.

As shown in FIG. 26, from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26). direction), the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 presses down the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, causing the release member 346 to rotate in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26), and Accordingly, the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where it disengages from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310.

The posture change of the release member 346 is caused by the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 34.
6d until the disk cam 344 is rotated until it faces each other, during which time the tilting device 310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotated clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is regulated by the arm member 345, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27),
When the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, the urging force of the first spring SP1 causes the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 to rotate forward in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 27). rotational direction), and the rotary claw member 347 returns to a state in which it can engage with the tilting device 310 (the state shown in FIG. 25). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction that increases the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), so the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area where the protective lens member 311i is visible from the player's viewpoint is the tilting device 31 in the first state.
Since it increases compared to 0, the light of the LED device 341f is directed toward the front (direction toward the player).
It is also possible to irradiate the area. Therefore, by changing the attitude of the tilting device 310, the LED device 3
The traveling direction of the light irradiated from 41f can be changed, and the effect of the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the starting point of the up-and-down reciprocating movement can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, from the state shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 28), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( Figure 2
By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise), the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28 is obtained.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of . Thereby, the way the tilting device 310 is viewed by the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Furthermore, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that projects upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the movement of the tilting device 310 that repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is
Since it is placed on the front side of the LED device 341f (on the left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 28). I can do it.

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state, the light from the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed down by the cylindrical member 312c. (See Figure 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to this embodiment, as the attitude of the tilting device 310 changes, not only the direction of light irradiation can be changed, but also the range of light irradiation can be changed at the same time. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c moves only through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. This prevents a large load from being placed on the player when the player presses the tilting device 310, allowing the player to comfortably operate the operating device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw When the member 347 rotates backwards (clockwise in FIG. 29) and the tilting device 310 is subsequently pushed in, the bottom plate portion 311a is moved to the hook-shaped portion 347d.
After passing through, the rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the movement of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is restricted by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player moves the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG.
If the player releases his/her hand after pressing down 0, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation that repeats movement in the expansion direction and movement in the contraction direction). Thereby, after the tilting device 310 has been pushed to the final end, it is possible to perform an effect in which vibrations are transmitted to the player who continues to place his/her hand on the tilting device 310.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force to assist the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 24), and to produce a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 disposed at the pushing end position. It can be used for.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases his/her hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 touches the lower frame member 320.
, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end.

Therefore, compared to a game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pressed, it is difficult to determine whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of the pressing operation.
Only the player who pushed the tilting device 310 can grasp it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a jackpot does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means will be reduced.

In contrast, the present embodiment is configured in such a manner that the player can only feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to produce a vibration effect when a jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the feeling of anticipation when the player presses the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can improve its value as a means of pre-reading.
This makes it easier for the player to operate the tilting device 310, and increases the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG.
By rotating the disk cam 344 by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) until it comes into contact with the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, the drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state. .

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, similar to the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first projecting portion 344c1 contacts the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second projecting portion 344c3 contacts the engagement rib 344c.

Note that from the state shown in FIG. 29, after the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engagement rib 344c passes the engagement portion 346d, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the reverse direction. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 25 by the method shown in FIG. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is rotated forward in the forward rotation direction (see FIG.
(counterclockwise).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the second initial state ( The second operation mode) will be explained. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (tilting operation) after passing through the second state.

31 to 34 show the operating device 300 along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).
FIG. In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 31) is illustrated, and in FIG. 32, the disk cam 344 is rotated from the state shown in FIG.
is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state.
34 shows how the disk cam 344 reciprocates from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the final position from the state shown in FIG. 3 is illustrated.
Further, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by an imaginary line,
In FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. The device 310 moves in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disc cam 345. The tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance without being pulled, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disk cam 344 by approximately 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 310 in the second state (disc cam 344 is moved 180° from the first initial state)
(rotated position). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 increases rapidly and attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the disc cam 344 obstructs the state change ( This can prevent a situation in which the cam 344 is slow to rotate by a predetermined angle and it takes a long time for the tilting device 310 to reach the second state.

As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( Figure 3
By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise), the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is obtained.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of . Thereby, the way the tilting device 310 is viewed by the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Furthermore, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that projects upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the movement of the tilting device 310 that repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is
Since it is placed on the front side of the LED device 341f (left side in FIG. 33), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 33). I can do it.

That is, according to this embodiment, as the attitude of the tilting device 310 changes, not only the direction of light irradiation can be changed, but also the range of light irradiation can be changed at the same time. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in this embodiment, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 as the vertical movement of the tilting device 310;
Two types of up-and-down movements (fanning movements), including the up-down movement shown in FIG. 33, can be performed immediately after the rotation claw member 347 releases the restriction on movement of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction. Therefore, two types of modes can be created in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342.

As a result, compared to the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a jackpot), and the tilting device 310
It is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

As shown in FIG. 33, while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft 311
c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated to lift the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. This prevents a large load from being placed on the player when the player presses the tilting device 310, allowing the player to comfortably operate the operating device 300.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into the state, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate backward. (clockwise direction in FIG. 34), and then by pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a passes the hook-shaped portion 347d. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the movement of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is restricted by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player moves the tilting device 310 from the state where the tilting device 310 shown in FIG.
If the player releases his/her hand after pressing down 0 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310
can be maintained in the first state.

Next, referring to FIGS. 35 to 37, after the player performs a pushing operation, the rotary claw member 3
The operation of bringing the disc cam 344 into the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the tilting device 47 will be described. With this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of up and down movements (tilting movements) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

35 to 37 show the operating device 300 along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).
FIG. In FIG. 35, the disc cam 344 is moved in the backward direction (FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the release member 346 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) is shown, and in FIG. 36, the rotating cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (in FIG. The disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) to a position where it abuts the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, and FIG. The disc cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the left side detection sensor 353L of 50 is in the ON state is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disc cam 344 is rotated backwards (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 changes as the engagement rib 344c pushes the release member 346 up; The rotating claw member 347 is shown in FIG.
It is maintained in the position shown in 5.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 and releasing the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the Regulation of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, by further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and then rotating the rotary cam 344 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35), The drive device 340 can be placed in a second initial state as shown in FIG.

Note that in this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disc cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the process goes through the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the vertical movement (swinging movement) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who presses the tilting device 310 may perform an action of leaving his hand on the tilting device 310 after pressing the tilting device 310, even if there is no special display such as "long press". be.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, when the user forgets to release the hand that pressed the tilting device 310 because he was so focused on the performance, but in this case, even if the restriction by the rotary claw member 347 is released, the tilting device 310 will continue to rise. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward/reverse switching operation) to move the tilting device 310 up and down (tilting operation) within the range of the angle D2,
The attitude of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if this rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disc cam 344 is rotated forward in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
5) maintains the ON state (while the tilting device 310 is tilted below the first state), the disc cam 344 is not reversely rotated, and the protective cover device 350 is turned on as shown in FIG. In the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the left side detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) is in the ON state, the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped).

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the player's hand is placed above the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 does not move upward, so in this case, from the state shown in FIG.
The change to the state shown in 7 occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, even when the player's hand continues to be placed above the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up or down, the drive motor 342 is operated in a reciprocating manner (forward/reverse switching). The load placed on the drive motor 342 can be reduced and the life of the motor can be extended.

Note that when the disk cam 344 is rotated a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, if the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) remains in the ON state, Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately rotate it in the opposite direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 36. Thereby, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and there is no need to apply unnecessary load to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a method for preventing destruction of the drive device 340 will be described. 38 is a sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 39 is a partial sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. Note that in FIG. 38, the tilting device 310 is shown in the second state.
The player's hand grasping and fixing the player is shown in imaginary lines, and the upper member of the main body cover 351 is not shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grasps and fixes the tilting device 310, the arm member 34
Since the movement of the disc cam 344 is restricted, the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, the drive motor 342
A high load is generated between the transmission gear 343b and the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), and if left unchecked, there is a risk that the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) will break down.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to freely rotate with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a that fixes the disc cam 344, so it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is biased in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portion 343b
2,343c2, and the movable clutch 343c moves in the direction away from the transmission gear 343b. Thereby, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, the drive motor 3
42 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

Note that if the player does not grip the tilting device 310, due to the configuration of the operating device 300, if the disc cam 344 is rotated once, the tilting device 310 will go through the first state. Therefore, in this embodiment, while rotating the drive motor 342 by a predetermined angle (for example, 360°), the lower frame member
If the left side detection sensor 324L of 20 is not in the ON state (tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player is intentionally performing an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while giving a notification to stop the gripping operation, for example, by displaying it on the third symbol display device 81.

This makes it possible to select the case where the player is intentionally performing an erroneous operation, and only then to notify the player to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage.
Breakdowns can be prevented.

Note that when the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disc cam 344, which has the same phase as the movable clutch 343c, deviate from each other. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (by the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, so the control of the drive motor 352 is resumed with that state as the initial position (the drive motor 342 is in the first initial state). By resetting the initial phase), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, control is performed so that the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are aligned again. It can be performed.

As a result, when performing a performance by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342
The rotation control prevents a deviation from occurring between the operation that the tilting device 310 is intended to perform and the operation that the tilting device 310 actually performs. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be operated appropriately to perform the performance.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that rotates idly relative to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotational direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity of this will be explained below.

40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). In addition, in FIG. 40, the disc cam 3 is changed from the state shown in FIG.
44 is shown rotated by 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (in the direction of arrow CCW), and FIG. 41 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the direction of arrow CCW from the state shown in FIG. 40. In addition, in FIG. 42, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward (in the direction of arrow CW) from the state shown in FIG.
43 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been further rotated in the direction of arrow CW from the state shown in FIG. 42.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 31
0 performs a standing motion toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. On the other hand, Figure 4
As shown in FIG. 3, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 42.

This is not only due to the fact that the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG.
This is because when rotating in the direction of arrow CW, even if the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, and the rotating claw Part 3
No load is generated in the direction of pushing up 47. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is never released.

Here, when viewing the operation of the tilting device 310 from the player's perspective, FIGS. 38 to 40 and 42
Up to the first state shown in FIG. 43 , both appear to have the same motion, and the motion after the first state is a different motion as shown in either FIG. 41 or FIG. 43 .

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state can be determined by the drive motor 342.

(See FIG. 39), but the difference in the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 makes the player aware of the mode of control being performed, and the performance that will be executed from now on. There is a risk that the player will understand this and lose interest in the player. In addition, the tilting device 3
10 by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load placed on the drive motor 342 increases, and there is a risk that the durability of the drive motor 342 may deteriorate.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is made different, the drive motor 342
The only difference in the rotations is the direction, so the driving manner (vibration, sound, etc.) can make it difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction. Therefore, for example, when the degree of expectation of the performance changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or whether the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is in operation toward the first state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the level of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, by confirming whether the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state.
Since the player can grasp the change in the level of expectation of the performance, the player can be informed that when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved by the drive motor 342 toward the first state, The movement of the tilting device 310 can be caused to be monitored.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 and the drive may be damaged due to the player's erroneous operation when driving the drive motor 342. Overloading the device 340 can be prevented.

Furthermore, in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, there is no need to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39).
42 can be eliminated, and the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotary claw member 347 even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). In addition, in FIG. 44, the disc cam 3 is changed from the first initial state of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 25).
44 is shown rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 44), and the first
The disc cam 344 is set at an angle such that the protruding portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346.
The external shape of the tilting device 310 after being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 44, when the release member 346 is pressed down by the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are connected to the engaging portion of the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disc cam 344 while maintaining a positional relationship in which the release member 346 does not pass through, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 changes in the backward rotation direction (
Since the tilting device 31 is maintained in a rotated state (clockwise in FIG. 44), the tilting device 31
0 moves up and down, even if the player presses the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage, and when the player releases his/her hand, the tilting device 310
can move upward from the first state (the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotating claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continue the vertical movement. .

Therefore, for example, by providing a difference in effect between the operation modes of the tilting device 310, the first operation mode and the second operation mode described above, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can be given a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 does not move up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode until the player presses the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the robot was moving up and down in the third operation mode.

The difference in performance is that when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 remains in the first state. ) is better than when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if you release your hand after pressing the tilting device 310). If a difference is made in that the player has a high expectation of a jackpot, then the player recognizes the expectation of a jackpot or not not only when pushing the tilting device 310 but also when releasing the player's hand from the tilting device 310. Since this opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings in which the player pays attention to the operating device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operating device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up. In addition, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 23
48 is configured in such a manner that it slides. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

FIG. 45(a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, and FIG.
5(b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45(c) is a side view of the release member 2346.

46(a) and 46(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. .

In FIG. 46(a), the rotary plate member 2347 is connected to the second spring S with respect to the release member 2346.
A large angle state in which P2 has rotated to the terminal position in the biasing direction is illustrated, and in FIG. 46(b), the rotary plate member 2347 has rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 2346. A small angle state is illustrated. Note that the state in which the release member 2346 rotates when it comes into contact with the disc cam 344 is between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the protruding pin 3
46b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) has a shaft portion 341c (
As functional members that are pivotally supported by the release member 2346 and the rotary plate member 2347, the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47) is disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the rotary plate member 2347 in between. It mainly includes a slide claw member 2348 that is configured to be slidably movable along an arcuate trajectory centered on the rotation axis of (see). In addition, in the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed of a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted into the rail portion 2347f, and a front end portion of the curved portion 2348a at the upper end of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b that protrudes in a hook-like manner toward the left side in FIG. Mainly, a reinforcing part 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the curved part 2348a, and a protruding pin 2348d protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing part 2348c. Be prepared.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348
347f, it is configured to be slidable relative to the rotary plate member 2347.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is disposed on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is used for the bottom plate portion 2311 of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.
It is a magnetic material for generating magnetic force that attracts a.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion that faces the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 opposite to the surface that faces the sliding claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , a portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is made of a metal rod that is inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. Release member 234
6 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348d moves into the functional elongated hole 23.
Pushed by the side surface of 46e, the slide claw member 2348 slides.

The rotating plate member 2347 has a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c,
In addition to the pull-down hole 347e, it includes a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348, and a support elongated hole 2347g into which the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed from a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end of the rotary plate member 2347, and the opposite side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions are arranged so that the rotary plate member 2347 rotates forward in the forward rotation direction.

(counterclockwise in FIG. 46), the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47)
It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered at .

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). Protruding pin 2348 in support long hole 2347g
When sliding the slide claw member 2348 in a state where d is inserted, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and it is possible to suppress the slide claw member 2348 from wobbling. can.

The release member 2346 includes, in addition to a shaft support hole 346a, a protruding pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, and an engaging portion 346d, a functional elongated hole 2346e that is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction. .

The functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length that is curved along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. a hole 2346e1; a second elongated hole 2346e2 extending from one end of the first elongated hole 2346e in a direction inclined toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a;
Mainly equipped with

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348
It slides along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the movement speed of the releasing member 2346 is the same as the movement speed of the protruding pin 2348d without any time delay for the movement of the releasing member 2346. reflected in speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide claw member 2348 will slide quickly, but if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operating speed of the slide claw member 2348 will also be slowed down.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along the arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding.

That is, in the present embodiment, the slide claw member 2 is rotated by the release member 2346.
347 may slide, but the slide claw member 2347 will not slide due to the slide claw member 2347 being pulled when the angle is large. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310 when the tilting device 2310 is placed in the first state, it is possible to restrict the tilting device 2310 from rising.

47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). In addition, in FIG. 47, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is connected to the release member 234.
In FIG. 48, the disk cam 344 is rotated backwards (clockwise in FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. 47 to engage the release member 2346. A state in which the portion 346d is pushed up is shown, and in FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG.
The state returned by the biasing force No. 2 is shown in the figure.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material and fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310
Since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are no longer attracted to each other due to the attitude change of 10, a large load is not applied to the slide claw member 2348 from the tilting device 2310.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with this movement. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, if the release member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is lifted by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the upward direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) due to the biasing force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes, including the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of looking ahead by associating the operation modes with the expected level of jackpot. Attention level can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG.
8b and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310
will rise, so by ensuring a large magnetic force, the load applied to the tilting device 2310 can be increased compared to the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315.

That is, normally, when the player places his hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. (Even if the biasing force by the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, then
In the state shown in , the tilting device 2310 can be raised by lifting the player's hand.

Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (force to maintain the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expectation level of a jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operating device 2300 as a means of looking ahead, so the degree of attention of the operating device 2300 to the player can be adjusted. can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state where it is pushed in by the player, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment is configured in such a manner that detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in an intermediate state between the first state and a state in which it is pushed in by the player, or in a state in which it is pushed in by the player. Ru. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has a right side detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and a left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). A left side detection piece 3311gL extends at a position on the opposite side of the right side detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the axis and located at the center position in the direction of the rotation axis. The left side detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right side detection piece 311gR,
Compared to the left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment, its extended length is shorter.

51(a) and 51(b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Furthermore, Figure 5
1(a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51(b), the tilting device 331 is in the first state.
A state in which 0 is being pressed is illustrated. Also, FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b)
In order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, upper frame member 330, and protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines, while the respective detection sensors 324L, 324R and voice coil motor 352 are illustrated with solid lines. In addition, portions where each detection sensor 324L, 324R and each detection piece 3311gL, 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3
311gL is not inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L, and the right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in an OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in an OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is connected to the left detection sensor 324L.
On the other hand, the right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).
.

By detecting changes in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and a state in which it has been pushed to the end of pushing, it is possible to determine whether it is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether the state is on the way back or not.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and the state in which it is pushed to the end of pushing. The left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of a pushing operation.

52(a) and 52(b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Furthermore, Figure 5
2(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the push-in, and FIG.
2(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is on its way from the pushing end to the first state. In addition, in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, upper frame member 330, and protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines; The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, and the right detection piece 3
11gR is inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in an ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in an ON state).

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state disposed at the push-in end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L while , the right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R.

(The left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and the state in which it has been pushed to the end of pushing. Sensor 324L is ON and right side detection sensor 324R is ON
By detecting that the state has changed, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to
310, the voice coil motor 352 is tilted while the tilting device 3310 is moving upward, rather than colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving downward. By colliding with the device 3310, it is possible to more effectively apply a load to raise the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each detection sensor 324L, 324R, and if the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of rising and has not reached the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when the voice coil motor 352 is not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 3310 after the tilting device 3310 is pressed from the first state
310's rising speed becomes slower. In this case, even if the player performs a repeated tapping operation on the tilting device 3310, the upward movement of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, making it impossible to comfortably perform the repeated tapping operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 can be moved up by only the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. The tilting device 3310 can improve the rising speed.
You can comfortably perform repeated tapping operations.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state where it is pushed in by the player, but the operating device 4300 in the fourth embodiment This is a mode in which the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 is detected while it is changing from the second state to the first state, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed based on the detection result. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of a tilting device 4310 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is protruded from the front side of the projecting protrusion 311j of the case body 4311 in a plate shape.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) provided on the bottom plate part 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operating device 4300 illustrating the push-down operations of the operating device 4300 in chronological order. Note that in FIG. 54(a), the tilting device 431
0 is the second state, and in FIG. 54(b), the tilting device 4310 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 54(a).
A state in which the front detection piece 4311k passes the lower detection sensor 4321e in a downward direction is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines; Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged with the detection groove oriented in a direction that allows the front detection piece 4311k to pass through. Note that in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at 20° intervals on a circular arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the state shown in FIG. 54(a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 54(b) by the player pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k
321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e in order. By detecting the interval between the timings of the passage, it is possible to determine the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310, and based on this determination, it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352.

Here, when pressing the tilting device 4310 from the second position, since the pressing length becomes long (because the period during which acceleration is applied is long), the tilting device The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 becomes higher. Therefore, if the player does not have any means of deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 strong as a safety measure in case the player presses with all his might, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, it is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the end of the push-in, and to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for players with weak force or players who decide to press gently, the reaction force always increases near the pressing position, which puts a burden on the pressing operation, making it easy to feel fatigued. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 based on the timing interval at which the voice coil motor 352 switches between the ON state and the OFF state, a strong reaction force can be applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary. can be prevented.

That is, for example, if the interval between the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned off. While the voice coil motor 352 is not driven, if the above-mentioned timing interval is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in a manner that it is driven.

As a result, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315, and even a weak force can easily push the tilting device 4310. Can be operated by pushing.

Furthermore, if the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is fast, the tilting device 4310
As a reaction force against this, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of pushing can be applied. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
11j extends below the lower frame member 4320, the voice coil motor 352 is driven and the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in advance to be pushed out toward the side closer to the tilting device 4310. Ru.

As a result, the tilting device 4310
The impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed compared to the case where the voice coil motor 352 collides with the tilting device 4310.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operating device 4300. Furthermore, Figure 5
5(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end.

In addition, in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), for ease of understanding, the lower frame member 4
320, while the outer shapes of the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines,
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 35
2 is illustrated with a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, when the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of reaching the end of pushing from the first state, the tilting device 4310 protrudes. The installation portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the protruding convex portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is moved in the contraction direction. The force of the pushing operation can be consumed in moving the object. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure that applies a load by friction like a disc brake, but has a structure that applies a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to the members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(a), the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 is already in contact with the voice coil motor 352, so the state shown in FIG. 55(a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the deceleration of the tilting device 4310 on the way from the first state to the pushing end is suppressed. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the pushing end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 contacts the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 using the voice coil motor 352.

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the expansion direction and movement in the contraction direction). This results in
After pushing the tilting device 4310 to the final end, an effect can be performed to transmit vibrations to the player who continues to place his/her hand on the tilting device 4310.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of producing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 disposed at the pushing end position.

Next, the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68.

In the first embodiment, by vibrating the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 31
Although a case has been described in which vibrations are transmitted to the player who presses 0, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment has a weight member 5 disposed on the lower frame member 5320 at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric.
The player is provided with a drive motor 5411 that rotates the lower frame member 5320, and is configured in such a manner that vibrations are transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, compared to the operating device 300 in the first embodiment, the operating device 5300 has a lower frame member 5320 instead of the lower frame member 320, and a driving device 340.
is used as the drive device 5340, and the voice coil motor 35 is connected from the protective cover member 350.
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disc cam 5344 that is fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412.
410, a transmission device 5410, a flexible member 5420 that accommodates the drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410 and is made of a flexible material, and a flexible member 5420 that is formed in a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface and that is connected to the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420. The lower frame member 53 is accommodated in separate sections.
It mainly includes a housing member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate part 5321 of 20.

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed from a rotationally driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is fan-shaped and whose portion corresponding to the key point of the fan is supported on the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411. The main preparation is as follows.

The drive motor 5411 includes fixing portions 5411a arranged in a pair on the left and right sides and formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on which the shaft extends.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra, and is eccentrically supported on the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 rotates, the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the drive motor 5411 is configured to vibrate.

The flexible member 5420 includes a main body part 5421 in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction, and a main body part 5421 formed of a cylindrical container shape having a bottom on the opposite side to the inserted side. A pair of rib-like leg portions 5422 protruding from the left and right in the radial direction and downwardly, respectively, and a rib-like leg portion 5422 protruding from the left and right on the open portion side of the main body portion 5421 are connected. Posture maintaining part 5423 in which the fixing part 5411a is embedded
and a pair of protruding legs 5424 that protrude upward from the upper surface of the main body 5421 in the shape of a column.

The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth equal to the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end surface of the drive motor 5411 on the shaft side and the end surface of the main body portion 5421 on the opening side are formed on the same plane. Furthermore, in this state, the fixing part 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining part 5423.

The rib-like leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-like leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are larger because the posture maintaining portions 5423 are provided on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is greater than that of the lower rib-like leg 5422.

Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is provided in a columnar manner, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point when it comes into contact with the tilting device 310, which will be described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the flexible member 5420 corresponds to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310.
The resolution of 20 degrees of deformation can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the accommodating member 5430 includes a first accommodating part 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and is provided adjacent to the first accommodating part 5431 and the weight member 5.
412 is housed in the second housing part 5432, and the first housing part 5431 and the second housing part 5
The connecting surface of 432 mainly includes a groove 5433 recessed downward from the upper surface.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is such that the flexible member 54
20 and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load released state), the protruding leg portion 5424 extends from the upper surface to a depth.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is such that it is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load released state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg portion 5424 and the flexible member The depth is such that it interferes with the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the weight member 5420 is deformed (assembly loaded state).

The groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension extending slightly below the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. Ru.

59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59(b) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and FIG. 59(c) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320. )teeth,
59(a) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc. FIG. Note that in FIG. 59(a), a portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Also,
In FIG. 59(a), the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and A terminal region S52, which is a region occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed at the terminal position, is illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), a protruding leg portion 5424 is provided in a protruding manner in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the tilting device 310

(See FIG. 56) The amount of deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change can be ensured to the maximum extent.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in an assembly load released state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424.

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the protruding legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left-right center line of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the extending direction. Therefore, since the protruding legs 5424 can be pushed in evenly on the left and right sides of the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right (tilting left and right in the paper of FIG. 59(b)) when being pushed in. 59(b), and the protruding leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a convex leg portion 5424.
A pair of through-holes 5321d are provided to allow insertion of the through-holes 5321d. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left and right direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the convex leg portion 5424, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player, the lower side of the tilting device 310 becomes convex. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.
Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 is suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 together with the protruding leg portion 5424 is
can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59(b)).

60(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibrating device 5400 taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59(a). In addition, in FIG. 60(a), the assembly load release state is illustrated, and FIG.
0(b), the assembly load state after the protruding leg portion 5424 is pushed into the first housing portion 5431 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal area S52 (see FIG. 59(a)) is Illustrated. Note that the external shapes of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), the vibration device 540
0 is applied to the assembly load state, the protruding leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5
422 is deformed, and the drive motor 5411 and weight member 5412 are also displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and this force becomes larger as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. The impact when 310 collides with lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be alleviated.
Furthermore, since the load is based on elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38) The rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed is slowed down. In this case, even if the player performs a repeated tapping operation on the tilting device 310, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, making it impossible to comfortably perform the repeated tapping operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is moved upward compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the repeated operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its orientation. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in a state where the assembly load is released, vibrations due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 do not occur.

In addition, vibrations of the drive motor 5411 itself and minute vibrations generated in the drive motor 5411 due to movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and
transmission to 0 is prevented. This can make it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the assembled load state, the main body portion 542 of the flexible member 5420
1 is configured in such a manner that vertical displacement is permitted by deforming the upper convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg portion 5422 disposed below the main body portion 5421 changes to a state where it is more compressed vertically, and the rib-like leg portion 5422 becomes slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-like leg portions 5422 can be weakened, and the vibrations generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portion 54
22 extend along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and are arranged in a pair on the left and right at even intervals left and right from the central axis. The radially outer end of 5422 is deformed in such a manner that it moves outward to the left and right (the one with the smaller resistance at the connection position between the main body part 5421 and the rib-like leg part 5422) (see FIG. 60(b)).
In this case, since the protruding direction of the rib-like leg portions 5422 disposed below the main body portion 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-like leg portions 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left and right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second housing part 5432 collide is absorbed by the lower rib-shaped legs 54 of the main body part 5421.
It can be partially absorbed by the elastic force of 22. Thereby, displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a).

61(a) and 61(b) illustrate an assembly load state, and FIG. 61(a) illustrates a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis, and FIG. In b), a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. In addition, Figure 6
1(a) and FIG. 61(b), the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player and the end area S52
The state of the vibration device 5400 in a state where it is occupied is illustrated.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be explained. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is placed on the upper side under an assembly load state, the drive motor 5411 is rotated at a position where the distance from the bottom of the second housing part 5432 is the distance Q1. The axis is placed. Note that in this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates under assembly load, the outer circumferential side surface of the weight member 5412 contacts the second accommodating portion 543.
Contact (rubbing) with 2. Therefore, compared to the assembly load released state, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes, and a different type of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432, the weight member 5412 is generated as a repulsive force.
A force is generated that moves the object upward (upward in FIG. 61(b)). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating part 5432 approach and separate from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. ). Due to this repulsive force, the flexible member 5 along with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412
420 moves upward, and the force of the flexible member 5420 to push back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (in the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is applied to the flexible member 542.
The force that pushes back the tilting device 310 is adjusted by combining the forces that are generated separately, that is, the force that occurs as an elastic recovery force of 0, and the force that occurs due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432. be able to.

That is, after the tilting device 310 starts contacting the protruding leg portion 5424, the end region S52 (FIG. 59

(a)), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is generated as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and after the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal area S52, the weight member 5412
The repulsive force of the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased near the end region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made easier and the impact during the pushing operation can be better alleviated. This adjustment can be performed while the drive motor 5411 continues to rotate. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and due to the difference in detection timing, the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) ) is larger than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed based on the determined operating speed.

For example, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420
It is desirable to increase the load applied to the tilting device 310 by the tilting device 310. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to take a downward attitude (see FIG. 61(b)).

As a result, the end of the descending movement of the drive motor 5411 is controlled so that the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411
It can be raised upward from the lower end of the inner wall of No. 2 by a radius Ra. As a result, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61(a)) (the case where it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61(a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 is The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the same amount by the tilting device 310, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 above the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Note that although the explanation is omitted in this embodiment, if the drive motor 5411 is kept pointing upward and stopped,

(See FIG. 61(a)), the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, and the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 is not generated. It can also be done.

Here, the contact between the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310, and to expand the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player presses the tilting device 310, vibrations can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pressing, or a part of the side of the hand, can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320. Vibration can be transmitted to the player via the player. This makes it possible to avoid a situation where vibrations are not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the player uses the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).
Only when the vibration device 5400 forms an assembled load state by pushing the weight member 5
412 and the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which vibrations are transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pressed, so that the player's pressing operation can be detected. The vibrations can be transmitted to the player more easily than when the vibrations are generated from the ground.

In other words, when the player presses the tilting device 310 and immediately releases the hand (pushing in a pulsed manner), the vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pressed. If so, there is a possibility that the vibrations cannot be generated before the player releases his/her hand (the vibrations may not start in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect caused by the vibrations. In contrast, in this embodiment, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance and ready to generate vibrations before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that vibrations can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. This allows the player to experience the effects of vibration.

Furthermore, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing part 5431. Therefore, the drive motor 5411
Even if the tilting device 310 is driven, vibrations can be prevented from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Therefore, by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pressing the tilting device 310, it is possible to create a state in which vibrations are transmitted when the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be explained. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is a disc cam 5344 and a transmission shaft rod 5343. The rest is the same as the drive device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the explanation is omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed in the center of a pair of disc cams 5344 consisting of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. In addition, the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 534
4L has a symmetrical shape, so only the right disc cam 5344R will be explained and the explanation of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disc cam 5344R and the right disc cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of clamping arms A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connection part with the transmission shaft rod 5343. It is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R has a circular rib 344 extending from the disk portion at its center position.
A support cylinder part P1 extends in a cylindrical shape toward the side where b is arranged, and an axially symmetrical elongated hole is formed along the axial direction of the support cylinder part P1 to a position approximately half of the extension distance. A long hole concave portion C1 recessed from the disk portion and an axial end of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole concave portion C1 extend toward the disk portion side along the axial direction. It mainly includes a pair of clamping arms A1.

The support cylindrical portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a because its inner diameter is equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the elongated hole recessed portion C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the elongated hole recessed portion C1.

The deformable portion P1a is a portion of a pair of connecting rods arranged with the elongated hole recessed portion C1 in between, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in an axially tilted manner with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part that

The elongated hole recess C1 has a recessed cross section that is slightly longer than the width of the holding arm A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is arranged in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (
It is configured so that it can be displaced in the longitudinal direction).

Further, the opposing surfaces of the elongated hole recess C1 have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from a circular arc shape that follows the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, the cylindrical member 5
343a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

The clamping arm portion A1 is formed of a pair of arm portions, from the side facing the other arm,
An engaging protrusion A1a is provided that protrudes in a direction approaching the arm of the other party. Engagement convex portion A1a
engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off from the disc cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engagement convex portion A1a is the engagement groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
It is composed of a shape that matches the circular arc shape of 4. As a result, the overlap length in the radial direction when the engagement convex portion A1a is engaged with the engagement groove 5343a4 is greater than when the tip shape is flat or the center is a curved surface with a convexity (see Fig. 65). (b) horizontal length) can be ensured to be long.

In the axial direction, the engagement convex portion A1a has a side surface near the connecting pin 344d that is a side surface of the right disk cam 5344R, and a concave surface portion C2 (elongated hole concave portion) recessed along the axis near the axis. It is arranged at a position that is in plane with the side surface on the opening side of C1.

Thereby, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65(b)) reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63(b)), the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is
It can be shortened by the thickness of the e-ring (see FIG. 65(b)).

Additionally, there is no need to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (the space required for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction of the right disc cam 5344R (direction parallel to the surface). Therefore, the recessed width (radial width) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced.
Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disc cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 shows the transmission shaft rod 5343
FIG. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fixing part 5343a1 with a D-shaped cross section that fixes the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof, and a fitting groove 5343a3 from the fixing part 5343a1 on the left side in front view.
A clutch actuating part 5343a2 with a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixing part 5343a1 and a disc cam 534 formed by the e-ring, which is a groove into which an e-ring is fitted.
When the disc cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning in the axial direction of the gripping arm 5343a3 and the e-ring fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3, the engagement convex of the clamping arm A1 It mainly includes an engagement groove 5343a4, which is a groove in which the portion A1a engages. In addition, the fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the left-right direction outer side of the pair of plates in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion that slides the movable clutch 343c by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

By fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3 later, the columnar member 5343a is formed with a part where the diameter becomes partially large. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter being uniform, insert a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then fit the e-ring into the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a relative to the shaft support hole 341b. In addition to preventing displacement along the axial direction, the e-ring can also prevent displacement of the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction.

Due to the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344
can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when assembling the disc cam 5344 to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is connected to the end of the support cylinder part P1 of the disc cam 5344 on the side where the engagement convex part A1a is disposed. From the opposite end, engage groove 5
343a4 until the engagement protrusion A1a fits into the position. At this time, the engagement groove 5343a4
Before the engagement protrusion A1a is inserted into the engagement protrusion A1a, the distal end of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusion A1a, so that the distance between the pair of engagement protrusions A1a is expanded. The clamping arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in this manner. Thereafter, when the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engagement convex portion A1a, the engagement convex portion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and as the engagement convex portion A1a fits into the engagement groove 5343a4, Then, the holding arm A1 elastically recovers, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 not only allows for one-touch assembly, but also functions as a structure for preventing destruction in this embodiment. This will be explained with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65(b) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 65(a).
44R, and FIG. 65(c) is a sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66(b) is a front view of
It is a sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R along the line XVIb-LXVIb.

Note that FIG. 66 shows the right disk cam 5344R after deformation when the player applies an overload to the right disk cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end portion of the support tube P1 at a position spaced apart from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and In the vicinity of the portion, the engagement convex portion A1a only engages with the engagement groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disc cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be able to pivot around the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arms A1 face each other, the resistance to the axial tilting displacement of the columnar member 5343a becomes small. on the other hand,
As shown in FIG. 65(c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected,
Since the columnar member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R, the resistance to the axis tilting displacement of the columnar member 5343a becomes large.

Therefore, if an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R by forcibly holding down (pulling up) the tilting device 310, etc. (the displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62) (when a load is applied to restrict the deformation of the right disc cam 5344R with respect to the columnar member 5343a), it is possible to restrict the direction in which the right disc cam 5344R deforms with respect to the columnar member 5343a.

In other words, the right disc cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of smaller resistance, so as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), when an overload is applied to the right disc cam 5344R,
The disk portion is axially tilted and deformed about the support shaft r1 that connects the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is moved along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R compared to the position shown in FIG. 65(a).
Displace.

67(a) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 67(b) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). FIG. 53 is a partial rear view of device 5300. Note that in FIG. 67(b), illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disc cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 67(a), for ease of understanding, the outline of the right disc cam 5344R in a state where it is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown as a solid line, and when an overload is applied, the shaft collapses. The outline of the state is shown with imaginary lines.

In FIG. 67(a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310 is illustrated, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is illustrated in an enlarged manner. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disc cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345, which is trying to stay in place, and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L, which is trying to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned axis tilting deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after its shaft tilting deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating and the outer periphery of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by a dimension Rd, by this dimension Rd,
The shaft support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connecting pin 344d will be misaligned,
In order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R undergoes axis tilting deformation.

Due to the axis tilting deformation, the connecting pin 344d will fall with respect to the direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. The plate cam 5344R is displaced along the circumferential direction. This misalignment causes the right disc cam 534
Since the positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of 4R can be partially absorbed, the drive motor 342 (
(see FIG. 62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting its axis, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other with their surfaces. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed due to the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so the player cannot drive the drive motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilting device 310. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, since the rotating claw member 347 is stopped from moving and stopped by the bottom plate portion 5321,
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed down by frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 counteracts this. is released from the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347.
It acts on In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact and the release member 346 moves along the operating direction of the disc cam 5344, the first
Among the elastic forces of either the spring SP1 or the second spring SP2, the disc cam 5344
The elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 can be increased in the opposite direction to the rotational direction of the disc cam 5344.
Thereby, the load that the release member 346 applies to the disc cam 5344 can be increased,
Since the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
The load applied to the disc cam 5344 can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the right disc cam 5344R is formed in a shape that is line symmetrical to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (in the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point) Therefore, regardless of the direction of rotation of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the direction in which the connecting pin 344d is misaligned with respect to the arm member 345), the right disc cam 5344R is deformed in the same way. The axis can be deformed by resistance.

68(a) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 68(b) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). FIG. 53 is a partial rear view of device 5300. Note that illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted in FIG. 68(b). In addition, in FIG. 68(a), for ease of understanding,
The outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state where it is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown in solid lines, and the outer shape in a state where the shaft is tilted due to an overload is shown in imaginary lines.

In FIG. 68(a), a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and tilted downward by an angle D2 is illustrated, and the tilting device 310 is A player's hand is shown grasping a .

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the player grasps the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 5344
The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R due to the axis tilt of R, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

Note that the matters described for the right disc cam 5344R are also applicable to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, causing an overload. and,
The right disc cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting movement in this axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, the drive motor 34
2 is driven during one rotation of the right disc cam 344R, the detection hole 3 of the right disc cam 344R
44eR passes through the right side detection sensor 353R, but if the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 344R will not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated.
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the input to the right side detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, by the time the occurrence of overload is detected, the right disk cam 3 is
Since it requires a period of time to rotate 44R by a predetermined angle, there is a problem in that overload detection is delayed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when an overload occurs on the right disc cam 5344R and the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the overload is detected. occurrence can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a method of detection, for example, the engagement rib 34c is detected between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c.
A method using the notification device E1 fixed to 4c is exemplified (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 66(a)).
.

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input section, and is arranged as a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of clamping arms A1 intersects the engagement rib 344c. At the same time, the input section is arranged in such a manner that it protrudes toward the support cylinder section P1 side. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support tube P1 are separated (see FIG. 65(b)), and in the overload condition, the notification device E1 and the support tube P1 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 65(b)). 66(b)). Thereby, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it can be determined at an early stage whether or not an overload has occurred in the disc cam 5344.

Next, an operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed, but the operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment 344c are constructed from separate members, and are configured to be able to rotate relative to each other. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, ring member 6344L2, and second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disc cam 6344R also has a different configuration from the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R has a shape that is a mirror copy of the left disc cam 6344L, so the description of the left disc cam 6344L will be The explanation of the right disc cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L includes a circular rib 344b, a connecting pin 344d, and
and a disc member 6344L1 provided with a detection hole 344eL and pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
and a ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially supported with the disk member 6344L1 and rotates relative to the disk member 6344L1.

In the disc member 6344L1, the central shaft part 344a of the first embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disc part, and an annular shaped shaft part 344a is arranged in the axial direction at a position spaced apart from the outer peripheral part of the circular rib 344b in the radial direction. An annular rib 6344f is provided to protrude along the circumferential direction.

The ring member 6344L2 includes an annular main body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b; A cover plate part 6344h is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate part 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. and receiving gear teeth 6344i that are formed in the thickened portion and are disposed radially outward.

The annular main body 6344g has an inner circumferential diameter larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the circular rib 344b, so in the assembled state, the annular main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, so that the central shaft portion 344a The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around the center.

Note that the end surface of the annular body 6344g on the axial disk member 6344L1 side is the annular rib 63.
44f. As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the surface of the disk member 634f is not formed.
Compared to the case of contacting with 4L1, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be performed smoothly.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i mesh with a deceleration transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348, the ring member 6344L2 rotates. In addition, in this embodiment, the rotation speed of the ring member 6344L2 is the same as that of the disc member 6344L1.
(While the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times, the disc member 63
The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, deceleration transmission gear 6348c, and receiving gear teeth 6344i are set in such a manner that 44L1 rotates once).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported on the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary column member 6348 arranged in a posture parallel to the columnar member 343a.
a, and a second column fixed to the auxiliary column member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b and the ring member 63 are fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348.
It mainly includes a deceleration transmission gear 6348c meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of 44L2.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be explained that the tilting device 310 can be raised in a plurality of ways after the tilting device 310 is released from the first state by the rotary claw member 347.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 71 shows a state similar to that shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a state in which the ring member 6344R2 has rotated once in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. , after rotating for more than one rotation, the disc member 6344R1 is in a posture in which it has rotated in the opposite direction by the amount exceeded, and the disk member 6344R1 is in a posture in which it has rotated 1/3 in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction). is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 73, FIG.
A state in which the ring member 6344L2 rotates by a predetermined angle in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in , and the tilting device 310 moves upward is illustrated.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operating device 300 according to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves upward instantly (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) after releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the reached position is in the second state. It was limited to the position where it was placed (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is the support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engagement rib 344c The relative relationship between the tilting device 31 and the tilting device 31 can be changed.
The types of 0 arrival positions can be increased.

That is, when releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 3
10 is instantly raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state where it is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state (see FIG. 73). In this way, the tilting device 310 instantly (disc cam (without waiting for 344 rotation)
The position it reaches can be changed.

As a result, for example, when configuring a gaming machine in such a manner that the level of expectation of the performance changes depending on the height at which the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 can be adjusted. can be improved. In this case, there is no limitation as to whether the expectation level is higher for the tilting device 310 to rise higher or the expectation level is higher for the tilting device 310 to reach a lower ascending position.

However, by keeping the normal upward reach position of the tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and making it reach the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation level reaches the maximum, the expectation level The magnitude of the tilting device 310 can be associated with the magnitude of the displacement amount by which the player pushes the tilting device 310, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the difference in expectations due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, since the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 will rise, the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the timing for operating the tilting device 310. You can induce them to do so. Therefore, the tilting device 3
Regardless of the ten presentation modes, it is possible to prevent a gaming method in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner.

Next, the operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

In the first embodiment, the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed. However, in the operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 is a disc member. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged as separate members, and these separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.
The explanation will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the characteristics of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, and FIG.

(b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75(a) is the LX of FIG. 74(a).
It is a sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R along the line XVa-LXXVa, and FIG. 75(b) is
74A is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). FIG. Note that the right disc cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disc cam 7344R, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disc cam 7344R has a central shaft portion 344a into which the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state.
1 and a ring member 73 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1.
44R2, and an engagement member 7 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1 in the assembled state and has an engagement portion 7630 that fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2.
344R3.

The disc member 7344R1 is formed into a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center,
A detection hole 344eR is located in a flange-shaped portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup.
In addition, the engaging rib 344c is partially omitted (the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first
This is a member having a shape (the space between the retracting portion 344c2 and the retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 on its surface in an assembled state, and also has a first circular recessed portion 7 that is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
410, a second circular recessed part 7420 which is a circular recessed part smaller in diameter and deeper in the axial direction than the first circular recessed part 7410, and a first projecting part 344c1 and a first retracting part 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 is bored in the radial direction in between, and a hole is formed in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430 from the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (the outer peripheral side of the disc member 7344R1) to the outside in the radial direction. It mainly includes a protruding fixing protrusion 7440.

The insertion hole 7430 extends from the intermediate position between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2.
At the shifted position, the first elongated hole 7431, which is a long rectangular elongated hole portion, extends along the axial direction of the disc member 7344R1, and from the bottom end of the disc member 7344R1 of the first elongated hole 7431. The second long hole 74 is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disc member 7344R1.
32 and a second elongated hole 74 with the first elongated hole 7431 side at the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
It mainly includes a return portion 7433 that is configured to protrude toward the 32 side.

The width direction (short side direction) dimension of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the width direction (short side direction) size of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. direction(
(in the lateral direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable about the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 (the lower end in FIG. 75(b)) as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433
2 is movable outwardly.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engagement member 7344R3, and has a height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the ring member 7344R2 will be described. Figure 76(a)
is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(b) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2.
FIG. 76(c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a).

As shown in FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c), the ring member 7344R2 is connected to the connecting pin 3.
A ring-shaped plate portion 7510 having a ring plate shape in which 44d is provided protrudingly, and the ring-shaped plate portion 7510
The thick wall portion 7520 extends in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the inner circumferential surface of the ring plate portion 7510 and has a star-shaped through hole formed in the center thereof.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a thickness equal to the depth of the first circular recess 7410 and an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the first circular recess 7410. Ru. Thereby, in the assembled state, the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disc member 7344R1 can be made to coincide with each other, while the resistance to relative rotation can be prevented from becoming excessive.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so that it approaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)), and has an outer circumferential diameter. is made slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This allows the engaging member 7344R3 to move in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75(a)) in the assembled state, while preventing the relative rotational resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disc member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 has an irregularly shaped through hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and recesses in the irregularly shaped through hole 7521 radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (in this embodiment, divided into five equal parts). It mainly includes equally divided recessed portions 7522 provided therein.

The irregularly shaped through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward from the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1. configured.

FIG. 77(a) is a front view of the engagement member 7344R3, and FIG. 77(b) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3.
) is a side view of the engagement member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), in the assembled state (see FIG. 74(b)), the engaging member 7344R3 is located outside the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. An arcuate plate portion 7610 disposed on the side and an end portion on the back side of the arcuate plate portion 7610 (FIG. 77(
b) An extension part 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the right end (right end) and an engagement extending in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77(b)) from the extending tip of the extension part 7620 7630, and a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring disposed on the side of the arcuate plate portion 7610 facing the engaging portion 7630.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611, which is a protrusion into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the tip of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner circumferential side surface.

The extending portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state,
When pushed inward in the radial direction against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extended tip thereof is configured to have an extended length that extends inward from the inner circumferential surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the irregularly shaped through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75(a)).

As will be described later, the engagement member 7344R3 has both the function of a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and the function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disc member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

Referring to FIG. 78, a method for assembling the right disc cam 7344R will be described. Figure 78(a)
is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(b) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG.
78(c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction VIIIb.
78(e) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction d, and FIG.
78(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e).

In addition, in FIG. 78(a), FIG. 78(b), FIG. 78(c), and FIG. 78(d), the disk member 7
78(e) and 78(f), the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344 are inserted into the disc member 7344R1.
A state in which R3 is inserted is illustrated. In addition, for ease of understanding, FIG. 78(b),
In FIGS. 78(d) and 78(f), illustration of the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 is omitted.

To assemble the right disk cam 7344R, first insert the engaging member 734 into the first elongated hole 7431.
Insert the engaging portion 7630 of 4R3 (see FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b)). As described above, since the widthwise dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 7630 from being accidentally inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. It can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, in the depth direction of FIG. 78(d), the engaging portion 7
The engagement member 7344R3 is slid to a position where the position of the engagement member 630 and the fixed protrusion 7440 match.

At this position after the movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engagement member 7344R3 suppresses displacement of the disc member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 78(d)) and engages The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1.

Moreover, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be explained. First, in a state in which the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the barbed portion 7433 is released, and the barbed portion 7433 returns to the second position due to the elastic recovery force. It enters inside the elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(d)).

When inserted into the second elongated hole 7432, the tip of the barbed portion 7433 contacts the extension portion 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, but the contact direction is in the longitudinal direction of the barbed portion 7433.

(the direction in which the deformation resistance increases) (see FIG. 78(d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed. As a result, the engaging member 73
Since the movement of the engagement member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 7344R3 from shifting its position during operation.

After holding the engagement member 7344R3 on the disk member 7344R1, the engagement member 734
4R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1, and the disk member 734
Insert the ring member 7344R2 from the opening side of 4R1. By releasing the load from the engagement member 7344R3, the engagement portion 7630 moves along the radially outward direction D7 due to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disc cam 7344R can be easily assembled. In addition,
The right disc cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction will be described. 79(a), FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(a), FIG. 80(b), and FIG. 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 79(a), FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(a), FIG. 80(b), and FIG. 81, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347
and a disc cam 7344 are shown as the center, and illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotating claw member 7347 in this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the convex pin 346b is configured to reach the end of its movement in the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes through.

The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the rear upper part of the main body portion (upper right corner in FIG. 80(a)) is shaved obliquely in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b), and 81, the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79(a)). are illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 79(a), the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R is attached to the release member 7346.
79(b) shows a state in which the right disk cam 7344R has further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 79(a), and FIG.

(a) shows a state in which the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed into the disc member 7344R1 to the end, and in M6-2 (b), the disc member 7344R3 is moved from the state shown in FIG.
81, the right disc cam 7344R rotates in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG.
The state after separation from 346 is illustrated. Note that FIGS. 79(a), 79(b), and 80

80(a) and 80(b) illustrate a state in which the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which it can rotate relative to the rotating claw member 7347 (small angle state).

As shown in FIG. 79(a), immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contacting each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward,
The outwardly extending state is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), a release member 734 is attached to the outermost side surface of the engagement member 7344R3.
In the state in which the engagement portions 346d of No. 6 are in contact, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 are brought into a small angle state.

In this embodiment, when the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320, the angle is small, and the arcuate plate portion 7610 The inner peripheral surface and the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 3 of the engaging rib 344c
The disc cam 7344 is arranged in such a position that the outer circumferential surface of the engagement member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 while the engagement member 7344R3 is in contact with the release member 346 (see FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disc cam 7344 and becomes unable to rotate any further (the small angle state), the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state. 7346 applies a load to the engagement member 7344R3 to push the engagement member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disc cam 7344.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the engagement member 7344R3 extends outward in the radial direction, it is impossible to continue rotating in the backward rotation direction. , the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the irregularly shaped through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is no longer transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, so that the disk member 7344R2 changes from the state shown in FIG. 80(a) as shown in FIG. 80(b).
Even if 4R1 is rotated, ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 is moved from one equally divided concave portion 75 that was originally arranged.
22 to another equally divided concave portion 7522, the phases of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disc cam 7344R further rotates, the engagement member 73
44R3 and the release member 7346 are released, the engagement member 7344R3 is extended radially outward, and the engagement portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, the equally divided concave portions 7522 in which the engaging portions 7630 are accommodated are shifted by one.

That is, by going through the steps shown in FIG. 79(a) to FIG. can be relatively shifted by the distance between the recessed portions (72 degrees).

Referring to FIG. 82, engagement member 73 when disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction.
The operation of 44R3 will be explained. Figure 82(a), Figure 82(b), Figure 83(a) and Figure 8
3(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

82(a) to 83(b) chronologically illustrate how the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)). In FIG. 82(a), the release member 734
6 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R are shown in the figure, and in FIG. 82(b), the engagement member 7344R3 starts descending by contacting the release member 7346 from above 83(a) shows a state where the disk cam 7344 has further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82(b), and FIG. 83(b) shows a state in which the release member 7346 and The state after the engagement member 7344R is separated is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 move in the backward direction (see FIG. 82(a) clockwise). When rotating in the rotation direction), there is no member to restrict the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 734 are moved by the elastic force of the first spring SP1.
7 is only loaded in the forward rotation direction.

Therefore, a load that would push the engagement member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction is not generated, and the engagement member 7344R3 remains in contact with the release member 7346 until the engagement member 7344R3 is separated from the release member 7346.
R3 maintains a state in which it extends outward in the radial direction. Therefore, when rotating the disc cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, relative rotation between the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented.

From these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disc cam 7344, the disc member 7
It is possible to switch whether or not the ring member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment, while In the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81), the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed, unlike the first embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, the rotation direction of the disc member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disc member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is the opposite direction to the direction in which the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixation is not released). Since they match, the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84).
The disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be rotated relative to each other while the ring member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 are maintained at a constant position (see).

As a result, a state where the tilting device 310 stops attracting attention from the player can be changed to
This can be used as a state for changing the relative postures of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place that cannot be seen by the player.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be explained that according to this embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of modes in which the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. In addition, in FIG. 84, by releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately changed from the first state to the second state shown in FIG.
A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that allows the ring member 7344R2 to be displaced (without rotating the ring member 7344R1) is illustrated, and in FIG. 85, from the state shown in FIG. 84,
A state in which the ring member 7344R2 has been rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by one equally divided recessed portion 7522 through the process described in FIG. 79 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 84 and 85,
In both cases, a state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 is in contact with the engaging portion 346d is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to this embodiment, the rotating claw member 347
By releasing the fixation, the range of movement of the tilting device 310 can be changed immediately (without rotating the disc cam 7344R2).

That is, when the rotation claw member 347 is rotated to release the fixation from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the top end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the rotating claw member 347 is rotated to release the fixation from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted rearward and lower than the position shown in FIG. Move to a state that is lower than state 2.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 3 is changed from the first state.
The position that 10 reaches immediately (without rotation of disc cam 7344) by the upward movement can be changed. Thereby, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device can be improved.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front side of the operating device 300 is exposed, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operating device 300 from the front side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Note that in the following description, the front side of the page is assumed to be the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is assumed to be the rear (rear) side of the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86. Furthermore, for the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 86) indicate the pachinko machine 8010.
The vertical direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction are shown respectively. Also, the definition of this direction is shown in Figure 8.
The same applies to the explanation with reference to the drawings before 6.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a
88 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (expanded) with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. Inner frame 1
89 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing an open state (deployed) for 2, and FIG.
90 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (expanded). FIG. FIG. 8 is a front view of the machine 8010. In addition, in FIG. 90, the reference numerals of the internal structure of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed into a frame shape with four fixed sides, with wooden board members as the top and bottom sides, and aluminum board members as the left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game parlor by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component in the pachinko machine 8010, and has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18, etc.) and locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the component is installed in a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 89, the inner frame 12 rotatably supports the front frame 14, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base side) and the right side is the rotation tip side. (opening/closing tip side) and can be rotated forward.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end (opening/closing base end) when viewed from the front, and the right side is the rotation base end. It can be rotated rearward as the moving tip side (opening/closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010, as shown in FIG. As a result, each is canceled.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the metal plate (having holes) with the inner frame 12 .

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is large enough to fit. The front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped cylindrical shape that projects upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12. It is pivotally supported by being externally fitted onto the support pin 19a (which has a small shape).

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed into a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed of a metal plate into a vertically long rectangular frame shape. Various members (illumination parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) are provided on the front and back sides of the main body frame 14a.
The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing units (operating device 300, operating handle 51, etc.).

The front frame 14 is provided with a window 14c having an opening smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 86). This window part 1
4c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, so that almost the entire area of the front side of the inner frame 12 is covered by the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached. Therefore, game board 1
3 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89).

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a, 16b that have a larger outer diameter than the window portion 14c and are transparent, and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates these transparent glasses 16a, 16b. It is equipped with. The fixed frame is made of transparent glass 16a made of synthetic resin.
, 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to a fixed frame, so that the glass unit 16 is an integrated double-glazed glass.

Although the glass unit 16 is made of transparent glasses 16a and 16b to be colorless and transparent, it is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored and transparent instead of being colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illumination parts 8029 to 8033 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window part 14c in the front frame 14. These illumination parts 8029-8
At 033, lighting or blinking is performed in response to changes in the gaming state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a predetermined reach is reached. Further, the illumination section 8030 above the window section 14c includes a light emitting means that lights up in the event of a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls to be paid out, and a light emitting means that lights up while the prize balls are being put out.

Furthermore, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member made of punched metal) is provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover a speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects depending on the game state. . Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, an upper tray 17 and a lower tray 50 are disposed to bulge out toward the front side and are arranged vertically in parallel.

The upper tray 17 has the function of temporarily storing the game balls put out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball firing unit 112a while arranging them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 50
has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17. A ball guide opening 53 is formed in the rear side surface of the lower tray 50 and is open in the front-rear direction and allows the ball to be guided to the lower tray 50.

It should be noted that there is no need to separate the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 and provide multiple locations for storing game balls; instead, it is possible to eliminate the lower tray 50 and use only the upper tray 17, which has only one storage section. Also good.

An operating device 300 that is manually operated by players is provided on the front side of the upper tray 17 (game ball storage area). The operating device 300 is an operating device used when an effect corresponding to a player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. This operating device 300 may be provided at another location other than the upper tray 17, such as around the lower tray 50,
They may be provided at a plurality of locations, and may be operated by a push-button type switch, or may be configured to allow information input using another operating method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact type sensor.

A passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 140 is molded from synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper plate passage part 141 communicating with the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage part 142 communicating with the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage part 145 ( (see FIG. 92).

A put-out ball socket 143 that projects rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14). 143 is partitioned left and right by a partition wall 144, thereby forming a passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage part 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage part 142, respectively.

The foul ball passage section 145 (see FIG. 92) is a part that forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a and discharge them to the lower tray 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that is open upward. The foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and then is discharged into the lower tray 50. Note that the foul ball passage section 145 may be connected to the upper tray 17 instead of the lower tray 50, and foul balls may be discharged to the upper tray 17.

The foul ball passage section 145 merges with a ball extraction passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which unlaunched balls flowing down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 are guided when the player performs a ball extraction operation. It is formed like this.

Attached to the back side of the front frame 14 are multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 made of resin that are fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper part and bulge toward the back side. On the front side of the multi-functional cover members 171 and 172, there are connectors for wiring that conducts electricity to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the internal board of the illumination sections 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14 and one end thereof. An electronic board is provided to which the other end of the connector is connected, and the electronic board and connector are covered by multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

In the portions of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171, 172, there are wiring through grooves 14h that communicate with the left and right illumination sections 8031, 8032, and through the wiring through grooves 14h, the illumination sections 8031, An electronic board 14i is formed to which the wiring drawn out from the 8032 is connected (see Fig. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are drawn out backward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. It will be done.

Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in FIG. 89). A connector for conductive wiring or a connector whose one end is connected to the internal board of the illumination parts 8031, 8032 can be easily inserted into and removed from the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover member 171 attached to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged as a pair above and below the rotating tip side of the inner frame 12, and is connected to a board support device 60 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13.
0 (see FIG. 126), and can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but details will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there is a container-shaped member made of a resin material and having an open front side, which is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and is formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The elongated cover member 173 has a cross-sectional area that decreases as it moves from the rotating tip side to the rotating base side of the front frame 14, and the lower wall portion 173a that constitutes the lower side of the space that accommodates the wiring is The upper wall part 173b, which is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged oppositely above the lower wall part 173a, and forms the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, matches the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 in a plane. Composed of shapes.

The elongated cover member 173 is a wall portion that is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and is a wall portion that is arranged in contact with the front frame 14, and is connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. An upwardly extending wall portion 173c is provided that extends upward from the wall portion 173b.

The upwardly extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that an end thereof connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b extends in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end of the front frame 14. , is constructed by securing a space that can be further curved into a semicircular shape in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (corresponding to one period of a sine wave) while the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall 173c. Extends toward the proximal end. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the change in the position of the wiring that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed (see FIG. 96), so it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and causing a load. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will be disconnected.

On the back side of the front frame 14, an upwardly extending wall portion 173c of the elongated cover member 173 (front frame 14
(the part closest to the rotation base end side) and a vertically elongated plate part that is a part of the main body frame 14a and is located on the rotation base side of the front frame 14, and is formed of a resin material. An inverted cup portion 178 having an inverted cup shape and opening downward is provided.

The inverted cup part 178 is a part that takes countermeasures against fraudulent acts, for example, where the front frame 14 is illegally pushed apart, a piano wire is inserted from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and the piano wire is entered into the gaming area. It is. That is, even if the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from around the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. , since the progress of the piano wire can be obstructed, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Furthermore, since the inverted cup portion 178 and the elongated cover member 173 are formed from a resin material,
It is possible to take measures against fraud committed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is introduced and pressed against the inverted cup part 178, the heat causes the inverted cup part 178 to
Similarly, the elongated cover member 173 can be melted and passed through the inverted cup portion 178.
It also dissolves. When the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the elongated cover member 173, the wiring housed on the front side of the elongated cover member 173 is burnt out, so that by detecting that the wiring is disconnected, , it is possible to make it easier to detect fraudulent acts.

In particular, in this embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the inverted cup portion 178 on the elongated cover 173 side has a shape that matches the shape of the elongated cover member 173, and abuts (close to) each other on the surface. Moreover, since the normal line of the lower surface of the inverted cup part 178 in the wall part 178a is shaped to face downward, when the piano wire enters the inverted cup part 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall part 178a. Furthermore, if the inverted cup portion 178 is melted, there is a high probability that the elongated cover 173 will also be melted, making it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

The wall portion 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. In other words, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forcibly opened on the rotating proximal end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip ends up in the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire moves. It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire advances through the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 (
Therefore, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the gaming area while preventing the reaction force exerted on the person who commits the fraud through the piano wire from increasing. By arranging a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act before the person committing the fraudulent act escapes, making it easier to secure the person committing the fraudulent act. .

In other words, even if the piano wire is guided into the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person committing the fraudulent act will not be able to tell, and will therefore think that the piano wire is on its way to the gaming area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the gaming area (for example, the window 14c
This allows the person who commits the fraud to naturally insert the piano wire deeper (until the end of the piano wire is visible from the front side through the cable) (without raising suspicions that the piano wire has not been inserted properly). . Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for a person committing a fraudulent act to realize that the fraudulent act has been discovered and to attempt to escape.

Note that the detection device may be a device composed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be disposed on the locking mechanism 20RK or on the back side of the operating handle 51. When disposed on the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally disposed on the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine whether the piano wire has entered.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball firing unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, this ball firing unit 112a includes an electromagnetic firing solenoid 701 provided as a firing device, and a game ball launched by the firing solenoid 701 between an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so that it is launched toward the area between
and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) to a shooting rail 730.
Supply one piece at a time on top. In this case, the supplied game ball is placed on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 is activated to the firing rail 7.
The game ball moves toward the game ball above 30, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. Note that the electric actuator of the ball firing unit 112a is not limited to the firing solenoid 701, and a firing motor or the like may be used. Note that the detailed configuration of the ball firing unit 112a will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 90, on the left side of the inner frame 12 and on the left side of the firing rail 730, a board 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is disposed. It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover this through hole from the front side. Fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage part 161 and a main body side lower dish passage part 162. The main body side upper plate passage section 161 and the main body side lower plate passage section 162 are
A passage is provided inside so that one end is opened toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with a through hole penetrated through the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end is opened toward the bottom. A curved passage is formed in which the direction changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction). In this configuration,
The balls discharged from the dispensing device 133 pass through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enter the tray passage forming member 160 from one end of the tray passage forming member 160, and are discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the front frame 1 is attached to the lower part of the dish passage forming member 160.
The ball receptacle 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided at 4 enters. A front door side upper plate passage 141 is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 161, and a front door lower plate passage 142 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 162.

As shown in FIG.
A shutter 163 is provided to restrict the outflow of game balls from the main body side lower tray passage section 162. The shutter 163 has a blocking position where the exit portions of both passages are narrowed to prevent the game balls from flowing out;
It is provided so as to be switchable between the allowable position and the allowable position that allows the outflow of game balls.

Further, a biasing member (coil spring, etc.) that biases the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and when the front frame 14 is opened relative to the inner frame 12, the biasing member is The shutter 163 is configured to remain in the blocking position depending on the force. This avoids the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out when the front frame 14 is opened with game balls stored in the main body side upper tray passage section 161 or the main body side lower tray passage section 162. There is.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 resists the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the dispensing ball receptacle 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the upper tray passage section 161 on the main body side and the upper tray passage section 141 on the front door side communicate with each other, and the lower tray passage section 162 on the main body side and the lower tray passage section 142 on the front door side communicate with each other to prevent the game balls from flowing down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. Note that the board 167 is configured such that a location where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided and a location where the connector CN3 is provided are separate boards. This means that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are connected to the main control device 1.
10, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, so the purpose of transmission is different, so using a separate board is intended to prevent malfunctions. by.

The portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded, and FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the window of the front frame 14. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are shown exploded.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the main body frame 14
On the front side of c, an operating device 300 is disposed on the front side of the upper tray 17, diagonally above the right side of the lower tray 50, and at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction.
A covering cover 370 is disposed on the front side of.

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower part of the operating device 300 from the front side, and has a horizontal width comparable to the horizontal width of the front frame 14 . That is, the left and right ends of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illumination parts 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least on the left and right ends, and has a main body curved portion 371 configured in a curved shape with left and right center portions protruding toward the front side, and They extend downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right center portions and the left and right ends of the portion 371 toward sides that are close to each other in the width direction, and merge at the lower end of the extension when viewed from the front V A hanging part 372 configured in a letter shape, a main body curved part 371 and a hanging part 3
A light-transmitting part 373 is a plate-like member that closes the opening surrounded by 72 and is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body curved part 371 or the hanging part 372, and the main body curved part 371 A left side plane support part 374 is formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end of the main body curved part 371, a right side plane support part 375 is formed as a plane on the upper surface of the right end of the main body curved part 371, and a right side plane support part 375 is formed as a plane on the upper surface of the right end of the main body curved part 371. It mainly includes a support groove 376 which is a recessed groove and whose recessed width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back side.

The main body curved portion 371 has a front side edge formed in a rounded curved shape, and a rear side edge formed in a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper plate 17, so that the upper plate does not fit in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). 1
The rear left edge 371a abuts the front side edge of 7 in the front-rear direction, and the rear left edge 371a is connected to the rear left edge 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operating device 300. A back middle edge 371b that contacts the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and a back middle edge 37
1b on the opposite side of the back left edge 371a, a back right edge 371c that has a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation section 40 and comes into contact with the ball rental operation section 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state; Mainly equipped with

The hanging portion 372 and the main body curved portion 371 cover the operating device 300 from the front side, and the right corner cover 38 is a plate portion on which the operating handle 51 is supported and is disposed at the right corner of the front frame 14.
This part prevents access to the operating device 300 from the front side by having a shape that does not create a gap between the right corner cover 380 and the right corner cover 380 (a shape in which the abutting positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). Note that the hanging portion 372 is located closer to the front than the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later.
A screw inserted from below is inserted into the bottom plate in which the recessed portion 15a is formed, so that it is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate in which the recessed portion 15a is formed.

The light-transmitting portion 373 is a portion that allows light emitted from the operating device 300 to pass through to the front side to create effects using light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operating device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320 are arranged close to each other.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is a matter that can be arbitrarily determined, and in this embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upwardly and downwardly. Specifically, light is irradiated upward (disposed on the upper surface of the illumination support part 341e).
Six LEDs emit light downward (disposed on the bottom surface of the lighting support part 341e)
Two pieces are placed respectively.

Light emitted from the LED of the LED device 341f that emit light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operating device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the transparent section 373. do. On the other hand, the tilting device 3
When 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then passes through the transparent section 373. .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be seen through the transparent portion 373 is compared to when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The force is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emit light downward (while reducing the control burden by omitting control to change the amount of light), it is possible to It is possible to perform an effect in which the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 373 is changed.

Furthermore, as another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from an LED that emit light downward in accordance with changes in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is increased (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22). By controlling the amount of light to change weakly (in steps) as the state changes from the first state to the second state, the light that can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 373 as the state of the tilting device 310 changes. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the settings).

In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the left side plane support portion 374 abuts the lower end of the illumination portion 8031 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illumination section 8031 and the illumination section 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support section 374 toward the illumination section 8031. . Thereby, downward displacement of the illumination section 8031 can be suppressed.

In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the right plane support portion 375 abuts the lower end of the illumination portion 8032 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illumination part 8032 and the illumination part 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right plane support part 375 toward the illumination part 8032. . Thereby, downward displacement of the illumination section 8032 can be suppressed.

Although the details will be described later, the illumination section 8031 and the illumination section 8032 are connected to the upper panel unit 40.
0 and the upper panel unit 400 shifts downward, the illumination portion 803
1,8032 generates an upward reaction force toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore,
According to this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illumination parts 8031, 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support can be distributed over a wide area.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove into which the lower end of the illumination part 8032 enters from the back side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the illumination part 8032 is in the deepest position in the support groove 376, and in this state, the lower front corner end of the illumination part 8032 and the front end of the right plane support part 375 are The position matches.

Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illumination portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 through the engagement relationship described later, an assembled state can be constructed by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. A separate fixing part for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is attached to the main body frame 14a (or a separate member (upper plate 17 The passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. A sheet metal member 150 in the shape of a metal plate is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) across the main body frame 14a, and a metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 is attached to the main body frame 14a or the plate in such a manner that the passage forming unit 140 is covered from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a with the main body frame 14a in between).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, a hot wire or piano wire is pressed against the tip and melted), the sheet metal member 150 will not be able to maintain the front frame. 14 functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side. That is, even if a wire with a heated tip is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 made of metal, it will not penetrate, and it is possible to prevent the exemplified wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed in such a manner as to cover the upper, lower, left and right sides of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145 in the left side when viewed from the front, and the open front side is connected to the passage forming unit. 140, and a planar plate-like part 152 that covers the back side of the lower side of the foul ball passage part 145 and the ball extraction passage 147.

The fitting box part 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage part 142 and the lower end part of the foul ball passage part 145 from top to bottom and left and right, so the fitting box part 151 covers the lower end part of the front door side lower plate passage part 142 and the foul ball passage part. Not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the passageway 145,
Even if the wire is penetrated in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction, the illustrated wire is
It is possible to prevent the vehicle from entering beyond 40 degrees.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back side of the foul ball passage section 145 and the ball extraction passage 147, when a wire such as the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 and a through hole is made. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent unauthorized members from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, the operating device 300 may be removed and the exemplified wire may be pressed against a location where the thickness of the front and back becomes thinner (a location diagonally above the rear of the recessed portion 15a). An example is illustrated in which a through-hole is opened by being inserted, and the illustrated wire enters the hole.

Furthermore, the front frame 14 includes an operating section back member 155 that is fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the back side, and the operating section back member 155 has the cylinder lock 20 disposed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of a left and right long plate member. There is a through hole 156 formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can pass therethrough, and the through hole 1
A pair of insertion holes 157 are bored at the top and bottom of 56 and are inserted with screws for fastening and fixing the operating unit back member 155 to the main body frame 14a, and a portion overlapped with the back side of the passage forming unit 140.

It mainly includes a pair of coupling insertion holes 158 that are vertically arranged and bored in the left end portion, and an opening/closing regulating portion 159 that protrudes toward the back side at the rotation base end side of the through hole 156.

The connection insertion hole 158 is connected to the connection part 1 formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140.
48 in the front-back direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is connected to the connecting through hole 1 at a position that matches the upper connecting through hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
The protruding part 148a has a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connector 58 and protrudes from the back side, and is inserted into the coupling insertion hole 158 at a position that matches the lower coupling insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a threaded portion 148b that is bored as a hole into which a screw can be inserted.

With this configuration, when the operating section back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the protruding portion 148a is passed through the upper coupling insertion hole 158. By aligning the position with the member 155 and then screwing the screw passed through the lower connection insertion hole 158 into the threaded part 148b, the operation unit back member 1 can be easily removed.
55 can be fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140.

Note that the L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left side edge of the left end portion of the operation unit back member 155, in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower side edge at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the area. 148c is
In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), it is formed into an L-shape that can make surface contact with the wall portion 158a at the top, bottom, left and right.

Therefore, for positioning when assembling the operating section back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the protruding portion 148a through the connection insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved vertically relative to the extending wall portion 148c. By bringing the left and right surfaces into contact with each other, the position and posture of the operating section back member 155 relative to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The opening/closing regulating portion 159 is a portion disposed front and back to face the panel support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and the details will be described later.
Under predetermined conditions, the front frame 1 is brought into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13.
4 is in a closed state.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing regulating part 159 is a part that extends toward the back side of the operation part back member 155 and is made of synthetic resin, and in order to ensure rigidity, the opening/closing regulating part 159 has a cross section when viewed in the extending direction. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same thickness, and the required amount of material is maintained while ensuring rigidity compared to when it is installed in a block shape that fills a U-shaped opening. can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as that of other parts of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength can be relied on the body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the part is formed as thin as possible). The strength of the opening/closing regulating portion 159 can be ensured while improving the moldability by forming the opening/closing regulating portion 159 with a thickness of 150 mm.

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing regulating portion 159 may be any shape that can ensure rigidity and maintain the shape, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, compared to a flat cross section, the cross section may be curved (wavy), stepped, rectangular, or cylindrical.

In addition, the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is not provided as a part of the operation portion back member 155, but rather as a part of the main body frame 15.
It may be constructed from a metal part that is bent and extended from a to the back side, or that is extended from another member fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a to the back side. However, as in this embodiment,
Forming the opening/closing regulating portion 159 from synthetic resin prevents the panel support device 600 from being chipped or dented when it comes into contact with the panel support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed from a metal member. can do. This can reduce the risk that an operator who changes the state of the board support device 600 to attach and detach the game board 13 will touch a chip or a dent made in the board support device 600 and be injured.

Here, since the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is arranged closer to the rotation base end of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock that is arranged further to the rotation tip side It is possible to ensure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 locations. Therefore, when the opening/closing regulating section 159 is in contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotating tip side will be locked by mistake. can.

As a route through which a foreign object such as a wire may enter, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operating device 300 is assumed. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operating device 300 is configured to be completely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operating device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, the configuration is such that it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if you follow the gap between the operating device 300.

Note that the harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies power to the operating device 300 is connected to the wiring through hole 14 that is bored in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the elongated cover member 173.
a1 (see FIG. 103), the harness HN3 is inserted into the protective cover device 350 (
(See FIG. 57) is connected to the operating device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall.

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operating device 300 through a gap in the operating device 300, the wire or the like will not reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operating device 300, which is configured in a substantially case shape. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

Note that a liquid can be considered as a foreign substance that enters the operating device 300. For example, a player who feels bad about a game result may pour drinking water or the like onto the pachinko machine 10. that time,
Operating devices 300 that are conveniently located are easy prey for being splashed with drinking water, and if no precautions are taken, drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) or voice coil motor 352 (see FIG.
3) may be damaged.

Furthermore, if liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board, etc. However, as described above, in this embodiment, the operating device 300 is placed on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since they are separably independent, liquid such as drinking water applied to the operating device 300 can be prevented from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

Note that a recessed portion 15a is recessed in the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operating device 300) in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion.
It is not completely case-shaped, and gaps are formed here and there (for example, see Figure 13,
The transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the clearance gap) through the inside of the operating device 300,
The recessed portion 15a plays the role of temporarily storing the liquid that falls below the operating device 300.

In the operation device 300, the drive motor 342 is arranged near the rear side of the opening 325, so the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)), and furthermore, the drive motor 342 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)) Since the portion is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17(b) and 18), liquid such as drinking water may be
42 and can prevent it from malfunctioning.

In addition, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a risk that liquid such as drinking water may come into contact with the voice coil motor 352. The liquid remains attached to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the attached liquid flows down toward the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, voice coil motor 352 can be prevented from breaking down.

With the above-described configuration, even if a player on his way home splashes a liquid such as drinking water on him, the next player can play the game normally as long as he wipes off the top surface of the operating device 300 that he touches. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operating device 300 from compressing business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a movable binding member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the movable binding member 180 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. In addition, FIGS. 93 to 9
6 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14, as in FIG.

93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member 180 are illustrated side by side. be. In addition, in FIG. 93(b), the movable binding member 180 in a released state is shown on the upper side, and the movable binding member 180 in a fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The movable binding member 180 is in a fixed state in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 extended leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In addition, in this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92)
and the harness HN2 connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are each guided to the movable binding member 180 without a relay board, and each is tied to the movable binding member 180.

On the other hand, each illumination section 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300 or the frame button 22 (Fig.
The harnesses to be connected to (see) are once connected (collected) to a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the elongated cover member 173, and a bundle of extension harnesses HN are connected to the relay board from the relay board.
3 heads toward the movable binding member 180, and its extension harness HN3 is bound to the movable binding member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The movable binding member 180 is a member formed from a synthetic resin material, and includes a main body portion 181 that is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side, and a screw that is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotably supported, and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotational direction along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from the side opposite to the movable arm 182
is a U-shaped part in a top view disposed on the other side surface in the rotational direction (the side surface facing the main body part 181 in FIG. 93(a)), and is capable of locking the binding arm part 183. A pair of locking parts 184
and a temporary fixing part 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm part 182 at a position (intermediate position) between the pair of binding arms 183 and having an opening.

In addition, in the binding movable member 180, while the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have high flexibility, the other portions are formed to have less flexibility (higher rigidity) than at least the binding arm portion 183.

The main body part 181 has a fixed part 181a whose upper side has a substantially horseshoe-shaped cross section and a through hole in the center for passing a screw, and a fixed part 181a that protrudes from the left and right lower corners of the fixed part 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b are provided, and an intermediate stop portion extends downward from the lower edge of the front side end of the fixed portion 181a, and the extending tip thereof curves close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, and a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending to the left along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a.

(See FIG. 96(a)) and a cylindrical fastening part that is disposed on the upper part of the support plate part 181d and is formed from a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened. 181e and
Mainly equipped with

The plate member 14d is provided with a hole group 14d1 at a position where the movable binding member 180 is fixed, which is made up of through holes arranged to match the arrangement of the fixed part 181a and the pair of rotation prevention parts 181b.

When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b fit into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. This makes it possible to prevent the movable binding member 180 from rotating around the screw passing through the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and also to prevent the movable binding member 180 from rotating around the screw that passes through the fixed portion 181a.
The attitude with respect to d can be determined.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between it and the plate member 14d.
In this embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extended ends (lower ends) and the plate member 14d, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping downward, and the center is placed on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the arranged circle, the region (plate member 14d and intermediate stop 18) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is
It is possible to secure a large cross-sectional area of the region sandwiched between 1c and 1c.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181
The outer circumferential surface of e fits into the proximal end portion of the movable arm portion 182, and pivotally supports the movable arm portion 182.

(See Figure 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a proximal end portion that is shaped to smoothly connect to a plane OS1 that is offset from the pivot position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a base end. 182a, and a thin elongated thin plate portion 182b connected to the opposite side of the pivot position of the base end portion 182a.

The base end portion 182a is located at the left and right end portions of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion that is fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e.

Side walls in the rotational direction extend from the rear end (the part where the straight line connected to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end (the part closest to the plane OS1). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape with the center of the radius of curvature disposed on the same side, and the distance between them gradually becomes shorter as they approach the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a (high rigidity) design concept that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a (low rigidity) design concept with the intention of elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since a pair of binding arm portions 183 are configured to have the same shape, one will be described, and a description of the other will be omitted. The binding arm portion 183 has a narrow portion 183a formed near the tip with a width equivalent to the width of the base, and a wide portion 183b formed wider than the narrow portion 183a, which are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. Note that in the fixed state, the binding arm 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking part 184 and the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, by forming the thickened portion on the outer circumferential side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)), a space can be secured on the inner circumferential side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking portion 184 includes a large opening 184a formed on the movable arm 182 side, and a large opening 1 of the large opening 184a.
It mainly includes a small opening 184b that is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 with 84a in between and has a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the narrow width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. , the large width portion 183b is sized so that it cannot pass (locked).

According to this embodiment, when the binding arm 183 is desired to move relative to the locking part 184, it is placed on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 is smaller). ,
When you want to lock the binding arm 183 to the locking part 184, you can easily adjust the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 by placing it on the small opening 184b side. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 includes a through hole in the center thereof through which a binding band can be inserted. Even if the binding arm 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be tied together, a commercially available binding band can be inserted into the through hole of the temporary fixing part 185 and fixed. , the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the movable binding member 180 will be explained. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94(b) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14.
95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95(b) is a partial sectional view of the front frame 14 taken along the line -XCIVb. a) XCV
FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame 14 taken along the line b-XCVb.

Note that FIGS. 94(a) and 94(b) illustrate a state in which the movable arm portion 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95(a) and 95( In b),
A state in which the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically elongated metal portion that constitutes the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range) is illustrated. .

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 has an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (
It is configured to be able to rotate approximately 160 degrees around an axis that points in the vertical direction. This angle is suitable for normal use, considering the situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are installed in game parlors (pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side on the left and right, and if the pachinko machines 8010 are rotated more than 90 degrees, there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). This is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm section 182 cannot rotate beyond the range in which it can rotate relative to the main body section 181 without being elastically deformed (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Therefore, the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 deteriorates and breaks due to elastic deformation can be reduced.

Next, the manner in which the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported will be explained. Harness HN1~HN
3 is supported by the movable binding member 180, so that its arrangement is regulated, so that, for example, it is possible to prevent the wire from being accidentally caught between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and being broken.

96(a) is a schematic back view schematically illustrating the movable binding member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. c) is a schematic back view schematically illustrating the movable binding member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c).

Note that FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b) illustrate one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIGS. 96(c) and 96(d) illustrate the other limit state of the movable binding member 180. is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is disposed at a position moved toward the rotation base end of the front frame 14 from the opening opened toward the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. Ru. That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened toward the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is the same, The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop part 181c near the cylindrical fastening part 181e, which is the pivot position of the movable arm part 182, the upwardly extending wall part 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop part 181c
The shapes of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 18 of the movable binding member 180
It can be made to conform to the shape of 2. As a result, FIGS. 96(b) and 96(d)
), the bending portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, which can prevent extreme bending deformation from occurring.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
3 can be placed on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 in between. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Thereby, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97(a) and 97(b) schematically show the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
FIG. 3 is a schematic top view of No. 3. Note that FIG. 97(a) shows one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIG. 97(b) shows the other limit state of the movable binding member 180.

Further, in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically illustrated. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported at the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines in imaginary lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the movable binding member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates with respect to the inner frame 12 around the rotation center point P57, similarly to the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97(b),
When the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 rotates around the cylindrical fastening part 181e, the inner frame 12
Since this corresponds to the opening and closing of the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (Fig. 9
6(b), see also FIG. 96(d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the movable binding member 180 are attached to the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is opened or closed relative to the inner frame 12.
A vertically elongated metal portion that constitutes the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (in FIG. 96(d),
The movable arm portion 182 is routed along a route that passes near the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182. In other words, by forcibly routing harnesses HN1 to HN3, harnesses HN
It is possible to prevent the curved portions 1 to HN3 from coming closer to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14.

This prevents the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the worker's work when opening and closing the front frame 14, and also prevents the harness HN1 from interfering with the worker's work when the front frame 14 is closed.
It is possible to improve the fit of N1 to HN3 (the fit that is curved only once on the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96(b) and 97(a)).

In this embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). Due to the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c disposed vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of a wire or piano wire may be heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the inverted cup portion 178. , it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which a wire enters between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when a wire is pressed against the lower surface of the inverted cup part 178, melted and penetrated, and the wire is advanced to the gaming area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom part of the inverted cup part 178, it becomes high temperature. Harness H in which the tip of the heated wire is supported by the intermediate stop 181c
It is pressed against N1 to HN3. As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out and electrical continuity is disabled.

Improper conduct can be quickly discovered by controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (display an error screen) when the continuity of harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes disconnected. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits a fraudulent act from obtaining fraudulent profits.

In detail, the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, so if the harness HN1 burns out, the ball cannot be fired even if the operating handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, the period from when a fraudulent act is committed to when the fraudulent act is discovered can be shortened (the fraudulent act can be detected early).

In this case, after entering the wire into the gaming area and tampering with the gaming area (for example, after bending the nail to make it easier to win illegally), the ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. Since it is possible to prevent a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize from being able to shoot a ball, it is possible to prevent a person from receiving fraudulent profits. In other words, it is possible to make it impossible to perform a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation section 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN2 burns out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) can be operated and the return button 43 (see FIG. 89) becomes impossible. Therefore, a person who commits a wrongful act shall
Because there is a risk that the players themselves will not be able to collect the remaining amount of balls on the banknotes and cards inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to their own fraudulent activities, the deterrent force against fraudulent activities should be exercised. be able to.

Furthermore, if the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is used to carry out fraudulent acts without the risk of being unable to collect the banknotes or balls equivalent to the remaining balance of the card, the card unit (ball lending unit) Since the player commits the fraudulent act without leaving his/her seat even though the balance of the game machine (unit) is 0 yen, the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent act.

In the first place, if the connection of harness HN2 is cut off, the card unit (ball lending unit) (
At a game machine store where a disconnection error (CR error) (not shown) is output, the disconnection error (CR error)
By checking the error (R error), it is possible to easily identify the possibility of fraudulent activity.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. Note that in FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
0 and the outline of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated in imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage section 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145. In addition, in this embodiment, the front door side lower plate passage section 1
The lower end of the foul ball passage section 145 occupies about 2/3 of the horizontal width of the ball guide opening 53 on the left side of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145 occupies the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53. The partition plate portion 53a is arranged so as to occupy an area (an area approximately 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53).
partitioned by.

The front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 are passages extending from the put-out ball receptacle section 143 and the foul ball receptacle section 146, respectively, so that the balls can flow down toward the lower tray 50. S-shaped paths SL1, S whose extension directions are directed (switched) at least once to the left and right sides.
L2 is provided respectively.

With the S-shaped path SL1, the flow path length of the front door lower tray passage section 142 can be increased while maintaining the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the flow path remains inside the front door side lower tray passage section 142. The number of possible balls can be increased. As a result, the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86)
The number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower tray 50 can be increased while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the lower tray 50 (and its Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily stored on the upstream side, the stress of replenishing balls is placed on the player (when the lower tray runs out of balls for 50 minutes, players are required to replenish balls from the senryo box, etc.) ) It is possible to configure a pachinko machine 8010 that can suppress.

The front door side lower plate passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 each have bending areas NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as areas whose extension directions are bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and these bend areas are common. Equipped with characteristics. That is, the front door side lower tray passage section 142 has a first bending area NEa1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending area provided upstream of the first bending area NEa1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion reversed. A region NEa2 is provided.

Further, the foul ball passage section 145 includes a first bending area NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending area NEb1 provided upstream of the first bending area NEb1 with the left and right of the characteristic portion reversed.
b2. In addition, in the description of the characteristic parts, the characteristics of the first bending area NEa1 will be explained, and the description of the other bending areas NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, the first bending region NEa1 includes a side wall Na, which is disposed on the opposite side of the left and right side walls of the front door lower plate passage section 142 in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. , a ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner that intersects the extending direction of the side wall Na, and a ceiling wall Nb extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the side wall Na toward the extension end. It mainly comprises a nearby wall Nc, and each wall Na,
Nb and Nc extend from the bottom plate on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed so that the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb is curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface for the sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 opposite to the surface Nc1 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) regulates the direction of movement of the illegally inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as wire or piano wire). The details will be explained later. Note that the gap Nin between the proximal wall Nc and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is equal to the wire H.
It is set larger than the width dimension (diameter) of M.

As shown in FIG. 99, due to the shape of the first bending area NEa1, the incorrectly inserted wire HM
can be prevented from penetrating deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, the ball guide opening 53 is used as the entry route for the wire HM that is incorrectly inserted into the front door side lower tray passage section 14.
2. In this case, the person who commits the fraudulent act has to use the wire H.
M is moved forward while being pressed against the side wall of the front door side lower tray passage section 142.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 by the person committing the fraud, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1. Even if the wire HM moves to the right due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door lower tray passage section 142, the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It turns out. That is, a pair of bending regions NEa1,
By arranging NEa2 in a horizontally inverted manner, the wire HM can completely enter the gap Nin.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling route of the wire HM when it enters the gap Nin. Note that the position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is illustrated by a black circle, and the direction of movement of the wire HM at that time is illustrated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM gets caught (caught) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from moving further, prevent the wire HM from being held, and quickly discover fraudulent activity. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and advances further, if the wire HM overhangs from the gap Nin, it will overhang with the tip facing downward, so the wire HM cannot be moved any further.
Even if the wire HM advances, the tip of the wire HM will advance downward. Therefore, the wire HM
The dispensing device 133, which is disposed upstream of the dispensing ball receiving section 143, and the foul ball receiving section 146.
It is possible to prevent the game area from reaching the gaming area located upstream of the game area.

As a result, it is possible to make the wire HM reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an illegal payout ball, or to cause the wire HM to reach the gaming area and cause the electric accessory 64 to malfunction.
By forcibly opening the movable device such as 0a (see Figure 2) and making it easier to win illegally, it is possible to prevent those who commit fraudulent acts from obtaining illegal profits by obtaining illegally paid out balls. .

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 98. The foul ball passage section 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the downstream portion from the confluence region CE where it merges with the ball extraction passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the ball (in this embodiment, more than twice the diameter). As a result, when the ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 147 is placed in the merging area CE, the ball flowing down the foul ball passage 145 enters the merging passage CE (the balls enter the merging area CE at the same time). Even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility of the balls being caught between the upper and lower walls and interlocking with each other can be extremely reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from being obstructed in the downstream portion from the confluence region CE.

The foul ball passage section 145 includes a passage section 145a that is formed between the first bending area NEb1 and the second bending area NEb2 and vertically connecting the bending areas NEb1 and NEb2. The passage portion 145a is set so that the left and right width is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage forming unit 1
The rear side bottom plate portion of 40 is formed to protrude toward the front side as it goes downward.

In the area upstream of the passage part 145a, the back side bottom plate part of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end of the passage part 145a, and in the area downstream of the passage part 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of is flush with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, in the foul ball passage section 145, the area on the upstream side of the passage section 145a is closer to the area on the upstream side of the passage section 145a.
The longitudinal width is set larger than that of the region on the downstream side of 5a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage section 145 is set so that its front-rear width is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball downstream of the passage section 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul ball passage section 145 is set to have a longitudinal width slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball upstream of the passage section 145a. Therefore, the foul ball passage section 145
When balls accumulate in the upstream of the passage section 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged with their positions shifted back and forth, so the number of balls that can stay can be increased, and the center of the balls can be adjusted in the front and rear direction. Since they are prevented from lining up (they will be slightly shifted horizontally and vertically), it is possible to prevent two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage portion 145a can be restricted to one ball at a time. As a result, even if two or more foul balls enter the foul ball passage section 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the confluence area CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of the upper and lower walls being caught and interlocking.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the bottom plate on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, and has a left end connected to the left side wall, and a downward flow surface of the ball faces rightward. An inclined plate part 146a that slopes downward as much as possible, and a foul ball receiving part 1 vertically below the inclined plate part 146a.
46 and the passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate part 146a.
It mainly includes a curved guide plate part 146c that extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate part of 40 toward the back side, and is curved in such a manner that the extending direction thereof is directed upward toward the back side.

While the ball is guided toward the foul ball passage section 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate section 146c, the foul ball receiving section 1
46 toward the front side can be moved to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball rolling down on the upper surface of the inclined plate part 146a can be caused to flow to the right, and the blocking part 146b can prevent the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball receiving part 146. I can do it.

Thereby, it is possible to lengthen the period until the ball that passes through the foul ball socket 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed by the time the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage section in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of the ball 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball), it is possible to make the ball flow smoothly.

The foul ball passage section 145 has a range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage section 145a
), since the passage width is set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball), it is possible to prevent illegal tools with a larger external shape from passing through the foul ball passage section 145.

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be explained. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 that constitute the illumination section 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be elongated from side to side, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500, which constitutes an illumination section 8031 and an illumination section 8032. In this support structure, a tapered support groove 417 is provided at the lower end of the right side end of the upper panel unit 400, and is recessed from the back side to the front side, similar to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (see FIG. 118) are formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 fit into the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 50
0 are concatenated.

Thereby, it is not necessary to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500, and by fastening and fixing them to the main body frame 14a, they can be connected and fixed to each other. Note that, from the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Note that details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500, which are divided into left and right parts, are connected to the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. Due to the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, the heavy plate units 500R, 5
It is possible to prevent 00L from separating left and right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. 102 and 103, on the front side of the main body frame 14a, the main body frame 14a
The upper side plate member 14e, which is sandwiched between the upper panel unit 400 and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89), and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are shown disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101).
1 and FIG. 122).

The fastening part 14e1 has a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back side, and by fastening the screw passed through the through hole to the second fastening part 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, the upper frame This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In addition, in FIG. 104, the main body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by screws inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the main body frame 14a, is shown disassembled from the main body frame 14a, and the upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e While illustration of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 is omitted, the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

Note that, as an actual assembly procedure, the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Further, the right side wall portion of the right panel unit 500 forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate section 510.
108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Note that FIG. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are overlapped in the left-right direction, and these heavy plate units 50
It mainly includes a vertically elongated plate-shaped support plate portion 510 to which 0L and 500R are fastened and fixed and also fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate unit 500 is inserted into the support plate part 510 from the back side to the front side.
L, 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate part 510, and in this state, the support plate part 510 is attached to the main body frame 1.
It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted into the main body frame 14a from the back side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed into an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-shaped extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right side edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side, and also has an L-shaped cross section. (Fig. 86
), the inner wall (left side wall) of the extension portion 511a abuts the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, a fixing plate 511, a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511, and A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 are formed in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, and a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 are formed in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512. It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 bored in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b having a shape that overlaps with the substrate member 512 in a front view, and a portion on the side of the substrate member 512 protrudes toward the front side in a table-like shape. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the base portion 511b has the heavy plate units 500L and 500R.
Since the heavy plate units 500L and 50 can be brought into contact with each other in the width direction (see FIG. 115(b)),
It is possible to suppress the tilting of the 0R in the left-right direction. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the posture of the heavy plate units 500L, 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In this embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extension portion 51 is lower than the base portion 511b.
1a is shifted to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extension portion 511
While the outer cover member 560 contacts the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction on the front side of a, the fixing plate 5
11, the rear side end of the inner cover member 520 is formed as a surface substantially flush with the side surface of the base portion 511b, so that the rear side end of the inner cover member 520 is aligned with the rear side end of the support plate portion 510. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the inner surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 contacts the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510.

The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a row that curves in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540, with a predetermined interval (in this embodiment, an interval of 11 [mm]) between adjacent LEDs. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape of the light guide member 540 projected from the front, and emit light from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other. irradiate (see Figure 107).

Since the width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (the width of the light emitting portion from side to side) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak through the light guide member. The light enters the light guide member 540 and exits from either surface of the light guide member 540, and the entry and exit of the light and its path will be described later.

The cover-side through hole 513 is a hole that positions the back surface fastening section 527 disposed on the inner cover member 520 and through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening section 527 is inserted from the back surface side. By fastening the screws to the back surface fastening portion 527, the inner cover member 520 is connected to the support plate portion 51.
Fixed to 0.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole that positions the back surface fastening section 556 disposed on the outer lens member 550 and through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening section 556 is inserted from the back surface side. By fastening the screw to the back surface fastening portion 556, the outer lens member 550 is attached to the support plate portion 51.
Fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole into which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin support hole 515 has a horizontal width set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, and a vertical width approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed.

That is, in the fastening preparation state where the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are in contact with the support plate part 510 from the front side, if the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly misaligned vertically with respect to the support plate part 510 (the protrusion 566 Even if the protrusion 566 is vertically misaligned by about the diameter of , the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. As a result, the protrusion 566
is inserted into the pin support hole 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L,
By moving 500R up and down by the amount of positional deviation, positional deviation can be eliminated and fastening and fixation can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L has a window portion 14c (FIG. 86).
The inner cover member 520 is made of a resin material that does not transmit light and constitutes the right edge of the
and an inner lens member 530 which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed from a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R has a light guide member 540 disposed opposite to the left heavy plate unit 500L.
, an outer lens member 550 that is in surface contact with the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction, the front end portions of which are arranged opposite to each other in the front-rear direction, and is made of a light-transmissive white resin material; The light guide member 54 is disposed on the right side of the light guide member 550 and is made of a resin material that does not transmit light.
0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be explained. 110 and 111 show the heavy plate unit 50
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L and 500R. Note that FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side, showing the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. is shown exploded.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening part 523 which is disposed at the lower end of the main body plate part 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate part 521, and an inner lens member 5.
A plurality of short fastening parts 525, which are cylindrical parts that are inserted into the inner lens member 530 and into which screws are screwed to fix the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520, are formed longer than the short fastening parts 525, and the inner The outer cover member 560 is a cylindrical portion inserted into the lens member 530 and the inner cover member 520
A plurality of long fastening parts 526 into which screws are screwed to fix the supporting plate part 510 are inserted, and a plurality of back fastening parts which protrude from the right side of the main body plate part 521 and into which screws to fix the support plate part 510 from the back side are screwed. 527
The main preparation is as follows.

The main body plate portion 521 has a front side end portion 521a having a wave shape, and a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b at a short width portion of the wave shape (a portion closer to the back side). Equipped with.

The back side base portion 521b is attached to the base portion 511 of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that comes into contact with (matches in shape) the left side surface.

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion that is arranged in a posture that tilts to the left toward the back side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In this embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals vertically, but are arranged so that the intervals gradually become wider from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). As a result, the aperture widths of the plurality of apertures 524 are made different, and the production effect of light can be created using the apertures 524.
It can be different for each.

The upper fastening part 522 is a cylindrical part into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is inserted, and is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface with a pair of fastening parts 522a arranged in parallel in the front-back direction. A fitting groove 522b is provided.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a, which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 through screws inserted at two places at the upper end and at one place at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged in parallel at four upper and lower locations, and the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state.
It functions as a window for viewing. Each external portion of the opening 524 is formed into a curved shape that extends to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is arranged to be recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary between the back side base 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c.

(See Figure 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design shape of the inner cover member 52 in this embodiment.
The surface (left side surface) of 0 corresponds to the part that protrudes to the left (see FIG. 111). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b is concave and curved to the right in design between the above-mentioned boundary portions.
That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a wave shape that waves from side to side as it progresses in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back side of the portion that projects toward the front side of the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, conversely, a depression is formed on the back surface of the design-shaped projecting portion, which tends to become a dead space. In contrast, in this embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back side of the inner cover member 520 (on the inner lens member 530 side) Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 is formed to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 has a main body plate portion 5 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape.
The front end 531a of the inner cover member 520 has a wave shape that almost matches the shape of the front end 521a of the inner cover member 520.

The front side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is perforated in the front and rear direction at a switching position of the curve forming the wave shape in the front and rear direction. and a support hole 531 into which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c.

The support hole 531b is formed in the wave-shaped front part of the front end 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening part 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the back side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wave-shaped rear part of the front end 531a, and an inclined rib part 532 is provided on the back side of the support hole 531c to extend to a position where it can come into contact with the light guide member 540. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531c, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531c from being deformed or displaced.

Note that the main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d that is bored in the left-right direction and has a size that allows the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted therethrough, at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is connected to a pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate parts 532 that vertically connect between the pair of upper and lower plate parts 532a.
It mainly comprises b.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended so as to fill the gap between them and the light guide member 540. That is,
Like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes to the left as it goes toward the back side, so the left and right width becomes longer as it goes toward the back side (when viewed from above, the front end is the tip). Triangular shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes a projecting portion 533 extending leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524 . The projecting portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the projecting side, which is protruded in a wavy manner and has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of thermoplastic resin, and has a halftone dot pattern on both left and right sides in which concave portions are arranged in a lattice pattern to redirect the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 512a disposed on the back side in the left and right directions. This is a so-called light guide plate. That is, at least a portion of the light irradiated from the LED 512a to the back side end of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is irradiated onto the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. Ru. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width in the thickness direction is from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to the end face on the front side. It is formed in a shape that gradually tapers toward the end surface.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a
) is a processed part that converts the light from the surface into uniform surface emitting light. The concave portion is a notch-like concave portion recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a, thereby guiding the light guide member 5.
The light is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of 40.

In this embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is made of a thermoplastic template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of approximately 1 mm are distributed in a grid pattern at approximately 3 mm intervals. It is formed by pressing it against resin (hot pressing). Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially perpendicular direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but it is preferably transparent, and includes acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), polycarbonate resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, amorphous polyester resin, and amorphous olefin resin. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
(acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound). Among these, the light guide member 540 has high average brightness and less deterioration in brightness distribution by using acrylic resin.
can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the light guide member 540 has a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness between 3 mm and 8 mm, light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after heat bending can be improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 has a front end shaped like a wave whose front end is slightly shifted toward the back side than the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530, and the light guide member 540 has a wave shape that is slightly shifted toward the back side from the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530. It is also formed from a wavy wave shape.

In the present invention, the waveforms on the left and right sides are not strict. Regarding the degree of waveform,
There are no particular restrictions, but the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion is 200 mm or more and 700 mm.
It is preferable that it is below. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design that has less distortion after heat bending, maintains good practical mechanical properties, and can provide three-dimensional degrees of freedom. .

The details of the wavy shape waving from side to side will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the inner cover member 520
In an embodiment, the holder is located to the left at a position corresponding to the connecting plate part 521c, and is located to the right at a position between the positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate parts 521c (located away from the inner cover member 520). It is said to have a wave shape.

The wave shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material in which the concave portion is formed, as described above. The heat bending method of the present invention involves heating a thermoplastic resin as a base material to a heating temperature of +10 to 40°C, and forming a curved concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (
It is made by pressing the base material into a mold with a male mold). More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin has an acrylic resin as its main component, the heating temperature can be 110°C or higher and 150°C or lower. Specifically, the temperature is preferably 130°C or higher and 150°C or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is below the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By keeping the temperature of the base material during heating below the load deflection temperature + 40°C and below the melting point, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light source light is fluctuations in the reflection angle can be suppressed. This can prevent a decrease in brightness and uneven brightness distribution on the light guide plate. Moreover, by setting such heating temperature conditions, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 includes a main body plate portion 541 having a curved plate shape and a main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate.
It mainly includes a fastening part 542 extending in the vertical direction from the top and bottom ends of the outer cover member 560 and into which a screw fastened to the outer cover member 560 is inserted.

The light guide member 540 has a fastening part 542 and a recessed part 541a for retreating from the long fastening part 526.
At any other position, there is no part that penetrates in the left and right direction. That is, since the light guiding member 540 is composed of a single plate without holes at least on the inside of the projection surface on which the opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, the effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guiding member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is fitted and supported within the body plate portion 551. Inner fitting part 5
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region that extends to the right in an area surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 and extends beyond the outer cover member. A visible overhang portion 554, a plurality of through holes 555 into which the long fastening portions 526 of the inner cover member 520 are inserted, and a support plate portion that protrudes from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and are inserted into the support plate portion from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear fastening parts 556 into which screws for fixing 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 has its front and rear ends shaped to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540 . That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end 551a extending leftward from the front edge of the main body plate 551 and forming a curved surface, which almost matches the shape of the front end of the light guide member 540. The light guide member 540 has a wavy shape and is arranged slightly shifted toward the front side with respect to the front end portion of the light guide member 540 . In this embodiment, the front end of the light guide member 540 and the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front and back direction at any position in the up and down direction. Ru.

The front side end portion 551a is located at a position where the curve forming the wave shape changes in the front-rear direction.
A plurality of protruding portions 551b are provided that protrude toward the front side and are fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

On the surface of the front end 551a opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540, there is a
Numerous bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a)) that bulge in a semicircular shape when viewed from the side are formed vertically. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front end surface can be in a vertically continuous band-like light emission mode.

The insertion hole 553 is disposed in a deep recessed part of the projecting part 554 that is recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate part 551). As a result, the outer lens member 550 can be firmly fastened to the outer cover member 560, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, a back surface fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550 and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate part 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the screw arrangement). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be expanded.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 5
40 and the main body plate portion 551 are in surface contact (see FIG. 114(b)).

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from shifting in the direction in which it is disposed opposite to the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LED 512a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate part 510,
It is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being misaligned, and the light can be made to enter the light guide member 540 from the LED 512a with high precision.

The outer cover member 560 includes a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end of the main body plate portion 561. The fastening portion 522a has an elongated hole portion formed in an oval shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a plurality of holes through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561,
The lower fastened part is formed in the shape of an elongated hole with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening part 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and has a screw receiving part 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side. portion 563 and the front end of the main body plate portion 561, the long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520
26, and is formed in the shape of an elongated hole with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening part 526, and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 into which screws are inserted, an opening portion 565 formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the protruding portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a protruding portion from the main body plate portion 561 toward the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of protrusions 566.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is connected to the covering cover 3.
70 (see FIG. 92) is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions forming the support groove 376 are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, the right panel unit 500 makes surface contact with the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction.

(See FIG. 86), the cover 370 makes it possible to stably support the right panel unit 500 even if it is in a shape that protrudes toward the front. The panel unit 400 can be supported. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape into which the protrusion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (
(formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhang 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the projecting portion 554 can be narrowed, and therefore, unauthorized acts of peeling off the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

With reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, left heavy plate unit 500L and right heavy plate unit 500
The method of assembling R will be explained. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 113(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a).

Note that FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b) illustrate a state in which the protruding portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIG. 113(a) and FIG. Part 55
1b is shown inserted into the support hole 531b.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled with the main body plate 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end of the front end 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R in contact with each other in the left-right direction (Fig. 11
2(b)), this can be done by bringing the left heavy plate unit 500L close to the right heavy plate unit 500R from the front side and inserting the protrusions 551b and 551c into the support hole 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the protrusions 551b, 551
By adopting a configuration in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the left heavy plate unit 500L into the support hole 531b, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 is improved. be able to.

For example, in this embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front end of the right panel unit (
The number of screws that are arranged on the front side of the light guide member 540 and fasten and fix the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R can be reduced, and thereby the screws block light. Since the area can be reduced, the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 can be easily seen as a strip extending in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, for example, in this embodiment, the number of screws (fastening locations) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, which may lead to incorrect guidance when fastening. When a load is applied to the light member 540, the light guide member 540
can reduce the range where there is a risk of damage. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

Note that when approaching the left heavy plate unit 500L from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and inserting the convex portions 551b and 551c into the support hole 531b, the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and , and the light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R,
The surfaces are parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship that allows them to come into contact with each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the same as that of the left heavy plate unit 500L.
Since the right panel unit 500R functions as a guide when moving in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the right panel unit 500 can be assembled easily.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, the right panel unit 500 has the left heavy plate unit 5 on the support plate portion 510.
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are respectively assembled by fastening and fixing, and there are at least two possible assembly procedures.

The first procedure is to fasten and fix the left heavy plate unit 500L and right heavy plate unit 500R to each other, and then fasten and fix them to the support plate part 510. is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate part 510, and then the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the protruding parts 551b and 551c are inserted into the support hole 531b.
This is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L to the right heavy plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. These two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, it is possible to assemble and disassemble the right panel unit 50 in two ways, so workers performing maintenance etc.
It is possible to select whether to disassemble or assemble the 0, thereby reducing work time.

In addition, regardless of which procedure is used for disassembling, in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R must be
need to slide horizontally into each other. Convex portions 551b, 551c and support hole 531b
This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the two. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid relative to each other in the plane direction, it is necessary to disassemble at least one of them from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, the configuration in which the protruding portions 551b, 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted can be achieved by prying (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and then This is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that may occur through the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily committed. As in this embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate part 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate part 510, and unless the screws are removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the left By configuring the heavy board unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R to be difficult to disassemble, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from outside the pachinko machine 8010. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity that involves passing through the inside of the right panel unit 500 and entering the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guiding member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect on presentation will be described. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . Note that in FIGS. 114(a) to 114(c),
Illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is directed to the left and right sides by the action of the light guide member 540. be redirected. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that waves in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), light is focused on the side forming the concave shape, and diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guiding member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the light member 540 toward the opening 524 can be focused and produced. Thereby, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, from the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side. It can diffuse the light emitted to the area and use it for production.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the upper and lower positions are the same, there is a difference in the manner of light production (whether the light is focused or diffused) on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It is possible to improve the presentation effect.

Note that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 into different regions, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 into different regions, the appearance of light on both the left and right sides can be made different. .

The light guiding member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes depending on the size of the opening 524. In other words, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 also increases as the openings 524 move upward from the top. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is made shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2>R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light differs for each opening 524, so that the LEDs 512a can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light emitted can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the amount of visible light can be made larger in the upper opening 524 than in the lower opening 524.

Furthermore, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the bottom opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line emanating from it is shaped slightly upward. Therefore, the amount of light that is visible through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be increased, making it possible to add sharpness to the light production, and directing the light emitted through the openings 524 at the bottom to the player's line of sight. It can be emitted upwards.

The vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as lengths connecting the midpoint of the upper side of the opening 524 and the midpoint of the lower side in a side view, as shown in FIG. 114(c). The width of the opening 524 that is placed opposite to the portion with the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, and the width of the opening 524 that is placed opposite to the portion with the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the width of the opening 524 that is placed opposite to the portion with the radius of curvature R3 is The width of the openings 524 disposed opposite to each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 disposed opposite to the portion of the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, the lower openings 524 among the openings 524 are formed in such a manner that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the radii of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship of the radii of curvature R1 to R3 is related to the magnitude relationship of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524. As a result, the degree of light condensation is weak (for example, the radius of curvature R
In the part 1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is made large so that enough light can enter the opening 524, while in the part where the degree of light convergence is strong (for example, the part with the radius of curvature R3), The vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to prevent too much light from entering the opening 524. Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform.

Note that the center point of each radius of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. It is placed approximately in the middle of the

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the boundary area KE of the opening 524 . Here, the region KE is defined as a band-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the area K
The upper end of the region E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to it above, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent to the lower side. Therefore, in the area KE, the LED 512
The light irradiated in the front and back direction from a is shown in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 114(c)
(see), the vehicle advances while being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is transmitted to the inner cover member 520.
Therefore, even if the light condensing effect is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small.

On the other hand, by making the area KE convex to the left instead of a flat surface, the light guide member 54
Since the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed from a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

Furthermore, by forming a convex shape toward the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. can be formed. Thereby, the effect of the light effect visually recognized through the opening 565 can be improved.

That is, depending on whether or not the light is incident on the area KE from the LED 512a, it is possible to suppress the change in the light visible through the opening 524 while causing a change in the light visible through the opening 565. .

For example, the LED 512a that makes light enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5
12a is also turned on, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without any gaps. At this time, since the right side of the light guide member 540 has a concave shape in the upper and lower portions of the region KE, the light emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the region KE intersects on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being visually recognized darkly in the area KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and the edge is visible to the player. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the overhanging portion 554 (FIG. 106)
It is possible to add sharpness to the light emitting mode (see ).

Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary between the openings 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the corresponding part (corresponding to the area KE) of the overhang part 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a band shape. can be done.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) compared to the upper and lower parts thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end even if the amount of light is weak. Effects may be performed using the light that reaches this front end.

That is, although it cannot be seen through the connecting plate portion 521c, the front end portion 5 of the inner lens member 530
By preparing a light effect that can be seen through 31a (see FIG. 105) (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) and by setting a high jackpot expectation level for that effect, the position of the player's eyes can be adjusted. , the right panel unit 500 can be moved further away from the game board 13 than the front end thereof. As a result, the degree of eye fatigue of the player can be reduced, and the player can play games for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is visible to the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, the notification is made using light that is not visible to the player sitting on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and playing the pachinko machine 8010, but is visible to the store clerk who views the right panel unit 500 from the right side. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to issue an error notification that can be easily noticed by the clerk while the player committing the fraudulent act is not noticed, thereby preventing the fraudulent player from attempting to escape. It can be prevented.

Note that by reversing the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be made visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115(b) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 taken along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG.

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers toward the front side from the end surface (about 5 mm thick) on the LED 512a side. Note that the largest end on the front side of the light guide member 540 (LED 512
The part farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the left and right width dimensions are reduced with a similar slope over the entire area in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is more sensitive to the LED 5 than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111).
Since the distance from the end face on the 12a side becomes longer, it becomes more tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in this embodiment, the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the upper and lower parts of the vicinity of the support hole 531b, and is arranged in a recessed position on the back side.
Due to the shadow created by the nearby parts, the part near the support hole 531c is darker and easier to see than the part near the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light guide member 54 in the portion facing the support hole 531b
Since the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is formed to have a larger width dimension (thickness) than the end face of the light guide member 540, it receives light emitted from the LED 512a. It is possible to secure a large area of the light-emitting surface.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any LED 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visible in the vicinity of the support hole 531c is
The amount of light visible in the area near 1b can be increased, and the difference in distance in the front-back direction and the degree of darkness caused by shadows can be reduced. As a result, the front end 531 of the inner lens member 530
With point a as the frontmost side, it is possible to easily make the level of light emitted visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 uniform across the top and bottom (reducing the difference in intensity).

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. Note that in FIG. 116, illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 is made visible. Further, in FIG. 116, an example of the path (progressing direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as a result of the curved light guide member 540, and as it passes through the inner lens member 530, the light is slightly It spreads and progresses to the outside.

Conversely, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as a result of the curved shape of the light guide member 540. Therefore, the LED 51 that generates the light that enters the light guide member 540
While the arrangement of the light guide members 2a is kept constant, the light emission mode (denseness, brightness and darkness) can be made different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light in a light emission manner different from the light emission manner expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Furthermore, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side)
0 is curved as shown in FIG. 115(b), so that it is bent toward the player rather than directly to the side (see the imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115(b).Imaginary FIG. 115(b)) The line arrow is
An example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540 is shown). Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 100 and 101. The upper panel unit 400 includes the upper side plate member 14
Fitting grooves 522b and 562b are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via e, and are disposed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof (see FIGS. 108 and 109).
This unit is fitted into the front frame 14 and supported from below, and is disposed at the upper end of the front frame 14.

117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 sandwiched therebetween.

(See FIG. 100) An upper frame member 410, an illumination unit 401 arranged on the front side of the upper frame member 410 and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and an illumination unit 401 arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410, a speaker assembly 450 sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e;
Mainly equipped with Note that illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted in FIGS. 117 and 118 (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side is decorated with a model name, etc.
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is included. By the included LED emitting light,
Create a performance using light.

The illumination unit 401 includes a main body part 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall part 403 formed in a wavy shape on the rear outer wall of the main body part 402, and a wavy wall part 403 of the wavy wall part 403. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending from the lower edge to the back side in a horizontally long plate shape, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side, which is a cylindrical inner side. A cylindrical part 405 whose shape is formed by penetrating the wavy wall part 403, and a plurality of fastening parts 406 arranged on the back side of the main body part 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , is mainly provided.

The main body part 402 is formed into a box shape with front and rear dish-shaped members overlapping their open sides, and a space is formed inside. In addition, the included LED is arranged on the electronic board,
The electronic board is fixed to the main body part 402.

The wavy wall portion 403 meshes with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, thereby easily determining the installation position in the left and right direction, and attaching the illumination unit 4 to the upper frame member 410.
This is a part that improves the workability of assembling 01.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. Note that the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 is recessed with a horizontally long groove shape that vertically sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 .

The cylindrical part 405 has a function as a through hole for passing the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED included in the main body part 402 is disposed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by screws passing through the upper frame member 410 and fastening to the plurality of fastening parts 406 . Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), it forms a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 with the upper side plate member 14e, making it difficult to access the inside. Formed in such a way that it becomes difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410.
FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of 0. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is
A main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a lower edge plate member formed from a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411 and fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge of the main body member 411 420, a right corner support member 430R that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and a right corner support member 430R that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411, and the left corner support member 430L is fitted into the main body member 411 from the back side to a position protruding from the opening 414 to the front side, and is pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back side. It mainly includes a lens member 440 that is restricted from falling off to the back side and that constitutes the illumination section 8033.

The main body member 411 is a longitudinally elongated member in which openings are formed on both left and right sides through which vibration waves (audio) generated from the speaker assembly 450 pass, and the speaker cover 27 is disposed to cover the openings. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 is formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the cylindrical portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 is larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 405. A support through hole 413 formed through the support hole 413 with a slightly larger inner shape;
It mainly includes an opening 414 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. Thereby, positioning in the left-right direction when fitting the illumination unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 can be easily performed.

The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted into the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
Thereby, the wiring extending through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. This can prevent the other end of the wiring from being attached or detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the cylindrical portion 405 when the cylindrical portion 405 is inserted therethrough.
Thereby, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be viewed from the front. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) has an LED 14 at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front and back direction.
e2 is provided, and the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the LED 14e2 through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has, on the back side, a wavy side portion 416 that is formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the right corner, and a supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the left corner. a fastening portion 419 arranged at symmetrical positions near the upper end and formed into which a screw can be screwed; and a second fastening portion 419 formed at a vertical position into which a screw can be screwed. It mainly includes a fastening part 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end of the lower edge). Thereby, positioning in the left-right direction when fastening and fixing the lower edge plate member 420 to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape that allows the right and left claws to fit into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the supported groove 417
), the load (weight, etc.) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface in which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end of the illumination part 8031, and the fitted state (
(see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 40
It is configured such that a load (weight, etc.) given from 0 can be applied to the illumination section 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is provided in a rib-like manner so as to protrude from the base to a position that does not reach the tip. It has an enlarged rib 419a.

As will be described later, the enlarged rib 419a allows the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e to be connected to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. (see FIG. 125(a)), details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are ribs of the same shape arranged at three locations around the fastening portion 419 at 120° intervals along the direction in which the screw is fastened to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) includes the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) and the concave portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411.
2,482 (see FIG. 122), and is formed at a position that matches the recessed portions 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the main body member 411. Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by a curved long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wave shape when viewed from below at the lower front side edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 toward the front side, the wavy wall portion 422 is extended from the extended end portion upwardly to form the cross section L.
An L-shaped extension portion 423 formed in a letter-shaped shape, and a plurality of L-shaped extension portions 423 that are disposed at positions equidistant from the left-right center position (upper end position of the curved shape) of the main body plate portion 421 and that penetrate in the vertical direction. The opening 424 is mainly comprised of a small-diameter through hole.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in the front and back, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back side, A portion of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the location where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut vertically, and it is possible to improve the strength.

The opening 424 is connected to the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
The vibration waves (sound) output from the back side of 1 into the speaker assembly 450 are passed through.

It is an opening (for releasing water to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings through which vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 pass.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally elongated rectangular through hole 430R2 formed to penetrate in the front and back direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front and back direction. Through hole 430R2
The light irradiated onto the lens member 440 through the opening 414 is made visible to the player.

121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. Note that in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated with an imaginary line for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connecting holes 469, and the left and right ends, The lower end portion is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Note that the speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450R, 45 having substantially symmetrical shapes.
0L, we will explain the speaker assembly 450R, and then explain the speaker assembly 450R.
50L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-shaped speaker) 451, which is an audio device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave so that it can be heard, and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 that is inserted into a through hole 466. It is formed with a front assembly 460 that is fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape that almost matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front,
The rear assembly 48 forms a space between it and the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).
0 and .

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460.
The speaker 451 is attached to the speaker 451 and emits sound effects related to the game.
A through hole is formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102) through which a speaker connection wire 453 (e.g., an electric wire consisting of a copper wire and a sheathing part that covers the copper wire) is connected to and extended at one end. The terminal connector of the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (FIG. 102).
(see FIG. 4).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass through. And this protective cover 4
The speaker 451 with the cover 54 covered is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front portion aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the sound reproduced from the speaker 451 is not enclosed. High quality sound can be played back and output without any loss of performance. Moreover, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front part of the speaker 451 without deteriorating the sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a main body portion 46 formed in the shape of a cup with an elongated left and right side and an open back side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width, and a rear surface of a recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portions 462. An extension plate 463 that extends in a plate shape from the side edge toward the upper and lower width outer sides to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461;
A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the rear side end to the front side; a light passage through hole 465 formed through the front and back direction at the upper right corner of the main body 461; and a speaker 451 on the right side of the main body 461. A circular through-hole 466 is inserted through the main body 461, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extend in a rib shape from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the rear side, and the rear assembly 480 is inserted through the through-hole 466. a plurality of fastening portions 468 into which screws are fastened and fixed, a connecting hole 469 into which screws are inserted to fasten the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), and a distal end main body. It mainly includes a front recessed part 471 that is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the part 461T.

The main body part 461 is divided in the left-right direction, and includes a proximal main body part 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a center side in the left-right direction of the proximal main body part 461B (FIG. 12).
1 left) and the intermediate body portion 461M connected to the left side) and the center side in the left-right direction of the intermediate body portion 461M

It mainly includes a distal end main body portion 461T (left side in FIG. 121). Note that a space is continuously formed between the proximal main body part 461B, the intermediate main body part 461M, and the distal main body part 461T with the rear assembly 480.

The main body part 461 includes a rear side wall part 461H formed as a wall part surrounding almost the entire circumference of the outer shape when viewed from the front. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge without a barb on the inside (an edge without a flange or the like formed on the inside).

The recessed part 462 is a recessed part in which the fastening part 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning between the fastening part 14e1 and the fastening part 14e1. be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 463
The screw inserted into a is inserted into the joint tightening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1 from the back side of the main body frame 14a.
4e through the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102), and the through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480.
and the through hole 463a, and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e and into the through hole 463a, so that the extension plate 463 becomes larger as the screw is tightened. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e in between (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material in between). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passing recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The width of the wiring passage recess 464 is smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453. This applies pressure to the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wire passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the wire passage recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is degraded due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 is passed. Note that in FIGS. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess 464 is shown so as to be visible.

Here, in this embodiment, since the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, The speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wire passage recess 464. Thereby, the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through hole 465 is connected to the LED 14e disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
This is a through-hole through which light emitted from lens member 2 to lens member 440 passes.

The passage-forming rib 467 contacts the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without a gap in the front and back, and forms a bent passage (which bends multiple times) into the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480.
123)). This bent path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side pass. The front side end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body part 461. This prevents a gap from forming on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120).

It is formed in a size that slightly protrudes outward from the outer shape.

The rear assembly 480 includes a main body portion 48 formed in the shape of a cup that is elongated from side to side and has an open front side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width, and a rear surface of a recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482. An extension plate 483 extends in a plate shape from the side edge toward the upper and lower width outwards to the upper and lower side edges of the main body part 481, and the main body part 481
from the cup-shaped bottom plate (rear side plate) of the main body 481 to the wiring pressing protrusion 484 protruding toward the front side of the main body 481; A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape toward the front side and the fastening portion 4 of the front assembly 460
68 and a plurality of through holes 488 formed as through holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the front and back direction of the front assembly 460, and a plurality of through holes 488 that are formed as through holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the front and back direction of the front assembly 460, and from the front side to the back side at positions that correspond to the front side recessed part 471 of the front side assembly 460 in the front and back direction. It mainly includes a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed toward.

The main body part 481 extends in a plate shape toward the front side in such a manner as to surround the outer periphery of the main body part 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body part 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. The front side wall portion 48 is formed into a shape that fits inside the inner surface of the rear side wall portion 461H of
Equipped with 1H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion that is fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H around the entire outer periphery, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is deteriorated due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H includes a pair of auxiliary protrusions that protrude toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing protrusion 484 at positions sandwiching the wiring pressing protrusion 484 on the left and right with an interval that allows the speaker connection wire 453 to pass through. It has 481 Ha.

The auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are a pair of convex portions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily secured to the wire passing recess 464 from shifting when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are tapered to widen left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124(c)), the speaker connection line 45
3 comes off from the wiring passage recess 464 and begins to shift from side to side, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha.

Thereby, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 during the assembly process, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 and the wire pressing protrusion 484. It can be easily accommodated in any opening.

The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 483
The screw inserted into a is inserted into the joint tightening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1 from the back side of the main body frame 14a.
4e is inserted into the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102), and the through hole 483a and the front assembly 46
It passes through the through hole 463a of No. 0 and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted into the through hole 483a from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, so that the screw is extended as the screw is tightened. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is provided in a convex manner along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481, and is formed with a width that is fitted into the wiring passage recess 464, and has a width that is larger than the depth of the wiring passage recess 464. The protruding length is slightly shorter than the outer circumferential diameter of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453.

That is, the speaker connection wire 4 is inserted into the opening surrounded by the wire pressing convex portion 484 and the wire passing recess 464.
53, the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and a gap is created between the speaker connection wire 453 and the opening surrounded by the wire pressing convex portion 484 and the wire passing recess 464. This can be prevented. As a result, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is deteriorated due to sound leakage from the opening for passing through.

The light passage through hole 485 is connected to the LED 14e disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
This is a through-hole through which light emitted from lens member 2 to lens member 440 passes. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that is large enough to surround one LED. Note that the light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape whose cross section becomes larger toward the front side. ), the light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage-forming rib 487 is formed at the same position as the passage-forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, and abuts each other without any gaps in the front and rear. This is a rib that forms a curved passage (see FIG. 123) that bends around. This bent path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H, and is also fixed to the front side wall 481H.
It is formed at the front and rear ends and surface position of. That is, the back end of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the main body 48.
Connect with the back side plate of 1. This prevents a gap from forming on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the front end of the passage-forming rib 487 comes into contact with the passage-forming rib 467, and is designed to have dimensions that generate a compressive force in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage forming rib 487 is loaded with a compressive force from the passage forming rib 467 toward the back side, and the compressive force causes the passage forming rib 4 to be compressed.
67 and 487 close the gap while elastically deforming in the front-back direction (Figure 124(b)
reference).

At this time, if the passage-forming rib 487 has low rigidity in the left-right direction and may bend left and right, the compressive force may not work properly and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H, the rigidity in the left and right direction is reduced to the strength of the front side wall 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H). The strength can be reinforced by the strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H. Therefore, the rigidity of the passage-forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage-forming rib 487 can be prevented from flexing in the left-right direction, so that the gap between it and the passage-forming rib 467 can be effectively closed. I can do it.

The rear recessed portion 491 has a shape that is reversed from front to back than the front recessed portion 471, and together with the front recessed portion 471 forms an opening. The opening is formed in a size that surrounds (slightly protrudes from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening 424 is It is placed in a position surrounding the outline.

123(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123(b) is a rear view of the rear assembly 48.
FIG. In FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), for ease of understanding,
The speaker connection line 453 is shown as an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are arranged opposite to each other, are shown unfolded with their opposing surfaces facing toward the front in the drawing. That is, by folding FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the left-right center of the paper, the abutting positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e can be brought into contact with each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e in the front-back direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the proximal body portion 46 of the front assembly 460 is located inside the speaker assembly 450.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic path serving as a passage for vibration waves Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the tip side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by passage-forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the passage-forming ribs 467 are formed inside (on the left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are staggered vertically toward the left side. Rib portions 467a, 467b arranged at multiple locations (in this embodiment, 5 locations).
, 467c, 467d, and 467e.

By forming each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inside (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passing recess 464 through which the wiring passes, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e is
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, and each rib portion 487a of the rear assembly 480,
Wiring can be prevented from being pinched between the wires 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

Each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body portion 461 and the back side wall portion 461H, so each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d
, 467e can strengthen the rigidity of the main body portion 461.

Each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e together with the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 forms a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, if there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally elongated cavity is formed, the speaker 451
The vibration wave generated from the passageway travels linearly, but in this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels avoiding the passage forming rib 467.

That is, as shown in FIG. 123(a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws moves to the left side after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the upper side.

When the rib portion (for example, rib portion 467b) that is arranged on the side of arrow L and is closest in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the direction of movement between the ribs is the upper left direction (direction of arrows L and U).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is generated after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is placed on the lower side, and then the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is placed on the left side (arrow L side) and closest in the left-right direction (for example, , rib portion 467c) are arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (direction of arrows L and D).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4
67e are alternately arranged vertically, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a vertically curved path, and the traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws is ensured to be long compared to the left and right width of the space. can do.

This makes it easy to adjust the traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws until it passes through the opening formed from the pair of recesses 471 and 491, and suppresses the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the same effect as the passage forming rib 467.
It can also be caused by That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted in the upper left direction between the recessed part 462 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed part 471 and the recessed part 463b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be made to advance in the directions of arrows L and U.

Therefore, the recessed portions 462, 463b not only have an effect during assembly, but also have an effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the passage forming rib 487 has a wiring pressing convex portion 4 that presses the wiring.
Rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 4 are formed on the inside (left side) of 84 in the left-right direction and are arranged at multiple locations (5 locations in this embodiment) alternately vertically toward the left side.
87d and 487e.

Each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, so each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d
, 487e can strengthen the rigidity of the main body portion 481.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is
60 rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e in the front-back direction, and are arranged opposite to each other in the front-back direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).

Note that the actions of each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to those of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have the same effect as the passage forming rib 487.
It can also be caused by That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted between the recessed part 482 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed part 491 and the recessed part 483b disposed above it and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be made to advance in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portion 48
2,483b has the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect produced during assembly.

Here, the vertical width of the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R decreases as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is narrowed once at the position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are arranged vertically. , the vertical width is suddenly expanded at a position further away from the speaker 451 , and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491 . Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the speaker 451
Since the proximal main body 461B side where is assembled is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is
In search of an exit, it advances towards the distal end main body portion 461T, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. Tip side main body part 4
The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached 61T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed part 471 and the rear recessed part 491, and the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120), and then passes through the speaker assembly. The sound is emitted to the outside of the solid body 450R (the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the rear surface of the speaker 451 is connected to the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and the recessed portion 47.
1,491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120), the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside, so the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is It is possible to reproduce and output high-quality sound without creating a clutter.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase, so that the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 is in the same phase as the sound output from the recessed portions 471, 491. It becomes possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. In other words, in the bass reflex speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel out the sound output from the front side due to the opposite phase, but can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify deep bass sounds. This results in
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment is able to perform a realistic performance,
It is possible to increase the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is placed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), so that the bass sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is transmitted to the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and the liquid is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (it is discharged downward from the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86)). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide a game performance using the bass sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side to a player who plays a game on the front side of the front frame 14.

The sound tuning of the vibration wave Ws (sound) is performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450,
This can be done by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in this embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
The path of the vibration wave Ws is defined as a path that avoids each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e. Therefore, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
7d, 467e and the respective rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the vertical extension length thereof can be individually set to tune the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice).

In addition, in this embodiment, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 4 of the front side assembly 460
67d, 467e and each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487 of the rear assembly 480
In addition to the above-mentioned purpose, the portions d and 487e are provided at a portion to which a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and serve to reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, each of the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d can reinforce the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by being arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged due to the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are inserted.

Furthermore, in the assembled state, the extension plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e and are pressed (see FIG. 125(a)).
7c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 463, 48
When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the screws are screwed into the fastening portions 419 inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a of No. 3, and the respective rib portions 467c, 4
By bringing 87c, 467d, and 487d into contact with each other, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48 are assembled.
0 deformation can be prevented. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
7d allows the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 to be reinforced.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions on which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is aligned with the upper side plate member 14e. In the state before being fastened and fixed to 14e, the speaker assembly 45
The recessed portions 462 and 482 of 0 will ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, the recessed portion 462
, 482, an upward load is applied from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462, 482 are likely to be damaged, but in this embodiment, the rib portions 467b, 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462, 482, so that the recessed portions 462, 482 are easily damaged. It is possible to reinforce against the load applied to the portions 462, 482, and the durability of the recessed portions 462, 482 can be improved.

The opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, fraudulent acts such as trying to illegally infiltrate wire, piano wire, etc. into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 are more difficult. It can be easily suppressed.

In addition, in such a fraudulent act, a wire, piano wire, etc. is illegally entered into the gaming area and a nail or the like is deformed. In this embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is inserted into the front recessed portion 471 In addition to being formed in a sealed box shape except for the opening formed by the rear concave portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 and The opening gap formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, piano wire, etc. enters the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recessed part 471 and the rear recessed part 491, the speaker assembly is inserted through an opening different from where it entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, piano wire, etc. to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection wires 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged closer to the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speakers 451, so that wires or piano wires can be passed through the through holes. It is possible to increase the distance between the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, which is a place where the speaker assembly 450 is allowed to enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, making it easier to prevent fraudulent profits from occurring.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along the CXXIVb-CXXIVb line of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(c) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R. is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a), and FIG.
FIG. 4 is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the Vd direction. Note that FIG. 124 (a
) and FIG. 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated as an imaginary line for ease of understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124(c), illustration of the speaker connection line 453 is omitted. .

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124(b), the inner surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the rear side. , the outer surface 481Ho of the front side wall 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 124(b)
The upper surface) has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the back side, and the inner surface 461H
It has a shape that fits with the i in the assembled state. Thereby, the work efficiency of inserting the front side wall part 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear side wall part 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. The restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed in such a dimensional relationship that a compressive load is generated between the rib portions that abut each other.

As shown in FIG. 124(c), the intermediate body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter longitudinal dimension than the proximal body portion 461B and the distal body portion 461T. Therefore, the tip side main body portion 46
Compared to 1T, it is possible to reduce (narrow down) the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration waves Ws can pass in the intermediate main body portion 461M. Thereby, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect.

As shown in FIG. 124(d), the internal space of the distal main body part 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front recessed part 471 and the rear recessed part 491 is inside the intermediate main body part 461M. A large amount of space is secured by bulging out in the front-rear direction compared to the space. Thereby, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end main body portion 461T, and can be emitted at a low speed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear deep bass sounds due to the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125(a) shows the front assembly 46 along the CXXVa-CXXVa line in FIG. 124(a).
125(b) is a partial sectional view of the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e, and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e.

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has a through hole 463a,
483a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, so that the front assembly 460
, the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are sandwiched between the main body frame 14a.
That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a on the front surface of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e from shifting in the front-rear direction. , the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly It is formed at a position that coincides with the recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450.

The second fastening part 419b and the fastening part 14e1 are arranged inside the recessed parts 462 and 482.

(passes through without contacting the recessed portions 462, 482 in the fastening direction)
It is configured as a part that fastens and fixes the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without using the rear assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, in the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending toward the back side is disposed inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is connected to the recessed portion 462,
482 (the part extending toward the front side is arranged inside).

Note that in this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, so that the speaker assemblies 450R and 450L on the other side are connected to each other.
Conflict with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 disposed in the speaker 450L is avoided, and the reproduced sound can be reproduced with high quality as transparent sound without being muddy.

In this embodiment, at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in plane contact with each other (see FIG. 125(a)). In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated, and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e is provided to protrude toward the front side at a portion facing the lower end of the rear side assembly 480, The protruding portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is,
The speaker assembly 450 does not have a structure in which the entire surface is in contact with the upper side plate member 14e, but in a contact mode in which the speaker assembly 450 makes a line contact, particularly at the lower end portion.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (made of synthetic resin).
However, it is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member made of ebony, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete, a soft resin material, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the metal member has a high specific gravity. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, etc. By using these metals, it is possible to add depth to the sound.

Further, it is desirable that the material be a member with high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics, etc. are applicable. By using these members, it is possible to improve the sound rise performance.

Regarding the shape, the protrusions may be in the form of a long plate, in the form of a spike, or in a dotted manner with rounded ends. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, but may be connected in a floating manner.

Note that the arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is different from that of the speaker assembly 45.
It is not limited to the back surface of the lower end portion of 0. For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the rear surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.
50 side or front may be used.

For example, when disposing it on the back side of the upper end, the member functioning as an insulator is made into a cylindrical shape, and is disposed between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted therethrough. You can also determine the position by doing this. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator is not required, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the tightness of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the acoustic effect by adjusting the degree of contact (load applied to each other) with the other members.

At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 will not be able to handle the screw inserted into the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123(a)) or the connecting hole 469.
A through-hole having the same shape as that and disposed on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction, or a screw inserted into a through-hole disposed at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through-hole is disposed. Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e.

Further, regarding fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 41
In addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a, the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (FIG. 1
00) from the back side is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125(b)) to be fastened and fixed. As described above, when fastening and fixing the fastening part 14e1 and the fastening part 419, the structure is such that no load is applied to the speaker assembly 450, so by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening part 14e1 and the fastening part 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same relationship as the above-described relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e,
This also applies to the relationship between the main body frame 14a, which is connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and contact relationship can be designed in the same way as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In addition, Fig. 127

In (b), the inner frame 12 is shown with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the supporting parts 12a,
12b will be explained. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, there are a left end front support part 12a and a left end rear support part 12b spaced apart in the front and back for the purpose of supporting the left end part of the game board 13. will be placed.

The left end front support part 12a has an inclined surface 12a1 that is inclined rearward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is disposed opposite to the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the left is formed. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 come into contact with each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, a front end surface that is formed on one surface so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a cup shape with an open center portion. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a state of natural length so as to protrude toward the front side as it goes leftward. That is, the elastic support part 12b1 works with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support part 12a,
A tapered shape is formed that expands in the left-right direction toward the side where the game board 13 is arranged (to the right). Thereby, work efficiency when the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

128(a) and 128(b) show CXXVIIIa-CXXV of FIG. 127(b).
129(a) and 129(b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the board support device 600 and the game board 13. FIG. It is. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128(a) shows the game board 13 whose left end has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12. , FIG. 128(b) and FIG. 129(a) show the game board 13 just before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and FIG. 129(b) shows the game board 13 after completing the assembly to the inner frame 12. Illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, for easy understanding,
Part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted from the illustration.

When a worker assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, temporarily place the game board 13 on the top surface of the tray passage forming member 160, adjust the vertical position of the game board 13 to some extent, and then remove the game board 13.
Slide the left end portion between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a rotated position around the axis pointing in the vertical direction, so the left end front support on the near side Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere, in this embodiment, the inclined surface 12 is provided on the left end front support portion 12a.
a1 is formed, so the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support part 12b interfere
can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the left end of the game board 13 (in detail, the inclined surface 12a
The game board 13 is rotated so as to approach the inner frame 12 around the abutting position between the back side edge of the game board 1 and the front surface of the game board 13. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is placed opposite the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied toward the game board 13 from the elastic support portion 12b1. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is determined by the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
2c. The support bottom part 12c is a plate-shaped part formed in the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction with an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 90).
A guide rib 1 that supports the game board 13 from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface.
A plurality of 2c1 are provided in the left and right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128(a) to FIG. 128(b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 when viewed from above. At the same time, the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1, so by making the game board 13 ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side, the rotation of the game board 13 can proceed smoothly. . Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

Note that the angle of inclination of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to approximately 15°, which is a larger angle than the backward inclination (approximately 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game parlor. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inclination of the sloped surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 when installed, so the pachinko machine 8013 when installed
It is possible to improve the workability when assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without relying on the rear tilt of 013.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slope angle of the slope of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at the same slope angle as the rear slope when the game parlor is installed. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 rides
The inclined surface of 2c1 can be made horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128(b), as shown in FIG. 129(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 arranged vertically and in a released state, which will be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 is rotated. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the released state, the board surface support device 600 is configured such that the front rotation claw member 620 and the front regulation claw member 630 (a portion disposed on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) are attached to the game board 13.
Since it is configured to retreat from the approach path of the game board 13, it is possible to improve work efficiency in assembling the game board 13.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board support device 60
0 changes to a fixed state, which will be described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, the game board 13
When fixed, the states of the upper and lower board support devices 600 change almost simultaneously.

Note that the game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c and its vertical position is regulated. Figure 129(a
) and FIG. 129(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game board 13 does not touch the board surface). The game board 13 is not pushed up by the support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, by changing the state of the panel support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached.

Here, when pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 toward the back side, the game board 13 is rotating with the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum, so the claw member 64 rotates via the game board 13 due to the principle of leverage.
The force required when applying a load to the 0 can be weakened by the long width of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is attached to the left end front support portion 12a.
Since it is supported at two places, upper and lower, by the left end rear support part 12b (see FIG. 126), for example,
When the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed to the inner frame 12 when the right end of the game board 13 is insufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed). Even if the game board 13 falls forward, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the game board 13 is pushed in by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12. It is possible to reduce the degree of tilting back and forth. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 toward the inner frame 12 to close it (the possibility can be reduced).

When the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is connected to the support part 12a.
, 12b, the right end part is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end part is regulated in vertical position by the support bottom part 12c.

In the state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)), the game board 13
It is arranged at the lower end of the back side of the game board 13, is connected to wiring connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13, and is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13. The floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the lower panel support device 600, and to which wiring connected to the control board unit 91 (see FIG. 3) etc. is connected on the back side. They are connected in the rotational direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are arranged in an inclined position so that the connection direction is oriented along the rotational direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotational direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board support device 600 that is disposed near the right corner of the inner frame 12 with a pair of upper and lower sides facing each other. Note that since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 have the same configuration and are disposed facing each other, one of the board support devices 600 will be described, and a description of the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600, FIG. 130(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. 131(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. In addition, Fig. 130

130(a) and 130(b) illustrate a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) show the game board 13 fixed by the board support device 600.
A released state in which the fixation of No. 3 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotation claw member 620 and the rear rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board support device 60
0 is a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, a front rotation claw member 620 that is rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 that is inserted through and fixed to the frame member 610, and a rotation thereof. A pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged on the front side of the front claw member 620 and is rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 that is inserted and fixed to the front claw member 620, and a pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged on the back side of the front claw member 620. A post-rotation claw member 6 is rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 which is inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620.
Mainly equipped with 40 and.

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate part 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a pair of main body plate parts 611 that are part of the main body plate part 611 and are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate part 611a in a straight line, and an arcuate hole 613 bored in the plate part 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. , on the back side of the support hole 612, the plate portion 6 extends along an arc centered on the support hole 612.
11a from below, and the plate portion 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612.
The inner frame 12 is controlled by a rod-shaped regulating rod 615 that is inserted through and fixed to the plate portion 611a, and a screw that extends from the plate portion 611a in the form of a flange to the left and right and is inserted into the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)). It mainly includes a pair of fixing plates 616 that are fastened and fixed to.

The support hole 612 is a through hole into which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
is formed as a cylindrical metal rod member whose diameter is expanded at the end on the proximal end of the insertion, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the distal end of the insertion is pressed, thereby forming the support hole 612.
Fixed. This fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are as follows: the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P
63 is also similar, so the explanation will be omitted. Note that when the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Like the frame member 610, the front rotation claw member 620 includes a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 are formed to penetrate in a straight line through the plate portion 621a arranged to face each other on the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and a pair of supported holes 622 are formed to penetrate in a straight line in the upper corner of the front side of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and into which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a plate portion 621
It mainly includes a pair of support holes 624 formed in a straight line on the back side of a and into which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

Note that when the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the pre-regulation claw member 63 is inserted at the same time.
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of No. 0, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624.
At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.
is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion disposed opposite to each other on the left and right, and has an elongated portion 621a1 that is long in the front and back.
and an extension part 621a2 extending vertically from the front end of the elongated part 621a1 to connect a pair of plate parts 621a formed in a T-shape in side view and the upper edge of the plate part 621a. A connecting plate portion 621b to be fixed, a rear side extension plate 621c extending from the rear side end of the connecting plate portion 621b at a downward slope of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b, and an extending plate 621c. Part 621a
A drooping back plate part 621d extends perpendicularly to the plate part 621a from the back side end of 2 toward the opposite plate part 621a. It mainly includes a front side extension plate 621e that extends at an angle of about 45 degrees toward the front side.

The downward hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the elongated portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the elongated portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the elongated portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the drooping back plate portion 621d are formed at right angles to each other.

The rear side extension plate 621c is arranged so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, in the released state, the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb comes into contact with the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)), while in the process of changing to the fixed state, the torsion spring By retracting above NBb, the torsion spring NBb
begins to come into contact with

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated toward the worker, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the end of the rotation, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the rotational momentum of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600.

The drooping back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when inserting the game board 13 into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction that brings the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the downwardly downward rear plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates a biasing force in a direction that causes the lower end portion of the rotational claw member 640 to move away from the rear side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The pre-regulation claw member 630 includes a main body plate portion 631 that is formed into a letter-shaped shape when viewed from the side by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the main body plate portion 631 that is arranged opposite to each other on the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 are formed to pass through the plate portion 631a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portion 631a is inclined toward the front side from the lower end of the front connecting plate 631b. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 633 that extends in a horizontal direction, and a curved surface 634 that is curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion disposed opposite to the front frame 14, and is a plate portion that is disposed opposite to the front frame 14, and is connected to the plate surface support device 600.
This is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the front frame 14 is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the restriction rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby restricting the free attitude change of the pre-restriction claw member 630.

The post-rotation claw member 640 includes a main body plate portion 641 that is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape in side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the main body plate portion 641 that is arranged opposite to each other on the left and right. A pair of supported holes 642 are formed to penetrate through the plate portion 641a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63, and from the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of plate portions 641a to the back side. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 643 that extends at an angle.

The front connecting plate 641b is a part that comes into contact with the back side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-back position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a part that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and has an inclination angle such that it touches the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129(a)). It is formed.

134(a), FIG. 134(b), FIG. 135(a), and FIG. 135(b) are side views of the board support device 600. Note that in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b), the process in which the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135

In (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed close to the board support device 600 and the arrangement of the game board 13 fixed to the board support device 600 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 134(a), the board support device 600 is in the released state, and in FIG. 135(b),
The fixed state of the board support device 600 is illustrated in each figure. In addition, in the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the back side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third This can prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward relative to the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the fixed position after rotation.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is applied with a biasing force in the direction of approaching the drooping back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is disposed close to the drooping back plate portion 621d. on the other hand,
When the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 come into contact with each other, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b), as the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the pre-rotation claw member 6
20, the front side where the extension part 621a2 is arranged is tilted, while the front side of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is raised up in a manner separating from the drooping back plate part 621d.

To be more specific, the regulating rod 615 is located on the front side of the curved surface 634 and is located on the front side of the second shaft member P.
134 (a) to 13
5(a)), the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises as the pre-rotation claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance part 634b, which is a part connected to the back side of the resistance part 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged opposite to the regulating rod 615,
When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 no longer come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released, and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released. The tip portion is disposed close to the drooping back plate portion 621d (FIGS. 135(a) to 135).

(see (b)).

The angular range in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and moves (from FIG. 134(a) to FIG. 135(a)
), even if a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630, which is a load in the direction of tilting the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the pre-regulation claw member 630 will operate due to the downward load. The change in the posture of the pre-regulation pawl member 630 at this time is a change in posture in the direction opposite to the downward load (change in posture in the rising direction), so the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the pre-regulation pawl member 630 responds to the downward load. Changes in the posture of 630 are regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the rotation front claw member 620 is regulated by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630, so that the pre-rotation claw member 620
rotation can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to suppress the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620. In the present embodiment, the positional relationship is such that when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the inclined extension plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630. , the shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate 621c 621c
Rubbing friction occurs between the player and the game board 13. As a result, the game board 1 is in the state shown in FIG. 134(b).
3 can be prevented from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13,
It is possible to suppress the movement (tilting) of the upper end portion of the game board 13 toward the front side due to the reaction.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the board support device 600, in the case of a structure in which the front rotation claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, Depending on the manner of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630, the board support device 600 may reach the fixed state, or the board support device 600 may not reach the fixed state and may be stabilized at a halfway angle. There may be cases where this occurs.

The board surface support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle, and in that state the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89)
If the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) can be closed, the distance between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 will be shortened, which may hinder the game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunctional When the cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, the store clerk who was working on closing the front frame 14 can be made aware that the board support device 600 is not in a fixed state.

Once the clerk notices this, he or she will push the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 will overlap when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135(a), when the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the pre-regulation pawl Depending on the manner of abutment of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the board support device 600 will reach the fixed state, or the board support device 600 will not reach the fixed state and will be stabilized at a halfway angle (exclusively (The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunctional cover member 171 is extended to a position where it can come into contact with the pre-regulation claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that its posture is not restricted by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the back side of the back side extension plate 621c is no longer in contact with the game board 13, and the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is not regulated by the game board 13. None.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulation front claw member 630 in a state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 becomes the fixed state, the front end of the rotation front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is placed at the position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the store clerk pushes the game board 13 with slightly insufficient force,
This eliminates the situation where the front frame 14 does not close even when the front frame 14 is installed in a stable manner.
When a load is applied to the panel support device 600, the load can change the panel support device 600 to a fixed state.

Therefore, the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact (see FIG.
34(a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 toward the back side. That is, the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to a fixed state. According to this method, since no downward load is applied to the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the state of the board support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board support device 600, which faces the game board 13, are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. In this state, game board 13
When moving (tilting) toward the front side, the torsion spring NBb applied to the front rotation claw member 620 via the post-rotation claw member 640 moves (tilts) while pushing away the drooping back plate portion 621d. The biasing force is applied as resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. This can reduce the possibility that the game board 13 will move (tilt) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, when the lower board surface support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the reaction force causes the game board 13 to
It is possible to suppress movement (tilting) of the vicinity of the upper end toward the front side.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is disposed facing the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates as the game board 13 pushes the downwardly downward rear plate portion 621d, the first shaft member P61 is the center. The non-resistance portion 634b comes into contact with the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the circular arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b),
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 will move (tilt) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the upper end of the game board 13 moves toward the front side (tilts) due to the reaction. can be restrained from doing so.

Furthermore, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is connected to the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(a).
A curved surface is formed in such a manner that the radius around the second shaft member P62 gradually increases from the part that contacts the regulating rod 615 to the part that contacts the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(b).

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the back side by the multifunctional cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG.
When is displaced, the non-resistance portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are momentarily separated. Therefore, the resistance applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is momentarily reduced, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves forcefully close to the downwardly downward rear plate portion 621d due to the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, as shown in FIG. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. However, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the panel support device 600 shown in FIG. After that, the board support device 600 can be placed in a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be placed in the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, in a state where the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not come into contact with the game board 13 and the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is in contact with the multifunctional cover member 171. (For example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a).) Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not placed (for example, when the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed when replacing the board). , it is possible to improve the work efficiency of workers.

In addition, when changing the board support device 600 from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633
is pulled toward the upper front side, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is rotated against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 6
15), the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force.
By continuing the rotation, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

Note that when the board support device 600 is released with the game board 13 fixed, the game board 13 is pushed toward the front side by the displacing post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 134(a), in the released state, the game board 1
3 comes into contact with the lower surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board support device 600. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 will fall to the front side when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

Note that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between a released state and a fixed state one by one. Here, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes, as in this embodiment, if the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and back positions of the game board 13 will be different from top to bottom. , there is a risk that the load applied to the game board 13 will become excessive.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 that is operated when the board support device 600 is released, the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 64,
0 operation does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), compared to the amount by which the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced, the pre-rotation claw member 6 that supports the game board 13 is
20 and the amount by which the pawl member 640 is displaced after rotation are smaller.

Therefore, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to the extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress displacement of the longitudinal position of the game board 13 at the portions supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, since the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620, a similar effect is produced. That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 135(b)) to the released state (see FIG. 13
4(a)), the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be displaced in a direction that widens the angle between the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member 640 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb. It is said that

Therefore, compared to the amount of displacement of the pre-rotation claw member 620, the amount of displacement of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation claw member 640 can be suppressed, so the game board at the locations supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be suppressed. 13 can be suppressed from shifting in the front and rear positions. As a result, game board 1
The load applied to 3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 disposed on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are shown in FIG. 86 CXXXVI-
It is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 8010 along the line CXXXVI. In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape, and the front frame 14 is illustrated in a closed state.

Further, FIG. 136 shows the released state of the board support device 600, FIG. 137 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 138 shows the board support device 600 moved at a predetermined angle (approximately 25 ) The rotated state is shown in FIG. 139, and the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed is shown in FIG. be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 and the opening/closing regulating portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. In addition, for ease of understanding, FIGS. 136 and 1
138 and 139, the opening/closing regulating portion 159, which is viewed in cross section at 37, is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the panel support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), interference between the opening/closing regulating portion 159 and the panel support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operating section back member 155 above the opening/closing regulating section 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13
When the front frame 14 is removed, it is allowed to close the front frame 14, but when the game board 13 is placed, closing the front frame 14 is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening/closing regulating portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, by arranging the game board 13 on the back side compared to the position when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, interference between the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 above the opening/closing regulating part 159 is reduced. is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG.
38), the opening/closing regulating portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the panel support device 600.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the front rotational claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the front rotational claw member 620 is affected by the action of the regulating rod 615. (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and rotational direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (clockwise direction in FIG. 138).
As described above, it is difficult to apply a normal load because the reaction force becomes excessive when the counterclockwise direction is opposite to the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 134(b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, closing of the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is installed, there is a risk that the lower end of the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extension plate 621c will come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of regulating the closing of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is in the state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening/closing regulating portion 159 , and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes with each other.

Further, in this state, when trying to rotate the front rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is caused by the action of the regulating rod 615. direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and rotation direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (FIG. 13).
8 (counterclockwise direction) is never in the opposite direction, and it can be easily pushed in with a normal load, as described above (see FIG. 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG.
Since the front frame 14 can be kept in a fixed state, it is permissible to close the front frame 14.

140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Note that FIGS. 140 and 141 show a state in which the ball firing unit 112a and the cover member that closes the back side of the back pack 92 are disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball firing unit 112a will be explained with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 142(b) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a.
is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a. FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143(a) shows a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143(b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then reversed. . That is, in FIG. 143(b),
Only the back side of the ball receiving member 731 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a includes a base member 710 made of metal or die-casting, and a base member 711 assembled to the base member 710, with the right side of the resin base member 711 as the center. A closed state in which the front surface of the base member 710 is partially covered (see FIG. 142(a)) and an open state in which the front surface of the base member 710 is opened (see FIG. 23(a)).
A ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 rotatably supported by a shaft between the
The main preparation is as follows.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721, and is secured to the base member 710 with an elastically deformable hook or the like, and is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is made of synthetic resin or the like. and a firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a firing rail 730 that guides the ball P8 launched by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and a ball receiving member 731 for regulating the posture. A plurality of fastening portions 716 are provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the front side at an intermediate position of a bulging portion 716a that bulges out in a straight line from the base member 710 toward the front side, and into which screws for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 are screwed. It mainly includes a mounting hole 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719.

The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 at the right corner through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted, and a locking portion 7 that is bored on the opposite side of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction so as to be able to lock the hook portion 723.
13, a protruding portion 714 protruding from the front side adjacent to the right side of the locking portion 713, and a protruding portion 714 disposed opposite to the suction force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see FIG. 142(a)). It mainly includes a defect determination convex portion 715 that is provided in a convex manner.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see FIG. 142(a)), and is located inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state. An opposing plane 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface that is left and right opposite to the opposing plane 714a and is inclined toward the right toward the back side. It mainly includes a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination protrusion 715 does not come into contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741, but when the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened ( When the cover member 721 is floating above the cover member 721, the cover member 721 comes into contact with the cover member 721 and has a convex height that restricts rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely fastened, and by creating a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the store clerk can use the suction force. It can be noticed that the connection of the generation solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before a malfunction occurs in the ball firing unit 112a, it is possible to perform repair (fastening and fixing the attraction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening).

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported by a shaft on the base member 711;
Switching controlled to change the state between a regulation state that restricts the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721 from flowing down, and a permissible state that allows the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) to flow down to the launch rail 730. It mainly includes a device 740.

The cover member 721 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material into a cup shape with an open back side (the front side in the drawing in the orientation shown in FIG. 143(a)), and is a pair of covers that are loosely fitted into the receiving portions 712 of the base member 711. A rod-shaped portion 722, a hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the opposite left and right sides of the rod-shaped portion 722, and a ball P at a position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722.
8 (see FIG. 144) and a ball passage opening 724 that is bored in the front-rear direction and has a size that allows the ball to pass through. A cutting metal member 725 and a shaft rod portion 72 that pivotally supports a ball guide arm member 742 of a switching device 740.
6 and are mainly provided.

The switching device 740 includes an attraction force generating solenoid 741 which is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and a synthetic resin member whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft portion 726.
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not 41 generates magnetic force, and a sheet metal member that is fixed to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the attraction force generating solenoid 741. A metal plate 743 , a guide slope 744 that is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the ball passage opening 724 and slopes downward as the distance from the ball passage opening 724 increases; It is extended by a distance that can accommodate the ball P8, and the extended end is connected to the shaft portion 72.
It mainly includes a regulating protrusion 745 that protrudes toward the ball passage opening 724 side along a plane orthogonal to 6 .

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided, and is a drop plate portion 724 that slopes downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotation radial direction.
a, and a rib portion 724b that is disposed oppositely above the flow plate portion 724a and extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib shape, and whose extending tip surface slopes downward as it goes toward the back side.
A left inner surface 724 that is connected to the left end of the downstream plate portion 724a and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction.
It mainly comprises c. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passing opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passing opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), the ball P8 comes into contact with the sloped surface 714b, and the slope of the sloped surface 714b It flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along the . Therefore, ball P8
flows down in a manner that separates from the cutting metal member 725 in the left and right direction, so that the cutting metal member 7
Even though the ball P8 is disposed in such a manner that it projects inside the ball passage opening 724, it is possible to prevent the ball P8 from colliding with the cutting metal member 725.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends from an intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side so as to be inclined upward. Near the lower end of the rail member, the ball P8 (Fig. 14
Ball receiving members 731 are arranged at intervals shorter than the diameter of the ball bearing members 731 (see 4).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 is parallel to the elongated direction, and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as a long hole along the direction and through which a fastening screw passes.
Like the bulging part 716a, it is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction of the through hole 731a), and has a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging part 716a and a bulging part of the bulging part 716a. A regulation groove 731b formed with a groove depth slightly larger than the protrusion height is provided.

When fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through hole 731a should be fastened and fixed in conjunction with the fastening portion 716, the ball receiving member 731 should be fastened and fixed to the bulging portion 710.
6a can be slid along the straight line in which the ball P8 (Fig. 14
4)) can be adjusted in its standby position (distance from the plunger 702). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the operating handle 51

(see FIG. 86) can be easily adjusted.
Note that since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and includes a rolling plate portion 730a that is formed in a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and extends diagonally upward to the left; It has mounting plate parts 730b and 730c hanging from the front and rear sides of the plate part 730a, and the mounting plate part 73
It is attached to the base member 710 with screws inserted into a plurality of attachment holes 732 (two in this embodiment) formed in 0b and 730c.

In addition, a rail guard 733 made of synthetic resin is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate parts 730b and 730c, and prevents noise and vibration caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and has a ball P8 (FIG. 146(b)).
) is configured to guide the ball P8 upward by contacting the front and rear two locations on the circumferential surface of the ball P8.

FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball firing unit 112a showing the ball sending status by the ball sending device 720 in chronological order. Note that from FIG. 144(a) to FIG.

In (c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144(a), the switching device 740 is in the regulated state (the power supply to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). When this is the case, the regulating protrusion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the open end on the back side of the ball passing opening 724, and comes into contact with the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, thereby preventing the ball from flowing down from the open end on the back side. is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the permissible state (the state in which power is supplied to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protrusion 745 is retracted above the ball, and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is released, so that the ball P8 flows into the upper part of the guide slope 744. In this state, the ball P8 comes into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711, thereby restricting further flow down, and stays on the upper surface of the guide slope 744.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulating state again, so that the ball P8 riding on the guide slope 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. be done. Thereby, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the slope of the guide slope portion 744, and is guided to the firing rail 730.

Note that the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144(a), so even in the state shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball entering the ball passage opening 724 The flow of water is regulated. Therefore, balls can be supplied to the launch rail 730 one ball at a time. Note that the balls P8 entering the ball passing opening 724 are balls supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 86), and are balls stored in the upper tray 17. be.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a falling plate portion 724a. A lower blade part 725b having an upper side that almost runs along the upper surface, and a notch with an acute angle at the tip formed between the lower blade part 725b and the same plate as the proximal plate of the lower blade part 725b. Upper blade part 72 extending from
5c is mainly provided.

The upper blade part 725c is formed such that its tip is inclined more toward the back side than the lower blade part 725b, and its lower side projects upwardly more than the flow plate part 724a. Note that the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c slopes downward toward the base end (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b slopes upward toward the base end (left side). That is, the upper blade part 725c and the lower blade part 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The cut between the upper blade part 725c and the lower blade part 725b is for cutting a thread member such as a tassel thread fixed to the ball. Next, referring to FIGS. 146 and 147, the sphere P
How the thread Y8 is treated when the thread Y8 is fixed to the thread Y8 and enters the thread will be explained.

FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 146(b) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a.
147(a) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 147(b) is a partial top view of the ball firing unit 112a as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 147(a). FIG. 148 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG.
FIG. 12a is a partial front view of the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62. In addition, FIGS. 146 and 14
7, illustration of some constituent members of the ball firing unit 112a is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146(a) and 146(b), the ball P guided to the launch rail 730
8 remains in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146(a)), and from this state, current is applied to the firing solenoid 701, causing the plunger 702 to protrude vigorously. , a firing force is applied to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the firing rail 730 (see FIG. 147(a)).

Now, with one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8, launch the ball P8, and with the ball P8 in the playing area, move the other end of the thread Y8 that was left at hand and pull the thread Y8. It is known that a fraudulent act is known in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning hole by loosening the ball.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut using the momentum of the ball P8. To be more specific, when the ball P8 is placed in the firing standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the falling plate part 724a in a posture that is pulled to the right as it goes toward the back side. (See Figure 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, it passes under the falling plate portion 724a and reaches the launch rail 730.
When the thread Y8 moves as it is pulled by the rolling ball P8, the middle part of the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface of the falling plate part 724a, so that the upper blade of the thread Y8 projects above the falling plate part 724a. It will enter below the portion 725c, and will enter into the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

While the player is holding the front end (other end) of the thread Y8, a load is applied to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 due to the firing of the ball P8, so that the thread Y8 is is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade part 725b and the upper blade part 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning hole.

In addition, if the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that sufficient tensile force will not be applied to the thread Y8 and the thread Y8 will not be cut, but in that case, the ball P8 will not reach the play area and The ball flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged into the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 will not pass through the winning hole, so it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of fraudulent activity in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning hole.

Next, the presentation operation unit 1000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the performance operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the performance operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operating device 800 is visible from the upper frame of the center frame 86, and other differences The configurations of are substantially the same.

A production operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is disposed in the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The production operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and a forward/backward movement unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100.

The advancing/retracting operation unit 900 moves the petal operating device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advancing/retracting operation, that is, the operation of advancing inward of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the third The petal operating device 800 is connected to one end, and the other end is connected to the petal operating device 800. The end of the arm gear 9 is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100.
A drive-side arm member 910 that rotates when the driving force of a drive motor 921 is transmitted through 24, and a drive motor 92 that generates a driving force that drives the drive-side arm member 910.
1, a transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and a transmission means 920 that slides in the left and right direction in conjunction with the rotational movement of the drive side arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930, a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding operation of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal operating device on the left and right opposite side of the drive side arm member 910. 800, and a driven side arm member 950 in the form of a long plate.

Next, the structure of the petal motion device 800 will be explained. FIG. 153 shows the petal motion device 80
154 is a sectional view of the petal operating device 800 taken along the CLIV-CLIV line in FIG. 153. Note that in FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated with imaginary lines.

The petal operating device 800 is configured such that members such as petals 802 are supported on a support base 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the supporting base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petal 802, etc., and although its overall shape is hidden behind other members and is not shown in the figure, it is made of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. The device includes a plate-shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to a position on the right side of the upper end of the central body portion of the support base material 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 extends to the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base material 801. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protruding portion.

An opening 8 is located at a position slightly below and to the left of the central motor 804 in the central main body portion of the support base material 801.
01P is drilled, arranged on the right side of the opening 801P, and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes,
A screw insertion part 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion part 801S, there is a detecting arc plate 88 of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later.
A donut-shaped recessed portion 801D that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass.

(see FIG. 152) is formed.

The central motor 804 of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed.
An oil damper 805 is fixed below from the front side (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening a vertically elongated, generally elliptical area at the center. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally elongated upper part that constitutes an upper end area and a generally U-shaped lower part that constitutes an area below the upper part.

In this embodiment, the supporting base material 801 as a whole has a shape that extends slightly vertically, but since the petal operating device 800 is arranged to be movable vertically as described later,
The operating space can be reduced if the support base material 801 is formed into a vertically elongated shape rather than horizontally elongated.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are connected to a second gear 830G and a third gear 810, respectively, which are arranged concentrically so as to overlap at the position of the opening 801P, as described later.
Since they are interlockingly connected (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, they can be placed at any position on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G without interfering with each other. They are respectively arranged on the right side via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G.

(See Figure 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by concentrating the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800, which is supported in an attitude slightly tilted toward the front, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from sagging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base material 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 from increasing, and The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. Note that in FIGS. 155 and 156, illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin and are molded to imitate the shape of one of the five separate petals that make up a hibiscus flower in its blooming state. It is formed as a member and includes a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back side.

157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, flat plate member 803, and slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, flat plate member 803, and slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front face shape extending in the radial direction in the arranged state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer periphery (Fig. 15
(see 4).

Irregular depressions and depressions including many wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the periphery also has an irregular shape when viewed from the front. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and there are slight differences in unevenness, etc., but they are formed into roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer periphery has a specific color (red) that is darker without forming a particular boundary with the inner area. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802S that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape and has a threaded hole inside, at two locations: near the outer periphery on the rear side of each petal 802 and at the center in the radial direction. There is.

The petal 802 is located closer to the rear side portion 80 than the rear side portion 802a, which is located on the rounded tip side (counterclockwise side in front view, right side of the paper in FIG. 157(a)) from the position where the petal 802 is fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803.
The front side portion 802b, which is disposed on the sharp-tip shape side (clockwise side in front view, left side in FIG. 157(a)) from 2a, is disposed on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The front side part 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the front side of the rear side part 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the rear side part 802a is stacked on the back side of the front side part 802b of the other adjacent petal 802. The petals 802 are arranged so that their tips on the inner circumferential side are concentrated toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side part 802a and the front side part 802b are shifted from each other in the front and back, so that the rear side part 802a and the front side part 802 at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175)
b can be placed in a positional relationship that overlaps the front and back, so that the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathered position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) becomes noticeable. be able to.

In the arranged state, the five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat plate member 803 has the five petals 8
They are long plate-shaped resin members that are separated from each other and are fixed to the 02 respectively.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front face shape extending from the center to the outer circumferential side in a generally rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer circumferential edge portion thereof extends forward.

Also, near the opening S1 (near the inner periphery) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state.
A pair of threaded portions 803S extending rearward in a cylindrical shape and having a threaded hole therein are integrally formed at positions separated in the circumferential direction (the lateral direction of the flat plate member 803).

The threaded portions 803S are formed on both side walls in the circumferential direction (lateral direction) of each flat plate member 803 in a substantially flush position, and furthermore, a pair of threaded portions are formed along the both side walls of the flat plate member 803. A slide rib 803a that is perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward from the rear surface of the flat plate member 803 extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the circumferential surface of the threaded portion 803S. As such, it is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the threaded portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), the rear side of each flat plate member 803 has internal screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the threaded portions 802S of the petals 802, and the petals 802 on the front side.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 has a corresponding screw insertion portion 8 of the petal 802.
02S is abutted from the front and screws are inserted from the rear, thereby fixing each flat plate member 803 to the corresponding petal 802, respectively.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. Note that in the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are appropriately referred to. A slit member 810 is arranged on the rear side of the flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS. 155 and 156.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a plate-like member made of resin and has a front face shape in which five similar shaped parts are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is bored in the center part. As shown in FIG. 159, a generally cylindrical front circumferential wall portion 812 and rear circumferential wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend in both front and rear directions from the periphery of the circular opening 811.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 156. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 has cylindrical holes in the front and rear, at two adjacent locations out of five locations equally spaced in the circumferential direction and at one location in the middle of the three locations excluding those two locations. A screw-in part 813S that extends and has a screw hole inside is integrally formed, and the positioning boss 81
3a is extended. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer radial direction at five locations corresponding to the threaded portions 813S and the positioning bosses 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

The slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815, as shown in FIG. Each of the central slits 814 is formed to extend linearly further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, the center slit 81
4 extends along a direction D12 inclined at an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in this pachinko machine 8010) in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The both-side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight interval between them.

In this way, groups of three slits, the central slit 814 and the two-sided slits 815 on both sides thereof, are formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72° intervals). Note that each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost double-sided slit 815 in the set of three slits, that is, two corners on the small diameter side among the four corners of the three slits, are the double-sided slits. It has a generally rectangular shape and extends slightly in the direction of extension of 815 (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extending portion (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side ends of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. is provided with a circular arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the rigidity of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed is enhanced by the arc plate 816. Therefore, the central slit 814 and both side slits 81
It is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which 5 is formed in the circumferential direction and the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815
The five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged inwardly to accommodate the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815, since each of the five sets extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. , are arranged more densely, and this also allows the slit members 81
0 has been made more compact.

In other words, if five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are circular openings 811
In the case where it is arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 as described above, than when it is arranged and formed so as to extend radially along this radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11. In this case, the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slide member 820 is arranged in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. Slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 157, reference numeral 20 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and the thickness is reduced at both ends of the slide member 820, and the tip is formed into a semicircular shape when viewed from the front. A central portion that is thicker than the production portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 formed in the extending portion, and a front view from the center of the slide member 820. It includes a guide pin 822 that is protruded from the side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to protrude from the center of the slide member 820 toward the back side and pass through it back and forth. .

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged so that the extending direction and the longitudinal direction of the three slits, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersect at right angles. and the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 810,
Threaded portion 803S of flat plate member 803 is inserted from the front side. In the fully fitted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes very slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the threaded portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is moved to the flat plate member 8 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
It is fixed to the rear side of 03. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is inserted almost along the corresponding outer edges of the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810. It is inserted without any gaps.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is held by the guide pin 8
The slide rib 803a restricts the slide movement so that the slide moves in a constant outward direction without rotating around the center 22.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and central motor 804, and FIG.

161(a) and 161(b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. Note that in FIG. 161(a), illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. In addition, Figure 16
0 and 161, reference is made to FIGS. 155 and 156 as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disc having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side of the rotary plate 830, and this peripheral wall
It is formed integrally with the rotary plate 830 so as to extend along the surface direction of the rotary plate 830 in a closed loop shape that is elongated when viewed from the front.

The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance of play. The ridge corner at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed to be rounded.

The guide rail 832 extends from a position in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831.
It extends clockwise in the front view along a direction approximately halfway between the tangent and the normal line of the pivot opening 831, and then extends in an arc shape further clockwise in the front view from the middle direction. It extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while being curved (see FIG. 175(a)).

The circumferential wall of the guide rail 832 at the end on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, at the end on the center side, is formed to be integrally continuous with the circumferential wall at the circumferential edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end thereof protrudes toward the front side from the front end of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and a total of five guide rails 832 are arranged at equal intervals around the pivot opening 831. It extends outward from the periphery in a spiral shape.

As shown in FIG. 161, on the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830, a second gear 830G is integrally formed, extending rearward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and having teeth on its outer periphery. The second gear 830G is arranged to mesh with the first gear 804G and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear end portions of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832, respectively (see FIG. 174(c)).

Since the outer circumferential surface of the rear circumferential wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, it is not linear but linear relative to the inner circumferential surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830. As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted onto the rear circumferential wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly rotatably supported.

As shown in FIG. 161(a), a second gear 830G is further provided on the rear side of the second gear 830G.
A third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically and arranged to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G, and the pivot opening 81
Around the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156), screw insertion holes 810b are provided at positions corresponding to the three screw insertion holes 813S in the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156), and screw insertion holes 810b are provided at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a. A positioning hole 810c is formed in each.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted onto the rear side peripheral wall part 813 of the slit member 810.
The positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) is inserted into the positioning hole 810c to determine the position, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 810b into the threaded part 813S (see FIG.
56)).

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G serves as a retainer to prevent the rotation plate 830 from coming off. is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to come off.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotation device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotation device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is loosely fitted to be rotatable around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape with a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder cut away along the axial direction, and a shaft portion 852 of the shaft portion 852. The shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

The center portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth. Around the lumen part 856 on the front side of the flange 855, there are two front screw holes 857 on the left and right sides with the lumen part 856 in between, and a front screw part 857 having a screw hole inside. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore in the displaced position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that are cylindrical and extend slightly short toward the front are each integrally formed. . The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

The inner circumferential surface of the lumen part 856 has a columnar shape extending along the axial direction of the shaft part 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing locations, extending further rearward from the rear end of the shaft part 852, and extending into the interior. A rear screw portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Furthermore, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, an LED board 861 is mounted on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
is placed. The LED board 861 is a substantially disk-shaped board with a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED board 861 at positions corresponding to the front threaded portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

Insert and position the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861, and insert the screw into the central shaft member 8 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861.
By screwing into the front screw part 857 of 51, the LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

In addition, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and has a size that allows the threaded portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be inserted therein.

On the front side of the LED board 861, as shown in FIG. L.E.
D865 are each fixed in position and emit light toward the front.

Near the outer periphery of the front and rear sides of the LED board 861, horizontal LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at multiple locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is supposed to be done. Note that the lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED board 861 are arranged concentrically and alternately with the forward-facing LEDs 865. A connector connecting portion 867 is arranged and fixed to the rear side of the LED board 861 so as to face rearward.

A center decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED board 861. Center decorative member 868
is made of a resin material that has a specific color (yellow) but is almost transparent, extends from a long plate-shaped base to the back side in a cylindrical shape, and has a screw hole in the center into which a screw can be inserted. A pair of threaded portions 869 are provided.

The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861. L.E.
The insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is inserted into the holding part 858 of the flange 855 with the D board 861 in between.
The center decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855 by abutting the threaded part 869 that has passed through from the front side, and by screwing a screw into the threaded part 869 from the back side of the flange 855. Thereby, the center decorative member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED board 861 to come off.

The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner circumferential surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a flanged cylindrical shape and having an outer circumferential surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side circumferential wall portion 812 of the slit member 810; It mainly includes a main body cylindrical member 883, which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and is rotatably fitted into the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter cylindrical member 882.

The main body cylindrical member 883 has integrally threaded parts 883S extending in a cylindrical shape from front to back and having a screw hole inside at two places out of four places equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical part. A positioning boss 883a is formed and extends from the tip edge of a location where the threaded portion 883S is not formed among the four locations described above.

The main body cylindrical member 8
83 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 has a rib-like projection in the outer radial direction with a projection length similar to that of the screw portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at a circumferential intermediate position of the four corresponding locations, and a rib-shaped projection in the axial direction. A sliding rib 88 extending over the
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 includes a decorative member 884 that is formed with a larger outer shape than the LED board 861 and covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149); A back cover 886 is fastened and fixed near the diameter, and forms a bottomless cup shape with the outer circumferential side rising up toward the front side from the fastened portion, and also contacts the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side and is fastened and fixed. , is arranged.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, thereby giving the side surfaces a mirror finish. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light from the horizontal LEDs 866 disposed on the back side of the LED board 861 near the outer periphery, a light emission effect can be performed.

The decorative member 884 is a member that produces light emission by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 arranged on the LED board 861, and has the shape of a hibiscus flower and transmits light in a specific color (red). a front side plate portion formed from a transparent resin material, and a rear side plate portion formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, the peripheral wall of which forms a disk shape on the back side thereof and which stands up on the back side. An opening 885 is formed in the central portion with a size that allows the center decorative member 868 to be inserted therethrough.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is allowed to rotate relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a fourth gear 880G having a slightly smaller diameter than the third gear 810G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically.
It meshes with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the support base 801 and mesh with each other.

One gear of the intermediate gear 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear that meshes with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is the intermediate gear 8
08 in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and the pivot opening 888
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 880b are formed at positions corresponding to the two screw-in parts 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. There is.

The fourth gear 880G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G fitted onto the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and is positioned over a positioning boss with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) into the positioning hole 880c, and insert a screw (not shown) through the screw insertion hole 880b into the threaded part 883S (see FIG. 16).
(see 3).

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G acts as a retainer to prevent the slit from coming off. The member 810 is held by the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to come off.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending toward the back side in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plate 880d, plates of the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d has a donut-shaped concave portion 80 in the assembled state (see FIG. 154).
1D (see FIG. 152), and is detected by a photocoupler type detection sensor 801C arranged to be able to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. That is, in this embodiment, no matter which attitude the fourth gear 880G starts rotating, the detection arc plate 88
It is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (center angle 72°) (minimum angle 72°).
(2° detection can be performed, and rotation of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

The assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be explained. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 on which the LED board 861 is fixedly arranged and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their respective rear ends protrude slightly rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 that protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is attached to the supporting base material 801.

(see FIG. 152) for positioning, and insert the rear screw part 853, which also projects further rearward from the rear end of the shaft part 852, into the screw insertion part 801S of the support base 801. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting it into the insertion hole and fixing it with a screw.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the inner cavity 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward from the support base 801, and as shown in FIG.
The rear side peripheral wall part 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the outside, and the front side peripheral wall part 8 is fitted onto the large diameter cylindrical member 882.
12 is attached so that it fits externally.

At this time, the outer circumferential surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 has eight places along the circumferential direction, such as threaded portions 883S,
Since the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b locally bulge, the slit member 810 comes into linear contact with the inner circumferential surface of the rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810, not in a planar manner. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted onto the main body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is supported for smooth rotation.

FIG. 164 shows a petal operating device 800, a driving arm member 910, and a driven arm member 95.
165 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. FIG. The petal operating device 800 moves up and down (advances and retreats) by applying a load in the up and down direction from the driving arm member 910. In addition, in the explanation after FIG. 164, FIGS. 150 to 15
2 as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally elongated rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the innermost part of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and is located at the lower left corner in front view. A support column 1110 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, a gear accommodating section 1120 that is recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a gear storage section 1120 that is aligned in the vertical direction at the left and right center position. A rail fixing part 1130 disposed in and a rail fixing part 1130
It mainly includes a support long hole 1140 that is formed as a long hole that slopes downward as it approaches the rail fixing part 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing part 1130 in between.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive side arm member 910,
In the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front end, there is a screw-in part 1111 which is a pair of holes arranged on the left and right and is formed so that a screw can be screwed into it, and a pair of upper and lower holes on the front side on the same plane as the tip edge of the screw-in part 1111. and a positioning boss 1112 extending to.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a dogleg shape when viewed from the rear, and is circularly bored in the front-rear direction at one end and has a support column. 1110, a connecting convex portion 912 protruding from the front side in a stepped cylindrical shape at a position near one end of the elongated main body member; The petal operating device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the elongated main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and at the other end of the elongated main body member. It mainly includes a support section 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 has an internal fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted into the transmission elongated hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that extends radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. Interlockingly, it rotates around the support column 1110.

The gear accommodating part 1120 is a recessed part in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses arranged in a row while slightly intersecting each other, and is arranged on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922. A first accommodating part 1121 and a second accommodating part 11 connected to the first accommodating part 1121
22, and a third accommodating part 112 which is disposed directly opposite to the first accommodating part 1121 with the second accommodating part 1122 in between and accommodates an arm gear 924 that is fitted to the drive side arm member 910.
3 and are mainly provided.

The rail fixing part 1130 is a part that supports the movement rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked one on top of the other and is supported so as to be able to slide up and down. It includes an insertion hole 1131 into which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the movement rail 1000R and positions the movement rail 1000R, and these are aligned vertically. placed on a line.
Due to the rigidity of the motion rail 1000R, the posture of the petal motion device 800 is maintained constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is a elongated hole that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined at an inclination angle of approximately 50° when viewed from the front so as to descend toward the left. An extension wall 1141 is provided that extends to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear, and has one end protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the back side. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported in the support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted into the supported protrusion 951, and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported protrusion 951 while the collar is fitted into the support elongated hole 1140. As a result, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is made slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is made larger than the outer diameter of the supported elongated hole 114.
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, side base material 1000S, and second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, slide plate 930, and second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is supported by the side base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right through a plurality of supported long holes 931 (three in this embodiment) that are formed in the front and back direction in the form of long holes extending left and right, and It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving arm member 910 through a proximal elongated hole 932, which is provided on the left end and extends in the vertical direction and is bored in the front-rear direction, and is provided on the right end. It is connected to a second presentation member 940 through a distal end side insertion hole 933 that is bored in the front-rear direction.

The proximal elongated hole 932 has a stop part 932a formed at the upper end along a locus in which the connecting convex part 912 rotates around the support column 1110, and extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stop part 932a. It mainly includes a displacement part 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a cylindrical part arranged in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front on the left side of the back plate 1100 when viewed from the front, and has a threaded part 1151 at the tip into which a screw can be screwed. A fastening plate part 1001S, which is a plate-like member fastened and fixed to the support column part 1150, which is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column part 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. A support protrusion 1002S is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the back side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement of the supported elongated hole 931, and a support protrusion 1002S is provided in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right corner in front view. Also, a shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second production member 940, an arcuate recess 1004S recessed in an arc shape co-centered with the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a center of the shaft support hole 1003S. A protruding strip 1005S protruding from the front side along an arc shape having the same center as
The main preparation is as follows.

The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar extends from the tip of the support protrusion 1002S.
and the support elongated hole 931, and in this state, a retaining screw is screwed into the tip of the support protrusion 1002S, thereby forming a part that supports the slide plate 930 in a slidable manner. Ru.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second presentation member 940, and the arcuate recess 1004S and the protruding portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second presentation member 940. This is the part that Note that the protruding portion 1005S is formed at a protruding height such that it does not come into contact with the second presentation member 940 when it is in the normal position, but can come into contact with it when it is displaced from the normal position or is bent. be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed in a circular shape centered on the shafted support 941, and has a main body portion whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed into a circular shape centered on the shafted support portion 941. A shafted support portion 941 that is protruded in a cylindrical shape and is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 1003S with a collar in between, and an auxiliary protrusion that is disposed close to the shaft supported support portion 941 and is provided in a cylindrical shape to the rear side. part 942 and
Mainly equipped with

The shafted support portion 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar, which has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and has a screw into which a screw is screwed at the tip. An entry portion 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). The shafted support portion 941 connects to the shaft support hole 1003 with the collar in between.
When a screw is screwed into the threaded portion 941a with a disk-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S arranged at the tip thereof, the lid member 94
5 acts as a stopper. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is inserted into the distal end insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the distal end, thereby preventing it from coming off the slide plate 930. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second presentation member 940 are interlocked by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal end side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the circular concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the circular concave portion 1004S. Thereby, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 contacts the arcuate recess 1004S and generates resistance, thereby suppressing the bending deformation.

This will be explained with reference to FIG. 165. The back plate 1100 includes three threaded portions 1161 into which screws can be inserted when the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921 is fastened;
A detection sensor 1162 that detects a flange portion 926 extending radially outward within a predetermined angle range from the arm gear 924, and a collar that guides a coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 are rotatably attached to the shaft. A shaft support 1163 to be supported, a cover support part 1164 arranged in a triangular shape when viewed from the front so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C at the lower right side of the long support hole 1140, and a board cover 10 arranged close to the cover support part 1164.
It mainly includes a wire stopper 1165 that is hidden in front view in 00C, and a threaded part 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the board cover 1000C are screwed. The screw part 1006S is arranged with a slight distance from the second effect member 940 disposed at the end of movement in the movement direction of the second effect member 940 (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary protrusion 942 may break due to long-term use,
Even if the portion that restricts the rotation of the second production member 940 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is missing,
The screw portion 1006S can restrict displacement of the second effect member 940.

In this way, the board cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the back plate 1100, which are stacked in front and back and are fastened and fixed to each other. 1000C, side base material 1000S and back plate 11
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easier to suppress vibrations and displacements of the board cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S even when the heavy device called the petal operating device 800 is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910. I can do it.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 173, the elevating and lowering operations of the petal operating device 800 by the advancing/retracting unit 900 will be explained. FIG. 169 is a front view of 1100, FIG.
71 and FIG. 173 are rear views of the petal motion device 800 and the forward/backward motion unit 900.

Note that FIGS. 168 and 169 illustrate a state in which the driving arm member 910 is disposed at the upper end of the movement range, and FIGS. 170 and 171 illustrate the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving arm member 910 (see FIG. 164 ) is arranged at a connecting position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the proximal elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910
The figure shows a state in which is placed at the lower end of the movement range.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, when the drive-side arm member 910 is disposed at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the drive-side arm member 910 is connected to the internal fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151) and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when starting the drive motor 921, the inner fitting protrusion 9
Since there is a range in which only the drive motor 25 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 maintains its posture (a range in which it spins idly), the resistance at the time of starting the drive motor 921 can be reduced.

In FIGS. 170 and 171, compared to the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second presentation member 940 is maintained. That is, when the driving side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal operating device 800 operates before the slide plate 930 and the second presentation member 940.

From FIGS. 170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, it can be visually recognized that the petal operating device 800 and the second presentation member 940 are interlocked by the driving side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 being interlocked. can be done.

Here, by moving the second presentation member 940 in such a manner that it extends toward the position where the petal operation device 800 was originally placed, it is as if the second presentation member 940 were moved to the petal operation device 800.
It can be visually recognized as if it is operating in accordance with 00.

Next, the collection and distribution rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 will be explained. 174(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174(c) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800. 174(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 175(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 175(b) is a front view of the rotating plate 830.
175(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176(b) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800.
is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176(c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 with the central axis rotating device 850 omitted, and FIG. 176(d) is a front view of the petal operating device 800. 810 and a front view of the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 177(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 177(b) is a front view of the rotating plate 830.
177(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 177(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178(b) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800.
is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178(c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 with the central axis rotation device 850 omitted, and FIG. 178(d) is a front view of the petal operating device 800. 810 and a front view of the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 179(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 179(b) is a front view of the rotating plate 830.
179(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 179(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operating device 800 is lowered by the lifting operation and is at the lowest position, it moves from the initial position (gathering position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to FIGS. 176 and 177.
The expansion operation (first operation) is performed through the expansion position shown in FIG. The structure is such that it can perform the operation (third operation) and return to the initial position (gathering position).

In the initial position (assembled position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide member 820

The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 157) is inserted into the central slit 81 in the slit member 810.
As shown in FIG. 174 and FIG. located in a cluster that collectively constitutes a hibiscus flower in bloom.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (gathering position) as described above, the central motor 804 causes the first
When the gear 804G is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view as shown by arrow A9 in FIG.
0 is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear as shown by an arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, since the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall part 812 of the slit member 810 through the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance, it can be easily moved around the front peripheral wall part 812 with a small torque. Can be rotated. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted onto the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, the slit member 810 is Since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a torque small enough to initially move the rotary plate 830 described above.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially the rotating plate 804G is rotated.
30 is rotated as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state.

(See Figures 176 and 177).

When the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175(a), the guide rail 832 on the front side rotates counterclockwise in the front view as indicated by the arrow A11.
Accordingly, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of pushing it outward along the radial direction while being guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is moved by the slit member 81 as shown in FIG. 174(d).
Since the slide pin 823 is regulated by the center slit 814 of 0, the slide pin 823 is linearly guided and moved from the inner end to the outer side along the center slit 814.

At this time, as the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, some torque is applied to the slit member 810, but this torque is exceeded by the braking force of the oil damper 805. While the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state, the slide pin 823 moves into the center slit 8 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.
14 to the outside in a straight line.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 begin an expanding operation in which they expand radially outward from the gathered position. In this expansion operation, the slit member 8
As described above, the ten central slits 814 extend along the direction D12 that is inclined at an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, as shown in FIG. A relatively large load will be applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, but on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 will be relatively fast due to this inclination.

That is, by tilting the central slit 814 counterclockwise in front view, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, thereby making it possible to more efficiently expand the petals 802.

Here, for example, if it is assumed that there is no inclination and the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 will be relatively small compared to the above case, but the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and furthermore, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined clockwise in the front view with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. In both cases, the decline will be even more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the center end along the direction D15 between the tangent and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. , after that, it extends outward while curving in an arc further clockwise in front view from the direction D15, and has a shape that extends outward in a spiral shape as a whole with the five guide rails 832. .

The more the guide rail 832 tilts clockwise in front view, the more the slide pin 82
As the load on 3 becomes smaller, the moving speed becomes slower. Furthermore, the guide rail 832
The more the slide pin 823 curves in an arc shape toward the clockwise side in front view from the direction D15, the more the slide pin 823
Both the reduction in the load on the vehicle and the reduction in movement speed become more significant.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 was relatively large and the moving speed was relatively fast by tilting it in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in front view and further curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side of the rotating plate 830 is formed into a groove shape, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, there is a risk that the slide pin 823 will deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. For this reason, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 passes through it, there is less risk of deviation.For this reason, it is possible to increase the moving speed of the slide pin 823 while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is composed of

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, defects such as deviation are prevented and reliability of power transmission is ensured.
14 to increase the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

After this, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the slide pin 823 is inserted into the central slit 81.
When reaching the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement in step 4 (see FIG. 178(d)), the five sets of petals 802 are radially expanded to the fully open position, and the expanding operation is completed.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially and discretely to positions that are continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 when viewed from the front. A petal 802 is arranged at. As a result, compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visible due to the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 174(b)), the flower can be seen integrally like a larger hibiscus flower (see FIG. 174(b)). 178(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and can no longer move outward, the slide pin 823
is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814, the rotary plate 830 cannot be rotated any further in the same direction by a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805.
Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, the fully open state after the expansion operation is completed can be maintained.

After the above expansion operation is completed, rotational power is transmitted from the central motor 804 in the same direction as before to the rotating plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction in front view, as shown by the arrow A12 in FIG. 178(d), together with the rotary plate 830. In this way, after the expansion operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a front view in a fully opened state, as shown by arrow A13 in FIG. 178(b).

At this time, if the center motor 804 is not stopped after the expansion operation and the rotational power is continued to be applied to the rotary plate 830, the expansion operation can be immediately continued from the rotation operation to the rotation operation without a pause. It can be migrated.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a front view in a fully open state as shown by arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) as shown by arrow A14 in FIG. 178(b). Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 884
Since the amount of movement (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotational speed.

After the above rotation operation is completed, the first gear 804G is operated by the central motor 804 in the opposite manner as before.
When rotated clockwise in the rear view as shown by arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b), while the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, first only the rotary plate 830 is rotated (see FIG. 179(b)). In b), as shown by arrow A15, it is rotated in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, thereby performing a converging operation in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned expanding operation.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement in the central slit 814, and at the same time, the five sets of petals 802 move from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 at the center. They gather toward the target, return to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, return to the gathering state, and complete the gathering operation.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. The first gear 804 is activated again and the central motor 804 is activated again.
When G is rotated clockwise in the rear view as shown by arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b), the petal 802
, rotate clockwise in a front view in a concentrated state, as shown by arrow A16 in FIG. 174(b).

When the petals 802 rotate in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front in a concentrated state as shown by arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) as shown by arrow A17 in FIG. 174(b). Rotate to. Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 884
Since the amount of movement (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotational speed.

From this gathering operation to rotational operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above,
It may be possible to stop once and then shift after a pause, or it may be possible to shift immediately without a pause.

Here, in this embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected when the detection arc plate 880d passes the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), so there is no need to control the rotation angle of the central motor 804. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether the petal operation device 800 is performing a rotation operation.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage section 145 whose four sides are closed by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the ninth embodiment has been described. The unit 9140 has a notch 9145 in a wall portion forming a foul ball passage portion 9145.
b is formed, and the sheet metal member 9150 is configured to protrude along the notch 9145b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment, the passage forming unit 9140 has a different internal configuration of the foul ball passage part 9145, and a lower end and front part of the foul ball passage part 9145. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end of the door-side lower plate passage 9142, the shape of the lower end of the front door-side lower plate passage 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage section 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the lower curved inner part of the S-shaped path SL2. . The sheet metal member 9150 covers the cutout 9145b from above, and includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the top to the top of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the concave direction end of the S-shaped path SL2,
The depth of the recess is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that is protruded from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) toward the back side, and the upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that protrudes from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91). Constructed to withstand loads.

This thin plate blade part 9153 passes a thread Y8 through the foul ball passage part 9145 and pulls or loosens the thread Y8, thereby preventing fraudulent manipulation of the balls inside the gaming area and obtaining fraudulent profits. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage section 9145. Here, we will explain possible fraudulent acts.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 148. As described above, the ball firing unit 112a of the eighth embodiment
A cutting metal member 725 is disposed in order to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that uses the momentum of the ball to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball, but if the momentum of the ball is weak, the thread Y8 will be cut. Sometimes the ball was fired without any warning.

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower tray 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, if we consider, for example, the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P fixed to one end of the thread Y8
8 is launched weakly, and in a state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball socket 146, the thread Y9
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is placed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the firing solenoid 701 side), so that the ball P9 is moved with force. Even if it is launched, the thread Y8 will not be cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is launched with force, the ball P9 will reach the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 launched in advance is in the foul ball passage section 1.
45, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower tray 50 and moving the ball P8, a person committing fraud can pull or loosen the thread Y8, and thereby move the ball P9 into the winning slot. 63 (see Figure 2), etc., repeatedly, resulting in fraudulent profits being obtained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a fraudulent act is carried out using the thread Y8 with the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, a thin plate blade is provided in the foul ball passage section 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when the person committing the fraudulent act pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 is rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the thread Y8 and allowing the thread Y8 to be cut at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in this embodiment, a cutout 9145 that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed.
b is formed closer to the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, so that the thread Y8 is placed inside the notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled. , and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance force against upward load by contacting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, from the thread Y8 to the thin plate blade part 915
Most of the load applied towards Y8 can be used to damage yarn Y8.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is approximately the radius Ra of the ball P8, so the ball P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. This can prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, thereby improving the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the discharged ball. In other words, the person who cheats is afraid that the cheating will be discovered, so the ball P
After holding the ball P8, keep the ball P8 close to your body (for example,
It is easy to commit fraudulent acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8 by keeping it in a pants pocket (such as in a pants pocket). In that case, the state in which the thread Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (in contact with the upper surface) toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched through a position approximately a diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the prize balls are paid out, the lower tray 5
When the ball ejected to the bottom plate 50 collides with the lower plate 50 and bounces around, the ball steps on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the ball guide opening 53, or hits the thread Y8, and bounces around the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1). ) flows down to the right and flows down through the bottom opening located behind the ball removal lever 52. That is, by arranging the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 above the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 (by raising the upper limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower tray Passage section 9
The possibility that the ball discharged from 142 to the lower tray 50 will come into contact with the thread Y8 and damage the thread Y8 can be increased, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it easy to impart rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 via the front door side lower tray passage section 9142.

As a result, the thread Y8 is
You can direct the ball towards. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcefully impart a rightward velocity component (toward the foul ball passage section 9145 side) to the balls ejected to the lower tray 50 along the front-rear direction, so that among the ejected balls, It is possible to increase the proportion of balls stepping on or hitting the thread Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in this embodiment, the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 is formed by the ball guide opening 5.
The lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 occupies the remaining area (the left and right sides of the ball guide opening 53 occupies an area of approximately 1/3 of the width dimension), and a riding restriction step portion 9053a is formed at the boundary thereof.

As shown in FIG. 180, the climbing restriction stepped portion 9053a is formed between the right end (right end side) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the far end portion disposed on the right side of the right inclined surface 9142a. It is configured as a flat part that connects the left end (left end side) of the lower bottom near the exit of the ball passage part 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the climbing restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 allows the front door lower plate passage 91
42 and the foul ball passage section 9145 are communicated with each other. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 can be caused to flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, it is possible to easily bring the ball closer to the thread Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the climbing restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.
Thereby, it is possible to restrict the ball that has rolled through the foul ball passage section 9145 and has come into contact with the riding restriction step section 9053a from riding up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the climbing restriction stepped portion 9053a is a part that allows the ball to pass in the left-right direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage section 145 whose four sides are closed by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 10140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming a foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 extends along the notch 10145c. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed diagonally from the top right, FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed diagonally from the top left, and FIG. 186 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed diagonally from the top left. A state viewed diagonally from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage section 10145.

That is, the foul ball passage section 10145 is a notch 10 that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the upper curved inner part of the S-shaped path SL2.
145c. The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending toward the front side so as to cover the lower part of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the ends of the S-shaped path SL2 in the concave direction, and the concave depth is approximately twice the radius (diameter) of the sphere (see FIG. 180). Ru. In addition, the notch 10145c is provided with a through hole that is bored in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate part 10145d below the rolling plate part 10145d through which the ball is guided to the passage part 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

In this embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has an external shape in front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. Auxiliary convex portion 1 that protrudes from the side surface of the back side toward the back side.
Equipped with 4d2. Note that the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is omitted from illustration in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180)), so that the length in the front-back direction where the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is the same as that of the sphere. The radius is approximately the radius Ra of P8. Therefore, the foul ball passage section 101
Since the balls flowing down the ball P8 can be prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade parts 10153 and 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade parts 10153 and 10154 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8. Therefore, the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the back side as it goes toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (as it goes toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 (front-back width) is
The closer it is to 5a, the wider it becomes. As a result, the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is transferred to the thin plate blade portion 1.
It becomes easier to insert the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 into the gap on the back side where the protruding tips 14d3 and 0153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion that protrudes from the back side edge of the notch 10145c toward the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and the part constituting the bifurcated blade part, the first thin plate blade part 10153
It extends from the right end of the front side edge to the left in a slightly upwardly sloping manner. As a result, an acute-angled recess 1015 with an acute deep recessed portion is provided between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154.
5 is formed.

Note that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members disposed for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute angle recess 10155 is arranged on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the back side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the thread Y8 is allowed to enter the acute angle recess 10155, and the thread Y8
can be easily damaged.

In addition, since the second thin plate blade part 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged higher than the first thin plate blade part 10153, the thread Y8 that is pulled diagonally downward to the front side by the person who commits the fraud. can easily enter the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155.

A plate-shaped portion connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
The foul ball passage section 10145 is configured to be in contact with the lower surface of the foul ball passage section 10145 and to withstand an upward load generated from inside the foul ball passage section 10145.

The extending end on the lower end side of the inclined plate part 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex part 14d2 are arranged to face opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage part 10145 bends in opposite directions. Ru. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in opposite left and right directions.

For example, a person who commits a fraudulent act may release the ball P8 that has come out of his hand and try to avoid the detection of his fraudulent act by allowing the ball P8 to flow backward through the foul ball passage section 10145 and be ejected through the playing area. However, according to the present embodiment, a load is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 in opposite directions to the left and right at the lower end of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the ball P8 flowing backward gets caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and remains there.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 remain inside the foul ball passage section 10145, and the thread Y8 remains inside the foul ball passage section 10145.
By lengthening the time that 8 is exposed in the gaming area, fraudulent activity can be discovered sooner.

Note that an adhesive member (glue, glue, etc.) may be placed in the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has arrived at the hand of the cheater is cut, the thread will be glued to the adhesive member disposed in the acute-angled recess 10155, and the ball P9 will be in the gaming area. Since the thread is not ejected from the thread and remains in place, it is possible to hasten the discovery of fraud using the thread Y8.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) whose launch strength is weak and does not reach the game area is ejected to the lower tray 50, but the tray passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the tray passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of resin material so that it has the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. a tip member 206 formed and disposed proximate to the ball firing unit 112a;
2a, and a guide member 2062b that is formed up to near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship that has a gap V11 having a width that allows the ball to flow down between the tip member 2062a and the guide member 2062a.

A foul ball passage 2062c is formed downstream of the gap V11 and communicates with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner inside the main body side upper tray passage section 161. Foul ball passage 2
062c is formed with a width slightly larger than that through which one ball can pass, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above it.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main body side upper plate passage part 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower plate passage part 162 is disposed in the above embodiment, and the main body side lower plate passage part 162 is moved to the left. Formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied to the upper tray 17 exclusively via the upper tray passage section 161 on the main body side. When the number of balls in the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown), which is disposed on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 and protruding inside the ball flow path, is turned on by the load of the balls, and the dispensing device 133 is configured to stop discharging the ball.

That is, in the present embodiment, the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c also passes through the dispensing device 133 (
The balls discharged from the ball (see FIG. 87) are also supplied to the upper tray 17. Therefore, as described above, by gluing balls to both ends of the thread Y8 and passing one ball through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8
When considering the fraudulent act of letting a ball enter the gaming area along the foul ball path 2062c,
By applying the discharged balls to the thread Y8, the effect of damaging the thread Y8 can be produced regardless of the degree of accumulation of balls on the upper tray 17. Thereby, the thread Y8 can be easily cut at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of outer rail 2062. In addition, in FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball prevention member 68 disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fixed to the game board 13 with long metal screws B11 in such a manner that the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is placed on the front side.

Specifically, on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68, the guide member 2062b is hollow. A support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity, which projects in a cylindrical shape from the back side of the guide member 2062b toward the front side, and has a threaded groove formed in the inner wall thereof into which the long screw B11 is threaded. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is attached to the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed in front of the closing plate 2062b4.
With b1 in contact, the elongated screw B11 is inserted into a through hole previously drilled as a mounting hole in the base member 68b1 and a through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 in alignment with the through hole. is inserted through the guide member 2062b, and in this state is screwed into the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, whereby the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

Note that the upper surface and left surface of the closing plate 2062b4, which are the sides that contact the guide member 2062b, are formed so that the shape matches the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the front surface in FIG. 189) is recessed to the extent that the guide member 20
It is formed as an inclined surface having the same slope as the increasing slope portion 2062d of 62b.

The increasing slope portion 2062d has a slope that slopes downward as it approaches the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface of the guide member 2062b that constitutes the outer frame of the game area. That is, the gradient increasing section 206
A straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a side along the plane 2d is located below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) that constitutes the outer frame of the play area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, the line L11 It intersects with the tip member 2062a at about 1/3 lower side).

With this configuration, when shooting a ball toward the game area, the slope increasing section 20
62d is retracted from the path of the ball, making it possible to avoid collision between the lower tip of the gradient increasing portion 2062d and the ball. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so the ball moves across the gap V11 from side to side. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball passes through the tip member 2062a and returns to the ball firing unit 112a side.

Between the front side surface 2062d1 of the gradient increasing portion 2062d and the closing plate 2062b4,
A cut 206 with a width (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment) that is smaller than the diameter of the ball and that allows the thread to enter.
It is recessed toward the back side to a position where 2b1 can be formed. Note that the notch 2062b1 is formed at a location where the path of the ball hit into the game area and the foul ball path 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side when viewed from the front includes, on the front side of the side surface 2062d1,
A semicircular cutout 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 that is screwed into the support cylindrical part 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cut 2062b1 is formed, so that, similarly to the method described above in the ninth or tenth embodiment, When a thread Y8 with balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c in a fraudulent act, the thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, when the thread Y8 is subjected to a load that is pulled at both ends, it is pressed against the long screw B11 located deep in the notch 2062b1 (see FIG. 190).
a)). In this state, the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, causing friction with the long screw B11, allowing the thread Y8 to be cut at an early stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. This can prevent the cut 2062b1 from being placed at the position where the shot ball contacts the outer rail 2062 (vertically below the center of the ball), so the cut 2062b1 can be prevented from colliding with the shot ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

In addition, a person who commits a fraudulent act by passing the string Y8, which has balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends, into the foul ball passage 2062c, must also pass the string Y8, which has balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends, into the foul ball passage 2062c. Since the end on the player's side (see FIG. 182) is pulled toward the front side to adjust the position of the ball P9 within the game area, the thread Y8 will be closer to the front side near the gap V11 closer to the player side. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the cut 2062c than when the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion projecting downward is disposed in the cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with an extremely weaker load than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility that the button-type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes,
It is arranged so that it can be switched between N and OFF.

FIGS. 190(a) and 190(b) are partially enlarged front views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 190(a), the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68
190(b), the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the weight portion 68a2 is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of the ball passing through the gate member 68a.
A state in which the opening/closing portion 68a1 side is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side is illustrated. Also,
In FIG. 190(a), the path of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is illustrated for reference, and it is also illustrated that the button-type switch SW11 is turned on, and in FIG. 190(b), the button-type switch SW11 is turned on. It is illustrated that it is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), the return ball prevention member 68 provides only a slight resistance to the ball passing through, but provides enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not so. This is because the ball flows away due to its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. 190(b), the ball flows away immediately. Since the state shown in 190(a) is restored, next, the foul ball path 20
This is because the state shown in FIG. 190(a) can be restored by the time the ball is guided to 62c (0.6 seconds at the earliest).

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance to objects that do not flow away, such as balls, such as objects that advance while filling the passage, such as endoscopes. This structure is a measure against fraudulent activity.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows, reaches the inside of the game area, and attempts to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, You can bend the nails (not shown) installed on the game board 13, grasp the ball and put it into the winning hole, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning hole, or emit a laser from the tip. (cutting nails, etc.) Possible fraud.

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that in FIG. 191, the external shape of a device such as an endoscope that is illegally invaded is illustrated with imaginary lines.

In this embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the downward direction of the ball, it is advanced while rejecting the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68. Become. Here, when transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight part 68a2 is repelled by the distal end of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. The insertion part (elongated flexible part) is still arranged below the weight part 68a2, and
2 will be maintained in the pushed up state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to exclude the opening/closing part 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end of the endoscope from advancing further into the interior.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is broken to enter the interior, it is impossible to prevent unauthorized use as it is. On the other hand, in this case, the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, so the button-type switch SW1
1 remains OFF for a predetermined period of time, fraudulent activity can be detected early.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned OFF occurs only at the timing when a foul ball passes (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned OFF.
N (see FIG. 190(a)), the period during which the ball payout from the payout device 133 is stopped can be made as short as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.
On the other hand, if the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped.

Note that the member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c does not need to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be any other movable member. However, as in this embodiment, the return ball prevention member 68
By arranging this, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side disposed on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be replaced at an early stage. As a result, compared to simply purchasing a replacement member for the return ball prevention member 68 as an option, it has the effect of being able to prevent fraudulent activities even before replacement, and it saves the trouble of forgetting and searching for the storage location. This effect can be achieved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported on a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

Furthermore, if the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and replaced, whether or not the above-mentioned fraud prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of damage to the return ball prevention member 68. , the person committing the fraud cannot know whether an exchange has taken place or not, and
Even if the item has been replaced, the degree of damage is unknown, so it is possible to maintain deterrence against fraudulent activity.

Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the petal operating device 800 rotates only in the assembled position or the fully open position, but the petal operating device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even in the expanding position. It consists of aspects. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. Figure 192
As shown in FIG. 2, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment.
887, and a regulating portion 2888 protruding from the extending tip of the flange portion 2887 toward the back side. The loose fitting device 2880 in this embodiment is the loose fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
80, the only difference is the back cover 2886, and the other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880.

The regulating portion 2888 is provided to protrude to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 is provided to protrude to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which a single flange portion 2887 and a single restriction portion 2888 are arranged, but they may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886.
Next, the functions of the flange portion 2887 and the restriction portion 2888 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIG.
4(a) and FIG. 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. In addition, in FIGS. 193 and 194, operation examples of the petal operation device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order, and FIGS. 193(a) and 194(a), FIG.
) respectively illustrate the state at the same time.

In addition, in FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and in the same cross section, the pair of threaded portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803
S is viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture changes due to the action of the regulating portion 2888 is shown in outline (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a pair of threaded portions 2803S disposed inside the both-side slits 815 have a threaded portion on the opposite side centered on the threaded insertion portion 803H. It includes an inclined surface 2803T that slopes away from 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is approximately 30° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
Formed at an angle. The effect that the regulating portion 2888 has on the petal 802 will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the regulating portion 2888 is disposed radially outward along the moving direction of the front part 802b of the petal 802 ( The rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in front view), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

With the petal 802 receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888, when the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 resists the load. Therefore, change your posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 that is fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is in the normal state shown in FIG. , as shown in FIG. 194(b), the central slit 814
It is also possible to change the posture to an inclined posture that is inclined with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. petal 8
At 02, posture changes occur to the extent possible.

As the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 change their postures in this way, the regulating portion 28
While the load from 88 is deflected, the resistance between slide member 2820 and slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), the slide member 2820 only has the narrow slide ribs 803a in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that frictional resistance is suppressed.
The slide member 2820 is allowed to move smoothly in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815.

On the other hand, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 194(b), the slide member 2820 has the slide rib 803a with respect to the slits 815 on both sides, and the sloped surface 280 with the inner inner wall.
Since the 3Ts are brought into contact with each other (pressed against each other), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than the slide rib 803a, the frictional resistance increases significantly. Incidentally, since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-side slit 815 from both sides in the lateral direction of the both-side slit 815, an increase in frictional resistance occurs regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 194(b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 in the longitudinal direction increases, the slide member 28
20 reaches the end of the slits 814, 815, the slide pin 823
The torque applied to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193(b),
Start rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 moves away from the regulating section 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 from the regulating section 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal motion device 2800. Note that in FIG. 195, FIG. 193 (
The state after the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated in the expanded position. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise direction when viewed from the front). Note that in the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is applied to the oil damper 805 (
(see FIG. 156), the petal 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the expanded position.

196(a), FIG. 196(b), and FIG. 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. Note that in FIGS. 196(a), 196(b), and 197, the movement of the petals 802 from the expanding position to the gathering position is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 196(a), the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196(b),
The regulating portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the postures of the petal 802 and the slide member 2820 are returned to their normal postures.

Furthermore, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 from the slide pin 823. The rotational movement of 802 stops, and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically rotate the petals 802 at the expanded position and then return them to the gathering position.

In addition, although the case where the front side part 802b of the petal 802 is expanded at the position where it comes into contact with the regulating part 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in front view), ), it is possible to avoid contact between the front side part 802b and the regulating part 2888, so it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate at the fully open position.

Further, the regulating portion 2888 may be placed in a position where it does not come into contact with the petals 802 in the concentrated position or the fully open position, or in a position where the regulating portion 2888 does not come into contact with the petals 802 rotating in the fully open position.
By slightly changing its posture, it can pass through the restriction part 2888 and be placed in a position where it can pass the load, thereby preventing the restriction part 2888 from interfering with the rotation of the petal 802 in the fully open position. can.

Further, as shown in this embodiment, by arranging the regulating section 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 when viewed from the front, the regulating section 2888 can be used as a part of the presentation device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, the petals 802
When the petal 802 expands, it can be used as a mark to determine whether it will pass through a position near or far from the star-shaped pattern, and depending on the distance, the petal 802 will expand to the maximum and perform a rotational movement. It is possible to make a difference between whether to perform the rotation operation or to perform the rotation operation by expanding halfway.

For example, by performing a performance in which the expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. The pattern of the mold can function as a production part. Thereby, the regulating section 2888 can be used as a part of the production device.

Note that the regulating portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since there is no need to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from a design perspective, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 contacts the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changes its posture, which may be used as a presentation effect (for example, a presentation indicating the magnitude of the expected jackpot). In this case, the meaning conveyed to the player can be changed depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating or are rotating (fluttering) while causing a slight change in posture due to contact with the regulating portion 2888. .

In this embodiment, the position where the petal 802 comes into contact with the regulating part 2888 is the tip position.
If the abutting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion when the petals 802 change their posture will change. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the regulating portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be varied in a plurality of ways.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199.
In the twelfth embodiment, a case has been described in which the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotary plate 830 in the expanding position regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830, but a petal operating device in another example of the twelfth embodiment The slit member 3810 of No. 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotary plate 830 and a case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

198(a), FIG. 198(b), FIG. 199(a), and FIG. 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 chronologically illustrate an example of the operation of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(a). Also,
In FIGS. 198(a), 198(b), 199(a), and 199(b), the rotating plate 83
The arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of 0 is illustrated in phantom lines.

Note that when the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. The fact that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together by exceeding the resistance caused by the rotation is similar to the twelfth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are shown in cross section in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view, the slide member 2820 receives a load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830. Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (see FIG. 198(b)). In this embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, 3815 are provided on the side that receives the sliding member 2820 that is displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the center slit 814 is formed on the wall portion on the clockwise side when viewed from the front among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the center slit 814.
Of the central recessed portion 3814a recessed in such a manner as to widen the width, and the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the both side slits 815 disposed on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front, the clockwise side when viewed from the front. A clockwise recessed portion 3815a is recessed in the wall portion so as to widen the width of both slits 815 in the lateral direction, and a radial direction of the both slits 815 is arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. There are slits 81 on both sides of the wall extending along the wall on the clockwise side when viewed from the front.
It mainly includes a counterclockwise recessed part 3815b that is recessed in such a manner as to widen the width in the lateral direction of the main body 5.

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the clockwise recessed portion 3815a
It is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of No. 3.

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the central recessed portion 3814a
from the position facing the guide pin 822 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (Fig.
8(a) lower side).

The central recessed portion 3814a has a deeper recess depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a longer radial length than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is formed on the flat plate member 28 in the state shown in FIG. 198(a).
From the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of 03 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (
198(a) (lower side).

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b has a deeper recess depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and has a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the rotating plate 830
When the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 start rotating clockwise in front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move toward the lower right in FIG. 198(b)).

This releases the contact between the flat plate member 2803 and the counterclockwise wall portions of the both-side slits 815 when viewed from the front, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are brought into contact with the contact portion between the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the contact portion between the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the slit member). 199(a) and 199(b).
)reference).

Note that the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recess depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, so the above-mentioned slide member 2820 and flat plate member 28
The contact between the guide pin 822 and the central recessed portion 3814a and the threaded portion 280 during the rotation of 03
Contact between 3S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is avoided.

Furthermore, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are recessed to such a depth that the rotating tip portion (the left side portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not come into contact with the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the above-described rotation. The circumferential recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 becomes lower than the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together with each other.

As shown in FIG. 199(b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of threaded portions 2803S (the longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are perpendicular to each other, when viewed from the front The sliding rib 803a on the radial center side accommodated in the both-side slits 815 on the clockwise side comes into contact with the walls of the both-side slits 815, so that the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are rotated from the front with the abutting portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that had entered the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a
moves toward the counterclockwise side in front view from the concave base end of the clockwise side concave portion 3815a.

That is, the state in which the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 194)

(See (a)) Therefore, by continuously rotating the rotating plate 830 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. It is possible to switch between the case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently and the attitude of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

Thereby, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) can perform operations that were impossible to realize in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 194(b) ), until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 280
3 and the rotational movement of the petal 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) which is fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803.

(rotating motion that rotates along with the slit member 3810) (Fig. 195, Fig. 196)

(a) and FIG. 196(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. (See FIG. 199(b)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise when viewed from the front, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199(b)).
. That is, the rotational movement of the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (the rotational movement of rotating along with the slit member 3810) until the changed posture is restored. Can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 198(a)), the rotating plate 830 can be placed in any state (phase or attitude).
By rotating the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 clockwise when viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are assembled from the position of the flat plate member 2803 that matches the arbitrary state (phase or posture) and the petal 802 that is fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803. You can start moving towards the position.
As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (Fig.
93(a)) rotates during expansion (see FIG. 198(a)) and then moves toward the gathering position (see FIG. 197), the arrangement of the petals 802 is varied. Therefore, the operation of the petal operating device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate without an opening. However, the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment
A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the curved wall portion 8326 of the curved wall portion 8326. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202(a), and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operating device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202(a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, FIG. 201 shows the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202(b) shows the tilting device 310 in the first state. A state in the middle of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operating device 8300 in this embodiment has a lower frame member 8300 in comparison with the operating devices 300 to 7300 in each of the embodiments described above.
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of 320 has not been explained yet, and the other configurations have almost been already explained in the operating devices 300 to 7300 in each of the embodiments described above.
Therefore, below, details of the lower frame member 8320 will be explained, and other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-back direction, and is bored in a substantially oval shape at the left-right center position. The first through hole 8326a on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400 has a cross-sectional shape of a horizontally long rectangle when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and corresponds to the slope of the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b are drilled along the bottom plate portion 321 and connect the top surface and the bottom surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at a plane position, and a pair of third through holes 8326b are drilled in the left and right corners with a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a through hole 8326c.

The purpose of each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c is to facilitate the downward passage of liquid such as the drinking water described above, and to facilitate the removal of a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300, which will be described below. It is a through hole having. For example, a coin-shaped foreign object may be caused by a player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is a nuisance and forcibly stops the operation of the tilting device 300, or by a player who is just curious, and the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. Member 33
0 may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the two.

Here, since the operating device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310.
By doing this, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but at the same time, the gap V13
, there is a high possibility that a foreign object will be inserted into V14.

In particular, in this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end of the ring member BR1 (
14(b)), that is, the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end, so that the longer the length of the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction, the The structure is such that it is easily displaced (deformed) from side to side near the front end. Note that this positional deviation (deformation) includes, for example, positional deviation that takes advantage of looseness caused by adding up design errors that are incorporated from the design stage between members, and positional deviation that occurs by slightly deforming each member. (transformation) is included.

Therefore, during normal use, there is a gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides.
However, even if the design is such that the gap V13 is not large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1 yen coin), the tilting device 310 may be displaced to either the left or right side (for example, to the left). In this case, the gap V13 created on the other side (for example, on the right side) is caused by the tilting device 310 during normal use.
A gap V1 having a size that is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the left and right sides of the upper frame member 330
3, which can be large enough to allow insertion of a coin-shaped foreign object.

That is, the gap V13 between the left and right upper frame members 330 of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign object (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1 yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is shifted to either the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted.

Further, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also reduced by utilizing the play around the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the tilting device 310.
The gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load toward the rear side to cause the gap V14 to be displaced (deformed), so that a coin-shaped foreign object can also be inserted into the gap V14.

In this embodiment, the gap V13 on either the left or right side between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is
Alternatively, if the tilting device 310 performs a tilting operation with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the longitudinal gap V14, the coin-shaped foreign object may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right walls of the tilting device 310 are configured in a shape that constricts inward from the left and right toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. On the other hand, the coin-shaped foreign object fitted into the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202(a)) protrudes outward from above the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320, making it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance will become excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem will occur in driving the tilting device 310. Further, when the coin-shaped foreign object rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the light transmittance of the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate, which may impede the light emission performance.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, it will be impossible to perform the intended performance with the operating device 8300, so the gap V13,
If it is discovered that a coin-shaped foreign object has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it as soon as possible. However, if the lower frame member 320 does not have a through hole, it is necessary to remove the coin-shaped foreign object by using the operating device 300. It needed to be disassembled.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, so it is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign objects through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be explained below.

203(a) is a front view of the operating device 8300, and FIG. 203(b) is a front view of the operating device 8300.
3A is a side view of the operating device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG.
03(c) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300, and FIG. 203(d) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300.
) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 along the line CCIIId-CCIIId,
FIG. 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 taken along the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line in FIG. 203(a).

The first through hole 8326a has the same horizontal center as the horizontal center of the vibrating device 5400, and is bored with a horizontal width larger than the horizontal width of the vibrating device 5400 (first housing portion 5431, see FIG. 58). Ru. Therefore, even if a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left-right center position of the gap V14, the liquid will be discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibration device 5400. Liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is connected to the extending portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 12).
(see). Therefore, if a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gap V14 is on the top surface of the extension part 311h, the slope of the top surface of the extension part 311h (left and right when viewed in the vertical direction in the second state) The tilting device 3 is curved toward the
In the first state of No. 10, the slope D81 slopes downward toward the left and right center, and the tilting device 310
The coin-shaped foreign object can be easily removed through the first through-hole 8326a along the slope D82 (see FIG. 201) that slopes downward toward the front side.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be suppressed to the necessary minimum while making it easier to remove coin-shaped foreign objects, so the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be ensured more easily than in the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be widened left and right.

Note that in this embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is the same as that of the tilting device 310 in the first state.
A portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) is made larger than the size of the object assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object. That is, in this embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 m.
m].

Note that the first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is an LED device 341f

(See FIG. 25) This is a portion that transmits light emitted from the radiator. In this embodiment, the spherical shell portion 31
In this embodiment, except for 3a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 that are connected to the left, right, top, and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished (the mirror-finished members are fixed). The light passing through the spherical shell portion 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, the first through hole 8326a is used to create a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In particular, by removing the resin member that weakens the amount of light through the first through hole 8326a, the center portion in the left and right direction can be viewed brightly.

Note that when a coin-shaped foreign object is placed in a position that partially blocks the first through-hole 8326a, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is smaller than the coin-shaped foreign object. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign object (the coin-shaped foreign object becomes a shadow). In other words, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-shaped foreign object remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign object as clues, so that the coin-shaped foreign object can be removed from the lower frame without being noticed. Member 832
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the value continues to remain at 0. Note that this effect is achieved by the first through hole 832
The same applies not only to the case of visual recognition through 6a but also to the case of visual recognition through second through hole 8326b and third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b allows coin-shaped foreign objects that have fallen on the bottom plate 321 to be removed from the bottom plate 32.
It is configured as a through-hole that can be discharged in the direction along the surface of 1. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second through hole 8326 has a horizontal width of about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size that can discharge the largest possible coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 500 yen coin). The width in the normal direction is approximately 2 mm.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the left and right center of the bottom plate part 321, even after a coin-shaped foreign object has slipped down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate part 321, it can be easily removed. can remove coin-shaped foreign objects.

The second through holes 8326b are arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, so that, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be used for discharging the liquid to the outside.

The third through hole 8326c has a central axis arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (Fig.
3(a)), it is formed as a through hole through which a coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 can be removed while remaining in the upright state (posture).

That is, the length in the longitudinal direction of the third through hole 8326c needs to be formed to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign matter to be ejected when viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is approximately 30 [mm] when viewed along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the width in the left and right direction is approximately 2 [mm].

When removing a coin-shaped foreign object, remove the covering cover 370 and remove the operating device 830.
0 in a front view (see FIG. 92), the operator can open the through holes 8326a to 8326c.
can be accessed. Note that the covering cover 370 is attached to the fastening portion 3 of the main body curved portion 371.
70a (see FIG. 91) is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging part 372 is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate in which the recessed part 15a is formed with a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Therefore, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

Note that the harness HN3 connected to the operating device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens outward to the right at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)).
. Including each of the embodiments described above, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be removed, the screws connecting the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 can be removed, and the harness HN3 can be removed from the connector part 8353 to facilitate operation. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement for the normal operating device 8300 is prepared, the operating device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be quickly replaced with a normal operating device 8300.

Thereby, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operating device 8300 and the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to normal operation, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 can be restarted quickly.

Next, the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the case has been described in which the board support device 600 is in the fixed state and receives no load from the front frame 14, the board support device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment is arranged so that it can come into contact with the front frame 14 in the fixed state. The front frame 14 is disposed in such a manner that it receives a load from the front frame 14 via a longitudinally displacing member 2652. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. In addition, Fig. 204 (
In a), the front frame 14 is shown open to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and in FIG. 204(b), the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12. The condition is illustrated. Further, the shape of the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(a) and the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(b) are each simplified and illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transfer device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is arranged to be able to vertically displace the front side of a plate part (a plate part arranged on the back side) that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 in the main body plate part 611; The vertical displacement member 2651
A front-rear displacement member 2652 disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower end of the front-rear displacement member 2652 and supported so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction; a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the front-rear displacement member 2652;
52 from above and below so that it can be displaced at two places in the front and back, and which is fixed to the plate part 611a, and the support part 2654 and the locking part 2653 are in contact with each other, and the front side is moved to the front side by the front and rear displacement member 2652. a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies a biasing force toward the
Equipped with.

The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in which it is in contact with the torsion spring NBb when the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, and a state in which it is separated from the torsion spring NBb. That is, in the lower position shown in FIG. 204(a), it retreats from the torsion spring NBb, and in the upper position shown in FIG. 204(b) (a position displaced upward from the lower position), it comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb, Deform the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the upper end of the vertically displacing member 2651 is positioned at a position with a slight gap between it and the torsion spring NBb in the lower position. is set.

The longitudinal displacement member 2652 can be placed at a front position where it is pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204(a)), or placed at a rear position where it is pushed by the front frame 14. The rear position (see FIG. 204(b)) is configured to be movable.

Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear tip of the longitudinal displacement member 2652, and the inclined surface 2652a slopes downward toward the tip. The inclined surface 2652a extends from the vertically downward position of the vertically displacing member 2651 with the longitudinally displacing member 2652 disposed at the front position to the vertically downward position of the longitudinally displacing member 2651.
52 is an inclined surface that is continuously connected to the vertically downward position of the vertically displacing member 2651 when the vertically displacing member 2651 is placed at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652a is located at the front position of the longitudinally displacing member 2652.
The inclination angle and the forming range are set so that the vertically displacing member 2651 is at the lower position and the vertically displacing member 2651 is at the upper position at the rear position of the longitudinally displacing member 2652.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is placed in the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load becomes larger by the thickness in the front and back direction. be able to.

As a result, the load that the post-rotation claw member 640 applies to the game board 13 from the back side can be increased, making it easier to maintain the game board 13 in contact with the drooping back plate portion 621d of the pre-rotation claw member 620. This makes it easier to define the distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the downward flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, and are to fix the game board 13. At the time of fixing, the board support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side with the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and fixes it by pressing it against the hanging back plate part 621d.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, a spring with a lower elastic modulus is adopted as the torsion spring NBb compared to the spring adopted in the eighth embodiment. can do.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600, which is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600. Since it is possible to reduce the force resulting in
Workability can be improved.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. In the eighth embodiment,
The inverted cup part 178 is melted with heated piano wire, and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are stretched above the inverted cup part 178 to prevent fraud from penetrating into the interior.
Although the case has been described in which the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment detects that the inverted cup portion 178 is burnt out by the heated piano wire and attempts to detect fraud at an early stage, In addition, it is configured to detect the heat and prevent burnout of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

FIG. 205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG.

205(b) and 205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. In addition, Fig. 205 (
In b), the shape memory spring 2288 is shown maintained in the contracted shape, as shown in FIG.
5(c) shows a state in which the tensile shape (memorized shape) is restored by application of heat. In addition, in FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c), the fraud detection device 2280
281 is viewed in cross section at the middle position between the front and back.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape with openings on the back side and the bottom side, and has an inverted cup portion 2.
178, and a back cover member 2282 that is attached from the back side so as to cover the back side opening of the main body box part 2281.
A space is formed between 1 and the back cover member 2282.

The main body box part 2281 is made of a metal material and extends from the lower right corner to the inverted cup part 217.
an extending portion 2283 that abuts the left side of the wall portion 2178a of 8; a narrowing portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner; and an upper end of the narrowing portion 2284 near the edge of the opening. It is accommodated in a protruding part 2285 that protrudes upward from the main body box part 2285 and a recess that is recessed from the back side of the left side wall of the main body box part 2281, with one end protruding outside the main body box part 2281 and the other end extending from the main body box part 2281. A first conductive portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281 and a main body box portion 228
It is housed in a recess formed in the right side wall of 1 from the back side, one end protrudes outside the main body box part 2281, the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box part 2281, and the first conductor a second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that can come into contact with the upper surface of the portion 2286; a torsion spring SP15 that generates a biasing force that presses the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286;
A shape memory spring 2288 is provided that rides on the upper surface of the narrowed part 2284, is supported by the protruding part 2285, and is disposed below the second conductive part 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when detecting heat. In the first conduction section 2286 and the second conduction section 2287, one end of separate wires is connected to the outside of the main body box section 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wire is connected to the main controller. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, from the state where the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact and conductive (see FIG. 205(b)), the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205(b)). (see c)), the continuity is broken,
It is controlled to output an error signal when the disconnection of conduction is input.

When an error signal is output from the main control device, the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120) outputs a loud warning, the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) stops dispensing balls, etc., and other actions are continued. It is controlled in such a way that it is impossible to play games.

The details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 205(a) to 205(c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup part 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall part 2178a is shifted to the left compared to the eighth embodiment, and the extending part 2283 is formed between the inverted cup part 2178 and the elongated cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

Since the extension portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the elongated cover member 173, even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire will remain intact and cover the elongated cover 173. Penetration can be prevented.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further is guided to the narrowed portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 disposed in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed from a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining a deformed shape at low temperatures and returning to a pre-memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . Note that in this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288
The transformation temperature is set to about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178 (approximately 80°), and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205(c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated above the transformation temperature by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, and the second conductive part 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part The conduction with 2287 is broken and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraud at an early stage.

The extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 toward the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2282 in an elongated shape in the vertical direction and in the front-rear direction, and extends toward the front side. overhang. After the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tensile state and returns to the low temperature state, the operator deforms the shape memory spring 2288 by pushing down the extension portion 2288a and returns it to the contracted state (see FIG. 205(b)). ) can be returned again. In other words, even after a fraudulent act is discovered, it can be used repeatedly in order to detect the fraudulent act early.

Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides. The right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment includes concave portions having different shapes for each region. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) shows an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing a portion 2543b, and FIG. FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically representing a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206(e) is a diagram of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view. Note that in FIG. 206(a), illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed into a plate shape that extends straight in the vertical direction. Note that in this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) disposed on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically vertically in line according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment, but in this embodiment, the concave portions 254 are formed in each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of 3 can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curvature of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, a region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, and a region CCVI arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side.
The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed by the region CCVId located below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and the region CCVIe located below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206(b), an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the region CCVIb by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the upper side and the back side. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult for the light incident on the lens to be reflected in the left and right directions at this position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543b refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(c), a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the region CCVIc by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the back side. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult for the light incident on the lens to be reflected in the left and right directions at this position. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(d), a downward concave portion 2543d is formed in the region CCVId by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the back side, and is heated by heat press. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult for the light incident on the lens to be reflected in the left and right directions at this position. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted by the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(e), an upward concave portion 2543e is formed in the region CCVIe by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the back side. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult for the light incident on the lens to be reflected in the left and right directions at this position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543e refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

Note that the concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (45° inclination angle with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of approximately 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, from this part, the inner lens member 5
The light emitted to the lens member 30 or the outer lens member 550 is only slightly refracted vertically and travels substantially horizontally.

According to this embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the light travels toward the inner lens member 530 in a direction that collects the light, and the light travels toward the outer lens member 550 in a direction that spreads the light. can be done. That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed into a flat plate shape, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides can be made different, so that the right panel unit 250
It is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance while suppressing the horizontal width of 0.

Next, the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. In the first embodiment described above, a case was explained in which the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 15 is formed flat, but in the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, a convex shaped portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400. This improves the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower tray unit 6400. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG.
is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 10010. In the following description, the front side of the page is assumed to be the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is assumed to be the rear (rear) side of the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207. Furthermore, for the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR,
FB indicates the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 includes an operating device 1030, which is shown in FIG.
0, a lower tray unit 6400 that is placed below the operating device 10300 and covers the lower side of the front frame 10014, a horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the left and right parts of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs light emitting effects, and a front It mainly includes an upper performance device 6500 that covers the upper part of the frame 10014 and mainly performs light emission performance and sound performance.

Note that the above-mentioned glass unit 16 is arranged in the area surrounded by the horizontal presentation device 6700 and the upper presentation device 6500, and the game area in which the game balls flow down is formed on the back side of the glass unit 16. This is similar to the embodiment. In order to avoid complicating the drawings, the illustration of the back side of the glass unit 16 is omitted in FIG. 207, and the illustration of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is omitted in FIG. 208. This is omitted, and the inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) can be seen from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is disposed.

FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 209 shows a view along the longitudinal direction of the lever member (for example, lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)) of the operating device 10300 (a radial view of the rotation axis of the lever member of the operating device 10300). Ru.

The operating device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322, each of which is formed into a thin plate shape and has enough flexibility to bend and deform. As shown in FIG. 209, the accommodating recess 17a is formed as a substantially symmetrical recess in which the extent of the depression toward the back side increases as it approaches the lateral center. It is arranged so that the left and right centers of 10300 coincide with each other.

The rear side ends of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodation recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves toward the back side as it approaches the left-right center. In other words, the fitting position moves toward the main body frame (metal main body portion 10014a) of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the left-right center.

Therefore, at the left-right center position where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operating device 10300 tends to be large, by shortening the front-back position from the metal main body 10014a to the fitting position,
It is possible to suppress vertical displacement of the fitting position and to suppress displacement of the operating device 10300 in the vertical direction (load direction).

On the other hand, the left and right positions (
(positions far left and right from the center), even if the length from the metal main body 10014a to the mating position is lengthened, the effect of suppressing vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 is not affected.
Furthermore, by arranging the mating position in this way, a space can be formed between the mating position and the metal main body portion 10014a, so a wide area for arranging the upper plate 17, the frame button 22, etc. can be secured. can do.

FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In addition, in FIG. 210, the outer frame 1
1, a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened toward the front centering on the left end portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19 is illustrated.

The front frame 10014 includes a rod-shaped portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be detachable from the hinge 19. By removing the rod-shaped portion from the hinge 19, the front frame 1
0014 can be separated from the inner frame 12. Each of the newly described configurations is disposed in the front frame 10014, so the description will be given below focusing on the front frame 10014.

211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 1001.
FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of No. 4. Note that FIGS. 211 and 212 illustrate a state in which the lower tray unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 are removed from the front frame 10014.

The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member that forms a skeleton, and includes a metal main body portion 10014a that is integrally formed with the front door mounting bracket 58. It is fastened and fixed. That is, the lower plate unit 6400
The operation device 10300 is also configured with a fastening part (female thread forming part) that opens to the metal main body part 10014a side (back side), and the metal main body part 10014a has a penetrating part at a position corresponding to the fastening part. Holes are drilled. The lower plate unit 6400 is inserted by inserting a fastening member (male thread) into the through hole from the back side of the metal main body part 10014a, screwing it into the fastening part, and tightening it.
Also, the operating device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014.

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operating device 10300 is held between the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400. That is, the upper plate 17
The lower tray unit 6400 holds the operating device 10300 from the lower front of the operating device 10300. Below, a configuration in which the operating device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be explained in order.

213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 1001.
FIG. 4 is an exploded front view of No. 4. Note that illustration of the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower tray unit 6400 is omitted in FIGS. 213 and 214. Further, in FIG. 213, the operating device 10
300 is shown disassembled from the metal main body 10014a and viewed from the rear side, and for easy understanding, an assembly direction line connecting the insertion holes 6801R, 6801L and their fastening locations is shown. is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the operating device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014 from the front side, the lower surface of the bottom member De disposed below the inner case member 10330 is attached to the front frame 10014.
It abuts so as to ride on the upper surface of a plate-shaped convex portion T10 protruding from the front side of the plate.

A bottom member De is provided below the operating device 10300 and is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) that is open to the front side, and a recess De2 that is open on the opposite side (lower side) of the inner case member 10330 and on the back side. Be prepared.

The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the back and is open at the bottom, and is similar to the plate-shaped convex portion T.
In other words, the operation device 10300 can be positioned with respect to the front frame 10014 by fitting the plate-like convex portion T10 and the concave portion De2. Furthermore, since the plate-like protrusion T10 is formed into a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operating device 10300 can be maintained due to the rigidity of the plate-like protrusion T10. Note that fitting here means
Regardless of the presence or absence of a gap, it is sufficient that the bottom member De can be aligned with respect to the plate-shaped convex portion T10.

The tip of the plate-like protrusion T10 is formed with a pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions that protrude in a thin cylindrical shape toward the front side, and a fastening screw can be screwed into the plate-shaped protrusion at an intermediate position between the pair of cylindrical protrusions. A female screw hole is formed.

The pair of cylindrical protrusions are inserted into recesses formed in the corresponding wall (front side wall) of the recess De2 for the purpose of aligning the plate-like protrusion T10 and the bottom member De. A fastening screw screwed into the female threaded hole is inserted into an insertion hole drilled at a corresponding position of the recessed portion De2, and by tightening this fastening screw, the plate-shaped convex portion T10 and The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

As described above, while the recessed portion De2 formed in the rear half of the bottom member De rests on the plate-shaped convex portion T10, the front half on the opposite side (see FIG. 215(a)) rests on the plate-shaped support. It is disposed above the flat plate-like portion 6426a of the portion 6426. That is, the front half of the bottom member De is made of resin member 6427.
The resin member 6427 is arranged to face the flat plate-like portion 6426a in the vertical direction with the resin member 6427 in between.

Note that the possibility of contact here is not limited to any situation. For example, the operation device 10300 may normally be in contact with the resin member 6427 due to its own weight, or the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be normally separated, but a load may be applied to the operation device 10300. The resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be in contact with each other when the operating device 10300 is displaced downward by performing a vibration effect.

After the operating device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014, a fastening screw inserted into the front frame 10014 from the back side is fastened, so that the operating device 10300 is attached to the front frame 1.
It is fixed at 0014.

That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operating device 10300 includes a plurality of fastening portions 10333 (three in this embodiment) formed into which fastening screws can be screwed, and the fastening portions 10333.
This is a metal plate that is covered with one of the metal plates, and mainly includes a metal plate part 10334 that has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted, and that can receive compressive force when fastening and fixing.

The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the edge of an insertion hole H10a formed in the metal main body portion 10014a with a diameter that allows a fastening screw to be inserted therethrough. An intermediate plate made of hard resin is disposed on the front side of the metal main body portion 10014a, and a through hole is formed in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 can be inserted through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal main body portion 10014a.

Here, the insertion hole H10a corresponding to the fastening part 10333 where the metal plate part 10334 is arranged.
The through-hole of the intermediate plate is made larger around the through-hole H10a than the other through-hole H10a. The shape of this through hole is designed to a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 covered on the back side of the fastening portion 10333.

As a result, as the operating device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014,
The metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal main body portion 10014a. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main body portion 10014a can be electrically connected, the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main body portion 10014a can be made to have the same role as a so-called ground wire. Thereby, the safety of the player who operates the operating device 10300 can be ensured.

Moreover, by arranging the metal plate part 10334 between them, the metal plate part 10334 can have the function of a washer. This allows the operating device 10300 to be connected to the metal main body 1001.
4a.

Note that the shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to this embodiment, and various forms are exemplified. For example, instead of forming a through hole, a pair of claws that straddle the screw hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, if the pawls are formed to be shifted back and forth, they can function as spring washers, and the fastening strength can be increased.

The operating device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 through the insertion holes 6801R,
They are concentrated on the back side except for 6801L. By concentrating the parts necessary for fastening on the back side, the degree of freedom in designing the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing on the back side is problematic because the operating device 10300 is likely to be displaced downward when a sinking (downward) load is applied to the front side of the operating device 10300. Therefore, in this embodiment, a structure is adopted in which the fastening points are concentrated on the back side while suppressing the sinking displacement of the front side of the operating device 10300. This will be explained in order below.

First, the function of the fitting recess De1 will be explained. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower front side fits into the fitting part 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, vertical movement of the front side portion of the operating device 10300 is restricted by the fitting portion 6426d, and sinking displacement is suppressed.

Next, the functions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are
A plate-like projecting portion is provided on the back side edge of the upper half portion disposed on the back side of the swing operating member 10310.

That is, the left front cover 10321 includes a plate-like projecting portion 10321c that projects in a plate shape along the back side edge of the upper half, and a plurality of partial projecting portions 103 that further project from the plate-like projecting portion 10321c.
21d.

Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-like projecting portion 10322c projecting in a plate-like manner along the back side edge of the upper half. Note that the front right cover 10322 has a partial projecting portion 1032.
A portion corresponding to 1d is not formed, and the periphery of the plate-like projecting portion 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

The plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c, 10322c and the partial overhanging portion 10321d are connected to the accommodation recess 17.
It is configured as a part that is inserted and fitted into a. Here, the accommodation recess 17 of this embodiment
The configuration of a will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the accommodation recess 17a has a lower edge protrusion 10017b whose lower edge extends to the front side with approximately the same extension width on both sides of the accommodation recess 17a, and The lower edge overhang part 100 extends toward the front side at a position slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate-like overhang parts 10321c and 10322c below the lower edge overhang part 10017b on both sides.
17b and a plurality of opposed protruding parts 1 forming a groove between the lower edge protruding part 10017b and the lower edge protruding part 10017b.
0017c, a plurality of positioning holes 10017d that are drilled in the front-rear direction as elongated holes whose upper sides are flush with the lower edge overhang 10017b, and a plurality of positioning holes 10017d that are drilled in the front-rear direction at positions parallel to the opposing overhang 10017c on the right side. It mainly includes an escape hole 10017e provided therein.

When assembling the operating device 10300 into the accommodation recess 17a, the plate-like protrusion 10321
c, 10322c are inserted into the grooves between the lower edge overhanging part 10017b and the opposing overhanging part 10017c, and the plurality of partial overhanging parts 10321d are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, respectively, so that the left front cover 10321 and The right front cover 10322 is fitted and supported in the accommodation recess 17a.

In this case, the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c are the lower edge projecting portion 10017b.
By fitting into the groove between the front left cover 10321 and the opposing protrusion 10017c, the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are prevented from displacing in the vertical direction.

In addition, by inserting (fitting) the plurality of partial projecting parts 10321d into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, it is possible to easily align the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a. This makes it possible to suppress displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Furthermore, the accommodation recess 17a is formed in an arch shape with an open front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated with their surfaces in contact with each other inside the arch.
It is possible to suppress displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the left-right direction or the back side direction.

With this configuration, the swinging operation member 10310 of the operating device 10300 is placed in an upward position, and the displacement of the operating device 10300 is suppressed when the player applies a load directed backward to the swinging operation member 10310. (return to original position early).

Here, when the player operates the swinging operation member 10310, he/she will mainly operate it with his/her left hand. When operating the disposed operating device 10300, the left hand is extended diagonally forward to the right, so it is rare that the load during the operation does not have a left-right component.

Therefore, since a rearward load is applied to the swing operating member 10310 and a lateral load is simultaneously applied to the swing operating member 10310, there is a possibility that the operating device 10300 may be displaced in the rear and left/right directions.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the operating device 10300 is surrounded by the arch-shaped part of the accommodation recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged between them, so that if the operating device 10300 is displaced, The restoring force of the deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 that may occur is the
occurs in the direction of returning to its original position. Thereby, even if the operating device 10300 is misaligned, it can be quickly returned to its position.

From each of the above configurations, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 103 for the accommodation recess 17a
22 can be suppressed. That is, the operating device 10 for the accommodation recess 17a
300 displacement can be suppressed.

Note that the relief hole 10017e functions as a through hole through which fixing assembly portions 6802 of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, which will be described later, are inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be disposed at a position that projects further outward than the plate-like projecting portion 10321c.

Next, the surroundings of the operating device 10300 will be explained. First, the operating device 1030
An outline of the internal structure of 0 will be explained. Figure 215(a), Figure 215(b), Figure 216(a)
) and FIG. 216(b) show the operating device 1 on the CCXVa-CCXVa line in FIG. 207.
0300 is a partial cross-sectional view.

FIG. 215(a) shows a state in which the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in an upward position (initial position in this embodiment), and FIG. 215(b), FIG. 216(a), and FIG. 216(
In b), the swinging operation member 10310 is in the downward position (the depressed position in this embodiment)
The state where it is arranged is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 215(a) and 215(b), the operating device 10300 has a lever support shaft to which a lever member 10340, which pivotally supports the swing operating member 10310 with a shaft support rod 10363, is fixed to an inner case member 10330. It is pivotally supported by 10331d1. Therefore, the swinging operation member 10310, which can be operated by the player, is displaced by the movement of the shaft support rod 10363, which is arranged on an arcuate locus centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1. It is configured to be able to be displaced in a manner in which displacement in the rotational direction is combined, and to cause the displacement by an operation by the player.

That is, by grasping the swinging operation member 10310 disposed in an upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swinging operation member 10310 can be pushed in in a manner of rotational displacement about the pivot rod 10363. (push operation).

In addition, by grasping the swinging operation member 10310 disposed in an upward position and applying a load toward the front and downward, the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed down in a manner of rotational displacement about the lever support shaft 10331d1. (press down operation).

In addition, when the swing operation member 10310 is placed in the downward position, the posture correction device 1
0312 (the action of applying a load to the swinging operation member 10310 in the direction of moving away from the wall member 10322b), the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (backwards rotation posture, The position is rotated backward by an angle θ17y with respect to the lever member 10340 from the initial position. Therefore, compared to the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, the angle of attitude change of the swing operation member 10310 is small, so it is possible to suppress changes in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to rotational displacement of the lever member 10340. .

In addition, when the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in the downward position, the swinging operation member 10310
When the lens member 10317 displaceably supported by the lens member 10317 is pushed (push operation), the swing operating member 10310 rotates around the pivot rod 10363 due to the load at the time of the operation, and falls forward. The vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 is changed to the direction Y17c.
(See FIG. 216(b)).

In this way, in this embodiment, the swing operation member 10310 is configured to be able to apply a load for operation from a plurality of directions.
The manner of displacement of can also be configured differently.

The lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by a drive motor. Thereby, even if the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed down and placed in the downward position, the swinging operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position by controlling the rotation of the lever member 10340 by the drive motor.

A vibration device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is disposed at the tip of the lever member 10340, and the vibration of the vibration device 10366 is applied to the lens member 10317 by direct or indirect contact. configured to be transmitted.

The vibration device 10366 is a device that uses electromagnetic force to move a pair of members toward and away from each other in a linear direction, and includes a bobbin member (a cylindrical member around which copper wire is wound).
A member arranged on the lever member 10340 side), a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member, and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member are arranged coaxially. Pressing member connected by a disk-shaped plate (member placed on the lens member 10317 side)
The main preparation is as follows. Note that the inner cylinder of the pressing member is made of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction.

The vibration device 10366 is configured to be able to generate linear vibration along a direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of the shaft support rod 10363. Additionally, in this embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to match the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317.

Thereby, the lens member 10317 can be vibrated (displaced) by making the most of the energy of the vibration of the vibration device 10366, and the performance effect of the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be improved.

Next, details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be explained in order. 217 is a front perspective view of the operating device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 10300.

As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are provided behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300. Left front cover 1032
1 and the right front cover 10322 have outer ends (ends opposite to the swinging operation member 10310).
is formed into a curve, and the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is located on the swinging operation member 10310 side. As a result, a large space can be secured around the swinging operation member 10310, so that the range of motion of the swinging operation member 10310 can be ensured, and it is also possible to secure a large space around the swinging operation member 10310. You can secure space for your fingers.

In addition, since the end portion is curved in a series so as to surround the swinging operation member 10310,
Not only can the design be improved, but also the deformation of the curved portion can be caused to occur in its entirety, so the permissible range of deformation of the curved portion can be widened.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322
The front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are separated from the inner case member 10330 by the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L that are bored in the front and back direction so that the fastening screws fastened to both the left and right ends of the accommodation recess 17a can be inserted, and the fastening screws. Fixing assembly 680 for permanently fixing
2 and.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6 arranged at both left and right ends.
801R and 6801L are fastened and fixed to the accommodation recess 17a. The left and right ends are the parts farthest from the load applied to the operating device 10300 (mainly the load in the direction along the plane passing through the center in the left and right direction and perpendicular to the left and right direction), and the load is difficult to be transmitted, so the insertion holes are 6801R
, 6801L and which are fastened and fixed to the housing recess 17a can be prevented from loosening.

The fixed assembly portion 6802 is formed at the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG.
321 and the left-right center of the right front cover 10322 (plate-like protruding parts 10321c, 10322
c is located at the farthest back side) to the right. That is, the left front cover 10
321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that can be disassembled at the left-right center, but the left front cover 10321 is formed beyond the left-right center to the right side, and the right front cover 10322 remains at a position to the right of the left-right center. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed over a wider area than the right front cover 10322.

In this embodiment, because the rear boundaries of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are shifted from the center in the left-right direction, one member (the main In the embodiment, the alignment with the housing recess 17a can be completed by inserting the left front cover 10321), making assembly easier than when aligning with both members.

Further, by shifting the position of the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when operating the operating device 10300. Here, the swing operating member 10310, which is a location operated by the player, may be placed close to the rear side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (particularly in the upward position (see FIG. 21).
8), there is a risk that the fastening screws may loosen due to load transmission during operation of the operating device 10300. In contrast, in this embodiment, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is arranged to be shifted left and right from the center of the left and right where the load during operation is maximum, thereby reducing the transmitted load compared to the load during operation. As a result, loosening of the fastening screws in the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be suppressed.

In this way, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is shifted left and right from the left and right center, and the left front cover 1032
1 and the right front cover 10322 in a similar manner, assembly efficiency can be improved and loosening of the fastening screws can be made less likely to occur.

Note that both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are attached to the fixed assembly part 680.
2, it is not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. That is, the fixed assembly part 680
2, the fastening screw inserted into the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321.

However, for the inner case member 10330, the fixed assembly portion 6802
It is inserted into the through hole formed in the upper plate part of 0330 (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 220), and the upper plate part is only held between the fixing assembly parts 6802 from both sides (see FIG. 218). With this configuration, compared to the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover
The number of fastening points formed at 0322 can be reduced.

Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided with many fastening points, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 become difficult to bend due to the rigidity of the fastening screws, and there is a possibility that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be easily damaged.

On the other hand, in order to make the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 more flexible while maintaining the fastening points, the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322 can be made thinner, but in this case, it may lead to a decrease in durability or lead to fraudulent activities. There is a risk that

On the other hand, by reducing the number of fastening locations as in this embodiment, it becomes possible to sufficiently bend the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screws. Thereby, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without making the plate thicknesses of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 excessively thin.

219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operating device 10300, and FIG.
and FIG. 222 are exploded rear perspective views of the operating device 10300. Figures 219 and 22
0, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are attached to the left cover member 103.
23 and the right cover member 10324, respectively, and can be disassembled to the left and right.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is attached to the left cover member 10.
323, the right front cover 10322 is attached to the right cover member 10324 at one point in the front and back direction.

(Adjustment long holes 10323a, 10324a) are fastened and fixed.

Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 is fixed to the right front cover 1032 with respect to the left cover member 10323.
22 are movable relative to the right cover member 10324, so that the assembly positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily adjusted. This will be explained below.

The operating device 10300 is arranged on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in such a manner that the back side is formed in a shape that follows the curved surface of the cover members 10344, 10345 (see FIG. 215), and hides the left and right edges of the cover members 10344, 10345. A left front cover 10321, a right front cover 10322, and a left cover member 10323 and a right cover member 10324 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 each include adjustment slots 10323a and 10324a, which are bored in the front-rear direction and extend in the left-right direction, at their outer upper ends.

The adjustment long holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively, and are elongated in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be bent due to molding variations etc. Even if the shape varies, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1032 for the swing operation member 10310
The horizontal position of 2 can be easily adjusted.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have adjustment slots 10323a and 1032.
4a in the front-rear direction, and is fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 has a fitting recess 10322a that is recessed rightward from the end surface of the right front cover 10322 that contacts the left front cover 10321, and is prevented from coming off in the front and rear direction by the fitting recess 10322a. and a wall member 10322b attached in a manner similar to that shown in FIG. 217.
(see), the wall member 10322b is held inside the fitting recess 10322a by being stopped from moving to the left by the end face of the left front cover 10321.

With this configuration, when replacing the wall member 10322b, the right front cover 10322
Wall member 10322b can be replaced by simply removing (wall member 10322b is
This is a location that is repeatedly subjected to load from the posture correction device 10312 (see FIG. 215). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

First, to explain the assembly procedure, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 103
22 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and right cover member 10324, respectively (Fig.
21 and 222 to FIGS. 219 and 220), after the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover are fixed. 10322 is aligned,
Thereafter, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed.

Here, if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, when correcting the positional deviation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is necessary to take the trouble to The right cover member 10324 is loosened from the inner case member 10330, and the left cover member 1032
3 and the right cover member 10324 need to be corrected.

In addition, in anticipation of this, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not fully tightened to the inner case member 10330, but are weakly fastened and fixed to the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1.
0322, after fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (downstream side of the assembly procedure), move the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 103.
24 to the inner case member 10330 (upstream side of the assembly procedure), which complicates the work itself, which is not preferable in terms of simplifying the work.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are movable relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, so the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are attached to the inner case. After fastening and fixing to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, assembly work can be simplified.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 each include shielding plate parts 6803L and 6803R whose front edges are arranged to face the guide part 10344a of the upper cover member 10344. The shielding plate parts 6803L and 6803R have the role of closing the gap created between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and the piano wire is inserted into the gap to enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against fraudulent acts or mischievous acts of pouring liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a and the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in this embodiment, the clearance is designed to be 0.3 mm).

On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shielding plate parts 6803L, 6803R and the guide part 10344a is shifted due to the influence of load (impact) during operation, and the gap is closed, the guide part 10344a and the shielding plate part will be separated when the operation device 10300 is operated. There is a risk that 6803L and 6803R will rub against each other and resin shavings will be generated. Resin shavings have little effect when they are small, but if a large amount of resin shavings gets stuck in the detection groove of a light-transmitting type switch, such as a photocoupler type switch, the shavings may block light and cause false detection. It is thought that there is. Therefore, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in selecting switches that can be employed may be limited.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1
Since the fixed assembly part 6802, which serves as the fastening point of 0322, is placed at a position left and right away from the left and right center position (where the maximum load during operation and operation occurs), the impact transmitted to the fastening point and The load can be reduced, and the tightening screws can be made less likely to loosen.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the positional relationship between the shielding plate parts 6803L, 6803R and the guide part 10344a, it is possible to prevent the generation of resin shavings, and it is possible to suppress false detection. In this embodiment, a photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate parts 6803L and 6803R.

Note that the detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation of the swinging operation member 10310 in the backward rotation direction, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

When the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed in the backward rotation direction, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is blocked, so it is determined that the pushing operation has been carried out. be able to. In this embodiment, since no load is applied to either the detection switch FC or the metal plate MB, durability can be improved compared to the case where a load is applied.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have shielding plate parts 6803L and 6803R.
curved plate parts 6804L and 6804R formed as continuous curved surfaces on the front side of the curved plate parts 6804L and 6804R, and a lower plate part 6805L continuously formed as a fan-shaped plate part in front view on the lower side of the curved plate parts 6804L and 6804R, 6805R.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have a curved shape (i.e., lever support shaft 10331d1 (FIG. 215 It is formed as a circular arc-shaped surface with a center angle of about 90 degrees centered at (see).

The lower plate parts 6805L and 6805R have a protruding interference part 68 that protrudes from the back side surface to the back side.
05a. The protruding interference portion 6805a is attached to the left cover member 13331 in the left-right direction.
and is arranged slightly inside the inner edge Rm1 of the right cover member 13332, and is formed to protrude toward the back side from the front side surface of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the protruding interference portion 6805a is attached to the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1032.
2, the left cover member 10323, and the right cover member 10324 are respectively assembled (see FIG. 220), displacement to the left and right outside is regulated by the inner edge Rm1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 from displacing outward in the left-right direction, and it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from disassembling in a manner that separates them from each other.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have curved plate parts 6804L and 6804R.
Connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are provided which connect the outer peripheries of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, respectively, and which expand outward in front view and curve toward the front side at the ends of the expanded ends.

The left front cover 10321 includes a plurality of fastening parts 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L arranged at the top and bottom, which are formed at the right end so that fastening screws can be screwed into them. In addition, the right front cover 103
22 is a plurality of insertion holes 68 arranged vertically at the left end portion, through which fastening screws can be inserted.
Equipped with 02R, 6807R, and 6808R.

The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by the plurality of fastening parts and insertion holes distributed in the vertical direction (direction along the operating direction of the operating device 10300). Thereby, the load and impact caused by the operation of the operating device 10300 can be dispersed to each fastening portion, and the occurrence of loosening of fastening screws can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress misalignment at the position of the break between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is possible to prevent the design part (especially
Lower plate parts 6805L, 6805R and connecting curved parts 6806L, 68 that are easily visible when viewed from the front
06R, see FIG. 207) can be prevented from deteriorating in performance. These fastening parts and insertion holes each have different roles. Below, they will be explained in order.

The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner that they sandwich the insertion hole H23a formed in the left-right direction in a portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and are fixed with the inner case member 10330 sandwiched therebetween by fastening screws. . Note that this is not a so-called "co-fastening" mode, but is fastened and fixed in such a manner that the tip of the cylindrical section extending rightward from the fastening section 6802L comes into contact with the left side of the plate section where the insertion hole 6802R is formed. . In other words, due to the fastening, no compressive load is applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed.

In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even if the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to the load applied to the operating device 10300 during operation, the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can operate independently within the above-mentioned gap range. Therefore, when a minute displacement occurs in the inner case member 10330, the fixing assembly 6
802 can be avoided from being displaced in the same way.

Note that the extension length of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compressive load is applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled during fastening. . In this case, the restoring force of the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled increases the fastening force, so the fixing assembly 6
Loosening of the fastening screw at 802 can be avoided.

The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw is inserted into an insertion hole H23b formed in the left-right direction in a portion of the inner case member 10330 that projects toward the front side. By screwing in this fastening screw, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. Note that in this embodiment, the only locations where the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed are only the locations where the fastening portion 6807L and the insertion hole H23b are fastened.

The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole into which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the fastening portion T23a formed so as to be screwable in the left-right direction in a portion projecting to the front side of the inner case member 10330 is inserted. By screwing in this fastening screw, the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 1.
It is fastened and fixed at 0330. In this embodiment, only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed at the fastening portion T23b and the insertion hole 6807.
This is only the part where the R is fastened.

The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are parts that are directly fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. In addition, in this embodiment, the locations where only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed are only the fastening locations by the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R.

As described above, in this embodiment, the fastening portions and the insertion holes are formed at multiple locations along the forming direction of the opposing portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, but at each location,
The combinations of objects to be concluded are different. Thereby, when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at once, so the assembly work can be facilitated. The assembly procedure will be explained below.

First of all, if either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened and fixed at even one place, one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 will be prevented from coming off from the inner case member 10330. be able to.

In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When attaching the left front cover 10321 first, the left front cover 10 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b.
321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330, and when the right front cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R. can be fixed to the inner case member 10330.

Next, the other of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10.
330 and similarly fastened and fixed at one location, it is possible to construct a state in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are each independently fastened to the inner case member 10330.

After this, there is no specified order, but by screwing in and fastening the fastening screws in the fixing assembly part 6802, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are attached to the inner case member 10.
330 can be integrally fixed. In addition, the fastening part 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R
By screwing in the fastening screws and fastening and fixing, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other.

In this way, by also forming a portion where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to each other, compared to the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled only in a fastening manner in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are respectively fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330, The number of fastening points can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the fastening work of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, all the fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left. Therefore, compared to the case where the fastening screws are inserted in both left and right directions, the fastening work can be performed more efficiently.

Furthermore, the screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening parts 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. Operation device 103
00 is a direction in which the operating direction of each operating section is along a plane perpendicular to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, so the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is the direction in which the operation device 103
This is a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of each operating section of 00. That is, if a load or impact occurs along the operating direction during operation, a component in the direction in which the fastening screw is screwed in does not occur. Thereby, it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to load or impact during operation of the operating device 10300.

In the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation parts (including parts that are operated by operation. For example, a swing operation member 10310, a lens member 10317, a lever member 103
40, etc.), but since all operating parts are designed to operate in a direction perpendicular to the rotational axis of the lever member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is set to the left-right direction along the rotational axis of the lever member 10340.

On the other hand, if some operating parts do not move on a plane perpendicular to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, if there is an operating part that pushes in diagonally left and right directions), each operating part The direction found as the balance (average) of the operating directions (for example, the middle angular direction) may be set as the direction of fastening, or the direction that is found as the balance (average) of the operating directions may be set as the fastening direction, or the direction that is found as the balance (average) of the operating directions may be set as the tightening direction. You may also set the direction of fastening (ignoring the operation part that only does this).

223(a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223(b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322. As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a gap between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R for arranging the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220). 10322a and a portion where the fitting recess 10322a is formed, a plurality of surfaces facing each other vertically contact each other.

In the contact portion, a plate-shaped portion extends rightward from the left front cover 10321 on the side that is not visible to the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate section 6803L includes a lower overlapping section 6803La extending rightward along its lower surface (see FIG. 223(a)).

Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower stacked portion 6803La, the shielding plate portion 68
03R is restricted from being displaced downward with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the shielding plate parts 6803R and 6803L, and it is possible to suppress the liquid from passing between the shielding plate parts 6803R and 6803L.

In this embodiment, an inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 218) arranged below the shielding plate parts 6803R, 6803L, a lever member 10340 in which the back side part is housed,
To prevent liquid from coming into contact with the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340, the transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear that transmits the drive force of the drive motor, and the electrical system (board etc.) that drives the drive motor. I can do it.

In addition, while the cuts in the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the left and right center of the swinging operation member 10310, the cuts (joining surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are formed on the right side of the swinging operation member 10310. It is arranged in the same plane as the left and right center position of 10310. Therefore, even if liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, the liquid can be prevented from immediately reaching the cut between the left and right members forming the inner case member 10330.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 is disposed toward the left side with respect to the left and right center of the inner case member 10330 (inner case member 10340).
Corresponding to the bulging part from 330 to the left, see Fig. 218), shielding plate parts 6803R, 6803L
Even if the lower part between the parts gets wet, the inner case member 10330 absorbs the liquid that wets that part.
Since the water can flow downward along the right outer surface of the drive motor, it is possible to avoid getting the drive motor wet.

Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapped portion 6805Lb extending to the right along the back surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the lower plate part 6805R is supported from behind by the rear overlapping part 6805Lb, displacement of the lower plate part 6805R to the rear with respect to the lower plate part 6805L is restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the lower plate parts 6805R and 6805L, and it is possible to suppress passage of liquid between the lower plate parts 6805R and 6805L.

The liquid that has passed below the lower plate parts 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-like support part 6426 (
(See FIGS. 232 and 234), as a larger amount of liquid continues to pass, it passes between the main body part 6411 of the covering foundation member 6410 and the main body box part 6421 of the lower plate forming member 6420, and flows toward the through hole 6412. There is a possibility that the liquid may flow along the recessed shape portion 6414. In particular, the through hole 6
When the liquid flows downward from the front frame 10014, the liquid flows downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014, and may splash on the player or wet the Senryobako.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430, so it is easy to prevent liquid from passing through by sandwiching the hole without a gap. By suppressing liquid from passing between the lower plate parts 6805R and 6805L as in the embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid will splash on the player or wet the Senryobako, so the player can A pachinko machine 10010 that allows players to play comfortably can be constructed.

As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R,
The curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R are provided with a striped portion D23 formed in a striped manner so as to be pushed out from the front side to the back side. The striped portion D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface due to the manner in which it is formed.

The striped portion D23 includes shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R and curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R.
It also plays a role as a part that adjusts the rigidity of the lower plate parts 6805L and 6805R. That is,
Compared to the case where it is formed as a simple thin plate, the rigidity along the direction in which the striped portion D23 is formed is improved while maintaining (or decreasing) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the striped portion D23. (anisotropy). This will be explained using the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are arranged between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a (see FIG. 213), and serve as portions that fill the gap. Here, the operating device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be able to be displaced downward by a small amount due to the load or impact during the operation, in order to prevent the reaction force returned to the player during the operation from becoming excessive. On the other hand, for the purpose of keeping the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodation recess 17a is configured to be immovable.

That is, when operating the operating device 10300, there is a possibility that a gap may be created between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a. In this embodiment, by extending the curved plate parts 6804L and 6804R in the vertical direction (elastically deforming or bending), it is possible to respond to changes in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a, and the gap can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in this embodiment, the striped portion D23 is formed along the vertical direction in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R deform (the direction in which the load during operation is mainly directed), thereby reducing deformation resistance in the vertical direction. Since the size is increased (rigidity is increased), it is possible to prevent vibration from occurring when the shape is restored or from deforming more than necessary. In this way, the striped portion D23 in this embodiment is designed with one purpose as a countermeasure against problems that may occur when operating the operating device 10300.

Since the striped portions D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front,
If a downward load is applied at the center, both left and right sides will withstand an upward load (a tensile force will be generated). That is, even if a downward load is applied to the operating device 10300 and a displacement occurs, the displacement can be quickly returned.

On the other hand, even if a load occurs in a direction perpendicular to the striped portion D23, the deformation that is allowed based on the flexibility of the resin occurs, so that the load is transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 disposed on the downstream side. can be reduced.

The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R each include an end striped portion D24 formed in a striped manner so as to be pushed out from the front side to the back side. The striped portion D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface due to the manner in which it is formed.

The end striped portion D24 mainly includes left and right striped portions D24a formed on the left and right sides, and a central striped portion D24b formed on the center side, each of which is formed as a countermeasure against loads in different directions.

The left and right striped portion D24a is a striped portion disposed above the fastening portion 6807L (the top of the fastening portions on the front side), and is formed in a shape that slopes downward toward the back side. This downward slope corresponds to the direction of a load such as an operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swinging operation member 10310 (along the direction of the load). That is, the connecting curved portion 6 is connected by the left and right muscle portions D24a.
By improving the rigidity of 806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a, resistance to operational loads can be improved.

Note that the inclination angle of the left and right muscle portions D24a is such that those arranged on the left and right sides have a larger angle in a stepwise manner with respect to the front-rear direction than those arranged on the left and right center sides. That is,
The striations extend in multiple directions. Thereby, irrespective of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310, the resistance to the load during operation of the lens member 10317 can be improved.

In addition, the width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R where the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is as follows:
Those placed on the left and right sides are shorter than those placed on the left and right center sides. In other words, since the formed width is shorter on the side (left and right sides) where the inclination in the front-rear direction is larger and corresponds to a larger force, the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R becomes smaller, increasing the resistance force. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to improve the resistance force against the load in the direction where the inclination is large with respect to the front-rear direction, which is the direction in which the load during operation is likely to be large (the direction in which the hand is swung down).

On the other hand, the central striped portion D24b is a striped portion disposed downward from the same position as the fastening portion 6807L (the top of the fastened portions on the front side), and has a shape that slopes upward toward the back side. formed from. This upward slope increases the operating device 10300 (inner case member 10330)
corresponds to the direction of the load when it falls forward.

That is, the rigidity of the connecting curved parts 6806L and 6806R is reduced by the central muscle part D24b.
24b, it is possible to improve the resistance force against the operation device 10300 (the inner case member 10330 thereof) being tilted forward due to the load during the tilting operation around the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. .

In addition, the central muscle portion D24b is formed of a total of seven pieces, one in the center and three on the left and right sides, and the left and right central muscle portions D24b are inclined toward the left and right center as they move toward the back side. As a result, when the operating device 10300 (inner case member 10330) is tilted forward due to the load during the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if a horizontal displacement also occurs, the Resistance to displacement (resistance in the left and right direction) can be improved.

The central muscle portion D24b is formed more densely than the left and right muscle portions D24a. As a result, especially in the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, the degree of lateral flexure (deformation that expands and contracts along the left-right direction) is greater than that in the vertical direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the lateral direction). This results in a large deflection.

Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower plate unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edges of the connecting curved parts 6806L and 6806R are pushed down on the V-shaped design member 6450 (the lower edge position The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are displaced downward.
), the upper and lower intermediate portions and upper edges of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R bend in the left-right direction, allowing the load (stress) applied to the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to be released (stress). (can avoid concentration).

Even in the case of bending and deforming in this way, the lower edge projecting portion is arranged so that the plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c that are continuously formed from the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. 10017b and the opposing overhang 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214), and the plate-like overhangs 10321c and 10322c are longer in shape in the front-rear direction as they go outward to the left and right, so that the front left cover 10321 and right front cover 1032
It is possible to make it difficult for a gap to occur between the housing recess 17a and the storage recess 17a.

In addition, by making the flexibility of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R different depending on the direction, the vibration of the vibration device 10366 of the operating device 10300 and the load generated by the operation of the operating device 10300 are reduced to the downstream side (V-shaped design member 6450, see FIG. 232) can be changed depending on the direction of vibration and load.

That is, while it is possible to easily transmit vertical vibrations and operation loads to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and lower plate 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to easily transmit vibrations and operation loads in the horizontal direction. The load (for example, the load generated when the hand holding the ball collides with the swinging operation member 10310 when transferring the ball from the lower tray 50 to the upper tray 17) is transmitted to the operating handle 51 and the lower tray 50. It can be made difficult. As a result, the player may unintentionally move the swinging operation member 10.
It is possible to prevent vibrations and loads from being transmitted to the operating handle 51 and the lower plate 50 even when a load is applied to the player 310, thereby causing a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, connecting curved portions 6806L, 680 are provided on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R.
6R is formed continuously, and a plate-shaped protrusion 10321c is formed on the upper edge thereof.
10322c is inserted between the laterally elongated lower edge projecting portion 10017b and the opposing projecting portion 10017c (see FIG. 214).

Here, when comparing the shapes of the plate-shaped overhanging parts 10321c and 10322c with the shapes of the lower edge overhanging part 10017b and the opposing overhanging part 10017c, if the vicinity of the left and right ends are shifted in the front-back direction due to molding errors, etc. (For example, when the front side upper end portions of the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R protrude to the front side of the accommodation recess 17a), the plate-like protruding portions 10321c, 10322
It is preferable that molding errors can be dealt with by deforming c so that the curvature is made gentler (by displacing the left and right end portions toward the back side).

In this regard, in this embodiment, since the linear portions D23 are formed along the vertical direction in the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, the rigidity in the left and right direction of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R is higher than the rigidity in the vertical direction. and be lowered. Therefore, the plate-like protruding parts 10321c, 10322c
When deforming the curved portions 10321c and 10322c to the side where the curve becomes gentler, the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R can assist the deformation of the plate-like protruding portions 10321c and 10322c.
The deformation width of 0321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, the size of molding error that can be accommodated can be increased.

In this way, by not improving (weakening) the rigidity of the striped portion D23 in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which it is formed (in the left-right direction), measures are taken against problems that may occur when the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

From these facts, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10 are
322 (same as when assembling the operation device 10300, see FIG. 213) and problems that may occur when operating the operation device 10300 can be addressed.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 212. In this embodiment, the metal main body portion 1001 of the front frame 10014
A flat plate part (ball guide opening 5
3 (see FIG. 214)), and the upper part of the flat plate part is bent toward the front side so as to be bent at the upper end part that slopes downward toward the right. A rear covering part 10014b made of a resin material is disposed in such a manner as to include an extending plate-shaped upper plate part. That is, the rear covered portion 10014b has a substantially L-shaped cross section in a plane perpendicular to the straight line along the arrow LR.

The rear covering portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower plate 50 is brought into contact with (connected to) the flat plate part at its rear end, and brought into contact with (connected to) the upper plate part at its right end. Balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 or so-called foul balls are stored in the area (space) formed in this way on the side where the lower tray 50 and the rear covered part 10014b face each other. That will happen. Next, details of the lower plate unit 6400 that constitutes the lower plate 50 will be explained.

224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. Note that in FIG. 225, each part of the lower tray unit 6400 is shown at an angle looking up from below.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower plate unit 6400 is configured to cover the front side of the metal body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIG. 211 or 212).
A covering foundation member 6410 that is fastened and fixed to the covering foundation member 6410, a lower plate forming member 6420 that is fitted from above to the covering foundation member 6410 to form the lower plate 50, and a plate that is attached to the covering foundation member 6410 from below. A ball ejecting device 6430 which is a shaped device and is fastened and fixed to the lower plate forming member 6420, and a lower plate forming member 64 from the back side at the left end of the covered foundation member 6410.
The intermediate holding member 6440 is assembled to the covering foundation member 6410 in a manner that prevents the metal body part 10014a from falling off, while the intermediate holding member 6440 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body part 10014a on the opposite side (rear side) thereof.
and a V-shaped design member 6450 that is disposed on the upper front side of the covered foundation member 6410 and is formed from a resin material in a V-shape when viewed from the front.

The covering foundation member 6410 has a main body part 6411 formed in a substantially box shape with a substantially planar lower bottom surface and an open back and top surface, and a slight frame part in the front and rear at the lower bottom part of the main body part 6411. A through hole 6412 formed through the main body 6412, a protruding shaped portion 6413 protruding downward from the lower surface of the main body 6411 on the left-right center side of the main body 6411 with the through hole 6412 as a reference; On the back side of the shaped portion 6413, the protruding shaped portion 641
The main body part 6411 mainly includes a recessed shaped part 6414 which is recessed so that the plate thickness at 3 is approximately the same as that of the other parts of the main body part 6411.

By configuring the concave shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large near the protrusion shape portion 6413, thereby improving the yield of resin molding and causing stress concentration in the protrusion shape portion 6413. This can be suppressed. The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 have a plurality of advantageous effects at a location where the operating device 10300 is held from below, and the details will be described later.

The through hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the width of the bottom shape of the lower plate 50, which will be described later, and is much larger than the bottom opening 6432 that is opened by sliding the ball removal lever 52.

In this way, by forming the through hole 6412 large in advance, the covered foundation member 6410
The speed of discharging balls from the lower tray 50 can be made to correspond to the speed of discharging balls that corresponds to the playability realized by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the pachinko machine 10010.

That is, the speed at which the balls are discharged from the lower tray 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom opening 6432.
For example, if the size of the through hole 6412 is the same size as the bottom opening 6432, the ball ejection speed cannot be increased any further. In contrast, in this embodiment, the through hole 6412
is formed large in advance, so if you change the size of the bottom opening 6432 or change the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 within a range that does not exceed the through hole 6412 (the design of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 If the change is made), the ejection speed (ejection mode) of the balls from the lower tray 50 can be changed without replacing the covering foundation member 6410. In other words, without changing the appearance of the lower plate unit 6400 that the player visually recognizes (without changing the design)
, the ball ejection speed (ejection mode) can be changed.

The demand for changing the ball ejection speed is not limited to the case where the playability of the Pachinko machine 10010 is changed. For example, in a game parlor, the pachinko machine 10010 may be installed in a manner that requires transferring the paid balls to the senryo box, or may be installed in a manner that does not require transferring the paid balls to the senryo box (so-called "personal"). ).

When it is necessary to transfer the paid balls to the senryo box, if balls are ejected at a high speed, there is a risk that the balls will frequently overflow from the senryo box, so the design is such that the balls are ejected at a slower speed than the predetermined speed. It is desirable that

In this embodiment, the bottom opening 6432 is formed from a circular opening with a diameter of about 35 [mm], and from the comparison between the opening area and the spherical shape (spherical shape with a diameter of about 11 [mm]), The upper limit of the number of balls that can be ejected from the opening at the same time is limited to about seven.

On the other hand, if it is not necessary to transfer the balls to the senryo box, there is no need to worry about the balls overflowing from the senryo box, so the upper limit of the desired ball ejection speed changes greatly in the direction of increase. In such an installation mode, the balls that are paid out will flow into the automatic counting machine installed in each pachinko machine 10010, so as an example of the upper limit of the ejection speed, The operating speed of the ball flow device is illustrated.

In this way, by forming the through hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the ejection speed of the ball can be changed without changing the design in front view.
There is a possibility that the strength of 411 may decrease. In particular, the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is a place where there is a risk of receiving load (mainly downward load) when a player operates the operating device 10300, so the size and arrangement of the through-hole 6412 and However, there is a risk that the load during operation will be limited to the extent that it can withstand.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are assembled to the covered foundation member 6410 in a manner that compensates for the decrease in strength due to the through hole 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other in such a manner that they sandwich the covered foundation member 6410 from above and below, with the lines shown in phantom lines in FIGS. 224 and 225 being the fastening direction. The edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430. Thereby, the surrounding portion of the through hole 6412 (for example, the left and right long frame portion located behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430.

Note that the design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 is not limited at all. For example, the lower plate forming member 6420
The design may be such that the edge portion of the through hole 6412 comes into contact with the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 before the ball ejecting device 6430 is fastened (disposed in the fastening preparation position) (see FIG. 233). Although there is a gap between the front parts, the design may be such that the gap can be filled by tightening the fastening screw and pressure can be applied.

Furthermore, the portion to be pressed need not be the entire circumference of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, but may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, especially near the operating device 10300 (the protruding shape portion 64
A large load is likely to be generated on the right side (near 13) and on the back side (long plate located behind the through hole 6412), which may be subject to impact each time it is opened or closed. It is preferable to incorporate it.

In this way, by sandwiching the edge portion of the through hole 6412 between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430, sufficient strength of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be ensured.
The bottom hole 6432 can be placed at any position without worrying about a decrease in strength due to the formation of the bottom hole 6432. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the bottom opening 6432 can be improved.

The lower plate forming member 6420 includes a main body box portion 64 in which the lower plate 50 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top surface.
21, a discharge port 6422 opened in the vertical direction on the bottom of the main body box part 6421, an L-shaped plate part 6423 protruding from the bottom back side of the main body box part 6421 in an L-shape when viewed from below, and the L-shape A plurality of fastening parts 6424 are provided on the inside (front side) of the area surrounded by the plate part 6423 in a cylindrical shape and protrude downward, and into which fastening screws for fastening the ball ejecting device 6430 are screwed together, and the edge of the ejection port 6422 is A pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in a rib shape along the left-right direction as ends, a plate-shaped support part 6426 extending rightward from the right end of the main body box part 6421, and the plate-shaped support part 642.
The flexible resin member 6427 is placed on the upper surface of the 6427.

The discharge port 6422 is formed at the front end of the lower tray 50 and at the right end. The bottom upper surface of the lower tray 50 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the discharge port 6422, and the balls flowing into the lower tray 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flow down toward the discharge port 6422, where they are discharged. Since the outlet 6422 is disposed on the front side close to the player, even if the number of balls stored in the lower tray 50 is small, the balls can be taken out smoothly from the lower tray 50.

The discharge port 6422 is connected to a plate-shaped support portion 6426 where load from the operating device 10300 is likely to occur.
Since the through hole is formed near the hole, it is thought that the strength may be reduced due to the structure of the through hole, but a countermeasure is taken by combining it with the ball ejecting device 6430, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has different protruding lengths depending on the left and right positions, but this corresponds to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, while the upper surface of the lower base of the main body 6411 is formed in a substantially planar shape, the lower surface of the lower base of the lower plate 50 is formed to be inclined downward toward the right. In order to make contact with the top surface of the edge of 6412,
The protruding length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 needs to be made shorter toward the right, and this corresponds to this. Due to this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end (lower end) of the L-shaped plate part 6423 comes into contact with the edge of the through hole 6412 (not in line contact or surface contact). ).

The fastening portions 6424 are provided at two locations at the front end where loads from players are likely to occur, and at the front frame 10.
014 is formed at one location on the rear side end where a load is likely to be generated when opening and closing. By preferentially providing fastening points in locations where loads are likely to occur, it is possible to limit the fastening locations and prevent the lower plate forming member 6420 from becoming unfixed and shifting in position when a load occurs. .

Furthermore, since the fastening portion 6424 is disposed near the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the through hole 641
2 (that is, the fastening is performed without separately forming a through hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the main body part 6411), the L-shaped plate part 6423 and the covered foundation member 6410 The contact with the edge of the through hole 6412 can be easily maintained (the relative position can be easily maintained). Therefore, the positional stability of the lower plate forming member 6420 can be improved while making it unnecessary to form through holes other than the through hole 6412.

The guide rib 6425 serves both the purpose of guiding the movement of the ball removal lever 52 and the purpose of reinforcing the bottom portion of the lower plate 50. In particular, in this embodiment, the bottom part of the lower plate 50 is formed from a plate shape that is elongated from side to side, and reinforcement along the left and right direction is considered necessary.
Since the ball removal lever 52 slides along the left-right direction that coincides with the longitudinal direction, the movement of the ball removal lever 52 is guided and the bottom portion of the lower plate 50 is suitably reinforced.

Note that, as described above, since the guide ribs 6425 are formed as a pair, the applied load can be distributed. Further, even if one of the parts is damaged, there is no problem in using it as long as the other part remains, so the service life of the lower tray unit 6400 can be extended.

The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or other flexible material with appropriate repulsion force (shape restoring force).
It may also be a member with a

The ball ejecting device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 on which the above-mentioned ball ejecting lever 52 is disposed.
A circular bottom opening 6432 is vertically formed through the main body plate portion 6431 and is arranged at a position vertically overlapping with a fastening portion 6424 of the lower plate forming member 6420, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6424. a plurality of fastening holes 6433 that are tightened by the fastening holes 6433;
The fitting frame portion 6434 is shaped like a rectangular frame that surrounds the base member 6410, and the outer shape of the frame is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covered foundation member 6410.

The ball removal lever 52 includes a grip portion 52a that extends forward so that the player can operate it by sliding it left and right, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). and a pair of rib-shaped parts that protrude upward from the upper surface of the closing plate part 52b and extend along the left-right direction, and are guided by the guided rib 52 guided by the guide rib 6425.
c, which are integrally molded from a hard resin material.

The bottom opening 6432 is vertically opposed to the discharge opening 6422 of the lower tray forming member 6420, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball removal lever 52 is disposed therebetween. As mentioned above, when not in operation, the ball removal lever 52 is placed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432, so the degree to which the strength is reduced due to the formation of the opening is determined by the closing plate. This can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

This prevents the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile.
Although the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the bottom of the operating device 10300 (close to the operating device 10300), the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 is reduced. This can be prevented.

The details of how the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are fastened will be explained. The main body plate portion 6431 includes a flange portion 6431a that protrudes outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (plane side and both left and right sides) excluding the front side. The fitting frame portion 6434 is in the assembled state (Fig.
07), it is fitted into the through hole 6412 of the covering foundation member 6410 with a gap,
When the ball ejecting device 6430 is inserted into the through hole 6412 as it is, the flange portion 6431a comes into contact with the lower surface of the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

On the other hand, the inner surface of the L-shaped plate part 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be abutted from the outside of the fitting frame part 6434 in the front, back, left and right directions, and the lower end of the L-shaped plate part 6423 is , as described above, contacts the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction.

In this way, the ball ejecting device 6430 can be positioned on the covered foundation member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball ejecting device 6430, and after aligning the positions of each component, the components are fastened. Each structure can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and tightening it. Therefore, assembly work can be facilitated.

The intermediate holding member 6440 has a plurality of through holes 6441 that protrude from the front side and is a portion into which fastening screws fastened and fixed to the covered foundation member 6410 are inserted, and a metal main body portion 10014a (
A plurality of fastening parts 6442, which are parts to which screws inserted into through holes formed in (see FIG. 211) are fastened and fixed, protrude from the back side, and the left upper end of the covered foundation member 6410 in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes an interference part 6443 that is formed in a plate shape and is a part that interferes with each other.

226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. In FIGS. 226 and 227, FIGS. 224 and 225
The V-shaped design member 6450 is shown in an exploded state.

The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape that is open on the back side and whose opening width becomes narrower toward the center of the left and right, and a V-shaped main body portion 6451 that is disposed downward toward the center of the left and right;
A plurality of insertion holes 6452 are formed at the lower edge of the main body part 6451 as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted, a positioning part 6453 is formed near the center of the lower edge of the main body part 6451, and the left and right sides of the main body part 6451 A plurality of overhanging fastening portions 6454 are formed near the end portions and are formed to be able to be screwed into the fastening screws, and a plate shape extends in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the right side of the main body portion 6451. A plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 6451, and a plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 are formed in the left side of the main body part 6451 in a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body part 6451 and are aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 6451. It mainly includes a plurality of left side reinforcing ribs 6456.

The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. Thereby, it is possible to limit the locations where a through hole is likely to be formed by a person who commits a fraudulent act in order to insert a fraudulent member into the interior of the pachinko machine 10010. That is, compared to the case where a through hole is made in the V-shaped design member 6450, the left front cover 10
321 or the right front cover 10322 is less difficult, so it is possible to create an unauthorized through hole in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322.

Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the areas that are periodically checked to detect fraud. That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a high possibility that the through hole will be formed in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322, so it is not necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450. This can reduce the burden of checking compared to the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 need to be checked equally.

The main body portion 6451 is formed with a thin wall and can be bent and deformed in a direction to narrow the groove width (it can be bent and deformed in a vertically collapsible manner). The V-shaped design member 6450 is the operating device 103
Since it fits with the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322 of 00, vertical displacement that may occur when operating the operating device 10300 is transmitted via the left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 is bent and deformed in the direction of narrowing the groove width of the groove of the main body portion 6451, so that the operation device 1030
At least a portion of the vertical displacement of 0 can be absorbed by the deflection of the V-shaped design member 6450.

That is, at least a portion of the load transmitted from the operating device 10300 is transferred to the V-shaped design member 6.
450 and then can be transmitted downstream thereof (eg, to the covered foundation member 6410). Therefore, the load transmitted to the main body 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 disposed below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, so that the amount of displacement of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be reduced by the operation. In addition, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

The positioning part 6453 includes a fastening part 6453L formed on the left side with respect to the left-right center so that a fastening screw can be screwed into it, and a plate-shaped protruding part that projects toward the back side on the opposite side of the fastening part 6453L. 6453R.

The insertion hole 6452 is a portion that is fixed to the covering foundation member 6410 by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion of the covering foundation member 6410 from the front side into a recess formed on the front side. be. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled in such a manner that it approaches the covering foundation member 6410 from the back side (an example of the movement locus of the V-shaped design member 6450 is illustrated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 226 and 227).

Note that at least some of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (in this embodiment, the lower right insertion hole 6
452) is not visible in the assembled state when viewed from the direction in which the fastening screw is inserted into the lower plate forming member 6420 (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the lower plate forming member 6420 is the covered foundation member 641.
0, the fastening screws inserted into at least some of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened, and the lower plate forming member 6420 is removed as a step before disassembling the V-shaped design member 6450 from the covered foundation member 6410. Since it becomes necessary to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, the number of man-hours required until the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled can be increased.

In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is provided with a front longitudinal portion 6426c to be described later, through which a fastening screw is inserted, which is screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L. The insertion portion 6426c1 is fixed to the insertion portion 6426c1. In addition, the insertion portion 6426
The operating device 10300 is arranged in such a manner that c1 is shielded from the rear view (see FIG. 232).

Therefore, as a premise for disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operating device 10300 and move it from the position where the insertion portion 6426c1 is shielded. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to increase the number of steps required to remove the operating device 10300 and disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420. Thereby, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as illegally removing the V-shaped design member 6450 and entering the interior through the created gap.

The plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R is attached to the front longitudinal portion 6426 of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the assembled state.
c (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-shaped support 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-shaped support 6426 is suppressed by the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R.

Thereby, for example, even if the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is subjected to a load from the player in the lifting direction, the fitting recess De1 of the operating device 10300 (
219) and the fitting portion 6426d are fitted, so the operation device 10300
As the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced in the upward direction, the front side portion of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in the upward direction.

Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-like protrusion 6453R, the operation device 10300
The upward displacement of can be suppressed.

The left and right protruding fastening parts 6454 are parts into which fastening screws are inserted through a resin intermediate member (not shown) fixed to the metal main body part 10014a of the front frame 10014, and the fastening positions thereof are as follows. , on the back side (closer to the metal main body part 10014a) than the fastening position of the fastening part 6453L.

The right side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left side reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs that reinforce the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and because they have a thin shape that can be bent and deformed themselves, they can transmit displacement downstream by deforming themselves. It also functions as a buffer means (displacement transmission suppressing means) to suppress As shown in FIG. 227, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged more closely together than the right reinforcing ribs 6455. Below, they will be explained in order.

228(a) is a schematic sectional view of the right side reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228(b) is a schematic sectional view of the left side reinforcing rib 6456. Note that FIGS. 228(a) and 228(b) illustrate a cross section in a plane that divides the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 in the thickness direction. In addition, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are formed to have the same thickness, but are designed to vary the dimensions in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction in accordance with the groove width of the main body portion 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a typical example will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 228(a), the right reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the main body 6451 to the back side, and is a joint portion that is coupled to the upper plate of the main body 6451. 645
5a, and an upper facing portion 6 that is arranged parallel to and opposite to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap.
455b, and a lower opposing portion 6455c which is arranged opposite to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 in such a manner that the width of separation increases toward the back side.

The lower edge of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted to the upper facing portion 6455b. Main body part 645
1 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially parallel to each other, it is possible to avoid contacting the right front cover 10322 at one point, and the load can be distributed between the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load capacity of the right reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322. This can prevent the lower edge of the right front cover 10322 after fitting from separating from the upper facing part 6455b and the upper plate part of the main body part 6451, and can prevent them from colliding with each other and rubbing against each other. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The lower facing portion 6455c is located on the side closer to the operation device 10300 (back side, right front cover 103
Since the distance between the main body portion 6451 and the lower plate increases toward the side where the displacement of the right side reinforcement rib 6455 tends to increase, it is possible to increase the allowable amount of downward displacement of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 itself, and Collision (abutment) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 at the time of occurrence can be avoided.

Therefore, since the right side reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a buffer member, the right front cover 10
It is possible to reduce the rate at which the displacement and load transmitted through the main body portion 6451 are transmitted to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451.

In this embodiment, the downstream side (
The operating handle 51 is arranged on the lower right side), but the right side reinforcing rib 6455 acts as a buffer member, so that the operating handle 51 is not subjected to loads, displacements, and vibrations caused by operating or driving the operating device 10300. The rate of transmission can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to ensure a gaming experience in which the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without feeling any discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 228(b), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the main body 6451 to the back side, and is a joint portion that is coupled to the upper plate of the main body 6451. 645
6a, and an upper facing portion 6 that is arranged parallel to and opposite to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap.
456b, and a projecting portion 6456 that extends toward the back side from the back side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451.
c, and a lower opposing portion 64 that is arranged parallel to and opposed to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap.
56d.

The lower edge of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper facing part 6456b and the upper plate part of the main body part 6451, and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted to the upper facing part 6456b. Main body part 645
1 and the upper facing portion 6456b are arranged substantially parallel to each other, it is possible to avoid contacting the left front cover 10321 at one point, and the load can be distributed between the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321. This can prevent the lower edge of the left front cover 10321 after fitting from separating from the upper facing part 6456b and the upper plate part of the main body part 6451, and can prevent them from colliding with each other and rubbing against each other. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The projecting portion 6456c is arranged in a direction (
It has an upper edge that slopes downward (downward). As a result, the overhanging portion 6456c is attached to the left front cover 103.
It is not a part that always comes into contact with the lower edge of the left front cover 10321, but a part that comes into contact only when the amount of downward displacement of the left front cover 10321 is increased to a certain extent. That is, the overhanging portion 6456c
can function as a fail-safe portion for suppressing the displacement of the left front cover 10321 when the amount of displacement becomes abnormally large.

Note that the upper surface of the projecting portion 6456c may be formed at the same level as the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, the length of the front and rear positions where the load transmitted via the left front cover 10321 can be distributed can be increased, so that the load capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 when the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) is inserted between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. It is. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the plurality of left side reinforcing ribs 6456 come into contact with the rear covered portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed, and the amount of downward displacement of the rear covered portion 10014b can be reduced. .

This makes it easier to maintain the arrangement of the rear covering part 10014b, so the space above the lower tray 50 (the space where the balls are stored and where the player may put his hands)
can be prevented from being narrowed.

That is, the rear covered portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450.
However, it is possible to suppress the load transmitted from the operating device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 from displacing the rear cover portion 10014b. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation where the surface constituting the lower tray 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball, causing abnormal noise.

As described above, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged more closely together than the arrangement spacing of the right reinforcing ribs 6455. Therefore, it is configured to be able to handle a larger load.
In this embodiment, the left side reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged close together in areas where the weight of the player's hand that touches the balls stored in the upper tray 17 placed on the left side is likely to be applied, and the load is likely to be uneven between the left and right sides. By arranging them evenly, it is possible to deal with uneven loads.

As described above, in this embodiment, by making the shapes of the right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 different, it is possible to cope with different types of loads. That is, the right side reinforcing rib 6455 forms a sufficient gap between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower opposing portion 6455c to block the transmission of load, thereby preventing instantaneous load or impact via the operating device 10300. On the other hand, the left reinforcing rib 6456 disperses and supports the load, so even if the weight is applied for a long time via the upper plate 17, the back It is possible to prevent the covering portion 10014b from being displaced. In this way, in this embodiment, the reinforcing ribs 6455, 64
56 shapes are designed.

229(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 229(b) is a front view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 230(a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit 6400. , FIG. 230(b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 231(a) is a right view of the lower tray unit 6400 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 231(b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400. 6400 is a left side view when viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 229(a) and 230(b), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is arranged so as to straddle the recessed portion 6414 of the covered foundation member 6410 from side to side. , the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is placed in surface contact with the upper bottom surface of the main body portion 6411, while being spaced apart from the recessed portion 6414. The details of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 will be explained below.

The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are connected to the main body portion 641 of the covered foundation member 6410.
Similar to the deformation when a part of 1 is pressed from above, it is a part that constitutes the front and back of a part that bulges (extends) downward from the bottom surface, and the shape of one of the front and back is similar to the shape of the other. ing. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding shape portion 6413 when viewed from the bottom and the inner shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 when viewed from the top are formed as shapes whose scales have been changed by an amount that can ensure the thickness of the main body portion 6411. Ru. Therefore, from one shape, the other shape can be easily imagined.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), the horizontal width of the protruding shape portion 6413 gradually increases toward the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 229(a), the plate-like support portion 64 of the lower plate forming member 6420
26 is disposed closer to the front than the front-back center of the recessed shape portion 6414, so that it supports the plate-like support portion 6426 at a location where the left and right widths of the protrusion shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are large. be able to. As a result, when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in a downwardly sinking manner, the main body portion 6411 can be partially sufficiently bent, but details will be described later.

Here, in the state where the game is possible, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-like support section 6426, and as the player operates the operation device 10300, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-like support section 6426.
6 can be displaced up and down. In relation to this displacement, the plate-shaped support part 6426 and the main body part 6411 are made of a resin material, and the plate-shaped support part 6426 and the main body part 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410
There is a possibility that shavings may be generated due to load generation, collision, or rubbing between the metal and the metal parts 11 and 11.

If shavings are generated around the operating device 10300, for example, the shavings may enter gaps and make it impossible to ensure clearance, resulting in malfunction, or the shavings may enter the detection area of the detection sensor, causing false detection. Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, generation of shavings can be suppressed or the amount generated can be reduced.

As described above, in this embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body portion 6411.

That is, a load is applied to the operating device 10300 in a downward direction, and the plate-like support portion 6426
When the main body 6411 is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414, thereby making it unnecessary to displace other parts such as the main body portion 6411.

On the other hand, a load is applied to the operating device 10300 in the lifting direction, and the plate-like support portion 642
6 is displaced upward, the displacement is received by the plate-like protrusion 6453R (see FIG. 232) and converted into deformation of the V-shaped design member 6450, so that the displacement of other parts such as the main body 6411 is reduced. can be made unnecessary.

In this way, in this embodiment, the plate-like support part 6426 and the main body part 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operating device 10300 is only indirectly transmitted to the main body part 6411. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 6411 from being deformed or damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 231(a) and 231(b), the lower surface of the protruding shaped portion 6413 is formed as a plane along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 is
It is formed as an inclined plane that slopes upward toward the front side. This configuration works well, for example, when the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

When storing the front frame 10014 alone, it is generally considered that it is often placed on a concrete or wooden floor with the lower surface of the front frame 10014 in contact with the floor. At this time, it may be preferable for the entire lower surface to be in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoidance of concentration of load, but in this case, there is a possibility that dirt from the floor will adhere to the entire lower surface. Although the lower surface of the main body part 6411 is difficult to see from the player, since it is a product, it is preferable to avoid getting dirt on it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the protrusion-shaped portion 6413 is formed as a plane along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side. When the shaped part 6413 comes into contact with the floor surface, a gap will be created between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body part 6411. Therefore, the protruding shaped part 6413
can be limited to. Therefore, when the game parlor side installs the front frame 10014 in a state where it can be played, it is only necessary to wipe the dirt on the protruding shaped portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. .

Further, the protruding portion 6413 also functions as a finger rest portion on which the front frame 10014 is hung when carrying it. Conventionally, the lower plate part was placed at the left and right center of the front frame, so it was easy to hook the lower plate part, lift the front frame, and attach it to the rear frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12). However, in the front frame 10014 of this embodiment, the lower tray 50 is placed on the left side in the left-right direction (opening/closing axis side), so hook your hand on the lower tray 50 and lift the front frame 10014.
It has a configuration that is difficult to assemble.

On the other hand, if you hook your hand on the operating handle 51 and lift the front frame 10014, the weight of the front frame 10014 will be applied to the base of the operating handle 41, which may damage the operating handle 51, so this is not recommended. is not desirable.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by hooking your hand on the bottom of the lower tray unit 6400, the front frame 100
14, a protruding shaped part 641 that also functions as a finger rest part
3 is placed at the left and right center position. The operator can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by hooking his/her hand on the protruding shaped portion 6413, lifting the front frame 10014, and pivoting the front frame 10014 to the rear frame.

And, by making the work procedure include wiping off dirt before and after putting your finger on it,
It is possible to make the worker aware of the location where dirt needs to be wiped off in relation to the carrying action. Therefore, forgetting to wipe off dirt can be prevented.

Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured to be just the right amount of gap depending on the amount of deformation expected in the protrusion-shaped portion 6413. To be more specific, from the shape of the lower surface of the main body part 6411, the gap between it and the floor becomes larger as it goes toward the front side. This corresponds to the fact that the amount of deformation (deflection) due to load increases.

That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor, the protruding shape portion 6413 is placed on the front frame 10014.
Even when the main body part 6411 is bent and deformed by the weight of the main body part 6411, it is possible to easily secure a gap between the lower surface of the main body part 6411 and the floor. On the other hand, if the protruding shaped portion 6413 is bent and deformed to its limit and there is no gap between the lower surface of the main body 6411 and the floor, it is possible to make the entire lower surface of the main body 6411 more likely to come into contact with the floor. Therefore, the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 can support the weight of the front frame 10014.

Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor weighs more than expected or an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 placed on the floor, part of the main body 6411 It is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on the

Furthermore, the deformable amount is made larger toward the front side of the protrusion-shaped portion 6413. It works well even during game execution. For example, when exchanging a senryo box, a clerk at a game store slides the senryo box back and forth on the lower surface of the main body part 6411 and the lower side of the protruding shape part 6413, but at this time, the senryo box and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 are There may be a collision. If the impact and load from this collision accumulates in the structural members as fatigue, the structural members may be destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, making it difficult to continue playing the game. There is.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the protruding shape portion 64 increases toward the front side where it is more likely to collide with the Senryo box.
13 is configured to have a large deformable amount. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the impact and load caused by the collision with the senryo box through deformation (bending deformation), and it is possible to suppress the destruction of the protrusion shaped portion 6413. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the protrusion-shaped portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed to be inclined in such a manner that it rises toward the front side (see FIG. 231(a)). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the senryo box and the main body part 6411 will collide on the left and right sides of the protruding shaped part 6413 when replacing the senryo box. This can reduce the possibility that the bottom surface of the main body section 6411 will be damaged, making it easier to maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

FIG. 232 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400. Note that FIG. 232 shows the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322, and the other operating devices 1
The outline of 0300 is schematically illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322
56b (see FIGS. 228(a) and 228(b))).

The main body portion 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed into a V-shape in rear view, and the reinforcing ribs 645
Since the reinforcing rib 6455 is formed into a plate shape extending in the groove width direction of the main body portion 6451, the reinforcing rib 6455
, 6456 is directed in a direction (in an upward diagonal direction) having a directional component that returns the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 to the left-right center. For example, reinforcing ribs 6455, 6
The restoring force from the deflection deformation of 456 is directed diagonally upward.

This makes it possible to accommodate not only vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 but also horizontal displacement. For example, as in the present embodiment, even if the moving direction of the operating portion of the operating device 10300 (for example, the swing operating member 10310) does not have a left-right component, the downward load applied by the player will be If such a load is applied, the entire operating device 10300 may be displaced downward and may also be slightly displaced (vibrated) in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 can respond to the horizontal displacement of the operating device 10300 by bending and deforming based on their own curved shapes (they can absorb the horizontal displacement or use their restoring force). Furthermore, since the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed upward and toward the center of the left and right sides, the operating device 10300 can be quickly returned to the position before displacement. Therefore, the design of the front frame 10014 as seen from the front (see FIG. 207) can be easily maintained.

233(a) is a sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and FIG.
233(c) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit 6400 taken along the line XXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb, and FIG. 233(c) is a sectional view of the lower pan unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). In addition, in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c),
The vicinity of the edge of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), in the assembled state of the lower tray unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is connected to the lower tray forming member 6420 (in the rear side portion, the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423). It is pressed by the installed end (lower end) and the ball ejection device 6430 (flange 6431a). Thereby, the area around the through hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430.

The inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is connected to the fitting frame portion 64.
34 (see FIG. 224) in a shape that can be abutted from the outside in the front, rear, left and right directions, and the L-shaped plate part 6
As described above, the lower end portion of the through hole 6412 contacts the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 233(c)). Thereby, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the through hole 6412 can be improved.

As described above, when the ball removal lever 52 is not operated, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6
432, the degree of decrease in strength due to the formation of the opening can be reduced by the rigidity of the closing plate portion 52b (see FIG. 233(b)).

This prevents the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile.
Although the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the bottom of the operating device 10300 (close to the operating device 10300), the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 is reduced. This can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width becomes wider and the recess depth increases toward the front side. That is, the recessed portion 6414 is formed to be more easily bent toward the front side.

As a result, sufficient bending performance can be given to the recessed portion 6414 near the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operating device 10300 is likely to be large, so that when the player operates the operating device 10300 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the covered foundation member 6410 that supports the operating device 10300 is damaged (for example, cracked) due to a load. This will be explained in detail.

As described above, the operating device 10300 is a device that can be operated in multiple operating modes. It has the role of notifying the operation timing and operation mode through a display device or the like, having the player operate the operating device 10300 in accordance with the notification, and drawing the player into the game. Here, the frequency of each operation mode in notification is not constant.

For example, as an example of control, the swinging operation member 10310 is controlled to stop at the initial position from the start of the game until a specific ready-to-win effect is executed (see FIG. 215(a)). This state occupies most of the arrangements of the swinging operation member 10310 during business hours.

In this state, notifications prompting operations in display effects (notifications such as "Press the button!")
Push operation of the lens member 10317 for operations such as switching the stage, etc.

(push operation) is executed by the player. Therefore, most of the load that occurs due to the operation is the load that occurs when the lens member 10317 is pressed and operated, and is in the direction Y17a (FIG.
15(a)). Since the frequency of occurrence of notification is high, the frequency of occurrence of this load increases.

On the other hand, when a specific reach effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is driven and controlled to vertically displace the swinging operation member 10310, for example, the swinging operating member 10310 is placed in a downward position. In this state (see FIG. 215(b)), a notification prompting an operation is executed.

The operation direction in this case is a direction Y17b (see FIG. 215(b)) which is further inclined in the front-rear direction by an angle θ17y compared to the state in which the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in an upward position.
Therefore, a load is generated along the direction Y17b. Since the notification occurs only when a specific reach effect is executed, the frequency of occurrence is low.

That is, the frequency of load occurrence along direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the frequency of load occurrence along direction Y17b. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the recessed portion 6
The shape of 414 is such that the width becomes wider and the depth of the recess increases as it goes toward the front side, so that it is formed so that the more it goes toward the front side, the higher the load response performance becomes.

In other words, compared to a case where the shape is the same in the front and back directions, it is possible to configure the structure so that it can respond to differences in the frequency of load occurrence in the appropriate place, and the applied load may cause too much deformation or insufficient deformation. This makes it easier to avoid damage.

As described above, in this embodiment, the side closer to the player and the side where the load is more frequently generated during operation are both the front side, so the concave shaped portion 6414 becomes wider as it goes toward the front side. , was formed at the deep bottom, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swinging operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of load generation during operation is reversed, so in this case, the concave shape becomes wider toward the back side. By forming the deep bottom, it is possible to configure the structure so that it can respond to differences in the frequency of load occurrence in the appropriate place, compared to a case where the shape is common in the front and rear directions, and prevents excessive deformation due to the applied load. This makes it easier to avoid problems such as occurrence of deformation or insufficient deformation resulting in easy breakage.

As shown in FIG. 233(b), which corresponds to the center cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-like portion 64
26b abuts the main body portion 6411 on the upper and lower sides at a position on the left and right sides of both ends of the recessed shape portion 6414 in the left and right widths.

As a result, the rate at which the load from the operating device 10300 is transmitted to the recessed portion 6414 can be lowered compared to the case where the hanging plate portion 6426b contacts the upper edge of the recessed portion 6414. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress damage to the recessed portion 6414 due to the load when operating the operating device 10300.

In addition, in response to the load, not only the recessed shape portion 6414 is bent, but also the recessed shape portion 6414 is bent.
Since the deflection of the plate-like portion from the upper edge of 414 to the contact position of the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 can also be utilized, the load tolerance can be increased.

FIG. 234 is a sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229(a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 includes a flat plate-shaped portion 6426a on which a resin member 6427 is placed, and a flat plate-shaped portion 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed.
A hanging plate-like part 6426b that hangs downward from the left and right and rear edges of 426a, and a part that is connected to the front side edge of the plane plate-like part 6426a and is formed to be taller than the plane plate-like part 6426a. It mainly includes a front vertically long part 6426c that is open at the bottom, and a fitting part 6426d that extends from the front vertically long part 6426c to the rear side and is fitted with the operating device 10300. Note that in the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 will be referred to as appropriate.

The planar plate-like portion 6426a is formed wider than the horizontal width of the recessed portion 6414, and is configured to cover the front half of the recessed portion 6414. A hanging plate-like part 6426b is formed between the plane plate-like part 6426a and the main body part 6411 of the covered foundation member 6410 (between the top and bottom).
That is, the planar plate-like portion 6426a does not come into contact with the main body portion 6411, and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from below (
(See FIG. 225) The extending end of the hanging plate-like portion 6426b comes into contact with the main body portion 6411, thereby determining the position of the planar plate-like portion 6426a with respect to the covered foundation member 6410.

In this way, the planar plate-like part 6426a and the hanging plate-like part 6426b are not block-shaped,
Since it is formed into a box shape with an open bottom, the planar plate-like part 6426a and the hanging plate-like part 6426
b has a structure that is easily deflected and deformed. Therefore, not only the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are bent and deformed in response to the load via the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 211), but also the planar plate portion 6426a and the hanging plate portion 6426b can also be flexibly deformed, and the plate-like support portion 6426 and the covered foundation member 6410 (the main body portion 6411, the protruding shape portion 6413, and the recessed shape portion 6414) arranged below the operation device 10300 Damage can be further prevented.

Although the hanging plate-like portion 6426b extends to the bottom upper surface of the main body portion 6411, it does not extend into the recessed portion 6414. That is, a space is created between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed-shaped portion 6414 (see below the rear end portion of the planar plate-like portion 6426a in FIG. 234). Thereby, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protrusion shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being inhibited.

Furthermore, the space between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even if liquid infiltrates from the gap between the operating device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid flowing along the back side of the plate-like support part 6426 is configured to be able to infiltrate into the front part of the recessed part 6414. This makes it possible to weaken the flow of liquid infiltrating to the rear. This allows the front frame 10014 to easily prevent liquid from entering.

The front vertically elongated portion 6426c has a fitting portion 6426d extending toward the back side so that the operating device 1
0300, and the lower part of the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the load applied by the player to the operating device 10300 is reduced to the main body 6.
Since the load can be distributed not only by the V-shaped design member 6450 but also by the V-shaped design member 6450, the load applied to each component can be weakened.

Further, a space is also created between the front side longitudinal portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed shaped portion 6414.
The deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, the space between the front longitudinal portion 6426c and the recessed portion 6414 also serves as a water drain. For example, even if liquid infiltrates from the gap between the operating device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid that has flowed along the back side of the plate-like support part 6426 is configured to be able to infiltrate into the front part of the recessed part 6414. This makes it possible to weaken the flow of liquid entering the back. This allows the front frame 10014 to easily prevent liquid from entering.

The fitting portion 6426d is formed to be elongated in the lateral direction so as to be able to fit into the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212), and is a portion that receives a load from the operating device 10300. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-shaped reinforcing ribs 6426d1 that are coupled to a lower surface and a front longitudinal portion 6426c formed on the extending proximal end side.

The reinforcing ribs 6426d1 can suppress vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting part 6426d, so even if a load that displaces the operating device 10300 downward is applied, the rigidity of the fitting part 6426d can withstand it. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operation device 10300 from being excessively displaced.

Here, the operating member 10300 is placed above the resin member 6427. Therefore, the load associated with the player's operation of the operating member 10300 and vibrations is transferred to the plate-like support portion 640 through the resin member.
6 and to the covered foundation member 6410 disposed downstream thereof, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is supported by the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

In this embodiment, the bottom surface of the main body part 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side (see FIG. 234). The direction component can be directed to the front side (load can be released to the front side).

That is, it is possible to avoid problems that may occur due to the load generated from the operating device 10300 being transmitted to the back side (outer frame 11 and inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) may shake, which may affect the flow of the shot ball, or the board box 13 may shake.
It is possible to prevent malfunctions such as cracking of the board due to load being transmitted to 0 to 104 or the electronic board.

Next, the top effect device 6500 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 235 to 264. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. Note that in FIGS. 235 and 236, the lower tray unit 640 described above is
0 and the operation device 10300 are omitted, and the upper direction device 6500 is the metal main body part 10.
The disassembled state is shown from 014a forward.

As shown in FIG. 235, the upper production device 6500 includes a pair of left and right sound devices 661.
An illumination board 657 that is a device that covers the front side of 0 and has a light emitting means such as an LED inside.
0, and each component that acts as an intermediary to deliver the light emitted from the LED to the player is provided.

As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (plate spring) 6584d that generates an urging force in the direction of separation from the metal main body portion 10014a is disposed on the back side of the upper presentation device 6500.
Thereby, it is possible to increase the fastening force of the fastening screw that fixes the top presentation device 6500 to the metal main body portion 10014a (stable fastening and fixation).

FIG. 237 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device 6500, and FIG. 238 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device 6500.
500 is an exploded rear perspective view. In addition, in FIGS. 237 and 238, the upper presentation device 6500
The top cover member 6510 is shown in a state in which it is disassembled upward.

The upper presentation device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 occupying the front portion below the upper lid member 6510, and front units 6520 to
It mainly includes rear units 6560 to 6580 arranged behind the unit 6550.

The upper lid member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the upper presentation device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and is a main body plate that is configured as a semi-elliptical plate-shaped portion that is formed by dividing a horizontally long ellipse into front and rear parts. 6511, a plurality of insertion holes 6512 formed vertically near the front edge of the main body plate 6511 and configured to allow fastening screws to be inserted therethrough, and a plurality of insertion holes 6512 extending downward from the back side of the main body plate 6511. A plurality of fastening portions 6513 are configured such that a female threaded hole is formed from the back surface of the extending tip, and a fastening screw inserted into the metal body portion 10014a can be fastened into the female threaded hole.
Mainly prepare for.

The upper lid member 6510 has a metal main body portion 10014 on the back side where the fastening portion 6513 extends.
Other constituent members of the upper presentation device 6500 are supported by the fastening screws that are fastened and fixed to a and inserted through the insertion holes 6512. That is, by utilizing the mechanical rigidity of the upper cover member 6510, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the front end side portion of the upper presentation device 6500.

The fastening portion 6513 has a plate-shaped plate portion 6513 connected to the main body plate portion 6511 on its front side.
Equipped with a. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in a manner of falling forward.

The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is arranged to face the front surface of the plate in which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see corresponding FIG. 125(a) described above, the fastening portion 419 is connected to the fastening portion 6513, and the plate portion 6513a is connected to the enlarged rib 4.
19a), the upper lid member 6510 can prevent the acoustic device 6610 from coming off the metal main body 10014a.

The upper lid member 6510 has an uneven portion 6514 recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface and extending downward from the lower surface as a decoration over the entire surface. This uneven portion 651
4, the force for resisting loads in the direction perpendicular to the surface can be increased compared to the case where the upper lid member 6510 of the same thickness is composed of a plate-like member with a smooth surface (the shape can be easily maintained). can).

FIG. 239 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper presentation device 6500.
500 is an exploded rear perspective view. In addition, in FIGS. 239 and 240, the upper presentation device 6500
The illustration of the upper lid member 6510 is omitted, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are shown disassembled in front of the rear units 6560 to 6580. Note that in this embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 are arranged diagonally downward (frontward and downward) with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580.
The upper presentation device 6500 can be disassembled by moving it in the direction in which the extending plate portion 6552 is formed (the direction along which the surface extends), but details will be described later.

In this embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have the role of receiving light emitted from light emitting means such as LEDs, and refracting or transmitting the light, and the rear units 6560 to
6580 has the role of a light emitting means such as an LED and the role of supporting an illumination board on which the light emitting means such as an LED is arranged. First, the rear units 6560 to 6580 will be described in detail.

FIG. 241(a) is a front view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and FIG. 241(b) is a front view of the rear units 6560 to 6580.
242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580.

As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the rear units 6560 to 6580 include a partitioning member 6560 that partitions the internal space into a plurality of sections when viewed from the front, and a plurality of LEDs that irradiate light to the partitioning member 6560. An illumination board 6570 is arranged, and a pair is stacked on the back side of the partition member 6560 and is disposed with a slight gap from the illumination board 6570 in the inner area of the outer shape, and is supported on the surface in the outer part. It mainly includes a back support member 6580.

Note that surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the illumination board 6570 can be maintained, and it can be supported so that it can be displaced back and forth by the gap between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580. It means that.

The partition member 6560 is disposed close to the front side of the illumination board 6570 and facing the illumination board 6570.
The light emitted from each illumination unit 6574 to 6576 of 570 is divided into sections from the vicinity of the illumination board 6570. By dividing the area in this way, the light emitted from each of the illumination sections 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each section, even when the light emission mode of the light emitted from each of the illumination sections 6574 to 6576 differs greatly. It is also possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

The partition member 6560 includes a facing plate portion 6561 disposed to face the illumination board 6570, a central light hole 6562 bored in the left and right center portions of the facing plate portion 6561, and a facing plate portion 656.
1, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted through the back support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of fastening portions 6564 extending to the back surface of the opposing plate portion 6561. A large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 and a rectangular cylindrical opposing plate portion 6561 surrounding the central light hole 6562.
a central cylindrical portion 6566 that extends toward the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561; It mainly includes a plate-shaped connecting part 6568 that is formed from a plate-shaped part and connects the opposing plate part 6561, the center cylinder part 6566, and the left and right cylinder parts 6567 on the front side of the opposite plate part 6561.

The opposing plate part 6561 has a flange part 6 which is provided in a left and right elongated shape protruding from its upper edge to the back side.
561a to 6561c. The first flange portion 6561a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portions 6561b are formed as a pair of left and right, and the first flange portions 6561b are
It extends from the position where a cut is made from the left and right ends of 561a to the vicinity of fastening part 6564.
The third flange portions 6561c are formed as a left and right pair and extend from a position opposite to the end of the second flange portion 6561b with the fastening portion 6564 in between to near the left and right ends of the plate-like coupling portion 6568.

Each of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c has a role as a shielding plate that prevents light from entering and exiting between the partition member 6560 and the illumination board 6570, and at least the cut is provided on the illumination board 6570. It is constructed in a location where light emitted from the LED is unlikely to leak. In other words, even if light enters from the outside, this location is a location where the light is unlikely to mix with the light emitted from the LED.

The cut between the first flange part 6561a and the second flange part 6561b is formed between the center light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563, and is purposely designed to prevent the illumination board 6
570, where no LED is arranged is defined as a cut. Therefore, since there are no LEDs that cause light leakage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of light leakage from the cut.

The break between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is the fastening portion 65
64 is provided, and the cut is purposefully made at the location where the alternative portion that blocks light is provided. That is, even if the light travels to the cut, the light attempting to pass through the cut is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of light leaking from the cut.

Here, the flange parts 6561a to 6561c can be configured as a continuous part, but in that case, the rigidity of the flange parts 6561a to 6561c cannot be ensured sufficiently, and the downward load applied to the partitioning member 6560 (Assuming a downward load applied to a member placed in front of the partition member 6560, a load applied by gravity or a player), it is necessary to counteract it only with the force generated by the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the fastening part 6564. occurs. In this embodiment, as the number of fastening parts 6564 increases, not only does the number of man-hours for tightening the fastening screws increase, but also the surface area of the illumination board 6570 decreases, which limits the locations where LEDs can be placed. This reduces the degree of freedom in designing the 6570.

On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6561a to 6561c into lengths that ensure rigidity, the downward load applied to the partitioning member 6560 can be resisted by the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. Therefore, the number of fastening parts 6564 can be limited, reducing the number of work steps and improving the degree of freedom in designing the illumination board 6570.

Further, in this embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction is designed depending on the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. In this embodiment, the shape of the upper presentation device 6500 is
It is formed in a semi-elliptical shape, with the width in the front and back direction increasing toward the left and right center when viewed from above.
(See Figure 237). Generally, the load applied by the player (for example, a hanging load) is applied at the front end of the upper presentation device 6500, so the load applied by the player at the left and right center of the upper presentation device 6500 is maximum. It gradually becomes smaller as it approaches the left and right ends.

In contrast, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are intentionally made to have different lengths. To be more specific, compared to the horizontal length of the first flange portion 6561a formed in the central portion where the load is maximum, the horizontal length of the second flange portion 6561b arranged on the left and right sides thereof is longer,
Furthermore, the third flange portions 6561c disposed on the left and right sides of the second flange portion 6561b are longer than the left and right lengths of the second flange portion 6561b. In other words, the left and right lengths are the shortest at the left and right center portions,
It gradually becomes longer as it approaches the left and right ends. As a result, it is possible to generate a counterforce to the load applied to the top effect device 6500 without excess or deficiency.

Thereby, deformation and displacement of the partitioning member 6560 can be suppressed, so that the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partitioning member 6560 and the illumination board 6570 can be stably maintained. Note that the relative relationship (positional relationship) can be maintained by deforming or displacing the illumination board 657 in the direction of separation.
This is not limited to preventing the illumination board 6570 from being displaced due to a decrease in the force that holds the zero, but it is also possible to prevent the illumination board 6570 from being destroyed due to a compressive load being applied to the illumination board 6570 due to deformation or displacement in the approaching direction. This also includes the case of preventing deformation.

The center light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563 are LEDs arranged on the illumination board 6570.
A plurality of through holes are drilled in accordance with the pattern of. The central light hole 6562 is a single L
While configured as a set of through holes that are slightly larger than the outer shape of the ED, the left and right light holes 6563 are
It is configured as a set of through holes sized to surround a plurality of LEDs.

The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580, and the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed to protrude from the fastening portion 6564 toward the back side. As a result, the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560
and the back support member 6580 are aligned.

The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 includes a front-side cylindrical portion having the same diameter and extending toward the front side, and includes an insertion hole 6565a formed at the bottom of the distal end thereof through which a fastening screw can be inserted. This insertion hole 656
A fastening screw passing through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 from the back side is inserted into 5a, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a partition unit 6540, which will be described later. By being configured like this,
The process of inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed while the rear units 6560 to 6580 are assembled (see FIGS. 239 and 240).

The central cylindrical portion 6566 and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 extend until they reach the rear side ends of the front units 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central cylindrical portion 6566 and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 enters the front units 6520 to 6550.

The plate-like joint portion 6568 is a portion to which the load is transmitted via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the upper presentation device 6500, and the central cylinder portion 6566 The top surface is placed at a slightly higher position than the top end of the. As a result, the plate-like joint portion 6568 takes over the load before the central cylindrical portion 6566, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a load is applied to the central cylindrical portion 6566, and prevent the central cylindrical portion 6566 from deforming or displacing. This makes it easier to avoid situations where this happens.

The plate-shaped joint portion 6568 extends downward until the plate-shaped portion reaches the left and right cylinder portions 6567. As a result, when a load is transmitted to the plate-shaped joint portion 6568 via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the load is also counteracted by the resistance force generated by the plate-shaped portions that reach the left and right cylinder portions 6567. can do. In this case, since it is formed of a plate-like part, a counter force can be generated by the bending deformation of the plate-like part itself, so that displacement and deformation of the left and right cylindrical parts 6567 can be suppressed.

The illumination board 6570 is a so-called printed circuit board, and includes a plate-shaped board portion 6571 and a fastening portion 656 of the partition member 6560, which is a portion drilled or cut out in the board portion 6571.
4 is inserted into the fastening insertion part 6572, a large-diameter insertion part 6573 is bored through the base plate part 6571 and the large-diameter cylindrical part 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted therethrough, and A first lighting section 6574 formed from LEDs (shown as uniform rectangles in FIG. 241(b)), and a plurality of LEs arranged symmetrically with respect to the first lighting section 6574.
A second lighting section 6575 formed from D and arranged near the vertical center of the substrate section 6571;
A third lighting section 6576 arranged symmetrically along the lower end of the substrate section 6571 and electrical wiring.

(not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 241(a) and 241(b), each illumination section 6574 to 6576 is formed from a plurality of LEDs that can emit light to the front side along the front-rear direction. They are arranged according to their physical position. That is, the first lighting section 6574 is located at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second lighting section 6575 is located at a position surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563, and the third lighting section 6576 is located below the partition member 6560. Each is placed below the edge. Thereby, each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 illuminates a separate area divided by the division member 6560. Note that the first illumination section 6574 and the second illumination section 6575 illuminate the area inside the partitioning member 6560, whereas the third illumination section 6576 illuminates the area inside the partitioning member 6560.
illuminate the outer area of

Note that the third illumination section 6576 is illustrated as being partially shielded by the partitioning member 6560 when viewed from the front. As described later, the light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 is transmitted to the light receiving member 65.
58, the light emitted from the third lighting section 6576 can be prevented from being blocked by the partitioning member 6560.
and the partitioning member 6560 may be arranged to at least partially overlap in the front-rear direction.

The thickness of the base plate portion 6571 is the same as that of the fastening portion 65 of the partitioning member 6560 in the fastening insertion portion 6572.
64 and the back support member 6580 are designed with dimensions that do not apply fastening force. That is, the illumination board 6570 is connected to the partition member 6560 and the back support member 65 without being fastened and fixed.
Supported between 80 and 80.

The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed into a vertically elongated oval shape (or a half oval shape) when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to improve assembly efficiency, which will be described in detail later.

The back support member 6580 is a member that covers the audio device 6610 from the front side, and is a pair of members having substantially symmetrical shapes with each other, and is a member of the front plate portion 6 disposed opposite to the illumination board 6570.
581, a flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the front plate portion 6581 toward the front side, and an upper plate portion having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6582 and extending in a plate shape toward the rear side. 6583
and a rear box part 6584 that is connected to the left and right edges (edges on the opposite side of the side where the pair of members face each other) and the lower edge of the front plate part 6581 and is formed in a box shape and opens to the back side. A pair of rear box parts 6
584, a lower box part 6585 formed in a box shape that has a smooth upper surface and opens downward on the side closer to the rear box part 6584 on the other side, and the lower box part 6585 and the front plate part 65.
A facing plate part 6586 which is a plate-shaped part connected to the 81 and is disposed facing the mating member (back support member 6580), and a cut vertically penetrating between the facing plate part 6586 and the bottom box part 6585. It mainly includes a cutout portion 6587 which is a cutout.

The front plate part 6581 has a plurality of fastening supports that are made up of pairs of oval ribs capable of supporting the fastening part 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 and insertion holes through which fastening screws fastened to the fastening part 6564 are inserted. portion 6581a and a through hole formed from a vertically elongated oval shape with a left and right width slightly longer than the diameter of the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560, and is arranged at a position overlapping the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 front and back. A plurality of positioning holes 6581b and a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c, which are mainly drilled in the lower edge forming the boundary with the rear box portion 6584, through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front units 6520 to 6550 can be inserted; Similar to the screw insertion part 6581c, the rear box part 658
Front units 6520 to 6550 are formed in a long hole shape along the lower edge forming the boundary with 4.
a plurality of long positioning holes 6581d used for positioning, and a wiring hole 658 that is drilled at a location corresponding to the connector 6577 of the illumination board 6570 and allows electrical wiring to pass back and forth.
1e and are mainly provided.

The inner width of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a in the left and right direction constituting the short axis is the same as that of the partition member 656.
The outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564 is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564 of the
It is made longer than the left and right width of the fastening insertion part 6572 of 70. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening part 6564 is inserted into the inside of the elliptical rib of the fastening support part 6581a, and the illumination board 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the elliptical rib. (See FIG. 244(a)).

The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550.
It is opened along the moving direction of ~6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed in such a manner that they slope downward toward the front side (see FIGS. 244(a) and 246(b)).

The front units 6520 to 6550 have screw insertion portions 6581c and positioning long holes 6581.
It is assembled into the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the direction of inclination formed by d, and the fastening screws are screwed in along the direction of the downward inclination (see FIG. 247).

This makes it easier to avoid interference between the front units 6520 to 6550 and the illumination board 6570 compared to the case where the openings are made in the front-rear direction.
Since the position of 81d can be brought closer to the illumination board 6570, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed to have the same size, a wide area for disposing the illumination board 6570 can be secured, and
When the illumination board 6570 is formed to have the same size, the area in which the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed can be narrowed (it can be formed compactly).

The flange portion 6582 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c of the partition member 6560. When a downward load (load in a hanging direction) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that suppresses the partition member 6560 from falling forward.

The upper plate portion 6583 includes a plurality of fitting recesses 6583a arranged at positions corresponding to the fastening portions 6513 (see FIG. 238) and recessed so as to be able to fit into the fastening portions 6513. Fitting recess 6
583a is open at the top and rear and is formed into a rectangular shape when viewed in the left-right direction (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513).

The rear box portion 6584 includes a sound transmitting portion 6 made of a punching metal that is covered with an overhang portion 6584a that overhangs to the front side than the front plate portion 6581, and an opening formed in the overhang portion 6584a.
584b, a light receiving section 6584c formed from a light-transmitting member disposed at the right end of the overhanging section 6584a of the right side member, and a light receiving section 6584c disposed at the most center position of the upper end (position near the front plate section 6581). A pair of plate-shaped metal spring members 6584d are provided and are formed to be able to generate a biasing force in the direction of repulsion from the metal main body portion 10014a in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), and an insertion hole 6512 of the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237). ), and a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which fastening screws inserted through the fastening portions 6584e are fastened.

The overhanging portion 6584a has an upper edge formed in a shape that follows the lower edge shape of the illumination board 6570 (
(see FIG. 241), the upper surface of which constitutes a guide surface that guides the front units 6520 to 6550.

The sound transmission section 6584b is a section through which sound waves generated from the acoustic device 6610 (see FIG. 235) pass. This sound transmission section 6584b is arranged at a position facing the vibrating membrane 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610.

The light receiving portion 6584c is a portion that receives light emitted from a lighting portion 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed from a single LED disposed at the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and displays it to the player as a light emitting effect. It is. In this embodiment, this illumination unit 10014c is the illumination board 65
The light emission is controlled in a manner different from that of 70. That is, while the light emitting effect of the illumination board 6570 is executed during a variable effect with a high probability of occurrence, a normal variable effect, a reach effect, a demonstration effect, etc., the light emitting effect of the illumination unit 10014c is performed when the probability of occurrence is high. This is executed when a performance that is extremely low and extremely advantageous to the player occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the lighting section 10014c.

The lower box portion 6585 is a portion into which the front units 6520 to 6550 enter from below, and is a fastening portion 658 to which a fastening screw inserted into the metal body portion 10014a from the back side is fastened.
5a.

The notch 6587 is one side of a hole through which the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is vertically bored on the lower surface of the left and right center portion of the acoustic device 6610 (the portion farthest from the vibrating membrane 6611). form. That is, the support plate section 10014 that supports the back side of the acoustic device 6610
The sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through the hole surrounded by the notch 6587 and the notch 6587.

The sound passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as sound directed towards the front side as the vibration membrane 6611 vibrates, whereas the sound is outputted as sound directed toward the back side as the vibration membrane 6611 vibrates. This is the sound that passes through the internal cavity of the audio device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex speaker) and is emitted to the outside from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612. By providing a plurality of sound output paths in this manner, sounds with different tones can be generated simultaneously.

FIG. 244(a) shows the partition member 6 along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. 241.
244(b) is a partial sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the rear support member 6580, and the rear support member 6580 taken along the line CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb in FIG. 241. and a partial sectional view of the acoustic device 6610, and FIG. 245(a) is a partial sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. 245(b) is a partial sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along the line CCXLVb-CCXLVb in FIG. 241, and FIG. 246(a) is a partial sectional view of the CCXLVIa in FIG. 246(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along the line CCXLVIa, and FIG. FIG. 6570 is a partial cross-sectional view of back support member 6580 and acoustic device 6610.

Note that in FIGS. 244(a) to 246(b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is shown enlarged. As can be seen from this enlarged view, the upper end of the illumination board 6570 and the flange portion 6
A slight gap is formed between the lower edge of 582 and the lower edge. Thereby, even if the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of vibrations from the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to suppress the illumination board 6570 from vibrating (width of vibration) due to the vibration of the back support member 6580. .

As shown in FIGS. 244(a) and 245(a), a fastening screw inserted into the fastening support part 6581a of the back support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening part 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 with the illumination board 6570 in between. By being inserted, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the illumination board 6570. That is, the illuminated board 657
0, the fastening insertion part 6572 is only aligned with the fastening part 6564, and the fastening part is not fixed to the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580.

Further, while the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a abut against the back surface of the illumination board 6570, the partitioning member 6560 is separated from the illumination board 6570 in its front and back positions. That is, in this embodiment, since the illumination board 6570 is not sandwiched between the front and back positions, the illumination board 6570 is not sandwiched between the front and rear positions.
70 can be displaced in the front-back direction (for example, tilted).

Furthermore, the lower edge of the illumination board 6570 is not supported by either the back support member 6580 or the partition member 6560. This also applies to FIGS. 244(b) to 246(b) described below.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the large diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illumination board 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. Here, the large diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape that allows a gap to be formed below the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the ribs of the fastening support part 6581a are formed in an oval shape that can form a gap below the fastening part 6564 (Fig. 244(a).
)reference). It will be explained that by forming in this way, the partitioning member 6560 can be easily assembled to the back support member 6580.

As in the past, for example, the fastening support part 6 has an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening part 6564.
When the ribs 581a are formed, it is necessary to assemble the partitioning member 6560 with the vertical and horizontal positions aligned with the back support member 6580.

However, in this embodiment, since the illumination board 6570 is disposed in an unfixed state between the division member 6560 and the back support member 6580, when the division member 6560 is assembled, the back support member 6580 of the illumination board 6570 It is also necessary to align the position with respect to the target, which may make the work difficult.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b have a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape). Since it is formed with

As an example of the assembly order, first, the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is attached to the illumination board 65.
The illumination board 6570 is attached to the partitioning member 6560 so as to be inserted into the large diameter insertion portion 6573 of 70. At this time, the arrangement of the illumination board 6570 with respect to the partition member 6560 is such that the large diameter insertion portion 65
It is not necessary to set it in the longitudinal direction of 73, and any position may be used.

In this embodiment, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are formed at positions where they can come into contact with the illumination board 6570, so that when the illumination board 6570 is assembled to the division member 6560, the division member of the illumination board 6570 Positional deviation with respect to 6560 is significantly suppressed.

Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is connected to the fastening support portion 6564 of the back support member 6580.
It is inserted inside the rib of 81a. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening part 6564 with respect to the fastening support part 6581a does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a, and may be placed at any position. In other words, it is sufficient to perform rough positioning (for example, positioning to the extent that the connector 6577 (see Figure 243) is passed through the wiring hole 6581e (see Figure 242), positioning with a sufficiently long permissible width in the vertical direction), so the fastening part It is possible to improve the work efficiency of inserting the 6564 into the inside of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a.

Next, the partition member 6560 is moved relative to the back support member 6580 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rib of the fastening support part 6581a, and the fastening part 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support part 6581a are aligned. and screw in the fastening screw (see Fig. 244(a)).

In this state, even if the illumination board 5670 is out of position, the partitioning member 6560 can be lowered by its own weight to a position where the large diameter insertion part 6573 is supported by the large diameter cylindrical part 6565 (see FIG. 244(b)). and the back support member 6580.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is disposed non-fixed between the partition member 6560 and the back support member, which generally makes it difficult to align the illumination board 6570. By forming the fastening insertion part 6572, the large-diameter insertion part 6573, the ribs of the fastening support part 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b in a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape), even though it is an assembled mode. , it is possible to improve assembly efficiency. In addition, even if the illumination board 5670 is displaced, it is configured to be corrected to its original position by its own weight.
It is possible to prevent the effect of the light emitting performance during the game from being degraded over a long period of time due to the positional shift of the illumination board 5670.

The enlarged hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. 245(b). Central light hole 6562
The enlarged holes 6562a are arranged in an inverted T-shape (arranged in 4 locations, see FIG. 241) in the left and right center portions, and the enlarged holes 6562a are arranged in a roughly gourd shape (approximately pot shape) in 8 locations outside of the enlarged holes 6562a. (See FIG. 241) Direct entry hole 6562b. Note that the direct entry hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG. 263.

The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through hole through which light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 passes, and the portion forming the outer edge is raised toward the front side, and the inner wall is raised toward the front side (the side away from the light source). It is formed in an inclined manner so that the opposing distance becomes wider as it goes toward the end.

Thereby, the irradiation width of the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 can be defined. That is, depending on the design aspect of the enlarged hole 6562a (the angle of inclination of the inner wall, the raised height, etc.), the way the light is shown to the player can be changed.

In this embodiment, the tip of the portion of the enlarged hole 6562a that is raised toward the front side is raised to a position where it comes into contact with the closing portion 6521c of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (see FIG. 263). Thereby, the light that has passed through the enlarged hole 6562a can be made to enter the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 without leaking.

In FIG. 246(a), a screw insertion portion 6581c is illustrated, and in FIG. 246(b), a positioning elongated hole 6581d is illustrated. The screw insertion part 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d are
As described above, the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled and fastened to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along this inclination direction.

Front units 6520 to 6 along screw insertion portions 6581c and positioning elongated holes 6581d
550, the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members can be improved compared to the case where they are assembled in the front-rear direction.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246(a), the illumination board 6570 can be positioned to the extent that it covers the area on the front side of the screw insertion part 6581c, so the size of the illumination board 6570 can be secured. . On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front units 6520 to 6550 can also be widely used, the size of the rear box part 6584 and the acoustic device 6610 to be accommodated can be secured.

In particular, in this embodiment, the screw insertion portions 6581c and the positioning elongated holes 6581d are formed in such a manner that they are inclined downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides where the diaphragm 6611 of the speaker is arranged. (Figs. 235 and 24)
(see 6).

As shown in FIGS. 246(a) and 246(b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning elongated hole 6581d are inclined downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is The reason why it is formed along (not inclined) is that the cutting direction of the resin mold used when manufacturing the back support member 6580 is the front-rear direction.

In other words, in order to simply configure the resin mold (consisting of two resin molds that are separated in the front-back direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d should be inserted into the back support member 658.
It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same extraction direction as the fastening support portion 6581a, the fitting recessed portion 6583a, etc. formed in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, this pulling direction is set to the fastening support portion 6581a.
The screw insertion portion 658 is set in the same front-rear direction as the direction in which the fitting recess 6583a is formed.
1c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed in an irregular shape (a shape that changes in the hole formation direction (depth direction)).

In particular, the screw insertion part 6581c is a through hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the back side fastening part 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a part that receives a load generated due to fastening and fixing. The shape of the screw insertion part 6581c is such that the thickness of the upper edge of the part where the load is applied during fastening is
Since the hole is thinner toward the center, load imbalance tends to occur between the upper edge and the rest, and there is a risk that the fastening screws may loosen depending on the usage conditions and years of use.

In order to prevent the fastening screws from loosening, fastening screws with large head diameters may be used, but
This results in higher costs due to the difference in quality from the required quality of the fastening screws used for other fastening locations. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large diameter head is used only at the problematic fastening points, it will lead to higher costs because the fastening screws cannot be made into common parts, but at the same time, it will be necessary to use fastening screws with large diameter heads in all the fastening points. If this method is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will increase, leading to higher costs in terms of material costs.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610, which is disposed opposite to each other across the head of the fastening screw inserted into the screw insertion portion 6581c, is formed in the shape of a depression ( A retaining plate part 6621 is provided, which is a part of the recessed part and is formed as an upper part of the plate parallel to the plate part in which the screw insertion part 6581c is formed.

The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure an area between the back support member 6580 and the head of the fastening screw. In addition, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is arranged in the direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw becomes loose, it restricts the further advancement of the fastening screw and prevents the fastening screw from falling out. It can be prevented.

The retaining plate portion 6621 is formed with a dimension that leaves a slight distance from the head of the fastening screw when the fastening screw is not loosened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted through the head of the fastening screw.

On the other hand, if the fastening screw becomes loose, the movement of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, the sound device 66
When audio is output from the front unit 10, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

The front wall 6620 also has a fastening support portion 6581a (
A plurality of contact avoidance recesses 6622 are provided at the back side of the through hole (see FIG. 242).
The contact avoidance recess 6622 is inserted into the fastening support part 6581a and is inserted into the fastening part 6564 (FIG. 243).
It is recessed to the extent that it is possible to avoid contact with the head of the fastening screw that is screwed into the screw (refer to the following) (see below) (a size that allows for a slight gap between the screw and the head).

This can prevent the vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partitioning member 6560 via the fastening screw. In addition, since the axial direction of the through-hole of the fastening support part 6581a is the same front-back direction as the cutting direction of the resin mold, the wall thickness of the plate part to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction, and is sufficient. A fastening force can be generated. Therefore, the fastening support part 65
Although there is a low possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the fastening screw 81a becomes loose, if the fastening screw becomes loose, the contact avoidance recess 6622 performs the same function as the above-mentioned slip-off prevention plate 6621.
can be caused to occur.

That is, when the fastening screw becomes loose, the movement of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the contact avoidance recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, the sound device 66
When audio is output from the front unit 10, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

As described above, by being configured to be able to detect the transmission of vibrations caused by contact between the head of the fastening screw and the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoidance recess 6622 due to the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw, It is possible to notice the occurrence of loosening, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the fastening screw is left loosened.

For example, an arrangement may be made in which an abnormal noise is generated by the transmission of vibrations, or a structure in which vibrations are detected.

As explained in FIGS. 244(a) to 246(b), in this embodiment, the illumination board 65
70 is placed close to the back support member 6580, but is placed without being fixed to the back support member 6580. As a result, while the acoustic device 6610 and the illumination board 6570 can be placed close to each other with the back support member 6580 in between, the vibration of the back support member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the illumination board 6570, and the illumination board 6570 is Breaking of the substrate 6570 can be avoided.

Here, the partitioning member 6560 is a production portion of the illumination board 6570 (i.e., the illumination portion 6574 to
6576), the area of the connecting portion between the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is narrow in order to ensure a large proportion of the presentation part on the surface of the illumination board 6570. It's easy to get caught.

Therefore, there is a problem that the partitioning member 6560 is likely to be insufficiently fixed, and without countermeasures, vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 may be transmitted to the partitioning member 6560 via the back support member 6580, and the partitioning member When the 6560 vibrates, there is a risk that the presentation effect will be poor, the fastened parts may become loose, and the partition member 6560 itself may be damaged.

In contrast, in this embodiment, vibration of the partitioning member 6560 is suppressed by fixing the partitioning member 6560 from a different direction. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 247.

FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the upper presentation device 6500. In FIG. 247, the upper direction device 65
The fastening locations, the fastening directions, and the fastening directions of each component of 00 are schematically illustrated. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is indicated by a T-shape, and the horizontal line of the T-shape indicates the head of the fastening screw,
A vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the threaded portion of the fastening screw.

As shown in FIG. 247, in the upper presentation device 6500, front units 6520 to 6550 surround the front and lower surfaces of rear units 6560 to 6580, and the front units 6520 to 6550
6550 is supported by the upper lid member 6510, but the upper lid member 6510 is only fastened to the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and is not fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560. .

This prevents the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 from being reinforced. In this embodiment, since the top cover member 6510 is formed from a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 are transmitted via the back support member 6580, the top cover member 6510 moves in the thickness direction ( It is easy to displace (deform) in the vertical direction).

Along with this displacement (deformation), the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed to curve with respect to the center of the front and back, the front-to-back distance between the insertion holes 6512 that are formed apart in the front and back is shortened. This generates a load that displaces the partition unit 6540 to the rear side, and can apply a compressive load to the partition member 6560 in the front-rear direction.

That is, since the back support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540 can sandwich the partition member 6560 and apply a load, even if the partition member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration can be suppressed. I can do it.

Here, even if the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is shortened, the partition unit 6540
When the lower side is displaced toward the front side (displaced toward the side away from the partitioning member 6560), the load applied from the partitioning unit 6540 to the partitioning member 6560 is likely to be insufficient, and the partitioning member 656
There is a possibility that the effect of suppressing the zero vibration may be insufficient.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the displacement of the lower end of the partitioning unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the guided unit 6550, so that the lower side of the partitioning unit 6540 can be prevented from displacing toward the front side. As a result, from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 656
It is possible to secure a sufficient load to be applied to 0.

At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed at the end of the guided unit 6550 in the direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 (see FIG. 254(a)), the acoustic device 6610 is connected to the rear support member 6580. The vibration transmission direction can be along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the curved deformation of the guided unit 6550, and it is possible to suppress the front and rear fastening points from moving in the front-back direction. Therefore, guided unit 6550
Even if vibration is transmitted to the partition unit 6540, the function of suppressing the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction can be sufficiently ensured.

As shown in FIG. 247, by devising the fastening points, the acoustic device 66 can easily generate vibrations.
By arranging the illumination board 6570 close to the acoustic device 6610 (or back support member 6580) in an unfixed state, the illumination board 6570 is prevented from being damaged.
), it is possible to suppress the vibration of the partitioning member 6560 due to the vibration being transmitted to the partitioning member 6560 that prevents the partitioning member 6560 from being separated from the partitioning member 6560 by more than an allowable amount.

That is, while improving the durability of the illumination board 6570 disposed close to the audio device 6610, it is possible to improve the shape maintenance performance of the upper presentation device 6500.

In addition, one purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in this embodiment is to
For example, it corresponds to a displacement amount of 10. That is, the upper lid member 6510 has the fastening portion 6513
This is because the back side is fixed and the back side is extended in a thin plate shape in the front and back, so the front side is likely to be bent and displaced in such a manner that the amount of displacement on the front side is larger than that on the back side.

For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end of the upper lid member 6510, the center of the radius of curvature is located below the upper lid member 6510, starting from the rear end due to the shape of the upper lid member 6510. It can have a curved displacement. In this case, a tensile load in the front-rear direction is applied to the upper lid member 6510 itself, while a compressive load is applied to other members disposed below it.

The direction of this compressive load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, so it is along the front-back direction on the back side, which is the base end side, but as the amount of displacement increases (as it moves toward the front side), the direction of the compressive load is along the front-back direction. It follows a direction that slopes downward toward the front side.

In this embodiment, the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate part 6547 is a direction that is inclined downwardly toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction. The direction of the compressive load caused by the displacement of the member 6510 can be brought closer to each other.

As a result, in addition to being able to generate sufficient resistance force against compressive load at the fastening position, the component of the compressive load applied in the direction of shearing the fastening screw (direction orthogonal to the fastening direction) is reduced, so that the fastening screw can be easily ruptured. can be suppressed.

The fastening screw whose fastening direction is formed in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side is the plate guide unit 6.
550, the plate guide unit 6550 is disposed close to the lower side and rear side of the illumination board 6570 (see screw insertion portion 6581c etc. in FIG. 246(a)). In this embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is disposed non-fixed and is configured to be easily displaced, but the allowable displacement of the illumination board 6570 can be limited by the plate guide unit 6550. That is, even if the illumination board 6570 is displaced, if the amount of displacement becomes excessive, the illumination board 6570 can be prevented from being excessively displaced by being able to come into contact with the plate guide unit 6550.

Further, since the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the back side of the illumination board 6570 (the side where the audio device 6610 is arranged), displacement of the illumination board 6570 toward the back side can be particularly suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the illumination board 6570 from coming close to the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration generation source.

In this embodiment, the fastening parts (fastening support part 6581a, insertion hole 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the front-back direction are gathered at the left and right center side (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction is downward toward the front side. The fastening parts along the inclined direction (screw insertion part 6581c, insertion plate part 6547, etc.) are
They are gathered on the left and right sides (see FIGS. 242 and 256), and are not arranged close to each other.

This makes it possible to suppress the influence of deformation (displacement) that occurs in one fastening part on the other fastening part. In other words, even if a fastening part along the front-rear direction becomes loose and displacement occurs in the front-back direction, the affected part can be limited to the fastening part along the front-rear direction, so the downward slope occurs. It can be avoided that a load is applied to the fastening portion along the direction in a direction that is inclined to the fastening direction (along the front-rear direction). Thereby, the occurrence of loosening of the screw can be suppressed.

In addition, by fixing a portion that is elongated in the front-rear direction, such as the left-right center side, with a fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-back direction, it is possible to improve the resistance of the upper direction device 6500 against a load in the push-down direction.

On the other hand, it is thought that a fastening part whose fastening direction is along a direction that slopes downward toward the front side is likely to have a lower resistance to a load in the downward direction compared to a fastening part whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the resistance force against the load in the downward direction is reduced by arranging the fastening parts along the direction in which the fastening direction slopes downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides that are formed short along the front-rear direction. The arrangement area for the illumination board 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 can be secured while minimizing the influence of this.

FIG. 248 is a sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580 taken along the line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241(a). Note that the specific location is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 248, in the illumination board 6570, the large diameter insertion portion 6573 is connected to the partition member 6560.
The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is in contact with the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction. Furthermore, while the front and rear surfaces abut the left and right side parts of the partitioning member 6560 and the left and right side parts of the back support member 6580, the abutment positions are formed so as not to coincide on the front and rear sides.

With this configuration, the durability of the illumination board 6570 can be improved and the ease with which displacement occurs can be adjusted. These will be explained in order below. First, improvement in the durability of the illumination board 6570 will be described.

Here, if the front and rear surfaces of the illumination board 6570 come into contact with the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at the same positions on the front and back, for some reason (error during resin molding, poor fastening, etc.), the partition When the distance between the abutting portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 becomes shorter than the thickness of the illumination board 6570, compressive force is applied to the illumination board 6570, and if the applied load is large, the electric There is a possibility that the decorative board 6570 may be broken.

Furthermore, even if no compressive force is applied to the illumination board 6570 during assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the moving acoustic device 6610, causing a load (for example, a load in the compressive direction). may be applied, and there is a risk that the illumination board 6570 may break due to this load.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the positions where the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 abut on the front and rear surfaces of the illumination board 6570 do not match (there are places where they abut at shifted positions). Even if a load is applied to the illumination board 6570 in the manner described above, the load is not a load that compresses the illumination board 6570, but a load that curves the illumination board 6570.
Therefore, since the illumination board 6570 can be flexibly deformed, the possibility of cracking of the illumination board 6570 can be reduced.

Next, adjustment of the likelihood of displacement of the illumination board 6570 will be explained. Illumination board 6570
In this embodiment, the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 are inserted to prevent misalignment, but in this embodiment, they are densely arranged near the left and right center ( (See Figure 243).

In addition, since the illumination board 6570 is in contact with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction, contact resistance between the illumination board 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a larger diameter than the fastening portion 6564, the contact area is naturally increased and sufficient frictional resistance can be ensured.

Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the illumination board 6570 near the left and right center portions of the illumination board 6570. Therefore, even when surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 of the illumination board 6570 can be easily maintained.

On the other hand, on the left and right sides (especially the lower side) of the illumination board 6570, neither the large diameter cylindrical part 6565 nor the fastening part 6564 are arranged, and there is no compressive load from the front and back, so the illumination board Compared to the left and right center portions of 6570, displacement can occur more easily.

Therefore, when the surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the illumination board 6610
The direction of light emitted from the second illumination section 6575 and the third illumination section 6576 of 70 can be easily changed.

In this embodiment, since the audio devices 6610 are arranged as a pair of left and right, each audio device 66
The vibration mode of the illumination board 6570 changes based on the ten vibration modes. That is, there is a case where only the sound device 6610 on the right side outputs sound and the right side of the illumination board 6570 is vibrated preferentially, and a case where sound is output only from the sound device 6610 on the left side and the left side of the illumination board 6570 is vibrated preferentially. In the case where the illumination board 6 is outputted from both the left and right acoustic devices 6610,
The illumination board 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes depending on when both left and right sides of the illumination board 6570 are vibrated.

Next, the front units 6520 to 6550 will be explained. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550, and FIG. 250 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550.
550 is an exploded rear perspective view. Note that in FIGS. 249 and 250, illustrations of detailed configuration symbols are omitted for easy understanding.

249 and 250 show a light transmission unit 6520 that transmits light incident from the first lighting section 6574 of the illumination board 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame formed to surround the light transmission unit 6520 and forming an outer frame. The member 6530, a partitioning unit 6540 that comes into contact with the partitioning member 6560 in the front and back and similarly partitions the light, and a guided unit 6550 that is guided to the upper surface of the overhanging part 6584a of the back support member 6580 are shown in an exploded state. Ru.

When producing light emission via the front units 6520 to 6550, the optical transmission unit 6520
receives the light from the first illumination section 6574, the partition unit 6540 receives the light from the second illumination section 6575, and the guided unit 6550 receives the light from the third illumination section 6576. Next, the partition unit 6540 and guided unit 6550 will be explained in detail.

251(a) is a front view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251(b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252(a) is the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550. 252(b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540, FIG. 253(a) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550, and FIG. 253(b) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550. FIG. 6 is a rear view of unit 6550.

254(a) is a sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the CCLIVa-CCLIVa line in FIG. 251(b), and FIG.

254(b) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 along the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line, and FIG. 254(c) is a cross-sectional view of the CCLIVc-CCL
FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 along line IVc.

255 is an exploded front perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550.

The partitioning unit 6540 includes a milky white member 6541 made of a milky white light-transmitting resin material and having a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a light transmission unit 6520 that is formed through the milky white member 6541 in the front and back direction at the center thereof. Through hole 65 formed to allow insertion of the rear portion
42, a pair of fastening portions 6543 which are the inwardly protruding portions of the through hole 6542 and into which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and fastening screws which fasten and fasten the outer frame member 6530 are drilled through so that they can be inserted therethrough. a pair of post-guiding fastening parts 6545 to which fastening screws passing through the through-holes 6565a of the partitioning member 6560 are fastened, extending in a cylindrical shape toward the back side; A pair of box-shaped light receiving sections 6 that are formed in a box shape and open to the back side.
546 and a plate-shaped portion extending downward from the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the partition unit 6540 to the plate guide unit 6550 can be inserted. A plurality of insertion plate parts 6547 in which insertion holes 6547b are formed, and a milky-white member 6541 formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material in a shape that covers the front side of the box-shaped light receiving part 6546.
It mainly includes a transparent covering member 6548 that is fitted and supported by the transparent covering member 6548.

The front side edge of the compartment unit 6540 is formed into a curved shape that swells toward the front side when viewed from above, similar to the upper lid member 6510, and is formed into a substantially inverted triangle when viewed from the front, and the center is located on the back side when viewed from the side. It is formed from a substantially circular arc shape (see FIG. 254(a)).

The milky white member 6541 includes a pair of fastening portions 6541a on its upper surface to which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened. This fastening part 6541
a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed to be inclined downward toward the back side, corresponding to the inclination of a contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) of an optical transmission unit 6520, which will be described later. Thereby, the front end of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate part 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) can be brought into surface contact, and the attitude of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be prevented from changing. I can do it.

The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. Further, the post-guide fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole facing toward the back side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the back side.

The box-shaped light-receiving section 6546 is a part of the illumination board 6570 that is disposed opposite to the second illumination section 6575 (see FIG. 241(b)), and has a front bottom back surface and a lower plate upper surface of the box-shaped light-receiving section 6546. teeth,
A jagged decoration with short left and right widths is formed. This jagged shape is formed by an uneven shape in which protrusions having a triangular cross section are closely aligned.

This shape allows light incident from the back side to be scattered (diffused), so that the box-shaped light receiving section 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front surface thereof can emit light uniformly when viewed from the front.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The insertion plate portion 6547 includes a U-shaped wall portion 6547a that is open at the top when viewed from the rear, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. It mainly includes a protruding rib 6547c that has a semi-elliptic shape and protrudes toward the front side.

By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547a with the front side fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550, the partition unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550.

The insertion plate portion 6547 has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the threaded portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) is inserted, and is a portion that receives a load generated during fastening and fixing. Insertion plate part 6
The shape of the insertion hole formed in 547 is such that the thickness of the upper edge of the part to which the load is applied during fastening is the center of the hole in relation to the direction in which the resin mold is removed (in this embodiment, the front-back direction). It becomes thinner toward the bottom (see FIG. 254(b)).

In this case, since load imbalance is likely to occur between the upper edge and the rest, the partition unit 6540
If small positional deviations occur repeatedly between the plate guide unit 6550 and the plate guide unit 6550, there is a possibility that the fastening screws may become loose.

In order to prevent the fastening screws from loosening, fastening screws with large head diameters may be used, but
This results in higher costs due to the difference in quality from the required quality of the fastening screws used for other fastening locations. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large diameter head is used only at the problematic fastening points, it will lead to higher costs because the fastening screws cannot be made into common parts, but at the same time, it will be necessary to use fastening screws with large diameter heads in all the fastening points. If this method is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will increase, leading to higher costs in terms of material costs.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the plate guide unit 6550 for the partition unit 6540
It is configured to prevent misalignment at multiple locations. That is, first, the plate guide unit 6
550 is supported by the protruding rib 6547c of the partition unit 6540, thereby preventing the plate guide unit 6550 from moving downward (see FIGS. 247 and 254(b)).

Second, the upper end of the front side of the plate guide unit 6550 is attached to the locking convex portion 6 on the milky white member 6541.
It is configured to engage in the front-rear direction with the lower end portion on the back side of the transparent covering member 6548 that is locked by the transparent covering member 6548 (see FIG. 254(b)). As a result, the partition unit 6 of the plate guide unit 6550
540 can be prevented from being displaced toward the front side.

Third, the lower end of the insertion plate portion 6547 is connected to the main body resin member 655 of the plate guide unit 6550.
1 (see FIG. 254(b)). Thereby, upward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be prevented.

These mainly the first to third abutment structures allow the partition unit 6 of the plate guide unit 6550 to
Since displacement with respect to 540 can be suppressed, loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the threaded portion 6554a can be suppressed.

The transparent covering member 6548 is formed into a generally V-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a lower edge plate-like portion 6548a that extends in a plate-like manner toward the back side at the lower edge connection portion of the V-shape, and a lower edge plate-like portion 6548a extending from the upper edge to the back side. It includes a plurality of locking convex portions 6548b that protrude sideward in a plate shape. The left and right center portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are cut out from the back side to the front side, and the lower edge plate portion 6548a enters to fill this gap.

Similar to the box-shaped light receiving section 6546, a jagged decoration is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge plate-like section 6548a. As a result, even if the center portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be cut out, the cutout portion can be compensated for by the decorative shape of the lower edge plate portion 6548a, so that the transparent covering member 65
It is possible to uniformly emit light in the left and right direction of 48.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

Here, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the back side (see FIG. 254(c)), and the lower edge plate-shaped portion In order to form the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a at a surface position with the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the rear side, similarly to the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550. .

If an attempt is made to form this inclined surface with the box-shaped light-receiving section 6546, the cutting direction of the mold for forming the box-shaped light-receiving section 6546 will become complicated. In other words, the punching direction is in the front-rear direction near the through hole 6542, while it is tilted upward toward the back side near the lower edge of the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546, which only increases the difficulty of mold design. Moreover, the manufacturing process may become complicated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed of the milky white member 6541, but is instead formed of the transparent covering member 6548 (see FIG. 254(c)). Furthermore, in the assembled state, a white partition member 6560 is disposed opposite to the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 constituting the slope, so that the transparent covering member 6548 The entire area can be visually recognized in a uniform color (white).

As a result, the cutting direction of the mold for the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 covered on the front side of the milky white member 6541 is tilted to the side that interferes in the front and rear drawing directions. The transparent covering member 654
8 can be visually recognized by the player in a uniform light emission manner.

In other words, while the partitioning unit 6540 has a shape that tapers toward the back side (the vertical distance narrows), the back part of the milky white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 65 that are adjacent to each other are
Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of 48 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to perform a light emission effect with a uniform light emission mode. .

In this case, it becomes difficult to set the direction in which the transparent covering member 6548 is removed from the molding die to be in the front-back direction, but the transparent covering member 6548 does not have a portion formed along the front-back direction in the first place. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a (direction of upward inclination) as the drawing direction of the mold, the manufacturing process in which resin molding is performed using a mold with the drawing direction in the front-rear direction (one direction) can be achieved. The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured using the same manufacturing process.

Therefore, the milky-white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured easily, and the area visible through the transparent covering member 6548 can be emitted uniformly.

The locking convex portion 6548b is a portion that is locked to the upper edge of the bulge toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking convex portion 6548b is locked to the milky white member 6541.

The guided unit 6550 is made of a colored opaque resin material and has a generally V-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a main body resin member 6551 that is guided along the upper surface of the overhang 6584a of the back support member 6580.
, an extension plate portion 6552 extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the lower edges of the left and right center portions of the main body resin member 6551; A pair of left and right exhaust pressure holes 6553 and a partition unit 6 arranged along the left and right upper edges of the main body resin member 6551
A plurality of front-side fastening parts 6554 are arranged to face the insertion plate parts 6547 of 540 and to which fastening screws are fastened and fixed, and a back support member 6580 is arranged along the left and right lower edges of the main body resin member 6551.
A plurality of rear-side fastening parts 6555 to which the fastening screws passing through the screw insertion parts 6581c (see FIG. 241(a)) are fastened and fixed, and a back-side support member protruding in a rib shape between the back-side fastening parts 6555. A plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 inserted into the positioning elongated hole 6581d (see FIG. 241(a)) of 6580, and a plurality of through holes 6 drilled in the front and rear direction in the left and right arm portions.
557, and a pair of light receiving members 6558 formed from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material and fitted and fixed into a plurality of through holes 6557.

The direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is the mold removal direction. That is, each component is formed along an inclined direction that is upwardly inclined toward the back side, or along a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction.

The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553.

The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is located in a range facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235).
Rather than being formed as a single large hole, it is formed in multiple small hole shapes (formed in small areas). Thereby, it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as entering a thin wire material such as a piano wire.

Further, the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed so that the hole width becomes narrower as it approaches the end of the hole and as it goes toward the back side. This allows the holes to be filled with thin wire material, so
After entering the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553, the movement resistance of the thin wire can be increased when the thin wire is advanced further into the interior or when a load is applied by hooking it to a specific member. This results in
Since the time required for fraudulent acts can be extended, fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

The front side fastening part 6554 includes a threaded part 6554a to which a fastening screw is fastened, and a threaded part 655 thereof.
Positioning wall portions 6554b formed in a pair of wall shapes on the left and right sides of 54a are provided. The positioning wall portions 6554b are opposed to each other at an interval slightly longer than the width of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b, the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned.

The light receiving member 6558 is a part that is guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and has an L-shaped cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. a guided portion 6558a, and a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558 that are formed in a box shape that bulges out on the front side of the guided portion 6558a and is open on the back side, and that can be fitted into the through hole 6557.
b, and the central end of the guided portion 6558a (the end on the side where the pair of light receiving members 6558 face each other)
It mainly includes an upper edge extension part 6558c extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the upper edge of the main body.

The light receiving member 6558 is the third illumination part 6576 of the illumination board 6570 (see FIG. 241(b))
It is a member that receives light irradiated from. The above-described decorative jagged shape is formed on the inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. As a result, the light can be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, so the number of LEDs corresponding to the through hole 6557 is small (
In FIG. 241(b), even if there are only one or two light beams, the entire rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be seen as uniform light. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (it is possible to reduce the sense of a point light source).

Furthermore, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is installed in an inclined position with respect to the front-rear direction (in an inclined position so that the light traveling direction is along the assembly direction of the plate guide unit 6550).

(It is installed in a posture in which the light receiving surface intersects the assembly direction of the plate guide unit 6550)
Therefore, on the back side of the light receiving member 6558, the light emitted along the front-rear direction from the LED disposed in the third lighting section 6576 of the illumination board 6570 is refracted when passing through the light receiving member 6558, and It can be made to advance in a diagonally downward direction toward the front side.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed such that the length of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b protruding toward the front side is shorter for those disposed on the left and right outer sides than those disposed on the left and right inner sides. As a result, the rear box-shaped portion 6
The front of 558b is connected to the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 65 connected below it.
50 can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge.

The upper edge extension portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partition member 6560. The main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550, which is disposed opposite to the partition member 6560, is formed from a planar shape, especially at the extending plate portion 6552 in the central portion, and there is no partition, so alignment with the partition member 6560 is difficult. It's difficult to do. In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper edge extending portion 6558c serves as a partition that partitions the area above the extending plate portion 6552, so that the partitioning member 6560 can be easily aligned.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 249. In the explanation so far, the second lighting units 6575 arranged on the left and right
The portion that receives the light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 has been described above. Hereinafter, the optical transmission unit 6520, which is a portion that receives light emitted from the first illumination section 6574, will be described.

257(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 257(b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.
8(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.

The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed from a colored (orange in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and includes a main body portion 6531 and a main body portion 653 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front.
1, an opening 6532 having an approximately gourd shape (approximately pot shape) and bored in the front and back direction;
A protruding rib 6533 that is shaped along the lower edge of the main body portion 6531 and protrudes from the back side in a rib shape;
It mainly includes a plurality of fastening parts 6534 that are arranged at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and are formed so that fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6544 can be screwed therein.

Since the main body portion 6531 of the outer frame member 6530 does not allow light to pass through, the portion inside the outer shape through which light is transmitted is limited to the opening portion 6532. The shape of this opening 6532 is
This corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the illumination section 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed to have a similar shape (enlarged shape) to the shape surrounding the LED of the first illumination section 6574 in a front view (see FIG. 241(a)).

The light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 passes through the transparent cylindrical member 6521, but since the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed differently depending on the front and rear positions, the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 is It is possible to make the player viewing the player see a pattern of light that is different from the arrangement pattern of the first illumination section 6574.

For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the width becomes longer as it approaches the opening 6532 (both left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction). The light that is visible from the front of the opening 6532 around the position that overlaps with the upper plate part in the front and rear is seen in a pattern that is spread laterally compared to the arrangement pattern of the first illumination part 6574.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to widen the range of light visible to the player while narrowing the arrangement range of the first illumination unit 6574 that emits light behind it. Therefore, while suppressing the size of the first illumination section 6574 (or the illumination board 6570), it is possible to make the light visible over a wide range. Note that the details of the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 will be described later.

The protruding rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking protrusion 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and is provided at a location where the formation of the locking protrusion 6548b is omitted. In this embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking convex portion 6548b are formed on the same curve in front view (formed on the same curve as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other). ).

259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The light transmission unit 6520 includes a transparent cylindrical member 6521 formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and a flat surface disposed midway in the transparent cylindrical member 6521. a flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange shape along the outer periphery, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed in a cup-shape to cover the transparent cylindrical member 6521 from a colorless, light-transmitting resin. , a shielding member 6524 made of a colored (white in this embodiment) and non-light transmitting resin material and formed in a cylindrical shape so as to be able to be inserted through the side opposite to the side covered with the cup-shaped member 6523; A contact plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate surface portion that can make surface contact with the flange portion 6522 at the front end portion, and an outer surface extending toward the front side along the left and right edges and lower edge of the contact plate portion 6525. It mainly includes a frame extension part 6526.

The bottomed cylindrical member 6521 is a member that extends in a cylindrical shape from front to back, has a curved shape in which the left and right walls are narrowed inward, and has a front and back side with the LED disposed in the first lighting section 6574. A back contour portion 6521a formed from overlapping contours, a plurality of light receiving protrusions 6521b protruding from the rear contour portion 6521a toward the back side at positions facing the LEDs, and a back contour portion 6
521a, a plurality of light passing holes 6521d are formed in the closing part 6521c at positions facing the LED, and at least the left and right widths of the upper wall and the width of the left and right walls. A main body cylindrical portion 6521e whose interval becomes longer toward the front side, and a frame-shaped extension portion 6 extending toward the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.
521f.

The light receiving protrusion 6521b is a portion inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partition member 6560. That is, by reducing the distance between the partitioning member 6560 and the illumination board 6570 (Fig.
), light can be made to enter the light receiving protrusion 6521b from the LED of the first illumination part 6574 without leaving a gap as large as the thickness of the opposing plate part 6561 of the partitioning member 6560. This makes it easier to cause total reflection.

In this way, the light emitted from the LED of the first illumination section 6574 is incident at a close distance, is totally reflected, and travels toward the front side.
The light emitted from the LED of No. 6 travels in the air by the area inside the recessed box-shaped light receiving part 6546 and the rear box-shaped part 6558b, which are recessed in the direction away from the LED, The light receiving portion 6546 and the front side wall portion of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b are caused to emit light. Therefore, the first lighting section 65
Compared to the light emitted from the second irradiation section 6575 and the third irradiation section 6576, the amount of light emitted from the second irradiation section 6575 and the third irradiation section 6576 is lower and can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light.

Further, the partition unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light receiving part 6546 is formed is formed from a light-transmitting milky white resin material, and the light-receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped part 6558b is formed is made of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation section 6575 and the third irradiation section 6576 can be changed in stages.

The frame-like extending portion 6521f is formed to have a similar shape to the rear outer shape portion 6521a, but the outer shape of the frame-like extending portion 6521f is more similar to the back outer shape portion 652 due to the relationship through the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.
It is made larger compared to the outer shape of 1a.

Therefore, compared to the size of the area where the LEDs are arranged in the first lighting section 6574,
It can be visually recognized by the player as a light that illuminates a large area.

The extending tip of the frame-like extending portion 6521f is shaped such that each location is spaced approximately the same distance from the bottom back side (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523, the shape of the extending end of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is designed.
Thereby, the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f can be illuminated in a uniform light-emitting manner.

The flange portion 6522 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a that are large enough to allow insertion of the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540.

The cup-shaped member 6523 has a planar back side, and is formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom that can support a fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping the insertion hole 6522a in the front-back direction, and is fastened with a fastening screw inserted through the bottom. A pair of terminal fastening parts 6523a to which the part 6543 is fastened and fixed, a decorative shape part 6523b in which a light diffusion shape (a decorative shape consisting of a protrusion with a triangular cross section) is formed on the back bottom of the cup shape, and the decorative shape part 6523b. It mainly includes a flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the periphery of 6523b.

The decorative shaped portion 6523b diffusely reflects the light irradiated onto the cup-shaped member 6523 from the back side. This allows the player viewing the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front to see it as if it were surface-emitting light, thereby improving the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 when viewed from the front.

Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region facing the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the light that has passed through the thick interior of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is not diffusely reflected. It can be passed to the side. Thereby, the light traveling through the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f can be visually recognized by the player as clear light.

The shielding member 6524 has a rear end having the same shape as the central cylindrical portion 6566 of the partitioning member 6560, and has a concave shape large enough to guide the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partitioning unit 6540. A pair of left and right guide recesses 6524a are provided.

The contact plate portion 6525 is connected to the fastening portion 6543 of the partition unit 6540 (see FIG. 251(a)).
A pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a are provided with a size that allows insertion of a circular screw portion.

The outer frame extension part 6526 is formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the flange part 6522 so as to be able to accommodate the flange part 6522, and its extension length is determined by the thickness of the flange part 6522,
The length is equal to or longer than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the back plate portion of the cup-shaped member 6523.

That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the flange portion 6522 and the plate portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 are accommodated inside the outer frame extension portion 6526 (see FIG. 258(a)).
Therefore, the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be maintained stably. Furthermore, the circular screw part of the fastening part 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540 is inserted into the insertion hole 6.
525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the end fastening portion 6523a, and are fastened and fixed in this order, so that the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

According to the optical transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear side end face of the light receiving protrusion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylindrical part 6521e and travels forward, and the light enters the front side end of the frame-shaped extension part 6521f. The cup-shaped member 6523 can be irradiated with the emitted light. Cup-shaped member 6
523 is set to have a short distance from the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f, so the cup-shaped member 6523
A player viewing the light from the front side of the cup-shaped member 6523 can see the light in a light-emitting manner in which it shines in a line shape (outline shape along the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523). This makes it possible to highlight the difference between the light emission mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emission mode seen in the transparent covering member 6548 described above, so that a sharp light emission effect can be performed. This will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 261 shows a six-sided view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows a six-sided view of the optical transmission unit 6520 in an assembled state. Note that since the optical transmission unit 6520 is configured laterally symmetrically, illustration of the left side view is omitted.

261(a) is a front view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, FIG. 261(b) is a top view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and FIG. 261(c) is a bottom view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. 261(d) is a right view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 261(e) is a rear view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.

262(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262(b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262(c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520. , FIG. 262(d) is a right view of the optical transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 262(e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. Note that FIG. 262(e
), illustration of the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 261(b) and 261(d), the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the bottom part are inclined so that the left and right widths and the top and bottom widths gradually increase toward the front side. It is said that On the other hand, since the cutting direction of the resin mold is set in the front-back direction, the portion that interferes with the resin mold in the cutting direction cannot be formed as an inclined surface.

For example, even if the outer surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it will not interfere when the resin mold on the back side is moved in the drawing direction (backward), but the outer surface 6521e formed on the rear side
If the inner surface of a is similarly sloped, it will interfere when moving the resin mold on the back side, so the inner surface of the outer portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-slanted surface) along the front-rear direction ( (See Figure 263).

Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it will not interfere when moving the resin mold on the front side in the drawing direction (forward); If the outer surface of the extending portion 6521f is similarly inclined, it will interfere with the resin mold when it is moved, so the outer surface of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is formed as a surface along the front-rear direction (a non-inclined surface). (See Figure 263).

Here, in this embodiment, the boundary between the front-side resin mold to be drawn forward and the rear-side resin mold to be drawn to the rear is constituted by the closing part 6521c and the flange part 6522, and one of the front and rear sides has the above-mentioned slope. In the closed portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522, the length of the non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction is compared to the length of the inclined surface in the front-rear direction. It is formed on the side that becomes shorter.

As a result, while the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has a gradually increasing shape as described above, it is possible to suppress changes in plate thickness due to changes in the front and rear positions, so that light passing through the thick inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress changes in the forward and backward positions of the movement mode. Therefore, when light is incident on the inside of the wall and total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, then the transparent cylindrical member 6
Since total reflection can be easily repeated until reaching the front end of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 and light leakage can be suppressed, the player viewing the transparent cylindrical member 6521 from the front can see sufficient light.

The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed so that its vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. As a result, when assembling the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partition unit 6540 (see FIGS. 249 and 250), compared to the case where the vertical widths are the same in the front-rear direction, the fastening portion is formed in the guide recessed portion 6524a. 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the difficulty of assembly can be reduced.

FIG. 263 shows the rear unit 65 along the CCLXIII-CCLXIII line in FIG. 241.
60 to 6580, a partial cross-sectional view of the acoustic device 6610 and the optical transmission unit 6520. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 263 shows a state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the audio device 6610 are arranged in an assembled position with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580.

As shown in FIG. 263, the light receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521
It is formed with dimensions that create a slight gap when it is inserted into the direct entry hole 6562b of 560, and its tip can be inserted up to the surface position of the opposing plate part 6561. As a result, the opposing plate portion 6561
The distance between the first illumination section 6574 and the light receiving protrusion 6521b can be set without being affected by the plate thickness.

The light-receiving protrusion 6521b is formed into a plate shape whose longitudinal direction is along the shape of the rear outer shape 6521a (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the transversal direction intersecting the longitudinal direction is set to be approximately equal to the width dimension of the LED of the first illumination section 6574 disposed opposite to each other.

As a result, in the lateral direction of the light-receiving protrusion 6521b, only the light (light at a very small angle with respect to the optical axis) traveling approximately straight from the first illumination part 6574 toward the front side is allowed to enter, and the other light is not allowed to enter. It can be prevented.

The light incident in this way easily travels through the thick interior of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 toward the front side,
Even in the case of reflection at the boundary, total reflection is likely to occur because the angle formed between the transparent cylindrical member 6521 and the direction of the light is small, so the light weakens before reaching the front end of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. can be suppressed.

The lengthwise dimension of the light-receiving protrusion 6521b is set to be approximately twice the widthwise dimension. Therefore, regarding the spreading direction of the surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, compared to the case described in the thickness direction of the surface, light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 and having a larger angle from the optical axis. The light can also be incident on the light receiving protrusion 6521b.

On the other hand, the rear contour portion 6521a coupled with the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b does not come into contact with the opposing plate portion 6561, but is arranged with a slight interval therebetween. As a result, the first illumination section 657
Of the light emitted from the rear outer portion 6521a, the light that enters from the end face of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (light that has a large angle between the optical axis and the direction in which the light travels) is reflected to avoid being visually recognized by the player. be able to.

That is, it is possible to allow the player to see only the light that passes through the light-receiving protrusion 6521b and continues within the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e, and to cut out the other light (weak light). In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light-receiving protrusion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle with respect to the optical axis of the light incident on the main body cylinder part 6521e.

Light irradiated from the LED of the first illumination section 6574 that is not disposed facing the light receiving protrusion 6521b passes through the enlarged hole 6562a and passes through the light passing hole 6521d of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.

(see FIG. 260) and is irradiated onto the cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). Since this light does not pass through the thickness of the member but travels through the air, it can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light.

Note that the raised tip of the enlarged hole 6562a and the closing portion 6521c are brought into contact with each other from the front and back. Therefore, it is possible to suppress light from leaking from the gap between the raised tip and the closing portion 6521c.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the appearance of light passing through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 of the optical transmission unit 6520 will be described. 264(a) is a front schematic diagram schematically illustrating the arrangement of the first illumination unit 6574, and FIG. 264(b) is a schematic front view illustrating the arrangement of light visible through the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. Note that in the description of FIG. 264, FIGS. 261 and 263 are referred to as appropriate.

First, as described above, since the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases as it goes toward the front side, the transparent cylindrical member 6521 passes through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (by total reflection). The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting sections 6574a on the left and right sides) is visually recognized in a shape that looks like an enlarged shape (approximately gourd shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting sections 6574a.

In addition, as described above, since the light in the thickness direction of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 travels toward the front end without being weakened, the edge light emitting portion 6
A position corresponding to the arrangement of 574a emits strong light (lights like a point light source).

Here, as for the distance between the light sources, the distance L17b between the strong light emitting arrangements when the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front is longer than the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitting parts 6574a, so if the distance is as it is, the light will be converted into a point. However, the lighting effect is likely to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance L17b between the visually recognized strong light emitting units is longer than the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitting parts 6574a, so it is necessary to increase the number of LEDs actually arranged. It is difficult to solve this problem even if the distance between the LEDs is narrowed.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the light from the edge light emitting section 6574a is allowed to travel radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b). , the light emitted from adjacent LEDs overlaps, and the intensity of the light seen at the position between the light sources is reinforced.

As a result, line-shaped light can be visually recognized when the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front even in areas where the LEDs of the first illumination section 6574 are not arranged (between the LEDs) (Fig. 2
64(b) (see imaginary line). Therefore, it is possible to improve the situation in which light is visually recognized as a point.

In particular, the two LEDs on the left and right located at the lower end of the first lighting section 6574 are connected to the main body cylindrical section 652.
1e is located at the boundary between the side surface 6521e1 and the bottom surface 6521e2 (Fig. 262

(see (e)). Therefore, the light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the light of the LED above it, and the light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2, causing the frame-shaped extension portion 655 to overlap.
They overlap at the bottom left and right center of 21f.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 264(a), the L
As shown in FIG. 264(b), even though the ED is not arranged, the optical transmission unit 6
520, a line-shaped light can be seen at the center of the lower left and right sides.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the space formed by the light visible through the optical transmission unit 6520 is increased while reducing the space for arranging the first illumination unit 6574.
It is possible to reduce the degree to which light is visually perceived as a dot, and to make a clear line of light visible.

Note that when the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the inside thereof is difficult to see due to the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523, so that the light traveling inside the thick transparent cylindrical member 6521 is difficult to see. It is said to be difficult to determine where the two intersect. Therefore, even if the position where the lights intersect is uncertain, it is possible to prevent the effect of the light emission performance from deteriorating.

Moreover, if the position where the light overlaps is near the tip of the frame-shaped extension part 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source was placed between the LEDs of the edge light emitting part 6574a. In other words, it is possible to create the illusion that there are more LED light sources than the actual number of LEDs, so even a small number of LEDs can emit as much light as a large number of LEDs. It is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance.

Surface light emitting section 6574b (first illumination section 6
The light emitted from the four LEDs on the left and right center sides of 574 passes through the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. Here, the light emitted from the surface emitting part 6574b does not travel within the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and in addition, the shape of the enlarged hole 6562a disposed oppositely (see FIG.
45(b)).

Therefore, when viewed from the front, the light emitted from the surface light emitting section 6574b is
It is visually recognized as a planar light that spreads out as an area A17 centered on the LED b. In addition, the light is transmitted to the decorative shape portion 6523b (Fig. 2
60), it is reflected diffusely and is visually recognized as planar light when viewed from the front.

In other words, the area where the light emitted radially from the surface light emitting part 6574b reaches (FIG. 264(b)
(see imaginary line), but also the decorative shaped portion 6 on the outer side of the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523.
523b (for example, the area A17 and the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f in front view)
(the area between the two) can be illuminated brightly.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be visually recognized as edge-shaped light and planar light, which have different impressions. In addition, by configuring the boundary between the edge-shaped light and the planar light to be irradiated with diffusely reflected light,
Darkening of the border can be avoided. Therefore, the visually recognized impression of light can be changed stepwise and continuously.

Here, various aspects are exemplified as changes in the visually recognized impression of light. For example, it may be a change in the impression of a light emitting situation such as brightness or darkness, or it may be a change in the color of the light.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

As described above, the partition units 6540 that are visible from the front on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 have a curved shape that swells toward the front when viewed from the front and from the side. Therefore,
The light that is visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 left and right and up and down (a direction in which it is diffused with respect to a point on the back side).

Furthermore, as described above, the light receiving members 6558 disposed on the lower left and right sides of the partitioning unit 6540 have their front edges positioned closer to the back side as they go further left and right, and because of the attitude in which they are attached, the light passing through the light receiving members 6558 is , moves away from the cup-shaped member 6523 horizontally and vertically (in a direction of diffusion with respect to a point on the back side).

This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the light gets larger as it gets closer to the player, compared to the case where the light only travels in the front and back direction, and the light production effect can be improved. can be improved.

Next, the horizontal presentation device 6700 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 265 to 281. FIG. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 266 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014.
It is an exploded front perspective view of.

In addition, in FIG. 265, illustration of the upper presentation device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 is omitted, and a direction view from the diagonally right front in a state where the horizontal presentation device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body portion 10014a is shown. , In FIG. 266, the horizontal presentation device 6700
A direction view from diagonally forward to the left is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal presentation device 6700 includes a metal main body 10014a
This is a presentation device disposed on the front side of the left and right vertically long parts of the screen, and is formed by dividing a vertically long ellipse in half when viewed from the side.

Note that the horizontal presentation device 6700 is a pair of left and right devices with similar shapes, but the internal configurations are the same. Therefore, the right horizontal presentation device 6700 will be explained in detail, and the left side horizontal presentation device 6700 will be explained in detail. Explanation will be omitted.

A horizontal rendering device 6700 is installed so that the front and rear stacking relationship can be visually recognized at the upper end portion of FIG. 266.
is configured in such a manner that covering units 6730 to 6760 that cover the front side of the base member 6710 are disposed on the front side of the base member 6710 that is fitted into the metal main body portion 10014a.

The connection between the base member 6710 and the metal main body portion 10014a will be described. When assembling the base member 6710 to the metal main body 10014a, positioning is performed by inserting a positioning convex portion (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the base member 6710 into a positioning recess 10014e formed in the metal main body 10014a. Then, a fastening screw inserted through the through hole of the metal main body portion 10014a is fastened and fixed to a fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the base member 6710.

Note that among the constituent members of the horizontal presentation device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. In other words, among the constituent members of the horizontal presentation device 6700,
There are no components other than the base member 6710 that are fastened and fixed to the metal body portion 10014a.

As shown in FIG. 266, on the side facing the game area, the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (the position where it is flush with the back end of the base member 6710) has been formed up to. The rear end of the curved plate member 6750 is shown in FIG.
As shown in the left unit in FIG. 5, the glass unit 16 is disposed close to and opposite to the glass unit 16 in the front and back.

With this arrangement, it is easy to create an effect in which the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the back side of the glass unit 16 can be seen as one unit. can do.

FIG. 267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal presentation device 6700, and FIG. 268 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal presentation device 6700.
700 is an exploded rear perspective view. In FIGS. 267 and 268, covering units 6730 to 6
760 is shown disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 267, an illumination board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 configured to emit light is mounted is disposed on the front side of the base member 6710.
The covering units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to the base member 6710 so as to cover the base member 6710 from the front side.

That is, the horizontal presentation device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports the illumination board 6720 whose light emission is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 and the illumination board 6720. a light-emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710;
A covering unit 673 that receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit and allows the player to see it.
It mainly includes a light-receiving side unit consisting of 0 to 6760 units. First, the light emitting side unit will be explained.

FIG. 269(a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the illumination board 6720, and FIG.
9(b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(c) is a left side view of the base member 6710.
269(d) is a top view of the base member 6710, and FIG.
9(e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(f) is a sectional view of the base member 6710 and the illumination board 6720 taken along the line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf in FIG. 269(a).

As shown in FIGS. 269(a) to 269(f), the base member 6710 includes the illumination board 6
A flat support plate portion 6711 that is arranged opposite to 720 and arranged on the back side of the illumination board 6720
, a frame-shaped protruding part 6712 protruding toward the front side of the support plate part 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the illumination board 6720, and a positioning part protruding from the frame-shaped protruding part 6712 toward the front side. Projection part 67
13, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 formed outside the illumination board 6720 and close to the illumination board 6720 in a front view so that fastening screws can be inserted therethrough, and two insertion holes 6736 at upper and lower locations. A pair of fastening parts 6715 to which the fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and the support plate part 6
711 (stepped part of the outer frame plate part 6717), which is vertically long in the area on the right side of the frame-like protruding part 6712 (the opposite side of the window surrounding the gaming area, the opposite side of the glass unit 16). A plurality of alignment holes 6716 are formed as holes, an outer frame plate part 6717 extends from the right edge of the support plate part 6711 to the back side in a stepped plate shape, and a hole is formed from the left edge of the support plate part 6711. It mainly includes an inner frame plate portion 6718 extending in a plate shape toward the back side.

The protruding tip of the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 is disposed to face the back surface of the illumination board 6720 near the outer shape thereof, and is in surface contact with the illumination board 6720. As a result, a gap is provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the back side of the illumination board 6720 except for the vicinity of the external portion (see FIG. 269(f)). Therefore, an air layer (insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the illumination board 6720.

As a result, even if the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and the heat transferred to the metal main body 10014a can be transferred to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transferred to the illumination board 6720 is Since the temperature can be suppressed (reduced to a low level), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as the illumination board 6720 becoming hot and malfunctioning.

The positioning protrusion 6713 includes positioning holes 672 formed at two locations on the illumination board 6720.
2 to align the illumination board 6720 with respect to the base member 6710. That is, the illumination board 6720 includes the base member 6710 and the illumination board 67.
20 (see FIG. 269(a)), the positioning protrusion 6
A positioning hole 6722 is bored at a position corresponding to 713.

The insertion hole 6714 is connected to the fastening portion 67 of the flat plate member 6740 of the covering units 6730 to 6760.
44 and a cup-shaped part that can be fitted from the front to the fastening part 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 (
(see FIG. 268) is a through-hole formed to enable positioning of them, and into which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted.

The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and is formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6736 can be screwed therein. The light-receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to two fastening portions 6715, upper and lower.

The alignment hole 6716 is located between the protrusions 6743 and 676 of the covering units 6730 to 6760.
6 (see FIG. 268) is a hole to be inserted. The covering units 6730 to 6760 have a pair of thin plate-like members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) arranged to face each other on the left and right sides, and are formed into a substantially cup shape that opens on the back side (see FIG. 268). ), and is fixed to the base member 6710 at the back side part (edge-like part).

Here, the connecting portion between the base member 6710 and the covering units 6730 to 6760 is located in a portion (external portion) that can be touched by the player, and is located in a portion (outer portion) that can be touched by the player, and is (loads generated by this process). As mentioned above, the base member 6
Since it is fixed to the thin-walled rear end of the plate member 710, it may be deformed or
There is a possibility that a positional shift with respect to the base member 6710 may occur. To prevent this,
Although the number of fixing locations (fastening locations) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, there is a risk that the number of assembly steps will increase.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while suppressing the increase in the number of fixing points, by inserting the protrusions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of alignment holes 6716, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are fixed to the base member. It is possible to suppress positional deviation (positional deviation in the left-right direction) with respect to 6710.

In addition, the inner surface (left side) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is connected to the frame-shaped protruding portion 671.
Since the flat plate member 6740 is placed close to and facing the outer surface (right side) of the player, even if a leftward load is applied to the flat plate member 6740 from the player, the flat plate member 6740 will not touch the frame-shaped protrusion 6712 with its surface. Since they are in contact with each other, movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, the covering units 6730 to 676
0 can be prevented from being deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710.

Therefore, the durability of the horizontal presentation device 6700 can be improved while suppressing an increase in the number of assembly steps. Note that the main body plate portion 6741 can distribute the load by being provided with a concavo-convex forming portion 6741a in which a fine concave-convex shape is formed in the range of contact with the frame-shaped protrusion 6712, but the details will be described later. .

The outer frame plate part 6717 is arranged to face the right side surface of the metal main body part 10014a and is in surface contact with it, and covers the right side of the metal main body part 10014a. As a result, the metal main body 10014a
can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recess 6717a that is recessed from some of the alignment holes 6716 along the front-rear direction. The support recess 6717a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716, and is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the back side of the alignment hole 6716.

The support recess 6717a is formed with a size that fits with the protrusion 6743 or is arranged opposite to the protrusion 6743 with a slight gap in the assembled state of the horizontal presentation device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, compared to the case where the protruding part 6743 is supported only by the alignment hole 6716, the area in which the protruding part 6743 can be supported can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a), so that the flat plate member 6740 can be prevented from being misaligned with respect to the base member 6710. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported with respect to the base member 6710.

The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion of the curved plate member 6750 that is disposed opposite to the main body curved portion 6751, and is formed in a planar shape facing the gaming area side (inside).

The illumination board 6720 is a so-called printed circuit board, and has a main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape.
, positioning holes 6722 drilled at two locations on the main body plate 6721, and the main body plate 672.
The LED chip D1 is mainly provided with a plurality of LED chips D1 mounted on the LED chip D1 in an arbitrary pattern.

The main body plate portion 6721 is held on the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, by inserting the positioning protrusion 6713 (see FIG. 269(c)) into the positioning hole 6722, movement in the left, right, up, and down directions is restricted, and forward and backward movement is restricted by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 280). (see), movement is restricted by being caught between them.

Although a similar chip is mounted on the LED chip D1 in this embodiment, the relationship between the LED chip D1 and the area shown by imaginary lines in FIG. , can be divided into two types.

That is, the LED chip D1 includes an edge emitting part D1a disposed inside the imaginary line frame shown in FIG. 269(a), and a surface emitting part D1b disposed outside the imaginary line frame. Prepare for the Lord. The difference between these light emitting parts D1a and D1b is that the light emitted from the light emitting part D1a is easily recognized as line-shaped (edge-like) light, while the light emitted from the light emitting part D1b is easily recognized as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode visually recognized by the player, which will be described in detail later.

Next, covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) disposed on the front side of the illumination board 6720 will be explained. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760.

As is clear from the exploded view of FIGS. 270 and 271 from the state shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are formed from a light-transmitting resin inside and allow light to pass therethrough. A light receiving member 6730 that can be bent and covers the illuminated board 6720 from the front side.
and is configured so that the front thereof is covered with other structural members.

272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272(b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730,
FIG. 273(a) shows the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272(a).
FIG. 273(b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272(b).

Moreover, FIG. 274(a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274(b) is a
274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. FIG.

Note that FIG. 272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the left side, and FIG.
2(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the right side, FIG. 274(a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the right side, and FIG. 274(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 seen from the right side. 6730
FIG. Further, in FIG. 272(b), covering units 6730 to 6760 are shown together for easy understanding.

The light-receiving member 6730 is a member formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and is similar to the illumination board 67.
A light-receiving surface portion 6731 is formed in a flat plate shape with an outer shape equivalent to that of No. 20, and is disposed opposite to the illumination board 6720, and a light-receiving surface portion 6731 that is bent from the inner edge (left side edge in FIG. 272) of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207). an inner extension portion 6732 that extends toward the back side so that the a plurality of long ribs 6734 (five in this embodiment) protruding from the back surface of the light-receiving surface portion 6731; A plurality of (five in this embodiment) fins 6735 extending in the form of long fins from the front of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 at positions that match the front and back sides of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 and the fastening portions arranged at the upper and lower ends. 6715 (see FIG. 269(a)), and a shape that can fit into the decorative protrusion 6751a (see FIG. 276) of the curved plate member 6750. It mainly includes a fitting part 6737.

The light receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and has a decorative pattern with complicated cuts formed on the back side. The decorative pattern is formed of elongated protrusions aligned along a plurality of concentric circles with different diameters centered at a location facing the surface light emitting part D1b (see enlarged view in FIG. 274(b)). ). Here, the outer circumferential surface of the small-diameter protrusion at the position facing the surface light-emitting section D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which light irradiated from behind is refracted outward along the surface of the light-receiving surface section 6731). Figure 2
75(b)), the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter protrusion is similarly inclined (it is inclined in such a manner that the light traveling along the surface of the light-receiving surface section 6731 is refracted toward the front side of the light-receiving surface section 6731, Figure 27
5(b)).

Therefore, the light irradiated from the surface emitting part D1b is refracted near the axis of the long protrusion, and after traveling toward the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b is further emitted from the large diameter side away from the axis of the long protrusion. By refracting at a certain point and proceeding toward the front side, a wide range of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 can be emitted.

Further, on the front side of the light-receiving surface section 6731, basic shapes that are triangular in front view and bulge toward the front side at the approximate center are formed in a manner that is regularly and densely arranged. A decorative recessed portion 6731a recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape is provided at the front side position of D1b.

The decorative recessed portion 6731a makes it possible to vary the strength of the surface light emission in the light receiving surface portion 6731 (the strength can be varied in stages). That is, since the shape of the decorative recessed portion 6731a causes light to be collected at the center of the recessed portion, the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a strong light emitting manner compared to other parts.

The inner extending portion 6732 and the outer extending portion 6733 are configured such that the extending ends thereof come into contact with the illumination board 6720 at the front and rear, and the extending ends of the inner extending portion 6732 extend over the entire upper and lower sides. While it comes into contact with the illumination board 6720, a part of the extending end of the outer extending portion 6733 does not come into contact with the illumination board 6720.

That is, the outer extending portion 6733 has a spaced-apart end portion 6733a whose extension length is formed to be as short as the thickness of the illumination board 6720, so that it does not come into contact with the illumination board 6720 but separates from it. In this embodiment, the separated end portion 6733a allows air to flow in and out of the area between the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730, thereby preventing heat from being trapped.

In addition, when the inner extension portion 6732 comes into contact with the illumination board 6720 over the entire upper and lower sides, the LED chip D1 arranged so as to protrude from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illumination board 6720 is placed inside. It cannot be placed behind the extension portion 6732. Therefore, the thicker the inner extension portion 6732 is, the more limited the area in which the LED chip D1 is placed is.

On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the separated end 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the illumination board 6720, the LED chip D1 is
733a. Therefore, while ensuring a sufficient plate thickness of the outer extending portion 6733, it is possible to secure the maximum area for disposing the LED chip D1.

The left and right walls of the outer extending portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the left wall of the inner extending portion 6732 (opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is densely packed with protrusions having a semicircular cross section. A concavo-convex shape is formed in such a manner that the concave-convex shape is aligned. As a result, the light emitted to the left through the inner extension portion 6732 emits light from a surface (spreads radially), making it easier for the player to see uniform light.

As will be described later, part of the light emitted from the illumination board 6720 toward the front side passes through the inner extension portion 6732, and the intensity of the light changes from region to region. That is, fin 6735
At the peripheral position of the end of the fin 6735, light D1m is visible, which is a combination of the light emitted from the edge light emitting part D1a and traveling along the long rib 6734, and the light emitted from the surface light emitting part D1b. At a position away from the long rib 6734, the light traveling through the long rib 6734 does not reach the light D1p emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b, and the light D1m is the light D1m.
It is visually recognized as light stronger than 1p (the intensity of the light corresponds to the length of the arrow).

Thereby, the magnitude of the intensity of the light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 can be changed and visually recognized for each region arranged vertically. Note that the difference in the aspect of the light that is visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a different from the color of the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b, the color of the light that is visually recognized through the inner extension part 6732 can be changed in the upper and lower directions. It can be visually recognized by changing the area for each area lined up.

The long rib 6734 is arranged on the front side of the edge light emitting part D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) when the horizontal direction device 6700 is assembled (see FIG. 265), and is formed with the same thickness without tapering at the front and back. It mainly includes a plurality of linear ribs 6734a that are formed in a substantially linear shape when viewed from the back, and a V-shaped rib 6734b that is bent and formed into a substantially V-shape when viewed from the back.

The side surfaces of the elongated ribs 6734 are formed as smooth surfaces. That is, unlike the case where a line-like jagged process is formed on the surface of the long rib 6734, when light reaches the side surface of the long rib 6734 and passes through it, it does not spread (no surface emission), but only in one direction. Proceed to. Therefore, the long rib 6
734 can be avoided from emitting light uniformly, when viewing the horizontal direction device 6700 from the left and right directions, the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a and the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b can be seen. It is possible to reduce the degree to which the image is visually recognized by being mixed with light.

That is, while the long rib 6734 is formed as a part that is long vertically and can be seen in the left and right directions, the light passing through the long rib 6734 is suppressed from reaching the player's eyes in a surface emitting manner. Therefore, it is possible for a player who views the horizontal presentation device 6700 from the left and right to easily recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The linear ribs 6734a are arranged in two pairs on the upper and lower sides, and are formed in such a manner that they extend in a direction that is inclined toward the vertical center position as they move toward the left (the center side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265). 6734a1 is connected to the inner extension portion 6732, while the right end portion 6734a2
is spaced apart from the outer extension portion 6733.

Therefore, light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can pass through the left end 6734a1 and directly enter the inner extension 6732, while light passing through the right end 6734a2 can enter the outer extension 6733. The energy of the light decreases in the gap between the two.

As a result, the brightness that is visually recognized near the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a differs. In other words, the area visible through the inner extending portion 6732 appears bright, and the area visible through the outer extending portion 6733 appears dark.

As described above, in this embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right directions is worsened.
The light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 through the inner extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extending portion 6732.

Therefore, only the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1 is easily recognized in the left-right direction. That is, the left end 6
Near 734a1, it is visually recognized by the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a, and at a position away from the left end part 6734a1 (position between), it is visible by the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b. Since it can be made visible, it is possible to make lights of different colors and brightness visible to a player who views the horizontal presentation device 6700 from the left and right directions.

The V-shaped rib 6734b is arranged at the vertical center position, and is located at the intermediate connecting portion 673 near the bending position.
4b1 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, while both ends 6734b2 are connected to the outer extending portion 673.
Separate from 3. Note that the bending position and the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted because
This is because the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) is disposed opposite the bending position.

That is, the position where the light emitted from the edge light emitting part D1a is received is set to the intermediate connecting part 6734b1.
By shifting the V-shaped rib 6734b from the V-shaped rib 6734b, it is possible to suppress the light (main light) emitted linearly in the front-rear direction from the edge light-emitting portion D1a from entering the connection position.
Loss of light incident on the fin 6735 can be reduced.

The V-shaped rib 6734b has the same function as the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, the light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b can pass through the intermediate connecting part 6734b1 and directly enter the inner extending part 6732, while the light passing through both end parts 6734b2 can enter the outer extending part 6733. The energy of the light decreases in the gap between the two.

As a result, the brightness that is visually recognized near the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b differs. In other words, the area visible through the inner extending portion 6732 appears bright, and the area visible through the outer extending portion 6733 appears dark.

As described above, in this embodiment, surface light emission through the side surfaces of the long ribs 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right directions is worsened. The light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 through the inner extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extending portion 6732.

Therefore, only the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 can be easily recognized in the left-right direction. That is, near the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, it is visually recognized by the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a,
At a position away from the intermediate connecting part 6734b1 (a position in between), it can be visually recognized by the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting part D1b, so the horizontal direction device 67 can be seen from the left and right directions.
A player who visually recognizes 00 can be made to see lights of different colors and brightness.

The fins 6735 are formed so that the thickness decreases from the extended base end toward the distal end,
It mainly includes a curved tip fin 6735a corresponding to the linear rib 6734a, and a bent tip fin 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped rib 6734b.

The tip curved fin 6735a has upper and lower inner edges curved, and the left side (front frame 100
A light diffusing portion is formed by densely forming triangular wave-shaped (jagged) notches on the inner surface of the front frame 10014, and the right side surface (the outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

The tip bent fin 6735b has an inclined surface whose extending tip slopes toward the back side as it goes from the upper and lower ends toward the vertical center, and which intersects at the front side of the bending position of the V-shaped rib 6734b.

A light diffusion portion is formed by densely forming triangular wave-shaped (jagged) notches on the (inner surface of the front frame 10014), and the right side (outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface. .

These fins 6735 are formed so that their extension length becomes shorter toward the left side. In particular, in the curved tip fin 6735a, since the end on the left side is coupled to the light receiving surface section 6731, a large amount of light (main ) is emitted from the fin 6735 near the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, the light is directed to the inner extension part 6732 side (back side, root side).
This makes it possible to easily illuminate the left side of the light receiving member 6730.

In addition, the elongated rib 6734 and the inner extension portion 6732 are coupled behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, so that light passing inside the elongated rib 6734 can also cause the inner extension. The installation part 6732 can be illuminated. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the curved tip fin 6735a joins the light receiving surface portion 6731, light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 and light passing through the curved tip fin 6735a can be combined to produce a light emission effect. , it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance.

Note that this jagged shape is explained as processing performed on the surface that is irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, a shape processing in which dot shapes are formed densely may be used, or a wavy striped shape processing may be used.

Due to the difference in the formation of the left and right sides of the fins 6735, the manner in which light passes through the sides can be changed. In other words, due to the surface emitting effect of the notch, the light passing through the left side can be seen as uniform light, while the surface emitting effect does not affect the light passing through the right side. The light can be visually recognized as local light. Further, it goes without saying that the elongated ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 due to their shapes.

One of the insertion holes 6736 is exposed when the horizontal presentation device 6700 is assembled (FIG. 266), and only two holes are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced by loosening the fastening screw inserted into the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731.

As a result, if the positional relationship between the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 and the edge light emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 is shifted (for example, due to vibrations caused by player operations,
14) can be performed without disassembling the horizontal direction device 6700, thereby improving maintainability (low difficulty and time saving). )be able to.

The fitting part 6737 has an inclined shape that tapers toward the back side and is recessed in the left-right direction, and is used to align and align the light-receiving member 6730 and the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light-receiving member 6730. This is a portion that is formed by fitting, and further includes a single recessed portion 6737a.

In this way, in this embodiment, the light receiving member 6730 and the light receiving member 6730 are arranged while limiting (reducing) the location of the recess 6737a (the location where the fastening portion 6753 is provided) on the inner extension portion 6732 side to one location. , attempts to suppress misalignment and misalignment with constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. This will be explained in detail below.

Here, in the case of fastening and fixing the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal presentation device 6700, since the fastening screws do not transmit light, the more fastening points there are, the more likely shadows will occur. Therefore, the horizontal direction device 67
Even if the surface area of 00 is made large, the light will be divided at the fastening location, and there is a possibility that the effect of the light production will be reduced. On the other hand, reducing the number of fastening points leads to a decrease in supporting capacity.
There is a possibility that the horizontal presentation device 6700 may be deformed from its base due to the load applied by the player or the load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the supporting force is maintained by fitting the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative protrusion 6751a (see FIG. 276) while limiting the fastening location to the recess 6737a. ing.

As a result, the horizontal presentation device 6 on the side of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265)
The durability of the horizontal presentation device 6700 is improved while reducing the number of fastening points 700 (in this embodiment, the fastening points arranged between the main body curved portion 6751 and the illumination board 6720 as light presentation points). be able to.

Further, in this embodiment, the recess 6737a is formed so that light can travel toward the back side. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 275.

275(a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal presentation device 6700 taken along the CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa line in FIG. 274(b), and FIG.
FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the light receiving member 6730 taken along the line CCLXXVb.

As shown in FIG. 275(a), the recessed portion 6737a is disposed on the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b that is disposed facing the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG.
81), the striped decorative portion 6751 is attached via the fastening portion 6753 fitted in the recessed portion 6737a.
It is formed so that light can travel to the back side of the main body curved part 6751 where the curved part 6751 is formed. That is, the illumination board 6720 is formed so that light can travel toward the back side (opposite side of the light irradiation direction).

Here, the fastening part 6753 is a part where the fastening screw is fastened, and since the fastening screw is likely to be in the shadow, it is considered unsuitable for light-emitting production. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light avoids the fastening screws up and down, thereby allowing the player to see the light while suppressing the influence of shadows created by the fastening screws.
That is, by transmitting light from both sides above and below the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw that is visible to the player can be eliminated (diluted).

In FIG. 275(b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is illustrated in an enlarged manner. Of the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b, the light traveling in a direction with a small angle to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the inside of the light receiving surface part 6731 while being gently refracted, and passes through the decorative recessed part 6731a. The light is then further refracted and focused. Thereby, the intensity of light emitted visually recognized through the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be increased.

In this way, the light emitting mode on the front side of the light receiving surface section 6731 is such that the intensity of light increases as the distance from the decorative recessed part 6731a becomes longer, centered around the decorative recessed part 6731a where the intensity of light increases by condensing light. It is said to be a mode in which it becomes lower.

At this time, since the light is condensed in the decorative recessed part 6731a, the light is gathered toward the optical axis side compared to when the surface light emitting section D1b is viewed individually. D1
The intensity of the visible light can be increased compared to the case where the light emitted from the light receiving surface 6731 is visible without the light receiving surface section 6731.

That is, due to the action of the light-receiving surface portion 6731, light (visible light near the decorative recessed portion 6731a) having a higher intensity than when directly viewing the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is removed from the surface emitting portion D.
The intensity of the light is gradually reduced to a lower intensity than when directly looking at the light emitted from 1b,
These lights having different intensities can be made visible to the player through the surface of the light receiving surface section 6731.

Returning to FIG. 270, the member covering the light receiving member 6730 will be described. A cup-shaped member with an open back side is disposed on the front side of the light receiving member 6730. The flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750, and cover member 6760 that constitute the cup-shaped member will be explained.

276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6.
278 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view.

After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left and right directions and joined together by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled from the front side and fitted, thereby fixing each member inseparably.

The flat plate member 6740 is a member formed from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and includes a main body plate portion 6741 formed from a flat plate having a shape obtained by dividing an elliptical shape. The main body plate portion 6741 is a flat plate portion disposed on a plane parallel to the left side from the plane.
A mating plate part 6742 connected with a step on the front side edge of the main body plate part 6741, a plurality of protrusions 6743 protruding from the back side end of the main body plate part 6741 toward the back side, and from the protrusions 6743. A plurality of fastening parts 6744 arranged at separate positions and configured to allow fastening screws to be screwed in from the back side.
and a plurality of insertion holes 6745 formed in the main body plate portion 6741 with a size that allows fastening screws to be inserted therethrough.
The main preparation is as follows.

The main body plate portion 6741 is recessed leftward from the left surface, and has a decorative shape that protrudes rightward from the right surface corresponding to the recessed surface. , main body plate part 674
Matches the right side of 1.

The unevenness forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure filled with hexagonal pyramids arranged so as to taper toward the left, and produces an effect similar to that of a reflecting plate. As a result, the main body plate portion 6741
The strength of the rear side part (the part that can come into contact with the outer frame plate part 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, so it will not break or break when external force is applied. can be prevented. Also, a flat plate member 67 is attached to the base member 6710.
40. Contact friction when the assembly of the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760 is slid to be assembled can be reduced.

Therefore, after the horizontal production device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 may be damaged if a shock is applied from a player or a load is applied when opening and closing the front frame 10014. By making it difficult, not only can durability be improved, but also the assembly of the horizontal presentation device 6700 can be facilitated.

The fitted plate portion 6742 has a plurality of groove portions 6742a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on the right side and a front-rear direction groove portion 6742a bored in the step between the main body plate portion 6741 in the direction along the groove portions 6742a. A hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the longitudinal hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, but details will be described later.

The protruding portion 6743 is a portion inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is a portion inserted into the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710.
This is the part that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through the hole (see FIG. 269(a)).

Further, the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are connected to the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730.
When viewed from the front, it is located close to the outside of the right edge of the In particular, the fastening portion 6744
720 and the light receiving member 6730 (Fig. 269(a), Fig. 2
74(b)), the illumination board 6720 and light receiving member 673 for the flat plate member 6740
0 position shift can be suppressed.

The insertion holes 6745 are through holes through which fastening screws that are screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are provided at four locations above and below. The curved plate member 6750 is connected to the flat plate member 6740 at four fastening positions.
Since the fastening portion 6 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fastened to the
Even if the number of 753 is small, insufficient fixing force can be avoided.

The curved plate member 6750 is disposed opposite to the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740, is curved so as to swell to the left toward the back side, is formed to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730, and is colorless and transparent and transmits light. The main body curved portion 6 is formed from a plastic resin and has a plurality of striped shapes on the inner surface.
751, and a curved plate part disposed parallel to the right side from the main body curved part 6751, connected to the front side edge of the main body curved part 6751 with a step, and arranged to face the fitted plate part 6742. A mating plate portion 6752 and a plurality of fastening portions 6 into which fastening screws can be screwed in from the back side.
753, a plurality of fastening parts 6754 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed into them at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6745, and a plurality of fastening parts 6754 formed at the front side edge of the main body curved part 6751 so that fastening screws can be inserted in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a plurality of insertion holes 6755, and a plurality of insertion holes 6756, which are formed at the front edge of the fitted plate portion 6752 so that fastening screws can be inserted thereinto in the front-rear direction.

The main body curved portion 6751 includes a decorative protrusion 6751a that has a triangular shape that tapers toward the back side and protrudes to the right from the right side in a region including the fastening portion 6753 at the top and bottom center, and the decorative protrusion 6751a. A front-rear hole 6751b drilled in the front-rear direction in the front side portion, a flat division part 6751c dividing the striped shape with a flat surface, and a central flat part 6751d formed from a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position. and a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin striped shape on the inner surface near the rear end.

The decorative protrusion 6751a is configured as a portion that fits into the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. Further, the longitudinal hole 6751b has a function of aligning the connecting extension portion 6763 and the curved plate member 6750.

Thereby, the decorative protruding portion 6751a can be configured as a portion that has both the function of a decorative portion and the function of a portion for positioning with the light receiving member 6730. As a result, the fastening portion 6753 is disposed at only one location in the upper and lower center portions as in this embodiment.

Even with a (small) configuration, it is possible to suppress the curved plate member 6750 from wobbling.

The flat section 6751c is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge of the curved tip fin 6735a (see FIG. 272(a)) in the front-rear direction and side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the front edge of the curved tip fin 6735a is visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 207)
Since the light passes through the flat section 6751c, it can be visually recognized as a clear light.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the curved tip fin 6735a is diffusely reflected by a plurality of striped portions defined by the flat section 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be set to surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge of the tip bent fin 6735b (see FIG. 272(a)) in the front-rear direction and side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the front edge of the tip bent fin 6735b is visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 207)
Since the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, it can be visually recognized as a clear light.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip bent fin 6735b is diffusely reflected by the plurality of striped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bent fin 6735b is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be set as surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

Similar to the mating plate part 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the mating plate part 6752 has a plurality of grooves 6752a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on the left side, and a main body curved part 6751.
A front-rear hole 6752b is provided in the step between the groove 6752a and the front-rear hole 6752b. The groove portion 6752a and the front-back hole 6752b are connected to the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 676.
0, the details of which will be described later.

The fastening portion 6753 is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6753 is disposed at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 when viewed from the front, and is arranged in such a manner that it enters the recess of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 269). a), Figure 274(b)
), it is possible to suppress misalignment of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750.

The fastening portions 6754 are portions into which the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6745 are screwed, and are arranged at positions (four locations) corresponding to the insertion holes 6745. Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left and right direction.

On the other hand, the flat plate member 6740 is connected to the base member 6 by the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744.
710, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from wobbling even when the number of fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced. As a result, the number of fastening parts 6753 near the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, so the number of places where light is blocked by the fastening screws can be reduced, and as a result, the light emitting effect can be visually recognized without blocking the light. A large area can be secured.

The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted from the back side, and guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a that guide the fastening portion 6764 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side thereof. (See Figure 277).

The guide wall portions 6755a, 6756a have an inner surface having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760 on the right side of the fastening portion 6764 (the side adjacent to the flat plate member 6740).
are formed so as to be placed opposite to each other. As a result, the assembled state of the horizontal presentation device 6700 (Fig. 2
Since the movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the left direction (see 65) can be restricted by the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being carelessly removed.

The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6764 back and forth along the guide walls 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 includes a main body plate portion 6761 which is a flat plate portion shaped to cover the mating plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and a main body plate portion 6761 which is bent at the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6761 to cover the curved plate member 6750. A curved plate part 6762 which is a curved plate part shaped to cover the fitting plate part 6742 from the left side, and a curved plate part 6762 from two positions spaced apart by approximately the same distance vertically from the vertical center position.
A connecting extension part 6763 that extends to the left rear and is connected at the extension end, and a fastening screw that is arranged on the back surface of the curved plate part 6762 and inserted into the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate member 6750. A plurality of fastening parts 6764 are formed to be screwable, and a fastening screw is inserted into an insertion hole 6714 disposed at the rear end of the upper end of the curved plate part 6762 and near the upper end of the base member 6710. It mainly includes a proximal end fastening part 6765 (see FIG. 279) that is formed to be able to be inserted into the main body plate part 6761, and a plurality of protruding parts 6766 that protrude from the back side end of the main body plate part 6761 toward the back side.

The main body plate portion 6761 is configured to be able to slide inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and is provided in a rib shape that extends toward the left along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6761a are provided.

The protruding rib 6761a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the main body plate portion 6761, and this protruding portion is inserted into the longitudinal hole 6742b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted.
This can prevent the flat plate member 6740 from shifting to the left with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal presentation device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The curved plate portion 6762 is located at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752a of the curved plate member 6750.
It is configured to be able to slide inside the groove portion 6752a, and includes a plurality of protruding ribs 6762a extending rightward in a rib shape extending along a straight line in the front-rear direction.

The protruding rib 6762a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the curved plate portion 6762, and this protruding portion is inserted into the longitudinal hole 6752b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the main body curved portion 6751, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, in the assembled state of the horizontal direction device 6700 (FIG. 265), the curved plate member
50 can be prevented from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760.

The connecting extension portion 6763 includes a protruding rib 6763a extending rightward in a rib shape extending along a straight line in the longitudinal direction at a position corresponding to the longitudinal hole 6751b.

The protruding rib 6763a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the connecting extension portion 6763 at the connecting position, and this protruding portion is inserted into the front-rear hole 6751b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. This can prevent the curved plate member 6750 from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal presentation device 6700 (FIG. 265).

As described above, the fastening portion 6764 is configured as a portion that can restrict leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 when the lateral direction device 6700 is assembled (see FIG. 265). Careless removal can be prevented.

In this way, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 from side to side. That is, the relationship between the protruding ribs 6762a, 6763a and the longitudinal holes 6751b, 6752b restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the right, and the fastening portion 6764 and the guide wall portion 6
755a and 6756a restricts movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

The proximal fastening portion 6765 is disposed at the rear end of the upper end of the curved plate portion 6762, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end of the base member 6710 can be screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765. is formed. That is, the insertion hole 6714 of the base member 6710 (see FIG. 269(a))
A fastening screw passing through is screwed into the proximal fastening portion 6765, and the proximal fastening portion 6765 is connected to the base member 67.
10 and is fastened and fixed.

The protruding portion 6766 is a portion that is inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710. Further, the protruding portion 6766 and the proximal end fastening portion 6765 are connected to the illumination substrate 6720 and the cover member 6760, which is disposed at a position close to the outside of the right edge or the upper edge of the illumination substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in front view. Misalignment of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

280(a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illumination board 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 taken along the CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa line of FIG. 272(b), and FIG.
) is the base member 6710 along the CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb line in FIG. 272(b).
280(c) is a cross-sectional view of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730, and FIG.

Base member 6710 and illumination board 67 along CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line in (b)
20 and a cross-sectional view of a light receiving member 6730.

As shown in FIG. 280(a), the longitudinal distance between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is
The height of the LED chip D1 is suppressed to the extent that it protrudes from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721. Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting part D1a is made to enter the long rib 6734 without leaking,
In addition, the inside of the long rib 6734 can be totally reflected (see FIG. 281) and can be made easier to advance toward the front side.

In addition, in locations where the elongated ribs 6734 are not arranged, the front-to-back distance between the surface light-emitting portion D1b and the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained to be greater than or equal to the longitudinal width (shape growth) of the elongated ribs 6734. Therefore, the area where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be increased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, on the premise that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially, the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a and the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b are divided. It is possible to distinguish the light from the other light and make it easier to see.

That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is emitted from the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735.
As a line-shaped clear light that travels by total reflection inside the or as a long rib 6734
While the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is visually recognized as light that brightens a small-scale area in which light can travel through the Visually recognized as uniform light (pale light).

As a result, compared to the conventional method in which a lens for condensing light emitted from the illumination board 6720 is arranged opposite to the illumination board 6720 and a dazzling light is visually recognized in a small area, this embodiment According to the invention, it is possible to make visible light (planar light) that spreads over the area of the illumination board 6720 while making dazzling light (line-like light) visible in a small area. These different lights can easily be controlled to make only one or both visible. Therefore, the degree of freedom in light effects can be improved.

Therefore, for example, even if the same LED chip is used for the edge emitting part D1a and the surface emitting part D1b, the light emitted from the edge emitting part D1a and the light emitted from the surface emitting part D1b will be different. By varying the color tone and brightness of the lights, it is possible to perform a luminous effect with a rich gradation (a luminescent effect of different colors and brightness).

As shown in FIG. 280(b), the side surface of the fin 6735 in the plate thickness direction is the right side (front frame 1
0014) is in a plane position with the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction, and the left side surface (front frame 10
014) is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front end (closer to the right side).
Therefore, the normal line of the left side surface does not point directly sideways (a direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illumination board 6720, that is, a direction orthogonal to the front-back direction), but a direction that has a component pointing toward the front side. facing. This allows the light emitted from the left side of the fin 6735 to be directed not only to the side, but also to the
It can also be directed towards the front.

As shown in FIG. 280(c), the elongated rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, so that the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the elongated rib 6734 is transmitted to the inner extending portion 6732.
32. The progression of this light will be explained using a schematic diagram.

FIG. 281 schematically shows a cross section of a base member 6710 and an illumination board 67 in FIG. 280(a).
20 and a schematic diagram of a light receiving member 6730. In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are schematically illustrated.

Although the intensity of the light emitted from the LED becomes smaller as the angle between the surface of the illumination board 6720 and the axis X23 perpendicular to it becomes larger, the light itself is emitted radially. In this embodiment, the subsequent arrival position differs depending on the direction in which the light travels, so it will be explained in order below.

The arrow L23a enters the end of the long rib 6734, and the long rib 6734 and the fin 67
35 and reaches the front end of the fin 6735. The light that reaches the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a is totally reflected and travels, so compared to the case where the light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735. , can reduce light energy loss. Therefore, even if the distance from the edge light emitting portion D1a is long, it is possible to easily make light of sufficient brightness visible to the player.

The arrow L23b points to the left side (front frame 1001) before reaching the front end of the fin 6735.
4) shows the traveling direction of light emitted from the side. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed into a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in a surface-emitting manner.

The arrow L23c indicates the traveling direction of light that passes through the elongated rib 6734, travels directly to the inner extension portion 6732, and is emitted from the surface thereof. This light is not refracted at the end face after entering the long rib 6734, and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, so it can be seen brightly. Further, since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed into a jagged shape, light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

The arrow L23d indicates the light receiving surface portion 6 as a joining position between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735.
731 shows the traveling direction of light that cannot travel inside the fin 6735 and is reflected. That is, as described above, the length of the fin 6735 in the thickness direction becomes shorter as it goes toward the front side compared to the long rib 6734.
Since a jagged concave portion is formed on the inner surface of the long rib 6 (inner surface of the rib 14), the elongated rib 6
734 partially protrudes from the fins 6735.

Therefore, even if the light travels in the front and rear directions in the same way, the elongated rib 6734 and the light receiving surface 6
It is not possible to enter the fin 6735 at all of the joining positions with 731, but some

In the region (particularly near the left side surface of the long rib 6734), entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed, and the light that reaches this region is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

After that, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extension portion 6732 and is emitted. Note that since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed into a jagged shape, the light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light of arrow L23d includes light that travels toward the back side of the illumination board 6720. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the illumination board 6720 equipped with the LED chip D1 on the front side that emits light to the front side can cause the back side portion of the illumination board 6720 to emit light (at least The light can be allowed to travel to the back side of the substrate 6720 (see FIG. 281).

The inner surface of the back side end of the curved plate member 6750 disposed on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed into a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are arranged vertically in rear view (see FIG. 276).
. Thereby, the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23d and reaching the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a vertically uniform manner, and the glass unit 16 can be brightly illuminated by this light.

Therefore, from the irradiation device arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16,
Since it is possible to perform a light effect by combining the light emitted towards the target and the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23d, the degree of freedom in designing the effect using light can be improved.

Note that according to this embodiment, the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d can be alleviated. That is, at the time of incidence on the long rib 6734, due to the difference in angle with the axis X23, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is more direct than the light indicated by the arrow L23c.
Although the light indicated by arrow L23 is brighter than the light indicated by arrow L23, when it is reflected by the light-receiving surface section 6731, an energy loss equivalent to the transmitted light occurs, so when the light reaches the inner extension section 6732, are visually recognized as light having approximately the same brightness. In this way, differences in light brightness depending on the irradiation direction can be alleviated, and the brightness of the inner extension portion 6732 can be easily made uniform across the front and rear.

Here, in this embodiment, the configuration of the horizontal presentation device 6700 disposed on the left side is formed in a shape that is almost bilaterally symmetrical (or similar shape) to the configuration of the horizontal presentation device 6700 on the right side. As a special part that is not symmetrical, the formation of the long ribs 6734 (protrusion on the back surface) is omitted (the formation of the fins 6735 is maintained). As a result, the mode of light production is adjusted for each range of the gaming area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

This adjustment is to ensure visibility for players. That is, although it is desired to maintain the presentation effect caused by the light traveling to the fins 6735 on the left side, the intention is to suppress the light traveling toward the gaming area due to the light traveling to the long ribs 6734.

That is, in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the left side of the game area, where the shot ball enters the game area, the intensity of the light emitted from the horizontal presentation device 6700 inward (towards the game area) is reduced. The aim is to Thereby, it is possible to prevent in advance that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the shot ball due to the dazzling light effect, making it difficult to adjust the shooting intensity and confirm the shooting of the game ball.

On the other hand, on the right side of the playing area, balls fired right-handed (the strongest firing strength) tend to flow down, and there is little need for players to visually check the ball in order to adjust the firing strength of the ball. . In addition, since a large number of game balls will flow down a narrow area in a short period of time, by shining light on that area and reflecting it on the game balls, the effect of the production using light can be improved. can be easily improved. Therefore, there is no need to weaken the intensity of light on the right side of the gaming area, and as in this embodiment, by making it easier to emit light from the horizontal presentation device 6700 to the gaming area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265). , it is possible to improve the performance effect.

Arrow L23e indicates light that is emitted in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734, and is irradiated in a direction with a large angle with the axis X23 (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). It shows the direction of travel. This light is reflected by the inner surfaces of the left and right extended portions 6732 and 6733, or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 and emits surface light.
Since the light beam L23e extends to a position very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a, the intensity of the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23e is very low to begin with, so the light can be constructed as a light that is difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light traveling along the arrow L23e from being visually recognized as being mixed with the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b, thereby preventing the light presentation effect from deteriorating.

Returning to FIG. 280(a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emitting effect near the fitting portion 6737 will be explained. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to the fitting portion 67 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1.
37 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, similar to what was described above with respect to arrows L23c and L23d, a portion of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through both walls of the recessed portion 6737a and reaches the left surface of the fitting portion 6737.

The recess 6737a is configured as a recess in which the fastening portion 6753 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6753, so that the fastening screw is not exposed to light near the recess 6737a. Therefore, there is a possibility that the effect of the light emitting display may be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, sufficient positioning (preventing misalignment) can be achieved by matching the shapes of the fitting part 6737 and the decorative protrusion 6751a, so that the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1 can be properly aligned. It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing positional deviation, and it is possible to reduce the number of locations where the effect of light emitting performance is degraded.

In addition, a concave portion 6737a is provided near the fastening screw to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and the light passing through the concave portion 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extension portion 6732. This prevents the area from becoming too dark. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the degree of deterioration of the production effect of the light emission production.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 284. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the illumination board 6 is placed on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 on the upper part of the front frame 10014.
570 has been described, the pachinko machine 18010 in the 18th embodiment has a presentation device 18800 equipped with an illumination board 18830 at the lower right of the operation device 10300, so that the front frame 18014 is It is also possible to perform light emitting effects at the bottom. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 282 is a front view of a pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG.
is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 18010. The pachinko machine 18010 has a front frame 180
14 is different from the pachinko machine 10010 in the 17th embodiment in that it is provided with a production device 18800 in contrast to the front frame 10014 in the 17th embodiment, and since the other configurations are the same, only the production device 18800 will be explained. Description of other configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, the presentation device 18800 is a device for producing light emission in which the back side and the top surface side of the front side of the lower tray unit 6400 are connected to the covering base member 6410, It is arranged between the operating handle 51 and the operating handle 51 .

This presentation device 18800 is configured so that the appearance of the light emitting presentation changes depending on whether or not the user participates in the operation presentation using the operating device 10300 due to a structural contrivance. Next, the internal structure of the presentation device 18800 will be explained in order to explain the structural improvements.

284(a) is a sectional view of the production device 18800 taken along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG.
It is a schematic diagram of the illumination board 18830 of the production device 18800 when viewed in the XIVb direction. Note that FIG. 284(b) schematically shows how the illumination board 18830 is supported.

As shown in FIG. 284(a), the presentation device 18800 is arranged with a planar gap between a combined base member 18810 connected to the lower plate unit 6400 and the front side of the combined base member 18810. An intermediate fixed member 18820 that is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the combined base member 18810, an illuminated board 18830 arranged in a gap between the combined base member 18810 and the intermediate fixed member 18820, and the illuminated board 18830 A light receiving member 18840 is formed to allow light emitted from the LED chip D1 to travel inside and is fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a covering member 18 is attached to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840.
850.

The connecting base member 18810 has a front wall surface facing the illumination board 18830 formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the back side. The inclination angle of this inclined surface corresponds to the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 (see FIG. 215) when the swinging device member 10310 of the operating device 10300 is placed in the upward position and in the pre-operation posture. It is formed at an angle of inclination that is parallel to the inclined surface.

The illumination board 18830 is arranged parallel to the front wall surface of the joint base member 18810. Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the illumination board 18830. The illumination board 18830 mainly includes an LED chip D1, a long hole 18831 formed in an elongated shape in the vertical direction, and a leaf spring 18832 that generates an upward biasing force.

The elongated hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted to support the illumination board 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the length of the elongated hole 18831 in the vertical direction and the diameter of the fixing part 18821 is designed as a length (permissible length) in which the illumination board 18830 can be mechanically displaced.

On the front side of the illumination board 18830, LED chips D1 are arranged in an arbitrary pattern (in this embodiment, the vertices of a pentagon) and emit light in the normal direction of the surface of the illumination board 18830. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 that receives this light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light along the front-rear direction.

That is, since the player visually recognizes the light whose traveling direction has been changed by the light receiving member 18840, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is downwardly inclined toward the front side (from the player's line of sight). It is possible to prevent the effect of the light production from deteriorating even if the direction is away from the light production.

The light-receiving member 18840 is made of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and is connected to the intermediate fixing member 1.
A plate-shaped portion 18841 configured to be able to close an opening on the front side of 8820, and its plate-shaped portion 188
It mainly includes a plurality of extending plate parts 18842 extending in a plate shape from the back surface of 41.

The intermediate fixing member 18820 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance and is formed into a container shape with an open front side, and has a plurality of fixing parts that protrude in a cylindrical shape toward the joint base member 18810 and are fastened and fixed to the joint base member 18810. 18821, and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 bored at a position and size capable of receiving an extension plate part 18842 at the bottom of the rear side.

In this embodiment, since the direction in which the resin mold of the light receiving member 18840 is cut out is set in the left-right direction, the extending plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape with the same cross section in the left-right direction. Therefore, L
While the ED chips D1 are arranged at the apexes of a pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged left and right at the intermediate position and the lower position can be associated with a common extension plate part 18842. Thereby, the extended plate portion 18842 can be formed as three upper and lower plate portions each having a different width. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also formed in shapes with different widths at three upper and lower locations.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extending plate portion 18842 begins to extend along the normal direction of the plate portion 18841, but is formed into a curved plate shape that is gently curved. Although the radius of curvature of the curve can be set arbitrarily, in this embodiment, the LED chip D1 of the illumination board 18830
to the extent that the total reflection of the light emitted from the plate portion 18841 is continued until it reaches the plate-like portion 18841.
It is designed with a curved shape with a large radius of curvature. As a result, the extended end of the extended plate portion 18842 (
The light incident on the back side end) can be made easier to reach the plate-like portion 18841 while maintaining its intensity.

The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage from a portion of the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840 where no light production is desired, and can be implemented in various ways. For example, it may be a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) that can be attached, or it may be a cup-shaped member made of a resin material.

In this embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that can be fitted from the front side, and the bottom of the cup disposed on the front side has a pentagonal shape based on the arrangement of the LED chip D1. A plurality of through holes 18851 are formed at the apex positions for light passage.

Note that, as described above, the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chip D1, and may have a similar shape with a slightly different size. L
Considering the propagation mode of the light emitted from the ED chip D1, the formation mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important than the arrangement of the LED chip D1 when designing the arrangement of the through hole 18851. Therefore, in this embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that matches the position of the root of the extended plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 when viewed from the front.

The operation of the production device 18800 will be explained. As described above, the illumination board 18830 is movable in the first deviation direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is disposed, within the permissible width of the elongated hole 18831, and the first deviation direction is Vibration device 1036 of device 10300
This corresponds to the direction of vibration Y17a of No. 6.

That is, when the operating device 10300 performs a vibration effect, the vibration causes the illumination board 1883 to
0 is configured to be slidable. When the illumination board 18830 slides, the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extension plate part 18842 shifts, so the LED chip D1
It becomes difficult for the light emitted from to enter the extension plate portion 18842.

In this case, even when light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the light does not reach the extension plate 18842.
Because it is difficult to advance through the hole 18851, the through hole 18851 appears dark. That is, it is not possible to determine whether the LED chip D1 is emitting light or not. On the other hand, in the operating device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operating member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes to a direction different from the first shift direction.

In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operating device 10300 on the illumination board 18830 is suppressed, and the illumination board 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the biasing force of the leaf spring 18832. At the initial position of the illumination board 18830, the LED chip D1 and the extension plate part 188
42 are arranged to face each other, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is directed to the extension plate part 18.
842, and is formed so that it can proceed toward the front side by total reflection.

That is, even when the operating device 10300 is performing a vibration effect (when the through hole 18851 is dark and visible) while light is being emitted from the LED chip D1, pressing the swinging operating member 10310 , it becomes possible to make the through hole 18851 brightly visible.

Therefore, when a vibration effect is being performed and the through hole 18851 is visible darkly, it is possible to determine whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light by operating the swinging operation member 10310. I can do it. Here, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light when a jackpot occurs or when a game state shifts to a game state advantageous to the player (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light.

As a result, the player's desire to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased, so when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's desire to participate can be increased, and the player's desire to actually operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased. The user can be induced to operate the swinging operation member 10310.

Note that, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 18830 is disposed outside the covered foundation member 6410, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, illuminated board 18830
is arranged in such a manner that it penetrates the covered foundation member 6410 and enters inside, and the operation device 103
It may be possible to make contact with 00.

In this case, the vibration of the operating device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the illumination board 18830, and the illumination board 18830 slides not only due to the vibration but also due to the pushing operation (push operation) to the lens member 10317. It can be configured as follows.

In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which a push instruction as a notification effect is generated. When the lens member 10317 is pushed in (push operation) at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light, the L
It is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to ascertain whether or not the ED chip D1 emits light when viewed from the front.

In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pushed in (push operation) at a timing other than the notification, the player can easily miss the notification that is advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pushing operation on the lens member 10317 at times other than the timing at which the pushing instruction is generated, the operating device 10300 may fail early or the operating device may be operated unnecessarily many times, causing noise. It is possible to suppress nuisance behavior.

Next, the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 285. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operating device 10300 are formed so as to be split into the left and right sides, but the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment are
It is formed so that it can be divided into front and rear parts. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 285 is a side view of covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 285, in this embodiment, an upper cover 19321 and a lower cover 1932
2 is arranged so as to surround the swinging operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). Note that the main configurations of the covers 19321 and 19322 are substantially the same shape as the covers 10321 and 10322 described above, and will mainly be described as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

The covers 19321 and 19322 are formed to be divisible at a dividing plane that coincides with the reference line X19 shown in FIG. The cover 19322 is configured to be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322.

Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before operation when the swinging operation member 10310 is in the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is orthogonal to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), loosening of the fastening screw due to vibration impact can be suppressed.

In addition, since the direction of vibration Y17a of the swinging operation member 10310 is the same as the pushing operation direction (pushing direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216(a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw Since the fastening direction is perpendicular to the fastening direction in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to an impact generated by operating the lens member 10317.

Next, the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 286. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat dish shape in cross-sectional view,
Although a case has been described in which the thickness of the plate is substantially constant in the inclined portion, the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 in the 20th embodiment are formed with a slight inclination toward the vertical direction. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 286 is a sectional view of the lower tray unit 16400 in the twentieth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229. As shown in FIG. 286, in this embodiment, the slopes of the left and right ends of the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 are different from those of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described above in the seventeenth embodiment. It is set closer to the top and bottom.

In addition, the lower end of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the seventeenth embodiment) and the upper end of the recessed shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the recessed shape portion 6414 of the seventeenth embodiment) (
(base end of the recess) are arranged on the same line in the up-down direction (vertical direction).

The hanging plate-like part 6426b of the plate-like support part 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is connected to the recessed part 16.
414 (the upper surface of the main body part 6411) and is supported, it is possible to ensure a sufficient support thickness in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the main body part 6411 at that support position. Main body part 6411 due to load during operation of operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207)
deformation can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which the slopes of the left and right end portions are changed compared to the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, there may be no inclination at all, and the left and right outer surfaces of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in cross-sectional view). Even in this case, a sufficient support thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be ensured.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by forming the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 to be inclined in an inverted V-shape in cross section, the direction in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 deform when receiving an external force is directed toward the left and right center. It can be made easier to direct. As a result, the degree of fatigue caused by external force can be lowered compared to a case where the shape can be deformed in both left and right directions, and the plate portion forming the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 can be damaged at an early stage. This can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 can be improved.

Next, the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 301. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the supply of electricity to the lower tray unit 6400 is not required, but the lower tray unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment is configured to vibrate due to electrical conduction. The device 21500 is provided, and it is necessary to supply electricity to the lower tray unit 21400. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.
The explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 287 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300, and the lower tray unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 287, the front frame 1001
4 is omitted, the lower tray unit 21400 and the operation device 10300 are
The metal main body portion 10014a is disassembled and illustrated as viewed from the rear side.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the assembly direction line connecting the insertion holes 6801R, 6801L and their fastening points is illustrated as an imaginary line, and furthermore, the electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500 so as to be able to supply electricity. The arrangement relationship with respect to the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300, and the lower tray unit 21400 is partially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 287, a bottom member 21De, which is a redesigned version of the above-described bottom member De, is fastened and fixed to the bottom side of the operating device 10300. In addition to the configuration of the bottom member De described above, the bottom member 21De includes a projecting portion De3 extending to the right side.

The projecting portion De3 has both the function of applying a load to the vibrating device 21500 and the function of regulating the displacement of the electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500. That is, as shown in FIG. 287, the electrical wiring 21513 is routed so as to crawl under the overhang De3, so that when the lower tray unit 21400 is removed for maintenance, the electrical wiring 21513 and the right front cover are 10322 can be prevented from rubbing against each other.

The overhang De3 is formed with the back side inclined so that the width becomes narrower toward the overhang end,
The front side constitutes a plane parallel to a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. With this configuration, the metal main body 1001 is placed on the back side of the overhang De3 while ensuring the rigidity of the overhang De3.
4a can be created.

This gap is used to connect the electrical wiring 21513 of the length required when removing the lower pan unit 21400 during maintenance (wire with a length to fill the length of the distance of the lower pan unit 21400 from the metal main body 10014a). (Metal body part 1001
4a), it is effectively used as an area to be left loose. This makes it possible to suppress the load that the electrical wiring 21513 receives from the surroundings to be smaller than when the electrical wiring 21513 is arranged in a cramped manner when the lower pan unit 21400 is not removed.

As shown in FIG. 287, the operating handle 51 is fitted and supported by a handle support plate 21051, and the handle support plate 21051 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 and the right side edge of the lower tray unit 21400 are overlapped front and back, but the handle support plate 2105
No fastening portion is formed over the entire left side edge of the lower plate unit 21400, and connection with the lower plate unit 21400 is performed not by fastening but by engagement (fitting by fitting in the front-rear direction).

Therefore, the lower plate unit 21400 and the handle support plate 21051 are not mechanically fixed, but are configured to be relatively movable in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the right side edge of the lower plate unit 21400 is displaced in the front-rear direction compared to the case where the right side edge of the lower plate unit 21400 and the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 are fastened and fixed over the entire area. Accordingly, displacement of the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration device 21500, which will be described later, from being transmitted to the operating handle 51 via the handle support plate 21051.

That is, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be configured to be transmitted only from the lower tray unit 21400 to the player. For example, the transmission path of the vibrations transmitted to the player who grips the operating handle 51 is not set as a route via the operating handle 51, but is instead a lower tray unit that is in contact with the finger or arm of the player who grips the operating handle 51. The route can be limited to the right side of 21400.

FIG. 288 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400. In FIGS. 288 and 289, the covering foundation member 21
410, the lower plate forming member 21420, the V-shaped design member 21450, and the portions corresponding to the fixing locations of the vibration device 21500 are shown in correspondence with imaginary lines.

In addition to the structure of the above-mentioned covering foundation member 6410, the covering foundation member 21410 has a main body portion 641.
A plurality of (a pair in this embodiment) fastening parts 21415 are formed in the region on the right side of one concave shaped part 6414 so that fastening screws can be screwed into the fastening parts 21415. The vibration device 21 is attached to the fastening portion 21415.
The fastening screws are inserted into the insertion portions 21535 which are arranged as a pair of upper and lower parts on the right side of 500. That is, the right insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the covered foundation member 21410.

In addition to the structure of the lower plate forming member 6420 described above, the lower plate forming member 21420 has a front vertically long portion 6.
A support hole 21428 is provided in a plate-shaped portion extending upward from the upper surface of 426c in the front-rear direction. A fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450, which is a connecting portion between the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500, is inserted into the support hole 21428.

In addition to the configuration of the V-shaped design member 6450 described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 has a plate-like protrusion 6
453R (see FIG. 227), a fastening part 21457 is provided in a columnar shape to protrude toward the back side and is formed into which a fastening screw can be screwed, and a fastening part 21457 is formed in a plate shape and is connected between the fastening part 21457 and the insertion hole 6452. A connecting plate-like portion 21458 is provided.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the fastening portion 21457 is inserted into the support hole 21428, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion portion 21535 on the left side of the vibration device 21500 is screwed into the fastening portion 21457 to be fastened and fixed. That is, the left insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the lower plate forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450.

Therefore, the vibrating device 21500 is not fastened and fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members (covering foundation member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420, and V-shaped design member 21450). Thereby, the fastening strength of these members can be reinforced by the vibration device 21500.

Here, in the V-shaped design member 21450, as described above, the overhanging fastening parts 6454 disposed at the left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the metal main body part 10014a via an intermediate member. Therefore,
It has a substantially bag-like shape that opens toward the back side, and is structurally more rigid than the covering base member 21410, which is fastened and fixed to the metal main body part 10014a mainly at the back side edge.

That is, the covering foundation member 21410 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body part 10014a at a plurality of positions at the lower end on the back side and the left end, while the number of fastening positions at the upper part and the right edge is suppressed (or there are no fastening positions). Even if there is one, it is limited to a small number), and because it is formed into a thin, substantially box-like (substantially bag-like) shape, it has a structure with a high degree of freedom of displacement (low resistance), especially at the right edge.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened and fixed to the upper front edge of the covering foundation member 21410, the vertical direction (vertical direction) displacement of the covering foundation member 21410 can be suppressed by the V-shaped design member 21450. , the degree of freedom of displacement of the covered foundation member 21410 in the front-back direction (horizontal direction)
can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which, for example, the lower tray 50 is displaced up and down and the balls stored in the lower tray 50 bounce due to the displacement of the covering foundation member 21410.

According to this embodiment, with the V-shaped design member 21450 having a rigid structure as a base (reference),
Covering foundation member 21410 is more flexible (higher degree of freedom of displacement) than V-shaped design member 21450
The covered foundation member 214 can be vibrated by driving the vibration device 21500.
The right side of 10 can be intensively vibrated (strong vibration).

In addition, transmission of vibration to the V-shaped design member 21450 and the lower plate forming member 21420 can be suppressed, so that the operation device 10300 may not vibrate due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500, and the balls stored in the lower plate 50 may not vibrate. It is possible to avoid vibration caused by the vibration of the device 21500, and from this fact, it can be said that the right side of the covered foundation member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strongly vibrated) by driving the vibrating device 21500.

The connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed into a long plate-like shape along the longitudinal direction of the shell-like projecting portion 21541, which will be described later. As a result, the connecting plate portion 214 extends in the longitudinal direction of the shell-like projecting portion 21541.
58 and the shell-like protruding portion 21541, and a large load generation area can be secured, so that stress concentration at the time of contact (pressing) can be avoided.

In this embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is configured in a dimensional relationship in which it abuts (is pressed) against the connecting plate-like portion 21458 (see FIG. 298).
Therefore, vibration can be received through at least the abutment position between the shell-like projecting portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458.

This configuration is effective in a configuration in which the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members as in this embodiment. That is, compared to the case where the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a single member, when the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members, deviations from the design dimensions of each member may accumulate, so the size is reduced. The deviation tends to become large. Therefore, the arrangement of the vibration device 21500 becomes unstable, making it difficult to stabilize the vibration transmission strength.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in anticipation of the possibility of dimensional deviations occurring, no matter how the dimensional deviations occur (no matter which dimension is within the size limit), the shell is By designing the dimension so that the shell-like protrusion 21541 comes into contact with the connecting plate-like part 21458 (if the interval is short, the shell-like protrusion 21541 is deformed to crush it while making contact), the shell-like protrusion 21541 can be stably formed. The overhanging portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458 can be brought into contact. Therefore,
Can receive vibration stably.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contact direction of the shell-like overhang part 21541 and the connection plate-like part 21458 is set to the front-back direction similarly to the screwing direction of the fastening screw. Therefore, even if the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced downward due to the operation of the operating device 10300 as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced so as to slide with respect to the shell-like projecting portion 21541. This makes it possible to avoid transmission of downward displacement. Therefore, the vibration device 21
500 can be prevented from being pushed down as the operating device 10300 is operated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the location where the vibration device 21500 is arranged is the covered foundation member 21.
410 is a flexible part, so it is a part that is easily broken in the event of a fraudulent act in which the outer shell of the pachinko machine A10 is destroyed and the inside is invaded (for example, by inserting a thin metal wire). That is, in this embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is disposed at a location that is likely to be selected as an intrusion route by a person who commits a fraudulent act.

Therefore, when the covering foundation member 21410 is broken, there is a possibility that the vibrating device 21500 is simultaneously destroyed or disconnected, and in this case, the conduction of the electrical wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500 is interrupted. By controlling the audio lamp control device 113 to detect this and output an error signal, it is possible to detect fraud at an early stage.

Further, instead of the vibrating device 21500, a device that outputs an error signal may be provided, but in this embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is intentionally provided, so that if no fraudulent activity has occurred, the device will vibrate. It can be used for performances. That is, since the vibration device 21500 can be used for both vibration production and detection of fraudulent activities (it can be configured as a multi-functional device), the installation space for the device can be reduced.

FIG. 290 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device 21500, and FIG. 291 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device 21500.
500 is an exploded rear perspective view. As illustrated in FIGS. 290 and 291, the vibration device 2
1500 includes a vibration motor 21510 that can generate vibration by controlling an eccentric weight 21512 to rotate, and a vibration motor 21510 that is made of a soft resin material (such as silicone resin).
A covering member 21520 that covers the covering member 21520 and a shape that is made of a harder material (for example, a resin material or a metal material) than the covering member 21520 and that can partially cover the covering member 21520 from the back side. The covered cover member 21530 and the covering member 21 to be formed
A flat opposing plate member 2154 is disposed opposite to the covered cover member 21530 with 520 in between.
0.

The covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 hold the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 so as to surround them from the front and back, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws. That is,
The covering cover 21530 has multiple locations (in this embodiment, two locations) through which the threaded portion of the fastening screw can be inserted.
The opposing plate member 21540 includes a plurality of fastening portions 21542 into which fastening screws inserted into the through holes 21532 can be screwed. Hereinafter, the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 that are to be held will be described first, and then the details of the covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 will be described.

FIG. 292 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520;
293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, and FIG. 294 is a front perspective view of the covering member 21520. In FIG. 294, covering member 21520
A perspective view looking down from diagonally front and above is shown.

The vibration motor 21510 includes a main body part 21511 whose shaft part is rotationally controlled by energization, an eccentric weight 21512 which is fixed to the shaft part and whose center of gravity is arranged at a different position from the shaft part and has a fan-like shape when viewed from above, and a lower surface of the main body part 21511. The electrical wiring 21513 extends downward from the bottom surface (electrically connected to a terminal formed on the bottom surface).

The covering member 21520 includes a cylindrical main body 21521 formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510, and a protrusion extending vertically along the back surface of the cylindrical main body 21521. A pair of protrusions 21522 formed as a cylindrical main body 215
A plate-shaped protrusion 21523 that protrudes in the left-right direction along the lower surface of the cylindrical main body 21
521, and a projecting portion 21524 that projects downward from the lower surface of 521 in an oval shape when viewed from below.

The projecting portion 21524 connects the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 and the electrical wiring 21513.
It is formed in an oval shape that is large enough to surround the connection position with the electrical wiring 21513 when viewed from below, and the upper surface side is the electrical wiring 21513.
It is recessed so that it can accept it.

That is, as shown in FIG. 294, the projecting portion 21524 has a recessed portion 21524a recessed downward from the lower surface side of the cylindrical main body portion 21521, and a region sandwiched between the recessed portion 21524a in the vertical direction. A wiring through hole 21524b to be drilled and a pair of preliminary holes 21524 to be bored in the vertical direction at positions opposite to the wiring through hole 21524b with the recessed portion 21524a in between.
c.

With the above configuration, the electrical wiring 21513 is guided to the wiring through hole 21524b while being held in the recessed portion 21524a, and is guided in the opening direction (downward) of the wiring through hole 21524b. That is, in this embodiment, the covering member 21520 has the function of preventing the electrical wiring 21513 from sagging due to its own weight and holding it, the function of bundling the electrical wiring 21513, and the function of the electrical wiring 21513.
513 can be provided. Thereby, the number of required binding bands can be reduced, and material costs and manufacturing man-hours can be reduced.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the covering cover 21530 and the opposing plate part 21540 when the covering member 21520 is not assembled, it is difficult for the person performing the assembly work to remove the covering member 21520 from the covering member 21520.
It is possible to prevent forgetting to add a 0. Therefore, compared to the case where a binding band is prepared separately to hold the electric wiring 21513, it is possible to suppress forgetting to assemble a member for holding the electric wiring 21513.

Note that in this embodiment, the electrical wiring 21513 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). That is, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500
is configured as a part of the other device 228, and its vibration is controlled by a control signal transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

The preliminary hole 21524c is formed at a position corresponding to the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 in the vertical direction. That is, even if the electrical wiring 21513 is about to come out from the main body 21511, the electrical wiring 21513 can be pushed into the main body 21511 by inserting a thin rod through the preliminary hole 21524c and pushing the electrical wiring 21513. can. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from falling off from the main body portion 21511.

In this embodiment, a vibrating device 21500 is arranged in a lower tray unit 21400 (see FIG. 287). Since the lower pan unit 21400 is formed to be removable from the metal main body 10014a, if a worker performing maintenance work accidentally removes the lower pan unit 21400 too far from the metal main body 10014a, the electrical wiring 21513 may be damaged. There is a risk of wire breakage due to excessive load. Also, when the vibration device 21500 generates vibration, the electric wiring 215
If an excessive load is applied to 13, there is also a risk of wire breakage.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the overhanging portion 21524 is formed so as to cover the connection position between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511, so that the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 are connected to each other.
It is possible to prevent the connection position with 1511 from being excessively displaced.

Furthermore, in front of the wiring through hole 21524b, the length of the electrical wiring 21513 to be held in the recessed portion 21524a is secured, so that it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from breaking during this length. I can do it (I can give myself some leeway). In addition, electrical wiring 2
Even if a load is applied to the electrical wiring 21513, the electrical wiring 21513 is not applied in the direction of connection between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body part 21511, but in the longitudinal direction of the electrical wiring 21513 held in the recessed part 21524a (i.e., in the longitudinal direction of the overhanging part 21524). Since the load is applied along the electrical wiring 21513
1511 can be avoided.

In addition, as described above, even if the electrical wiring 21513 falls out from the main body 21511, the electrical wiring 2151 can be easily removed by inserting a thin rod through the preliminary hole 21524c.
3 can be reconnected to the body portion 21511. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of maintenance work including the process of removing the lower tray unit 21400.

Note that in the step of inserting (assembling) the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the electric wiring 21513 is arranged on the covering member 21520 side with respect to the main body portion 21511. Therefore, the work of inserting the electric wiring 21513 into the wiring through hole 21524b can be performed at the same time as the work of inserting the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, so that the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

FIG. 295 is a front view of the cover member 21530. In addition, in the explanation of FIG. 295,
Refer to FIGS. 290 and 291 as appropriate. The covered cover member 21530 includes a main body part 21531 forming a frame whose front side and lower side are open, the above-mentioned insertion hole 21532, and a main body part 21531.
a receiving recess 21533 that is recessed on the front side of the vibration motor 21510 and receives the vibration motor 21510;
A plurality of protrusions 21534, which are protrusions inwardly protruding from the left and right inner surfaces of the receiving recess 21533 and extend in the front-back direction, are bored in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower positions of the insertion hole 21532, Covering foundation member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420, and V-shaped design member 2145
0 (see FIGS. 288 and 289), through which the fastening screws fastened and fixed can be inserted.

The receiving recess 21533 includes a weight receiving recess 21533a that receives the eccentric weight 21512, a main body receiving recess 21533b that receives the main body 21511, and a weight receiving recess 21533a and the main body in such a manner that the rotation axis of the main body 21511 is located at the center position in the left-right direction. Receiving recess 2153
3b and a bearing receiving recess 21533c.

The main body receiving recess 21533b is recessed with an extra length on the right side compared to the left side with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c. On the contrary, the protruding portion 21534 is provided with an extra length on the right side compared to the left side, so that the protruding tip of the protruding portion 21534 is located in the bearing receiving recess 21.
It is arranged at a substantially symmetrical position with respect to 533c.

As a result, the covering member 21520 is held by the protruding tip of the protruding portion 21534 when the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state), while the covering member 21520 is
In the excitation state (vibration state) of 510, the covering member 2 is
It can accommodate 1520 deformations (displacements, flows). As a result, the covered cover member 2
It is possible to prevent overload from being applied to the cover member 21530, and the durability of the cover member 21530 can be improved.

Since the protruding part 21534 is formed along the front-rear direction, the displacement of the covering member 21520, which is supported by contacting the protruding part 21534 from side to side, is due to the effects of engagement with the protruding part 21534 and biting. It tends to occur in the front, back, left and right (horizontal direction), but is suppressed in the vertical direction.

Therefore, even in a configuration where the main body 21511 tends to tilt around the lower end when vibration occurs, such as when the eccentric weight 21512 is disposed at the upper end of the main body 21511, the vertical component of the vibration can be suppressed. , the displacement direction of the vibration motor 21510 can be corrected in the horizontal direction.

The protrusion portion 21534 is formed in a planar plate shape with a vertical width half that of the left and right side portions at the left and right intermediate portions of the main body portion 21531, and the protrusion length increases as it approaches the intermediate portion 21531a side (back side). The covering member 215 is formed in a manner that follows the outer shape of the member 21520.
20 can be supported from left and right and from the back side.

In addition, the protruding portion 21534 extends from the intermediate lower surface 2153 that constitutes the lower surface of the intermediate portion 21531a.
A deep inclined part 21534a is provided below 1b and rises from the nearest protrusion part 21534 toward the intermediate lower surface 21531b.

The distance between the rear inclined portion 21534a and the protruding portion 21534 directly above it becomes narrower toward the back side. Therefore, when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced toward the back side and the covering member 21520 is deformed in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510, the rear inclined portion It is possible to increase the load (reaction force) applied to the portion of the covering member 21520 that enters between the protrusion 21534a and the protrusion 21534 directly above it. This can prevent the covering member 21520 from being excessively displaced toward the back side.

The protrusions 21534 are not arranged completely symmetrically, but are arranged partially shifted vertically. This makes it easier to avoid loads being applied to the covering member 21520 from both left and right directions on the same horizontal plane, compared to when the protrusions 21534 are arranged in completely symmetrical positions. , the compressive load applied to the covering member 21520 can be reduced.

Note that the protrusions 21534 may be arranged completely symmetrically. In this case, it is preferable to select a material for the covering member 21520 that is not fragile.

The formation of the lower half of the rear side wall portion of the main body portion 21531 is omitted. Therefore, the covering member 21
520 is held such that the displacement of the covering member 21520 is restricted in the upper half of the main body 21531, while the displacement of the covering member 21520 is allowed in the lower half of the main body 21531.

Therefore, when the covering member 21520 is displaced toward the back side due to excitation of the vibration motor 21510, the upper half of the protrusion 21522 is regulated by the upper half of the main body 21531, and the lower half is allowed to be displaced. both advance to the open area in the lower half of the main body 21531 (
The vibration device 21500 can be deformed so as to flow) and work to improve the vibration performance of the vibration device 21500, which will be described in detail later.

The right side of the plate-like protrusion 21523 of the covering member 21520 is supported from below by the protruding ridge 21534 of the covered cover member 21530. Further, while the left side portion is open to the covered cover member 21530, it is supported by the support extension portion 21543 of the opposing plate member 21540 (Fig.
91). As a result, in addition to being able to support the weight of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, an open portion that can be accessed from the outside can be formed on the lower side of the covering member 21520.

That is, with respect to the covering member 21520, the covering member 21530 covers the lower part from the rear right side, and the opposing plate member 21540 covers the lower part from the front left side, so that the lower surface of the covering member 21520 is supported. The lower left rear part of the member 21520 can be opened as an open part. This open portion functions as a location that ensures contact between the overhang portion De3 and the covering member 21520.

The opposing plate member 21540 is inserted into the covering cover member 2 from the open side of the covering cover member 21530.
It is a plate-shaped member arranged opposite to 1530, and includes a shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 formed to project from the front side, the above-mentioned fastening portion 21542, and a support extension extending from the lower left end toward the back side. It is provided with a mounting part 21543.

The shell-like projecting portion 21541 is thin like the opposing plate member 21540, and a gap is formed between the projecting tip and the covering member 21520, so that the shell-like projecting portion 21541
Even if a load is applied in the direction in which it is pushed in (towards the back) and the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is deformed, it is possible to avoid transmitting a large load to the covering member 21520.

FIG. 296(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 296(b) is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400.
296(a), FIG. 297 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG.

FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the lower pan unit 21400 taken along the line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII in (a).

As shown in FIG. 296(b), the protrusion 21522 of the covering member 21520 and the bottom member 21D
When the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state), the projecting portion De3 slightly bites into the protruding portion 21522 (the protruding portion De3 is configured to have a dimensional relationship in which the projecting portion De3 of the The striped portion 21522 is slightly deformed).

By applying a load from the protruding portion De3 to the protruding portion 21522, the vibration device 2150
The vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 can be placed closer to the front in the interior. This can prevent the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from unintentionally stopping at a position closer to the back side.

FIG. 299(a) shows a lower tray unit 2140 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400.
299(b) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit 21400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a), and FIG. 300(a) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit 21400. FIG. 300(b) is a partial top view of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 214 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb in FIG. 300(a).
00 is a partial side schematic diagram.

299(a) and 299(b), similar to the non-excited state of the vibration motor 21510, a state in which the vibration device 21500 is placed at the front-side limit position of vibration displacement is illustrated, and FIG.
0(a) and FIG. 300(b), the vibration motor 21510 is in an excited state, and the vibration device 2
1500 is illustrated in a state where it is placed at the rear side limit position of vibration displacement. That is, when the vibration motor 21510 is excited and the eccentric weight 21512 rotates to generate vibration, the vibration device 21500
is repeatedly displaced between the state shown in FIG. 299 and the state shown in FIG. 300. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 300, the eccentric weight 21512 is in contact with the main body portion 21531 in the front-rear direction, and vibrations are also directly transmitted.

With reference to FIGS. 299 and 300, the transmission mode of vibration of the vibration device 21500 will be described. As described above, in the vibrating device 21500, a plurality of parts are intentionally fastened and fixed to members having different rigidities. The purpose of this is to effectively cause the vibration of the vibration device 21500 to occur in a specific part.

Specifically, if the member to which the entire vibrating device 21500 is fixed is too hard, the vibrations will be suppressed too much, while if it is too soft, the vibrations may be damped too much. is fixed to a hard member, and the vibration device 215 is rotated around the fixed position as an axis.
It is configured to vibrate the soft side member fixed to the other part of 00. Thereby, the portion fixed to other parts of the vibrating device 21500 can be sufficiently displaced.

That is, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side of the vibrating device 21500 is connected to the V-shaped design member 214.
50 (hard side) and the shell-like projecting part 21541 is brought into contact with the connecting plate-like part 21458, while the insertion part 21535 formed on the right side of the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410 (soft side). side).

Therefore, the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is generated by using the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side as a fixed reference (axis of vibration), and the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side being displaced (rotationally displaced) in the covered foundation member. 21410, it is possible to vibrate the position close to the player's finger holding the operating handle 51.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced toward the back side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, the protruding portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 is pressed against the protruding portion De3 (see FIG. 300). As a result, the protrusion portion 21522 receives a load directed toward the front side from the overhang portion De3, so the vibrating device 21500 has more force to return to the front side than when the overhang portion De3 is not formed. can be increased.

In addition, when the vibration device 21500 is displaced in a manner that rotates backward about the left end portion due to the vibration, the left plate-shaped protrusion 21523 is pressed against the left side surface of the bottom member 21De due to this displacement (Fig. 300 (see (a)). As a result, the plate-like protrusion 21523 becomes the bottom member 21De.
As a result, the vibrating device 21500 receives a load directed toward the right side, thereby increasing the momentum of the vibrating device 21500 returning forward in the rotational direction about the left end portion.

When the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are displaced to the back side, the volume of the covering member 21520 whose displacement is regulated by the intermediate portion 21531 of the covering cover member 21530 is allowed to flow downward from the intermediate lower surface 21531b. Therefore, by concentrating the resin material constituting the covering member 21520 between it and the overhang De3, the covering member 21520 can be partially hardened, thereby increasing the reaction force received from the overhang De3. I can do it. In addition, since the bottom member 21De including the overhanging portion De3 is not a member that is expected to be displaced in the front-back direction, it is difficult to imagine a situation in which the covering member 21520 is deformed due to displacement of the overhanging portion De3.

As a result, the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the overhang De3 is transferred to the vibration motor 2.
It can be increased to a limited extent in the energized state of 1510. In this case, when operating the operating device 10300, the vibration device 10366 of the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 216)
During the vibration performance, when the vibration device 21500 is de-energized, the vibration device 215
By keeping the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the overhang portion De3 small, transmission of vibration to the vibration device 21500 side can be suppressed. By increasing the load generated between the vibration device 2 and the
The effect of assisting the vibration of 1500 mm can be increased.

Therefore, in the non-excited state of the vibrating device 21500, the structure is configured such that the load transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be sufficiently suppressed (the covering member 215
On the other hand, when the vibrating device 21500 is in an excited state, compressive deformation (strain) occurs in the protrusion 21522, which reduces the load transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520. (reaction force) can be increased.

On the other hand, since the protrusion portion 21522 is a protrusion formed from a flexible resin material, the protrusion portion 21522
1522 is pressed against it, it is possible to suppress displacement of the overhang portion De3. Therefore, it is possible to suppress vibrations from being transmitted to the protruding portion De3, and therefore it is possible to avoid vibrations occurring in the operating device 10300 due to the vibrations of the vibration device 21500.

When the vibration device 21500 is displaced toward the back side and then back toward the front side as the vibration device 21500 vibrates, the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is pressed against the connecting plate-like portion 21458. As a result, the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 receives a load from the connecting plate-like portion 21458 toward the back side, so that the vibrating device 21500 is placed on the back side compared to the case where the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is not formed. It can increase the momentum of returning to the side.

In this way, the present embodiment is configured to assist the displacement of the vibration device 21500 in both the front and rear directions, so that after the vibration device 21500 is in the excited state, until the vibration becomes strong enough to be felt by the player, period can be shortened.

Note that in the above description, when the operation device 10300 is operated or when the operation device 10300
Although a state in which the vibrating device 21500 is de-energized when the vibrating device 10366 produces a vibration has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vibration device 21500
The operation of the operation device 10300 may be performed while the operation device 10300 is vibrating.

In this case, the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhang De3 will increase, but the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the overhang De3 due to the operation of the operating device 10300,
Since the direction of the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhang portion De3 intersects,
Interaction between the load generated from the vibration device 21500 and the load applied to the operating device 10300 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation (adverse effect) in which the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300 break down due to loads being generated by the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300 at the same time.

FIG. 301 is a partial top schematic diagram of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400. FIG. 301 shows a state in which the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 is restricted to the right end of the bearing receiving recess 21533c of the covered cover member 21530, that is, a state in which the vibration motor 21510 is placed at the right-hand limit position of the displaceable region. Illustrated.

In this embodiment, since the vibration motor 21510 is held by the covered cover member 21530 via the covering member 21520, the vibration motor 21510 is
1510 is configured to be displaceable with respect to the covering cover 21530. Furthermore, as described above, in the vibration device 21500, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotational displacement) with the insertion portion 21535 on the left side (see FIG. 290) as a reference (axis of vibration), so the centrifugal displacement The force is applied to the right.

That is, when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 becomes intense, the vibration motor 21510 is displaced rightward due to the centrifugal force generated in the vibration device 21500 (see FIG. 301). Covering cover 215
Since the protruding portion 21534 formed on the right side of 30 is formed in a curved shape that moves toward the left at the end on the back side (see FIG. 295), the more the vibration motor 21510 moves to the right, the more the vibration motor The resistance received from the covering cover 21530 increases when it is displaced to the back side. Thereby, displacement of the vibration motor 21510 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the vibration of the vibration motor 21510 becomes excessive, the vibration is suppressed by displacing the vibration motor 21510 in a direction intersecting the main vibration direction (front-back direction). Since this effect occurs, vibration can be suppressed without controlling the vibration motor 21510 (for example, before the vibration motor 21510 is stopped by control). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510.

Further, by configuring the vibration to be suppressed by the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510, it is possible to eliminate the need to arrange a detection sensor for detecting displacement due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost of the lower tray unit 21400 in this embodiment, and also to dissipate the heat generated from the vibration motor 21510 by passing the wiring through the vacant area by omitting the provision of the detection sensor. It can be effectively used as a space for doing things.

Next, the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 381. In the first embodiment, the gaming machine frame was mainly explained, but in the twenty-second embodiment, the operating unit A300 that is visually recognized through the window 14c will be explained.

FIG. 302 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 in the twenty-second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the game board A13 includes a base plate A cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) for guiding the ball, rails 61, 62,
It is constructed by assembling a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit A80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (see Fig. 1). Fixed.

The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 can be viewed by the player from the front side thereof. General prize opening 6
3. The first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the variable display unit A80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and fixed with tapping screws etc. from the front side of the game board A13. has been done.

The front central part of the game board A13 is connected to the inner frame 1 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1).
It can be visually recognized from the front side of 2. Below, mainly with reference to FIG. 302, game board A13
The configuration of is explained below.

On the front of the game board A13, there is an outer rail 6 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
2 is erected, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a band-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected inside the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board A13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board A13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the front of the game board A13 and has two rails 61, 6.
2 and the outer edge member A73 made of resin that connects the rails (an area in which a prize opening, etc. is provided and a shot ball flows down).

Note that in this embodiment, the outer edge member A73 includes a metal plate-like member 75 (see FIG. 308).
By incorporating this, the combined strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73 is strengthened, but the details will be described later.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the aim of arranging the general winning a prize opening 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be explained below.

In this embodiment, in the normal game, the route passing through the left side of the third symbol display device 81 is the first
The ball will be launched with the aim of winning the ball into the winning hole 64, but the first winning hole 64
A part of the ball flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning hole 64 without reaching the ball wins a prize in the general winning hole 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the left side of the gaming area is arranged with the aim of influencing the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning in the general winning opening 63, the more likely it is to generate a winning number in the first winning opening 64 with a small number of balls during normal play.

On the other hand, in a game in which the time is shortened or the probability is changed, the ball is fired with the aim of winning the ball into the second prize opening 640 on the route passing on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of the second winning hole 640 without reaching the winning hole 640 wins a prize in the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the gaming area is arranged with the aim of influencing the game when the probability is changing or when the time is being shortened. For example, the higher the possibility of winning a prize in this general winning hole 63, the more it is possible to suppress the decrease in balls during probability change or time saving.

By suppressing the loss of balls, you can obtain the next jackpot before the balls held in the upper tray 17 run out, even if you do not play the game in a firing mode that stops the ball firing at the right time during the probability change (even if you keep hitting it). Therefore, it is possible to reduce stress (feeling of fatigue) experienced by the player while playing the game. Therefore, the number of revolutions until the next jackpot frequently increases during the probability change (for example, 10
Even in cases where the number of rotations exceeds 0, the player can comfortably play the game.

In the game in the special game state, the ball is fired with the aim of winning the ball into the specific winning opening 65a on a route that passes through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second winning opening 640
A part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side flows not to the specific winning hole 65a side (left side) but to the general winning hole 63 side (right side) and enters the general winning hole 63a. The prize balls associated with the winning in the general winning hole 63 are paid out as different prize balls from the prize balls in the specific winning hole 65a, so the player can pay out the prize balls due to the winning in the special winning hole 63 by the end of the special gaming state. In addition to the prize balls based on the expected number of winning balls to the specific winning hole 65a, it is possible to obtain prize balls based on the number of winning balls to the general winning hole 63.

That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the gaming area is arranged with the aim of increasing the number of payout prize balls that the player can acquire in the special gaming state. Here, as the number of winnings in the general winning hole 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning in the specific winning hole 65a decreases, so the elapsed time until the special game state ends tends to become longer. In other words, depending on the location and number of general winning ports 63 and the design of the upstream channel, the number of rounds and counts (specified number of winnings for each round) in the special gaming state are the same for control purposes. Also, the time required for the special game state to end (longer or shorter) and the number of prize balls paid out to the player (more or less) can be varied.

It should be noted that the display mode when displaying the number corresponding to the number of payout prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 in the special game state is not limited at all. For example, the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings to the specific winning hole 65a and the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings to the general winning hole 63 may be displayed separately, or the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings to the specific winning hole 65a may be displayed separately. The total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the general winning hole 63 may be displayed, or a combination of them may be displayed.

As mentioned above, during fixed change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal.
Also, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, a state can be created in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 640, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, so the first winning opening 6 without the electric accessory is closed.
4, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit A80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning in the first prize opening 64, you will have many chances to win a jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot.

On the other hand, during the probability change or time saving period, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second prize opening 64
Since the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in the open state and it is easy to win in the second winning opening 640, the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640. (so-called "right-handed hitting"), passes the ball through the through gate 67, and fires the ball at the electric accessory 640a.
It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by opening the second prize opening 640 and winning a prize in the second prize opening 640.

In addition, in the pachinko machine A10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is asymmetrical, and balls are required to be hit on the left and right sides depending on the game state, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be symmetrical (see Figure 302).
. In this case, you can aim for the first winning hole 64 by hitting right, or you can aim for the second winning hole 64 by hitting left.
You can also aim for Therefore, depending on the game status (whether the game is in fixed play, short time play, or regular play), the player can be told how to shoot the ball between ``left-handed'' and ``right-handed''. You can eliminate the need to do so. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

In this embodiment, an input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225 (see FIG. 4). Other devices 228 include drive motor AMT1, drive motor AM
T2 and a drive motor for raising and lowering the production unit A710.

FIG. 303 shows pachinko machine A in which the front frame 14 is opened (expanded) with respect to the inner frame 12.
FIG. 304 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 with the front frame 14 removed. Note that FIG. 304 shows a state in which the game board A13 is separated from the inner frame 12, and in FIGS. 303 and 304, the reference numerals of the internal structure of the game board A13 are omitted for convenience.

Next, the structure of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 305 to 323. FIG. 305 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, center frame A86, lottery unit A600, and operation unit A300, and FIG.
13. It is an exploded rear perspective view of center frame A86, lottery unit A600, and operation unit A300. Note that in FIGS. 305 and 306, a part of the right side surface of the game board A13 is shown in an enlarged view. Further, in the description of FIGS. 305 and 306, FIG. 302 will be referred to as appropriate.

The center frame A86 is an annular member made of a light-transmitting resin material, which is fitted from the front side into a through hole 13a formed in the game board A13 and fastened and fixed near the peripheral edge.
A covering part 86h that covers the game board A13, and a covering part 86h that allows balls to be distributed on the left side.
A distribution extension part 86a extends from the upper end to the front side, a left inclined part 86b extends from the upper end to the front side from the covered part 86h in a shape that slopes downward from the upper end to the left. A right inclined part 86c extending from the covering part 86h to the front side in a shape downwardly inclined toward the right, and the right inclined part 8
A right flow path forming wall portion 86d connected to the lower end of the covering portion 86h and extending downward from a position facing the return rubber 69 toward the front side, and a right flow path forming wall portion 86d. Wall portion 86d
A plurality of horizontal protrusions 86e protrude toward the flow path side (right side) as protrusions spanning the front and rear widths of the right flow passage forming wall 86d in an alternating positional relationship with the horizontal protrusions 86e. and a plurality of front protrusions 86f that protrude from the covering portion 86h to the channel side (front side) as protrusions spanning the channel width in the area between the outer edge member A73 and the right channel forming wall portion 86d. It mainly includes a separation wall part 86g that extends downward from the lower end and is configured to be able to separate the lower right corner of the through hole 13a from other parts.

FIG. 307(a) is an enlarged front view of the game board A13 in the area A5a of FIG. 302,
FIG. 307(b) is a partial sectional view of the game board A13 taken along the CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb line of FIG. 307(a).

When the player strongly rotates the operating handle 51 to the right and plays a right-handed game, the ball flows down between the right channel forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. As shown in FIG. 307(a), the distance between the right channel forming wall 86d and the outer edge member A73 is such that the ball can flow down (the diameter of the ball is 11 m).
m, but the distance is set to be a length with a slight gap of about 16 mm), so the ball flows down while contacting the right channel forming wall 86d or the outer edge member A73. Become.

To explain in more detail, the ball that has reached the return rubber 69 is bounced toward the left and right center of the game area by the reaction force from the return rubber 69, and collides with the right channel forming wall portion 86d. Right channel forming wall portion 86
Since d is formed as an inclined wall that slopes downward as it goes to the right, the balls flowing down due to their own weight tend to roll down the right flow path forming wall portion 86d.

In the process of flowing down, the ball rides on the horizontal protrusion 86e. In this embodiment, the horizontal protrusion 8
The protrusion length of 6e is designed to be about 2 mm (a little less than 20% of the diameter of the ball), and the arrangement interval is 16 mm (the same length as the flow path width), so the deceleration of the falling ball, It is possible to achieve a well-balanced goal of preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, in this embodiment, the front protrusion 86f is located at an intermediate position between the plurality of horizontal protrusions 86e.
is formed with the same protrusion length (2 mm) as the horizontal protrusion 86e. This makes it possible to improve the deceleration effect by setting the interval between the protrusions to be half the channel width, while also making it easier to prevent ball clogging.

Normally, when the pachinko machine A10 is installed in a game parlor, it is moved slightly (1
It is installed lying down. Therefore, the covered part 86h is arranged as a sloped wall that slopes downward toward the front side, and the ball flowing down due to its own weight tends to roll down the covered part 86h. Since it is configured in this way, the glass unit 16 side (front side)
Compared to the case where a protruding portion is formed toward the flow path, the front protruding portion 86f protruding from the covering portion 86h can better collide with the ball. In addition, in FIG. 307(b), in order to make it easier to understand the inclination, the inclination angle of the game board A13 is illustrated to be larger than usual (approximately 5 degrees).

The separation wall portion 86g is a wall portion disposed facing the lottery unit A600, and the through hole 13a
It has the role of closing and separating the area in which the lottery unit A600 is placed. The assembly of the lottery unit A600 to the game board A13 will be described below.

In the area where the lottery unit A600 is arranged, the through hole 13a of the game board A13 is
A small recess 13b projecting to the right from the substantially circular portion that receives the center frame A86, and a large recess 13c projecting to the lower right below the small recess 13b are formed. In this way, the small recess 13b and the large recess 13c as the installation area of the lottery unit A600 are arranged in the through hole 1.
By forming the center frame A86 of 3a as a concave part connected to the open part that receives it, compared to the case where multiple independent through holes are formed (occupying the area required as the width of the part forming the boundary). It is possible to secure a wide area that can be used as a placement area for the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600. Note that details of the lottery unit A600 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, the operation unit A300 has a rear surface formed in a box shape with an open front side and a bottom wall portion A311 and an outer wall portion A312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A311. A case A310 is provided.

The back case A310 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening A311a in the center of the bottom wall portion A311. The opening A311a is the third symbol display device 81
The size corresponds to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The operation unit A300 includes a plurality of first operation units A400 arranged in the inner space of the back case A310 in such a manner that movable devices having substantially the same configuration cover the upper peripheral edge of the inner space, and the first operation units A400. and a second operation unit A700 disposed on the lower side where the arrangement thereof is omitted, respectively, and are configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operating unit A400 is located above and on the left and right sides of the opening A311a, and the second operating unit A700 is located below the opening A311a on the bottom wall A311 of the back case A310. will be placed. In addition, Fig. 305 and Fig. 3
In 06, the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700 are attached to the rear case A31.
0 is shown in the figure.

The back case A310 extends from the front end of the outer wall portion A312 as a flat plate along (for example, arranged parallel to) the back surface of the game board A13, and in the assembled state (see FIG. A support plate portion A313 for support is provided.

The support plate portion A313 is a cylindrical portion that protrudes from the back side of the game board A13 toward the back side, and is provided in a shape that allows positioning of the fastening convex portion 13d having a female screw portion formed in the center. It is provided with a positioning convex portion A313a, and the positioning convex portion A313a is provided with a substantially central position (the fastening convex portion 13d
An insertion hole A313b having a size that allows the insertion of a fastening screw screwed into the fastening convex portion 13d is bored at a position that matches the female screw of the fastening convex portion 13d.

That is, by positioning the fastening convex part 13d with the positioning convex part A313a and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening convex part 13d, the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 can be integrally fixed. The overall rigidity of A13 and the operation unit A300 can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion A313a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the protrusion may have a shape that follows an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape (circular in this embodiment) of the fastening protrusion 13d, or the support plate A
The convex portion may have an oval shape along the direction in which 313 is formed. Further, when the fastening convex portion 13d is formed in a rectangular column shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion A313a is also made into a shape corresponding to the rectangular shape.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, in this embodiment, more support plate portions A313 are provided on the left side and upper side of the back case A310, and fewer support plate portions A313 are formed on the right side and lower side. This is the result of a design that takes into account the balance between improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operating unit A300 as a whole and space efficiency.

That is, when the game board A13 is made of a light-transmitting resin material as in this embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board A13 is visible through the game board A13. The entire back side of the game board A13 is effective as an area for the effect to be arranged. On the other hand, at the location where the support plate portion A313 is formed, the internal space of the back case A310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion A313 in front view.
The area in which the movable member can be placed becomes narrower. Therefore, if the strength problem can be maintained even if the support plate part A313 is omitted, the restriction on the arrangement range of the movable member can be avoided by omitting the support plate part A313. That's true.

In this embodiment, the reason why many support plate portions A313 are disposed on the left side and upper side of the back case A310 is related to the range of the area such as the gaming area where the shot ball can be visually recognized by the player. That is, the support plate portion A313 is formed at a location other than the range where the fired ball is visually recognized.

To explain in more detail, in this embodiment, the ball fired from the firing device 112a (FIG. 304) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the return ball prevention member 68, and enters the game area. introduced, and thereafter configured to flow down the gaming area. In a pinball game, the area that is thought to attract the most attention is the area where the ball passes, and other outer areas (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 across the outer rail 62 and inner rail 61). ) usually receives less attention.

Therefore, the lower left and upper left, based on the arc convex to the left formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right, based on the arc convex upward, as ranges that the ball cannot reach. It is thought that players' attention to the game will be lower.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member A73 and the surfaces facing the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left of the outer rail 62 are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62, and are arranged on the front side of the game board A13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a resin material that does not transmit light.
It is configured such that the back side of the game board A13 cannot be viewed from the front side of the game board A13 through the outer edge member A73 and the block-shaped member 74.

In this embodiment, the support plate portions A313 are preferentially arranged in these locations where attention is low or in locations where visibility is not possible. In fact, even in the left side and upper side where many support plate parts A313 are formed, the support plate parts A313 are formed near the corners of the back case A310, avoiding the central part as the overhanging end of the outer rail 62. be done.

In other words, by selecting the location where the space will be eroded by forming the support plate portion A313 from locations with low visibility (low production ability), the operation unit A3
While achieving the effect of ensuring the rigidity of the entire game board A13 and the game board A13, it is possible to still secure a wide area within the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the ball.

From this point of view, since there is a common configuration in pachinko machines in which the balls fired by the ball firing unit 112a roll along the outer rail 62 and are introduced into the gaming area, the range where the balls do not fall is the lower left, upper left It is easy to ask for the part and the upper right part. On the other hand, the return rubber 6 is a part that absorbs the kinetic energy of the ball and can adjust the subsequent flow pattern.
9, it is difficult to identify a common range in which the balls do not flow down.

That is, downstream of the return rubber 69, the falling path of the ball changes depending not only on the relationship with the members forming the outer edge of the gaming area but also on the configuration and state of the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. , the placement location of the support plate portion A313 cannot be determined until the specifications of the game board A13 side are determined.

Compared to the configuration of the game board A13, which is related to the ball launching performance of the pachinko machine A10, the operating unit A
300 can be designed freely, the design of the operating unit A300 usually progresses earlier than the design of the game board A13.
0's internal structure can be carefully crafted. If a specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13 occurs at the end of the development schedule, and the position of the support plate part A313 is changed accordingly, not only the back case A310 but also the internal space of the operation unit A300 will be affected. This will result in design changes to other devices installed in the area, increasing the cost of design changes.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the support plate portion A is located at a position corresponding to the downstream side of the return rubber 69.
The formation of 313 is omitted. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is changed due to a specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13.

In addition, the inner space of the back case A310 is prevented from being eroded by the support plate portion A313 in the region downstream of the return rubber 69, and sufficient space is secured for arranging the first motion unit A400 for production. and the path along which the ball flows and the first operating unit A.
Since the range in which the first operating unit A400 is arranged can be overlapped in the front and back, the first operating unit A400 can be naturally placed in the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the ball.

Further, in this embodiment, the support plate portion A313 formed at the rear position of the outer edge member A73 is
It is formed inside (on the left side) of the right outermost end of the outer wall portion A312. On the other hand, the support plate part A313 formed on the left side of the back case A310 is formed on the outside (left side) of the left outermost shortest part of the outer wall part A312. That is, the form of the support plate portion A313 (the direction of formation with respect to the outer wall portion A312) is asymmetrical.

This makes it possible to shorten the distance between the right outermost end of the outer wall A312 and the right end of the game board A13 compared to the distance between the left outermost end of the outer wall A312 and the left end of the game board A13. Therefore, the right end of the internal space of the back case A310 can be brought closer to the right end of the game board A13.

The right side outer wall part A312 has no surface facing the game board A13 except for the support plate part A313, and the front edge comes into contact with the back surface of the game board A13. In other words, the right side outer wall portion A312 comes into line contact with the game board A13.

Approximately the lower half of the right outer wall A312 is provided with a cutout A312a that is cut out (formed) toward the back side. This notch A312a is the lottery unit A60.
It is notched below the upper edge of 0, and in the assembled state (see Figure 304),
A gap is formed between the game board A13 and the game board A13.

By forming the cutout portion A312a in this manner, the following effects can be achieved. For example, the lottery unit A
600 and the variable prize winning device 65 can function as a wire passage through which the wires are connected to the variable prize winning device 65 and pass through to the outside of the back case A310. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will interfere with the first operating unit A400 or the second operating unit A700, compared to the case where the wiring is routed up and down.

Furthermore, the gap formed by the notch A312a can be used as an arrangement space for the configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. Note that the necessary components of the lottery unit A600 and the variable prize winning device 65 include, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a channel for flowing a ball, a board for a light-emitting effect, a detection sensor that detects a ball, Examples include other structures. In this embodiment, the second winning slot 6 of the lottery unit A600
The ejection path ER through which the winning ball is ejected is configured to pass through the gap between the notch A312a and the game board A13 (see FIG. 317).

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED near the notch A312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily seen by the player as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case A310 is connected to the game board A13 (the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board A13 is formed along the shape of the back case A310). This makes it possible to blur the boundaries of the light seen through the game board A13. Thereby, it is possible to avoid that the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board A13 depends on the shape of the back case A310, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in producing light emission.

Note that the shape and length (vertical length) of the cutout portion A312a is not limited at all. For example, the notch portion A31 spans the entire area (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions A313.
2a may be formed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game board A13 is located on the right side of the back case A310.
Since the fastening and fixing with the game board A13 is omitted, when considering the rigidity of the right side of the game board A13,
It is not possible to rely on the rigidity of the motion unit A300.

As a countermeasure against this, in this embodiment, a metal plate-like member 75 is provided on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board A13. The metal plate member 75 will be explained below.

FIG. 308 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, outer edge member A73, and metal plate member 75, and FIG. 309 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, outer edge member A73, and metal plate member 75. In addition, in FIGS. 308 and 309, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board A13 is shown alone, and illustrations of other members arranged on the game board A13 are omitted.

The outer edge member A73 is made of a resin material, and includes an arcuate wall portion 73a that constitutes an upper side and has an arcuate inner surface, and a thin wall extending downward from the lower end of the arcuate wall portion 73a. The vertical wall portion 73b includes a vertical wall portion 73b, and an inclined wall portion 73c formed with an upper surface that slopes downward toward the left from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b. In this way, by configuring the outer edge member A73 with a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member A73 is made of a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction. The number of man-hours required for assembly to the game board A13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b includes a plurality of plate-like protrusions 73b1 that protrude toward the back side along the right side.
A plurality of bent portions 73b2 are bent from the front side edge of the right side portion in a U-shape when viewed in the vertical direction, and a columnar shape is formed toward the back side at the joint portion between the arcuate wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c. It includes a cylindrical protruding portion 73b3 that protrudes, and a fastening portion 73b4 that is provided alongside the cylindrical protruding portion 73b3 and into which a fastening screw can be screwed.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position between the arrangement intervals of the plate-like protruding portions 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate member 75, which will be described later, the holding force of the metal plate member 75 to the vertical wall portion 73b is suppressed while suppressing the number of seam penetration portions 75c formed in the metal plate member 75. can be improved.

In other words, compared to the case where the plate-like protrusions 73b1 at three locations resist the bending of the metal plate-like member 75, the plate-like protrusions 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 prevent the metal plate-like member 75 from bending. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, by arranging the plate-like protruding portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 at equal intervals, the load that occurs when the metal plate-like member 75 bends can be equally distributed.
It is possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to any one place.

The metal plate-like member 75 has a main body plate portion 75a which is folded back multiple times in the transverse direction and has no creases in the longitudinal direction, and is bent leftward at the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c are formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the joint between the bent portion 75b, the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b, and a plurality of joint penetration portions 75c are formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b. A through hole 75d is provided along with the plate portion in which the through hole 75d is formed, and an insertion hole 75e is formed in a stepped plate portion toward the front side so that a fastening screw can be inserted therethrough.

The metal plate-like member 75 generates particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way the main body plate portion 75a is creased. Therefore, by disposing it integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, which is easily curved in the longitudinal direction, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced.

The seam penetrating portion 75c is formed in a size that allows the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b to be inserted therethrough. In this embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-like member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 into the joint penetration portion 75c.

When the metal plate member 75 is assembled to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and a cylindrical protrusion is formed. Part 73b3
is inserted into the through hole 75d. In this way, the metal plate-like member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned relative to each other at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

With the above configuration, the metal plate member 75 is disposed above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, so that the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped protruding part 73b1 and the cylindrical protruding part 73b3 of the vertical wall part 73b penetrate through the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the back side, and their tips engage with the game board A13. The engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board A13 will be described below.

The game board A13 has a plurality of recessed portions 13e recessed on the right edge of the front surface so as to be able to receive the plate-like protrusion portions 73b1, and a cylindrical protrusion portion 73b3 is received on the upper and lower sides of the recessed portions 13e. A plurality of positioning holes 13f are provided, which are formed as vertically elongated holes.

When the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate-like member 75 are assembled into the game board A13 in an integrated state, the plate-like protrusion 73b1 is received in the recessed part 13e, and the circular protrusion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. and positioned. That is, the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 and the circular protruding portion 7
3b3 is used not only for positioning with the metal plate member 75, but also for positioning with the game board A13. Thereby, the number of positioning objects can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the metal plate member 75 is assembled to suppress the curvature of the vertical wall portion 73b, there is no need to provide sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall portion 73b alone, and the vertical wall The portion 73b can be formed so thin that it can be easily curved in the left-right direction when used alone.

Furthermore, the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 can suppress the deformation of the game board A13 (improve the rigidity), so even when the game board A13 and the back case A310 (see FIG. 306) are separated, the game board The shape of A13 can be maintained. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 309, the formation of the fastening convex portion 13d can be omitted at the right end position of the game board A13.

Therefore, the small recess 1 is located at a short distance from the right end of the game board A13 (a position extremely close to the right end).
3b or the right edge of the large recess 13c. Thereby, the right side limit positions of the through hole 13a, the small recess 13b and the large recess 13c relative to the game board A13 can be moved further to the right, and the opening shape thereof can be made larger.

In this case, when forming a gaming area by using the gaming board A13 with the same vertical and horizontal widths and the center frame A86 with the same opening size, the right end of the gaming area with respect to the gaming board A13 should be set to the right. Since the center frame A86 can be moved in the opposite direction, the area on the left side of the center frame A86 can be expanded. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the path along which the game ball flows when the game ball is hit to the left (the degree of freedom in designing the position of the nail, the ball guide channel, the position of the ball passage hole, etc.).

Furthermore, there is a distribution device (not shown) that allows balls to flow down during a right-handed game (e.g., a device that changes the path of the balls in the order in which they arrive), a lottery unit A600, and a variable prize winning device 65 (FIG. 305).
(see) can be secured, the degree of freedom in designing the unillustrated sorting device, lottery unit A600, and variable prize winning device 65 can be improved.

FIG. 310 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit A600, and FIG. 311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit A600. The lottery unit A600 is the electric accessory 640 mentioned above.
a, and a second prize opening 640 that can be switched between a state where a ball can pass and a state where a ball cannot pass depending on whether the electric accessory 640a is in an open state or a closed state.

The lottery unit A600 includes a main body member A610, which has a second prize opening 640 formed through it, forms a flow path through which the balls flow down to the front side, and is fastened and fixed to the game board A13 (see FIG. 305), and a back surface of the main body member A610. Engagement member A rotatably supported on the side and engaged with the electric accessory 640a
620 and a drive device unit A63 that generates a driving force to operate the engaging member A620.
0, a covering member A650 that is arranged on the front side of the main body member A610 and defines the falling path of the ball, and a main irradiation member that is arranged on the back side of the main body member A610 and irradiates light to an area corresponding to the falling path of the ball. A device A660, and an auxiliary irradiation device A that is arranged on the back side of the main body member A610 and irradiates light to an area whose visibility is lowered by the covering member A650 and which is different from the falling path of the ball.
670.

The main body member A610 has a main body plate portion A6 having a plane parallel to the front of the game board A13 on the front side.
11, and a left extending wall portion A61 extending in a wall shape from the left edge of the main body plate portion A611 toward the front side.
2, a right extending obstacle wall part A613 that extends in a wall shape from a position including the right edge of the main body plate part A611 to the front side, and a rectangular frame shape that surrounds the second prize opening 640 in a rear view on the back side. An extended rectangular frame A614 that extends to A614, a protruding receiving part A615 that protrudes toward the back side above the second prize opening 640 inside the extended rectangular frame A614, and the right side of the extended rectangular frame A614. The main light emitting holding frame A616 has a frame shape and extends to the back side, and an auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 has a frame shape and extends to the back side on the left side of the extended rectangular frame A614.

A through gate 67 is inserted and fixed at the upper end position of the main body plate portion A611. That is, in the present embodiment, at least a portion of the balls attempting to enter the inside of the lottery unit A600 are
It passes through the through gate 67 and flows downstream.

The left extending wall portion A612 is a wall portion that is disposed to face the separation wall portion 86g (see FIG. 305) of the center frame A86. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304), the separation wall portion 86g of the center frame A86 and the left extending wall portion A612 engage (abut) to ensure rigidity. As a result, the through hole 13a can be connected to the center frame A86 as well as the lottery unit A600.
The center frame A86 and lottery unit A are formed in a shape large enough to fit together.
600 can be stably held in a manner that suppresses positional displacement.

The right extending obstacle wall portion A613 is a wall portion that constitutes the rolling surface of the ball. That is, lottery unit A
The ball flowing down 600 rolls on the upper surface of the right extending obstacle wall portion A613 and flows downstream.

The extended rectangular frame A614 is provided with a shaft support hole A614a bored as a part for rotatably supporting the engagement member A620, and the extended end edge thereof can receive the front side end of the drive device unit A630. formed from shapes. That is, by fastening the front end of the drive device unit A630 assembled to the extended end of the extended rectangular frame A614, the drive device unit A63
0 is fixed to the extended rectangular frame A614.

The projecting receiving portion A615 is configured to be able to come into contact with the engaging member A620 and the operating member A632 of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL as the driving device of the driving device unit A630, and is a portion that defines the end position of its movement. will be described later.

The main light emitting holding frame A616 is a frame that constitutes an outer frame for the light emitted from the main irradiation device A660, and has an insertion hole A616a drilled inside thereof into which a fastening screw is inserted. This insertion hole A6
The fastening screw inserted through 16a is screwed into the fastening part A652a of the covering member A650, but as described later, the fastening part A652a is formed at a position that overlaps the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 when viewed from the front. be done. Thereby, the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A616a can be made difficult to be seen when viewed from the front, and it is possible to avoid spoiling the design of the lottery unit A600.

The auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 is a frame that constitutes the outer frame of the light emitted from the auxiliary irradiation device A670, and is formed at a position that overlaps the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 when viewed from the front.

The engagement member A620 is rotatably supported by a shaft support hole A614a of an extended rectangular frame A614,
The claw-like portion A622 disposed at the rotating tip portion is configured to engage with the electric accessory 640a. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a is configured to change its state (open state or closed state) as the posture of the engaging member A620 changes. Next, details of the engagement member A620 will be described with reference to FIG. 312.

FIG. 312(a) shows the engaging member A620 viewed from the rotation axis J1 direction.
FIG. 312(b) is a front view of the engagement member A620 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312(a), and FIG.
It is a sectional view of the engagement member A620 along the c-CCCXIIc line.

The engaging member A620 is made of a flexible resin material, and includes a pair of rotating arm portions A621 each consisting of a plate-shaped portion intersecting (orthogonal to) the rotational axis J1, and a rotating tip of the rotating arm portion A621. A claw portion A622 formed in a C-shaped claw shape, a pair of protruding shaft portions A623 protruding from the rotating arm portion A621 in a cylindrical shape centered on the rotation axis J1, and a rotating base of the rotating arm portion A621. A proximal connecting rod portion A624, which is a rod-shaped portion extending in the radial direction from the end side, and is formed into a U-shape in front view in such a manner that the extended end is curved toward the other side and then joined. and a rod-shaped portion extending in a direction parallel to the proximal connecting rod portion A624 from the rotating tip side of the rotating arm portion A621, and are connected after being curved toward the other side at the extending end. A distal end side connecting rod portion A625 formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front.

The pair of rotating arms A621 are arranged opposite to each other with an interval larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, a flow path for the ball can be formed so that the ball passes between the rotating arms A621 (see FIG. 313), thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the flow path for the ball formed by the lottery unit A600. be able to.

The proximal connecting rod portion A624 includes a main body rod portion A624a formed with substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the rod, and a distal connecting rod portion A62 at an intermediate position between the main body rod portion A624a.
A protrusion regulating portion A624b protruding toward the 5 side. The protruding restriction portion A624b is configured as a portion for restricting over-rotation of the engagement member A620, and the details will be described later.

The distal end connecting rod portion A625 is formed to have a cross-sectional shape different from that of the proximal connecting rod portion A624 in a rod-like portion A625a extending parallel to the rotation axis J1. That is, the rod-shaped portion A625a
The surface facing the rotary arm A621 is formed into a flat shape that maintains the distance from the rotary arm A621, while the surface opposite the rotary arm A621 is formed so as to extend toward the rotating tip side. It is formed as an inclined surface A625b that is inclined in a direction away from the rotating arm portion A621. That is, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed so that the thickness increases toward the rotating tip side, and the rigidity increases (deformation resistance increases).

In addition, the rod-shaped portion A625a is concave in such a manner that the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm portion A621 is inclined toward the surface on the side opposite to the rotating arm portion A621 as it goes toward the center in the rotation axis J1 direction. It is formed as a recessed surface A625c provided.

This recessed surface A625c is recessed along the slope of the inclined surface A625b. That is, when viewed from the inclined direction of the inclined surface A625b, each point of the recessed surface A625c is the same, with only the thickness direction of the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 (width direction of the surface facing the rotating arm portion A621) being different. Visible as a dot.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed to correspond to the shape of the operating member A632 so as to be able to receive the operating member A632 of the drive device unit A630, but the details will be described later.

FIG. 313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member A610, the engagement member A620, and the drive device unit A630. In FIG. 313, the engagement member A620 is connected to the shaft support hole A6 of the main body member A610.
The state in which it is pivotally supported by 14a is illustrated.

The engagement member A620 is assembled to the main body member A610 by applying a compressive force to the engagement member A620, deforming it, and then fitting it inside the extending rectangular frame A614 so that the shaft support hole A614a and the protrusion of the engagement member A620 are aligned. This is executed by removing the load and canceling the deformation while aligning with the shaft installation part A623.

That is, after gripping the engaging member A620 with fingers from the rotation axis J1 direction and applying compressive force to deform it to the extent that the arrangement width of the protruding shaft portion A623 is shorter than the inner width of the extending rectangular frame A614, The engaging member A620 can be assembled to the main body member A610 by entering the engaging member A620 inside the extended rectangular frame A614, aligning the position, and releasing the finger.

In this embodiment, the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are formed to be connected by a proximal connecting rod portion A624 and a distal connecting rod portion A625 that are narrower and more easily deformable than the rotating arm portion A621. Therefore, most of the deformation when applying the load for assembly is caused by the proximal connecting rod A624.
and the distal end side connecting rod portion A625. Therefore, deformation of the rotary arm portion A621 related to the function of opening and closing the electric accessory 640a can be suppressed, and therefore it is possible to prevent the engaging member A620 from malfunctioning due to deformation during assembly.

In addition, since the pair of rotating arm parts A621 are connected not by a single rod-shaped part but by a pair of rod-shaped parts (the proximal connecting rod part A624 and the distal connecting rod part A625), the load can be released. It is possible to easily avoid misalignment of the postures of the rotating arm portions A621 after the rotation.

Furthermore, by arranging a rod-shaped part wider than the rotational base-end side on the rotating tip side, where the load during operation tends to be large among the pair of rod-shaped parts (see Fig. 312(c)), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL When the rotary arm portions A621 are operated by the driving force of the rotary arm portions A621, it is possible to suppress the postures of the rotary arm portions A621 from shifting from each other.

In addition, by narrowing the width of the rod-shaped portion on the rotation base end side (see Figure 312(c)), the deformation of the engaging member A620 required during assembly can be reduced near the protruding shaft portion A623 on the rotation base side. It can be produced intensively. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the engaging member A620 while realizing stable operation using the engaging member A620.

As shown in FIG. 313, the front end of the engagement member A620 comes into contact with the lower end of the protruding receiving portion A615, thereby restricting further rotation. As described above, the engaging member A620 is a part for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, and there is a possibility that the ball will enter the second prize opening 640 in the open state of the electric accessory 640a. The ball that entered the second prize opening 640 is a surface that forms an extended rectangular frame A614 with the engaging member A620, and is arranged opposite to the engaging member A620, and is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the back side. The water flows down between the lower bottom inclined surface A614b formed as a slanted surface A614b, and flows into the drive device unit A630.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the rotating arms A621 are arranged at intervals longer than the diameter (11 mm) of the balls, the balls can flow between the opposing rotating arms A621. As a result, the engagement member A620 can be arranged in such a manner that it surrounds the downward flow path of the ball from above, so that the engagement member A620 and the downward flow path of the ball can be arranged compactly.

The drive device unit A630 is held by a box-shaped main body box part A631 with an open front side that is connected and fixed to the rear side end of the extended rectangular frame A614 of the main body member A610, and an upper part of the main body box part A631. an electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, an operating member A632 that slides in the front-rear direction when excited by the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, a coil spring A633 that applies an urging force to the operating member A632, and a coil spring A633 that is held on the lower side of the main body box part A631. A detection sensor A634 that detects passage of the ball is provided.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized, the operating member A632 is placed in the front position (see FIG. 314(a)) due to the biasing force of the coil spring A633, and the electromagnetic solenoid A
When SOL is excited, the operating member A6 resists the biasing force of the coil spring A633.
32 is driven and placed at the rear side position (see FIG. 314(b)). The front side position of the operating member A632 is configured as a position where a disk-shaped disk portion A632a fixed to the tip of the operating member A632 is in contact with the protruding receiving portion A615. Next, the transmission path of the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL will be described with reference to FIG. 314.

314(a) and 314(b) are side views of the electric accessory 640a, the engagement member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In FIGS. 314(a) and 314(b), in order to facilitate understanding, only the electric accessory 640a, the engagement member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL are illustrated, and other structures for holding these members are illustrated. Illustration is omitted.

In addition, in FIG. 314(a), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a de-energized state (the electric accessory 640
a closed state) is illustrated, and FIG. 314(b) shows the energized state (
An open state of the electric accessory 640a) is illustrated.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized and the operating member A632 is placed at the front side position, the engagement member A620 is placed in a downwardly inclined position (see FIG. 314(a)), and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized. When the operating member A632 is placed at the rear side position, the engaging member A620 is placed in an upwardly inclined position (see FIG. 314(b)).

The electric accessory 640a is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion A653 of the covering member A650,
An eccentric protruding portion 640b is provided that protrudes toward the back side from a position eccentric to the rotation axis.
This eccentric protruding portion 640b is arranged so as to be able to abut vertically with the claw-like portion A622 of the engagement member A620, and as the eccentric protruding portion 640b is displaced in conjunction with the claw-like portion A622, The state of the electric accessory 640a changes.

In this embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a single blade-like member, but as can be seen from the fact that there are two sets of claw-like parts A622 of the engagement member A620, the electric accessory 640a can be connected to each other. It may be constructed from a pair of blade-like members facing each other. In this case,
The engagement member A620 of this embodiment can be used.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 310 and 311. The covering member A650 is a member that is formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material and is disposed on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a in between, and is a member that is disposed on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a interposed therebetween. A main body plate part A651 that forms a downward flow path for the ball between the main body plate part A651, a regulating wall part A652 that protrudes in a wall shape toward the back side of the main body plate part A651 and regulates the downward flow of the ball, and a rear surface of the main body plate part A651. Electric accessory 640a protruding to the side in a columnar manner
and a shaft support-like portion A653 that rotatably supports the shaft.

The main body plate portion A651 has a high transmittance range A651a in which the back side is easily visible when viewed from the front, and a low transmittance range A651 in which the back side is difficult to see due to lower light transmittance than the high transmittance range A651a.
b.

In addition, in this embodiment, a seal whose printed surface is designed in such a manner that it constitutes a high transparency range and a low transparency range is pasted on the front side of the main body plate part A651, so that the high transparency range A651a and the low transparency range are affixed. Although the low transmission range A651b is configured, the method is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate part A651 may be manufactured by two-color resin molding,
A region with low transparency may be formed by roughening the surface by cutting the main body plate portion A651.

In this embodiment, the high-transmission range A651a is formed on the front side (mainly on the right side) of the ball's downward flow path, and the low-transmission range A651b is formed with a regulating wall A652 that restricts the downward flow of the ball. It is formed on the side that faces (mainly the left side). Thereby, while ensuring the visibility of the ball's falling path, it is possible to block the player's view of the internal structure within the range where the ball does not fall.

The regulating wall portion A652 has, for example, an insertion hole A616a for fastening and fixing with the main body member A610.
The fastening portion A652a is provided with a fastening screw inserted into the fastening portion A652a. The fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion A652a is made of metal and is non-transparent, so it tends to create a shadow when viewed from the front. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A652a is placed outside of the ball's falling path, so that the shadow caused by the fastening screw can be prevented from entering the ball's falling path and giving the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from detracting from the player's concentration when visually checking the falling state of the ball.

The main irradiation device A660 includes a diffuser plate A661 housed inside the main light emitting holding frame A616 of the main body member A610, an illumination board A662 on which a light emitting means A663 such as an LED is disposed on the side of the diffuser plate A661, and an illumination board A662. It includes a rear lid part A664 which is formed to have an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the illumination board A662 and is fastened and fixed to the back end of the main light emitting support frame A616.

The diffuser plate A661 is a plate-like member that has an outer shape that is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the main light emitting holding frame A616, and has a diffuser shape that diffuses light on both front and rear surfaces, and is a plate-like member that has a diffuser shape that diffuses light on both the front and rear surfaces. A plurality of extending portions A661a extending in a plate shape are provided. This extended portion A661a is the diffuser plate A661a.
Reference numeral 661 is a posture maintaining portion for preventing the diffuser plate A661 from tilting when housed in the main light emitting holding frame A616. When the diffuser plate A661 is about to tilt, either of the extension parts A6
61a comes into contact with the inner surface of the main light emitting holding frame A616, and resistance is generated in the direction of returning the inclination, so that the posture of the diffuser plate A661 is maintained.

Note that when the main irradiation device A660 is assembled to the main body member A610, the illumination board A66
The front surface of the diffuser plate A661 is prevented from coming off to the rear side by contacting the extending end portion of the extending portion A661a.

The outer shape of the illumination board A662 is approximately the same as the outer shape of the outer surface of the main light emitting holding frame A616,
The outer shape of the rear lid part A664 is approximately the same as the outer shape of the illumination board A662.
That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the illumination board A662 is held between the main light emitting holding frame A616 and the rear lid part A664 from the front and back (held by surface contact).

This makes it possible to stably hold the illumination board A662 by utilizing the rigidity of the main light emitting holding frame A616, even if the rear lid part A664 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid part A664 alone is low. can.

Here, an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A661. Therefore, in order to remove the fastening screws, it is necessary to pull out the diffuser plate A661 from the main light emitting holding frame A616, so mischief can be suppressed by increasing the number of steps required to remove the fastening screws.

Further, as described above, the fastening screw is non-transparent and tends to cause shadows, but according to the present embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means A663 are provided on the back side of the fastening screw, and light emitted from the light emitting means A663 is provided. A diffusion plate A661 capable of diffusing is arranged. Therefore, the shadow of the fastening screw can be made thinner (the shadow can be blown away) by the diffused light, and the shadow of the fastening screw can be made less noticeable.

In particular, the light emitting means A663 is disposed at a position where the insertion hole A616a does not overlap with the optical axis directed along the front-rear direction (a position where the external shapes projected in the front-rear direction do not overlap). Thereby, the shadow of the fastening screw can be made thinner (the shadow can be blown away), and the effect of making the shadow of the fastening screw less noticeable can be made more noticeable.

As mentioned above, the main irradiation device A660 is arranged on the back side of the downward flow path of the sphere, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 is irradiated onto the downward flow path of the sphere.In this embodiment, the diffuser plate A661 is The light reaches the downstream path. Therefore, compared to the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 without going through the diffuser plate, the light can be made lighter and more expansive. This results in
It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue on the eyes of a player who pays attention to the falling path of the ball.

The auxiliary irradiation device A670 includes an illumination board A671 arranged on the back side of the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 and on which a plurality of light emitting means A672 are arranged, and an illumination board A671 arranged on the back side of the illumination board A671. A rear lid part A673 formed from an outer shape having substantially the same shape as the outer shape is provided.

The illumination board A671 is fixed in a holding manner similar to that of the illumination board A662. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the illumination board A671 is held between the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 and the rear lid part A673 from the front and back (held by surface contact).

As a result, even if the rear lid part A673 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid part A673 alone is low, it is possible to stably hold the illumination board A671 using the rigidity of the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617. can.

Here, unlike the main irradiation device A660, in the auxiliary irradiation device A670, the illumination board A671
A diffuser plate is not installed on the front side of the That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is irradiated onto the main body member A610 while maintaining the light emission intensity without being diffused.

Although light is emitted in this manner, in this embodiment, the light emitting means A672 is placed at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b when viewed from the front, so the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 has a low transmittance. It passes through the transmission range A651b and is visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the player sees the light weakened in the low transmission range A651b, so that it is possible to avoid causing excessive fatigue to the eyes of the player who sees the light.

In addition, by maintaining the emitted light intensity, it is possible to prevent the light from being completely blocked in the low transmission range A651b. Thereby, for example, when a character corresponding to the pachinko machine A10 is drawn in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to perform an effect in which the character is brightly illuminated by the light emitted from the light emitting means A672.

315(a) and 315(b) are CCCXIIc-CCCXI in FIG. 312(b).
It is a sectional view of lottery unit A600 along a line corresponding to Ic line. In FIG. 315(a), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in the de-energized state, that is, the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (FIG. 31
4(a)) is illustrated, and FIG. 315(b) shows the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL,
That is, the open state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314(b)) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 315(a), when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-energized state, the lower end of the disc at the tip of the operating member A632 is in contact with the concave surface A625c of the engaging member A620. Here, in addition to the fact that the disc portion of the operating member A632 has advanced to the front side to the extent that it is placed opposite to the vicinity of the widthwise intermediate position of the concave surface A625c, the concave surface A625c is By making the surface substantially parallel to the surface, the load applied from the engagement member A620 to the operating member A632 becomes a load mainly having a component in the vertical direction (direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction).

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620 by moving (retracting) the operating member A632 with the load from the engaging member A620, so that the piano wire can be removed from the gap of the pachinko machine A10. It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which a wire rod such as the like is inserted to apply a load to the movable accessory 640a to change it to the open state.

Here, pachinko machines have traditionally been equipped with a function to output an error notification when fraudulent activity is detected, but by illegally applying a load to the movable accessory 640a that can be seen from the front side, the electromagnetic solenoid If the movable accessory 640 could be placed in the open state regardless of the ASOL state, the deterrence against fraudulent acts would not be sufficient.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine A10 of the present embodiment, even if a load is applied to the movable accessory 640 and the state is about to change, the movable accessory 640a is connected to the movable accessory 640a via the eccentric protrusion 640b of the movable accessory 640a. Since the engaging member A620 is engaged (see FIG. 314(a)), the engaging member A
In the configuration of this embodiment in which it is difficult to change the posture of the movable accessory 620, it can also be made difficult to open the movable accessory 640a by applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

Furthermore, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent act that places a load on the movable accessory 640a, in this embodiment, the recessed surface A
625c is inclined, the engaging member A620 is forcibly removed from the state shown in Fig. 315(a).

When displacing in the rising direction (for example, while deforming the distal end side connecting rod portion A625), the contact position of the rod-like portion A625a with the operating member A632 shifts to the thick side (rotating distal end side), and the distal end side The connecting rod portion A625 becomes difficult to deform.

Therefore, each time the engagement member A620 is displaced in the rising direction, the engagement member A62
Since the structure can be configured to increase the load required to displace the movable accessory 640a, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of attempting to open the movable accessory 640a by applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

Further, the plane opposite to the recessed surface A625c of the rod-shaped portion A625a is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 315(a), the rod-shaped portion A625
When a is deflected in the thickness direction due to the load received from the operating member A632, the operating member A6
The reaction force applied to 32 can be directed in a direction that is upwardly inclined toward the front side.

Thereby, the load in the front-rear direction applied from the bar-shaped portion A625a to the operating member A632 can be generated as a load toward the front side, and the operating member A632 can be prevented from retreating rearward due to the load from the bar-shaped portion A625a. This allows for more secure engagement of the engaging member A62.
The rising displacement of 0 can be regulated.

As shown in FIG. 315(b), in the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the operating member A6
32 and the protrusion regulating portion A624b of the engaging member A620, the engagement member A620 is prevented from further backward rotation movement (rising directional movement) is regulated. That is, since the rotation of the proximal connecting rod part A624 can be restricted without causing a collision with the main body box part of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the proximal connecting rod part A624 can be controlled by the main body box part of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. It is possible to avoid problems such as cracking or bending due to collision with other parts.

316(a) is a top view of the operation unit A300, and FIG. 316(b) is a top view of the operation unit A300.
317 is a side view of the operation unit A300 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG.
13 and a rear view of the operating unit A300.

As shown in FIGS. 316(a) and 316(b), the front end surface of the first operating unit A400 is arranged so as to protrude further to the front side than the front end of the rear case A310. When forming the game board A13 from a plywood board while disposing the first operating unit A400 in this way, it is necessary to form depressions and holes on the back side of the game board A13 to avoid interference with the first operating unit A400. However, in this embodiment, since the game board A13 is formed from the resin base plate A60, if the shape is designed in advance to avoid interference with the first operating unit A400 and the mold is manufactured, The game board A13 can be easily formed in a shape that avoids interference.

That is, in this embodiment, since the base plate A60 of the game board A13 is recessed from the back side to the front side along the left and right and upper surfaces (see FIG. 306), the front end surface of the first operating unit A400 is recessed. Interference between the game board A13 and the first operating unit A400 can be easily avoided while configuring the back case A310 to protrude further to the front side than the front end thereof. This results in
Since the first operating unit A400 can be placed closer to the player, it is possible to improve the production effect of making the first operating unit A400 visible.

As shown in FIGS. 316(b) and 317, the support plate part A313 arranged at the upper part of the back case A310 is arranged inside (lower side) than the outer surface (upper surface) of the outer wall part A312.
As a result, the arrangement of the outer wall part A312 in the left and right center where the support plate part A313 is not arranged is shifted further to the outside (upper side), compared to the case where the support plate part A313 is arranged outside of the outer wall part A312. This allows the upper end position of the back case A310 to be lowered.

That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the back case A310 with respect to the game board A13 while improving the degree of freedom in arranging the first operating unit A400 (or the second operating unit A700) with respect to the back case A310.

In addition, since the left and right positions where the support plate part A313 on the upper part of the back case A310 is arranged are located outside the gaming area in front view, as described above, the support plate part A313 is located below the outer wall part A312. The influence (disadvantage) on the game can be suppressed by being placed in the area.

As shown in FIG. 317, unlike the left side, the support plate portion A313 is not provided on the right side of the back case A310 except at the upper end position. That is, since the space occupied by the support plate part A313 below the upper end position can be omitted, the outer wall part A312 of the back case A310 can be brought closer to the right end of the game board A13. I can do it.

FIG. 318 shows the game board A13 along the CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII line in FIG. 302.
and a partial cross-sectional view of the operation unit A300. As shown in FIG. 318, base plate A60
Compared to the outer edge extending portion 60a extending along the outer edge toward the back side, the area is located on the back side in an area that is inside the outer edge extending portion 60a and at least partially overlaps with the gaming area in the front and back. The central projecting portion 60b that projects outward is formed to have a shorter longitudinal width.

Since the front end surfaces of the base plate A60 are formed on substantially the same plane, the rear end of the central projecting portion 60b is located closer to the front than the rear end of the outer edge extension portion 60a. This avoids interference between the base plate A60 and the first operating unit A400.

A recessed portion 60 recessed toward the front side is provided between the outer edge extension portion 60a and the central protruding portion 60b.
c is formed, and in the formation range of this recessed part 60c, base plate A60 is formed thinner than outer edge extension part 60a and central extension part 60b. That is, the degree of decrease in the energy of light passing through the base plate A60 is determined by adjusting the degree of decrease in the energy of light passing through the base plate A60 in the formation range of the concave portion 60c.
0a and the central protrusion 60b.

A center frame A86 is covered on the front side of the base plate A60, and the covering portion 86h of the center frame A86 is formed with a gap maintained between it and the outer edge member A73, as shown in FIG. This gap is arranged at a position overlapping with the recessed portion 60c when viewed in the front-rear direction. In other words, the effect of suppressing the energy reduction of light passing through the base plate A60 is
It can also be maintained on the front side of 0.

The light whose energy reduction is suppressed is used to illuminate the sphere by being irradiated onto the sphere flowing down between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73. In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the degree of energy reduction when the light used for the effect of irradiating the ball with light passes through the game board A13, so it is possible to effectively use weaker light. You can perform an effect that makes the ball shine.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 318, the inner surface of the outer edge member A73 is disposed outward from the inner surface of the outer edge extension portion 60a of the base plate A60 in front view, so that the falling path of the ball is concave. Setting part 6
It can be easily arranged at a position overlapping with 0c in the front and back. Therefore, it is possible to easily irradiate the sphere with the light that has passed through the recessed portion 60c.

As shown in FIG. 318, the bent portion 75b of the metal plate member 75 is sandwiched between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. Thereby, the outer edge member A73, the base plate A60, and the metal plate-like member 75 can be configured integrally and so as to support each other from the viewpoint of rigidity.

Further, by utilizing the fact that when light is irradiated to the bent portion 75b, the light is reflected on the metal, the outer edge member A
The light emission intensity between 73 and base plate A60 can be locally increased. This locally increased intensity of light emission is caused by the inner end (left end) in the width direction of the bent portion 75b being the outer edge member A7.
Since the light emission occurs at a location that can be visually recognized through the vertical wall portion 73b (Fig. 30
8)) (the arcuate wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c can be excluded).

As a result, even when the light is irradiated from the back side to the entire top and bottom of the metal plate-like member 75, the area where the light emission intensity is locally high is limited to the vertical length range of the vertical wall portion 73b. As a result, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the lottery unit A600 disposed opposite the vertical wall portion 73b and the area where the flow path is formed above the lottery unit A600.

319, 320, 321, and 322 are front views of the operating unit A300. In addition, in the description of FIG. 319, FIG. 320, FIG. 321, and FIG. It means A400C and A400D. Also,
The first operating unit A400 may be used as a representative example of configurations and functions that can be commonly adopted by the five first operating units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D.

In FIG. 319, all the first operation units A400 and the second operation units A700 are
A state in which the retracted state is maintained without protruding toward the symbol display device 81 side is illustrated, and FIG. 32
0, all the first operating units A400 are excited and set in an extended state extending toward the third symbol display device 81, and the second operating unit A700 is shown maintaining a retracted state.

In FIG. 321, all the first operation units A400 maintain the retracted state, and the second operation unit A700 is shown in the extended state extending toward the third symbol display device 81 side, and FIG.
22, some of the first operating units A400B and A400C are in the retracted state, other first operating units A400, A400A, and A400D are in the extended state, and the second operating unit A700 is maintained in the extended state. The situation is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 319 to 322, the plurality of first operation units A400 allow the player to
Front cover A4 formed in a conspicuous color (in this embodiment, the front surface is gold-plated)
10 and the first displacement member A440 are configured so that they are mainly visible, and the first displacement member A440
is arranged so that the edge on the third symbol display device 81 side is closest to the adjacent first operation unit A400.

That is, the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are located inside the third symbol display device 81.

The player's line of sight can be focused inward on the third symbol display device 81, which is the center of the radiation, because it is arranged along the radiation that spreads outward from the center. .

The side surface of the first displacement member A440 on the third symbol display device 81 side is connected to the adjacent first displacement member A440.
As shown in FIG. 319, the side surface of the first displacement member A440

(The side surface including the side surface adjacent to the adjacent first displacement member A440) is the tip side (the third symbol display device 8
It is chamfered so that it tapers toward the 1st side). As a result, the adjacent first displacement member A4
Avoiding interference with 40.

Although there is no limitation on the starting point of chamfering, in this embodiment, a straight line extending along the lateral side of the first displacement member A440 is similarly extended from the adjacent first displacement member A440. The chamfering is not performed until just before the intersection where it intersects with the straight line, and the chamfering is started from just before the intersection. As a result, while avoiding interference between the first displacement members A440,
A wide range in which the first displacement member A440 is visible can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the retracted state of the first operation unit A400, the first displacement member A4
40 is arranged in a wide posture in the front and rear so as to occupy a range extending from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, compared to the case where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is limited to a posture in which the light-emitting side surface (the surface facing the front side in FIG. 320) faces the front side, the area occupied by the first displacement member A440 when viewed from the front. In addition, it is possible to increase the visual change while suppressing the amount of displacement in front view.

This configuration is effective when the range available for displacement of the first displacement member A440 is limited in the rotation angle range of the drive gear AMG1 (see FIG. 335) rotated by the drive motor AMT1; Details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 320, in the extended state of the first operation unit A400, the second displacement member A4
90 is placed in the extended position, while the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position (a position away from the third symbol display device 81).

To explain in detail, the first displacement member A440 is arranged in a posture that is wide in the front and rear so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and
From the state where it interferes with the movement locus of the displacement member A490 (the retracted state of the first operation unit A400), in order to allow the movement of the second displacement member A490, it moves toward the game board A13 side and is closer to the front side than the second displacement member A490. The state changes to a state where the first operating unit A400 is placed in the extended state.

As a result, the first displacement member A440 determines whether the first operation unit A400 is in the retracted state or not.
Regardless of whether it is in the extended state, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which light is emitted to the player side without the light being blocked by the second displacement member A490. In particular, in the extended state of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to switch the light emitting mode of the long hole A412a (see FIG. 325) arranged around the third symbol display device 81, and the line of sight to the third symbol display device 81 is made switchable. The details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 321, in the second operation unit A700, the production unit A710 can move up and down to the center side of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the second operation unit A700
is equipped with a rotary body A720 configured to be operable regardless of the vertical position of the production unit A710, and the rotation of this rotary body A720 makes it possible to perform a light emission production in which light travels in multiple directions. This will be discussed later.

As shown in FIG. 322, each of the plurality of first operation units A400 is provided with an individual drive device, so that each first operation unit A400 can change and maintain the state independently. That is, the combination of the retracted state and the extended state in the first operation unit A400 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 322, and can be set arbitrarily.

For example, it is possible to execute only the state change of any one first operating unit A400, or it is also possible to execute the state change in different first operating units A400 in order. For example, the state change can be executed sequentially from the first operation unit A400 at the lower left in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, or the third first operation unit A400B can be executed clockwise from the lower left.
It is also possible to perform state changes sequentially in both directions. In this way, the first operating unit A
400 can be used to perform various effects.

Further, for example, the first operating units A400B and A4 which are in the retracted state in FIG.
By placing the second displacement member A490 of 00C in the extended position, the second movement unit A700
, the first operating units A400B and A400C that are likely to interfere with the second operating unit A700 are placed in a retracted state, and the other first operating units A400, A400A, and A400D are placed in a tensioned state. It can be in an out state. This results in
Compared to the case where all the first operation units A400 operate synchronously with the same drive device, the first operation unit A400
It is possible to increase variations in combinations of operations (states) between the operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700.

FIG. 323 is a front view of operating unit A300. In FIG. 323, the outer shape of the game board A13, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 are illustrated with imaginary lines. As shown in FIG. 323, the first
The front cover A410 of the operation unit A400 is arranged to be able to effectively decorate the game area. This will be explained below.

First, when defining a game area as an area in which a ball that has passed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 flows down, the area where the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are arranged facing each other and guides the ball (ball launching unit The section from the 112a side to the ball return prevention member 68 (see FIG. 302) is not included in the gaming area, and the outer frame of the gaming area in this section is the inner rail 61. Therefore, the outer ends of the front covers A410 of the first operating units A400, A400A (second from the bottom left) arranged on the back side of the inner rail 61 are arranged near the inner rail 61 (on the outer side). (It is not necessary to extend it to the outer rail 62.)

On the other hand, the outer frame of the game area in the area after the ball passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (particularly the area where the ball hit right flows down) is the outer rail 62. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400B, A400C (third and fourth from the bottom left) arranged on the back side of the outer rail 62 is located near the outer rail 62 (outer side). will be placed in

Furthermore, the outer rail 62 is interrupted and the outer frame of the gaming area in the area where the outer edge member A73 is arranged becomes the outer edge member A73. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operating unit A400D (first one on the lower right) arranged on the back side of the outer edge member A73 is arranged near the inner surface (outer side) of the outer edge member A73. . In this embodiment, this is the back case A310.
The support plate part A313 is omitted on the right midsection of the game board A13, and the back case A is placed on the right end of the game board A13.
This is possible because the right end of 310 is moved closer to each other.

That is, by forming the internal area of the back case A310 closer to the right end of the game board A13 when viewed from the front, the first operating unit A400D can be arranged closer to the right end of the game board A13. As a result, a channel (channel sandwiched between the right channel forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73, FIG.
02), the outer end of the front cover A410 is arranged outward (to the right) than the first cover A410.
An operating unit A400D can be provided.

In other words, like a typical right-handed machine (for example, a pachinko machine that is not bilaterally symmetrical),
When the right-handed flow path is made extremely thinner than the left-handed flow path and is arranged closer to the right end of the game board A13, as in this embodiment, the right-handed flow path is placed in the inner area of the back case A310. By arranging a movable device such as the first operating unit A400, it becomes possible to arrange the movable device over the entire back side of the gaming area.

On the other hand, on the left side of the back case A310, a guide section is formed that is sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 when viewed from the front, and the player's line of sight is not concentrated on this guide section. Therefore, even if the support plate portion A313 is disposed on the left side of the back case A310 as in this embodiment, it is possible to avoid reducing the degree of decoration of the gaming area. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is optimal to arrange the support plate part A313 on the left side of the back case A310 and omit the support plate part A313 on the right side of the back case A310 from the viewpoint of improving the decoration of the gaming area. It can be said that it is a choice.

As described above in a plurality of ways in FIG.
The front cover A410 can be configured with a plurality of front covers A410 that are visible through the front cover A410.

This makes it unnecessary to decorate the game area by pasting stickers or the like on which characters or the like are printed on the surface of the game board A13. In addition, the front cover A410
The area where the game board A is disposed is configured so that its appearance can be changed depending on the arrangement of each displacement member and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means as part of the first operation unit A400.
Compared to the case where stickers or the like are pasted on the game area 13, variations in the manner in which the game area is decorated can be increased. Note that the details of the change in appearance will be described later.

In addition, since the outside of the game area is hidden by the block-shaped member 74 (see FIG. 305),
Even if a portion where the structure is exposed or a drive device is placed here, it is possible to avoid the appearance from becoming unsightly.

As shown in FIG. 323, the adjacent first operating units A400 are arranged close to each other with a slight gap, and the cover member A591 disposed between the adjacent first operating units A400
They are fastened and fixed to the first operating unit A400 in a manner that connects them together. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) first operation units A400 arranged around the third symbol display device 81 are coupled to each other to form an integral structure.

Further, the outer side surface of the first operating unit A400 is arranged close to the inner side surface of the rear case A310 (see FIG. 324). Therefore, the rigidity of the first operating unit A400 as a whole can be improved, and the deformation of the rear case A310 can be assisted by the rigidity of the first operating unit A400. ,
It is possible to avoid relying too much on the metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308). Therefore,
Since the strength (rigidity, plate thickness) required for the metal plate member 75 can be lowered, the degree of freedom in designing the metal plate member 75 can be improved.

As a result, it is possible to easily design the metal plate member 75 into a shape that facilitates noise countermeasures and grounding by contacting the inner surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIGS. 303 and 304), which is the original function of the metal plate member 75. can.

FIG. 324 is an exploded front perspective view of operating unit A300. FIG. 324 shows a state in which a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) first operating units A400 are removed from the rear case A310 to the front side, and a second operating unit A700 is attached to the rear case A310.

The first operation units A400 are each configured to be able to operate in a generally common operation mode,
A plurality of them are arranged so as to partially surround the inner space of the back case A310. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, each first operation unit A400 moves in a direction toward the center of the internal space of the back case A310 (a direction along the radiation emitted from the center of the internal space of the back case A310). Configured to move with.

Therefore, for example, since the influence exerted by gravity can change in each first movement unit A400, in this embodiment, the configuration is devised so that movement can be realized without relying on gravity.
Details will be described later. As described above, each of the first operating units A400 has a generally common configuration, so the first operating unit A400 disposed at the lower left will be explained in detail, and the other first operating units A400 will be explained in detail. Omitted.

FIG. 325 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 326 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. As shown in FIGS. 325 and 326, the area of the first operating unit A400 is a generally rectangular area when viewed from the front covered by the front cover A410, and includes a main body area A400b where light emitting effects are mainly performed, and the main body area A400b. It is composed of an annexed area A400v that is attached to the end of the area A400b.

The annex area A400v is not an area that is assumed to be visible to the player in the assembled state. In particular, a blind cover member A591 is placed over the center side where there is a risk of being seen by the player, and the back side of the cover member A591 is configured to be invisible to the player.

This annexed area A400v is not intended to be visible to players, but includes configurations that inevitably occur along with the performance performed in the main body area A400b (for example, the drive motor AMT1, the detection sensor A426 that detects the position, wiring and connectors, etc.). By arranging the main body area A400b, it is possible to make maximum use of the main body area A400b for arranging members intended to be visually recognized by the player. That is,
Since the main body area A400b can be prevented from being invaded by structures that are not intended for the player to see, it is possible to arrange large members by making full use of the width of the main body area A400b.

FIG. 327 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 328 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. Note that FIGS. 327 and 328 illustrate a state in which the front cover A410 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the first operation unit A400 includes a front cover A41
0 and its front cover A410.
The main unit mainly includes a front unit FU and a rear unit BU disposed on the back side of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 is formed by a thin plate bent into a U-shape so as to cover the front side of the front unit FU, and the main body part A411 is fastened and fixed to the rear unit BU. It mainly includes a plurality of through holes A412 drilled at positions defined by the relationship with the front unit FU, and a guide part A413 that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

With the above-described configuration, the front cover A410 has the function of hiding most areas of the front unit FU from the player's view while making a specific area visible through the through hole A412;
It mainly has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

329 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover A410, and FIG. 330 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover A410.
410 is an exploded rear perspective view. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the front cover A41
0 is a structure that is laminated on the back side of the production center part A411a of the main body part A411, and is arranged opposite to the production center part A411a, and has a light-transmitting resin plate shaped in an outer shape corresponding to the shape of the production center part A411a. A diffuser plate A415 made of a material, and a light emitting means A416a such as an LED (shown as a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 329) arranged opposite to the diffuser plate A415 and with its optical axis directed toward the diffuser plate A415 are arranged. The illumination board A416 installed and the illumination board A
416, fixes the illumination board A416, and fastens and fixes the board fixing plate A417 to the front unit FU.

Hereinafter, the configurations of the diffusion plate A415, the illumination board A416, and the board fixing plate A417, and how positional shift is suppressed by the configurations will be described.

The diffuser plate A415 is not fastened with fastening screws or the like, but is supported by being sandwiched between the main body part A411 and the board fixing plate A417 from the front and back directions, and has an axis corresponding position A415a arranged on the back side facing the light emitting means A416a. A wave pattern is formed by protrusions concentrically spread around the center, and a recessed part A415b is formed inward from the outer edge, and a through hole with a smaller diameter than the light emitting means is formed. It mainly includes a plurality of small diameter holes A415c, and a plurality of protruding plate portions A415d protruding from the sides constituting the upper and lower ends toward the back side.

The protrusions forming a wave pattern on the back side of the diffuser plate A415 refract the light irradiated toward the axis-corresponding position A415a, so that the light travels in the radial direction of a circle centered on the axis-corresponding position A415a. It is formed in a shape that advances toward the front side. That is, the light incident on the axis-corresponding position A415a is visually recognized by the player at a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a (radially outward), but the opposite is not the case. That is, it is formed so as to prevent light incident on a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a from traveling toward the axis-corresponding position A415a.

The recessed portion A415b is a notch formed to avoid interference between members, and in this embodiment, the purpose of the recessed portion A415b is to avoid interference with the screw head of a fastening screw that fastens and fixes the illumination board A416 to the board fixing plate A417. is formed.

The narrow diameter portion 415c is inserted into the through hole A412 of the main body portion A411 in order to make it difficult to see when viewed from the front.
(a position facing the plate part of the main body part A411), and the board fixing plate A41
It is a through hole formed at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar part A417f of No. 7, and the diffusion plate A415,
This is used for positioning the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and the details will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h of the substrate fixing plate A417 to enable positioning of the diffusion plate A415 with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417. The protruding plate portion A415d has a protruding length of approximately 4 mm and a width of approximately 10 mm, and has a certain degree of rigidity, so it can withstand loads that occur during assembly or maintenance (for example, due to interference with other members). The protruding plate portion A415d can be prevented from being bent or broken due to loads caused by collisions, friction, etc., and the positioning function can be maintained for a long time.

The diffusion plate A415 has a wave pattern formed over the entire area on the back side and can perform a light diffusion function over the entire area, but it can be clearly divided into a first area AC1 and a second area AC2 in terms of performance. That is, the first area AC1 is an area that overlaps with the illumination board A416 when viewed from the front, and the second area AC2 is an area that does not overlap with the illumination board A416 when viewed from the front.

The optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the illumination board A416 passes through the first area AC1, so that it can be visually recognized by the player in a strong light emitting manner as a light emitting effect. On the other hand, the second area AC2 is
This corresponds to a region formed so as to protrude from the right side wall A417a3 of the board fixing plate A417 to the outside (to the right) of the board fixing plate A417, and the optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the illuminated board A416 does not pass therethrough. The light from A416a arrives weakened.

On the other hand, the second area AC2 has a function of enhancing the effect of the light emission produced by the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU, but the details will be described later.

The illumination board A416 includes the above-mentioned light emitting means A416a, a recessed part A416b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of large diameter holes A416c bored with a large diameter for positioning, and a small diameter through hole A416c. A plurality of assembly fastening holes 416d arranged as a set of holes, a plurality of connectors A416e arranged on the front and back sides to which the ends of the wiring are connected, and an electric wiring F for supplying electricity to the first displacement member A440.
C (in this embodiment, a flat cable) is connected to the intermediate connector A416f
The main preparation is as follows.

The light emitting means A416a is located at a position where the intensity of the light visible to the player is likely to be maximum, and in this embodiment, it is preferentially arranged at a position that matches the position where the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 is formed in the front and back direction. Ru. Thereby, it is possible to easily ensure the intensity of the light that is visible to the player through the through hole A412.

The recessed portion A416b is a notch formed to avoid interference with the screw head of a fastening screw inserted into the through hole A417b to fasten and fix the board fixing plate A417 to the front unit FU.

The large diameter hole A416c is a through hole drilled with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outermost diameter of the insertion columnar part A417f of the board fixing plate A417, and is bored at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar part A417f. By inserting the insertion columnar part A417f into the large diameter hole A416c, the illumination board A416
can be aligned with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417.

The assembly fastening portion A416d is composed of a pair of small-diameter through holes arranged vertically. Maintenance efficiency is improved by configuring the fastening screw to be inserted into the upper one of the pair of through holes.

For example, for maintenance, the main unit A411 and the diffuser plate A415 are removed while the first operating unit A400 is fixed to the back case A310, and the illumination board A4 that has failed is removed.
16 from the board fixing plate A417, and then remove the normal illumination board A416 from the board fixing plate A417.
It is assumed that the lighting board A416 will be attached to a wall, but before it is fastened and fixed, the illumination board A416 falls forward due to its own weight. In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper through hole (the side that is more displaced toward the front due to forward tilting) of the pair of upper and lower through holes of the assembly fastening portion A416d is fixed with a fastening screw, so that the front It is possible to successfully return the fallen position to the backward direction by tightening the fastening screws. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the posture of the illumination board A416 from being erroneously fixed during fastening and fixing during maintenance.

Note that the columnar part of the board fastening part A417c protruding from the front side of the board fixing plate A417 is inserted into the lower through hole of the assembly fastening part A416d for positioning the illumination board A416 and for positioning the illumination board A416. Equipped with a temporary fastening function. That is, even before the fastening screws are fastened, the lower through-hole is hooked on the columnar part of the board fastening part A417c, so that it is possible to suppress the illumination board A416 from falling under its own weight.

The connector A416e is arranged on the front side and has a first connector A416e1 connected to wiring for supplying power and controlling light emission of the light emitting unit A416a, and a wiring connected to a detection sensor A426 fixed to the front unit FU. It mainly includes a second connector A416e2 to be connected, and a third connector A416e3 to which wiring is connected to a second displacement member A490 disposed in the rear unit BU.

These connectors A416e have a fixed position of the mating member to which the wiring is connected.

(first connector A416e1, second connector A416e2), and even if the mating member is movable, there is a sufficient distance between the connectors (third connector A416e3), so they can be placed at any position. In this embodiment, the illumination board A416 is located at a position corresponding to the lower end of the illumination board A416 in order to prevent interference with other members and to avoid the risk of being seen by the player.
It is located at a location included in 400v.

On the other hand, the first displacement member A440, which is a mating member to which the intermediate connector A416f is connected by wiring, is located in an area on the opposite side of the illumination board A416 with the board fixing plate A417 in between (the board fixing plate A417 and the guide plate part A430 (Fig. 335), the gap between the connectors (refer to 335) is shortened, so if the connectors are placed incorrectly, excessive load may be placed on the wiring. There is a risk of giving.

In this embodiment, unlike the connector A416e in which the wiring direction can be any direction (in this embodiment, the wiring is connected to the connector A416e from below), the intermediate connector A416e
The posture of f is changed to the direction A416x, which is the moving direction of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.
and the direction in which the electric wiring FC can be expanded and contracted (the flat cable band extends, can be easily bent, and there is little possibility of disconnection) are set so as to be aligned.

The board fixing plate A417 has a main body part A417a formed in a box shape with an open front side and capable of accommodating the illumination board A416, and a protrusion part on the back side of the main body part A417a to receive the fastening part of the front unit FU. and a plurality of through-holes A417b configured to allow insertion of fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion, a fastening portion into which the fastening screws are screwed, and a plane common to the front end surface of the fastening portion toward the front side. A plurality of board fastening parts A417c constituted by a set of protruding narrow-diameter columnar parts
and.

Further, the main body part A417a of the board fixing plate A417 has a plate-shaped deep bottom plate part A417a1 connected to the rear end part of the board fastening part A417c, and is parallel to the deep bottom plate part A417a1, and the front surface thereof is parallel to the deep bottom plate part A417a1. A shallow plate-shaped portion A4 formed on the same plane as the distal end surface of the fastening portion.
17a2.

That is, the back surface of the illumination board A416 can be surface-supported by the front end surfaces of the fastening parts of the plurality of board fastening parts A417c and the shallow plate-like part A417a2.

The board fixing plate A417 has a sharp protruding part A417d extending from the deep bottom plate-like part A417a1 to the front side with a sharp tip, and a vertical width of the sharp protruding part A417d at the lower left of the sharp protruding part A417d. The insertion hole A417e is formed in a rectangular shape with the same width.

The sharp protruding part A417d is arranged at the lower left of the intermediate connector A416f in the assembled state, and has a triangular cross section in such a manner that it leaves an interval approximately equal to the thickness of the electrical wiring FC, which is a flat cable, between it and the electrical board A416. It is formed as a linearly extending protrusion, and the extending direction of the protrusion intersects (perpendicularly intersects) the direction A416x when viewed from the front. Then, the wiring connected to the intermediate connector A416f passes through the insertion hole A417e and is routed to the back side.
The electrical wiring FC connected to the intermediate connector A416f is sandwiched between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protrusion A417d.

In this way, by sandwiching and supporting the electrical wiring FC between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protruding portion A417d, the portion of the electrical wiring FC that receives displacement due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is transferred to the intermediate connector A416f. Board fixing plate A41 from the end position of the electrical wiring FC to be connected
7 and the sharp protrusion A417d. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring FC falls off from the intermediate connector A416f.

The board fixing plate A417 has a shallow plate-like portion A417 at a position corresponding to the large diameter hole A416c.
A plurality of insertion columnar parts A417f protruding from a2 to the front side in a columnar manner and a shallow plate-like part A417
a2, a plurality of through holes A417g formed through the boundary between the shallow plate-like part A417a2 and the deep-bottom plate-like part A417a1, and a protrusion of the diffusion plate A415 on the side wall A417a3 extending from the outer shape of the main body part A417a to the front side. A plurality of cutout portions A417h are formed with a width that can accommodate the installation plate portion A415d, and a plurality of cutout portions A417h are formed to protrude toward the inside of the main body portion A417a along the front side edge of the side wall A417a3 formed diagonally on the right side when viewed from the front. multiple protruding pieces A417i
and.

The insertion columnar part A417f has a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the large diameter hole A416c of the illumination board A416c, and is a large diameter base that extends beyond the thickness of the illumination board A416 and protrudes from the flat surface formed by the tip of the side wall A417a3. and a small-diameter tip portion protruding from the tip of the large-diameter base portion with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the small-diameter hole A415c of the diffuser plate A415.

Thereby, the large-diameter base can align the illumination board A416 and the surface support of the diffuser plate A415 can be performed, and the small-diameter tip can align the diffuser plate A415. That is, diffuser plate A4
15 is aligned with the small diameter tip and is supported in plane by the side wall A417a3 and the tip of the large diameter base of the insertion columnar part A417f. With this configuration, even though the diffusion plate A415 is not directly fastened and fixed, it is possible to suppress the posture of the diffusion plate A415 from shifting.

The through hole A417g forms an air passage and has a function of suppressing heat generation of the illumination board A416. In this embodiment, the diffusion plate A415 is arranged in such a manner as to block the front side of the light emitting means A416a of the illumination board A416, and since the configuration is such that it is difficult to form an air passage to the front side, the through hole A417g is formed on the back side. is formed. Thereby, heat generation of the illumination board A416 can be suppressed without reducing the production effect of the light emitting means A416a.

The notch portion A417h receives the protruding plate portion A415d of the diffusion plate A415, and the side wall A41
It engages in the direction along 7a3. As a result, even if the small diameter tip of the insertion columnar part A417f breaks due to aging or falls off due to manufacturing defects, the diffusion plate A4
15 can be prevented from shifting in the longitudinal direction of the protruding plate portion A415d (direction along the formation direction of the side wall A417a3, upper right direction) with respect to the board fixing plate A417. Therefore,
In the supporting mode in which the diffuser plate A415 is not fastened and fixed as described above, it is possible to prevent the diffuser plate A415 from shifting its position.

The protruding piece A417i is formed into a thin plate shape into which the illumination board A416 can be inserted between the protruding piece A417i and the shallow plate-like part A417a2. In this embodiment, in addition to the fact that the protruding piece A417i is formed with a protruding length that interferes with the illumination board A416 in a front view in the assembled state, the protruding piece A417i
is provided to protrude downward (diagonally downward) from the side wall A417a3, so even if the illumination board A416 receives a load in the direction of falling forward due to gravity or the like, this protrusion piece A417i will prevent the illumination board A416 from collapsing. Since the tip end side (upper right side) of the illumination board A416 is locked (stopped from the front side), it is possible to prevent the illumination board A416 from falling forward.

The protruding piece A417i is formed inside the internal space of the operation unit A300, and is attached to the illumination board A4.
16 to the front side (suppresses flapping). Therefore, operation unit A3
The illumination board A416 can be stably fixed while omitting the provision of fastening screws inside the internal space of the 00. As a result, the action unit A3 that tends to attract more attention from players
The illumination board A416 is fixed to the board fixing plate A41 while avoiding reduction in the light emitting effect (due to shadows caused by the fastening screws) due to the arrangement of the fastening screws inside the internal space of the 00.
7 can be stably fixed.

When assembling the illumination board A416 to the board fixing plate A417, insert the right side edge of the illumination board A416 diagonally between the shallow plate-like part A417a2 and the protruding piece A417i as far as it will go, and then press the insertion tip. It can be assembled smoothly by pushing the illumination board A416 backwards from the starting point. This will be explained with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332.

FIG. 331(a) is a front view of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG.
1(b) is a cross-sectional view of the illuminated board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 along the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb line of FIG. 331(a), and FIG. 332(a) is a cross-sectional view of the illuminated board A416
and a front view of the board fixing plate A417, and FIG. 332(b) is a front view of the CCCX of FIG. 332(a).
It is a sectional view of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 along the line XXIIb-CCCXXXIIb.

331(a) and 331(b) illustrate a state in which the illuminated board A416 is inserted into the board fixing plate A417, and FIGS. 332(a) and 332(b) show the illuminated board A416 inserted into the board fixing plate A417. is shown assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

The illumination board A416 has a chamfered portion A416g chamfered from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the board body.
, A416h. The manner in which the chamfered portions A416g and A416h are formed corresponds to the length from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the adjacent notch portion A417h. That is, since the length up to the notch A417h at the lower end is shorter than the length up to the notch A417h at the upper end of the right side of the board fixing plate A417, the illumination board A4
16, the second chamfered portion A416h at the lower end is formed at a shorter distance from the right side of the illumination board A416 than the first chamfered portion A416g at the upper end.

In FIG. 331, compared to the state shown in FIG. 332, the illumination board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A41.
7 is shown displaced upward along the inclination of the left side. The upper limit of the degree of this displacement is the length of the space formed between the first chamfered part A416g and the upper surface of the board fixing plate A417, and in the state shown in FIG. The edge of the cutout A417h fits into the gap formed by the cutout A417h.

Contrary to the state illustrated in FIG. 331, when displacing the illumination board A416 downward, the length of the space formed between the second chamfer A416h and the lower surface of the board fixing plate A417 is set to an upper limit. As shown in FIG. 332, the illumination board A416 can be shifted downward from the state shown in FIG. 332, and in the downwardly shifted state, the edge of the second chamfered portion A416h enters the gap formed by the notch A417h.

By forming the chamfered portions A416g and A416h on the illumination board A416 in this manner, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in positioning the illumination board A416 when inserting the illumination board A416 into the board fixing plate A417. That is, the right side of the illuminated board A416 and the board fixing plate A417
332, the illumination board A416 can be inserted into the board fixing plate A417 while allowing a slight vertical shift. This results in
The illumination board A416 can be easily inserted into the board fixing plate A417.

To change from the state shown in FIG. 331 to the state shown in FIG. 332, the illumination board A416 may be tilted closer to the board fixing plate A417 with its right side as the tilting axis. On this occasion,
As shown in FIG. 331, the board fixing plate A41 is inserted through the large diameter hole A416c of the illumination board A416.
As can be seen from the fact that the insertion columnar portion A417f of No. 7 is visible, the large diameter hole 417c is guided by the tapered insertion columnar portion A417f (see FIG. 329), so that the illumination board A4
The vertical positional deviation of 16 is corrected, and the state shown in FIG. 332 is achieved. Therefore, the vertical misalignment of the illumination board A416 can be corrected without intentionally correcting the vertical misalignment of the illumination board A416.
The illumination board A416 can be easily assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

Note that the notch A417h has a protruding plate part A415 in the assembled state (see Fig. 325).
d is inserted and the gap is filled. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illumination board A416 from entering the notch A417h after assembly. That is, for the notch A417h,
While having the function of widening the gap when the illumination board A416 is assembled, it is possible to have the function of maintaining the arrangement of the illumination board A416 by filling the gap after the assembly is completed.

As shown in FIG. 332(b), when the illumination board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417, the protruding piece A417i protrudes to the front side of the illumination board A416, and the illumination board A
416, so the right side of the illumination board A416 is connected to the board fixing plate A41.
7 can be prevented from falling off.

By using such a retaining structure to prevent the illumination board A416 from falling off, in this embodiment, a board fastening portion A417 is provided near the right side of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.
c is not provided (the fastening screws are omitted). Thereby, it is possible to secure a region for disposing the light emitting means A416a near the right side of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and it is also possible to avoid shadows caused by the fastening screws. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of light emission near the right side of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.

When the illumination board A416 becomes defective and during maintenance work to replace the illumination board A416, the illumination board A416 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 332(b) to the board fixing plate A417 as shown in FIG. 331(b). You need to tilt it. At this time, the illumination board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A416.
417, it is difficult to directly tilt the illumination board A416. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first connector A416e1 is arranged on the front side, and by pulling the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1 toward the front, the illumination board A416 can be easily connected. It can be tilted with respect to the board fixing plate A417.

Furthermore, since the first connector A416e1 is disposed at a position opposite to the right end (the end disposed opposite to the side wall A417a3) which is the starting point of the attitude change of the illumination board A416,
The load applied to the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1 allows the illumination board A to be efficiently
416 can be rotationally displaced. In other words, the moment of force applied to the illumination board A416 due to the load applied to the wiring can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying unnecessary (excessive) load to the illumination board A416 and wiring during maintenance work.

FIG. 333 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU, and FIG.
4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. As shown in FIGS. 333 and 334, the rear unit BU is formed into a box shape with an open front side, and the front unit FU is fixed to the open front side with a lid. That is, rear unit B
The second displacement member A490 disposed on the front side of U is configured to be able to move forward and backward through the gap between the rear unit BU and the front unit FU.

As shown in FIG. 333, only one drive motor AMT1 is provided in each first operation unit A400. The driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is transferred to the front unit F.
By being transmitted to the first displacement member A440 of U and the second displacement member A490 of the rear unit BU, the movable performance of the first movement unit A400 is executed.

In this embodiment, the front unit FU and the rear unit BU are simply called the front unit FU and the rear unit BU as units that can be disassembled. They do not work independently, but work in conjunction with each other. For example, the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the front unit FU, while the transmission gear A461 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the rear unit BU.

FIG. 335 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and rear unit BU of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 336 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and rear unit BU of the first operating unit A400. be. That is, FIG. 335 and B11 show the front cover A4
10 is an exploded perspective view of the first operating unit A400 with the first operating unit A400 removed. FIG. Note that in FIGS. 335 and 336, illustration of the wiring HC and the like is omitted. First, an overview of the configuration of the first operating unit A400 will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 335 and 336, the first operation unit A400 includes a front unit FU
, a supporting plate portion A420 formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and a supporting plate portion A42 formed from a light-transmitting colorless resin material.
A first displacement member A440 is disposed on the front side of 0 with a gap that allows it to move forward and backward, and the support plate portion A42
A guide plate portion A430 fastened and fixed to the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A42.
A mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the first displacement member A440 that moves forward and backward (slide displacement, see FIGS. 339 to 344) guided by the gap between the The slide link A4 is displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440.
50, a drive motor AMT1 and its drive motor AM which are fastened and fixed to the support plate part A420.
It mainly includes a drive gear AMG1 fastened and fixed to T1.

The first operating unit A400 also includes a transmission gear group A460, which constitutes the rear unit BU, and a transmission gear group A460 that meshes with the drive gear AMG1 and whose constituent members rotate as the drive gear AMG1 rotates. A support box portion A470 rotatably supports the gear group A460 and is formed from a light-transmissive colored (black in this embodiment) resin material in a box shape with an open front side.
, a rear plate part A480 formed from a light-transmitting colorless resin material, arranged with a gap on the back side of the support box part A470, and fastened and fixed to the support box part A470; and a front face of the support box part A470. The forward and backward displacement (
This is a rack and pinion mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the second displacement member A490 that performs rotational displacement (rotational displacement, rotational displacement, see FIGS. 356 to 358) and the second displacement member A490, and is on the back side of the support box part A470. It mainly includes a rack and pinion A510 that is fastened and fixed to the rack and pinion A510.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 have a transmission mechanism on the back side with the plate-like part (the support plate part A420, the bottom of the support box part A470) arranged on the back side sandwiched therebetween. (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are arranged in the gap between the support plate part A420 and the support box part A470.
50 and a second displacement member A490 are both disposed.

That is, the displacement members A440, A490 and the transmission mechanism (slide link A45
0, rack and pinion A510) are disposed in the front and rear, which tends to be bulky in the front and rear.
Compared to the case where the displacement member A490 and the first displacement member A490 are arranged in independent gaps in the front and back, it is possible to omit the arrangement of a plate member for forming the independent gaps. The longitudinal width occupied by the displacement mechanism portion of the displacement member A490 can be suppressed. As a result, other performance mechanisms can be placed in the front-rear gap that can be formed by suppressing the front-rear width, thereby improving the performance effect of the first operating unit A400.

Next, each configuration of the first operating unit A400 will be explained in detail. As described above, the first operation unit A400 includes a first displacement member A440 and a second displacement member A490 that have different displacement modes, and the configurations required for each displacement are partially different.
The configuration required to realize the displacement of the displacement member A440 will be explained, and later the configuration required to realize the displacement of the second displacement member A440 will be explained.
The remaining configuration required for the displacement of 490 will be explained.

The support plate portion A420 constitutes the framework of the first operation unit A400 and is a portion that guides the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440, and is a main body plate configured in a rectangular plate shape to which the drive motor AMT1 is fastened and fixed. A portion A421, a plurality of guide holes A422 formed through the guide holes as long holes extending parallel to the direction A416x, a punch hole A423 provided as a similar long hole to one of the guide holes A422, and a hole A423 extending parallel to the direction A416x. A plurality of guide protrusions A424 protrude toward the front side as protrusions, and a plurality of guide protrusions A424 are recessed along the direction A416x from the right edge of the main body plate portion A421, and as the recessed end goes toward the front side, the main body plate portion A421 A recessed portion A425 formed as an inclined surface that slopes away from the right side edge of the slide link A425, a detection sensor A426 that detects that the first displacement member A440 is placed at the initial position, and a cover of the slide link A450. Pivot hole A45
A shaft support A427 has a circular cross-section and projects from the main body plate part A421 toward the back side, and can support the transmission gear group A460 in a cylindrical shape. It mainly includes a plurality of retaining cylindrical parts A428 provided therein.

The guide hole A422 includes a first guide hole A422a that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440,
A plurality of second guide holes A for guiding the displacement of the guided protrusion A455c of the slide link A450
422b.

The pull-out hole A423 is a through-hole through which the spring hooking portion A455d of the slide link A450 passes toward the front side, and the spring hooking portion A455d extends from the front side of the main body plate portion A421 to the coil spring ASP1. to lock (hook) the end of the

The other end of the coil spring ASP1 is latched (hooked) to the lower left corner of the main body plate portion A421, and the coil spring ASP1 generates an urging force in the direction of contraction (lower left direction).

The guide protrusion A424 straddles the guide groove A441g of the first displacement member A440 and has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440. The recessed portion A425 is formed to guide the bending of the electrical wiring FC connected to the first displacement member A440, and details will be described later.

The detection sensor A426 is a photocoupler type sensor arranged to be able to determine that the first displacement member A440 is placed at the initial position. In this embodiment, the detection sensor A426 does not directly detect the position of the first displacement member A440, but rather detects the position of the first displacement member A440.
The position of the detected plate portion A455e of 0 is detected.

In this embodiment, the sensor arranged to determine the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is the detection sensor A426, and the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are in the extended position. The arrangement of a detection sensor for determining the arrangement is omitted.

As a result, it is possible to reduce member costs and create space for arranging other displacement members, while the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are already placed in the extended position. It is also conceivable that problems such as the drive motor AMT1 not stopping may occur despite the fact that the drive motor AMT1 is not stopped. On the other hand, even if the drive motor AMT1 does not stop, it is possible to avoid overloading the parts related to the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and
Measures have been taken to maintain the arrangement of 0s, but the details will be described later.

The retaining cylindrical portion A428 has a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter that is approximately half the outermost diameter of the transmission gear A461 of the transmission gear group A460, and is protruded from the transmission gear with a slight gap between its tip. It is arranged opposite to group A460. That is, the retaining cylindrical portion A428 is connected to the transmission gear A461.
It has the function of suppressing displacement in the direction of falling off on the shaft side.

Note that in this embodiment, a locking screw is fixed to the tip of the shaft support of the transmission gear A461 (not shown). Therefore, unless the screw loosens or falls off, the screw can prevent the transmission gear A461 from displacing in the direction of falling off on the shaft side. In this way, in this embodiment, the screw and the retaining cylindrical part A428 are configured to prevent the transmission gear A461 from coming off in two stages, so it is possible to ensure that the transmission gear A461 does not come off from the shaft. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

The right edge of the guide plate portion A430 is parallel to the right edge of the main body plate portion A421, and the right edge of the guide plate portion A430 is parallel to the right edge of the main body plate portion A421.
plate-shaped main body plate portions A431 arranged facing each other along a plane parallel to the plane formed by 21;
A plurality of long rectangular recesses A432 are provided on the back side of the main body plate portion A431 in a long rectangular shape along the direction A416x, and on the right side edge of the front side of the main body plate portion A431, the lower left side along the direction A416x An inclined surface A433 that is inclined toward the front side and configured to be able to assist the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (rear cover section 443), and a recessed section A of the support plate section A420.
Guide plate portion A434 formed in a long plate shape along direction A416x with a width corresponding to the width of A425.
The main preparation is as follows.

The main body plate portion A431 includes a plurality of insertion holes A431a on the peripheral edge thereof, into which fastening screws are inserted. The left side edge of the main body plate part A431 is supported by the side wall part A421a raised toward the front side from the left side edge of the main body plate part A421 of the support plate part A420, so the left side of the main body plate part A431 Even though there is only one insertion hole A431a provided at the edge, the guide plate portion A
430 can be stably fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420.

Also, the main body plate portion A4 is a position where the first displacement member A440 passes through the front and back when moving forward and backward.
31, the insertion hole A431a is arranged at only one location approximately at the center of the vertical width, so the main body plate A43
The gap between the right edge of the first displacement member and the support plate A420 can be suppressed throughout the right edge, and compared to the case where a plurality of insertion holes A431a are arranged, A44
0 degree of freedom in design can be improved.

The elongated recess A432 is a recess that guides the displacement stop protrusion A441e of the first displacement member A440 in the direction A416x, which is the direction in which the displacement stop protrusion A441e of the first displacement member A440 can be displaced. It is recessed with approximately the same length. That is, the first displacement member A440
Not only is the back side guided to the guide hole A422 of the support plate part A420, but also the long recess A420
The front side is also guided by 432.

The guide plate part A434 has an electric wiring FC consisting of a flat cable on the right edge side.
A plurality of claw portions A434a are provided at intervals slightly wider than the thickness of the claw portion A434a.
An electric wiring FC whose end is connected to the first displacement member A440 is passed through the gap between the parts 434a and temporarily fixed. Due to this. Electrical wiring FC that is deflected and displaced by displacement of the first displacement member A440
One end of the deflection displacement can be set at the position of the claw portion A434a, and the position of the electric wiring FC on the left side of the claw portion A434a can be stabilized.

Therefore, the electric wiring FC consisting of a flat cable is connected to the guide plate section A434.
Therefore, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the front side of the guide plate portion A434 and the electric wiring FC is similarly displaced (see FIG. 346), the first displacement member Interference between the displacement member A440 and the electrical wiring FC can be avoided. The first displacement member A440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338.

FIG. 337 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 338 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member A440. Note that, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 338 is illustrated in a direction different from that in FIG. 336.

As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the first displacement member A440 includes a guided plate portion A4 which is a plate-shaped portion guided along the direction A416x between the support plate portion A420 and the guide plate portion A430.
41, a plate made of a colored (gold plated in this embodiment) and light-impermeable resin material, pivoted on the guided plate part A441, and displaced in conjunction with the guided plate part A441. The interlocking plate portion A442 is a shaped portion, and the interlocking plate portion A44 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the interlocking plate portion A442.
2, a diffusion plate A444 formed in a plate shape from a colorless light-transmitting resin material and disposed opposite to the rear side of the interlocking plate part A442, and the diffusion plate A444. It mainly includes an illumination board A445 which is arranged to face the rear side of the rear lid part 443 and has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the diffuser plate A444, and which is arranged to face the rear cover part 443.

Here, the interlocking plate part A442, the rear lid part 443, the diffusion plate A444, and the illumination board A445 are as follows:
Since they are fixed as a group, these will be explained first. That is, the interlocking plate portion A442
A plurality of positioning pins A442a protruding from the back surface of the diffuser plate A444 are inserted into the plurality of insertion holes A444.
444a, the interlocking plate part A442 and the diffusion plate A444 are positioned with respect to each other, and a plurality of positioning pins A444b protruding from the back surface of the diffusion plate A444 are inserted into the illumination board A44.
The diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 are positioned with respect to each other by being inserted through the plurality of insertion holes A445a of No.5.

Then, the plurality of insertion holes 4 of the rear lid part 443 are inserted into the plurality of threaded parts A442b of the interlocking plate part A442.
43a is fastened and fixed, the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 are displaced (positioning It is held in a manner that allows displacement of less than the height of the pin.
Thereby, the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 can be stably fixed without directly inserting fastening screws into the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445.

In addition, in this embodiment, the plurality of protruding ribs 443b protruding toward the front side near the outer periphery of the rear lid part 443 come into contact with the illumination board A445 and press it against the interlocking plate part A442 and the diffusion plate A444. It is formed in a dimensional relationship where loads occur. Due to this pressing force, the diffuser plate A
444 and the illumination board A445 can be stably fixed to the interlocking plate part A442.

The illumination board A445 includes a plurality of light emitting means A445b such as LEDs (shown as approximately square chip shapes in FIG. 337) with optical axes directed toward the diffuser plate A444 on the front side.

The diffuser plate A444 has an axis corresponding position A444 arranged on the back side facing the light emitting means A445b.
A wavy pattern is formed from protrusions extending concentrically around c as a center, and the outer edge of the wavy pattern is formed at a position corresponding to the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442.

A fitting part A444d is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A444 and projects toward the front side and has a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape of the opening A442c of the interlocking plate part A442.In the assembled state, the fitting part A444d is fitted into the opening A442c. It will be done.

With this configuration, the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b can be transmitted to the diffuser plate A444.
Of the light that has passed through the aperture A442c, the player can visually recognize the light that has passed through the aperture A442c.

The illumination board A445 is provided with a connector A445c disposed on the back side and to which an electric wiring FC made of a flat cable is connected. The electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is connected to the connector A445c from the rotating tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442.
Thereby, the curved position of the electric wiring FC can be configured on the rotating tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the degree of the curve can be made gentle.

The rear lid part 443 is connected to the connector A445c and circuit components (such as capacitors and resistors) not shown.
A ventilation opening 443c is formed at a position corresponding to the ventilation opening 416c, and a through hole A443d is formed to penetrate the ventilation opening 416c in the direction A416x.

The tip of the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c will be placed in the ventilation opening 443c where the connector A445c is located, but the electrical wiring FC is routed to the back side of the rear lid part 443 through the through hole A443d. . As a result, the electrical wiring FC can be sandwiched between the illumination board A445 and the narrow rod-shaped portion 443e that partitions between the ventilation opening 443c and the through hole A443d, so that the electric wiring FC can be inserted between the connector A445c and the narrow rod-shaped portion 443e Wiring FC
can be prevented from being displaced. Note that the through hole A443d also has the role of forming a space for arranging the electric wiring FC, and compared to the case where the through hole A443d is not formed with a sufficient length along the direction A416x, the electric wiring FC It is possible to reduce the load applied to the

In addition, in this embodiment, the small diameter rod-shaped portion 443e is formed to protrude toward the illumination board A445 side similarly to the protruding rib 443b. Therefore, the small diameter rod-shaped portion 443e and the illumination board A445
The distance between them will be narrowed. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the point at which a load is applied from the rear lid part 443 to the illumination board A445. In other words, only the protruding rib 443b and the narrow rod-shaped portion 443e are configured to apply a load from the rear lid portion 443 to the illumination board A445.

Thereby, even if the electrical wiring FC is displaced due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring FC from coming off from the connector A445c.

Next, the manner of connection between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 and the details of the guided plate portion A441 will be described. The interlocking plate portion A442 has a support shaft portion A442d that protrudes in a circular outer shape.
and a pivoted support hole A442e, which is a circular opening coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft part A442d, and is rotatably supported by the interlocking plate part A442 about an axis parallel to the central axis of the support shaft part A442d. A roller member A442f, which is a resin member and has a circular outer shape, is provided.

The guided plate portion A441 includes a main body plate portion A441a formed in a long plate shape from a resin material, a support shaft portion A441b protruding in a circular shape from the upper end of the main body plate portion A441a, and A shaft support hole A441c is formed in a circular shape coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft part A441b and is bored at the lower end of the main body plate part A441a, and a long straight line extends from the front side of the main body plate part A441a to the front side. A plurality of protruding guide protrusions A441d, a plurality of displacement stopper protrusions A441e protruding toward the front side in an elongated shape extending in a direction intersecting (orthogonal to) the guide protrusions A441d, An inclined surface A441f that slopes outward (lower left side) toward the front side at a position facing the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the decorative board A445, and a main body plate portion A4
A plurality of guide grooves A4 formed as small diameter grooves along the direction A416x on the back side of 41a.
41g, a recessed part A441h recessed along the direction A416x from the upper right edge of the main body plate part A441a, and a fastening part protruding from the back side of the main body plate part A441a in a manner that allows fastening screws to be fastened. A441i.

The support shaft portion A441b and the supported shaft hole A441c are used for connection with the interlocking plate portion A442. As for how to assemble, the supported shaft hole A442e of the interlocking plate part A442 is connected to the support shaft part A441b.
After arranging the interlocking plate part A442 so that it is arranged in the shape of an axis, the interlocking plate part A442 is arranged along the axis.
442 relative to the guided plate portion A441, the support shaft portion A is inserted into the shaft supported hole A442e.
441b, and the support shaft portion A442d is inserted into the supported shaft support hole A441c, respectively, to constitute a pivotally supported state. In addition, the shafted support hole A442e and the support shaft part A441b, the shafted support hole A
441c and the support shaft portion A442d are configured with dimensions such that a slight gap is formed between them so as to be rotatable.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the interlocking plate part A442 and the guided plate part A441 are configured to be pivoted in the above-described manner, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the support shaft part A441b, and the screw is fixed to the tip of the support shaft part A441b. By configuring the diameter of the head portion to be larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole A442e, the interlocking plate portion A442 is prevented from coming off from the guided plate portion A441.

The guide protrusion portion A441d is a small diameter portion for narrowing the area of contact with the back surface of the guide plate portion A430. Thereby, the frictional force generated between the guide plate portion A430 and the main body plate portion A431 can be reduced, and the guided plate portion A441 can be smoothly displaced.

The displacement stopping protrusion A441e is formed with a width slightly shorter than the width of the elongated recess A432 of the guide plate portion A430, and enters into the elongated recess A432 when the first operating unit A400 is assembled (see FIG. 324). Formed with a protruding length.

The formation position of the displacement stop protrusion A441e is designed so that when the guided plate part A441 is placed at the end of displacement, the displacement stop protrusion A441e is placed at the end of the elongated recess A432 in the longitudinal direction. be done. Therefore, even if the guided plate part A441 does not stop normally at the end of displacement, the guided plate part A4
41 can be regulated.

The inclined surface A441f is connected to the electrical wiring F connected to the connector A445c of the illumination board A445.
It is a plane for receiving and guiding C. By forming the guided plate part A at an angle,
The load applied to the electrical wiring FC due to the displacement of 441 can be suppressed. In addition, flat type (
The mode of bending of the electrical wiring FC constituted by a flat cable will be described later.

The guide groove A441g is a groove that straddles the guide protrusion A424 of the support plate part A420, and is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness of the guide protrusion A424, and has a cross-sectional half-shaped groove from both sides toward the inside of the groove near the end of each groove. It has an overhang that extends in a circular shape. The distance between the tips of this overhang is the guide protrusion A424.
The dimension is slightly longer than the thickness of the As a result, while suppressing that the direction in which the guide groove A441g extends deviates from the longitudinal direction of the guide protrusion A424, the guide groove A441g and the guide protrusion A4
24 can be reduced.

The recessed portion A441h is a relief portion provided in order to avoid interference with a portion used for fastening by a fastening screw inserted into the right-hand insertion hole A431a of the guide plate portion A430. As a result, in this embodiment, the right end portion of the guided plate portion A441 is configured to be disposed on the right side of the insertion hole portion A431a.

The fastening portion A441i is inserted into the first guide hole A422a of the support plate portion A420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), and is connected to the displacement side elongated hole A453 of the slide link A450.
That is, by transmitting the driving force to the fastening portion A441i via the slide link A450, the first displacement member A440 including the guided plate portion A441 is displaced.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 335 and 336. The slide link A450 has a support plate portion A42.
A long link A451 rotatably supported by a shaft support A427 of 0 and its long link A4
51 and supported so as to be movable in parallel along the direction A416x.
55.

The long link A451 is a member formed in the shape of a long rod, and includes a shaft support hole A452 bored with a diameter that allows the shaft support A427 to be inserted therethrough, and a shaft support hole A452 on the long side with respect to the shaft support hole A452. A displacement side elongated hole A453 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the end, and its displacement side elongated hole A45
A transmission side elongated hole A45 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the end opposite to the side where No. 3 is provided.
4 and.

The irregularly shaped slide member A455 is disposed in a concave portion A421b of the main body plate portion A421 that is recessed toward the front side of the proximal end surface from which the shaft support A427 of the support plate portion A420 protrudes.
21 and the elongated link A451, and a plate-shaped main body plate portion A455a which is sandwiched between the main body plate portion A455a and the main body plate portion A455a. a plurality of guided protrusions A455c that protrude in a circular shape toward the front side of the main body plate portion A455a and are inserted into the second guide hole A422b of the support plate portion A420;
A spring hanging part A that protrudes in a hook shape toward the front side of the main body plate part A455a, is inserted into a hole A423 of the support plate part A420, and the end of the coil spring ASP1 is hooked (locked).
455d, a detected plate portion A455e formed in a plate shape that is thin enough to enter the detection gap of the detection sensor A426, and an irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 to which driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear group A460.

The transmission gear group A460 is composed of a pair of gears that are rotatably supported by the support box part A470, one of which is meshed with the drive gear AMG1, and a pair of transmission gears A461 with which the other gear meshes with the drive gear AMG1. Gear with pin A462 meshed on the opposite side of drive gear AMG1
and an in-phase member A465 that follows the pin-equipped gear A462 in phase.

The pin-equipped gear A462 has a transmission protrusion A that protrudes from an eccentric position toward the front side in a circular shape.
463, and an arcuate wall portion A464 formed as an arcuate wall portion with the transmission protrusion A463 as the base end and the rotation axis of the pin gear A462 as the center.

The arcuate wall portion A464 has a center angle of about 230 degrees, and its growth toward the front side is shorter than that of the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, as described later, the transmission protrusion A463 also has the circular arc wall portion A.
Similarly, 464 is a portion that transmits a load to the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456, but the load generation location differs in the front-rear direction. In other words, the location where the load is generated via the transmission protrusion A463 (if the load occurs at multiple points, the middle point or average point) is closer to the front side than the location where the load is generated via the arcuate wall portion A464. becomes. With the above-described configuration, the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 can be explained, so the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 will be explained below.

339(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 339(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 339(c) is a front view of the front unit FU.
FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along the line XIXc.

For ease of understanding, in FIG. 339(a), the guide plate portion A430 is illustrated with an imaginary line, and in FIG. 339(b), the illustration of the transmission gear A461 and the electric wiring FC is omitted, and the gear with a pin is shown. Regarding A462, only the transmission protrusion A463 and the arcuate wall portion A464 are illustrated, and in FIG. 339(c), the front cover A410 is illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, in FIGS. 339(a) and 339(b), illustration of the rear unit BU is omitted unless specifically explained.
The same applies to FIGS. 340 to 345 below.

In FIGS. 339(a) to 339(c), the first displacement member A440 is connected to the drive motor AMT1.
The state in which it is placed in the retracted position before excitation is illustrated. In this state, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is disposed furthest outward (to the left) and the length of the coil spring ASP1 is made the shortest, so the biasing force is applied from the coil spring ASP1 to the irregularly shaped slide member A455. is the weakest.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 is a portion that engages with the gear with a pin A462, and the body plate portion A45 is located on the extended position (upper right) side of the transmission protrusion A463.
A protruding plate part A456a that protrudes in a plate shape from 5a toward the back side, and a protruding plate part A456 with an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A463 on the retracted position (lower left) side of the protruding plate part A456a.
The opposing arrangement part A456b arranged opposite to a, and the protruding plate part A456a and the opposing arrangement part A
456b, and an insertion gap A456c formed between the two.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A456a is longer than the length of the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the transmitting protrusion A463 and the arcuate wall portion A46
4 in the direction of movement.

The opposing arrangement portion A456b can come into contact with the transmission protrusion A463a in the moving direction (
On the other hand, they do not contact (do not overlap) the arcuate wall portion A464 in the moving direction.
That is, the facing portion A456b and the arcuate wall portion A464 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-back gap.

The insertion gap A456c is configured to be able to receive the transmission protrusion A463, and a relief part A456d formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A463 is formed on the open end side. This relief portion A456d allows the transmission protrusion A463 to move forward and backward with respect to the insertion gap A456c smoothly (with low resistance).

Although the illustration of the transmission gear A461 is omitted in FIG. 339(b), the actual assembled state (
324), a pair of transmission gears A461, which are gears of the same shape, are arranged between the drive gear AMG1 and the gear with a pin A462, and the driving force of the drive gear AMG1 is transferred to the gear with the pin A4.
62.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the first displacement member A44 guided to the first guide hole A422a
0 and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 guided to the second guide hole A422b are connected to the elongated link A
451. That is, the long link A451 rotates around the shaft support A427.
As a result, the first displacement member A440 and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 are respectively displaced in opposite directions parallel to the direction A416x.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), when the first displacement member A440 is placed in the retracted position, the detected plate portion A455e has entered the detection gap of the detection sensor A426.

As shown in FIG. 339(c), the first displacement member A440 includes a roller member A442f disposed between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410. A442f is arranged in the guide wall section A47 of the support box section A470.
1b and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, the guided plate portion A44
The interlocking plate portion A442 is configured to rotate with the pivoted support hole A442e as a starting point in response to the first sliding displacement. An action diagram for explaining the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 in chronological order will be described.

340(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 340(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 340(c) is the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX of FIG. 319.
FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along the line XIXc.

In FIGS. 340(a) to 340(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the roller member A442f is at the same position as seen in the front and rear direction with respect to FIG. 339(c), and the support box portion A47
A state in which the guide wall A471b is in contact with the bent corner of the guide wall A471b is illustrated.

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 340, it has rotated by the first angle d1 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 340(b)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the gear with pin A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 at the initial angle d0 is configured to be parallel to the direction A416x, but the present invention is not limited to this. .

For example, at the initial angle d0, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pin gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is tilted by 10 degrees with respect to the direction A416x (by 10 degrees in the opposite direction of the rotation direction of the pin gear A462). It may also be formed as a straight line (tilted). In this case, the section corresponding to 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be configured as a section in which no load is applied to the protruding plate part A456a in the traveling direction, so that excessive drive resistance is prevented from occurring immediately after the start of rotation. can be avoided.

That is, the section corresponding to 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be used as a run-up section, and the protruding plate part A456a can be pushed forward vigorously after rotating 10 degrees from the initial angle d0, so that the driving resistance can be reduced. This can be suppressed. Furthermore, when driving in the direction returning to the initial angle d0, a 10 degree section can be used as a deceleration section.

341(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 341(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 341(c) is the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX of FIG. 319.
FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along the line XIXc.

341(a) to 341(c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f is in contact with the intermediate portion of the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 341, it has rotated by the second angle d2 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 341(b)).

342(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 342(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 342(c) is the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX of FIG. 319.
FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along the line XIXc.

342(a) to 342(c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the longitudinal direction of the elongated link A451 is substantially perpendicular to the direction A416x.

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 342, it has rotated by the third angle d3 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 342(b)).

Note that in this embodiment, in a state in which the first displacement member A440 starts sliding movement along a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction (see FIG. 342), the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 and the displacement direction of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (A direction parallel to the direction A416x) is configured to be substantially orthogonal, so that the first displacement member A440 can be smoothly slid in one direction (on the same plane).

That is, the direction of the load applied from the displacement side elongated hole A453 to the fastening part A441i is set to one side (in this embodiment, the lower side) with respect to the displacement direction of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). can be limited. As a result, compared to the case where the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed in the direction crossing the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 during the sliding displacement of the first displacement member A440, the first displacement member A440 It is possible to suppress the rattling of the slide displacement.

343(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 343(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 343(c) is the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX of FIG. 319.
FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along the line XIXc.

343(a) to FIG. 343(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f changes from the state of FIG. 342(c) to the extended position of the first displacement member A440 (see FIG.
44(c)) is illustrated.

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 343, it has rotated by the fourth angle d4 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 343(b)).

344(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 344(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 344(c) is the CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX of FIG. 319.
FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along the line XIXc.

FIGS. 344(a) to 344(c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated and the first displacement member A440 is placed in an extended position (also referred to as an extended state).

By the time the pin gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 344, it has rotated by the fifth angle d5 from the initial angle d0. As the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate part A456a along with this rotation, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is slid, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451. Ru. As described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the opposing arrangement portion A456b, the arcuate wall portion A464 can be arranged overlapping the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the front and back directions. (See Figure 344(b)).

When the pin gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 starts to be displaced in the opposite direction to the direction A416x. Here, since the circular arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a are formed in a dimensional relationship in which they abut in the direction A416x, the transmission protrusion A
463 separates from the protruding plate part A456a, the arcuate wall part A464 remains connected to the protruding plate part A456a.
Displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is regulated while in contact with 456a.

The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a is arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the pin gear A462 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, since the configuration is such that the load applied from the protruding plate part A456a to the arcuate wall part A464 passes through the rotation axis of the gear with pin A462, the gear with pin A462 can be rotated by the load from the protruding plate part A456a. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arcuate wall portion A464 is curved, the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a can be suppressed (theoretically, line contact can be made, so the contact area can be reduced). is 0). Therefore, when the pin gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the need for additional driving force for regulating the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455. That is, the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be regulated with only the driving force required to rotate the gear with pin A462.

In addition, in reality, if we consider the deformation due to wear of the resin material that constitutes the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a, the contact area increases over time, and the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456
It is thought that the frictional force generated between a and a increases. This may be countered by applying a low-friction seal or applying a lubricant (grease, etc.) to the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be addressed with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of countermeasures can be suppressed.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 344(b), the outer surface of the transmission protrusion A463 and the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 are formed in the same circular shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the pin gear A462, so that the transmission This can make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing of transition from the state of contact with the protrusion A463 to the state of contact with the arcuate wall portion A464.

FIG. 345 is a rear view of the front unit FU. FIG. 345 shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position, and the transmission protrusion A463 is in contact with the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456.

By the time the pin-equipped gear A462 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 339 to the state shown in FIG. 345, the pin-equipped gear A462 has rotated by the sixth angle d6 (360 degrees or more) from the initial angle d0 (see FIG. 360). Figure 344
After the state, the transmission protrusion A463 does not push the protruding plate part A456a and is displaced without contacting other members. Further, as shown in FIG. 345, the protruding plate portion A456a is
464, the displacement is regulated and the state shown in FIG. 344(b) is maintained (displacement in the return direction is regulated). That is, the contact between the transmission protrusion A463 and the irregularly shaped transmission target portion A456 occurs in a state where the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 345, the contact position between the transmission protrusion A463 and the irregularly shaped transmission receiving part A456 is a position on the extended position side of the first displacement member A440 with respect to the insertion gap A456c. That is, the location where the load is applied to the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (insertion gap A456c) is different from the location where the load is applied to the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 in FIG. 345. As a result, the pin gear A462 unintentionally over-rotates and the transmission protrusion A4
Even if an overload occurs in 63 or the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456, the shape of the insertion gap A456c can be prevented from changing. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 will be affected after an overload occurs.

In the state shown in FIG. 345, the direction of the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 to the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is the direction toward the retracted position of the first displacement member A440 (upper right direction).
Since the odd-shaped slide member A455 is arranged at the end of the movement range in this direction, displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 due to the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 is avoided.

In this way, while avoiding displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455, the transmission protrusion A4
63 can be alleviated by elastic deformation (bending and expansion/contraction) of the opposing arrangement portion A456b.

As shown in FIG. 345, the transmission protrusion A463 comes into contact with the side wall of the opposing arrangement part A456b on the detected plate part A455e side.
5e is loaded. In this embodiment, when an overload occurs on the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 due to overrotation of the pin gear A462, the detected plate portion A455e is configured to break preferentially. In other words, the detected plate portion A455e is more fragile than the transmission protrusion A463.

This makes it possible to avoid destruction of the structure of the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 that is related to the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 due to the load caused by overrotation of the pin gear A462. Therefore, the durability of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be improved.

If the detected plate part A455e is bent, the detected plate part A455e will not be detected by the detection sensor A426 even if the first displacement member A440 returns to the retracted position.
Based on the detection failure of 455e, it is possible to assume the possibility that over-rotation of pin gear A462 has occurred, and timely maintenance can be performed.

Note that the design aspect of the detection target plate portion A455e is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, for each series of displacement operations of the first displacement member A440, the transmission protrusion A463 comes into contact with the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456, and the drive motor AMT1 is controlled to be energized until a slight load is applied, causing fatigue damage due to long-term use. Locations where this is likely to occur (e.g. transmission protrusion A463)
The detection target plate portion A455e may be designed to break when a load is accumulated for the same number of times of contact as the number of durable operations. In this case, in addition to being able to predict the possibility of over-rotation of the gear with pin A462, it is also possible to notify when it is time to replace the transmission protrusion A463, so that maintenance can be performed in a timely manner.

346(a) is a sectional view of the first operation unit A400 taken along the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and FIG.
FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 along the line XLVIb-CCCXLVIb. 346(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is in a retracted position (also referred to as a retracted state), and FIG. 346(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is in an extended position (also referred to as an extended state). ) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 346(a) and 346(b), the connector A of the first displacement member A440
An electrical wiring FC formed as a flat cable is connected to 445c.
The electric wiring FC is loosely arranged in the space between the guided plate part A441 and the rear cover part 443.

As shown in FIG. 346(a), the inclined surface A441f of the guided plate portion A441 is connected to the electrical wiring FC.
It is formed so that it does not come into contact with the That is, the upper edge of the inclined surface A441f is located at a position slightly deeper than the end of the inclined surface A433 of the guide plate section A430 (the end facing the first displacement member A440).

(the position pulled in toward the side away from the first displacement member A440), and the inclined surface A4
A distance between 41f and the electric wiring FC can be secured.

When the first displacement member A440 is in the extended state, the electric wiring FC retreats from the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490, while when the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state, the electric wiring FC is placed into the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490. Ru. Thereby, the space VE to be described later can be used both as a space into which the electric wiring FC enters and a space into which the second displacement member A490 enters, so that the space required for arrangement can be reduced.

The electrical wiring FC is arranged in the space VE formed on the back side of the first displacement member A440 when the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state. As a result, the first displacement member A440 functions as a shielding means for blocking the view to the electrical wiring FC, and the electrical wiring FC can be seen from the front, back, left, and right.
can be prevented from being visually recognized. Space VE will be explained.

The space VE is defined by a side surface visible to the player (
This is the space behind the interlocking plate portion A442 (the surface where the opening A442c is formed) which is formed in an inclined attitude toward the third symbol display device 81 side. In this way, space V
E is easy because the first displacement member A440 is formed into a plate shape, and the first displacement member A440 is configured in an inclined posture that is easy to see to the player in the retracted state where the first displacement member A440 is in a wide posture in the front and back direction. is formed.

On the other hand, this space VE is also a space into which a second displacement member A490, which will be described later, enters by displacement, so if the visibility of the second displacement member A490 is considered, it is preferable to maintain a wide field of view when viewed from the front. Since the field of view when viewed from the front expands at an angle centering on the player's eyes, it is preferable that the outer contour of the space VE be formed so as to be inclined in a direction away from the third symbol display device 81 toward the back side. In the embodiment, for ease of manufacturing, the space VE
The outer shell (boundary surface on the side far from the third symbol display device 81) is formed of a non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the space VE created to improve the visibility of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is effectively used as a region where the wiring is loosened and arranged. As a result, the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is moved to the third position relative to the first displacement member A440 at the extended position.
There is no need to secure the area required to loosen the wiring when placed on the opposite side of the symbol display device 81 (in other words, the area between the outer wall A312 of the back case A310 and the first displacement member A440). It can be done.

Therefore, compared to the case where the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is arranged on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 in the extended position, the electrical wiring FC is placed inward of the rear case A310. While being accommodated, the displacement end of the first displacement member A440 can be brought close to (close to) the outer wall portion A312 of the back case A310.

As shown in FIG. 346, the first displacement member A440 has the front side of the interlocking plate portion A442 located on the front limit line FL in the extended position (see FIG. 346(b)), and the first displacement member A440 in the retracted position (see FIG. 346(a)
), at least a portion of the interlocking plate portion A442 (mainly the side portion at the protruding position) protrudes to the front side from the front limit line FL. This overhang is the first displacement member A44
0 is displaced from the retracted position, the first displacement member A440 moves to the retracted position (Fig. 339 (
c) until the posture change of the first displacement member A440 is completed (see FIG. 342(c)), so especially on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 (left side in FIG. 346). , the first displacement member A440 may extend beyond the front limit line FL to the front side.

Therefore, it is necessary to form a space on the front side of the front limit line FL to avoid collision with the first displacement member A440, so the arrangement of the illumination board A416 is made further away from the first displacement member A440 (front side However, in this embodiment, the illumination board A416 is moved to the first
By not forming the displacement member A440 on the retracted position side (left side in FIG. 346), the first displacement member A4
40 forms a space for protruding. In addition, by forming only the diffuser plate A415 to protrude toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440, the area where the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the illumination board A416 is visually recognized is the area on the illumination board A416. This avoids being limited to the formation range of A416.

In this way, by limiting the formation range of the illumination board A416 and forming the diffusion plate A415 so as to protrude from the outer edge of the illumination board A416, the illumination board A416 and the first displacement member A44
While narrowing the distance between the front and back of the arrangement with 0, it is possible to secure a sufficient range in which the light emitting effect by the illumination board A416 can be visually recognized.

With reference to FIGS. 347 to 352, changes in the appearance of the first operating unit A400 that occur due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 will be described from the viewpoint of light emission effects. This change in appearance is caused by the fact that the first displacement member A440 is partially visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 when it is placed in the extended position (position after excitation). be.

347(a), FIG. 347(b), and FIG. 348 are front views of the first operating unit A400. In FIG. 347(a), the retracted state of the first displacement member A440 is illustrated, and FIG.
In b), a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at a position midway through the displacement section (the position shown in FIG. 342) is illustrated, and in FIG. 348, a state in which the first displacement member A440 is extended is illustrated. . In addition, in FIGS. 347(b) and 348, the front cover A41 of the first displacement member A440
The shape of the part hidden by 0 is illustrated by hidden lines.

A diffusion plate A415 is disposed on the back side of the front cover A410 to diffuse the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the illumination board A416.
It is divided into the above-mentioned first area AC1 and second area AC2 (see FIG. 330).

The first displacement means 440 is disposed on the back side of the diffuser plate A415 at least in the extended position, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b (see FIG. 337) and passed through the opening A442c travels toward the diffuser plate A415. Here, although the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440 is displaced to a position overlapping with the first area AC1 in front view, the illumination board A41 is located in the first area AC1.
6, the light passing through the opening A442c is blocked by the illumination board A416.

Therefore, the light that has passed through the opening A442c can reach the diffuser plate A415 in the second area AC2. In other words, in the second area AC2, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) disposed on the illumination board A416 and diffused to the diffusion plate A415 and the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement means 440 (See FIG. 337) can be visually recognized in a mixed state with the light irradiated from.

To explain in detail, the mode of the second area AC2 is such that the light emitting means A416a is turned on and the light emitting means A
445b is turned off, light-emitting means A416a is turned off and light-emitting means A445b is turned on, both light-emitting means A416a and light-emitting means A445b are turned on, and both light-emitting means A416a and light-emitting means A445b are turned off. It is configured to be switchable in at least four types of modes.

In this embodiment, the aspect of the second area AC2 is visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410, and the front cover A410 has a through hole A412.
A plurality of elongated holes A412a are formed at three locations in a straight line along the edge of the third symbol display device 81 side of the display device 410.

As shown in FIG. 348, among the plurality of long holes A412a, the central long hole A412a is arranged opposite to the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440, and the long holes A412a on both sides thereof are arranged opposite to the opening A442c.
c (not facing each other). As a result, the light emitting means A is better viewed through the central long hole A412a than when viewed through the long holes A412a on both sides.
The visibility of the light emitted from 445b can be increased.

For example, in a state where the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position, the light emitting means A44
The light irradiated from 5b can be configured to be visible through the central elongated hole A412a, but not visible through the elongated holes A412a on both sides. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b can be seen in a mixed state through the central elongated hole A412a, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b can be seen through the elongated hole A412a on both sides.
It can be configured such that the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is visible (the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is difficult to see).

Here, the aspect (emission color, brightness, etc.) of the front cover A410 is different from that of the first displacement member A440.
While the light emitting means A445b is off, it depends on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329). Therefore, even when the first displacement member A440 is placed in the extended position (see FIG. 348), as long as the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the effect on the light emitting performance by the light emitting means 416b can be reduced. That is, it is possible to displace the first displacement member A440 to the extended position without causing a change in the aspect of the front cover A410 when viewed from the front.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means A445b is turned on in the state where it is placed at the overhanging position 440, the elongated hole A412a, which is commonly formed in each of the first operation units A400 at a position closer to the third symbol display device 81, is illuminated. Since the light emission mode changes, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third symbol display device 81 side.

Note that the effect of changing the aspect visually recognized through the through hole A412 is not limited to this. For example, with the first displacement members A440 of the first movement units A400 disposed in a set of five units placed in the extended position, first, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 disposed at the lower left is turned on. Then, at the timing when the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is turned on, and at the timing when the light emitting means A445b is turned off. Light emitting means A4 of displacement member A440
45b, the light emitting means A445b may be turned on sequentially in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

In this case, by leaving the light emitting means 416b lit, the brightness of the front cover A410 itself is maintained while only the mode of light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a is changed sequentially in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. can be executed.

Here, the light emission mode of the other first operating units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D will be explained. The first operation unit A400A moves 2 clockwise from the lower left when viewed from the front.
The first operating unit A400B is the third unit clockwise from the lower left when viewed from the front, and the first operating unit A400C is the fourth unit clockwise from the lower left when viewed from the front. , the first operating unit A400D is the fifth unit clockwise from the lower left when viewed from the front. The main differences between the first operating units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D from the first operating unit A400 are the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 and the shape of the opening A442c. Therefore, the first operating units A400A, A400B, A40
The openings corresponding to the opening A442c of 0C and A400D are the openings WA, WB, WC, and
It is illustrated as WD, and other components are given the same reference numerals as those of the first operating unit A400 for convenience.

FIGS. 349(a) and 349(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400A.
Note that FIG. 349(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 349(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 A4
40 is shown in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 349(a) and 349(b), in the first operation unit A400A,
Unlike the first operating unit A400, the opening WA is configured to overlap the elongated holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. Furthermore, since the width of the opening WA changes along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 (it is longer on the retracted position side), as the first displacement member A440 approaches the extended position, the width of the opening WA and both ends change. The area overlapping with the elongated hole A412a can be increased. Thereby, the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the appearance of light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a can be changed in conjunction with each other.

350(a) and 350(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400B.
Note that FIG. 350(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 350(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 A4
40 is shown in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 350(a) and 350(b), in the first operation unit A400B,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WB is configured so that it may overlap the elongated hole A412a at both ends when viewed from the front, and the width of the opening WB is set along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. It is configured to change so that it repeatedly expands and contracts. This results in
Center long hole A41 while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position
The area where 2a and the opening WB overlap is maximized in the state shown in FIG. 350(a), is decreased once as the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and is increased again in the state shown in FIG. 350(b). can do. Thereby, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, the appearance of the light visually recognized through the central elongated hole A412a can be changed in two directions (the enlargement direction and the reduction direction).

FIGS. 351(a) and 351(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400C.
Note that FIG. 351(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 351(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 A4
40 is shown in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 351(a) and 351(b), in the first operation unit A400C,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WC is configured so that it may overlap the elongated hole A412a at both ends when viewed from the front, and the width of the opening WC is set along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. It is configured to change so that it repeatedly expands and contracts. That is, the opening W
C is tapered and widened in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 near the upper end.

As a result, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position, the area where the left and right elongated holes A412a and the opening WC overlap is temporarily decreased and then increased again as the first displacement member A440 is displaced. It can be configured as follows. As a result, the first displacement member A4
While 40 is displaced in one direction, the appearance of the light visually recognized through the elongated holes A412a at both ends can change in two directions (enlargement direction and reduction direction).

352(a) and 352(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400D.
Note that FIG. 352(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is placed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 352(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 A4
40 is shown in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 352(a) and 352(b), in the first operation unit A400D,
Unlike the first operating unit A400, the opening WD has a branching shape when viewed from the front. That is, the opening WD has a shape that branches near the lower end in such a manner that it widens toward the retracted position of the first displacement member A440.

Thereby, the range where the central elongated hole A412a and the opening WD overlap while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position can be divided. In other words, the mode of light visually recognized through the central long hole A412a is changed from a mode in which the entire central long hole A412a emits light uniformly (see FIG. 352(a)), to a state in which the central long hole A412a divides the light into a plurality of ranges. It is possible to change the mode to emit light (see FIG. 352(b)).

Note that in the first operation unit A400D, a case has been described in which the central elongated hole A412a is divided by the edge of the opening WD, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the entire three elongated holes A412a are targeted and the range in which the light can be visually recognized is divided. That is, when the three elongated holes A412a and the opening WD overlap so that uniform light can be seen through the three elongated holes A412a, and when the opening WD overlaps with the central elongated hole A412 of the three elongated holes A412a.
By overlapping only with the elongated hole A412a at both ends without overlapping with the elongated hole A412a, it is possible to switch between the case where the visible range of light is divided into the elongated hole A412a in the center and the case where it is limited to the elongated hole A412a on both sides. It's okay.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 335 and 336. The support box portion A470 includes a main body box portion A471 formed in a box shape with an open front and upper right side, and a shaft hole bored in the main body box portion A471 through which the rotation shaft of the pin gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 passes. A472 and second displacement member A4
90, a notch A474 formed in a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole A473, and a columnar hole A474 in the vicinity of the notch A474. A fastening portion A475 whose tip is formed such that a fastening screw protruding from the rear plate portion A480 and inserted into a through hole A482 of the rear plate portion A480 can be screwed into the fastening portion A475 and a slide rack A511 of a rack and pinion A510 are slidably supported. Rack support part A476 and its rack support part A4
A pinion support part A477 that supports a pinion A517 that meshes with the slide rack A511 supported by the slide rack A477 is provided.

The main body box portion A471 includes a protruding wall portion A471a that protrudes from the back bottom edge toward the back side;
It is provided in the form of a wall protruding from the upper edge of the front surface toward the front side, and the assembled state of the first operating unit A400 (Fig. 32
4), the guide wall portion A471b is arranged to face the roller member A442f, and the protruding wall portion A471 is located on the opposite side of the shaft hole A472 (see FIG. 335) with the notch portion A474 in between.
The wiring guide portion A471c is arranged opposite to the wire guide portion A471c.

Although the detailed shape of the guide wall portion A471b will be described later, the roller member A442f comes into contact with the edge of the guide wall portion A471b, and the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is guided in a sliding or rolling manner (Fig. 339 (See Figure 344).

The shape of the wiring guide portion A471c is designed so that the arrangement of the wiring HC, which will be described later, can be appropriately corrected, and the details will be described later.

The second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 of the rack and pinion A510 are connected through the shaft support hole A473 and the notch portion A474. In particular, the notch A474 is formed wide as a region through which the wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 passes, but the details will be described later.

The rack support portion A476 is a pair of columnar portions that protrude toward the back side of the main body box portion A471, and includes a support columnar portion A476a that is inserted into the support hole A512 of the rack and pinion A510, and a support columnar portion A476a that is inserted into the support hole A512 of the rack and pinion A510. A stepped portion A476b extending along the slide movement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) and extending toward the back side from the surface on which the support columnar portion A476a is disposed. Be prepared.

The pinion support part A477 includes a pinion shaft A477a on which the pinion A517 of the rack pinion A510 is rotatably supported, and a wall-like (plate-like) wall-like (plate 477b.

Through the shaft hole A472, the pin gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 and the same phase member A
465 are connected. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, the manner in which the pin gear A462 and the phase member A465 are connected will be described.

FIG. 353(a) is an exploded perspective view of the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465, and FIG. 353(b) is a front perspective view of the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465 on the left side, and the right side is a front perspective view of the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465. It is a rear perspective view of gear A462 with a pin and phase member A465. In addition, in FIG. 353(a), the pin gear A462 and the phase member A465 are shown in a posture in which the sides connected to each other are in the front.

As shown in FIG. 353(a), the pin-equipped gear A462 has a plurality of phasing circumferential protrusions A protruding from the surface facing the same-phase member A465 toward the same-phase member A465.
462a.

The in-phase member A465 has a phase matching diameter protrusion A465a that protrudes from the surface facing the pin-equipped gear A462 toward the pin-equipped gear A462, and a phasing diameter protrusion A465a that extends from the eccentric position toward the rear side in a circular shape. A protruding transmission protrusion A466, and an arcuate wall portion A467 formed as an arcuate wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the phase member A465 with the transmission protrusion A466 as the base end.
Equipped with. Compared to the transmission protrusion A466, the arcuate wall portion A467 has a shorter shape growth toward the back side.

The phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a and the phase matching diameter protrusion A465a will be explained. The phase-aligning circumferential protrusion A462a has a plurality of arcuate wall portions formed by cutting along the axial direction in a circular wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the pin gear A462.

Further, the phasing radial protrusion A465a is provided with a protrusion that protrudes radially outward from a cylindrical protrusion with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the phasing circumferential protrusion A462a, and the protrusion is It is formed to match the angle (phase) at which the notch is made in the matching circumferential protrusion A462a. By inserting the protrusion into the notch of the phasing circumferential protrusion A462a, the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465 can be connected while the same-phase member A465 is in phase with the pin-equipped gear A462, By inserting the fastening gear along the central axis of the gear with pin A462 and screwing it into the tip of the phasing diameter protrusion A465a, the gear with pin A4
62 and the same phase member A465 can be fixed.

Here, in this embodiment, the angles between the notches of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a are not made equal (120 degree intervals in the case of three divisions as in this embodiment), but are made uneven. Pin gear A462 and same phase member A4 only in a specific angular relationship (see Figure 353(b))
65 are connected to each other.

That is, the angle between the notches of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a is set to 100 degrees, 120 degrees, and 140 degrees.
By combining them at different angles (by making them unequal), the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A
465 can be connected to one type of angular relationship.

In addition, in this embodiment, the notch of the phasing circumferential protrusion A462a (the phasing radial protrusion A462a
Although the case where 465a) are formed in three places has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number may be one or two locations, or a plurality of four or more locations, which can be selected as appropriate in consideration of the rigidity in the assembled state of the gear with pin A462 and the phase member A465.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 335 and 336. The rear plate part A480 includes a main body plate part A481 formed in a plate shape from a colorless light-transmitting resin material, and a fastening part that is bored in the main body plate part A481 and screwed into a fastening part A475 of the support box part A470. A through hole A482 through which a screw is inserted, and a plurality of alignment protrusions A483 that protrude toward the outer periphery of the arcuate wall portion A477b of the support box portion A470 and are used for positioning by coming into contact with the outer periphery. and a plurality of protruding plate parts A484 that protrude from the main body plate part A481 toward the front side so as to have a plate shape that follows the outer shape of the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510.

The outer edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the left edge in FIGS. 335 and 336) is in plane contact with the rear side edge of the protruding wall portion A471a of the main body box portion A471, and the protrusion is used for positioning in the left-right direction. Only the mounting plate part A484 functions.

On the other hand, the inner edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the right edge in FIGS. 335 and 336)
, due to the abutment between the alignment protrusion A483 and the arcuate wall portion A477b, it is possible to move in multiple directions (
Positioning can be performed in the vertical, horizontal, and horizontal directions. As a result, while the rear plate portion A480 is properly aligned with the support box portion A470, a large space can be secured near the outer edge by eliminating the positioning portion from near the outer edge. In this embodiment,
This secured space is utilized as a space for arranging the wiring HC (see FIG. 356(a)), and the details will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A484 has its protruding tip disposed close to and facing the back bottom of the main body box portion A471 (either in contact with it or with a slight gap that prevents the wiring from passing through), and the rack pinion A484
The movement range of the slide rack A510 and the outer area are divided. This can prevent the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 from entering the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510, but details will be described later.

FIG. 354 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member A490, and FIG. 355 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member A490. As shown in FIGS. 354 and 355, the second displacement member A490 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and is attached to the shaft support hole A473 of the support box portion A470.
A shaft-supported plate A491 is pivotally supported by the shaft-supported plate A491, and the shaft-supported plate A491 is formed with an inner shape similar to the outer shape of the shaft-supported plate A491 and is fitted to the shaft-supported plate A491 in a manner that covers the shaft-supported plate A491 from the front side. A covering member A492 made of a colorless light-transmitting resin material and a light emitting part A493 made of an LED etc.
an illumination board A493 on which a is disposed and accommodated in the pivoted support plate A491 and the covering member A492;
Equipped with.

The supported support plate A491 includes a supported protrusion A491a that has a circular outer shape and is inserted into the support hole A473, and a protruding length that is shorter than that of the supported protrusion A491a. a fastening protrusion A491b, a plurality of insertion holes A491c drilled through which fastening screws can be inserted, and an elongated hole A491d drilled in an elongated rectangular shape along the radial direction of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a. , insertion hole A491
A491e has a plurality of circular support parts A491e that have a circular (arc) shape with the center at the center and protrude toward the front side, and a plurality of circular support parts A491e that have a slender protrusion shape and protrude toward the front side along the side wall part forming the outer periphery. The thin protrusion A491f is provided.

The circular support portion A491e and the thin protrusion A491f are arranged in the assembled state of the second displacement member A490 (
335 and 336), it comes into contact with the outer peripheral edge of the illumination board A493 and supports the illumination board A493 from the back side.

In particular, the narrow protrusion A491f is formed at a location where the shape of the housed illumination board A493 is constricted, that is, at a location where the outer peripheral side wall of the pivoted support plate A491 is recessed inward. It is possible to selectively support the portion where the shape of A493 is constricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress deformation of the illumination board A493 at the constricted portion where the rigidity is likely to decrease due to the shortening of the width dimension, and it is possible to avoid breakage of the illumination board A493. .

The covering member A492 is inserted into the supported part A493b of the illumination board A493, and is inserted through the insertion hole A4.
A plurality of fastening parts A492a into which the fastening screws inserted into 91c are screwed, and the fastening part A49
At the position where a plurality of protruding support parts A492b protrude in the radial direction on the base side of 2a and are coupled to the plate-shaped part of the covering member A492, and a narrow protrusion A491f of the shafted support plate A491, A plurality of narrow protrusions A4 protruding toward the back side in a narrow protrusion shape along the side wall portion forming the outer periphery.
92c.

With the above configuration, the illumination board A493 has its outer peripheral edge supported by the thin protrusions A491f and A492c, and the circular support part A491e and the protruding support part A492b around the fastening screw.
Supported by As a result, the illumination board A493 is connected to the shaft supported plate A491 and the covering member A4.
92 can be well fixed.

Note that the manner in which the illumination board A493 is supported is not limited at all. For example, it may be fixed by applying a load to the illumination board A493 along the fastening direction, or there may be a dimensional relationship that does not cause a compressive load (for example, the front and rear spacing of the thin protrusions A491f and A492c may be fixed to the illumination board A493). The thickness of A493 is the same as that of A493.
493 may be maintained.

The illumination board A493 has a plurality of light emitting parts A493a described above, a plurality of supported parts A493b which are bored or recessed so as not to interfere with the fastening part A492a in front and rear view, and are arranged on the back side. and a board-side connector A493c to which the end portion (connector) of the wiring is connected.

The board side connector A493 is fixed in such a position that the wiring extends along the long direction of the elongated hole A491d of the shafted support plate A491. A section extension part A491d1 that extends in a direction intersecting the direction until the distance from the inner edge on the opposite side becomes shorter than the width dimension of the board side connector A493c (or the wiring bundle to be connected), and the section extension part A491d1. A wide protrusion portion A491d2 is formed that protrudes from the opposite edge of the board-side connector A493c toward the back side with reference to the protrusion portion A491d2.

The visible area side of the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 355
The board side connector A493c is arranged on the left side), and the board side connector A49 is arranged on the opposite side.
The wiring connected to 3c passes through the elongated hole A491d. That is, board side connector A493c
The wiring connected to is sandwiched and supported between the partition extension part A491d1 and the illumination board A493.

Thereby, even if the second displacement member A490 is displaced, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the wiring between the board side connector A493c and the compartment extension part A491d1, so that when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, the wiring on the circuit board side It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will come off from A493c.

The protruding portion A491d2 is formed with a protruding length that is long enough to enter the notch portion A474 of the support box portion A470. As a result, the wiring HC whose end is connected to the board-side connector A493c can be routed so as to stand up toward the back side of the shaft-supported plate A491 (in the direction in which the protrusion portion A491d2 is provided). The wiring HC can be prevented from coming into contact with the notch A474, compared to the case where the wiring HC is arranged close to the back surface of the shafted support plate A491 and routed to the back surface of the support box portion A470. Therefore, disconnection of the wiring can be avoided.

In addition, since the protruding portion A491d2 protrudes at right angles to the back surface of the shafted support plate A491, the rising angle of the wiring HC can be shifted to the right angle side, thereby avoiding contact with the wiring HC. The width of the notch A474 can be suppressed. As a result, the main body box part A4
Since a large area (area) on the fastening part A475 side of 71 can be secured, the main body box part A
The rigidity of the fastening portion A471 can be ensured, and the degree of freedom in arranging the fastening portion A475 can be improved.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 335 and 336. Rack pinion A510 is in direction A416x
A slide rack A511 is supported so as to be slidable along the slide rack A511, is meshed with a gear portion of the slide rack A511, is pivotally supported by a pinion shaft A477a of a support box portion A470, and is synchronized with the sliding movement of the slide rack A511. It includes a rotating pinion A517 and a reinforcing arm part A518 that is meshed with the pinion A517 and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the pinion A517.

The reinforcing arm portion A518 is connected and fixed to the second displacement member A490 mentioned above, and thereby the second displacement member A490 is connected and fixed.
The displacement member A490 is supported by the support box portion A470 in a manner that cannot be pulled out. That is, the reinforcing arm portion A5
is fastened to the pivoted support protrusion A491a of the second displacement member A490 at the rotation center position of No. 18,
The reinforcing arm A518 is fastened to the fastening protrusion A491b at the rotating end side (see FIG. 355). Therefore, the rotational displacement of the reinforcing arm portion A518 is synonymous with the rotational displacement of the second displacement member A490.

The slide rack A511 has a pair of support holes A512 formed in the shape of an elongated hole extending along the direction A416x and large enough to allow the support columnar part A476a of the support box part A470 to be inserted therethrough, and a pair of support holes A512 formed in the shape of a plate along the gear part. a supported plate portion A513, a protruding plate portion A514 that protrudes in a plate shape toward the front side at a position apart from the support hole A512 in the longitudinal direction; Irregularly shaped transmitted portion A5 to which driving force is transmitted from member A465
15.

The support hole A512 is inserted through the small diameter end portion of the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470, and the large diameter portion on the base end side is formed to have a larger diameter than the width of the support hole A512. By arranging this large diameter portion on the front side of the support hole A512, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced toward the front side, that displacement can be prevented by the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a. . In this way, in the slide rack A511, the plate-like parts are arranged opposite to the back bottom part of the main body box part A471 with a gap at least about the height of the large diameter part of the support columnar part A476a. It is configured to be able to slide along the direction A416x while being held.

The supported plate portion A513 is arranged to face the back side end of the stepped portion A476b of the support box portion A470 with a slight gap therebetween, and the protruding plate portion A514 is placed opposite to the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 with a slight gap. They are placed facing each other with a gap between them. That is, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced toward the front side, the supported plate portion A513 and the protruding plate portion A514 can prevent this displacement from occurring.

Note that there are various reasons why the slide rack A511 is displaced in the front-rear direction. Examples include a case where a player applies an impact to the pachinko machine A10 (so-called knock), a case where a gap is clogged with fine particles, and the meshing resistance becomes excessive, causing an excessive load at the meshing position. Ru.

356(a), FIG. 356(b), FIG. 357(a), FIG. 357(b), and FIG. 358 are rear views of the rear unit BU. Note that FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), and 357(a)
), FIG. 357(b), and FIG. 358, for ease of understanding, illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted, and the plate portion of the slide rack A511 is torn so that the irregularly shaped transmission receiving portion A515 can be visually recognized. The condition is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 358, for ease of understanding, the same phase member A
465 and the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A515 are shown enlarged.

In FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358,
The second displacement member A490 moves from the retracted position (see Figure 356(a)) to the extended position (see Figure 358).
The diagram shows the displacement in time series.

The second displacement member A490 is fixed to the reinforcing arm portion A518. When the in-phase member A465 rotates, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the slide rack A511 along with the rotation. When the slide rack A511 is pushed forward, driving force is transmitted to the reinforcing arm portion A518 via the pinion A517. In this way, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is caused by the rotation of the in-phase member A465.

The in-phase member A465 rotates in the same phase as the pin gear A462, as described above. Therefore, in synchronization with the rotation of the in-phase member A465 described in FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, The pin gear A462 will rotate, and the relationship between these will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 356(b), the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A515 is a portion that engages with the same phase member A465, and the transmission protrusion A466 is allowed to enter and is movable independently (slide rack A
A non-transmission recess A515a recessed in the non-transmission recess A515a (which is movable without applying a load to the recess A511), a connection recess A515b which is a recess of the same depth connected to the end of the non-transmission recess A515a, and a connection recess A515b from the connection recess A515b. is also narrow, and the non-transmission recess A5 is narrower than the connection recess A515b.
An insertion gap A515c which is a recess of the same depth connected to the opposite side of the transmission protrusion A4
A protruding plate portion A515d protrudes from the slide rack A511 toward the front side on the retracted position (lower left) side than 66 and forms the left side surface of the insertion gap A515c, and the protruding plate portion A5
15d, facing the protruding plate part A515d with an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A466, and forming the right side surface of the insertion gap A515c.
5e.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A515d is longer than the length of the facing portion A515e in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the transmitting protrusion A466 and the arcuate wall portion A46
7 in the direction of movement.

The opposing arrangement portion A515e is able to abut (overlap) the transmission protrusion A466 in the moving direction, but does not abut (does not overlap) the arcuate wall portion A467 in the moving direction. That is, the opposing arrangement portion A515e and the arcuate wall portion A467 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-back gap.

The side surfaces of the protruding plate portion A515d and the opposing arrangement portion A515e are configured as planes perpendicular to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x).

The connection recess A515b has the same function as the relief part A456d of the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456. That is, the connecting recess A515b is configured to be able to receive the transmission protrusion A466, and the side connected to the non-transmission recess A515a is formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A466. Thereby, the transmission protrusion A466 can be smoothly moved forward and backward with respect to the insertion gap A515c (with low resistance).

Although not shown in FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, the in-phase member A465 is similar to the gear with pin A462 and is connected to the drive motor. The driving force of AMT1 is transmitted by drive gear AMG1 and a pair of transmission gears A461, thereby rotating (see FIG. 335). Below, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and the drive gear AMG1
The displacement mode in which the second displacement member A490 rotates and the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position will be described in chronological order.

In FIG. 356(a), the drive gear AMG1 is in a state before it rotates, and the slide rack A511 is disposed at the end of the movement range on the retracted position side, and accordingly, the second displacement member A49
0 is shown in the retracted position.

In this state, the transmission protrusion A466 is connected to the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A515 in the moving direction (direction A416x
), while the arcuate wall part A467 is in contact with the protruding plate part A515d at the contact part A467a which is arranged opposite to the protruding plate part A515d in the upper right direction along the moving direction (direction A416x). Contact from the (extended position side). As a result, the arcuate wall portion A467 allows the projecting plate portion A515 to
Since the displacement of d can be regulated, it is possible to prevent the slide rack A511 from being unintentionally displaced by an external force applied when the drive motor AMT1 is in a non-excited (non-driven) state.

The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d is arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the phase member A465 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, since the configuration is such that the load applied from the protruding plate part A515d to the arcuate wall part A467 passes through the rotation axis of the in-phase member A465, the in-phase member A465 cannot be rotated by the load from the protruding plate part A515d. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arcuate wall portion A467 is curved, the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d can be suppressed (theoretically, line contact can be made, so the contact area can be reduced). is 0). Therefore, when the in-phase member A465 rotates from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the need for additional driving force for regulating the displacement of the slide rack A511. That is, the same phase member A4
The displacement of the slide rack A511 can be regulated only by the driving force required to rotate the slide rack A511.

In addition, in reality, if we consider the deformation due to wear of the resin material that constitutes the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d, the contact area will increase over time, and the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515
It is thought that the frictional force generated between d and d increases. This may be countered by applying a low-friction seal or applying a lubricant (grease, etc.) to the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be addressed with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of countermeasures can be suppressed.

Examples of the external force include gravity, a load caused by vibration during an earthquake, and a force caused when a player hits or shakes the pachinko machine A10.

FIG. 356(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 has started to enter the coupling recess A515b. From the state of FIG. 356(a) to FIG. 356(
By the time the in-phase member A465 is displaced to the state b), the in-phase member A465 changes from the initial angle d10 to the first angle d11.
However, the transmission protrusion A466 is still in the moving direction (
A non-contact occurs in the direction A416x).

On the other hand, the arcuate wall portion A467 is still in contact with the projecting plate portion A515d from the upper right (projection position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x) at the contact portion A467a. Figure 35
As shown in FIGS. 6(a) and 356(b), since the contact portion A467a is formed on the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A467, the contact portion A467a is formed in the direction of movement of the slide rack A511 (direction A416x). No displacement. Therefore, even in the state of FIG. 356(b), the state of FIG. 356(a)
Similar to the state shown in , the arrangement of the slide rack A511 is maintained at the end of the moving range on the retracted position side.

Note that, as described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the opposing placement portion A515e, the arcuate wall portion A467 can be placed overlapping the opposing placement portion A515e in the front and back directions. (See Figure 356(b)).

FIG. 357(a) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 has started to enter the insertion gap A515c. From the state of Fig. 356(a) to Fig. 357(a)
), the in-phase member A465 rotates by a second angle d12 from the initial angle d10, and the transmission protrusion A466 comes into contact with the protrusion plate part A515d.

In FIG. 357(a), a straight line passing through the center of rotation of the phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, since the part of the transmission protrusion A466 farthest from the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 contacts the protruding plate part A515d, when the in-phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. 357(a), The restriction by the same phase member A465 is released, and the slide rack A5
11 can be displaced to the extended position side (upper right side).

Note that, as described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the opposing placement portion A515e, the arcuate wall portion A467 can be placed overlapping the opposing placement portion A515e in the front and back directions. (See Figure 357(a)).

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 has entered the insertion gap A515c. From the state of Fig. 356(a) to Fig. 357(
By the time it is displaced to the state b), the in-phase member A465 changes from the initial angle d10 to the third angle d13.
only rotates. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement part A515e, so that the slide rack A511 slides, and the slide displacement causes the pinion A517 to slide.
is transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via.

In FIG. 357(b), a straight line passing through the center of rotation of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is orthogonal to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the second angle d12 from the third angle d13 is 90 degrees.

Note that, as described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the opposing placement portion A515e, the arcuate wall portion A467 can be placed overlapping the opposing placement portion A515e in the front and back directions. (See Figure 357(b)).

In FIG. 358, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 is
515e is pushed forward, the slide rack A511 is placed at the end of the moving range on the extended position side, and the second displacement member A490 is placed at the extended position.

Before being displaced from the state shown in FIG. 356(a) to the state shown in FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by a fourth angle d14 (rotates one or more revolutions). With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement part A515e, so that the slide rack A5
11 slides, and the slide displacement moves through the pinion A517 to the second displacement member A4.
90.

In FIG. 358, a straight line passing through the center of rotation of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the third angle d13 from the fourth angle d14 is 90 degrees.

Note that, as described above, since a space is provided between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the opposing placement portion A515e, the arcuate wall portion A467 can be placed overlapping the opposing placement portion A515e in the front and back directions. (See Figure 358).

In FIG. 358, the part of the transmission protrusion A466 that is farthest from the center of rotation of the same-phase member A465 comes into contact with the opposing arrangement part A515e, so when the same-phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. 358, the slide rack There is a possibility that A511 may be displaced toward the retracted position (lower left side). In this embodiment, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 358, the slide rack A511
is arranged at the end of the moving range on the extended position side, the configuration is such that rotation of the phase member A465 is allowed from the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358) to the allowable angle dd1.

That is, since the configuration is such that the transmission protrusion A466 and the protrusion plate part A515d come into contact only after the in-phase member A465 rotates by the allowable angle dd1, the transmission protrusion A466 and the protrusion do not contact each other until the rotation by the allowable angle dd1. Since there is no contact with the installation plate part A515d and no load transmission occurs,
The arrangement of the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end of the moving range on the extended position side.

Therefore, in the series of displacement modes illustrated in FIGS. 356 to 358, the same phase member A46
In the control to stop the rotation of No. 5 at the fourth angle d14, the in-phase member A465 actually stops at the fourth angle d14.
Even when rotating beyond the angle d14, if the rotation angle exceeds the allowable angle dd1, the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end of the movement range on the extended position side, and the second displacement member A490 can be maintained in the extended position.

In other words, even if the accuracy of the stop position of the in-phase member A465 is not strict (allowable angle dd1
Even if there is the following error), the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the extended position, so with a simple configuration, it is possible to increase the rotational speed of the same phase member A465 and to increase the rotational speed of the second displacement member A490.
A highly accurate displacement of 0 can be achieved (the second displacement member A490 can be rapidly decelerated and stopped at the extended position without rapidly decelerating and stopping the same phase member A465).
.

In addition, by deliberately causing a rotation angle exceeding the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14, the excess amount is used when driving the second displacement member A490 toward the retracted position (when the driving direction is reversed). It can be used as a run-up section.

Further, when the transmission protrusion A466 of the same-phase member A465 is arranged at the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358), the transmission protrusion A466 and the opposing arrangement part A515e are connected to the slide rack A51.
1 (parallel to the direction A416x), the slide rack A51
1 can be prevented from returning to the retracted position (bound displacement).

As a result, the rotation of the pinion A517 can be defined in the state shown in FIG. 358 (return rotation can be prevented), so that the reinforcing arm A518 meshed with the pinion A517 and the reinforcing arm A518 are fastened and fixed. The second displacement member A490 can be prevented from rotating back from the extended position (see FIG. 358).

FIG. 359 shows the rear unit B along the CCCLIX-CCCLIX line in FIG. 356(a).
It is a sectional view of U. In addition, in FIG. 359, in order to facilitate understanding, illustration of the positioning protrusion A483 of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted, and the shape of the main body plate portion A481 is mainly illustrated.

The wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 will be described below with reference to FIG. 359. Note that in the description of the wiring HC, FIGS. 356 to 358 will be referred to as appropriate. Wiring H
C is an electrical wiring made up of a plurality of cables with a round cross section connected to the board side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490, and is located in a space surrounded by the support box part A470 and the rear plate part A480. will be placed.

As shown in FIG. 359, the part of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c passes between the section extension part A491d1 and the illumination board A493, and runs along the protrusion part A491d2 to the support box part A470. and the rear plate portion A480.

As described above, since the protrusion portion A491d2 is formed with a protrusion length that is long enough to enter the notch portion A474 of the support box portion A470, the wiring HC is guided away from the notch portion A474. , contact with the notch A474 is avoided. Thereby, it is possible to avoid disconnection of the wiring HC due to rubbing against the notch A474.

On the other hand, since the wiring HC is guided by the protrusion A491d2, it will be guided close to the rear plate part A480, and if no measures are taken, there is a risk that the wiring HC will rub against the rear plate part A480 and break in a short period of time. However, in this embodiment, there is a middle part HC of the wiring HC between it and the rear plate part A480.
By appropriately inserting the portion a into the rear plate portion A480, friction between the rear plate portion A480 and the rear plate portion A480 is suppressed. This will be explained in detail below.

In this embodiment, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475 of the support box part A470. To be more specific, the wiring HC extending from the third connector A416e3 of the illumination board A416 (see FIG. 330) is wound around a winding part A471a1 that is formed so that a cable tie KB can be wound around the intermediate position of the protruding wall part A471a. The side of the second displacement member A490 connected to the board-side connector A493c is wrapped around the fastening part A475 once, and the tip thereof is connected to the board-side connector A493c. .

The wiring HC is wrapped around the fastening part A475, so that the wiring HC is in a relaxed state (Fig. 356(a)
), it is also possible to suppress the amount of displacement of the wiring HC upward away from the fastening portion A475 (in the direction in which the wiring HC bound with the binding band KB extends). Thereby, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced without forming a large gap above the fastening portion A475.

In this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 is used as the portion around which the wiring HC is wound, which is advantageous in terms of ease of assembly. That is, in the assembly process of fastening and fixing the rear plate part A480 to the support box part A470, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475, a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening part A475 through the rear plate part A480. At this time, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from falling off from the fastening portion A475 before the fastening and fixing is completed by the fastening screw that is being screwed in.

In addition, when fastening and fixing, the back side of the support box part A470 (the side where the fastening part A475 protrudes) is facing upward, and after wrapping the wiring HC around the fastening part A475, the rear plate part A480 is attached to the support box part A470. By placing the HC and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening part A475, assembly can be performed while preventing the wiring HC from hanging in the direction of gravity in the main body box part A471, so the assembly can be completed easily. . That is, compared to the case where the fastening part A475 is designed to be forced to be assembled in a downward position, it is easier to assemble the support box part A470 and the rear plate part A480 by wrapping the wiring HC around the fastening part A475. It can be done.

Since the winding portion A471a1 is formed on the protruding end side of the protruding wall portion A471a, the wiring HC temporarily fastened by the binding band KB is guided (pushed) toward the rear plate portion A480 side. Thereby, when the wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475, the wiring HC comes closest to the rear plate part A480 at the upper part of the fastening part A475 which is closest to the fastening part A475 (see FIG. 359).

Then, the wiring HC is extended toward the board-side connector A493c while leaving a margin in the length of the wiring HC so that no tensile load is applied to the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, and the wiring HC intersects with each other. At this position, the end of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c is wound in such a manner that it slides between the already placed wiring HC and the support box part A470.

As a result, the intermediate portion HCa is connected to the rear plate portion A480 of the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c side.
It is possible to configure a state in which the wiring HC contacts from the side (see FIG. 356(a)), and the wiring HC
491d2 can suppress the degree of proximity to the rear plate portion A480 side.

The manner in which the wiring HC is displaced when the second displacement member A490 is displaced will be described.
The wiring HC is not fixed in position by the support box part A470 or the rear plate part A480 between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490. Therefore, the wiring HC between the cable tie KB and the board side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490
By using the entire length to generate a displacement (bending) corresponding to the displacement of the second displacement member A490, it is possible to equalize the load (fatigue) caused by the displacement, so it is possible to make the load (fatigue) caused by the displacement uniform. Loads can be avoided.

The board-side connector A493c is at the retracted position compared to the supported protrusion 491a that functions as the rotation axis of the second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 formed on the extended position side of the second displacement member A490. placed on the side. That is, when the second displacement member A490 is placed in the retracted position, the substrate side is located inside the support plate portion 420 (see FIG. 346(a), right side) that blocks the line of sight toward the second displacement member A490. A connector A493 is provided.

Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring HC protrudes outside the outer shape of the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470. In other words, by arranging the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the reinforcing arm A518 closer to the extended position side (the third symbol display device 81 side), the wiring can be maintained while ensuring a large amount of overhang of the second displacement member A490. It is possible to prevent the HC from being visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 356(a), the board-side connector A493c is configured to be able to receive the end of the wiring HC along the radial direction of a circle centered on the supported protrusion A491a. When the board-side connector A493c is placed on one side (lower right side, see FIG. 356(a)) with respect to the straight line connecting the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475, , and the other side (upper left side, see FIG. 358) are switched by the displacement of the second displacement member A490.

As a result, the board side connector A49 of the wiring HC is
It is possible to suppress a difference in the displacement mode of the portion connected to 3c. This makes it possible to suppress variations in the load applied to the wiring HC, thereby preventing disconnection of the wiring HC.

In addition, the displacement of the portion of the wiring HC connected to the board side connector A493c can be easily shifted toward the straight line connecting the center of the supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475. Therefore, the absolute value of the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced. This will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 has started to be displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and rotated approximately 45 degrees. In this state, the board side connector A493
The direction in which the wiring HC connected to
It is approximately parallel to the straight line connecting the center of

In other words, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A475 is arranged on the bisector of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490 passing through the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491. That is, the fastening portion A475, which is the position where the wiring HC is loosely wound, is set at the intermediate position of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490, so that the amount of deformation (the amount of deflection) of the wiring HC can be minimized. .

To explain the local displacement of the wiring HC in comparison with the retracted state (see FIG. 357(a)), the part that was in contact with the upper part of the fastening part A475 and the part that was placed below the fastening part A475 are It is rising slightly. Further, the intermediate portion HCa is arranged at a position where it does not interfere with the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c in the front-rear direction.

That is, when the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. While the effect of penetrating the wires HC cannot be obtained, the second displacement member A490 can be displaced at high speed without the wiring HC rubbing against each other.

Here, as the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357(b) to the extended position shown in FIG. Become. Therefore, as a load applied to the wiring HC, a load to maintain the posture along the left-right direction is generated, compared to the case where the second displacement member A490 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 357(a)). Therefore, the influence of the load applied by the protruding portion A491d2 on the arrangement of the wiring HC is reduced.

Therefore, even if the intermediate portion HCa is not inserted between the intermediate portion HCa and the rear plate portion A480, excessive frictional force is prevented from being generated between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480. That is, in this embodiment,
Only when there is a risk of excessive frictional force occurring between the rear plate part A480 and the wiring HC extending from the rear plate part A480 and the board side connector A493c, the intermediate part HCa is inserted between the rear plate part A480 and the wiring HC extending from the board side connector A493c. It is designed to create an effect of separating it from the plate portion A480.

On the other hand, when the possibility of excessive frictional force occurring is low, as shown in FIG. 357(b),
By eliminating the front-to-back overlap between the intermediate portion HCa and the wiring HC extending from the board side connector A493c, it is possible to prevent excess resistance from occurring in the displacement of the second displacement member A490. High-speed displacement can be achieved.

In the extended state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIG. 358), in comparison with the state shown in FIG. 357(b), the local displacement of the wiring HC is as follows: The part has gone down a little, and the part that was located below the fastening part A475 has gone up a little. That is, the displacement of the wiring HC is such that it approaches the straight line side connecting the center of the supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

As shown in FIG. 358, when the second displacement member A490 is placed in the extended position (that is, rotated 90 degrees from the retracted position), the wiring HC comes into contact with the wiring guide part A471c, thereby changing its position. is corrected. The wiring guide portion A471c is designed with one purpose of reducing the load applied to the wiring HC in this corrected arrangement.

Specifically, when the second displacement member A490 is extended, the arc that passes through the board-side connector A493c and touches the lower end of the wiring guide portion A471c is the fastening portion A that is the path of the wiring HC.
475 and the protruding wall portion A471a. As a result, the wiring HC
It is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the wiring HC, and it is possible to improve the durability of the wiring HC.

FIG. 360 is a schematic diagram showing the rotation angles of the pin gear A462 and the phase member A465 based on the initial angles d0 and d10. Note that in the description of FIG. 360, angles d0 to d6, d10 to d14, and dd1 indicate rotation angles of the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 unless otherwise described.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 moves from the initial angle d0 to the fifth angle d5,
The second displacement member A490 continues to be displaced and stops from the fifth angle d5 onwards, while the second displacement member A490 stops from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12, and from the second angle d12 to the fourth angle d.
The displacement continues until 14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 360, a gap of 10 degrees is formed between the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle range of the gear with pin A462 and the phase member A465 that generate the driving force for displacing the first displacement member A440, and the driving force for displacing the second displacement member A490 are determined. Gear A462 with pin for generating
An angular range in which no driving force is generated is inserted between the rotation angle range of the phase member A465 and the rotation angle range of the same phase member A465. Thereby, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be stably driven.

Note that the manner in which the angle range is set is not limited to this. For example, the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12 may be the same angle. In this case, at the same time as the first displacement member A440 is switched from a state in which it continues to be displaced to a stopped state, the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced from its stopped state. Therefore, the first displacement member A440 is moved by the driving force of the drive motor AMT1.
Since the configuration is configured such that timing for simultaneously displacing the first displacement member A490 and the second displacement member A490 does not occur, a single drive motor AMT1 can displace a plurality of members (the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A440).
490), the load applied to the drive motor AMT1 can be reduced (the load can be kept to the load applied from a single member).

Further, for example, the second angle d12 may be arranged between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5. In this case, while forming a section in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are simultaneously displaced, a section in which it is necessary to generate the driving force of both the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is defined. The angle can be limited to between the second angle d12 and the fifth angle d5.

According to the present embodiment, since the member that is displaced is switched at the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, the pin-equipped gear A462 By reversing and rotating the same phase member A465, one member (
While the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490) is stopped, the other member (the second displacement member A490) is stopped.
The displacement member A490 or the first displacement member A440) can be reversed.

Note that, as described above, the configuration is such that there is no need to add a large driving force to stop one of the members (the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490). That is, at the abutting position for regulating the displacement of one member, the members abut (rub) in line contact with each other, so theoretically no frictional force is generated. Thereby, the driving force required for the drive motor AMT1 can be suppressed, so that a small-sized drive device can be selected as the drive motor AMT1.

Further, by driving to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, stopping, and rotating the drive motor AMT1 in the reverse direction, only the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and the second displacement member A49
A driving mode in which 0 is maintained in the retracted state is also possible.

As shown in FIG. 360, the sixth angle d6 is set as an angle that does not exceed the sum of the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd1. Therefore, the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A4
65 is mechanically restricted from rotating when it rotates through the sixth angle d6 before it rotates by the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 345). Therefore, since it does not rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1, even if the second displacement member A490 has a configuration (control mode) in which the accuracy of stopping the in-phase member A465 at the fourth angle d14 is low and is likely to over-rotate. in the extended position (Fig. 3
58).

Note that the numerical value of the sixth angle d6 is not limited to this. For example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle that slightly exceeds the angle obtained by adding the allowable angle dd1 to the fourth angle d14 (for example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle that exceeds the fourth angle d14 by about 20 degrees). good). In this case, the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 exceed the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd
1, but continues to rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1, and when the sixth angle d6 is reached, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is immediately stopped by mechanical regulation. can be done.

As a result, the tolerance for the deviation in the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 (i.e., the fourth
By controlling the stop at an angle (tolerable amount) slightly exceeding the angle d14, it is possible to prevent the second displacement means A490 from reaching the extended position, and to ensure that the second displacement means A490 can be stopped at the extended position. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from being erroneously displaced by a large amount in the event that the shift in the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 becomes large unintentionally.

Since the arcuate wall portion A464 is formed with a center angle of about 230 degrees as described above, even when the rotation angle reaches the sixth angle, the position where the first displacement member A440 is restricted (the fifth angle d
Since the arcuate wall portion A464 is disposed up to the position where it abuts the first displacement member A440 at the position 5), displacement regulation at the extended position of the first displacement member A440 can be maintained. .

Note that the state in which the arcuate wall portion A467 of the in-phase member A465 is in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d corresponds to a state in which the detected plate portion A455e is detected by the detection sensor A426 and is controlled to stop. There is little possibility that the deviation in the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 will become large unintentionally near the angular state where the wall portion A467 contacts the protruding plate portion A515d. Therefore, the arcuate wall portion A467 is moved by the second displacement member A490 from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12.
The minimum required angle range for maintaining the arcuate wall portion A464 at the retracted position is formed at an angle smaller than the arcuate wall portion A464 (about 210 degrees in this embodiment). Thereby, the cost of materials necessary for the arcuate wall portion A467 can be suppressed.

Next, the second operation unit A700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 381. FIG. 361 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit A700 and the rear case A310. As shown in FIG. 361, the second operation unit A700 is formed with a horizontal width exceeding the horizontal width of the visible area of the display of the third symbol display device 81, and is located below the visible area of the display of the third symbol display device 81. will be placed in

FIG. 362 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operating unit A700, and FIG. 363 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second operating unit A700. As shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the second
The operation unit A700 includes an elevating unit A701 that is held by a rectangular plate-like member with a left and right elongated shape and includes an elevating portion A702 configured to be able to move up and down, and a retracted position and an extended position by the elevating and lowering movements of the elevating portion A702. The production unit A710 is configured to be movable between the two and can operate (capable of production) in a plurality of modes.

The elevating unit A701 supports a elongated elevating part A702 on the left and right sides, and includes a pair of arm members A703 that are rotatably supported around the left and right end portions, and the arm member A703 via a drive mechanism (not shown). and a pair of drive motors A704 that transmit driving force to the drive motor A704.

Note that the mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor A704 to the arm member A703 is as follows:
For example, a gear transmission mechanism is exemplified in which gear teeth are formed at the end of the arm member A703 on the rotating shaft side, and a gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 meshes with the gear teeth.

In addition, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a rotating body is provided that protrudes in the axial direction at a position where a pin inserted into the long hole is eccentric, and gear teeth are formed on the outer periphery. A gear link transmission mechanism may also be used in which gear teeth of the body mesh with a gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704.

Further, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a pin formed at the rotational outer diameter direction end of an auxiliary arm member (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 is inserted into the long hole. , a link transmission mechanism in which the driving force is transmitted from the auxiliary arm member to the arm member A703 may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game board A is arranged opposite to the front side of the second operation unit A700.
In response to the fact that the shape of the rear side of A7 is asymmetrical (see Fig. 306), the drive motor A7
04 is arranged asymmetrically. In other words, the gap (space) in the back side configuration of the game board A13
By inserting the drive motor A704 into the drive motor A704, it is possible to suppress the front-rear width necessary for arranging the game board A13 and the second operating unit A700.

In this way, since it is desired to set the arrangement of the drive motor A704 to match the shape of the game board A13, in this embodiment, a gear link transmission mechanism or a gear transmission mechanism is adopted rather than a link transmission mechanism. is preferable.

FIG. 364 is a front exploded perspective view of the production unit A710, and FIG. 365 is a rear exploded perspective view of the production unit A710. In FIGS. 364 and 365, the production unit A710
An annular front cover A711 that partitions the production range of the annular front cover A711.
A skirt-shaped upper cover A7 arranged below and fastened to the upper lid part A740 described later.
12, and an elevating unit A7 arranged overlappingly on the back side under the upper cover A712.
The skirt-shaped lower cover A713 which is fastened and fixed to the elevating part of 01 is disassembled and is shown in a state where it is separated to the front side.

In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular rear cover A714, which is formed into an annular shape that is substantially the same as the annular front cover A711 when viewed in the front-rear direction and forms an annular internal space IE between the annular front cover A711 and the annular front cover A711, is fixed to the upper lid part A740, A rotating body A720 is shown rotatably disposed at the center of the circle of the annular rear cover A714.

The rotating body A720 is a member having a size that fits in a circle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the annular front cover A711 when viewed from the front, and is configured to be rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and is fixed to the annular rear cover A714. Light emitting means A7 such as LEDs arranged on a plurality of illumination boards A715
It is possible to receive light emitted from 15a. The light emitting means A715a is the illumination board A715
On each side of the pentagon formed by , three are placed at equal intervals in the side direction.

In addition, in this embodiment, the illumination board A715 is composed of three LEDs arranged on each side of a pentagon at equal intervals in the side direction, similarly to the light emitting means A715a, and the optical axis is directed toward the front side. A front light emitting means A715b is provided. The front light emitting means A715b is connected to the annular front cover A71.
By irradiating light onto the back side of the annular front cover A711, the annular front cover A711 emits light. That is, the player can visually recognize the light emitting effect through the light-transmitting portion partially formed in the annular front cover A711.

In this embodiment, each of the five flat illumination substrates A715 constitutes one side of a pentagon, and the illumination substrate A715 above the rotary body A720 is in a horizontal position, and the illumination substrates on the lower left and right sides The light emitting means A715a is arranged in such a manner that the lower end of the illumination board A715 faces the rotation axis, and its optical axis is directed in the normal direction of the inward surface of each illumination board A715. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is emitted toward the center of the pentagon so as to intersect near the center of the pentagon.

Therefore, when the rotating body A720 rotates, the rotating outer part of the rotating body A720 is connected to the light emitting means A.
It can be configured to cross the optical axis of the light emitted from 715a. As a result, when the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the rotating body A720, the traveling direction of the light can be changed as the rotating body A720 rotates, so it is possible to perform a dazzling performance. .

Note that in this embodiment, in order to make it easier for the rotating body A720 to reflect light, the rotating body A720
Plating (gold plating, silver plating, etc.) is applied to the outer surface of 720. The aspect of the outer surface is not limited to plating, and various other aspects may be used. For example, a reflective colored tape may be attached.

As described above, since the rotating body A720 rotates around the rotating axis that extends in the vertical direction, the light traveling on the rotating axis is transmitted along the rotating axis of the rotating body A720, regardless of whether or not the rotating body A720 rotates. The same area of the body is irradiated. In this embodiment, the upper part of the rotating body A720 is opened by forming a light passing recess A722a at that location, and the structure is configured such that light passes through it.
Details will be described later.

The annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 have concave portions A711a and A714a on opposing edges thereof, which constitute windows through which light emitted from the light emitting means A715a passes.
and a semicircular concave portion A711b having a semicircular cross section to surround the rotation axis of the rotating body A720.
, A714b.

The inner circumferential surface of the ring, excluding the window formed by the recessed portions A711a and A714a, and the other outer surfaces are plated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a and reflected by the rotating body A720 can be further reflected by the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714, so that the light emitted from the same light emitting means A715a can be It can be visually recognized by the player as light traveling (reflecting) from the point. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of light emitting means A715a while performing a dazzling performance.

In this respect, it is better to make the window necessary for passing the light from the light emitting means A715a as small as possible to ensure a wide area for reflecting other light (the area to be plated). It is advantageous because it can be done. In this embodiment, recessed portions A711a, A714
The shape of the window formed by a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the LED that constitutes the light emitting means A715a, and the area for reflecting light is formed without impairing the brightness of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. It can be widely secured.

FIG. 366 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the production unit A710, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the production unit A710. In FIGS. 366 and 367, illustration of the annular front cover A711, upper cover A712, and lower cover A713 of the production unit A710 is omitted.

The rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members, and is a set of members each supported by a plurality of supporting parts A730 that support the plurality of rotating members, and includes a pair of members having a substantially hemispherical outer shape. A first rotating member A721, and a second rotating member configured to be rotatable on the outside of the first rotating body 721 and made of a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmissive resin material and composed of a pair of members. A728.

The first rotating member A721 is divided into front and rear parts, and is formed from a resin material with low light transmittance to have a substantially hemispherical shell-like skeleton, and has a pair of shell parts A that are fastened and fixed to the support part A730 at the lower part.
722, and an annular gear member A723, which is an annular member rotatably supported by an annular recess formed on the back side of the front shell part A722, and has gear teeth carved on the back side. The annular gear member A723 is disposed on the back side, is rotatably supported by a pair of shells A722, and the gear teeth A724a carved on the shaft are aligned with the gear teeth of the annular gear member A723. It mainly includes a central rotating member A724 that is meshed with each other.

The pair of shell portions A722 have light passing recesses A recessed in the upper part thereof in a direction away from each other.
722a. At least in the front side shell portion A722, this light passing recess A72
2a is formed on both the upper and lower sides of the annular gear member A723, and is arranged in such a manner that most of the annular gear member A723 enters the front side of the concave end of the light passage recess A722a.

That is, even if you look into the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a when viewed from above, most of the annular gear member A723 is not visible when viewed in that direction, so the central rotating member A724 disposed inside the annular gear member A723 can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the light traveling in the vertical direction passes through the through hole surrounded by the light passing recess A722a, the annular gear member A72
3 can be avoided from blocking the light, and the light can be allowed to reach the central rotating member A724. Here, with reference to FIG. 368, an outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described.

FIG. 368 is a rear view of the first rotating member A721. In FIG. 368, in order to make the inside visible, illustration of the shell part A722 on the back side is omitted, and for convenience of explanation, the support part A7
A fixed gear SG non-rotatably disposed above 30 is shown in mesh with an annular gear member A723.

An outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be explained. As described above, the first rotating member A721 is configured to rotate around a rotating shaft (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) that extends in the vertical direction. When this rotation occurs, the relative position of the annular gear member A723 disposed inside the first rotating member A721 and the fixed gear SG changes, and accordingly, the relative position of the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG changes. Displacement (tooth alignment changes).

In this embodiment, the fixed gear SG is non-rotatably fixed to the tip of the shaft portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750, so that relative displacement with the fixed gear SG is ensured by rotation of the annular gear member A723. . When the annular gear member A723 rotates, the annular gear member A7
A central rotating member A724 meshed with 23 rotates. The rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 is
The shell portion A of the first rotating member A721 extends in a direction intersecting (orthogonal to) the vertically extending axis (coaxial with the center axis of the fixed gear SG) serving as the rotating shaft of the first rotating member A721.
722 (horizontal rotation on the vertical axis), the central rotating member A724 rotates in a different manner (vertical rotation on the horizontal axis). Note that the relationship in the rotation direction will be described later.

The rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 rotates with the rotation of the shell portion A722 (in synchronization with the rotation angle).
Since it continues to change within the same plane, it can appear to the player that the central rotating member A724 rotates around a plurality of vertical and horizontal rotation axes. Therefore, by causing the shell portion A722 to rotate in one direction, it is possible to cause the central rotating member A724 to rotate in multiple directions.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of teeth of the gear tooth A724a and the number of teeth of the fixed gear SG are the same (both 10 teeth), the absolute value of the rotation angle of the shell part A722 and the central rotating member A724
is synchronized with the absolute value of the rotation angle. As a result, during the rotation of the shell portion A722, each time the shell portion A722 assumes a posture in which the ring shape is visible in front view as shown in FIG. 368 (every half rotation), the central rotating member A724 As shown in the figure at 368, the posture is such that the disk portion side faces the front side (returns). Therefore, the reproducibility of the rotation effect can be maintained.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 366 and 367. The second rotating member A728 is the first rotating member A7
The first rotating member A7 is composed of a pair of substantially symmetrical members that are fastened and fixed to the support part A730 below the first rotating member A721, and passes from the bottom of the first rotating member A721 to the outside of the first rotating member A721.
A rod-shaped extension portion A that is formed in a rod shape that extends upward so as to reach a position that covers 21 from above.
728a.

The rod-shaped extension part A728a is formed narrower than the outer shape of the first rotating member A721,
Depending on the arrangement, there are cases where a part of the first rotating member A721 is hidden, and cases where a part of the first rotating member A721 is hidden.
(the case where it hardly overlaps with the first rotating member A721) can be configured, but the details will be described later.

Note that the external shapes of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are similar to that of the annular rear cover A7.
14, and the vertical gap is shortened. As a result, the annular rear cover A714 functions as a retainer for the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are prevented from coming off while the annular rear cover A714 is installed. Inadvertent disassembly such as pulling upward (disassembling) can be prevented.

As described above, the rotating body A720 includes a plurality of rotating members fastened and fixed to the support section A730.

(the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728), which are the supporting part A7
It rotates with 30 rotations. Next, this support portion A730 will be explained.

FIG. 369(a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support part A730, and FIG. 369(b) is a front exploded perspective view of the support part A730.
It is a front exploded perspective view of support part A735. FIG. 370(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 370(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the second support portion A735.

As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370, the support portion A730 is colored (white in this embodiment).
The first support part A731 has a cylindrical main body made of a light-opaque resin material, and the first support part A731 has an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the main body made of a colorless and light-transparent resin material. The second support part A735 is formed in a cylindrical shape and configured as a set of divided bodies divided into two parts in the radial direction. Part A7
The shaft part A751 fixed to the shaft part A750 is inserted, and removed by the metal ring-shaped C ring C1 and fixed gear SG, which are fixed non-rotatably by fitting with the irregularly shaped shaft at the tip side of the shaft part A751. Impossibly supported.

The first support portion A731 includes a cylindrical main body portion having a through hole A731a having an inner diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the shaft portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 and through which the shaft portion A751 can be inserted, and the main body. A plurality of support plate parts A732 extend in a straight line in both directions from the upper end of the main body part and have through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted. A pair of protruding portions A733.

The protruding portion A733 is disposed at a position corresponding to a notch portion A772a of a lower transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, and is a portion that enables transmission of force in the rotational direction by fitting, and is formed to have different widths from each other. Ru. This makes it easier to match the angle between the cylindrical extension part A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 and the first support part A731 during fitting, compared to the case where the pair of protruding parts A733 are formed with the same width. can do.

As shown in FIG. 369(b) and FIG. 370(b), the second support portion A735 includes a half-cylindrical portion A736 forming the cylindrical portion and a plate extending in both directions on a straight line from the upper end of the half-cylindrical portion A736. It is composed of a pair of substantially symmetrical divided bodies including a plurality of half-support plate portions A737 extending in a shape and having through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The half-cylindrical part A736 includes a recessed fitting part A736a that is recessed in a rectangular shape upward from the lower end at the center position of the circular arc at the lower end side part, and a recessed fitting part A736a that is provided in a rectangular shape that projects radially outward from the end of the circular arc. A protruding fitting portion A736b is provided.

The recessed fitting portion A736a is connected to an inner protrusion A762d (Fig. 3
The protruding fitting portion A736b is a concave portion that fits into the notch portion A762c of the upper transmission mechanism A760.

At the fitting position of the recessed fitting portion A736a, the wall portion around the recessed fitting portion A736a is arranged to face the inner wall of the cylindrical protrusion portion A762b, and the inner wall has a radially outer wall portion of the semi-cylindrical portion A736. By restricting the displacement and fitting the protruding fitting part A736b into the notch part A762c, it is possible to support the divided body constituting the second support part A735 inseparably.

Furthermore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b are fitted in such a manner that they abut in the circumferential direction of rotation with the notch portion A762c of the upper transmission mechanism A760 and the shaft portion A751 as the rotation axis. Therefore, it also functions as a transmission section for transmitting the rotation of the large diameter gear LG12 to the second support section A735. Therefore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b can function both to prevent the second support portion A736 from being split and to transmit rotation to the second support portion A736.

A groove portion A735a recessed along the circumferential direction is formed on the inner surface of the half-cylindrical portion in which the half-support plate portion A737 is formed. The groove portion A735a connects the inner surface of the second support portion A735 with the first support portion A735a.
The contact area with the outer surface of the support portion A731 can be reduced, and the generated frictional force can be reduced.

In particular, there is a risk that a load will be generated when the second rotating member A728 is fastened and fixed at the location disposed between the half-support plate portions A737, and the inner diameter may be tightened compared to the design dimensions. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, the groove portion A735 is located between the half support plate portions A737.
a is formed, it is possible to reduce the contact area between the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 at locations where sliding friction is likely to occur. As a result, the second support part A735 and the first support part A731 can be fixed while minimizing the decrease in rigidity due to the formation of the groove part A735a.
It is possible to effectively reduce the frictional force generated between the

The half support plate portion A737 includes a pair of assembly protrusions A737a that protrude toward the opposite side of the mating member along the direction in which the second support portion A735 is divided, and a pair of assembly protrusions A737a that protrude from one of the divided members. Fastening of the alignment protrusion A737b, the insertion hole A737c bored in the other divided body as a through hole large enough to allow the alignment protrusion A737b to pass through, and the second rotating member A728, which is bored in the thickness direction. A pair of fastening holes A737d are formed in a size that allows the portion A728b (see FIG. 367) to be inserted therethrough.

The half-support plate portions A737 are aligned with each other by inserting the alignment protrusions A737b into the insertion holes A737c, and the second rotating members A728 (
(see FIG. 367) are connected to each other by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion A728b and fastening and fixing them. That is, since the fastening screws used for fastening and fixing the second rotating member A728 can also be used for fastening and fixing the half-support plate part A737, the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

The assembly protrusion A737a is inserted into a recess formed at a corresponding position of the second rotating member A728 and used for positioning, and the protrusion interval is equal to the distance between the pair of divided bodies constituting the second support part A735. They differ from each other. That is, the spacing between the assembly protrusions A737a provided on the divided body disposed on the front side is greater than that of the assembly protrusions A7 disposed on the divided body disposed on the rear side.
It is wider than the interval of 37a.

By forming the assembly protrusions A737a at different intervals, each of the pair of members constituting the second rotating member A728 can be assembled from the correct direction of the second support part A735. That is, the assembly protrusion A737a and the second rotating member A728 can be properly fitted together only when assembled from the correct direction, and when assembled from the wrong direction, the assembly protrusion A737a and the second rotating member A728 can be properly fitted together. Since the position of the two-rotation member A728 is not aligned with the recessed portion and the assembly cannot be performed, it is possible to notice the error in the assembly direction.

In addition, the second rotating member A728 has a major difference in the presence or absence of the fastening portion A728b, and the other configurations are approximately the same, so when handling it, it is difficult to assemble it as a pair of members.
There is a possibility that an error may occur in attempting to assemble two members of one of a pair of members. According to this embodiment, since the formation intervals of the assembly protrusions A737a are different (because they are not common), both members of the second rotating member A728 to be assembled to the second support part A735 are one member (of the combination). This makes it possible to make the mistake of trying to assemble the parts (on one side) before inserting the fastening screws.

Before disassembly, the second support portion A735 is configured to maintain the radial separation from the cylindrical protrusion portion A of the upper transmission mechanism A760.
762b (see FIG. 366), the first support part A731 and the second support part A73
5 is assembled exclusively by parallel movement in the axial direction, and with the parallel movement, the protruding portion A
733 is the notch part A772a, and the recessed fitting part A736a is the inner protrusion A762d (Fig. 373
), and the protruding fitting portion A736b is fitted into the notch portion A762c, respectively. Here, due to its shape, the second support part A735 is assembled first, and in that state, the first support part A735 is assembled.
1 is assembled.

Here, due to the shape of the mating member to be assembled, the first support part A731 and the second support part A731
The posture when assembled together with the support part A735 is not an arbitrary posture, but is limited to a specific posture. Therefore, when assembling the first support part A731, the second support part A735 may block the view, making it difficult to assemble the first support part A731.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second support part A735 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and the first support part A731 is formed from a light-impermeable resin material.
After assembling, the inside of the second support part A735 can be visually recognized. In addition, the cylindrical extension part A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 to which the first support part A731 is assembled is attached to the upper lid part A7.
40, the position where the protrusion part A733 of the first support part A731 fits is not hidden by the upper lid part A740, and can be configured to be easily visible.

Therefore, when assembling the first support part A731, the posture can be easily adjusted to a suitable position, so that the first support part A731 and the second support part A735 can be easily assembled.

Here, the upper lid part A740 which arranges (accommodates) an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, between it and the box-shaped part A750 has a through hole A surrounding the central axis of the support part A730.
741 is drilled, so in order to disassemble the upper lid part A740 and modify the upper transmission mechanism A760 and the lower transmission mechanism A770, remove the shaft part A751 fixed to the box-shaped part A750 from the through hole A741. In order to remove it, it is necessary to displace the upper lid part A740 upward with respect to the box-shaped part A750.

At this time, if the support part A730 is still assembled, the support plate part A732 or the half support plate part A
737 interferes with the upper lid portion A740, making it impossible to displace the upper lid portion A740 upward. Therefore, the upper lid part A
Before disassembling 740, it is necessary to disassemble support part A730. As mentioned above, in order to disassemble the support part A730, it is necessary to disassemble the C-ring C1 and the fixed gear SG, and since the fixed gear SG is disposed inside the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 368). ), it is necessary to disassemble the rotating body A720 in order to disassemble the fixed gear SG.

In this way, by having a configuration that requires disassembling multiple members in order in order to access the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, it is possible to illegally access the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770. This makes it easier to prevent fraudulent acts that cause malfunctions by tampering with the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770.

371 and 372 are front exploded perspective views of the upper lid part A740 and the box-shaped part A750. Note that FIG. 371 shows a direction view looking down from diagonally above, and FIG. 372 shows a direction view looking up from diagonally below (a direction view inclined at 22.5 degrees with respect to the vertical direction).

As shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, the upper lid part A740 is provided with a through hole A741 that is vertically bored at the left and right center position, and supports each transmission member of the upper transmission mechanism A760 on the lower surface facing the box-shaped part A750. A shape (a shape such as an uneven shape) is formed for the purpose.

The box-shaped part A750 is disposed below the upper lid part A740 and is formed in a box-shape with at least the top side open, and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are disposed in the open position. is fixed to the bottom plate part A750a of the
A shaft portion A751 made of metal (made of brass in this embodiment) that extends vertically coaxially with the central axis of
, a first detection sensor A752 consisting of a photocoupler type detection device disposed on the upper surface side of the box-shaped portion A750, and a first detection sensor A752 consisting of a photocoupler type detection device disposed on the lower surface side of the box-shaped portion A750. A second detection sensor A753 consisting of a detection device, a drive motor AMT2 whose main body extends downward and is fastened and fixed, a drive gear AMG2 that rotates due to the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, and a second detection sensor A753 arranged below the bottom plate part A750a. and a relay board A754 to which wiring connected to various sensors A752, A753, drive motor AMT2, etc. is relayed.

373 and 374 show the box-shaped part A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, and the lower layer transmission mechanism A.
770 is an exploded front perspective view. 373 and 374, the upper transmission mechanism A760 is vertically separated from the lower transmission mechanism A770. In FIG. 373, the upper transmission mechanism A760 is shown looking down from diagonally above, and in FIG. 374, it is shown diagonally from below. Illustrated in a directional view looking up.

The upper transmission mechanism A760 and the lower transmission mechanism A770 are both configured by meshing four gears, and each gear is limited to two types (sizes) of gears. That is, the lower transmission mechanism A770 includes a drive gear AMG2, a small small diameter gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2, a small diameter gear PG2 of the same shape meshed with the small diameter gear PG1, and the small diameter gear PG2. The drive gear AMG2 is meshed with the drive gear AMG2 and a large diameter gear LG1 having the same shape.

The upper transmission mechanism A760 also includes a large diameter gear LG11 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2, a large diameter gear LG12 having the same shape meshing with the large diameter gear LG11, and a small diameter gear meshing with the large diameter gear LG12. It is composed of a small diameter gear PG11 having the same shape as gear PG1, and a large diameter gear LG13 meshing with the small diameter gear PG11 and having the same shape as drive gear AMG2.

Large diameter gears LG13 and LG1 are arranged on the most downstream side with the drive gear AMG2 side being upstream.
Detection target pieces A763 and A773 are formed to be detected by the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753, respectively.

In the process of transmitting the driving force of each of the transmission mechanisms A760 and A770, a small-diameter gear is used, but since a large-diameter gear is arranged again on the downstream side, both large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 rotate. The absolute value of the rotation angle in this case is equal to the absolute value of the rotation angle of drive gear AMG2.

In this embodiment, detection pieces A763 extending radially outward from the umbrella portion that covers the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG13 from above are formed at two locations (180 degree intervals) at equal intervals on the circumference. A detected piece A7 extends in the axial direction from the umbrella portion that covers the gear teeth of the large diameter gear LG1 from below.
73 are formed at four equal intervals on the circumference (90 degree intervals), so the first detection sensor A7
When the drive gear AMG2 rotates 180 degrees from the state where the detected pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 (see FIG. 372), the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor The state returns to the state where the detected pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both the sensor A753. In this way, in this embodiment, the first detection sensor A75
The detection timings of the second detection sensor A753 and the second detection sensor A753 can be related to each other.

On the other hand, the reason why a plurality of detection sensors, the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753, are provided is that there is a timing when only one of the detection sensors functions.
Details will be described later.

In the detailed description of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is supported by the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 at multiple locations, so for easy understanding, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 will be described first. . The lower transmission mechanism A770 has a box-shaped portion A7
50, and the four gears AMG2, PG1, which are meshed with each other as described above.
This is a transmission mechanism composed of PG2 and LG1.

A plurality of recesses A771 for fitting are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side of the drive gear AMG2 of the lower transmission mechanism A770, and one of the recesses A771 has a protrusion A protruding radially inward.
771a is formed. As a result, the internal shape of one recess A771 becomes different from that of the other recess A771.
It is formed to have a different internal shape.

The small diameter gear PG2 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 includes a cylindrical extension portion A772 that extends upward from the upper surface in a cylindrical shape so as to surround the shaft portion A751. A pair of rectangular notches A772a are provided at the upper end of the cylindrical extension portion A772 at symmetrical positions across the shaft portion A751.
is formed. This notch A772a is a part that fits into the protruding part A733 of the support part, and is formed as notches having mutually different widths in accordance with the manner in which the protruding part A733 is formed.

The large-diameter gear LG1 is disposed below the intermediate plate portion A750b formed above the bottom plate portion A750a of the box-shaped portion A750, and is restricted from being pulled out upward by the intermediate plate portion A750b. That is, in order to extract the large diameter gear LG1, the second
Since it is necessary to remove the detection sensor A753, the number of steps required to remove the large diameter gear LG1 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid inadvertent removal of the large diameter gear LG1.

Further, by partitioning the area by the intermediate plate portion A750b, contact between the large diameter gear LG1 and the constituent members of the upper transmission mechanism A760 can be easily avoided. Thereby, it is possible to avoid transmitting the driving force between the large diameter gear LG1 and the upper transmission mechanism A760 (on the downstream side of the driving force transmission path).

Next, details of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 will be explained. The upper transmission mechanism A760 is disposed on the upper layer of the box-shaped portion A750, and includes four gears LG11 and LG11 that mesh with each other as described above.
This is a transmission mechanism composed of LG12, PG11, and LG13.

Driving force is transmitted to the large-diameter gear LG11 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 only when it rotates in one direction (clockwise when viewed from above) by a one-way clutch housed inside;
The one-way clutch is configured to idle when rotating (counterclockwise in top view), and includes a plurality of protrusions A761 that protrude downward from the lower surface of the one-way clutch.

The protrusion A761 is a protrusion in the shape of a curved wall that fits into the recess A771 of the drive gear AMG2. It has a straight line shape with minimal overhang. As a result, it is possible to assemble the drive gear AMG2 only in an attitude in which the protruding portion A771a and the corresponding portion A761a of the large-diameter gear LG11 match.

The large diameter gear LG12 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 has a cylindrical extension part A of the small diameter gear PG2 in the center.
A through hole A762a with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion A762b is formed, and a cylindrical protrusion A762b is provided in a large diameter cylindrical shape protruding from the upper surface side. A pair of rectangular notches A7 formed at opposite positions across the central axis of the part A751.
62c, a pair that protrudes along a straight line that passes through the central axis of the shaft portion A751 and is perpendicular to the straight line that passes through the notch portion A762c and the central axis of the shaft portion A751 when viewed from above. and an inner protrusion A762d.

The cylindrical protruding portion A762b receives the lower end of the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 366),
This is a part that restricts displacement of the second support part A735 in the division direction, and the notch part A762c and the inner protrusion part A762d are the protruding fitting part A736b and the recessed fitting part A736a of the second support part A735, respectively. These are parts that fit together and are configured to be able to transmit driving force.

The large-diameter gear LG13 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 is formed with the pair of detected pieces A763 described above, and the formation of the umbrella part is omitted at the position where the same angle deviation in the same direction from the detected piece A763 is formed, and the umbrella part is formed in the axial direction. and a cylindrical functional part A765 that is coaxially rotatably disposed inside the large diameter gear LG13 and configured to be rotatable relative to the large diameter gear LG13.

The cylindrical functional part A765 includes a pair of rotation regulating protrusions A765a that are disposed at symmetrical positions across the rotation axis and supported by a support groove part A750c formed in a groove shape on the upper surface of the box-shaped part A750. Here, a functional device that functions as a so-called torque limiter (safety clutch) between the large-diameter gear LG13 and the large-diameter gear LG13 is housed inside the cylindrical functional portion A765.

That is, when the load generated between large-diameter gear LG13 and cylindrical functional part A765 is smaller (slightly) than the standard, torque transmission is maintained, and large-diameter gear LG13 and cylindrical functional part A7
65 is configured to cut off torque transmission if the load generated between the two is excessive.

In this embodiment, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 when the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 idles to cut off the driving force transmission to the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. A torque limiter is used to generate resistance to more reliably prevent rotation of the motor. Therefore, from this point of view, it functions similarly to a resistance member that constantly produces resistance or a member that produces viscous resistance such as a damper gear.

On the other hand, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, and the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission mechanism A760, the torque limiter As a result, the transmission of torque is cut off and the resistance from the large diameter gear LG13 side can be reduced, so that the load applied to the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed and the heat generation of the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed.

Here, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the torque limiter is in a state of transmitting torque at the start of rotation. After the rotation continues for a certain amount of time (after rotating by a certain degree of angle), the state switches to a state where torque transmission is canceled. Therefore, before the switch occurs,
A large load is generated between the small diameter gear PG11 and the large diameter gear LG13.

In this embodiment, the elongated gear tooth A764 is formed as a portion that receives this large load. That is, the posture of the large diameter gear LG13 when the drive gear AMG2 starts rotating clockwise when viewed from above is the posture in which the detected piece A763 enters the gap between the first detection sensor A752 (FIG. 37).
3), the gear teeth that mesh with the small diameter gear PG11 when the drive gear AMG2 starts rotating clockwise in top view can be limited to specific gear teeth.

By forming the specific gear tooth to be elongated in the axial direction as the elongated gear tooth A764, the load generated per unit length in the axial direction can be reduced. As a result, large diameter gear LG13
can improve durability.

Note that the first detection sensor A752 can detect a plurality of objects by detecting the detection target piece A763 of the large diameter gear LG13. First of all, upper layer transmission mechanism A760
In the case where the upper layer transmission mechanism A76 rotates to transmit driving force and then stops,
It is possible to detect that 0 has stopped in an appropriate posture (angle).

Second, when the one-way clutch disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 is idle and the drive force transmission to the upper transmission mechanism A760 is canceled (when the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above) ), it can be detected that the release of the driving force transmission is functioning well. In other words, for example, if the one-way clutch's internal structure is damaged and the driving force transmission is not sufficiently cut off (idling), or if the torque limiter's torque generation function is insufficient due to a malfunction, a major When the driving force transmitted to the diameter gear LG13 exceeds the resistance of the torque limiter, the large diameter gear LG13 will rotate.

When the drive gear AMG2 is controlled to rotate counterclockwise in a top view, when the first detection sensor A752 detects that the detection target piece A763 has been displaced, an error signal is sent to the first detection sensor A752. You can use this to discover problems with the one-way clutch or torque limiter.

Note that the above-mentioned mechanism that uses the torque limiter function to compensate for the release of driving force transmission using a one-way clutch is effective when the transmitted driving force is directed in the horizontal direction, as in this embodiment. be. That is, in this embodiment, the driving force is transmitted by a plurality of transmission members rotating around a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, but gravity cannot be used in this configuration.

If the transmitted driving force has a component in the direction of gravity, a structure may be adopted in which the weight of the member to which the driving force is transmitted is used to suppress movement in the direction in which the driving force transmission is released. In the embodiment, it is not possible to utilize the vehicle's own weight, and there is a possibility that the driving force may be transmitted even due to a weak load generated when the one-way clutch idles in the releasing direction.

It is also possible to create friction with other members as a structure to suppress displacement due to idle rotation, but in this case, it would be necessary to generate a driving force greater than the friction to drive the member, which causes another problem. There is a possibility that this may occur. From this point of view, in this embodiment, a torque limiter is employed to ensure that driving force transmission is canceled upon switching of the driving direction.

FIG. 375(a) is a top view of the upper lid part A740, the box-shaped part A750, the upper transmission mechanism A760, and the lower transmission mechanism A770, and FIG. 375(b) is a top view of the upper lid part A740, the box-shaped part A750.
, is a front view of an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

Transmission of the driving force of the drive motor AMT2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 375(a) and 375(b). When the drive gear AMG2 rotates due to the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, the protrusion A761 (see FIG. 374) that fits into the recess A771 (see FIG. 373) of the drive gear AMG2 is rotated.
) also rotates.

When the rotation direction of drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the one-way clutch housed inside large-diameter gear LG11 idles as described above, and the protrusion portion A761 and large-diameter gear LG11 rotate relative to each other. By doing so, even if the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large diameter gear LG11 remains in the same state.

That is, the driving force is transmitted only through the lower transmission path DL1 that is transmitted through the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1 that is transmitted through the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. Therefore, of the cylindrical extension part A772 and the cylindrical protrusion part A762b that fit into the support part A730 (see FIG. 369), only the cylindrical extension part A772 rotates, and the cylindrical protrusion part A762b remains in the same state. maintain.

As a result, in the assembled state of the production unit A710 (see FIG. 362), the first support part A7 of the first support part A731 and the second support part A735 that fits into the cylindrical extension part A772
31 (see FIG. 369) rotates, and the second support part A735 remains as it is, so that of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728, the Only the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) rotates, and the second rotating member A728 maintains its state.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is clockwise when viewed from above, as described above, the driving force is sufficiently transmitted by the one-way clutch housed inside the large-diameter gear LG11, and the protrusion portion A761 and the large-diameter The gear LG11 rotates (integrally) in synchronization with the gear LG11. That is, drive gear A
When MG2 rotates, large diameter gear LG11 also rotates.

That is, the driving force is transmitted not only through the lower transmission path DL1 but also through the upper transmission path UL1. Therefore, the cylindrical extension part A772 and the cylindrical protrusion part A7 that fit into the support part A730 (see FIG. 369)
62b both rotate.

As a result, in the assembled state of the production unit A710 (see FIG. 362), both the first support section A731 and the second support section A735 (see FIG. 369) rotate, and the first support section A73
Both the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367), which are fastened and fixed to the first and second supporting parts A735, respectively, rotate.

Here, the rotational directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 will be explained. First, the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the drive transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1. As drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view, large diameter gear LG
11 rotates clockwise when viewed from the top, and the large diameter gear LG12 that meshes with the large diameter gear LG11 rotates in the opposite direction counterclockwise when viewed from the top. Therefore, the rotation direction of the second rotating member A728 is counterclockwise when viewed from the top. It goes clockwise.

Next, the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the drive transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1. As drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view, drive gear A
Since the small diameter gear PG1 that meshes with MG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the small diameter gear PG2 that meshes with small diameter gear PG1 (see FIG. 373) rotates clockwise when viewed from above, the first rotating member A721 The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from above.

That is, the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 is the same as that of the shaft portion A751.
The rotation axis is the opposite direction. As a result, the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A7
Compared to the case where the rotating directions of the rotating members A721 and A728 are the same, the player can see that they are rotating at a high speed (with a large angle change), and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A7
28 can be easily executed to make it appear as if they are rotating independently.

FIG. 376(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(b) is a front view of the first rotating member A721.
376(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 6(a);
is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(d) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG.
FIG. 7 is a top view of the first rotating member A721 when viewed from the direction.

In FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b), the initial state of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 376(c) and 376(d), the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is shown in the initial state. The state (first state) after being rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above is illustrated.

FIG. 377(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(b) is a front view of the first rotating member A721.
377(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 7(a).
is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(d) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG.
FIG. 7 is a top view of the first rotating member A721 when viewed from the direction.

In FIGS. 377(a) and 377(b), the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is
The state (second state) after being rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above is shown in FIG. 377.

377(c) and FIG. 377(d), a state (third state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the second state is illustrated.

378(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(b) is a front view of the first rotating member A721.
378(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 8(a).
is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(d) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(d) is a front view of the first rotating member A721.
FIG. 7 is a top view of the first rotating member A721 when viewed from the direction.

In FIGS. 378(a) and 378(b), the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is
The state (fourth state) after being rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above is shown in FIG. 378.

378(c) and 378(d), a state (fifth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the fourth state in a top view is illustrated.

FIG. 379(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(b) is a front view of the first rotating member A721.
379(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(a).
is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(d) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG.
FIG. 7 is a top view of the first rotating member A721 when viewed from the direction.

In FIGS. 379(a) and 379(b), the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is
The state (sixth state) after being rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above is shown in FIG. 379.

379(c) and FIG. 379(d), a state (seventh state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the sixth state in a top view is illustrated.

When the shell portion A722 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the seventh state, the first rotating member A7
21 returns to the initial state. That is, in FIGS. 376 to 379, one section (one period) of the rotation of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated.

Note that in the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 376(a)), the shell portion A72
The side that is visible when viewed from the front of No. 2 will be described as the front shell portion A722F, and the opposite side thereof as the back shell portion A722B. Similarly, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A7
24 will be described as the front side of the member viewed from the front A724F and the opposite side as the back side of the member A724B.

In addition, Fig. 376(a), Fig. 376(c), Fig. 377(a), Fig. 377(c), Fig. 378

(a), FIG. 378(c), FIG. 379(a), and FIG. 379(c), the illumination board A715 (
The optical axis KJ of the LED constituting the light emitting means A715a (see FIG. 364) is illustrated by an imaginary line,
Figure 376(b), Figure 376(d), Figure 377(b), Figure 377(d), Figure 378(b),
In FIGS. 378(d), 379(b), and 379(d), a predetermined virtual plane VS is illustrated. The optical axis KJ passes on this virtual plane VS.

Moreover, in FIG. 376(d), FIG. 377(d), FIG. 378(d), and FIG. 379(d), arrows HL and VL that schematically indicate the direction of light reflection are illustrated. Arrow HL indicates central rotating member A7
The arrow VL represents the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the center rotary member A724 is reflected by the shell part A722 and travels. It represents the direction in which the emitted light is reflected by the central rotating member A724 and travels.

As shown in FIG. 376(d), FIG. 377(d), FIG. 378(d) and FIG. 379(d),
Corresponding to the first rotating member A721 rotating once counterclockwise when viewed from the top, the direction of the arrow VL changes by one rotation clockwise when viewed from the top. That is, in this embodiment, the central rotating member A7
The light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724
The first rotating member A721 can be moved in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotational axis of the first rotating member A721, and the direction can be changed in the opposite direction to the rotating direction of the first rotating member A721.

This is difficult to achieve, for example, with a configuration in which the light emitting means is provided on the side surface of the shell portion A722 or the central rotating member A724. For example, when the light emitting means is disposed on the side surface of the shell portion A722, the direction of light emitted from the light emitting means changes in the same rotational direction as the rotational direction of the first rotating member A721.

Further, for example, since the member front side A724F of the central rotating member A724 always faces the front side when the first rotating member A721 rotates, the member front side A724F and the member back side A724B
When the light emitting means is arranged in the direction of the surface, the change in the traveling direction of the light irradiated in the normal direction of the surface does not change around the rotation axis of the first rotation member A721 (a rotation having the rotation axis in the front-rear direction) (change in direction).

Therefore, compared to the case where a configuration is adopted in which a light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the first rotating member A721 to perform a light emitting effect, it is possible to perform a more unexpected light emitting effect. For example, because the rotational direction of the change in the traveling direction of the light and the rotational direction of the first rotating member A721 are opposite, the player may feel as if the rotational speed is high compared to the actual rotational speed. It can make you feel.

As shown in FIGS. 376 to 379, as the first rotating member A721 rotates, the central rotating member A724 also rotates, but the surface visible to the player is limited to the front surface A724F of the member. Therefore, even if the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the central rotating member A724 is exposed on the back side (see FIG. 368), the fastening screw can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

In other words, the back surface A724B of the central rotating member A724 can be configured not as an area visible to the player but as an area intended for another purpose, regardless of its appearance.

A configuration that more easily achieves the objective (in this embodiment, the purpose of reflecting light) can be selected. For example, in this embodiment, by deliberately exposing the fastening screw, it is possible to cause light reflection using the gloss of the member surface of the fastening screw.

Note that the aspect of the member surface of the fastening screw can be arbitrarily set. For example, the surface of the fastening screw may be painted black to make it easier to create shadows, the surface of the fastening screw may be painted with a color to reflect that color, or the fastening screw may be equipped with an LED. A light emitting means such as the like may also be attached.

The effect of light irradiated onto the first rotating member A721 will be explained. Note that in the following description, FIG. 364 will be referred to as appropriate. As described above, the illumination board A715 including the light emitting means A715a that irradiates light to the first rotating member A721 is arranged to form each side of a pentagon, and is arranged in a direction perpendicular to each side (in a direction that is tilted to each other). The optical axis KJ is arranged along the direction of
The illumination board A715 (see FIG. 364) disposed above the first rotating member A721 will be described first, and the illumination board A715 disposed on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 will be described later.

The illumination board A715 disposed above the first rotating member A721 is irradiated with light downward from the light emitting means A715a. This light passes through the light passage recess A722a and reaches the central rotating member A724 regardless of the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, the first rotating member A7
By irradiating light from the light emitting means A715a disposed on the illumination board A715 disposed above the central rotating member A724, the center rotating member A724 can be constantly irradiated with light.

Note that the light emitting means A715a has three LEDs arranged horizontally in parallel, and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can vary depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. That is,
In the initial state (see FIG. 376(b)), the light passing recess A722a is formed in a long length in the same direction as the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, so that the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a also rotates centrally. Easy to reach component A724.

On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 377(b)), the light passing recess A722a does not extend in the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, and the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a passes through the light passing recess. Since it is difficult to enter A722a, among the light emitted from the illumination board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724, the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 is mainly the light emitted from the central light emitting means A715a. Become. Therefore, the difference in the state of the first rotating member A721 can be associated with the difference in the light emission intensity of the central rotating member A724.

From this point of view, in the initial state or fourth state in which the member front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 is easily visible when viewed from the front, the illumination board A71 disposed above the central rotating member A724
The intensity of the light irradiated from 5 and reaching the central rotating member A724 is maximized, and the central rotating member A7
In the second and sixth states where it is difficult to visually recognize the front side A724F of the 24 member when viewed from the front, the intensity of the light emitted from the illumination board A715 disposed above the central rotating member A724 and reaching the central rotating member A724 is minimized. It can be done. That is, the visibility of the central rotating member A724 when viewed from the front and the intensity of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed correspondingly.

The illumination board A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 includes a light emitting means A715a whose optical axis KJ is arranged on a plane (virtual plane VS) passing through the rotation axis of the shell part A722. Light is emitted from this light emitting means A715a toward the first rotating member A721.
The location where the light reaches differs depending on the state of the rotating member A721.

That is, the state in which the shell portion A722 is disposed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a (initial state (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b)) or the fourth state (see FIG. 378(a)
) and FIG. 378(b)), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is transmitted to the shell portion A72.
2 and does not reach the central rotating member A724.

The shell portion A722 is curved at the outer peripheral edge in such a manner that the width becomes smaller toward the outside in the radial direction, and a connecting portion A722 connects the edges of the opening of the shell portion A722 with each other with an irregular arch-shaped bridge.
b. Therefore, even in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, a part of the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a to the shell part A722 is transmitted through the curvature of the outer peripheral edge of the shell part A722 and the arch of the connecting part A722b. By reflecting the curvature of the ball, the ball can be directed toward the player.

In addition, when the shell portion A722 is in a state between the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected toward the player (reflected along the arrow HL). Since the player is in a tilted position, it is possible to highlight the difference between the amount of light traveling toward the player in a state slightly angularly shifted from the initial state and the fourth state, and the amount of light in other states. That is, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is momentarily (pulse-like) visible darkly, and in the state slightly angularly shifted from the initial state and the fourth state, the central rotating member A724 is made to appear dark. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect of switching to a bright and visible state.

On the other hand, in a state between the initial state and the fourth state in the rotational displacement of the first rotating member A721, the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a does not entirely overlap with the shell part A722, so at least a portion The light reaches the central rotating member A724.

In this way, the light emitting means A of the illumination board A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721
The state in which the light irradiated from 715a reaches the central rotating member A724, and the state in which the light irradiated from the central rotating member A7
24 can be switched by changing the state of the first rotating member A721. Thereby, without controlling the light emission mode (for example, blinking mode) of the light emitting means A715a, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that makes the light reaching the central rotating member A724 visually appear to be blinking.

For example, by changing the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a, it is possible to make it appear as if the light is blinking at different lighting or extinguishing times ( (It can be visually recognized as a light emitting effect with different blinking cycles).

In this case, if the central rotating member A724 cannot be tracked as a still image and the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate at a speed that exceeds the speed at which an afterimage occurs (for example, 20 [rps]), Regardless of the magnitude of the speed, the central rotating member A724 is visually recognized as if it were stationary, but depending on the speed, the blinking cycle of the light irradiated to the central rotating member A724 can be varied.

That is, the faster the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721 is, the shorter the interval until the first rotating member A721 reaches the initial state or the fourth state, and the shell portion A722 allows the light emitting means A715a (center Since the period in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a) arranged on the left and right sides of the rotating member A724 is blocked can be shortened, the blinking period of the light emitted to the central rotating member A724 can be shortened. Therefore, in this embodiment, the first rotating member A7
By changing the rotational speed of the central rotating member A724, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the blinking cycle of the light irradiated to the central rotating member A724.

In this embodiment, as illustrated as the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is , when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (or viewed in the direction of the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a), the longitudinal direction is configured to overlap the shell portion A722. In this embodiment, the central rotating member A
724 is defined as a direction parallel to the front side A724F of the member and the back side A724B of the member (for example, the direction perpendicular to the arrow LR direction, arrow UD direction, or arrow FB in FIG. 376(a)). , the shorter direction is the direction connecting the front side of the member A724F and the back side of the member A724B (Fig. 37
6(b) in the direction of arrow FB).

In other words, in the initial state or fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the longitudinal direction of the central rotating member A724 is the same as the shell portion A72 when viewed in the rotational axis direction (or as viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a).
It will be in a position where it will fit inside the thick wall of No.2. Thereby, the light shielding effect of the shell portion A722 in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 can be improved. That is, by blocking the light with the shell part A722, it is possible to easily prevent the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a from reaching the central rotating member A724. It is possible to easily configure a situation in which the central rotating member A724 is not illuminated while the central rotating member A724 is illuminated.

In addition, when rotating the first rotating member A721 at a constant speed, the total (ratio) of the time during which the first rotating member A721 is maintained in the initial state or the fourth state with respect to the time during which the rotation is continued is determined by its rotational speed. It's the same regardless. Thereby, the brightness of the first rotating member A721 that is visually recognized by the player can be prevented from changing due to a change in the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721. That is, when the first rotating member A721 is rotated at high speed, it is possible to avoid the first rotating member A721 from being visually recognized darkly.

Note that in this embodiment, when the light emitting means A715a is turned on, the first rotating member A72
By rotating the central rotating member A724, the blinking cycle of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 can be changed. According to this, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a circuit for causing the light emitting means A715a to blink while producing the same effect as when the light emitting means A715a itself is blinked. Therefore, the size of the illumination board A715 can be reduced.

As described above, a light emitting means A715a that irradiates light from above the central rotating member A724;
The light emitting means A715a that emits light from the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 refers to the first rotating member A724.
The configuration is such that how the first rotating member A721 is illuminated differs depending on the state of the rotating member A721. Therefore, by controlling them separately, it is possible to execute the light emitting effect illustrated below.

For example, the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b))
Or in the fourth state (see FIGS. 378(a) and 378(b)), the central rotating member A7
The light emitting means A715a disposed above the central rotary member A724 is turned off, and the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right sides of the central rotary member A724 are controlled to turn on or blink, thereby making the central rotary member A724 dark and visible. It is possible to perform a light effect that brightly illuminates the A722.

Further, for example, only the light emitting means A715a (the central light emitting means A715a) arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on or blinked, and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 are turned off. By controlling it, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the central rotating member A724 is brightly illuminated and the shell portion A722 is darkly visible.

Also, for example, light is emitted from both directions in the left and right directions, but light is emitted from only one direction (upper side) in the vertical direction (every half rotation, light is reflected from the central rotating member A724 to the front side). It is possible to perform complex light-emitting effects by utilizing the difference between the light emitted from the light and the case where the light is reflected to the back side. For example, by configuring the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 to emit blue light, and the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 to emit red light, For a player viewing from the front, a situation in which the player is visible with blue light and a situation in which a mixture of blue light and red light is visible is switched every half rotation of the first rotating member A721. I can do it.

In this case, the period at which the appearance of the light changes can be arbitrarily changed by changing the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721 while controlling the light to turn on continuously without blinking the light. .

An example of stop control of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the driving force for rotationally driving the first rotating member A721 is transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1 (see FIG. 375(b)), and is transmitted to the large diameter gear LG1 disposed on the lower transmission path DL1. Since the detected piece A773 (see FIG. 374) is detected by the second detection sensor A753 at 90 degree intervals, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) detects the detected pieces A773 (see FIG. 374) every time the first rotating member A721 rotates 90 degrees. The occurrence of rotation can be determined. The state of the first rotating member A721 can be determined by dividing this determination according to the rotational direction of the first rotating member A721, accumulating the results, and separately determining the accumulated results.

That is, for example, when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotation direction (positive direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, the detected piece A773 is rotated by the second detection sensor A75.
3 is detected, the cumulative counter value is incremented by 1, and when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotation direction (reverse direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, the detected piece Each time A773 is detected by the second detection sensor A753, the cumulative counter value is decremented by 1.

If the value of the cumulative counter is a multiple of 0 or 4, it is the initial state, and (0 or 4
If (multiple of 0 or 4) +1, it is the second state; if (0 or a multiple of 4) +2, it is the fourth state; if (0 or a multiple of 4) +3, it is the sixth state. I can do it.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if it is not possible to specify the rotation angle of the drive motor AMT2, by determining the value of the cumulative counter and controlling the stop of the drive motor AMT2, the initial state and the The first rotating member A72 in either the second state, the fourth state or the sixth state
1 can be stopped.

Therefore, it is possible to perform effects such that the posture in which the first rotating member A721 stops has different meanings. For example, it can be used as a presentation means to notify differences in jackpot expectations or to notify time information (for example, the stopping position changes every two hours).

In addition, although this embodiment has described the case where the detection target pieces A773 are formed at four locations at equal intervals, the detection target pieces A773 are not necessarily limited to this. The detection target pieces A773 may be arranged at non-uniform intervals, may be formed at three locations, five or more locations, or may be formed at one location.

FIG. 380(a) is a front view of the production unit A710, and FIG. 380(b) is a front view of the production unit A710.
380(c) is a top view of the production unit A710 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(a).
is a front view of the production unit A710, and FIG. 380(d) is a front view of the production unit A710, and FIG.
It is a top view of production unit A710 in direction.

FIG. 381(a) is a front view of the production unit A710, and FIG. 381(b) is a front view of the production unit A710.
381(c) is a top view of the production unit A710 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 1(a);
is a front view of the production unit A710, and FIG. 381(d) is the arrow D in FIG. 381(c).
It is a top view of production unit A710 in direction.

In FIGS. 380 and 381, the rotation of the rotating body A720 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotational direction that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and as shown in FIG. 380 (
a) and FIG. 380(b) show the initial state of the first rotating member A721, and FIGS. 380(c) and 380(d) show the first state of the first rotating member A721. (b
), the first rotating member A721 is in the second state, and FIGS. 381(c) and 381(d) are in the first state.
A third state of the rotating member A721 is shown in each figure.

When the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotational direction that rotates counterclockwise in a top view, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1 as described above, so that the second rotating member A728 also rotates in the first rotation. It rotates in the opposite direction at the same rotation angle as member A721.

That is, FIGS. 380(a) and 380(b) illustrate the initial state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extensions A728a are arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 380(
c) and FIG. 380(d), the rod-shaped extension portion A728a is rotated clockwise from the initial state by 4
The first state of the second rotating member A728 rotated by 5 degrees is illustrated in FIGS. 381(a) and 381.

In (b), the rod-shaped extension part A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the first state in a second state.
The second state of the rotating member A728 is illustrated, and FIGS. 381(c) and 381(d) show the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extension portion A728a has rotated 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the second state.
A third state of is illustrated.

Note that since the pair of rod-shaped extensions A728a are formed in a substantially rotationally symmetrical shape, the second rotating member A728 returns to the initial state by further rotating 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the third state. do.

In addition, in FIG. 380(b), FIG. 380(d), FIG. 381(b), and FIG. 381(d), the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are shown in schematic diagrams (simplified shape diagrams) for ease of understanding. ) is illustrated in imaginary lines.

In addition, in FIGS. 380(a), 380(c), 381(a), and 381(c), the outline of the illumination board A715 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and FIGS. 380(b), 380(d) ), Figure 381

In (b) and FIG. 381(d), a virtual plane VS is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, as the second rotating member A728 rotates, the first
It passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the illumination boards A715 (two boards arranged on the left and right sides) arranged on the left and right sides of the rotating member A721. Therefore, similarly to the first rotating member A721, the traveling mode of the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a of the illumination board A715 is controlled by the second rotating member A7.
It can be changed in accordance with the rotation of 28.

Here, unlike the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721, which is formed from a resin material with low light transmittance, the second rotating member A728 is formed from a light transmitting resin material, so that it is light-transmissive. Rather than blocking the light as it passes through the optical axis, it acts to change the way the light is refracted and the color of the light. In this embodiment, since the second rotating member A728 is made of a blue resin material, at the timing when the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis, the light reaching the first rotating member A721 is changed to a blue color. (color mixed with blue).

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is formed into a rod shape that extends in the direction along the rotational axis and is bent along the circumferential direction of rotation, and the light emitting means A715a are arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724. It is configured so that it does not overlap with any of the optical axes of the

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 380(d), the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the illumination board A715 arranged on the left and right upper sides of the central rotating member A724 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the other Although the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the illumination board A715 does not overlap with the second rotating member A728, on the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 381(d), the central rotating member A
The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the illumination board A715 disposed on the lower left and right sides of 724 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the light emitting means A disposed on the other illumination board A715 overlaps.
The optical axis of 715a and the second rotating member A728 do not overlap. In addition, FIG. 380(b) and FIG.
In the state shown in 81(b), the optical axis of any light emitting means A715a is connected to the second rotating member A72.
8 are configured so that they do not overlap.

As a result, compared to the case where the optical axes of all the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 and the second rotating member A728 are switched to overlap or not, the central rotating member A724 It is possible to increase the number of types of light that reaches the target. That is, the second
There are two modes in which the light that passes through the rotating member A728 reaches the central rotating member A724, one mode in which only the light that reaches from the upper left and right sides passes through the second rotating member A728, and a mode in which only the light that reaches from the lower left and right sides reaches the second rotating member A724. A728 can be increased.

In this case, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned on and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned off, or conversely, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned off. turns off the light emitting means A715a overlapping with the second rotating member A72.
The light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the central rotating member A724 depends on whether it is lit or not.
You can change the way it looks. That is, the central rotating member A724 is replaced by the second rotating member A72.
It is possible to switch between emitting light in a manner in which eight colors are mixed or emitting light in a manner that is independent of the color of the second rotating member A728.

In addition, the direction of the optical axis that overlaps with the second rotating member A728 can be changed from the left and right upper side to the left and right lower side depending on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728.
The part of the central rotating member A724 that emits light in a mixed manner of 28 colors can be switched.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, when viewed from above, the second rotating member A7
28 is configured so as not to overlap with the light passage recess A722a. Thereby, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is independent of the arrangement of the second rotating member A728, and the optical axis of the light does not pass through the second rotating member A728. A72
Head to 2a.

Therefore, for example, only the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on, and the light emitting means A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724
By configuring the light a to be turned off, it is possible to prevent the color of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 from being changed by the second rotating member A728.

If this is to be realized by the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the light emitting means A715a is turned on at a timing when the second rotating member A728 does not intersect with the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a, and the second rotating member A728 Control is required to turn off the light emitting means A715a at the timing when the light emitting means A715a intersects the optical axis (control synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728), but in this embodiment, the light emitting means A715a is placed above the central rotating member A724. Due to the function of the light emitting means A715a, such control can be made unnecessary.

The second rotating member A728 partially hides the central rotating member A724 from the player's view in a posture where the front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 does not face the front and the presentation function of the central rotating member A724 is reduced. (see FIG. 381(a)), and is configured so that the light refracted by the second rotating member A728 can easily travel toward the player. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation function of the rotating body A720 while the rotating body A720 continues to rotate.

Here, since the rod-shaped extending portion A728a of the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rotationally symmetrical shape, the shape (outer shape) in a front view is switched at intervals of 180 degrees. That is, FIG.
The shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 shown in FIG. 1(a) is the same as the shape (outer shape) in a state where the second rotating member A728 is rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 381(a).

On the other hand, the first rotating member A721 rotating inside the second rotating member A728 is not in the same state at 180 degree intervals. That is, when the first rotating member A721 rotates 180 degrees from the second state shown in FIG. 381(a) (see FIG. 377(a)), it becomes the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)). In this embodiment, as described above, the second rotating member A728 is the first rotating member A721.
(see FIG. 381(a)), the first rotating member A721 is partially hidden by the second rotating member A728.
This can make it difficult to determine whether 21 is in the second state or the sixth state.

Then, from the state where the second rotating member A728 is arranged as shown in FIG. 381(a),
While the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are synchronously rotated by 45 degrees, if the first rotating member A721 is in the second state (see FIG. 377(a)), the first rotating member The light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the member A721 is transmitted to the central rotating member A.
724 is toward the front side (see arrow VL in FIG. 377(d)), and while the central rotating member A724 is brightly visible to the player, the first rotating member A721
is in the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)), the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724 is toward the back surface. The direction is toward the side (see arrow VL in FIG. 379(d)), and the central rotating member A7
24 is darkly visible to the player.

That is, the light emitting means A changes the appearance of the first rotating member A721 (the brightness of the central rotating member A724) while keeping the visible external shape of the second rotating member A728 the same during displacement.
This can be done without changing the lighting mode of 715a. In this case,
When the second rotating member A728 stops in the state shown in FIG. 381(a), for example, by associating the difference between whether the central rotating member A724 looks bright or dark with the level of jackpot expectation in the special symbol lottery. In addition, it is possible to increase expectations regarding the subsequent operation mode, and it is possible to improve attention to the rotating body A720.

In this case, while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are synchronously rotated by 90 degrees from the state where the second rotating member A728 is arranged as shown in FIG. 381(a), , the member front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 rotates 90 degrees from an upward attitude to a front-rear attitude. Along with this, the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728
The direction of the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 gradually changes from the vertical direction to the front-rear direction until just before the rotation angle of the first rotating member A721 reaches 90 degrees (in synchronization with the rotation angle of the first rotating member A721). On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 reaches 90 degrees, the front face A724F of the member faces in the front-rear direction (the inclination with respect to the optical axis KJ from above disappears). ), the longitudinal component of the direction of the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 becomes close to 0, and the direction of light reflection returns to the vertical direction.

In this way, in synchronization with rotating the first rotating member A721 from the second state or the sixth state, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is transmitted to the central rotating member A724. It is possible to gradually increase the front-to-back component of light when reflected. As a result, the longer the rotation time of the first rotating member A721, the longer the rotation time of the first rotating member A721 becomes.
Since it becomes easier to determine whether the first rotating member A721 is in the second state or the sixth state, the first rotating member A721 is not only at the moment when it starts to rotate, but also after it has rotated.
It is possible to maintain a high level of attention to 1.

Note that in this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is stopped by driving the rotating body A720 in the direction in which the first rotating member A721 rotates clockwise when viewed from above from the state shown in FIG. 381(a). It is also possible to rotate the first rotating member A721 as it is. In this case,
Since the light reflected by the central rotating member A724 (light along the arrow VL) passes through the second rotating member A728 and easily reaches the player's eyes, the central rotating member A724 is colored and easily visible.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 381(a), the posture of the first rotating member A721 can be configured in two ways with an interval of 180 degrees, and from the state shown in FIG. The first rotation member A721 can be rotated by rotating the first rotation member A721, and the second rotation member A728 can maintain its posture from the state shown in FIG. 381(a) and only the first rotation member A721 can be rotated. A total of four ways of presenting the rotating member A724 to the player can be executed.

Note that the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 not only functions to change the brightness of the central rotating member A724 itself, but also has a function of illuminating members arranged around the central rotating member A724.

For example, when light is reflected to the left front side via the central rotating member A724 (Fig. 377 (
(see d)), as a light that brightly illuminates the left side channel (the channel configured in the left side area with the center of the left and right width of the game area as a reference) in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13. When the light is reflected to the right front side via the central rotating member A724 (
Refer to FIG. 376(d)), in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13, the right side flow path (the flow path configured in the right side area with respect to the center of the left and right width of the game area, mainly It can be used as a light to brightly illuminate the channel through which a ball fired when hitting right-handed.

Furthermore, for example, when light is reflected to the left rear side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG.
78(d)), the light can be used to brightly illuminate the first operating units A400, A400A, A400B, etc. arranged on the left side of the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and the central rotating member A724 can be In the case where the light is reflected to the right back side (see FIG. 379(d)), the first operating units A400C and A4 disposed on the right side of the front side of the third symbol display device 81
It can be used as a light that brightly illuminates objects such as 00D. In this way, the central rotating member A7
Since the light reflected through 24 can be switched in a direction toward different members, by switching the direction of the light, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to different members (locations).

Further, the second rotating member A728 has a vertical length that can partition the inner area of the annular front cover A711 into left and right sides when viewed from the front (see FIG. 381(a)). As a result, when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, for example, the production unit A710
is placed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 321), so that the display area of the third symbol display device 81, which is visible through the inner area of the annular front cover A711, is divided into left and right. Can be divided. In other words, the second rotating member A728 can be used not only as a member that performs effects through rotational motion, but also as a member that divides the display area of the display device when the second rotating member A728 is stopped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first rotation member A721 can be rotated while the second rotation member A728 is stopped. , it is possible to perform an effect in which the first rotating member A721 is rotated while the display area of the display device is divided.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate only when the first rotating member A721 is driven in a counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from above, and the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate in the opposite direction (first rotating member A7
21 is a clockwise rotation direction when viewed from above), the second rotating member A728 stops.

In other words, in one rotational direction, the first rotating member A721 has the effect of arbitrarily changing the blinking cycle of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 by passing through the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides. In the other direction of rotation, in addition to the effect of changing the blinking period, the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axes arranged on the left and right, so that the central rotating member A7
It is possible to cause a change in the emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light that reaches 24.

In this way, by changing the direction of the rotational drive, the visibility of the light emission effect can be changed. Since the frequency with which the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis depends on the rotational speed of the second rotating member A728, variations in the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 are It depends on the resolution (switchable number) of the rotational speed of the two-rotation member A728.

Naturally, there is a permissible limit to the rotational speed of the second rotating member A728, and this permissible limit defines the limit of variations in the light emission mode. However, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the rotation direction. Since the second rotating member A728 is switched between operating and stopping, even if the rotational speed is the same, changing the rotational direction will change the emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724. can be made different.

Therefore, if the first rotating member A721 or the second rotating member A728 rotates in only one direction, or if the influence on light does not change even if the rotation direction is different (for example, the second rotating member A7
28 or when only the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721 changes and the second rotating member A72
8, the variation in the visibility of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be doubled compared to the case where the rotation is maintained, etc.), thereby increasing the variation in how the central rotating member A724 looks. be able to.

Details of how the central rotating member A724 looks will be explained. As described above, the central rotating member A724 maintains the attitude in which the front side of the member A724F faces the front side.
Repeat the operation of flipping F upside down.

Therefore, if the central rotating member A724 cannot be tracked as a still image and the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate at a speed exceeding the speed at which an afterimage occurs (for example, 20 [rps]), the central rotating member When viewed from the front, A724 is visually recognized as if the upper and lower sides of the front side of the member A724F have been reversed and combined. That is, in this embodiment, the central rotating member A724, which is formed into a star shape with five corners, is visually recognized as having a star shape with ten corners.

Note that in this embodiment, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is formed to have a vertically asymmetrical shape, but the shape is not limited to this. For example, the member front A724F of the central rotating member A724 may be formed to have a vertically symmetrical shape. In this case, since there is no difference between the shape that is visually recognized as an afterimage during rotation (the shape that is a combination of vertically inverted shapes) and the shape of the member front A724F, it appears as if the central rotating member A724 is stopped. can be visually recognized.

Also, for example, a characteristic shape or figure is formed on either the upper or lower side of the rotation axis of the central rotating member A724, and by reversing the shape or figure vertically and combining them, it is configured to evoke a different concept. You may do so.

For example, by drawing an equilateral triangle shape on the front side of the member A724F in such a manner that one side overlaps the rotation axis when viewed from the front above the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724, the center rotation member A7
When 24 is rotated, the upper and lower equilateral triangles are combined to make a diamond-shaped figure visible, and the lower end overlaps the rotation axis when viewed from the front above the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724. By drawing the character (shape) for ``tsu'' in hiragana, when the central rotating member A724 is rotated, the inverted shapes will combine at the top and bottom to form the character ``3''.

(figures) can be made visible. With this, it is possible to perform a surprising performance.

Referring to FIG. 382, an example of production using the second action unit A700 will be described.
FIG. 382 is a front view of the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720. Figure 382
In this case, the production unit A710 is placed in the extended position (see FIG. 321), that is, the third
A state in which an annular front cover A711 and a rotating body A720 are arranged on the front side of the symbol display device 81 is illustrated.

In FIG. 382, the second state of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (FIG. 381

(a)) is illustrated, and in the area on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 and inside the annular front cover A711 (inside the circular opening), the third symbol display device 81 An image displayed by is illustrated.

That is, the third symbol display device 81 displays the second rotating member A728V on the rotating display. Thereby, even when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, the player can visually recognize it as if the second rotating member A728 is rotating.

Note that the means for displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display is not limited to the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the second rotating member A728. For example, a transparent liquid crystal may be disposed on the front side of the second rotating member A728, and the rotating state of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed using the transparent liquid crystal, or the front side or the back side of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed. An illumination plate may be disposed on the illumination plate, and the figure formed on the illumination plate may be combined with the image on the third symbol display device 81 to be visually recognized as the second rotating member A728V on the display. The second rotating member A728V on the display may be displayed by a combination of a plurality of display means including the display means.

When emitting light from the light emitting means A715a of the illumination board A715 in this state, the player expects the mode of light production to occur when the second rotating member A728 is in a rotating state, but when the second rotating member A728 is in a stopped state. Since the light effect can be performed in the manner shown in , it is possible to perform a highly unexpected effect.

Further, this is not limited to the state in which the production unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is stopped at the extended position, but also applies while the production unit A710 moves up and down. For example, the production unit A710 is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720 in the retracted position (Fig. 3
20) On the other hand, in the extended position, the third symbol display device 8 is displayed through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720.
1 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 321).

That is, in response to the upward movement of the production unit A710 toward the extended position, the annular front cover A711 on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728
The display area of the third symbol display device 81 that is visible through the area inside (inside the circular opening) gradually becomes wider. By displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display mentioned above in the area of the third symbol display device 81 that is gradually recognized, the production unit A710 can be moved upward while the second rotating member A728 is stopped. When the player controls the second rotating member A
It is possible to perform an effect that makes you feel that the 728 has started rotating before you know it.

(Optical illusions can be used to create effects.)

In this case, during the upward movement of the production unit A710, the external shape of the rotating body A720 that is visible to the player when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped can be kept the same, while when emitting light from the light emitting means A715a, the difference between when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped. It is possible to change the light emission mode (light reflection mode) of the rotating body A720 that is visible to the player. This makes it possible to perform highly unexpected performances.

Next, the twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 383. In the 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a, but in the 23rd embodiment, the member passing through the optical axis KJ is moved in the front-rear direction. It is configured as a sliding member A2729 that moves in parallel. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 383 is a top view schematically showing the first rotating member A2721 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 383, the slide member A2729 is configured to be slidable between a rear side position intersecting the virtual plane VS and a front side position not intersecting the virtual plane VS.

Therefore, even if the slide member A2729 is placed at a position intersecting the optical axis KJ at the rear side position, the intersection with the optical axis KJ can be canceled by moving it to the front side position, and the second The way the light reaches the one-rotation member A2721 can be changed. Since the movement of the slide member A2729 is a slide movement in the front-back direction, it can be made difficult for the player who visually recognizes the slide member A2729 from the front side to understand that the slide member A2729 is moving.

In other words, the presentation mode of the first rotating member A2721 when the LED etc. constituting the light emitting means A715a are turned on while maintaining (while leaving) the shape (external shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 when viewed from the front. (how it shines) can be changed. As a result, it is possible to create a surprising performance without performing control to change the LEDs to be lit.

Note that the material of the slide member A2729 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material, a light-opaque resin material, or a metal material.

Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the 22nd embodiment, the gear with pin A46
In the 24th embodiment, the pin-equipped gear A3462 is formed on the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 in the 24th embodiment. A plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3 having a semicircular cross section projecting radially outward from the
464. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 384 is a rear view of the front unit FU in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 384, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed at four locations that divide the circumferential length of the arcuate wall portion A464 into approximately five equal parts when viewed from the rear.

In addition, in the 24th embodiment, the elongated hole formed to displace the first displacement member A440

(First long hole A422a, second long hole A422b, displacement side long hole A453, and transmission side long hole A45
4) is formed longer than in the twenty-second embodiment, so that the first displacement member A440 can be displaced beyond the displacement end on the extended position side in the twenty-second embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 384, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 comes into contact with the arcuate wall portion A464 and its movement is restricted, so that the first displacement member A440 stops at the extended position. When the gear with pin A3462 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 moves to the protrusion plate A4.
56a, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is pushed upward and to the right from the state shown in FIG. It can be configured as follows.

As a result, at the timing when the second displacement member A490 is displaced (see FIG. 360),
The first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced.

Note that in FIG. 384, the sizes of the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are shown randomly, but the size is not limited to this. For example, all the protrusions may have the same size, or the external protrusions A3464 may have different sizes. In this case, it is not necessary that they all have different sizes.

In this embodiment, the two outer diameter protrusions A3464 closer to the transmission protrusion A463 are formed larger than the two outer diameter protrusions A3464 farther from the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, the first displacement member A4
When the gear with pin A3462 is rotated continuously after the pin 40 reaches the extended position, the displacement caused by the contact between the outer protrusion A3464 and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is smaller than that of the first two times. The two times are smaller. That is, the first displacement member A after reaching the extended position
440 displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) can be produced so that it gradually subsides.

From this point of view, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be formed so that it becomes smaller as it moves away from the transmission protrusion A463 side along the arcuate wall portion A464, or vice versa. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect in which the displacement width of the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 gradually changes.

Further, a recessed portion recessed radially inward from the arcuate wall portion A464 may be formed at the location where the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed. In this case, contrary to the description in the twenty-fourth embodiment, each time the recessed portion is disposed to face the protruding plate portion A456a, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 moves downwardly to the left to attach the coil spring SP1 from the state shown in FIG. 384. It can be configured such that the elongated link A451 rotates as the elongated link A451 is pulled back by force, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the right (toward the retracted position) from the extended position.

Also, the formation position of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is changed to the first operating unit A400, A400A, A
400B, A400C, and A400D (see FIG. 319) may be made different (shifted). As a result, the first operating units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C
, A400D (when the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 start operating at the same timing), the first displacement member AMT1 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is synchronized. The timing at which the one-displacement member A440 is displaced can be made different. That is, in a control mode in which each drive motor AMT1 is excited all at once,
The timing of the displacement (minor displacement) that occurs in the first displacement member A440 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 can be shifted by a predetermined deviation width depending on the arrangement of the outer diameter protrusion A3464.

For example, each first operating unit A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A40
The timing at which each first displacement member A440 of 0D (see FIG. 319) reaches the extended position (see FIG. 320) and the timing at which each second displacement member A490 reaches the extended position (see FIG. 320) are the same. , after the first displacement member A440 reaches the extended position, the outer diameter protrusion A3
464, the timing of occurrence of the displacement (minor displacement) that occurs in the first displacement member A440 is
Adjustment can be made so that the signals are generated sequentially in a clockwise direction starting from the first operating unit A400 located at the lower left when viewed from the front.

Thereby, it is possible to easily guide the line of sight of the player who is paying attention to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Furthermore, as described above, in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the aspect of the light that is visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a (see FIG. 320), so that the player who visually recognizes the light can It is possible to easily guide the line of sight in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. For example, an effect suggesting a right-handed hit performed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like during a jackpot game (special game) can be performed using the order of displacement of the first displacement member A440.

Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the 22nd embodiment, the first displacement member A44
Although the case has been described in which the decorative member A4550 is displaced toward the front side of the illumination board A416 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the decoration member A4550 is displaceable toward the front side of the illumination board A416. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 385(a) is a diagram 339(a) of the first operation unit A4400 in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view along a line corresponding to the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line in a);
85(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A4400 along a line corresponding to the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG. 344(a).

As shown in FIGS. 385(a) and 385(b), the decorative member A4550 includes a plate-shaped decorative plate portion A4551 disposed so that the front side of the front cover A410 can be displaced, and a main body portion A411.
a pair of guided parts A4552 guided to a long hole A4411b drilled along a straight line parallel to the direction A416x on the side surface of the front cover A416x, and a pair of connecting arm parts A4553 formed on the outside of the front cover A410. are integrally connected and fixed.

Since the pair of guided parts A4552 are both inserted into the elongated hole A4411b,
The guided portion A4552 is only allowed to be displaced along the elongated hole A4411b. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a change in the posture of the decorative plate portion A4551. That is, the displacement of the decorative plate portion A4551 is limited to sliding displacement in a direction parallel to the direction A416x, which is the extending direction of the elongated hole A4411b.

The first displacement member A4440 includes a pair of protruding portions A4442g that protrude from the left and right ends of the interlocking plate portion A4442 toward the front side, and has the same configuration as the first displacement member A440 except for this.

In this embodiment, the guided portion A4552 is formed to protrude inward of the front cover A410 to a position where it can come into contact with the protruding portion A4442g in the displacement direction. As a result, the first displacement member A
The decorative member A4550 interlocks with the first displacement member A4440 at the timing when the protruding portion A4442g and the guided portion A4552 come into contact during the displacement of the decorative member A4440.

The interlocking plate part A4442 of the first displacement member A4440 is configured to be displaced with a change in attitude during the displacement of the guided plate part A441.
The arrangement of the protruding part A4442g is set so that the protruding part A4442g can enter between.
Thereby, in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A4440 in both forward and backward directions, the decorative member A455
0 can be displaced in both forward and backward directions (both left and right in FIG. 385(a)).

According to this embodiment, since the decorative plate portion A4551 is arranged on the front side of the front cover A410, it is possible to configure the timing to hide the through hole A412 with the decorative plate portion A4551.
Thereby, light traveling through the through hole A412 can be physically blocked.

In addition, the first displacement member A4440 is hidden behind the back side of the front cover A410 in the extended position.
Unlike, the decorative plate portion A4551 is always arranged so that the player can see it without being hidden by the front cover A410. Therefore, the decorative plate portion A4551 and the opening A442c of the first displacement member A4440 are configured to have different shapes for each first operation unit A4400, and these are configured to have a series of meanings in the retracted position. This can be used as a means to solve the problem that in a hidden overhang position, the player cannot see it in a series of senses, but it is also difficult to create a sense of unity in the light emitting mode.

That is, by configuring the shape of the decorative plate portion A4551 of each first operation unit A4440 and the drawn figure in the same manner, the first displacement member A4440 is placed in the extended position and the front cover A41
The decorative plate portion A4551 can create a sense of unity among the first operating units A4440 in the state where they are hidden by the decorative plate A4551 (see FIG. 385(b)).

Further, the light emitting means is placed in advance at a similar position in the first displacement member A4440 of the plurality of first operation units A4400, and at a position that can be visually recognized through the through hole A412 with the first displacement member A4440 disposed in the extended position. A445b is arranged, and the light emitting means A445b is lit all at once by a plurality of first operation units A4400, with the first displacement member A4440 being hidden as described above, to create a light emission effect with a sense of unity. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the elongated hole A4411b is formed using a gap area (area on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A4440) secured by not forming the illumination board A416. In other words, the space created by limiting the formation range of the illumination board A416 is used as the decorative member A4550.
It can be effectively used as a space for arranging a structure to realize the displacement of .

The movable range of the decorative member A4550 is limited to the range in which the elongated hole A4411b is formed.
That is, only the space created by limiting the formation range of the illumination board A416 can be a range in which not only the first displacement member A4440 but also the decorative member A4550 can be displaced. Therefore, the number of displaced members can be increased in the range where the illumination board A416 is not formed (the corresponding range when viewed from the front).

Moreover, before and after the displacement of the decorative member A4550, a posture change (displacement in the front-rear direction) occurs in the first displacement member A4440. Therefore, in the range where the illumination board A416 is not formed (the corresponding range when viewed from the front), a large displacement amount (displacement amount in the front-rear direction) of the first displacement member A4440 can be ensured.

Note that the aspect of the decorative member A4550 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material, or may be formed from a resin material with low light-transmitting properties, and an LED or the like or an illumination board may be arranged inside. Further, a through hole may be formed in the decorative member A4550 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the light emitted from the illumination board A416 through the through hole can be made visible.

Next, the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 386. In the 22nd embodiment, the circular arc wall portion A464 is rotationally displaced along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion A463, so that even after the transmission protrusion A463 is separated from the irregularly shaped slide member A455, the irregularly shaped slide member A455
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, a case will be described in which the displacement mode is not limited to rotation. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

386(a) and 386(b) are front views of a displacement device A5000 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 386(a) shows a state where the displacement member A5001 of the displacement device A5000 is in the middle of displacement, and FIG. 386(b) shows a state where the displacement member A5001 is disposed at the end of displacement.

The displacement device A5000 is configured to be slidable along a straight line, and includes a biasing member (not shown) (
Displacement member A5001 that is biased to the left by a coil spring, etc.) and its displacement member A5
A transmission member A5002 to which a driving force for displacement along the displacement direction of 001 is transmitted, a supported member A5003 that is rotatably supported at an end of the transmitted member A5002, and a supported member A5003 that is rotatably supported at the end of the transmitted member A5002. A thin wall portion A that extends from both ends of the
5004, a roller member A5005 disposed at the end opposite to the end supported by the shaft of the supported member A5003, and guide grooves A5006 and A5 in which the roller member A5005 is guided.
007.

The guide grooves A5006 and A5007 are first grooves extending along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.
It is composed of a region A5006 and a second region A5007 that starts from the end of the first region A5006 and deviates from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001. In this embodiment, the second area A
5007 is configured in a circular arc shape, but the shape is not limited to a circular arc shape as long as it deviates from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.

The operation of displacement device 5000 will be explained. While the roller member A5005 is guided through the first region A5006 of the guide groove, the displacement member A5001 is pushed toward the end of the transmission member A5002 (see FIG. 386(a)).

On the other hand, at the stage where the roller member A5005 is guided through the second area A5007 of the guide groove,

(See FIG. 386(b)), the portion that contacts the displacement member A5001 is switched to the thin wall portion A5004, and in this state, leftward displacement of the displacement member A5001 can be restricted.

Furthermore, the roller member A5005 changes the outer shape of the thin wall portion A5004 to the second area A50 of the guide groove.
The position of the displacement member A5001 is kept unchanged during at least one section during the displacement of the displacement member A5001 (
By configuring the contact position of the displacement member A5001 to remain unchanged in the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 during the displacement of the transmitted member A5003 can be restricted in the above-mentioned one section. .

In addition, when the thin wall portion A5004 is configured to be deformable so as to collapse toward the supported member A5003, a position where the repulsive force of the thin wall portion A5004 subjected to deformation and the urging force applied to the displacement member A5001 are balanced. The displacement member A5001 can be maintained. Thereby, even after the contact between the supported support member A5003 and the displacement member A5001 is released, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 can be suppressed.

Next, the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. 22nd
In the embodiment, a case has been described in which the wiring HC is loosely wound around the fastening part A475 and supported so as not to fall off from the fastening part A475.
A case will be described in which the wiring HC is supported so as to be relatively displaceable by the wiring guide member A6560, which is supported so as to be movable at 0. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

387(a), FIG. 387(b), and FIG. 388 are rear views of the rear unit BU in the twenty-seventh embodiment. 387(a) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 is disposed in the retracted position, and FIG. 388 shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 is disposed in the extended position.
87(b) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 is disposed at an intermediate position between the retracted position and the extended position (about a 45 degree rotation position). Note that in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b), and 388, illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted to facilitate understanding of the structure of the rear unit BU.

As shown in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b), and 388, in this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 356) is not formed, and instead, the wiring guide member A6560 is connected to the support box portion A6470. It is supported between the rear plate portion A480 (see FIG. 359).

The upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6560 is rotatably supported by at least one of the support box portion A6470 or the rear plate portion A480. In this embodiment, the rear plate part A480 is inserted into the through hole formed in the upper end of the wiring guide member A6560, with the support protrusion A6471d protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the back side of the support box part A6470. By fixing, the wiring guide member A656
0 is pivotally supported by the support protrusion A6471d so that it cannot fall off.

The wiring guide member A6560 is formed in the shape of a long plate, and includes a main body plate part A6561 that is arranged to face the back surface of the support box part A6470 with a gap between them, and a front view from the lower end of the main body plate part A6561 and the middle part of the body plate part A6560. It includes a plurality of protruding portions A6562 that protrude toward the side (support box portion A6470 side).

The main body plate portion A6561 is arranged close to the rear plate portion A480. As a result, the main body plate part A6
Since the space on the front side of 561 can be increased, a large space for arranging the wiring HC can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to avoid placing an unnecessary load on the wiring HC.

In addition, since the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 from rubbing against each other. In particular, in this embodiment, where the wiring HC is guided toward the back side (rear plate part A480 side) by the protrusion part A491d2 and the binding band KB, the position between them (the position sandwiched in the left-right direction) Since the main body plate part A6561 is arranged in the rear plate part A480, the main body plate part A6561 can be arranged between the wiring HC and the rear plate part A480 at a position where the wiring HC is closer to the rear plate part A480.
Rubbing between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, by setting the part where the wiring HC is pressed against the rear plate part A480 side to a position that overlaps with the main body plate part A6561, the main body plate part A6561 is displaced in the direction along the displacement in synchronization with the displacement of the wiring HC. It is possible to make it easier for situations to occur. In this case, since the absolute value of the relative displacement between the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 can be reduced, the occurrence of rubbing can be suppressed. Therefore, wear of the wiring HC can be prevented and durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

The displacement mode of the wiring guide member A6560 will be explained. In the state shown in FIG. 387(a), the wiring guide member A6560 is placed at the limit position on the retracted position side. In the state shown in FIG. 387(b), although the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced, the displacement of the board-side connector A493c in the left-right direction is small and the displacement in the vertical direction is large, so that the displacement of the wiring HC is mainly caused. Occurs in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring guide member A6560 maintains the attitude shown in FIG. 387(a).

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 387(b), the upward displacement of the wiring HC is
6562. That is, the protruding portion A6562 can function as a portion that restricts the vertical displacement limit of the wiring HC.

In the state shown in FIG. 388, since the displacement of the board-side connector A493c occurs mainly in the left-right direction, the wiring HC is also displaced in the left-right direction, so that the wiring guide member A is pushed by the wiring HC.
The attitude of 6560 changes. In this case, the wiring HC should be connected to the wiring guide member A with a margin.
6560, the lower limit of its displacement can be defined by the lower protrusion A6562. Therefore, the wiring HC is overpowered and pinion A517 and reinforcing arm part A5
It is possible to prevent the liquid from entering (dripping down) to the 18 side.

In this way, the location where the wiring HC is wrapped (the protruding portion A656 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561)
By configuring the arrangement in 2) to be changeable, the design length of the wiring HC can be reduced compared to the case where the arrangement of the part where the wiring HC is wrapped is fixed (see fastening part A475, Figure 356(a)). Can be shortened.

To explain the policy of changing the arrangement of the part around which the wiring HC is wound (protruding part A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate part A6561) from a different perspective, in the displacement from Fig. 387(a) to Fig. 387(b), The board side connector A493c is displaced in a manner approaching the protrusion A6552 (the wiring H
387(b) to the protruding part A6552 side), the part of the wiring HC wound around the protruding part A6552 is displaced to the side where it loosens. Setup A
The board side connector A493c is displaced in a manner to move away from 6552 (the wiring HC is
6552), the portion of the wiring HC that is wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced toward the tightening side. In this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 is shown in FIG.
) and Fig. 388.

Therefore, when the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protrusion A6552 is displaced toward the tightening side, the wiring guide member A6560 suppresses the displacement of the wiring HC toward the tightening side (
It can be said that the wiring HC is configured to be able to be displaced to the side where the wiring HC is expanded. This can prevent the radius of curvature of the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protrusion A6552 from becoming excessively small, and can prevent excessive deformation (such as bending or chipping) of the wiring HC. .

According to this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 is not connected to the second displacement member A490.
is displaced as the wiring HC is displaced. Therefore, for example, a member that interlocks with the wiring guide member A6560 is arranged so that the player can see it in any of the states shown in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b), or 388 (for example, the third By disposing a decorative member that can be extended on the side of the symbol display device 81 (right side in FIG. 387(a)), it is possible to perform an effect using the decorative member that is displaced by the displacement of the wiring HC.

In this case, as described above, the second displacement member A490 and the wiring guide member A6560 do not completely interlock, and the wiring guide member A6560 stops while the second displacement member A490 rotates 45 degrees from the retracted position. Since the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be displaced when the second displacement member A490 rotates more than that (the timing of the displacement is shifted), it is as if the decorative member is the second displacement member A490. It can be visually recognized as if they are being displaced independently.

Note that, for convenience of explanation, the wiring HC is illustrated in a manner in which it is wound once (a manner in which the wiring passes twice between the pair of protrusions A6562), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, multiple protrusions A
The wiring HC may be configured to pass through (not be wound) only once between the wirings 6562 and 6562.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the tilting device 310 is pressed downward, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the initial position may be a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force to return the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so the torsion spring 3
15 can be made unnecessary.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 moves to the end of pushing, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, it is possible to perform the effect of a "button that cannot be pushed"). can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of its operation (the end of the extending operation), due to the dimensions that create a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320, the voice coil motor 352 It is preferable to arrange the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. Thereby, it is possible to suppress generation of impact noise due to collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is protruding in advance, and it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the button is in the "button that cannot be pushed" state until after the player presses the tilting device 310. can.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be formed from a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, it is possible to change the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other, so that the engaging rib 344c can be rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the attitude of the rotating claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed. Therefore, more operating states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 can be formed than in the first embodiment.

In addition, by driving the disc cam 344 continuously rotating in the forward rotation direction, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched). Thereby, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, deterioration of the drive motor 342 can be suppressed, while a complicated operation mode in which the raised position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched can be performed.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 provides driving force to the tilting device 310.
Although the case where the operation timing of the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operation speed and the direction of the operation of the tilting device 310 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed and direction of the tilting device 310. For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (
During the downward movement), the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a position where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and just before the tilting device 310 reaches the end of pushing and begins to move upward. , the rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started. In this case, while the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be made smaller while the tilting device 310 is pressed down repeatedly, the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be increased when the tilting device 310 starts to move upward. .

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the housing member 543 is attached to the tilting device 310.
0 may be fixed and the vibration device 5400 may be operated within it. Tilt device 31
For example, when fixing the housing member 5430 to the base plate 5321,
The shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 can be changed by disposing the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 so that the convex leg portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321 when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the pushing end. may be configured to change whether the weight member 5412 can come into contact with the housing member 5430 or not.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the tilting speed when operating the tilting device 310. Therefore, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher, the flexible member 5420 A state in which the weight member 5412 contacts the housing member 5430 can be created by increasing the amount of deformation. That is, the player can feel the vibration not only when pushing the tilting device 310 to the end, but also when operating the tilting device 310 at high speed. It is possible to increase the variety of performances.

For example, when a player operates the tilting device 310, a message such as "Press the button" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying a message such as "Big chance!", it is possible to perform an effect that instructs the player how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, the player can press the button in the specified way.

By setting whether or not the tilting device 310 is pressed as a condition for transmitting vibrations to the player,
It is possible to increase the player's desire to operate the button (tilting device 310) in a specified manner of pressing, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

Note that the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be reversed in magnitude with the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 with force, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction caused by pushing the tilting device 310 with force.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can feel the vibrations generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing in the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the housing member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in,
The weight member 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it cannot come into contact with the housing member 5430 on the condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of its movement. In this case, the tilting device 31
While it is possible to transmit vibrations to the player when 0 is not being operated and make the performance lively,
By stopping the vibration when pressing the button, it is possible for the player to change the presentation mode (
This creates a premium feeling in which only the player playing the machine can feel the changes in the presentation mode, excluding surrounding players. I can do it.

In addition, as a variation of the performance, there is a case where the player pushes the tilting device 310 so that the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot come into contact with each other, and a case where the weight member 5
412 and the housing member 5430 can be in continuous contact with each other, but this can be achieved by changing the operating mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can occur depending on the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, the disk cam 5344 is deformed by tilting its axis, so that the disk cam 53
Although a case has been described in which a frictional force is generated due to the contact between the release member 346 and the release member 346, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored partially protrudes in a direction approaching the disc cam 5344, and is configured in such a manner that it comes into contact when the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting its axis. It's okay. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a movable part, the frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 is ensured to be larger than when the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 are in contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both the board support devices 600 disposed above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to come into contact with the front frame 14, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to be able to come into contact with the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, a portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 disposed in the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when attaching the game board 13 to the board support device 600, the game board 13
Although a case has been described in which the vertical position of the image does not change, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side, and the front end thereof is connected to the board support device 60 in the released state.
0 may be arranged below the upper surface of the rear side extension plate 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 from there, the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state. 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be lowered compared to the height when the game board 13 is fixed, so that the work of fixing the game board 13 can be made lower. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the foul ball passage section 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or it may be a combination of back and forth and left and right bends. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
It is preferable that a long path be formed in the front and back directly behind the ball 3, since the ball can be ejected smoothly. Furthermore, by creating a path that bends back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage section 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, thereby preventing interference between the firing path and the foul ball passage section 145. It can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface, but the light guide member 540 is not necessarily limited to this. for example,
The position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 appears dim. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, curved portions and straight extending portions may coexist at the upper and lower positions.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a vertically curved path is formed by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of the bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi are connected to the back side wall portion 461H.
It is also possible to have a configuration in which they are separated by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. in this case,
Since the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi, the resistance of the sandwiching causes a load on the speaker connection wire 453 in the direction of pulling the speaker assembly 450 outward. Even if the speaker connection wire 4
53 can be prevented from coming off from the speaker 451.

In addition, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha contacts the inner surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H in the thickness direction within the range of the protrusion length corresponding to the concave depth of the wiring passage concave portion 464, but the protrusion length beyond that is abutted in the thickness direction. In terms of length, a step may be provided in the middle so that the inner surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are spaced apart by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, a sufficient area is secured to form a double wall between the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H, and the speaker connection wire 453 can be held between the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the proximal body part 461B and the distal body part 461T correspond to the speaker chamber, and the intermediate body part 461M corresponds to the duct. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate body part 461M in the front-rear direction to the same level as the proximal body part 461B and the distal body part 461T, the proximal body part 461B, the intermediate body part 461
M and the tip side main body part 461T may jointly constitute a large speaker room.

Further, although the proximal body portion 461B has been described as having a larger volume than the distal body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed, or the volumes may be the same. speaker 45
1 may be located not only at the left and right ends, but also at the center in the left and right direction, or between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, each of the rib portions 467a to 4 constituting the passage forming ribs 467, 487
67e, 487a to 487e, the adjacent rib portions are arranged in the left-right direction (the direction connecting the proximal body portion 461B and the distal body portion 461T, the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491). Although the case where they do not overlap in view (direction intersecting the direction) has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze-like manner, for example, the front recessed portion 47
By inserting a thin metal wire such as a piano wire through the opening formed by 1 and the rear recessed portion 491, and making it difficult to commit a fraudulent act in which the tip of the wire enters the gaming area, and prolonging the time required for such a fraudulent act, It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts. In addition, suppression of fraud here refers to suppression of the fraud itself, or obtaining fraudulent profits through the fraud (successful in the fraud).
Examples include suppression of

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 is the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830.
G and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 may be configured to mesh with each other. in this case,
Since the rotary plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be linked, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 but also during the expanding operation and the gathering operation. can. Thereby, the radial sliding movement of the petals 802 and the rotational movement of the decorative member 884 can be performed simultaneously, and the presentation effect can be improved.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract as the rotary plate 830 rotates, or it may be configured to rotate around an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the second effect member 940 operates due to the driving force being transmitted via the slide plate 930 that slides due to the operation of the drive side arm member 910, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal operating device 800 and the tip of the second presentation member 940, the second presentation member 940 can be operated based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. It's okay. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment described above, when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated from each other above the opening/closing regulating part 159. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 may be configured to abut in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing regulating part 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 will be displaced to the front side (game (the right side of the board 13 is tilted toward the front side), the game board 13 is disposed facing the operation unit back member 155.
Since the portion is also displaced to the front side, it is possible to cause the operation section back member 155 and the game board 13 to interfere with each other. Thereby, the front frame 14 can be prevented from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board support device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board support device 600 arranged above the inner frame 12 6
00 is in a fixed state based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13, which are arranged opposite to the lower board surface support device 600, and the board surface arranged above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, it is possible to prevent the front frame 14 from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. As a result, the function of determining the state of the panel support device 600 installed above the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600 (
It may be configured so that the surface is chamfered. In this case, when the multifunctional cover member 171 formed from synthetic resin collides with the metal board support device 600, the multifunctional cover member 171
Since the risk of damage to the multifunctional cover member 171 can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long period of time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, a case will be described in which the right panel unit 500, from which the light irradiated onto the end face of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540, is arranged at the right end and front side of the front frame 14. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, one side of the right panel unit 500 may be configured to be switchable between being placed on the front side and the other side being placed on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate around an axis, the mode of light irradiated onto the center frame 86 can be switched. Furthermore, the mode of light irradiated onto the center frame 86 and the manner in which the center frame 86 is
By switching the correspondence with moving accessories that move inwardly, it is possible to diversify the performance.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged such that one side is placed on the front side and the other side is placed on the front side. Consider switching between when it is placed on the front side. Inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the movable accessory, the movable accessory placed opposite to the part corresponding to the top opening 524 (the part near the end) emits light, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side emits light. When the surface faces the moving accessory, the moving accessory placed oppositely emits light over a wide area of the opening 565 (wider than the top opening 524). Therefore, by changing the attitude of the right panel unit 500 without changing the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting location of the moving accessory can be changed.

In this case, for example, the performance effect can be improved by moving the moving accessory in synchronization with the timing of the change in the light emitting location. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side changes in size and changes so as to fit in the location corresponding to the top opening 524, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving accessory. At the timing when the right panel unit 500 faces, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (expand) in the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. Thereby, switching to change the location where light is emitted in accordance with the movement of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500, while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a that controls the light emission.

Further, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed.

(The brightness becomes higher, the amount of light becomes larger, and the light is emitted clearly), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is diffused (the brightness becomes lower, the amount of light becomes smaller, and the light becomes fainter). Therefore, by changing the posture of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to
It is possible to change the light emitting mode.

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving accessory or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is placed in front of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal) By changing the posture so that the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is placed on the back side of the support plate 510, a beam-shaped (
It is possible to emit light over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving accessory or liquid crystal while irradiating light in a narrow state. Thereby, it is possible to emit light in a wide range of positions away from the moving accessory and the liquid crystal, while causing only the details of the moving accessory and the liquid crystal to emit light.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments, the foul ball passage portions 9145, 10145
Although a case has been described in which the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sheet metal member may partially break due to the load from the thread Y8 and be so fragile that the broken part will fall, and a detection sensor may be placed at a position where the broken part passes through when it falls. Also good. In this case, due to the sheet metal member being detected by the detection sensor, a warning is issued and the launch of the ball is forcibly stopped in order to detect the cheating at an early stage. The profits gained by those who commit fraudulent acts (losses suffered by gaming machine halls) can be minimized.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve frictional force may be added. For example, the friction force may be improved by pasting a rubber sheet on the inclined surface 2803T, or by arranging a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810). The motion resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in a posture inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, on the walls of the both side slits 815 that are arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T,
A recessed portion may be formed to allow the inclined surface 2803T to enter therein. In this case, since the inclined surface 2803T penetrates into the recessed portion, it is possible to improve the operating resistance.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, by changing the shape of the concave portions 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the traveling direction of the light is set as the direction in which the light is collected or the direction in which the light is spread. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is
~CCVIe Since all of the lights are tilted upward, it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the eye level of a person walking to select a machine to play with. Thereby, the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, areas CCVIc and CCV which are areas that emit light to the inner lens member 530
A downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in Ie, and an upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId, which are the regions from which light is emitted to the outer lens member 550. In this case, the light travels in the direction opposite to the player playing pachinko 8010, and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is slanted upward. On the other hand, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is tilted downward. Therefore, for example, by illuminating the balls stored in the upper tray 17 with light, it is possible to make the balls look glittering. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the players playing the game while improving the customer attraction effect of the pachinko machine 8010.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed near the center of the left and right sides, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position may be changed depending on the arrangement of the operating device 10300.

Moreover, both one formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operating device 10300 and one formed near the left and right center may be provided. In other words, there are problems with the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 to cope with the operation load of the operation device 10300, and with the front frame 10014 alone (
A protruding portion 6413 and a recessed portion 6414 may be separately provided to accommodate the ease of holding, durability, etc.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the operating device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is disposed above the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 so that it can be assembled (replaced). It is not limited to this. That is, anything that can be assembled (replaced) may be used. For example, it may be an audio device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibration device that is configured so that it cannot be operated by the player and that produces a vibration effect, an illuminated board that produces a light emission effect, or a board box. It may also be something that is not intended to be directly visible to the player, such as.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in the shape of a groove extending in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, triangular or circular concave portions and convex portions may be formed when viewed from above. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount of the operational load of the operating device 10300 and the frequency with which the load is applied. It's okay.

Moreover, the same groove shape or a plurality of grooves may be formed. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while reducing the width of the groove, the same effect as when one wide groove is formed in terms of reducing the contact area with the operating device 10300 can be achieved. I can do it. When forming multiple grooves, each groove does not necessarily have to be along the front-rear direction; for example,
It may be formed radially in a top view.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding shaped portion 6413 is protruded below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 so that it can be used as a finger rest when carrying the front frame 10014, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the recessed portion 6414 may be formed to be longer in the vertical direction than the fingers of the worker who carries the front frame 10014. In this case, the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 64
14 (can be used as a finger rest), the front frame 10014 can be easily carried.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the resin member 6427 is disposed below the operating device 10300 to soften the transmission of the load on the operating device 10300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a member that generates an elastic urging force (such as a coil spring or a torsion spring), or it may be a device such as a damper for the purpose of damping vibrations.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have poor pliability and flexibility, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the operating device 10300 from being transmitted to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor, but various modes are exemplified as the mode of the drive motor. For example, a load may be transmitted from a rotating gear rotated by a drive motor to the lever member 10340 by a simple gear mechanism, or a mechanism (for example, a rotating cam) that does not rely on the gear mechanism may be interposed in the transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 1 via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b.
By transmitting the load to 0340, it may be configured to be able to spin idly when an overload occurs.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which a load is applied during operation of the operating device 10300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if there are operating parts that do not move on that plane (for example, if there is an operating part that pushes in diagonally to the left or right), the balance (average) of the operating directions of each operating part direction to be found

(For example, an intermediate angular direction) may be set as the direction of fastening, or the direction of fastening may be set by targeting the operating parts for which operating instructions are frequently given (ignoring the operating parts for which operating instructions are rarely given). You may do so. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening due to the load during operation.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are joined together by fastening, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be combined using an adhesive, or may be combined by fitting by matching shapes.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the direction in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have high rigidity (the vertical direction) is aligned with the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366, but this is not necessarily the case. . For example, the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 may be set to the left-right direction. In this case, the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be made easier to change due to the generation of vibration of the vibration device 10366, so it is possible to perform an effect that dynamically changes the design around the operating device 10300 when vibration occurs. can. Moreover, the aspect of the vibration device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, it may be a direct-acting type such as a voice coil motor, a rotary type such as a vibrator, or a combination thereof.

Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed from a transparent resin material instead of an opaque resin. In this case, by configuring the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to be irradiated with light from a predetermined irradiation device, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are
As the shapes of the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 change, the appearance of light visible through the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 can be changed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed with different inclinations so that deflection can be easily suppressed regardless of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by making the inclination angles of the left and right muscle portions D24a the same regardless of the position, the degree of rigidity can be changed between the direction in which the left and right muscle portions D24a increase their rigidity and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened relative to that direction. The difference can be increased.

In this case, for example, by setting the direction in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed along the direction Y17a, the vibrations generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in the upward position can cause the left front cover 10321 and the right front While suppressing the deflection of the cover 10322, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in the downward position is increased. be able to. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366
The degree of deflection of 0322 can be varied.

Note that, conversely, the direction in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed may be along the direction Y17b.
In this case, when the swinging operation member 10310 is placed in the downward position, the vibration device 1036
6 suppresses the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated, while suppressing the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is placed in the upward position. Cover 10321 and right front cover 103
The deflection of 22 can be increased. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operating member 10310, the degree of deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be varied.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be removed from the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1 are formed integrally with the inner case member 10330.
A configuration in which 0322 is assembled may also be used. In this case, when assembled to the inner case member 10330, the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 can be easily assembled due to the flexure, and after the subsequent assembly to the front frame 10014, the flexure of the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 is suppressed. By doing so, the effect of suppressing displacement due to interference between the protruding interference portion 6805a and the inner edge Rm1 can be exerted.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 contacts the plate-shaped support portion 6426 at the top and bottom, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a fastening part into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-like protruding part 6453R, and the fastening screw is attached to a plate extending above the plate-like support part 6426 in correspondence with the fastening part. It may be configured to be inserted into an insertion hole formed in the section. In this case, the plate-like support part 642
Not only during the upward displacement of 6, but also during the downward displacement, the load that is the basis of the displacement is applied to the V-shaped design member 645.
0, and the load can be distributed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 has a gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b, 6456b such that the cover 10321, 103 into which it is inserted is
Although a case has been described in which the thickness is such that it can be fitted with respect to the thickness dimension of No. 22 (dimensional relationship with almost no gap), it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be shorter than the gap (the size may be such that a gap is formed between the members during assembly). In this case, if the displacement of the covers 10321, 10322 (displacement of the operating device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, contact (collision) between the covers 10321, 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 is prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the flange portion 6582 is formed into a flat plate shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flange portion 6582 may be formed with a hook-shaped cross-sectional shape projecting downward from the front side edge, and the opposing plate portion 6 of the partition member 6560
561 may be formed in a shape that meshes with that shape, so that they fit into each other when assembled. In this case, with the partition member 6560 positioned in the assembled state, the partition member 65
60 can be prevented from separating from the back support member 6580 toward the front side.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the opposing side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in cross-sectional view. It's not something you can do. For example, only one of the two side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed into a curved shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the transparent covering member 654 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material.
By making the color of the milky-white member 6541 and the partitioning member 6560 placed behind the player who visually recognizes the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the player 8 visible, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a and the box-shaped Although a case has been described in which the lower edge of the light receiving section 6546 is configured to be easily recognized as a series of areas, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a may be formed in advance to have a milky white color.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with a fastening screw in a fastening direction that slopes downward toward the front side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fastening may be performed using a fastening screw whose fastening direction slopes downward toward the back side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set depending on the arrangement space required by the parts placed near the fastening position and the side where displacement is desired to be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a configuration has been described in which compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 as the upper lid member 6510 deforms, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partitioning member 6560 may be configured to be driven so that its longitudinal width can be changed, thereby changing the degree of compressive force that may be generated as the upper lid member 6510 deforms.

In other words, if the partitioning member 6560 is driven to shorten the front and rear width in such a manner that the back side edge of the partitioning member 6560 is displaced toward the front side, even if the top cover member 6510 is deformed, the separation between the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is maintained. A gap can still be generated between them, and compressive force can be made less likely to occur. Since compressive force is less likely to be generated, the extent to which the illumination board 6570 is held can be lowered, and therefore, the degree of displacement of the illumination board 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 similarly deforms.

In other words, by controlling the longitudinal width of the partition member 6560, it is possible to change the behavior of the illumination board 6570 in a situation where the top cover member 6510 may deform. It is possible to change the appearance of the irradiated light.

Note that the front-to-back width of the partition member 6560 is normally shortened (leave a space between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580), and the front-to-back width is increased by drive control, so that the partition member 6560 and the back support member The configuration may be such that the situation is changed so that a compressive force may be generated between the member 6580 and the member 6580.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that sandwich and support the illumination board 6570 are stacked on the front side of the front frame 10014, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the illumination board 6570 is
580, or the illumination board 6570 may be placed below the partition member 6560 (acoustic device 6
610), or the illumination board 6570 may be fastened and fixed to the partition member 6570.
The light receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 inserted through the transparent cylindrical member 6521 may be inserted (fixed) into the light receiving protrusion 6521b. In either case, transmission of vibration from the acoustic device 6610 to the illumination board 6570 can be suppressed.

Further, while the back support member 6580 (and the acoustic device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 which is arranged on the back side of the front frame 10014, the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 1
It may be fixed to 0014. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, it is possible to separate the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560.
It is possible to easily replace the illumination board 6570 sandwiched between the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 in the closed state of 014, or to correct the positional shift.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is arranged to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw becomes loose, vibrations are transmitted and abnormal noise can be generated. Although the case where it is possible to grasp the information has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that light travels near the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw loosens, the shadow of the fastening screw can be visually recognized from the front side. In this case, it is possible to identify the occurrence of loosening of fastening screws by checking for the presence or absence of shadows, so in a noisy environment, it is easier to detect loosening of fastening screws than when detecting abnormal noises. It can be made easier.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the fastening direction of the fastening screw is vertically inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, but the fastening direction is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction may be tilted left and right with respect to the front-rear direction, or there may be a mixture of locations that are tilted vertically and horizontally.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the elongated ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 are formed in a shape that extends linearly when viewed from the front, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a shape extending in a curved line, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a lattice shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the side surfaces of the elongated ribs 6734 are made smooth to suppress light from being diffused from the side surfaces, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a light shielding tape may be attached to the side surfaces of the long ribs 6734 to prevent light leakage from the side surfaces. In this case, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in the energy of light traveling toward the fins 6735. Further, a light-shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, you can emphasize the light on the front edge by covering the entire side, or by covering part of the side (for example, using light-shielding tape with holes in a polka dot pattern). Since the light conforming to the shape of the light-shielding tape can be visually recognized by the player, the presentation effect of the light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735 can be improved.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the elongated rib 6734 does not extend to the back side of the left horizontal presentation device 6700 of the pachinko machine 10010, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elongated rib 6734 extends toward the back side, but may be formed so as not to be coupled to the inner extending portion 6732 at the left and right ends. Also in this case, the intensity of light near the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the light traveling along the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction is emitted from the front end of the fin 6735, thereby improving the light production effect when the fin 6735 is viewed from the front. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (such as a cut) for emitting at least a portion of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from the side surface of the fin 6735 may be formed in the middle of the front-rear width of the fin 6735.

For example, as shown in this embodiment, the side surfaces of the fins 6735 are inclined such that the thickness gradually becomes thinner as the fins 6735 move toward the front side. By configuring the fins 6735 so that they can be repeatedly reached, light may be configured to easily exit from the fins 6735.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the number of fastening positions of the curved plate member 6750 to the base member 6710 is small, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the fixing may be performed by fitting claws based on the shape relationship or by meshing. In this case, since the fastening screw can be omitted, it is possible to prevent the effect of light from being degraded due to the shadow of the fastening screw.

In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 18830 slides due to the vibration of the operating device 10300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the audio device 6610 may be placed close to the back side of the coupling base member 18810, and the illumination board 18830 may be slid by the vibration of this speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operating device 10300 (direction along direction Y17a) and the vibration direction of the speaker box (generally the front-rear direction) are different, the displacement mode of the illumination board 18830 can be complicated.

In addition, by generating sound with a frequency outside the audible range from the speaker, a silent effect is executed in which the player can cause the illumination board 18830 to slide while maintaining a state in which the player cannot hear the sound. can do. At this time, by configuring so that the vibration of the illumination board 18830 is transmitted to the operating device 10300, the operating device 10300
A player who touches 00 can grasp vibrations derived from the sound output from the speaker. Thereby, for example, by controlling the silent effect to be executed when a change in situation advantageous to the player occurs, interest in touching the operating device 10300 can be increased.

In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 18830 is supported in a floating (slidable) manner near the operation device 10300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination board 6570 of the upper presentation device 6500 may be supported in a floating manner. In this case, it may be floatingly supported by a rod member fixed to the front frame 10014 and extending toward the front side from the gap between the left and right pair of audio devices 6610, or a rod member fixed to the wall of the audio device 6610. It may be supported in a floating manner. Further, the sliding direction is not limited to the vertical direction, but may be horizontal or diagonal.

In the nineteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line The reference line X19 may be configured to run along the direction of the angle .

In addition, considering the frequency of occurrence of vibration and the frequency of operation of the lens member 10317,
9 directions may be set. For example, if multiple vibration directions Y17a or operation directions are set in the first direction and other directions, the frequency of vibration or operation in the first direction is extremely high, and the frequency of vibrations in the other directions is extremely high. If the frequency of occurrence of operations is low, the reference line
By setting 19, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a.

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is configured to be difficult to transmit to the operating device 10300 side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body 6411 of the covered foundation member 21410 is also connected to the operation device 10300.
It may be configured such that vibrations are transmitted to the same extent as vibrations are transmitted to. In this case, the vibration device 2
1500 allows multiple objects to be vibrated.

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front surface of the projecting portion De3 against which the protruding portion 21522 is pressed due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is formed in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, the front portion of the projecting portion De3 may be formed with a plane that is vertically inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. In this case, the direction of the load applied to the vibrating device 21500 from the protruding portion De3 (the normal direction of the front surface of the protruding portion De3) is a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, so that the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is A component in a direction (vertical direction) intersecting the front-rear direction can be added to the displacement at the time (particularly the displacement toward the front side). As a result, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction, so that in addition to the case where the eccentric weight 21512 and the covered cover member 21530 collide in the front and rear direction, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction 21534 (non-guiding direction that intersects with the guiding direction), the vibration mode can be complicated.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the protruding portion 21534 of the covered cover member 21530 is formed along the front-rear direction, which is the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 vibrates (the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the eccentric weight 21512). Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the protrusion 21534 may be formed along a direction that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, may be formed along a curved line, or may be formed along a line of an arbitrary shape. . Thereby, the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are guided by the protrusion 21534 when the vibration device 21500 generates vibration can be arbitrarily set.

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the fastening portions 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 are fastened together through the support holes 21428 of the lower plate forming member 21420, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the length of the fastening portion 21457 may be made slightly longer, and the length of the support hole 214
It may be configured such that no fastening force is applied to 28. This makes it difficult for the vibration of the vibration device 21500 to be transmitted to the lower plate forming member 21420 through the plate portion having the support hole 21428, and as the vibration device 21500 vibrates, the balls stored in the lower plate 50 vibrate. Since this can be avoided, the vibration effect by the vibration device 21500 can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the formation of the support plate part A313 is omitted on the side where the notch part A312a is formed in the back case A310, and the end face is arranged opposite to the base plate A60, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the support plate portion A313 may be maintained on the side where the notch portion A312a is formed. In this case, it is possible to maintain the rigidity of the assembled state of the base plate A60 and the back case A310 while maintaining the effect of blurring the boundaries of the light that is visually recognized through the base plate A60 of the game board A13. can.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the back case A310 is formed in a box shape with an opening on the front side, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, back case A3
10 may be composed of a plurality of members (as an assembly of divided members), or the outer edge may be composed of a columnar part extending from the bottom of the back side to the front side (no wall part is formed). You may do so. In this case, rigidity can be ensured by fastening and fixing the back case A310 to the third symbol display device 81 and other movable units (first operating unit A400 and second operating unit A700).

In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the portion of the right side adjacent to the game board A13 is formed not in a plane but in a line shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the linear portion may be formed on the left side. Further, in the case where the linear portions are formed on both the left and right sides, the formation ratio (ratio) on one side may be lower than that on the other side.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the metal plate member 75 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the game board A13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the metal plate is the outer edge member A7
3 (on the gaming area side). In this case, by forming the metal plate along the inward curved shape of the outer edge member A73, the metal plate has the function of improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300, and the game area. A function of guiding the falling ball can be added. Alternatively, a gap may be provided inside the outer edge member A73, and a metal member may be disposed in the gap.

In the 22nd embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the front protrusion part A86f that can come into contact with the game ball is provided to protrude from the back side of the game area toward the front side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, a flange portion extending from the front end of the right channel forming wall portion A86d of the center frame A86 toward the gaming area side may be provided, and a protrusion portion may be provided protruding from the back side of the flange portion to the back side. In this case, even when the game ball flows down a position closer to the front side of the game area, the protruding portion can be brought into contact with the game ball, so that the speed of the game ball can be efficiently caused.

In the above 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which, when the illumination board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417, the front surface of the illumination board A416 and the protruding piece A417i do not come into contact with each other, leaving a gap. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, illuminated board A416
The front surface of the illumination board A416 may be in contact with the protruding piece A417i, or another member (for example, a flexible rubber-like member) may be interposed between the front surface of the illumination board A416 and the protruding piece A417i, It may be configured such that the load can be transmitted from the protruding piece A417i to the illumination board A416. Thereby, the illumination board A416 can be stably supported.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the second area AC2 of the area of the diffusion plate A415 of the first action unit A400 is disposed closer to the third symbol display device 81 side, and the plurality of first action units A4
Although the case has been described in which the second area AC2 of 00 surrounds the third symbol display device 81 from above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second area AC2 may be configured to be scattered around the third symbol display device 81, or may be configured to be displaceable so that the second area AC2 reaches before and after the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured in any arbitrary arrangement.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an illumination board and a diffusion plate on which light emitting means such as LEDs that emit light to the front side are arranged may be arranged on the guide plate section A430 and the support plate section A420. Thereby, by arranging the first displacement member A440, it is possible to configure the light emitting means to be hidden from the player.

Further, the first displacement member A440 may be configured to move on the front side of the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415. Even with this configuration, similar effects can be achieved. In this case, the first displacement member A440 may be configured so that the illumination board A445 is not disposed thereon. For example, one or more through holes may be formed in the thickness direction of the first displacement member A440, and light may be able to pass through the through holes. According to this, since the position of the through hole changes depending on the arrangement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the position from which the light irradiated to the back side of the first displacement member A440 leaks.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the first displacement member A440 is the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A41.
Although the case where one side of the board A416 is displaced (not cutting through the illumination board A416 when viewed from the front) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced so as to pass through (cut through) the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415 in a front view. Further, it is not necessary that the entire first displacement member A440 enters the back side of the diffusion plate A415 when viewed from the front, and a part of the first displacement member A440 is configured so as not to reach the back side of the diffusion plate A415 when viewed from the front. It's okay.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first displacement member A4
The illumination board A445 does not need to be disposed at 40. In this case, by arranging the illumination board on the back side of the first displacement member A440 and irradiating light to the front side, the ventilation opening A443c of the rear lid part A443 and the opening A442c of the interlocking plate part A442 can be used. It is possible to make the light passing through the player visible to the player.

In the 22nd embodiment, a case will be described in which the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 is regulated by the circular arc wall portion A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462 even after the transmission protrusion A463 of the pin-equipped gear A462 is separated from the odd-shaped slide member A455. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the circular arc wall portion A464 is not formed, the transmission protrusion A463
is disposed at a position away from the irregularly shaped slide member A455, the arcuate wall portion A464
Even if the shutter member, which is constructed as a separate member from the gear with pin A462, extends to the position where it was supposed to be placed, and comes into contact with the shutter member, the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is restricted. good.

In the above 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the plurality of guided protrusions A455c arranged on the irregularly shaped slide member A455 are arranged shifted in the direction (left and right) intersecting the direction A416x, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a plurality of guided protrusions A45
5c may be placed on the same straight line parallel to direction A416x, or direction A4
It may be arranged to be shifted in a direction that intersects 16x in the front and rear directions. In either case, the posture of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be stabilized.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced at different timings, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by shortening the length of the arcuate wall portion A464 of the gear with pin A462 from the transmission protrusion A463.

(At the same time, the protruding plate portion A456a is made long so that it does not interfere with contact with the arcuate wall portion A464.)
By reducing the angular width of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 regulated by the arcuate wall portion A464, the first displacement member A440 can be moved in synchronization with the displacement of the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position to the extended position. It can be displaced from the extended position to the retracted position. At this time, by adjusting the length of the arcuate wall part A464 so that the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is contained in the section where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is maintained, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member Interference with A490 can be avoided.

Also, in this case, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position, does it come into contact with the transmission protrusion A463 or with the end of the arcuate wall part A464 on the opposite side from the transmission protrusion A463? depends on the operating mode of the pin gear A462, that is, the driving mode of the drive motor AMT1. That is, by controlling the drive speed (a constant speed or a variable speed) and the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 differently, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position can be adjusted to The case where the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456) abuts against the circular arc wall part A464 and the case where it abuts against the transmission protrusion A463 can be made different.

In addition, here, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (
Although it is assumed that the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456) comes into contact with at least one of the arcuate wall portion A464 or the transmission protrusion A463, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, arc wall part A
464 and the transmission protrusion A463 are in a predetermined arrangement, the direction A is higher than either of them.
A fixed wall portion extending toward the odd-shaped slide member A455 (oddly-shaped transmitted portion A456) may be formed along 416x. In this case, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 (the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456) moves the arcuate wall portion A46 to the stop position.
4, the transmission protrusion A463, and the fixed wall.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the wiring HC is disposed outside the rotation axis of the second displacement member A490, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, reinforcement arm part A518
The rotating shaft may be formed in a cylindrical shape, and the wiring HC may be configured to pass through the inside of the cylinder and reach the board side connector A493c. In this case, it is possible to prevent the portion of the wiring HC disposed on the opposite side of the second displacement member A490 from being displaced (pulled) due to the displacement of the second displacement member A490 via the cylinder.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the wiring HC is wound around the fixed fastening portion A475, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flexible member made of a flexible material and having the same shape as the fastening portion A475 may be fixed to the front side of the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may be wound around the flexible member. Further, the number of flexible members does not need to be one, and may be plural. In this case, even if the wiring HC is pulled excessively and comes into contact with the flexible member, the load on the wiring HC can be alleviated by deforming the flexible member.

Moreover, what supports the wiring HC may be not the fastening part A475 but a mere columnar part (a part not used for fastening). In this case, there may be a gap (a gap narrower than the width of the wiring HC) between the columnar part and the rear plate part A480. In addition, the main body box part A471, the rear plate part A480
Alternatively, it may be a binding band that can be loosely wrapped around a fixing part that is separately formed on the wiring guide member A6560 or the like. In this case, since the displacement of the wiring HC can be absorbed by the displacement allowed by the binding band, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced.

Further, the fastening portion A475 is not fixed, but may be configured to be movable along the displacement direction of the wiring HC. In this case, the direction of displacement is not limited to this,
Various embodiments are illustrated.

Furthermore, the displacement of the fastening portion A475 may occur in synchronization with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. For example, by displacing the second displacement member A490 in the opposite direction as it approaches the extended position, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from entering the player's eyes.

In addition, the method of displacing the fastening part A475 may be such that the fastening part A475 is movably supported in a long hole, or the fastening part A475 may be configured to be tiltable using the main body box part A471 side as a fulcrum. In this case, it is desirable that a guide groove, a notch, or an interlocking part be formed in the rear plate part A480 so as to allow the displacement of the fastening part A475 while maintaining the coupled state with the fastening part A475.

Further, although the fastening portion A475 has been described as a portion around which the wiring HC is wound, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a pair of support walls formed in the shape of walls on both sides of the upper and lower sides of the wiring HC to restrict passage of the wiring HC. In this case, the width of the range in which the wiring HC can be displaced can be defined by the support wall.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, one end of the wiring HC is connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 from the back side, and the other end is disposed closer to the front than the board-side connector A493c. Although a case has been described in which the third connector A416e3 is connected from the back side, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the board to which the other end is connected may be disposed facing inward on the side surface of the back case A310. In this case, since the wiring HC can be connected to the board by extending it to the side surface of the rear case A310, the length required for routing the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

Further, for example, the board to which the other end is connected may be disposed on the rear plate portion A480, which is located on the back side of the board-side connector A493c. In this case, the length required for routing the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

In the 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, it is configured to be recessed from the end surface of the detected plate portion A455e that contacts the transmission protrusion A463 toward the opposing arrangement portion A456b, and the pin-equipped gear A462
The rotation angle may be allowed to exceed the sixth angle. In this case, since the in-phase member A465 can rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14, by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction, the second displacement member A490 is moved from the retracted position. It can be displaced to the extended position and then returned to the retracted position. As a result, by switching the driving (excitation) length of the drive motor AMT1, the displacement mode of the second displacement member A490 can be changed between a mode in which the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and the arrangement is maintained, and a mode in which the arrangement is maintained from the retracted position to the extended position. After being displaced to the extended position, it can be switched further back to the retracted position.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the upper transmission path UL1 and the lower transmission path DL1 have been described as paths through which driving force is transmitted by gears, but they are not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cam, a gear belt, or a direct-acting slider may be used.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board A715 that irradiates light onto the rotating body A720 is formed from a flat member, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. for example,
It may also be configured as a sheet-like substrate made of a flexible material. in this case,
A substrate having a light emitting means for irradiating light to the rotating body A720 can be easily arranged on the circumference surrounding the rotating body A720.

In the 22nd embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotary body A720 is placed at a position where it can be seen by the player at all times, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, rotating body A7
20 may be configured to be movable to an invisible position where the player cannot see it. In this case, with the rotating body A720 placed in an invisible position, the first rotating member A721 is moved to the second rotating member A7.
28 on the vertical axis (the second rotating member A728 is stopped), starts synchronous rotation in that state, and moves it to a position where it can be seen by the player while continuing to rotate. It is possible to draw attention to the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 during rotation. This allows the rotation of the rotating body A720 to continue while the rotating body A720 is performing an effect that associates information useful for the player (for example, jackpot expectation level) with the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 when stopped. It is possible to improve attention to the rotating body A720.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700 operate independently, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the production unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is configured to be tiltable forward from the lower end,
When the second displacement member A490 of the first operation unit A400 is in the extended position, the production unit A71
The production unit A710 may be configured to change to a tilted posture by raising and lowering the production unit A710 so that they come into contact with each other and receive a load. In this case, it is possible to perform a performance that changes the attitude of the performance unit A710 by arranging the second displacement member A490. Note that the configuration that allows the presentation unit A710 to be tilted is not limited at all. For example, the production unit A710 and the elevating section may be connected by a flexible member, or may be configured to be pivotally supported by the elevating section.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the shell portion A722 is made of an impermeable material, and the first rotating member A
Although the case where the light irradiated toward the central rotating member A724 is blocked in the initial state or the fourth state of A721 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, shell part A72
2 may be configured to have a light-transmissive portion. As a result, the first rotating member A721
It is possible to finely adjust the relationship between the attitude of the member A724 and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation axis of the annular gear member A723 meshed with the fixed gear SG intersects with the axis of the fixed gear SG, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the annular gear member A723 may have a rack shape that extends linearly (corresponding to an infinite radius of curvature), or the rotating shaft of the gear member to be meshed may be arranged parallel to the fixed gear SG. . a first effect member in which the rotational axis of the gear member to be meshed intersects with the axis of the fixed gear SG;
By combining the second effect member whose rotating shaft of the gear member to be meshed is parallel to the axis of the fixed gear SG, a complex effect can be performed.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the first area AC1 of the diffusion plate A415 is formed closer to the outside of the operating unit A300, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, by forming the illumination board A416 into a C-shape concave from the outside to the inside when viewed from the front, the first area AC1 is formed closer to the inside of the operating unit A300, and the second area AC2 is formed closer to the inner side of the operating unit A300. It may be formed at a position closer to the outside of A300. In this case, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight to a position closer to the outside of the operating unit A300.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the second rotating member A728 is irradiated with light from the left and right and from above, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, rotating body A72
An illumination board is disposed below 0, and light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the illumination board is conducted to a second support part A735 and is supported by the second support part A735. The second rotating member A728 may be reached and the player may visually recognize the second rotating member A728 after the second rotating member A728 is electrically connected. In this case, unlike the second support part A735, the first rotating member A721
Since the first support part A731 that supports is difficult to transmit light, it is possible to perform the effect of making the second rotating member A728 shine without making the first rotating member A721 shine.

This assumes an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. That is, the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is directed toward the first rotating member A721, and the second rotating member A7, which can be disposed between the first rotating member A721 and the light emitting means A715a, is directed toward the first rotating member A721.
28 transmits light, so the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is transmitted to the second rotating member A728.
It is difficult to control the rotational member A721 so that it does not reach the first rotating member A721. Therefore, by making the second support part A735 conductive and allowing the light to reach the second rotating member A728, it is possible to perform effects that are difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the first rotating member A721 supported by the first support part A731 disposed inside the rotating shaft is the second rotating member supported by the second supporting part A735 disposed outside the rotating shaft. Although the case where it is arranged inside the rotation axis of A728 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A721 has the side opposite to the side supported by the first support part A731 extended to the outside of the rotating shaft, and rotates from the extended end side so as to cover the second rotating member A728 from the outside of the rotating shaft. The extending portion may be formed in a direction parallel to the axis. In this case, the first rotating member A721 supported on the inner side of the rotating shaft can be configured to rotate on the outer side of the rotating shaft of the second rotating member A728, and an unexpected effect can be performed.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the rotational displacement of the central rotating member A724 causes the light emitting means A7 to
Although a case has been described in which the area of the central rotating member A724 as viewed in the optical axis direction of 15a changes, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the central rotating member A724 expands without changing its posture or if the moving body protrudes from inside, the light emitting means A715
The area of the central rotating member A724 when viewed in the optical axis direction of a may be configured to change.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the shell portion A722 interposed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a is rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a predetermined member is linearly moved between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a.

It may be configured to move forward and backward by (sliding movement). Further, the light emitting means A715a may be arranged in the predetermined member.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a is always directed toward the central rotating member A724, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light emitting means A
The optical axis of 715a may be configured to swing around the central rotating member A724, and may be configured to face the central rotating member A724 at a predetermined timing.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the central rotating member A724 and the shell portion A722 are driven by the same drive source, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, separate driving may be used, or the timing of driving by the same drive source and the timing of separate driving may be switched.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap with all of the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, the second rotating member A728 may be formed of a plate-like member formed to cover a plane passing through the rotation axis when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, and may be configured to overlap with the entire optical axis at a timing. In this case, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the influence on the central rotating member A724 due to the attitude of the second rotating member A728 can be increased.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, when the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 changes its posture by 180 degrees, the shape in front view is different, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a shape that remains the same when viewed from the front when the posture changes by 180 degrees. This makes it impossible to recognize the second state and the sixth state of the first rotating member A721 from the difference in shape of the shell portion A722.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the light emitting means A715a is arranged with the optical axis KJ directed on the virtual plane VS, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of planes on which the optical axis KJ is arranged may be set. Moreover, in this case, the plane through which the optical axis KJ passes does not need to pass through the rotation axis of the rotating body A720.

In the twenty-third embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the slide member A2729 is displaced in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A2721 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-back direction, or the light-emitting unit A715 may be configured to be displaceable, and the displacement of the light-emitting unit A715 (not limited to the front-back direction, but also a mixed displacement of front, rear, left, right, top, and The virtual plane VS may also be configured to change depending on the location of the virtual plane VS. In either case, the appearance of the first rotating member A2721 when the light emitting means A715 is turned on is changed while suppressing changes in the external shape (shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 when viewed from the front. be able to.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pin-equipped gear A3462 is connected to the irregularly shaped slide member A455.
Although a case has been described in which a plurality of abutting positions are arranged in the circumferential direction, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the protruding tip of the transmission protrusion A463 with a large diameter, the position where the transmission protrusion A463 abuts the irregularly shaped slide member A455, and the position where the external protrusion A3464 abuts the irregularly shaped slide member A455. It may be configured such that it is shifted in the front-rear direction.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the gear with pin A3462 is attached to the irregularly shaped slide member A455.
Although a case has been described in which the plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 abut at the same position, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the longitudinal direction of the protruding plate portion A456a (direction A416x in rear view)
The pin-equipped gear is further extended along the longitudinal direction from the inner end (the opposite side of the detected plate part A455e), and the wall that is orthogonal to the side surface of the extended part in rear view is a pin-equipped gear. A346
It may be configured to extend to two sides.

In this case, the orthogonal wall portion does not come into contact with the arcuate wall portion A464, and the outer diameter protrusion A464
By arranging it so as to be in contact with the outer diameter protrusion A3464, the pin is suppressed from being displaced in the direction intersecting the direction A416x when the orthogonal wall portion and the outer diameter protrusion A3464 come into contact with each other. A load in the rotational direction (load in the braking direction) can be generated on the attached gear A3462.

Furthermore, by deforming the second guide hole A422b so as to extend in the transverse direction at the longitudinal end (into an L-shape), the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be displaced in a direction intersecting the direction A416x, and the displacement The first displacement member A440 may be configured to be displaced in conjunction with. That is, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 pushed by the outer diameter protrusion A3464 moves into the second guide hole A.
422b, the transmission projection A455b moves in the direction A41.
6x, and the displacement may be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the elongated link A451.

In this case, when the irregularly shaped slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b, the second guide hole A422b and the guided protrusion portion A455c are moved in the direction A416x.
By engaging at , displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 in the direction A416x can be restricted. Thereby, even after the contact between the protruding plate portion A456a and the arcuate wall portion A464 is released, displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 in the direction A416x can be restricted.

Note that the displacement that occurs in the first displacement member A440 when the irregularly shaped slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to cause displacement along direction A416x, or may be configured to cause displacement in a direction intersecting direction A416x.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is described as having a semicircular shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be rectangular, triangular, semi-elliptical, or any arbitrary shape. On the other hand, in consideration of durability, it is preferable that the shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is configured so that it becomes tapered toward the radially outer side (the width does not increase).

Note that this also applies to the case where a recess is formed in place of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. In other words, while the shape may be arbitrary, the diameter tapers toward the inside (width does not increase).
It is preferable that the configuration is as follows.

The shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be symmetrical with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis, or may be asymmetrical. In this case, if the first displacement member A440 is configured in an asymmetrical shape, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed in each direction.

For example, in the rear view of the external protrusion A3464, the side surface of the extending tip side of the arcuate wall portion A464 (the side opposite to the transmission protrusion A463 along the circumference of the arcuate wall portion A464) is closer to the extending proximal end side. (A463 side along the circumference of the circular arc wall A464)
4 may be configured such that the angle with respect to the outer circumferential surface is small.

In this case, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 caused by contact with the outer diameter protrusion A3464 under the condition of rotating the pin gear A3462 at a constant speed is from the extended position to the opposite side of the retracted position.

The speed when displacing toward the retracted position can be increased compared to the speed when displacing toward the side that extends beyond the extended position. That is, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction of displacement.

Note that when the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the side opposite to the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has a protruding shape, the first displacement member A440 may be displaced beyond the extended position to the side opposite to the retracted position. For example, in the case where a recessed portion is formed in place of the external protrusion A3464, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 slides by the dimension of the recessed portion, and the first displacement member A440
An example is a case in which after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position, the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is pushed out and slid onto the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the extended position.

In addition, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position, the outer diameter protrusion A440
3464 is a protruding shape, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the opposite side of the retracted position as the irregularly shaped slide member A455 slides by the protruding dimension, the outer diameter protrusion A3
464 and the irregularly shaped slide member A455 are released, the irregularly shaped slide member A45
An example is a case in which the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the extended position (toward the retracted position) as the external protrusion A3464 slides. As the irregularly shaped slide member A455 is displaced by the dimension of the installation part, the first displacement member A4
A case is illustrated in which 40 is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed closer to the rear plate portion A480, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, main body plate A6561
may be arranged at a position away from the rear plate part A480 (closer to the support box part A6470), and the protrusion part A6562 may be provided to protrude toward the rear plate part A480 side. In addition, the main body plate part A65
61 may be formed into a thin (for example, sheet-like) structure. In this case, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the wiring HC is displaced.

Furthermore, although a case has been described in which the main body plate portion A6561 is formed in an elongated shape, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may be formed into a wide plate shape. In this case, members can be placed between the rear plate part A480 and the wiring HC over a wide range, increasing the possibility that rubbing can be suppressed by synchronously displacing the wiring HC and the main body plate part A6561. can do.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding portion A6562 is fixedly arranged on the main body plate portion A6561, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protruding portion A6562 is held movably in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561, and the protruding portion A
The main body plate portion A6561A may be configured to rotate in response to the displacement of the main body plate A6562. That is, for example, a long hole (groove) through which the protruding portion A6562 is inserted is formed in the main body box portion A471, and the elongated hole (groove) allows the protruding portion A6562 to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561. Accordingly, the main body plate portion A6561 may be formed in a shape that allows rotational displacement. In this case, the arrangement of the wiring guide member A6560 can be appropriately changed depending on the magnitude of the load applied from the wiring HC to the wiring guide member A6560, so that the load generated between the wiring HC and the wiring guide member A6560 can be changed appropriately. can be moderately reduced.

Further, although a case has been described in which the main body plate portion A6561 is rotatably supported, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be one that slides, or one that moves along a path that combines rotation and sliding.

Although a case has been described in which the second displacement member A490 is reciprocated and rotationally displaced, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second displacement member A490 may be slidably displaced, or the second rotating member A490 may be rotationally displaced by one rotation or more.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed on the back side of the support box portion A6470, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, main body plate A
6561 is arranged on the front side of the support box part A6470, and is a through hole (a long hole along an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the main body plate part A6561) that guides the protruding part A6562 to the support box part A6470. may be formed so that the protruding portion A6562 passes through the long through hole and protrudes toward the back side of the support box portion A6470. In this case, the support box part A6470 and the rear plate part A480
Compared to the case where the main body plate part A6561 is disposed between the main body plate part A6561, a space corresponding to the volume of the main body plate part A6561 can be created. This makes it easier to secure a space for the wiring HC to displace, and also improves the degree of freedom in designing the main body plate part A6561 (for example, the gap between the support box part A6470 and the rear plate part A480 (can also be constructed as a thick member).

<First control example>
Next, various control examples applicable to the pachinko machines of each embodiment described above will be explained. First, with reference to FIGS. 389 to 478, a first control example in the pachinko machine of each of the above embodiments will be described. Note that some of the configurations used in this first control example are the same as those in each of the above embodiments and are given different symbols, but this is for the purpose of explaining the invention of this first control example in an easy-to-understand manner. Since the specific contents of the configuration are the same as the corresponding configurations of the above embodiments, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the outline (specifications) of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 in this first control example has a first area (V area) into which a game ball can enter, inside a variable winning device 65, into which a ball can enter when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. , a second area (non-V area) different from the first area, and a sorting device (V (Yakushu) are provided. During the first jackpot, at least one game ball enters (passes) into the first area, and a special symbol probability change state is given after the jackpot ends. When no game ball enters one area, the time-saving state of normal symbols is given until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times at maximum after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed, the game can be played with the expectation that the game balls will be sorted to the first area (V area) by the sorting device (V accessory).

The sorting device (V accessory) is basically maintained in a position that allows game balls to be distributed to the second area (arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first area), and is used for a predetermined round in a jackpot (for example, 5 In the first round), the arrangement is changed so that the game balls can be distributed to the first area only during a specific period (for example, 5 seconds after 5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round). . By letting the game ball enter the specific winning hole 65a during this specific period, it becomes possible to let the game ball enter the first area, and the probability of changing the special symbol that is advantageous for the game state after the end of the jackpot. can be moved to a state.

In addition, in this first control example, an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball can reach the sorting device during a specific period in the fifth round (for example, from 5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 9.5 seconds) The jackpot type (probable variable jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed with the opening/closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds at the elapsed time, and the distribution during the specific period. A specific winning hole is opened in an opening/closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the device (for example, an opening/closing pattern in which the specific winning hole 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the start of the 5th round until 4.5 seconds have elapsed). There is at least a jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed. In the former type of jackpot (probable jackpot), in the fifth round of the jackpot, simply by continuing to shoot the game ball at the specific prize opening (large opening) 65a, the game ball is easily sent to the first area by the sorting device. Since it is possible to distribute the symbols, after the jackpot ends, the special symbols will almost always be in a variable state. On the other hand, in the latter type of jackpot (normal jackpot), even if you continue to shoot the game balls aiming at the specific prize opening (large opening) 65a in the 5th round of the jackpot, all the game balls that reach the sorting device Since it is distributed to the second area, a variable probability state is not given (a time saving state is given).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, when transitioning to the special symbol probability variable state, each time the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to fall to the special symbol low probability state. The configuration is such that a lottery is executed. To explain in more detail, when the lottery conditions for the special symbol are established in the probability variable state of the special symbol, a lottery is first performed to determine whether or not to cause the special symbol to fall to the low probability state (fall probability 1/500). If the corresponding lottery result is obtained, a jackpot lottery is executed with the lottery probability (1/250) in the low probability state of the special symbol, while if the lottery result does not correspond to a fall, the high probability state of the special symbol is executed. The configuration is such that a jackpot lottery is executed at a lottery probability (1/125). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, regardless of whether it is a variable jackpot or a normal jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbol is maintained after the jackpot ends until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times. The structure is such that it is maintained as follows. In other words, if a variable probability jackpot occurs and the variable probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends, it depends on whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall occurs before the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. First, after the end of the jackpot, the normal state of the normal symbols continues until the lottery conditions for the 100th special symbol are met. For this reason, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the operations other than the jackpot probability are almost the same, so it is difficult to determine whether the special symbol is in a low probability state or the special symbol is in a variable probability state. can be made difficult for players to recognize. Therefore, if the previous jackpot was a normal jackpot and the special symbol was in a low probability state after the jackpot ended, or if the previous jackpot was a high probability jackpot but the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Even if the player falls into a low probability state during the period, the player will continue to have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will be in a variable probability state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. You can continue to let it flow. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for playing the game.

In addition, as mentioned above with reference to FIG. It is provided at a position where a ball can enter (a position where a game ball flowing down the channel provided on the left side in a front view is unable (difficult) to enter). That is, a probability variable state in which a time-saving state of a normal symbol is set in which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is easily opened (that is, the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entry port 640); In the time saving state, by firing game balls toward the channel on the right side when viewed from the front, game balls enter the second ball entry port 640 at a high rate (for example, 1 out of 3 balls). Therefore, the game can be played efficiently. On the other hand, in the normal state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is difficult to open (that is, the game ball does not enter the second ball entry port 640). Therefore, the position where the game ball flowing down the channel provided on the left side in front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81 can enter (the position where the game ball flowing down the channel provided on the right side in front view The game is played using a game method in which a game ball is fired aiming at a first ball entry hole (first winning hole) 64 provided at a position where it is impossible (difficult) for the ball to enter. Hereinafter, in order to simplify the explanation, firing the game ball toward the channel on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the third symbol display device 81 will be referred to as "left-handed hitting", and firing the game ball toward the channel on the right side when viewed from the front will be referred to as "left-handed hitting". Shooting a game ball is called "right-handed hitting." In addition, the special symbol lottery that is executed based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance (first prize opening) 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery). The special symbol lottery that is executed based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance (second prize opening) 640 is called the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery). ).

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 389. FIG. 389(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example, and FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents of a symbol display device 81. FIG. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 404), so that, for example, three A pattern row is displayed.

The third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "1" to "9" attached to the rear symbol made of a wooden box, among which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , a large number is added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, for the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8), attached symbols imitating characters such as shields, swords, and cloaks are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box; Small even numbers are added in green to the lower right side of the figure, and are displayed in front of the attached symbols.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 404), which will be described later, is a jackpot (jackpot A to E), if the same main symbol The arrangement is such that a fluctuating display of matching is performed and a jackpot occurs after the fluctuating display ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

Furthermore, if the type of jackpot won is a regular jackpot, a fluctuating display in which the same main symbols with even numbers will always be displayed will be displayed, while if it is a probability variable jackpot, the same main symbols with even numbers will be displayed. Either a fluctuating display in which the characters line up or a fluctuating display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned are executed. In other words, by executing a variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned, not only the jackpot but also the variable probability state after the jackpot is finalized. In addition, in this first control example, the rate at which a variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are executed in the event of a variable jackpot is set to an extremely low probability (for example, a rate of 1%). There is. Thereby, it is possible to make it possible to make it rare that when a jackpot is won, it is possible to know that it is a variable jackpot from the types of symbols that are aligned. As mentioned above, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is maintained (it can be determined from the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a whether it is in the variable probability state or not. Therefore, by configuring it so that it is difficult to determine whether it is a guaranteed variable jackpot based on the type of main symbols that are aligned when winning a jackpot, it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot is won or not until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. During this period, a situation in which it is unclear whether the state is variable probability state or time saving state can occur more frequently. Therefore, whether it is a jackpot with variable probability or a regular jackpot, the player's responsibility for being in a variable probability state from the end of the jackpot until the end of the 100th special symbol drawing is over. It can maintain a sense of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 389(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display for displaying the third symbol when the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner or when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. An area Dm, a small area Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, a small area Ds2 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and a predetermined effect (for example, an interrupt described later). It is constituted by a small area Ds3 for displaying the variable effect of the third symbol in a reduced size while executing the continuous hit effect).

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of balls (reserved balls) for which movement has not been performed among the balls that entered the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol), The small area Ds2 is an area that displays the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed (the number of held balls of the second special symbol) among the balls that entered the second ball entrance 640, and is a small area Ds2. Ds3 is an area where the variable effect is displayed in a reduced size when a display effect different from the variable effect is executed in the main display area. By displaying the variable effect in a reduced size, it is possible to prevent a display effect different from the variable effect from being obscured by the third symbol and becoming difficult to see.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 389(b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display indicating the expectation level of the jackpot is displayed in the background of the third symbol. Performances, etc. are performed.

If a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37A, 37B) is displaying a variable display, the number of times the ball enters the ball is up to four times. The number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37A and also in the small area Ds1. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the number of balls entered is held up to a maximum of 4, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B, and the small area Ds2 It is also shown in In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number of the first special symbol, and in the small region Ds2, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number of the second special symbol. is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 or the small region Ds2, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved pitch number symbols are displayed, This indicates that the number of pending pitches is 4. Further, when the number of reserved balls symbol is not displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 balls, that is, there are no reserved balls. In FIG. 389(b), the case where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 4 and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 is illustrated.

In addition, in this first control example, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is configured to be held up to a maximum of four times each, but the maximum number of balls held is four times. The number of times is not limited to 3, or may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small areas Ds1 and Ds2, the number of reserved balls can be displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four can be displayed for the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (eg, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps in a lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 390 to 403, various types of entertainment performances executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 390 to 393, in the present first control example, the normal symbols are executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) in which the time saving state is set. We will explain the display effects. As mentioned above, in this first control example, after the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving state and the probability changing state. It consists of In other words, whether the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state or the variable probability state, unless a jackpot occurs, the special symbol lottery will be executed 100 times after the previous jackpot ends. Until then, the configuration is such that the time-saving state of normal symbols is maintained. This time-saving state of the normal symbol is maintained even if the special symbol's variable probability state changes to the special symbol's low probability state until it is executed 100 times, so the game set at the end of the jackpot It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify not only the state but also the timing at which the special symbol falls from a variable probability state to a low probability state.

However, if the state of the special symbols of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbol is a variable probability state or a low probability state) is configured to be completely indistinguishable, the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set While this continues, the game becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player's interest in the game may not be sufficiently increased. Therefore, in this first control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to allow the player to predict the probability of the probability change state to some extent. More specifically, each time a variable display of special symbols is executed, one back mode is selected from among three types of back modes that suggest the degree of expectation of the probability change state, taking into consideration the gaming state etc. at the time of execution. The configuration is as follows. As a result, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the state of the special symbol is predicted from the aspect of the back mode, and thus it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

First, with reference to FIG. 390(a), a display mode (back mode) in which the current state is a variable probability state and in which the degree of expectation is relatively low will be described. As shown in FIG. 390(a), when the back mode (cave exploration mode), which is in a variable state and has a relatively low expectation level, is set, a character 801 imitating an adventurer carries a sword and a torch. A display mode for exploring inside the cave is displayed. In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front, the remaining number of drawings for special symbols until the number of drawings that may end the time-saving state of the normal symbol (time-saving state of the normal symbol) is displayed. A horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area 802 for indicating the guaranteed number of times is displayed. In the example of FIG. 390(a), 90 times is displayed as the guaranteed number of times. That is, the state after the special symbol lottery has been executed 10 times after the end of the jackpot is illustrated. Further, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area 803 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front. Inside this display area 803, horizontally elongated, approximately elliptical right-handed images on which the words "right-handed" are displayed are displayed on the left and right, and between these right-handed images, "cave exploration mode" is displayed. is displayed. Due to these display modes, the time saving state of the normal symbol will continue until at least 90 more special symbol draws are executed (the time saving state may end when the 90 drawings are completed); It is possible to easily make the player understand that the game can be played by playing right-handed. In addition, compared to the temple search mode (see Figure 390(b)) and the super temple search mode (see Figure 391), which will be described later, the display content is plain, so players can intuitively understand the It can be made to understand that the possibility that the condition continues is relatively low.

FIG. 390(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when a back mode (temple search mode) in which the current state is a variable probability state and has a higher expectation level than the cave search mode is set. When the temple search mode is set, a display mode in which a character 801 imitating an adventurer searches the temple is displayed, and the characters between the right-click images in the display area 803 indicate "temple search mode". will be changed to The display content in the temple search mode looks brighter than in the cave search mode, and the display format tends to give the player a flashy impression, so the expectation level for the player to be in a certain state is relatively high. can be intuitively understood.

FIG. 391 is a diagram showing a display mode when the back mode (super temple search mode) indicating that the degree of expectation is even higher in the probability variable state than in the temple search mode is set. When this super-temple search mode is set, the word "CHANCE" is displayed on the pillars of the temple, and torches are installed on the pillars of the temple. Further, on the upper left side of the text "temple search mode" in the display area 803, a substantially circular display area 804 in which the text "super" is displayed is displayed. These display modes can give the player a more flashy impression than the temple search mode (see FIG. 390(b)), and can further improve expectations for the variable probability state. This super-temple search mode is a back mode that may be set (shifted to) only when the gaming state is in the variable state and the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state. In other words, when you shift to the super temple search mode, not only is the variable state confirmed, but it is also confirmed that the variable state will continue at least until the pending balls at the time of transition are exhausted, so you can shift to the super temple search mode. By doing so, it is possible to please the players.

In this way, in this first control example, during the game state where the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, the cave exploration mode where the expectation level of the probability variable state is relatively low, and the temple search mode where the expectation level of the probability variation state is relatively high. , and 3 of the super temple search mode, which not only confirms that the state is in a fixed state but also confirms that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the pending state (at least the fixed state continues until the pending state is exhausted). The configuration is such that one of the types of back modes is set at the time of execution of a variable display performance based on the lottery results of special symbols. With this configuration, while the time saving state of the normal symbols is set, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current gaming state from the back mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing. can be improved. In addition, by setting the super temple search mode, it is confirmed that the gaming state is in a variable state, so if the game state is predicted to be in a variable state and the mode shifts to the super temple mode, the player On the other hand, it can make you feel happy that your predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the game transitions to the super temple mode even though it was predicted that the special symbol will be in a low-probability state, the player may feel happy that the game state has been set to be more advantageous than expected. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by setting the super-temple mode, it is guaranteed that lottery results corresponding to falls will not be included in the reservation (at least the lottery results for the number of reserved balls can be executed with variable probability of jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with a stronger expectation of hitting the jackpot while the player is on hold.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 392 and 393, in this first control example, a special symbol is drawn a predetermined number of times (for example, 96 times) without winning the jackpot in a state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. The probability variation continuation suggestion effect that is executed when is executed will be explained. FIG. 392 is a diagram showing the display mode at the start of this probability change continuation suggestion performance. This variable probability continuation suggestion performance is a performance for suggesting whether the gaming state is a variable probability state or not, and is executed from the 96th variable display performance to the 99th variable display performance after the end of the jackpot. That is, this is an effect that is executed until just before the 100th special symbol lottery is executed, which is the guaranteed number of times in the time saving state. In addition, in the present first control example, in the time saving state, the remaining time saving number is subtracted when the special symbol starts changing. That is, in the time saving state, after the end of the jackpot, the number of time saving times becomes 0 at the start of the 100th fluctuating display, so while the 100th fluctuating display is being executed, the time saving state has already ended (transition to the normal state). (completed state). Therefore, even if it is a variable probability state or a shortened time state, it is configured to notify whether or not it is in a variable probability state at the 99th variable display performance in which the shortened time state of normal symbols is surely maintained. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to specify whether or not the variable probability state continues until the result of the probability variation continuation suggestion performance is confirmed (that is, it is difficult to identify whether the variable probability state continues or not from the operation of the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention and play the game by using the probability change continuation suggestion performance.

As shown in FIG. 392, when the probability change continuation suggestion performance is started, a performance in which a door 806 appears in front of a character 801 imitating an adventurer is performed. Further, above the door 806, a display area 805 is displayed in which the words "Door break-through mode starts!!" and the words "Probability change continues if the door is broken through!?" are displayed. Furthermore, the characters displayed between the right-handed images in the display area 803 are changed to "door breakthrough mode." These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if the character 801 is able to break through the door, it means that the variable probability state continues. In this continuous change suggestion production (door breakthrough mode), the effect of attacking the door 806 is executed every time the variable display is executed, and if the door 806 can be destroyed (breakthrough) in the end, the probability change state is reached. An effect is executed that notifies the continuation of.

FIG. 393(a) is a diagram showing a performance mode that suggests that the degree of expectation that the probability change state continues is relatively low in the probability change continuation suggestion production (door breakthrough mode). When this low-expectation performance mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 393(a), a character 801 imitating an adventurer attacks the door 806 by cutting it with a sword, thereby destroying (breaking through) the door 806. ) is executed. On the other hand, FIG. 393(b) is a diagram showing a performance mode that suggests that the degree of expectation that the probability change state continues is relatively high in the probability change continuation suggestion production (door breakthrough mode). When this highly anticipated production mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 393(b), a character 801 imitating an adventurer attacks the door 806 by hitting it with a huge hammer. A performance that attempts to destroy (break through) is executed.

It is intuitively obvious to many players that hitting with a hammer is more effective than cutting with a sword in order to destroy the door 806, so it is better to hit with a hammer. , it is possible to easily make the player understand that there is a high expectation of breaking through the door 806. Therefore, while the probability change continuation suggestion performance is being executed, the player can play the game with the expectation that the performance of hitting the door 806 with a hammer will be executed more times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this first control example, at the start of the probability change continuation suggestion performance, the lottery results from the 96th to the 99th time, which is the execution range of the probability variation continuation suggestion production, are read in advance, and the probability variation state is maintained until the 99th special symbol lottery. It is configured to determine whether or not this continues, and if the variable probability state continues until the 99th special symbol drawing, the selection rate of production scenarios in which highly anticipated attack patterns are likely to occur is increased. . On the other hand, if you fall into a time-saving state before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or you were in a time-shortening state after the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern will occur. The configuration is such that the selection rate of easy-to-play production scenarios is high. In this way, by configuring the performance mode to be set based on the gaming state at the end of the performance, it is possible to more accurately notify the gaming state after the performance ends.

Here, if the configuration is such that the probability variable continuation suggestion performance is executed based only on the gaming state at the start of the production, the probability variation continuation suggestion production will fall to a low probability state while the probability variation continuation suggestion production is being executed, and the continuation of the probability variation state will not be announced. Despite this, there is a possibility that the time saving state will end when the 100th special symbol lottery begins. In this case, there is a possibility that the content of the performance and the actual operation are inconsistent, causing the player to distrust the Pachinko machine 10 and the hall. In addition, as a countermeasure to this problem, it is possible to construct a performance that suggests a definite change continuation by a performance that can be completed with one change, but with this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient performance period, so the production mode may be varied. It becomes difficult to become

On the other hand, in this first control example, the variable continuation suggestion performance is executed over the last four fluctuation displays in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed, and the notification content of the probability change continuation suggestion performance is , is configured to be determined based on the gaming state at the time when the last special symbol lottery in the execution range of the variable probability continuous performance is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately notify the gaming state at the end of the performance, and it is possible to diversify the performance modes. In addition, if the probability is variable at the start of the performance and there are no reserved balls until the end of the performance, the system is configured so that a performance in which an attack pattern with a relatively high expectation level is likely to occur is selected. ing. This is because the probability of a lottery result corresponding to a fall is lower than the probability of a jackpot, and it is extremely rare for a symbol to fall to a low probability state of a special symbol within the production period (with a relatively high probability of a probability change state). This is because the performance ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 394, the transition of various states after the end of the probability variable jackpot in the first control example will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 394(a), a description will be given of the state transition in the case where the probability variable jackpot falls to a low probability state within 100 times after the end of the probability variable jackpot. As shown in Figure 394(a), if the player falls within 100 times, the state will shift to the special symbol low probability state at the time of the fall, but in the normal symbol time saving state, the special symbol lottery will be executed 100 times. It will continue until it is done. Then, in the variable continuation suggestion performance executed from the 96th to the 99th variable display performance, a performance that fails to break through the door 806 is performed, and a shift to the normal state is notified.

On the other hand, FIG. 394(b) is a diagram showing the state transition in the case where the lottery falls to the low probability state of the special symbol in the 100th special symbol lottery after the end of the probability-variable jackpot. As shown in FIG. 394(b), if the jackpot falls 100 times or later after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbol and the variable probability state of the special symbol are maintained until it falls. For this reason, in the probability variable continuation suggestion performance that is executed from the 96th to the 99th execution period of the variable display, a production that successfully breaks through the door 806 is executed to notify the continuation of the probability variable state.

In addition, in this first control example, in the same way as when you fall in the special symbol lottery after the 100th time, even if you hit the jackpot in the special symbol lottery during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the normal symbol will be returned at the start of the variation. It is configured such that the time saving state of the symbol ends. Therefore, if the time saving state is ended before the special symbol has been drawn less than 100 times (that is, within the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state), the winning of the jackpot is confirmed at that point. On the other hand, if the time saving state is terminated after the 100th time (that is, after the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state has elapsed), it means either a jackpot or a fall. And, since the probability of winning the jackpot (1/125) is higher than the probability of falling (1/500), even if the time saving state ends at the start of the fluctuation after 100 times, it will still be a jackpot. can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while paying attention to whether or not the time-saving state continues, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 395, the press stop effect in the first control example will be described. This press-stop performance is a performance in which each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the lens member (PUSH button) 10317 provided on the swinging operation member 10310 is pressed. In other words, this is an effect in which the stop timing of each symbol row can be set to any timing desired by the player, depending on the timing of the operation of the PUSH button 10317 by the player.

FIG. 395(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the press stop effect. In this press stop effect, as shown in FIG. 395(a), button images imitating the PUSH button 10317 (left button image 807aL, center button image 807aC, right button image 807aR) is displayed. Further, below each button image, a validity period gauge (left validity period gauge 807bL, center validity period gauge 807bC, right validity period gauge 807bR) indicating the remaining period during which the stop operation for each symbol row is valid is displayed. . These display contents allow the player to easily understand that each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed.

FIG. 395(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the player performs the first operation (press) on the PUSH button 10317 while the press stop effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 395(b), when the first operation (press) is executed, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the second operation is executed within the operation validity period, the right symbol column is stopped and displayed, and when the third operation is executed, the center symbol column is stopped and displayed. In this way, by configuring the timing of symbol stopping to be arbitrarily determined by the player, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the structure is such that each symbol row is stopped and displayed according to the timing of the player's operation, if the player operates too quickly, there may be too much time left after all the symbol rows are stopped. As a countermeasure for this, in this first control example, if the stop operation is executed three times early (for example, within 1 second after the start of the validity period), the central symbol row will not be immediately stopped and displayed. By configuring the central symbol row to be stopped and displayed after a specific performance, the period after the stoppage display is suppressed from being too long. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 396(a), based on the third operation (press) being performed, a plurality of symbols (designs with the words Chance Charge) containing a specific symbol (a symbol with the words Chance Charge) are displayed. After the symbols (3) have moved up and down in the central symbol row (i.e., after suggesting that any of the three symbols may be displayed as a stop symbol in the central symbol row), a specific symbol It is configured to execute a performance (chance charge promotion performance) in which symbols other than the (chance charge symbol) are stopped and displayed. In this way, depending on the length of the remaining operation validity period at the time of performing the stop operation of the center symbol row (the third press of the PUSH button 10317), the center symbol row will be immediately stopped and displayed, or the chance charge will be applied. By adopting a configuration that switches whether or not to fill the time with an inciting effect, it is possible to prevent the state in which all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed from becoming unnaturally long. Therefore, a more natural presentation mode can be realized.

In addition, in this first control example, there is also a separate effect of a pattern in which the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed in the center symbol column in the press stop effect. In this case, the chance charge symbols are stopped and displayed through the chance charge promotion effect (see FIG. 396(a)), regardless of the timing at which the stop operation for the central symbol row is executed. When this stop display of the chance charge symbol occurs, it develops into a chance charge effect (see FIG. 396(b)), which will be described later. By setting a performance pattern in which the chance charge symbol is actually stopped and displayed, even if the operation stop performance is selected as a mere missed performance and a chance charge stimulation performance occurs, there is a possibility that it will develop into a chance charge performance. It is possible to make the player think that there is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 396(b) and FIG. 397, the mode of performance of the above-mentioned chance charge performance will be explained. FIG. 396(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the chance charge performance is started. When the chance charge effect is started, a character 801 imitating an adventurer is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the character 801 is set in a manner in which the surroundings are emitted light (in a manner covered with an aura). be done. Further, to the right of the character 801, a vertically elongated substantially rectangular spirit gauge KG is displayed. This spirit gauge KG is for displaying the level of spirit accumulated in the character 801 in a meter format, and can be displayed in 1 to 6 levels. Furthermore, in a display area 805 displayed above the character 801, the words ``The more spirit you have, the more chances you have in stock'' are displayed. Furthermore, the words "Chance Charge 5 times remaining" are displayed in the display area 803. In the 1st chance charge effect, the character 801 attempts to accumulate spirit five times, and the amount of spirit accumulated is determined by the size of the light around the character 801 (the amount of aura it surrounds) and the spirit gauge KG. It is notified by the meter amount. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that the more motivated the player is, the better things will be.

FIG. 397(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the chance charge performance. As shown in FIG. 397(a), in addition to the size of the light surrounding the character 801 (amount of aura surrounding the character) and the meter amount of the spirit gauge KG, the level of spirit accumulated is also determined by the characters displayed in the display area 805. will be notified. The example in FIG. 397(a) illustrates a state in which the spirit has accumulated to the 5th stage out of 6, and the display area 805 displays the words "Charge level 5!!". These display contents allow the player to easily understand the amount of spirit that has finally been accumulated.

Note that the spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge performance is consumed in order to generate some kind of chance-up performance at each timing until the reserved balls are exhausted at the start of the chance charge performance. Chance-up effects are effects that increase the expectation of a jackpot, such as changes in the display format of the number of reserved pitches, the occurrence of so-called pseudo-runs, the occurrence of cut-in effects, and changes in lines written in red. Occurrence, etc. Note that the spirit gauge is configured so that it is always consumed until it reaches 0. In other words, it is configured so that it will not be discarded without being consumed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, the amount of the spirit gauge KG accumulated in the chance charge performance is determined mainly based on the number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge performance. After the chance charge performance ends, the pace at which the chance up performance is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is varied by taking into consideration the lottery results of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load (processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge performance.

FIG. 397(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when consuming the spirit gauge. In FIG. 397(b), a case is illustrated in which one gauge of the spirit gauge is consumed and a so-called pending change performance is executed as a chance-up performance. That is, as shown in FIG. 397(b), at the same time that the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG decreases (is consumed) by one gauge, the display mode of the third reserved ball number pattern Hz3 in the small area Ds1 changes from white to blue. A production that changes (increases expectations) is executed. In this way, by configuring a structure in which some kind of effect (chance up effect) that increases the expectation of winning is executed as the amount of the spirit gauge KG decreases, it is possible to , the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 398, a description will be given of a change over time in the display mode (presentation mode) in the variable display presentation in which the press stop presentation is set. First, with reference to FIG. 398(a), in a press stop performance that does not develop into a chance charge performance, if the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is performed after 1 second from the start of the validity period. We will explain the changes over time in the performance mode. As shown in FIG. 398(a), when a variable display is executed in which only the press stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed), the normal A fluctuating display (a fluctuating display in which each symbol row simply fluctuates at high speed in the vertical direction) is executed, and when 6 seconds have elapsed, a press stop effect (see FIG. 395(a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed after 1 second (in the example of Fig. 398(a), 2 seconds have elapsed) after the effective period of the press-down stop effect starts, the left symbol row that has already been stopped , and in addition to the right symbol row, the center symbol row is displayed in a pseudo-stop display. Note that the pseudo stop display means that the display is displayed in a manner that is difficult to distinguish from the final stop display (for example, in a manner that vibrates with an extremely small amplitude). This pseudo stop continues until the stop display timing of the original variable display (timing at which a stop command is received from the main controller 110), and each symbol row is completely stopped and displayed when the stop display timing is reached.

Next, referring to FIG. 398(b), in the press stop performance that does not develop into a chance charge performance, the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed within 1 second or less from the start of the valid period. We will explain how the presentation mode changes over time when the game is played. As shown in FIG. 398(b), when a variable display in which only the press stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, the normal The variable display is executed, and when 6 seconds have elapsed, the press stop effect (see FIG. 395(a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed within 1 second or less after the effective period of the press stop effect starts (0.5 seconds have elapsed in the example of FIG. 398(b)), the chance charge excitement effect is executed. After (see FIG. 396(a)) is executed, an effect is executed in which a combination of missing symbols is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. As a result, even if the stop operation is executed 3 times relatively early after the start of the validity period, the period until the stop display can be bridged (filled) by the chance charge inciting effect, so there will be no missed symbols. The transition of the performance mode until the stop display can be made to look natural. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance mode that makes the player feel less uncomfortable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 398(c), a description will be given of changes over time in the performance mode when the chance charge performance develops. As shown in FIG. 398(c), even when the chance charge performance develops, the transition of the performance mode is the same as when the chance charge performance is not performed until the press stop performance is executed. In the variable display in which the chance charge effect is set, when the stop operation is executed three times in the press stop effect, the chance charge excitement effect (Figure 396(a) ) occurs, and then, after 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, it develops into a chance charge performance.

In this way, in this first control example, even in a variable display in which only the press stop effect is set, the chance charge promotion effect can be executed depending on the end timing of the stop operation, so that the chance charge effect is executed. It is possible to create a feeling of anticipation for more times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 399 to 401, an explanation will be given of an interrupt continuous hit performance, which is a type of entertainment performance in the first control example. This interrupting continuous hit performance is a display style performance that appears as if a performance different from the display performance that had been displayed up to that point suddenly interrupts the normal fluctuating display or during the reach fluctuation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 399(a), the image of the normal variable display effect is executed by executing the interrupt continuous hit effect during the execution of the normal variable display effect (see FIG. 389(b)). A cut-in area CR is formed (displayed) in which the monster's face is displayed in close-up, superimposed on (on the layer on the near side). That is, as shown in FIG. 399(a), a display area (cut-in area CR) formed in a band shape extending downward from the upper left side to the lower right side on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. . As shown in FIG. 399(a), this cut-in region CR has a display range that occupies approximately 70% of the display screen area of the third symbol display device 81, and a monster is modeled in the center of the cut-in region CR. The image will be enlarged and displayed. Further, a display area 805 in which the words "Monster group assault!!" is displayed is displayed (formed) above the image imitating a monster in the cut-in area CR. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that a completely different performance has been performed (interrupted) from the performance that was being performed until the cut-in area CR was displayed. can be done. While the cut-in area CR is being formed (that is, while the interrupt continuous hit effect is being executed), the display effect that has been being executed immediately before is interrupted. That is, all the display performances of the layer on the back side of the cut-in area CR are temporarily stopped, and when the interrupt continuous hit performance ends, the performance mode is restarted from the state at the time of interruption. Note that with regard to audio (music), it is possible to switch between pausing (interrupting) and continuing playback depending on the situation. In this first control example, when an interrupt continuous hit effect is executed during execution of a normal variable display, both the display mode and the audio mode are controlled to be interrupted until the end of the interrupt continuous touch effect, If an interrupting continuous hit effect is executed after a reach has occurred (while the reach is changing), only the display mode is interrupted. This is because more flashy music (BGM) is played after a reach occurs than during normal fluctuation display, so the interruption of the relatively flashy BGM creates a sense of discomfort for the player. The purpose is to prevent people from harboring children.

After the interrupt continuous press effect is executed and the cut-in area CR in which an image resembling a monster, etc. is displayed is formed, the player is prompted to press the PUSH button 10317 continuously (repeat press). The display mode is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 399(b), a button image BG imitating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in the cut-in area CR, and below it, a button image BG indicating that the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is valid is displayed. A gauge image GG showing the remaining period in a gauge format is displayed. Additionally, above the button image BG, the words "Continuous Hit" and images of three arrows pointing toward the PUSH button image BG are displayed. Furthermore, the words "Reduce monsters by hitting them repeatedly!!" are displayed in the display area 805, and a display area 808 is formed on the right side of the button image BG, in which the words "100 monsters remain" are displayed ( Is displayed. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that the more the PUSH button 10317 is pressed within the effective period of consecutive hits, the more the number of monsters can be reduced.

In addition, in this first control example, a plurality of types are provided as the types of interrupt continuous hit effects, which differ at least in the number of monsters that can be reduced during the valid continuous hit period (the lower limit of the remaining number of monsters to be displayed). It is being Basically, the system is configured such that the more monsters are defeated (the fewer the number of remaining monsters), the higher the expectation of a jackpot. More specifically, if an interrupt continuous hit effect is set for the fluctuating display of a jackpot, it is a type of effect that makes it possible to defeat all 100 monsters (reducing the number of remaining monsters to 0). While the mode can be selected, the variable display of failures is configured so that it is impossible to reduce the number of monsters to 0 (the number can only be reduced to 3 at most).

Note that in the first control example, the number of monsters to be subdued (subtracted) by pressing the PUSH button 10317 once is configured to be varied according to the length of the remaining validity period. More specifically, the configuration is such that the longer the remaining validity period, the fewer the number of subjugations (number of subtractions) due to one press. With this configuration, even if a player is playing a game with a fast pace of consecutive hits, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being decremented to the lower limit early after the start of the performance.

Here, conventionally, as a type of entertainment performance, there has been known an operation performance in which the performance mode is changed by continuously operating an operating means such as an operation button for a predetermined period of time. In this operation production, an upper limit value for the number of times the production mode can be changed (development number) is generally set for each production, and by increasing the number of operations to a specific number, the development mode can be varied up to the upper limit. Things were normal. However, in a production with such specifications, when a player with a fast operation speed is playing the game, the production reaches its upper limit stage (variable) at an early stage. There is a problem in that, if the game is at a stage where the player's interest is shown, the player's interest may be lost. Furthermore, if a player with a slow operation speed is playing the game, even though he/she is actively operating the game, the player may not be able to perform the operation the specified number of times to develop the upper limit development mode. There is a possibility that the validity period will end and the player's interest will be lost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the number of monsters to be defeated (subtracted) by one press is varied according to the length of the remaining validity period, and the longer the remaining validity period, the more Since the configuration is configured so that the number of monsters to be defeated is small, even if the button is pressed at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the monsters from being defeated to the lower limit number at an early stage. That is, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the number of monsters based on the presses being stopped at the remaining 10 monsters or the remaining 4 monsters, which are likely to be set in the event of a loss, and the player's expectations for a jackpot are reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, even if a player is playing the game with a slow pressing pace, if the player presses the button in the latter half of the effective period, a relatively large number of monsters to be defeated will be more likely to be selected, so the player can reach the target number within the lower limit of the number of monsters. possibility can be increased. Therefore, even a player who presses at a slow pace can be entertained by the interrupting continuous hit effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 400(a), in a performance where continuous operation of the PUSH button 10317 is effective, such as an interrupt continuous press production, the operation (pressing) of the PUSH button 10317 is performed within the validity period of the continuous press of the production. The output mode of the audio that is output every time it is detected will be explained. As shown in FIG. 400(a), each time a press (operation) of the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the valid period of repeated presses, the audio data is played back in the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 423), which will be described later. Audio data corresponding to the press is played back to either CN2 or CN3 among the plurality of channels provided. More specifically, when a press is detected for the first time during the valid continuous press period, first audio data (first continuous press sound) is reproduced for CN2. As shown in FIG. 400(a), the audio data corresponding to the first continuous hit sound is composed of audio data that, when reproduced, outputs the sound "bishee". Further, when a second press is detected during the valid continuous press period, second audio data (second continuous press sound) is played back to CN3. As shown in FIG. 400(a), the audio data corresponding to the second continuous hit sound is composed of audio data that, when reproduced, outputs the sound "Bashii". From then on, every time a press is detected, the control for reproducing the audio data corresponding to the first repeated tapping sound for CN2 and the control for reproducing the audio data corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound for CN3 are alternately performed. repeated. In this way, by configuring the configuration to output audio data corresponding to a different audio each time a press is detected, it is possible to diversify audio modes during repeated tapping. In other words, since it is possible to prevent the sound form from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game during the continuous play valid period. In addition, if the configuration is such that the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are simply played back alternately on a single channel (in other words, the output of one sound being played is stopped and the output of the other sound is controlled). Compared to the case where the repeating configuration is used), it is possible to output the other sound while maintaining the state in which one sound is output (the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output in duplicate) ), it is possible to make the sound mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. To be more specific, when a single channel is configured to alternately play the first consecutive hit sound and the second consecutive hit sound, when a player who plays the consecutive hits quickly performs a repeated tapping operation, the first part of each audio data is This results in a monotonous sound pattern in which only the words are repeated alternately. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that multiple channels play multiple pieces of audio data in sequence, the output of one piece of audio data played on one channel will not be interrupted, and other audio data will be played on other channels. can be played. In other words, a voice based on one voice data and a voice based on another voice data can be synthesized and output. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the first part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify sound modes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Note that in this first control example, each time a press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected, two types of audio data are alternately reproduced on two channels, thereby diversifying the audio format. The configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of audio data are sequentially and alternately reproduced on CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify audio modes. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the configuration may be such that the audio data is sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. With this configuration, from the time one audio data is played for one channel until the next audio data is played for the same channel (the audio data being played ends) Since the period of time can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify audio modes. Furthermore, the type of audio data to be output may be changed depending on the interval between successive hits. Specifically, for example, if a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between successive hits (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less), three types of audio modes are sequentially played on three channels. On the other hand, if a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between successive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data may be sent sequentially to two channels. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the information is reproduced (alternately). With this configuration, it is possible to vary the output mode of the sound according to the interval between consecutive hits, so it is possible to realize a game in which the interval between consecutive hits is adjusted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In this first control example, the configuration is such that one of the consecutive tapping sounds is output in conjunction with the multiple tapping operation, but under certain conditions, the configuration may be such that the multiple tapping sound can be output even if the multiple tapping operation is not performed. . More specifically, for example, if the last repeated tapping sound output during the effective period of the repeated tapping operation is the first repeated tapping sound, a configuration may be adopted in which the second repeated tapping sound is output after the end of the repeated tapping sound. With this configuration, even though the first consecutive tapping sound and the second consecutive tapping sound are output as a set in response to the multiple tapping operation, the last sound output is the first consecutive tapping sound. (In other words, the second continuous hit sound that becomes the pair is no longer output), and it is possible to prevent the sound form from becoming half-finished. Therefore, the audio mode can be set more suitably. In this case, when the last repeated tapping sound is the first repeated tapping sound, the control for outputting the second repeated tapping sound after the end is controlled by the variable display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during execution of jackpot fluctuation). With this configuration, for players who wish to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last repeated hit sound output during an interrupt repeated hit presentation can be made the first repeated hit sound. It is possible to realize the gameplay. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, the first consecutive hit sound and the second consecutive hit sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between consecutive hits by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a repeated tapping operation is detected while no sound is being played, the first repeated tapping sound may be always output. In other words, if the interval between repeated hits is so long that the next repeated hit operation is executed after the first repeated hit sound has finished playing, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible for players who wish to diversify the audio formats to perform repeated tapping operations at a faster pace, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the interrupting repeated tapping performance. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 400(b), a description will be given of the correspondence between the press timing during the continuous hit valid period of the interrupt continuous hit effect and the subtracted number of monsters. In the example shown in FIG. 400, a description will be given by taking as an example the correspondence relationship in a type of interrupt continuous hit performance that makes it possible to defeat up to 100 monsters. FIG. 400(b) is a graph showing the correspondence between the elapsed time (horizontal axis) at the time when the press of the PUSH button 10317 is detected and the number of monsters defeated (vertical axis). As shown in FIG. 400(b), the later the timing of the press, the greater the number of monsters to be subtracted (the number of subdued monsters). Thereby, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being defeated quickly to the lower limit number. That is, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the number of monsters based on the presses being stopped at the remaining 10 monsters or the remaining 4 monsters, which are likely to be set in the event of a loss, and the player's expectations for a jackpot are reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, even if a player is playing the game with a slow pressing pace, if the player presses the button in the latter half of the effective period, a relatively large number of monsters to be defeated will be more likely to be selected, so the player can reach the target number within the lower limit of the number of monsters. possibility can be increased. Therefore, even a player who presses at a slow pace can be entertained by the interrupting continuous hit effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the correspondence between the press timing and the subtracted number of monsters is not limited to that shown in FIG. 400(b), and can be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, by reducing the slope (for example, halving) the correspondence shown in FIG. It can be made more difficult to subtract monsters until it becomes. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player play the repeated hits more seriously, it is possible to further increase the player's desire to participate in the interrupt repeated hitting performance. On the other hand, if the slope is increased, it will be relatively easy to subtract the number of monsters until the minimum number of monsters is reached by repeated hits, so even players who are not good at continuous hits will be able to reduce the number of monsters to the minimum. This allows easy confirmation. Therefore, even players who are not good at continuous play can be encouraged to actively participate in the interrupt continuous play performance. In addition, in this first control example, the correspondence between the press timing and the number of monsters to be subtracted was configured to be a proportional relationship (linear function), but it may also be a quadratic function or a logarithmic function. A designer can set any correspondence relationship such as a correspondence relationship or an exponential correspondence relationship. Further, the correspondence relationship may be configured to differ depending on the type of performance of the interrupt continuous hit performance. With this configuration, it is possible to realize a gameplay that allows the player to predict the expected jackpot based on the change in the number of subtractions in consecutive hits, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 401, a description will be given of changes over time in the performance mode during execution of the variable display performance in which the interrupt continuous hit performance is set. First, with reference to FIG. 401(a), a change over time in the performance mode during execution of the variable display performance in which the interrupt continuous hit performance is not executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 401(a), when a variable effect for which an interrupt continuous hit effect is not set is executed, a normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds. Then, while the normal variable display is being executed, the variable display BGM (song 1) corresponding to the normal variable display is played in a loop. This song 1 is made up of three melody parts: A part, B part, and C part, and by loop playback for 10 seconds, it will be at exactly the last playback position after 10 seconds. It is composed of

Then, as shown in FIG. 401(a), normal reach occurs after 10 seconds have elapsed, and the display mode changes to a normal reach variation display mode. When this normal reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 401(a), the audio is switched to BGM (song 2) corresponding to the normal reach variation. Similarly to song 1, this song 2 is also loop-played, so that the playback time is set so as to end at the same time as the normal reach effect.

On the other hand, in the variable display effect in which the interrupting continuous hit effect occurs before the normal reach effect occurs, as shown in FIG. , the normal fluctuating display performance is interrupted, and an interrupt continuous hit performance is started (interrupted). When the interrupt continuous hit performance is executed, not only the display mode (normal fluctuating display performance) but also the sound (normal fluctuating display BGM) is interrupted. Then, when 9 seconds have passed since the start of the variation (7 seconds have passed since the start of the interrupt continuous hit performance), the interrupt continuous hit performance is ended, and the normal variable display performance and variable display BGM are resumed from the interrupted point. Thereafter, at a timing when 17 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the normal fluctuation display is ended and a normal reach occurs. That is, the normal reach occurs after the normal variable display is executed for a total of 10 seconds. After it develops into normal reach, the transition of the display mode is the same as that in the variable display in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set (see FIG. 401(a)), so the explanation thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, in the variable display effect in which the interrupting continuous hit effect occurs after the normal reach effect occurs, as shown in Figure 401(c), after the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds, the area develops into the reach effect. The process up to this point is the same as the transition of the display mode of the variable display effect (see FIG. 401(a)) in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set. Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the normal reach effect develops, the normal reach effect is interrupted and an interrupt continuous hit effect is executed for 7 seconds. Then, when the 7-second interrupt continuous hit performance ends, the interrupted normal reach performance is resumed. In addition, when the interrupt continuous hit performance is executed after the occurrence of reach, only the display mode is interrupted, and the audio output mode is maintained as it is. In other words, while maintaining the reproduction of the BGM for the reach effect, the BGM for the interrupt continuous hit effect is played on other channels (for example, CN2 to CN4). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the relatively lively BGM for the reach performance from suddenly cutting off and making the player feel uncomfortable.

In this first control example, the types of fluctuations in which normal reach occurs are normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds (missing normal reach A, winning normal reach A), and normal reach with a fluctuation time of 37 seconds (missing normal reach B, winning normal reach B). ) is provided. That is, different variation types with different variation times are set for 7 seconds, which is the performance time of the interrupt continuous hit performance. The interrupt continuous hit performance is configured such that whether or not it can be executed is determined by lottery only when the variation type is such that the variation time is 37 seconds. With this configuration, by combining the production mode that can be set for a 30-second variation pattern (30 seconds worth of production modes) and the production mode of the interrupt continuous hit production, it is possible to create a variation time of exactly 37 seconds. can be filled. That is, when the interrupt continuous hit performance is set, there is no need to provide a dedicated performance mode, so display data and audio data can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Similarly, multiple types with different variation times of 7 seconds are set for the variation type that does not cause reach and the variation type that develops to super reach, but the interrupt continuous hit performance is the variation type that is longer by 7 seconds. The configuration is such that it can be set only for . As a result, the memory capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased because it is possible to exactly fill the 7 seconds long variation time by simply combining the production mode that can be selected in the variation type that is short for 7 seconds and the production mode of the interrupt continuous hit production. It is possible to suitably perform the performance without any problems.

Here, although the details will be described later, in this first control example, as the special symbol lottery is executed, the variation time of the first symbol to indicate the special symbol lottery result is determined by the lottery in the main controller 110. The determined variation time is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 selects a variable display effect with a performance period that matches the variable time notified by the variable pattern command, synchronizes it with the variable display of the first symbol, and synchronizes the variable display effect of the third symbol with the variable display effect of the third symbol. It is configured to execute. The variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic variation time and an additional time command indicating the additional variation time. The configuration is such that the notification whether or not is made is provided by an additional time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as a basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as an additional variation time. Be notified. On the other hand, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as an additional variation time. . In other words, it is configured such that it is possible to identify whether the variation type is longer by 7 seconds or not based on the notification content of the additional time command. Thereby, by simply checking the contents of the additional time command, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a variation type for the lottery to determine whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hit performance. In addition, when it is decided to execute an interrupt continuous hit performance, by setting the performance mode corresponding to the variation time (7 seconds shorter variation time) notified by the basic time command, it is possible to fill the variation time exactly. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the performance mode and the end timing of the variable display performance without preparing a performance mode exclusively for the interrupt continuous hit performance, so that a suitable performance mode can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 402 and 403, a pending batch change effect, which is a type of entertainment effect in the first control example, will be described. This hold batch change performance is a performance that may be executed when there are multiple held balls, and at least some of the held ball number symbols among the multiple held ball number symbols are This is an effect that changes the display mode to a highly anticipated display based on the operation. In FIGS. 402 to 403, there are four reserved balls, and the second reserved ball number symbol Hz2 has been changed to a blue display mode, and the third reserved pitch number symbol Hz3 has been changed to a green display format. , a case where a pending batch change effect is executed will be explained as an example. In addition, the display mode of the number of reserved balls symbols is configured such that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white, blue, green, and red. Basically, the display mode of the number of reserved balls symbol is, when a starting winning (ball entering into the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entering port 640) is detected, various types of winnings obtained based on the starting winning. Determined based on a random value (counter value). To be more specific, from the various random numbers obtained at the time of starting winnings, the success or failure when the special symbol lottery is executed and the type of fluctuation are predicted (pre-read) in advance, and the prediction result (pre-read result) is Based on the lottery probability, a lottery is performed to determine which display mode the reserved ball number symbol should be set to. In this lottery, control is performed such that the higher the expectation level is for the pre-read result corresponding to the lottery result, the higher the rate of setting the reserved ball number symbol in the form with the higher expectation level. In addition, since the timing of the start winning is variable depending on the player's gaming situation (pace of firing of game balls, etc.), the hold batch change performance is executed independently of the variable display performance. . That is, it is a performance that may be executed across the variable periods of a plurality of variable display effects (or may be executed within one variable period).

FIG. 402(a) is a diagram showing the display mode at the time when the pending batch change effect is executed. This pending batch change performance may be executed when a plurality of pending balls are present at the time when a new starting winning is detected. When the pending batch change effect is executed, first, the pending change character HC indicating the start of the pending batch change effect is displayed within the frame from above the display screen. As shown in FIG. 402(a), this pending change character HC is displayed in a manner in which the portion corresponding to the face resembles the PUSH button 10317. By the display mode of this pending change character HC, it is possible to suggest to the player in advance that an effect of pressing the PUSH button 10371 will be executed.

After the pending change character HC appears (enters the frame), as shown in FIG. 402(b), all of the pending ball number symbols Hz1 to Hz4 are changed to a display mode imitating a rock. That is, the expectation level (display color of the pending pitch number symbol) indicated by the pending pitch number symbol is temporarily changed to a hidden state. Further, a speech bubble image FG imitating a speech bubble is displayed above the reservation change character HC, and within the speech balloon image FG are displayed the words "Place rank UP with button PUSH!?". With this display mode, it is possible for the player to easily understand that by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the expectation level (display color) of any one of the pending ball count symbols will improve. can.

FIG. 403(a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the player presses the PUSH button 10317 during execution of the pending batch change effect. As shown in FIG. 403(a), when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, all the rocks around the number of reserved balls, which had been changed to a rock-like display, burst away, and the normal number of reserved balls are displayed. An effect that returns to the display mode of several symbols is executed. Further, at this time, the expectation level indicated by at least some of the reserved pitch number symbols increases compared to before the occurrence of the reserved batch change effect. In the example of FIG. 403(a), the second pending ball number symbol Hz2, which was set in the blue display mode before the execution of the pending batch change performance, has been changed to the red display format after the pending batch change production. It shows the case.

By executing this pending batch change performance, it is determined that the expectation level indicated by at least one pending ball number symbol increases, so that the player's expectation for a jackpot can be improved. In addition, since it is not known which pending ball number symbol will change (expectation level will increase) until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is fun to see which pending ball number symbol will change. can be made to do so. Further, since the expectation level is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the timing of notification can be adjusted to the timing desired by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

FIG. 403(b) shows a state in which the pending change character HC (mini character) fades out of the screen during the effective period of the pending batch change effect. When the pending change character HC fades out of the screen, even if the operation valid period in the pending batch change performance remains, the valid period is interrupted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 403(b), even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317, the effect (see FIG. 403(a)) in which the expectation level of each pending ball number symbol changes will be executed. There isn't. This effect in which the mini-character is absent is executed, for example, when the pending batch change effect conflicts with another operation effect that involves an operation on the PUSH button 10317. By the absence of the pending change character HC corresponding to the pending batch change performance, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the valid operation period has been temporarily interrupted. Therefore, in the pending batch change performance, it is possible to prevent the user from operating the PUSH button 10317 under the misunderstanding that it is valid, and from feeling dissatisfied with the lack of progress in the performance. Therefore, a more suitable performance mode can be realized.

<Electrical configuration in first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 404. FIG. 404 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 405) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 405, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, etc. used in

For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a special winning type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol, A stop type counter C3 used to select a stop type, a fall lottery counter C4 used for a fall lottery from a special symbol probability change state, a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select a fluctuation pattern, and a special hit random number counter. An initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of C1 is used. Further, a normal winning random number counter C5 is used for drawing the normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 425), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 434). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a consisting of four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). The values of the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are respectively stored in accordance with the timing. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas), and each of these areas has access to the second ball entrance 640. The values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variable type counter CS1 are respectively stored in accordance with the entry timing. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball execution area, in which a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a falling lottery counter C4, and a fluctuation lottery target are provided in the RAM 203. Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Furthermore, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4), and game balls are stored in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is stored in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry gate (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The special winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 999, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 999. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 434).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and when a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the value is updated. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot counter C1 is If it matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for times when the probability of the special symbol is low (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the probability is high that the probability of the special symbol becoming a jackpot is higher than when the probability is low (for the special symbol). It is divided into two types: one for the period in which the symbol is in a variable probability state, and the number of random numbers that become a jackpot included in each type is set to be different (see FIG. 407(a)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the special winning type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the value is updated. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (the special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not in progress). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (or in the special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not in progress). ).

Here, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is not a random number that will result in a jackpot of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a miss of the special symbol, the first symbol will be displayed. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. is for when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the special win type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that result in a special symbol jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability times. (See FIG. 407(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 4 out of a total of 1000 random numbers, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/250". Note that the random number value (counter value) that results in a jackpot is the same for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are eight random numbers that will result in a special symbol jackpot, and the values "4 to 11" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability ( Figure 407(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 8 out of the total number of random numbers of 1000, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/125".

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 408(b), when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot and the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "jackpot A" (15 The round is sure to be a jackpot). Also, when the value is "10-49", the jackpot type is "Jackpot B" (5 round probability variable jackpot), and when the value is "50-99", the jackpot type is "Jackpot C". (5 rounds normal jackpot).

On the other hand, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol and the value of the special win type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the jackpot type is "jackpot D" (15 round probability variable jackpot). Further, when the value is "80 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot E" (15 round normal jackpot).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects one jackpot type from among five jackpot types (jackpots A to E) depending on the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the special win type counter C2. configured to be determined.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 250). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type of the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Stop types include, for example, after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops before or after the reach symbol by one position, or "out-of-front reach," or after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops before or after the reach symbol. ``Reach other than front/back off'' which stops at a point other than ``reach'' or ``complete off'' where reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (the special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not in progress). In addition, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (or the special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not in progress). Stored.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The rough display mode of so-called normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed pattern fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 434) to be described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Note that the fluctuation pattern table 202b (see FIG. 409(a)) that stores a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is set in.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 409 and 410. FIG. 409(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 409(a), the variation pattern selection table 202b in the first control example is a symbol variation selection table 202b for indicating the lottery result of a special symbol when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. The normal table 202b1 is referred to to determine the variation time, and when a special symbol lottery is executed in a gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (probable variation state and time saving state), the symbol variation It is composed of at least a probability change/time saving table 202b2 that is referred to in order to determine the variable time.

First, the normal table 202b1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 409(b). FIG. 409(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal table 202b1. In this normal table 202b1, various fluctuation patterns are defined in correspondence with the special symbol lottery results, and for each of the fluctuation patterns, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are defined. The value is assigned. In addition, when the result of the judgment is a win, each variation pattern is changed according to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d based on the value of the acquired special win type counter C2). is set. Specifically, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the winning/failure determination result is a jackpot, and the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50". If the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 180", the winning normal reach A with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this winning normal reach A is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 0 seconds, if this hit normal reach A is notified to the audio lamp control device 113, the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399) will not be executed as described above. In addition, if the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50" and the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "181 to 198", the fluctuation pattern is normal reach B with a fluctuation time of 37 seconds. is stipulated. When this winning normal reach B is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 7 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 7 seconds, when this winning normal reach B is notified to the audio lamp control device 113, as described above, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 409(b), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "51 to 250" and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 150", there is a fluctuation pattern. , a winning super reach A with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined, and a winning super reach B with a variation time of 67 seconds is defined in a range where the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "151 to 198". In hit super reach A, the additional time is 0 seconds, so there is no possibility that an interrupt continuous hit effect will be executed, while in hit super reach B, the additional time command indicating that the additional time is 7 seconds is voiced. Since the lamp control device 113 is notified, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the interrupt continuous hit effect can be executed.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the validity judgment result is wrong, as shown in FIG. 409(b), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Therefore, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 8 seconds to 67 seconds is set is defined. Even in the case of a miss, in a variation pattern in which an additional time command corresponding to an additional time of 7 seconds is specified, the audio lamp control device 113 randomly determines whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hit performance, while the additional time of 0 seconds is determined. In a variation pattern in which an additional time command corresponding to the above is defined, the interrupt continuous hit performance will not be executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 409(b), when the symbol type is special drawing 2, if the judgment result is a hit (jackpot D, jackpot E), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type selection counter Regardless of the value of CS1, a winning long variation A with a variation time of 150 seconds is defined as the variation pattern, and if the result of the judgment is incorrect, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 are Regardless of the value, a long variation with a variation time of 150 seconds is specified. This is because, in the normal state, if you hit right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol that has an advantage in the distribution of jackpots (that is, the probability of a jackpot is high), the gaming efficiency will be deteriorated. The purpose is to suppress irregular gaming methods that involve playing right-handed during normal play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 410, the stipulated contents of the probability change/time saving table 202b2 will be explained. Also in the probability variation/time saving table 202b2, as shown in FIG. 410, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and the stop type selection counter C3 is set for each of the variation patterns. and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are assigned. In addition, in the probability variation/time saving table 202b2, compared to the normal table 202b1, a relatively short variation time is likely to be set, and a common variation time is set for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The only difference is that they are configured so that . By configuring the game so that short variable times are easily set, it is possible to draw special symbols more efficiently than in other gaming states during the probability variable state where the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, and during the time-saving state. can do.

Returning to FIG. 405, the explanation will be continued. The normal winning random number counter C5 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C5 completes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5. In this embodiment, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the value of the normal symbol holding in the RAM 203 is updated. The ball is stored in the ball storage area 203d.

The random number value for the normal symbol win is defined in the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 407(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is If it matches the value of the random number that is a win defined in the normal win random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In addition, this normal winning random number table is used for low probability of normal symbols (the period when the normal symbol is in its normal state) and for high probability times when the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than that low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state). It is divided into two types: one for a certain period), and the number of random numbers that become a jackpot included in each type is set to be different (see FIG. 407(b)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between the low probability of a normal symbol and the high probability of a normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 407(b), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are two random numbers for winning the normal symbol, and the values are "5, 6". In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 2 out of a total of 240 random numbers, so the probability that a special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/120".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 , a fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C5 is within the range of "5, 6", it is determined that the win is won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), the symbol "○" is displayed by lighting up, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x once". In addition, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is released for "0.2 seconds x once"; The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers that result in a jackpot for the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204." These random numbers are stored in a normal random number table for high probability times. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 , a fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "twice for 1 second". be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, compared to when the probability is low for the normal symbol, the fluctuating display time is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, and furthermore, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is Since the time is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In addition, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64a is released only "1 second x 2 times", but the opening time and The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 2 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal random number counter C5 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425). , is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 434).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 404, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 405, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I/O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as the following are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including the time when a power outage occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 433). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 432) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be explained with reference to FIG. 406(a). FIG. 406(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes, as part of the fixed value data described above, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a variable pattern selection table 202b, a normal jackpot random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection table 202d, a falling lottery table 202e, and an open lottery table 202e. At least a pattern selection table 202f is stored.

The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" is defined as the range of judgment values that are determined to be a jackpot, and in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol, the range of judgment values that are determined to be a jackpot is determined. “4 to 11” is defined as the value range (see FIG. 407(a)). When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning matches any of the judgment values corresponding to the jackpot specified in this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) , it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot.

The jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 408(a)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the judgment value of the special hit type counter C2 is It is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the special winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202b, and the special winning type counter The jackpot type corresponding to the value of C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 408(a), the jackpot type selection table 202b is a special symbol that is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol (lottery of special symbol 1). It is composed of at least a table 202d1 for 1 jackpot and a table 202d2 for special pattern 2 jackpot, which is referred to in order to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery (special pattern 2 lottery). ing. First, details of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 408(a).

As shown in FIG. 408(b), the range in which the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "0 to 9" is associated with and defined as "jackpot A" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "Jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a probability change state is given (an opening/closing pattern is set that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period when it is distributed to the V area) ) It's a big hit. Out of the 100 counter values that the special winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that will be "Jackpot A", so "Jackpot A" will be determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "Jackpot A" has the largest number of rounds among the first special symbol jackpots, and is given an advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends, so it is the most advantageous jackpot among the first special symbol jackpots. It is a type.

In addition, the value of the special win type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 49" is associated with "Jackpot B" and defined (see FIG. 408(b)). This "Jackpot B" has 5 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a probability change state is given (an opening/closing pattern is set that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period when it is distributed to the V area) ) It's a big hit. Out of the 100 counter values that the special winning type counter C2 can take, there are 40 counter values that will become "Jackpot B", so "Jackpot B" will be determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol. The ratio is 40% (40/100). Although this "jackpot B" has fewer rounds than the "jackpot A," it is a relatively advantageous jackpot type because an advantageous probability change state is given after the jackpot ends.

Furthermore, the value of the special win type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" is associated with and defined as "jackpot C" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "Jackpot C" has 5 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a time saving state is given (an opening/closing pattern is set that makes it impossible for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area). ) It's a jackpot. Out of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that will be a "jackpot C", so a "jackpot C" will be determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot C" has the least number of rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state, so it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the first special symbol jackpots. . It is constructed so that it is variable at a lower rate than

Next, details of the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 408(c). As shown in FIG. 408(c), the value of the special winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", and "big win D" is defined in association with it (see FIG. 408(b)). This "Jackpot D" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a probability change state is given (an opening/closing pattern is set that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period when it is distributed to the V area. ) It's a big hit. Out of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, there are 80 counter values that will be a "jackpot D", so a "jackpot D" will be determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. The ratio is 80% (80/100). This "jackpot D" has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots, and is the most advantageous jackpot type because it is given an advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 408(c), the value of the special winning type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 99", and "Jackpot E" is associated with and defined (see FIG. 408(b)). ). This "Jackpot E" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a time-saving state is given (an opening/closing pattern is set that makes it impossible for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period when it is allocated to the V area). ) It's a jackpot. Out of the 100 counter values that the special winning type counter C2 can take, there are 20 counter values that will be a "jackpot E", so a "jackpot E" will be determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. The ratio is 20% (20/100). Although this "jackpot E" has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots, it is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends because a disadvantageous time-saving state is given after the jackpot ends.

In this way, in this first control example, when a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery, the variable probability jackpot (jackpot A, B) is determined at a rate of 50%, while the second It is configured such that when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol lottery, a probability-variable jackpot (jackpot D) is determined at a rate of 80%. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a jackpot, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect a variable probability state. As described above, the first control example is configured so that the type of jackpot is made clear to the player very rarely (1% of cases where the jackpot is variable). After the jackpot is over, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is maintained until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Therefore, from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the variable probability state or the time saving state has been set. Even if an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the game can be played with the expectation of a variable probability state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Also, if you hit the jackpot within 100 times, even if it was a jackpot in a time-saving state, you can make it seem like you hit the jackpot while in a variable state, so it will be more likely that you will be in a variable state than it was originally. It is possible to make it seem as if the rate and continuation rate are high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 407(b)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5, 6" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see FIG. 407(b)). Furthermore, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for a normal symbol to be a hit (see FIG. 407(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passing of the game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the normal winning random number table 202c are referred to. Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 409(a)) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. Note that the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d are as described above in the explanation of the variation type counter CS1, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

The fall lottery table 202e is a data table in which the determination value of the fall lottery counter C4 that is determined to be a fall is defined. The value of the fall lottery counter C4 acquired when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (at the time of starting winning) in the special symbol probability change state is the value of the fall lottery counter C4 in the fall lottery table 202e. It is set so that if it matches any of the determination values stipulated in , it will transition to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall down).

More specifically, two determination values ``0, 1'' are defined as determination values for determining a fall in the special symbol's variable probability state. Here, the fall lottery counter C4 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 999". Among the 1000 values that the falling lottery counter C4 can take, there are two judgment values that are determined to be a fall, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the variable probability state of the special symbol. is 1/500 (2/1000).

In addition, in the fall lottery table 202e in this embodiment, only the determination value (determination value for the probability variable state of the special symbol) for determining whether or not a fall occurs in the variable probability state of the special symbol is defined. The decision value for low probability states is not specified. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol is already in the low probability state.

In the present embodiment, this falling lottery table 202e and a regularly updated falling lottery counter C4 are compared to determine whether to transition from a special symbol probability variable state to a special symbol low probability state (fall). It is determined whether That is, the timing of transition from the variable probability state to the time saving state can be made random. Therefore, when the state shifts to a variable probability state, the game can be played while making the player feel nervous because he does not know when the variable probability state will end, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this first control mode, it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift (fall) from the variable probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, but it is determined whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol. It may be configured to allow lottery (judgment). For example, it may be determined whether or not to shift from the time-saving state of normal symbols to the normal state of normal symbols by a lottery performed for each variation. As a result, the number of times the time-saving state of the normal symbol continues can be made random, so that the game can be played while creating a sense of tension in this case as well. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The opening pattern selection table 202f is a data table in which data for setting a pattern according to the jackpot type as the opening pattern (opening/closing pattern of the specific winning hole 65a) in the fifth round of the jackpot is defined. Although the illustration is omitted, in the fifth round of the guaranteed variable jackpot (jackpot A, B, D), the sorting device (V accessory) is arranged to sort the game balls into the first area (V area). During the open period (from 5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round) during which the game balls can reach the sorting device (from 5 seconds to 9.9 seconds from the start of the 5th round). Data for setting the open period (until 5 seconds have elapsed) is read out. On the other hand, in the 5th round of the normal jackpot (jackpot C, E), the period during which the sorting device (V accessory) is arranged to distribute the game balls to the second area (non-V area) (start of the 5th round) Set an open period (4.5 seconds from immediately after the start of the 5th round until 4.5 seconds have passed) during which game balls can reach the sorting device The data to do this is read out.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be explained with reference to FIG. 406(b). FIG. 406(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 403(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b. 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203g, probability variable flag 203h, jackpot start flag 203i, jackpot medium flag 203j, probability variable setting flag 203k, probability variable passage counter 203m, winning number counter 203n, remaining It has at least a ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a variable probability effective flag 203r, a variable probability effective timer 203s, a discharge number counter 203t, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type counter. C2 and the values of the stop type selection counter C3 are respectively stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C4, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas. Among the vacant areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first reservation area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are The reserved ball is shifted (moved) to the reserved ball special symbol reserved ball execution area (see FIG. 405), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the execution area, the lottery of special symbols, etc. is determined. will be held.

Note that when data is shifted from the first holding area to the special symbol holding ball execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this first control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (2nd reserved area to 4th reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value, etc. is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A normal win random number counter C5 is stored in each of these areas. More specifically, the value of counter C5 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding area). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C5 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the reservation first area to the execution area, the reservation first area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b, Shift processing is performed to shift winning data stored in other holding areas to a holding area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending pitches (the number of times of waiting) up to four times (fluctuating display performed on the display device 81). The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 428). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 426).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending balls N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 426, S405 in FIG. 428). reference). The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203e is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of pitches itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the number of held balls in the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

Note that the audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on hold for display to notify the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e displays a variable display (third symbol) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending pitches (the number of times of waiting) up to four times (fluctuating display performed on the display device 81). The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 428). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 426). The value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f calculates the number of reserved balls (of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the game ball at the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67). This is a counter that counts up to 4 times (the number of wait times). The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 431). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (see S605 in FIG. 430).

When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 431). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 431: No).

The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal symbols. The initial value of this time saving counter 203g is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110 and a jackpot is achieved, 100 is set at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 437). (See S1303). In addition, regardless of the jackpot type, if a jackpot is achieved by drawing a special symbol, the value is set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating the jackpot (see S310 in FIG. 427). By configuring the value to be set to 0 at the start of the fluctuating display that indicates a jackpot, there is a possibility that the time-saving state is terminated, such as when the normal symbol falls out during the fluctuating display that was executed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. When a certain behavior occurs, expectations for a jackpot can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

When a winning lottery with a normal symbol is drawn, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g and the state of the probability change flag 203h are referred to, and whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more or the probability change flag 203h is on. If so, it is determined that the normal symbol is time saving. In this case, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the normal winning random number table for high probability times (see S609 in FIG. 430). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol is normal, and the normal state of the normal symbol is determined based on the normal winning random number table for low probability times. A lottery is held (see S610 in FIG. 430).

The variable probability flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state with special symbols.If the variable probability flag 203h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state with special symbols. If the flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state. Moreover, as mentioned above, during the probability change state of the special symbol, it becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203h is on, it indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol is present, and also that it is the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The initial value of the probability variable flag 203h is set to OFF, and when the game ball enters the first area (V area) in the variable prize winning device 65 in the fifth round of the jackpot, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot. It is set to on (see S1302 in FIG. 437). In addition, the probability variation flag 203h is reset to OFF when the lottery result corresponding to a fall in the probability variation state (see S305 in FIG. 427) and when a jackpot variation display starts (see S310 in FIG. 427). be done.

This probability variation flag 203h is referred to in the special symbol variation start process to determine whether or not the gaming state is in a probability variation state (see S302 in FIG. 427). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 427, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 427, S208), the probability variation flag 203h is referred to, and if it is on, a fall lottery is executed first, and if there is no fall, the first winning random number table 202a for high probability times is (See FIG. 407(a)), a special symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off or the probability variation flag 203h is on and it is determined that the player has fallen by the fall lottery, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 407(a) ), a special design lottery will be held.

In addition, the probability change flag 203h is also referred to in order to determine whether the gaming state is a time saving state in the normal symbol variation process (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 430). Specifically, the probability change flag 203h and the above-mentioned time saving medium counter 203g are referred to during the normal symbol variation process, and if the probability change flag 203h is on or the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, It is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and a lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability times (see FIG. 407(b)) (see S609 in FIG. 430). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off and the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and the second winning random number table 202c (FIG. 407) for low probability times is determined. A lottery of normal symbols is performed based on (see b)) (see S610 in FIG. 430). In addition, in the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol hits (S614 in FIG. 430, (See S620).

The jackpot start flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203i is on, it means that it is the timing to start the jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start the jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203i is set to ON when the end timing of the variable display indicating a jackpot is reached (see S217 in FIG. 426). Moreover, the jackpot start flag 203i is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see S1103 in FIG. 435).

The jackpot flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special gaming state) is in progress. If this jackpot flag 203j is on, it means that a jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203j becomes a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, and is set to ON when the jackpot (special game state) starts (see S1103 in FIG. 435). Further, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1305 in FIG. 437). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426), this jackpot flag 203j is referred to to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (see S201 in FIG. 426).

The variable probability setting flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to a variable probability state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined depending on whether or not a game ball enters the first region (V region) during the jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that the game ball enters the first area (passing the probability change switch provided in the first area), the probability change setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1415 in FIG. 438). . On the other hand, this probability change setting flag 203k is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1305 in FIG. 437). Note that this probability change setting flag 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), it is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

Note that if the variable variable setting flag 203k is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the variable variable switch has been passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that the variable variable switch has been passed before the power is turned off, the variable variable setting flag 203k is set to ON. It may be configured to formally turn on and return. In this case, it can be determined whether the variable probability switch has been passed before the power is turned off by checking whether a variable probability passage counter 203m (described later) has a value greater than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the gaming parlor side by determining fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203k to on while the power is turned off and then turning the power back on. can.

The probability variation passage counter 203m is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch (entered the V area) in one round during a jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round of jackpot). . In addition, it can be determined whether all the game balls that entered the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been ejected by the sum of the variable passing counter 203m and the ejected number counter 203u, which will be described later. The variable probability passing counter 203m is updated by incrementing by 1 when the ball passes through the variable probability switch (the ball entering the V area is detected) (S1414 in FIG. 438). Further, after the variable winning device 65 executes a process of determining whether the number of winning game balls matches the number of ejected balls, it is reset to the initial value "0" (S1511 in FIG. 439). Note that this probability variable passage counter 203m is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game, and when a winning in the specific winning hole 65a has been detected. is incremented by 1 and updated based on (S1403 in FIG. 438). On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winning pieces in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the number of winning pieces counter 203p) and the number of winning pieces (the total value of the number of winning pieces counter 203u and the variable passing counter 203m) are the same. After it is determined whether the value is the same, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 439). Note that the value of this prize winning number counter 203p is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203q is a flag that indicates whether or not it is the ball throw period after one round is completed and the specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed. When this remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to on, it means that it is a ball throw period. While this remaining ball timer flag 203q is set on, a remaining ball timer 203r, which will be described later, is updated by incrementing it by 1 (see S1505 in FIG. 439). The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning opening 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be ejected has elapsed. This is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203r is a timer necessary for ejecting winning game balls from the variable winning device 65 when the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round ends. This is a counter for determining whether time has passed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball to be ejected from the variable winning device 65 is 0.5 seconds, and in this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance by the remaining ball timer. This is set as the upper limit value of 203r. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203r has reached its upper limit (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of prizes entered into the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of prizes ejected match. (S1507 in FIG. 439). If they do not match, an error command is set and this fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, balls are left in the variable winning device 65 illegally, and the game balls are transferred to the sorting device (V accessories) at the timing when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the 5th round of jackpot C or jackpot E. It is possible to suppress the spread of fraud.

In addition, if the number of winnings and the number of ejected pieces do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if that flag is on, the probability variation setting flag 203k is turned on even if the game ball passes the probability variation switch. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is not set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a probability variable state from being improperly assigned.

The probability variation valid flag 203s indicates that when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch (enters the V area) after the V accessory has been switched to an arrangement that cannot be allocated to the first area (V area), its passage ( This flag is used to determine whether or not the input ball is valid. When this probability variation valid flag 203s is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch.

The probability variation valid timer 203t is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation validity flag 203s described above is set to ON. This probability variable effective timer 203t allows determining the period required for the V accessory to normally pass through the probability variable switch after switching to the non-V side arrangement. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has reached the V accessory to pass through the probability change switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the variable probability effective timer 203t is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch is passed after that, it will be determined as fraudulent and will not be determined as passing.

As a result, it is possible to illegally allow a game ball to enter the V area and pass the fixed variable switch, push the game ball up with a piano wire, etc. from below the fixed variable switch and make it pass, or cause the magnetic sensor to mistakenly detect that it has passed due to radio waves, etc. damage caused by fraud can be suppressed.

The discharge number counter 203u is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable prize winning device 65 in one round. This ejected number counter 203u is reset to the initial value 0 after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of ejected balls (S1511 in FIG. 439).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

In this way, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Next, with reference to FIG. 411, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 411 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example.

As shown in FIG. 411, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with three game states. That is, a normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, a variable probability state shown in the middle part of FIG. 411, and a time saving state shown in the lower part of FIG. 411 are provided.

As mentioned above, the normal state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, where the probability of a jackpot is low and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. (The electric accessory 640a is difficult to release), resulting in the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, as mentioned above, the variable probability state indicates the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the jackpot probability is high and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 by hitting the ball to the right. Since the game ball enters the ball frequently, the game state becomes most advantageous for the player. In addition, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and although the probability of jackpot is low, the game ball will enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting right. Since the ball is frequently entered, the game state becomes relatively advantageous for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state to another state only in the case of a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 411, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and either jackpot A or B is selected as the jackpot type, the game ball moves to the V area in the fifth round of the jackpot. On the condition that the ball has been entered, the state will change to a certain state after the jackpot ends. In jackpots A and B, the game ball can be brought into almost the V area by simply hitting the ball to the right in the 5th round. In addition, if no game ball enters the V area in the 5th round due to the player not hitting the game ball in the 5th round, the game state after the jackpot ends will be changed to the time-saving state. Set. On the other hand, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, when jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, it is impossible (difficult) to make the game ball enter the V area in the 5th round of the jackpot. ), so after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to the time saving state.

Further, as shown in the interruption in FIG. 411, there is a possibility of transitioning from the variable probability state to another gaming state not only in the case of a jackpot but also in the case of falling in the falling lottery. Specifically, when a jackpot occurs in the variable probability state and the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 20%, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state. Also, if a lottery result corresponding to a fall is obtained in a fall lottery before the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the variable probability state is set, the state shifts to the time saving state. Furthermore, after the special symbol lottery has been executed 100 times or more after the probability variable state is set, if the lottery result corresponding to a fall is obtained in the falling lottery, the state shifts to the normal state. On the other hand, when a jackpot occurs in the probability variable state and the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 80%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probability variable state again (the most advantageous probability variable state is looped). Therefore, in the variable probability state, it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the player will hit the jackpot before falling and that the player will win the jackpot D.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 411, the transition from the time-saving state to another gaming state is possible not only when a jackpot is won, but also when a specified number of special symbols are drawn after the jackpot ends. transition to the state. More specifically, when a jackpot occurs in the time saving state and the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 80%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous probability variable state. Furthermore, when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the previous jackpot ends, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 20%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state again (time-saving state ). In the time-saving state, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/250, which is the same as in the normal state, so the possibility of winning the jackpot again within 100 attempts is not very high (approximately 33% of the time you will hit the jackpot again). . Therefore, when the time is shortened, the possibility of transitioning to the normal state increases. As mentioned above, it is difficult to accurately distinguish between the time-saving state and the variable probability state (the operations other than the jackpot probability, such as the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, are the same), so the time-saving state with the normal symbol While this is set, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation regarding the variable probability state. In other words, even if a time-saving state is set that is disadvantageous compared to a variable probability state (that is, it is easier to shift to the normal state), it can make the player think that they are playing the game in a variable probability state. It is possible to maintain high motivation for playing games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In this way, in the first control example, it is possible to provide an innovative game experience that goes back and forth between three types of game states, and therefore it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 404, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric controller. A solenoid 209 consisting of a solenoid for driving an object is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208. Also, various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, includes a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area where the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 432) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the game ball. be. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 performs display control such as audio output from the audio output device 226, output of turning on and off from the lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display performance (fluctuating display). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the device 114. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, PUSH button 10317, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls display of error commands including the type of error. to the device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. FIG. 412(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 includes a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a back mode lottery table 222b, a pending change lottery table 222c, a change point calculation table 222d, a batch change lottery table 222e, a chance charge lottery table 222f, and a continuation suggestion effect selection table. 222g and an interrupt consecutive hit lottery table 222h.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the audio lamp control device 113 selects, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, miss, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command). ) is used to determine more detailed fluctuation content. This makes it possible to determine even more diverse variations. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by the main controller 110.

The back mode lottery table 222b is data for drawing a lottery to change the back mode to indicate the degree of expectation that a variable probability state is set in a gaming state (variable probability state, time saving state) in which a time saving state of normal symbols is set. This is a data table in which the following is specified. The details of this rear mode lottery table 222b will be explained with reference to FIG. 413. FIG. 413 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the back mode selection table 222b.

As shown in FIG. 413, the rear mode lottery table 222b shows that the rear mode lottery table 222b shows the rear mode lottery table 222b in which it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable state and that there is no lottery result corresponding to a fall in the pending state. A fixed change continuation table that is referred to in order to draw changes, and a drawing to draw changes in the back mode in a state where the current gaming state is a fixed change state but there is a lottery result corresponding to a fall in the pending state. The table is made up of at least a table for not yet fallen and a table for already fallen which is referred to in order to draw a lottery to change the back mode in a state where the state has already fallen to the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 413, the rear mode lottery table 222b defines a range of values of the production lottery counter 223y in association with each combination of the current rear mode type and the transition destination (after change) rear mode. has been done. Here, the performance lottery counter 223y is composed of a random number counter whose value is updated regularly, and is updated to any value within the range of "0 to 99" every time the update timing comes. Using the value of this performance lottery counter 223y, performance modes of various performances are selected. Note that the performance lottery counter 223y is provided with a separate random number counter for each type of performance for which a lottery is executed. In other words, the performance lottery counter 223y is a general term for random number counters used for lottery of various performances.

As shown in FIG. 413, in the probability change continuation table, for a combination where the current back mode is cave exploration mode and the transition destination back mode is temple exploration mode (mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode), A range of values “0 to 19” for the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with each other. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the performance lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 20, so the current game state is In the variable probability state and in the state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 20% (20/100). Further, as shown in FIG. 413, the value "20, 21" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. Out of the 100 random numbers that the performance lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 2, so the current game state is a variable state, In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from cave search mode to super temple search mode is 2% (2/100). It should be noted that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223y is other than the above (namely, the range of "22 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave exploration mode is maintained.

In this way, when the cave search mode is set and the table for continuation of definite change is referenced (in case of definite change and no fall lottery results are included in the pending state), the change display will be displayed. Each time it is executed, it shifts from cave exploration mode to other modes at a rate of 22%. That is, the number of times the cave search mode is continued is reduced to about five times on average. In other words, even if cave exploration mode is set, the transition to another mode with higher expectations occurs in a relatively short period of time, so the period of time set in cave exploration mode tends to become shorter (mode with higher expectations). ). Therefore, the longer the player stays in the mode with high expectations, the more the player's expectations regarding the continuation of the variable state can be improved, and the more the player's interest in the game can be improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the probability change continuation table, a range of values of the performance lottery counter 223y of "0" is defined in association with a mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the performance lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from temple search mode to cave search mode is 1, so the current game state is In the variable probability state and in the state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 1% (1/100). Further, as shown in FIG. 413, the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223y "1 to 10" is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. Among the 100 random numbers that the performance lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from temple search mode to super temple search mode is 10, so the current game state is in a variable state. , and in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from temple search mode to super temple search mode is 10% (10/100). It should be noted that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223y is other than the above (ie, the range of "11 to 99"), the mode transition will not be performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, when the temple search mode is set and the table for continuation of definite change is referenced (in case of definite change and no fall lottery results are included in the pending state), the change display will be displayed. A super shrine that transitions to cave exploration mode at a rate of 1% every time it is executed, and at a rate of 10%, the state of change is confirmed, and it is confirmed that the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state. Shift to mode. In other words, the configuration is such that it is difficult to shift to the cave exploration mode, which has low expectations, and it is easy to shift to the super temple mode, which has high expectations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the probability change continuation table, the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. Furthermore, for mode transition from the super-temple search mode to the temple search mode, a range of values "0 to 4" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association. Out of the 100 random numbers that the performance lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current game state is in a variable state. , and in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100). It should be noted that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223y is other than the above (ie, the range of "5 to 99"), the mode transition will not be performed. That is, the super temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, when the super temple exploration mode is set, only 5% of the time the mode will shift to another mode, and even if the mode is shifted, the temple exploration, which has a relatively high expectation level, will mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation regarding the probability change state even if the player shifts from the super temple mode, which has the highest level of expectation, to another back mode.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-fall table, the mode transition from cave search mode to temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 4" of the performance lottery counter 223y. . Out of the 100 random numbers that the production lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 5, so the current game state is a variable state, In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from cave search mode to temple search mode is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. It should be noted that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223y is other than the above (ie, the range of "5 to 99"), the mode transition will not be performed. That is, the cave exploration mode is maintained.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-fall table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 9" of the performance lottery counter 223y. . Out of the 100 random numbers that the performance lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10, so the current game state is a variable state, In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from temple search mode to cave search mode is 10% (10/100). On the other hand, the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. It should be noted that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223y is outside the above range (that is, the range of "10 to 99"), the mode transition will not be performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-fall table, the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 99" of the performance lottery counter 223y. That is, when the non-fall table is referenced in a state where the super temple search mode is set, the transition to the temple search mode (fall) is made without fail. When the non-fall table is referenced in the super temple search mode, it means that at the start of the previous variation, there were no falling lottery results in the pending list, and new pending results by the start of the current variation display. This is only the case when the reserved ball is the result of a falling lottery. Therefore, in order to prevent the super-temple mode from being maintained even though the falling lottery result is included, the configuration is such that the mode is always shifted to the temple search mode in this case.

In this way, when the back mode transition lottery is executed with reference to the non-fall table (that is, with the lottery result corresponding to a fall included in the hold), the probability change continuation table is referenced. The mode transition rate from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is lower than when the mode is changed to temple exploration mode, and even if the mode transitions to temple exploration mode, the rate of falling to cave exploration mode is higher. That is, the proportion of stays in cave exploration mode, which has low expectations, increases. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which it is possible to predict whether or not the current game state is a variable state using the stay ratio in the cave exploration mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the mode transition from cave search mode to temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0, 1" of the performance lottery counter 223y. . Out of the 100 random numbers that the production lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 2, so the current game state is the time saving state. In this case, the rate of transition (change) from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 2% (2/100). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. It should be noted that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223y is other than the above (namely, the range of "2 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave exploration mode is maintained.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 29" of the performance lottery counter 223y. . Among the 100 random numbers that the performance lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30, so the current game state is a variable state, In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from temple search mode to cave search mode is 30% (30/100). On the other hand, the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. Note that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223y is outside the above range (ie, in the range of "30 to 99"), no mode transition is performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 99" of the performance lottery counter 223y. That is, when the fallen table is referenced while the super temple search mode is set, the transition to the temple search mode (fall) is made in the same way as when the unfallen table is referenced. The case where the fallen table is referred to in the super temple search mode is only when the state was in a variable state at the start of the previous variation, and the current special symbol lottery resulted in a fallen lottery result. Therefore, in order to prevent the super-temple mode from being maintained even though the falling lottery result is included, the system is configured to always shift to the temple search mode in this case.

In this way, when the table for those who have fallen is referred to (that is, in the time-saving state) and the rear mode transition lottery is executed, the transition from the cave exploration mode to the temple is more likely than when the table for those who have not fallen is referred to. Not only will the mode transition rate to exploration mode become lower, but even if you do transition to temple exploration mode, the rate of falling to cave exploration mode will be significantly higher. That is, the proportion of stays in cave exploration mode, which has low expectations, increases. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which it is possible to predict whether or not the current game state is a variable state using the stay ratio in the cave exploration mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the explanation will be continued. The pending change lottery table 222c refers to the pre-reading result executed based on the detection of a starting prize for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and selects the pending ball number symbol corresponding to the starting winning. This is a data table that is referred to when executing the lottery of the display mode. The details of this pending change lottery table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 414(a). FIG. 414(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this pending change lottery table 222c.

As shown in FIG. 414(a), the pending change lottery table 222c includes the value of the effect lottery counter 223y from which each pending symbol mode (white, blue, green, red) is selected for each look-ahead result (variation type). The ranges are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 414(a), when the fluctuation type is "Long Off", the white pending symbol is displayed for the value of the production lottery counter 223y in the range of "0 to 98". The modes are defined in association with each other, and the blue pending symbol mode is defined in association with the value "99" of the production lottery counter 223y. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the green and red pending symbol modes. Therefore, if the look-ahead result is a variation type of out-of-length (the main controller 110 has notified the look-ahead result of out-of-length by the winning information command), the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the starting prize is 99%. A white pending symbol mode is set at a rate of (99/100), and a blue pending symbol mode is set at a rate of 1% (1/100). That is, in the case of a long miss, a white pending symbol mode is almost always set, and it is extremely rare that a pending change (a pending symbol mode other than white) is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 414(a), for the variation type "Normal Reach", the white pending symbol mode is associated with the value of the production lottery counter 223y in the range "0 to 94". The value of the production lottery counter 223y is in the range of "95 to 99", and the blue reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the value of the production lottery counter 223y. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the green and red pending symbol modes. Therefore, if the look-ahead result is off and it becomes a normal reach variation type, the white pending symbol pattern will be set at a rate of 95% (95/100) as the pending ball number symbol corresponding to the starting prize, and 5% ( A blue pending symbol mode is set at a ratio of 5/100). That is, even in the case of a missed normal reach, the white pending symbol mode is set at a relatively high rate, and the rate at which pending change (a pending pattern mode other than white) is set is low.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 414(a), for the variation type "Outside Super Reach", the white pending symbol mode corresponds to the value of the production lottery counter 223y in the range of "0 to 74". A blue pending pattern is defined in association with the range "75-89", and a green pending symbol mode is defined in association with the range "90-97". , "98, 99", a red reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the range. In other words, in the case of a variation type of losing super reach in which the variation time is long and a relatively flashy (lively) performance mode is executed, the percentage of white pending symbol modes is 75% (75/100). This is lower than the variation type of miss, and the percentage of blue pending symbols is as high as 10% (10/100). Furthermore, it can also be set to a green or red reserved symbol mode. That is, the percentage of green pending symbols is 8% (8/100), and the percentage of red pending symbols is 2% (2/100). Therefore, in the case of green or red pending symbols, at least the variation type below the normal reach (variation type with low expectation level) will be denied, improving the player's expectation of a jackpot. be able to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 414(a), for the variation type "hit normal reach", the white pending symbol mode is associated with the value of the production lottery counter 223y in the range "0 to 74". A blue pending symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "75 to 84", a green pending symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "85 to 94", A red reserved symbol pattern is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99". That is, the percentage of green and red pending symbols is set higher than in the case of a missed super reach.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 414(a), when the variation type is "Hit Super Reach", the white pending symbol mode corresponds to the value of the production lottery counter 223y in the range of "0 to 49". A blue pending pattern is defined in association with the range "50 to 59," and a green pending symbol is defined in association with the range "60 to 84." , and the range of "85 to 99", a red pending symbol mode is defined in association with the range. That is, the occurrence rate of pending changes itself is improved compared to the variation types of missed super reach and winning normal reach, and the percentage of green and red pending symbol patterns being selected also becomes higher. Therefore, when the green or red reserved symbol mode is set, the expectation for a jackpot can be further improved.

Returning to FIG. 412, the explanation will be continued. The change point calculation table 222d is a data table that is referred to when calculating change points that are used as a criterion for determining whether or not to perform a pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403). The details will be described later, but this change point is due to a discrepancy between the variation type of each reserved ball and the jackpot expectation level indicated by the reserved symbol pattern at the time of drawing of the reservation batch change performance (lower expectations are announced). The system is configured such that the more points are used (too much), the higher the number of points is set. It is configured such that the more a reservation pattern mode with a relatively lower degree of expectation is set by the reservation change performance, the easier it is to execute a performance that improves the expectation level by the reservation batch change performance. Thereby, it is possible to more appropriately notify the degree of expectation based on the pending symbol mode. The details of this change point calculation table 222d will be explained with reference to FIG. 414(b).

As shown in FIG. 414(b), in the change point lottery table 222d, change points are associated with each change type of the held ball (preread result) and the held symbol mode set for the held ball. It is stipulated that In this first control example, when a plurality of reserved balls are reserved at the time when a starting prize is detected, the change point of each reserved ball is calculated using this change point lottery table 222d, and the total value of the change points is calculated. Based on this, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the pending batch change performance can be executed. That is, it is configured such that the larger the total value of change points, the higher the execution rate of the pending batch change effect. As a result, even if a low level of expectation is once reported in the hold change performance, it is possible to give an opportunity to improve the level of expectation through the hold batch change performance, so that the level of expectation can be notified more appropriately by the hold symbol mode. I can do it.

As shown in FIG. 414(b), for the variation types of short miss and long miss, "0" is associated and defined as a change point, regardless of the pending symbol mode. In addition, for the variation type of out normal reach, "1" is defined as a change point for the pending symbol mode of white pending, and "0" is defined as the change point for other pending symbol modes. are defined in association with each other. In addition, for the variation type of missed super reach, "2" is defined as a change point for the pending symbol mode of white pending, and "2" is defined as a change point for the pending symbol mode of blue pending. 1" is defined in association with the change point, and "0" is defined in association with other pending symbol modes as a change point. In addition, for the variation types of hit normal reach and hit super reach, 3 is defined as a change point in association with the pending symbol mode of white pending, and 3 is defined as a change point for the pending symbol mode of blue pending. 2 is associated and defined, 1 is associated and defined as a change point for the green reserved symbol mode, and 0 is associated and defined as a change point for the red reserved symbol mode.

In this way, the first control example is configured such that the more a pending symbol mode with a lower expectation level is set for a reserved ball of a variation type with a higher expectation level, the more change points there will be. In other words, the larger the room for improving the expectation level of the pending symbol mode, the more change points there are, and the more likely it is that the execution of the pending batch change performance will be permitted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation depending on the pending symbol mode.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the explanation will be continued. The batch change lottery table 222e is a data table that is referred to when performing a lottery to determine whether or not the pending batch change effect can be executed. The details of this batch change lottery table 222e will be explained with reference to FIG. 415(a). FIG. 415(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this batch change lottery table 222e. As shown in FIG. 415(a), in the batch change lottery table 222e, for each total value of change points, the range of values of the production lottery counter 223y, in which execution of the pending batch change production is determined, is defined in association. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 415(a), the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is not associated with the total value of change points being 0. Furthermore, when the total value of change points is 1, the value "0 to 9" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in correspondence, and when the total value of change points is 2, the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is specified. "0 to 24" are defined in association with each other, and for a total value of change points of 3 or more, a value of "0 to 49" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with each other. In other words, if the change point is 1, the pending batch change effect will be selected at a rate of 10%, if the change point is 2, the pending batch change effect will be selected at a rate of 25%, and if the change point is 3, the pending batch change effect will be selected at a rate of 25%. For example, the pending batch change performance is selected at a rate of 50%.

In this way, in this first control example, as the total number of change points increases (a holding symbol pattern with a low expectation level is set for a holding ball of a variation type with a high expectation level), the holding batch change effect increases. The system is configured so that the ratio of execution decisions is high. Thereby, the larger the room for improving the expectation level of the reserved symbol mode, the more change points there will be, and the more likely it is that execution of the reserved batch change performance will be permitted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation depending on the pending symbol mode.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the explanation will be continued. The chance charge lottery table 222f is a data table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the chance charge effect can be executed. The details of this chance charge lottery table 222f will be explained with reference to FIG. 415(b). FIG. 415(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the chance charge lottery table 222f. As shown in FIG. 415(b), in the chance charge lottery table 222f, the number of reserved balls and the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223y that are determined to execute the chance charge effect are associated for each variation type. stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 415(b), in the variation pattern of the out-of-the-box normal reach and out-of-the-box super reach, when the number of reserved pitches is 0 or 1, the value range of the production lottery counter 223y is “0 to 1”. 4" are defined in association with each other. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the value range "0 to 14" of the production lottery counter 223y is defined in correspondence, and when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the value range of the production lottery counter 223y is specified. A range “0 to 24” is defined in correspondence. In other words, if the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, it is decided to execute the chance charge effect at a rate of 5%, and if the number of reserved balls is 2, it is decided to execute the chance charge effect at a rate of 15%, If the number of pending balls is 3 or more, it is decided to execute the chance charge effect at a rate of 25%.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 415(b), in the variation pattern of normal reach, the range of values ``0 to 34'' of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 0 and 1. On the other hand, the value of the production lottery counter 223y is not associated with the number of reserved balls of 2 or more. In other words, if the number of held balls is 0 or 1, the execution of the chance charge effect will be determined at a rate of 35%, while if the number of held balls is 2 or more, the execution of the chance charge effect will not be decided. do not have. That is, when the number of reserved balls is 1 or less, the decision ratio of chance charge performance is higher than that of the variation pattern of miss. Furthermore, the reason why the chance charge performance is not performed when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more is to prevent a problem in which the spirit gauge accumulates too much and a jackpot starts before it is completely consumed. That is, in the case of a hit normal reach, the fluctuation time is relatively short (there are few opportunities to perform a chance-up effect), so there is a high possibility that the spirit gauge will accumulate beyond the timing when a chance-up is possible. The number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge performance is determined only according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, the higher the number of reserved balls, the higher the possibility that a higher number of spirit gauges will be set. Therefore, in this control example, in a situation where the variation results in a win, if the number of reserved balls is large, execution of the chance charge effect is avoided. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem in which a jackpot is started before the number of spirit gauges is completely consumed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 415(b), in the variation pattern of the winning super reach, the range of values ``0 to 49'' of the production lottery counter 223y corresponds to the number of reserved balls from 0 to 2. When the number of reserved balls is 3, the value range "0 to 9" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in correspondence. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the number of reserved balls being 4. In other words, if the number of held balls is 0 to 2, the chance charge effect will be executed at a rate of 50%, and if the number of held balls is 3, the execution of the chance charge effect will be decided at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the number of pending balls is 4, execution of the chance charge performance is not determined. That is, when the number of balls on hold is 2 or less, the decision ratio of the chance charge effect is higher than the variation pattern of a miss or the variation pattern of a hit normal reach. Further, when the number of balls on hold is 3, the chance charge performance is executed at a low rate, and when the number of balls on hold is 4, the chance charge performance is not performed. Similar to normal reach, this is intended to suppress the problem of a jackpot starting before the spirit gauge is completely consumed.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the explanation will be continued. The continuation suggestion performance selection table 222g is used when selecting the performance scenario of the continuation suggestion performance that is executed over the 96th to 99th variable display performance after the end of the jackpot (that is, after the start of the time saving state of the normal symbol). This is the referenced data table. The details of this continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g will be explained with reference to FIG. 416.

FIG. 416 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 416, the continuation suggestion production selection table 222g includes a continuation confirmation table that is referred to when the continuation of the variable probability state is confirmed until the end of the continuation suggestion production, and a table for continuation confirmation until the end of the continuation suggestion production. Although the ball is not on hold, it is confirmed that the continuation probability table that is referred to when it is certain that the variable state will be maintained in the hold and the end of the continuation suggestion performance are in the short time state. It consists of at least a table for non-continuations. Each table defines a plurality of combinations (scenarios) of performance modes to be executed in the 96th to 99th variable displays.

As shown in FIG. 416, in the continuation confirmation table, the range of the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with each of the seven scenarios "01H" to "07H". Specifically, as shown in Figure 416, in the 96th to 98th variation display, a weak attack with a low expectation level (see Figure 393(a)) is executed, and in the 99th variation display, a weak attack with a high expectation level is executed. The value "0-9" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the performance scenario "01H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed and the door 806 is broken through. Also, a weak attack (see Figure 393(a)) is executed in the 96th and 97th variable display, and a strong attack (see Figure 393(b)) is executed in the 98th and 99th variable display to break through the door 806. The value "10 to 19" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the performance scenario "02H" in which the game is performed, and a weak attack (see FIG. 393(a)) is executed in the 96th variable display. In the 97th to 99th variable display, the value of the production lottery counter 223y is "20 to 59" for the production scenario "03H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed and the door 806 is broken through. The production lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the production scenario "04H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed and the door 806 is broken through in all the 96th to 99th variation displays. The values "60 to 89" are defined in association with each other. That is, the selection rate is low for production scenarios in which the number of strong attacks is small, and the selection rate is high for production scenarios in which the number of strong attacks is large.

Further, as shown in FIG. 416, the continuation confirmation table is provided with a special production scenario in which the player breaks through the door 806 with a variation number of less than 99 times. In other words, there is a performance scenario "05H" (range of the value "90, 91" of the performance lottery counter 223y) in which a weak attack is performed in the 96th variable performance and the door 806 is directly broken through, and a weak attack is performed in the 96th time, 97. A production scenario "06H" in which a strong attack is made on the 96th and 97th time to break through the door 806 (range of the value "92 to 94" of the production lottery counter 223y), and a weak attack is made on the 96th and 97th time, and the 98th A production scenario "07H" (value range of "95 to 99" of the production lottery counter 223y) is set in which the player performs a strong attack and breaks through the door 806. These special scenarios may be set only when the continuation confirmation table is referenced. In other words, the scenario may be executed only in a state where it is certain that the variable state continues until the 99th variation display ends, so by executing the scenario in a special manner, It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 416, four scenarios from "08H" to "0BH" are defined in the continuation-rich table. The flow of the performance in the performance scenarios "08H" to "0BH" is exactly the same as the performance scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, so the details thereof will be omitted here. As shown in FIG. 416, the production scenario "08H" is associated with the values "0 to 14" of the production lottery counter 223y, and the production scenario "09H" is defined with the values "15 to 14" of the production lottery counter 223y. 29" is defined in association with the production scenario "0AH", the value "30-69" of the production lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the production scenario "0BH", and the value "30-69" of the production lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the production scenario "0BH". 70 to 99" are defined in association with each other. That is, similar to the continuation confirmation table, it is configured such that the selection rate for production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate for production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is high. In addition, if a lottery result corresponding to a fall occurs while the scenario specified in the table for continuation is in progress, the performance specified in the table for non-continuation will be determined from the variation display that corresponds to the lottery result for that fall. You can switch to the production scenario "0CH", which is one of the scenarios. As a result, even if the balls up to the 99th variation display are not on hold at the start of the continuation suggestion performance, by switching the scenario midway through, the game state at the end of the 99th variation can be accurately determined. Can be notified.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 416, four scenarios from "0CH" to "0FH" are defined in the non-continuation table. The flow of the production scenarios "0CH" to "0FH" is exactly the same as the production scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, except that they ultimately fail to break through the door 806, so we will explain them here. Details are omitted. As shown in FIG. 416, the performance scenario "0CH" is associated with the value "0~39" of the performance lottery counter 223y, and the performance scenario "0DH" is defined with the value "40~39" of the performance lottery counter 223y. 79'' is defined in association with the production scenario "0EH", the value "80-94" of the production lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the production scenario "0FH", and the production scenario "0FH" is defined in association with the value "80-94" of the production lottery counter 223y. 95 to 99" are defined in association with each other. In other words, in contrast to the continuation confirmation table and the continuation intensive table, it is configured so that the selection rate for production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is high, and the selection rate for production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is low. There is. Therefore, the greater the number of strong attacks, the lower the possibility that the non-continuation table will be referenced to determine the production scenario, so while the continuation suggestion production is in progress, pay attention to the content of each attack and play the game. You can make it happen. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the explanation will be continued. The interrupt continuous hit lottery table 222h is a data table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hit performance (see FIG. 399) and to determine the type of performance. The details of this interrupt consecutive hit lottery table 222h will be explained with reference to FIG. 417. FIG. 417 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the interrupt consecutive hit lottery table 222h. As shown in FIG. 417, the effect type and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y are defined in association with each other in the interrupt consecutive lottery table 222h for each variation type.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 417, in the long-off variation pattern, the performance type is executed during the normal variation performance period and can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 10 remaining monsters. The values "0 to 4" of the performance lottery counter 223y are defined in association with each other. For this reason, in the case of a long miss, the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of out normal reach, the performance lottery is executed for the performance type of the performance mode that is executed during the normal fluctuation performance period and can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 5 monsters remaining. The value of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the value "0 to 9" of the counter 223y, and the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is executed for the performance type of the performance mode that is executed during the reach fluctuation and can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 4 monsters remaining. “10 to 14” are defined in correspondence. For this reason, in the variation pattern of the missed normal reach, it is decided to execute the interruption continuous hit effect with a total rate of 15%. In other words, execution of the interrupting consecutive hit effect is determined at a higher rate than in the case of a long miss.

In addition, as shown in Figure 417, in the fluctuation pattern of the missed super reach, as an interrupt continuous hit performance executed during the normal fluctuation performance period, a performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 5 remaining monsters is created. The value "0 to 4" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the type, and the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined for the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 4 monsters remaining. “5 to 9” are defined in correspondence. In addition, as an interrupt continuous hit performance executed during reach fluctuation, the value "10 to 14" of the performance lottery counter 223y is associated with the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 4 monsters. The value "15 to 19" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of three monsters. That is, since the total execution rate of the interrupt continuous hit performance is higher than that of the missed normal reach, and the number of monsters can be reduced to a smaller number, the player's expectation for a jackpot can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the hit normal reach variation pattern, as an interrupt continuous hit production executed during the normal variation production period, there is a production type of production mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 5 monsters remaining. , the value "0 to 3" of the production lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the production type, and the value "4" of the production lottery counter 223y is defined for the production type of production mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 0. They are defined in correspondence. In addition, as an interrupt continuous hit performance executed during reach fluctuation, the value "5 to 24" of the performance lottery counter 223y is associated with the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 4 monsters. The value "25" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the performance type of the performance mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to zero. That is, since the total execution rate of the interrupt continuous hit performance is higher than in the case of a miss, and there is a possibility of defeating all the monsters, it is possible to improve the player's expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in Figure 417, in the variation pattern of the hit super reach, as an interrupt continuous hit production that is executed during the normal variation production period, a production mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 4 monsters remains. The value "0, 1" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the type, and the value "2" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined for the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 0. are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interrupt continuous hit performance executed during reach fluctuation, the value "3 to 19" of the performance lottery counter 223y is associated with the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 4 monsters. The value "20 to 39" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 3 and is defined, and the production mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 0. The value "40, 41" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the performance type. In other words, compared to the case of miss or hit normal reach, the total execution rate of the interrupt continuous hit effect is higher, and the possibility of defeating all the monsters is higher, so that the player's expectations for the jackpot are improved. I can do it.

In this way, in this first control example, the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance and the number of monsters that can be defeated are configured to differ for each variation type, and only in the case of a jackpot, the performance that defeats all the monsters is performed. It has a configuration that can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to have the player perform the repeated hitting operation more actively during the execution of the interrupting repeated hitting performance, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the interrupting repeated hitting performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 412(b), the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 412(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a game state storage area 223f. , time saving guarantee number counter 223g, continuous scenario storage area 223h, right hit winning flag 223i, continuous hit type storage area 223j, chance charge standby flag 223k, charge number counter 223m, charge state number counter 223n. , the batch change flag 223p, the change point storage area 223q, the pending symbol state storage area 223r, the fluctuation time timer 223s, the operation valid period timer 223t, the stop operation number counter 223u, the continuous hit valid period timer 223v, At least a change period timer 223x, an effect lottery counter 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (standby number) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110 up to 4 times, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223a The ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and reads the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. It is not possible to obtain the value of . Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and counts the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223b. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, or the main control device 110 displays a special symbol. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction. A command is sent to the audio lamp controller 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 based on the held ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S3910 in FIG. 451). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved pitch number counter 223b. , sends a command for the number of reserved balls for display to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223b after storage. .

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 reserved The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved pitch number symbols corresponding to the value of the pitch counter 223b are displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. However, its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved balls symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while changing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223c has the same contents as the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, but differs in that the target is changed from a special symbol to a normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3904 in FIG. 451), and the third symbol is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display setting on the display device 81 is made (see S4202 in FIG. 455). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 441). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 controls the display control device 114 so that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3907 in FIG. 451), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. It is turned off when it is turned off (see S4208 in FIG. 455). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command.

The gaming state storage area 223f is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. This gaming state storage area 223f is updated every time a state command is received from the main controller 110, which is output every time there is a change in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (see S3902 in FIG. 451). Note that the game state storage area 223f is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured such that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower two bits. More specifically, for example, the lowest bit indicates whether or not the symbol is in a time-saving state, and the second lower bit indicates whether or not it is in a probability-changing state of a special symbol. Therefore, in the "low probability state of special symbols" and the "normal state of normal symbols", the lower two bits are "00B", and in the "low probability state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols", the lower two bits are "00B". The 2 bits become "01B", and the lower 2 bits become "11B" in the "probability change state of special symbols" and the "time saving state of normal symbols". The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can grasp the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the gaming status storage area 223f.

The time saving guarantee number counter 223f is a counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations in which the time saving state is guaranteed. The initial value of this guaranteed time reduction counter 223f is set to 0, and the value is set to 100 when the jackpot ends (see S4107 in FIG. 454). Furthermore, each time a new variable display is set to be executed, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S4304 in FIG. 456). As described above, in the first control example, the time saving state of the normal symbols is maintained until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot. By counting the number of guaranteed time savings using the guaranteed time counter 223f, the audio lamp control device 113 can also accurately grasp the guaranteed number of times.

The continuation scenario storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of performance scenario determined from the continuation suggestion performance selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) at the start of the probability variable continuation suggestion performance. The initial value of this continuation scenario storage area 223h is set to 00H, and when the production scenario is determined by lottery using the continuation suggestion production selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) at the start timing of the variable continuation suggestion production, Data indicating the performance scenario is stored (see S4409 in FIG. 457). During execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion performance, the variation display mode at the start of each variation display is determined based on the data in the continuation scenario storage area 223h (see S4415 in FIG. 457).

The winning flag 223i during right-hand hitting is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot being executed is a jackpot won during the right-hand hitting gaming state (normal symbol time saving state). If this winning flag 223i during right-handed hitting is on, it indicates a jackpot won during the right-handed gaming state, and if off, it indicates a jackpot won during the left-handed gaming state (i.e., the first win). . At the end of the jackpot, the back mode is set according to the state of the winning flag 223i during right-hand hitting. That is, if it is on, the temple search mode is set, and if it is off, the cave search mode is set (see S4109 and S4110 in FIG. 454). As mentioned above, if you hit a jackpot in a left-handed game state (that is, you hit a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol), only 50% of the time it will shift to a variable probability state, while if you hit a jackpot in a right-handed game state. (that is, a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol), the probability changes state at a rate of 80%. The configuration is such that the difference in this ratio is reported based on the degree of expectation indicated by the back mode.

The continuous hit type storage area 223j is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of interrupt continuous hit effect (the execution timing of the effect and the lower limit value of the number of monsters to be subtracted). In accordance with the data in the continuous hit type storage area 223j, the start timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect, the number of monsters to be subtracted in response to the press of the PUSH button 10317, etc. are set.

The chance charge standby flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not there is a period (chance charge standby period) after the execution of the chance charge performance is decided until the chance charge performance is actually started, and is turned on. If so, it indicates that it is a chance charge standby period. The initial value of this chance charge standby flag 223k is set to OFF, and it is set to ON when it is decided to execute the chance charge effect (see S4564 in FIG. 459), and the execution of the chance charge effect is started. (See S3313 in FIG. 443). If a new starting prize is detected while this chance charge standby flag 223k is on, the gauge number is added to the gauge number predetermined as the number of spirit gauges that will be accumulated in the chance charge performance that will be executed afterwards. It is determined whether or not.

The charge number counter 223m is a counter that indicates the number of spirit gauges notified in the chance charge performance. The initial value of this charge number counter 223m is set to 0, and when it is decided to execute the chance charge effect, the value obtained by adding 1 to the number of balls held at the time of the decision is set (see FIG. 459). (See S4563). Further, by executing the chance-up effect, each time the spirit gauge is consumed, its value is subtracted by 1 and updated (see S3559 and S3561 in FIG. 446).

The charge state number counter 223n is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuations until consumption of the spirit gauge accumulated by the chance charge performance is completed. This charge state number counter 223n is set to a value according to the current number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge performance (see S3314 in FIG. 443), and the value increases each time a new variable display performance is set to be executed. It is subtracted by 1 (see S4302 in FIG. 456). While the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not to execute the chance-up effect by consuming the spirit gauge every time the chance-up effect can be performed.

The batch change flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not the pending batch change effect is being executed. If it is on, it means that the pending batch change effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the pending batch change effect is being executed. Indicates that the performance is not in progress. The initial value of this batch change flag 223p is set to OFF, and is set to ON when execution of the pending batch change effect is set (see S4059 in FIG. 453).

The change point storage area 223q is a storage area for storing change points specified by referring to the change point calculation table 222d described above. This change point storage area 223q is configured such that the change points of each reserved ball can be stored separately.

The pending symbol status storage area 223r is a storage area for storing data indicating the pending symbol mode of each pending ball number symbol. With the data stored in this pending symbol state storage area 223r, it is possible to accurately grasp the pending symbol mode of each pending ball number symbol.

The fluctuation time timer 223s is a timer for measuring fluctuation time. Based on the timer value of the variable time timer 223s, it is possible to accurately judge the progress of the variable display performance.

The operation valid period timer 223t is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). This operation valid period timer 223t determines whether or not the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the press stop effect is treated as valid. In addition, in the press stop effect, separate button images and validity period gauges are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen, but in reality, the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is valid according to a single operation validity period. It is determined whether or not. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the determination as to whether or not to enable the stop operation of each symbol row, so that the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The stop operation number counter 223u is a counter that indicates the number of remaining stop operations that can be executed in the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). When the value of the stop operation counter 223u is 3 and a stop operation is detected during the valid operation period, the left symbol column is displayed in a stopped state, and when the value is 2, it stops during the valid operation period. When an operation is detected, the right symbol column is stopped and displayed, and when the value is 1 and a stop operation is detected during the valid operation period, the center symbol column is stopped and displayed.

The continuous press valid period timer 223s is a timer for measuring the period during which the continuous press operation on the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the interrupt continuous press effect (see FIG. 399). This continuous hit valid period timer 223s determines whether or not the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the interrupt continuous hit performance is treated as valid.

The batch change period timer 223x is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 403 and 404). This batch change period timer 223x determines whether or not the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the pending batch change performance is treated as valid.

As described above, the performance lottery counter 223y is a random number counter for executing a lottery of performance modes.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The other memory area 223z is provided with, for example, a winning information storage area for storing winning information based on winning information commands received from the main control device 110. The winning information storage area has a storage area consisting of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In this pachinko machine 10, when a starting winning is detected in the main control device 110, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are each acquired according to the starting winning. From the value, the main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various information (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) that will be obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts various information notified by the winning information command (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) as winning information, and converts the winning information into the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the four vacant areas (1st to 4th areas) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). be done. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and a timer that measures the performance time. are doing. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. This is used to control the performance (performance) and continuous preview performance. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 418.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply section 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122. have. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 432).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 418. FIG. 418 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol winning a jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying an address to outputting data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 made up of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, read operations are performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) that is executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 460) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 423), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of this one frame image and the display process of the one frame image within the image display time of one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the next one frame worth of images, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until the third symbol display device 81 displays any image.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which has a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The final address (the final address of the storage source), the information on the transfer destination (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeated until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and it is possible to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b indicates that the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected. In this case, this is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 using a variation effect.

The MPU 231 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply section 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 460).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be explained. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 419). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen, a power-on fluctuation image with an "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and a power-on fluctuation image with an "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, are displayed during the fluctuation period. In the middle, the display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery held in the main control device 110 is determined. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", an image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuating effect has stopped, and if it is a "missing special symbol", an image showing it will be displayed after the fluctuating effect has stopped. It will then be displayed for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on variation image area The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating "○" and "x" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to . With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the time when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 418, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance, the third symbol display device 81 does not display the variable effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance is not started immediately.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character pattern area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but changes it to the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading resident image data in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in the error message image area 235f in advance, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a storage image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background mode storage area 233k, and an interrupted data storage area 233m.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, round presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , ending effects, and demo effects are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss will finally be displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 is a winning hole from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, so the electric accessory is released as a jackpot with a normal symbol, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball mouth 640, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to reduce or the number of balls it has does not decrease even if it plays a game, so the player is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to decrease or the number of balls it has is You can get a sense of a period of time when you can get a jackpot with a special symbol even if you don't have one. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demo performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with a starting prize is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 421. FIG. 421 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. If the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2,...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite is defined for each address, such as effects for expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, etc. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table.

If it is specified that any of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (undersea, beach, background of the preparation period, background dedicated to time production) is to be displayed based on the background type, the MPU 231 determines which of the backgrounds is selected by the player. The back image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified as time passes.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81), depending on the back type. Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information using the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current fluctuating performance, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is being displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36 is the last address of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is written. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 423), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operations, so the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on the start-up winnings.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 422. FIG. 422 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each production, and as mentioned above, among the image data of sprites used in the production specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all of the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 422). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined in association with an address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 422 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the transfer data table, similar to the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 422, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 423) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 422, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the corresponding address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 419 on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 460) executed by the MPU 231 (see S8005 in FIG. 460). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S9705 in FIG. 471(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 462(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S8308 in FIG. 462(b), S8309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 463 to 468) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 469 and 470) are executed.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S9601 in FIG. 471(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 471(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 472) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 423), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of the image drawing instructions for the image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and displays the image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 423), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 423), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 462(b ), pointer update processing (see S9305 in FIG. 470(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 423), and obtains the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 423. FIG. 423 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Pattern 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite (design) is described for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and an obtained image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , pending pitch number symbol 1, pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , error symbol), and detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in this order.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 462 (b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S9307 in FIG. 469). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S9813 in FIG. 472). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S9814 in FIG. 472). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i specifies a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9902 in FIG. 473).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 462(b)) is executed (see S9902 in FIG. 473).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The background mode storage area 233k is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the currently set background mode. Further, the interruption data storage area 233m is a storage area for temporarily holding information indicating the display mode at the time of interruption during the interruption period when interruption of the display mode is instructed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 424, the audio output device 226 in this first control example will be described. FIG. 424 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 424, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 301, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A certain RAM 303 is built-in.

The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input/output port 305 and the audio synthesizer 306. When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input/output port 305. Further, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizer 306.

The speech synthesis section 306 is composed of a known speech synthesis LSI that synthesizes the speech data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized speech data to the amplifier section 307. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier section 307 and input to the speaker section 308. This allows the speaker unit 308 to output various sounds specified by the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIG. 424, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 424, the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which audio files (sound data) used to output music, sound effects, etc. in various performances performed by the pachinko machine 10 are stored. When execution of various effects is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, an audio file corresponding to the effect is read from the audio file storage area 302a and output to a corresponding channel of the audio synthesis section 306.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the audio output device 226 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 424, the RAM 303 is provided with at least a continuous hit sound output flag 303a, a reproduction position storage area 303b, and a music outputting flag 303c.

The continuous hit sound output flag 303a is a flag indicating the type of the most recently output continuous hit sound (whether it is the first continuous hit sound or the second continuous hit sound) during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect. If this repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is 01H, it indicates that the most recently outputted repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, and if it is "02H", it indicates that it is the second repeated hitting sound. By configuring the repeated tapping sound output flag 303a to be able to grasp the type of the most recently outputted repeated tapping sound, it is possible to alternately reproduce different types of repeated tapping sounds for different channels each time a repeated tapping operation is detected. can. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the sound modes during execution of the continuous hitting operation, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The playback position storage area 303b is a storage area for storing data indicating the playback position at the time of interruption when the playback of music is instructed to be interrupted. When reproducing the music, it is possible to accurately restart the reproduction from the interrupted reproduction position based on the data stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b.

The song outputting flag 303c is a flag indicating whether a variable display effect or the like is being executed and a song based on an audio file is being output. If the song output flag 303c is on, it means that the song is being output, and if it is off, it means that the song is not being output.

<About the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 425 to 439. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. Store it in the corresponding buffer area.

Furthermore, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the normal winning random number counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fall lottery counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (999, 999, respectively in this control example). 99, 250, 999, 198, 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C5 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed to perform display on the first symbol display device 37 and to set a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104), and then, A starting prize winning process accompanying winnings (starting winnings) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 426 to 429.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal ball opening is executed. Execute (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431. After executing the through gate passing process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and then other winning processes are executed (S109). Furthermore, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process starts when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 426, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed in step 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. Otherwise (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of pending variable display in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending variable displays in the special symbol The number of times N2) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 ( S204: Yes), subtract 1 from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S205), and set a reserved ball number command that indicates the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation. (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 434) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store in.

After setting the number of reserved balls command through the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process moves to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203 is It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 434) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store in.

After setting the number of reserved balls command through the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed to set the start of variation of the special symbol (first symbol) (S208), and this process ends. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 427.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the period has not elapsed (S213: No), the display on the first symbol display device is updated (S214), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S208) which will be described later with reference to FIG. 427. When this special symbol fluctuation start process (S208) is executed, the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are Based on this, a special design lottery will be held. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot is determined according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. The type is determined.

In this control example, as the stop symbol of the first symbol (special symbol), when the jackpot A occurs, a blue LED is lit in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, a red LED is lit. Light up the LED, if it becomes a jackpot C, turn on the green LED, if it turns out to be a jackpot D, turn on the blue LED and red LED, and if it turns into a jackpot E, turn on the red LED. and lights up the green LED. Further, if the error occurs, the blue LED and the green LED are set to light up. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S215 is finished, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed in the special symbol variation start process (S208) is displayed. ) is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203i is set to ON (S217). Then, a stop command is set (S218), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped, and after executing the process of S218, this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 427, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 427 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" lottery (judgment) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is a process for determining the performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of the variable performance.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process (S208), first, the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, stop type counter C3, falling lottery counter C4, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area are Each value is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently changing in probability (high probability state of special symbols) (S302). Note that the determination as to whether or not the probability is changing is executed by determining whether the value of the probability changing flag 203h is 1 or more. Here, the probability change flag 203h is set to a predetermined value based on the completion of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 based on the start of the jackpot game.

In the process of S302, if it is determined that the probability is changing (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is changing the probability (high probability state of special symbols), so the falling lottery counter C4 acquired in the process of S301 is changed. By comparing the value with the fall lottery table 202e (see FIG. 407(c)), a lottery (fall lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to cause the special symbol to fall from the variable probability state to the low probability state of the special symbol. S303). Specifically, the value of the falling lottery counter C4 is compared one by one with two random numbers stored in the falling lottery table 202e. As mentioned above, the two random numbers "0, 1" corresponding to a fall to a low probability state during probability change (high probability state of special symbols) are set, and the value of the fall lottery counter C4 and , and the random numbers corresponding to these falls match, it is determined that the fall is caused to fall into a low probability state. After acquiring the lottery result of the fall lottery in the process of S303, the process moves to S304.

In the process of S304, it is determined whether the lottery result corresponds to a fall of the special symbol to a low probability state (S304), and if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to a fall (S304: Yes), The probability change flag 203h is set to OFF (S305), a state command indicating a fall to a low probability state is set (S306), and the process moves to S307.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a probability change state (high probability state of special symbols), that is, it is determined that it is in a low probability state of special symbols (S302: No), S303 to S306 are performed. The process is skipped and the process moves to S307.

In the process of S307, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability times (see FIG. 407(a)). The lottery result is obtained (S307). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with four random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Four random numbers from 0 to 3 are set as the random numbers for a jackpot with a special symbol in a low probability state, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these random numbers for a jackpot are set. If they match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S309.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, if it is determined that the lottery result does not correspond to a fall (S304: No), the process moves to S308. In the process of S308, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability times (see FIG. 407(a)). The lottery result is obtained (S308). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with eight random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Eight random numbers from "4 to 11" are set as the random numbers for a jackpot with a special symbol in a high probability state, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these random numbers for a jackpot are set. If they match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S309.

In the process of S309, whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of S307 or S308 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, it is determined whether the obtained special symbol jackpot random number counter C1 value and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a are (S309), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S309: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203g and probability variable flag is set to the initial value. It is reset (S310), and the display mode at the time of a jackpot is set based on the value of the special win type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S311). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot A to It is determined which of the jackpots E) is the current jackpot type. As mentioned above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot), and it is determined as "10 to 49". If it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot B (5R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (5R normal jackpot) (see Figure 408(b)) . In addition, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined that it is a jackpot D (15R probability variable jackpot), and the value is in the range of "80 to 99". If so, it is determined that it is a jackpot E (15R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 408(c)).

In the process of S311, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LEDs 37A and 37B) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to E). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A to E) are set as the stop types in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the stopped symbols set in the process of S311 is stopped and displayed by the process of S215 of the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426).

Next, with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIGS. 409(a) and 410), a variation pattern for winning a jackpot is selected. Here, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 409(b) and 410, in order to facilitate setting of different fluctuation patterns depending on the set gaming state, It is configured such that the variation time of the special symbol is set by referring to different data tables depending on the state. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the normal table 222b1 (see FIG. 409(a)) of the variation pattern selection table 222b, while the gaming state is If it is a variable probability state or a time saving state, a variation pattern is determined with reference to the probability variation/time saving table 222b2 (see FIG. 410) of the variation pattern selection table 202b (S312). After the process of S312 is completed, the process moves to S318. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S312, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3. .

On the other hand, in the process of S309, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a loss (S309: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g is larger than 0. (S313). In the process of S313, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203g is larger than 0 (that is, it is a value of 1 or more) (S313: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S314), A status command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203g after the subtraction is set (S315), and the process moves to S316. On the other hand, in the process of S313, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S313: No), the processes of S314 and S315 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S316.

In the process of S316, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the stop type stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol reserved ball execution area is selected. Based on the values of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern (variation time) at the time of deviation is determined (S317). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S312, the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area. .

In the process of S318 that is executed after the process of S312 or S317 is completed, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S312 or S317. (S318). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S312 or the process of S317 (S319). When the process of S319 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 428, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for suspending the values indicated by various random number counters and pre-reading the lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the various random number counters.

When the starting winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or not (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, in the process of S401, if it is determined that there is no winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), the process moves to S408, and even if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 ( S401: Yes), in the process of S403, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (that is, the upper limit value is 4) (S403: No), the process of S407 Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S401, it is determined that there has been a winning in the first ball entry port 64 (S401: Yes), and in the process of S403, the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is If it is determined that the number is less than 4 (S403: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S404). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S405).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 434) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball count command through the process of S405, the special win random number counter C1, special win type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, fall lottery counter C4, and fluctuation type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In addition, in the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area. After completing the process of S406, next, a prefetch process is executed (S407), and the process moves to S408. The detailed contents of this look-ahead processing (S407) will be described later with reference to FIG. Based on this, a process of pre-determining (pre-reading) each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In addition, regarding each process of S408 to S413, each process of S401 to S407 described above based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is simply changed to a process based on the ball entering the second starting port 640. , S401 to S406 are executed, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S413, a prefetch process is executed (S414 (S407)), and then this process ends.

Note that in this control example, the value of each counter is configured to be acquired based on the ball entering, but it may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, there is no need for a storage area to store the values of each counter until the fluctuation starts, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Alternatively, some of the counters (for example, only the variation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of variation. With this configuration, the counters related to the judgment of success or failure can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counters that are not related to the judgment of success or failure can be acquired later, which reduces the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 429, the prefetching process (S407 (S414)), which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S407 (S414)).

In the prefetch process, first, it is determined whether there is a new prize winning (S501). In the process of S501, when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is added, it is determined that a new prize has been won. . In the process of S501, if it is determined that there is no new prize winning (S501: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning (S501: Yes), then it is determined whether the current winning is special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (S502), and if it is special symbol 1. If it is determined (S502: Yes), the lottery results for each counter value acquired this time are acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and the special symbol jackpot table 202d1 (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. Transition. In the process of S504, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result and jackpot type is set as the lottery result obtained in advance (S504), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the current winning is not special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), that is, special symbol 2 (special symbol 2) (S502: No), each counter acquired this time The lottery results for the values are acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 (S505), and as the lottery results acquired in advance, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result and jackpot type is obtained. is set (S504), and this process ends.

In this way, before the fluctuation starts, the result of the validity judgment made in advance is output as a winning information command to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a reserved ball is established, so the audio lamp control device 113 , it is possible to recognize the success/failure determination result and the winning type in advance. Therefore, based on the winning information command, the audio lamp control device 113 provides a preview effect (for example, changing the color of the reserved symbols to a color that suggests the winning/failing determination result) that notifies the player of the winning/failure judgment result for the held balls in advance. It is also possible to perform effects such as outputting a notification sound to notify the result of determination of the validity of the held balls. Moreover, since one winning information command is output for each held ball every time a held ball is established, the audio lamp control device 113 can also recognize the formation of a held ball. can. In addition, in the prefetching process (see S407 in FIG. 429) in this control example, if it is determined in the process of S501 that there is no new prize winning (S501: No), this process is directly terminated. , without being limited to this, for example, the winning information command may be set again for each counter value already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Also good. With this configuration, even if it is determined in response to the winning information command received by the audio lamp control device 113 that the preview performance is not to be executed, the preview performance will be executed again for the same pending symbol. It is possible to make a determination as to whether or not to do so. Further, in this control example, the lottery results are determined in advance based on each counter value acquired on the main control device 110 side, and information for indicating the preliminary determination results is set as a winning information command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and information for indicating each acquired counter value may be set as a winning information command, and the lottery result may be determined in advance based on the winning information command received on the audio lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured. In addition, when setting information indicating each acquired counter value as a winning information command, the winning information command may be encrypted so that the currently acquired counter value cannot be identified by the player who illegally acquired the winning information command. It is preferable to configure the system so that the winning information command is output at multiple timings.

Next, with reference to FIG. 430, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425), and is performed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425), and is used to display the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 and the variation display associated with the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). When the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is controlled to open and close. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S601: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (number of times M of pending variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607), and the process moves to S608.

In the process of S608, it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (normal symbol high probability state) (S608). In the process of S608, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g and the state of the probability change flag 203h are checked, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more or the probability change flag 203h is on, the time saving medium is in effect. If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the time saving is not in progress. In the process of S608, if it is determined that the time saving is in progress (normal symbol high probability state) (the value of the time saving middle counter 203g is 1 or more or the probability change flag 203h is on) (S608: Yes) , since the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 acquired in the process of S603 and the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability times (see FIG. 407(b)) are used. Based on this, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S609), and the process moves to S611. In the process of S609, specifically, the value of the normal win random number counter C5 is compared with the random value stored in the normal win random number table 202c for high probability times (see FIG. 407(b)). As mentioned above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a normal symbol win. It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 407(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S608, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (the value of the time saving mode counter 203g is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off) (S608: No) , since the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (normal state, potential state) with normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 obtained in the process of S603 and the normal winning random number table 202c for low probability times (Fig. 407(b)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the normal win random number counter C5 is compared with the random number stored in the normal win random number table 202c for low probability times (see FIG. 407(b)). As mentioned above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5, 6", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", it is determined to be a normal win. It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 407(b)).

In this control example, during the special symbol jackpot, it is configured such that the normal symbol lottery is less likely to become a hit. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to enter the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entering hole 640 is opened. This is to suppress as much as possible the game ball that is intended to enter the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second ball entering hole 640.

After executing the process in S609 or S610, the process moves to S611. In the process of S611, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol win (S611), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S611: (Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S612), and the process moves to S614. In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S611, if it is determined that the normal symbol is out of line (S611: No), the display mode when the pattern is out is set (S613), and the process moves to S614. In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S614, it is determined whether the current time is being shortened (or not in a high probability state of normal symbols) (S614), and if it is in a time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) (S614: Yes) , the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S614, if the time is not being shortened (normal symbol high probability state), that is, the normal symbol is low probability state (S614: No), the variation display time on the second symbol display device 83 is 30 seconds (S616), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S617). Note that the variable time here is a time that is preset by the process of S615 or the process of S616 before the variable display starts on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S617, if the variable time has not elapsed (S617: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1009) of the main process (see FIG. 434) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 will be changed. When the process is finished, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S613.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. is determined (S619). If the lottery result this time is not a normal symbol hit (S619: No), the process ends as is. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current time is being shortened (S620). If it is determined that the time is being reduced (S620: Yes), the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 are set to 1 second x 2 times (S622), and the process proceeds to S623. Transition.

On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the time is not being shortened (S620: No), the opening time and number of times the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened is set to 0.2 seconds x 1 time. (S622), and the process moves to S623.

In the process of S623 executed after the process of S6212 or S622, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry opening 640 is set (S623), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 434) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S621 or S622 of FIG. 430 are completed.

In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is extremely short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to the low probability state of the regular symbol. Since the release period of the second ball entry port 640 becomes very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640.

In addition, in this control example, the opening time and the number of openings per long period are the same in the normal state and the potential state, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the opening time and number of openings can be set at different times. Good too. In addition, in this control example, the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state that is set at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (at the time of lottery). Without limitation, for example, the validity of the normal symbol is determined based on the gaming state set at the start of the variation of the normal symbol (at the time of lottery), and the game is played at the time when the variation time of the winning normal symbol has elapsed. The opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a may be set based on the state. That is, in this control example, since the gaming state is configured to be variably set based on the lottery of special symbols, the gaming state may be variably set while the normal symbols are changing. In such a case, if the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state that is set at the start of fluctuation of the symbols (at the time of lottery), for example, during a jackpot game or normal There is a problem that the first electric accessory 640a remains open for a long time while the symbol is in a high probability state. In contrast, by configuring to set the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a based on the gaming state at the time when the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol has elapsed, the first electric accessory 640a The opening operation can be executed with contents suitable for the set gaming state.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 431. FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entry opening (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed through. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C5 in case of a normal win.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entry opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry ball opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol held ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of holding the variable display in the normal pattern) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S705), and then this process ends. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 432, the NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout firing control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 433, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational, a wait process (in this control example, a wait time of 1 second is performed) is performed. setting process) is executed (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process moves to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S913 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S913 in such a case. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S1016 in FIG. 434, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S914, S915).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S914, S915) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), a status command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203g and the status of the probability change flag 203h (that is, the gaming status at startup) is transmitted (S908). Next, the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S909). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S911, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various productions. Next, interrupts are permitted (S912), and the process shifts to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 434, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 425), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command to In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 428) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 428) or the prefetch process (see FIG. 429) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning apparatus 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning hole 65a is opened according to the content of the jackpot game to be executed (jackpot type), and the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed, or the specified number of balls are in the specific winning hole 65a. Determine whether you have won a prize. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. Details of this jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 435 to 439. In addition, in this control example, although the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. In addition, in this control example, the jackpot game contents (type of entrance to be opened, opening time, number of openings (number of rounds), opening period, interval period, ending period) corresponding to the jackpot type are set as a jackpot scenario. A jackpot scenario that is stored in advance and corresponds to the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot is read out, and a jackpot game is executed based on the read jackpot scenario.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 (S1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430), opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S621 or S622 of FIG. 430 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S312 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427), a variation display according to the variation pattern is changed to the first symbol display. It starts in devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off, the green LED is turned on, and the green LED is turned on until the variation time elapses after the variation starts. If the LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S312 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427) ends, the first symbol display 427, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S311 or the process of S316 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427). A stop display (lit display) is displayed at 37.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device 83 (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S615 or S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430), variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430), the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The current variation display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S613 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430). (lit display).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM 203 stores information on the occurrence of a power outage (S1008), and if the RAM 203 does not store information on the occurrence of a power outage (S1008: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process moves to S1001, and the processes from S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S1009: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1001 to S1007 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 432 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S1013). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process in S1001, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( By setting it to the initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 435. FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 434), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various performances according to the jackpot, and controls the execution of specific winning openings ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203i is on (S1101). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203i is on (S1101: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S1102), the jackpot start flag 203i is set to OFF, and the jackpot flag 203j is set to ON (S1103). , this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203i is off (S1101: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is a special symbol (that is, if the jackpot flag 203j is on). ) or not (S1104). In the process of S1104, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203j is off) (S1104: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (the jackpot flag 203j is on) (S1104: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round ( S1105).

In the process of S1105, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed to set the opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a according to the number of rounds (S1106). ), this process ends. Details of this jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 436.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S1107). . Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot ends, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S1107: Yes), an ending command is set (S1108), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S1107, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (S1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1109). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the case where the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. In the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S1110), and this process is ended. Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 437. On the other hand, in the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the jackpot (S1109: No), a winning process is executed to perform control according to the winning in the specific winning opening 65a (S1111), An abnormality process is executed to determine whether the ball that entered the winning hole 65a is normally ejected (S1112), and then this process ends. Details of the winning process and abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 438 and 439.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 436. FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1106). This jackpot operation setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 436) is started, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the 5th round (that is, the round in which the V accessory is activated) (S1201). In the process of S1201, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the 5th round (S1201: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the V accessory is set (S1202), and the opening pattern of the specific winning hole 65a corresponding to the jackpot type is set. is set (S1203), and the process moves to S1205.

In addition, as mentioned above, in this 1st control example, it is comprised so that the common operation|movement scenario may be set for V accessory regardless of a jackpot type (regardless). Specifically, an operation scenario is set in which the arrangement changes so that the game balls can be distributed to the V area from 5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round. On the other hand, as described above, regarding the opening pattern of the specific winning hole 65a, different opening patterns are set depending on whether it is a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a guaranteed variable jackpot, the opening/closing pattern in which the game ball can reach the V accessory (in the 5th round) while the V accessory is changing the arrangement to distribute the game ball to the V area. During a period of 4.5 seconds from 5 seconds after the start to 9.5 seconds, the specific winning hole (large opening hole) 65a is opened and closed in the opening/closing pattern in which the specific winning hole 65a is opened, while the normal In the case of a jackpot, an opening/closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the V accessory while the V accessory is changing its arrangement to distribute game balls to the V area (4.5 seconds have passed from the start of the 5th round) For 4.5 seconds up to the time, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed in an opening/closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the fifth round (S1201: No), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a is set (S1204), and the process moves to S1205. In the process of S1205 executed after the process of S1203 or S1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1205), and this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 436), the specific winning hole 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the state can be set so that the ball can enter the V area in the fifth round. I can do it. As a result, in jackpots A, B, and D, if the player hits right in the fifth round, the game ball will almost certainly enter the V area and pass the probability change switch, so after the jackpot ends, It is possible to shift to a variable probability state (a variable probability state for special symbols and a time saving state for normal symbols). Furthermore, in the case of jackpots C and E, it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the V area even if the ball is hit right, so it is possible to set the time saving state after the jackpot ends. As a result, the lottery for the first special symbol, in which jackpot C is determined at a relatively high rate (50% rate) in the case of a jackpot, is considered to be disadvantageous for the player, and in the case of a jackpot, The second special symbol lottery in which the jackpot E is determined at a low rate (20% rate) can be made advantageous for the player.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 437. FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing this jackpot ending process (S1110). This jackpot end process (S1110) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends, as described above.

In this jackpot end processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203k is on (S1301). In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), it means that the game ball passed through the variable probability switch during the jackpot, so set the variable probability flag 203h to ON. In this step, the state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the probability change setting flag 203k is off (S1301: No), it means that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch during the jackpot, so by skipping the process of S1302, , the state after the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the process moves to S1303.

In the process of S1303, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is set to 100 (S1303), and based on the probability change flag 203h and the state of the time saving medium counter 203g, a status command (jackpot end command ) is set (S1304). The status command (jackpot end command) set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201. and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the status command, the audio lamp control device 113 updates the gaming status storage area 223f in accordance with the gaming status notified by the status command. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot flag 203j and the variable probability setting flag 203k are set to OFF (S1305), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot ending process (see FIG. 437), the gaming state after the jackpot can be accurately set depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variable switch during the jackpot.

Next, details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 438. FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning in the specific winning hole 65a.

In this winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the current round validity period is in effect (S1401). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the opening state of the specific winning a prize hole 65a until the end of the interval period. In the process of S1401, if it is not the round validity period (S1401: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that the current round validity period is reached (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a winning in the specific winning hole 65a has been detected (S1402). If a winning is detected (S1402: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1403), and a winning command is set to indicate that a winning to the specific winning opening 65a has been detected. (S1404), the process moves to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if a win to the specific winning hole 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the process of S1403 and S1404 is skipped, and the process moves to the process of S1405.

In the process of S1405, it is determined whether the value of the prize winning number counter 203p is 10 or more (S1405), and if the value of the winning prize number counter 203p is 10 or more (S1405: Yes), the process moves to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, if it is determined that the value of the winning prize counter is 9 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406), and if the round time has elapsed ( S1406: Yes), the process moves to S1407. Note that in the process of S1406, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round.

In the process of S1407, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is set to be closed (S1407), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning a prize opening 65a is set to be closed is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether the current closing of the specific prize opening 65a is based on the end of the first round (S1409), and if it is determined that the closing is based on the end of the fifth round (S1409: Yes), the V accessory By setting the flow path solenoid for varying OFF to OFF, the state of the V accessory is set to an arrangement where game balls are distributed to the non-V area (S1410), and the process moves to S1411. On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the current closing of the specific prize opening 65a is due to the completion of a round other than the 5th round (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid is set to ON. Since there is no possibility, the process of S1410 is skipped and the process moves to S1411.

In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203q, probability variation valid flag 203s, and round end flag are set to ON (S1411), and the process moves to S1412. Further, if it is determined in the process of S1405 that the value of the prize winning number counter 203p is 9 or less (S1405: No), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), The processing in S1407 to S1411 is skipped and the processing moves to S1412.

In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag is on (S1412), and if the round end flag is off (S1412: No), the process moves to S1413. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round end flag is on in the process of S1412 (S1412: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203s is on (S1416). In the process of S1416, if the probability variation valid flag 203s is off (S1416: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if the variable variable valid flag 203s is on (S1416: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable variable effective timer 203t (S1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the variable variable effective timer 203t is the upper limit ( S1418). If the value of the variable probability valid timer 203t is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process moves to S1413, and the process of monitoring the variable probability switch and updating the variable probability setting flag 203k is executed. As a result, if the variable probability effective timer 203t is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch, and therefore the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time required to brush the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being improperly passed through the probability change switch and being given a probability change state.

On the other hand, if the value of the variable variable effective timer 203t is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the variable variable effective flag 203s and the round end flag are set to OFF (S1419), and the value of the variable variable effective timer 203t is reset (S1420). , this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the variable probability switch (S1413), and if the game ball has not passed the variable probability switch (S1413: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed the probability variation switch (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203m (S1414), the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1415), and this processing is performed. end.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 439. FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormality process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, it is determined whether the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was normally ejected. This is a process for

In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether the current period is in the round validity period (S1501), and if it is not in the round validity period (S1501: No), the process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the round validity period (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball ejection port switch (or whether the game ball ejected from the variable winning device 65 has been detected). It is determined (S1502).

In the process of S1502, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball ejection port switch (the game ball has been ejected from the variable winning device 65) (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ejected number counter 203u. (S1503), the process moves to S1504. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203q is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203q is off (S1504: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203q is on (S1504: Yes), it is during the pitch period, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is updated by adding 1 (S1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1506), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), then the number of balls ejected (the total value of the value of the variable passing counter 203m and the value of the number of balls ejected counter 203u) wins the prize. It is determined whether the number matches the number (value of the winning number counter 203p) (S1507).

In the process of S1507, if it is determined that the number of ejected pieces and the number of won pieces do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process moves to S1509. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activity in which a game ball is illegally entered into the V area and passed through the probability change switch during the period when the V area is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1507, if it is determined that the number of ejected pieces and the number of winning pieces match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is reset (S1510). Thereafter, the values of the winning pieces counter 203p, the ejected pieces counter 203u, and the variable passing counter 203m are reset (S1511), and the process ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 439), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a malfunction in which the ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a is not ejected normally due to a ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65. It can be detected early and notified.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 440 to 458. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 440, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S3119 (see Figure 441). ) is started during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 441, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 441), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S3119. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S3119 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S3119 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process moves to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process moves to S3008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process moves to S3004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3119 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process moves to S3008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S3119, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, the power-off process is in progress, so the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S3004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S3006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S3119 is executed (see S3118 in FIG. 441). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S3119 is executed, so the reason why the process in S3008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S3009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010), the interrupt Permission is set (S3011). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110. When the process of S3011 is completed, it is next determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3012). Note that this status command is a command that is set in the process of S908 of the startup process (see FIG. 433) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In the process of S3012, if it is determined that a status command has been received (S3012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area (S3013), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 441). and transition. On the other hand, in the process of S3012, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S3012: No), the process of S3013 is skipped and the process moves to the main process (see FIG. 441).

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S3008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S3004 to S3006 and then S3008. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S3010, the processes of S3010 to S3013 described above are executed, and the main process (Fig. 441).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is hitting for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 side can also determine the state. I can do it.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S3009 is skipped is because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S3004 when the process reaches the process in S3008 from S3004 through the process in S3006. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 441, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main processing was started or the current processing of S3101 has been executed (S3101), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the current processing of S3101 was executed. If not (S3101: No), the process moves to S3114 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3113. In the process of S3101, determining whether 1 ms has elapsed is because S3102 to S3113 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S3114, the variable display setting processing in S3115, and the processing for updating various counter values (not shown) in short cycles. That is, by executing the process in S3114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process in S3115 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command from being received by the command determination process. Based on the commands, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S3103 to S3115 are sent to the display control device 114 (S3102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108, which will be described later (S3103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S3104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S3105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a reservation lamp (not shown) is lit according to the values of the special symbol 1 reservation ball counter 223a, the special symbol 2 reservation ball counter 223b, and the value of the normal reservation ball counter 223c. will be held.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring/production processing, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S3109, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S3110), and the process moves to S3111. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output processing in S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S3110 is finished, next, a performance update process is executed to update the performance mode of various performances executed during execution of the variable display performance (S3111). This effect update process (S3111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 442 to 446. After executing the effect update process (S3111), next, the operation status of the PUSH button 10317 (whether it is pressed or not) is monitored, and when a press is detected, control is executed according to the press status. A press detection process is executed (S3112). Details of this press detection process (S3112) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 447 to 450.

When the process of S3112 is finished, counter update process is executed (S3113). In this counter update process (S3113), a process is executed to update the value of a counter (for example, the performance lottery counter 223y for selecting a performance mode) that is necessary when performing various performances.

When the process of S3113 is completed, next, a command determination process is executed to execute control according to various commands received from the main control device 110 (S3114). Details of this command determination process (S3114) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 451 to 454. After executing the command determination process (S3114), a variable display setting process is executed (S3115). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 455 to 459.

When the process of S3115 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3118), and the power-off process is executed (S3119). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S3120), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he or she can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 442, the effect update process (S3111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing this effect update process (S3111). This effect update process (S3111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, various effects executed during execution of the variable display effect. This is a process for updating the presentation mode.

In the effect update process (S3111), first, it is determined whether the value of the variable time timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3201), and if the value is determined to be 0 (S3201: No), the current This means that the variable display is not being executed, and there is no possibility that the effect that should be updated is being executed, so the process is ended as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s is larger than 0 (that is, it is a value of 1 or more) (S3201: Yes), the value of the variable time timer 223s is subtracted (S3202), and then, A press stop effect process is executed to update the effect mode during execution of the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) (S3203). Note that details of this press stop effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 443.

When the process of S3203 is completed, next, an interrupt continuous hit performance process is executed to update the performance mode during execution of the interrupt continuous hit performance (see FIG. 399) (S3204). Note that details of this interrupt continuous hit production process (S3204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 444. Further, when the process of S3204 is completed, next, a batch change performance process is executed to update the performance mode during execution of the pending batch change performance (see FIGS. 402 and 403) (S3205). The details of this batch change effect processing (S3205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 445. When the process of S3205 is completed, a charge consumption process for setting the consumption of the spirit gauge charged in the chance charge performance (see FIG. 397) is executed (S3206), and this process is ended. Details of this charge consumption process will be described later with reference to FIG. 446.

Next, with reference to FIG. 443, the press stop effect processing (S3203) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 443 is a flowchart showing this press stop effect processing (S3203). This press stop effect processing (S3203) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) is executed. This is a process for updating the presentation mode inside.

In this press stop effect processing (see FIG. 443), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) (S3301). In the process of S3301, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) (S3301: Yes), the start of the press stop effect is set (S3302), and the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is set to 3. A timer value corresponding to seconds is set (S3303). Next, the value of the stop operation counter 223u is set to 3 (S3304), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the press stop effect (S3301: No), then it is determined whether the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3305). In the process of S3305, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is larger than 0 (S3305: Yes), the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is updated (S3306), and then the updated operation valid period timer It is determined whether the value of 223t is 0 (S3307). In the process of S3307, if it is determined that the value of the updated operation valid period timer 223t is not 0 (S3307: No), this process is directly ended. If it is determined that the value of the updated operation valid period timer 223t is 0 (S3307: Yes), then it is determined whether the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3308). In the process of S3308, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3308: Yes), the stop display of the chance charge symbol is set (S3309), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3308, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S3308: No), only the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) is set for the current variable display effect. This means that the operation valid period (3 seconds) has passed without the player performing a stop operation in a state where the execution of the chance charge effect was not set, so the stop display of the missing symbol is set. (S3310), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is 0 (S3305: No), then it is determined whether the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has elapsed (S3311). If it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has not elapsed (S3311: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3311, if it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has passed (S3311: Yes), the start of the chance charge effect corresponding to the value of the charge number counter 223m is set (S3312), The charging standby flag 223k is set to OFF (S3313). Next, a value corresponding to the current number of reserved balls is set to the value of the charge state number counter 223n (S3314), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 444, the interrupt continuous hit production process (S3204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 444 is a flowchart showing this interrupt continuous hit effect processing (S3204). This interrupt continuous hit effect processing (S3204) is executed during the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is executed during the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399). This is a process for updating the aspect.

When this interrupt continuous hit effect processing (see FIG. 444) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (S3401). In the process of S3401, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (S3401: Yes), then, based on the value of the variable time timer 223s, it is determined whether the current variable time is the time indicating before reach. (S3402). In the process of S3402, if it is determined that it is a variable time indicating before reach (S3402: Yes), both the display and audio are set to pause, and the pause flag is set to "01H" ( S3404), the process moves to S3405. Specifically, in the process of S3404, a display interrupt command indicating the start of stopping (interrupting) the display mode is set to be output to the display control device 114, and a display interrupt command is set to be output to the display control device 114, and a display interrupt command indicating the start of stopping (interrupting) the output of BGM is set to be output. A setting is made to output an audio interrupt command indicating this to the audio output device 226.

On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s is not a timer value indicating before reaching (S3402: No), only the display mode is set to be temporarily stopped (interrupted), and the temporary stop flag is set. is set to "02H" (S3403), and the process moves to S3405. In the process of S3405 executed after the process of S3403 or S3404 is finished, the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399) is set (S3405), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3401, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (S3401: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the continuous hit period (S3406). In the process of S3406, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous hit period (S3406: Yes), a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223v (S3407), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the continuous hitting period (S3406: No), then it is determined whether the value of the continuous hitting valid period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3408). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3408: Yes), the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223v is subtracted by 1 (S3409), and then the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223v after the subtraction. It is determined whether or not is 0 (S3410). If it is determined that the value of the consecutive hit valid period timer 223v after the subtraction is 0 (S3410: Yes), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3410, if it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223v after the subtraction is not 0 (S3410: No), the display of the end image of the interrupt continuous hit effect is set (S3411), and then, This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3408, if it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223v is 0 (S3408: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance (S3412). . In the process of S3412, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance (S3412: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pause flag is "01H" (S3413). If it is determined that the value of the pause flag is "01H" (S3413: Yes), it means that both the display and audio were stopped (interrupted) at the start of the interrupt continuous hit performance, so the display Both the mode and the audio mode are set to resume from the pause position (S3414). That is, the display control device 114 is set to output a display interruption command indicating the end of interruption of the display mode, and the audio output device 226 is set to output an audio interruption command indicating the end of interruption of the audio mode. Set the output. When the process of S3414 ends, the process moves to S3415.

On the other hand, in the process of S3413, if it is determined that the value of the temporary stop flag is not "01H" (S3413: No), it means that the value of the temporary stop flag is "02H", and only the display mode is temporary. Since this means that the display mode has been stopped (suspended), the display mode is set to restart from the paused position (that is, a display interrupt command is output to the display control device 114 indicating the end of the display mode interruption). setting) (S3416), and the process moves to S3415. In the process of S3415 executed after the process of S3414 or S3416, by setting the initial value "00H" to the pause flag (S3415), it is determined that neither the audio nor the display is paused (interrupted). is displayed, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3412, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance (S3412: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 445, the batch change production process (S3205) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 445 is a flowchart showing this batch change effect processing (S3205). This batch change effect processing (S3205) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403) is executed. This is a process for updating the presentation mode inside.

In the batch change production process (see FIG. 445), first, it is determined whether or not the batch change flag 223p is on (S3501), and if it is determined that the batch change flag 223p is not on (off), ( S3501: No) means that the execution period of the pending batch change performance (see FIGS. 402 and 403) is not in progress, and there is no possibility of making settings related to the pending batch change performance, so the process ends as is. If it is determined that the batch change flag 223p is on (S3501: Yes), next, in the pending batch change performance, the timing at which the validity period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 for batch changing the pending symbol mode starts. It is determined whether or not (S3502). In the process of S3502, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 (S3502: Yes), by setting a timer value corresponding to 3 seconds to the value of the batch change period timer 223x ( S3503), the valid period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is set to 3 seconds, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of 3502, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the valid period (S3502: No), then check whether the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (that is, whether the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is valid) It is determined whether or not it is within the period (S3504). In the process of S3504, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (S3504: Yes), the value of the batch change period timer 223x is subtracted by 1 (S3505), and the value of the batch change period timer 223x after the subtraction is It is determined whether the value of is 0 (S3506). In the process of S3506, if it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223x after the subtraction is not 0 (S3506: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3506, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x after the subtraction is 0 (S3506: Yes), each pending ball number is The symbols are set to be changed and displayed (S3507), and the values of the batch change flag 223p, change point storage area 223q, and batch change period timer 223x are all reset (S3508), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3504, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3504: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 446, the charge consumption process (S3206) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 446 is a flowchart showing this charge consumption process (S3206). This charge consumption process (S3206) is executed in the performance update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, it is charged in the chance charge performance (see FIG. 397). This is a process for setting the consumption of the spirit gauge.

In the charge consumption process (S3206), it is first determined whether the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3551), and if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is 0 (S3551: No). , this means that there is no room to generate a chance-up effect by consuming the spirit gauge, so this process is ended as is. On the other hand, in the process of S3551, if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S3551: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the executable timing of the charge consumption effect (S3552). In the process of S3552, if it is determined that it is not the executable timing of the charge consumption effect (S3552: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3552, if it is determined that it is the executable timing of the charge consumption effect (S3552: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 ( S3553). If it is determined that the value of the charge state counter 223n is 0 (S3553: Yes), it means that this is the last fluctuation display in which the Kiai gauge can be consumed, and within this fluctuation display, the Kiai gauge Since it is necessary to completely consume the spirit gauge, a process (processes of S3560 and S3561) for setting a chance-up effect by consuming the spirit gauge is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3553, if it is determined that the value of the charge state counter 223n is not 0 (S3553: No), next, the currently executed variation display (the variation) has an expectation level of super reach or higher. It is determined whether the displayed performance mode is a set variable display (S3554). If it is determined that the fluctuation is not the expected level of super reach or higher (below normal reach performance) (S3354: No), then next, whether or not the charge state includes a hold of super reach or higher. (S3555). If it is determined that the range of the charge state includes balls of super reach or higher (S3555: Yes), then the value of the charge number counter 223m is the value of the number of balls held within the charge range plus 2. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than that (S3556). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is larger than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of held balls within the charge range (S3556: Yes), the held balls of the super reach effect or higher, which have many chances to execute the chance-up effect, are Even if you take into account the number of balls that are included, it means that the number of gauges (number of charges) of the Kiai gauge remains large compared to the number of balls held, so in order to reduce the number of Kiai gauges during the fluctuation, A process (processes of S3558 and S3559) for setting a chance-up effect by consuming the gauge is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3556, if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is less than or equal to the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of reserved balls within the charge range (S3556: No), a variable display with a super reach effect set By consuming the spirit gauge at the execution timing of multiple chance-up performances in , it is possible to fully consume the spirit gauge within the value of the charge state counter 223n. This process ends without setting the consumption of the spirit gauge in .

In addition, in the process of S3555, if it is determined that the range of the charge state includes a suspended ball of super reach or higher (S3555: No), then the value of the charge number counter 223m is determined to be within the charging range. It is determined whether the value is greater than the number (S3557). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is less than or equal to the number of reserved balls within the charge range (S3557: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3557, if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is larger than the number of reserved balls within the charge range (S3557: Yes), the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge is This means that a large amount remains, so in order to reduce the spirit gauge during the fluctuation, the process (processes of S3558 and S3559) for consuming the spirit gauge and setting a chance-up effect is executed.

In the process of S3558, a charge consumption performance is set in a performance mode according to the execution timing (S3558), the value of the charge number counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S3559), and then this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3554, if it is determined that the fluctuation is greater than or equal to the super reach (S3354: Yes), a charge consumption performance with a performance mode according to the execution timing is set (S3560), and the value of the charge number counter 223m is set. is subtracted by 1 (S3561), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 447, the press detection process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 447 is a flowchart showing this press detection process (S3112). This press detection process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and monitors the operation status (whether or not it is pressed) of the PUSH button 10317, This is a process for executing control according to the pressing situation when a pressing is detected.

In the press detection process (S3112), first, it is determined whether or not a press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected (S3601), and if it is determined that a press on the PUSH button 10317 is not detected (S3601: No), the process continues as is. This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a press on the PUSH button 10317 has been detected (S3601: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3602). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3602: Yes), it means that the PUSH button 10317 was pressed (operated) during the valid period of the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). Therefore, a stop operation detection process is executed to perform control corresponding to the stop operation during execution of the press stop effect (S3603), and this process ends. Note that details of this stop operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 448.

In the process of S3602, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is 0 (S3602: No), then it is determined whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223v is greater than 0 (i.e., if the continuous hit in the interrupt continuous hit effect (S3604). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3604: Yes), repeated hit operation detection processing is executed to execute control corresponding to the repeated hit operation during execution of the interrupt repeated hit performance (S3605). , and then ends this process. Note that details of this repeated-hit operation detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 449.

In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223v is 0 (S3604: No), next, whether the value of the batch change period timer 223x is larger than 0 (that is, if the value of the batch change period timer 223x is larger than 0 (i.e., It is determined whether or not the PUSH button 10317 is valid (S3606). If it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (S3606: Yes), change operation detection processing is executed to perform control for setting batch changes while the pending batch change effect is being executed. (S3607), and then this process ends. Note that details of this changing operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 450. On the other hand, in the process of S3606, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 448, the stop operation detection process (S3603) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 448 is a flowchart showing this stop operation detection process (S3603). This stop operation detection process (S3603) is executed during the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, when the stop operation is executed during the press stop effect. This is a process for performing corresponding control.

In the stop operation detection process (S3603), it is first determined whether the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is greater than 1 (S3701), and if it is determined that the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is greater than 1 (S3701). :Yes), the stop display of the symbol row corresponding to the value of the stop operation counter 223u is set (S3702), and the process moves to S3709. In the process of S3702, if the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 3, the stop operation for the left symbol row is set, while if the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 2, the stop operation for the right symbol row is set. Set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3701, if it is determined that the value of the stop operation counter 223u is 1 or less (S3701: No), it is determined whether the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3703). In the process of S3703, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3703: Yes), it means that the variable display set to execute the chance charge effect is being executed, so the remaining period By setting the stop display effect of the chance charge symbol, it is notified that the chance charge effect will start (S3707), and the process moves to S3708.

On the other hand, in the process of S3703, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S3703: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation validity period remains for 2 seconds or more (S3704). If it is determined that the operation validity period remains for 2 seconds or more (S3704: Yes), the execution of the chance charge stimulation effect (see FIG. 396(a)) is set in the remaining period (S3705), and the process moves to S3708. do. By executing the process in S3705, in a variable display where only the press stop effect is set, if three presses are completed early in the valid period (within 1 second after the start), the display will be canceled immediately. It is possible to perform a chance charge stimulation performance that has a longer performance period than when the symbols are stopped. Therefore, since the performance period can be varied according to the speed of the player's operation (press), a more suitable performance mode can be realized.

In the process of S3704, if it is determined that the operation validity period does not remain for 2 seconds or more (less than 2 seconds) (S3704: No), the stop display of the middle symbol row is set so that it becomes a combination of missing symbols. (S3706), the process moves to S3708.

In the process of S3708 executed after any of the processes of S3705 to S3707 is executed, the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is reset to 0 (S3708), and the process moves to the process of S3709. In the process of S3709 executed after the process of S3702 or S3708 is executed, the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is updated by subtracting 1 (S3709), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 449, the continuous hit operation detection process (S3605) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 449 is a flowchart showing this repeated tapping operation detection process (S3605). This repeated tap operation detection process (S3605) is executed during the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. This is a process for executing corresponding control.

In the repeated hit operation detection process (S3605), first, the remaining valid period (T) is identified from the value of the repeated hit valid period timer 223v (S3751), and then the number of monsters corresponding to the production type of the current interrupt continuous hit performance is determined. A lower limit value (D) is calculated (S3752). Note that the lower limit value of the number of monsters is predefined for each performance type in the interruption consecutive hit lottery table 222h (see FIG. 417) as described above. When the process of S3752 is completed, next, "T/5 seconds x (100 monsters - D)" is calculated (S3753), and a value is calculated by subtracting the calculated value from the current remaining number of monsters (S3754). ). Note that in the process of S3754, values below the decimal point are rounded off. When the process of S3754 is completed, it is next determined whether the calculated number of monsters is less than the lower limit value for the performance type of the current interrupt continuous hit performance (S3755).

In the process of S3755, if it is determined that the number of monsters has been calculated below the lower limit (S3755: Yes), the display of the remaining number of monsters is updated to the lower limit (S3756), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3755, if it is determined that the calculated number of monsters is greater than or equal to the lower limit (S3755: No), the specified subtraction number is subtracted from the display of the remaining number of monsters and updated (S3757), and then , this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 450, the change operation detection process (S3607) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 450 is a flowchart showing this changing operation detection process (S3607). This change operation detection process (S3607) is executed during the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, during the execution of the pending batch change effect, This is a process for performing control for setting changes.

In the change operation detection process (S3607), first, change points corresponding to each held ball are identified from the data in the change point storage area 223q (S3801), and the appearance of held balls with 1 or more change points is uniformly increased by one level. The data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r is updated as follows (S3802). Next, the variation type of pending 1 is specified (S3803), and the pending symbol mode is specified according to the specified variation type, the pending variation lottery table 222c, and the performance lottery counter (S3804). Then, it is determined whether the specified pending symbol mode has a higher expectation level than the data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r (S3805). If it is determined that the specified pending symbol mode has a higher expectation level than the data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r (S3805: Yes), the data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r is changed to data indicating the specified pending symbol mode. (S3806), and the process moves to S3807.

On the other hand, in the process of S3805, if it is determined that the specified pending symbol mode is not higher in expectation than the data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r (S3805: No), the process of S38006 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3807. Transition.

In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the rank up lottery of the reserved symbol mode by the processes of S3804 to S3806 has been completed for all reserved balls (S3807), and the lottery for all reserved balls has not been completed. If it is determined that (S3807: No), the variation type of the reserved ball whose start prize detection time is newer than that of the reserved ball targeted for the current lottery is specified (S3808), and the process returns to S3804.

In the process of S3807, if it is determined that the rank up lottery for all the reserved balls has been completed (S3807: Yes), the display of the reserved symbol mode indicated by the data in the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r is set (S3809), and The values of the change flag 223p, change point storage area 223q, and batch change period timer 223x are all reset (S3810), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 451, the command determination process (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 451 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S3114). This command determination process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

In the command determination process (S3114), first, the unprocessed commands received from the main controller 110 are read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the unprocessed commands received from the main controller 110 are It is determined whether a status command is included therein (S3901). In the process of S3901, if it is determined that a status command is included in the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 (S3901: Yes), the game is played according to the gaming status notified by the received command. The data in the status storage area 223f is updated (S3902), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3901, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S3901: No), next, a variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (the variation pattern command is included in the unprocessed commands). (S3903). In the process of S3903, if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S3903: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set on (S3904), and a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S3905). , and then ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3903, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S3903: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3906). In the process of S3906, if it is determined that a stop type command has been received (S3906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3907), and the stop type is extracted from the received command. (S3908), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3909, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3906: No), then it is determined whether or not the held pitch count command has been received (S3909). In the process of S3909, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has been received (S3909: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved pitch number counter (special symbol 1 number of reserved balls The values of the counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223b) are updated (S3910), and this process ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored. Further, when a held ball number command indicating the number of held balls of a normal symbol is received, information for indicating the number of held balls is stored in the normal held ball number counter 223c. In this control example, the number of held balls command sent from the main controller 110 includes information indicating the current number of held balls. Even if the value is erased, the value of each held pitch number counter can be restored to an appropriate value by receiving the next transmitted held pitch number command. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that each held pitch count command is transmitted in the process of transmitting the status command (see S908 in FIG. 433) of the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 433).

On the other hand, in the process of S3909, if the number of reserved balls command is not received (S3909: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S3911). In the process of S3911, if it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S3911: Yes), various effects (pre-read effects) are set according to the type of winning information notified by the winning information command. The winning information command process is executed (S3912), and the process ends. Details of this winning information command processing (S3912) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 452 and 453.

In the process of S3911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S3911: No), then various commands related to winning (opening command, round number command, jackpot end command, and ending command) (S3913), and if it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S3913: Yes), execute control according to the type of the win-related command. A win-related command process is executed to perform the win (S3914), and the process ends. This winning related command processing (S3914) will be described later with reference to FIG. 454. On the other hand, in the process of S3913, if it is determined that a command related to winning has not been received from the main control device 110 (S3913: No), then this process ends.

Next, details of the winning information command process (S3912), which is one process in the command determination process (S3114), will be described with reference to FIG. 452. FIG. 452 is a flowchart showing this winning information command processing (S3912). In this winning information command process (S3912), first, data indicating the lottery result notified by the command is stored in an empty area of the winning information storage area (S4001), and the process moves to S4002. In the process of S4001, data indicating the winning information notified by the command is stored in the empty area with the smallest number among the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area.

In the process of S4002, it is determined whether the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S4002). If it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S4002: No), it means that the variable display performance to which the chance charge performance is set is being executed, and the chance charge performance has not yet started. Therefore, according to the content of the newly detected starting prize, the number of gauges (number of charges) of the spirit gauge charged in the chance charge performance is added to the value determined in advance at the start of fluctuation. Execute processing. More specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current winning information command is a winning information command indicating a win (S4003), and if it is determined that it is a winning information command indicating a winning (S4003: Yes). ), the charge number counter 223m is updated by adding 2 to the value (S4004), and the process moves to S4006. On the other hand, in the process of S4003, if it is determined that the current winning information command is not a winning information command indicating a win (it is a winning information command indicating a loss) (S4003: No), the value of the charge number counter 223m is It is updated by adding 1 (S4005), and the process moves to S4006.

On the other hand, in the process of S4002, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S4002: No), there is no possibility of adding the number of gauges (number of charges) of the spirit gauge, so each step of S4003 to S4006 The process is skipped and the process moves to S4006. In the process of S4006, it is determined whether the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (S4006). In the process of S4006, if it is determined that a lottery result corresponding to a fall has been notified (S4006: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a production mode corresponding to a scenario for continuation in the probability change continuation suggestion production is being executed. It is determined (S4007). In the process of S4007, if the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h is one of "08H" to "0BH" corresponding to the continuous rich scenario, the production mode corresponding to the continuous rich scenario is being executed. It is determined that there is.

In the process of S4007, if it is determined that the continuation suggestion effect of the continuation rich scenario is being executed (S4007: Yes), next, the winning information notified by the current winning information command is used as the continuation suggestion effect of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. It is determined whether the winning information is to be consumed during execution (S4008). That is, based on the new winning information, it is determined whether or not it is certain that the special symbol will fall from the variable probability state to the low probability state during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion presentation, (S4008: Yes), refer to the non-continuation table of the continuation suggestion production selection table 222g (see FIG. 416). Then, a continuation suggestion production scenario is determined (S4009), data indicating the selected scenario is overwritten in the continuation scenario storage area 223h (S4010), and the process moves to S4011. In each process of S4009 and S4010, the production scenario of "0CH" in the non-continuation table is stored in the continuous scenario storage area 223h.

In addition, in this first control example, when a new starting prize is a lottery result corresponding to a fall in the number of fluctuations within the execution range of the variable continuation suggestion performance, the production scenario of "0CH" is always set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which one scenario is determined by lottery from among the four performance scenarios (any of "0CH" to "0FH") defined in the non-continuation table. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the performance modes when falling.

On the other hand, in the process of S4006, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has not been notified (S4006: No), or if it is determined that the probability change continuation suggestion performance of the continuation-rich scenario is not being executed (S4007: No) ), and if it is determined that the new winning information notified by the current winning information command is not the winning information that will be digested during the execution of the definite variable continuation suggestion performance (S4008: No), the performance in the definite variable continuation suggestion performance Since there is no need to rewrite the scenario to the scenario in the non-continuation table, the process directly proceeds to S4011.

By executing each of the processes from S4006 to S4010, it is possible to perform a probability change in a situation where the start of the probability change continuation suggestion performance is in a probability change state, and the number of reserved balls for the number of fluctuations at which the probability change continuation suggestion performance ends has not been accumulated. If a continuation suggestion performance is executed and a starting prize that corresponds to a fall occurs after that, by switching to the non-continuation performance scenario (the "0CH" performance scenario), the result of the definite change continuation suggestion performance is that a fall has already occurred. It is possible to notify that In other words, since it is possible to prevent the effect from appearing as if the fall has continued even though the fall has already occurred, it is possible to realize a more suitable effect.

In addition, in the process of S4011, based on the winning information notified by the winning information command, a pending notice lottery process is executed to determine whether or not the pending change performance and the pending batch change performance can be executed (S4011), and this process end. The details of this pending notice lottery process will be explained with reference to FIG. 453.

FIG. 453 is a flowchart showing this pending notice lottery process (S4011). In this pending advance notice lottery process (S4011), first, data indicating a pending symbol mode of white pending is stored in an empty area of the pending symbol mode storage area 223r (S4051). More specifically, data indicating the pending symbol mode of white pending is stored in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas of the pending symbol mode storage area 223r. When the process of S4051 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the batch change flag 223p is on (S4052), and if it is determined that the batch change flag 223p is on (S4052: Yes), the white reservation is suspended. The symbol mode is set to be displayed as a pending symbol corresponding to the new winning information (S4053), and this process ends. By executing the process of S4053, the number of reserved balls symbol changed to resemble a rock by the reservation batch change performance and the number of reserved balls symbol based on the newly detected starting prize after the start of the reservation batch change production. Since the manner of the reserved symbols can be made different between the two, it is possible to easily make the player understand the range of the reserved ball number symbols that are subject to the collective reservation change performance. Therefore, it is possible to realize a performance mode that is easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this first control example, the number of pending balls symbols based on the starting winnings detected after the start of the pending batch change performance is uniformly set to the pending symbol mode of white pending, but this is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery in a pending symbol mode is performed using the pending variation lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414(a)) for a new pending ball number symbol. As a result, it is possible to create a feeling of expectation of winning the jackpot not only for the reserved ball number symbol that is the target of the reservation collective change performance, but also for the reserved ball number symbol based on the new starting winning prize. Furthermore, for example, a new starting winning prize detected after the start of the pending batch change performance may also be configured to be added to the targets of the pending batch change performance. In this case, it may be configured such that the reserved ball number symbol based on the new starting prize is always added to the target of the pending batch change effect, or it may be configured such that it is added to the target of the pending batch change effect only under predetermined conditions. Good too. In addition, as a predetermined condition, for example, if the winning information corresponding to a new starting winning shows a jackpot expectation level that is higher than the super reach miss, it may be configured to be included in the execution target of the pending batch change effect. For example, only when newly notified winning information corresponding to a variation type that has a higher expectation level than the held balls in the range for which the held batch change effect is set, can the system be included in the execution target of the held batch change effect. Good too. With this configuration, when the reserved ball number symbol based on a new starting prize is added to the execution target of the reserved batch change performance, the player's expectation of a jackpot can be further improved.

In the process of S4052, if it is determined that the batch change flag 223p is off (S4052: No), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is greater than 1 (S4054), and the number of reserved balls is 1 or less. If it is determined that this is the case (S4054: No), there is no possibility of executing the pending batch change effect, so the process proceeds to S4060 for drawing a pending symbol mode of the pending ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4054, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is larger than 1 (2 or more) (S4054: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area and the data in the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r are , change points are calculated according to the change point calculation table 222d (S4055), and it is determined whether or not the pending batch change performance can be executed according to the calculated change points, the values of the batch change lottery table 222e, and the performance lottery counter. (S4056). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result in the process of S4056 corresponds to the execution of the pending batch change effect (S4057), and it is determined that the determination result does not correspond to the execution of the pending batch change effect. If so (S4057: No), the process moves to S4060 for drawing a pending symbol mode of the pending ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information. On the other hand, in the process of S4057, if it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the pending batch change effect (S4057: Yes), the execution of the pending batch change effect is set (S4058), and the batch change flag 223p is turned on. (S4059), and the process ends.

In the process of S4060, the pending change lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414(a)) is read out (S4060), and according to the read pending change lottery table 222c, the winning information notified by the command, and the value of the production lottery counter. The pending symbol mode is determined (S4061). Next, in accordance with the pending symbol mode determined in the process of S4061, the data corresponding to the latest winning information in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r is updated (S4062), and the pending symbol mode of the mode indicated by the updated data is updated. The display is set (S4063), and this processing ends.

By executing this pending notice lottery process (see FIG. 453), various performance modes using the pending ball number symbol can be suitably set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the contents of the above-described hit-related command processing (S3914) will be explained. FIG. 454 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related command processing (S3914). This win-related command processing (S3914) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 451) of the audio lamp control device 113, and when a command related to a win is received from the main control device 110, This is a process for performing control according to the type of the received command.

In the win-related command processing (see FIG. 454), first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an opening command (S4101). If it is determined that the command received this time is an opening command (S4101: Yes), a display opening command corresponding to the received opening command is set (S4102), and then this process ends.

In the process of S4101, if it is determined that the command received this time is not an opening command (S4101: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a number of rounds command (S4103), and the command received this time is determined to be a number of rounds command. If it is determined that there is one (S4103: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S4104), and this process ends.

In the process of S4103, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a round number command (S4103: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot end command (S4105), and if it is a jackpot end command. If it is determined (S4105: Yes), the data in the gaming state storage area 223f is updated according to the information indicating the gaming state after the end of the jackpot included in the received jackpot end command (S4106), and then It is determined whether the medium winning flag 223i is on (S4107). If it is determined that the winning flag 223i during right-handed hitting is on (S4107: Yes), a jackpot was achieved during the variable probability state or time-saving state in which the game is played by right-handed hitting (that is, a so-called consecutive game has occurred). This means that a jackpot was won in the lottery of the second special symbol with a high percentage of probability-variable jackpots, so the back mode for high expectations (see FIG. 390(b)) is set (S4109), This process ends. The reason for uniformly setting the background mode for high expectations is to make it difficult to tell whether the time-saving state or the variable probability state has been set, thereby improving the gameplay that allows the player to predict the current gaming state. This is to make this happen.

On the other hand, in the process of S4107, if it is determined that the winning flag 223i during right-handed hitting is off (S4107: No), a jackpot was achieved in the normal state of playing the game by left-handed hitting (so-called winning on the first hit). This means that a jackpot was won in the lottery of the first special symbol with a low probability of jackpot, so the back mode for low expectations (see FIG. 390(a)) is set (S4108), After that, this process ends. Uniformly setting the background mode for low expectation level makes it difficult to tell whether the time-saving state or the variable probability state has been set, thereby improving the gameplay that allows the player to predict the current gaming state. This is to make this happen.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S4105 that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4105: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (S4110), and if it is an ending command. If it is determined (S4110: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S4111), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S4110 that the ending command has not been received (S4110: No), then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 455, the variable display setting process (S3115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 455 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S3115). This variable display setting process (S3115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, This is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S3115), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4201). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S4201: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S4207 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4202), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation performance extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is stored in the RAM 223. (S4203).

Next, a variable effect setting process is executed to set the effect mode to be executed with the extracted variable pattern (variable time) (S4204). The contents of this variable effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 456. When the process of S4204 is completed, a display variation pattern command is generated to notify the display control device 114 of the production mode determined in the process of S4204, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 ( S4205). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area is shifted (S4206). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process moves to S4207.

In the process of S4207, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4207). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S4207: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S4208), and the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is stored in the RAM 223. (S4209). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is directly set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 (S4210), and the process moves to S4211.

In the process of S4211, a display stop type command is generated to notify the display control device 114 based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S4211). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled. After the process of S4211 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 456, the contents of the variable effect setting process (S4204), which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 455) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. . FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process (S4204). In this variable performance setting process (S4204), a process for setting a detailed performance mode (notice content) of the variable performance of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

In the fluctuation performance setting process (S4204), it is first determined whether the value of the charge state number counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4301), and if it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4301). :Yes), the value of the charge state counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S4302), and the process moves to S4303. On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the value of the charge state counter 223n is 0 (S4301: No), the process of S4302 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S4303.

In the process of S4303, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed time reduction counter 223g is greater than 0 (S4303). If it is determined that the value of the guaranteed time reduction counter 223g is 0 (S4303: No), the process moves to S4311. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223g is larger than 0 (S4303: Yes), the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4304), and then It is determined whether the value of the guaranteed time reduction counter 223g is greater than 0 (S4305). In the process of S4305, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed time reduction counter 223g after the subtraction is 0 (S4305: No), the process moves to S4311. On the other hand, in the process of S4305, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number of times counter 223g after subtraction is larger than 0 (S4305: Yes), next, if the value of the time saving guaranteed number of times counter 223g after subtraction is larger than 4? It is determined whether or not (S4306). In the process of S4306, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed time reduction counter 223g after the subtraction is greater than 4 (S4306: Yes), the process moves to S4312.

In the process of S4311, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4311). Here, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state based on the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223f. In the process of S4311, if it is determined that the current state is in a variable probability state (S4311: Yes), it means that the variable probability state has continued for more than 100 times after the jackpot ends, so a back mode lottery is performed. Therefore, the process moves to S4312. On the other hand, in the process of S4311, if it is determined that the current state is not in a variable probability state (S4311: No), the process of S4312 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S4313.

In the process of S4312, in a gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which the game is played with right-handed players, one back mode is drawn from among a plurality of back modes indicating the expectation level of the variable probability state with a lottery probability according to the gaming state. A back mode lottery process is executed for the purpose of this (S4312), and the process moves to S4313. Note that details of this back mode lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 458.

In the process of S4313, a production mode selection process for selecting a production mode in the variable display production is executed (S4313), and then this process is ended. Note that details of this presentation mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 459.

In addition, in the variable effect setting process in the first control example, if it is determined in the process of S4306 that the value of the guaranteed time saving count counter 223g after subtraction is 4 or less (S4306: No), the variable continuation suggestion effect is set. Since this means that it is the execution period (variation period of the 96th to 99th variable display after the end of the jackpot), next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (S4307). In the process of S4307, if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S4307: Yes), the jackpot presentation mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuous suggestion presentation is set as the current variable display mode (S4308), and when the player is hitting right The winning flag is set to on (S4309), and this process ends. In addition, as a presentation mode for a jackpot exclusive to the execution period of the continuous suggestion presentation, for example, a presentation is performed in which an adventurer who breaks through the door 806 discovers treasure on the other side of the door 806 by a presentation of breaking through the door 806. , a performance that announces a jackpot, etc. is performed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4307, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a special symbol jackpot (S4307: No), the continuation suggestion performance setting for setting the performance mode during the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion performance The process is executed (S4310), and this process ends. The details of this continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 457.

Next, with reference to FIG. 457, the contents of the continuous suggestion effect setting process (S4310), which is one process in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. do. FIG. 457 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310).

When the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223g is 4 (S4401), and the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223g is not 4 (3 (S4401: No), the data in the continuation scenario storage area 223h is read (S4411), and it is determined whether the read scenario is a scenario for continuation (S4412). In the process of S4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is not a scenario for continuous use (S4412: No), the process moves to S4415. On the other hand, in the process of S4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is a scenario for continuous concentration (S4412: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result of the current special symbol is a lottery result of falling ( S4413) If it is determined that the lottery result is not a fall (S4413: No), the process moves to S4415. On the other hand, in the process of S4413, if it is determined that the lottery result is a fall (S4413: Yes), the production scenario is switched to "0CH" (S4414), and the process proceeds to S4415.

In the process of S4415, from the scenario read from the continuous scenario storage area 223h, the production mode of the number of fluctuations corresponding to the value of the guaranteed time reduction counter 223g is read (S4415), and the read production mode is used as the display mode of the current variation pattern. Set (S4416). Next, it is determined whether the last presentation mode of the scenario has been set (S4417), and if it is determined that the last presentation mode of the scenario has been set (S4417: Yes), the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h is reset to "00H" (S4418), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4417, if it is determined that the final performance mode of the scenario has not been set (S4417: No), the process of S4418 is skipped and the process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed time counter 223g is 4 (S4401: Yes), it means that it is the start timing of the probability change continuation suggestion performance (see FIG. 392). Executes processing for determining a production scenario for a continuous suggestion production. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4402). In the process of S4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4402: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read (S4403), and if the winning information includes the winning lottery result. It is determined whether or not there is one (S4404). In the process of S4404, if it is determined that the lottery result of falling is not included in the winning information (S4404: No), next, check whether four pieces of winning information are stored (i.e., whether the winning information of the probability change continuation suggestion effect is not included). It is determined whether the reserved balls until the end are already reserved (S4405).

In the process of S4405, if it is determined that four pieces of winning information are stored (S4405: Yes), the continuation confirmation table in the continuation suggestion production selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) is referred to, and the continuation suggestion production scenario is selected. is determined (S4406), and the process moves to S4409. On the other hand, in the process of S4405, if it is determined that four pieces of winning information are not stored (S4405: No), the continuation richness table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) is referred to, and the continuation suggestion A production scenario is determined (S4407), and the process moves to S4409.

On the other hand, in the process of S4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a variable probability state (S4402: No), and in the process of S4404, the lottery result of falling is included in the winning information. If it is determined that (S4404: Yes), a production scenario is determined with reference to the non-continuation table in the continuation suggestion production selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) (S4408), and the process moves to S4409.

In the process of S4409 executed after any of the processes of S4406 to S4408 is executed, data indicating the selected performance scenario is stored in the continuous scenario storage area 223h (S4409), and the first variation in the determined scenario is stored. The presentation mode is set as the presentation mode of the current variation pattern (S4410), and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 458, the contents of the back mode lottery process (S4312), which is one process in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. . FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing the contents of the back mode lottery process (S4312).

When the back mode lottery process (S4312) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a jackpot variation pattern (S4501). If it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S4501: Yes), the fluctuation display mode for jackpot is selected as the fluctuation display mode (S4502), and the right-handed winning flag 223i is set to on. (S4503), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S4501: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4504). . If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a variable probability state (S4504: No), the back mode is selected by referring to the fallen table in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. (S4505), and the process moves to S4510.

On the other hand, in the process of S4504, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4504: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read (S4506), and next, the winning lottery result is included in the winning information. is included (S4507). In the process of S4507, if it is determined that the lottery result of falling is included in the winning information (S4507: Yes), the non-falling table in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the effect lottery counter 223y The back mode is selected by lottery with reference to the value of (S4508), and the process moves to S4510.

On the other hand, in the process of S4507, if it is determined that the lottery result of falling is not included in the winning information (S4507: No), the probability change continuation table in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the effect lottery The back mode is selected by lottery with reference to the value of the counter 223y (S4509), and the process moves to S4510.

In the process of S4510 executed after any of the processes of S4505, S4508, and S4509 is executed, the lottery result of each process is a lottery result indicating a change to a rear mode different from the current rear mode. It is determined whether or not (S4510). In the process of S4510, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to changing the back mode (S4510: Yes), a display back change command indicating the changed back mode is set (S4511), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S4510, if it is determined that the back mode is not to be changed (S4510: No), the process of S4511 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 459, the contents of the effect mode selection process (S4313), which is one process in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. . FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing the contents of the production mode selection process (S4313).

When the performance mode selection process (S4313) is executed, first, it is determined whether a variable pattern command including an additional time command (including an additional time command indicating an additional time of 7 seconds) has been received (S4551). If it is determined that the variable pattern command including the additional time command has not been received (S4551: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4551, if it is determined that a variable pattern command including an additional time command has been received (S4551: Yes), the interrupt continuous hit lottery table 222h (see FIG. 417) is read out (S4552), and the effect lottery counter In accordance with the value of 223y, it is determined whether or not the interrupt continuous hit performance can be executed (S4553), and then it is determined whether the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the interrupt continuous hit performance (S4554). In the process of S4554, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the interrupt repeated hit effect (S4554: Yes), data corresponding to the type of the interrupt repeated hit effect to be executed is stored in the repeated hit type storage area 223j (S4555 ), Next, it is determined whether the type of the interrupt continuous hit effect is a type to be executed before reach-to-reach (S4556). In the process of S4556, if it is determined that it is an interrupt continuous hit performance of the type that is executed before reach (S4556: Yes), the audio mode corresponding to the variable time indicated by the basic time command is determined (S4558), and the sound mode is determined in S4559. Move to processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S4556, if it is determined that the determined type of interrupt continuous hit effect is not the type to be executed before reach (S4556: No), the variable time indicated by the basic time command and the additional time command are The audio mode corresponding to the sum with the indicated variation time is determined (S4557), and the process moves to S4559.

In the process of S4559, a display mode corresponding to the variable time indicated by the basic time command is determined (S4559), and this process ends. In this way, the first control example is configured such that it is possible to easily identify whether or not the variation type is longer by 7 seconds, depending on the presence or absence of the additional time-saving command. Thereby, by simply checking the contents of the additional time command, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a variable type of lottery target for determining whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hit performance. In addition, when it is decided to execute an interrupt continuous hit performance, by setting the performance mode corresponding to the variation time (7 seconds shorter variation time) notified by the basic time command, it is possible to fill the variation time exactly. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the performance mode and the end timing of the variable display performance without preparing a performance mode exclusively for the interrupt continuous hit performance, so that a suitable performance mode can be provided.

On the other hand, in the process of S4554, if it is determined that the interrupt continuous hit effect is not being executed (S4554: No), the chance charge lottery table 222f (see FIG. 415(b)) is read (S4560), and the current variation type is Then, it is determined whether or not the chance charge performance (see FIGS. 396(b) and 397(a)) can be executed according to the number of reserved balls and the value of the performance lottery counter 223y (S4561), and then, the process of S4561 It is determined by the determination (lottery) whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance charge effect (S4562). In the process of S4562, if it is determined that the execution of the chance charge effect has not been determined (S4562: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S4566), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, in the process of S4562, if it is determined that the execution of the chance charge performance has been decided (S4562: Yes), the value of the charge number counter 223m is set to the value obtained by adding 1 to the number of held balls (S4563), The charging standby flag 223k is set to ON (S4564), and a performance mode including a chance charge performance is determined as the current variable display mode (S4565), and this processing is ended. In this way, in this first control example, when it is decided to execute the chance charge performance, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG (charge number counter 223 m The configuration is such that the value of After the chance charge performance ends, the pace at which the chance up performance is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is varied by taking into consideration the lottery results of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load (processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

<About the control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 460 to 473. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 460, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration, and , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since this is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 made up of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S8001) will be explained with reference to FIG. 461. FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S8001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access, so if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S8101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S8101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S8102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S8102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently being stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S8103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) (S8105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S8001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 461, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a through the process of S8101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S8102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further points the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing in S8101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a portion of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S8101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the steps S8102 and S8102 multiple times, the steps S8103 to S8105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program, which is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released, is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 460. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image in a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S8003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S8004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S8004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S8005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 471(a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer (see S9602 in FIG. 471(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)), the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 419(a) to 419(c) are drawn. The simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 462(b)) are executed as shown in FIG.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first starting port 64 (starting prize), and an instruction to start the variable performance is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation production period, and a simple variation production can be performed. can. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Since it is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, so that immediately after the power is turned on, for example, when the power is restored, To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S8005, interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 462(a). FIG. 462(a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 462(b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 462(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 423) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 462(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S8302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S8303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S8302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 463 to 468.

In the display setting process (S8303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 469 to 470.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S8304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S8303) or the simple display setting process (S8309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113, a continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the performance and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S8304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S8305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 423, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 473.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S8307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter, and the third symbol display device The stop symbols displayed at 81 after the variable performance are finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S8301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. In order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S8308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S8309) is executed, and the process moves to S8304. do.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S8302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 463 to 468. First, FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (FIG. 463, S8302), as shown in FIG. 463, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401). (S8401: No), the command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S8303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S8402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S8403).

Then, it is first determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S8404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S8404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S8405), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S8405) will be described with reference to FIG. 464(a). FIG. 464(a) is a flowchart showing variable pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation display data table that corresponds to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time can actually have a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S8501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set in the process of S8501 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S8503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S8503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can be judged.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S8501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S8504), and the pointer is 233f is initialized to 0 (S8505). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S8506), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S8505, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, transfers data to the transfer data table buffer 233e through the process of S8502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data was set in the process of S8504 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 463. In the process of S8404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S8406), If there is a stop type command (S8406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S8407), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S8407) will be described with reference to FIG. 464(b). FIG. 464(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S8601), and the stop type table and V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462(b)) are executed. By comparing the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time is executed, the stop symbol after the variable performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S8602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S8602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. (S8603). Thereafter, the process returns to S8401 in FIG. 463.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S8602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S8304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stop symbol set in the process of S8602 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set in S8603, and the identified stop symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Incidentally, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 463, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S8406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display suspend command among the unprocessed commands (S8408). If it is determined that a display interrupt command has been received (S8408: Yes), interrupt command processing is executed (S8409). Details of the suspension command processing (S8409) will be described with reference to FIG. 465.

Here, the suspension command processing (S8409) will be explained with reference to FIG. 465. FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing this interruption command processing (S8409).

In the suspension command processing (FIG. 465, S8409), first, it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating the start of suspension (S8701). In the process of S8701, if it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the start of suspension (S8701: Yes), data indicating the current display data table type, pointer value, and time counter value is used as suspension data. It is stored in the storage area 233m (S8702), and the interrupt continuous hit effect display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8703). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the interrupt continuous hit performance display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8704), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the interrupt continuous hit performance display data table (S8705). , the pointer 233f is initialized (S8706), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S8701, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating the start of an interruption (that is, a command indicating the end of an interruption) (S8701: No), the received command is stored in the interruption data storage area 233m. The type of display data table, the value of the pointer 233f, and the value of the clock counter 233h are specified based on the data in the display data table (S8707), and the display data table buffer 233d, pointer 233f, and clock counter 233h are updated, respectively, based on the specified results. (S8708), and this processing ends.

By executing this interrupt command processing, the progress status of the display performance that was paused (interrupted) at the start of the interrupt continuous hit performance is held in the interrupted data storage area 233m, and when the interrupt continuous hit performance ends, the interrupted data storage area The display mode can be restarted from the display mode at the time of interruption, which was maintained at 233 m.

Returning to FIG. 463, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8408, if it is determined that there is no display interrupt command (S8408: No), it is determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S8410), and the display opening command is If there is a command (S8410: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S8411), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the opening command process (S8411) will be described with reference to FIG. 466(a). FIG. 466(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8804). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S8805), this process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8801, The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the image data of the sprite required in the set opening display data table is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Returning to FIG. 463, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8410, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S8410: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S8412), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S8412: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S8413), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S8413) will be described with reference to FIG. 466(b). FIG. 466(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S8902).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S8901, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8904). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S8905), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 463. In the process of S8412, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S8412: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8414), and the display command is executed. If there is an ending command (S8414: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S8415), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the ending command process (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. 467. FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S9001). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S9002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S9001, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S9003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9003). S9004). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S9005), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 463. In the process of S8414, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S8416), and the rear image is changed. If there is a change command (S8416: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S8417), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S8417) will be described with reference to FIG. 468(a). FIG. 468(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag is set to on (S9101), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S9603) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. . Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (rear image type), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the rear image determination flag corresponding to the other rear image types is turned on. The image determination flag is set to OFF (S9102), this rear image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S9101 is turned on, the changed back image type is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S9102. . When the identified back image type is back B or back C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if the back type of the back image specified in the display data table specifies that one of a plurality of back types should be displayed, the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S9102 is used. , specifies the back image type to be displayed at that time, further specifies the range of the back image to be displayed as time passes, and determines the RAM type in which image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. There should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S9102, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 463. In the process of S8416, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S8416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8418), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no command. If (S8418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S8419), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S8419) will be described with reference to FIG. 468(b). FIG. 468(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S9201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S9202). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S9201, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S9202, and a response is taken according to the error type. The process is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S9202, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 463. In the process of S8418, if it is determined that there is no error command (S8418: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S8420), and the process returns to S8401.

In the process of S8401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes). ), the processes of S8402 to S8420 are executed again. Then, the processes of S8401 to S8420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S8401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination process is executed. finish.

Note that the simple command determination process (S8308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Only the type commands are extracted and the processing corresponding to each command, such as the fluctuation pattern command processing (see Fig. 464(a)) and the stop type command processing (see Fig. 464(b)), is executed. For commands, processing is performed to discard them without executing the processing corresponding to the commands.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 464(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S8501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S8502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S8303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 469 and 470. FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 469, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S9301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S9301: No), It is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, so the process skips steps S9302 to S9304 and moves to the process S9305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S9301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S9302), S9303 to S9304 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S9303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S9303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S9303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S9304).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 470(a). FIG. 470(a) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S9401).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing information such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Determine the various parameters required.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S9401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S9402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 469. After the warning image setting process (S9304) or in the process of S9303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S9303: No), then the process moves to S9305.

In S9305, pointer update processing is executed (S9305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 470(b). FIG. 470(b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S9501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f through the process of S9501, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S9502). As a result, if it is End information (S9502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S9503), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S9503: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S9504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S9505), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S9503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S9503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S9506), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S9502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S9502: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 469, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9306). In task processing, the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S9306, along with the warning image developed earlier, and display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S9307), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S9308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S9308: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S9308: Yes), it means that the presentation time of the presentation corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on. (S9309).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S9309: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S9310), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S9311). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S9312), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9313). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S9314), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S9315), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. In addition, compared to the conventional case where display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not placed on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S9315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is changed. Until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S8304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S9315, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S9309, if the confirmed display flag is not off but on (S9309: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S9316). If the demo display flag is off (S9316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S9317), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S9318). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S9319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9320), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (S9321), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of S9316, if the demo display flag is on (S9316: Yes), it means that the demo effect will be performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process will end. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S8309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image (see FIGS. 419(b) and 419(c)) is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S8305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 471(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S9602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 471(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S9601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S9601: No), all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 472.

Next, with reference to FIG. 471(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S9602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 471(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S9602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S9701), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S9701: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S9702). In the process of S9702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . Then, if it is determined in the process of S9702 that the transfer process has not finished (S9702: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9702: Yes), the process moves to S9703. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S9701, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S9701: No), the process proceeds to S9703.

In the process of S9703, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S9703), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S9703: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S9703, if all the resident image data has been transferred (S9703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S9705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 463 to 282) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 469 to 470 (a) and (b)) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the A normal image is displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472) (see S9601: No in FIG. 471(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed with . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 472, the normal image transfer setting process (S9603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 472 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S9603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9305) of the previously executed display setting process (S8303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S9801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S9802), and if it is transfer data information (S9802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S9803), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S9804), and the process proceeds to S9805.

Further, in the process of S9802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data (S9802: No), the process of S9803 and S9804 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S9805. In the process of S9805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S9805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S9805: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S9806).

In the process of S9806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S9806 that the transfer process has not ended (S9806: No), the image controller 237 continues to perform the image transfer process, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9806: Yes), the process moves to S9807. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S9805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S9805: No), the process proceeds to S9807.

In the process of S9807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S9807: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S9808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S9803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S9813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S9807: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S9809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S9809: No), there is no image data to start transferring, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S9809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S9810), the back image provided for each back image type is Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S9811). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S9812), and the process moves to S9813.

Note that if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S9812, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer process is immediately terminated.

In the process of S9813, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813). The determination in the process of S9813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S9813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S9813, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S9814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S9814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S9815), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and also by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the opening performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 473, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S8306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 473 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification rate, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305), a drawing list shown in FIG. 423 is generated (S9901). That is, in the process of S9901, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S8304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed furthest in the background to the sprite that should be placed in the front in one frame's worth of images, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as drawing information (detailed information). In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of that sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S9902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. I can do it.

In the drawing process, after the process in S9902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S9903). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 462(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<About the control process of the audio output device in the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 474 to 478. First, with reference to FIG. 474(a), the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 474(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main processing.

When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process is executed to perform control according to various commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 (20001). Details of this command determination process (S20001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 475. After the processing in S20001, an audio setting process is executed to reproduce audio data (audio file) according to the performance (S20001). Details of this audio setting process (S20001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 478.

When the process of S20001 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (S20003). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S20003 (S20003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S20005), and the power-off process is executed (S20006). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S20007), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S20003 (S20003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S20004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S20004: No), the process returns to S20001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S20004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 474(b). FIG. 474(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interruption process (see FIG. 474(b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt processing, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S20101), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 475, the command determination process (S20001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 474(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 475 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (S20001).

In the command determination process (S20001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S20201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S20201: No), the command determination process is terminated. and return to main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S20201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S20202), and then the unprocessed command flag stored in the command buffer area is set to ON. The type of command for all processing commands is analyzed (S20203).

First, it is determined whether or not there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S20204). This audio fluctuation pattern command is used when outputting the display fluctuation pattern command (see S4205 in FIG. 455) during the fluctuation display setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 455). It is set to notify the type and output timing of the audio to be played according to the mode.

In the process of S20204, if it is determined that there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S20204: Yes), the music and sound effects to be used during the execution of the notified variation pattern command are identified (S20205). ), the output channel and output timing of the specified music and sound effects are set (S20206), and the process returns to S20201.

On the other hand, in the process of S20204, if it is determined that there is no voice variation pattern command (S20204: No), then it is determined whether or not a voice continuous command is included in the unprocessed commands ( S20207), if a continuous hit command for audio is included (S20207: Yes), it means that the player has performed a continuous hit operation, so a repeated hit sound command processing is performed to set the reproduction (output) of the repeated hit sound. is executed (S20208), and the process returns to S20201. The details of this continuous hit sound command processing (S20208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 476.

On the other hand, in the process of S20207, if it is determined that the audio continuous sound command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S20207: No), then it is determined whether or not the audio interrupt command is included. (S20209), and if it is determined that a continuous sound command for audio is included in the unprocessed commands (S20209: Yes), interrupt command processing is executed to interrupt and resume the BGM being played. It is executed (S20210), and the process returns to S20201. Note that details of this interrupt command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 747. On the other hand, in the process of S20209, if there is no audio interrupt command among the unprocessed commands (S20209: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed commands is executed (S20211), and the process returns to S20201.

Next, details of the continuous hit sound command processing (S20208) will be described with reference to FIG. 476. FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing the continuous hit sound command process (S20208). This repeated hitting sound command process (S20208) is executed during the command determination process (FIG. 475) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and is a process for setting the reproduction (output) of the repeated hitting sound, as described above.

In this repeated hitting sound command processing (S20208), first, it is determined whether the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "00H" (S20301). In the process of S20301, if it is determined that "00H" is set in the value of the repeated hit sound output flag 303a (S20301: Yes), the repeated hit sound command for the first repeated hit operation in the interrupt repeated hit performance (see FIG. 399) is Since this means that the sound has been received, the process moves to step S20305 to reproduce the first continuous hit sound.

On the other hand, if it is determined that "00H" is not set in the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a (S20301: No), next, whether or not "01H" is set in the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is determined. (S20302). In the process of S20302, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is not set to "01H" (that is, the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is "02H") (S20302: No), 1 Since this means that the last repeated hit sound output in the interrupt repeated hit performance is the second repeated hit sound, in this case as well, the process moves to S20305 in order to reproduce the first repeated hit sound.

In the process of S20305, the CN2 of the speech synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 424) is set to play the audio file corresponding to the first continuous tapping sound (S20305), and the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a is set to correspond to the first continuous tapping sound. It is updated (set) to "01H" (S20306), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S20302, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "01H" (that is, the previously outputted repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound) (S20302: Yes) , sets CN3 of the voice synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 424) to play the audio file corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound (S20303), and sets the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a to "02H" corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound. (S20304), and the process ends.

By executing this repeated tap sound command processing, two types of audio data can be played alternately on two channels each time a repeated tap operation is executed, so it is possible to diversify the audio format. . In addition, if the configuration is such that the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are simply played back alternately on a single channel (in other words, the output of one sound being played is stopped and the output of the other sound is controlled). Compared to the case where the repeating configuration is used), it is possible to output the other sound while maintaining the state in which one sound is output (the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output in duplicate) ), it is possible to make the sound mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. To be more specific, when a single channel is configured to alternately play the first consecutive hit sound and the second consecutive hit sound, when a player who plays the consecutive hits quickly performs a repeated tapping operation, the first part of each audio data is This results in a monotonous sound pattern in which only the words are repeated alternately. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that multiple channels play multiple pieces of audio data in sequence, the output of one piece of audio data played on one channel will not be interrupted, and other audio data will be played on other channels. can be played. In other words, a voice based on one voice data and a voice based on another voice data can be synthesized and output. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the first part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify sound modes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Note that in the first control example, two types of audio data (repeated tap sounds) are alternately output to two channels each time a repeated tap operation is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of audio data are sequentially and alternately reproduced on CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify audio modes. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the configuration may be such that the audio data is sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. With this configuration, from the time one audio data is played for one channel until the next audio data is played for the same channel (the audio data being played ends) Since the period of time can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify audio modes. Furthermore, the type of audio data to be output may be changed depending on the interval between repeated hits. Specifically, for example, if a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between successive hits (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less), three types of audio modes are sequentially played on three channels. On the other hand, if a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between successive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data may be sent sequentially to two channels. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the data is played back (alternately). With this configuration, the sound output mode can be varied according to the interval between repeated hits, so it is possible to realize a game in which the interval between repeated hits is adjusted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In this first control example, the configuration is such that one of the consecutive tapping sounds is output in conjunction with the multiple tapping operation, but under certain conditions, the configuration may be such that the multiple tapping sound can be output even if the multiple tapping operation is not performed. . More specifically, for example, if the last repeated tapping sound output during the effective period of the repeated tapping operation is the first repeated tapping sound, the second consecutive tapping sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, even though the first continuous tapping sound and the second consecutive tapping sound are output as a set in response to the repeated tapping operation, the last sound output is the first consecutive tapping sound. (In other words, the second continuous hit sound that becomes the pair is no longer output), and it is possible to prevent the sound form from becoming half-finished. Therefore, the audio mode can be set more suitably. In this case, when the last repeated tapping sound is the first repeated tapping sound, the control for outputting the second repeated tapping sound after the end is controlled by the variable display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during execution of jackpot fluctuation). With this configuration, for players who wish to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last repeated hit sound output during an interrupt repeated hit presentation can be made the first repeated hit sound. It is possible to realize the gameplay. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, the first consecutive hit sound and the second consecutive hit sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between consecutive hits by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a repeated tapping operation is detected while no sound is being played, the first repeated tapping sound may be always output. In other words, if the interval between repeated hits is so long that the next repeated hit operation is executed after the first repeated hit sound has finished playing, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible for players who wish to diversify the audio formats to perform repeated tapping operations at a faster pace, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the interrupting repeated tapping performance. be able to.

Next, the suspension command processing (S20210) will be described with reference to FIG. 477. FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing this interruption command processing (S20210). The interruption command process (S20210) is executed during the command determination process (FIG. 475) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and is a process for setting the interruption and restart of the BGM being played.

In the suspension command processing (S20210), first, it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating the start of suspension (S20401). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the start of interruption (S20401: Yes), data indicating the playback position of the fluctuating BGM being played is stored in the playback position storage area 303b (S20402), and in CN1 The reproduction of BGM for the interrupt continuous hit performance is set (S20403), and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S20401, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating the start of an interruption (that is, a command indicating the end of an interruption) (S20401: No), the BGM for the interrupt continuous play effect is The playback is ended (S20404), the data in the playback position storage area 303b is read (S20405), the playback of the fluctuation BGM from the read playback position is restarted at CN1 (S20406), and then this process is ended.

Next, details of the audio setting process (S20002) will be described with reference to FIG. 478. FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the audio setting process (S20002). This audio setting process (S20002) is executed during the main process (FIG. 474) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226.

In this audio setting process (S20002), first, it is determined whether the current timing is to output the music (S20501). If it is determined that the current timing is not the output timing of the music (S20501: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S20501, if it is determined that the current time is the output timing of the song (S20501: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current song is read (S20502), and the read audio file is played on the corresponding channel. (S20503), sets the music output flag 303c to ON (S20504), and ends this process.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, when a jackpot is won, regardless of the jackpot type, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the time reduction of the normal symbol is The configuration is such that the condition continues. That is, the operation (operation mode of the electric accessory 640a) between the end of the jackpot and the execution of the 100th special symbol lottery is configured to be the same for the probability-variable jackpot and the normal jackpot. Then, only when the game state is in the probability variable state at the end of the 100th special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues even after the 100th time. That is, if the time-saving state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, or if the variable probability state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol occurs within 100 times. In this case, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is terminated at the timing when the 100th special symbol lottery is executed, and the state is shifted to the normal state. With this configuration, even if a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, or if the variable probability state is set and falls to a low probability state within 100 times, However, until the 100 special symbol drawings have been executed, it will be difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving state and the variable probability state, so at least 100 special symbol drawings will be carried out. Until this happens, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the gaming state will be in a variable state.

In addition, in this first control example, if the normal symbol is in the time-saving state at the time of winning the jackpot, the gaming state is set to the normal state at the start of the variable display to indicate the jackpot (the normal symbol is in the time-saving state). ). By configuring in this way, it is possible to limit the case where the time saving state of the normal symbol ends within 100 times after the end of the jackpot to the case where the fluctuating pattern of the jackpot starts. Behavior in which there is a high possibility that the time saving state of the normal symbol has been terminated during the execution of the variable display effect within the number of times (for example, if the variation time of the normal symbol exceeds 3 seconds, or if the normal symbol is out of lottery) (or when a pattern of 0.2 seconds x 1 time is executed as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a), the player can be pleased. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the game can be played while paying attention to the lottery results of the normal symbols, the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, etc.

Further, in the present first control example, the player is configured to be able to predict the probability of the probability change state to some extent by the display mode of the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, during the game state where the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, in the cave exploration mode where the expectation level of the definite variable state is relatively low, in the temple exploration mode where the expectation level of the definite variable state is relatively high, and in the definite variable state. There are three types of rear modes in the super temple search mode that not only confirm that something is true, but also confirm that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the variable state will continue until the hold is cleared). Either of these is configured to be set when executing a variable display performance based on the special symbol lottery results. With this configuration, while the time saving state of the normal symbols is set, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current gaming state from the back mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing. can be improved. In addition, by setting the super temple search mode, it is confirmed that the gaming state is in a variable state, so if the game state is predicted to be in a variable state and the mode shifts to the super temple mode, the player On the other hand, it can make you feel happy that your predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the game transitions to the super temple mode even though it was predicted that the special symbol will be in a low probability state, the player may feel happy that the game state has been set to be more advantageous than expected. can be used. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by setting the super-temple mode, it is guaranteed that the lottery results corresponding to falls will not be included in the hold (at least the lottery results for the number of hold balls can be executed with variable jackpot probability) Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with a stronger expectation of hitting the jackpot while the player is on hold.

In addition, in this first control example, regardless of the gaming state, over a specific range of variable display that is executed before the end of 100 special symbol drawings that guarantee the time saving state of normal symbols ( In other words, immediately before the end of the 100th special symbol lottery (over the 96th to 99th fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot), the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is performed to inform whether or not the probability variation state continues. It is configured to execute. When starting this probability variation continuation suggestion performance, read in advance the lottery results from the 96th to 99th time, which is the execution range of the probability variation continuation suggestion production, and check whether the probability variation state continues until the 99th special symbol drawing. If the variable probability state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of a performance scenario in which a highly expected attack pattern is likely to occur is increased. On the other hand, if you fall into a time-saving state before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or you were in a time-shortening state after the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern will occur. The configuration is such that the selection rate of easy-to-play production scenarios is high. In this way, by configuring the performance mode to be set based on the gaming state at the end of the performance, it is possible to more accurately notify the gaming state after the performance ends. Here, if the configuration is such that the probability variable continuation suggestion performance is executed based only on the gaming state at the start of the production, the probability variation continuation suggestion production will fall to a low probability state while the probability variation continuation suggestion production is being executed, and the continuation of the probability variation state will not be announced. Despite this, there is a possibility that the time-saving state will end when the 100th special symbol lottery begins. In this case, there is a possibility that the content of the performance and the actual operation are inconsistent, causing the player to distrust the Pachinko machine 10 and the hall. In addition, as a countermeasure to this problem, it is possible to construct a performance that suggests a definite change continuation by a performance that can be completed with one change, but with this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient performance period, so it is difficult to ensure a sufficient performance period. It becomes difficult to become On the other hand, in this first control example, the variable continuation suggestion performance is executed over the last four fluctuation displays in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed, and the notification content of the probability change continuation suggestion performance is , is configured to be determined based on the gaming state at the time when the last special symbol lottery in the execution range of the variable probability continuous performance is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately notify the gaming state at the end of the performance, and it is possible to diversify the performance modes. In addition, if the probability is variable at the start of the performance and there are no reserved balls until the end of the performance, the system is configured so that a performance in which an attack pattern with a relatively high expectation level is likely to occur is selected. ing. This is because the probability of a lottery result corresponding to a fall is lower than the probability of a jackpot, and it is extremely rare for a symbol to fall to a low probability state of a special symbol within the production period (with a relatively high probability of a probability change state). This is because the performance ends.

Furthermore, in the first control example, as a type of entertainment effect, a press stop effect in which a stop operation of each symbol row is executed according to the timing of the player's operation on the PUSH button 10317 is configured to be executable. This press stop performance is basically a performance that suggests that it may develop into a chance charge performance. In this press-stop performance, if it does not develop into a chance charge performance, each symbol row will be stopped and displayed as a simple miss combination depending on the player's press timing, but if it develops into a chance charge performance, the The charge symbol is (pseudo) stopped and displayed to notify the development of a chance charge performance. In this way, by configuring the stop timing of each symbol row to be varied according to the player's press timing, the timing at which it is announced whether or not it will develop into a chance charge effect can be adjusted to the player's preferred timing. It can be adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, in the press stop performance that does not develop into a chance charge performance, the mode at least when the center symbol row is stopped and displayed is different depending on the timing when the stop operation is performed for all symbol rows. More specifically, if the stop operation is completed a specified number of times (3 times) within a predetermined period (1 second) (in other words, at a relatively early stage) after the start of the valid period of the stop operation, the performance is relatively effective. While the central symbol row is displayed as stopping due to the long chance charge inciting performance, if the specified number of stop operations are completed after a predetermined period (1 second) has passed, the central symbol row will be removed immediately. A performance that is stopped and displayed with a symbol (that is, a relatively short performance) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the period after the stop display from becoming too long or short depending on the completion timing of the player's stop operation. It is possible to make the transition of the performance mode until the stop display of the missing symbol appear natural. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance mode that makes the player feel less uncomfortable. In addition, in the press stop effect in this first control example, separate button images and valid period gauges are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen, but in reality, a single operation valid period causes the PUSH button 10317 It is determined whether or not the operation is valid. Then, according to the number of times the stop operation (pressing the PUSH button 10317) has been executed during the valid operation period of 1, the symbol row for setting the stop display is varied (it is determined whether the stop operation has been performed for all symbol rows) ) is configured. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the determination as to whether or not to enable the stop operation of each symbol row, so that the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, in this first control example, a chance charge performance is configured to be executable as a type of entertainment performance. This chance charge performance is based on the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) that a specific performance mode (chance up performance) will be performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all the balls held at the start of the performance are exhausted). This is a performance that is suggested (notified) to the player in advance. The guaranteed number of chance up performances (the number of accumulated spirit gauges) announced in this chance charge performance is such that some kind of chance up performance will occur at each timing until the held balls are exhausted at the start of the chance charge performance. consumed for. Here, chance-up effects are effects that increase the expectation of a jackpot, such as a change in the display format of the number of reserved pitches, the occurrence of a so-called pseudo series, the occurrence of a cut-in effect, or the appearance of red letters. Examples include the occurrence of lines such as Note that the spirit gauge is configured so that it is always consumed until it reaches 0. In other words, it is configured so that it will not be discarded without being consumed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In the first control example, the amount of the spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge performance is determined mainly based on the number of balls held at the start of the chance charge performance. After the chance charge effect ends, the pace at which the chance increase effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is varied by taking into account the lottery results of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load (processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

Further, in this first control example, an interrupt continuous hit performance can be executed as a type of entertainment performance. This interrupting continuous hit effect is a display style effect that appears as if a different type of display effect than the previously displayed display effect suddenly interrupts the normal fluctuating display or reach fluctuation, and the player On the other hand, it is composed of a performance that prompts the user to operate the PUSH button 10317 in a specific operation mode (repeat operation mode). In this interrupt continuous hit performance, as the stage of the presentation progresses (the number of displayed monsters decreases) in response to the player's repeated hit operations, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. be. As a result, the player can be made to actively perform the repeated-hitting operation, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the interrupting repeated-hitting performance. This interrupt continuous hit effect is performed when it is determined that the additional time command is not a command indicating 0 seconds (it is a command indicating 7 seconds) among the basic time command and additional time command that make up the variable pattern command. This is a performance that has the potential to be carried out. Here, the variable time is set by the sum of the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time notified by the additional time command. Then, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect, the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed for a period of the same length as the additional time notified by the additional time command, and the normal variable display effect (execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect) is executed. Regarding the performance mode for a period other than the above period), the configuration is such that a production mode for a period of the same length as the basic time notified by the basic time command is set. With this configuration, even if a variable display effect is executed in which an interrupt continuous hit effect is set, the effect mode corresponding to the basic time command can be reused, thereby reducing the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10. can do.

In addition, in the interrupt repeated hit performance in the first control example, each time a repeated hit operation is executed, multiple types of audio data (sound data corresponding to the first repeated hit sound, audio data corresponding to the second repeated hit sound), etc. ) is configured to play back one audio data. More specifically, if an odd-numbered repeated tapping operation is detected during the valid period of the repeated tapping operation in the first interrupted repeated hitting performance, audio data corresponding to the first repeated tapping sound is reproduced to CN2 in the audio synthesis unit 306. On the other hand, when an even-numbered consecutive tapping operation is detected, the audio data corresponding to the second consecutive tapping sound is reproduced to CN3 in the audio synthesis unit 306. In this way, each time a repeated tapping operation is executed, one of a plurality of different audio data is output to one of a plurality of different channels (the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output to CN1 and CN2). By adopting a configuration in which the output is output alternately, it is possible to diversify the sound modes while performing the repeated tapping operation. In other words, since it is possible to prevent the sound form from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game during the continuous play valid period. In addition, if the configuration is such that the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are simply played back alternately on a single channel (in other words, the output of one sound being played is stopped and the output of the other sound is controlled). Compared to the case where the repeating configuration is used), it is possible to output the other sound while maintaining the state in which one sound is output (the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output in duplicate) ), it is possible to make the sound mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. To be more specific, when a single channel is configured to alternately play the first consecutive hit sound and the second consecutive hit sound, when a player who plays the consecutive hits quickly performs a repeated tapping operation, the first part of each audio data is This results in a monotonous sound pattern in which only the words are repeated alternately. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that multiple channels play multiple pieces of audio data in sequence, the output of one piece of audio data played on one channel will not be interrupted, and other audio data will be played on other channels. can be played. In other words, a voice based on one voice data and a voice based on another voice data can be synthesized and output. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the first part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify sound modes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the interrupt continuous hit effect in this first control example, during the valid period in which the repeated press operation is valid, the later the timing of the press (the less time remaining in the valid period), the greater the number of monsters subtracted (the more It is configured such that the performance mode at the stage of high expectation level is more likely to be set. Thereby, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being defeated quickly to the lower limit number. That is, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the number of monsters based on the presses being stopped at the remaining 10 monsters or the remaining 4 monsters, which are likely to be set in the event of a loss, and the player's expectations for a jackpot are reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, even if a player is playing the game with a slow pressing pace, if the player presses the button in the latter half of the effective period, a relatively large number of monsters to be defeated will be more likely to be selected, so the player can reach the target number within the lower limit of the number of monsters. possibility can be increased. Therefore, even a player who presses at a slow pace can be entertained by the interrupting continuous hit effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this first control example, as a type of entertainment production, the plurality of pending ball number symbols are changed to a specific mode (a display mode that looks like a rock) that is different from the normal pending symbol mode. The system is configured to be able to execute a pending batch change performance. In this pending batch change performance, after the plurality of pending ball number symbols are changed to a specific form, the player performs a specific operation (pressing the PUSH button 10317) to change at least one pending ball number symbol. However, an effect is executed in which the pending symbol mode is changed to a mode with higher expectation level than the pending symbol mode before being changed to the specific mode. By executing this pending batch change performance, it is determined that the expectation level indicated by at least one pending ball number symbol increases, so that the player's expectation for a jackpot can be improved. In addition, since it is not known which pending ball number symbol will change (expectation level will increase) until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is fun to see which pending ball number symbol will change. can be made to do so. Further, since the expectation level is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the timing of notification can be adjusted to the timing desired by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In addition, in this first control example, each time a press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect, two types of audio data are alternately played on two channels, thereby changing the audio mode. Although the configuration is diversified, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of audio data are sequentially and alternately reproduced on CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify audio modes. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the configuration may be such that the audio data is sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. With this configuration, from the time one audio data is played for one channel until the next audio data is played for the same channel (the audio data being played ends) Since the period of time can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify audio modes. Furthermore, the type of audio data to be output may be changed depending on the interval between successive hits. Specifically, for example, if a player is playing a game with relatively short intervals between successive hits (for example, intervals of 0.5 seconds or less), three types of audio modes are played in order on three channels. On the other hand, if a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between successive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data may be sent sequentially to two channels. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the information is reproduced (alternately). With this configuration, it is possible to vary the output mode of the sound according to the interval between consecutive hits, so it is possible to realize a game in which the interval between consecutive hits is adjusted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In this first control example, during the execution of the interrupt repeated hit effect, one of the repeated hit sounds is output in conjunction with the repeated hit operation, but under certain conditions, the repeated hit sound is output even if the repeated hit operation is not performed. It may be configured so that it can be output. More specifically, for example, if the last repeated tapping sound output during the effective period of the repeated tapping operation is the first repeated tapping sound, the second consecutive tapping sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, even though the first continuous tapping sound and the second consecutive tapping sound are output as a set in response to the repeated tapping operation, the last sound output is the first consecutive tapping sound. (In other words, the second continuous hit sound that becomes the pair is no longer output), and it is possible to prevent the sound form from becoming half-finished. Therefore, the audio mode can be set more suitably. In this case, when the last repeated tapping sound is the first repeated tapping sound, the control for outputting the second repeated tapping sound after the end is controlled by the variable display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during execution of jackpot fluctuation). By configuring this way, for players who wish to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last continuous hit sound output during the interrupt continuous hit performance can be made the first continuous hit sound. It is possible to realize the gameplay. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are output alternately during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect, regardless of the interval between consecutive hits by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, if a repeated tapping operation is detected while no sound is being played, the first repeated tapping sound may be always output. In other words, if the interval between repeated hits is so long that the next repeated hit operation is executed after the first repeated hit sound has finished playing, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible for players who wish to diversify the audio formats to perform repeated tapping operations at a faster pace, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the interrupting repeated tapping performance. be able to.

In this first control example, each time a repeated tapping operation is detected, the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the first repeated tapping sound and the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound are alternately transmitted to different channels. However, under predetermined conditions, the method for reproducing audio data may be changed (or the audio data may be subjected to predetermined processing). More specifically, for example, the playback speed may be varied (or the audio data may be processed) so that the output period of each continuous hit sound is varied depending on the interval between repeated hit operations by the player. . That is, if the interval between the player's repeated hitting operations is longer than a predetermined interval (eg, 1 second interval), the output period may be configured to be longer (eg, 1.5 seconds or more). With this configuration, even when a player is playing a game with a long interval between consecutive hits, it is relatively easy to overlap the sound of one consecutive hit while outputting the sound of another consecutive hit. Voice modes can be diversified. In addition, in this first control example, the first repeated tapping sound and the second repeated tapping sound were alternately output (played) to different channels based on the execution of the repeated tapping operation, but this control example is not limited to the case based on a continuous hit operation. Similar control may be executed when outputting the starting winning sound based on the starting winning or when outputting the winning sound based on detecting a winning to the specific winning opening 65a. With this configuration, the audio can be output more appropriately, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Furthermore, this control can be employed simply when outputting a sound effect whose output period is set in advance as part of a variable display effect. With this configuration, when sound effects, etc. are output continuously in a relatively short period of time, the audio can be output more appropriately, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game. can.

In this first control example, if the execution timing of the interrupt multiple hit performance is before the reach, both the display mode and the audio aspect are interrupted and the interrupt multiple hit performance is executed, while the execution timing of the interrupt multiple hit performance is during the reach performance. In this case, the configuration is such that only the display mode is interrupted and the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in an interruptive hit performance that is executed before a reach occurs, only the display mode is interrupted, while in an interruptive continuous hit performance that is executed after a reach occurs, both the display mode and the audio mode may be interrupted. good. Since the sound output before reach is relatively plain, it is difficult to interfere with the sound of the interrupt continuous hit performance without interrupting the output. On the other hand, since flashy sounds are likely to be output after reach, by interrupting the sound mode, it is possible to prevent the sound of the interrupt continuous hit performance from becoming difficult to hear. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably set the audio mode of the interrupt continuous hit performance. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which both the display mode and the audio mode are interrupted regardless of the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance, or conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which only the display mode is interrupted regardless of the execution timing. . Further, the control is not limited to switching the object to be interrupted (at least one of the audio mode and the display mode) depending on the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance, and may be controlled to switch depending on other conditions. . More specifically, for example, it may be configured to determine whether to interrupt both the audio and the display, or only one of them, by lottery at the start of the interrupt continuous hit performance. In this case, the probability of determining whether to interrupt both may be changed depending on whether it is a jackpot or a miss. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game by paying attention to whether both the audio and the display have been interrupted, or whether only one of them has been interrupted. You can improve your interest in. Further, in the first control example, only a performance with a performance time of 7 seconds is provided as the interrupt continuous play performance, but a plurality of interrupt continuous play effects with different performance times may be provided. In this case, by providing a command that indicates an additional time different from 0 seconds and 7 seconds as an additional time command, it is possible to execute an interrupt continuous hit production with a production time corresponding to the additional time notified by the additional time command. It may be configured as follows. This makes it possible to further diversify the performance modes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Also, instead of or in addition to increasing the variation of additional time that can be notified by the additional time command, the total notified by the variation pattern command (i.e., the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time command A configuration that determines the performance time of the interrupt continuous hit performance so that the difference between the variable time (sum of the additional time notified by) and the performance time of the interrupt continuous hit performance becomes the basic time that can be notified by the basic time command. You can also use it as More specifically, for example, when a variation pattern of a losing super reach B with a variation time of 67 seconds is notified, 37 seconds is set as the production time of the interrupt continuous hit production so that 30 seconds, which is the basic time of a missed normal reach, remains. It is also possible to configure a configuration in which . With this configuration, by simply setting the presentation mode for the basic time of 30 seconds, it is possible to finish the variable display presentation exactly at the end of the variable time, in conjunction with the presentation time of the interrupt continuous hit presentation. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the performance mode of the variable display performance to which the interrupt continuous hit performance has been set, without providing a dedicated variable display mode for the interrupt continuous hit performance. In addition, when adopting this control (control that determines the performance time of the interrupt continuous hit performance so that the variation time equivalent to the basic time is left over), the interrupt continuous hit performance cannot be executed even if the additional time is 0 seconds. can. That is, the invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine 10 whose specifications do not include an additional time command. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the interrupt continuous hit effect, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this first control example, after the end of the jackpot, if the number of drawings of the special symbol exceeds 100 and the probability change state continues, the special symbol will be lowered based on the lottery result corresponding to the fall. Although the configuration is such that the time-saving state of the normal symbol ends at the same time as falling into the probability state, the present invention is not limited to this. Even after the special symbol has been drawn more than 100 times, the condition for ending the time saving state of the normal symbol may be different from the condition for falling into the low probability state of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, a lottery to determine whether or not to fall from a time-saving state with normal symbols to a normal state with normal symbols may be configured to be performed at the start of fluctuation, separately from the lottery to determine whether to fall from a variable probability state. good. Further, for example, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a special symbol lottery, only the time saving state may be terminated. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state of the normal symbol ends, it is possible to configure so that the probability change state of the special symbol may continue, so immediately after the time saving state of the normal symbol ends. To prevent a player from quitting the game and to allow the player to continue the game with the expectation that the probability change state of special symbols continues. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In this first control example, the number of pending balls symbols based on the starting winnings detected after the start of the pending batch change effect is uniformly set to the pending pattern mode of white pending, but this is not limited to this. . For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is performed in a pending pattern format using the pending variation lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414(a)) for a new pending ball number symbol. Thereby, it is possible to create a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot not only for the reserved ball number symbol that is the object of the reservation collective change performance, but also for the reserved ball number symbol based on the new starting winning prize. Furthermore, for example, a new starting winning prize detected after the start of the pending batch change performance may also be configured to be added to the targets of the pending batch change performance. In this case, it may be configured such that the reserved ball number symbol based on the new starting winning is always added to the target of the pending batch change effect, or it may be configured such that it is added to the target of the pending batch change effect only under predetermined conditions. Good too. In addition, as a predetermined condition, for example, if the winning information corresponding to a new starting winning shows a jackpot expectation level that is higher than the super reach failure, it may be configured to be included in the execution target of the pending batch change effect. For example, only when winning information corresponding to a variation type with higher expectations than the held balls in the range in which the held batch change performance is set is newly notified, it is included in the execution target of the held batch change performance. Good too. With this configuration, when the reserved ball number symbol based on a new starting winning is added to the execution target of the reserved batch change performance, it is possible to further improve the player's expectation of a jackpot.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 479 to 516. In the first control example described above, as described above with reference to FIG. It is configured to be able to set the high probability state of the symbol (high probability state of the symbol) and the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol). The game state was configured to be variably set based on the number of figure fluctuations (the number of special figure lottery numbers).

On the other hand, in this second control example, in addition to the normal state, variable probability state, and time saving state, it is possible to set a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) as the gaming state. It consists of In addition, the system is configured so that even if a jackpot is not won in the special drawing lottery, a small jackpot will be won in some cases. Here, we will explain the small wins that can be won in the special drawing lottery.

When a small win is won in the special drawing lottery, a small win game that is different from the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won is executed. In this control example, the amount of benefits (number of prize balls) given to the player is smaller in small winning games than in jackpot games, and specifically, in jackpot games, the variable winning device 65 is The round game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened is configured to be executed for five rounds or more, whereas the round game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened is configured to be executed for only one round in the small winning game. Further, after the end of the jackpot game, the game state is set according to the winning jackpot type. In other words, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game are configured to be variable. It is configured such that the gaming state at the time of winning a winning game and the gaming state set after the end of the small winning game cannot be changed.

Furthermore, in this control example, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (probability variable state, time saving state), the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state based on winning a small hit in the special lottery. The configuration is such that it allows the user to move from one state to another. In other words, as a condition (time saving ending condition) for transitioning the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, the first time saving ending condition (100 times special symbol fluctuation number) which is also provided in the first control example mentioned above. In addition to the second time saving end condition (winning a small win). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol is transferred to the low probability state.

In this control example, there are multiple small win types (small win A, small win B) that are set when a small win is won, and when the set small win type is a specific small win type (small win A). In addition, the above-mentioned second time saving termination condition is configured to be satisfied. With this configuration, the high probability state of the normal symbol will transition to the low probability state only if a specific small win type is won, so the high probability state of the normal symbol will end based on the small win winning. It is possible to set when the process will be executed and when it will not be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol changes to the low probability state.

In addition, in this control example, similar to the first control example described above, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and based on the small winning Even when the high probability state of the normal symbol is transferred to the low probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is transferred to the low probability state at the start timing of special symbol variation. In this way, by making the timing of ending the high probability state of normal symbols the same regardless of the trigger for ending the high probability state of normal symbols, the player is forced to end the high probability state of normal symbols. This can make it difficult to understand what the trigger is.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a specific small winning type (small winning A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice), the above-mentioned second time saving end condition is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol is transferred to the low probability state.

In the above explanation, the game states (time saving state, variable probability state) in which it is easy to open the electric accessory 640a are generally referred to as high probability states with normal symbols. An easy game state (a game state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set) is also simply referred to as a time saving state.

In addition, in this control example, when a small win is won in the special drawing lottery, it is possible to set multiple small win types, but no matter which small win type is set, the same small win game can be played. configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the currently set small win type based on the game mode of the small win game (the opening operation mode of the variable winning device 65). Therefore, each time a small winning game is executed, by predicting whether or not a specific small winning type (small winning A) has been set, the time saving ending condition (second time saving ending condition) for ending the time saving state is set. ) can be enjoyed during the period until it is established.

In addition, in this control example, the time-saving termination condition for ending the time-saving state is set based on the number of times the special symbol changes during the period in which the time-saving state is set, or the number of times a specific small win (small win A) is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of changes of a specific special pattern type (for example, the second special pattern (special pattern 2)) can be set as the number of special pattern changes. The number of times a specific special figure fluctuates by accumulating only the (number of drawings), the number of times the special figure lottery result is a loss (lottery results other than jackpot winnings and small winning winnings), and the number of times the ball passes through a specific area. A time-saving termination condition may be provided that is satisfied when a predetermined number of times is reached.

In the first control example described above, when the probability variable state or time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is guaranteed until the number of special symbol changes reaches 100 times. On the other hand, in this second control example, the second time saving end condition can be satisfied before the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 100 times. If the second time-saving end condition is met before the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 100, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is activated based on the establishment of the second time-saving end condition. It is configured to terminate.

In the second control example configured in this way, the back mode effect (the high probability state of the special symbol based on the lottery result of the falling lottery) described with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391 of the first control example described above is performed. The system is configured to notify the player that the time-saving state has ended by means of a performance to suggest to the player whether or not the time-saving state has ended. Thereby, it is possible to execute a back mode performance according to the gaming state that is variably set depending on the lottery result of the falling lottery and whether or not the time-saving termination condition is satisfied. The details of this back mode effect will be described later.

<About the production content in the pachinko machine in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 479 to 487, the content of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be explained.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 479 to 481, the content of the above-mentioned back mode effect will be explained. FIG. 479(a) shows an example of a production performed when winning information indicating that the second time-saving termination condition is met during the temple search mode (winning information indicating winning of small hit A) is held and stored. FIG. 479(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance executed when the special symbol 2 variation in which the small win A is won during the temple search mode is started. Note that among the display elements shown in each figure, the same display elements as in the first control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 479(a) shows the display screen during the special symbol 2 variation, where the number of variations of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game is the 77th time. "23 times" is displayed as a remaining period display mode indicating the remaining period until reaching 100 times (remaining fluctuation period). As shown in FIG. 479(a), if there is a special drawing 2 reservation (displayed with the character "small" in the figure) that has winning information indicating that the small win A will be won, the temple At the same time, the pillars of the temple are shown shaking, and the words "Pinch" are displayed on the pillars of the temple. Then, in the display area 812 where comments for indicating the gaming situation are displayed, a comment such as "What, what!?" is displayed.

By setting such a display mode, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state will be established before the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 100 times, so the time saving state will be established as in the first control example. Compared to setting a guaranteed number of times that the game will be played, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in this control example, if the second time-saving end condition described above is satisfied, or if a jackpot is won in the special drawing lottery, the number of special drawing fluctuations reaches 100 after the jackpot game ends. The configuration is such that the time saving state ends by. Therefore, by executing the end suggestion effect that suggests the end of the time-saving state shown in FIG. It can be suggested that either one is set. Thereby, the player can be made to pay close attention to the performance result of the termination suggestion performance, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In addition, in this control example, when the special figure reservation that is stored on hold contains winning information that satisfies the conditions for ending the time saving state, the end suggestion effect (see FIG. 479(a)) is executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, as in this control example, the small winning type set at the time of small winning winning and the number of small winning winnings for which a specific small winning type is set, In the pachinko machine 10 that is configured to satisfy the second time-saving termination condition based on the above, the pachinko machine 10 executes the termination suggestion effect based on a small hit winning, or executes the termination suggestion effect based on the type of small win type that is set. You can also execute it. In addition, in this case, it is configured such that winning a small winning type that can trigger the establishment of the second time-saving termination condition is easier to execute the termination suggestion effect than winning a small winning type that cannot trigger the establishment, Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the system so that the closer the number of wins of the small winning type that can be the trigger for establishment to the number of wins for which the second time-saving termination condition is satisfied, the more likely the termination suggestion effect is to be executed.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the time-saving termination condition is likely to be satisfied, depending on the frequency of execution of the termination suggestion performance. The player can be made to pay close attention to whether or not the game is being executed. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, the execution frequency of the end suggestion effect may be varied based on whether or not a high probability state (variable probability state) of the special symbol is set. For example, when a variable probability state is set, the time saving state is It is preferable to configure the system so that it is easier to execute the end suggestion effect than when is set.

In other words, when the variable probability state is set, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special lottery is higher than when the time-saving state is set, so after the end suggestion performance is executed, the time-saving state is set. Even if the state ends, it is possible to increase the percentage of people who end the time-saving state by taking advantage of a jackpot win. Therefore, when the variable probability state is set, it is possible to make the end suggestion performance more likely to be executed than when the time saving state is set, thereby creating a sense of expectation in the player for the end suggestion performance. .

Note that, without being limited to this, it may be configured such that the end suggestion effect is more difficult to be executed when the variable probability state is set than when the time saving state is set, or after the end of the jackpot game. The execution frequency of the end suggestion performance is different depending on the case where the time saving state is set from 1.2 and the case where the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game and then the transition to the time saving state based on winning the falling lottery. It may be configured so that the In addition, the execution frequency of the end suggestion effect can be varied based on the period required from the setting of the probability change state to the falling winning (number of special drawing fluctuations) and the elapsed period after falling winning (the number of special drawing fluctuations). It may be configured so that the

Then, when time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 479(a) and the special symbol fluctuation that satisfies the second time saving end condition is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 479(b) is displayed. In this control example, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is configured to end at the start timing of the special symbol variation that satisfies the second time-saving termination condition, and when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win. Also, since the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is configured to end at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, in any case, the display screen shown in Fig. 479(b) is displayed. be done.

FIG. 479(b) shows a scene in which the main character 801 falls into a pit 820, and in the display area 806, as an end notification mode 822 indicating that the time saving state has ended, "Temple The text "Search completed" is displayed, and the text "Left-handed play" is displayed as a guidance notification mode 821 for guiding the player on the gaming method after the end of the time saving state. Then, the comment "It's a pitfall!!" is displayed as a display mode 812 for notifying the player of the performance being executed. Further, in the display area 802, "? times" is displayed as a remaining period display mode indicating the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) until the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 100 times.

Next, the continuation of the effect shown in FIG. 479(b) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 480 and 481. FIG. 480(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the presentation content displayed when the performance result of the pitfall performance is a jackpot, and FIG. 480(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance content displayed when the performance result of the pitfall performance is FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of presentation content displayed when the time saving state ends. 480(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the production content displayed during the variation production corresponding to the 99th special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot game, and FIG. 481(b) is It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen showing the performance result of a variable performance corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation of the 99th rotation after the end of the jackpot game.

If the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479(b) is executed based on the jackpot winning of the special drawing lottery, the display mode in which the character 801 discovers the treasure box 807 as shown in FIG. 480(a) is displayed, and a display mode of "333" indicating a jackpot is displayed in the display area Ds3 indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. In the display areas 821 and 823, "Right hit" is displayed as a guide display mode to show the playing method during the jackpot game, and in the display area 806, "Right hit" is displayed as the lottery result notification mode to indicate the jackpot winning. A comment saying “Treasure Found!!” is displayed.

On the other hand, if the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479(b) described above is executed based on the establishment of the second time saving end condition, the character 801 runs through the forest as shown in FIG. 480(b). A wandering background mode (lost child mode) is set. This lost child mode is a potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) due to the second time-saving end condition being satisfied during the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). state) is set, and when the second time saving end condition is satisfied during the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) (low probability state) is set.

As mentioned above, when the lost child mode is set, since the probability of normal symbols is low, "Left hit" is displayed in the display areas 821 and 823 as a guidance display mode to show the player how to play. Then, in the display area 806, characters "entering lost child mode" are displayed to indicate that "lost child mode" has been set as the background mode. In addition, in the display area Ds3 showing the special symbol lottery result, a display mode of "341" indicating a small hit win (small win A win) is displayed.

This "lost child mode" is configured to continue to be set until the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 99. When the variation is executed, as shown in FIG. 481(a), an effect is executed in which the character 801 stands on a fork in the road and chooses the direction of travel. Then, as the character 801 walks toward the selected direction of movement, a game state notification mode 821 for indicating the current game state is displayed as shown in FIG. 481(b).

According to the example shown in FIG. 481(b), a gaming state notification mode 821 indicating that the current gaming state is the normal state is displayed, and a display area 806 displays "Unfortunate, normal" indicating that the current gaming state is the normal state. ``Go to mode'' is displayed, and the background mode effect ends. On the other hand, although not shown, if the current gaming state is a potential state at the stage where the 99th special symbol fluctuation is executed after the end of the jackpot, the word "Continue" is displayed as the gaming state notification mode 821. The lost child mode continues until the game state changes from the potential state to the normal state due to the falling lottery.

In other words, in this control example, if the lost child mode is set even after the 99th special symbol change is executed after the end of the jackpot, it is determined that the potential state is set. . In this way, for a predetermined period of time (99 special symbol fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot game, even if the time saving state ends, the current gaming state is the normal state or the potential state. After a predetermined period of time (99 special symbol fluctuations) has elapsed, the current game state is made easy to understand for the player, and for a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to stop playing the game until the time period (99 special figure variations) has elapsed, it is possible to improve the performance of the game. In addition, after a predetermined period of time (99 special symbol fluctuations) has passed, the current gaming status is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby preventing the player from playing excessively disadvantageous games. can do.

In addition, in this control example, the timing at which the player is notified of the current gaming state is fixed at the timing at which the special symbol variation is executed 99 times after the end of the jackpot game, but the timing is not limited to this. For example, you can set multiple timings (for example, timings when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of a jackpot game is 10, 30, 70, 90) as timings at which game status can be notified, and when the timing reaches the timing, the time will be reduced. It is determined whether or not the state has ended (whether or not the second time-saving end condition is satisfied), and when it is determined that the time-saving state has ended, an effect for notifying the current gaming state (Fig. 481(b))). Further, a measuring means is provided for measuring the number of special symbol fluctuations after the second time-saving end condition is satisfied (after the lost child mode is set), and the measurement result of the measuring means is a predetermined number (for example, 20, 30, 40) At the timing when the current gaming state is announced, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the performance (see FIG. 481(b)), and the current gaming state is notified based on the lottery result. It may be configured to perform the effect (see FIG. 481(b)).

By configuring this way, the second time saving end condition is met immediately after the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is set, and if the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) ends, it becomes unnecessary. It is possible to prevent the player from playing the game in the lost child mode for a long period of time.

In addition, in this control example, even if you win a jackpot while the lost child mode is set, the effects shown in FIGS. It is configured so that it is displayed with the words "Jackpot". As a result, even if the performance for notifying the current gaming state (see FIG. 481(b)) has started, you can wait for the performance result while hoping for a jackpot, so the performance will continue to be effective until the end. can be increased.

Also, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, as in the first control example described above, the gaming state at the execution timing of the special symbol variation to be executed in the future is predicted based on the pre-read result of the special symbol reservation, and the predicted result is The game state notification mode 821 may be displayed in advance based on the above.

As explained above, in this control example, when the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) ends at various timings. Because of this configuration, the transition process of the gaming state differs depending on the timing at which the second time-saving end condition is met and the timing at which the player wins by falling through the falling lottery. This can improve the interest of the game. In addition, as a background mode effect, a background mode corresponding to each gaming state is set, and a potential state is set when the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) ends. Since the game is configured to set a background mode (lost child mode) to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the game is in the normal state or the normal state, the player can continue playing the game.

In addition, if you win a jackpot during the background mode performance (during right-handed play), "left-handed hit" will be announced during the special symbol fluctuation period that indicates the jackpot win, and after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (confirmed display), " By configuring to notify "Right-handed player", the performance mode (see FIG. 479(b)) when the time-saving state ends during background mode performance (during left-handed game) can be changed to the trigger for ending the time-saving state. can be unified regardless of In addition, in this control example, when the time-saving state ends, the system is configured to uniformly notify (display) "left-handed hit," but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special feature that ends the time-saving state It may be configured to uniformly notify (display) "Right hit" during the period until the fluctuation is displayed as stopped (determined).

In addition, in this control example, an example of a production to make it difficult for the player to understand the trigger for ending the time saving state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to vary the production mode of a part of the production to be executed. Therefore, it may be configured to suggest to the player the opportunity to end the current time-saving state. For example, in the end suggestion performance shown in FIG. By varying the types of characters displayed, the structure may be configured to indicate to the player the opportunity to end the current time-saving state, and in the pitfall effect shown in FIG. By changing the color and the display mode of the display area 812, it may be configured to indicate to the player the opportunity to end the current time saving state.

In this control example, when the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the first time saving state ends the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) based on the number of special symbol fluctuations. An end condition (100 special symbol fluctuations) is set, and a second time-saving end condition, which is satisfied if a specific small win is won a predetermined number of times by special lottery, is established before the first time-saving end condition is met. If the player wins a jackpot or wins a jackpot, the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is configured to end at that point.

Furthermore, in this control example, in order to end the above-mentioned time-saving state, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the special symbol variation where various conditions are satisfied. In other words, if you set 100 times as the first time-saving end condition, the time-saving state will end at the start timing of the 100th special pattern variation while the time-saving state is set, and the second time-saving state will end when the time-saving state is set. When setting a specific small win (small win A) to be won twice as an end condition, the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation when the second small win A is won with the time saving state set. The time saving state is ended at the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the special symbol variation in which a jackpot is won in the state where the time saving state is set.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving state ends while the first time saving end condition is not satisfied, a display showing a lottery result indicating that the special symbol fluctuation being executed is a jackpot or a lottery result indicating a small win is displayed. Since it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation will be stopped and displayed in a certain manner, the special figure fluctuation that is being executed when the time-saving state ends is stopped and displayed to keep the player interested. It is possible to make the viewer pay close attention to the variation performance that is executed in response to the variation.

In addition, in this control example, since the second time-saving end condition is set as a condition that is satisfied when the small winning is won multiple times, for example, the special drawing lottery result executed during the time-saving state may be watched carefully. By determining whether or not a small hit has been won, if the first time saving end condition is not satisfied and the time saving state ends in a state where a small win has never been won, the execution It becomes possible to understand that the lottery result of the special drawing fluctuation is a jackpot. In this way, it is difficult to identify the current time-saving termination condition based only on the end timing of the time-saving state, and the game content (special symbol lottery results) during the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) and the end timing of the time-saving state By making it possible to specify the time-saving ending conditions that were established this time based on , it is possible to make the player more interested in the game content (special drawing lottery results) during the time-saving state, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the time saving state, which is the game state.

In addition, in this control example, the game content of the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won due to special symbol fluctuation (for example, a round game, a 15 round game), and the small win game that is executed when a small jackpot is won. Since the game content (1 round game) is different from the game content (1 round game), it is configured so that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery can be determined after the fact based on the content of the winning game to be executed. For example, the game type of a jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot in a special drawing lottery is a jackpot game that is the same as a small jackpot game (a concept that also includes differences that are difficult for players to identify). The game type in which the game is executed may be configured to be settable.

With this configuration, a part of the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special drawing lottery, and a small winning game that is executed based on winning a small hit in a special drawing drawing. Since the game contents of the winning games (the opening operation contents for the variable winning device 65) can be unified, it is possible to determine whether the winning game executed this time is a jackpot game or a small win based on the game contents of the winning game to be executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether it is a game or not.

In addition, in this case, if a jackpot game with the same winning game content as the small winning game is executed, after the jackpot game ends, the potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) It is better to configure it so that it can be set. By configuring in this way, the game after the end of the small winning game based on the small winning winning where the second time saving end condition is satisfied (left-handed game), and the game after the end of the jackpot game (left-handed game), It is possible to make them the same. Therefore, when the time saving state ends while the first time saving end condition is not satisfied, the game content (opening operation content for the variable prize winning device 65) of the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) to be executed, and the winning Based on the game content (left-handed game) to be executed after the end of the game (big win game, small win game), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what the time-saving end condition that has been established this time is.

Furthermore, in this control example, the probability state of the special symbol and the probability state of the normal symbol can be variably set based on a jackpot win, whereas when a small win is won, the high probability state of the normal symbol It is configured to be variable only from one state to a low probability state. In other words, winning a jackpot is a trigger that allows the gaming state to be variably set within a range of 1, and winning a small hit is a trigger that allows the gaming state to be variably set within a range of 2, which is narrower than range 1. There is. In this way, by varying the range of gaming states that can be variably set based on the lottery results of the special drawing lottery, it is possible for players to predict the gaming state that will be set in the future when they know the lottery results of the special drawing lottery. can be made easier.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 482 and 483, the contents of the performance during the dialogue zone executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be explained. In this control example, the dialogue zone can be set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. When this dialogue zone is set, among the third symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the character of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) that is stopped and displayed first. An effect is executed in which each of the third symbols utters a line in response to.

Here, when performing an effect in which each third symbol utters a line in accordance with the display mode (for example, a character) of the third left symbol LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) that is first stopped and displayed, first If the same display mode (for example, character) of the left third symbol LZ (see Fig. 482(a)) that is stopped and displayed is repeated, the same dialogue production will be executed and the production effect will be There was a problem in that the value decreased.

On the other hand, in this second control example, it is possible to store the character of the third left symbol LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) that was stopped and displayed in the past, and information indicating the set lines (past information). Based on the stored past information, the performance mode (character, dialogue) of the dialogue performance to be newly executed is set. As a result, it is possible to set a variety of presentation modes for the dialogue presentation, thereby increasing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, in this second control example, when setting the production mode of a new dialogue production, the production mode is configured to be set based on the result of a special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery). As a result, for example, if the result of a special drawing lottery is a jackpot, it is possible to intentionally set a performance mode that gives the player a sense of discomfort (for example, a performance mode in which the same character is set continuously). Become. Therefore, it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special drawing lottery based on the performance mode of the dialogue performance, so that the player can be made to pay close attention to the performance and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this second control example, a plurality of characters that can be stopped and displayed on the third left pattern LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) are divided into a plurality of groups (in this control example, a land creature group and a sea creature group ), and when each third symbol corresponding to a character in the same group is stopped and displayed, and when the third symbol corresponding to a character in a different group is stopped and displayed, the dialogue is different. They are structured to have different contents. As a result, it is possible to predict the lines that will be displayed by understanding the third symbol that will be stopped and displayed before the timing at which the lines are displayed (the timing at which each third symbol is stopped and displayed). Become. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy seeing whether or not the content of the predicted dialogue matches the content of the dialogue that is actually displayed.

Here, the selection method of the character used in the dialogue production and the specific content of the dialogue will be described later with reference to FIGS. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 483. FIG. 482(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the left third symbol LZ is stopped and displayed in the dialogue performance, and FIG. 482(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the left third symbol It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed an example of a display screen when 3 symbols RZ are stopped and displayed. FIG. 483(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the display screen when the reach state is reached in the dialogue performance, and FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when a character is displayed in a stopped state.

As shown in FIG. 482(a), when a dialogue zone is set, the display area 806 displays the words "Serif Zone" as an effect notification mode to notify the player that a dialogue zone has been set. be done. In the center of the display screen, the third symbol LZ on the left, the third symbol CZ in the middle, and the third symbol RZ on the right are displayed in a variable manner, and at the timing when each third symbol is stopped and displayed, a third symbol is attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. The lines corresponding to the selected character will be displayed. In the state where the dialogue zone is set, the third symbol is a fusion third symbol that combines a numerical aspect that is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and a character aspect that corresponds to the numerical aspect. In the diagram shown in FIG. 482(a), a fused third symbol that combines the character aspect of "elephant" and the numerical aspect of "1" is displayed as the left third symbol LZ. , the characters "Hello" are displayed as the line LZ1.

In addition, in this control example, a different character mode is associated with each of the nine types of number modes. A detailed explanation of the display mode of each fused third symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 495(a).

Further, in this control example, the dialogue displayed in the dialogue performance is configured to be outputted as audio by the audio output device 226. This makes it possible to aurally identify the performance to be performed, thereby increasing the performance effect. In addition, it is possible for nearby players who have difficulty visually recognizing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to identify the performance mode (audio mode) of the dialogue production, so that, for example, when a player wins a jackpot, It is possible to obtain a sense of superiority when a highly anticipated dialogue performance is executed.

FIG. 482(b) shows a state where the performance has progressed from the state of FIG. 482(a) described above and the third right symbol RZ is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 482(b), a fused third symbol that combines the character aspect of "lion" and the numerical aspect of "2" is displayed as the right third symbol RZ, and the words "Long time no see" are displayed as the dialogue RZ1. is displayed. Here, in FIG. 482(b), the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ are both stopped and displayed as a fused third symbol having characters belonging to the same group (land creature group). The lines that lead to a conversation are being produced.

In the variable display displayed in FIG. 482(b), in FIG. 483(a), the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ are both the character mode of "elephant" and the number "1". A fused third symbol which is a fusion of the two modes is displayed in a stopped state, and a ready-to-reach state is displayed in which the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ are stopped and displayed as the same fused third symbol. The words "The weather is nice" are displayed as the line LZ1, and the words "It's hot" are displayed as the line RZ1.

Next, variable operation effects will be explained with reference to FIGS. 484 and 485. This second control example is configured to be able to execute a variable operation performance that allows the player to operate a lever member 10340 that is movable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (operation position). . This variable operation performance includes a preparation performance executed during a performance preparation processing period (2 seconds) in which the lever member 10340, which is normally located in the first position, is moved to the second position, and a preparation performance that is executed during the performance preparation processing period (2 seconds), in which the lever member 10340, which is normally located in the first position, is moved to the second position. An operation instruction performance executed during the operation instruction period (3 seconds) for causing the player to operate the member 10340, and an operation corresponding performance indicating that the player operated the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, The system is configured to execute a result effect executed during a result display period (2 seconds) showing the effect result of the variable operation effect.

Furthermore, a variable operation valid period for effectively determining the player's operation on the operation means (lever member 10340) is set in correspondence with the period in which the operation instruction period (3 seconds) is set. If the player operates the lever member 10340 during this operation instruction period and the operation is determined to be valid, the operation corresponding effect is executed without waiting for the operation instruction period to elapse, and then the result effect is configured to be displayed. As a result, a result effect can be displayed in response to the operation of the operating means performed by the player, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means. Note that, without limitation, if the player operates the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period and the operation is determined to be valid, only the operation corresponding performance is executed, and after the operation instruction period has elapsed, the result is It may be configured to perform a performance.

Here, the contents of various performances executed during the variable operation performance will be briefly explained. First, during the preparation performance, a performance is performed that suggests to the player that a performance that will cause the player to operate the lever member 10340 will be performed soon. Specifically, an image imitating the lever member 10340 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player is informed that the lever member 10340 is moving from the first position to the second position. A preparatory performance is executed in a presentation mode for the purpose.

In this control example, since the operating means is configured to be operated from the second position to the first position during variable operation performance, the lever member 10340 is moved from the first position to the second position in this way. By notifying the player of the preparation performance indicating that the player is moving, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp the direction in which the lever member 10340 should be operated by the current variable operation performance. In addition, when executing a variable operation effect that causes the player to operate the operation means from the second position to a third position different from the first position after the operation means has moved from the first position to the second position, preparations are necessary. Notifying the player that the operating means will move to the first position, second position, and third position during the performance, and informing the player that the operating means is located at the second position when the performance preparation process is completed. It is preferable to set a presentation mode for notifying the person. In other words, it is preferable to use a preparatory effect to inform the operating means of the content of the operation to be performed by the player on the operating means.

Then, when the preparation performance is completed, an operation instruction performance for causing the player to operate the operating means (lever member 10340) is executed. Here, the contents of the operation instruction presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 484(a). FIG. 484(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a performance screen displayed during operation instruction performance. As shown in FIG. 484(a), when the operation instruction performance is executed, an image imitating the lever member 10340 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the lever member 10340 is moved downward (first position). A display style that prompts the user to press down in the direction (direction) and a comment "Press the lever" are displayed.

Although not shown in FIG. 484(a), a period gauge for indicating the elapsed period and remaining period of the operation instruction period (3 seconds) is also displayed. Although not shown, when the player presses down the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, an operation corresponding effect indicating that the operation means was operated during the operation validity period (for example, a comment indicating that the operation has been completed) is displayed. ) will be displayed, and then the performance results will be displayed. The result of this performance is the same as the result of various performances using the operating means used in the first control example described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this way, in this control example, as a variable operation performance, the operating means (lever member 10340) located at the first position (origin position) is moved to the second position (actuation position), and then the player It is configured to be able to perform an effect of causing an operation to move the operating means from the second position to the first position. As a result, as in the first control example described above, the player's operational feeling can be improved, and the performance effect can be enhanced, compared to the case where the operation performance is simply to press the PUSH button 10317. I can do it.

However, when executing the variable operation performance described above, if the player does not operate the operating means (lever member 10340) during the valid operation period, the lever member 10340 remains in the second position even after the end of the variable operation performance. This poses a problem in that the structure of the operating device 10300 having the lever member 10340 becomes unstable. In addition, the operating device 10300 used in this control example is provided with an operating means (PUSH button 10317) in addition to the lever member 10340, and if the lever member 10340 remains in the second position, other operations cannot be performed. There was a problem that it became difficult to press the means (PUSH button 10317).

To deal with this problem, the position of the lever member 10340 is determined at the end timing of the variable operation performance, and if the lever member 10340 is not located at the first position, the lever member is moved using the driving means. It is conceivable to perform operation control (return operation control) for forcibly returning the lever member 10340 to the first position, but in order to improve the feeling of operation of the operating means by the player, it is possible to move the lever member 10340 to the second position. Even though it was moved, the problem remained that the performance effect could not be enhanced because it was moved from the second position to the first position without any operation by the player.

In contrast, in this control example, the position of the lever member 10340 is determined at the end timing of the variable operation performance, and if the lever member 10340 is not located at the first position, the next variable operation performance is It is configured to be easy to execute. With this configuration, the lever member 10340, which has been moved to the second position, can be easily moved to the first position by the player's operation. 10340 can be moved to the first position (origin position).

Furthermore, in this control example, an upper limit is set for the period during which the next variable operation performance is likely to be executed, and even after the period has passed, if the lever member 10340 is located at the second position, the driving means ( The lever member 10340 is configured to use a drive motor) to perform return operation control for moving the lever member 10340 to the first position. Thereby, it is possible to suppress excessive execution of variable operation performance for the player.

Here, when executing the return operation control, the player applies force in a direction that resists the force generated when the lever member 10340 located at the second position moves toward the first position. That is, if the player pushes up the lever member 10340 so that the lever member 10340 does not move to the first position, a problem arises in that the lever member 10340 cannot be moved to the first position by the return operation control. .

Therefore, if the return operation control is executed to move the lever member 10340 to the first position with a force stronger than the force that the player can apply, the player may be injured, and the lever member If the return operation control is continued until the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position, there is a problem in that an excessive load is applied to the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340, which may cause a failure.

On the other hand, in this second control example, when the lever member 10340 is located at the second position after completing the return operation control for a predetermined period (5 seconds), the initial position of the lever member 10340 is The controller is configured to perform a process of switching from a first position to a second position, and to perform an effect in which the second position is the initial position.

When the variable operation performance is executed with the second position set to the initial position, the lever member 10340 moves from the second position to the first position during the performance preparation period during which the performance preparation process is executed, and the operation instruction is As a performance, a performance that causes the lever member 10340 to be operated from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 484(b)) is executed. In this way, by varying the performance mode of the variable operation performance, it is possible to make the player interested in the variable operation performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, after the end of the variable operation performance, if it is determined that the position of the lever member 10340 is neither the first position nor the second position, that is, the origin detection flag 223ae and the actuation position detection flag 223af, which will be described later, are set to on. If not, it is possible that the player is holding the lever member 10340 at an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. In order to do this, a presentation mode using a touch sensor having a detection area formed at a position overlapping with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 485, an image 891 imitating a hand is displayed in correspondence with the detection area 890 of the touch sensor displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the detection area 890 is touched. The character "Touch" is displayed in the display area 892, and the comment "Touch the liquid crystal" to indicate the operation content of the current operation effect is displayed in the display area 806. By performing the effect of touching the liquid crystal (touch effect) in this manner, the player can release his hand from the lever member 10340 and touch the liquid crystal. In this control example, the return operation control of the lever member 10340 is executed in accordance with the execution period of the touch effect. Thereby, the lever member 10340 can be reliably moved to the first position.

Note that in this second control example, the touch sensor is configured to be operable with one hand, but in this case, it is possible to operate the touch sensor while holding the lever member 10340 by releasing the hand from the operation handle. Therefore, in addition to the touch performance for operating the touch sensor, it is preferable to perform a firing performance that prompts the player to fire a ball by operating the operating handle. This makes it easier to separate the player's hand from the lever member 10340.

Alternatively, only the above-mentioned firing effect may be executed, or the touch effect may be performed using both hands, for example, the detection range may be set at intervals of 20 centimeters or more so that it cannot be reached with one hand on the game board 13. A plurality of touch sensors may be provided so as to be formed, and a touch effect may be executed in which the plurality of touch sensors are operated simultaneously.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 486 to 488, the contents of the hold effect in this second control example will be explained. In this control example, similar to the first control example described above, a special symbol variation effect that can be executed in response to a special symbol variation to indicate the lottery result of a special symbol, and a special symbol variation effect that can be executed based on the starting winning of a special symbol. It has a hold performance that can be executed when a hold is acquired, and is configured to be able to set an operation performance for causing a player to operate an operating means in any of the performances.

As mentioned above, the special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation, and the hold effect is executed based on the acquisition of the special figure hold, and even while the special figure change effect is being executed, the hold effect is executed. Because it is configured to be executable, the operation effects can be executed at various timings, which improves the interest of the game. There is a problem in that the effects and effects are executed at the same time, making it difficult for the player to understand which operation effect is to be changed based on the result of the operation performed by the player on the operating means.

In contrast, in this control example, when the execution conditions for one operation effect are met, the execution status of the other operation effect is determined, and the execution start timing of one operation effect is determined based on the determination result. It is configured to be variable. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of operation effects from being executed at the same time, and to provide easy-to-understand operation effects to the player. Furthermore, it is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect that indicates that the operation effect is in a waiting state by using the period from when the execution conditions for the operation effect are satisfied until the operation effect is actually executed. are doing. Thereby, it is possible to suggest that a new operation performance will be executed after the currently executed operation performance ends, so that the player can play the game while expecting the performance to be executed in the future.

Here, with reference to FIG. 486, the contents of the standby performance executed when the operation performance overlaps will be explained. FIG. 486(a) schematically shows an example of a standby effect that is displayed on the display screen when a condition that allows the operation effect to be executed as a hold effect is established while the operation effect is being executed in the special figure fluctuation effect. FIG. 486(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed on the display screen after the standby performance ends. Note that the operation performance derived from the special symbol variation performance executed in this control example is the same as the first control example described above, so a detailed explanation of the performance content and execution trigger will be omitted.

FIG. 486(a) shows the display area on the upper left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 389), specifically, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). It is a schematic diagram which enlarged the display area Ds1 vicinity where the display mode (reserved ball pattern) for is displayed. As mentioned above, the standby effect shown in FIG. 486(a) is executed when the operation effect derived from the special figure variation effect is being executed, so it is not shown in FIG. 486(a). However, the operation performance derived from the special symbol variation performance is being executed at approximately the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In FIG. 486(a), in a state where the first reserved ball symbol Hz1 to the fourth reserved ball symbol Hz4 are displayed as reserved symbols of special drawing 1, the fourth reserved ball symbol Hz4 is displayed on the display screen. Based on this (based on the audio lamp control device 113 receiving a winning information command indicating winning information for the fourth reserved ball of special drawing 1), a state in which a standby effect is being executed is shown.

In other words, based on receiving the winning information command indicating the winning information for the fourth reserved ball of special drawing 1, when an operation performance (holding operation performance) that causes the player to operate the operation means as a reservation performance is executed. If it is determined that the operation performance (special figure operation performance) is being executed as a special figure fluctuation performance at that point (the execution condition for the held operation performance is met), then (the standby condition for the held operation performance is met) (in this case), a standby effect indicating that a hold operation effect is to be executed is executed.

In this standby performance, the suggested character HC1 appears on the display screen (frames in) while rotating its display part (head in FIG. 486(a)) having a plurality of display surfaces. This suggestion character HC1 has three display surfaces, and the characters "PUSH", "red", and "chance" are displayed on each display surface. During the standby performance, after rotating the display part, a specific display part is stopped and displayed at a position that is easier to see than other display parts as a result of the standby performance.

For example, when performing a hold operation effect after a standby effect, a specific display area where the characters "PUSH" are displayed as a result of the standby effect is stopped and displayed in a position that is easier to see than other display areas. , a hold operation effect is executed.

In this way, when the standby effect is being executed, the effect is executed to rotate the display part of the suggested character HC1 that has entered the frame in the display screen, and furthermore, a part of the rotating display part is displayed to the player. By displaying a display mode ("PUSH") for operating the operating means, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pending operation performance is in a standby state. In addition, by rotating the display mode ("PUSH") for allowing the player to operate the operation means, the player is informed that the operation validity period for the pending operation performance is not set at the current moment (during the standby performance). Information can be provided in an easy-to-understand manner.

Note that this control example shows an effect mode in which the suggestion character HC1 is framed in the display screen while the standby effect is being executed, but the suggestion character HC1 is displayed only during a part of the standby effect period. It may be configured so that it is framed. In addition, as a standby effect, an effect will be executed in which the suggested character HC1 is rotated with a predetermined display mode ("PUSH", "red", "chance") displayed on multiple display surfaces that are the display parts. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode displayed on the plurality of display surfaces that are the display parts of the suggestive character HC1 may be varied during the standby performance, or the display mode may not be displayed. It may be configured to perform an effect of rotating the display part.

Furthermore, in a performance that rotates the display part of the suggested character HC1 that is performed during the standby performance, the rotation speed of the display part may be varied depending on the degree of progress of the standby performance, for example, the closer the end timing of the standby performance is, the more It may be configured to reduce the rotation speed. With this configuration, it is difficult to understand what the suggestion character HC1 is suggesting immediately after the standby performance is executed, and as time passes, it becomes easier for the player to understand what the suggestion character HC1 is suggesting. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the standby performance.

Furthermore, the rotation speed of the display part of the suggested character HC1 may be changed based on the operation content of the operating means in the special figure operation performance being executed. For example, when the player It is preferable that the rotational speed is increased based on the operation of the operating means. With this configuration, when the operating means is actively operated during the special figure operation performance, the display part of the suggestion character HC1 rotates at high speed, and the display part of the suggestion character HC1 is not displayed. The characters "PUSH" can be made difficult to identify. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game while concentrating on the special symbol operation effect.

Furthermore, the relationship between the manner in which the player operates the operating means for the special figure operation performance and the manner in which the operation is displayed during the standby performance is not limited to this; The display mode displayed on each display surface of the display part of the suggestion character HC1 may be changed based on the operation.

In this control example, at the point when the standby effect shown in FIG. The word "PUSH" is displayed in a stopped state so that it can be identified, but if it is determined that the hold operation effect cannot be executed after the standby effect ends, the display part of the suggestion character HC1 is changed to "red" or "chance". It is configured to stop and display the characters so that they can be identified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 486(b), when the display part of the suggestion character HC1 is stopped and displayed so that the character "red" can be identified, the held ball symbol is displayed without executing the operation effect. A holding performance is executed that changes the display mode of (in FIG. 486(a), the second holding ball symbol, which was in a blue display mode, is changed to a red display mode).

In this way, if the execution conditions for the held operation performance are satisfied and the held operation performance cannot be executed immediately, it is possible to execute the standby performance and execute the held operation performance at the end timing of the standby performance. By determining again and configuring to vary the performance result of the standby performance based on the determination result, it is possible to simplify the determination of the execution condition of the standby performance.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 487 and 488, the flow of setting the operation effect in this second control example will be described. In this second control example, the performance mode of the variable production corresponding to the special figure variation is set at different timings for the first half period (first period) and the second half period (second period) of the special figure variation period. It is composed of Specifically, the production mode of the special pattern fluctuation performance corresponding to the first half period (first period) of the special pattern fluctuation period is set at the start timing of the special pattern fluctuation (timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received), The performance mode of the special figure fluctuation performance corresponding to the latter half period (second period) of the fluctuation period is configured to be set after a predetermined period has elapsed after the special figure fluctuation has passed.

Furthermore, in this control example, information (first information) used to set the production mode (first production mode) of the variable production corresponding to the first period of the special figure variation period, and the second The information (second information) used to set the production mode (second production mode) of the variable production corresponding to the period is different, and specifically, the first production mode is The performance mode is set based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the , and the second performance mode is based on the performance information stored when the first performance mode was set (information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak), It is configured to be set based on information indicating whether the hold performance (hold operation performance) is on standby (setting status of the standby flag 223ah).

Here, a method of setting the special figure variation effect and the hold effect will be explained with reference to FIGS. 487 and 488. FIG. 487 is a diagram showing a method for setting various effects when the execution condition for a pending operation effect is established as a pending effect during the first period of the special figure variation period, and FIG. It is a figure showing the setting method of various performances when the execution condition of the suspension operation performance as a suspension performance is satisfied during the second period.

As shown in FIG. 487, the variation pattern command is output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the special figure variation is executed. Then, on the audio lamp control device 11 side, the variation pattern is determined based on the information indicating the special symbol variation time included in the received variation pattern command, the information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, and the information indicating the stop type of the special symbol. The variable performance for the first period is set with reference to the table 223a. Specifically, the variable performance mode of the first period and the performance information indicating the length of the second period are set and stored in the performance information storage area 223ak.

Here, if the operation performance (special figure operation performance) is set as the variable performance mode of the set first period, the special figure operation performance is executed in accordance with the execution timing of the special figure operation performance, and the game An operation validity period is set to effectively determine the operation that a person performs on the operation means. Then, during the period in which the variable performance of the first period is being executed, a starting winning of the special symbol (ball winning into the first winning hole 64) occurs, and the pre-reading result corresponding to the starting winning is sent from the main control device 110. When the winning information command containing the winning information command is output to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp controlling device 113 side executes a process of determining whether or not to execute a pending effect based on the received winning information command, and further If it is determined that the suspended performance has been executed, processing for setting the performance mode of the suspended performance is executed.

As a performance mode of the holding performance, a performance mode other than the operation performance (holding operation performance) (for example, displaying any of the special symbol holding ball symbols Hz1 to Hz4 based on the elapsed time without using the operation means by the player) If a performance mode in which the mode is varied is set, the suspended performance is executed without determining the performance mode of the special symbol variation performance that is being executed. On the other hand, when the operation effect (hold operation effect) is set as the effect mode of the hold effect, in order to determine whether the current situation is such that the hold operation effect can be executed, the special figure fluctuation effect (the first Analyzing the production content of the special figure variation production during the period and determining whether the operation production is duplicated, here, the performance of the special figure variation production is read out from the production information stored in the production information storage area 223ak. Analyze the content.

If this analysis determines that the operation effects overlap, that is, the current moment is within the period in which a special figure operation effect is being executed, or if a suspended operation effect is executed, a special operation effect is executed during the suspended operation effect. If it is determined that the figure operation effect will be executed, the hold operation effect is not executed within the first period of the special figure variation period, and the standby effect is executed (see FIG. 486(a)).

Then, at the timing (timing 28 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) to set the performance mode for the second period of the special figure fluctuation period (30 seconds to 60 seconds of the special figure fluctuation period), the first period The performance mode during the second period is based on the performance results of various performances (for example, performance results for the operation performance), the performance information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak, and the standby status of the pending operation performance. Set. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, there is a priority order for the information to be referred to when setting the production mode during the second period, and information that is duplicated when setting the production mode is The presentation mode is configured to be set based on information to which a high priority is set. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol variation that is being executed is a jackpot, the various information indicating the lottery result of the variation is set to have higher priority than the standby information of the hold operation performance. If the lottery result of the special symbol variation that is being executed is a loss, it is preferable to configure the standby information of the pending operation performance to have a higher priority than the lottery result of the special symbol variation that is being executed. With this configuration, the performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be executed in accordance with the player's interests.

Next, with reference to FIG. 488, a presentation setting method for a case where a new special figure winning occurs during the second period of the special figure fluctuation period will be explained. As shown in FIG. 488, if the timing at which it is determined that the winning information command is received and the hold operation effect is to be executed is during the second period of the special figure fluctuation effect, at that point, is it possible to execute the hold operation effect? If it is determined that it is possible to perform, the suspended operation performance is executed as is, and if it is determined that it is impossible (difficult) to perform, a suspended performance that does not execute the suspended operation performance is executed as the current suspended performance. .

As explained above, in this control example, at the execution start timing of the special symbol variation effect (special symbol variation effect), the length of the first period and The length of the two periods is set, and the performance mode is set according to the length of the set period, but the present invention is not limited to this. The execution period of the set performance mode may be set as the first period, and the remaining period may be set as the second period. With this configuration, it is possible to set the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed in the first half period without worrying about the performance period, so it is possible to easily increase the types of performances to be executed.

In addition, in this control example, the suspended operation performance that is in a standby state during the first period is configured to be executable during the second period, but the presentation mode of the suspended operation performance that is executed from the first period (performance content, performance period) may be configured to be different from the performance mode of the hold operation performance that is executed after the second period (executed after waiting). For example, for example, the performance mode that is executed during the first period It is preferable that the performance period of the performance mode of the suspended operation performance performed is shorter than that of the performance mode of the suspended operation performance executed during the second period.

With this configuration, when a standby effect is executed and then a hold operation effect is executed, the hold operation effect is executed using a longer period, so it is easier to enhance the effect of the hold operation effect. can do. Therefore, when the standby performance is executed, the player can be made to play the game while expecting that the hold operation performance will be executed.

Furthermore, if a new special figure is acquired during the waiting period when the hold operation effect is on standby, a hold operation effect that also reflects the look-ahead result corresponding to the newly acquired special figure is executed. It is best to configure it as follows. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to play the game even while the standby performance is being executed. Further, in the hold operation performance executed after the standby performance, it is possible to perform a performance that can vary the display mode of a plurality of reserved special symbols, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 489, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 489 is a transition diagram showing the flow of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example. As shown in FIG. 489, in this second control example, for the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). (probability state) can be set, and in the case of winning a jackpot in the special drawing lottery, it is now possible to set the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game. It is greatly different from the above in that a state transition is provided to end the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) based on winning a small hit in the special drawing lottery.

In other words, in the first control example described above, only the normal state can be set as the game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, so if the jackpot game is not executed after the time saving state ends, , the player could easily determine that the currently set gaming state is the normal state, but in this second control example, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state. Since the normal state and the potential state are configured to be settable, it is difficult for a player to easily determine the set gaming state even if a jackpot game is not executed after the time saving state ends. I can do it.

In addition, among the game states in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, the potential state is set to a high probability state of special symbols, and the normal state is set to a low probability state of special symbols. The game is configured so that the probability state is a gaming state in which it is easier to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, that is, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, even after the time-saving state ends, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the currently set gaming state is the definite state. It is possible to make it difficult to stop the game upon completion of the game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 489, the flow of transition to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be specifically explained. Note that detailed explanation of the same flow as the first control example described above will be omitted. First, if the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state) is set, the normal symbol is in the low probability state and becomes the trigger for the second special symbol (special symbol 2). Since the game state is such that it is difficult to enter the ball into the second winning hole 640, the ball is entered into the first winning hole 64, which triggers the start of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), similarly to the first control example described above. A special figure 1 game (left-handed game) is executed.

When a jackpot is won by the special drawing 1 lottery (jackpot probability 1/250), different game states are set after the jackpot ends depending on the winning jackpot type. Specifically, if the type of jackpot won is "Jackpot A, B" (50% of the total jackpot), the probability will change after the jackpot game ends (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set and it is "Jackpot C" (30% of the total jackpot), a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and "Jackpot F" is set. In some cases (20% of all jackpots), the normal state is set again after the jackpot game ends.

Next, when the time saving state is set, the normal symbol is in a high probability state and the game state is such that it is easy to enter the ball into the second prize opening 640, which is the trigger for starting the special drawing 2, so the above-mentioned Similarly to the first control example, a special figure 2 game (right-handed game) in which a ball is won into the second winning hole 640, which is the trigger for starting the special figure 2, is executed.

When a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery (jackpot probability 1/250), a different game state is set after the jackpot ends depending on the winning jackpot type. Specifically, if the type of jackpot won is "Jackpot D" (80% of the total jackpot), a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and if it is "Jackpot E, G" (80% of the total jackpot) 20%) is configured so that the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 2 lottery during the variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is always set after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, similarly to the first control example described above, each time the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause the special symbol to fall to a low probability state (so-called falling lottery). It is configured to execute. Furthermore, it has multiple conditions for shifting the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) to the low probability state of normal symbols, and after the time saving state that was also set in the first control example is set. In addition to the first time-saving termination condition, which is satisfied when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), a specific lottery result other than a jackpot win (for example, Set a second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of wins (small win A win) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2 times), and when any of the time-saving end conditions is met, the time-saving state (normal It is configured to shift from a high probability state of a symbol to a low probability state of a normal symbol.

In this way, in this control example, if a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, aim for a jackpot by special drawing lottery during the variable probability state. A game in which a high probability state of a special symbol is transferred to a low probability state while executing the game (falling lottery), and a game in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is transferred to a low probability state (special symbol lottery). They will be executed in parallel. In addition, there is no correlation between the timing of shifting the probability state of the special symbol based on the falling lottery and the timing of shifting the probability state of the normal symbol based on the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to determine which timing is earlier. Since it is configured such that whether or not the game will arrive is determined based on a predetermined lottery result, it is possible to set a complex transition of gaming states for the player.

Returning to FIG. 489, the explanation will be continued. If you win a small win (1/100) in a variable probability state, the type of small win is other than the specific small win type (small win B) (50% of the total small win), or the first specific small win If it is a win type (small win A), the gaming state will not be changed, and if it is a second specific small win type (small win A), the high probability state of the normal symbol will be changed to a low probability state. It is configured to migrate. Furthermore, a falling lottery was executed in the same way as in the first control example described above, and a falling lottery was won (falling probability 1/500) at a timing when the number of special symbol drawings after the variable probability state was set was less than 100. If the number of special drawings after the variable probability state is set is 100 or more, and the winning lottery is won (probability of falling 1/500), the state will be changed to the normal state. It is configured as follows.

In addition, in this control example, the variable probability state is configured so that if there is no falling win during the variable probability state and the time-saving termination conditions are not met, the variable probability state continues until the jackpot is won in the special lottery. , without being limited to this, a configuration is provided to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state when the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of special symbol drawings) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 150 times). Also good. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to set a gaming state advantageous to the player (probability variable state) for a long period of time, and it is possible to suppress the provision of an excessively advantageous gaming state to the player. can. In addition, in this case, if the high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of transitioning the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol will also be changed to the low probability state. It may also be configured to migrate to

Finally, when the probability state is set, the normal symbol is in a low probability state and it is a game state in which it is difficult to enter the second winning hole 640, which is the trigger for starting the special drawing 2, so the normal state Similarly, a special figure 1 game (left-handed game) in which a ball is won into the first winning hole 64, which triggers the start of the special figure 1, is executed.

When a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery (jackpot probability 1/125), different game states are set after the jackpot ends depending on the winning jackpot type. Specifically, if the type of the jackpot won is "Jackpot A, B" (50% of the total jackpot), the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, and if it is "Jackpot C, F" (Jackpot 50% of the total) are configured so that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

In other words, the configuration is such that if the player wins a jackpot during the probability state, it is easier to set a gaming state advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game than if the player wins the jackpot during the normal state. . With this configuration, it is possible to make the potential state a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the normal state, so even after the time-saving state ends, the player can be informed of the current settings. Since it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the current gaming state is the definite state, it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game when the time-saving state ends. Also, during the potential state, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, so if you win the falling lottery and the high probability state of the special symbol changes to the low probability state, the number of times the special symbol lottery will be Regardless, the situation will return to normal.

As mentioned above, in this second control example, the high probability state (probability change state or time saving state) of the normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, and after that, by the time the special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times (the first If the high probability state of the normal symbol ends before the time-saving end condition is met, the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) is set based on the winning of the jackpot or small win in the special drawing lottery. That means that. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends before the first time-saving end condition is satisfied, the game can be played while making the user look forward to whether or not he or she has won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, in this control example, like the first control described above, even if the player wins the falling lottery during the period until the special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times, the player is not notified of the falling winning. There is. If the high probability state of the normal symbol ends during the period until the special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times, the same back mode (lost child mode) regardless of the gaming state (normal state or potential state) ) is configured so that it is set. With this configuration, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to determine whether the current state is a variable probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) or the time saving state (special symbol high probability state). It is difficult to tell whether the symbol is in a low probability state or a normal symbol is in a high probability state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether it is a low probability state (low probability state for special symbols or a low probability state for normal symbols).

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining that the currently set gaming state is disadvantageous to the player (for example, the normal state) and from being able to stop the game early.

<Electrical configuration in second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this second control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 490 to 498. In this control example, in addition to the electrical configuration of the first control example described above, the configuration of various counters included in the main controller 110, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the configuration of the RAM 203, and the audio lamp The configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the control device 113 is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in that new elements are added. Elements that are the same as those in the first control example are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 490, the configurations of various counters in this second control example will be explained. FIG. 490 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter configuration in this second control example. This second control example is different from the first control example described above, and is configured so that it is possible to win a small hit by drawing a special symbol. Based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1, the small winning random number 2 table 202ab (see FIG. 493(a)) is used to determine whether there is a small winning winning. When a small win is won in the special drawing lottery, the small win type selection 2 table 202ac is used based on the obtained value of the small win type counter C6 in order to select the small win type of the won small win. It is configured so that the small winning type can be selected. In addition, the detailed content of the small winning type which can be selected in this control example will be described later.

In this second control example configured in this way, the above-mentioned small hit type counter C6 is added to the various counters included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, and the obtained value of the small win type counter C6 is A small hit type counter buffer for temporarily storing the number of balls is provided in the counter buffer, and a small winning type counter storage area is provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. They are different in that they are set up. Although not shown in FIG. 490, each counter provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is also stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area. This is different from the first control example in that an area is provided and a small winning type counter storage area is also provided.

Although the details will be described later, in this second control example, small wins are not won in the first special symbol lottery (special pattern 1 lottery), and only in the second special symbol lottery (special pattern 2 lottery). It is structured so that you can win a small prize. In this way, by providing a small hit type storage area for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the special symbol 1 that cannot win a small hit (special symbol 1), the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b can be unified in configuration. Furthermore, the contents of the process (information acquisition process) that is executed when the acquisition conditions for acquiring the values of various counters are satisfied can be unified. In other words, by daringly providing a process for acquiring the value of the small hit type counter C6, which is unnecessary because there is no winning of a small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery, and a configuration for storing the value of the acquired small hit type counter C6. , when the acquisition condition for special drawing 1 is met (when the ball wins in the first winning hole 64), and when the acquisition condition for special drawing 2 is satisfied (when the ball wins in the second winning hole 640). , can execute common processing, and the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Furthermore, when changing the gameplay so that small winnings can be won even in the special drawing 1 lottery, the changing process can be easily executed, so it is possible to easily diversify the gameplay. In addition, as in this control example, if the acquisition condition for special drawing 1 is satisfied without using a configuration that simplifies the entire process by providing unnecessary processes, the value of the small hit type counter C6 You can also configure it so that it does not get it. As a result, information that is not actually used in the game (the value of the small winning type counter C6) is no longer acquired, so it is possible to reliably prevent the game content from being analyzed based on unnecessary acquired information. can.

As described above, in this second control example, the special winning random number counter C1 is used for the small winning lottery for determining whether or not there is a small winning among the special symbol drawings (special symbol drawing), and the small winning type is selected. When doing so, the small hit type counter C6 is used. An initial value random number counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a special symbol fluctuation pattern are used to set the initial value of the small hit type counter C6. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 425), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 434). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a that corresponds to winnings in the first winning hole 64, which is made up of four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4), A second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to winnings to the second winning opening 640 consisting of In accordance with the winning timing in the winning opening 64 (in accordance with the establishment of acquisition conditions), special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS1, falling lottery counter C4, small winning Each value of the type counter C6 is stored respectively.

Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is established, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the first special symbol. A shift is made to the execution area, and special symbol variations are started based on the various stored values. In addition, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type Each value of a selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter CS1, a falling lottery counter C4, and a small winning type counter C6 are stored, respectively.

Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is established, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the first special symbol. A shift is made to the execution area, and special symbol variations are started based on the various stored values.

In this control example, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is used when determining whether or not there is a small winning. In other words, in order to avoid winning both a jackpot and a small jackpot in one special drawing lottery, it is first determined whether the jackpot has been won in the special drawing drawing, and then it is determined that the jackpot has not been won. Since it is configured to determine whether a small win has been won if are doing. The present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated counter (for example, a small win random number counter) for determining whether or not a small win has been won may be provided.

In addition, in this control example, when the acquisition condition is satisfied based on the ball winning the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (for example, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second When a new prize is won while there is free space in the storage area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b), the value of each main counter mentioned above is acquired, and the acquired value is stored in each corresponding reserved ball storage area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when there is free space in the storage area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a new When there is a winning, only the right to obtain the values of various counters is stored in each corresponding reserved ball storage area, and the values of the various counters are obtained based on the fulfillment of special symbol fluctuation conditions. Alternatively, only a specific counter value may be acquired based on the fact that a ball has won in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, and the remaining counter values can be acquired based on the fact that a ball has won in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. It may be configured to obtain the information.

As described above, in this control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the system is configured such that a small win can be won in a special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery), and the obtained small win type It is configured to execute various controls based on the value of the counter C6. Although not shown, the obtained value of the small winning type counter C is configured to be used in various processes like other counters, and is used in S406 in the starting winning process (see FIG. 428), In the process of S413, a process is executed in which the value of the acquired small hit type counter C6 is stored in the corresponding reserved ball storage area in the same way as other counters. In addition, in the processing of S503 and S505 in the prefetching process (see FIG. 429), the result of the small winning lottery corresponding to the new winning is acquired, and the winning information command set in the processing of S504 is used to determine whether or not there is a small winning winning. , and a winning information command that includes information indicating the small winning type to be set.

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if you win a small hit in a special drawing lottery, after the special drawing fluctuation to show the lottery result of that special drawing lottery stops displaying (confirmed display), the small winning winning will be announced. A small winning game based on a small winning winning is performed by setting the flag shown (small winning start flag) on and by small winning control processing executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 434). Processing for executing the is executed.

When this small win control process is executed, it is first determined whether the flag indicating a small win win (small win start flag) is set on, and if it is determined that it is set on, it is not set. A process of setting an opening operation for executing a small winning game according to the small winning type, setting a small winning medium flag to ON, and setting a small winning start flag to OFF is executed. In this control example, when a small winning game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened, and specifically, the opening period of the small winning game (the closing period of the variable winning device 65) 0.2 seconds)), round game period (variable winning device 65 opening period (0.2 seconds)), ending period (variable winning device 65 closing period (0.2 seconds)) The opening operation is set.

In this control example, the above-mentioned opening operation is configured to be set regardless of which of the plurality of small winning types is set. This prevents the player from easily identifying the small win type set for the small win won this time based on the game content of the small win game (the opening operation content of the variable winning device 65). can.

The game content of the small winning game is not limited to this, and for example, different game content may be set depending on the small winning type. The game content of the small winning game to be executed may be different depending on the small winning type. In addition, as described above, in this control example, the period in which the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the small winning game is in the open state is shorter than that during the jackpot game, and It is configured so that a winning game in which it is difficult to win a ball into a prize opening 65 is executed. Regarding the specific content of the small winning game in this control example, the only difference is the period in which the variable winning device 65 is in the open state and the period in which it is in the closed state, and other than that, it is different from the first control example. This is the same as the jackpot game described above.

Therefore, the various processing contents executed during the small winning game are the same as the processing related to the jackpot control of the first control example described above (see FIGS. 434 to 436), and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 491(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this second control example. As shown in FIG. 491(a), in this second control example, compared to the first control example described above, a jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is provided in place of the jackpot type selection table 202c (see FIG. 408). , a small win random number 2 table 202ab that is referred to when determining the presence or absence of a small win, and a small win type selection table 202ac that is referenced when selecting a small win type to be set when a small win is won. The difference is that a time-saving termination condition selection table 202ad is added in which time-saving termination conditions for terminating the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) are defined. Other elements are the same, and detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is used to select the jackpot type to be set at the time of winning a jackpot, and is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 408(a)) of the first control example. The difference is that the jackpot type that is listed above has been added. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 drawing, "Jackpot F" can be selected as the jackpot type, and when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 drawing, "jackpot G" is selected as the jackpot type. They are different in that they are configured to obtain Another difference is that the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is set based on the set jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 492. FIG. 492(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 492(a), the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is the special chart 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1, which is referred to when a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 drawing, and the jackpot is won in the special chart 2 drawing. It has 2 tables 202aa2 for special drawing 2 jackpots that are referred to when the game is performed.

Next, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 492(b). FIG. 492(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1. This special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 is a data table used when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, similar to the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 492(b), in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, the jackpot types are "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", and "jackpot F". It is configured so that four types can be set. The contents of the jackpot game (number of round games) are defined in correspondence with the set jackpot type. Further, a gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is defined for each jackpot type in correspondence with the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Specifically, when the value of the acquired special win type counter C is in the range of 0 to 9, there is a ``jackpot A'', when it is in the range of 10 to 49, there is a ``jackpot B'', and when the value is 50 to 79. ``Jackpot C'' is defined in the range of , and ``Jackpot F'' is defined in the range of ``80-99''. When "Jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, "15 rounds (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, a "probable variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

When "Jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type, "5 rounds (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, a "probable variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

Further, when "Jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, "5 rounds (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, a "time saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (potential state, variable probability state, time saving state). In this case, the "time saving state" is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Finally, when "Jackpot F" is set as the jackpot type, "5 rounds (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the "normal state" is set after the jackpot game ends, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (potential state, variable probability state, time saving state) In this case, the "time saving state" is set after the end of the jackpot game.

In this control example, the game in which the special drawing 1 lottery is executed (left-handed game) is configured to be executed in a normal state and a potential state, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The effect mode of the effect to be executed (background mode effect) will now be the same (lost child mode) when the normal state is set and when the potential state is set. It consists of

As mentioned above, if the player wins a jackpot in the special drawing 1 drawing in the potential state than if he wins the jackpot in the special drawing 1 drawing in the normal state, it is more likely that the gaming state (normal) is disadvantageous to the player. state) is configured so that it is difficult to set. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gaming state in which the potential state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. The game can be played while expecting that the potential state is set. In addition, as mentioned above, the configuration is such that the probability of winning a jackpot in the special drawing lottery is higher in the potential state, which is the high probability state of the special symbol, than in the normal state, which is the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the potential state can be a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the normal state.

In addition, as a pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed during a variable probability state or time saving state in which a game in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed (right-handed game) is executed, for example, a pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed when the jackpot is won is already obtained. There is a pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation is executed during the probability variable state or time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game. In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 drawing with such a pattern, the gaming state is set with the same content as when winning the jackpot in the special drawing 1 drawing during the probability state. It consists of

With this configuration, immediately after the game state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the player plays a right-handed game is set, the player wins the jackpot in the special drawing 1 drawing based on the special drawing 1 pending, and that It is possible to suppress setting of a game state (normal state) in which a left-handed game is performed after the end of a jackpot game. Therefore, even though a right-handed game that is advantageous to the player is once set, a left-handed game is set without causing the special drawing 2 lottery to be executed due to the right-handed game, which reduces the player's desire to play. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

Next, with reference to FIG. 492(c), the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2 that the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa has will be explained. FIG. 492(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the 2 tables 222aa2 for special drawing 2 jackpots. This special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2 is a data table that is referred to when selecting the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery.

As shown in FIG. 492(c), in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, three jackpot types can be set: "Jackpot D," "Jackpot E," and "Jackpot G." It is composed of The contents of the jackpot game (number of round games) are defined in correspondence with the set jackpot type. Further, a gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is defined for each jackpot type in correspondence with the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Specifically, when the value of the acquired special winning type counter C is in the range of 0 to 79, there is a ``jackpot D'', when the value is 80 to 89, there is a ``jackpot E'', and when the value is 90 to 99. ``Jackpot G'' is defined in the range. In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, a "15 round (R) round game" is executed as a jackpot game regardless of the set jackpot type. The game state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the jackpot type set.

Specifically, when "Jackpot D" is set, a "probable variable state" is set after the end of the jackpot game regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and when "Jackpot E" is set, Regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the "time saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, when "Jackpot G" is set, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is "probable variable state", "normal state" is set after the end of the jackpot game, and other than the probability variable state (normal state, If the potential state, time saving state) is set, the "time saving state" is set after the end of the jackpot game.

The small hit random number 2 table 202ab is a data table for determining whether a small win has been won in the special drawing lottery, and is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the special drawing lottery (if the small winning is won). It is something. This small hit random number 2 table 202ab is used to determine whether the lottery result is a small win in the out-of-win variation process (see S351 in FIG. 500) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S258 in FIG. 499). Referenced when doing so.

Here, the contents of the small winning random number 2 table 202ab will be explained with reference to FIG. 493(a). FIG. 493(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small winning random number 2 table 202ab. As shown in FIG. 493(a), the small hit random number 2 table 202ab defines the value of the special win random number counter C1 that results in a small win for each symbol type (special symbol type), and for each special symbol type. When a lottery is executed, it is determined that the result of the special drawing lottery is a small hit by comparing the value of the acquired special winning random number counter C1 with the determination value specified in the small winning random number 2 table 202ab. It is determined whether or not.

Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 that will result in a small hit win is not specified for the symbol type "Special Figure 1", and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 that will result in a small hit win is not specified for the symbol type "Special Figure 2". “0-4” is defined as the value of the winning random number counter C1. In other words, in this control example, it is specified that a small win is won only in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the probability of winning a small win in the special drawing 2 drawing is 1/100. With this configuration, it is possible to make the lottery results different between the special drawing 1 drawing and the special drawing 2 drawing, so it is possible to realize diversification of the game and improve the interest of the game. can.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, if a specific small hit (small win A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice) during the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state), the time saving end condition (second time saving The configuration is such that the time-saving state ends when the termination condition) is satisfied. As mentioned above, in this control example, since there is no possibility of winning a small hit by the special figure 1 lottery, the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation is executed immediately after the time saving state is set, and the special figure 1 lottery is executed immediately after the time saving state is set. The second time saving end condition is never satisfied based on the lottery.

Therefore, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery that is executed in the normal state, and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, the time-saving state is set when you have not obtained the special drawing 2 reservation. It is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending due to the special drawing 1 lottery executed in the case. In addition, like the first control example described above, this control example is configured so that the time saving state ends at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, so for example, the time saving state is executed immediately after the time saving state is set. When the time-saving end condition is established based on the special drawing (the first special drawing after the time-saving state is set), the game in the time-saving state (time-saving game), that is, the electric accessory 640a is released. There is a problem in that the time saving state ends without allowing the player to play a game in which a ball enters the second winning opening 640.

On the other hand, in this control example, the second time-saving termination condition is not satisfied by the special drawing 1 drawing, so if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 drawing executed in the normal state, If the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, that is, if the time-saving state is set in a state where the special drawing 2 reservation has not been acquired, the time-saving state ends without allowing the time-saving game to be played. can be suppressed. In addition, in this control example, since the number of small winnings for which the second time-saving termination condition is satisfied is set to "2," the time-saving state is configured so that one special lottery drawing during the time-saving state does not end the time-saving state. There is. Therefore, even though the time-saving state has been set, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from ending without allowing the player to play the time-saving game.

Here, if you win a small hit in the special drawing lottery (special drawing 2 drawing), it is configured so that a winning game that is different from the case where you win a jackpot is executed. A winning game in which the device 65 is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds), that is, a winning game that can provide the player with fewer benefits than a jackpot game, is executed.

In addition, in this control example, the same winning hole (specific winning hole 65a) changes from the first state (closed state) in which it is difficult to win a ball to the first state (closed state) in which it is easy to win a ball in the case of winning a small hit and the case of winning a jackpot. Although the configuration is such that a winning game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened so as to be variable between two states (open state), the winning game is not limited to this, and different variables may be used for a jackpot game and a small winning game. The winning device may be configured to operate in an open manner.

In this case, the privilege (the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins) that is awarded when a ball enters the winning hole of the variable winning device that is opened during a small winning game is changed to the variable winning device that is opened during a jackpot game. It may be configured such that the number of balls that enter the winning hole of the variable winning device that is opened during the small winning game is smaller than that of the winning hole of the variable winning device that is opened during the jackpot game. The winning opening of the variable winning device to be operated may be configured so that it is more difficult to win a ball.

In this control example, in the special drawing lottery, there is a data table (special symbol jackpot random number table 202a) for determining whether a jackpot has been won, and a data table (small winning random number 2) for determining whether a small winning has been won. Tables 203ab) and 203ab) are used separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a single data table may be used to determine whether the current special drawing lottery has won a jackpot or a small jackpot. It's okay. In this case, for example, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 corresponding to a small winning win may be defined in the jackpot random number table 202a without overlapping the value of the special winning random number counter C1 corresponding to a big winning winning. With this configuration, the number of data tables that the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 has can be reduced.

The small winning type selection 2 table 202ac is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small winning type that is set when winning a small winning, and is referred to when winning a small winning in the special drawing lottery. be. The small hit type selection 2 table 202ac of this control example is configured so that small win A and small hit B can be selected as the small win type, and is executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S258 in FIG. 499). When it is determined that the current special drawing lottery result is a small win in the error fluctuation process (see S351 in FIG. 500) (see S371 in FIG. 500), it is referred to to determine the small win type ( (See S374 in FIG. 500).

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac will be explained with reference to FIG. 493(b). FIG. 493(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning type selection 2 table 202ac. In this small win type selection 2 table 202ac, different small win types are defined in correspondence with the acquired value of the small win type counter C6. Specifically, "small win A" is defined in the range of the obtained small win type counter C6 from "0 to 64", and "small win B" is defined in the range of "65 to 99". A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, a predetermined small win (for example, small win A) is set to a predetermined small win (for example, small win A) in a state (time saver state, variable probability state) in which a time saver state (normal symbol high probability state) is set. It is configured so that the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is terminated when the winning number is won a number of times (for example, twice). In other words, as a condition (time saving end condition) for transitioning the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) to the normal symbol low probability state (time saving end condition), the time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) based on the small winning is set. It is configured so that

Here, if the time saving end condition is established in a state where the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set. Similar to the first control example described above, this control example is configured so that the time saving state is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the normal state, so the player is kept in the time saving state for as long as possible. You will play the game while expecting that the value will be set.

On the other hand, in this control example, as mentioned above, the time saving end condition is established based on a small winning win, so it is clear to the player at what timing the time saving state will end. It can be made difficult. Therefore, it is possible to make a player who is playing a game in a time-saving state feel nervous while playing the game.

In addition, in this control example, as the same time-saving termination condition as in the first control example described above, the number of drawings (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol to be executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined number of times ( For example, the configuration is such that a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times (for example, 100 times) is reached is also set. As a result, it is possible to set an upper limit on the period during which a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set (the period during which a time-saving state is set), thereby suppressing the excessive provision of benefits to players. can do.

Similarly, if the time-saving end condition is met in a state where the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is established. ) is set. Even in this case, the variable probability state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the probability state. In addition, in this control example, similarly to the first control example described above, in the case where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (the number of special symbol fluctuations is 100 times). It is configured so that a special mode effect is executed during the period until the child reaches the same mode (the period until the child reaches the mode) is set, and a mode performance corresponding to the lost child mode is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current state is the normal state or the potential state while the mode performance is being executed. Here, the differences between the normal state and the potential state will be explained. The normal state and the potential state are both low probability states with normal symbols, and the electric accessory 640a opens based on the common symbol, and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. Therefore, it becomes a game state in which a left-handed game (special symbol 1 game) in which a ball enters the first winning hole 64 is executed, but whereas the normal state is a state with a low probability of special symbols, the latent Since the definite state is a high probability state of special symbols, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) is higher than the normal state (jackpot winning probability 1/250). /125) is higher.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is won, the gaming state that is set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot is made different depending on whether the jackpot is won during the normal state or when the jackpot is won during the potential state. The game is configured so that a game state advantageous to the player is more likely to be set when the player wins a jackpot during the probability state than when the player wins the jackpot during the normal state. Specifically, when winning a jackpot in the normal state, the percentage of gaming states set after the end of the jackpot game is 50% in the variable probability state, 30% in the time saving state, and 20% in the normal state. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the probability state, the ratio of the gaming states set after the end of the jackpot game is set to 50% in the probability variation state and 50% in the time saving state. Therefore, the potential state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

As explained above, in this control example, the normal state is set during the mode performance that is executed during the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (the period until the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 100 times). , the same mode (lost child mode) is set and the mode performance is executed in the same manner as in the case where the potential state is set. With this configuration, while the mode performance corresponding to the lost child mode (normal state or mode for indicating a probable state) is being executed, the current state is either normal or probable. It is possible to prevent the player from easily identifying the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately stopping the game when the time saving state or the variable probability state ends.

Furthermore, in this control example, at the timing when the mode performance ends (timing when the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 100), the current gaming state is changed to the normal state for the player. It is configured to be able to execute a notification effect that can identify whether the device is in a certain state or a potential state. As a result, games that are disadvantageous to the player (for example, even though the normal state is set, the hidden state is It is possible to suppress a situation in which a game that makes the user think that a certain state has been set is executed.

The time-saving termination condition selection table 202ad is a data table for setting conditions (time-saving termination conditions) for terminating the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) set after the end of the jackpot game. This is referred to at the set timing (the end timing of the jackpot game).

Here, the contents of the time saving termination condition selection table 202ad will be explained with reference to FIG. 493(c). FIG. 493(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving termination condition selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 493(c), the time-saving termination condition selection table 202ad is defined so that different time-saving termination conditions are set according to the set jackpot type, and specifically, " After the end of the jackpot game in which jackpots A, E, F, and G have been set, a time-saving ending condition is set in which the value of the time-saving medium counter 203j is set to "100" and the value is not set to the small winning counter 203aa. Ru.

Although the details will be described later, the time saving counter 203j is a counter whose value is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation is executed during the time saving state, and when the value of the counter becomes "0", It is determined that the condition for ending the time saving state (first time saving end condition) is satisfied. In addition, the value of the small win counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 each time a specific small win (small win A) is won during the time saving state (every time a special symbol variation that wins a specific small win is executed). When the value of the counter becomes "0", it is determined that the condition for ending the time saving state (second time saving end condition) is satisfied.

That is, after the end of the jackpot game in which "jackpot A, E, F, G" is set, a time-saving state is set in which the second time-saving ending condition (time-saving ending condition that is established based on the small winning win) is not set. .

On the other hand, after the end of the jackpot game in which "jackpot B, C, D" is set as the jackpot type, the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is set to "100", and the value of the small win counter 203aa is set to "2". A time-saving termination condition is set. That is, after the end of the jackpot game in which "jackpot B, C, D" is set, the second time-saving ending condition (time-saving ending condition that is established based on the winning of the small winning) is that if the small winning A is won twice. A time-saving state is set in which a time-saving end condition that is satisfied is set.

In this control example, as mentioned above, a gaming state in which a time saving state (a high probability state with normal symbols) is set is more advantageous to the player than a gaming state in which a low probability state with normal symbols is set. Therefore, by providing a time saving state in which the second time saving end condition is set and a time saving state in which the second time saving end condition is not set, a time saving state in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is easily continued. It becomes possible to set a state and a time-saving state that is difficult to continue.

In addition, in this control example, no matter which type of jackpot the time saving state is set based on, the number of changes of the special symbol (number of special symbol fluctuations) "100" is set as the first time saving end condition. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and different first time saving end conditions may be set depending on the jackpot type, or jackpot types may be provided for which the first time saving end condition is not set. Further, although there are jackpot types for which the second time-saving end condition is set and jackpot types for which the second time-saving end condition is not set, a different end condition may be set as the second time-saving end condition depending on the jackpot type. Furthermore, in this control example, the time saving state is configured to end when either the first time saving ending condition or the second time saving ending condition is satisfied; however, the first time saving ending condition is not limited to this. The time saving state may be configured to end when the end condition and the second time saving end condition are satisfied.

In addition, in this control example, the time saving state is configured to end at the start timing of the special symbol variation, regardless of which of the time saving end conditions is satisfied; however, the present control example is not limited to this. The time saving state may be ended at different timings depending on the type of the time saving end condition. For example, when the first time saving end condition is met, the timing at which the special symbol variation that has been met stops displaying or the stop display ends The time saving state may be ended at the timing when the symbol confirmation display period has elapsed, or when the second time saving end condition is met, a special feature corresponding to the small winning where the second time saving end condition is satisfied is set. The timing at which the figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed, the timing at which the stop display ends (the timing at which the symbol confirmation display period has elapsed), or the timing at which the small winning game based on the small winning winning where the second time saving end condition is met is executed. , the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small winning game ends. With this configuration, by understanding the timing at which the time saving state ends, it becomes possible for the player to predict the time saving end condition that has been met this time.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 491(b). The RAM 203 of this second control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first control example described above in that a small hit medium flag 203aa and a small hit counter 203ab are added, and the rest is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small winning medium flag 203aa is a flag used to determine whether or not a small winning game is currently in progress, and is set to ON when a small winning game is being executed. A detailed explanation of the specific processing content will be omitted, but in this control example, it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the special figure variation process of the first control example (see S104 in FIG. 426). 426, S213: Yes), when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S216, No in FIG. 426), a process is added to determine whether the current lottery result is a small win, and the process When it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win, a control process is executed to start the small win game, and a flag (for example, Set the small hit start flag) to on. Then, in the main processing of the main control device 110 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 434), a flag indicating that the small winning game is ready to be executed (for example, the small winning start flag) is set to ON. The system is configured to periodically (every 4 milliseconds) determine whether the button is set to on, and when it is determined that the button is set to on, a small winning game is executed according to predetermined opening operation rules. At the same time, the small hit flag 203aa is set to ON. Then, when the small winning game executed by the control process for executing the small winning game ends, the small winning medium flag 203aa is set to OFF.

In this control example, the variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened during the small winning game, but during the small winning game, the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 moves the game ball to the second area. The distribution device (V accessory) is configured to be maintained in a placement that allows distribution (a placement that cannot be distributed to the first area), and when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 during a small winning game. However, the configuration is such that it does not pass through the first region (V region). As a result, even though the ball passes through the first area (V area) during the period when the variable winning device 65 is in the open operation, a situation occurs in which the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols) is not awarded. suppressing things.

In addition, in this control example, the number of devices disposed on the game board 13 is reduced by making the winning device that is opened by the small winning game and the winning device that is released by the jackpot game the same, and the cost is reduced. Although this is intended to reduce the amount of money, the invention is not limited to this, and a winning device dedicated to small winning games may be provided separately from the variable winning device 65. In this case, it is preferable to install a winning device dedicated to small winning games (small winning winning device) at a position away from the second winning opening 640, which is the starting condition for the special drawing 2 lottery that can win small winnings, for example, If the pachinko machine 10 uses the configuration of the game board 13 that allows balls to be won in the second prize opening 640 in right-handed games, the area where balls fired in left-handed games can fall (right-handed games It is preferable that the small winning prize device is disposed in an area where it is difficult (impossible) for the ball to flow downward. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is playing a right-handed game to execute the special drawing 2 lottery to notice that a small winning game has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the opportunity for the second time-saving termination condition described above to be satisfied. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the period during which the result of the special drawing lottery is stopped and displayed (determined display period) becomes longer in some cases where the result of the special drawing drawing 2 is a loss. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period from when the result of the special drawing lottery is stopped until the next special drawing drawing is executed, so that the next special drawing lottery is executed because the small winning game is being executed. Players can check whether it takes a predetermined period of time before the lottery is executed, or whether it takes a predetermined period of time before the next special drawing lottery is executed because the fixed display period is long and the display is stopped. It can be difficult to understand.

The small win counter 203ab is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery and small win A is set as the small win type. With reference to this, a value serving as the second time saving end condition is set. Then, when a small win A is set during the time saving state, the value is subtracted by 1. Then, the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the subtraction is referred to when determining whether to end the time saving state, and when the value after the subtraction becomes 0, the control for ending the time saving state is performed. is executed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 494 to 498. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that a configuration is added to the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 494(a). FIG. 494(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example has a dialogue mode related table 222aa and an operation effect switching table 222ab added to the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. Different, otherwise the same. Note that in FIG. 494(a), description of some of the same elements as in the first control example is omitted, but since the elements are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The dialogue mode related table 222aa is a data table for setting the performance mode of the dialogue performance executed when the dialogue mode is set. Here, the dialogue mode set in this control example will be briefly explained. The dialogue mode is one of the production modes that is set based on the variable pattern command output from the main controller 110. When the dialogue mode is set, the dialogue mode described above in FIGS. 483 and 484 Zone" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which lines are displayed (outputted from the audio output device 226) according to the stop display mode of the third symbol.

Next, detailed contents of the dialogue mode related table 222aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 495. First, with reference to FIG. 495(a), the display mode of each symbol that is variably displayed as a third symbol (fused third symbol) when the speech mode is set will be described. FIG. 495(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence of each symbol. As shown in FIG. 495(a), the fused third symbol is formed in a display mode that is a combination of a number mode that is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing lottery, and a character mode that indicates the character that speaks the lines. A numerical form is attached to correspond to each character form. The image data of this fused third symbol is stored in the character ROM of the display control device 114, and the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a display command to the display control device 114 indicating that the dialogue mode is set. In this case, it is used as image data indicating identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol.

In this control example, different character aspects are associated with the numerical aspects 1 to 9, and furthermore, the character aspects associated with the numerical aspects "1 to 4" and "5 to 9" are A fused third pattern is formed so that the other parts are separated. Specifically, character aspects included in the land creature group are set in the fused third symbols corresponding to the numerical aspects "1 to 4", and character aspects included in the land creature group are set to the fused third symbols corresponding to the numerical aspects "5 to 9". , character aspects included in the sea creature group are set.

Next, the contents of the dialogue mode related table 222aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 495(b). FIG. 495(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the dialogue mode related table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 495(b), the dialogue mode related table 222aa includes a dialogue state setting table 222aa1 for setting the current dialogue progress level, a character selection table 222aa2 for selecting the character that utters the dialogue, and a character selection table 222aa2 for selecting the character that utters the dialogue. It has a dialogue selection table 222aa3 for setting the content of the dialogue, and by referring to each table, the fused third symbol that is stopped and displayed during the dialogue mode is selected, and each fused third symbol is It is configured to select the type of lines to be uttered.

First, the contents of the line state setting table 222aa1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 495(c). FIG. 495(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the line state setting table 222aa1. This dialogue state setting table 222aa1 is based on the history information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac, which stores the history information of the fused third symbol that is stopped and displayed when the dialogue mode is set. This is a data table that is referred to when setting a state, and as shown in FIG. 495(c), each line state is defined based on the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac. Based on the speech state selected here, the type of the fused third symbol to be stopped and displayed next and the content of the speech (state of speech) to be displayed (output) during the speech mode are selected.

Next, the contents of the character selection table 222aa2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 496. FIG. 496 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character selection table 222aa2. This character selection table 222aa2 selects different characters ( The configuration is such that the left fused third symbol that is stopped first is selected.

Next, the contents of the line selection table 222aa3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 497. FIG. 497 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the line selection table 222aa3. This dialogue selection table 222aa3 selects the types of the right fusion third symbol, the middle fusion third symbol, And, it is a data table for selecting the content of the dialogue (state of dialogue) of each fused third symbol.

The operation performance switching table 222ab is a data table for switching the performance mode of the variable operation performance to be executed when the variable operation performance is set based on the variation pattern output from the main control device 110. In this control example, when the variable operation effect is set, after moving the lever member 10340 (hereinafter referred to as lever member 10340) of the operation device 10300 from the origin position to the actuation position (raised position), As shown in 484(a), the variable operation performance for causing the player to operate (push down) the lever member 10340 is configured to be executed.

However, if the depressing operation is not performed on the lever member 10340 after the performance period (operation valid period) of the variable operation performance has elapsed, even if the performance period (operation validity period) of the variable operation performance has elapsed. Nevertheless, the lever member 10340 remains in the operating position (raised position). In this case, the lever member 10340 is moved from the operating position (raised position) to the origin position using a driving means (motor, etc.) for variably operating the lever member 10340, and the lever member 10340 is returned to the initial state (origin position). Although it is possible to return the lever member 10340 to the state before the start of the variable operation performance by executing the return process to position the lever member 10340 in Even though the lever member 10340 is moved to the operating position for the purpose, the lever member 10340 returns to the initial position without the player operating the lever member 10340 located at the operating position, which reduces the performance effect. The problem was that it could not be increased.

On the other hand, in this second control example, when the lever member 10340 is located at the operating position after the performance period of the variable operation performance has elapsed, the normal state (the lever member 10340 is located at the initial position) The configuration is such that a push-down operation effect for causing the lever member 10340 to perform a push-down operation is more likely to be executed than in the state in which the lever member 10340 is held down. That is, in order to execute one variable operation performance, a performance preparation process is executed in which the operating means (lever member 10340) is moved from the first position (origin position) to the second position (operation position), and the performance preparation process is configured to perform a variable operation performance for the player to move the operating means from the second position to the first position after the completion of the variable operation performance, and the player operates the operation means during the variable operation performance. If the operating means (lever member 10340) does not move to the first position (continues to be located at the second position), the operating means remains in the second position even after the variable operation performance is finished. (operating position) (a state in which the performance preparation process is completed), and in a state where the performance preparation process is completed, the above-mentioned push-down operation performance is easily executed. ing.

With this configuration, in order to perform one push-down operation performance, it is possible to cause the operating means (lever member 10340) on which the performance preparation process has been executed to perform a plurality of press-down operation performances. Therefore, the operating means can be easily moved to the initial position by the player's operation.

In addition, in this control example, in a state in which the performance preparation process is completed (a state in which the operating means is located at the operating position), even though the push-down operation performance has been executed a predetermined number of times (twice), the operating means is located at the second position (operating position), the operating means (lever member 10340) is moved to the first position (origin position) using a drive means (such as a motor) for variable operation of the operating means (lever member 10340). It is configured to move (execute return processing). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the push-down operation effect is executed persistently. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequency of performance that gives dissatisfaction to players who do not want to operate the operating means. In addition, in this case, a storage means is provided that can store the execution of the return process, and when the return process is executed, that is, the state in which the performance preparation process is completed (the state in which the operating means is located at the operating position) In the case where it is stored that a state in which the operating means is located at the second position (operating position) occurs even though the push-down operation effect has been executed a predetermined number of times (twice). , the variable operation effect may be configured to be difficult to execute. Thereby, it is possible to provide a performance that corresponds to the player's preferences.

Here, the contents of the operation effect switching table 222ab will be explained with reference to FIG. 498. FIG. 498 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation performance switching table 222ab. This operation performance switching table 222ab is referred to when switching the performance mode of the variable operation performance to be executed according to the setting status of the initial position variation flag 223ag, origin detection flag 223ae, and actuation position detection flag 223af. be.

Specifically, when the initial position switching flag 223ag is off, the origin detection flag 223ae is off, and the actuation position detection flag 223af is off, touch performance (see FIG. 485) is set as the performance mode of the variable operation performance. When the operation position detection flag 223af is turned on, a lever push-up effect (see FIG. 484(b)) is set. When the initial position switching flag 223ag is off and the origin detection flag 223ae is on, the lever press effect (see FIG. 484(a)) is set regardless of the setting status of the actuation position detection flag 223af.

In addition, if the initial position switching flag 223ag is on, the origin detection flag 223ae is off, and the actuation position detection flag 223af is off, a touch effect is set, and if the actuation position detection flag 223af is on, the lever is pressed. The performance is set. Finally, when the initial position switching flag 223ag is on and the origin detection flag 223ae is on, the lever press effect is set regardless of the setting status of the actuation position detection flag 223af.

Next, with reference to FIG. 494(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 494(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this second control example. As shown in FIG. 494(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example has the special figure fluctuation number counter 223aa, Performance mode storage area 223ab, stop symbol information storage area 223ac, character selection counter 223ad, origin detection flag 223ae, operating position detection flag 223af, initial position change flag 223ag, return operation timer 223ah, operation performance flag 223ai, performance standby The difference is that a flag 223aj, a performance information storage area 223ak, a variable operation effective period timer 223am, a second variable time timer 223an, a press-down performance prohibition flag 223ao, and a variable performance priority flag 223ap are added, but other than that, they are the same. Note that, as shown in FIG. 494(b), for convenience of explanation, some elements included in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above are omitted, but the audio lamp control in this control example The RAM 223 of the device 113 has all the elements of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol variation number counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the special symbol (special symbol), and when the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game, This is to measure the period until the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end reaches 100. In addition, in this control example, when the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is started before the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 100. Since it may end, the names and configurations are separated, but the specific contents of the special figure variation counter 223aa are the same as the time saving guarantee counter 223g in the first control example described above.

The production mode storage area 223ab is a storage area for storing the production mode set by the background mode production, and temporarily stores the production mode set in the back mode lottery process 2 (see S4362 in FIG. 515). It is something to remember.

The stop symbol information storage area 223ac is a storage area for storing stop symbol information (type of left symbol, set dialogue) in a state where the dialogue mode is set.

The character selection counter 223ad is a loop counter that is a type of production counter, and its value is referred to when setting a character with reference to the character selection table 2222aa2.

The origin detection flag 223ae and the actuation position detection flag 223af are flags for indicating the position of the lever member 10340, and the origin detection sensor (not shown) indicates that the lever member 10340 is located at the initial position (origin position). ) is detected, the origin detection flag 223ae is set to on, and when the actuation position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the lever member 10340 is in the actuation position, the actuation position detection flag 223af is turned on. is set to

Note that when both the origin detection flag 223ae and the actuation position detection flag 223af are set to OFF, it is determined that the lever member 10340 is located between the initial position and the actuation position, and the origin detection flag 223ae , and the actuation position detection flag 223af are both set to on, there is a failure in the detection means (origin detection sensor, actuation position detection sensor) for detecting the position of the lever member 10340, or a failure in the lever member 10340. This is considered to be an abnormal state.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if it is determined that the lever member 10340 is in an abnormal state, an operation performance is produced using an abnormality selection table in which a variable operation performance using the lever member 10340 is not selected. The mode is set, and an error command indicating that the lever member 10340 is in an abnormal state is output to the outside.

The initial position change flag 223ag is a flag for changing the initial position of the lever member 10340, and is set to OFF during a normal state in which the initial position of the lever member 10340 is the origin position, and is set to OFF when the lever member 10340 is not operated. Set to on when the position is the origin position. Depending on the setting status of this initial position change flag 223ag, the performance mode of the variable operation performance is set.

This eliminates the need to repeatedly execute the return process that is executed after the execution period of the operation performance has elapsed. Further, it is possible to prevent the operating device 10300 from breaking down by executing the return process against the force that maintains the operating position.

The return operation timer 223ah is a timer for measuring the elapsed time during the return process for driving the lever member 10340 toward the initial position, and is set to a predetermined value (for example, 5 (value indicating seconds) is set. Then, the value of the return operation timer 223ah is subtracted by the counter update process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the audio lamp control device 113 that is executed periodically, and the value becomes 0. The configuration is such that the recovery process is executed until . Note that the value (time) set in this return operation timer 223af is set to be longer than the time required for one return process, and once the return process is executed, the lever member 10340 is configured to execute the return process multiple times.

The operation presentation flag 223ai is a flag for determining whether the operation presentation is currently in progress, and is set to ON when the operation presentation is executed, and set to OFF when the operation presentation ends. . This control example is configured so that operation effects can be set (executed) at different opportunities. Specifically, when setting effects corresponding to special figure fluctuations (fluctuation effect) and when setting effects corresponding to special figure fluctuations, and when setting effects corresponding to special figure fluctuations, The operation performance is configured to be executable in both cases where a performance (pending performance) based on a ball winning a prize in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 is set.

The performance standby flag 223aj is a flag for indicating that the operation performance is in an execution standby state, and is set to ON when the execution of the operation performance is to be put on standby. This performance standby flag 223aj is set when the timing at which it is determined that the operation performance can be performed as a suspended performance is during the first period of the variable performance and is the timing when the operation performance is being executed as the variable performance. Set to on.

Then, at the timing of setting the performance mode for the second period of the variable performance, the performance mode is set based on the setting status of the flag.

The performance information storage area 223ak is a storage area for temporarily storing information regarding each performance. Various performance modes are set using the information stored in this performance information storage area 223ak.

The variable operation valid period timer 223am is for measuring the variable operation valid period for effectively determining the operation on the operating means (lever member 10340) performed by the player when a variable operation performance is set as the operation performance. This timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable operation effect to be executed when the variable operation effect is executed, and is used in main processing 2 of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 502) which is executed periodically. It is subtracted by the counter update process (see S3113 in FIG. 502). Then, the period until it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am becomes 0 is set as the variable operation valid period.

The second variable time timer 223an is a timer for measuring the elapsed period of the variable production executed in response to the special figure variation, and is the timing for setting the production mode of the second period of the production period of the variable production. This is referred to when determining whether the target has been reached. This second variable time timer 223an is set with a value calculated as the timing for setting the performance mode of the second period in the normal performance setting process (see S4351 in FIG. 513) (see S5215 in FIG. 513), It is subtracted by the counter update process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the audio lamp control device 113, which is executed periodically. Then, in the effect update process 2 (see S3151 in FIG. 503), if the value is determined to be 0 (S3255 in FIG. 503: Yes), the second A period setting process is executed (see S3256 in FIG. 505).

The push-down performance prohibition flag 223ao is a flag for indicating a period during which a push-down performance that causes the PUSH button 10317 to be operated is prohibited from being selected as a variable performance corresponding to the special figure fluctuation, and the push-down performance is prohibited from being selected. This setting is set to ON during the period in which it is prohibited.

In this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 207 to 211, one operating device 10300 has a PUSH button 10317 and a lever member 10340, and by moving the lever member 10340, the PUSH button 10317 is also configured to move in conjunction. Therefore, in this control example, the pressing effect that causes the player to operate the PUSH button 10317 is configured not to be executed while the return process of moving the lever member 10340 to the initial position is being executed.

With this configuration, when the player attempts to press the PUSH button 10317 based on the execution of the press effect, the PUSH button 10317 moves in conjunction with the movement of the lever member 10340, making it smooth. It is possible to suppress the problem of not being able to press the PUSH button 10317.

Further, by executing the press-down effect while the return process of the lever member 10340 is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from staring at the operating device 10300 during the return process, and giving the player a sense of discomfort with respect to the effect. can do. In addition, in this control example, a configuration is used in which the press effect prohibition flag 223ao is set so that the press effect is not executed during the return process of the lever member 10340, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the press effect is executed. It may be configured such that the returning process of the lever member 10340 is not executed while the lever member 10340 is being moved, and in this case as well, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

The variable performance priority flag 223ap is used to prioritize the variable operation when setting an operation performance (variable operation performance, press performance, etc.) that causes the player to operate the operating means (for example, lever member 10340, PUSH button 10317). This is a flag for indicating a period in which a performance is set, and is set to be turned on during a period in which a variable operation performance is preferentially set.

This variable performance priority flag 223ap is set to ON when the variable operation performance ends with the lever member 10340 located at the second position (operation position). As a result, when the lever member 10340 is located at the second position (actuation position), the variable operation performance can be set more easily than when the lever member 10340 is located at the initial position (origin position). I can do it. Furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform other operation effects (for example, a press effect) while the lever member 10340 is located at the second position (operating position).

As described above, in this control example, the operating device 10300 uses a configuration including the PUSH button 10317 and the lever member 10340, and when the lever member 10340 is located at the operating position, it is located at the initial position. The lever member 10340 is further away from the base of the operating device 10300 than in the case. Since the PUSH button 10317 is provided on the distal end side of the lever member 10340 (on the side opposite to the base of the operating device 10300), the PUSH button 10317 is pressed when the lever member 10340 is in the operating position. When a push operation is performed on the PUSH button 10317 with the lever member 10340 located at the initial position, various structures of the operation device 10300 (for example, the lever member 10340 ), which may lead to failure of the operating device 10300. On the other hand, in this control example, when the lever member 10340 is in the actuation position, the variable operation effect is selected as the operation effect with priority. The lever member 10340 can be easily moved to the initial position by the player's operation, and failure of the operating device 10300 can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, when an operation effect is set in a state where the lever member 10340 is located in the actuation position, the variable operation effect is selected with priority over other operation effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this; for example, even if a variable performance is set without any operation performance, a variable operation performance may be set instead of the performance mode of the variable performance. It is only necessary that the variable operation effect is more easily selected when the lever member 10340 is at the operating position than when the lever member 10340 is at the initial position. In addition to the variable performance that is executed in response to special pattern fluctuations, for example, there are regular pattern fluctuation effects that are performed in response to normal pattern fluctuations (common pattern fluctuations), and those that are executed during jackpot games and small win games. In a winning game performance, the variable operation performance may be selected more easily when the lever member 10340 is located at the operating position than when the lever member 10340 is located at the initial position.

<About the control process of the main controller in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 499 to 501. Hereinafter, the same control processes as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 499. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427) in the first control example.

Of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) in this second control example, each process of S301 to S309, S310 to 313, S315, S318, and S319 is performed in the special symbol variation start process in the first control example (FIG. 427 The same processes as those of S301 to S309, S310 to 313, S315, S318, and S319 of (see) are executed.

In the process of S309, if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S309: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (S352), and the process moves to S310.

Further, in the process of S313, after executing the process of S313, the process of S314 is not performed, and the process of S315 is executed. After executing the process of S315, the process of S316 and S317 is not executed, and the off-time variation process is executed (S351), and the process moves to the process of S318. Note that details of the off-time variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 500.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 500, details of the off-time variation process (S351) in the second control example will be described. This losing time variation process (S351) is a process executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 499) in the second control example, and is performed when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than a jackpot (missing or small). This will be executed if there is a win).

When the winning time variation process (S351) is executed, it is first determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S371), and if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (a loss), (S371: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S372), the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S373), and the process proceeds to S381. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process in S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is compared. time).

In the process of S371, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S371: Yes), the small win type is determined based on the small win type selection 2 table 202ac (S374).

Here, the value of the small win type counter C6 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the small win type selection 2 table 202ac (see FIG. 493(b)) to determine the small win type. Set. Specifically, if the value of the small win type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 64", small win A is set, and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", small win B is set.

After completing the process of S374, it is then determined whether the determined small win type is small win A (S375). If it is determined that the small win type is not small win A (small win B) (S375: No), the process moves to S381. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small win type is small win A (S375: Yes), the value of the small win counter 203ab is incremented by 1 (S376), and then the value of the small win counter 203ab after the addition is 2. It is determined whether it is (S377).

If it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the addition is not 2 (S377: No), the process moves to S380. If it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the addition is 2 (S377: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the second time saving end condition is satisfied due to this small winning winning, the time saving state (normal symbol (high probability state) to a low probability state, the value of the time saving counter 203g is reset to the initial value (S378), a state command indicating the end of time saving is set (S379), and the process moves to S380. do.

In the process of S380, a fluctuation pattern (small win fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the small win won this time is determined. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when a small hit is won in the special drawing lottery, the same fluctuation pattern as when a jackpot is won in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is set. That is, the variation pattern to be referred to in the case of winning a jackpot in the special drawing lottery is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202b. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the fluctuation pattern determined based on the small winning win and the fluctuation pattern determined based on the jackpot winning the same. Therefore, the performance mode of the special figure fluctuation performance executed based on the determined fluctuation pattern can be made the same, so that it is difficult for the player to understand whether he has won a big hit or a small hit.

In the process of S381, a variation pattern command is set for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the processes of S373 and S380 (S381). Then, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type (S382). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 434) in the first control example. Sent. When the process of S382 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, details of the jackpot end process 2 (S1160) in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 501. This jackpot ending process 2 (S1160) is a process that is executed in place of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 437) in the first control example.

Of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1160) in this second control example, the steps S1301 to S1302 and S1305 are the same as the steps S1301 to S1302 and S1305 of the jackpot end processing 2 (see FIG. 437) in the first control example, respectively. The same process as each process is executed.

After executing the processes of S1301 and S1302, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is read out (S1351), and based on the read gaming state and the jackpot type, it is determined whether or not to set the time saving state (S1352). Here, in this second control example, as the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the current gaming state, the gaming state at the time of winning (at the time when the winning is determined by the special drawing lottery), and the winning It has a storage means (game state storage means) that can temporarily store the game state at the start of the game. In addition, in the process of S1351 described above, a process of reading out the gaming status at the time of winning the jackpot from the gaming status storage means included in the memory area 203z is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to set a new gaming state based not only on the currently set gaming state but also on the past gaming state (the gaming state at the time when the gaming state setting conditions were met). Therefore, it is possible to provide a wide variety of games.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a time saving state setting (S1353). If it is determined that there is a time saving state setting (S1353: Yes), values are set in various counters based on the contents specified in the time saving end condition selection table 202ad (S1354), and the game state after the jackpot ends. A jackpot end command indicating this is set (S1355), and the process moves to S1305.

On the other hand, in the process of S1353, if it is determined that the time saving state is not set (S1353: No), the process of S1354 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S1355.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 502 to 516. In this second control example, in addition to the first control example described above, processing for executing a variable operation performance for operating the lever member 10340, which is a variable operation member, is added, and a dialogue mode is added as a variable performance. The process for setting the variable effect that is set when a variable pattern command is received has been changed, and the process can be set when a winning information command is received. Changes have been made to the processing content for setting a hold effect (hold notice effect), and to select the lost child mode to be executed when the hidden state or normal state is set in the process of selecting the back mode. The difference is that this process is added, but other than that, they are the same. Hereinafter, the same control processes as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 502. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing this main processing 2. This main process 2 is a process executed in place of the main process in the first control example (see FIG. 441).

Of the main processing 2 in this second control example, the processing in S3102 to S3110 and S3116 to 3120 is the same as the processing in S3102 to S3110 and S3116 to 3120 in the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 441), respectively. processing is executed.

After executing the process of S3110, effect update process 2 is executed (S3151). The details of this performance execution process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 503 to 505. After executing the process of S3151, press detection process 2 is executed (S3152). Note that details of this press detection process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 506 and 507. After executing the process of S3152, an operation performance management process is executed (S3153). Note that details of this operation performance management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 508. After executing the process of S3153, variable operation means management process is executed (S3154). The details of this variable operation means management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 509. After executing the process of S3154, command determination process 2 is executed (S3155). After executing the process of S3155, variable display setting process 2 is executed (S3156), and the process moves to S3116.

Next, the effect update process 2 (S3151) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 503. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing this effect update processing 2 (S3151). This effect update process 2 (S3151) is a process that is executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 442) in the first control example, and sets a value corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation, and periodically By updating the value, the variable timer 223s measures the variation time (elapsed variation time, remaining variation period) of the special figure variation.While determining the progress status of the variation effect (variable display effect) based on the value of the variation time timer 223s, The process for updating the production contents of the operation production and executing the variable production corresponding to the second period (the second half period of the special figure variation being executed) is performed by the production update process (in the first control example described above). (See FIG. 442) is executed.

In addition, the second variable time timer 223an, which measures the period from the start timing of the special figure variation to the setting of the production mode of the variable production corresponding to the second period, is updated in the same manner as the above-mentioned variable time timer 223s. is executed, and when the value becomes 0 (when it is determined that it is the timing to set the presentation mode for the second period), the process for setting the presentation mode for the second period is executed. are doing.

In the effect update process 2 (S3151) in this second control example, each process in S3201 to S3206 is the same as each process in S3201 to S3206 in the effect update process in the first control example (see FIG. 442). executed.

In the process of S3201, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s is 0, that is, when it is determined that the current special figure is not changing (S3201), the process moves to S3255.

On the other hand, after executing the process of S3206, a variable operation effect process is executed (S3251), and the process proceeds to S3252. Note that details of this variable operation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 504.

In the process of S3252, it is determined whether the value of the variable time timer 223s indicates the start timing of the second period (S3252). If it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s indicates the start timing of the second period (S3252: Yes), the information indicating the variable display mode of the second period stored in the performance information storage area 223ak is read out. (S3253), a display variation pattern command is set based on the read information (S3254), and the process moves to S3255.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, when a fluctuation pattern command is received, the performance mode of the fluctuation display performance is not set for the entire period of fluctuation time included in the fluctuation pattern command, but for the first half period. It is configured such that the performance mode is set only during the (first period). Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 487, if the received variation pattern command includes information indicating a variation time of 60 seconds, then ), when a variation pattern command is received, the production period information indicating that the current variation time is 60 seconds, and the production period is set to the first period (30 seconds) and the second period (30 seconds). Each period information divided into 1 and 2 and first period performance mode information indicating the performance mode set for the first period are stored in the performance information storage area 223ak. Then, a value corresponding to the second variable time timer 223an is set in order to measure the second period production mode setting timing (28 seconds after the start of variation) indicating the timing to set the production mode corresponding to the second period.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the process for setting the presentation mode of the second period presentation 28 seconds after starting the special symbol variation. The exercise information storage area 223ak is configured to also store performance results for performances performed during the first period (for example, performance results of operation performances performed during the first period), The performance mode of the second period performance is set based on various information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak.

As a result, even at a timing different from the timing at which the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to set the performance mode of the fluctuation performance corresponding to the remaining period (second period) of the special figure fluctuation period. . Furthermore, since it is possible to set the second period effect based on the information indicating the effect result of the effect that has already been executed (the effect executed during the first period), it is possible to set the second period effect based on the information indicating the effect result of the effect that has already been executed (the effect executed during the first period), so it is possible to specify the start timing of the special figure fluctuation. It is possible to more easily set a variety of performance modes than when setting the performance mode of the variable performance for the entire period of the figure variation period.

In addition, in this control example, an example was shown in which the special figure fluctuation period was divided into two periods, the first period (first half period) and the second period (second half period), but this is not limited to this, and three or more The system may be divided into variable periods, and the performance mode corresponding to each variable period may be set before reaching each variable period. In addition, in this control example, the arrival timing of the second period (in the example shown in FIG. 487, the timing 30 seconds after the start of special symbol fluctuation) is not the timing before the arrival timing of the second period (the timing shown in FIG. 487). In the example shown, the performance mode during the second period is set at a timing of 28 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation, and once stored in the performance information storage area 223ak, at the arrival timing of the second period, By configuring the variable performance to be executed in the performance mode stored in the performance information storage area 223ak, it is possible to simplify the process executed at the timing of reaching the second period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that, at the arrival timing of the second period, processing for setting the performance mode during the second period is executed. By configuring in this way, the number of processes executed at the arrival timing of the second period increases, but without storing the performance mode set corresponding to the second period in the performance information storage area 223ak, Since it can be executed as is, it is possible to simplify the storage area for storing information indicating the performance mode of the variable performance.

In the process of S3252, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s does not indicate the start timing of the second period (in the example of FIG. ), the process of S3253 and S3254 is skipped, and the process moves to the process of S3255.

In the process of S3255, it is determined whether the value of the second variable time timer 223an is 0 (S3255). If it is determined that the value of the second variable time timer 223an is not 0 (S3255: No), this process is directly ended. If it is determined that the value of the second variable time timer 223an is 0 (S3255: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is the timing to set the presentation mode for the second period, the second period setting process is executed. (S3256), then this process ends. Note that details of this second period setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 505.

Next, the variable operation effect processing (S3251) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 504. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing this variable operation effect processing (S3251). This variable operation effect processing (S3251) is a process executed within the effect update process 2 (FIG. 503) in the second control example.

In this variable operation performance processing (S3251), processing for setting the performance mode of the variable operation performance and processing for terminating the variable operation performance are executed. As explained with reference to FIGS. 485 and 486, in this control example, as the production modes of the variable operation production, there is a push-down operation production that pushes down the lever member 10340, a push-up production that pushes up the lever member 10340, and a push-up production that pushes up the lever member 10340. It is configured to be able to set a touch effect in which the hand touches the detection range of the touch sensor instead of the touch sensor, and the effect mode is configured to be set according to the positional situation of the lever member 10340 at the execution timing of the variable operation effect. are doing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a contradiction occurs between the performance mode of the variable operation performance to be executed and the positional situation of the lever member 10340. Specifically, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the push-down operation effect is executed when the lever member 10340 is already lowered.

In this control example, for convenience of explanation, a touch performance that does not allow the player to operate the lever member 10340 is included as part of the variable operation performance. As described above, this touch effect is an operation effect using a touch sensor, and is an operation effect that does not use the lever member 10340, which is a variable operation member. However, since the operation performance is to create a state in which the player's hand is away from the lever member 10340 by executing the performance for causing the player's hand to touch the detection range of the touch sensor, for example, the lever member For the player who continues to hold 10340, this is an effect to make him release his hand from lever member 10340, which is a variable operation member. Therefore, if viewed in a broad sense, it becomes part of variable operation performance. In other words, in this control example, as a variable operation effect, the push-down operation effect (see Fig. 484(a)) and a push-up operation effect (see FIG. 484(b)) that moves the variable operation member (lever member 10340) located at the first position (origin position) toward the second position (origin position). (see FIG. 485) and a touch effect (see FIG. 485) for letting go of the variable operation member (lever member 10340).

When the variable operation performance processing (S3251) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of the variable operation performance (S4601). Here, the determination is performed based on the performance mode information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak and the value of the variable time counter 223s.

In the process of S4601, if it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the variable operation performance (S4601: Yes), the performance mode of the current variable operation performance is set with reference to the operation performance switching table 222ab (S4602). , sets a value corresponding to the operation performance period to the variable operation valid period timer 223am corresponding to the set performance mode (S4603), sets the operation performance flag 223ai to ON (S4604), and moves to the process of S4608.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the variable operation performance (S4601: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4605) . If it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4605: Yes), a performance mode indicating the end of the variable operation performance is set (S4606), and the operation performance flag 223ai is set to off ( S4607), the process moves to S4608. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is not 0 (S4605: No), the process of S4606 and S4607 is skipped, and the process moves to the process of S4608.

In the process of S4608, a display command indicating the currently set presentation mode is set (S4608), and then this process ends. Thereby, it is possible to execute a performance that corresponds to the start timing and end timing of the variable operation performance.

Next, the second period setting process (S3256) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 505. FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing this second period setting process (S3256).

This second period setting process (S3256) is a process executed within the effect update process 2 (FIG. 503) in the second control example. In this second period setting process (S3256), a process for setting a performance mode corresponding to the second period (second half period) of the performance period of the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation being executed is executed. . Furthermore, when the suspended operation performance is on standby (performance standby flag 223ah is set to on), processing is executed to set a performance mode for executing the suspended operation performance during the second period. .

When the second period setting process (S3256) is started, first, from the production information storage area 223ak, information regarding the special figure fluctuation being executed (information corresponding to various information included in the corresponding fluctuation pattern command), Information regarding the performance results of the first period and information regarding the second period (information indicating the length of the second period) are read out (S4701), and then it is determined whether the performance standby flag 223ah is on (S4702). . If it is determined that the performance standby flag 223ah is not on (off) (S4702: No), then it is determined whether there is additional performance information during the first performance period (S4703). The additional performance information that is determined in the process of S4703 is when the player presses the operating means (for example, PUSH button 10317, lever member 10340) among the performances executed during the first period (first performance period). Information on variable effects executed during the first period (first effect period), such as information for indicating the effect results of effects that vary based on the contents of the executed operations (for example, special figure operation effects). As a performance mode, one performance mode is selected from a plurality of production modes according to the selection condition (operation on the operating means) established during the first period. This indicates information for indicating the performance mode (that is, the performance mode). This additional performance information is stored in the performance information storage area 223ak as additional performance information when a performance mode is selected from among a plurality of performance modes based on selection conditions established. Stored.

If it is determined that there is additional performance information during the first performance period based on the information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak (S4703: Yes), a variable display mode corresponding to the additional performance information is set ( S4705), the process moves to S4710. If it is determined that there is no additional performance information during the first performance period (S4703: No), a variable display mode is set based on the information regarding the second period stored in the performance information storage area 223ak (S4704), The process moves to S4710.

In this way, in this control example, the second period (second performance period) is controlled based on the content of the additional performance information (stored in the performance information storage area 223ak) acquired during the first period (first performance period). Since it is configured so that the production mode can be set, the production mode of the variable production that is executed in response to the variation time of one special symbol variation can be divided into multiple production periods and set at different timings. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when the performance modes set in each performance period are combined. Therefore, the performance effect of the entire variable performance can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S4702, if it is determined that the performance standby flag 223ah is on (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether the pending batch change performance is possible during the second performance period (S4706). If it is determined that the pending batch change performance is possible during the second performance period (S4706: Yes), a variable display mode corresponding to the pending batch change performance is set (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4709. If it is determined that the pending batch change performance is not possible during the second performance period (S4706: No), a variable display mode is set based on the information regarding the second period stored in the performance information storage area 223ak ( S4708), the process moves to S4709.

Here, to specifically explain the processing content executed in S4706, in this control example, there are cases where the current special symbol fluctuation is a special symbol fluctuation that has won a jackpot, or the lottery result of a special symbol lottery is a winning one. However, if the fluctuation pattern has a high expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time set), the second half of the special pattern fluctuation performance (equivalent to the second period) In this case, the special figure variation effect (for example, super reach effect) for suggesting to the player that the current special figure variation has a high possibility of winning a jackpot is easily executed.

In such a case, that is, when an effect is being executed to make players interested in the lottery results of the special drawing fluctuations that are being executed, the newly acquired winning information (special drawing pending) By executing the reserved performance to suggest the content in the second half period (second period) of the special figure variation effect, interest in the special figure variation effect weakens and the effect of the effect decreases. there were. Therefore, in this control example, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute a pending operation performance based on information for setting the performance mode for the second period (various information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak). are doing. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier to understand the effects (special figure variation effect, hold effect) that the player should pay attention to during the second period. Note that, without being limited to this, it is simply determined whether the length of the second period is longer than the execution period of the suspended operation performance (suspended batch change performance), and determines the period during which the suspended operation performance can be executed during the second period. The configuration may be such that it is determined whether the hold operation performance can be secured, or a performance result indicating that the suspended operation performance will not be executed during the second period is displayed as the performance result of the performance executed during the first period (execution). ), and the determination may be made based on the determination result.

In addition, despite the process of S4708 described above, that is, the performance standby flag 223ah was set to ON during the first period, it is not possible to execute the hold operation performance (hold batch change performance) during the second period. If it is determined that this is the case, as shown in FIG. 486(b), the display part of the suggestive character HC1 is stopped and displayed in a display mode that does not require operation of the operating means (display mode other than "PUSH"), and the display part is stopped. A performance variable in a performance mode according to the displayed display mode is executed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 486(a), when the execution of the suspended operation effect is in a standby state, the suggestion character HC1 is displayed and the effect of rotating the display part of the suggestion character HC1 is executed. It is configured as follows. By rotating the display part in this way, it is possible to execute a presentation that suggests the possibility that a pending operation presentation will be executed later, and even if a situation occurs in which the pending operation presentation is not executed as described above. , it is possible to continue playing the game without giving the player a sense of dissatisfaction.

In the process of S4709, the production standby flag 223ah is set to OFF (S4709), and the process moves to S4710. In the process of S4710, each piece of information set this time is stored in the performance information storage area 223ak (S4710), and then this process ends.

Next, the press detection process 2 (S3152) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 506. FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing this press detection process 2 (S3152). This press detection process 2 (S3152) is executed in place of the press detection process (see FIG. 447) in the first control example, and is a process that is referred to when a press operation on the PUSH button 10317 is executed. and variable operation detection processing that is executed when the lever member 10340 is variably operated.

Of the press detection process 2 (S3152) in this second control example, each process in S3601 to S3607 is the same as each process in S3601 to S3607 in the press detection process in the first control example (see FIG. 447). executed.

In the process of S3601, if it is determined that the press of the PUSH button has not been detected (S3601: No), the process moves to S3653. In addition, in the process of S3606, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), then it is determined whether the value of the other press valid period timer is greater than 0 ( S3651). If it is determined that the value of the other press valid period timer is greater than 0 (S3651: Yes), a production mode corresponding to the production being executed is set (S3652), and then the process moves to S3653. If it is determined that the value of the other press valid period timer is 0 (S3651: No), the process moves to S3653.

In the process of S3653, it is determined whether an operation on the operating means (lever member 10340, touch sensor) used for variable operation performance is detected (S3653). If it is determined that an operation on the operating means used for variable operation performance has been detected (S3653: Yes), variable operation detection processing is executed (S3654). Note that details of this variable operation detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 507.

Here, the processing contents of S3653 will be explained. As described above, in this control example, the lever member 10340 is configured to be variably operable between the first position (origin position) and the second position (actuation position). Then, when a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lever member 10340 is located at the first position detects the lever member 10340, the origin detection flag 223ae is set to ON, and the lever A detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the member 10340 is located at the second position is configured such that the actuation position detection flag 223af is set to ON when the lever member 10340 is detected. are doing.

Then, after the origin detection flag 223ae that was in the on state is set to off, the actuation position detection flag 223af that was in the off state is set to on, or the actuation position detection flag 223af that was in the on state is turned off. If the origin detection flag 223ae, which was in the OFF state after being set to OFF, is set to ON, it is determined in the process of S3653 that an operation on the lever member 10340 has been detected.

Note that the method of determining that an operation on the lever member 10340 has been detected is not limited to the method of this control example, and for example, the setting state (on state, The configuration may be such that it is determined that an operation on the lever member 10340 has been detected when it is determined that the state (off state) has been switched, or one of the detection flags (origin detection flag 223ae, actuation position detection flag 223af) When it is determined that the setting state (on state, off state) has been switched, it is determined that the first operation has been executed, and the setting state (on state) of both detection flags (origin detection flag 223ae, actuation position detection flag 223af) is determined. , off state) has been switched (when it is determined that an operation has been detected based on the operation detection contents in this control example), it is determined that the second operation has been executed, and the first operation is established. , the detection result may be different depending on the case where the second operation is established. Furthermore, when the second operation described above is established, the period from when the setting state of one detection flag is switched until the setting state of the other detection flag is switched, that is, the lever member 10340 located at the origin position is moved to the operating position. The configuration may be such that different detection results are obtained based on the period required to move the lever member 10340 from the operating position to the original position.

In the process of S3653, if it is determined that no operation on the operating means used for the variable operation effect has been detected (S3653: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, the variable operation detection process (S3654) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 507. FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing this variable operation detection process (S3654). This variable operation detection process (S3654) is a process executed within the press detection process 2 (FIG. 506) in the second control example.

When the variable operation detection process (S3654) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4801). That is, it is determined whether the variable operation performance is currently being executed. If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4801: Yes), the operating means (lever member 10340, touch sensor) has been operated, the production mode corresponding to the production being executed is set (S4802), the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is reset to 0 (S4803), and then this process is ended. do.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is not greater than 0 (0) (S4801: No), then it is determined whether the origin detection flag 223ae is on ( S4804). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4804: Yes), then it is determined whether the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4805). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4805: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set to off (S4806), and the process moves to S4807. If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4805: No), the process skips S4806 and proceeds to S4807. In the process of S4807, a locking process for fixing the variable operation means at the origin position is set (S4807), and then this process ends.

By executing the above-described process, if the lever member 10340 that is not located at the origin position is moved to the origin position during a period in which the variable operation effective period is not set, the lever member 10340 is moved to the origin position. It will be locked. Therefore, even if the lever member 10340 is left in a position other than the origin position while the variable operation effect is being executed, the lever member 10340 can simply be moved to the origin position. can be securely locked.

On the other hand, in the process of S4804, if it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S4804: No), then it is determined whether the actuation position detection flag 223af is on (S4808). If it is determined that the actuation position detection flag 223af is off (S4808: No), the process is immediately ended. If it is determined that the operating position detection flag 223af is on (S4808: Yes), then it is determined whether the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4809). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4809: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set to off (S4810), and then this process ends. If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4809: No), the process of S4810 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 508, the operation performance management process (S3153) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing this operation effect management process (S3153). This operation effect management process (S3153) is a process executed within the main process 2 (FIG. 502) in the second control example, and updates the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am during the variable operation effect period. The processing for this is executed.

When the operation effect management process (S3153) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4901). If it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is 0 (S4901: No), this process is directly ended. If it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4901: Yes), the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is updated (S4902), and then the updated variable operation effective period timer 223am is updated. It is determined whether the value is 0 (S4903). If it is determined that the updated value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is not 0 (S4903: No), this process is directly ended. If it is determined that the updated value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is 0 (S4903: Yes), then it is determined whether the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4904). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4904: Yes), an initial return operation scenario is set (S4905), and a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the return operation timer 223ah (S4906). ), sets the press effect prohibition flag 223ao to ON (S4907), and then ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4904: No), then it is determined whether the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4908). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4908: Yes), this process is immediately ended. If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S4908: No), the variable performance priority flag 223ap is set on (S4909), and then this process ends.

Next, the variable operation means management process (S3154) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 509. FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing this variable operation means management process (S3154). This variable operation means management process (S3154) is a process executed within main process 2 (FIG. 502) in the second control example.

When the variable operation means management process (S3154) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the return operation timer 223ah is greater than 0 (S5001). If it is determined that the value of the return operation timer 223ah is 0 (S5001: No), the process is immediately ended. If it is determined that the value of the return operation timer 223ah is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the return operation timer 223ah is updated (S5002), and whether the updated value of the return operation timer 223ah is 0 or not. It is determined whether or not (S5003). If it is determined that the updated value of the return operation timer 223ah is not 0 (S5003: No), a return operation corresponding to the value of the return operation timer 223ah is set (S5004), and then this process ends. .

In the process of S5003, if it is determined that the updated value of the return operation timer 223ah is 0 (S5003: Yes), the press effect prohibition flag 223ao is set to OFF (S5005), and then the origin detection flag 223ae is set to OFF. is on (S5006). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S5006: Yes), information indicating that the variable operation means is in the normal position is stored in the performance information storage area 223ak (S5007), and then this process ends. do.

In the process of S5006, if it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S5006: No), then it is determined whether the actuation position detection flag 223af is on (S5008). If it is determined that the operating position detection flag 223af is on (S5008: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set on (S5009), and the information indicating that the variable operation means is in the opposite position is stored in the production information. It is stored in the area 223ak (S5010), and then this process ends.

In the process of S5008, if it is determined that the operating position detection flag 223af is off (S5008: No), information indicating that the variable operation means is in an unknown position is stored in the performance information storage area 223ak (S5011), After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 510, the pending notice lottery process 2 (S4031) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 510 is a flowchart showing this pending notice lottery process 2 (S4031). This suspended advance notice lottery process 2 (S4031) is a process that is executed in place of the suspended advance notice lottery process (see FIG. 453) in the first control example.

Of the pending advance notice lottery process 2 (S4031) in this second control example, each process of S4051 to S4057 and S4060 to S4063 corresponds to S4051 to S4057 and S4063 of the pending advance notice lottery process in the first control example (see FIG. 453), respectively. The same processes as those from S4063 to S4063 are executed.

In the process of S4057, if it is determined that the pending batch change effect has been executed (S4057: Yes), an execution timing setting process is executed (S4081), and then this process is ended. Note that details of this execution timing setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 511.

Next, the execution timing setting process (S4081) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 511. FIG. 511 is a flowchart showing this execution timing setting process (S4081). This execution timing setting process (S4081) is a process executed within the pending notice lottery process 2 (FIG. 510) in the second control example.

When the execution timing setting process (S4081) is started, first, information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak is read (S5101), and then it is determined whether or not the operation performance flag 223ai is on. (S5102). If it is determined that the flag 223ai during operation performance is off (S5102: No), then it is determined whether the execution period of the pending batch change performance can be secured (S5103). If it is determined that the execution period can be secured (S5103: Yes), the execution of the pending batch change effect is set (S5104), the batch change flag 223p is set to ON (S5105), and then this process ends. do. Further, in the process of S5103, if it is determined that it is not possible to secure the execution period of the pending batch change effect (S5103: No), the processes of S5104 and S5105 are skipped, and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that the operating performance flag 223ai is on (S5102: Yes), then it is determined whether the current variable performance is in the first period of performance ( S5106). If it is determined that the current variable performance is in the first period (S5106: Yes), the performance standby flag 223aj is set to ON (S5107), and the display of the pending symbol mode indicating that it is on standby is set ( S5108), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5106, if it is determined that the current variable performance is not in the first period (S5106: No), next, whether or not the current variable performance is in the second period is determined. (S5109), and if it is determined that the current variable performance is not in the second period of performance (S5109: No), this process is ended as is. If it is determined that the current variable performance is in the second period (S5109: Yes), the display of the pending symbol mode corresponding to the latest winning information is set (S5110), and then this process ends. .

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 512, the variable effect setting process 2 (S4252) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 512 is a flowchart showing this variable effect setting process 2 (S4252). This variable effect setting process 2 (S4252) is a process executed in place of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example.

Of the variable effect setting process 2 (S4252) in this second control example, each process in S4301 to S4311 and S4313 is different from each process in S4301 to S4311 and S4313 in the variable effect setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 456). The same process as the process is executed.

In the process of S4311, if it is determined that the current state is a variable probability state (S4311: Yes), the back mode lottery process 2 is executed (S4352), and the process moves to the process of S4312. Note that details of this back mode lottery process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516.

On the other hand, in the process of S4311, if it is determined that the current state is not in a variable probability state (S4311: No), the normal effect setting process is executed (S4351), and the process moves to the process of S4313. Note that details of this normal effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 513 and 514.

Next, the normal effect setting process (S4351) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 513. FIG. 513 is a flowchart showing this normal effect setting process (S4351). This normal effect setting process (S4351) is a process executed within the variable effect setting process 2 (FIG. 512) in the second control example.

When the normal effect setting process (S4351) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current state is normal (S5201). If it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (S5201: No), the process moves to S5214. If it is determined that the current state is normal (S5201: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current state is in dialogue mode (S5202). If it is determined that the current mode is in dialogue mode (S5202: Yes), dialogue mode setting processing is executed (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Note that details of this dialogue mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 514.

In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the current mode is not in the dialogue mode (S5202: No), the process of S5203 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S5204.

In the process of S5204, it is determined whether the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (S5204). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (S5204: No), a fluctuation display mode corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern is set (S5205), and then the process moves to S5214. In the process of S5204, if it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (S5204: Yes), the first period (first half) corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern is extracted (S5206), and then during the operation performance. It is determined whether the flag 223ai is on (S5207). If it is determined that the operation presentation flag 223ai is on (S5207: Yes), a variable display mode is set from a group of presentation modes that do not use operation presentation as the presentation mode for the first period (S5208), and then , the process moves to S5214.

On the other hand, in the process of S5207, if it is determined that the operation performance flag 223ai is off (S5207: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an operation performance in the set performance mode (S5210). If it is determined that the set performance mode includes operation performance (S5210: Yes), then it is determined whether the variable performance priority flag 223ap is on (S5211). If it is determined that the variable performance priority flag 223ap is on (S5211: Yes), the variable operation performance is set as the operation performance (S5212), the variable performance priority flag 223ap is set to OFF (S5213), and the process of S5214 is performed. Move to.

In addition, in the process of S5210, if it is determined that there is no operation effect in the set effect mode (S5210: No), and in the process of S5211, if it is determined that the variable effect priority flag 223ap is off (S5211: No). ), the process moves to S5214.

In the process of S5214, a value is calculated by subtracting 2 seconds from the number of seconds corresponding to the first period (S5214), a data value corresponding to the calculated value is set in the second variable time timer 223an (S5215), and this time The set information is stored in the performance information storage area 223ak (S5216), and then this process is ended.

Next, the dialogue mode setting process (S5203) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 514. FIG. 514 is a flowchart showing this dialogue mode setting process (S5203). This dialogue mode setting process (S5203) is a process executed within the normal effect setting process (FIG. 513) in the second control example.

When the dialogue mode setting process (S5203) is started, first, the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac is read out (S5301), and it is determined whether or not the second stop symbol information is stored ( S5302). If it is determined that there is no memory of the second stop symbol information (S5302: No), the stop character and dialogue corresponding to the lottery result are randomly selected, and the performance mode of the dialogue performance is set (S5303), and in S5306 Move to processing.

In the process of S5302, if it is determined that the second stop symbol information is stored (S5302: Yes), a dialogue state is set based on the dialogue state setting table 222aa1 (S5304), and the set dialogue state and validity are determined. Based on the determination result, a stopped character is selected with reference to the character selection table 222aa2 (S5305), and the process moves to S5306.

In the process of S5306, the speech selection table 222aa3 is referred to, the production mode of the current speech production is set (S5306), the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac is shifted by one (S5307), and the current speech production mode is set (S5306). The set performance mode is stored in the previous storage area (S5308), and then this process ends.

Next, the back mode lottery process 2 (S4362) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 515. FIG. 515 is a flowchart showing this back mode lottery process 2 (S4362). This back mode lottery process 2 (S4362) is a process that is executed in place of the back mode lottery process (see FIG. 458) in the first control example.

In the back mode lottery process 2 (S4362) in this second control example, the processes in S4501 to S4504 and S4506 to S4511 are the same as the processes in S4501 to S4504 and S4504 in the back mode lottery process in the first control example (see FIG. 458), respectively. The same processes as those from S4511 to S4511 are executed.

In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a variable probability state (S4504: No), the back mode setting process is executed after the time saving ends (S4551), and the process moves to S4510. Note that the details of this post-time saving back mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 516.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 516, the back mode setting process (S4551) after the end of time saving executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 516 is a flowchart showing the back mode setting process (S4551) after the end of time saving. This back mode setting process after the end of time saving (S4551) is a process executed within the back mode lottery process 2 (FIG. 515) in the second control example.

When the back mode setting process (S4551) is started after the end of time saving, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a normal state or a potential state (S4561). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state or the potential state (S4561: Yes), the back mode corresponding to the lost child mode is determined (S4562), and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4561, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state or the potential state (S4561: No), the back mode is (S4563), and then this process ends.

<About the first modification of the second control example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example will be explained. In the second control example described above, while an operation performance (special figure operation performance) for causing the operation means to be operated in the special figure fluctuation performance is being executed, an operation performance for causing the operation means to be operated as a hold performance is performed. When the execution condition for executing (suspended operation performance) is satisfied, the execution timing of each operation performance is configured so as not to overlap. On the other hand, in this first modification, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a game environment adjustment means that can adjust the volume level output from the audio output device 226, the brightness of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, etc. The player has adjustment operation means (for example, a first button (for example, a button consisting of an up arrow button and a down arrow button) that allows the player to select the operation content, and a display on the third symbol display device 81. By operating the second button that is operated to display the menu screen on the screen or to determine the selection content (for example, a button with menu/decision displayed on the button press surface), the player The system is configured so that the gaming environment can be set according to the user's preferences.

Here, to briefly explain how to adjust the gaming environment, when the above-mentioned second button is pressed while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be displayed. A menu screen for adjusting the gaming environment is displayed. The menu screen includes a volume adjustment display mode for adjusting the volume level, a light intensity adjustment display mode for adjusting the brightness, a game information display mode for checking the game information of the pachinko machine 10, and a menu screen. An end display mode for ending the process is displayed, and when an arbitrary display mode is selected by operating the above-mentioned first button and the second button is pressed, a corresponding screen is displayed.

When the user operates the first button and presses the second button while selecting the volume adjustment display mode, the volume adjustment screen is displayed. This volume adjustment screen displays a volume indicator that shows the volume of the pachinko machine 10 in stages, and by operating the first button and varying the volume indicator, the volume level of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied. It is configured. In this case, the configuration is such that each time the first button is operated to vary the volume indicator, demo audio (for example, the lines of the character 801) is output at a volume corresponding to the selected volume level. This allows the player to easily understand the volume level corresponding to the currently selected volume level. Then, by operating the second button while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the currently selected volume level is determined, and the volume adjustment is completed.

Further, when the second button is pressed with the light amount display mode selected, a light amount adjustment screen is displayed. This light amount adjustment screen displays a light amount indicator that shows the brightness (light amount) of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in stages, and similarly to the volume adjustment described above, the first The light intensity is configured to be adjustable based on the button operations. Based on the amount of light determined here, the brightness of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (specifically, the brightness of the backlight for illuminating the display surface of the liquid crystal display constituting the third symbol display device 81) ) can be adjusted.

Further, when the second button is pressed with the game state display mode selected, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 and past game history are displayed.

In this way, when the second button is operated and the menu screen is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol reservation obtained based on the variation effect of the special symbol or the start winning of the special symbol. The on hold performance based on this issue becomes difficult to see. Furthermore, since it is necessary to provide a plurality of operating means within the limited space of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to adjust the operating means (lever member 10340, PUSH button 10317) used in each of the control examples described above and the gaming environment. It is necessary to arrange adjustment operation means (first button, second button) nearby.

Therefore, while adjusting the gaming environment (while operating the first button and the second button), a special symbol operation performance can be executed as a special symbol variation performance, or a pending operation performance can be executed as a suspension performance. If this happens, there is a problem in that when adjusting the gaming environment, the user accidentally operates the operating means instead of the adjusting operating means, resulting in an unintended performance being performed.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, similar to the second control example described above, the execution conditions for executing the operation performance (special figure operation performance, hold operation performance) for operating the operation means are satisfied. If the adjustment operation means is operated, it is determined whether the period is in which the adjustment operation means is operated (the period in which the menu screen is displayed), and if it is determined that it is the period in which the adjustment operation means is operated, the execution of the operation effect is waited. It is configured as follows.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which different operating means are operated at the same time, and therefore it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. Furthermore, in a state where the standby effect is being executed and the suggestive character HC1 (see FIG. 486(a)) indicating that the execution of the operation effect is on standby, the player can adjust the gaming environment. When the first button is operated, the rotation speed of the display part of the suggested character HC1 increases, and the display is configured to rotate at high speed.

As a result, when a standby effect is being executed while the gaming environment is being adjusted, when the adjustment operation means is operated to adjust the gaming environment, the display content suggested by the effect mode of the standby effect is displayed. It can be difficult to understand. Specifically, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the characters "PUSH" that prompts him to operate the operating means displayed in the display area of the suggestion character HC1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who recognizes the word "PUSH" rotated and displayed in the suggestion character HC1 from accidentally operating the operating means or the adjusting operating means.

On the other hand, when an operation effect using the operation means is being performed, the configuration is such that a valid period that can effectively determine the operation on the second button is not set, so the player can use the operation means instead of the operation means. The configuration is such that even if the second button is operated by mistake, the menu screen will not be displayed. As a result, the adjustment operation means is arranged near the operation means, and when the second button is accidentally operated during the operation performance, the menu screen is displayed and the situation where the performance effect is significantly reduced can be suppressed. I can do it.

Note that, without being limited to the configuration of the first modified example, during the period when the operation performance is being performed, even when the first button or the second button is operated, the operation means (lever member 10340, PUSH button 10317) may be configured to perform the same effect as when operating 10317), or during a period in which the operation validity period is not set for the 1st button and 2nd button, the 1st button and 2nd button A configuration may be used in which a physical restriction is provided so that the player cannot press the 2 button.

<About the second modification of the second control example>
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be explained. In the second control example described above, while an operation performance (special figure operation performance) for causing the operation means to be operated in the special figure fluctuation performance is being executed, an operation performance for causing the operation means to be operated as a hold performance is performed. By configuring so that the execution timing of each operation performance does not overlap when the execution conditions for executing the (suspended operation performance) are satisfied, it is possible to play a game that is difficult for the player to understand, i.e., when one operation performance (for example, To prevent a game from being played in which, even though the operating means is operated for a special figure operation effect, the performance mode of the other operation effect (for example, a pending operation effect) is changed based on the operation of the operating means. It was composed of On the other hand, in this second modification, there is an operation performance (special figure operation performance) for causing the operating means to be operated in the special figure fluctuation performance, and an operation performance for causing the operation means to be operated as a hold performance (holding operation). By setting a special operation presentation mode, when the operations (effects) and are executed overlappingly (the operation validity period set for each operation effect overlaps), it is possible to provide an operation effect that is easy for the player to understand. It is configured to be executable. Specifically, it is configured to be able to execute a fused operation performance that combines a special figure operation performance and a hold operation performance.

This fused operation performance is an operation in which a performance mode for showing the performance result of the special figure operation performance or the performance result of the suspended operation performance is set as the performance mode of the performance executed based on the operation of the operating means. Specifically, for example, a special figure operation effect in which an operation validity period is set during which the operation on the operating means can be effectively determined for 10 seconds from 5 seconds to 15 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation. In a state where an operation performance (so-called continuous hit performance) that changes the performance mode based on the number of times the player operates the operation means is set, when the player operates the operation means once, the performance mode ( When the execution condition of the pending operation performance that changes the display mode of the pending symbols is satisfied, the fused operation performance is executed in which the operation validity period of the special symbol operation performance is set to 10 seconds.

While the fused operation performance is being executed, the final performance result (the performance result of the special figure operation performance and the performance result of the suspended operation performance) is configured to be displayed at the timing when the operation validity period has elapsed. Each time the player operates the operating means during the valid operation period, a performance is performed in which the performance mode of the special figure operation performance and the performance mode of the suspended operation performance are gradually varied.

In other words, unlike the above-mentioned suspended operation performance, which is set so that the performance result is displayed based on a single operation, by making it a fused operation performance, the performance result is displayed. The content of the operations on the operating means required to complete the performance is different, and the performance result is notified after a specific performance period (valid operation period) has elapsed.

In this way, when the execution timings of multiple operation effects with different display conditions (operation conditions) for displaying the effect of the operation effects overlap, the display conditions (operation conditions) of each of the duplicate operation effects are set to specific conditions. By executing a fused operation performance that is corrected so that, even if multiple operation performances are executed, the unintended operation performance will display the performance result first, making it difficult for the player to understand. It is possible to suppress the provision of

In addition, in the above example, when the execution timings of multiple operation effects with different display conditions (operation conditions) for displaying the effect of the operation effects overlap, specific conditions are set so that the display conditions are difficult to satisfy. Configured to set. As a result, the period during which the fused operation presentation is executed can be made longer than the period during which the operation presentation is executed alone, making it easier for the player to recognize that the fusion operation presentation is being executed. can.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example, the operation validity period set for the fused operation performance is configured to be the same as the operation validity period set for any of the overlapping operation performances. As a result, the fused operation performance can be executed without newly setting a valid operation period exclusively for the fused operation performance, so that the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Note that the configuration is not limited to this, and an operation valid period dedicated to the fused operation performance may be set.

To explain in detail the presentation content of the above-mentioned fused operation presentation, in this fused operation presentation, a presentation is performed that visually makes it appear as if each operation presentation is being executed in duplicate. That is, a performance in which a special figure operation performance and a hold operation performance are respectively performed is executed. Then, the operation suggestion mode that suggests the operation content on the operating means for each operation effect, and the effect mode that is set when the operation is performed on the operation means, are determined based on the case where each operation effect is executed alone. are configured differently.

Specifically, when the fusion operation performance is executed, the third symbol display device 81 displays a comment of "set operation start" as a display mode indicating to the player that the fusion operation performance has been executed. At the same time as being displayed on the screen, one display mode for operating the operating means (for example, PUSH button 10317) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Then, when the player operates (presses) the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation validity period of the fused operation performance, the content of the current operation is determined by the operation determination means, and which performance mode of the fusion operation performance is selected. Decide whether to make it variable. Then, the performance mode of the operation performance that is the target of the variable performance mode is varied. In this case, for example, when it is executed alone like the above-mentioned hold operation effect, the display mode that shows the effect of the hold operation effect by one operation (for example, change the color of the hold symbol from blue to red) When a fused operation performance is executed that includes an operation performance that is configured to display a display mode that is changed to A performance is performed in which the held symbol) is changed to a display mode (for example, a blue pending symbol with cracks) that is different from the display mode (red pending symbol) indicating the performance result of the pending operation performance.

Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the suspended operation performance is being executed as part of the fused operation performance, and it is also possible to delay the period until the performance result of the suspended operation performance is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to have the player operate the operating means voluntarily until the fused operation performance is completed. In this case, if the performance of the operation performance to be executed is a performance that changes a specific display mode in stages, the display mode indicating the current stage, the display mode of the stage indicated by the performance result, It is preferable to configure the display mode of the stages located between the two to be displayed during the fusion operation performance. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the performance result of the fused operation performance.

Furthermore, while the fused operation performance is being executed, a notification means (for example, a third symbol) is used to notify the player of which operation performance can be changed the next time the operation means is operated. It is preferable to provide notification by bringing the position of the operating means displayed on the display screen of the display device 81 closer to any of the production positions of the plurality of operation productions being executed. Thereby, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player. In addition, in this modification, when a fusion operation performance is executed, only one operation means is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to display a number of operating means corresponding to the number of operation effects, and the corresponding operating means may be alternately displayed as the above-mentioned notification means.

Furthermore, in the second modified example described above, an example was explained in which two operation effects were fused as a fused operation effect, but the invention is not limited to this, and three or more operation effects may be configured to be fused. good. Furthermore, by using the configuration of the second control example described above and the configuration of this second modification example, a waiting period after the execution condition of the operation performance is established for one or both of them can be set. However, the configuration may be such that the execution period is adjusted so that a plurality of operation effects are executed simultaneously, and then the combined operation effect is executed.

<About the third modification of the second control example>
Next, a third modification of the second control example described above will be explained. In the second control example described above, a lever member 10340 that is movable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (actuation position) is provided as a variable operation means, and the lever member 10340 is used when performing a variable operation performance. By configuring the performance mode of the variable operation performance to be varied according to the positional situation of the lever member 10340, the performance content of the variable operation performance and the content of the operation that can actually be performed on the lever member 10340 are not different. It consisted of: Then, regardless of the player's operation, the lever member 10340, which is not located at the first position (original position), is returned to the first position (original position) using a drive motor as a return control. A moving configuration was used. Further, in order to prevent the lever member 10340 located at the first position (origin position) from being operated by the player (operation to move it toward the second position) except during the period when the variable operation performance is being executed. By using the locking structure, the lever member 10340 located at the first position (origin position) is prevented from being unnecessarily moved.

However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, the lever member 10340 located at a position other than the first position (for example, the second position or an intermediate position between the first position and the second position) is always operated by the player. Therefore, there remains a risk that the lever member 10340 may be moved unnecessarily.

On the other hand, in the present third modification, a biasing means (for example, a spring member) that always applies a biasing force in the direction of the first position is provided to the lever member 10340, and The lever member 10340 is configured to always move toward the first position. Furthermore, when the lever member 10340 is located at the second position, it has a second locking configuration for maintaining that position.

In the third modified example configured in this way, the lever member 10340 can be maintained at either the first position or the second position, and can also be maintained at an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. Since the lever member 10340 located at is moved to the first position by the biasing means, it is possible to prevent the lever member 10340 from being located at an intermediate position when the player is not holding it. .

Also in the third modified example configured in this way, when the player grasps the lever member 10340 and determines that it is located at the intermediate position (that is, the origin detection flag 223ae and the actuation position detection flag 223af are If it is determined that both are set to off), an effect (touch effect) for making the player take his hand off the lever member 10340 is executed. Then, when the player releases his hand from the lever member 10340 based on the touch effect, the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position (origin position) by the action of the biasing means.

As explained above, in the third modified example, when the player grasps the lever member 10340 and moves the lever member 10340 located at the intermediate position to the first position, the player's hand It is only necessary to perform a presentation (for example, a touch presentation) to make it easier to move away from the lever member 10340, and there is no need to perform return operation control in accordance with the touch presentation as in the second control example described above. The configuration for moving member 10340 to the first position can be simplified.

In addition, in the present third modification, as means for moving the lever member 10340 in the first position direction, a first moving means using a driving means (drive motor) and a second moving means using a biasing means are used. The first moving means and the second moving means have different moving speeds for moving the lever member 10340. Specifically, the first moving means is configured to move faster than the second moving means.

As a result, for example, if the timing for executing a variable operation performance using the lever member 10340 has already been set and the lever member 10340 must be positioned at the first position within a predetermined period, the touch performance may be changed. When the lever member 10340 is configured to be moved to the first position using the first moving means at the same time as the execution, and the timing at which the next variable operation performance using the lever member 10340 is executed is not set, i.e. , if there is no limit on the period until the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position, the lever member 10340 can be configured to be moved to the first position using the second moving means. . By varying the speed at which the lever member 10340 is moved in accordance with the situation in this manner, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary load from being applied to the lever member 10340.

Note that, as in the second control example and the third modification example described above, the first position is adjusted using the variable operation means configured to be movable between the first position and the second position based on the player's operation. A first variable operation effect that moves the variable operation means from the second position toward the second position, and a second variable operation effect that moves the variable operation means from the second position toward the first position are configured to be executable. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to perform movement control to move the variable operation means to the first position or the second position without being based on a player's operation, a second variable operation performance is executed, While the player is performing an operation of moving the variable operating means toward the first position, using the first moving means, the second moving means, etc., move the variable operating means toward the first position. There may also be a case where the first moving means, the second moving means, etc. are not used.

With this configuration, when the player operates the variable operation means, it becomes possible to vary the force (pushing down force) that the player applies to the variable operation means. Therefore, by making the player's operation feel different when moving the variable operation means in the same direction as a variable operation performance, the performance effect can be enhanced. In this case, it is preferable that the force (push-down force) applied by the player to the variable operation means be varied in accordance with the performance result of the variable operation performance. In addition, when executing the first variable operation performance described above, the player uses the first moving means, the second moving means, etc. to apply force to the variable operation means ( The configuration may be such that the push-up force) is varied.

As explained above, in this second control example, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (probability variable state, short time state), the normal symbol is The configuration is such that the high probability state of is shifted to the low probability state. In other words, as a condition (time saving ending condition) for transitioning the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, the first time saving ending condition (100 times special symbol fluctuation number) which is also provided in the first control example mentioned above. In addition to the second time saving end condition (winning a small win). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol is transferred to the low probability state.

In this control example, there are multiple small win types (small win A, small win B) that are set when a small win is won, and when the set small win type is a specific small win type (small win A). In addition, the above-mentioned second time saving termination condition is configured to be satisfied. With this configuration, the high probability state of the normal symbol will transition to the low probability state only if a specific small win type is won, so the high probability state of the normal symbol will end based on the small win winning. It is possible to set when the process will be executed and when it will not be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol changes to the low probability state.

Furthermore, like the first control example described above, this control example is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and is based on the small hit winning. Even when the high probability state of the normal symbol is transferred to the low probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is transferred to the low probability state at the start timing of special symbol variation. In this way, no matter what the trigger for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol is, by making the timing of ending the high probability state of the normal symbol the same, the player is forced to end the high probability state of the normal symbol. This can make it difficult to understand what the trigger is.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a specific small winning type (small winning A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice), the above-mentioned second time saving end condition is established. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol is transferred to the low probability state.

In addition, in this control example, when the above-mentioned first time saving end condition or second time saving end condition is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to transition to the low probability state, Without being limited to this, for example, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be configured to transition to the low probability state when both the first time saving end condition and the second time saving end condition are satisfied. Furthermore, the order in which the first time-saving end condition and the second time-saving end condition are satisfied may be defined. For example, if the second time-saving end condition is satisfied after the first time-saving end condition is satisfied, the normal symbol is It may also be configured to shift a high probability state to a low probability state.

In addition, in this control example, when the second time-saving termination condition is satisfied based on winning a small hit in the special drawing lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the high probability state of the special symbol may be changed to the low probability state based on winning a small hit in the special symbol lottery. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state.

In the second control example described above, the second time saving end condition is established when a specific small win (small win A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice). is set, it may be configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that a specific small win (small win A) has been won for which the second time-saving end condition can be satisfied, and the suggestion effect that is executed. The production mode is set when the number of times a specific small win (small win A) for which the second time-saving end condition is satisfied reaches a quasi-achieved number of times that is smaller than the number of wins for which the second time-saving end condition is satisfied. It is better to configure it so that it is variable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the period until the second time saving end condition is satisfied in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. In addition, the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be performed while a special symbol is displayed to indicate that a specific small win (small win A) has been won, or may be performed while a special symbol is being displayed to indicate that a specific small win (small win A) has been won. It may be executed at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) in a display mode indicating that it has been done, or it may be executed during a small winning game corresponding to a specific small winning (small winning A), It may be executed while the special symbols are changing after the small winning game corresponding to a specific small winning (small winning A) is completed.

In addition, as a variation time of the special symbol that can be set when winning a specific small win (small win A), a variation time that cannot be set in other lottery results is set, and the game is changed depending on the length of the variation time of the special symbol. It may be configured to suggest to the person that he or she has won a specific small win (small win A). Furthermore, we set a variation time that cannot be set in other lottery results as the variation time of the next special symbol after winning a specific small win (small win A), and specify it to the player based on the length of the variation time of the special symbol. It may be configured to suggest that a small win (small win A) has been won.

In the second control example described above, a variable operation means (lever member 10340) movable between the first position (origin position) and the second position (operation position) is provided, and the variable operation means using the variable operation means It is configured to be able to perform operation effects. Then, after performing control (performance preparation control) for moving the variable operation means from the first position to the second position using the electric drive means (drive motor, etc.), the variable operation means is directed to the player. It is configured to be able to perform a variable operation effect of moving toward the first position.

By using the variable operation performance in this way, it is possible to perform a performance that causes the player to largely displace the operating means, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with a powerful performance. Furthermore, since the variable operation means can be moved in the direction of the first position by the player's operation, the process of returning the variable operation means to the first position (origin position) after execution of the variable operation performance is omitted. It can be made easier.

Then, a position determination means is provided for determining the position of the variable operation means at the timing when the execution period of the variable operation performance has elapsed, and the determination result of the position determination means determines that the variable operation means is not located at the first position. In such a case, the configuration is such that it is easy to execute the variable operation performance.

Thereby, the variable operation means can be easily returned to the first position by the player's operation on the variable operation means. In addition, during the period in which the state that makes it easy to execute the variable operation performance described above is set, if it is determined that the variable operation means is not located at the first position even though the variable operation performance has been executed a predetermined number of times. The apparatus is configured to use an electric drive source (drive motor) to execute a return process for returning the variable operation means to the first position.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who does not want to operate the variable operation means from excessively performing the variable operation performance and reducing his or her desire to play. Furthermore, in this second control example, in order to make it easier for the player to execute the above-mentioned return process with his hand off the variable operation means, there is a control function for causing the player to operate an operation means (touch sensor) other than the variable operation means. It is configured to perform touch effects.

This allows the return process to be executed while the player is operating the touch sensor, making it difficult for the player to understand that the return process has been executed. Further, it is possible to prevent the return process from being performed while the player is holding the variable operation means, which would cause an excessive load on the variable operation means and cause it to malfunction.

In addition, in the second control example described above, the lever member 10340 that is movable between the first position and the second position is used as the variable operation means, but the configuration of the variable operation means is not limited to this. It may be configured to be movable between the first position, the second position, and a different third position, or it can be moved to the third position only after being moved from the first position to the second position. It may be configured as follows. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a pressing operation and a moving operation are combined, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined pressing portion is pressed down to allow movement between the first position and the second position.

In addition, as drive control of the electric drive source (drive motor) for the variable operation means, the variable operation means is You may perform a return-to-origin process to move it to the origin position, or if a specific performance is being performed, an electric drive source (drive motor) may be used to lock the variable operation means to prevent it from moving. Control execution may also be performed. Moreover, as lock control for restricting movement of the variable operation means, a stopper (for example, a pin protruded by driving a solenoid) may be provided on the movement path of the variable operation means.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 517 to 542. In contrast to the first control example, in the third control example, the amount of image data of the display mode in the fluctuation pattern displayed simultaneously or for a predetermined period (for example, during one fluctuation display), and the amount of image data displayed during the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern When the sum of the image data amount of the preview display mode to be displayed, the image data amount of the volume adjustment setting image, and the image data amount of the error screen displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state is greater than a predetermined value. By setting some images to a low quality with a reduced number of pixels, it is possible to prevent the amount of displayed image data from becoming excessively large and to suppress the control load on display control. The main difference is that the control that can be performed is executed. Note that only the points that are different from the first control example will be explained, and the illustrations and explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 517 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example. This third control example differs from the front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example (see FIG. 282) in that a frame button 22a and selection buttons 22b and 22c are added, respectively. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The frame button 22a is used as an operation means for changing the performance, such as stopping a changing symbol or displaying a preview display mode, by operating the frame button 22a in a game performance, etc. used.

The selection buttons 22b and 22c are composed of a left selection button 22b and a right selection button 22c, respectively, and are used to adjust the volume, adjust the light intensity of the LED provided on the third symbol display device 81 and the pachinko machine 10, and perform operations during performance. This is used when selecting one target performance from among multiple candidates. When adjusting the volume, either the left selection button 22b or the right selection button 22c is operated in any case, such as during standby, during a game where the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, during a jackpot game, etc. The volume adjustment screen shown in a) is displayed. After this volume adjustment screen is displayed, by operating the left selection button 22b or the right selection button 22c, the volume is changed and output.

Specifically, when the left selection button 22b is operated, the volume is decreased, and the level of the indicator on the volume adjustment screen is also configured to decrease by one level toward the left for each operation (press). . Further, the output volume is configured to be output at a correspondingly low volume (in this embodiment, 15% relative to one level). Note that in this embodiment, the minimum volume level is 1 level, and the configuration is such that it cannot be lower than that level (for example, silent). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem in which a sound such as an error sound is not outputted, making it easier for fraud to occur. In this embodiment, the volume is configured so that it cannot be muted, but the configuration is not limited thereto.The configuration is such that the volume can be muted, and even in the muted state, specific sounds such as error sounds are output (for example, the maximum volume is ), it is possible to make adjustments according to the player's preferences while preventing damage from fraud and the like.

Further, when the right selection button 22c is operated (pressed), the volume is increased by a predetermined amount (for example, 10%) and output, and the volume display is increased by one level for each operation. It is composed of With this configuration, the player can check whether the volume is the desired volume while checking the actual output volume and the level display, and can easily adjust the volume. Note that the volume adjustment screen is configured so that the display is canceled if the selection buttons 22b and 22c are not operated for a certain period of time (10 seconds in this embodiment). Furthermore, when this volume adjustment screen is displayed, the other displays are drawn and displayed on the topmost layer while remaining displayed. Therefore, as the volume adjustment screen is set in addition to the normal display data by the player's operation of the selection buttons 22b and 22c, the display data to be displayed increases and the display control load for drawing increases. Ru.

Although details will be described later, in this third control example, if it is determined that the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 exceeds a certain value, the image quality of the predetermined image data is displayed at low image quality. By setting the image data to be displayed at the same time, the image data displayed at the same time is configured to be configured to be able to suppress the occurrence of problems such as processing failures in which the display data increases excessively and rendering processing cannot be completed in time.

FIG. 518(b) shows that the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state (the front frame of the pachinko machine 10 is opened, or a game ball is detected to have entered the big winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) other than during a jackpot game). FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error screen that is displayed when an error occurs (e.g., magnetism such as a magnet is detected). In addition to the normal display mode, display data for this error screen is set so that it is drawn on the foreground layer. Since this error screen is also displayed at an unexpected timing, it can cause a sudden increase in display data, but in this third control example, it is determined that the display data to be set exceeds a predetermined value. In this case, the image quality of specific display formats such as background images and preview displays is set to a low quality, which prevents problems such as processing failures due to an increase in display data for display formats that are displayed at the same time. can.

A display example of displayed images will be described with reference to FIG. 519. FIG. 519(a) is a diagram showing an example of pixel display when image data such as a preview is displayed at a preset normal image quality (resolution). On the other hand, FIG. 519(b) is a diagram showing a display example when the display data shown in FIG. 519(a) is set and displayed at a low image quality (low resolution) of 1/6. In this way, in this control example, data converted to low resolution at the start of variation is set to be stored in the low resolution data storage area of display control device 114. With this configuration, when it is necessary to display at a low resolution, the corresponding display data is read out from the low resolution data storage area 233ba and set in the drawing data table.

In this embodiment, the amount of display data that is changing is determined at the start of the change, and if it is determined that the total amount of display data exceeds a predetermined value, the display data to be displayed at a low resolution is changed to a low resolution. Although the configuration is configured such that the conversion process is executed and stored in the low resolution data storage area 233ba, the configuration is not limited thereto. It may be configured to be stored in the data storage area 233ba. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the problem that the control load of display control increases during a game. In addition, the configuration is configured to set the resolution in the display data table, and when a low resolution is set, the corresponding display image (display data specified as low resolution in the display data table) is converted to low resolution. It may also be configured such that it is set in the drawing data table.

An example of the display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 520. FIG. 520(a) is an example of a display mode showing a state in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) when the display mode displayed at low resolution is not set. In FIG. 520(a), the third symbol is reduced and displayed in a variable manner in the upper right reduced display area Ds3, and in the upper left reserved symbol display areas Ds1 and Ds2, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced to Ds1. The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed on Ds2. In the center of the display area, a preview display mode indicating the jackpot determination result for the changing third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed.

On the other hand, FIG. 520(b) is an example of a display mode in which the preview display mode is displayed at low resolution because the amount of display data to be displayed exceeds a predetermined value. In the example shown in FIG. 520(b), the preview display mode is set and displayed at low resolution. In addition. In the example shown in FIG. 520(b), the preview display mode is displayed at low resolution, but if the display data amount exceeds a predetermined value even if the preview display mode is lowered to low resolution, the pending symbol display, etc. Other display modes are also displayed at low resolution. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress problems such as all of the displayed displays being displayed at low resolution, which deteriorates the visibility of the entire display and makes it difficult to identify the validity determination result.

<Electrical configuration in third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 521 to 524. In the third control example, an image point table 222ba is added to the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 compared to the first control example.

The image point table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 522. FIG. 522 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the image point table 222ba. The image point table 222ba is a data table in which point values (status information) corresponding to the display data amount of each display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The larger the amount of display data to be displayed, the larger the point value is allocated. The display data amount is mainly configured such that the data amount increases depending on the display content with high resolution, the size of the displayed pattern, etc. As shown in FIG. 522, the image types are set respectively: background image, first half of variable pattern image, second half of variable pattern image, first preview image (variable pattern), second preview image (pending prize), and pending symbol image. , volume adjustment image, and error display image are each set.

The background image is an image that is always displayed on the back side where the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in this embodiment, a cave (point value 2), a temple (point value 3), a super temple (point value 4), The sea (point value 2) and the mountain (point value 1) are each set. Among the background images, the background of the mountain has the smallest display data, and the background of the super temple has the largest display data.

In the first half of the variation pattern image, point values are set for the display data of the first half of the variation pattern of the special symbol (third symbol). The first half indicates the amount of display data until the third symbol is displayed in reach. Out of range indicates a variation pattern of out of reach display, Normal indicates a variation pattern of normal reach, Super A indicates a variation pattern of super reach A, and Super B indicates a variation pattern of super reach B. In the second half of the variation pattern image, a point value corresponding to the amount of display data after the third symbol is displayed in the ready-to-reach display mode is set. In this way, by setting separate point values for the first half and the second half of a fluctuation pattern, you can determine whether the display data amount exceeds a predetermined value only in the first half or only in the second half of the fluctuation pattern, and if it exceeds it. In addition, it is possible to configure the display mode to be displayed in low resolution only in the first half, only in the second half, etc., and by displaying only the necessary period in low resolution, the player can easily identify the performance, the result of the judgment, etc. This can shorten the difficult period.

In the first preview image (variation pattern), a point value corresponding to display data is set for a display image of a preview effect displayed while the third symbol is changing. Further, the second preview image (pending prize) is set with a point value corresponding to the amount of display data of the pending preview image (pending change notice etc. in which a pre-reading determination result is announced). For the pending symbol image, a point value corresponding to the display data amount of the pending symbol is set. A point value corresponding to the display data amount of the volume adjustment image is set for the volume adjustment image. For the error display, a point value corresponding to the display data amount of the error display is set.

In this control example, when the third symbol starts to fluctuate, the upper limit of the total point value is set to 12 if the result of the determination of whether or not the fluctuating starts is a hit, and if it is a miss, it is set to 10. Then, by the image point setting process (S4252: see FIG. 536) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 at the start of the variation of the third symbol, the maximum number of points to be set during the variation is determined. This prediction is made based on the selected variation pattern and preview display mode, and the prediction is performed when the volume adjustment screen and error screen are displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress a problem in which processing is stopped even if a volume adjustment screen or an error display is displayed while the third symbol is changing. If the predicted point exceeds the set upper limit value, the simple face map creation flag 223bd is set to ON to set a simple image creation command (S3252: Figure 527), and the simple image creation command is displayed. When the control device receives the image, the display control device 114 executes a simple image creation process (S8452: see FIG. 538), and the display image that has been set to be converted to a low resolution in advance is converted to a low resolution. , are stored in the low resolution data storage area 233ba. Here, the images to be converted to low resolution are prioritized in the following order: background image, first preview image, second preview image, first half of the variable pattern image, and second half of the variable pattern image. Images are converted to lower resolution images in priority order until the point value does not exceed the upper limit. Here, since the display data is reduced to 1/6 in this control when converted to a low resolution, it is determined whether the number of points is converted to 1/6 and falls below the upper limit value.

Next, when the variable display of the third symbol is started, the current number of image points (display It is determined whether the total number of points of the display data for which the setting has been determined does not exceed the upper limit, and if it is determined that it has exceeded the upper limit, it is displayed at a lower resolution based on the difference that exceeds the upper limit. The type of simple image to be displayed is specified. The display control device 114 is configured to set the simple image in the display data table based on receiving the instruction command. With this configuration, it is determined in advance whether the amount of display data exceeds the upper limit at the start of fluctuation, the low-resolution display data is converted and stored, and the display timing determines whether the amount of display data exceeds the upper limit. By determining when the value is fluctuating and displaying it in low resolution when the point count exceeds the upper limit value, the low resolution display is displayed only when the load exceeds the upper limit value. The control load in control can be reduced. Furthermore, the period during which the game is displayed at low resolution can be kept to the minimum necessary, and the period during which it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the success/failure determination and performance can be shortened.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of points to display is configured to differ depending on the result of the validity judgment, so even under high load when many previews, etc. are displayed overlappingly, if low-resolution previews, etc. are not displayed, It is possible to play a game with the expectation that the determination result will be a win. That is, it is possible to predict the validity determination result based on the frequency of displaying at low resolution. Furthermore, if the low-resolution image is not displayed by pressing the selection buttons 22b, 22c and displaying the volume adjustment screen during a period when a display mode with large display data such as super reach is displayed, the validity judgment result This can give you hope that it might be a hit. That is, by operating the selection buttons 22b and 22c, the player can be given an opportunity to identify the result of the judgment, and the player can predict the result of the judgment at any time.

In the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, an image point number storage area 223ba, a point upper limit value storage area 223bb, a return flag 223bc, and a simple image creation flag 223bd are added to the first control example.

The image point number storage area 223ba is a storage area in which point values corresponding to the selected preview display mode, the display mode of reserved symbols, etc. are stored. Regarding the display mode selected at the start of fluctuation of fluctuation patterns, etc., the point value corresponding to the start of fluctuation is stored, and it is displayed when a hold occurs during fluctuation of a held symbol, etc., or when the frame button is pressed like an operation effect. Regarding the display mode displayed when 22 is pressed, when the display mode is set, the corresponding number of points is selected from the image point table and stored. Further, when the image display period ends, a value corresponding to the point number is subtracted from the image point number storage area 223ba and set. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the state of display data corresponding to the currently displayed state.

The point upper limit value storage area 223bb is a storage area in which the point upper limit value is stored in correspondence with the validity determination result. If the result of the judgment is a loss, 10 is stored, and if the result is a win, 12 is set. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the frequency of displaying at low resolution depending on the result of the validity judgment, and the frequency of displaying at low resolution and the state of display data when displayed at low resolution (high resolution). The result of the judgment can be predicted based on the state in which the loads are displayed in an overlapping manner.

The return flag 223bc is a flag for indicating that the initial setting at power-on has been executed, and when the return flag 223bc is on, it indicates that the initial setting has been completed. Further, when the return flag 223bc is off, it indicates that the setting for starting the variation of the third symbol has already been executed after the initial setting is completed.

The simple image creation flag 223bd is a flag for instructing the creation of a simple image. When the simple image creation flag 223bd is set to on, if the amount of display data at the start of variation exceeds the upper limit, This indicates that it has been determined. By setting this simple image creation flag 223bd to ON, a simple image creation command is set and output to the display control device 114. As a result, the image data is converted to low resolution by the display control device 114, and the image data is stored in the low resolution data storage area 223ba.

FIG. 523 is a block diagram of the display control device 114 in this third control example. In the third control example, a low resolution data storage area 233ba and an image switching information storage area 233bb are added to the work RAM 233 compared to the first control example.

The low resolution data storage area 233ba is a storage area where display data converted to low resolution is stored. The original display data that is converted to this low resolution is the image data stored in the character ROM, and there is no need to separately store low resolution display data in advance, which eliminates the problem of increasing the storage data capacity. It can be suppressed.

The image switching information storage area 233bb is a storage area in which type information of target image data to be switched to low resolution specified by a command from the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. The image switching information storage area 233bb is configured to also store image types that can be switched to low resolution and information about the period for displaying the images while switching to the low resolution.

FIG. 524 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a drawing list in this third control example. In the third control example, a volume adjustment image, a volume display where an error display image is set, and a data area for error symbol 1 are added to the first control example.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 525 to 536. In the third control example, in addition to the first control example described above, processing for executing a variable operation effect for operating the lever member 10340, which is a variable operation member, is added, and a dialogue mode is added as a variable effect. The process for setting the variable effect that is set when a variable pattern command is received has been changed, and the process can be set when a winning information command is received. Changes have been made to the processing content for setting a hold effect (hold notice effect), and to select the lost child mode to be executed when the hidden state or normal state is set in the process of selecting the back mode. The difference is that this process is added, but other than that, they are the same. Hereinafter, the same control processes as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, startup processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 525. FIG. 525 is a flowchart showing this startup process 3. This startup process 3 is a process that is executed in place of the startup process in the first control example (see FIG. 440).

In the start-up process 3 in this third control example, each process in S3001 to S3013 is the same as each process in S3001 to S3013 in the start-up process in the first control example (see FIG. 440). .

In the startup process 3 in the third control example, after executing the process in S3013, the return flag 223bc is set to ON (S3051), and then this process ends. Further, in the process of S3012, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S3012: No), the process of S3051 is executed, and then this process ends.

Next, main processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 526. FIG. 526 is a flowchart showing this main processing 3. This main process 3 is a process executed in place of the main process in the first control example (see FIG. 441).

Of the main processing 3 in this third control example, each of S3101 and S3102 to S3120 executes the same processing as S3101 and each of S3102 to S3120 of the main processing (see FIG. 440) in the first control example. be done.

In main processing 3 in the third control example, if it is determined in the processing of S3101 that 1 msec or more has passed since the current processing of S3101 was executed (S3101: Yes), image point determination processing is executed ( S3151), the process moves to S3102. Note that details of this image point discrimination processing (S3151) will be described later with reference to FIG. 527.

Next, the image point determination process (S3151) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 527. FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing this image point discrimination processing (S3151). This image point determination process (S3151) is executed in main process 3 (see FIG. 526) in the third control example.

When the image point determination process (S3151) in this third control example is started, first, it is determined whether the simple image creation flag 223bd is on (S3251). If it is determined that the simple image creation flag 223bd is on (S3251: Yes), a simple image creation command is set (S3252), the simple image creation flag 223bd is set to off (S3253), and then the process of S3254 is performed. Move to.

On the other hand, in the process of S3251, if it is determined that the simple image creation flag 223bd is off (S3251: No), the process of S3252 and S3253 is skipped, and the process moves to the process of S3254.

In the process of S3254, the information stored in the image point number storage area 223ba is read out (S3254), the information stored in the point upper limit value storage area 223bb is read out (S3255), and the value of the image point number is determined as the point upper limit value. It is determined whether or not it is the above (S3256). If it is determined that the value of the number of image points is greater than or equal to the point upper limit (S3256: Yes), a simple display target is set based on the difference between the value of the number of image points and the upper limit of points (S3257), and the set A simple display instruction command including the contents to be displayed briefly is set (S3258), and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3256, if it is determined that the value of the number of image points is smaller than the point upper limit value (S3256: No), the processes of S3257 and S3258 are skipped, and this process ends.

Next, the effect update process 3 (S3152) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 528. FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing this effect update processing 3 (S3152). This effect update process 3 (S3152) is a process executed in place of the effect update process in the first control example (see FIG. 442, 3111).

Of the effect update process 3 (S3152) in this third control example, each process in S3201 to S3106 is the same as each process in S3201 to S3106 in the effect update process in the first control example (see FIGS. 442 and 3111). Processing is executed.

In the performance update process 3 (S3152) in the third control example, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the value of the variable time timer 223s is 0 (S3201: No), the process moves to the process of S3211. Further, even after executing the process in S3206, the process proceeds to S3211.

In the process of S3211, it is determined whether the current timing is the end of various effects (S3211). If it is determined that the current time is the end timing of various effects (S3211: Yes), image points corresponding to the finished effects are extracted based on the image point table 222ba (S3212), and the number of extracted points is converted into image points. The number of points is subtracted from the number of points stored in the number storage area 223ba (S3213), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3211, if it is determined that the present time is not the end timing of various effects (S3211: No), the processes of S3212 and S3213 are skipped, and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 529, the press stop effect processing 3 (S3253) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing this press stop effect processing 3 (S3253). This press stop effect processing 3 (S3253) is a process executed in place of the press stop effect process (see FIG. 443, S3203) in the first control example.

Of the press stop effect processing 3 (S3253) in this third control example, each process of S3301 to S3310 and S3311 to S3314 corresponds to S3301 to S3314 of the press stop effect process in the first control example (see FIG. 443, S3203). The same processes as those in S3311 to S3314 are executed.

In the press stop effect processing 3 (S3253) in the third control example, after executing the processing of S3309 and S3310, the process moves to the processing of S3351.

In the process of S3351, image points corresponding to the set mode are extracted based on the image point table 222ba (S3351), and the number of points extracted from the image point table 222ba is stored in the image point number storage area 223ba (S3352). , and then ends this process.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 530, the batch change production process 3 (S3255) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing this batch change effect processing 3 (S3255). This batch change production process 3 (S3255) is a process that is executed in place of the batch change production process (see FIG. 445, S3205) in the first control example.

Of the batch change production process 3 (S3255) in this third control example, each process in S3501 to S3508 is the same as each process in S3501 to S3508 in the batch change production process in the first control example (see FIG. 445, S3205). The same processing is performed.

In batch change effect processing 3 (S3255) in the third control example, after executing the process of S3508, image points corresponding to the set aspect are extracted based on the image point table 222ba (S3551), and from the image point table 222ba. The extracted point number is stored in the image point number storage area 223ba (S3552), and then this process ends.

Next, the press detection process 3 (S3153) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 531. FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing this press detection process 3 (S3153). This press detection process 3 (S3153) is a process executed in place of the press detection process in the first control example (see S3112 in FIG. 447).

Of the press detection process 3 (S3153) in this third control example, each process in S3601 to S3607 is the same as each process in S3601 to S3607 in the press detection process in the first control example (see FIG. 447, S3112). Processing is executed.

In the press detection process 3 (S3153) in the third control example, if it is determined in the process of S3606 that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), the process moves to the process of S3651. Further, even after executing the process in S3607, the process proceeds to S3651.

In the process of S3651, it is determined whether or not pressing of the adjustment button is detected (S3651). If it is determined that a press on the adjustment button has been detected (S3651: Yes), a volume adjustment process is executed (S3652), and the process moves to S3653. On the other hand, in the process of S3651, if it is determined that the press of the adjustment button is not detected (S3651: No), the process of S3562 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S3563. Note that details of this volume adjustment process (S3652) will be described later with reference to FIG. 532.

In the process of S3563, image points corresponding to the set mode are extracted based on the image point table 222ba (S3653), and the number of points extracted from the image point table 222ba is stored in the image point number storage area 223ba (S3654). , and then ends this process.

Next, the volume adjustment process (S3652) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 532. FIG. 532 is a flowchart showing this volume adjustment process (S3652). This volume adjustment process (S3652) is executed in the press detection process 3 (see FIG. 531, S3153) in the third control example.

When the volume adjustment process (S3652) in this third control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current timing allows volume adjustment (S3671). If it is determined that the current time is not the timing at which the volume can be adjusted (S3671: No), this process is immediately ended. If it is determined that the current time is the time when the volume can be adjusted (S3671: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the adjustment screen is being displayed (S3672). If it is determined that the adjustment screen is not being displayed (S3672: No), the current volume level is read from the volume level storage area (S3673), a display adjustment screen command indicating the current volume level is set (S3674), After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3672, if it is determined that the adjustment screen is being displayed (S3672: Yes), then it is determined whether or not an operation of the UP button (right button) is detected (S3675). If it is determined that the operation of the UP button (right button) has been detected (S3675: Yes), the volume level is increased by 1 and stored in the volume level storage area (S3676), and then the process moves to S3677.

On the other hand, in the process of S3675, if it is determined that the operation of the UP button (right button) has not been detected (S3675: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation of the DOWN button (left button) has been detected. (S3679). If it is determined that the operation of the DOWN button (left button) has been detected (S3679: Yes), the volume level is lowered by 1 and stored in the volume level storage area (S3680), and the process proceeds to S3677.

In the process of S3677, a display command indicating the current volume level is set (S3677), an audio command indicating a pseudo sound corresponding to the current volume level is set (S3678), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3679, if it is determined that the operation of the DOWN button (left button) is not detected (S3679: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 533, the pending notice lottery process 3 (S4041) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing this pending notice lottery process 3 (S4041). This suspended advance notice lottery process 3 (S4041) is a process that is executed in place of the suspended advance notice lottery process in the first control example (see S4011 in FIG. 453).

Of the pending advance notice lottery process 3 (S4041) in this third control example, each process of S4051 to S4063 is the same as each process of S4051 to S4063 of the pending advance notice lottery process in the first control example (see FIG. 453, S4011). The same processing is performed.

In the pending notice lottery process 3 (S4041) in the third control example, after executing the process of S4059, image points according to the set mode are extracted based on the image point table 222ba (S4071), and from the image point table 222ba. The extracted point number is stored in the image point number storage area 223ba (S4072), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 534, the variable display setting process 3 (S3154) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process 3 (S3154). This variable display setting process 3 (S3154) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process in the first control example (see S3115 in FIG. 455).

Of the variable display setting process 3 (S3154) in this third control example, the processes in S4201 to S4203 and S4205 to S4211 are the same as the steps S4201 to S4201 in the variable display setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 455, S3115). The same processes as those in S4205 to S4211 are executed.

In the variable display setting process 3 (S3154) in the third control example, after executing the process of S4203, the variable effect setting process 3 is executed (S4251). The details of this variable effect setting process 3 (S4251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 535.

After executing the process of S4251, image point setting process is executed (S4252). Note that details of this image point setting process (S4252) will be described later with reference to FIG. 536.

After executing the process in S4252, the process moves to S4205.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 535, the variable effect setting process 3 (S4251) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 535 is a flowchart showing this variable effect setting process 3 (S4251). This variable effect setting process 3 (S4251) is a process executed in place of the variable effect setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 456, S4204), and is the process executed in place of the variable effect setting process 3 in the third control example (see FIG. 534). , S3154).

Of the variable effect setting process 3 (S4251) in this third control example, each process in S4301 to S4313 is the same as each process in S4301 to S4313 in the variable effect setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 456, S4204). The same processing is performed.

In the variable effect setting process 3 (S4251) in the third control example, after executing the processes of S4310 and S4313, the process moves to the process of S4351.

In the process of S4351, image points corresponding to the set mode are extracted based on the image point table 222ba (S4351), and the number of points extracted from the image point table 222ba is stored in the image point number storage area 223ba (S4352). , and then ends this process.

Next, the image point setting process (S4252) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 536. FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing this image point setting process (S4252). This image point setting process (S4252) is executed in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 534, S3154) in the third control example.

When the image point setting process (S4252) in the third control example is started, first, it is determined whether the return flag 223bc is on (S4371). If it is determined that the return flag 223bc is on (S4371: Yes), the return flag 223bc is set to off (S4372), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the return flag 223bc is off (S4371: No), then it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a winning fluctuation (S4373). If it is determined that the current variation is a winning variation (S4373: Yes), the upper limit value is set to "12" (S4374), and the process proceeds to S4375. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current variation is not a winning variation (S4373: No), the upper limit value is set to "10" (S4376), and the process proceeds to S4375.

In the process of S4375, the set upper limit value is stored in the point upper limit value storage area 223bb (S4375), the maximum number of points that can be set during the current fluctuation is predicted (S4376), and the value of the predicted maximum number of points is the upper limit value. It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (S4377). If it is determined that the predicted maximum point number is larger than the upper limit value (S4377: Yes), the simple image creation flag 223bd is set to ON (S4378), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4377, if it is determined that the predicted maximum number of points is less than or equal to the upper limit value (S4377: No), this process is directly ended.

<About the control process of the display control device in the third control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 537 to 542. Hereinafter, the same control processes as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 537, command determination processing 3 (S8352) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 537 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 3 (S8352). This command determination process 3 (S8352) is a process executed in place of the command determination process in the first control example (see S8302 in FIG. 463).

Of the command determination processing 3 (S8352) in this third control example, each of the processing in S8401 to S8403, S8404, S8406 to S8411, and S8416 to S8420 is the command determination processing in the first control example (see FIG. 463, S8302). The same processes as S8401 to S8403, S8404, S8406 to S8411, and S8416 to S8420 are executed.

In command determination processing 3 (S8352) in the third control example, after executing the process of S8403, it is determined whether or not there is a simple image creation command among the unprocessed commands (S8451). If it is determined that there is a simple image creation command (S8451: Yes), the simple image creation process is executed (S8452), and then the process returns to S8401. Note that details of this simple image creation process (S8452) will be described later with reference to FIG. 538.

On the other hand, in the process of S8451, if it is determined that there is no simple image creation command (S8451: No), then it is determined whether there is a simple display instruction command among the unprocessed commands (S8453). ). If it is determined that there is a simple display instruction command (S8453: Yes), image switching processing is executed (S8454), and then the process returns to S8401. Note that details of this image switching process (S8454) will be described later with reference to FIG. 539.

On the other hand, in the process of S8453, if it is determined that there is no simple instruction command for display (S8453: No), then it is determined whether there is a variable pattern command for display among the unprocessed commands ( S8404) If there is a display variation pattern command (S8404: Yes), variation pattern command processing 3 is executed (S8455), and then the process returns to S8401. The details of this variable pattern command processing 3 (S8455) will be described later with reference to FIG. 540.

In addition, in the process of S8418, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8418), and if it is determined that there is no error command (S8418: No), next, the unprocessed command is It is determined whether or not there is a volume-related command among the commands (S8456). If it is determined that there is a volume-related command (S8456: Yes), volume-related command processing is executed (S8457), and then the process returns to S8401. Note that details of this volume-related command processing (S8457) will be described later with reference to FIG. 541(b).

Further, in the process of S8456, if it is determined that there is no volume-related command among the unprocessed commands (S8456: No), the process moves to S8420.

Next, with reference to FIG. 538, the simple image creation process (S8452) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing this simple image creation process (S8452). This simple image creation process (S8452) is a process executed in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 537, S8352) in the third control example.

In the simple image creation process (S8452) in the third control example, first, image data corresponding to the command is read from the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 (S8471), and is stored in the low resolution data storage area 233ba. The information is read out (S8472), and then it is determined whether or not the current image data has been reduced in resolution (S8473). If it is determined that the current image data has not been reduced in resolution (S8473: No), low resolution processing is executed on the read image data to create low resolution image data (S8474), and the low resolution image data is The data stored in the storage area 233ba is shifted to the execution area of the low resolution data storage area 233ba (S8476), and the currently created low resolution image data is transferred from the low resolution data storage area 233ba to the low resolution data storage area 233ba. It is stored in a free area (S8477), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S8473, if it is determined that the resolution of the current image data has been lowered (S8473: Yes), the processes of S8474 to S8477 are skipped, and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 539, the image switching process (S8454) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing this image switching process (S8454). This image switching process (S8454) is a process executed in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 537, S8352) in the third control example.

In the image switching process (S8454) in the third control example, first, information stored in the low resolution data storage area 233ba is read out (S8491), and it is determined whether or not the image data to be switched has already been reduced in resolution. It is determined (S8492). If it is determined that the image data to be switched has not been reduced in resolution (S8492: No), the image data to be switched is read from the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 (S8493), and the read image is Perform low resolution processing on the data to create low resolution image data (S8494), shift the data in the low resolution data storage area 233ba to the execution area of the low resolution data storage area 233ba (S8495), and The low resolution image data is stored in an empty area of the low resolution data storage area 233ba (S8496), and the process moves to S8497.

On the other hand, in the process of S8492, if it is determined that the image data to be switched has already been reduced in resolution (S8492: Yes), the process of S8493 to S8496 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S8497.

In the process of S8497, the target and period for displaying the low resolution image are stored in the image switching information storage area 233bb (S8497), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 540, variable pattern command processing 3 (S8455) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing this variable pattern command processing 3 (S8455). This variation pattern command processing 3 (S8455) is a process executed in the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 537, S8352) in the third control example, and the variation pattern command processing 3 (FIG. 464, S8405) in the first control example. This is the process that is executed in place of (see).

Of the variable pattern command processing 3 (S8455) in this third control example, each process in S8502 to S8506 is different from each process in S8502 to S8506 in the variable pattern command process in the first control example (see FIGS. 464 and S8405). The same processing is performed.

In the variation pattern command processing 3 (S8455) in the third control example, first, instead of the processing in S8501, a variation effect pattern indicated by a display variation pattern command and information stored in the image switching information storage area 233bb A variable display data table corresponding to is determined, the determined variable display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8551), and the process moves to S8502.

Next, warning image setting process 3 (S9354) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 541(a). FIG. 541(a) is a flowchart showing this warning image setting process 3 (S9354). This warning image setting process 3 (S9354) is a process executed in place of the warning image setting process in the first control example (see S9304 in FIG. 470(a)).

Of the warning image setting process 3 (S9354) in this third control example, each process in S9402 is the same as each process in S9402 in the warning image setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 470(a), S9304). processing is executed.

In the warning image setting process 3 (S9354) in the third control example, first, instead of the process in S9401, the error determination flag and the information stored in the image switching information storage area 233bb are referred to and turned on. Warning image data for displaying error warning images corresponding to all the error discrimination flags on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S9451), and the process moves to S9402.

Next, with reference to FIG. 541(b), volume-related command processing 3 (S8457) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 541(b) is a flowchart showing this volume-related command processing (S8457). This volume-related command process 3 (S8457) is a process executed in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 537, S8352) in the third control example.

In volume-related command processing 3 (S8457) in the third control example, volume image data is first set (developed) based on the type of the received volume-related command and the information stored in the image switching information storage area 233bb. ) is performed (S8591). After that, this process ends. With this configuration, when a volume adjustment image is set to be displayed and a low resolution display is set, the display can be set and displayed at a low resolution.

Next, with reference to FIG. 542, normal image transfer setting processing 3 (S9653) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process 3 (S9653). This normal image transfer setting process 3 (S9653) is a process executed in place of the normal image transfer setting process in the first control example (see S9603 in FIG. 472).

Of the normal image transfer setting process 3 (S9653) in this third control example, each process of S9801 to S9810 and S9812 to S9815 corresponds to S9801 of the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472, S9603) in the first control example. The same processes as those from S9810 to S9812 to S9815 are executed.

In normal image transfer setting processing 3 (S9653) in the third control example, after executing the process of S9810, instead of performing the process of S9811, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back side that is in the on state is The image data of the back image corresponding to the image discrimination flag and the information stored in the image switching information storage area 233bb is specified, the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S9851), and the process proceeds to S9812. Transition.

In this way, in this third control example, when the variable display of the third symbol is set, it is determined whether the display data exceeds the upper limit based on the variable pattern, the background image, the contents of the selected notice mode, etc. When the resolution is to be exceeded, the image converted to a lower resolution is easily prepared, and at the timing when the resolution is exceeded, an image corresponding to the exceeded resolution is displayed at a lower resolution, thereby reducing the control load in display control.

Note that in this embodiment, the process of converting to a low resolution is performed at the start of the fluctuation, but the configuration is such that the resolution can be set when setting it in the display data table, and the resolution is converted at the display timing. It may also be configured to be displayed.

Furthermore, although we have set the upper limit value in the case of a hit higher than in the case of a miss, the upper limit value is not limited to this, but can be set smaller in the case of a win than in the case of a miss, so that the upper limit value can be set smaller in the case of a win than in the case of a miss. It may be configured to increase expectations. Furthermore, if the result of the judgment is a win, it is set so that low-resolution display is not displayed, and the configuration is configured so that problems such as processing failures can easily occur, thereby reducing the expectation of winning. It may be configured to set the performance to be high.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example in the present pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 543 to 549. In contrast to the first control example, in the fourth control example, the display mode in the variation pattern is displayed by combining (overlapping) image data with a shifted focus, image data with black and white inverted, etc. The main difference is that a virtual presentation (hereinafter referred to as "virtual presentation") is executed that gives the illusion that a specific image is displayed on the front side (or back side) of the third symbol display device 81. . Only the points that are different from the first control example will be explained, and illustrations and explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Conventionally, when displaying something on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, it has been displayed by moving a movable accessory placed in advance to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, or by using a light guide plate. It was necessary to set the display and then irradiate the light guide plate with light to display the display.

In addition, when displaying something on the back side of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 is a transmissive liquid crystal display or an organic EL panel, and the transmittance of the third symbol display device 81 is There was a method to make the accessories and liquid crystal panel installed on the back side visible by changing the screen (or by adopting a display device with high transmittance).

However, in such a method, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, it is necessary to arrange a light guide plate and a movable accessory on the front side or the back side thereof, and there is a problem that the mounting space is compressed. .

<About the production content in the pachinko machine in the fourth control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 543 to 548, an example of the display contents of the above-mentioned virtual presentation will be explained. Figure 543(a) is a diagram showing the layer structure of image data used in virtual production, and Figures 543(b) to (e) are examples of image data set in each image layer. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 543(a), the layer structure of the image data used in the virtual presentation has a total of four layers: a first image layer 2300a, a second image layer 2300b, a third image layer 2300c, and a fourth image layer 2300d. It has become. Image data is set for each image layer, and by switching display/non-display of each image layer, it is possible to display an image in which a plurality of images are superimposed (combined). By superimposing the images and switching the images, it is possible to create an illusion that the image of a specific image layer is displayed on the front side (or back side) of the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, a background A image (FIG. 543(b)), which is a background image in mountain mode, is set in the first image layer 2300a. A background B image (FIG. 543(c)), which is an out-of-focus background image in mountain mode, is set in the second image layer 2300b. An inverted image (FIG. 543(d)) obtained by performing black-and-white inversion processing on an image imitating an accessory in a treasure chest (accessory object image) is set in the third image layer 2300c. An image imitating a treasure box accessory (accessory object image) (FIG. 543(e)) is set in the fourth image layer 2300d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 544, a method of combining and switching image data of each image layer 2300a to 2300d will be described.

The image data of each image layer is set based on the virtual presentation display data table shown in FIG. 544. The display data table for virtual presentation defines a drawing list corresponding to an address.

The display control device 114 updates the address (adds 1) every 20 milliseconds, and sets the image data of each image layer according to the drawing list corresponding to the updated address.

Specifically, the background A is first displayed using the drawing list A, and then the focus is shifted from the background A to the background B using the drawing list B.

In this way, while the in-focus background A is displayed, the player's focus can be shifted by superimposing the out-of-focus background B, which is the same image, on top of the other. At this time, by gradually displaying the image of background B that is out of focus (gradually increasing the contrast and sharpness), it is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by the sudden image change, and the player This can make it difficult to recognize that the focus has shifted.

Note that in this control example, the in-focus background A and the out-of-focus background B are prepared separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that only the background A that is in focus is prepared and the background B is generated by performing image processing on the background A. In this case, as in the third control example, the process for generating the background B may be started when the fluctuation pattern of the virtual effect is notified from the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the image data capacity of the background image can be saved.

Next, since the drawing list C and the drawing list D are stipulated alternately, the background B display and the inverted image display are performed alternately. That is, the display and non-display of the reversed image are performed alternately, and the reversed image is displayed blinking.

When the inverted image is displayed blinking while the player's focus is out of focus, it is possible to give the illusion that the inverted image is displayed on the near side of the third symbol display device 81. By using this illusion, a three-dimensional effect (with a sense of depth) can be provided without providing a light guide plate or the like on the front side of the third symbol display device 81.

Finally, the accessory image is displayed according to the drawing list D, and the virtual presentation ends. At this time, the player is under the illusion that the black and white inverted accessory image is being displayed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, so by displaying the normal accessory image, the third symbol It is possible to create an illusion as if the accessory appeared on the back side of the display device 81.

As a result, without changing the transmittance of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to perform an effect as if the accessory appeared on the back side of the third symbol display device, and to create a three-dimensional (depth We can provide a (feeling) performance.

FIG. 545 is a diagram showing the contents of drawing list A in detail.

In the drawing list A, image data for displaying only the background A is defined.

FIG. 546 is a diagram showing the contents of drawing list B in detail.

In the drawing list B, image data for gradually displaying the background B in addition to the background A is defined.

FIG. 547(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the first to fourth image layers in the drawing list A.

Specifically, in drawing list A, only the background A image is displayed, so only the first image layer 2300a to which the background A image is set is displayed, and the other second image layer 2300b to fourth image layer 2300d are displayed. It is set to be hidden.

FIG. 547(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the first to fourth image layers in the drawing list B.

Specifically, in drawing list B, in order to gradually display the background B image in addition to the background A image, the first image layer 2300a where the background A image is set is displayed, and the background B image is set. The second image layer 2300b is set to be gradually displayed. Gradually displaying the image of the second image layer 2300b is achieved by gradually increasing the contrast and sharpness values for the second image layer.

FIG. 548(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the first to fourth image layers when the drawing lists C and D are displayed alternately.

Specifically, when displaying the drawing lists C and D alternately (that is, displaying the back B image and the reversed image alternately), the first image layer 2300a and the fourth image layer 2400d are hidden, and the back This is achieved by alternately switching the display of the second image layer 2300b where the B image is set and the display of the third image layer 2300c where the inverted image is set.

FIG. 548(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the first to fourth image layers in the drawing list E.

Specifically, in the drawing list E, in order to display only the accessory images, only the fourth image layer 2300d in which the image data of the accessory images is set is displayed, and the first image layer 2300a to the third image layer 2300c is set to be hidden.

In addition, although the above control example was explained using a total of four image layers, it is not limited to this, and three or less image layers may be used, or five or more image layers may be used. You can.

Further, image layers may be set individually depending on the image type. For example, it is possible to prepare two image layers for back images, three image layers for effect images, and display a combination of the back image and the effect image.

Further, although the configuration is such that the back B image and the inverted image are displayed alternately, the inverted image may be displayed when the player's focus is out of focus, and the invention is not limited to this. The inverted images may be alternately displayed (blinking display) while the images are being displayed. Furthermore, it is also possible to measure whether the player's focus is out of focus using a camera or the like, and vary the timing of alternate display (blinking display) depending on the measurement result. It goes without saying that the images to be alternately displayed (blinking) may be accessory images instead of inverted images.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 549. This fourth control example differs from the third control example described above in that a simple image creation command corresponding to virtual presentation can be set, and is otherwise the same. Hereinafter, the same control processes as those in the third control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 549, the variable display setting process 4 (S3174) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 549 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process 4 (S3174). This variable display setting process 4 (S3174) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 534, S3154) in the third control example.

Of the variable display setting process 4 (S3174) in this fourth control example, each process of S4201 to S4203, S4251 to S4252, and S4205 to S4211 is performed in the variable display setting process 3 in the third control example (see FIG. 534, S3154). ) are executed.

In the variable display setting process 4 (S3174) in the fourth control example, after executing the process of S4252, it is determined whether there is a virtual effect setting (S4271). If it is determined that there is a virtual effect setting (S4271: Yes), a simple image creation command corresponding to the virtual effect is set (S4272), and the process moves to S4205. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no virtual effect setting (S4271: No), the process of S4272 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4205.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 550 to 566. In the first control example described above, when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 640a operates to open, and the state changes from a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry opening 640 to a state in which it is easy to enter the ball. This makes it easier to draw the second special symbol, which is more advantageous to the player, than to draw the first special symbol. In addition, there are variable probability states (high probability states for special symbols, high probability states for normal symbols), and time saving states (low probability states for special symbols, high probability states for normal symbols) as gaming states. ) is set, the electric accessory 640a becomes easier to open, and the configuration is such that a large number of second special symbols can be drawn. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by setting the high probability state of the normal symbols, it becomes easier to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, so that it is possible to provide an advantageous state to the player. However, there was a problem in that the game executed when the high probability state of normal symbols was set became monotonous and the player got bored with it.

On the other hand, in this fifth control example, if the ball enters the special ball entry hole that makes it easier for the ball to enter if it wins in the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery trigger or It is configured so that the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol is established. In other words, the configuration is such that when a winning lottery is won using a normal symbol, a lottery opportunity for one of a plurality of special symbol types is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which type of special symbol the lottery opportunity will be established when a high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

In addition, the fifth control example is configured to vary the type of special symbol for which a lottery opportunity is established based on the number of balls that enter the special ball entrance. This makes it possible to vary the type of special symbol that triggers a lottery depending on the number of balls that the player enters into the special ball opening. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new game feature in which the player is made to think about how many balls to enter into the special winning slot when winning a lottery with normal symbols.

First, with reference to FIG. 550, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 550 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game board 13 of the fifth control example. This fifth control example differs greatly from the first control example described above in that a prize distribution device 10700 is provided in the right side area of the game board 13. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the configuration of prize distribution device 10700 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 551 and 552. FIG. 551 is an enlarged view showing the configuration of the prize distribution device 10700, and FIG. 552 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of balls within the prize distribution device 10700.

A special through gate 10067 is provided in the right side area of the game board 13, and when the ball passes through the special through gate 10067, a normal symbol lottery is executed. If the player wins in the normal symbol lottery, the special electric accessory 10701a is released. The special through gate 10067 is controlled by the same control processing content as the through gate 67 of the first control example described above, and the special electric accessory 10701a is the same as the electric accessory 640a of the first control example described above. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the special electric accessory 10701a is in the open state, the ball fired by the right-handed game and flowing down the right area enters the special winning hole 10730. The ball that has entered the special winning port 10730 passes through the operating flow path passage sensor 10701, and depending on the position of the switching valve 10702, the ball enters either the first flow path having the first operating port 10703a or the second operating port 10703b. It is divided into crabs.

In this control example, the number of balls won in the special winning hole 10730 is measured during the period from when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set until the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the switch is made based on the measurement result. It is configured to operate valve 10702. Specifically, the number of winning balls into the special winning hole 10730 after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is measured based on the detection result of the operating flow path passage sensor 10701, and the game per normal symbol (special electric winning The configuration is such that the position of the switching valve 10702 is switched based on the measurement result at the end timing of the winning game in which the object 10701a is opened.

This switching valve 10702 is configured to operate at the end timing of the winning game (winning game that opens the special electric accessory 10701a), so when the ball is present in the special prize opening 10730. It never works. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the switching valve 10702 from coming into contact with the switching valve 10702 during operation, thereby preventing the switching valve 10702 from malfunctioning or from clogging the ball. Further, a solenoid is used to operate the switching valve 10702, and when power is not supplied to the solenoid, the ball is distributed to a flow path that is disadvantageous to the player.

The first operating port 10703a is mechanically connected to the lower first ball entry port 10640b1, and is physically (mechanically) attached to the lower first ball entry port 10640b1 by the ball that enters the first operating port 10703a. The first actuating accessory is configured to be in the open state (the state shown by the dotted line in FIG. 551). Similarly, the second operating port 10703b is mechanically connected to the upper second ball entry port 10640a, and the ball entering the second operating port 10703b physically (mechanically) causes the upper second ball entry port 10640a1 to The second actuating accessory attached to the controller is configured to be in the open state (the state shown by the dotted line in FIG. 551).

Among the balls flowing down the right side area, the balls that did not enter the special prize opening 10730 pass through each accessory in the order of the second action accessory 10640a and the first action accessory 10640a while flowing down the meandering channel. For example, when the second actuating accessory 10640a is in the open state, the ball enters the upper second ball entry port 10640a1, and when the first actuating accessory 10640b is in the open state, the ball enters the upper second ball entry port 10640a1. is configured so that the ball enters the lower first ball entry port 10640b1. In addition, when the second operating accessory 10640a and the first operating accessory 10640b are both in the open state, a ball is provided in the right side area so that the falling ball preferentially enters the upper second ball entry port 10640a1. The second operating accessory 10640a is configured to operate so as to close the meandering flow path.

The second actuating accessory 10640a described above mechanically operates when a predetermined number (2) of balls enter the upper second ball entry port 10640a1, and an actuating part (not shown) comes into contact with the entered ball. The structure is such that it shifts to the closed state (the state shown by the solid line in FIG. 551). In addition, the first operating accessory 10640a also mechanically shifts to the closed state (the state shown by the solid line in FIG. 551) when a predetermined number (2) of balls enter the lower first ball entrance 10640b1. It is configured to do so.

<About the production content in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 553 and 554, the characteristic effects executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 553(a) shows an example of a display screen displayed during a normal drawing. In this control example, the switching valve 10702 is configured to operate according to the number of balls that entered the special winning hole 10730 during the winning of the ordinary drawing, and the position of the switching valve 10702 at the time when the winning of the ordinary drawing was started. Accordingly, the type of actuation port that will win the prize in this common drawing is determined. In FIG. 553(a), the number of winning balls in the special winning hole 10730 that is necessary for the ball to be able to win in the operating hole (second operating hole 10703b) advantageous to the player in the next normal pattern is displayed. be done.

By executing such a display, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game during the normal winning game. Furthermore, if the ball is currently in a state where it is possible to win a prize in the operating port (second operating port 10703b) that is advantageous to the player in the next normal ticket, the display shown in FIG. 553(b) is executed. As a result, the player can easily maintain a state in which the ball can land in the operating port (second operating port 10703b) which is advantageous to the player by winning too many balls during the normal winning pattern.

In this control example, there are multiple drive scenarios that are referred to when switching the position of the switching valve 10702 according to the number of balls entering the special winning hole 10730, and the time saving state is set according to the type of jackpot. It is configured so that different driving scenarios are set. In these multiple drive scenarios, the number of balls entering the special winning hole 10730 and the drive content of the switching valve 10702 are stipulated to be different. For example, the number of balls entering the special winning hole 10730 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). A driving scenario is defined in which the position of the switching valve 10702 is changed every time the ball reaches a specific number (for example, 100 balls) that is larger than a predetermined number. Furthermore, drive scenarios that make it easy to maintain a state in which the ball enters the operating port (second operating port 10703b) that is advantageous to the player, and drive scenarios that are difficult to maintain are defined.

Among these, if a drive scenario in which the position of the switching valve 10702 changes minutely is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 554(a) is displayed. In FIG. 554(a), the remaining number of times in the time saving state, the number of variations of the first special symbol executed during the time saving, and the number of variations of the second special symbol are displayed. On the other hand, if a driving scenario is set that makes it easy for the ball to enter the operating port (second operating port 10703b) that is advantageous to the player, as shown in FIG. The text "Super Temple Search Mode" is displayed, which is a notification mode to notify that the driving scenario has been set, and also indicates an advantageous state for the player (remaining number of balls entered into the special prize opening 10730). A suggested remaining number suggestion mode 804a is displayed.

FIG. 557(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 557(a), in this fifth control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, when a winning is won in the lottery with normal symbols, this is referred to when selecting the winning type. a normal symbol winning type selection table 202da, and a driving scenario selection table 202db for selecting a driving scenario of the changeover valve 10702, which is variable probability or time saving, based on the won jackpot type when the special symbol jackpot ends. The difference lies in the additions. Other elements are the same, and detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

The normal pattern winning type selection table 202da is a table that is referred to when selecting the winning type (hereinafter referred to as the normal pattern winning type) when a winning result is won in the normal pattern lottery. The opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a is determined based on the type and gaming state. The detailed contents of the ordinary figure type selection table 202da will be described later with reference to FIG. 558(a).

The drive scenario selection table 202db is a table that defines the drive contents of the drive solenoid based on the winning jackpot type. The driving scenario selection table 202db is referred to when the jackpot ends, selects a driving scenario based on the jackpot type won this time (S1371 in FIG. 564), and stores the selected driving scenario in the driving scenario storage area 203da (S1372 in FIG. 564). reference). Then, the drive scenario of the drive member is determined based on the drive scenario stored at the end timing per attached figure. The detailed contents of the driving scenario selection table 202db will be described later with reference to FIG. 559(b).

Next, with reference to FIG. 557(b), the contents of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM203 which MPU201 of the main control device 110 has in this 5th control example. This fifth control example is different from the contents of the RAM 203 in the first control example described above in that a driving scenario storage area 203da, a winning number counter 203db for winning ordinary symbols and a winning flag 203dc for ordinary symbols are added. Other elements are the same, and detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

The drive scenario storage area 203da is an area for storing and memorizing a drive scenario set based on the winning jackpot type. This drive scenario storage area 203da stores a drive scenario set based on the type of jackpot won during the jackpot end process (see S1372 in FIG. 564), and refers to the stored drive scenario at the end timing of the normal symbol win. The operation details of the driving member are set (see S1612 in FIG. 563).

The regular winning number counter 203db is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 10730, and the drive content of the drive member is determined based on the scenario type set as the regular winning winning number counter 203db. is determined. The value of the normal symbol winning number counter 203db is incremented by 1 when the normal symbol wins and the game ball enters the special winning hole 10730 (see S1616 in FIG. 563). Then, at the end timing of the winning of the normal symbol, the value is read out (see S1610 in FIG. 563), and the drive content of the drive member is set based on the read value and the set drive scenario (see S1610 in FIG. 563). (See S1613). Then, the value is reset at the end timing of the jackpot (see S1374 in FIG. 564).

The ordinary symbol winning flag 203dc is a flag for indicating that the ordinary symbol has been won. This normal symbol hit flag 203dc is set to ON when it is determined that the normal symbol has won in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 561) (see FIG. 561), and is set to ON in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 561). ), and if the normal figure hit flag 203dc is on, the normal figure hit flag 203dc is set to OFF (see S1602 in FIG. 563), and a status command indicating the normal figure hit is set. The normal symbol hit command set here is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process (see S1001 in FIG. 562), which will be described later, and based on this command, the process related to the normal symbol hit is executed. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 558(a), the contents of the ordinary figure type selection table 202da will be explained. FIG. 558(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ordinary figure type selection table 202da. As shown in FIG. 558(a), the normal symbol winning type selection table 202da is referred to when selecting the winning type (hereinafter referred to as the common symbol winning type) when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery. This is a table that determines the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a based on the determined normal figure winning type and gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 558(a), in this control example, when a lottery with a normal symbol is won, the types of winning symbols are "A", "B", and "C". It is configured so that three types can be set. Then, the opening operation of the special electric accessory is determined based on the set winning type and the gaming state at the time of winning (see FIG. 558(b)). That is, since the opening operation of the special electric accessory is determined according to the type per ordinary figure, the ease with which the ball enters the first operating port 10703a or the second operating opening 10703b depends on the type per normal figure. It is configured differently depending on the

Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, and the value of the acquired per-regular symbol type counter C8 is "0", "A per ordinary symbol" is specified. has been done. When the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, among the 100 counter values that the per-regular symbol type counter C8 can take, there is only one counter value that is "A per ordinary symbol", so The gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, and when a winning result occurs in the lottery of normal symbols, the rate at which "A per normal symbol" is determined is 1% (1/100).

In addition, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, "B per common symbol" is defined for the value of the obtained per common symbol type counter C8 in the range of "1 to 98". There is. When the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, out of the 100 counter values that the per-regular symbol type counter C8 can take, there are 98 counter values that are "B per ordinary symbol", so The gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, and when a winning result occurs in the lottery of normal symbols, the rate at which "normal symbol winning B" is determined is 98% (98/100).

Furthermore, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols and the value of the obtained per-regular symbol type counter C8 is "99", "C per regular symbol" is defined. . When the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, out of the 100 counter values that the per-regular symbol type counter C8 can take, there is only one counter value that is "C per ordinary symbol", so The gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, and when a winning result occurs in the lottery of normal symbols, the rate at which "C per common symbol" is determined is 1% (1/100).

As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Even if C) is won, short opening (0.2 seconds) is set as the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a. With this configuration, it is impossible to make the game ball enter the first operating port 10703a or the second operating port 10703b during the low probability state of the normal symbol, so if the game ball is hit to the right and the It is possible to prevent an irregular game method such as entering the ball into the upper second ball entry port 10640a1, which is the starting port for the lottery of two special symbols, and then returning to left-handed batting. Therefore, appropriate games can be provided.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is set to a high probability state (variable probability state or time saving state) with normal symbols, and the value of the acquired common symbol type counter C8 is "0 to 19", " "A per ordinary map" is stipulated. When the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variable state or time saving state), among the 100 counter values that the per-regular pattern type counter C8 can take, there are 20 counter values that are "A per regular pattern". Therefore, if the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variable state or time saving state) and a winning result is achieved in the normal symbol lottery, the percentage of "A per normal symbol" being determined is 20% (20/100). It is.

In addition, when the gaming state is set to a high probability state (probability variable state or time saving state) with normal symbols, and the value of the acquired common symbol type counter C8 is "20 to 69", " "B per ordinary map" is stipulated. When the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variable state or time saving state) of normal symbols, the counter value that is "A per normal symbol" among the 100 counter values that the common symbol type counter C8 can take. Since there are 60 pieces, if the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variable state or time saving state) and a winning result is obtained in the drawing of normal symbols, the percentage of "B hit per normal symbol" is determined to be 60% (60%). /100).

Furthermore, when the gaming state is set to a high probability state (probability variable state or time saving state) with normal symbols, and the value of the acquired common symbol type counter C8 is "70 to 99", " "C per common map" is specified. When the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variable state or time saving state), among the 100 counter values that can be taken by the type counter C8 per ordinary figure, there are 20 counter values that become "C per ordinary figure". Therefore, if the gaming state is a high probability state (variable probability state or time saving state) and a winning result is obtained in the normal symbol lottery, the percentage of "C per common symbol" being determined is 20% (20/100). It is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 558(b), the contents of the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a based on the type of winning and the gaming state will be explained. FIG. 558(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a based on the type of common symbol and the gaming state. In this fifth control example, as described above, the game ball passes through the special through gate 10067, and the lottery of normal symbols is started. If the lottery of the normal symbol is won, the special electric accessory 10701a is opened for a specified period of time, and it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the first operating port 10703a or the second operating port 10703b. In this control example, the content of the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a is configured to be set based on the type of winning common symbol and the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 558(b), when the game state during the opening operation of the special electric accessory 10701a is a low probability state of normal symbols, all the common symbol types (per common symbol A, per common symbol In B and C) for ordinary figures, the opening operation content of the special electric accessory 10701a is set to "short opening". When this "short release" is set, the special electric accessory 10701a is set in an open state for 0.2 seconds (a state in which the game ball can enter the special winning hole 10730), and the game ball enters the special winning hole 10730. It is configured to close when one ball enters the special winning hole 10730 (a state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning hole 10730).

As mentioned above, the game balls are configured to be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and even if they continue to be fired to the right area of the game board during the low probability state of normal symbols, the ball will be released for 0.2 seconds. During the period, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the special winning hole 10730. In addition, if a game ball accidentally enters the special winning hole 10730, the special electric accessory 10701a is closed when one ball enters, so multiple game balls are allowed to enter the special winning hole 10730. That is impossible. Therefore, executing a right-handed game in which the game ball is fired into the right area of the game board in a low probability state of normal symbols becomes an inefficient game method for the player, as the number of balls he has continues to decrease. . Therefore, even in a state where the probability of normal symbols is low, it is possible to prevent an irregular gaming method from being carried out in which a second special symbol is drawn which is advantageous to the player, thereby making it an appropriate gaming method. The player can be prompted to do so. Furthermore, since the same opening action content is set for any winning type of winning symbol, it is possible to prevent the number of types of opening action content to be specified from increasing unnecessarily and the processing load from increasing.

In addition, in this control example, the opening operation period of the special electric accessory 10701a in the low probability state of the normal symbol is configured to be 0.2 seconds, but it is not limited to this, and may be 0.2 seconds or less. . Further, the driving amount of the special electric accessory 10701a may be set to a driving amount that does not allow the game ball to enter. With this configuration, it becomes more difficult to enter the game ball into the special winning hole 10730, and it is possible to prevent irregular games from being played.

Then, the type of winning ordinary symbol is "A per ordinary symbol", and when the gaming state is a high probability state of ordinary symbols, "Long A release" is defined as the opening operation content of the special electric accessory 10701a. ing. When this "long A release" is set, the special electric accessory 10701a is in an open state for 5 seconds (a state in which the game ball can enter the special winning hole 10730), and during the opening operation, the game ball enters the special winning hole. When 10 balls enter the opening 10730, the game enters a closed state (a state in which game balls cannot enter the special winning opening 10730).

In addition, in the case of the high probability state of the normal symbol, the opening operation period of the special electric accessory 10701a is set to be the longest for the "normal symbol win A" than for winning in other common symbol winning types. Therefore, the game ball is the type of normal figure that is most likely to enter the special winning hole 10730. In addition, as described above, in this control example, the number of game balls won into the special winning opening 10730 is counted, and based on the counted number (value of the regular winning number counter 203db), the driving scenario of the switching valve 10702 is is determined. In other words, "Normal symbol hit A" is the winning type of the normal symbol that is most likely to make the game ball enter the special winning opening, and it is based on the gaming situation (ease of entering the ball into the first operating opening, ease of entering the second operating opening, etc.). It is a type of ball hit that is easy to change (ease of entering the ball).

Therefore, the player can play during a period in which the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is likely to be executed (a state in which the switching valve 10702 is located above the first operating port 10703a and the ball can enter the second operating port 10703b). ), the player will play the game while hoping not to win the "A", but the first special symbol is likely to be drawn at a disadvantage for the player (switching). When the valve 10702 is located above the second operating port 10703b and the ball can enter the first operating port 10703a, the player wins "A" and the special winning port 10730 receives many games. The player plays the game while hoping that the ball will enter the ball and the switching valve 10702 will be driven. With this configuration, even when winning the same type of common symbol, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage depending on the gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, when the winning ordinary symbol type is “general symbol B” and the gaming state is a high probability state of ordinary symbols, “long B release” is defined as the opening operation content of the special electric accessory 10701a. ing. When this "long B release" is set, the special electric accessory 10701a is in an open state for 3 seconds (a state in which the game ball can enter the special prize opening 10730), and during the opening operation, the game ball enters the special prize. When 10 balls enter the opening 10730, the game enters a closed state (a state in which game balls cannot enter the special winning opening 10730). In addition, this "B" per common symbol is a type of common symbol that is selected at a rate of 60% when the gaming state is a high probability state of normal symbols, and is selected more than other types of common symbols. A high percentage of

Furthermore, when the winning ordinary symbol per type is "ordinary symbol C" and the gaming state is a high probability state of ordinary symbols, "long A release" is defined as the opening operation content of the special electric accessory 10701a. ing. When this "Long C release" is set, the special electric accessory 10701a is in an open state for 51.5 seconds (a state in which the game ball can enter the special winning hole 10730), and during the opening operation, the game ball When 10 balls enter the special winning hole 10730, it becomes a closed state (a state in which game balls cannot enter the special winning hole 10730).

In addition, in the case of the high probability state of the normal symbol, if this "normal symbol winning C" is won, the opening operation period of the special electric accessory 10701a is set to be the shortest compared to other common symbol winning types. ing. Therefore, in the high probability state of normal symbols, it is the normal symbol winning type that makes it most difficult for the game ball to enter the special winning hole 10730. Therefore, "normal symbol winning C" is a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player is likely to be executed (the switching valve 10702 is located above the second operating port 10703b, and the game ball is located above the first operating port). 10703a (in a state where the ball can be entered), the normal symbol winning type is the most disadvantageous to the player, but during the period when the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is likely to be executed ( When the switching valve 10702 is located above the first operating port 10703a and the ball can enter the second operating port 10703b), this type of winning is advantageous for the player.

As explained above, this control example is configured to be able to execute a game per normal figure in which the opening time and the number of entering balls serving as the end condition are different depending on the type of per normal figure. Therefore, it is possible to vary the number of balls that can enter the special winning hole 10730 in one game per normal figure. As a result, it is possible to randomize the number of balls that enter the special winning hole 10730 during a game with a common symbol, allowing the player to enter the ball into any operation port for the next common symbol. It can make it difficult to understand.

In addition, in this control example, even if the number of balls entering the special winning hole 10730 reaches the number of balls that indicates that the set drive scenario switches the position of the switching valve 10702, the game per normal symbol ends. Until then, the switching valve 10702 is configured not to operate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of balls entering the current special winning hole 10730 from being accurately grasped.

Next, the contents of the driving scenario selection table 202db will be explained with reference to FIG. 559(a). FIG. 559(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the driving scenario selection table 202db. This drive scenario selection table 202db is referred to at the end of the jackpot game (see S1371 in FIG. 564), and the drive scenario of the drive solenoid in the variable probability or time saving state is defined based on the type of jackpot won. The switching valve 10702 is configured to move based on the content specified in this drive scenario.

As shown in FIG. 559(a), when the winning jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot D, "scenario A" is defined as the driving scenario type. When the type of jackpot won is Jackpot C, "Scenario B" is defined as the driving scenario, and when it is Jackpot E, "Scenario C" is defined as the driving scenario.

<About the control process of the main controller in the fifth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 561 to 564. Note that the same control processing as in the first control example described above is given the same reference numeral, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 561. FIG. 561 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing 5 (S106). This normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) is a process that is executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430, S106) in the first control example.

Of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (S106) in this fifth control example, each of the processing in S601 to S611 and S612 to S619 is similar to the processing in S601 to S619 of the normal symbol variation processing in the first control example (see FIG. 430, S106). The same processes as those in S612 to S619 are then executed.

In the normal symbol variation process 5 (S106) in the fifth control example, in the process of S611, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S609 or S610 is a hit of the normal symbol (S611 :Yes), the type per ordinary figure is set using the type selection table 202da per ordinary figure (S651), and the process proceeds to S612.

In addition, in the process of S619, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol fluctuation process is changed to the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result). If it is determined that it is a hit (S619: Yes), an opening pattern is set according to the type of winning pattern and the gaming state (S652), the winning flag 203dc is set to ON (S653), and then this process is performed. end.

Next, main processing 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 562. FIG. 562 is a flowchart showing this main processing 5. This main process 5 is a process executed in place of the main process in the first control example (see FIG. 434).

Of the main processing 5 in this fifth control example, each processing of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1015 is the same as each processing of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1015 of the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 434). processing is executed.

In the main process 5 in the fifth control example, after executing the process in S1004, a normal figure hit control process is executed in place of the process in S1005 (S1071), and the process moves to the process in S1006. In addition, the details of this normal figure hit control process (S1071) will be described later with reference to FIG. 563.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 563, the normal figure control process (S1071) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 563 is a flowchart showing this normal figure hit control process (S1071). This normal pattern hit control process (S1071) is a process executed in main process 5 (see FIG. 562) in the fifth control example.

When the ordinary figure hit control process (S1071) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary figure hit flag 203dc is on (S1601). If it is determined that the normal map hit flag 203dc is on (S1601: Yes), the normal map hit flag 203dc is set to OFF (S1602), a status command indicating the normal map hit is set (S1603), and this process end.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that the normal symbol hit flag 203dc is off (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is currently being won (S1604). In the process of S1604, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not currently being won (S1604: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1604, if it is determined that the current normal symbol is hitting (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the electric accessory operation (S1605).

In the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the operation of the electric accessory (S1605: Yes), the electric accessory 640a is released (S1606), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the electric accessory operation (S1605: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to end the electric accessory operation (S1607). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the operation of the electric accessory (S1607: Yes), the electric accessory 640a is closed (S1608), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the electric accessory motion (S1607: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing for the ordinary figure (S1609). Here, the end timing per ordinary figure indicates the case where the operating period of the electric accessory 640a has elapsed. In the process of S1609, if it is determined that it is the end timing for the normal drawing (S1609: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203db for the common drawing is read (S1610), and the driving scenario stored in the driving scenario storage area 203da is read. (S1611), and based on the read value of the winning number counter 203db and the drive scenario, the operation content of the drive member is set (S1612), and the drive solenoid operation corresponding to the set operation content is executed. (S1613), sets a status command indicating the end of winning a normal figure (S1614), and then ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1609, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the normal winning pattern (S1609: No), it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the special winning slot (S1615). If it is determined that there is no prize in the special winning hole (S1615: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a prize in the special winning slot (S1615: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the number of winnings in the common winnings counter 203db (S1616), and the added value of the number of winnings in the winnings of the common winnings counter 203db is indicated. A winning number command is set (S1617), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 564, the jackpot end process 5 (S1170) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 564 is a flowchart showing this jackpot ending process 5 (S1170). This jackpot ending process 5 (S1170) is a process that is executed in place of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 437, S1110) in the first control example.

Of the jackpot ending process 5 (S1170) in this fifth control example, each process in S1301 to S1305 is the same as each process in S1301 to S1305 in the jackpot ending process in the first control example (see FIG. 437, S1110). Processing is executed.

In the jackpot end process 5 (S1170) in the fifth control example, after executing the process of S1303, a drive scenario is selected with reference to the drive scenario selection table 202db based on the won jackpot type (S1371).

The driving scenario selected in the process of S1371 is stored in the driving scenario storage area 203da (S1372), a driving scenario command including information indicating the selected driving scenario is set (S1373), and the value of the winning number counter 203db is set to 0. (S1374).

Next, a winning number command indicating that the value of the common figure winning number counter 203db is 0 is set (S1375), the drive solenoid is set to OFF (S1376), and the process moves to S1304.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 565 and 566. Hereinafter, the same control processes as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, command determination processing 5 (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 565. FIG. 565 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 5 (S3114). This command determination process 5 (S3114) is a process executed in place of the command determination process in the first control example (see S3114 in FIG. 451).

Of the command determination process 5 (S3114) in this fifth control example, each process in S3901 to S3914 is the same as each process in S3901 to S3914 in the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 451, S3114). Processing is executed.

In the command determination process 5 (S3114) in the fifth control example, if it is determined in the process of S3913 that a command related to winning has not been received from the main controller 110 (S3913: No), the command from the main controller 110 It is determined whether or not a command related to winning a common map has been received (S3951). If it is determined that a command related to winning a common figure has been received from the main control device 110 (S3951: Yes), a process related to winning a common figure is executed (S3952), and then this process ends. Further, if it is determined that a command related to winning a common symbol has not been received from the main control device 110 (S3951: No), this process is directly ended. The details of this winning-related process (S3952) will be described later with reference to FIG. 566.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 566, the winning-related process (S3952) per common symbol executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 566 is a flowchart showing the winning-related process (S3952). This ordinary figure winning related process (S3952) is a process executed in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 565, S3114) in the fifth control example.

In the common map winning related process (S3952), first, it is determined whether the received command is a driving scenario command (S5401). If it is determined that the received command is a drive scenario command (S5401: Yes), the drive scenario corresponding to the received drive command is stored in the drive scenario storage area 203da (S5402); A display command for showing the driving scenario is set (S5403), and the process moves to S5404. On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that the received command is not a driving scenario command (S5401: No), the processes of S5402 and S5403 are skipped, and the process moves to the process of S5404.

In the process of S5404, it is determined whether the received command is a winning number command (S5404). If it is determined that the received command is a winning number command (S5404: Yes), the winning number corresponding to the received winning number command is added to the value of the winning number counter 223db (S5405), and the A display command is set (S5406), the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area 203da is read (S5407), the content of the read drive scenario is compared with the value of the winning number counter 223db, and the drive solenoid is activated. The number of differences up to the number of winnings to be set to ON is calculated (S5408). The calculated difference number value is set in the difference number counter 223dc (S5409), a display command for indicating the difference number is set (S5410), and the process moves to S5411.

In the process of S5411, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reservation number is 4 (S5411). If it is determined that the value of the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not 4 (S5411: No), this process is ended as is. If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number is 4 (S5411: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the difference number is smaller than 5 (S5412). If it is determined that the value of the number of differences is 5 or more (S5412: No), the process is immediately ended. If it is determined that the value of the number of differences is smaller than 5 (S5412: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the number of differences is 0 (S5413). If it is determined that the value of the difference number is 0 (S5413: Yes), a display command for suppressing the ball launch is set (S5414), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5413, if it is determined that the value of the difference number is 1 or more (S5413: No), a display command to prompt the ball to be launched is set (S5415), and then this process ends. do.

<Sixth control example>
Next, the sixth control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 567 to 572. The fifth control example described above is configured to operate the switching valve 10702 according to the number of balls that entered the special winning hole 10730 during the period in which the time saving state is set. On the other hand, this control example differs in that it is configured to operate the switching valve 10702 based on the number of balls that entered the special winning hole 10730 during one game per normal figure, Other than that, they are the same.

In other words, in the fifth control example described above, since the switching valve 10702 is configured to operate according to the number of balls that enter the special winning hole 10730 during the period in which the time saving state is set, the special winning hole 10730 There was a problem in that by knowing the position of the switching valve 10702 in the player, the player could know which operation opening the ball will land in when the next game with a common symbol is executed.

On the other hand, in this sixth control example, as shown in FIGS. 567 to 570, a stopper is provided in the special winning opening 10730 that is released when the game ends when the normal symbol is won, and one ball can be stored in the stopper. Storage means are provided. A switching valve 10702, a first operating port 10703a, and a second operating port 10703b are provided in a region where one ball stored by the storage means can flow down when the stopper is released.

With this configuration, with the balls stored in the stopper, the switching valve 10702 is operated based on the number of balls won in the special prize opening 10730, and the game for winning the normal symbol is completed, and the stopper is released. The balls can be distributed according to the position of the switching valve 10702 at the time. In other words, the configuration is such that it is possible to enter a ball into any operating port during a single regular game.

In addition, since the switching valve 10702 is provided in the area where the ball cannot flow down due to the stopper, even if the switching valve 10702 is activated during a normal game, the ball will not collide with the operating switching valve 10702. , problems such as failure of the switching valve 10702 and clogging of the bulb can be suppressed.

<About the electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 571 and 572. In this sixth control example, in contrast to the fifth control example described above, the period for measuring the number of balls entering the special winning hole 10730 for operating the switching valve 10702 is changed to a short period when the time saving state continues. The difference is that one regular game is a gaming period. Based on this change, the content of the driving scenario has been changed. Furthermore, in order to have a range in the number of balls that can enter the special winning hole 10730 per single round, the end conditions for each round are set differently depending on the type of round. There is a difference.

As explained above, in this sixth control example, the lottery trigger of different special symbol types can be established according to the number of balls that enter the specific winning hole during one regular symbol game. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game every time the game is played with a common symbol.

Furthermore, in the fifth and sixth control examples described above, explanations have been made using the pachinko machine 10 that has a game feature that aims to win a jackpot by drawing special symbols, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, It can also be applied to a pachinko machine 10 that is provided with a variable ball entry means that opens when a small winning is won in a lottery, and configured to be able to execute a jackpot game when a ball passes through a specific area within the variable ball entry means. good.

In this case, for example, if the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol drawing (for example, 1/200) and the probability of winning a small winning in the second special symbol drawing (for example, 1/2) are significantly different. Furthermore, it is preferable that the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbols is set is a short period (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed twice). Thereby, the player can pay close attention to which special symbol lottery opportunity is established in the regular symbol game.

<Seventh control example>
Next, a seventh control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 573 to 638. FIG. 573 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, FIG. 574 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 575 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 573, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a frame 11 that is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 573), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 574) having a large number of nails, ball entry holes 64, 640, 67, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by the ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 584) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 573), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 573), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a. Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect, background, etc. displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 573), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 574) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50 and is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, a ball firing unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the operation, a push-button stop switch 51b that stops firing the ball while the button is pressed, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. (not shown) is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the ball, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

In this control example, the above-mentioned configuration is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the main controller 110 and other control devices may have a configuration in which the game ball is detected by the ball firing unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball firing unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that the player has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 574, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, and a It is constructed by assembling a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a variable prize winning device 65, a distribution member 660, a variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning hole 63, the first ball entrance hole 64, the second ball entrance hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is fixed from the front side of 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 573). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 574.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 573), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is a generally circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70 on the front side of the game board 13 (a starting hole etc. is provided, and a fired ball is (area flowing downstream). Furthermore, the gaming area includes all areas where the gaming balls that have passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flow down before passing through the out opening 66 and the winning opening.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 584) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (top left in FIG. 574) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 574) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated. Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn; 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery held for balls entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot or not, and it is also determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If so, the type of jackpot is also determined. When a special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the special winning slot 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 7 balls have won a prize). ) is released, and the release is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the type of jackpot. As a result, a large number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so a larger amount of prize balls than usual are paid out. There are six types of jackpots for special symbols: "Jackpot A" to "Jackpot F", and after the special game state ends, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, there will be a game bonus depending on the result of the jackpot game. value (gaming value) is given to the player. The three types of jackpots A to C are the types of jackpots that can be determined when a jackpot is won in a lottery that is executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The three types of jackpots D to F are jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won in a lottery that is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Hereinafter, for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, the special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 will be referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the lottery when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the first special symbol lottery. The special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the ball mouth 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating this will be stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the first symbol display device 37 is displaying a variable display, the number of ball entries is determined for each type of ball entry port. Each ball is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls remains for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the next special symbol will be drawn and the next special symbol will be drawn. , a variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery that is performed when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a determination is made as to whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. When a normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the first ball entry port 64 is opened. It will be released. Note that in normal times, the electric accessory 64a is disposed in the closed position, so the right side and the left side of the first ball entry opening 64 when viewed from the front are closed. Therefore, it is impossible (difficult) for balls rolling toward the first ball entrance 64 from the right side and left side in front view to enter the first ball entrance 64 because they are blocked by the electric accessories 64a. ). Therefore, in normal times, only the balls that have flowed down from vertically above the first ball entrance port 64 in the front view can enter the first ball entrance port 64. On the other hand, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64a is released, and the balls rolling toward the first ball entry port 64 from the right side and left side when viewed from the front enter the first ball entry port 64. It becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball, and as a result, it becomes easier to draw a special symbol.

In addition, when a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the second symbol display device 83 starts to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. If a ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67 while a variable display is being displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes will be suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls will be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. At the same time as being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display ends on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls remains for the normal ball entrance 67, the next normal symbol lottery is held, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. will be started.

As mentioned above, there are six types of special symbol jackpots: "Jackpot A" to "Jackpot F".

When "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot D" occur, a special game state in which the number of rounds is 16 (16 round jackpot) is established. On the other hand, when the number of rounds becomes "Jackpot B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5 rounds jackpot), when the number of rounds becomes "Jackpot C", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 2 rounds, and when the number of rounds becomes "Jackpot E", When the number of rounds becomes 7 rounds (7 rounds jackpot) and the state becomes "Jackpot F", the number of rounds becomes 6 rounds (6 rounds jackpot). Furthermore, if a specific condition is met during each of the above jackpot games (when the ball that enters the variable winning device 65 passes through the probability variable switch 65e3, which will be described later), the high probability state of the special symbol (special Transition to (during pattern change). In addition, when the high probability state of the special symbol is given, the probability of winning the normal symbol also increases (the time saving state of the normal symbol is given). The high probability state of special symbols and the time saving state of normal symbols continue from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. On the other hand, if the high probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the special symbol will be in the low probability state until the next jackpot, and the normal symbol will win. The probability will also be the normal probability (the normal state of the normal symbol).

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols has increased, so-called "high probability state of special symbols" (probability variable state of special symbols), in other words, a special gaming state. This is a state of play that can easily lead to a jackpot. On the other hand, a case where the special symbol is not in a "high probability state" is called a "special symbol low probability state", and this is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol's variable probability state, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is lower than the normal probability state. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbol). In addition, the "time saving state of normal symbols" (high probability state of normal symbols) refers to a game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbols increases and the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time saving state", it is called the "normal symbol normal state" (normal symbol low probability state), and this means that the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than the normal state, that is, the time saving state. Indicates a state where the probability of winning is low.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state after the end of the special symbol jackpot will be referred to as the special symbol probability variation period. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time shortening state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the normal symbol time short period.

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this control example, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is varied depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all five rounds). In addition, in this control example, the "probability change state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols" given after a jackpot are configured to continue until the next jackpot, but it is not limited to this. For example, the "probability change state of special symbols" and the "time-saving state of normal symbols" may be configured to be limited until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of drawings that result in the "probability variable state of special symbols" and the number of drawings that result in the "time-saving state of normal symbols" may be made different. Further, the number of drawings may be varied depending on the type of jackpot.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power, etc., it is always set to the "low probability state of special symbols" and the "normal state of normal symbols." Then, if it becomes a jackpot and the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the transition is made from the "low probability state of special symbols" to the "variable probability state of special symbols" and from the "normal state of normal symbols". Transition to "normal symbol time saving state". In this case, the set "probability change state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols" continue until the next jackpot occurs. On the other hand, if the ball never passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the jackpot of 1, the state shifts to the "low probability state of special symbols" and the "normal state of normal symbols." Although the details will be described later, in this seventh control example, when it becomes "Jackpot A to D", the ball easily passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and when it becomes "Jackpot E, F", it becomes easier to pass the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. It becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, one of "jackpots A to C" will result, so after the end of the jackpot, there is a high possibility that the state will be "special symbol probability change state" and "normal symbol time saving state." On the other hand, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a jackpot, one of the jackpots D to F will result. Furthermore, although details will be described later, when a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, the percentage of "jackpot D" is 5%. Therefore, if a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, there is a high probability (95% rate) that it will be a "jackpot E, F", so after the jackpot ends, the "special symbol low probability state" is disadvantageous for the player. And there is a high possibility that it will be a "normal state with a normal pattern". Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol is disadvantageous for the player compared to the lottery for the first special symbol.

At the upper right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 574), there is a first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information according to various controls performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery is being executed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in a lit state, and a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is displayed. The number of pending balls, which is the number of balls for which variation has not been performed (pending balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. The number of balls to be played is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 is configured to be held up to a maximum of four times each, but the maximum number of times that the ball is held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds during a jackpot and an error. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits light in a different color (for example, red, green, blue), and depending on the combination of the emitted light colors, various gaming states (high probability states of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be realized with a small number of LEDs. , normal symbol time saving, etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the fluctuation ends, but also indicates the jackpot type (special symbol according to jackpot A to F) if it is a jackpot. (first symbol) is shown.

In addition, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 configured with an LED. . A center frame 86 is disposed in this variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting winning), this is used as a trigger to display a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37. executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three symbols on the left, middle, and right can be displayed. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the display of the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display will be made accordingly. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels or the like, for example.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 579. FIG. 579 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 579(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen, FIG. 579(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is constructed to imitate the numbers "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 584), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The system is structured so that a jackpot occurs after the fluctuating display ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 579(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, with approximately 4/5 of the upper portion being the main display area Dm that displays the third symbol in a variable manner, and the other portion being the main display area Dm that displays the third symbol in a variable manner. The lower one-fifth of the area is a sub-display area Ds that displays the number of reserved pitches, preview characters, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stopped display state is maintained for at least 0.5 seconds. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (0.5 seconds or more), the player can check whether the combination of the third symbol corresponds to a jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not it is a jackpot). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this control example, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening performance) is displayed as a jackpot.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss and there are reserved balls, after the stopped display, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the reserved balls is started. In addition, when a plurality of reserved balls exist, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in terms of time. Furthermore, if there are both a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol and a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is given priority. executed.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there are no reserved balls, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) passes or a new ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to continuously shoot a ball for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) without a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In many cases, when the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), it is because the player has quit playing, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing any games at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, a player who is about to select the pachinko machine 10 to start a game can easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demonstration effect being displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 before a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the new ball will be dealt with. A variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is horizontally provided below the main display area Dm, and displays balls that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of reserved balls, is displayed by the number of reserved symbols indicating each reserved ball.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 579(b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a maximum of four reserved symbols each represented by a black circle are displayed on the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. The reserved symbol displayed on the right side when viewed from the front is the reserved symbol (first reserved symbol) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol, and the reserved symbol displayed on the right side when viewed from the front corresponds to the lottery of the second special symbol. This is a pending symbol (second pending symbol). Figure 579(b) illustrates a case where three first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all second reserved symbols are blank). There is.

In this control example, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 is configured to be held up to four times each, but the maximum number of balls held is four times. The number of times is not limited to three, or may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols, the number of reserved balls can be displayed numerically on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (eg, color or lighting pattern). Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps in a lit state.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a normal symbol lottery is being executed as the ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed in a lit state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67 on either the left or right side, the symbol “○” and the symbol “x” are displayed as the normal symbol (second symbol). A variable display is performed in which the symbols are lit alternately. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this control example, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the second ball entry port 640. The number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 mentioned above, and is also displayed by lighting on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

Note that the variable display of the normal symbols (second symbols) can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this control example, as well as by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be held through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, as is the case with the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but may be 3 or less, or , the number of times may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch, The main control device 110 draws a special symbol, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 displays a display according to the lottery result. Further, the first ball entry port 64 also serves as one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the ball. This first ball entrance 64 is provided with a pair of electric accessories 64a that can be opened and closed on the left and right sides, and when the electric accessories 64a are in the open state, In addition to balls that flow down from the center, balls that flow down from the left and right directions can also enter the ball. Note that this first ball entry port 64 is used to receive the ball that flows down the channel on the left side of the variable display unit 80 (a ball that is hit to the left), regardless of whether or not the electric accessory 64a is in the open state. Nails and the like are arranged so that the ball enters the ball more easily than the ball that flows down the channel on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (ball hit to the right).

A second ball entry port 640 into which a ball can enter is provided on the upper right side of the first ball entry port 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second ball entrance switch, The main control device 110 draws a special symbol, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 displays a display according to the lottery result. Further, the second ball entry port 640 also serves as one of the winning ports from which, when a ball enters, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. As shown in FIG. 574, since the second ball entry port 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, basically the ball that flows down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is However, the ball enters the ball more easily than the ball that flows down the channel provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second ball entrance 640 when viewed from the front, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 results in a jackpot, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed so that the jackpot symbol is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until seven balls have won). That is, the opening/closing door 65f1, which normally closes the specific winning opening 65a, is opened by the jackpot, and the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, this specific winning a prize opening 65a and the second ball entrance opening 640 are positions where a ball (a ball hit to the right) that flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 can enter (easily enter the ball). It is located in In other words, the ball is placed at a position where the ball that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 cannot enter (difficult to enter). Therefore, in order for a player to receive a payout of a prize ball (earn a profit) during a jackpot, he or she only needs to hit the ball to the right.

Inside the variable prize winning device 65, there are provided a plurality of channels (normal discharge channel 65e1 and special discharge channel 65e2) through which the balls can pass (see FIGS. 578(a) and 578(b)). The balls that have flowed into the variable prize winning device 65 flow down one of the channels (the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e2) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the special discharge channel 65e2 is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 that provides a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol after a jackpot when the ball passes through. This special discharge channel 65e2 becomes passable only in the first round of the jackpot. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the ball can be easily entered into the specific prize opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot (the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for a maximum of 30 seconds). (Jackpots A to D) and jackpots (Jackpots E and F) in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning opening 65a (the opening/closing door 65f1 is only opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds) are provided. .

Here, the configuration of this variable prize winning device 65 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 576 to 578. FIG. 576 is an exploded perspective view of this variable prize winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 576, the variable winning device 65 is assembled with an opening forming member 65b that is arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the back side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has an LED board 65d arranged, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The opening/closing unit 65f that has been opened and closed, the channel cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a channel, and the game device that protrudes into the channel formed by the back cover body 65e and the channel cover body 65g. A switching member 65h that switches the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back surface of the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the side and actuating the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m that covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. There is.

FIG. 577 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65. FIG. 577(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 577(b) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 577(b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined to the lower left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 577(b). The bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 578(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 577(b), the opening of the specific prize opening 65a can be opened in an open state in which a game ball can enter, or in an open state in which a game ball cannot enter, by means of an opening/closing door 65f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can come in and out from the game board 13 side. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the top of the opening/closing door. In addition, in the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retreated from the specific winning opening 65a by being retreated inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening/closing door 65f1 is in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently sent to the specific winning slot. You can win within 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 577(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line La-La shown in FIG. 577(b). As shown in FIG. 577(a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

Referring to FIG. 578, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 578(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 578(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 that guides the game ball, and the channel cover body 65g It is rotatably pivoted from the back side. Here, the channel cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distributed channel from the back side of the channel cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be placed anywhere.

As shown in FIG. 578(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. Ru. The game balls that have passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 are detected by the variable rate switch 65e3, which is configured with a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of game balls provided in the special discharge channel 65e2, and are sent to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as out balls. It is discharged.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the probability variable state of the special symbol ( (variable gaming state). That is, the variable probability switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for granting a variable probability gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after a jackpot into a low probability gaming state or a variable probability gaming state.

In this way, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed depending on the falling route of the game ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot game, so it is possible to improve the player's interest even during the jackpot game. . Note that the operation of the switching member 65h is linked to the first round of the jackpot, and while the switching member 65h operates to the position where the special discharge channel 65e2 is opened at the same time as the start of the first round of the jackpot, Simultaneously with the end of the first round, the switching member 65h operates to a position where the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed. Further, the time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guiding piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 0.2 seconds at the shortest. There is. As mentioned above, in jackpots E and F, the opening period of the opening/closing door 65f1 is at most 0.2 seconds, so unless the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a at the same time as the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened. , the special discharge passage 65e2 is closed by the guide piece 65h2 before the ball flows into the special discharge passage 65e2. Therefore, when the jackpots E and F occur, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot of 1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 578(b), a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 578(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h is blocking the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. A ball discharge port switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of game balls is provided at the end of this normal discharge channel 65e1. Thereby, whether all the game balls that entered the variable winning device 65 have been ejected can be determined based on the sum of the ball ejection port switch 65e4 and the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, if a malfunction such as ball jamming occurs in the variable prize winning device 65, the malfunction can be discovered at an early stage.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player is given a prize ball (in this control example, 11 balls for each winning ball) as a bonus. You can pay out prize balls). In addition, by using the detected game ball, it is possible to determine whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, thereby making it possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to give a variable probability gaming state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning hole for granting variable probability gaming states separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Returning to FIG. 574, the explanation will be continued. A substantially semicircular distribution member 660 is provided on the upper right side of the variable prize winning device 65 when viewed from the front. This distribution member 660 is provided with receiving portions on the left and right sides of the distribution member 660, which can receive balls flowing down from above. The distribution member 660 has two configurations: one in which the right receiving portion is located directly below the channel provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and the other in which the left receiving portion is located directly below the channel. Can take street layout. FIG. 574 illustrates an arrangement in which the right receiving portion is directly below the flow path.

If a ball flowing down the channel is caught by the right receiving section in a state where the right receiving section is placed directly below the channel, the distribution member 660 will be moved due to the weight of the ball. As a result of the clockwise rotation, the left receiving portion is positioned directly below the flow path. Furthermore, due to the rotation, the right receiving portion is inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front, and as a result, the ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, flows down in the lower right direction of the distribution member 660. The balls that have flown down to the lower right direction of the distribution member 660 roll on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 along the flow path. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 65f1 is set to the open state, the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a.

If a ball flowing down the channel is caught by the left receiving section in a state where the left receiving section is placed directly below the channel, the distribution member 660 will move due to the weight of the ball. As a result of rotation in the counterclockwise direction, the right receiving part is placed directly below the flow path. Further, due to the rotation, the left receiving portion is inclined in the lower left direction when viewed from the front, so that the ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, flows down toward the lower left of the distribution member 660. The balls that have flowed down to the lower left of the distribution member 660 flow down toward the second ball entry port 640 along the flow path, and about 80% of them enter the second ball entry port 640.

In this way, in this seventh control example, the ball launched into the channel provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (ball hit to the right) is directed toward the variable winning device 65 by the distribution member 660. and the direction of the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, in the special gaming state (jackpot), if you hit the ball to the right in order to win the prize ball by entering the special winning hole 65a, the ball will enter the second ball entering hole 640 during the jackpot. Inject a large amount of balls. As a result, in most cases, when the jackpot ends, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has accumulated to the value (4 balls).

As described above, in this seventh control example, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot type (jackpot E, F) in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 has a high probability (95%). It is determined. Further, in both jackpots E and F, the opening time of the specific winning hole 65a in each round is extremely short (0.2 seconds), making it difficult to enter the ball during the jackpot. Therefore, when a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, there is a high probability (95%) that the player hardly gets any prize balls, and the game condition after the jackpot is also disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the lottery for the second special symbol is an undesirable lottery and that he/she wants to execute only the lottery for the first special symbol if possible.

However, as mentioned above, if you hit the ball right into the special winning opening 65a to win the prize ball in a jackpot, the ball will also enter the second ball opening 640, so at least you will not be able to hit the jackpot. After the end, the lottery of the second special symbol that was held during the jackpot is executed. Therefore, after hitting the jackpot, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which the player plays the game in the hope that the lottery of the special symbol will not result in a jackpot until there are no reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol. If, as expected by the player, all the reserved balls corresponding to the drawing of the second special symbol are out of order, by hitting left, only the drawing of the first special symbol can be drawn. The player can continue playing the game without reducing the number of balls he has until he reaches a relatively advantageous type of jackpot (jackpots A to C).

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one prize ball is awarded. When you hit to the right, the distribution member 660 distributes one out of every two balls toward the second ball entry port 640, so all the balls distributed toward the second ball entry port 640 are distributed to the second ball entry port 640. Even if the ball enters the ball entrance 640, only half of the ball hit by right-handed ball is paid out as a prize ball. Therefore, when the player hits right-handed, the number of balls he holds tends to decrease, so it is possible to eliminate the advantage of hitting right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed during normal times (states other than during a jackpot).

In this way, in this seventh control example, if a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot ends, it will be disadvantageous for the player, and all the reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery will be lost. If so, it will be advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the lottery results a predetermined number of times (four times) after the end of the jackpot and play the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Pasting spaces K1 and K2 are provided at the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 for pasting certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 573).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that do not win in any of the winning ports are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 575, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 584). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 575). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 584). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 575) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 580 to 582, a characteristic effect of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example executed in the main display area Dm will be described. As described above, in this control example, if you hit the right hand aiming at the specific winning hole 65a during a jackpot, the ball will enter the second ball entry hole 640 and the second special symbol will be displayed before the jackpot ends. The system is configured such that the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit. If the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, it will be disadvantageous for the player, so the player plays the game while the lottery is being executed based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol, hoping that the lottery will be a loss. In this seventh control example, until all variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are finished, whether or not the reserved balls include a lottery result that is a jackpot of the second special symbol. The structure is designed to perform a production that suggests the following.

First, with reference to FIGS. 580(a) and 580(b), the effects performed during the jackpot will be explained. FIG. 580(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 580(a), during the jackpot, an effect in which the adventurer 811 explores a cave is displayed. Further, on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR1 is displayed. The current number of rounds is displayed in this display area HR1. In the example of FIG. 580(a), the words "1st round" are displayed, indicating that the current round is the 1st round.

On the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR2 is displayed. In this display area HR2, the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is displayed. In the example of FIG. 580(a), the characters "GET 0022" are displayed in the display area HR2, and 22 prize balls have been paid out (that is, 2 balls have been specified since the start of the jackpot). This indicates that the ball has entered the winning hole 65a.

Further, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, four display areas HR3a to HR3d are displayed. Although details will be described later, these four display areas HR3a to HR3d show the expectation level of the reserved ball of the second special symbol, which has increased due to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 during the jackpot. The image is displayed. As mentioned above, it is more likely that a loss in the lottery of the second special symbol will result in a more favorable result for the player than a jackpot, so the display areas HR3a to HR3d are provided with information regarding the result of a loss in the second special symbol lottery. An image indicating the level of expectation is displayed.

Note that FIG. 580(a) illustrates a state in which there are no reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, and each display area HR3a to HR3d is marked with a "?" symbol. The image is displayed.

FIG. 580(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected during a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 580(b), when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected during a jackpot, an effect in which the adventurer 811 discovers the treasure box 812 is executed. This treasure box contains a key 813, and the shape of the key 813 indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the second special symbol reserved based on the ball entered will be a loss. The more gorgeous the shape of the key 813 is, the higher the expectation of winning, and the poorer the shape, the lower the expectation of winning (the risk of winning in the lottery of the second special symbol increases).

FIG. 580(b) illustrates a case where a key 813 in a normal mode is displayed. When the adventurer 811 discovers the key 813, a key in the same manner as the one discovered is displayed above the display area where "?" is displayed among the display areas HR3a to HR3d. The areas are displayed in order. The example in FIG. 580(b) illustrates a case where an image of the key 813 is displayed in the display area HR3a among the display areas where the "?" symbol is displayed. In this way, by displaying the mode of each key 813 discovered by the adventurer 811 in the display areas HR3a to HR3d, a variable display based on each reserved ball that is executed after the current jackpot ends. The player can check the expectation level of the player at any time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the main display area Dm is configured to have dedicated display areas HR3a to HR3d for displaying the expectation level of the reserved ball of the second special symbol, but the dedicated display area HR3a to HR3d is not necessarily provided. There is no need to create an area. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the second special pending symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is displayed in the form of a key discovered by the adventurer 811.

FIG. 581(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the start of the ending performance after all rounds of the jackpot are completed. In this seventh control example, from the ending period of the jackpot until the variable time of all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol have elapsed, the jackpot E, in the reserved balls of the second special symbol, An effect is executed to inform the player whether or not F exists. In other words, even after all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are finished, it suggests whether the gaming state remains the "probability change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol". The performance for this purpose is executed. Hereinafter, in order to simplify the explanation, the "probability variable state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols" which are advantageous to the player will be referred to as "probability variable mode", and will be referred to as the "probability variable mode" which is advantageous to the player. The ``low probability state of special symbols'' and the ``normal state of normal symbols'' which are gaming states are referred to as the ``normal mode.''

As shown in FIG. 581(a), when the jackpot ending period starts, an effect is performed in which the adventurer 811 discovers the door 814. Further, above the image of the door 814, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR4 is formed. In this display area HR4, the words "Start door breakthrough mode!! Break through four doors!!" are displayed. Based on these display contents, it will be advantageous for the player if he can open the four doors using the four keys (displayed in the display areas HR3a to HR3d) collected during the jackpot (the second special symbol is the reserved ball). It is possible to easily make the player understand that the variable probability mode continues even after the player has completed the game. Further, in the display area HR1 on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81, an image of a leftward arrow and the words "left-handed hit" are displayed. These displays allow the player to launch the ball to the left (to launch the ball into the channel on the left side of the variable display unit 80).

The reason why the left-handed hit is notified at the start of the ending period is to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed after the end of the jackpot. That is, the ball fired by the player hitting right during the ending period enters the second ball entrance 640 after the end of the jackpot (and after the fluctuation based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol has started). Prevents the number of drawings for the second special symbol from increasing after the jackpot ends due to the ball entering the jackpot (the number of drawings for the second special symbol being executed beyond the four times held during the jackpot) This is to (suppress) As described above, even if a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is almost impossible to obtain prize balls during the jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot becomes the normal mode, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, as the number of times the second special symbol is drawn increases, it becomes disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from continuing to hit the right ball even after the jackpot ends and the ball newly entering the second ball entrance 640, in this seventh control example, the game starts from the ending period. The configuration is such that the player is notified that the player is hitting left-handed. As a result, the drawing of the second special symbol that is executed after a jackpot can be limited to the holding ball of the second special symbol that was held during the jackpot, which will not be excessively disadvantageous to the player. can be prevented (suppressed).

When the jackpot (special game state) ends with the end of the ending period, as shown in FIG. 581(b), an effect is performed in which the keys collected during the jackpot are used to break through the door 814. FIG. 581(b) illustrates a case where the adventurer 811 successfully breaks through the door 814 using the key displayed in the display area HR3a. If the breakthrough is successful, an image of the door 814 being opened is displayed, and the words "Breakthrough!!" are displayed in the display area HR4. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that if the remaining three doors are broken through, the player will be in an advantageous state (variable probability mode).

The effect of breaking through the door 814 is basically executed in conjunction with the variable display based on the second special symbol, the held ball. That is, the effect in which the adventurer 811 uses the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR3a) to open (break through) the first door is based on the first held ball of the second special symbol. This is executed during the period from when the variable display is started to when the variable display based on the second reserved ball is started. Similarly, the production in which the adventurer 811 opens the second door using the second key starts with the fluctuating display based on the second held ball of the second special symbol, and then opens the third key. This is executed during the period until the variable display based on the held balls starts. The production in which adventurer 811 uses the third key to open the third door starts with a variable display based on the third held ball of the second special symbol, and then changes to the fourth held ball. It will be executed during the period until the start of the fluctuation display based on the above. The performance of opening the fourth door using the fourth key is executed at a variable time of a variable display based on the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol. In addition, these are the operations when the held ball of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to a loss, and if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the door will be broken through during the period of the jackpot. The performance is performed one or more times.

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 583, in this seventh control example, it is difficult to detect whether or not the second special symbol has become a jackpot from the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 in the variable winning device 65. In this way, when the second special symbol comes off, it is determined that the win (so-called small hit) is almost accompanied by the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1. Then, the opening period (0.2 seconds) of the opening/closing door 65f1 in the case of a small hit and the opening period of the opening/closing door 65f1 in each round in the case of a jackpot E or F in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is matched. Further, in the case of a jackpot E or F, the interval period between rounds is made to match the fluctuation time (1 second) in the case of a loss in the lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, even if a jackpot E or a jackpot F occurs during the execution of the variable display based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol, the current status is already a jackpot based on the opening period and opening interval of the opening/closing door 65f1. It can be difficult to determine whether the This makes it possible to draw attention to the series of performances (door breakthrough mode performance) that are executed at the start of the ending period until the end.

FIG. 582(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when breaking through the fourth door fails in the door breaking mode performance. That is, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when either jackpot E or F is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 582(a), if the adventurer 811 fails to break through the door, the words "Failure..." are displayed in the display area HR4, and the adventurer 811 has A scene where the key is broken is performed. These display modes make it easy for the player to understand that the variable probability mode has ended (he has won either jackpot E or F).

FIG. 582(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the fourth door is successfully broken through in the door breaking mode performance. In this case, an image of the fourth door being opened is displayed, and at the same time, the words "Great success!!" and "Entering variable probability mode!!" are displayed in the display area HR4. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the game can be played in the advantageous variable probability mode.

In this way, in this seventh control example, the above-mentioned door breakthrough is performed over a period from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the variable display based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol that increased during the jackpot. It is configured to perform mode production. Due to this door breakthrough mode production, all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol will be removed, and it will be possible to play in the fixed variable mode. It is possible to suggest to the player whether he will fall into the normal mode without drawing the first special symbol. By configuring a series of effects to be executed over the ending period and a plurality of variable displays after the jackpot, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this seventh control example, depending on whether or not it is possible to break through the number of doors corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, the game after all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are finished. Although the configuration is such that notification is given as to whether or not the state is in the variable probability mode, the presentation mode is not limited to this. Any performance mode may be used as long as one of two types of results (success or failure, victory or defeat, confirmation, failure, etc.) is announced. For example, if the adventurer 811 encounters an enemy, It may be configured such that the variable rate mode is notified when the enemy is defeated in battle.

Next, with reference to FIG. 583, a description will be given of the correspondence between the change over time in the performance mode during the execution of the door breakthrough mode performance and the change over time in the state of the specific prize opening 65a (opening/closing status of the opening/closing door 65f1). FIG. 583(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship when the variable probability mode is notified (that is, when the lottery result corresponds to all the reserved balls of the second special symbol being out). On the other hand, FIG. 583(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship when the normal mode is announced (that is, when either jackpot E or F is included in the hold).

As shown in FIG. 583(a), when it is announced that the mode has shifted to the variable probability mode (when all the second special symbols are won), at the same time as the ending period starts, the start screen of the door breakthrough mode ( (See FIG. 581(a)) is displayed. This start screen continues to be displayed during the ending period of 1 second, and ends when the ending period ends and the jackpot ends. When the jackpot ends and the variable display based on the first reserved ball (reserved 1) of the second special symbol starts on the first symbol display device 37, the effect of breaking through the first door (Fig. 581(b) ) is started. This performance continues until the start timing of the fluctuation based on the second held ball (held 2) is reached. Note that, as described above, if the second special symbol is a loss in the lottery, it is almost a small win. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 583(a), when the 1-second variable display based on Hold 1 ends, a small win is started and the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. During this opening period, a message will be displayed indicating that the door has been successfully breached.

Thereafter, the variable display for 1 second and the opening/closing door 65f1 for 0.2 seconds based on the small win are repeated in the same manner. In line with this, the performance of breaking through the second to fourth doors is executed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is announced (displayed) that the doors were able to be broken through during each opening period of the opening/closing door 65f1. . In this way, by having a configuration in which the result of whether or not the door can be broken through is announced during the small winning opening period after the variable time has elapsed, it is possible to break through the door during the 1 second variable period. It is possible to further increase expectations for In addition, since it is possible to draw attention to the performance during the opening period of the small winning, it is difficult to make the player think that he or she has already won or not from the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65f1. can.

In the production of breaking through the fourth door, after adventurer 811 breaks through door 814 and the transition to fixed variable mode is announced (after the fourth small win is completed), a special display format for fixed variable mode will be displayed. (not shown) is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has shifted to the variable probability mode.

FIG. 583(b) is a diagram showing a case where the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is a jackpot F. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode performance, even if the transition to normal mode is announced (if either jackpot E or F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol), the ending period At the start of the game, the door breakthrough mode will begin. When the jackpot ends and the variable display of special symbols based on the first reserved ball starts on the first symbol display device 37, an effect of trying to break through the first door is executed, and the opening period of the small jack Adventurer 811 breaks through the first door at the same time.

When the variable display of the special symbol based on the second reserved ball is started on the first symbol display device 37, an effect of trying to break through the second door is executed. At this time, a fluctuating display for one second is executed based on the second reserved ball, and the jackpot F is started after one second has elapsed. When the jackpot F is reached and the first round starts, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In conjunction with this opening period, it is announced that adventurer 811 has succeeded in breaking through the door. Then, at the start of the interval period after the end of the first round, a performance of trying to break through the third door is executed, and after the interval period of 1 second has passed, the opening period of the second round (0.2 seconds), it is announced that the third door has been successfully breached.

Also, when the interval period starts after the end of the second round, a performance of trying to break through the fourth door is executed, and the opening period of the third round (0. 2 seconds), it is reported that the fourth door could not be broken through (see FIG. 582(a)).

After the failure to break through the door is announced, a result display (not shown) indicating the total number of prize balls paid out in the current variable probability mode is displayed until the end of the jackpot. When the jackpot ends, a special display mode for normal mode is set.

In this way, in this seventh control example, when the variable display is sequentially performed based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol after the jackpot, the state of the opening/closing door 65f1 changes over time when the variable display and the small hit are repeated. change (see FIG. 583(a)) and change over time in the state of the opening/closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 583(b)) when the reserved balls of the second special symbol include jackpot E or F. It is configured to match until the end of the door breakthrough mode performance. That is, the opening period of the opening/closing door 65f1 in each round of jackpots E and F was configured to be 0.2 seconds, which is the same period as the opening period of the small winning. In addition, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of jackpots E and F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. With this configuration, even if any of the 1st to 4th reserved balls of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, the opening/closing until the door breakthrough mode effect ends. The operation of the door 65f1 can be made the same as when the variable probability mode is notified (see FIG. 583(a)). Therefore, it can be made difficult to determine whether the jackpot E or F has been achieved based on the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1, so that the attention can be drawn to the door breakthrough mode performance until the end. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, in FIG. 583(b), even if the second held ball results in a jackpot F (falling back to normal mode), the game breaks through to the third door and fails at the fourth door. However, it may be configured such that when either jackpot E or F variation is executed while the reserved balls of the second special symbol are used up, an effect is executed in which the player fails to break through the door.

<About the electrical configuration in the seventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 584. FIG. 584 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 589) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 589, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, etc. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first winning type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol are used. , a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 599), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 608). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). In accordance with the timing of the ball entering the ball mouth 64, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, respectively. Furthermore, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through the entrance (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 399). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 608).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the value is updated. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

As mentioned above, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot for the special symbol is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 585(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the first winning random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first winning random number table 202a is used for times when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a jackpot than when the probability is low (a period when the special symbol is in a low probability state). It is divided into two types: one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of random numbers that become a jackpot included in each type is set to be different (see FIG. 585(b)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 in the event of a special symbol jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). The counter is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the first The display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. This is the display mode.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that result in a special symbol jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are the first winning random numbers for low probability times. It is stored in the table (see FIG. 585(b)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 4 out of a total of 400 random numbers, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/100". As shown in FIG. 585(b), the random number value (counter value) that results in a jackpot is the same for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. On the other hand, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers that result in a jackpot correspond to misses. As mentioned above, the miss of the special symbol includes a small hit. As shown in FIG. 585(b), when the probability of the special symbol is low, the random numbers that result in a loss in the lottery of the first special symbol are 396 from "4 to 399". On the other hand, the random numbers that result in a loss in the second special symbol lottery are 37 from 3 to 40, and the random numbers that result in a small win in the second special symbol lottery are from 41 to 399. There are 359 pieces.

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 40 random numbers that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the values "0 to 39" are stored in the first random number table for high probability ( (See Figure 585(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 40 out of the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/10". In addition, when the special symbol has a high probability, the random number that results in a loss in the lottery of the first special symbol is 360 from 40 to 399. On the other hand, only "40" is stipulated as the random number that results in a loss in the second special symbol lottery, and the random number that results in a small win in the second special symbol lottery is 359 from "41 to 399". number is specified.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 586(a), when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "jackpot A" ( 16 rounds (probable jackpot). Also, when the value is "10-89", the jackpot type is "Jackpot B" (5 round probability variable jackpot), and when the value is "90-99", the jackpot type is "Jackpot C". (2nd round guaranteed strange jackpot).

On the other hand, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 4", the jackpot type is "jackpot D" (16 round probability variable jackpot). Also, when the value is "5-49", the jackpot type is "Jackpot E" (7 round normal jackpot), and when the value is "50-99", the jackpot type is "Jackpot F". (6 rounds normal jackpot).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that six types of winnings (jackpot A to F) are determined by the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. has been done. As described above, in this seventh control example, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. In other words, even if the type of jackpot is determined, it is not determined whether or not the game will transition to a variable probability state. The above-mentioned "probable jackpot" means a type of jackpot in which the ball easily passes through the probability variable switch 65e3 during a jackpot, and "normal jackpot" refers to a type of jackpot in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variable switch 65e3 during a jackpot. It means.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of a miss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. ``reach outside the front and back'' (for example, 98, 99), which stops at the reach, and ``reach outside the front and back'' (for example, in the range of 90 to 97), where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected, including a "completely off" (range of 0 to 89, for example) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Note that the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into one for special symbols with high probability and one for special symbols with low probability, and the range of random values set for each stop type of miss depending on the table. is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so in order to prevent more reach effects than necessary from being selected, the table for high probability states has a wide random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed". is selected, and "completely off" is more likely to be selected. In this table, the "front/back off reach" is narrowed to 98, 99, and the "front/back off reach" is also narrowed to 90-97, making it difficult for "front/back off reach" or "front/back off reach" to be selected. In addition, in a low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64, the random value range corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed" is narrow from 0 to 79. ``Completely off'' is less likely to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front/back off" is wide, from 80 to 97, making it easier to select "reach other than front/back off". Therefore, in the low probability state, many reach displays with long production times can be performed, so the time for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can continue. It becomes easier to perform. Note that in the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "front/back off reach" is set to 98 and 99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The rough display mode of so-called normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed pattern fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 604) to be described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Note that the fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 587(a)) that stores a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is set in.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be explained with reference to FIGS. 587 and 588. As shown in FIG. 587(a), this fluctuation pattern table 202d is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and is a table for one special symbol 202d1 (see FIG. 587(b)). At least a table 202d2 for special drawing 1 off (normal) (see FIG. 587(c)) and a table 202d3 for special drawing 1 off (probability variation) (see FIG. 587(d)) are defined. In addition, as a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a table 202d4 (see Fig. 588(a)) for special symbols per 2 (4 variations or less) and a table 202d4 for special symbols per 2 (5 variations or more). ) table 202d5 (see Fig. 588(b)), table 202d6 (see Fig. 588(c)) for special drawing 2 off (4 variations or less), table 202d7 (see Fig. 588(b)) for special drawing 2 off (5 variations or more) 588(d)).

First, with reference to FIG. 587(b), the special figure 1 per game table 202d1 will be explained. FIG. 587(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this special figure 1 per table 202d1. The special figure 1 winning table 202d1 is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected is defined when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined as the jackpot fluctuation patterns. In the special figure 1 per table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as the determination value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with various normal reach (30 seconds) fluctuation patterns, and the range of "51 to 179" is associated with various types of super reach. (60 seconds) fluctuation patterns are associated with the range "180 to 198", and various special reach (90 seconds) fluctuation patterns are associated with the range "180 to 198". When selecting a variation pattern when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern in which a judgment value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the special figure 1 per table 202d1.

FIG. 587(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is a loss in a special symbol low probability state. . If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, as described above, the stop type is determined from the stop type selection table (not shown) as whether it is completely out (non-reach) or out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is set as a complete miss, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is set as a miss reach. (Reach off front and back, reach other than off back and forth).

Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete error, either a short error (7 seconds), which has a relatively short variation time, or a long error (10 seconds), which has a relatively long variation time, is set. The determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to "0 to 98" for short misses (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" for long misses (10 seconds).

In addition, for out-of-reach reaches, if the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", there are various kinds of out-of-reach normal reaches (30 seconds), and in the range of "150 to 197", out-of-reach types of super reaches. (60 seconds), but "198" has various special reaches (90 seconds) set.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss in the normal gaming state, and changes the variation obtained from the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

FIG. 587(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202d3. This loss (probability variable) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the special symbol lottery becomes a loss in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In this deviation (probable) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from the above-mentioned deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

As mentioned above, when the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), a complete failure is determined. , if it is in the range of "90 to 99", an off reach (front/back off reach, reach other than front/back off) is determined.

In this way, when the game is in the variable probability game state than in the normal game state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is a miss is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that when the probability changes, the fluctuation time of a miss becomes long, and the period until a jackpot is reached becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is delayed during the variable probability game state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and the player feels bored.

FIG. 588(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d4 for special figure 2 (4 variations or less). This table 202d4 for special symbol 2 winnings (4 variations or less) is selected when the number of variations of the special symbol is 4 or less after the jackpot ends, and when a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery. This is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be applied is defined. As shown in FIG. 588(a), after a jackpot, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 or less, the fluctuation pattern is a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. selected.

FIG. 588(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d5 for special drawing 2 (5 variations or more). This table 202d5 for special symbol 2 winning (5 fluctuations or more) is selected when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 or more after the jackpot ends, and when the lottery of the 2nd special symbol results in a jackpot. This is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be applied is defined. As shown in FIG. 588(b), after a jackpot, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 or more, the long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds is the fluctuation pattern, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. selected.

FIG. 588(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d6 for special drawing 2 failure (4 variations or less). This table 202d6 for special symbol 2 failure (4 fluctuations or less) is for when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 or less after the end of the jackpot, and the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is a defeat (including small win). This is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time) that will be selected when the change occurs. As shown in FIG. 588(c), after a jackpot, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 or less, the fluctuation pattern is a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. selected.

FIG. 588(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d7 for special drawing 2 failure (5 variations or more). This table 202d7 for special symbol 2 winnings (5 fluctuations or more) is for cases where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 or more after the jackpot ends, and the lottery of the special symbol is a loss (including small wins). This is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) selected for each case is defined. As shown in FIG. 588(b), after a jackpot, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 or more, the fluctuation pattern is a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. selected.

In this way, in this seventh control example, if the second special symbol lottery is executed with the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol being 4 or less after the jackpot, the lottery result will be incorrect (small win). 1 second is always set as the fluctuation time regardless of whether it is a jackpot or a jackpot. This makes it difficult to determine whether a jackpot E or F has occurred based on the variation time during execution of a variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after a jackpot. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the variation time whether the gaming state is in the variable probability mode after all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol have been completed. Therefore, the player who wants to know whether or not the variable probability mode will be played can be made to pay more attention to the result of the door-breaking mode performance and play the game, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in this seventh control example, after a jackpot, if the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol is 5 or more, regardless of the lottery result, the fluctuation time The configuration is such that 300 seconds is always set. As a result, if the player hits right in a state other than during a jackpot, it is possible to create a state in which the special symbol lottery is executed only once every 300 seconds (5 minutes) at the shortest (very inefficient game). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from hitting right in a state other than during a jackpot. If the player hits right in a state other than during a jackpot, especially during the variable probability mode, only the lottery of the second special symbol will be executed. There is a very high possibility that this will happen. In other words, there is a high possibility that the player will hardly get any prize balls, and that the game will fall into the normal mode after hitting the jackpot. For this reason, the player is unable to fully enjoy the game in the advantageous probability variable mode, and instead enters the disadvantageous normal mode, and there is a risk that the player may feel dissatisfied with the game.

On the other hand, in this seventh control example, since the gaming efficiency is deteriorated when the player hits right in a state other than a jackpot, it is possible to suppress the player from hitting right in a state other than a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game in the variable probability mode even more.

Returning to FIG. 589, the explanation will be continued. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and is stored in the normal symbol storage in the RAM 203. The ball is stored in the ball storage area 203c.

The random number value for the normal symbol win is set by the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 586(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and is determined by the value of the second win random number counter C4. If it matches the value of the random number that is a win set by the second random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In addition, this second winning random number table is used for times when the probability of normal symbols is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state), and when there is a high probability that the probability of winning the normal symbols is higher than when the probability is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state). It is divided into two types: one for the time saving period) and the other for the short period, and the number of random numbers that become a jackpot included in each type is set to be different (see FIG. 586(b)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high.

As shown in FIG. 586(b), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that will be a hit for the normal symbol, and the values are "5 to 28". In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that a special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 , a fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second At the same time, the symbol ``○'' is lit up as a symbol), and the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened only once for 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64a is released for "0.2 seconds x once"; The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers that result in a jackpot for the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204." These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability times. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 , a fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. If the obtained value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol winning. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 64a is opened "1 second x 3 times". be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, compared to when the probability is low for the normal symbol, the fluctuating display time is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, and furthermore, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a is Since the time is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. In addition, in this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64a will be released for "1 second x 3 times", but the opening time and The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 2 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 596). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 604).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 584, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 582, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I/O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as the following are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including the time when a power outage occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 608) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 607). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 606) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be explained with reference to FIG. 585(a). FIG. 585(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this control example. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above. ing.

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 585(b)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" is defined as the range of judgment values that are determined to be a jackpot (see 202a1 in FIG. 585(b)), and the first special symbol is determined to be a miss. "4 to 399" is defined as the range of the determination value to be determined (see 202a2 in FIG. 585(b)). In addition, "3 to 40" is defined as the range of the judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is a miss (see 202a2 in FIG. 585(b)), and the range of the judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is a small hit is specified. “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 585(b)). In addition, in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol, "0 to 39" is defined as the range of judgment values that are determined to be a jackpot (see 202a4 in Figure 585(b)), and the first special symbol is a miss. “40 to 399” is defined as the range of the judgment value to be judged (see 202a5 in FIG. 585(b)). In addition, "40" is defined as the determination value for determining that the second special symbol is a miss (see 202a5 in FIG. 585(b)), and "41 to 399" is defined as the determination value for determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. ” (see 202a6 in FIG. 585(b)). When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning matches any of the judgment values corresponding to a jackpot specified in this first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 585(b)) , it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 586(a)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the 1 hit type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 586(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is associated with "Jackpot A" and defined. (See 202b1 in FIG. 586(a)). This "jackpot A" is a jackpot with 16 rounds. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that will be "Jackpot A", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot A" will be determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). In this "Jackpot A", the door 65f1 is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds pass or until seven balls are won. Therefore, in each round, just by continuing to hit the ball to the right, the player can almost certainly win the upper limit number of balls (7 balls) into the special winning slot 65a before 30 seconds have elapsed. , If the jackpot is A, you can win a large amount of prize balls. Furthermore, in one round when the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6(a)) can pass, if the player continues to hit the ball to the right, the ball will almost certainly pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, after the end of "Jackpot A", the mode will almost certainly be changed. As described above, "Jackpot A" has the largest number of rounds, and furthermore, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to variable probability mode, so it is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

For the first special symbol, "Jackpot B" is defined in correspondence with the range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "10 to 89" (see 202b2 in FIG. 586(a)). . This "jackpot B" is a jackpot with five rounds. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 80 counter values that become "Jackpot B", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot B" is determined. The ratio is 80% (80/100). In this "Jackpot B", similarly to "Jackpot A", in each round of the jackpot, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened until 30 seconds have elapsed or until seven balls have been won. Therefore, similarly to jackpot A, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. In addition, in the first round of the jackpot, the ball almost certainly passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so after the end of "Jackpot B", the mode almost certainly becomes variable probability. In this way, "Jackpot B" has fewer rounds than "Jackpot A" (and "Jackpot D" described later), so the number of prize balls that can be won is smaller than "Jackpot A" (and "Jackpot D"). However, it is possible to pay out many prize balls. Furthermore, since the gaming state after the jackpot becomes the variable probability mode, the game shifts to a gaming state advantageous for the player after the jackpot, similar to "Jackpot A".

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99" is associated with a "jackpot C" and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 586(a)). . This "jackpot C" is a jackpot with two rounds. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that will be "jackpot C", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "jackpot C" will be determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). In this "Jackpot C", similarly to "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B", in each round of the jackpot, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened until 30 seconds pass or until seven balls are won. Therefore, similar to "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Furthermore, in the first round of the jackpot, the ball will almost certainly pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, so after the end of "Jackpot C", the mode will almost certainly be variable. In this way, since "Jackpot C" has the smallest number of rounds, the number of prize balls that can be won is reduced, but since the prize balls can be paid out, the number of balls held by the player can be increased. Furthermore, since the gaming state after the jackpot becomes the probability variable mode, the game shifts to a gaming state advantageous for the player after the jackpot, similar to "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

In this way, if you win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, you will be able to receive prize balls for 2 to 16 rounds, and the gaming state after the jackpot will almost certainly be in variable mode. Regardless of the type of jackpot, it will be advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 586(a), for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" is associated with "jackpot D" and defined. (See 202b4 in FIG. 586(a)). This "jackpot D" is a jackpot with 16 rounds. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 5 counter values that become "Jackpot D", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "Jackpot D" is determined. The proportion of these cases is 5% (5/100). Since this "jackpot D" has the same operation as the "jackpot A", it is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player like the "jackpot A".

For the second special symbol, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 49" is associated with "Jackpot E" and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 586(a)). . This "jackpot E" is a jackpot with seven rounds. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 45 counter values that will be "jackpot E", so if the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot E" will be determined. The proportion of people with disabilities is 45% (45/100). In this "Jackpot E", in each round of the jackpot, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or until seven balls have been won. Therefore, it becomes difficult to even allow one ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a in each round, so it is almost impossible to win a prize ball. In addition, since it is difficult to let the ball enter the special winning hole 65a in the first round, there is almost no possibility that the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 in the first round. Therefore, the gaming state after the end of "Jackpot E" becomes a "normal mode" which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, "Jackpot E" is a type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, since the player hardly gets any prize balls and there is an extremely high possibility that the game will shift to the disadvantageous "normal mode" after hitting the jackpot.

For the second special symbol, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" is associated with "Jackpot F" and defined (see 202b6 in FIG. 586(a)). . This "jackpot F" is a jackpot with six rounds. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that become "Jackpot F", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot F" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot F" is similar to the "jackpot E" in that in each round of the jackpot, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or until seven balls have been won. Therefore, similar to "Jackpot E", it is a type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player because not only can hardly any prize balls be obtained, but there is an extremely high possibility that the game will shift to the disadvantageous "normal mode" after the jackpot.

In this way, if you get a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a high probability (95% rate) that you will hardly get the prize ball, and the game state after the jackpot will almost certainly be in normal mode. , F, which is likely to be disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the number of held balls of the second special symbol, which increases due to balls entering the second ball entrance 640 during a jackpot, will all be missed. It is possible to provide novel gameplay.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 586(b)) is a data table in which winning determination values for normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c1 in FIG. 586(b)). In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c3 in FIG. 586(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to. , it is determined whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 7236) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. Note that the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be explained with reference to FIG. 590. FIG. 590 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 590, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, remaining ball timer flag 203k, remaining ball timer 203m, probability variation valid flag 203n , a probability variable valid timer 203o, a discharge number counter 203p, a variable time counter 203q, a medium jackpot flag 203r, a medium small win flag 203s, a round end flag 203t, and other memory areas 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type. Each value of a counter C2 and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding area). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th area). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the execution area ( (see FIG. 589), and a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this control example, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In this second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value, etc. is the same as that of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 1). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so it is similar to the case of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Then, a shift process is performed to shift the winning data stored in other holding areas to a holding area whose area number is one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 602). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 600).

The value of this first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending balls N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 600, S211 in FIG. 602). (See S405). The reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol held ball counter 203d is changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of balls held. As a result, the number of pending balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol pending ball counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual number of pending balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if there is a deviation from the pitch count, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

Note that the audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on hold for display to notify the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 602). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 600). The value of this second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to four times. This is a counter that counts up to The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S704 in FIG. 605). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (see S605 in FIG. 604).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 605). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 605: No ).

The probability variable flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state (variable probability mode) with special symbols.If the variable probability flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state (variable probability mode) with special symbols. ), and if the probability change flag 203g is off, it shows that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (normal mode) with special symbols. Moreover, as mentioned above, in the variable probability mode, it becomes a time saving state of normal symbols. Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol is present, and also that it is the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The initial value of the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF, and when a ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during a jackpot, it is set to ON at the end of the jackpot (see S1302 in FIG. 611). Further, the probability change flag 203g is reset to OFF when a jackpot game is started (see S219 in FIG. 600).

This probability variation flag 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is in a probability variation state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 601). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 601, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 601, S213), the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if it is on, a special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table 202a for high probability times, while the probability variation flag 203g is If the flag 203g is off, a special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table 202a for low probability times.

Further, the probability change flag 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether the gaming state is a time saving state in the normal symbol variation process (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 604). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203g is referred to during the normal symbol variation process, and if the probability variation flag 203g is on, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table 202c for high probability winnings. On the other hand (see S609 in FIG. 604), if the probability change flag 203g is off, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table 202c for low probability (see S610 in FIG. 604). In addition, in the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203g is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a when the normal symbol hits (S614 in FIG. 604, (See S620).

The variable probability setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to a variable probability state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined depending on whether or not a ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6(a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1416 in FIG. 612). On the other hand, this probability change setting flag 203h is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1304 in FIG. 611). Note that this probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

In addition, if the variable rate setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the variable rate switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that the variable rate switch 65e3 has passed, the variable rate setting flag 203h is set to ON. 203h may be formally set to ON and then restored. In this case, it can be determined whether the variable probability switch 65e3 has been passed before the power is turned off by checking whether a variable probability passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the gaming parlor side by determining fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to on while the power is turned off and then turning the power back on. can.

The probability variable passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variable switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in this control example, one round of the jackpot). In addition, it can be determined whether all the game balls that entered the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been ejected by the sum of the variable passing counter 203i and the ejected number counter 203p, which will be described later. This probability variable passing counter 203i is updated by incrementing by 1 when passing the probability variable switch 65e3 (S1415 in FIG. 612). Further, after executing a process to determine whether the number of winning game balls and the number of ejected balls match the variable winning device 65, it is reset to the initial value "0" (S1511 in FIG. 613). Note that this probability variable passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won into the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 576) provided in the variable winning device 65, it is updated by incrementing by 1 (S1403 in FIG. 612). On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the number of winnings counter 203j) and the number of winnings (the total value of the number of winnings counter 203p and the variable passing counter 203i) are the same. After it is determined whether the value is the same, the value is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 613). Note that the value of this prize winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203k is a flag that indicates whether or not it is the ball throw period after one round is completed and the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed. When this remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to on, it means that it is a ball throw period. While this remaining ball timer flag 203k is set on, a remaining ball timer 203m, which will be described later, is updated by incrementing it by 1 (see S1505 in FIG. 613). The remaining ball timer 203m is a counter for determining the time since the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the balls in the variable winning device 65 to be ejected has elapsed. It is a counter.

The remaining ball timer 203m is the time required for the winning game ball to be ejected from the variable winning device 65 when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round ends. This is a counter for determining whether the time has elapsed. In this control example, the time required for the winning game ball to be ejected from the variable winning device 65 is 0.5 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance by the remaining ball timer. The upper limit is set at 203m. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203m has reached its upper limit (0.8 seconds in this control example), it is determined whether the number of prizes entered into the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of prizes ejected match. (S1507 in FIG. 613). If they do not match, an error command is set and this fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, it is possible to suppress fraud in which the ball is left in the variable winning device 65 and the ball is flown down to the special discharge channel 65e2 at the timing of the first round of jackpot E or jackpot F.

In addition, if the number of prizes won and the number of ejected pieces do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is on, even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is not turned on. A configuration may also be configured in which it is not set to on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a probability variable state from being improperly assigned.

The variable probability valid flag 203n is a flag for determining whether or not to make the passage valid when a ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When this variable probability valid flag 203n is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6(a)) is switched to the variable probability switch based on the flow path solenoid 65k being on. 65e3. That is, this indicates that it is a normal period for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probability variation valid timer 203o is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation validity flag 203n described above is set to ON. This variable validity timer 203o can determine the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. In this control example, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the probability variable effective timer 203o is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the probability variable switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be fraudulent and is not determined to have passed.

As a result, after the switching member 65h closes the special discharge channel 65e2, it is possible to illegally allow a ball to enter the special discharge channel 65e2 and pass the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, or to disable the piano from below the variable probability switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, such as pushing up a game ball with a wire or the like, or causing a magnetic sensor to falsely detect that the ball has passed due to radio waves, etc.

The discharge number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6(a)) in one round. This ejected number counter 203p is reset to the initial value 0 after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of ejected balls (S1511 in FIG. 613).

The fluctuation time counter 203q is a counter for counting fluctuation time. A counter value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202d is set in the variation time counter 203q (see S311 in FIG. 601). In addition, this fluctuation time counter 203q is subtracted by 1 during the special symbol fluctuation processing (see Figure 600) (see S214 in Figure 600), and it is determined whether the fluctuation time has elapsed based on the value of this fluctuation time counter 203q. It is determined.

The jackpot flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not there is a jackpot (special game state). If this jackpot flag 203r is on, it means that a jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203r becomes a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, and is set to ON when the jackpot (special game state) starts (see S1103 in FIG. 609). Further, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1304 in FIG. 611). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600), this jackpot flag 203r is referred to to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (see S201 in FIG. 600).

The medium winning flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not a small winning is occurring. If this small winning flag 203s is on, it means that a small winning is occurring, and if it is off, it means that a small winning is not occurring. The small hit medium flag 203r becomes a small win when a special symbol is drawn, and is set to ON when the small win starts (see S1603 in FIG. 614). Moreover, it is set to off at the end of the small win (see S1610 in FIG. 614). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600), this small hit flag 203s is referred to to determine whether or not there is a small hit (see S201 in FIG. 600).

The round end flag 203t is a flag that indicates whether or not it is the ball-playing period after the jackpot round ends. If the round end flag 203t is on, it indicates that it is the ball throwing period after the end of the round, and if it is off, it indicates that the ball shooting period has ended.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

In this way, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags. By performing control with reference to these flags and counters, it is possible to realize the novel gameplay of playing the game in the hope that the second special symbol reserved ball will be a miss.

Next, with reference to FIG. 591, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 591 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example.

As shown in FIG. 591, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example has three states (modes) that can be roughly divided. That is, a normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 591, a door breakthrough mode shown in the middle part of FIG. 591, and a variable probability mode shown in the lower part of FIG. 591 are provided.

As mentioned above, the normal mode indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, and the probability of a jackpot is low and the ball is difficult to enter the first ball entrance 64. This becomes the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, as mentioned above, the variable probability mode indicates the variable probability state of special symbols and the time saving state of normal symbols, and the jackpot probability is high and the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64. This creates the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, the door breakthrough mode indicates a state where there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol obtained during the execution of a guaranteed jackpot (jackpot A to D), and the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is all lost. If so, this indicates that the game can be played in an advantageous variable probability mode. This door breakthrough mode is the same as the fixed variable mode except that the second special symbol reserved ball is present. That is, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is high (1/10), and the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64. The probability that all the reserved balls of the 4 second special symbols accumulated during the jackpot will be missed is approximately 65.6% (9/10 to the 4th power), so the door breakthrough mode is 65.6%. This can be said to be a situation in which a variable mode can be expected.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 591, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another mode only in the case of a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 591, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot (jackpot A to C) and the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round, the game shifts to the door breakthrough mode after the jackpot ends. . As described above, in jackpots A to C, the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 by simply hitting the right ball in one round. In addition, if the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (does not win a V prize) due to the player not hitting the ball, etc., the game state after the jackpot is set to normal mode again. be done.

As shown in the middle part of FIG. 591, the door breakthrough mode is shifted to another mode not only when a jackpot is achieved, but also when all variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are completed. That is, as shown in FIG. 591, when the variable display based on the reserved balls of all the second special symbols is completed in the door breakthrough mode, the mode shifts to the variable probability mode.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot D, which is determined at a rate of 5% of the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the ball passes through the almost guaranteed variable switch 65e3, so after the jackpot, you can enter the door breakthrough mode again. to move to. In addition, if the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (does not win a V prize) due to the player not hitting the ball, etc., the gaming state after the jackpot is set to normal mode. . On the other hand, if the jackpot is either jackpot E or jackpot F, which is determined at a rate of 95% when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the ball is sent to the special winning slot 65a in the first round. Since it is difficult to let the ball enter the ball, the ball almost never passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 591, after jackpots E and F end, the mode shifts to the normal mode.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 591, the mode changes from the variable probability mode to another mode only when a jackpot is achieved. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 591, if the lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot (jackpot A to C) and the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round, the game enters the door breaking mode after the jackpot ends. Transition. Since jackpots A to C are all jackpot types that allow the ball to easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3, after the jackpot ends, the mode almost shifts to the door breakthrough mode. In addition, if the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (does not win a V prize) due to the player not hitting the ball, etc., the gaming state after the jackpot is set to normal mode. .

In this way, in this seventh control example, by going back and forth between the three types of modes, the lottery for the second special symbol that is executed based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot is all out. , it is possible to realize a unique gaming experience in which the game can be played in an advantageous variable probability mode. In a general pachinko machine, it is a favorable event for the player to hit the jackpot again while on hold after the jackpot ends (so-called playing consecutive games on hold), but in the pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example, The player can be given an advantage in the hope that consecutive wins will not occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide novel gameplay that is different from that of a general pachinko machine, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game.

Returning to FIG. 584, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 60322) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. Various processes are executed based on the signal output from 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 60322) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 606) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs turning on and off from a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable display effects ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to the device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. FIG. 592(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 includes at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the audio lamp control device 113 selects, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, miss, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command). ) is used to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. This makes it possible to determine even more diverse variations. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by the main controller 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 592(b), the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 592(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a secondary fluctuation time counter. 223f, a breakthrough effect counter 223g, a game state storage area 223h, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area consisting of one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. There is. Winning information is stored in each area. In this pachinko machine 10, when a starting winning occurs in the main control device 110, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired according to the starting winning. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various information (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) that will be obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn, and the predicted various information is , is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts various information notified by the winning information command (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) as winning information, and converts the winning information into the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the four vacant areas (1st to 4th areas) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). be done. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110 up to four times, and The symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and displays the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The value of counter 203e cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and counts the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, or the main control device 110 displays a special symbol. When the fluctuation display in is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reservation indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction The pitch count command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol from the held ball number command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4208 in FIG. 618). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. Therefore, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the held ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of held balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol held ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol held ball number counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send to.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it displays the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113, and the second special Image drawing is controlled so that the number of reserved balls symbols equal to the value of the number of reserved balls counter 223c are displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110. Its value is changed in synchronization with 203e. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while being synchronized with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 618), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S4802 in FIG. 624). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 617) executed by the MPU 221. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 618), and turned off when the stop type is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S4807 in FIG. 624). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command.

The secondary variation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol. When a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is set in the slave variation time counter 223f.

The breakthrough performance counter 223g is a counter that indicates the number of remaining doors to be breached before transitioning to the variable probability mode in the door breakthrough mode performance (see FIG. 6630). Based on the value of this breakthrough performance counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the door breakthrough mode performance has ended.

The gaming state storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. This gaming state storage area 223h is updated every time a state command is received from the main controller 110, which is output every time there is a change in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (see S4210 in FIG. 618). Note that the gaming state storage area 223h is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured such that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower two bits. More specifically, for example, the lowest bit indicates whether or not the symbol is in a time-saving state, and the second lower bit indicates whether or not it is in a probability-changing state of a special symbol. Therefore, in the "normal mode", the lower two bits are "00B", while in the "door breaking mode" and the "probability variable mode", the lower two bits are "11B". The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can grasp the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the gaming status storage area 223h.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and a timer that measures the performance time. are doing. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 618) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. This is used to control the performance (performance) and continuous preview performance. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 593.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 575). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 606).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 575) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 593. FIG. 593 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 625) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 625) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 598), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 627(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, while NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until the third symbol display device 81 displays any image.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw an image; There is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted. Therefore, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, the power-on variation image area 235b is displayed when a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 using a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 625).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 594. FIG. 594 shows the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image area 235a as shown in FIG. 594(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 performs the display control as shown in FIG. 594(b). As shown in FIG. 594(c), on the display screen of the power-on main image, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 594(c), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery held in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in Figure 594(b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Figure 594(c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Furthermore, when the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 594(b) and 594(c) are alternately drawn. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 593, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 595, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 595 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 595(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sandy beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", respectively.

As shown in FIG. 595, the back images corresponding to each back surface A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scroll images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When it is decided to change the back type and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the area between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scrolling image, and the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches an image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 595(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to positions a to position d are stored in the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage with the initial stage "Sandy Beach Stage" displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the "Sandy Beach Stage" that is frequently displayed. By making all the data reside permanently in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load placed on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 595(b), on the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", only the image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, the image between position a and position b, is for permanent use. It is stored in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235; Therefore, it is necessary to use a RAM with a very large capacity, which may lead to an increase in cost.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, when the stage is changed, the initial position of the back image that is first displayed is set in the range from position a to position a' (or in the range shown in FIGS. 595(a) to 595(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 595(a) and 595(b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, when a stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image data can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone as time passes. It can be displayed. Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored on the rear surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back side B, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this time, the range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Note that on the back side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to back side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 593) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the subarea dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on the back side B, the image data stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display images between positions a to c that are scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 593, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 579), numbered from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable production, the third symbol display device It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variable performance is not started immediately in step 81.

In addition, the third symbol area 235d includes main symbols that are not numbered from "0" to "9" and include a main symbol consisting of a backward symbol such as a wooden box, a backward symbol and a character such as a plane, a wrapping cloth, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of an auxiliary pattern imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a winning start does not start even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. It will be done. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Adventurer" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and the data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character pattern area 235e, so that the display When changing the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but changes the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data stored in advance in the image controller 237, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back side of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a storage image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, opening presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss is finally displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

The opening performance is a performance to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect to notify the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending performance is a performance for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening performance, a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 596. FIG. 596 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image displayed on the back side of the sprite will be. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back surface is determined by whether to display either the back surface A or B that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (either "Sandy Beach Stage" or "Deep Sea Stage"), or to display a back surface that is different from back surfaces A and B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A and B as the drawing target, Furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, we will explain the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information by the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current fluctuating performance, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is being displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the example of FIG. 596 is the last address of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 598), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the process of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 597. FIG. 597 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as mentioned above, the transfer data table is the one that is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 597). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 597 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 597, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 598), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 597, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIGS. 594(a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a flag to indicate. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 625) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 625). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 636(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 627(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 627(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 627(b), S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 628 to 632) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 633 to 635) are executed.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 636(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 636(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 637) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 598), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of the image drawing instructions for the image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and writes an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 598), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 598), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 627(b ), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 633) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 598), and obtains the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 598. FIG. 598 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Pattern 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite such as a pattern) is described for that sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and an obtained image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 adjusts the image data according to the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (Character 1, Character 2, . . . , Pending pitch number symbol 1, Pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 627(b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 633). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 625) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 637) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 637). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 637). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 66).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 627(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<About the control process of the main controller in the seventh control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 599 to 615. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 599 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this control example). 399, 99, 99, 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed, which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104), and then, A starting prize winning process accompanying a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 600 to 602.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process is executed as the ball passes through the through gate 67. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 604 and 605. After executing the through gate passage process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process starts when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 600, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 600 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed in step 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting a jackpot or a small jackpot (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether either the medium jackpot flag 203r or the medium small win flag 203s is on. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the special symbol is neither a big hit nor a small hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), acquire the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display is reserved based on the lottery of the second special symbol). (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A held ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 608) to be described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol held ball number counter 203e of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the number of reserved balls command by the process of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. The data is shifted and the process proceeds to S213.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the first special symbol The number of reservations N1) of the variable display based on the lottery is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209).

In the process of S209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 608) to be described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

After setting the number of reserved balls command by the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S209), and the process goes to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process ends. The details of this special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 601.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q is updated by subtracting 1 (S214), and the updated fluctuation time counter is Based on the value of 203q, it is determined whether the variable time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). That is, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q updated in the process of S214 has become 0. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the time has not passed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). Setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 601. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, it is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2. Then, one of the jackpots A to F is determined.

In addition, in this control example, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is lit in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is lit, and when the jackpot C occurs, the red LED is lit. , the green LED is turned on, and in the case of a jackpot D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, if it is off, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S216 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set to off (S219), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S220), and the process moves to S221. do. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the process of S219, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 608) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, a jackpot effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), the process of S219 and S220 is skipped and the process moves to S221.

The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio output during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 608), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it acquires the gaming status included in the status command. Thereby, the state grasped by the audio lamp control device 113 can be made to match the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 601, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 601 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599), and includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed (judgment of success or failure), and the first symbol This is a process for determining the production pattern (variation pattern) of the variation production performed on the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are , and the values of the stop type selection counter C3 (S301).

Next, the probability change flag 203g is read and it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability change state (S302). In the process of S302, if the variable probability flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in a variable probability state, and if the variable probability flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (not a variable probability state). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state (S302: Yes), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability times (see FIG. 585(b)). As mentioned above, 40 random numbers from 0 to 39 are set as the special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that result in a jackpot. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variable state (it is in the special symbol low probability state) (S302: No), the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 585(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability times. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value (ie, "0 to 39") that results in a winning, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, a display mode at the time of a jackpot is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 586(a)) to determine what type of jackpot is. do. As mentioned above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is considered to be jackpot A (16 round probability variable jackpot). If it is in the range of ``10 to 89'', it is determined to be a jackpot B (5 round guaranteed variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of ``90 to 99'', it is judged to be a jackpot C (2 round guaranteed variable jackpot). (See FIG. 586(a)). On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined that it is a jackpot D (16 round probability variable jackpot), If it is in the range of "5 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot E (7 round normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is judged to be a jackpot F (6 round normal jackpot) ( (See Figure 586(a)).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to F). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A to F) are set as stop types in order to stop display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is set. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 585(a)), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( (variable time).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, if it is determined that the special symbol is a miss (including a small hit) (S305: No), a display mode at the time of a miss is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the display mode of the third symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front and back, the reach is other than out of front and back, or the reach is completely off.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability times. and set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete off is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach is set other than front and back out, and "98 , 99'', the front and back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability times. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete off is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach is set other than front and back off, and "98 , 99'', the front and back off reach is set.

Next, a variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process in S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is compared. time).

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 203q (S311). Then, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in S306 or S308 (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 608). When the process of S312 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 602. FIG. 602 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. , This is a process for executing suspension processing of the values indicated by various counters when there is a starting prize.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or not (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of reservation of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d remains unchanged. If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process moves to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 608) to be described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S405, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406), and the process moves to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 into a prize (starting prize) (S407). In this process as well, similarly to the process in S401, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entry port 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of reservation of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S409).

Then, whether there is no winning in the second ball entry port 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning in the second ball entry port 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is If it is determined that the number is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S409: No), the process moves to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e that has been changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 608) to be described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol held ball number counter 203e of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the number of reserved balls command in the process of S411, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is It is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and the process moves to S413. In addition, in the process of S412, similarly to the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of S413, a pre-read process is executed to pre-read the win/fail from various counter values acquired based on the starting winnings (S413), and this process ends. The details of this prefetching process will be explained with reference to FIG. 603.

FIG. 603 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). In this pre-reading process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 was detected in the current starting winning process (see FIG. 602). (S501) If a new ball entering ball is not detected (S501: No), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that a new entering ball has been detected (S501: Yes), next, check whether the number of held balls corresponding to the detected entering ball is the upper limit (i.e., 4). If it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), it is determined whether the timing to start the variable display based on the entered ball is in the probability variable state of the special symbol. (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether the game is in a variable probability state or not according to the current gaming state and the pre-read result of the reserved balls that were reserved before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the held balls do not include a jackpot, the current gaming state will match the timing at which the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry starts, so the current gaming state will be in a variable state. It is determined that Further, if a jackpot is included in the reserved balls, the game state may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, if the probability variable jackpot is pending, the state shifts to the probability variable state after the jackpot, and if the normal jackpot is pending, the state shifts to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into account, it is determined whether the start timing of the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry is in a variable probability state.

In the process of S503, if it is determined that the start of the fluctuation based on the currently detected entering ball is in the probability change state of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the entering ball opening where the entering ball was detected and the high probability state. The lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained based on the first winning random number table (S504), and the process moves to S506. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start of fluctuation is a special symbol low probability state (S503: No), based on the type of ball entrance where the ball was detected and the first random number table for low probability times. Then, the lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained (S505), and the process moves to S506.

In the process of S506, which is executed after the process of S504 or S505, a prize information command is set based on the type of the ball entrance where the current ball was detected and the lottery result obtained in the process of S504 or S505. (S506), this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 608) to be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it stores the type of ball entrance and the lottery result notified by the winning information command in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 604, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 604 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599), and is used to display the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry hole. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the electric accessory 64.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S601: Yes), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (number of times M of pending variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the period in which the special symbols are in the variable probability state and the period in which the normal symbols are in the time-saving state match. Therefore, in the process of S608, if the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on, it is determined that the time saving state is a normal symbol, and if it is off, it is determined that it is a normal state of a normal symbol.

In the process of S608, if it is determined that the time is shortened for normal symbols (S608: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability times are used. Based on this, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number table for normal symbols for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 586(b)).

In the process of S608, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S608: No), the process moves to S610. In the process of S610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low Based on the normal symbol per random number table for probability time, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the normal symbol per random number table for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is determined to be a normal symbol win. It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 586(b)).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol win (S611), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S611: Yes), The display mode at the time of winning is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (whether the probability change flag 203g is on) (S614), and if the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S614: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 The fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the probability variation flag 203g is off) (S614: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S616), this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S617). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S615 or the process of S616 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S617, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S617: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 634) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 will be changed. When the process is finished, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed is started on the second symbol display device 83, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol fluctuation process is a normal symbol win? is determined (S619). If the current lottery result is a hit for the normal symbol (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether the regular symbol is in the time saving state (that is, whether the probability change flag 203g is on) (S620), and the time saving state is determined. If not (S620: No), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S621), and the process is performed. The process moves to S523. On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the normal symbol time is being shortened (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 are set to "1 second x 2 times" (S622), and the process moves to S623.

In the process of S623, the opening time determined in the process of S621 or S622 and the opening/closing control start of the number of openings are set (S623), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 608) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the process of S621 or the process of S622 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped and this process is ended.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 605. FIG. 605 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal ball entry opening 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance ball opening 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry ball opening 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 1 is added to the value (M) of 203f (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

FIG. 606 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout firing control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 607, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 607 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 575) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process moves to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S914 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S914 in such a case. Note that, as described later in the process of S1015 in FIG. 608, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S914). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start payout control of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S915, S916).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S915, S916) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S915, S916) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the process of S916 is completed, the process moves to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S909), and the process moves to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various productions. After the process of S910 is completed, the probability variation flag 203g is read out (S911), and a state command is set based on the state of the read probability variation flag 203g. This status command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the current gaming status. After the process of S912 is completed, interrupts are permitted (S911), and the process moves to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 608, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 608 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of S1009 and S1010 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 599), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). (S1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599), and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 602) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, when the gaming state is changed, a state command for notifying the change in the gaming state is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each jackpot round, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have won. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of this jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 609.

When the process of S1004 is completed, next, when there is a small win state, a small win control process is executed to open or close the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1005). In the small win control process, the specific winning hole 65a is opened at the start of the small win, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed during the opening period of the small win or whether a specified number of balls have won. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in this control example, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of this small hit control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 614.

When the process of S1005 is completed, next, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control opening and closing of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S1006). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 604), opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or the process of S522 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 604) are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 601), a variation display according to the variation pattern is changed to the first symbol display. Starting at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is lit, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is lit, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the red LED lights up.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 601) ends, the first symbol display device 37, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 601). A stop indication (lit indication) is given on the device 37.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device 83 (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or S516 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 604), the second symbol display device 83 The variable display starts at . As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the normal symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit. In addition, the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83 when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 604). The current variation display is ended, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or S513 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 604). (lit display).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM 203 stores information on the occurrence of a power outage (S1009), and if the RAM 203 does not store information on the occurrence of a power outage (S1009: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process moves to S1001, and each process from S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010: No), the time period until the predetermined time has elapsed, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (both 399 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1001 to S1008 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1009, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 606 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S1014). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is turned off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 609, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 609 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 608), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot, and controls the execution of various effects in the special winning hole 65a. This is a process for opening or closing.

In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609), first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is to be started. In the process of S1101, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set to notify the start of a jackpot opening period (S1102). The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 608) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the opening effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1102, the jackpot flag 203r is set to ON (S1103), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1004, if there is no special symbol jackpot (S1104: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105), and if it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes). ), executes a jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning hole 65a according to the number of rounds (S1106), and ends this process. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 610.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is determined that it is not the start time of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start time of the ending effect (S1107). Specifically, when the special game state (all rounds of the jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out has ended, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect.

In the process of S1107, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1107: Yes), an ending command is set (S1108), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 608) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1107, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1109). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending performance. In the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: Yes), then a jackpot end process is executed to set the gaming state after the jackpot ends (S1110), and this process ends. do. The details of this jackpot ending process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 611.

In the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special gaming state) (S1109: No), a winning process is executed to perform processing according to the winning in the specific winning opening 65a (S1111). . The details of this winning process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 612. After the winning process (S1111) is finished, an abnormality process is executed to determine whether the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a is normally ejected (S1112), and this process ends. Details of this abnormality processing (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 613.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 610. FIG. 610 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1106). This jackpot operation setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 610) is started, first, opening of the specific winning hole 65a is set (S1201), and then it is determined whether it is the start timing of one round (S1202). In the process of S1202, if it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S1202: Yes), the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1203), and the process moves to S1204. On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if it is determined that the current round is not the first round, the process of S1203 is skipped and the process moves to S1204. In the process of S1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to newly start is set (S1204), and this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 608) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 (see S4404 in FIG. 620). Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 610), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the special discharge channel 65e2 can be set to be passable in the first round. can. As a result, in jackpots A to D, if the player hits right in the first round, the ball will almost certainly pass through the probability change switch 65e3, so after the jackpot ends, the probability change mode (special symbol probability change state and , normal symbol time saving state). Also, in the case of jackpots E and F, although the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON in the first round, as mentioned above, the opening period of the opening/closing door 65f1 is extremely short (0.2 seconds). Since it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during one round, there is almost no possibility that the ball will pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, if the jackpot is either E or F, the normal mode can be set after the jackpot ends. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol, which determines one of the jackpot types A to C in the case of a jackpot, is made into a lottery that is advantageous for the player, and the lottery with a high probability (95%) in the case of a jackpot. The lottery of the second special symbol in which either the jackpot E or F is determined by the percentage) can be made a lottery disadvantageous for the player.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 611. FIG. 611 is a flowchart showing this jackpot ending process (S1110). This jackpot end process (S1110) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609), and is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends, as described above.

In this jackpot end process (S1110), first, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S1301). In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is on (S1301: Yes), it means that the ball passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so set the variable probability flag 203g to ON. The state after the jackpot is set to variable probability mode (S1302), and the process moves to S1303. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the probability change setting flag 203h is off (S1301: No), the process of S1302 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S1303. Since the probability variable flag 203g is reset to OFF at the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 600), by skipping the process of S1302, the probability variable flag 203g is turned off after the jackpot. That is, the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends.

In the process of S1303, a status command is set based on the status of the probability change flag 203g (S1303). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 608) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it updates the gaming status storage area 223h in accordance with the gaming status notified by the status command. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot flag 203r and the variable probability setting flag 203h are set to OFF (S1304), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot ending process (see FIG. 611), it is possible to accurately set the gaming state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

Next, details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 612. FIG. 612 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning in the specific winning hole 65a.

In this winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the current round validity period is in effect (S1401). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the opening state of the specific winning a prize hole 65a until the end of the interval period. In the process of S1401, if it is not the round validity period (S1401: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that the current round validity period is reached (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a winning in the specific winning hole 65a has been detected (S1402). If a winning is detected (S1402: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1403), and a winning command is set to indicate that a winning to the specific winning opening 65a has been detected. (S1404), the process moves to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if a win to the specific winning hole 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the process of S1403 and S1404 is skipped, and the process moves to the process of S1405.

In the process of S1405, it is determined whether the value of the prize winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405), and if the value of the winning prize number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405: Yes), the process moves to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, if it is determined that the value of the prize winning number counter 203j is 6 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406), and if the round time has elapsed, (S1406: Yes), the process moves to S1407. In addition, in the process of S1406, if the current jackpot is a jackpot A to D, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the round, and if the jackpot is a jackpot E or F, the round starts. When 0.2 seconds have passed since then, it is determined that the round time has elapsed.

In the process of S1407, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is set to be closed (S1407), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning a prize opening 65a is set to be closed is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether the current closing of the specific prize opening 65a is based on the end of one round (S1409). If it is determined that the closing is based on the end of one round (S1409: Yes), the flow path solenoid (Definitely variable solenoid) 65k is set to OFF (S1410), and the process moves to S1411. On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the current closing of the specific prize opening 65a is due to the completion of a round other than the first round (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 65k is turned on. is not set, the process skips S1410 and moves to S1411.

In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, probability variation valid flag 203n, and round end flag 203t are set to ON (S1411), and the process moves to S1412. Further, if it is determined in the process of S1405 that the value of the winning prize counter is 6 or less (S1405: No), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), The process from S1411 to S1411 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1412.

In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag 203t is on (S1412), and if the round end flag 203t is off (S1412: No), the process moves to S1413. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round end flag 203t is on in the process of S1412 (S1412: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203n is on (S1416). In the process of S1416, if the probability variation valid flag 203n is off (S1416: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if the variable variable valid flag 203n is on (S1416: No), 1 is added to the value of the variable variable valid timer 203o (S1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the variable variable valid timer 203o is the upper limit value ( S1418). If the value of the variable probability valid timer 203o is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process moves to S1413, and the process of monitoring the variable probability switch 65e3 and updating the variable probability setting flag 203h is executed. As a result, if the variable probability valid timer 203o is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, and therefore the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time required to brush the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time during which it is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent a ball from being improperly passed through the probability change switch 65e3 and being given a probability change state.

On the other hand, if the value of the variable variable effective timer 203o is the upper limit (S1418: Yes), the variable variable effective flag 203n and the round end flag 203t are set to OFF (S1419), and the value of the variable variable effective timer 203o is reset (S1420). ), this process ends.

In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1413), and if the ball has not passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1413: No), the process moves to S1414. On the other hand, if the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i (S1414), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1413), and this processing is performed. end.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 613. FIG. 613 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormality process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609), and as described above, it is determined whether the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was normally ejected. This is a process for

In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether the current period is in the round validity period (S1501), and if it is not in the round validity period (S1501: No), the process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6(b)) (S1502).

In the process of S1502, if it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203p (S1503), and the process moves to S1504. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if the ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S1504.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203k is off (S1504: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504: Yes), it is during the pitch period, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is updated by adding 1 (S1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit (S1506: Yes), then the number of ejected balls (the total value of the value of the variable passing counter 203i and the value of the number of ejected balls counter 203p) wins the prize. It is determined whether the number matches the number (value of the winning number counter 203j) (S1507).

In the process of S1507, if it is determined that the number of ejected pieces and the number of won pieces do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process moves to S1509. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activity in which the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge channel 65e2 and passed through the probability change switch 54e3.

On the other hand, in the process of S1507, if it is determined that the number of ejected pieces and the number of winning pieces match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is reset (S1510). Thereafter, the values of the winning pieces counter 203j, the ejected pieces counter 203p, and the variable passing counter 203i are reset (S1511), and this process is ended.

By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 613), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a is not ejected normally due to a ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65. It can be detected early and notified.

Next, details of the small hit control process (S1005) will be described with reference to FIG. 614. As described above, this small win control process is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 when there is a small winning state.

In this small hit control process (see FIG. 614), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit (S1601), and if it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit (S1601: Yes), the small hit is started. An opening command indicating a winning opening is set (S1602), a small winning medium flag 203s is set on (S1603), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small win (S1601: No), then it is determined whether the small win is in progress (S1604), and if it is determined that the small win is not in progress (S1604) :No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1604, if it is determined that there is a small win (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a based on the small win (S1604: Yes). S1605), if it is the start timing of the opening operation (S1605: Yes), the opening of the specific prize opening 65a (opening of the opening/closing door 65f1) is set (S1606), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the opening operation (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period (S1607), and if it is the start timing of the ending period (S1607: Yes), an ending command indicating that the small winning ending period has started is set (S1608), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1607: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the small hit (S1609), and if it is the end timing of the small win. (S1609: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203s is set to OFF (S1610), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1609, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small win (S1609: No), a small win medium winning process is executed to determine the end of the small win open period (S1611). Details of this small hit medium winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG. 615.

When the small hit medium winning process (S1611) is completed, abnormality processing is executed to determine whether the number of balls that entered the specific winning hole 65a matches the number of balls that were ejected (S1612), and this process ends. do. This abnormality process (S1612) is the same process as the abnormality process (see FIG. 613) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609), so the details thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 615, details of the small win medium winning process (S1611) for determining the end of the small win open period will be described. FIG. 615 is a flowchart showing the small hit medium winning process (S1611). In the small winning medium winning process (S1611), first, it is determined whether or not the small winning round is within the valid period (S1701), and if it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S1701: No), the book is entered as is. Finish the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not winning of the ball into the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1702), and winning of the ball is detected. If it is determined that this has been done (S1702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the prize winning counter 203j (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1702 that no winning has been detected for the specific winning hole 65a (S1702: No), the process of S1703 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1704.

In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the value of the prize winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704), and if it is less than 7 (S1704: No), then the round time (0.2 seconds) has elapsed. It is determined whether it has been executed (S1705). In the process of S1705, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1705: No), this process is directly ended in order to continue the small winning opening period. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1704 that the value of the winning prize counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704: Yes), and if it is determined that the round time has elapsed in the process of S1705 (S1705: Yes) , which means that the condition for ending the small winning opening period has been met, so the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S1706), and this process is ended.

In addition, it is almost impossible to enter 7 or more balls into the special winning hole 65a during the round time of 0.2 seconds for a small hit, so if you get a small win, it is almost impossible to enter the special winning hole 65a. After the winning hole 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds, the specific winning hole 65a is closed.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 616 to 624. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 616. FIG. 616 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup processing may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), and the power-off processing in S4116 (see Figure 617). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 617, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 617), it executes the power-off process in S4116. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4116 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S4116 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1506. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process moves to S1504 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process moves to S4008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process moves to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1616 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. If the process is started in response to this, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process moves to S4008. .

In the processing of S4002, if the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S4116. This is started when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, the power-off process is in progress, so the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

In the process of S4005, if the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set ( S4006), the process moves to S4008. By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

On the other hand, in the process of S4005, if an abnormality is detected in the read/write check in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and the loop continues indefinitely until the power is cut off. . An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4116 is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 617). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, so the reason why the process in S4008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main controller 110.

After the process of S4010, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 analyzes the notification contents of the status command set during the start-up process (see FIG. 603) (S4011), and stores the game status storage area 223h according to the analysis result. (S4012). Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time the power is turned on. After processing in S4012, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process moves to main processing.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S4008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after, for example, the power was completely shut off. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processes of S4010 to S4013 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004 when the process reaches S4008 from S4004 through the process in S4006. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 617, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 617 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main processing was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the previous process of S4101 was executed. If not (S4101: No), the process moves to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether 1 ms has elapsed or not, whereas S4102 to S4110 are mainly related to display (effect) and do not need to be edited in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S4111 and the variable display setting process in S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S4112 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S4102 to S4112 are sent to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108, which will be described later (S4103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and this notification is performed using the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process is performed in which a reservation lamp (not shown) is lit according to the values of the first special symbol reservation ball counter 223b and the second special symbol reservation ball counter 223c.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/production processing, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Further, if the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, a process for changing the stage is performed and a rear image change command is set for the display control device 114. By including information regarding the type of back image corresponding to the changed stage in this back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a preview character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 will display the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, and pressing the frame button 22 during the reach effect will display the expectation of a jackpot. It is also possible to change the effect to one that can be held, or use the frame button 22 as a decision button for selecting one of the ready-to-reach effects from a plurality of ready-to-reach effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S4107 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal performance execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S4110 is completed, the process moves to S4111. In the process of S4111, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S4111). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 618. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. Note that details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 624.

When the process of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. In the process of S4113, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are set to on (S4115), and the power-off is performed. The process is executed (S4116). After executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he or she can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 618, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 618 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 617) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is a process for

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S4201). In the process of S4201, if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4202), and the fluctuation pattern type is determined from the received fluctuation pattern command. is extracted (S4203), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referenced when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 624) to be described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4204). If the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206), and the main Finish the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referenced when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 624) to be described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4204, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4207). . If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. (the number of times N1 of holding a variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol) or the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of holding a variable display based on the second special symbol), and extracts this value. is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4208). In addition, in the process of S1708, a display number of reserved balls command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. . After completing the process in S4208, this process ends.

Here, the number of reserved balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning) or when a special symbol lottery is held. Therefore, each time a starting prize is detected or a special symbol is drawn, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b and the second special symbol of the audio lamp control device 113 are activated by the process of S08. The value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise etc., the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 may be lower than the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110. 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of S4208 is executed, the display holding balls for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c are displayed. Several commands are set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved pitches is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4207, if it is determined that the held pitch count command has not been received (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the gaming status storage area 223h is updated in accordance with the received command (S4210). That is, based on the information corresponding to the gaming state (whether or not it is a variable probability state) notified by the status command, when the variable probability mode is notified, the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223h are set to "11B". On the other hand, if the normal mode is notified, the lower two bits of the gaming state storage area 223h are set to "00B". Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the audio lamp control device 113 can easily understand the change.

On the other hand, in the process of S4209, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S4211). In the process of S4211, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning information command process is executed to perform control according to the prefetch result of the new starting winning notified by the winning information command. (S4212), and this process ends. Details of this winning information command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 619.

In the process of S4211, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether a command related to the jackpot (one of the opening command, round number command, and ending command) has been received. (S4213). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S4213: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed to execute control corresponding to the type of jackpot-related command (S4214), and the main Finish the process. Details of this jackpot related process (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 620.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if it is determined that a command related to the jackpot has not been received (S4213: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S4215), and this process ends. In the process of S4215, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, that command is executed. This command is used to set a command so as to send the command to the display control device 114.

Next, details of the winning information command processing (S4212) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 619. FIG. 619 is a flowchart showing winning information command processing (S4212).

In the winning information command process (see FIG. 619), first, the information notified by the received winning command (information indicating the type of ball entry opening where a new starting winning was detected and the lottery result) is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S4301). When the process of S4301 is completed, it is then determined whether what was notified by the current winning information command is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302). In the process of S4302, if it is determined that what has been notified this time is not the winning information of the second special symbol (it is the winning information of the first special symbol) (S4302: No), this process is ended as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current winning information is that of the second special symbol (S4302: Yes), it is determined whether jackpots A to D are currently being executed (S4303), and the jackpot is determined to be the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302: Yes). If it is determined that any of A to D is in progress (S4303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ending period is in progress (S4304), and if it is not in the ending period, the adventurer 811 selects the mode of the key 813 in the effect of discovering the key 813 (see FIG. 580(b)) (S4305). In the process of S4305, if the current winning information corresponds to a lottery result that is a loss (small win), the proportion of those who select the key 813 with a luxurious aspect increases, and the current winning information corresponds to a jackpot E, F. If the prize winning information corresponds to , the proportion of keys 813 in poor condition (tattered) will be selected. When the process of S4305 is completed, an effect for discovering the key 813 in the mode selected in the process of S4305 is set (S4306), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4303 that jackpots A to D are not in progress (S4303: No), and if it is determined that the ending period of jackpots A to D is in progress in the process of S4304 (S4304: Yes) As a result of the player hitting the right ball during a period when the player should have hit the ball left, this means that a starting prize for the second ball entry port 640 has been detected, so the game player is instructed to stop hitting the right ball and return to hitting the left ball. A warning effect is executed to notify the person (S4307), and this process ends. This warning effect (not shown) is intended to alert the player to a stronger left-handed strike than the text "Left-handed hit" and the image of a left-pointing arrow that are displayed in the display area HR1 during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. A presentation is performed in a manner that instructs. Specifically, for example, the characters "left-handed batting" are displayed in large size on the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a sound saying "Please return to left-handed batting" is repeatedly played at maximum volume. be done. By executing this warning effect, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player from hitting right in situations other than when jackpots A to D are being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to hit the right hand during the normal mode or the variable probability mode, and from consecutively executing drawings of unfavorable second special symbols.

By executing this winning information command process, the mode of the key 813 discovered during the jackpot can be appropriately set based on the new winning information of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation of the player to enter the fixed variable mode based on the aspect of the key 813 during the execution of the door breakthrough mode performance, so that the player's play during the execution of the door breakthrough mode performance can be predicted. You can improve your interest in.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the selection ratio of the mode of the key 813 is varied simply depending on whether or not the winning information of the second special symbol newly notified by the winning information command is a loss (small win). However, the mode of the key 813 is selected based not only on the winning information based on the new winning information command but also on the winning information of the second special symbol already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Good too. Specifically, for example, before receiving the current winning information command, winning information corresponding to either jackpot E or F is found in the winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. If it is included, the configuration may be such that the proportion of keys 813 that are in poor condition (tattered) is selected regardless of the lottery result of the current winning information. With this configuration, the more the keys 813 are in poor condition (tattered), the more likely the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol, so the player can It is possible to more accurately estimate whether or not the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved balls. Also, for example, if the current winning information command and all of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a before receiving the current winning information command are wins (small wins), the selection ratio is It is also possible to provide an aspect (for example, an aspect of the diamond key 813) that increases (or is selected only in this case). By configuring in this way, when the mode is displayed, it is possible to further increase expectations for shifting to the variable probability mode.

In this seventh control example, when the winning information command corresponding to the second ball entrance 640 is received outside the execution period of jackpots A to D, a warning effect is executed, but the configuration is limited to this. isn't it. Even if a new ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaching the upper limit, a warning effect is executed if it is outside the execution period of jackpots A to D. It may also be a configuration. In particular, during the ending of jackpots A to D or during the execution of the first variable display, there is a very high possibility that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is at the upper limit. In such a case, if the player is hitting right-handed, a new starting prize will occur in the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery may be executed five or more times after the jackpot. There is a risk that the player may suffer losses. On the other hand, by setting a warning effect when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected outside the execution period of jackpots A to D, the player can avoid losing money. can be suppressed (prevented).

Next, with reference to FIG. 613, the jackpot related process (S4214) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 620 is a flowchart showing this jackpot related processing (S4214).

In the jackpot related process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S4401), and if an opening command has been received (S4401: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S4402). The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 617) executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it starts an opening effect on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the start of the jackpot. When the process of S4402 ends, the main jackpot related process (see FIG. 620) ends. In addition, if the current opening command is a command corresponding to the opening of jackpot E, F, or small win, and the door breakthrough mode performance (see Figure 6630) is being executed, the door breakthrough mode performance will be executed. It will continue as is. In this case, the configuration may be such that the opening command itself is not output to the display control device 114, or the display control device 114 side determines whether or not the door breakthrough mode performance is being executed and selects the performance mode. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4403). If it is determined that the number of rounds command has been received (S4403: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received number of rounds command (S4404), and a number of rounds command for display is set according to the extracted number of rounds. (S4405). The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 617) executed by the MPU 221. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, it starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S4405, this process ends. Note that, similarly to the case where the opening command is received, if the start timing of a new round of jackpots E and F comes while the door breakthrough mode performance is being executed, the door breakthrough mode performance continues as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4403: No), then it is determined whether a closing command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4406). If it is determined that a closing command has been received (S4406: Yes), closing command processing is executed to perform control according to the situation in which the closing command was received (S4406), and this processing ends. Details of this closure command processing (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG. 621.

In the process of S4405, if it is determined that a closing command has not been received (S4405: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4407). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4407: Yes), ending command processing is executed to perform control according to the type and situation of the ending command (S4408), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4407: No), this process is directly ended. By executing this jackpot-related process, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the jackpot.

Next, details of the above-described closure command processing (S4406) will be described with reference to FIG. 621. In this closing command processing (S4406), first, it is determined whether the type of jackpot being executed is one of jackpots A to D (S4501), and if it is determined that it is one of jackpots A to D, ( S4501: Yes), this process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is other than jackpots A to D (either jackpot E or F) (S4501: No), then the value of the breakthrough performance counter 223g is set to a value greater than 0. (that is, whether the door breakthrough mode performance (see FIG. 6630) is being executed), and if the value of the breakthrough performance counter 223g is 0 (the door breakthrough mode performance is not being executed). If it is determined (S4502: No), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4502: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4503). , it is determined whether the value of the breakthrough performance counter 223g after the subtraction has become 0 (that is, whether it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode performance) (S4504). In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the counter value after the subtraction is 1 or more (S4504: No), this process is directly ended in order to continue the door breakthrough mode performance. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after the subtraction has become 0 (S4504: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, so it will continue for the remaining period until the end of the jackpot. A result display is set (S4505), and this processing ends. Note that the result display refers to the display content that displays the total number of prize balls paid out by repeating the current jackpot and the probability variable mode, the number of jackpots, etc. on the third symbol display device 81. By setting this result display, the player can easily grasp the number of jackpots he has won, the number of prize balls he has won, etc., so it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment.

Next, details of the above-described ending command processing (S4408) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 622. As described above, this ending command process (S4408) is a process for performing control according to the type of jackpot, the game situation, etc. when the ending command is received.

In this ending command processing, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command indicating a small winning ending (S4601), and if it is determined that it is a small winning ending (S4601: Yes), a small winning ending is determined. A small hit control process is executed to perform control according to the timing of ending the process (S4602), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the ending is not a small win (S4601: No), the current ending command is output to notify that the jackpot ending has started. Therefore, it is determined whether the jackpot being executed is one of jackpots A to D (S4603).

In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is not any of the jackpots A to D (S4603: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is one of jackpots A to D (S4603: Yes), the winning information of the second special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S4604), and the winning information that has been read is read out from the winning information storage area 223a. It is determined whether the jackpot D is included in the lottery result of the reserved ball of the second special symbol indicated by the information. Incidentally, as described above, the jackpot D is the only type of jackpot among the second special symbol jackpots that is advantageous in that it is possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls, and the almost probability variable mode is set after the jackpot.

In the process of S4605, if it is determined that the jackpot D is included in the hold (S4605: Yes), a special form of door breakthrough mode is activated in which a jackpot is announced during the execution of the door breakthrough mode performance. The effect is set (S4606), and this processing ends. As mentioned above, after jackpots A to D are completed, it is basically advantageous for the player if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off. This is because if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a jackpot, there is a high probability (95% rate) that the jackpot will be either E or F, which is disadvantageous. However, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a jackpot, there may be a case where the jackpot D is advantageous to the player with a low probability (5% rate). In this case, not only can a large amount of prize balls be obtained, but also the door breakthrough mode effect is set again after the jackpot, which is more advantageous for the player than when the jackpot E or F occurs. Therefore, in this case, by setting a door breakthrough mode effect in a special notification mode, the player can easily understand that the jackpot D has been achieved.

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, if it is determined that the jackpot D is not included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol (S4605: No), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is set to 4 (S4607), Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol (S4608). In the process of S4608, if it is determined that a jackpot is included, this means that either jackpot E or F will occur during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and the game will shift to normal mode after the jackpot ends. Finally, a door breaking mode effect is set in a mode that notifies the fall to the normal mode (a mode in which breaking through the door fails) (S4609), and this processing is ended. Note that the performance time of the door breakthrough mode performance is set to the same performance time of 5.8 seconds, regardless of whether a jackpot is included or not. This 5.8 seconds is the period from the start of the ending mechanism to the end of the small hit based on the 4th reserved ball when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are missed (small hit). It is a period. In other words, in order to make it difficult for players to guess whether there is a jackpot among the reserved balls based on the performance time, the performance time of the door breakthrough mode performance is set to be the same time (4.8 seconds) regardless of the result. .

In the process of S4608, if it is determined that the jackpot is not included in the reserved balls (S4608: No), a door breaking mode effect is set to notify the final transition to the variable probability mode (S4610). ), this process ends. By executing this ending command process (see FIG. 622), it is possible to set an appropriate performance mode according to the content of the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 623, details of the above-mentioned small winning end process (S4602) will be described. This small win end process (S4602) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the ending command process (see FIG. 622) that the received ending command is a small win ending command.

As shown in FIG. 623, in the process at the end of the small hit (see FIG. 623), first, it is determined whether the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0 (that is, whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed). If the value of the breakthrough performance counter 223g is 0 (S4701: No), it means that the door breakthrough mode performance is not being executed, and the process is immediately terminated. In addition, a case where a small hit occurs outside the execution period of the door breakthrough mode performance is a case where the player intentionally or negligently performs a right-handed hit outside the execution period of jackpots A to D (the period in which left-handed hitting should be performed). be. In this case, at the time when the starting winning for the second ball entrance 640 is detected, the warning effect is set by the process of S4307 of the winning information command process (see FIG. 619), so the player has already returned to hitting left-handed. It is thought that there are. Therefore, at the end of the small win, control such as performing a warning effect again is not performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the warning performance being repeated even though the player has returned to left-handed hitting.

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (S4701: Yes), then the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4702), and the counter value after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether it has become (S4703). If it is determined in the process of S4703 that the value of the breakthrough performance counter 223g has become 0 (S4703), the door breakthrough mode performance ends with a lottery result of a loss (small win) (that is, all of the door breakthrough mode performance Since this means that the fluctuation has become out of place, a performance mode indicating entry into the definite fluctuation mode is set (S4704), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4703, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is not 0 (it is 1 or more) (S4703: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, so the main Finish the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 624, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 624 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 617) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S4801: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S4806. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4802), and then in S4803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 618). In the process, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4803).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command is generated to notify the display control device 114, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4804). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4805), and the process moves to S4806. In the process of S4805, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area.

In the process of S4806, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S4806: No), this fluctuation display is because the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110. Finish the setting process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S4807), and then the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 612) In this step, the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4808). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type obtained in the process of S4808 (S4809), and this process ends. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to stop display the third symbol with the stop type indicated by this display stop type command. be done.

<About the control process of the display control device in the seventh control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 625 to 66. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 625, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 625 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration. , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 626. FIG. 626 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the command to be executed after this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 625) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 625) (S6105), execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 626, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S6101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S6101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process of S6102 and S6102 multiple times, the process of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 625. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 636(a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S7502 in FIG. 636(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 627(b)), the simple command A determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 627(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 627(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable production is issued. If a display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation is displayed. Can perform. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, and since it takes time to transfer the data, the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 627(a). FIG. 627(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 627(b). FIG. 627(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 627(b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 628 to 632.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 633 to 635.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 636 and 637.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 598, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S6307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command judgment process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, small hit, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss) ) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process moves to S6304.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 628 to 632. First, FIG. 628 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 628, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 629(a). FIG. 629(a) is a flowchart showing the variable pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation time is actually longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted, and at the same time, the content is transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data has been set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. 628. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 629(b). FIG. 629(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of jackpot A to F, small hit, out of reach, or completely out of reach) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S6601), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 627(b)) is executed, and displays the result on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variable performance is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S6602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S6603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 will display a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 628, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 630(a). FIG. 630(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 628, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 630(b). FIG. 630(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 628, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display command is If there is an ending command (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 631. FIG. 631 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 628, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the rear image is changed. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 632(a). FIG. 632(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag is set to on (S7001), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of a change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back side A, B), the bit corresponding to the back side image type indicated by the back side image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to on. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S7002. .

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that either the back side A or B should be displayed according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, the back side image determination flag set in S7002 is used to determine whether the back side image is to be displayed. The type of back image to be displayed at a time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. 628. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no command. If (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 632(b). FIG. 632(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S7102, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 628. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), the processes of S6402 to S6418 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 627(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 629(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 629(b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command. Performs processing to discard the command without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 629(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 633 to 635. FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 633, it is first determined whether the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No ), it is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process skips steps S7202 to S7204, and proceeds to the process S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 634. FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, information such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 633. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), then the process moves to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 635. FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 633, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206, as well as the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite, Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S7209: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S7210), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S7214), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so a certain period of time has elapsed since the end of the confirmed display effect. Later, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (S7221), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 627(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image of is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 636 and 637, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 636(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 636(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 637.

Next, with reference to FIG. 636(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 636(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not finished (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process in S7601, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 627(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 628 to 632) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 633 to 635) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 637) (see S7501: No in FIG. 636(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, except for the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed using . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 637, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 637 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not finished (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type is Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally (S7712), and proceeds to the process of S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the process indicated by the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the stop type information displayed is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, the image data is transferred to the predetermined address according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 598) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. , the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process in S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 627(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh control example, when the ball is hit to the left (a game method in which the ball is fired toward the channel on the left side when viewed from the front on the game board 13), the ball is placed at a position where it is easier to enter the ball. With the first ball entry port 64 located at and a second ball entry port 640 located at a position where it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball. If the lottery of the second special symbol, which is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, results in a jackpot, it will be disadvantageous for the player (not only will the player hardly get any prize balls during the jackpot, but On the other hand, if a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, which is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, the game The system is configured such that there is a high possibility that it will be advantageous for the player (in addition to being able to win a large amount of prize balls in a jackpot, the game will shift to an advantageous probability variable mode after the jackpot). Thereby, the player can be made to want to execute the lottery of the advantageous first special symbol rather than the lottery of the disadvantageous second special symbol.

In addition, a specific prize opening 65a is provided in the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, which is opened during a jackpot and from which a large amount (11) of prize balls are paid out each time a ball enters. Similar to the second ball entry opening 640, this specific winning hole 65a allows the ball to enter when the ball is hit to the right (easy entry), and cannot enter the ball when the ball is hit to the left (difficult to enter the ball). It is located at a location where Therefore, in order to win the ball into the specific winning hole 65a during a jackpot and obtain a prize ball, it is necessary to hit the ball to the right. As described above, when the ball is hit to the right, the ball also enters the second ball entry port 640, so after hitting the jackpot, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored up to the upper limit. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to create a state in which drawings of second special symbols that are disadvantageous in the event of a jackpot are executed consecutively, so that the player can receive the second special symbols accumulated during the jackpot. The game can be played in the hope that all the reserved balls of the symbols will come off (small win). In other words, in a general pachinko machine, it is a favorable event for the player to hit the jackpot again while on hold after the jackpot ends (so-called consecutive games on hold), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, It is possible to give the player an advantage in the expectation that consecutive games on hold will not occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide novel gameplay that is different from that of a general pachinko machine, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game.

In addition, in this seventh control example, each time the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases during the execution of jackpots A to D, the lottery results of the increased number of reserved balls are read in advance, and the presentation is performed in accordance with the preread result. It is configured to execute. That is, the configuration is such that an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result will be a loss (small win) is executed. More specifically, an effect is performed in which the adventurer 811 acquires the key 813 in a manner corresponding to the pre-read result of the lottery result of the increased number of reserved balls. This effect allows the player to guess whether or not to shift to the variable probability mode during a jackpot from the appearance of the displayed key 813. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from turning into a task simply to obtain a prize ball, so it is possible to improve the player's interest during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this seventh control example, from the ending period of jackpots A to D until the elapse of the variable time of all the variable displays based on the held balls of the second special symbol, the held balls of the second special symbol are An effect is executed to inform the player whether or not there are jackpots E and F. That is, even after all the variable displays based on the second special symbol's reserved balls are finished, an effect is performed to indicate whether the gaming state will remain in the fixed variable mode or will fall into the normal mode. . By configuring the system to perform a series of effects during the ending period and during a plurality of variable displays after the jackpot, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this seventh control example, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a loss, it is configured to result in a small win with a high probability. The opening period of the specific prize opening 65a in the case of a small win is configured to be the same (0.2 seconds) as the opening period of the opening/closing door 65f1 in each round of jackpots E and F. Furthermore, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of jackpots E and F are completed is 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. . With this configuration, even if any of the 1st to 4th reserved balls of the second special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, the opening/closing until the door breakthrough mode effect ends. The series of opening and closing operations of the door 65f1 can be made the same as in the case where the variable probability mode is notified (when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are small hits). That is, regardless of whether or not the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol, the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 from the end of the jackpot until the end of the door breakthrough mode performance is , the operation can be unified to repeat closing for 1 second and opening for 0.2 seconds four times. Therefore, from the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 after the jackpot ends, it becomes difficult to determine whether the opening/closing operation is due to successive small wins or the opening/closing operation is due to a jackpot E or F. You can keep your attention on the door breaking mode production until the end. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the lottery for the second special symbol was configured to be executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specification may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. By configuring in this way, it is possible to achieve a jackpot by fluctuating the display of the first special symbol before the drawing of the disadvantageous second special symbol is executed, so during the execution of the door breakthrough mode production. , it is possible to make the player hit left-handed more aggressively. In this case, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined at a predetermined rate (for example, 10% rate). . With this configuration, it is possible to execute the first special symbol lottery one or more times during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol, increasing the chance of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. can be formed.

In the seventh control example, left-handed hitting is reported from the start of the ending period, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is only necessary to inform the player not to continue hitting right-handed after the jackpot ends. For example, in the final round of a jackpot, the remaining number of balls entered until the end of the final round is displayed, and a message saying "With remaining ○ balls left-handed" is displayed. '' may be displayed so that the player can switch to left-handed batting immediately after the final round termination condition is met. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the second ball entry port 640 after the jackpot ends.

In this seventh control example, when the normal symbol time is shortened, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 3 seconds, and when the normal symbol hits, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a is 1 second × Although the configuration is such that the number of times is set twice, it is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the jackpot, only the fluctuation time of the first normal symbol may be set to a longer time (for example, 10 seconds) than the period until all fluctuations based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are completed. good. With this configuration, while the door breakthrough mode performance is being executed, the normal symbol will not be a hit, so from the opening time of the normal symbol, the second special symbol will be a jackpot in the lottery, and the normal symbol will be in a low probability state. It can be difficult to determine whether the symbol has fallen or whether the time-saving state of the normal symbol is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the result of the door breaking mode performance.

In the present seventh control example, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a loss, it is configured so that it almost becomes a small win, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, if the second special symbol is a miss, instead of configuring it so that it is just a miss, the variation time in the case of a jackpot is changed according to the number of variations after the jackpot, and the door breakthrough mode The period from the start of the production until the jackpot of the second special symbol starts, and the period from the start of the door breakthrough mode production to the end of all the variable displays corresponding to the failure of the second special symbol four times. A configuration may be adopted in which the periods (periods until shifting to variable probability mode) are made to match. More specifically, after a jackpot, if a jackpot is achieved in the first drawing of the second special symbol, 4 seconds is set as the fluctuation time, and if a jackpot is achieved in the second drawing of the second special symbol. , 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time, and if a jackpot is achieved in the 3rd drawing of the 2nd special symbol, 2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time, and a jackpot is achieved in the 4th drawing of the 2nd special symbol. In this case, the variable time may be set to 1 second. By configuring in this way, the total fluctuation time is 4 seconds (1 second x 4) when all the reserved balls of the 4 second special symbols are missed, and when it becomes a jackpot on the way, The period (4 seconds) until the jackpot starts can be made to match. Therefore, during the 4 seconds after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the door breakthrough mode performance, the specific prize opening 65a will not be opened even if the jackpot of the second special symbol is included in the reserved balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is known from the operation of the specific winning hole 65a whether or not to shift to the variable probability mode before the door breakthrough mode effect ends. In addition, during the period from the start of the door breakthrough mode performance until the start of the second special symbol jackpot, a variable display corresponding to the failure of the second special symbol four times after the start of the door breakthrough mode performance will be displayed. If it is longer than the period until all ends, at least the jackpot will not start during the execution of the door breakthrough mode performance. Therefore, when the second special symbol simply hits the jackpot, a configuration may be adopted in which the variation time is uniformly set to be equal to or greater than the sum of the variation times of the variation displays corresponding to four misses of the second special symbol.

In this seventh control example, the opening period of the specific winning hole 65a in rounds 1 to 4 in jackpots E and F is configured to be the same (0.2 seconds) as the opening period of the specific winning hole 65a in the small winning. However, the period may be arbitrarily determined as long as it is impossible for the player to discern whether it is a jackpot opening period or a small winning opening period by experiencing the difference. Specifically, for example, in the present seventh control example, the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous, and the first special symbol lottery is advantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second special symbol lottery may be advantageous, and the first special symbol lottery may be advantageous. Then, if the lottery for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the door breakthrough mode performance will be executed to successfully breakthrough the door, and if all the lottery results for the second special symbol are misses, the door breakthrough will fail. It may also be configured such that a performance is performed. This makes it possible to realize an easier-to-understand gaming experience in which if the player succeeds in breaking through the door, he or she wins the jackpot. Furthermore, in this case, the first ball entry port 64 may be deleted and only the second ball entry port 640 may be provided. That is, it may be configured such that only the second special symbol lottery is executed.

In this seventh control example, while the fluctuation based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after a jackpot is being executed, it becomes difficult to tell whether the lottery of the second special symbol has resulted in a jackpot or a small jackpot. Although the opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a is set as shown in FIG. For example, even in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small win and a jackpot type in which an action similar to a small win (the same action or an action that the player cannot distinguish from a small win) are set may be determined. good.

In this seventh control example, when the ending period of the jackpot starts, it is determined whether all the reserved balls of the second special symbol that were reserved during the jackpot will come off (small hit) (transfer to the probability variable mode). Although the present invention is configured to be executed over a period from 1 to 3 until all the second special symbols are drawn, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least part of the transition to the variable probability mode may be configured to notify that the mode will shift to the variable probability mode during the ending period. That is, at the start of the ending period, the lottery results of the reserved balls of the second special symbol are pre-read, and if it is determined that all the pre-read results are wins (small wins), the probability change will be made during the jackpot ending period with a predetermined probability. It may be configured to notify the transition to the mode. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the transition to the variable probability mode more quickly, thereby making the player happy. In addition, if you want to notify the transition to fixed mode during the ending period, you can perform a performance that breaks through four doors at once, or you can perform a performance that is different from the normal door breakthrough mode performance. Good too. Here, as a production that is different from the normal door breakthrough mode production, for example, it may be configured to perform a production in which the theme song of the adventurer 811 is played, or the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be blacked out. After that, an effect may be performed in which the words "Probability Variable Mode Confirmed" appear on the display screen. Furthermore, if a production that confirms the transition to the fixed variation mode is executed during the ending period, the production will be continued until the variation based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol ends (i.e., until the fixed variation mode starts). ) may be configured to continue running. By configuring this way, a player who learns of the transition to the fixed-variable mode early (during the ending period) will be informed about the transition to the fixed-variable mode during the remaining period until the transition to the fixed-variable mode. You can immerse yourself in the aftertaste. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel satisfied.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the variable probability mode is notified before the ending period. More specifically, when a starting winning corresponding to the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected and the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated based on the winning information command. , it is determined whether all winning information of the second special symbol is a loss (small win). Then, when all the winning information is a loss (small win), a configuration may be adopted in which an effect indicating a transition to the variable probability mode is executed at that point. In addition, as a production indicating the transition to the variable probability mode, for example, the adventurer 811 may discover the key 813 in a special (premium) mode, or, for example, the display mode may be the same as usual and the jackpot will be announced. It may also be configured to change the music played inside to a special (premium) song.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 639 to 656. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2, and the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 is activated during a jackpot. When the ball passes through, the game state after the jackpot is set to variable probability mode. Further, as long as the probability change switch 65e3 is passed, the probability change mode and the jackpot are repeated indefinitely.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example, the gaming state after a jackpot is determined in advance for each type of jackpot. In addition, the configuration is such that an upper limit is set on the number of consecutive times that the special symbol can be in a variable probability state, and when the upper limit is reached, even if the jackpot is won, the special symbol is set to a low probability state after the jackpot. There is.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, in order to prevent the player from hitting the right ball during normal times (states other than jackpot winnings), when a starting winning for the second ball entrance 640 is detected during normal times, It was configured to execute a warning performance.

On the other hand, in the present eighth control example, an electric accessory 640b is provided for the second ball entrance 640, and under normal conditions, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while being obstructed by the electric accessory 640b. It is structured so that it is difficult to In addition, during the jackpot state, by controlling the electric accessory 640b provided in association with the second ball entrance 640 to be easily opened, the second special It is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the design can be accumulated up to the upper limit number. In addition, by providing the electric accessory 640b in association with the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a provided in connection with the first ball entrance 64 in the seventh control example is deleted. .

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is that the configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, The configuration of the RAM 203 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed. There are some changes. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 7 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 639, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 639, in the eighth control example, the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is set in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Furthermore, on the downstream side of the normal ball entry port 67, a variable prize winning device 650 and a second ball entry port 640 are provided. The variable winning device 650 is provided in place of the variable winning device 65 in the seventh control example, and serves as a winning hole from which 13 prize balls are paid out every time a ball enters the specific winning hole 650a of the variable winning device 650. It is configured. The specific winning hole 650a is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can enter (easy) and a closed state in which a ball cannot enter (difficult), and is opened in each round of jackpot. set to state.

As shown in FIG. 639, the second ball entry port 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be variable between a closed position that prevents the ball from entering the second ball entry port 640 and an open position that allows the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. This example shows a case where it is variable. Although details will be described later, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled so that the ball enters the ball more easily in the low probability state of the normal symbol than in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. be exposed. More specifically, when the normal symbol is in a high probability state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is slightly higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol (199/240 → 200/240), but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer. As the time increases (from 3 seconds to 30 seconds), the opening period of the electric accessory 640b when the normal symbol hits becomes shorter (from 1 second x 2 times to 0.1 seconds x 1 time). Therefore, as a whole, it is more difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the variable probability mode where a high probability state of normal symbols is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it will be difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the disadvantageous second special It is possible to suppress the drawing of symbols from being executed. In addition, during a jackpot where the normal symbol is set to a low probability state, balls are more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640, so it is possible to easily accumulate reserved balls up to the upper limit number during a jackpot. .

Note that by attaching the electric accessory 640b to the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a that was attached to the first ball entrance 64 in the seventh control example is deleted. Further, a winning device 655 for special drawing 1 small winning is provided below the first ball entrance 64. This special drawing 1 small winning prize winning device 655 allows the ball to enter the interior by setting the special drawing 1 small winning prize opening 655a in an open state when a small winning is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol. The ball is ready to enter. In this 8th control example, when the variable probability mode is entered, the probability of getting a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is greatly increased (1/1000 → 989/1000). The number of balls consumed in this case is equal to the number of prize balls that are paid out when the first special symbol is drawn into a small win and the ball enters the special pattern 1 small win prize opening 655a. It is composed of By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency when a left-handed hit is made during the variable probability mode without using the electric accessory 64a in the seventh control example.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 639, in this eighth control example, the distribution member 660 (see FIG. 574) provided in the seventh control example is removed, and the distribution member 660 (see FIG. 574) is removed, and The flow path is branched into approximately three directions. That is, there is a flow path toward the second ball entry port 640, a flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and an out port 66 without heading toward any of these (second ball entry port 640, specific winning port 650a). The flow path is branched into a flow path that flows downward toward the flow path. With this configuration, similarly to the seventh control example, it is possible to cause a part of the ball hit aiming at the specific winning hole 650a by hitting the right hand during a jackpot to enter the second ball entering hole 640. can. Therefore, the configuration can be such that the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the upper limit number during the jackpot. As a result, in this eighth control example as well, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol, which is executed after a jackpot, is hoped to result in all wins.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 639, in this eighth control example, a plurality of nails are used to create a flow path toward the second ball entrance 640, a flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and a flow path toward the out port 66. and is formed. Therefore, by adjusting the nail, the clerk at the hall can adjust the proportion of balls distributed to the second ball entrance 640 and the proportion of balls distributed to the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, since adjustments can be made in accordance with the management policy of the hall, it is possible to realize a more convenient pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 640 to 644. First, with reference to FIG. 640(a), the first winning random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth control example will be described.

FIG. 640(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 640(a), in this eighth control example, the range of values that the first winning type counter C1 can take is expanded to 0 to 999.

As shown in FIG. 640(a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 9" is defined as the range of determination values that are determined to be a jackpot (see 202a1 in FIG. 640(a)). Note that, similarly to the seventh control example, the determination value for a jackpot is the same for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. In addition, "10 to 998" is defined as the range of the judgment value for determining that the first special symbol is a miss (see 202a2 in FIG. 640(a)), and the range of the judgment value for determining that the first special symbol is a small hit is specified. "999" is defined as the range. In addition, "10, 11" is defined as the range of the judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is a miss (see 202a2 in FIG. 640(a)), and the range of the judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. “12 to 999” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 640(a)).

On the other hand, in the high probability state (variable probability state) of the special symbol, the range of judgment values for a jackpot, the judgment value for a miss, and the range for a judgment value for a small hit are all between the first special symbol and the range of judgment values for a small hit. It is common to 2 special symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 640(a), "0 to 10" is defined as the range of determination values for determining a jackpot (see 202a4 in FIG. 640(a)), and the range for determining a jackpot "11" is defined as the value (see 202a5 in FIG. 640(a)), and "12 to 999" is defined as the determination value for determining a small win (see 202a6 in FIG. 640(a)).

In this way, in this eighth control example, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is made different between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is The configuration is such that the probability of a small win in the first special symbol lottery is extremely high. As a result, the number of balls consumed when hitting left in the fixed variable mode and the lottery of the first special symbol result in a small win, and the ball enters the special pattern 1 small win prize opening 655a. It is configured so that the number of prize balls to be paid out is the same. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency when a left-handed hit is made during the variable probability mode without using the electric accessory 64a in the seventh control example.

In addition, the small winning of the second special symbol and the small winning of the first special symbol are configured with different numbers of prize balls that the player can obtain, and the small winning of the first special symbol has a larger number of prizes. It is configured so that the ball can be acquired. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit with the second special symbol, as in the seventh control example, the specific winning hole 650a is opened for only 0.2 seconds, making it difficult for the player to win the prize ball. Therefore, if you normally hit to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and even if you hit a jackpot, it is easy to decide on a disadvantageous jackpot type, and even if you hit a small jackpot, you will not be able to receive the prize ball. This is disadvantageous for the player compared to the case where the player plays left-handed because he or she hardly ever gets it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed during normal play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 640(b), the first winning type selection table 202b in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 640(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning type selection table 202b in this eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 640(b), in this eighth control example, three types of jackpot A2 to C2 are provided as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, and jackpot D2 is provided as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. , E2 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 640(b), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is associated with "jackpot A2" and defined. (See 202b1 in FIG. 640(b)). This "jackpot A2" has 16 rounds, and is a jackpot in which the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become "Jackpot A2", so when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot A2" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). In this "jackpot A2", in each round of the jackpot, the specific winning hole 650a is opened until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 6 balls have won. Therefore, in each round, just by continuing to hit the ball to the right, the player can almost certainly win the upper limit number of balls (6 balls) into the special winning slot 650a before 30 seconds have elapsed. If the jackpot is A2, you can win a large amount of prize balls.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 69" is associated with "Jackpot B2" and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 640(b)). . This "Jackpot B2" has 7 rounds, and is a jackpot in which the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 60 counter values that become "Jackpot B2", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot B2" is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100). In this "jackpot B2", similar to the "jackpot A2", in each round of the jackpot, the specific winning hole 650a is opened until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 6 balls have won. Therefore, similarly to "Jackpot A2", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99" is associated with a "jackpot C2" and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 640(b)) . This "Jackpot C2" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 2, and a probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 30 counter values that will be a "jackpot C2", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a "jackpot C2" will be determined. The ratio is 30% (30/100). This "jackpot C2" is similar to "jackpot A2" and "jackpot B2", in each round of the jackpot, the specific winning hole 650a is opened until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 6 balls have won. . Therefore, similar to "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

In this way, if you win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, you can receive prize balls for 2, 7, or 16 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot will almost certainly be in variable mode. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player regardless of the type of jackpot. Furthermore, since the 7th round and the 16th round, which have a relatively large number of rounds, are determined at a high rate (70% rate), it is possible to expect to win a large amount of prize balls when the first special symbol hits the jackpot. Therefore, when the player wins a jackpot in the drawing of the first special symbol, the player can be pleased.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 640(b), for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and "jackpot D2" is defined in association with it. (See 202b4 in FIG. 640(b)). This "Jackpot D2" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 4, and the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 5 counter values that become "Jackpot D2", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "Jackpot D2" is determined. The proportion of these cases is 5% (5/100). In this "jackpot D2", in each round of the jackpot, the specific winning hole 650a is opened until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 6 balls have won. Therefore, a relatively large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 640(b), for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 99" is associated with "jackpot E2" and defined. (See 202b5 in FIG. 640(b)). This "jackpot E2" has four rounds, and is a jackpot in which the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 95 counter values that will be a "jackpot E2", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, a "jackpot E2" will be determined. The ratio of This "Jackpot E2" differs from other jackpot types in that in each round of the jackpot, the specific winning hole 650a is opened until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or until 6 balls have won. Since it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning hole 650a within 0.2 seconds, "Jackpot E2" is a disadvantageous jackpot type in which it is impossible to win a prize ball. In addition, as mentioned above, there is an upper limit (4 times) on the number of consecutive times that the special symbol can be in a variable state, and if you hit the jackpot after reaching the upper limit, the game state after the jackpot will change regardless of the type of jackpot. The configuration is such that the normal mode is disadvantageous. Therefore, if a "jackpot E" occurs, not only will the player not be able to win the prize ball, but the number of times it will take to shift to the normal mode will be subtracted, which will be disadvantageous for the player.

In this way, in this eighth control example, if a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol lottery, there is a high probability (95% rate) that you will not get a prize ball, and the remaining jackpot until the normal mode is set. The configuration is such that a jackpot type (jackpot E2) with a smaller number of hits is determined. That is, as in the seventh control example, the configuration is such that if a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, there is a high possibility that the result will be unfavorable to the player. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which a game can be played in the hope that the lottery result will be a loss while the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is being executed after the end of the jackpot. I can do it.

Next, details of the second winning random number table 202c in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 641. FIG. 641 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 641, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 203" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c1 in FIG. 641). Furthermore, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for a normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c3 in FIG. 641). That is, the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are configured such that the number of determination values for determining that the normal symbol is a hit differs by only one value. Thereby, even in the normal state of the normal symbol, the winning probability can be made almost the same as that in the high probability state of the normal symbol.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer (from 3 seconds to 30 seconds) than in the normal state of the normal symbol, and the electric shock when the normal symbol hits is increased. The opening period of the accessory 640b becomes shorter (1 second x 2 times → 0.1 second x 1 time). Therefore, in total, it is more difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the variable probability mode in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry hole 640, so the disadvantageous second special It is possible to suppress the drawing of symbols from being executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a situation other than the execution of the door breakthrough mode performance, which would be excessively disadvantageous to the player. In addition, during a jackpot where the normal symbol is set to a low probability state, balls are more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640, so it is possible to easily accumulate reserved balls up to the upper limit number during a jackpot. .

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 642. FIG. 642 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 202. As shown in FIG. 642, the configuration of the RAM 202 in the eighth control example is such that a fixed variable limit counter 203aa and a breakthrough mode counter 203ab are added to the configuration of the RAM 202 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 590). They are different in that they are Further, the difference is that the probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, remaining ball timer flag 203k, remaining ball timer 203m, probability variation effective flag 203n, probability variation effective timer 203o, and discharge number counter 203p are deleted.

The variable probability limit counter 203aa is a counter that counts the remaining number of continuous variable probability states until the normal mode is set. This variable probability limit counter 203aa is set to 4, which is the maximum consecutive number of variable probability states, when the normal mode is set as the state after the end of the jackpot (see S1314 in FIG. 650), and every time the variable probability jackpot ends. , the value is subtracted by 1 (see S1311 in FIG. 650). When the value of the probability variable limit counter 203aa is updated to 0 at the end of the jackpot, the mode is set to be the normal mode after the jackpot ends.

The breakthrough mode counter 203ab is a counter that indicates the remaining number of changes in the door breakthrough mode performance, and at the end of jackpots A2 to D2, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set as the counter value (see S1316 in FIG. 650). ), the value is updated by subtracting 1 at the start of the fluctuation (see S324 in FIG. 645). In this eighth control example, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab (the remaining number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode performance ends) is transmitted while being included in the fluctuation pattern command. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, it reads the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab from the variation pattern command and grasps the remaining number of variations until the door breakthrough mode performance ends. In particular, since the memory contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are not backed up, if the power is cut off while the door breakthrough mode performance is being executed, the audio lamp control will control the progress of the door breakthrough mode performance after the power is restored. This makes it impossible for the device 113 to grasp it.

In contrast, in this eighth control example, the information corresponding to the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode is included in the fluctuation pattern command and output to the audio lamp control device 113, so that the door breakthrough mode performance is Even if the power is cut off during execution and the memory contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are cleared, the door breakthrough mode effect can be executed by analyzing the first fluctuation pattern command received after the power is restored. It is possible to know whether the application is currently in progress or not, and its progress. Thereby, even if the power is cut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode performance, the performance can be restarted from the continuation of the door breakthrough mode performance after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the content of the performance from changing before and after the power is shut off, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the content of the performance.

Next, a state transition method in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 643. As shown in FIG. 643, in this eighth control example, similarly to the seventh control example, three types of states: normal mode, door breakthrough mode, and variable probability mode are switched. In this eighth control example, the contents of the door breakthrough mode are changed from the seventh control example. Specifically, the door breakthrough mode of the seventh control example described above is a special symbol probability change state and a normal symbol time shortening state, and only shows a state in which a second special symbol reserved ball exists. In addition to this, in the eighth control example, the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists, are also set as the door breakthrough mode. Hereinafter, to simplify the explanation, the door breakthrough mode in which the special symbol's probability variable state and the normal symbol's time saving state are set will be referred to as door breakthrough mode 1, and the special symbol's low probability state and The door breaking mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is referred to as the door breaking mode 2. Note that door breakthrough mode 1 is illustrated on the left side of the middle row in FIG. 643, and door breakthrough mode 2 is illustrated on the left side of the middle row in FIG. 643.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 643, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of transitioning to another state only when a jackpot is achieved. Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode always shifts to the door breakthrough mode. As mentioned above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the specific winning hole 650a is opened for a relatively long time (maximum 30 seconds) in each round of the jackpot. When the ball is hit, a large amount of the ball also enters the second ball entry port 640. As a result, when the jackpot ends, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the upper limit value, and after the jackpot the game enters the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1).

As shown in the middle part of Figure 643, in the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1, 2), basically either the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, or the lottery of all the second special symbols is a miss and the 2. When the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes 0, there is a possibility that the state will shift to another state. The state of the transition destination when it becomes a jackpot is the same in Door Breakthrough Modes 1 and 2, but the transition destination state when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 is the same as Door Breakthrough Mode 1. It is different from door breaking mode 2. Specifically, in the door breakthrough mode 1, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without becoming a jackpot of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the variable probability mode (see the middle left side of FIG. 643). In the fixed variable mode, by hitting left, it is possible to execute only the lottery of the first special symbol that is advantageous to the player, and the probability of getting a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol increases (for small wins) (The winning hole 655a becomes easier to open), so the game can be continued until the first special symbol hits the jackpot without reducing the number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, in the door breakthrough mode 2, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without becoming a jackpot of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the normal mode (see the middle right side of FIG. 643). In normal mode, the probability of a small hit is low, so if you hit left to execute the lottery for the first special symbol, the number of balls you have will continue to decrease until you hit the jackpot, which puts the player at a disadvantage compared to the variable probability mode. Become.

As shown in the middle part of Figure 643, in the door breakthrough mode, if the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot E2, on the condition that the number of consecutive variable probability states has not reached the upper limit, after the jackpot ends, Shift to variable mode (common to door breakthrough modes 1 and 2). As described above, in the jackpot E2, the opening time of the specific winning hole 650a is short (0.2 seconds), and the prize ball cannot be won even if the ball is hit to the right. Also, in the display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, left-handed hitting is notified during this jackpot E2 and the small win of the second special symbol. Therefore, unless the player intentionally hits the right hand against the notification, the reserved balls of the second special symbol will not be accumulated during the execution of the jackpot E2, so after the jackpot E2 ends, the game will directly shift to the variable probability mode. do. In this case, the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa, which counts the number of consecutive remaining variable probability states until transition to the normal mode, is subtracted by 1. Therefore, when the jackpot E2 is reached, the player cannot win the prize ball and the number of probability changes is subtracted, resulting in an unfavorable result for the player. Therefore, if the specific winning opening 650a repeats the opening operation for 0.2 seconds multiple times in the door breakthrough mode, the player may wish that the opening operation is all due to the small hit of the second special symbol. It is possible to realize innovative gameplay that makes you wish for it.

In addition, if the second special symbol hits E2 in the door breakthrough mode and the variable probability limit counter 203aa becomes 0 (the number of consecutive variable probability states reaches the upper limit), set the variable probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot. Since this is not possible, the state after the jackpot is set to normal mode. In this case, in the door breaking mode presentation, a presentation of a failure in breaking through the door is performed, and a transition to the normal mode is notified.

In addition, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 643, if you win the jackpot D2 during the door breakthrough mode, after the jackpot D2 ends, you can enter the door breakthrough mode again (either door breakthrough mode 1 or door breakthrough mode 2). transition to. More specifically, if the number of consecutive variable probability states has not reached the upper limit, door breakthrough mode 1 (probable variable state of special symbols and time saving state of normal symbols) is set, and the number of consecutive variable variable states reaches the upper limit. If it has been reached, door breakthrough mode 2 (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) is set. As described above, when the door breakthrough mode 1 is set, it is advantageous for the player because if the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not result in a jackpot, the game can shift to the variable probability mode. On the other hand, when door breakthrough mode 2 is set, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), you will fall to the normal mode, so it is more advantageous to hit the jackpot. .

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 643, in the variable probability mode, when a special symbol hits the jackpot, the game shifts to another gaming state. Specifically, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and the number of consecutive variable probability states has not reached the upper limit (the variable probability limit counter 203aa is not 0), the door breakthrough mode is started after the jackpot ends. . On the other hand, if the number of consecutive variable probability states has reached the upper limit (the variable probability limit counter 203aa has reached 0), the state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, it is reported that the number of consecutive times of variable probability state has reached the upper limit during the jackpot. That is, an effect that informs that the state after the end of the jackpot is the normal mode is performed, for example, during the ending period of the jackpot.

In this way, in this eighth control example, if a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode, the prize ball can be won with a high probability (95%, which is the rate at which jackpot E2 is determined). This is an undesirable result for the player, in which the remaining number of successive variable probability states (the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa) is subtracted. Therefore, in the door breakthrough mode, the player can play the game in the hope that the second special symbol will not become a jackpot.

In addition, in the door breaking mode performance of the eighth control example, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a jackpot E2, a performance that fails to break through the door (see FIG. 582(a)) is executed once. Ru. Then, if the number of consecutive times of the variable state has not reached the upper limit (unless the value of the variable limit counter 203aa is 0), the adventurer 811 attempts to break through the door again by the so-called resurrection effect, and as a result, the door is broken through. A successful performance is executed. On the other hand, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a jackpot E2 and the number of successive variable probability states has reached the upper limit, the revival effect is not performed and the mode directly shifts to the normal mode. By configuring in this manner, even when the transition to the variable probability mode is accompanied by a revival effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining number of consecutive runs has decreased.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 643, in the variable probability mode, only when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, the state shifts to another state. Specifically, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the number of consecutive variable probability states has not reached the upper limit, after the jackpot ends, the mode shifts to door breakthrough mode 1, and the number of consecutive variable probability states reaches the upper limit number of times. In this case, the game shifts to door breakthrough mode 2 after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the case of door breakthrough mode 2, as a door breakthrough mode effect, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are missed (small hit), the door will fail to break through and the mode will return to normal mode. An effect that notifies the transition is executed. In other words, a performance that has a result opposite to the door breakthrough mode 1 (and the door breakthrough mode performance in the seventh control example) is executed. Further, when a jackpot E2 is achieved in the door breakthrough mode 2, the probability variation mode is notified through a revival performance, similarly to the case where the remaining number of continuous variations in the probability variation state remains in the door breakthrough mode 1.

In this way, in this seventh control example, two types of door breaking modes are provided. In other words, the door breakthrough mode 1 is entered when the number of consecutive variable probability states has not reached the upper limit and the jackpot is one of A2 to D2, and the state where the number of consecutive variable probability states has reached the upper limit (limit). There is a door breakthrough mode 2 which is entered when one of the jackpots A2 to D2 occurs. In door breakthrough mode 1, as in the seventh control example, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), the second special symbol shifts to the variable probability mode that is advantageous for the player. It is advantageous to not win the jackpot in the lottery. On the other hand, door breakthrough mode 2 is internally a low probability state with special symbols and a normal state with normal symbols, and is a state in which the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of variable probability states has been reset. Therefore, if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off, the mode will shift to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this case, by hitting the jackpot with the second special symbol during door breakthrough mode 2, you can move to door breakthrough mode 1 or variable probability mode, so if you hit the jackpot with the lottery of the second special symbol. This is more advantageous for the player. If all the held balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit) in door breakthrough mode 2 and you switch to normal mode, there is a possibility that a large amount of balls you have will be consumed before you hit the jackpot. It is.

Depending on the type of door breakthrough mode, it may be advantageous if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are advantageous, or it may be advantageous if the jackpot is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the mode shifts to the door breaking mode, it is possible to predict which mode the current door breaking mode will be. Then, depending on the type of predicted mode, it is possible to make the player expect a loss or a jackpot, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 644. FIG. 644 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 644, the RAM 223 of the eighth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 592(b)) in that a post-turning flag 223i is added. are doing. The other configurations are the same as those in the seventh control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The after-on flag 223i is a flag indicating that the power of the pachinko machine 10 was cut off during execution of the door breaking mode, and after the door breaking mode was set to the middle stage, the power was turned on again and the door breaking mode was restarted. It is. The after-power-on flag 223i is set to ON when it is determined that the door breakthrough mode performance is being executed and the change is other than the last fluctuation of the door breakthrough mode performance when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. (See S5102 in FIG. 654).

<About the control process of the main controller in the eighth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 645 to 651. First, details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the eighth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 645. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 601) in the seventh control example.

Of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in this eighth control example, the processes in S301 to S309 and S311 are respectively S301 to S309 of the special symbol variation start process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 601), The same processes as those of S311 and S311 are executed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the eighth control example, after determining the variation pattern in the process of S307 or S309, the value of the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode is read out (S321), and the read counter value A variation pattern command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in S307 or S309 (S322).

Further, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 645) in the eighth control example, after the process of S311 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is greater than 0 (S323). In the process of S323, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is greater than 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S323: Yes), the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is subtracted by 1. (S324), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S323, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S323: No), the process of S324 is skipped, This process ends immediately.

With this special symbol variation start processing 2 (see FIG. 645), the progress status of the door breakthrough mode production (the value of the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode) can be included in the variation pattern command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the remaining number of actual door breakthrough mode effects from being out of sync with the effect mode executed by the audio lamp control device 113. In particular, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily cut off, all the memory contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are cleared, so the situation of the door breakthrough mode effect before the power cut is also This becomes unknown on the control device 113 side. Even in this case, if the configuration is such that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the fluctuation pattern command, it can be easily done before the power is cut off by simply analyzing the fluctuation pattern command that is output first after the power is restored. The state of the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the performance mode before the power was cut off.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example, the situations in which the reserved balls of the second special symbol exist are basically only during the jackpot and during the execution of the door breakthrough mode production. Therefore, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the jackpot is not in progress, it may be sufficient to determine that the door breakthrough mode performance is being executed. However, even if the player intentionally or accidentally hits the ball to the right during normal play, the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol may become one or more. In such a case, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, when the power is restored, the number of balls held in the hold ball command is notified that the number of balls held in the second special symbol is 1 or more. A problem occurs where it is mistakenly recognized that the breakthrough mode effect is in progress. On the other hand, in this eighth control example, the progress status of the door breakthrough mode performance is included in the variable pattern command and output, so if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more when the power is restored, It is possible to ascertain whether the door breaking mode is being executed or whether the player intentionally or accidentally just hit the right hand during normal play. Therefore, the performance mode after the power is restored can be accurately restored to the state before the power was cut off.

In this eighth control example, the number of fluctuations until the end of the door breakthrough mode performance is grasped by the breakthrough mode counter 203ab, and is included in the fluctuation pattern command and output. A configuration may also be adopted in which only the information as to whether or not it is being executed is included in the variation pattern command and output. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 side may be configured to grasp the number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode performance ends based on the information and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of updating the counter 203ab during door breaking mode on the main control device 110 side, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 646, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S106) in the eighth control example will be described. This normal symbol variation process 2 (S106) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599) instead of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 604) in the seventh control example.

Of the normal symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 646) in this eighth control example, each of the processing in S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 is the same as the normal symbol variation processing in the seventh control example (see FIG. 604). The same processes as S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 646) in the eighth control example, if it is determined in the process of S614 that the current time is in the normal symbol time saving state (S614: Yes), the normal symbol variation The time is set to 30 seconds (S631), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S614, if it is determined that the current state is the normal state of the normal symbols (S614: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is set to 3 seconds (S632), and this process is ended.

Furthermore, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 646) in this eighth control example, if it is determined in the process of S620 that the current state is in the normal state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the second incoming ball The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640b attached to the mouth 640 are set to "1 second x 2 times" (S633), and the process moves to S623. On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the current state is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entrance 640 are set to " 0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S634), and the process moves to S623.

In this way, in this eighth control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter in the normal state of the normal symbol than in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the release time when the normal symbol hits is shorter. It is designed to be long. In addition, as described above, the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 641) in this eighth control example shows the normal state (low probability state) of normal symbols and the high probability state of normal symbols. The configuration is such that the number of judgment values to be judged differs by only one. As a result, even in the normal state of the normal symbol, the winning probability is almost the same as in the high probability state of the normal symbol, so overall, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the short time state of the normal symbol. It becomes difficult. Therefore, in the fixed variable mode where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the second special symbol is disadvantageous. It is possible to suppress the lottery from being executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a situation other than the execution of the door breakthrough mode performance, which would be excessively disadvantageous to the player. In addition, during a jackpot where the normal symbol is set to a low probability state, balls are more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640, so it is possible to easily accumulate reserved balls up to the upper limit number during a jackpot. .

Next, startup processing 2 of the main control device 110 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 647. This start-up process 2 (see FIG. 647) is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 607) in the seventh control example.

In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 647) in this eighth control example, the processes in S901 to S910 and S913 are the same as those in the start-up process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 607), respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed. Furthermore, in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 647) in the eighth control example, when the process in S910 is completed, a status command setting process is executed to set a status command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113. (S921), the process moves to S913. The details of this status command setting process (S921) will be explained with reference to FIG. 648.

The flowchart in FIG. 648 is a flowchart showing the status command setting process (S921). In this state command setting process (S921), first, the probability change flag 203g is read out (S1801), and a state command is set based on the state of the read probability change flag 203g (S1802). Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently changing (S1803), and if it is changing (S1803: Yes), the data in the execution area and the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q are read out (S1804). . Next, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S1805), and a variation pattern command is set based on each read value (S1806). Next, a stop type command is set (S1807), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1803, if it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S1803: No), each process of S1804 to S1807 is skipped, and this process is directly ended.

By executing this status command setting process (see Figure 648), the game status before the power was cut off, the progress status of the door breakthrough mode performance, etc. can be recorded by voice during startup process 2 (see Figure 647). The lamp control device 113 can be notified.

Next, details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 649. This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609) in the seventh control example.

Of the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 649) in this eighth control example, each process of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109 is different from S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 609), respectively. The same processes as those in S1107 to S1109 are executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 649) in the eighth control example, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), first, the specific winning hole 650a is opened. state (S1121), sets a round number command indicating the number of rounds to newly start (S1122), and ends this process. In this eighth control example, a variable winning device 650 is provided in place of the variable winning device 65 in the seventh control example, and the normal discharge channel 65e1 and special discharge channel 65e2 are not provided inside thereof. Therefore, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 649), there is no need to execute the process of switching the flow path, so these processes (S1202 and S1203 in FIG. 610) are deleted.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 649) in the eighth control example, when it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is the jackpot end timing (S1109: Yes), the jackpot end process in the seventh control example ( (See S1110 in FIG. 609), jackpot end processing 2 is executed (S1123), and this processing is ended. Details of this jackpot ending process 2 (S1123) will be described later with reference to FIG. 650.

On the other hand, in the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: No), the winning process 2 is executed (S1124) instead of the winning process in the seventh control example (see S1111 in FIG. 609). ), this process ends. Details of this winning process 2 (S1124) will be described later with reference to FIG. 651.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 649) in the eighth control example, a process corresponding to the abnormality process (see S1112 in FIG. 609) in the seventh control example is not provided. This is because in the seventh control example, whether or not to shift to the variable probability state after a jackpot is determined by whether or not the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the variable prize winning device 65, whereas in this control example This is because in the 8 control example, there is a difference in that the gaming state after the jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. Therefore, in the eighth control example, even if the ball remains inside the variable prize winning device 650, it does not affect whether or not the probability variable state will occur, and there is no fraudulent act in which the ball remains inside the variable prize winning device 650. itself is not established. Therefore, in this eighth control example, the abnormality processing (see FIG. 613) for determining whether an abnormality in which a ball remains inside the variable prize winning device 650 has occurred is deleted.

Note that in this eighth control example as well, it is of course possible to perform processing equivalent to the abnormality processing (see FIG. 613) in the seventh control example. Thereby, when a malfunction such as ball jamming occurs inside the variable prize winning device 650, the error can be notified at an early stage.

Next, details of jackpot end processing 2 (S1123) will be described with reference to FIG. 650. FIG. 650 is a flowchart showing this jackpot ending process 2 (S1123). In this jackpot end processing 2 (S1123), first, the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S1311), and it is determined whether the counter value after the subtraction has become 0 or not.

In the process of S1311, if it is determined that the counter value after the subtraction is 1 or more (S1312: No), it means that the number of consecutive times of variable probability state has not reached the upper limit (limit), so the variable probability flag is set. 203g is set to ON (S1313), and the process moves to S1315. On the other hand, in the process of S1311, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa after the subtraction has become 0 (S1313: Yes), it means that the number of consecutive variable probability states has reached the upper limit value. , without executing the process of S1313 that turns on the probability variation flag 203g (leaving the probability variation flag 203g off), sets the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa to 4 (S1314), and moves the process to S1315. .

In the process of S1315 executed after the process of S1313 or S1314 is finished, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is read out (S1315), and the read value is set to the value of the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode. (S1316). Then, a status command is set based on the state of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa (S1317). By including the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa in the state command, the audio lamp control device 113 side can grasp not only the gaming state after the jackpot, but also the number of times remaining until the number of consecutive variable probability states reaches the upper limit. be able to. When the process of S1317 ends, the jackpot flag 203r is set to OFF (S1318), and this process ends.

Next, details of winning process 2 (S1124) will be described with reference to FIG. 651. As described above, this winning process 2 (S1124) is a process that is executed in place of the winning process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 612).

Of the winning process 2 in the eighth control example (see FIG. 651), the processes S1401 to S1404 and S1406 to S1408 are the same as those in the winning process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 612), respectively. The same processes as those from S1408 to S1408 are executed.

In the winning process 2 (see FIG. 651) in the eighth control example, when the process of S1404 is finished, it is determined whether the value of the winning pieces counter 203j is 6 or more (S1431), and the winning pieces counter 203j is If the value of 203j is 6 or more (S1431: Yes), the process moves to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1431, if it is determined that the value of the prize winning number counter 203j is less than 6 (S1431: No), the process moves to S1406.

Furthermore, in the winning process 2 in the eighth control example (see FIG. 651), the processes of S1409 to S1420 of the winning process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 612) are deleted. These processes are for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, and for determining whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 at the normal timing. This is because this process is unnecessary for the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example in which the discharge flow path 65e2, the probability change switch 65e3, etc. are not provided. By omitting these processes, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 652 to 656. First, startup processing 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 652. This start-up process 2 (see FIG. 652) is a process executed in place of the start-up process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 616) when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 652) in this eighth control example, each process in S4001 to S4013 is the same as each process in S4001 to S4013 in the start-up process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 616). Processing is executed. In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 652) in the eighth control example, when the process of S4012 is completed, the state at power-on is then determined based on the status command and fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110. The input state determination process is executed to determine the state (S4021), and the process moves to S4013. The details of this input state determination process (S4021) will be explained with reference to FIG. 653.

FIG. 653 is a flowchart showing this input state determination process (S4021). In this input state determination process (S4021), first, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4901), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received and within (S4901: No) , a back image is set according to the gaming state when the power is turned on (S4902), and the present process ends. Here, the gaming state when the power is turned on is determined based on the data in the gaming state storage area 223h updated in the process of S4012 of startup processing 2 (see FIG. 652), and if the current state is a variable probability state, A back image for a certain variable state is set, and a back image for a normal state is set for a normal state. In addition, since the door breakthrough mode performance is a performance executed while the second special symbol is fluctuating, there is no possibility of the door breakthrough mode if the fluctuation is stopped when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), then the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S4903 ), it is determined whether the extracted value is 0 (S4904). If the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode is 0, it means that the door breakthrough mode performance is not being executed, and if the value of the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode is 1 or more, it means that the door breakthrough mode performance is being executed. means.

In the process of S4904, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is not 0 (the door breakthrough mode performance is being executed) (S4904: No), the breakthrough mode is executed to select the performance mode of the door breakthrough mode performance. A mode selection process is executed (S4905), and the process moves to S4907. Details of this breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described later with reference to FIG. 654.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S4904: No), the remaining fluctuation The performance mode is determined according to the time and the lottery result (S4906), and the process moves to S4907. In the process of S4907, a display variation pattern command is set based on the production mode determined in the process of S4905 or S4906 (S4907), and this process ends.

Next, details of the breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described with reference to FIG. 654. FIG. 654 is a flowchart showing this breakthrough mode selection process (S4905).

In the breakthrough mode selection process (see FIG. 654), first, it is determined whether the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 1 (S5001), and if the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1. If there is (S5001: Yes), then it is determined whether the variation pattern is an outlier (S5002). In the process of S5002, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a loss (S5002: Yes), then it is determined whether the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h is data indicating a probability fluctuation state (S5003). , if it is in the variable probability state (S5003: Yes), the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the last second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode 1 (see the middle left side of FIG. 643), and the execution is This means that the last held ball in the middle was a miss (small hit). Therefore, in this case, as the performance mode to be executed in the remaining variable time, the performance mode that notifies the transition to the variable probability mode is determined (S5004), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5003, if it is determined that the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is data indicating a low probability state of the special symbol (S5003: No), the door breakthrough mode 2 (middle row of FIG. 643 This means that the power was cut off during the execution of the variable display based on the last held ball of the second special symbol in (see right side), and that the last held ball that was being executed was a miss (small hit). Therefore, in this case, the performance mode that notifies the transition to the normal mode is determined as the performance mode to be executed in the remaining variable time (S5004), and this process ends. Through the processing of S5003 and S5004, even if the state at the time the power is turned on again is that the last variable display in the door breakthrough mode performance is being executed, the door is displayed based on the lottery result and the gaming state. It is possible to accurately notify the result of breakthrough mode performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is not 1 (is 2 or more) (S5001: No), and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1. And if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern being executed at the time of power restoration is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S5002: No), first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot E2 (S5006). In the process of S5006, if it is determined that it is a jackpot E2 (S5006: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of consecutive variable probability states has reached the upper limit (S5007). Note that the remaining number of consecutive times of variable probability states up to the upper limit is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a state command together with the gaming state at the time of power-on.

In the process of S5007, if it is determined that the upper limit of the number of consecutive variable probability states has been reached (S5007: Yes), the state after the jackpot will be the normal mode, so to notify the transition to the normal mode. Then, the process moves to the process of S5005 described above. On the other hand, in the process of S5007, if it is determined that the upper limit of the number of consecutive variable probability states has not been reached, the state after the jackpot will become fixed variable mode, and the player will succeed in breaking through the door through the revival effect. The production mode is determined (S5008), and the present process ends. As mentioned above, this revival performance is based on the fact that the number of consecutive times in the probability change state has decreased due to the jackpot E2 even though the prize ball was not won. This is a performance to show. This revival performance allows the player to recognize that he won the jackpot E2 during the door breakthrough mode performance.

Further, in the process of S5006, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot E2 (S5006: No), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot D2 (S5009). In the process of S5009, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot D2 (S5009: Yes), a special production mode is determined to indicate a jackpot in the door breakthrough mode production (S5010). , this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S5009, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a jackpot D2 (S5009: No), the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a loss (small win), and the current fluctuation pattern Since this means that this is not the last change in the door breakthrough mode, the performance mode of the breakthrough performance is determined according to the extracted value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab (S5011). That is, the mode of the door 814 is determined according to the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode. Then, the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set in the breakthrough effect counter 223g, the post-throwing flag 223i is set to ON (S5012), and this process ends. By keeping the after-turn-on flag 223i on, it can be determined that the performance has been restarted from the middle of the door breakthrough mode when the power is turned on, even when the next and subsequent fluctuation patterns are received.

The door breakthrough mode performance in this eighth control example is basically the same as the seventh control example, and lasts for 5.8 seconds from the start of the ending period of the jackpot until the end of the opening period of the fourth specific prize opening 650a. A series of performances of the performance time are set. That is, at the start of the door breakthrough mode performance, the result of the door breakthrough mode performance is determined in advance based on the preread result of each reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, basically, during the execution of the door breakthrough mode performance, when a new second special symbol variation pattern command is received, it is sufficient to simply execute the predetermined performance mode as is. However, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door breakthrough mode performance, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be cleared, and the progress of the door breakthrough mode performance and the result of the performance. etc., and become unable to grasp it. Therefore, in the present eighth control example, if the power is cut off during execution of the door breaking mode effect and then turned on again, this can be recognized by the after-turn-on flag 223i. While the post-input flag 223i is on, each time a variable pattern command is received, the door breakthrough mode is set based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variable pattern command and the information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the performance, and to set the performance mode according to the determination result. With this configuration, the end timing of the door breakthrough mode performance can be accurately determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

Next, details of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 655. This variable display setting process 2 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 624) in the seventh control example. Of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) in this eighth control example, the processes in S4801 to S4803 and S4805 to S4809 are the same as the processes in S4801 to S4803 of the variable display setting process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 624), respectively. The same processes as those in S4805 to S4809 are executed.

In the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 655) in the eighth control example, when the process of S4803 is completed, the rough variation display mode ( Based on the variation time), a variation pattern determination process is executed to determine the detailed performance mode of the variation pattern (S4811). Details of this fluctuation pattern determination process (S4811) will be described later with reference to FIG. 656. When the process of S4811 is completed, a display variation pattern command is set based on the detailed performance mode of the variation pattern determined in the process of S4811 (S4812), and the process moves to S4805.

Next, details of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination process (S4811) will be described with reference to FIG. 656. In the fluctuation pattern determination process (S4811), first, it is determined whether or not the after-throwing flag 223i is on (S5101), and if the after-throwing flag 223i is off (S5101: No), the main controller 110 Based on the general aspect of the fluctuation pattern extracted from the outputted fluctuation pattern command, a detailed performance aspect of the fluctuation pattern is determined (S5102), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the after-power-on flag 223i is on (S5101: Yes), the power is turned off and then turned on again during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, processing for determining the performance mode during the door breakthrough mode performance is executed according to the information of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variable pattern command and the lottery result.

Specifically, first, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S5103), and whether the extracted value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (i.e., the last fluctuation in the door breakthrough mode performance). (S5104). In the process of S5104, if it is determined that the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), then it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is an outlier fluctuation pattern. (S5105), and if it is determined that it is a losing variation pattern (S5105: Yes), it is determined whether the current state is a special symbol probability variation state based on the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h. (S5106).

In the process of S5106, if it is determined that the current state is the special symbol probability change state (S5106: Yes), the production mode for notifying the transition to the probability change mode (see FIG. 582(b)) is determined, and the process is executed. The process moves to S5116. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, if it is determined that the current state is a low probability state of special symbols (S5106: No), the performance mode (see FIG. 582(a)) for notifying the transition to the normal mode is determined. (S5108), the process moves to S5116.

On the other hand, in the process of S5104, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 2 or more (S5104: No), and the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1. (S5104: Yes), and if it is determined that a jackpot fluctuation pattern has been notified (S5105: No), then it is determined whether it is a jackpot E2 (S5109).

In the process of S5109, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to jackpot E2 (S5109: Yes), then it is determined whether the upper limit of the number of consecutive variable probability states has been reached. (S5110), and if the upper limit of the consecutive number of times has been reached (S5110: Yes), the state after the end of jackpot E2 cannot be set to fixed variable mode, so the transition to normal mode is notified. The process moves to S5108 for determining the performance mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5110, if it is determined that the number of consecutive variable probability states has not reached the upper limit (S5110: No), the performance mode of the revival performance is determined (S5111), and this process ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S5109, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not the jackpot E2 (S5109: No), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot D2. (S5112), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the jackpot D2 (S5112: Yes), the production mode of the special door breaking mode production that notifies the jackpot is determined (S5113), and the process proceeds to S5116. and transition.

In addition, in the process of S5112, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot D2 (S5112: No), the current variation pattern is a miss (small win) variation pattern, and the remaining number of variations in the door breakthrough mode performance ( Since this means that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 2 or more, the performance mode of the door breakthrough mode performance is determined according to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted in the process of S5103 (S5114). , the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set to the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S5115), and this processing is ended.

In addition, in the process of S5116 executed after any one of S5107, S5108, S5111, and S5113 is completed, the post-injection flag 223i is reset to OFF, and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is reset to 0 ( S5116), this process ends.

By executing this fluctuation pattern determination process, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off in the middle of the door breakthrough mode performance, the performance can be resumed from the middle of the door breakthrough mode performance after the power is turned on again. The mode can be restored. More specifically, if the power is cut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode performance, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is cleared, making it possible to grasp the progress of the door breakthrough mode performance, the results of the performance, etc. I won't be able to do it. Therefore, in the present eighth control example, if the power is cut off during execution of the door breaking mode effect and then turned on again, this can be recognized by the after-turn-on flag 223i. While the post-input flag 223i is on, each time a variable pattern command is received, the door breakthrough mode is set based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variable pattern command and the information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether it is the end timing of the performance or not, and to set the performance mode according to the determination result. With this configuration, the end timing of the door breakthrough mode performance can be accurately determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth control example has a configuration in which the gaming state after a jackpot is determined in advance for each type of jackpot. In addition, an upper limit is set on the number of consecutive times that the special symbol can be in a variable probability state, and when the upper limit is reached, even if you win a probability variable jackpot, the special symbol will be set to a low probability state after the jackpot. It consists of By configuring in this way, it is possible to form two types: a door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1) in which the special symbol is in a variable probability state, and a door breakthrough mode in which the special symbol is in a low probability state. can. Therefore, in the case of transitioning to the door breaking mode, even if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off, there is a possibility of transitioning to the normal mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide an innovative game feature in which whether a jackpot during the door breaking mode is advantageous or disadvantageous changes depending on the number of successive variable probability states.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the electric accessory 640b is provided for the second ball entrance 640, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640b is difficult to open, and the electric accessory 640b is difficult to open. In the normal state (low probability state) of the symbol, the electric accessory 640b is configured to be easily released. With this configuration, in the variable probability mode where a high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. , it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous second special symbol from being drawn. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a situation other than the execution of the door breakthrough mode performance, which would be excessively disadvantageous to the player. In addition, during a jackpot where the normal symbol is set to a low probability state, balls are more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640, so it is possible to easily accumulate reserved balls up to the upper limit number during a jackpot. .

In addition, in the eighth control example, information indicating the remaining number of variations in the door breakthrough mode performance (the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab) is included in the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. The structure includes the following. As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off in the middle of the door breakthrough mode production, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 after the power is turned on again. By simply analyzing it on the side, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the door breaking mode effect is being executed, and if so, the progress status. Therefore, while minimizing the amount of information output from the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 can accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode performance.

In addition, in this eighth control example, by configuring the variable pattern command to include the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab and output it, the audio lamp control can be used to determine whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the power is restored. Although the device 113 side is configured to be able to discriminate, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable pattern command may include only information as to whether or not the second special symbol is on hold after the end of the jackpot. That is, it is not necessary to include information on the remaining number of times of variable display until the door breakthrough mode effect ends in the variable pattern. Then, if the power is restored during the execution of the door breakthrough mode production, the number of pending balls in the second special symbol and the type of variation pattern (hit or not) notified by the variation pattern command will be used. , it may be configured to determine whether or not this is the last change in the door breakthrough mode production. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data of the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113.

In this eighth control example, the configuration is such that the variable pattern command always includes the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab, but is not limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, only the first fluctuation pattern command may include the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab and be output. Thereby, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In the eighth control example, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command and output, but it is not necessarily necessary to include it in the variation pattern command. For example, a separate command may be prepared to notify only the value of the counter 203ab during breakthrough mode. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 by a command only when there is a change in the value of the counter 203ab during the breakthrough mode. With this configuration, the data amount of the variable pattern command can be reduced.

In this eighth control example, when the power is turned on, the gaming state is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a status command, and the value of the counter 203ab in breakthrough mode is notified by a fluctuation pattern command. The information notified to the control device 113 is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the pre-reading results of each reserved ball are notified again by the winning information command. With this configuration, if the door breakthrough mode performance is in progress when the power is turned on, it is possible to check not only the fact that the door breakthrough mode performance is in progress, but also the result of the door breakthrough mode performance. , can be grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to determine the performance mode by taking into consideration the result of the performance.

<Modified example of the eighth control example>
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 657 to 659. In the eighth control example described above, the electric accessory 640b is provided in association with the second ball entrance 640. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter in the low probability state of the normal symbol than in the high probability state of the common symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640b is longer when the normal symbol becomes a hit. By doing so, the ball is prevented (suppressed) from entering the second ball entry port 640 in the variable probability mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

On the other hand, in this modification, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80, there is a storage valve 63a that can store (reserve) the balls in the upper part, and the balls stored in the storage valve 63a are A general prize opening 63 is provided into which the stored ball can enter when the stored state is released. Although the details will be described later, the second ball entry port 640 in this modification is basically provided at a position where it is impossible (difficult) for the ball to enter the ball even if the ball is hit to the right. As an exception, a ball can enter the second ball entry port 640 only when the ball is hit to the right with three balls stored in the storage valve 63a. More specifically, if you hit the right ball with three balls stored in the storage valve 63a, the ball flowing down due to the right ball will collide with the third stored ball. There is a possibility that the trajectory of the ball is changed and becomes a trajectory that allows the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. In this modified example, by canceling the storage state during normal times and setting the storage state only during jackpots, the ball can enter the second ball entry port 640 only during jackpots. .

With this configuration, there is no need to attach the electric accessory 640b to the second ball entry port 640. Therefore, similarly to the seventh control example, the electric accessory 64a can be attached to the first ball entry port 64. As a result, as in the seventh control example, the electric accessory 64a is easily released in the variable probability mode, so that the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held. In addition, by configuring the first ball entrance 64 to be accompanied by an electric accessory 64a, a "low probability state of special symbols" and a "time saving state of normal symbols", which are not set in the above control examples, can be created. It is possible to create a game state that did not previously exist. More specifically, by setting the gaming state when the consecutive number of variable probability states reaches the upper limit to "low probability state with special symbols" and "time saving state with normal symbols", the probability variable mode After the limit has been reached, the special symbol lottery can be executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, until the special symbol lottery has been executed 25 times) while keeping the ball held (so-called (return state) can be set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately quitting the game after the variable probability mode ends, and therefore the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Hereinafter, to simplify the explanation, the "low probability state of special symbols" and the "time saving state of normal symbols" will be referred to as "pullback mode".

First, with reference to FIG. 657, the game board 13 in a modification of the eighth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 657, in this modification, an electric accessory 64a is attached to the first ball entrance 64, similarly to the seventh control example. As a result, in the "probability variable mode" and the "pullback mode" which are set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened and the ball is easily entered into the first ball entry opening 64. Therefore, in this modification, as in the seventh control example, the first special symbol lottery is configured to prevent a small win.

Further, in addition to the second ball entry port 640 and the variable winning device 650, a general winning port 63 is provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable winning device unit 80. This general winning hole 63 is configured as a winning hole from which one prize ball is paid out when a ball enters. Further, a storage valve 63a is provided vertically above the general winning opening 63. This storage valve 63a can be changed between a protruding state in which it protrudes toward the front side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 658(a)) and a buried state in which it is buried inside the game board 13 (see FIG. 658(b)). It is configured. In the protruding state of the storage valve 63a, the balls that have reached the storage valve 63a can be prevented from flowing down to the general prize opening 63 by storing (staying) the balls in the upper part thereof. On the other hand, when the storage valve 63a is in the buried state, the ball can pass through the front side of the storage valve 63a. That is, the ball will be in a state where it can flow down to the general winning hole 63. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 658, but in this modification, the storage valve 63a is set to the buried state (see FIG. 658(b)) during normal times other than during a jackpot, and when the jackpot starts, the storage valve 63a is changed from a buried state (see FIG. 658(b)) to a protruded state (see FIG. 658(a)). Then, at the end of the jackpot, the storage valve 63a is again changed from the protruding state (see FIG. 658(a)) to the buried state (see FIG. 658(b)).

The protruding state and buried state of the storage valve 63a will be explained in more detail with reference to FIG. 658. FIG. 658 is a diagram illustrating a case in which the storage valve 63a is in a protruding state, and FIG. 658(b) is a diagram illustrating a case in which the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As shown in FIG. 658(a), when the storage valve 63a comes into the protruding state with the start of the jackpot, the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63 is blocked by the storage valve 63a. As a result, up to three balls that have reached the flow path are stored (stayed) above the storage valve 63a. It should be noted that during a jackpot, the player cannot receive a prize ball unless the ball enters the specific winning hole 650a, so the player almost always hits the ball to the right during a jackpot. Nails, windmills, etc. are arranged in the flow path formed above the general winning hole 63 so that one out of every two balls shot by right-handed players advances. Therefore, during one round of almost a jackpot, three balls are stored in the information of the storage valve 63a (see FIG. 658(a)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 658(a), if a ball is further hit to the right with the upper limit of three balls stored above the storage valve 63a, the ball hit to the right will be , the ball may collide with the third (last) ball stored by the storage valve 63a. The ball that collided with the third stored ball is reflected in the opposite direction to the previous flowing direction, and as a result, it enters the general prize opening 63 in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80. This provides a trajectory that allows the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 provided on the opposite side. In the modification of the eighth control example, the storage valve 63a enters the storage state based on the jackpot, and this storage state is maintained until the end of the jackpot. Therefore, if the player hits the ball right to enter the special winning hole 650a during a jackpot, three balls will be stored above the storage valve 63a. With three balls stored above the storage valve 63a, when the player further hits the ball to the right to get a prize ball, the newly fired ball collides with the stored ball. As a result, the ball enters the second ball entry port 640. As a result, if the player continues to hit the ball to the right in an attempt to obtain a prize ball during a jackpot, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol will be accumulated up to the upper limit (4) at the end of the jackpot. I can do it. Although not shown in the diagram, in a state where three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, some of the balls fired by hitting the ball to the right do not collide (interfere) with the stored balls. It flows down in the direction of the specific winning opening 650a. Thereby, it is possible to enter the ball into the second ball entrance hole 640 and the specific winning hole 650a during the jackpot.

FIG. 658(b) is a diagram showing a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As described above, when the jackpot ends, the protruding state is changed to the buried state, and the buried state is maintained (maintained) until the next jackpot. When the storage valve 63a is in the buried state, the ball can pass (flow down) through the flow path provided above the general prize opening 63. Therefore, the ball fired into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 passes through the front side of the buried storage valve 63a and enters the general prize opening 63, or the ball enters the general winning hole 63. It flows down a flow path toward the specific winning hole 650a, which is provided between the winning hole 63 and the second ball entering hole 640. In this modification, since the storage valve 63a is in the buried state after the jackpot ends until the next jackpot, it is possible to prevent the ball hit right in normal times from entering the second ball entry port 640. It can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the drawing of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous in normal times from being executed, so it is possible to prevent (suppress) the drawing from becoming too disadvantageous for the player.

Next, a state transition method in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 659. As shown in FIG. 659, in this modification, in addition to the four states (normal mode, fixed variable mode, door breakthrough mode 1, and door breakthrough mode 2) provided in the eighth control example described above, a pullback mode is also available. It is provided.

The pullback mode is a state in which a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols are set. In this modification, when the upper limit of the consecutive number of variable probability states is reached, the state after the end of the jackpot is set to a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols. Therefore, in this modification, door breakthrough mode 2 becomes a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in door breakthrough mode 2 becomes 0, it becomes a pullback mode. .

As shown in the upper right of Fig. 659, the pullback mode shifts to another mode when a jackpot occurs or when the set number of time-saving (25) special symbol draws are completed without a jackpot. there's a possibility that. Specifically, when all the special symbols for the number of times of time reduction are drawn, the mode shifts to the normal mode. In addition, in the pullback mode, the low probability state of the special symbol is set, and the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state is reset, so if the first special symbol is a jackpot in the lottery, it will shift to door breakthrough mode 1. .

In addition, in this modification, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry opening 64 is easily opened in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the opening control of the electric accessory 64a is the same in both the variable probability mode and the pullback mode, it is difficult to distinguish from the appearance whether it is the variable probability mode or the pullback mode. In this modification, when the number of time reductions ends and the mode falls from the pull-back mode to the normal mode, the player can recognize that the game is in the pull-back mode. In other words, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in the pullback mode, it becomes difficult to tell whether the jackpot was a jackpot in the variable probability mode or the jackpot in the pullback mode. Therefore, by hitting the jackpot in the pull-back mode, the player can be made to feel as if the variable probability state has continued beyond the upper limit of the number of times the variable probability state can continue. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in accordance with the configuration in which the fixed variation mode and the pullback mode cannot be distinguished from the movement of the electric accessory 64a, in this modification, all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are released in the door breakthrough mode 2. Even in this case, the effect of successfully breaking through the door is executed. As a result, when the Door Breaking Mode effect is executed in which Adventurer 811 succeeds in breaking through all the doors, whether the Door Breaking Mode 1 has transitioned to the Fixed Variable Mode or the Door Breaking Through Mode 2 has changed to the Pull Back Mode. This can make it difficult to understand whether the data has been migrated or not. Therefore, it is possible to realize an innovative game in which it is impossible to know how long the repetition of the jackpot and the mode (probability variable mode or pullback mode) in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set will continue.

In this way, in the modification of the eighth control example, the ball can be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 63a, and depending on whether or not the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 63a, the ball hit to the right is It is configured so that the direction in which it flows can be changed. When no balls are stored in the storage valve 63a, it becomes difficult for the balls to enter the second ball entry port 640, while the maximum number of balls (3) is stored by the storage valve 63a. In this case, the flow direction of a part of the newly launched ball is switched by the stored ball, and the trajectory is changed to a trajectory that allows the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. did. With this configuration, it is possible to configure the ball so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 even if the ball is hit to the right during normal times when the storage valve 63a is set to the buried state. Furthermore, during a jackpot in which the storage valve 63a is set to the protruding state, the ball can be configured to enter the second ball entry port 640 if the ball is hit to the right. Therefore, it is possible to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol to the upper limit at the end of the jackpot, and it is possible to suppress the lottery of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player from being executed in normal times.

In addition, in a modification of the eighth control example, when the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit, a time saving state of the normal symbol is set which continues until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (25 times). The configuration is as follows. By configuring this way, when the number of consecutive variable probability states reaches the upper limit, the special symbol lottery can be performed without reducing the number of balls held until the special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (25 times). It is possible to create a state (pullback mode) in which the process can be executed. Therefore, even if the number of consecutive probability variable states reaches the upper limit and a low probability state of a special symbol is set after a jackpot, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from immediately quitting the game. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, since both the pullback mode and the probability change mode are set to the time-saving state of normal symbols, they are configured so that it is difficult to distinguish them from each other based on the appearance of the movement of the electric accessory 64a. Thereby, even if the player wins a jackpot in the pull-back mode, it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won a jackpot in the variable probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay that makes the player feel as if the variable probability state continues beyond the upper limit of the variable probability state.

In addition, in the modification of the eighth control example, a storage valve 63a is provided above the general winning opening 63, and depending on the state of the storage valve 63a, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry opening 640. , a state in which a ball can enter the ball is configured to be switched, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the general prize opening 63, a storage valve 63a may be provided above the second ball entry opening 640. During a jackpot, the storage valve 63a is set to a buried state, so that a right-hit ball can enter the second ball entrance 640. By keeping the valve 63a in a protruding state, it may be configured such that it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. Thereby, the general winning hole 63 can be omitted, so the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the modification of the eighth control example, an upper limit is set on the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state, but instead of this, an upper limit may be set on the number of times the special symbol is drawn in one variable probability state. That is, when a probability variable jackpot occurs, the special symbol may continue to have a variable probability state after the jackpot until, for example, the special symbol lottery is executed 130 times. With this configuration, there is no need to determine whether or not the number of consecutive times of variable probability states has reached the upper limit, so the processing load at the end of the jackpot can be reduced. In addition, in this case, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, the special symbol's variable probability state and the normal symbol's time-saving state are set, while if the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the lottery, It is also possible to have a configuration in which the jackpot type is determined with a high probability (for example, 95%) that hardly any prize balls can be obtained, and in addition, after the jackpot, the special symbol changes the probability state and the normal symbol changes the normal state. . By configuring in this way, similar to each of the above control examples, a novel gameplay is realized in which the game is played in the hope that the lottery does not result in a jackpot based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the jackpot. be able to.

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 660 to 675. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, the second ball entry opening 640 and the specific winning opening 65a are provided in the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. There is a possibility that only balls hit to the right will flow into the channel on the right side when viewed from the front (even if the ball is hit from the left, the ball will not flow into the channel on the right side when viewed from the front). In both the opening 640 and the specific winning opening 65a, if the ball is hit to the right, the ball can enter (easy entry), and if the ball is hit to the left, the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). For this reason, if you hit the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, if you hit the ball to the right to get the prize ball, the ball will also enter the second ball entrance 640, so after the jackpot, the second special It is possible to make a state in which the reserved balls of the design are accumulated up to the upper limit. As a result, after the jackpot of the first special symbol, a state is created in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous if it becomes a jackpot, is continuously executed.

On the other hand, in this ninth control example, when the ball is hit to the left, the ball can enter (easy entry), and when the ball is hit to the right, the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). There are two types of special winning holes: 656a and a right-side special winning hole 657a, which allows the ball to enter (easy entry) if the ball is hit to the right, and cannot enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball) if the ball is hit to the left. It has a configuration with an opening. Then, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, there is a jackpot type in which only the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in every round (the right specific winning hole 657a is difficult to open), and a jackpot type in which only the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in the first round. is opened, and the right specific winning hole 657a is opened in other rounds (the right specific winning hole 657a is likely to be opened). In other words, there are jackpot types in which there are few opportunities to hit right during a jackpot (difficult to accumulate reserved balls with the second special symbol during a jackpot) and jackpot types where there are many opportunities to hit right (difficult to accumulate reserved balls with the second special symbol during a jackpot). It is structured to provide a jackpot type (easy to accumulate). If the type of jackpot is such that there are few opportunities to hit right-handed (difficult to accumulate reserved balls with the second special symbol during a jackpot), the possibility that the jackpot will be included in the reserved balls that exist at the end of the jackpot will be low. The possibility of transitioning to variable mode can be made higher. On the other hand, if it is a jackpot type where there are many opportunities to hit to the right (the second special symbol's reserved balls are likely to accumulate during a jackpot), there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be included in the reserved balls that exist at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, the possibility of shifting to variable probability mode is relatively low. As a result, the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the type of jackpot can be made larger, so that when a jackpot occurs, it is possible to draw more attention to the type. Therefore, the player's expectations can be further increased until the type of jackpot is known.

In addition, in this ninth control example, as the difference in the degree of advantage according to the jackpot type of the first special symbol is made larger, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable display. The structure is designed to suggest the type of jackpot depending on the type of. More specifically, the jackpot type (relatively) where the number of rounds is small (2 rounds or 5 rounds) and the right specific prize opening 657a is opened in other than the first round (the reserved balls of the second special symbol are easy to accumulate). In the case of an unfavorable jackpot (type of jackpot), the occurrence of a jackpot is notified by aligning three main symbols imitating the same even number on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the number of rounds is large (16 rounds), and the right special prize opening 657a is opened in rounds other than the first round (the reserved balls of the second special symbol are easy to accumulate), making it a jackpot type (relatively disadvantageous jackpot type). In this case, notification is made that three main symbols imitating any of the eight types of numbers from "1 to 9" other than "7" are aligned on the display screen. Furthermore, if the most advantageous jackpot type (jackpot type where the number of rounds is 16 and all rounds are completed by left-handed hitting), one of the third symbols imitating the numbers "1 to 9" It is possible that there will be. In other words, if three main symbols with odd numbers other than "7" line up, it indicates a jackpot of at least 16 rounds, and furthermore, if three main symbols with odd numbers other than "7" line up, means that in addition to the number of rounds being 16, it is a jackpot type in which you can win a prize ball by hitting left-handed in all rounds of the jackpot. This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the types of main symbols that are aligned on the display screen when the variable display ends, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the most advantageous jackpot type (the jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 and all rounds are completed by left-handed hitting), and when all numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display effect. In this case, after that, a promotion effect is executed during the jackpot to change (promote) to a set of “7”. That is, in the most advantageous jackpot, a set of "7" indicating the most advantageous jackpot is announced during the variable display performance or during the jackpot after the variable display performance. Similarly, the number of rounds is the largest (16 rounds), and the right special prize opening 657a is opened in rounds other than the first round (the reserved balls of the second special symbol are easy to accumulate), and it becomes a jackpot type, and even numbers in the variable display performance are If the numbers are aligned, then a promotion effect executed during the jackpot is performed to change (promote) the numbers to an odd number other than "7". That is, in a 16-round jackpot in which the right specific winning hole 657a is opened in a round other than the first round, a sequence of odd numbers other than "7" is announced during the variable display performance or the jackpot after the variable display performance. Furthermore, in addition to opening the right special prize opening 657a in rounds other than the first round, in jackpots where the number of rounds is small (5 rounds or 2 rounds), even numbers are aligned by the variable display effect, which has developed into a promotion effect. Even in this case, the even numbers remain as they are without being changed (promoted) to odd numbers. In this way, by providing the promotion effect, in the variable display effect, the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot type with a low advantage (simulating the same even number corresponding to the jackpot in the 5th round or the 2nd round) Even if a combination of 3rd symbols (such as a combination of 3rd symbols) is stopped and displayed, the combination corresponding to a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage due to the promotion effect (3 3rd symbols imitating a 7, which corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot) will be displayed. It is possible to make the player expect that the combination (combination, etc.) will be changed (promoted). This can improve interest.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is that the configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. , the configuration of the RAM 223 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The only difference is that the processing has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 7 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 660, the configuration of the game board 13 in this ninth control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 660, in the game board 13 according to the ninth control example, the variable prize winning device 65 in the seventh control example is deleted, and instead of the left variable prize winning device 656 being installed in the left channel of the game board 13. In addition, a right variable winning device 657 is provided in the right flow path. The internal structure of the left variable winning device 656 provided in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13 is the same as the variable winning device 65 in the seventh control example. That is, the ball that enters the left specific winning port 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharge channel 65e2 inside the left variable winning device 656. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2 during the jackpot and passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, the right variable winning device 657 only has the function of paying out 11 winning balls when it detects that a ball enters the right specific winning opening 657a. In other words, the winning device has a simple configuration in which a switch (probability variation switch 65e3) that is the target for determining whether or not to give a probability variation state is not provided inside.

The left specific winning hole 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is opened in the first round (in the case of jackpots A3 to C3 described later) or in all rounds (in the case of jackpot D3 described later) when the first special symbol is a jackpot. ) will be released. On the other hand, the right specific winning hole 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened from the second round onwards when a jackpot A3 to C3 is achieved. When the jackpot type (jackpot D3) is reached in which the left specific prize opening 656a is opened in every round, a prize ball can be obtained by simply continuing to hit the ball to the left during the jackpot. That is, since there is no need to hit the ball right-handed, which may cause the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, after the jackpot ends, the second special symbol is drawn at a disadvantage (i.e., a variable probability state is not given). Difficult) There is no chance of hitting the jackpot (low). In other words, there is no possibility (low) of a jackpot winning again in a lottery performed after a jackpot based on the reserved balls that exist at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot type (jackpot D3) in which the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in all rounds, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction. Hereinafter, the type of jackpot that can be achieved by hitting left-handed in all rounds will be referred to as a "left-handed hitting jackpot." On the other hand, a type of jackpot in which the jackpot is achieved by hitting the player right-handed from the second round onward is referred to as a "right-handed jackpot."

On the other hand, if the right specific winning hole 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened in the second round or later, if the jackpot type is such that the right winning hole 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened, you will not be able to win the prize ball unless you hit the right ball in the second round or later. Therefore, a large number of balls enter the second ball entry port 640 during a jackpot. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot, the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored up to the upper limit. If there are many reserved balls with the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot, the possibility of a jackpot in the lottery based on the reserved balls after the jackpot is higher than in a left-handed jackpot. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, it is possible to create a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous if it becomes a jackpot, is executed continuously, so that, as in the seventh control example, for the player, It is possible to provide an innovative game feature in which the player can play the game in the hope that all the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the jackpot will come off (small win).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 661 and 662, a promotion effect, which is a type of display effect in the ninth control example, will be described. In this ninth control example, as described above, there is a possibility that the main symbols with the number "7" aligned only during the fluctuating display notifying the left-handed jackpot. Moreover, the main symbols with odd numbers other than "7" may be aligned during the fluctuating display to notify the 16th round jackpot. In other words, there is a possibility that the main symbols with even numbers will line up even in a variable display that notifies you of a left-handed jackpot or a variable display that notifies you of a 16-round jackpot. In this ninth control example, in the fluctuating display that notifies you of a 16-round jackpot or a left-handed jackpot, if the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, the opening period of the jackpot to the end of the first round is Until the interval period, the main symbols once aligned in the variable display will be changed (promoted) to a main symbol that imitates the number "7" or an odd number other than "7". executed. Thereby, even when the main symbols imitating even numbers are aligned in the variable display, it is possible to expect that a promotion effect will be executed during the jackpot and the symbols will be promoted to the symbols imitating odd numbers. Therefore, even if an even number of symbols are aligned in the variable display, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation to play from decreasing. Further, the promotion effect is configured such that the rate of execution is higher when promotion is successful than when promotion is unsuccessful. Thereby, when the promotion performance is executed, it is possible to improve the player's expectations for the promotion.

FIG. 661(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during the opening period of a jackpot in which a promotion effect is set. As shown in FIG. 661(a), during the opening period of the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set, the third symbol aligned in the variable display (in the example of FIG. 661(a), the main symbol imitating "2") continues to be displayed. Furthermore, a display area HR5 is formed in the upper center of the display screen, in which the words "Promotion chance! Hit hard to the left!!" are displayed. Further, to the left of the display area HR5, a display area HR1 is displayed in which the words "left-handed hitter" and an image of a leftward arrow are displayed. Furthermore, a cannon 815 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that by hitting left-handed, an effect using the cannon 815 will be executed.

The reason why the player is informed of left-handed hitting during the opening period is that the left specific prize opening 656a is opened in the first round. By starting left-handed hitting during the opening period, it is possible to efficiently win a ball into the left specific prize opening 656a at the start of the first round.

FIG. 661(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the first round. As shown in FIG. 661(b), during one round, when a ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a, the cannon 815 fires the third symbol (the main symbol imitating "2"). A bombardment performance is performed. As shown in FIG. 661(b), the part of the third symbol that has been bombarded is in a state where the view is blocked by the smoke K1. From then on, every time a ball entering the left specific winning hole 656a is detected, a production (shelling production) in which the third symbol is bombarded is executed, and the smoke increases.

FIG. 662(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of one round in a jackpot in which a promotion effect is set. As shown in FIG. 662(a), at the end of one round, smoke K1 to K7 are displayed so as to cover all of the third symbols. By completely covering up the third symbol, the player can predict whether the third symbol that will appear after the smoke clears will remain an even number or will be promoted to an odd number. can improve expectations for promotion.

FIG. 662(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the interval period after the end of one round when the promotion to left-handed jackpot is successful (that is, the current jackpot type is left-handed jackpot). . As shown in Figure 662(b), if the promotion to left-handed jackpot is successful, after the smoke K1 to K7 clears, an effect will be executed in which three main symbols imitating the number "7" will appear. be done. Furthermore, the words "Promoted to Super Big Bonus!!" are displayed in the display area HR5. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that he has hit the left-handed jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a great sense of satisfaction.

In addition, when promoted to a symbol indicating a right-handed jackpot in the 16th round (main symbol imitating an odd number other than "7"), the words "Promoted to Big Bonus!!" will be displayed in display area HR5. Is displayed. Also, if the promotion fails (that is, the current jackpot type was a right-handed jackpot other than the 16th round), the main symbol will remain as an even number pattern even after the smoke K1 to K7 clears. At the same time, the characters "Promotion failed..." are displayed in the display area HR5. These display contents allow the player to easily understand whether the promotion has been successful or not, and if the promotion has been successful, the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth control example, the probability change switch 65e3 is provided inside the left variable winning device 656, and both in the case of a left-handed jackpot and in the case of a right-handed jackpot, the left variable winning device 656 is connected to the left variable winning device 656. The specific winning hole 656a is configured to be opened in the first round of the jackpot. With this configuration, the opening operation can be the same until the interval period of one round of the jackpot ends whether it is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot. Therefore, even if you pay attention to the left specific winning hole 656a or the right specific winning hole 657a, it can be difficult to distinguish whether it is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot. Therefore, when a promotion performance is executed, the game can be played with more attention paid to the content of the performance, so that the performance effect of the promotion performance can be enhanced.

Further, in this ninth control example, the promotion effect is executed in the first round when the left variable prize winning device 656, which is provided with the probability change switch 65e3 inside, is activated. As a result, when the promotion effect is executed, even if it is determined that the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a and the state becomes variable after hitting the jackpot, the focus is on whether or not the ball will be promoted. Then, the remaining games in the first round can be played.

Here, in a general gaming machine, the player pays the most attention to whether or not the probability changes, and plays a jackpot game. That is, it is common to play a game during a jackpot by paying most attention to whether or not the ball enters the winning hole in which the probability change switch is built-in. However, once the ball passes through the probability change switch and it becomes certain that it will be in the probability change state, the player becomes satisfied at that point, and the rest of the game in the jackpot becomes like work simply to get the prize ball. There were cases where it became.

On the other hand, in this ninth control example, the promotion performance is configured to be executable from the opening period of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. That is, the promotion effect continues even after passing through the probability change switch 65e3. With this configuration, after it is determined that the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 and enters the probability change state, attention can be drawn to the result of the promotion performance. Even after that, you can draw attention to the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a jackpot from turning into a task simply to obtain a prize ball, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game during a jackpot.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 663 and 664, the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the ninth control example will be described. First, the ROM 202 will be explained with reference to FIG. 663(a).

FIG. 663(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 663(a), the ROM 202 in the ninth control example has an open scenario selection table 202e added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 585(a)). They are different in that they are Also, the difference is that the configuration of the first winning type selection table 202b has been changed. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the seventh control example, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 663(b), details of the first winning type selection table 202b in the ninth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 663(b), in this ninth control example, four types of jackpots A3 to D3 are provided as jackpots of the first special symbol. Furthermore, four types of jackpots E3 to H3 are provided as jackpot types of the second special symbol. Jackpots A3 to C3 and E3 are jackpots corresponding to jackpots A to D in the seventh control example, respectively, and are right-handed jackpots with round numbers of 16 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds, and 16 rounds, respectively. In other words, it is a jackpot in which the right specific winning hole 657a is opened in rounds other than the first round of the jackpot. In the right-handed hitting jackpot, the right specific winning hole 657a is opened from the second round, so if you do not hit right from the second round onwards, you cannot make the ball enter the right specific winning hole 657a and get a prize ball. Therefore, as in the seventh control example, by continuing to hit right during a jackpot, a large amount of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 provided on the right side of the game board 13, and the jackpot ends. At times, the reserved balls of the disadvantageous second special symbol can be stored up to the upper limit. Therefore, after the jackpots A3 to C3 and E3 are finished, the mode can be shifted to the door breakthrough mode in the same way as after the jackpots A to D in the seventh control example. As a result, after the jackpots A3 to D3 and E3, the player can play the game in the hope that the special symbol lottery will not result in a jackpot based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol. can.

On the other hand, jackpots D3 and H3 are left-handed jackpots with 16 rounds, and the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in every round. If you hit a left-handed jackpot, you can get the prize ball just by continuing to hit left-handed during the jackpot. That is, since there is no need to hit the ball right-handed, which may cause the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, after the jackpot ends, the second special symbol is drawn at a disadvantage (i.e., a variable probability state is not given). Difficult) There is no possibility of becoming a jackpot (transfer directly to fixed change mode without going through door breakthrough mode). Therefore, in the case of a jackpot type (jackpot D3, H3) in which the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in all rounds, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

Further, jackpots F3 and G3 are jackpots corresponding to jackpots E and F in the seventh control example, and are jackpot types in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. That is, this is a type of jackpot in which the right specific winning hole 657a is opened for only 0.2 seconds in each round of the jackpot. Since the right variable winning device 657 is not provided with the probability change switch 65e3, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from passing through the probability change switch 65e3 in the event of a jackpot F3 or G3. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol can be made more disadvantageous. In addition, in accordance with the configuration in which the right specific winning hole 657a is opened in each round when the jackpot F3 or G3 is reached, in this ninth control example, the right specific winning hole 657a is opened even when it becomes a small hit. It is configured to be open. As a result, when the right specific winning opening 657a is opened, it is difficult to distinguish whether the opening is due to a jackpot F3 or G3 or a small win. can. Therefore, it can be made difficult to discern whether or not the second special symbol has won the jackpot from the operation of the right specific winning opening 657a, so as with the seventh control example, the result of the door breakthrough mode performance can be drawn more attention. You can play games.

As shown in FIG. 663(b), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4” is associated with “Jackpot A3” with 16 rounds. (See 202b1 in FIG. 663(b)), and in the range of "5 to 84", "Jackpot B3" with 5 rounds is defined in association (see 202b2 in FIG. 663(b)). ), the range of "85 to 94" is associated with a "jackpot C3" with two rounds (see 202b3 in Figure 663(b)), and the range of "95 to 99" is defined with a "jackpot C3" of two rounds. “Jackpot D3” with 16 rounds is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 663(b)). Since the possible values of the first winning type counter C2 are 100 from "0 to 99", the percentage of "jackpot A3" being determined when the first special symbol is a jackpot is 5% (5/ 100). Similarly, the rate at which "Jackpot B3" is determined is 80% (80/100), the rate at which "Jackpot C3" is determined is 10% (10/100), and the rate at which "Jackpot D3" is determined is 80% (80/100). The proportion of these cases is 5% (5/100). That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the percentage of right-handed jackpots (jackpots A3 to C3) is 95%, and the percentage of left-handed jackpots (jackpot D3) is 5%. Since the percentage of left-handed jackpots is extremely low compared to the percentage of right-handed jackpots, when an advantageous left-handed jackpot is reported, it is possible to make the player feel more satisfied.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 663(b), for the second special symbol, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 3”, there is a “jackpot E3” with the number of rounds of 16. The range of "4 to 48" is associated with and defined as "Jackpot F3" with 7 rounds (see 202b5 in FIG. 663(b)). 202b6), the range of "49 to 98" is associated with "Jackpot G3" with 6 rounds (see 202b7 in Figure 663(b)), and "99" has a number of rounds of 6. 16 rounds of "Jackpot H3" are defined in association (see 202b8 in FIG. 663(b)). Therefore, when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the percentage of "Jackpot E3" being determined is 4% (4/100), and the percentage of "Jackpot F3" being determined is 45% (45/100). , the ratio at which "Jackpot G3" is determined is 50% (50/100), and the ratio at which "Jackpot H3" is determined is 1% (1/100). That is, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of a jackpot (either jackpot F3 or G3) to which a variable probability state is unlikely to be applied is determined to be 95%. Therefore, if the second special symbol hits the jackpot during the door breakthrough mode, the mode will shift to the normal mode at an extremely high rate (95%). In addition, the percentage of jackpots in which the left specific prize opening 656a is opened (a variable probability state is given after a jackpot) is 5%, of which 4% is a right-handed jackpot (jackpot E3), and 1% is a left-handed jackpot (jackpot E3). It becomes a jackpot H3). Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, the player can be made to think that he or she has been very lucky, which can make the player feel even more joy. .

In addition, in this ninth control example, there is a possibility that the promotion effect will be executed even when the jackpot E3 or H3 is reached. Since jackpots E3 and H3 are both 16-round jackpots, they become jackpots E3 and H3, and when a promotion effect is executed, an effect in which the main symbols imitating odd numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display is executed. After that, a promotion performance is performed to determine whether or not to promote to the main symbol imitating "7". Jackpot H3 is a rare jackpot type that is selected only in 1% of the second special symbol jackpots, but once the jackpot is announced, the possibility of jackpots F3 and G3, which account for 95% of the jackpots, is eliminated. be done. That is, at the time when a jackpot is announced in the second special symbol lottery, it is determined that the distribution is a 4% jackpot E3 or a 1% jackpot H3. Therefore, since the jackpot H3 occurs at a rate of 1/5, the player can be made aware that this is the most advantageous chance to win the jackpot. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the promotion effect is set so that the rate of execution is higher when the promotion is successful, so a jackpot was announced in the second special symbol lottery, which developed into a promotion effect. In this case, the player's expectation for the jackpot H3 can be further increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, details of the open scenario selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 664(a). This opening scenario selection table 202e includes, for each jackpot type, the type of specific winning opening to be opened in each round of the jackpot (either the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a) and the opening period ( This is a data table that defines either a long opening of up to 30 seconds or a short opening of up to 0.2 seconds. When a jackpot is won, an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is read out from the open scenario selection table 202e and stored in an open scenario storage area 203ba to be described later. Then, during a jackpot, the opening operation for each round is set according to the scenario defined in the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

As shown in FIG. 664(a), as an opening scenario corresponding to the jackpot types "Jackpot A3" to "Jackpot C3" and "Jackpot E3" (i.e., right-handed jackpot), a left-hand specific prize is won for the first round. A long opening (maximum of 30 seconds) of the right winning opening 656a is defined in correspondence with each other, and a long opening (maximum of 30 seconds) of the right specific winning opening 657a is defined in association with each round after the second round (Fig. 664(a), 202e1). As a result, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, the left specific winning hole 656a is opened only in the first round, and the right specific winning hole 657a is opened in each round after the second round. Therefore, from the second round onward, you cannot get the prize ball unless you hit the right ball and play a jackpot game aiming at the right specific winning hole 657a. A large number of balls enter the 640 during the jackpot. Therefore, at the end of the right-handed jackpot, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can reach the upper limit, so after the jackpot ends, the unfavorable lottery of the second special symbol is consecutively executed. mode can be set. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which the player is allowed to play the game in the hope that the second special symbol will continue to be missed in the lottery after the end of the jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 664(a), as an opening scenario corresponding to the jackpot type "Jackpot D3" and "Jackpot H3" (that is, left-handed jackpot), the length of the left specific winning hole 656a is set for all rounds. Opening (maximum 30 seconds) is defined in association (see 202e2 in FIG. 664(a)). As a result, in the left-handed hit jackpot, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained by simply hitting the left-handed ball aiming at the left specific prize opening 656a in all rounds. In other words, since there is no need to hit the ball to the right during a jackpot, there is no possibility that the ball will enter the second ball entrance 640 during a jackpot. Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, in most cases, the number of balls held in the unfavorable second special symbol becomes 0 at the end of the jackpot, and after the jackpot ends, the most advantageous ball is directly entered without going through the "door breakthrough mode". It is possible to shift to "definite change mode". As a result, when a player hits a left-handed jackpot, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 664(a), as an opening scenario corresponding to the jackpot type "Jackpot F3" and "Jackpot G3", the right specific prize opening 657a is opened for a short time (maximum 0.2 seconds) for all rounds. ) are defined in association with each other (see 202e3 in FIG. 664(a)). As a result, in the case of "Jackpot F3" and "Jackpot G3", it is almost impossible to get a prize ball, and the ball enters the left specific prize opening 656a and the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. There is no possibility of doing so. In other words, it is possible to form a disadvantageous jackpot without getting a prize ball or being given a variable probability state after the jackpot.

In this way, in this ninth control example, by setting the opening operation according to the opening scenario defined in the opening scenario selection table 202e, it is possible to accurately set the same opening operation every time for all jackpot types. I can do it.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 664(b). FIG. 664(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 664(b), the RAM 203 in the ninth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 590) in that an open scenario storage area 203ba is added. ing. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the seventh control example, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The open scenario storage area 203ba is a storage area for storing (storing) the open scenario when a jackpot is won and the open scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is read out from the open scenario selection table 202e. It is. At the start of each round in the jackpot, the types of specific winning openings to be opened (left specific winning opening 656a, right specific winning opening 656a, right specific winning opening 656a, the opening 657a) and the opening period (either a long opening of up to 30 seconds or a short opening of up to 0.2 seconds) is determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 665, the configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. First, FIG. 665(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 665(a), the ROM 222 of the ninth control example has a promotion effect lottery table 222b added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 592(a)). They are different in that they are Since the other configurations are the same as those in the seventh control example, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Details of the promotion effect lottery table 222b will be explained with reference to FIG. 665(b). This promotion effect lottery table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining (lottery) whether or not the promotion effect can be executed, and for each jackpot type, the random value (of the effect lottery counter 223j) determined to execute the promotion effect is (values) are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 665(b), for "Jackpot A3", "0 to 49" is defined in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j (FIG. 665 (See 222b1 in (b)). The details will be described later, but the performance lottery counter 223j is configured as a random number counter that generates a value in the range of "0 to 99", and can take 100 values of "0 to 99". Therefore, the ratio of promotion performance being determined when the game becomes "Jackpot A3" is 50% (50/100). When the "Jackpot A3" (16th round right-handed jackpot) was reached and the promotion effect was decided, an effect was executed in which three main symbols (third symbols) imitating the same even numbers were aligned in the variable display. Thereafter, a promotion performance for the jackpot is performed to promote the main symbol to a main symbol imitating the same odd number other than "7", and it is announced that it is a 16th round right-handed jackpot. On the other hand, if the promotion performance is not determined, a performance in which main symbols imitating odd numbers other than "7" are aligned is performed in the variable display performance. In this case, the normal jackpot effect (see FIG. 580) is executed without the promotion effect being executed during the jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 665(b), "0 to 19" is associated with "Jackpot B3", "Jackpot C3", and "Jackpot E3" as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j. (See 222b2 in FIG. 665(b)). Among the 100 counter values (random values) that the performance lottery counter 223j can take, 20 counter values (random values) corresponding to the execution of the promotion performance are specified, so "Jackpot B3" and "Jackpot C3" are specified. , and "Jackpot E3", the ratio of promotion performance being determined is 20% (20/100). When the first special symbol lottery results in "Jackpot B3" (5th round right-handed jackpot) or "Jackpot C3" (2nd round right-handed jackpot) and the promotion effect is determined, an even number will appear in the variable display. After a performance in which three main symbols imitating the same numbers are aligned, a performance in which promotion fails in a jackpot promotion performance is performed. In addition, if the promotion effect is not determined, after a variation display effect in which the main symbols imitating even numbers are aligned, a normal jackpot effect is performed without developing into a promotion effect (see Figure 580). is executed.

In addition, when the second special symbol lottery becomes "Jackpot E3" (16th round right-handed jackpot) and the promotion effect is decided, the main character that imitates the same odd number other than "7" in the variable display After a performance in which three symbols are aligned is performed, a promotion performance performed during a jackpot in which promotion fails is performed. In addition, if the promotion effect is not decided, after the effect in which the main symbols imitating the same odd numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display, the normal jackpot will not develop into the promotion effect. The effect (see FIG. 580) is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 665(b), for "Jackpot D3" and "Jackpot H3" (left-handed jackpot in 16 rounds), the value range of the production lottery counter 223j is "0 to 79". are defined in association with each other (see 222b3 in FIG. 665(b)). Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the performance lottery counter 223j can take, 80 counter values (random values) corresponding to the execution of the promotion performance are defined, so "Jackpot D3" or "Jackpot H3" is specified. ”, the ratio of promotion performance being determined is 80% (80/100). When the first special symbol lottery results in "Jackpot D3" and a promotion effect is determined, after the effect in which three main symbols imitating even numbers are aligned in the variable display, the promotion in the jackpot is performed. A production is executed in which the main symbol imitates the number "7" and a 16th round left-handed jackpot is announced. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery results in "Jackpot H3" and the promotion effect is determined, an effect in which three main symbols imitating the same odd numbers other than "7" line up in the variable display will be executed. After that, a promotion effect for the jackpot is performed to promote the main symbol to a main symbol imitating the number "7", and it is announced that it is a 16th round left-handed jackpot. Note that if the promotion performance is not determined, a performance in which the main symbols imitating the number "7" are aligned is executed in the variable display performance. In this case, the promotion performance is not performed during the jackpot, but the normal jackpot performance is performed.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to the block diagram in FIG. 665(c). As shown in FIG. 665(c), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the ninth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 592(b)). It differs in that a presentation flag 223k is added. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the seventh control example, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The performance lottery counter 223j is a counter used for lottery of performance modes, such as determination (lottery) of whether promotion performance can be executed. This performance lottery counter 223j is. The value is updated in the range of "0 to 99". When drawing a promotion performance, it is determined whether any of the random numbers (counter values) specified in the promotion performance lottery table 222b match the value of this performance lottery counter 223j, and if the values match, the promotion performance is selected. execution is decided.

The promotion effect flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not a promotion effect is set. If the promotion effect flag 223k is on, it indicates that the promotion effect is set, and if it is off, it indicates that the promotion effect is not set. This promotion performance flag 223k is set to ON when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot A to E or G, and when the promotion performance execution lottery that is executed at the start of the variation of the third symbol is won. (See S5405 in FIG. 675). Further, after setting the end of the promotion performance, it is set to off (see S4515 in FIG. 673).

<About the control process of the main controller in the ninth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 666 to 669. First, details of the special symbol variation process 3 (S121) in the ninth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 666. This special symbol variation process 3 (S121) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) in the seventh control example.

Of the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 666) in this ninth control example, each process of S201 to S221 is different from each process of S201 to S221 of the special symbol variation process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 600). The same processing is performed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 666) in the ninth control example, when the process of S219 is completed, the opening scenario is then changed to select the opening scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type from the opening scenario selection table 202e. A scenario selection process (S241) is executed, and the process moves to S220. The details of this open scenario selection process (S241) will be explained with reference to FIG. 667.

FIG. 667 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned open scenario selection process (S241). In this opening scenario selection process (S241), first, the opening scenario selection table 202e (see FIG. 664(a)) is read out (S1901), and the opening scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is specified (S1902). Next, the identified release scenario is stored in the release scenario storage area 203ba (S1903), and the process ends.

With the release scenario specified in this release scenario selection process (see FIG. 667) and stored in the release scenario storage area 203ba, the release action for each round during a jackpot can be set to an appropriate action according to the type of jackpot. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 668, jackpot control processing 3 (S1031) will be described. This jackpot control process 3 (S1031) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 609) in the seventh control example, and is a process for controlling the opening operation during a jackpot.

Of the jackpot control process 3 in this ninth control example (see FIG. 668), each process of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1112 is the same as that of S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 609), respectively. The same processes as those in S1107 to S1112 are executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process 3 in the ninth control example (see FIG. 668), if it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the seventh control example Instead of (see FIG. 610), jackpot operation setting processing 3 is executed (S1131), and the processing ends. The details of this jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131) will be explained with reference to FIG. 669.

FIG. 669 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131). This jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the number of rounds of jackpot. Of the jackpot control process 3 (S1131) in this ninth control example, each process in S1202 to S1204 is the same as each process in S1202 to S1204 in the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 610) in the seventh control example. is executed.

Further, when the jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 669) in this ninth control example is executed, first, the data of the open scenario stored in the open scenario storage area 203ba is read out (S1211), and the read data Based on this, the type of specific winning hole to be opened in this round (left specific winning hole 656a or right specific winning hole 657a) and opening time are specified (S1212). Next, the opening of the specific winning hole (left specific winning hole 656a or right specific winning hole 657a) of the type specified in the process of S1212 is set (S1213), and the opening time specified in the process of S1212 is started this time. The round time is set as the round time (S1214), and the process moves to S1202.

By executing this jackpot action setting process 3 (see FIG. 669), it is possible to accurately set the opening action for each round according to the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 670 to 675. First, with reference to FIG. 670, jackpot related processing 3 (S4221) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. This jackpot related process 3 (S4221) is a process executed in place of the jackpot related process (see FIG. 620) in the seventh control example.

Of the jackpot-related processes 3 (see FIG. 670) in this ninth control example, each process of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 is different from the jackpot-related processes in the seventh control example (see FIG. 620). The same processes as S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 are executed.

In addition, in the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 670) in the ninth control example, if it is determined that an opening command has been received in the process of S4401 (S4401: Yes), then whether or not a promotion effect is set is determined. An opening command process is executed to set a corresponding opening effect (S4411), and this process ends. Details of this opening command processing (S4411) will be described later with reference to FIG. 671.

In addition, in the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 670) in the ninth control example, when it is determined that the round number command is not included in the commands received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4403 (S4403: No), then it is determined whether the winning command is included in the commands received from the main controller 110 (S4412). In the process of S4412, if it is determined that a winning command is included (S4412: Yes), a specific winning opening (left specific winning opening 656a, or A winning command process is executed to set a winning effect when a winning to the right specific winning opening 657a) is detected (S4413), and the process ends. Details of this winning command processing (S4413) will be described later with reference to FIG. 672. On the other hand, in the process of S4412, if it is determined that the winning command is not included (S4412: No), the process moves to S4405.

In addition, in the jackpot related process 3 in the ninth control example (see FIG. 670), if it is determined in the process of S4405 that a closing command has been received (S4405: Yes), the closing command process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 621), the closing command process 3 is executed (S4414), and this process ends. Details of this closure command processing 3 (S4414) will be described later with reference to FIG. 673.

Next, details of the opening command processing (S4411) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 671. FIG. 671 is a flowchart showing this opening command processing (S4411).

In this opening command process (see FIG. 671), first, it is determined whether the flag 223k during promotion is on (S5201), and if it is determined that the flag 223k is on during promotion (S5201: Yes), An opening performance (see FIG. 661(a)) corresponding to the promotion performance is determined (S5202), and the process moves to S5204. On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if it is determined that the promotion performance flag 223k is off (S5201: No), an opening performance is determined according to the type of jackpot this time (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Transition. Note that, in the case of jackpots F3 and G3, the mode according to the type of jackpot is a mode of performance as if the door breakthrough mode performance is continuing. On the other hand, in the case of jackpot types other than jackpot F3 and G3, the effect is such that it is announced that it has become a jackpot.

In the process of S5204, a display opening command indicating the mode of the opening effect determined in the process of S5202 or S5203 is set (S5204), and this process ends. By executing this opening command process, it is possible to execute an appropriate mode of opening performance depending on whether promotion performance is set or not.

Next, details of the winning command processing (S4413) described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 672. When this prize winning command processing (S4413) is executed, it is first determined whether the flag 223k is on during promotion performance (S5301), and if it is determined that the flag 223k is on during promotion performance (S5301: Yes). ), a bombardment effect (see FIG. 661(b)) in which the main symbol is bombarded by the cannon 815 is executed (S5302), and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the promotion performance flag 223k is off (S5301: No), a winning performance in the normal mode is set (S5303), and this process ends. It should be noted that the winning performance in the normal form refers to a performance that suggests winning a prize ball, such as a performance to win gold coins or a performance in which the characters "GET" are displayed.

By executing this winning command process (see FIG. 672), each time the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a in one round of the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set, the main symbol will be changed in stages by the bombardment effect. It can be hidden with an image of smoke. By performing a performance in which the main symbols are hidden and it is unclear whether the player will be promoted or not, it is possible to further heighten the player's expectations for promotion.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the notification of whether to be promoted or not is configured to be executed in the interval period after one round is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time a ball enters the left specific winning slot 656a, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to notify the result, and if the lottery is won, the end condition for one round (7 or more balls win the prize) is , or 30 seconds have elapsed). Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect, it may also be configured to determine by lottery how many times the left specific winning hole 656a is won to notify the result of the promotion effect. With this configuration, it is possible to expect that promotion will be announced each time the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a, so that the game in the first round of the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set. It is possible to further improve people's interest. Furthermore, in the case where the result of the promotion performance can be announced even if the end condition of the first round is not met, the result may be announced only when the player is promoted before the end condition is met. . In other words, if the promotion fails, the promotion failure is always notified during the interval period after the end of the first round, while if the promotion is successful, the left specific winning slot is It may be configured such that notification is made when the number of winnings for 656a is less than the upper limit number of winnings. By configuring in this way, the expectations for promotion will be announced each time a prize is won in the left specific prize opening 656a, and if the promotion fails, the expectation for promotion will continue for a longer period of time (until the end of one round). can be sustained.

Next, details of the closure command processing 3 (S4414) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 673. As described above, this closing command process 3 (S4414) is a process executed in place of the closing command process (see FIG. 621) in the seventh control example.

Of the closure command processing 3 (see FIG. 673) in this ninth control example, each of the processing from S4502 to S4505 is the same as each processing from S4502 to S4505 of the closure command processing in the seventh control example (see FIG. 621). Processing is executed.

Moreover, when the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 673) in this ninth control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the promotion performance flag 223k is on (S4511). In the process of S4511, if it is determined that the promotion performance flag 223k is on (S4511: Yes), it means that the end condition for the first round of the jackpot in which the promotion performance is set is satisfied. That is, it means that it is the timing to notify the result of the promotion effect, so next, it is determined whether the jackpot being executed is one of jackpot B3, C3, or E3 (S4512). In the process of S4512, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: No), it is determined that the jackpot type for which the promotion effect is set this time is jackpot A3, D3, or H3. means. In other words, this means that it is a jackpot type that will result in successful promotion, so in this case, an interval effect (see FIG. 662(b)) to notify successful promotion is set (S4513), and the process moves to S4515. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S4512, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is jackpot B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: Yes), it means that the jackpot type will fail in promotion. An interval effect for notifying promotion failure is set (S4514), and the process moves to S4515. In the process of S4515, the end of the promotion effect is set by turning off the promotion effect flag 223k (S4515), and this process is ended.

In addition, in the closing command processing 3 (see FIG. 673) in this ninth control example, if it is determined in the processing of S4511 that the promotion performance flag 223k is off (S4511: No), then the jackpot being executed is It is determined whether or not is the jackpot F3 or G3 (S4516). In the process of S4516, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is either jackpot F3 or G3 (S4516: Yes), the process moves to S4502. On the other hand, in the process of S4516, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is neither jackpot F3 nor G3 (S4516: No), an interval effect is set according to the number of rounds (S4517), and the process is continued. finish.

By executing this closing command processing 3 (see FIG. 673), when the end condition of the promotion effect is satisfied (the end timing of one round has come), the result in an appropriate manner depending on the jackpot type is notified. be able to.

Next, details of the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG. 674. This variable display setting process 3 (S4131) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 624) in the seventh control example. Of the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) in this ninth control example, each process in S4801 to S4809 is the same as each process in S4801 to S4809 in the variable display setting process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 624). Processing is executed.

Further, in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 673) in the ninth control example, when the process of S4803 is completed, a promotion effect lottery process is executed to determine (lottery) whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (S4821 ), the process moves to S4804. The details of this promotion effect lottery process (S4821) will be explained with reference to FIG. 675.

In the promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 675), first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that announces any of the jackpots A3 to E3, H3 (S5401), and If it is determined that it is not a variation pattern that reports either (that is, it is a miss or a jackpot F3 or G3) (S5401: No), there is no possibility of executing the promotion effect, so this process is performed as it is. end.

On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that the variation pattern is to notify one of the jackpots A3 to E3, H3 (S5401: Yes), a process is executed to draw a lottery to determine whether or not the promotion effect can be executed. Specifically, first, the promotion effect lottery table 222b is read out (S5402), and from the read table, the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is set within the range of the counter value (random value) corresponding to the type of this jackpot. By determining whether there is a matching value, it is determined (by lottery) whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (S5403). Then, based on the determination (lottery) in the process of S5403, it is determined whether execution of the promotion effect has been decided (S5404).

In the process of S5404, if it is determined that execution of the promotion effect has not been determined (S5404: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5404, if it is determined that the execution of the promotion effect has been decided (S5404: Yes), the execution of the promotion effect is indicated by setting the promotion effect in progress flag 223k to ON (S5405), and then this time It is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot E3 or jackpot H3 (S5406).

In the process of S5406, if it is determined that the jackpot is neither E3 nor H3, it means that the first special symbol is a jackpot and the execution of the promotion effect has been decided, so the third symbol imitating an even number is changed to It is set as the stop symbol at the time of stop (S5407), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5406, if it is determined that the jackpot is either E3 or H3 (S5406: Yes), it means that the second special symbol is a jackpot and execution of the promotion effect has been decided. A third symbol imitating an odd number other than "7" is set as a stop symbol when fluctuation is stopped (S5408), and the present process ends.

Through this promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 675), it is possible to determine (lottery) whether or not the promotion effect can be executed, and to set a stop symbol when the promotion effect is won.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example, when the ball is hit to the left, the ball can enter the ball (easy entry), and when the ball is hit to the right, the ball cannot enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). A left specific winning hole 656a that allows the ball to enter (easy entry) when the ball is hit to the right, and a right specific winning hole 657a that allows the ball to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball) when the ball is hit to the left. The structure is such that two types of specific winning openings are provided. If a ball enters the left specific prize opening 656a during a jackpot, the prize ball is paid out, and the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 inside the left variable winning device 656, so that a special symbol is displayed after the jackpot. A variable state is given. On the other hand, when the ball enters the right specific winning hole 657a, the same number of prize balls are paid out as when the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a, but the game state set after the jackpot is It has no effect on In addition, in this ninth control example, the type of jackpot is a left-handed jackpot in which only the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in all rounds (the player who hits the ball left-handed than the right-handed ball in all rounds wins the prize). The left specific winning hole 656a is opened in the first round, and the right specific winning hole 657a is opened in the other rounds (the right specific winning hole 657a is easier to open). From the second round onwards, a jackpot is provided in which it is easier to win more prize balls if you hit right than left. In a left-handed jackpot, there is no need to hit right-handed during the jackpot (there are few opportunities to hit right-handed), so it is difficult to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol during the jackpot. Since it is difficult to obtain the prize ball unless the ball is hit right after the round, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are likely to accumulate during the jackpot. Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, it becomes difficult for the unfavorable second special symbol to be drawn after the jackpot ends (the possibility that the jackpot of the second special symbol is pending at the end of the jackpot becomes lower) ) On the other hand, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, a disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed after the jackpot ends (the jackpot of the second special symbol may be pending at the end of the jackpot) is higher than the left-handed jackpot). Thereby, after the left-handed jackpot ends, the player can play the game with peace of mind until the next jackpot occurs. On the other hand, after the right-handed jackpot ends, the game can be played with the expectation that the jackpot will not occur until all the drawings of unfavorable second special symbols based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are completed. In this way, in this ninth control example, the gameplay after the jackpot is over can be switched depending on the jackpot type, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Furthermore, in addition to the number of rounds of jackpots and the game state set after jackpots, the ease with which the second special symbol lottery is executed after jackpots (ease of holding consecutive games) is also varied according to the type of jackpot. I can do it. Thereby, the difference in the degree of advantage for each type of jackpot can be made larger. Therefore, when the most advantageous left-handed jackpot occurs, the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

Further, in this ninth control example, the promotion effect can be executed from the opening period of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. That is, the promotion effect continues even after passing through the probability change switch 65e3. With this configuration, after it is determined that the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 and enters the probability change state, attention can be drawn to the result of the promotion performance. Even after that, you can draw attention to the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a jackpot from turning into a task simply to obtain a prize ball, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game during a jackpot.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in the first round of the jackpot for both right-handed and left-handed jackpots, but this is not limited to this, and for right-handed jackpots. In this case, the round and number of times that the left specific winning hole 656a is opened may be arbitrarily determined. In addition, if the configuration is such that the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in a round other than the first round in a right-handed jackpot, the right specific winning hole 657a is opened in the first round, so that the first round starts. At this point, you will know the type of jackpot. Therefore, the promotion performance may be performed during the opening period while the type of jackpot is unknown.

In this ninth control example, two types of variable winning devices, a left variable winning device 656 and a right variable winning device 657, were provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13, but as in the seventh control example, the game A variable winning device may be provided only on the right side of the board 13. Further, a storage valve 63a may be provided upstream of the second ball entry port 640 as in the modification of the eighth control example described above. Then, instead of providing a left-handed jackpot and a right-handed jackpot, the storage state of the storage valve 63a is maintained during a jackpot (that is, even if a right-handed ball is hit during a jackpot, the ball reaches the second ball entrance 640). It is also possible to provide a jackpot type (which is impossible) and a jackpot type in which the storage state is released (that is, if the ball is hit right during the jackpot, the ball can reach the second ball entrance 640). With this configuration, the number of variable prize winning devices can be reduced, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the present ninth control example, the promotion effect is such that the third symbol is bombarded with the cannon 815, but the presentation mode of the promotion effect is not limited to this. Any presentation mode may be set as long as it is a presentation that can clearly inform the player of the two modes of success and failure in promotion; for example, the adventure mode displayed during the door breakthrough mode presentation. The user 811 may perform an effect to promote the symbol by attacking the third symbol. Further, the promotion effect is not limited to the effect of promoting the third symbol. For example, without displaying the third symbol, a battle may be performed between the adventurer 811 and the enemy, and a left-handed jackpot may be announced by defeating the enemy. Thereby, the degree of freedom in production can be further increased.

In the ninth control example, the timing for notifying the result of the promotion performance is set to the end timing of the first round, but the timing is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the result of the promotion performance is notified when a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls) of balls have won in the left specific winning hole 656a. Further, the number of prizes that will be the trigger for notifying the results does not need to be fixed, and may be determined by lottery, for example. In this case, it is also possible to set a winning number with a high probability of being selected in the case of a left-handed jackpot or a winning number with a high probability of being selected in the case of a right-handed jackpot. By configuring this way, players who want to know the type of jackpot (whether it is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot) at an early stage based on the timing when the result of the promotion effect is notified can use the left-hand specific A game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls that have won a prize (balls entered) into the winning hole 656a. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the first round of the jackpot.

In the present ninth control example, the configuration is such that when a jackpot is achieved, it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the promotion effect is always executed. This makes it possible to omit the lottery process for promotion effects, thereby reducing the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, for example, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, the promotion effect is executed in such a way that the promotion always fails, and in the case of a left-handed jackpot, the number "7" is selected by lottery in the fluctuating display effect. A configuration in which it is determined whether a third symbol imitating the number "7" is to be displayed as a final design, or a main symbol imitating an even number is displayed once, and then promoted to a third symbol imitating the number "7" through a promotion effect. You can also use it as With this configuration, when a right-handed jackpot occurs, it is possible to have the player play the jackpot game in anticipation of promotion every time. Further, for all jackpot types, the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot type may be definitely displayed in a variable display effect without executing the promotion effect. As a result, any performance can be performed during the opening period or the first round of the jackpot, so the degree of freedom in performance can be increased.

In this ninth control example, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a left-handed hit jackpot and the promotion performance is executed, the variable display performance is configured to definitely display the third symbol imitating an even number. , but not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a third symbol imitating an odd number other than "7" is displayed as confirmed, and promoted to a main symbol imitating the number "7" by a promotion effect. Further, in the ninth control example, the promotion effect is executed from the opening period of the jackpot to one round of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the promotion effect may be executed within the variable period of the variable display effect that informs the jackpot, or the promotion effect may be executed over the variable period and the opening period of the jackpot.

In this ninth control example, the promotion performance was configured to be executed as a performance to notify whether it was a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot, but in a pachinko game where there is no distinction between left-handed jackpots and right-handed jackpots. It may be configured to be applied to the machine 10 (for example, a general gaming machine that has a probability-variable jackpot and a normal jackpot). More specifically, for example, in the event of a guaranteed variable jackpot, the third symbol imitating an even number or the third symbol imitating an odd number is configured to be displayed with a variable display effect. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, a third symbol imitating an even number is displayed as confirmed by a variable display effect. Then, when it is a probability-variable jackpot and the third symbol imitating an even number is confirmed and displayed, a promotion performance may be executed in which the symbol is promoted to the third symbol imitating an odd number. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, a promotion performance in which promotion fails may be performed at a predetermined rate. Thereby, the versatility of the promotion performance can be increased.

In this ninth control example, the probability change switch 65e3 is provided only inside the left variable winning device 656, and if the ball does not enter the left variable winning device 656 during a jackpot, a special symbol probability change state is given after the jackpot. The configuration was such that it would not be possible. That is, even in the case of a right-handed hit, the game is played by hitting left-handed in the first round, aiming at the left variable prize winning device 656, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a probability change switch 65e3 may be provided inside the right variable winning device 657 as well as the left variable winning device 656. Then, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, only the right variable winning device 657 may be configured to be in a state where the ball can be entered in all rounds. With this configuration, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, the ball is passed through the probability change switch 65e3 by hitting the left hand only in the first round, and the prize ball is acquired, and the ball launch is stopped in the remaining rounds. method can be prevented from being carried out. That is, in order to avoid the ball from entering the second ball entry port 640 during a right-handed jackpot, the ball is hit only in the round (first round) in which the ball can enter the left specific winning port 656a. Irregular gaming methods can be suppressed. If you play this irregular game method, the prize ball you get for a right-handed jackpot is small (you can only get one round), but because the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is not executed, it is normal. Never fall into mode. Therefore, the variable probability state continues semi-permanently, and there is a possibility that the hole may be disadvantaged unexpectedly. On the other hand, in the case of a right-handed hit jackpot, only the right variable winning device 657 is configured to allow ball entry, thereby making the above-described irregular gaming method fundamentally impossible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being caused to the hole.

In this ninth control example, by varying the ease with which a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 during a jackpot depending on the type of jackpot, some of the balls held at the end of the jackpot are The structure was such that the possibility of a jackpot being included (the so-called possibility of a consecutive win within a reservation occurring) was variable. In other words, by switching the direction in which you can get a prize ball by firing a ball depending on the type of jackpot, the possibility of physically holding consecutive hits occurring is changed, but this is not limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, it may be configured to control the likelihood of occurrence of consecutive reservations. More specifically, for example, similar to the seventh control example, a specific winning opening for winning a prize ball during a jackpot is provided only on the right side of the game board 13, and the probability change state of the special symbol is changed. It is also possible to have a structure in which the number of drawings that result in a variable probability state is made different depending on the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot in which the number of drawings that result in a variable probability state is one time and a jackpot in which the number of drawings that result in a variable probability state is four times are provided). By configuring this way, in the case of a jackpot type where the number of drawings that result in a variable probability state is one, the probability of a jackpot in the second and subsequent drawings with special symbols is low, so even the first drawing will be a miss. If this is the case, there is a high possibility that all lottery results based on reserved balls will be losers. On the other hand, if the number of drawings that result in a variable probability state is 4, all drawings based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol will be executed in the variable probability state of the special symbol, so the lottery will be held at the end of the jackpot. There is a high possibility that a jackpot will be won in a lottery based on reserved balls. Therefore, the same operation as the ninth control example described above can be realized with only one variable winning device. In addition, if the variable probability state is configured to end after a predetermined number of drawings according to the type of jackpot as in this modification, for example, all drawings based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol will be lost. As a benefit in the case of a normal symbol, it may be configured so that it becomes a time saving state. In other words, by making the number of drawings where the special symbol is in a variable probability state different from the number of drawings in which the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, for example, 100 special symbols may be drawn, regardless of the number of drawings in which the special symbol is in a variable probability state. It may be configured so that the time-saving state of the normal symbol continues until the end. In this case, as a more advantageous jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which only a time-saving state is provided without a probability change state of the special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol, which is executed after the end of the jackpot, can be performed in a low probability state of all special symbols, so that all the lottery of the second special symbol is a loss. You can increase the possibility of becoming

In this ninth control example, by providing a jackpot type in which reserved balls of the second special symbol are easy to accumulate during a jackpot and a jackpot type in which it is difficult to accumulate, it is possible to hit the jackpot again with the reserved balls held at the end of the jackpot. Although the configuration is such that the possibility of becoming different for each type of jackpot is used, it is not limited to this. For example, by creating a jackpot type in which it is easy to accumulate reserved balls with a normal symbol during a jackpot and a jackpot type in which it is difficult to accumulate reserved balls with a normal symbol during a jackpot, the number of reserved balls with a normal symbol at the end of the jackpot can be reduced. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the possibility of a normal symbol winning after a jackpot is varied. In addition, by varying the probability of winning a normal symbol after a jackpot depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to make a normal symbol during a predetermined period after the jackpot ends (for example, until all the reserved balls of the normal symbol at the end of the jackpot are exhausted). It is also possible to have a configuration in which the percentage of winnings is varied depending on the type of jackpot. Even with this configuration, since the degree of advantage for the player can be varied depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to have the player play the game while paying attention to the type of jackpot.

In this ninth control example, when a promotion effect is set, the ball enters the specific winning hole 656a in the first round, and even after it is determined that the special symbol will be in a variable state after hitting the jackpot, the ball will continue to Each time a ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a, a production (a production of bombarding the third symbol) that arouses expectations as to whether or not the player will be promoted is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the promotion effect may be executed during the opening period of the jackpot. In the first round of the jackpot, the configuration may be configured to execute an effect (for example, an effect in which an image imitating the letter "V" is displayed) indicating that this is the round in which the left specific winning hole 656a is opened. good. With this configuration, the player does not notice that the jackpot has started and continues to look at the result of the promotion effect, and fails to enter the ball into the left specific winning hole 656a (probable jackpot) However, it is possible to prevent the probability change state from being applied after a jackpot. For example, in the first round of the jackpot, the effect indicating that the left specific winning hole 656a is the round that is opened is displayed during the first round (even after the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a). , may be configured to continue to be executed, and the promotion effect may be executed after one round is completed. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to insert the ball into the left specific winning hole 656a, so it is possible to prevent the player from being at an excessive disadvantage. Furthermore, the promotion effect is not executed at all (that is, the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is always stopped and displayed in the variable display), and the left specific prize opening 656a is opened during the jackpot. It may be configured such that the effect indicating whether or not the game is true continues to be executed throughout each round. This can reliably prevent the player from hitting the ball in the wrong direction.

In this ninth control example, when the ball entered into the left variable prize winning device 656 passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the pachinko machine 10 has specifications that shift to the probability variation state after the jackpot ends. Although the configuration was such that the result of the promotion effect is announced after a prize is won in the left specific prize opening 656a in the second round and the probability change state is confirmed, the specifications to which the promotion effect can be applied are not limited to this. do not have. If the specification is such that the player can shift to either an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state compared to the advantageous state at a predetermined opportunity, a promotion effect can be applied. For example, a promotion effect may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 with specifications that award a jackpot when a ball enters a specific area inside a variable winning device provided on a game board. In other words, in the lottery based on the starting winnings, a lottery will be held to determine whether or not the variable winning device should be in a state where it is easy for balls to enter the ball (whether the variable winning device can be moved or not), and the lottery to determine whether the variable winning device can be moved is conducted. Even in this case, the specifications are such that a jackpot will not be awarded unless the ball enters the variable winning device and the ball does not enter a specific area. In this specification, the type of jackpot awarded when the ball enters the specific area may be notified after the ball enters the specific area and the jackpot is determined. More specifically, when a lottery is won to determine whether or not the variable winning device can be moved, a lottery is conducted to determine the jackpot type that will be awarded when the ball enters a specific area, and whether or not a promotion performance can be executed. When winning the promotion performance lottery, a combination of third symbols (for example, the same even numbers) corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type is displayed even if the prize is won in the advantageous jackpot type. Then, when the ball enters the variable winning device and the ball enters a specific area while the variable winning device is activated and the ball can enter, it corresponds to the original jackpot type. An effect is executed to display a combination of the third symbols (for example, the combination is promoted to the same odd number, or the same number is maintained as an even number). With this configuration, even after the ball enters the specific area, it is possible to attract attention to the performance in the expectation that an advantageous jackpot type will be notified by the promotion performance. Therefore, the game from the time the ball enters the specific area to the end of the jackpot can be prevented from becoming a task simply to obtain the prize ball. In other words, since it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the probability change switch 65e3 is not provided (the gaming state after the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type), the gaming state after the jackpot is configured to be able to be notified by promotion effect. You can. In other words, during a jackpot, the structure is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the time-saving state and the variable probability state after the jackpot, and there are cases where the time-saving state is set and some cases where the variable probability state is set. This notifies you that the time is shortened when the jackpot ends. If a variable probability state is set, the promotion effect is executed after the jackpot ends, and the variable probability state is set as a result of the promotion effect based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, when a predetermined number of starting wins are detected). It may also be configured to execute a promotion effect. In addition, when the time saving state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot and the promotion performance is executed, a performance that fails to promote to the variable probability state may be performed based on a predetermined opportunity. In addition, regarding the pachinko machine 10 where the same opening pattern is set for a specific winning hole for a small win and a so-called sudden win, if a small win is once notified and the player suddenly wins. may be configured to notify the sudden promotion to a certain position at a predetermined opportunity by a promotion effect. Furthermore, an opening pattern that cannot pass through the variable probability switch is set for a jackpot type in which an opening pattern that allows the player to pass through the variable probability switch is set, and a jackpot type in which an opening pattern that cannot pass through the variable probability switch is set. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the jackpot type is notified and promotion to the jackpot type in which an opening pattern that allows passing through a variable probability switch is set at a predetermined opportunity is notified.

<Modified example of the ninth control example>
Next, a modification of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 676 and 677. In the above-mentioned ninth control example, when a jackpot with a promotion effect set is started, the promotion effect is executed over the opening period of the jackpot, the first round period, and the interval period. In the promotion performance, a performance is performed that attempts to promote the main symbol combination that is confirmed and displayed in the variable display performance that notifies the player to a combination of main symbols that corresponds to a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. If the player succeeds in winning, the player is notified that it was a more advantageous type of jackpot.

On the other hand, in this modified example, one variable display effect is executed in a pseudo manner during the execution period of the variable display to notify the jackpot and the period from the start of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. And so. Thereby, in addition to whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot (whether it is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot) can be notified with one variable display effect.

Figure 676(a) shows the display that can be displayed when a left-handed jackpot (either jackpot D3 or H3) occurs in the special symbol lottery, and when a miss occurs in which a reach state occurs in the special symbol lottery. It is a figure showing an aspect. As shown in FIG. 676(a), in this modification, when a ready-to-reach state occurs, the words "left-handed hit" and an image of an arrow pointing left are displayed on the upper left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display area HR1 in which is displayed is displayed. Further, a display area HR5 is displayed in the upper center portion of the display screen, in which the words "Strike left and stop the symbol!!" are displayed. These displays allow the player to easily understand that the symbols will be stopped and displayed by firing the ball to the left.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the display mode shown in FIG. 676(a) is set at the timing when the opening period of the jackpot is started. That is, in this modification, even in the opening period of the jackpot, the third symbol is not stopped and displayed and remains in the ready-to-win state. Under this situation, if left-handed hitting is not suggested, there is a possibility that firing the ball toward the left specific prize opening 656a in the first round will be delayed. If the launch to the left specific winning hole 656a is delayed, there is a possibility that the ball will not be able to enter the ball during the opening period of the left specific winning hole 656a (the ball will not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3), resulting in a variable probability jackpot. Despite this, there is a possibility that the probability change state will not be given after a jackpot. In order to prevent such a situation, this modification is configured to perform an effect suggesting left-handed hitting (see FIG. 676(a)) when the opening period starts during execution of the variable display. In addition, in order to prevent (suppress) the possibility of detecting whether or not it is a jackpot from the display mode, even when the fluctuating display of winnings is being executed, a predetermined timing (for example, 1 second before the third symbol is confirmed and displayed) is displayed. The configuration is such that an effect suggesting left-handed hitting (see FIG. 676(a)) is executed. Thereby, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether it is a jackpot or a miss until the third symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the player's expectation of a jackpot can be maintained for a longer period of time.

FIG. 676(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when either jackpot D3 or H3 occurs and all the third symbols are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 676(b), when the player hits the ball left-handed and the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a during execution of the performance suggesting left-handed hitting, the number "7" is triggered. An effect is executed in which a third pattern (main pattern) imitating the . This makes it easy for the player to understand that he has hit the left-handed jackpot. In addition, by having a configuration that notifies you of a jackpot based on the ball entering the left specific winning hole 656a, you can pay more attention to the whereabouts of the fired ball (whether or not it enters the left specific winning hole 656a). You can play games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate. In addition, if you lose in the special symbol lottery and a performance suggesting left-handed batting is executed, the left specific winning hole 656a will not be opened, so the ball fired by left-handed hitting will enter the left specific winning hole 656a. There's nothing to do. In this case, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the performance suggesting left-handed hitting was performed, the stop symbols of the winning combination (combinations other than double-eye) are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 676, the case where the jackpot is D3 or G3 is explained as an example, but the same effect is executed for other jackpots as well. In other words, when the jackpot is A3 or E3, an effect is executed in which the third symbol (main symbol) imitating an odd number other than "7" is aligned, and when the jackpot is B3 or C3, an even number is executed. An effect is executed in which a third pattern (main pattern) imitating the numbers of is aligned. In addition, even in the case of a miss accompanied by a reach state, a number other than "7" may result in a reach state.

FIG. 677 is a diagram showing changes over time in the performance mode after the start of the variable display performance in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols and in the case of a loss accompanied by a reach state. First, with reference to FIG. 677(a), a description will be given of changes over time in the presentation mode in the case of a jackpot.

FIG. 677(a) shows the change over time in the performance mode when the game develops into a super reach and becomes a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 677(a), when the fluctuating display corresponding to the jackpot starts, the normal fluctuating display is first performed for 10 seconds, and then a reach state occurs at the end of 10 seconds. . After that, after 20 seconds of normal reach performance, it develops into super reach performance after 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Furthermore, after the super reach effect continues for 28 seconds, an effect suggesting left-handed hitting (left-handed hitting navigation, see FIG. 676(a)) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 677(a), at the time the effect suggesting left-handed hitting is displayed, the variable time of the variable display corresponding to the jackpot has actually elapsed, and the opening period of the jackpot has begun. ing. Therefore, in the first symbol display device 37, the variable display of the first symbol (special symbol) ends when 58 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation, and a stop symbol indicating a jackpot is displayed.

When one second of the opening period has elapsed and a ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a after the left specific winning hole 656a is opened, a third symbol imitating the same number ( An effect in which the main symbols) are aligned (see FIG. 676(b)) is executed. Then, you will be notified that you have hit the jackpot, and an effect will be executed to show that you are hitting the jackpot.

In addition, as shown in Figure 677(b), even if the lottery result is a loss with a reach state, from the start of the variable display until the left-handed navigation (see Figure 676(a)) is displayed. The presentation mode is the same as in the case of a jackpot (see FIG. 677(a)). Then, as shown in FIG. 677(b), in the case of a miss, the third symbol combination indicating the miss is stopped and displayed one second after the left-handed navigation (see FIG. 676(a)) is displayed. Then, you will be notified that you are out.

As shown in FIG. 677, the variation time when the special symbol becomes a jackpot is set to be 2 seconds shorter than the variation time when it becomes a miss. This means that when a fluctuating display of a loss is executed, the lottery result of the special symbol will be announced within the execution period of the fluctuating display, whereas when a fluctuating display of a win is executed, a jackpot will be announced. This is because the variable display is performed over the opening period and the first round period. If the variation time is the same for jackpots and misses, the timing to generate the left-handed navigation will be different for jackpots and misses, and due to the difference in variation time, the lottery results will be displayed before the fluctuating performance ends. There is a risk that it will be detected. On the other hand, in this modification, since the variation time is configured to be longer for a miss than for a jackpot, it is possible to display the left-handed navigation at the same timing as for a jackpot and a miss. Therefore, it becomes difficult to detect the special symbol lottery result from the varying time, so it is possible to attract more attention to the result of the varying display performance.

As explained above, in the modified example of the ninth control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern, the opening period of the jackpot, and the period of the first round are The present invention is configured to execute the first variable display effect. With this configuration, in addition to whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot can also be notified in one variable display effect, so that the player can pay more attention to the variable display effect and play the game. I can do it.

In addition, in this modified example, when a jackpot occurs in the variable display performance, the type of number corresponding to the jackpot type is configured to be in the reach state, but as in the ninth control example described above, the execution of the promotion performance is It is also possible to have a configuration in which a lottery is performed. Then, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect, the promotion effect is performed using the remaining period after the jackpot symbol is announced in the first round of the jackpot and the interval period after the end of the first round. It may also be configured to execute. With this configuration, even if the third symbols with even numbers are aligned, it is possible to make the player expect that the promotion effect will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest. .

In this modification, an image suggesting left-handed hitting is displayed in the upper left display area HR1 of the display screen during the opening period of a jackpot and during the last two seconds of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a miss. It's not something you can do. For example, a presentation that suggests to the player that he or she should play left-handed may be performed in a manner that is more conspicuous than the changing third symbol. Specifically, for example, instead of or in addition to the configuration of the above modification, the words "Aim for V!!" and the left variable winning device 656 may be added to the layer on the front side of the third symbol that is changing. It may also be configured to display a schematically illustrated image. When a ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a (when the lottery result of this special symbol is a jackpot), an image in which the third symbol imitating the same number is stopped and displayed is displayed. An image imitating the letter "V" may be displayed in front of the third symbol as the background. The display of the image imitating the letter "V" may be continued until one round is completed, for example. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to view the result of the performance without hitting the ball until the variable display ends. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot, the ball can be more reliably entered into the left specific winning hole 656a in the first round. Further, for example, the changing third symbol may be displayed in a semi-transparent manner to make the effect suggesting left-handed batting more noticeable, or the third symbol may be temporarily hidden.

<10th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 678 to 684. In the seventh control example described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a loss, there is a high probability of a small hit. The opening period of the opening/closing door 65f1 in each round of F was configured to be the same (0.2 seconds). Furthermore, the length of the interval period after the first to fourth rounds of jackpots E and F is completed is 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. . As a result, even if jackpot E or F is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol that are reserved at the end of the jackpot, or if they are all misses, the time until the door breakthrough mode effect ends. The opening/closing door 65f1 was configured to perform the same series of opening/closing operations.

On the other hand, in this tenth control example, the type of jackpot that the player can easily detect whether the result of the variable display of the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot is a loss or not, and the type that is difficult to detect It is configured to include a jackpot. As a result, depending on the type of jackpot, you will not be able to tell whether or not the second special symbol won until you check the result of the door breakthrough mode performance, and you will not be able to tell whether or not you missed the door breakthrough mode performance. You can switch between easy-to-understand gameplay.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is that the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 have been partially changed, and The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 has been partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the seventh section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in 10th control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 678 and FIG. 679, the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the tenth control example will be described. The ROM 202 in the tenth control example has the structure of the first winning type selection table 202b and the structure of the variation pattern selection table 202d partially changed from the ROM 202 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 585(a)). They are different in that they are different. The rest of the configuration is the same as the seventh control example described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 678 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning type selection table 202b in this tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 678, in this tenth control example, five jackpot types of jackpots A4 to E4 are provided as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. In addition, three jackpot types, jackpot F4 to H4, are provided as jackpot types of the second special symbol.

Jackpots A4, B4, D4, and F4 to H4 are jackpot types that operate in the same manner as jackpots A to F in the seventh control example, respectively. That is, jackpots A4 and F4 are both jackpots with 16 rounds, jackpot B4 is a jackpot with 5 rounds, and jackpot D4 is a jackpot with 2 rounds. When these jackpots occur, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for a maximum of 30 seconds in each round, so that a large amount of prize balls can be won during the jackpot, and the balls can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. I can do it. Further, jackpot G4 is a jackpot with seven rounds, and jackpot H4 is a jackpot with six rounds. When it comes to these jackpots, the opening/closing door 65f1 is only opened for 0.2 seconds at the most in each round, so not only can you hardly get the prize ball, but there is also a small possibility that the ball will pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. do not have.

Jackpot C4 has the same operation as jackpot B4 (5 round jackpot), but after the jackpot ends, while the fluctuating display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is being executed, whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol is missed. It becomes easier to distinguish. More specifically, when it comes to jackpot C4, after the jackpot ends, if you lose in the second special symbol lottery, a variable time (3 seconds) different from the interval period (1 second) of jackpot G4, H4 seconds) is more likely to be selected. Therefore, by observing the interval at which the specific winning hole 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) is opened, it is possible to estimate whether or not the special symbol lottery was a loss. In other words, if the player feels that the interval between openings of the specific prize opening 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) clearly exceeds 1 second after hitting the jackpot, this opening will be a special symbol miss (small hit). It is possible to make them recognize that there is a high possibility that the release is based on the above.

Further, the jackpot E4 has the same operation as the jackpot D4 (two-round jackpot), but like the jackpot C4, it is a jackpot type that makes it easy to determine whether the lottery of the second special symbol is a mistake after the jackpot ends.

In this way, in this tenth control example, when a jackpot C4 or a jackpot E4 occurs, it can be determined whether or not it was a loss by observing the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) is opened. It is configured so that it can be inferred. As a result, after the end of the jackpot, the game can be played by paying attention not only to the content of the door breakthrough mode performance but also to the opening interval of the specific prize opening 65a (opening/closing door 65f1). In particular, while a performance with a high risk of becoming a jackpot with a disadvantageous second special symbol (a performance in which a door 814 is opened using a tattered key 813) is being executed, If the player feels that the opening interval of the winning hole 65a exceeds 1 second, the possibility that the current change is a change display corresponding to a loss increases, so that the player can feel relieved. Hereinafter, to simplify the explanation, a jackpot (jackpot C4, E4) in which it is easy to guess whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot is a loss will be referred to as a "special win."

On the other hand, when it comes to jackpots A4, B4, D4, and F4, as in the seventh control example, is the lottery result of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot a loss (small win) or a jackpot? It becomes impossible (difficult) to identify from the opening operation of the specific winning a prize opening 65a. Therefore, in this 10th control example, depending on the type of jackpot, there is a gameplay where it is not known whether the second special symbol has won or not until the result of the door breakthrough mode performance is confirmed, and whether or not it has been a miss. Since it is possible to switch between easy-to-understand game characteristics during execution of the door breaking mode performance, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this 10th control example, jackpot B4 and jackpot C4 are configured so that the actions during the jackpot (opening action of the specific winning hole 65a, display mode of the third symbol display device 81) are completely the same. There is. Similarly, jackpot D4 and jackpot E4 are configured so that the operations during the jackpot are exactly the same. For this reason, if the jackpot ends in the 2nd or 5th round, the gameplay is such that you do not know whether the second special symbol was a hit or not until you check the result of the door breakthrough mode performance, and whether it was a miss or not. It becomes difficult to distinguish which one is set, the gameplay which is easy to detect during the execution of the door breaking mode performance. Therefore, even if the same period as the interval period is set consecutively as the interval at which the specific winning hole 65a is opened, the win of the second special symbol will not be included until the result of the door breakthrough mode performance is confirmed. It is possible to make the player think that the game feature is set in such a way that he or she does not know what is going on. Therefore, the game can be played with the expectation that the game will shift to the variable probability mode until the door breakthrough mode performance is completed.

As shown in FIG. 678, regarding the jackpot of the first special symbol, "jackpot A4" is defined in association with the value range of "0 to 9" of the first winning type counter C2, and "jackpot A4" is defined in association with "10 to 19". ” range, “Jackpot B4” is defined in correspondence, “20-89” range is defined as “Jackpot C4”, and “90, 91” range is defined in association with “Jackpot B4”. "D4" is defined in association with the range "92-99", and "Jackpot E4" is defined in association with the range "92-99". In other words, between the 5-round jackpot "Jackpot B4" and the "Jackpot C4", the "Jackpot C4" (special win) is configured so that it is selected more often (7 times more likely to be selected). . In addition, between the two round jackpots "Jackpot D4" and "Jackpot E4", "Jackpot E4" (special win) is configured so that the selection rate is higher (5 times more likely to be selected). . By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily set a game property in which it is easy to detect whether or not the player has missed the door during the execution of the door breaking mode performance. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, the player can play the game with more attention paid to the operation of the specific winning hole 65a.

The range of values of the first winning type counter C2 associated with each of jackpots F4 to H4 is the same as jackpots D to F in the seventh control example, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 679, the variation pattern selection table 202d in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 679(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 679(a), the structure of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the tenth control example is different from the structure of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the seventh control example (see FIG. 587(a)). The difference is that a table 202d8 for winning after winning and a table 202d9 for special winning and losing.

The special hit later winning table 202d8 is used when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot in the range where the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the special win (jackpot C4 or E4) is 4 or less. This is a data table referenced by In addition, the table 202d9 for special winning and losing is used when the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the special winning ends is within the range of 4 times or less, and the second special symbol is a winner (small hit) in the lottery. This is a data table referenced by The details of the special winning table 202d8 and the special winning table 202d9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 679(b) and 679(c).

FIG. 679(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the special after-winning table 202d8. As shown in FIG. 679(b), in the special post-win table 202d8, a "middle hit variation" with a variation time of 3 seconds is defined in association with the value "0" of the variation type counter CS1. , a "win short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 1 second is defined in association with the range of "1 to 198". For this reason, if a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery after the special win ends, a 1 second fluctuation time will be set with a high probability (198/199), but with a low probability (1/199). A variable time of 3 seconds may be set. For this reason, when the variable time of 3 seconds is set (the opening interval of the specific winning slot 65a becomes 3 seconds), it is not confirmed that the lottery result is a loss (small win), but a jackpot. There is a possibility that

FIG. 679(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hit/lose table 202d9. As shown in FIG. 679(c), in the special hit-later-lose table 202d9, "lose middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds corresponds to the value range "0 to 66" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. For the range of "67 to 198", "missing/short variation" with a variation time of 1 second is defined. For this reason, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a loss (small win) after a special win, a variable time of 3 seconds is set at a rate of about 34% (67/199). That is, the opening interval of the specific winning a prize opening 65a becomes 3 seconds or more. As mentioned above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol after a special hit, the variation time of 3 seconds is selected only with an extremely low probability, so the variation time is 3 seconds ( At the point when the player recognizes that the period of time (exceeding 1 second), it is possible to make the player think that the possibility that the currently executed variable display is a variable display corresponding to a loss is high. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the possibility of shifting to the variable probability mode can be predicted from the set variable time during the execution of the door breaking mode performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 680, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 680 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 680, the RAM 203 in the tenth control example has a variation counter 203ca and a special post-win flag 203cb added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 590). They differ in some respects.

The variation counter 203ca is a counter that counts the number of special symbol variation displays (special symbol lottery) performed after a jackpot. The initial value of this variation counter 203ca is set to 0, and the value is added by 1 each time the special symbol variation start timing (see S2001 in FIG. 682 and S2201 in FIG. 684). Further, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol lottery, the initial value is reset to 0 (see S253 in FIG. 681). When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, one data table for determining a fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d according to the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca (see FIG. 683). (See S2103, S2109).

The post-special hit flag 203cb is a flag indicating whether the previous jackpot was a special hit (jackpot C3 or E3). If this post-special hit flag 203cb is on, it means that the previous jackpot is a special win, and if it is off, it means that the previous jackpot is not a special win. The initial value of this special winning flag 203cb is set to OFF, and it is updated according to the jackpot type at the start of the jackpot (see S254 in FIG. 681). When the second special symbol lottery is executed, this special after-win flag 203cb is referred to and one data table for determining a fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 683). (See S2105, S2111). In the tenth control example, the special winning flag 203cb is updated when setting the start of the jackpot, but it may be set at the end of the jackpot.

<About the control process of the main controller in the 10th control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 681 to 684. First, special symbol variation processing 4 (S131) in the tenth control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 681. This special symbol variation process 4 (S131) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) in the seventh control example.

Of the special symbol variation processing 4 in this tenth control example (see FIG. 681), each of the processing in S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221 is performed in the special symbol variation processing in the seventh control example (see FIG. 600). ) The same processes as S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221 are executed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 681) in the tenth control example, when the process of S207 is finished, the special symbol 2 variation start process is executed to start a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. The process is then executed (S251) and ends. The details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 682 and FIG. 683.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 681) in the tenth control example, when the process of S212 is completed, the special symbol 1 variation start process is performed to start a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. is executed (S252), and the present process ends. Details of this special figure 1 variation start process (S252) will be described later with reference to FIG. 684.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 681) in the tenth control example, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the process of S218 (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is reset to OFF. At the same time, the variation counter 203ca is reset to the initial value of 0 (S253). Next, the special post-win flag 203cb is updated according to the type of jackpot won this time (S254), and the process moves to S220. In the process of S254, the post-special win flag 203cb is set to ON if the current win is a special win (either jackpot C3 or E3), and is set to OFF if it is another jackpot type. By switching the state of the special after-win flag 203cb according to the jackpot type, it is possible to switch the data table to be referred to for selecting a variation pattern after the end of the jackpot according to the state of the special after-win flag 203cb. Therefore, if the special after-win flag 203cb is on, when determining the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol after a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special after-win table 202d8 and the special after-win table 202d9. Since this is determined, a gaming property is set in which it is relatively easy to guess whether or not the game has won based on the opening interval of the specific winning hole 65a. In addition, if the special after-win flag 203cb is off, a game feature is set in which it is difficult to determine whether the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot is a win or a miss based on the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 682, details of the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process (S251) will be explained. This special figure 2 variation start process (S251) is a process for starting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol, as described above.

In this special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 682), first, 1 is added to the value of the variation counter 203ca to update it (S2001), and data of the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained. (S2002). Next, the probability variation flag 203g is read out to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (S2003). In the process of S2003, if the probability variable flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in a variable probability state, and if the probability variable flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state. In the process of S2003, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state (S2003: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S2002 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S2004). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability times (see FIG. 585(b)). As mentioned above, 40 random numbers from 0 to 39 are set as the special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that result in a jackpot. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S2006.

On the other hand, in the process of S2003, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variable state (it is in the special symbol low probability state) (S2003: No), the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S2002 Based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 585(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S2005). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability times. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value (ie, "0 to 39") that results in a winning, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S2006.

Then, a special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process is executed to determine a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of S2004 or S2005 (S2006). Details of this special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) will be described later with reference to FIG. 683.

When the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is completed, next, a variation pattern command is set for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) ( S2007). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 223f (S2008). Then, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) (S2009), and this process is ended. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 608).

Next, with reference to FIG. 683, details of the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) will be explained. This special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is a process for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, as described above.

In this special pattern 2 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a jackpot (S2101), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S2101: Yes), the special pattern 2 variation starts. Based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2002 of the process (see FIG. 682), the display mode at the time of a jackpot is set (S2102). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2002 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 682) is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 678). , determine what type of jackpot is. As mentioned above, in the case of a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is considered to be a jackpot F4 (16 round probability variable jackpot). If it is in the range of "5 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot G4 (7 round normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is judged to be a jackpot H4 (6 round normal jackpot). (See FIG. 678).

In the process of S2102, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot F4 to H4). Further, the jackpot type (jackpot F4 to H4) is set as the stop type in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S2102 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2103), and if it is 5 or more (S2103: Yes), from the variation pattern selection table 202d, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter 203ca is 5 or more. The table 202d5 for (5 variations or more) is read out (S2104), and the process moves to S2114.

On the other hand, in the process of S2103, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2103: No), it is determined whether the special after-win flag 203cb is on (S2105), and the special after-win flag If 203cb is on (S2105: Yes), the special winning later winning table 202d8 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2106), and the process moves to S2114. In addition, in the process of S2105, if it is determined that the special after winning flag 203cb is off (S2105: No), the table 202d4 for special figure 2 hits (4 variations or less) is read out from the variation pattern selection table 202d. S2107), the process moves to S2114.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current special symbol is a loss (S2101: No), first, a display mode at the time of a loss is set (S2108). In the process of S2108, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the display mode of the third symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. In 81, the stop type to be displayed is set as whether the reach is out of front and back, the reach other than out of front and back, or the reach is completely off.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2109), and if it is determined that it is 5 or more (S2109: Yes), the special figure 2 is removed from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (5 fluctuations or more). ) table 202d7 is read out (S2110), and the process moves to S2114. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2109: No), it is determined whether the after special winning flag 203cb is on (S2111), and after the special winning If the flag 203cb is on (S2111: Yes), the special hit/lose table 202d9 is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2112), and the process moves to S2114. In addition, in the process of S2111, if it is determined that the special after-hit flag 203cb is off (S2111: No), the table 202d6 for special symbols 2 out (4 variations or less) is read out from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2113 ), the process moves to S2114.

In the process of S2114, the lottery result of the current special symbol is determined based on the data table read out in any of the processes of S2104, S2106, S2107, S2110, S2112, and S2113 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. A variation pattern to be displayed is determined (S2114), and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 684, details of the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process (S252) will be explained. This special figure 1 variation start process (S252) is a process for starting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol, as described above.

Of this special figure 1 variation start process (see FIG. 684), each process of S2201 to S2205 and S2214 to S2216 corresponds to S2001 to S2005 and S2007 to The same processes as those in S2009 are executed.

In addition, in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 684), when the process of S2204 or S2205 is completed, it is then determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained in the process of S2204 or S2205 is a jackpot ( S2206) If it is determined that it is a jackpot (S2206: Yes), the display mode at the time of jackpot is set based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 (S2207). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 678), and it is determined what the jackpot type is. As mentioned above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is considered to be a jackpot A4 (16 round probability variable jackpot). If it is in the range of ``10 to 19'', it is determined to be a jackpot B4 (5 round guaranteed variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of ``20 to 89'', it is judged to be a jackpot C4 (5 round special win). If it is in the range of ``90, 91'', it is determined to be a jackpot D4 (2 round guaranteed variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of ``92 to 99'', it is judged to be a jackpot E4 (2 round special win). (See FIG. 678).

In the process of S2207, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A4 to E4). Further, the jackpot type (jackpot A4 to E4) is set as the stop type in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81. When the process of S2207 is completed, the table 202d1 for one special figure is read out from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2208), and the process moves to S2213.

On the other hand, in the process of S2206, if it is determined that the acquired lottery result is a loser (S2206: No), a display mode for when the lottery result is a loser is set (S2209). In the process of S2209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the display mode of the third symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front and back, the reach is other than out of front and back, or the reach is completely off.

Next, it is determined from the state of the probability variation flag 203g whether the special symbol is in a probability variation state (S2210), and if it is determined that it is in a probability variation state (S2210: Yes), the special symbol 1 is removed from the variation pattern selection table 202d. The (probability variation) table 202d3 is read out (S2211), and the process moves to S2213. On the other hand, in the process of S2210, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a state of probability change (S2210: No), the special symbol 1 off (normal) table 202d2 is read out from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S2212), and the process is performed. The process moves to S2213.

In the process of S2213, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the data table read out in any of the processes of S2208, S2211, or S2212 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S2213), and the process moves to S2214. do.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth control example, the type of jackpot that makes it easy for the player to detect whether or not the result of the variable display of the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot is a loss, The structure is such that there are jackpots of types that are difficult to detect. More specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot is a loss, a jackpot type (special win) in which a variable time of a period different from the interval period of the jackpot of the second special symbol is likely to be selected. and a jackpot type that is difficult to select. Thereby, after the special winning is over, the player can guess whether or not the lottery result is a loss by paying attention to the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1. In other words, the player can predict the possibility of shifting to the variable probability mode before the result of the door breaking mode performance is announced. On the other hand, after a jackpot other than a special win ends, it is determined from the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 whether the opening/closing operation is due to successive small wins or the opening/closing operation is due to a jackpot G4 or H4. Things become difficult. As a result, depending on the type of jackpot, you will not be able to tell whether or not the second special symbol won until you check the result of the door breakthrough mode performance, and you will not be able to tell whether or not you missed the door breakthrough mode performance. You can switch between easy-to-understand gameplay. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 10th control example, if the lottery of the second special symbol after a special win results in a loss (small win), the interval period (1 second) of the jackpot of the second special symbol is longer (3 seconds). The variable time (in other words, the interval until the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened in the event of disconnection) is limited to this value. It's not a thing. It may be set arbitrarily within a range that allows the player to determine that a period different from the interval period has been set. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable time of 0.1 seconds is easily set. With this configuration, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened and closed at clearly short intervals, so there is a high possibility that the opening/closing of the opening/closing door 65f1 this time is due to a small win for the player. It can make you think. Therefore, it is possible to draw more attention to the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 and allow the player to play the game. In addition, apart from the opening/closing door 65f1, a variable member capable of variable operation is provided, and the variable operation of the variable member is determined depending on whether it is a miss after a special hit or a miss after a jackpot other than a special hit. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the values are different.

This tenth control example is based on the premise that the pachinko machine 10 is disadvantageous to the player if the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot; It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 where it is advantageous. With this configuration, after the end of the jackpot, the more the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened at one-second intervals, the higher the expectation for the jackpot with the advantageous second special symbol increases, so that the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 and play the game.

In this 10th control example, the configuration provides a jackpot type in which the mode of the variable operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 after the jackpot ends is likely to be different depending on whether it is a miss or a jackpot, and a jackpot type in which the variable operation is likely to be the same. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the mode of performance executed on the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to provide jackpot types that tend to be different between misses and jackpots, and jackpot types that tend to match. Also, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the probability of a small hit occurring when the special symbol lottery is a loss (that is, a loss in which the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds)) may be different. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the opening/closing door 65f1 will not open (that is, it will come off).

<Eleventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 685 to 711. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2, and the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 is activated during a jackpot. When the ball passes, the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable mode (probability variable state for special symbols and time-saving state for normal symbols) advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example, instead of the variable winning device 65, a V winning device 670 is provided, which has the same appearance and internal structure as the variable winning device 65, and has different functions of each part. ing. In this V prize winning device 670, when a small win is achieved in a special symbol lottery, the opening/closing door 670f1 is opened and a game ball can be entered. Inside the V winning device 670, a V winning switch 670e3 is provided at a position corresponding to the probability change switch 65e3 in the seventh control example. When the game ball that enters the V winning device 670 during the opening period of the opening/closing door 670f1 passes through the V winning switch 670e3 described above, a jackpot game is awarded after the small winning ends. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example, in addition to a case where a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol lottery, a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 in the V winning device 670 due to a small win in the special symbol lottery. The structure is such that the jackpot will start even if the player does. In addition, in this eleventh control example, the small win is won with a high probability (for example, 9/10) only in the lottery of the second special symbol (the lottery of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 6400). (the lottery with the second special symbol is more likely to result in a small win than the lottery with the first special symbol), and the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entry port 6400 is adjusted according to the game state. It has a variable configuration. That is, in this eleventh control example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is constant regardless of the gaming state, and the probability of opening the electric accessory 6400a attached to the second ball entry hole 6400 (the probability of winning the normal symbol) is By varying the normal symbol fluctuation time, opening time, etc. depending on the gaming state, the probability of winning a small hit varies depending on the gaming state, and as a result, the possibility of winning a jackpot. (so-called specifications for a 1-type and 2-type mixer).

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example is configured to provide three types of gaming states. Specifically, a time-saving gaming state A in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entry port 6400, a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry port 6400, and Three types are provided: time-saving game state B; In the time-saving game state A, by playing a game aiming at the second ball entry port 6400, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entry port 6400 with a high probability, and the game ball can enter the second ball entry port 6400 without reducing the number of balls. Special symbol lottery can be executed continuously. In addition, if a jackpot is achieved in time-saving gaming state A, the time-saving gaming state A will be entered again at a high rate (80% rate), so once time-saving gaming state A is reached, time-saving gaming state A and the jackpot are more likely to be repeated. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state A is a gaming state that is extremely advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal game state, it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400, so it is difficult to generate a V prize due to a small hit. Therefore, the possibility of hitting the jackpot is reduced. In addition, even if a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery, the rate of transition to the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot ends is low (for example, 50%), so the normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous for the player. becomes. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state B, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, which is similar to the normal game state, but in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time-saving game state B Since the ratio of transition to gaming state A is the highest (eg, 100%), the state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In this eleventh control example, when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving gaming state A, either the time-saving gaming state A or the time-saving gaming state B is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends. With this configuration, even if the time-saving gaming state A is not set, the time-saving gaming state B becomes more advantageous than the normal gaming state (it is easier to shift to the time-saving gaming state A in the event of a jackpot). , it is possible to prevent the player from immediately quitting the game when the time-saving game state A ends. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the following explanation of this 11th control example, the most disadvantageous normal game state will be referred to as the "normal mode", the most advantageous time-saving game state A will be referred to as the "long game mode", and the mode will be changed to the consecutive game mode although it is disadvantageous during the stay. The time-saving gaming state B that is easy to shift to is called the "pullback mode".

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. , the configuration of the RAM 203 has been partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and some of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed. The following points have been changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 7 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 685, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 685 is a front view of the game board 13 in this eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 685, in the game board 13 in the eleventh control example, the electric accessory 64a provided in association with the first ball entrance 64 in the seventh control example is deleted. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 in this eleventh control example receives a game ball that is fired (hit to the left) toward a channel provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. On the other hand, it becomes impossible (difficult) for a game ball launched (hit to the right) toward the channel provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front to enter the ball. The arrangement of nails, etc. is set as follows. Further, below the first ball entry opening 64, a variable winning device 650 is provided which is set to allow a game ball to enter in each round of the jackpot. The specific winning hole 650a of this variable winning device 650 is configured as a winning hole from which 10 prize balls are paid out every time a game ball wins.

A V winning device 670 is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. As described above, this V winning device 670 has the same structure as the variable winning device 65 in the seventh control example (see FIGS. 576 to 6), but the functions of each part are configured differently. To be more specific, in the V winning device 670, the opening/closing door 670f1 on the top surface is normally closed, and only when a small win is achieved in a special symbol lottery, the opening/closing door 670f1 on the top surface is closed for a predetermined period of time. It is opened (for example, for 1.5 seconds), and a state is created in which a game ball can enter the inside through the V winning hole 670a, which is an opening. Inside the V prize winning device 670, instead of the normal discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 6(a)) and the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6(b)) in the seventh control example, the same structure as these is provided. A normal discharge channel 670e1 and a special discharge channel 670e2 are provided. The game balls that have flowed into the V winning device 670 flow down one of the channels (the normal discharge channel 670e1 and the special discharge channel 670e2) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the special discharge channel 670e2 is provided with a V winning switch 670e3 that starts a jackpot after a small win when a game ball passes through it. Details will be described later, but during a small win, game balls are basically distributed to the normal discharge channel 670e1, and only for a short period (for example, 0.075 seconds), are distributed to the special discharge channel 670e2. form. For this reason, even if a game ball can enter the inside of the V prize winning device 670 during the opening period (1.5 seconds) of the opening/closing door 670f1 based on a small hit, it will be distributed to the special discharge channel 670e2. If it is not the period in which the winning occurs, it will flow down the normal discharge channel 670e1 and the jackpot will not start. In addition, in this eleventh control example, when the game ball continues to be fired aiming at the V winning device 670, the game ball enters the special discharge channel 670e2 at a rate of about 1 out of 20 small wins. is configured to do so.

As shown in FIG. 685, a through gate 67 is provided in the channel provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and a through gate 67 is provided below the flow path through which game balls enter. A second ball entry opening 6400 is provided, which serves as an opportunity for the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 685, a large number of nails are planted in the area from the upstream side of the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front to the second ball entry port 6400. These nails cause almost all of the game balls fired at least with a firing strength (for example, 95% or more firing strength) that collides with the return rubber 69 to flow down to the second ball entry port 6400 (guidance). can do. Hereinafter, to simplify the explanation, the area for guiding the game ball to the second ball entrance opening 6400 will be referred to as the second ball entrance guiding area.

The second ball entrance 6400 includes a horizontally long rectangular electric accessory 6400a that covers the second ball entrance 6400, and an electric accessory for driving the electric accessory 6400a to open and close forward with the lower side of the electric accessory 6400a as an axis. A solenoid (not shown) is provided. The electric accessory 6400a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win. In the closed state of the electric accessory 6400a, the electric accessory 6400a and the game board 13 are closed on the same plane, so the game ball can pass in front of the electric accessory 6400a. Furthermore, by tilting the electric accessory 6400a to the lower front side, an open state is temporarily formed in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 6400 to win a prize. Therefore, even if the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that causes it to collide with the return rubber 6400, if the electric accessory 6400a is not in the open state at the timing when it reaches the second ball entrance 6400, the game ball will be fired at the second ball entrance 6400. The ball fails to enter the ball entrance 6400 and passes through, flowing downward (an area where the V winning device 670, the variable winning device 650, the out port 66, etc. are provided).

As shown in FIG. 685, the inside of the second ball entrance guiding region and the upstream side of the second ball entrance 6400 is branched into a right flow path R1 and a left flow path R2. Further, as shown in FIG. 685, a through gate 67 is provided in the left flow path R2. Furthermore, on the upstream side of the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2, the game ball that has entered the second ball entrance guidance area is placed in either the right flow path R1 or the left flow path R2. A sorting member 6600 for sorting is provided. The details will be described later, but depending on the interval at which the game balls arrive, the distribution member 6600 tends to distribute them biasedly to one channel, or the distribution member 6600 tends to distribute them alternately to both channels. What happens is variable. More specifically, when the firing interval of the game ball (the interval at which the game ball reaches the distribution member 6600) becomes long (for example, when the firing interval and arrival interval are 1.5 seconds or more) In this case, while the game balls are distributed only to the right channel R1 by the distribution member 6600, the firing interval of the game balls (the interval at which the game balls reach the distribution member 6600) becomes short (for example, , when the shortest firing interval is 0.6 seconds), the game balls are alternately distributed to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2 by the distributing means. In addition, when the game ball is fired at a firing interval between 0.6 seconds and 1.5 seconds, the ball is sent to the right channel R1 depending on the arrangement of the distribution member 6600 at the time when it reaches the distribution member 6600. It is variable whether it is distributed or distributed to the left flow path R2. Therefore, if the firing interval can be adjusted accurately between 0.6 seconds and 1.5 seconds, it will be possible to continue distributing game balls only to the left channel R2. The configuration of this distribution member 6600 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 686.

FIGS. 686(a) to 686(d) are diagrams showing the operation details of the distribution member 6600. FIG. 686(a) shows a state in which the game balls are flowing down (falling) toward the distribution member 6600 with the distribution member 6600 placed at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 686(a), the distributing member 6600 includes a rotating shaft 6600a, a right receiving part 6600R having a substantially rod shape extending rightward with respect to the rotating shaft 6600a, and an upper left part 6600R with respect to the rotating shaft 6600a. A substantially rod-shaped left receiving portion 6600L extending in the direction, a substantially rod-shaped hanging portion 6600b extending (hanging) downward to the left with respect to the rotation axis, and a hanging portion 6600b joined to the right side in front view with respect to the hanging portion 6600b. and a substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped biased portion 6600c. The distribution member 6600 is configured to be able to rotate clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front, with the rotation axis 6600a as the center, and the hanging portion 6600b is rotated with respect to the rotation axis 6600a. By being arranged vertically downward, it is configured to have a substantially "Y" shape when viewed from the front. Note that the biased weight portion 6600c is made of a material with a higher density than other parts of the distribution member 6600 (the right receiving portion 6600R, the left receiving portion 6600L, the hanging portion 6600b), and the center of gravity of the entire distribution member 6600 is There is a difference in mass from other parts to such an extent that it almost coincides with the center of gravity of the eccentric part 6600c. Specifically, for example, the unbalanced portion 6600c is made of iron and has a mass of 4 g, while all other parts are made of PS material and the total mass is 0.5 g. has been done. When no force other than gravity G is acting on the distribution member 6600, the center of gravity is ultimately stable at the lowest position (the state with the least potential energy), so the distribution member 6600 is Even if it moves to the position, if there is no action other than gravity G (action of external force), it will eventually return to the position shown in FIG. 686(a) and remain stationary.

The distribution member 6600 is configured to be able to receive game balls flowing down from above the second ball entrance guidance area by a right receiving portion 6600R and a left receiving portion 6600L. At the initial position (rest position) of the distribution member 6600, when a game ball flows down from above the second ball entrance guiding area (see FIG. 686(a)), the game ball is mainly received by the right receiving part 6600R. It will be done. When the game ball and the right receiving part 6600R collide, a downward force in front view acts on the right receiving part 6600R. In other words, a force acts to rotate the distribution member 6600 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front about the rotation axis 6600a. Here, since the mass of the game ball is configured to be heavier (approximately 5.5 g) than the total mass (approximately 4.5 g) of the distribution member 6600, the game ball collides with the distribution member 6600. , the right receiving portion 6600R is pushed down, and the distribution member 6600 is rotated clockwise in front view. As a result, the distribution member 6600 is rotated to a position where the right receiving portion 6600R forms an inclination from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in front view (see FIG. 686(b)). Therefore, the game ball received by the right receiving part 6600R flows down to the lower right direction in a front view along the slope formed by the right receiving part 6600R, and falls into the right flow path R1. That is, the game balls are distributed to the right channel R1.

In this way, the game ball that first reaches the distribution member 6600 when the distribution member 6600 is placed at the initial position (completely stationary) is distributed to the right channel R1. There is. As mentioned above, the left flow path R2 is provided with the through gate 67, while the right flow path R1 is not provided with the through gate 67, so the lottery of normal symbols is performed in the right flow path R1. This creates a disadvantageous flow path for the player since there is no possibility that the player will be rejected. By arranging the initial position of the distribution member 6600 such that it can be distributed to the disadvantageous flow path, it is possible to prevent the initial state of the gaming machine from becoming an advantageous state.

After the game balls are distributed to the right flow path R1 (falling from the right receiving part 6600R), a force (load due to the weight of the game balls) that rotates the distribution member 6600 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is applied. Therefore, only the gravity G acts on the distribution member 6600. Here, immediately after the game balls are distributed to the right channel, the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 is moved to the upper left side compared to the initial arrangement. Therefore, of the gravity G acting on the distribution member 6600, the component Gc parallel to the rotation direction becomes a force that rotates the distribution member 6600 counterclockwise in a front view (downward right in a front view). Due to the rotational direction component Gc of gravity, the distribution member 6600 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Note that even if the distribution member 6600 reaches the initial arrangement due to this rotational operation, it does not immediately come to rest, but passes through the initial arrangement once. This is because kinetic energy is generated during the rotation operation from the arrangement shown in FIG. 686(b) to the initial arrangement. Therefore, the distribution member 6600 continues to rotate in the counterclockwise direction even after passing through the initial arrangement, and temporarily stops when the kinetic energy becomes 0 (the speed of rotation becomes 0) ( (See Figure 686(c)). Note that if the player continuously fires the game balls into the second ball entrance guidance area (that is, fires them at the shortest firing interval of 0.6 seconds), the initial The next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 before and after this temporary rest position (see FIG. 686(c)), which is placed after passing through the arrangement. That is, the movable range ( The next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 while the game ball is moving in the rotation range).

As shown in FIG. 686(d), when the game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 after passing the distribution member 6600, the game ball mainly collides with the left receiving portion 6600L. The left receiving portion 6600L collided with the game ball is subjected to a force that pushes it downward in a front view due to the weight of the collided game ball. In other words, a force acts to rotate the distribution member 6600 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. As mentioned above, the mass of the game ball is heavier than the total mass of the distribution member 6600, so the distribution member 6600 rotates and the left receiving portion 6600L slopes downward from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front. Form. The game ball received by the left receiving part 6600L rolls along this slope and falls into the left flow path R2 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. That is, the game balls are distributed to the left flow path R2.

After the game balls are distributed to the left flow path R2 (falling from the left receiving part 6600L), a force (load due to the weight of the game balls) that rotates the distribution member 6600 counterclockwise when viewed from the front is applied. is eliminated, so that only gravity G acts on the distribution member 6600. Therefore, after distributing the game balls to the right channel R1 (see FIGS. 686(b) and (c)), the component Gc of the gravity G acting on the distributing member 6600 that is parallel to the rotation direction As a result, the distribution member 6600 rotates clockwise in a front view as a result of the force acting to return it to the direction of the initial arrangement.

From then on, while the game balls continue to be fired at the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds), the distribution member 6600 sends the game balls to one of the channels (the right channel R1, the left channel R1, the left channel The operation of distributing the game balls to any one of the channels R2) and the operation of rotating the game balls to a position where the game balls can be distributed to the other channel due to the reaction of distributing the game balls are repeated. Thereby, by continuing to fire the game balls at the shortest firing interval, the game balls can be distributed alternately to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2. As mentioned above, since the through gate 67 is provided in the left channel R2, by continuing to fire the game balls at the shortest firing interval, one out of every two game balls will pass through the through gate. 67 can be passed.

On the other hand, if the game balls continue to be fired at a firing interval of 1.5 seconds or more, the game balls are arranged to be distributed to the left flow path R2 due to the reaction of the game balls being distributed to the right flow path R1. However, it rotates again toward the initial configuration, and thereafter performs a pendulum movement centered on the initial configuration. The amplitude of this pendulum movement decreases over time due to air resistance, dynamic friction acting on the rotating shaft 6600a, etc., and when 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the range in which game balls can be distributed to the right channel R1 (rotating shaft The pendulum moves (or stands still) only in the range where the hanging portion 6600b is placed to the left of a perpendicular line drawn vertically downward from 6600a. For this reason, if the game balls are fired at intervals of 1.5 seconds or more, the game balls will be distributed only to the right channel R1, so the game balls will be distributed to the through gate 67 provided in the left channel R2. It becomes impossible for the ball to pass through. In other words, since it becomes impossible to execute the lottery of normal symbols, it becomes especially easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400 (if the normal symbol hits, the game ball In the consecutive win mode (in which the fluctuation time of normal symbols that easily enter the second ball entrance 6400 and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a are set), it is extremely disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, in the consecutive game mode, the player who wants to distribute the game balls to the left flow path R2 can have the game balls fired at the shortest firing interval. That is, in the consecutive game mode, game balls can be continuously fired without interruption, so the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, by adjusting the firing interval between the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds) and 1.5 seconds according to the operation of the distribution member 6600, the distribution member 6600 performs a pendulum operation. It becomes possible for the game balls to reach the distribution member 6600 only at the timing when the position is changed to the point where the game balls can be distributed to the left channel R2. Note that in order to fire the game balls at the shortest firing interval, it is sufficient to perform a relatively simple operation such as keeping the operating handle 51 at the maximum rotation amount, but by adjusting the firing interval, it is possible to In order to fire the game ball as intended at a firing interval other than the firing interval, delicate operation of the operating handle 51 is required. Therefore, except for some players with high gaming skills, it is better to continue firing game balls at the shortest firing interval by keeping the operating handle 51 at the maximum rotation amount, which will result in more games being played. By distributing the balls to the left channel R2, it becomes possible to perform more lottery drawings of normal symbols.

In this manner, the distribution member 6600 in the eleventh control example can vary the flow path through which the game balls flow depending on the operation details of the handle 51 by the player. That is, by maintaining the rotation amount of the operating handle 51 and continuing to fire the game balls at the shortest firing interval, the game balls can be reliably flowed down alternately into the right channel R1 and the left channel R2. can be done. In other words, there is an unfavorable channel (right channel R1) in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed even if the game ball passes through, and an advantageous channel (right channel R1) in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed even if the game ball passes through. The flow path (left side flow path R2) can be alternately distributed. In addition, while the distributing member 6600 performs a pendulum motion centered on the initial arrangement (see FIG. 686(a)) due to the reaction after distributing the game balls to any of the channels, the game balls are distributed to the left channel R2. By operating the operating handle 51 so that the game balls reach the period during which the balls can be distributed through the movable range, most of the fired game balls are sent to the left side where the through gate 67 is provided. It also becomes possible to distribute it to the flow path R2. In other words, it is also possible to realize an operation in which the flow channels are distributed in a way that is more advantageous to the player. Furthermore, although there is no benefit to the player, by operating the operating handle 51 so that the firing interval is 1.5 seconds or more, it is possible to modulate the flow path and distribute the game balls to a disadvantageous flow path for the player. It becomes possible. Therefore, the operation details on the operation handle 51 can be varied depending on the player's skill and the desired action, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in this eleventh control example, in the consecutive game mode (time-saving gaming state A), the electric accessory 6400a is opened at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second ball entrance 6400. be done. That is, an extremely short variation time of 0.1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol. In addition, 0.2 seconds is set as the release period of the electric accessory 6400a when the normal symbol hits. It takes about 0.2 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to reach the second ball entrance 6400, so the game ball reaches the second ball entrance just during the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a. It reached 6400 and entered the ball. Therefore, during the continuous game mode, by simply continuing to hit the game balls to the right with the maximum firing intensity and the shortest firing interval, all the game balls distributed to the left flow path R2 are sent to the second ball entry port 6400. You can get the ball into the ball. In other words, approximately one out of every two game balls can be allowed to enter the second ball entry port 6400.

On the other hand, in the pull-back mode (time-saving gaming state B), the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is also fired into the second ball entrance guidance area after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67, and is sent to the right flow path. A normal symbol fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set in which it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball distributed to R1 to enter the second ball entrance 6400. By setting this 0.5 second variable time, when the normal symbol hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 must wait until it has passed through the second ball entrance 6400 (i.e. through the through gate 64). After 0.2 seconds, which is the flow period of the flow path from the gate 67 to the second ball entry port 6400, has elapsed, the electric accessory 6400a is opened. In addition, since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is set to 0.2 seconds as in the consecutive game mode, the period from 0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds after the first game ball passes through the through gate 67 is set. It becomes impossible to enter the second ball entrance 6400 unless another game ball reaches the second ball entrance 6400. However, even if the game balls continue to be fired into the second ball entrance guidance area at the shortest firing interval, the game balls following the game ball that passed through the through gate 67 will be distributed to the right channel R1 and Since it takes about 0.8 seconds for the ball to reach the ball entry port 6400, the ball enters the second ball entry port 6400 after the opening period has elapsed. Therefore, even if you hit the game ball right at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pullback mode, it will be impossible (difficult) for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and This is an extremely disadvantageous situation that only reduces the number of balls you have. Therefore, in the pull-back mode, it is possible for the player to perform a gaming method in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 by hitting to the left to proceed with the game (drawing of special symbols is performed). In other words, even though the time-saving state of the normal symbol is given, a game method similar to the normal mode (normal game state) is performed instead of a game method that aims at the second ball entry hole 6400 that is easily opened. It is possible to realize a novel gameplay that allows you to play.

As mentioned above, in this 11th control example, when the pullback mode becomes a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, there is a higher possibility of shifting to the consecutive winning mode after the jackpot ends than in the normal mode. The structure is as follows. In addition, in this eleventh control example, after the consecutive game mode ends, the pullback mode is set until at least 30 special symbol lottery games are completed. More specifically, when the jackpot reaches E5 in the consecutive game mode, after the jackpot ends, the drawback mode is set until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times, and when the jackpot reaches F5, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. It is set to pullback mode until the end of the cycle. On the other hand, when another jackpot type (jackpot A5 to D5) occurs in the consecutive winnings mode, the consecutive winnings mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, after the consecutive game mode ends, if the special symbol lottery does not result in a jackpot, the pullback mode is maintained until the special symbol lottery ends 30 or 100 times. In other words, the pullback mode is maintained after the end of the consecutive winnings mode until at least 30 special symbol lottery drawings are completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that it is better to continue playing the game after the end of the consecutive game mode until at least 30 special symbols are drawn. In other words, even after the consecutive game mode ends, the game can be continued until at least 30 special symbol drawings are completed, so the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Here, in a gaming machine that is designed to award a jackpot when a special symbol is drawn or when a game ball enters a specific area (a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine), the game state is There are only two types of game states: a normal game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter a specific area, and a time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the specific area. It was common for the game to shift to the normal gaming state, which is the most disadvantageous state. However, with this configuration, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing will be greatly reduced when the game transitions to the disadvantageous normal gaming state, and the player will immediately quit playing when the time-saving gaming state ends. There was a possibility that it would happen.

On the other hand, in this eleventh control example, after the end of the consecutive game mode, until at least the 30th special symbol lottery is executed, a special symbol is used to easily switch to the consecutive game mode in the event of a jackpot. The configuration is such that a state (return mode) is set. This prevents the player's motivation to play from decreasing even if the consecutive game mode ends and the game ball enters the second ball entry port 6400 in an unfavorable gaming state. can. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the consecutive game mode ends, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in this eleventh control example, the configuration is such that when the consecutive game mode ends, the game always shifts to the pullback mode. That is, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, there are only two types of jackpot: the jackpot type that shifts to consecutive winning mode again after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot type that shifts to the pullback mode after the jackpot ends. Although the configuration is such that it is provided, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide a jackpot type that shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot ends at a predetermined rate (for example, 5%).

In this eleventh control example, when the game balls are continued to be fired at the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds interval), the operating range in which the distribution member 6600 can distribute the game balls to the right channel R1, and the left side The period of switching between the operating range that can be assigned to the flow path R2 and the firing interval of the game balls were configured to be approximately the same. That is, the distributing member 6600 of this control example distributes the game balls to one channel and the other channel during 0.6 seconds until the next game ball reaches the distributing member 6600. Although it is configured so that it can move to a range of motion that allows it to distribute game balls (the half period of the pendulum motion of the distribution member 6600 is approximately the same as 0.6 seconds), it is not limited to this. . If the game balls can be distributed alternately to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 when the game balls are fired at the shortest firing interval, the next game ball will arrive after the first game ball is distributed. It may also be configured to reciprocate by pendulum motion between an operating range that can be distributed to one flow path and an operating range that can be distributed to the other flow path one or more times during the 0.6 seconds until . In other words, an odd multiple of the half period of the pendulum motion of the distribution member 6600 may be configured to be approximately the same as 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing interval. Even with this configuration, each time the game balls fired at the shortest firing interval reach the distribution member 6600, the game balls can be distributed alternately to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2.

In the eleventh control example, by providing an unbalanced weight portion 6600c to shift the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600, the game balls can be distributed to the right channel R1 in a state where the distribution member 6600 is stationary (see FIG. 686). (see (a)), but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of providing the biased weight part 6600c, an elastic body such as a spring is used to rotate the distribution member 6600 by distribution of game balls, and then the initial arrangement shown in FIG. 686(a) is finally achieved. It may be configured to return to .

Next, with reference to FIG. 687, the operation of the V winning device 670 in the eleventh control example will be described. As described above, in the V winning device 670, when a small win is achieved in the special symbol lottery, the opening/closing door 670f1 is opened and a ball can enter the inside. FIG. 687 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the opening period of the opening/closing door 670f1 based on a small hit and the channel in which the game ball can flow down inside the V winning device 670.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 687, when the small win is won, the opening/closing door 670f1 is opened. This opening period continues for 1.5 seconds, and when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win, the opening/closing door 670f1 is closed and the small win ends. In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 687, for 0.5 seconds after the start of the small win, the game balls that have flowed into the V winning device 670 are normally guided to the discharge channel 670e1. , the flow path solenoid 670k is maintained in the off state. This makes it difficult for the game ball to flow down into the special discharge channel 670e2 for 0.5 seconds from the start of the small hit, so it also becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 670e3. Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit, the flow path solenoid 670k is turned on for 0.075 seconds, thereby guiding the game ball to the special discharge flow path 670e2. (The game ball becomes difficult to flow down into the normal discharge channel 670e1). As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the V-winning device 670 for 0.075 seconds are guided to the special discharge channel 670e2 and easily pass through the V-winning switch 670e3.

After 0.075 seconds have elapsed since the flow path solenoid 670k was set to on, the flow path solenoid 670k is set to OFF until the end of the small hit. That is, the game balls flowing into the V winning device 670 are set in a state where they are easily guided to the normal discharge flow path 670e1. With these operation details, if the game ball can enter the V winning device 670 and reach the special discharge channel 670e2 during the 0.075 seconds during which it becomes easier to be guided to the special discharge channel 670e2, the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 and a jackpot is awarded after the small win is completed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning switch 670e3 during the opening period of the small win, no jackpot will be awarded.

While the opening period for a small win is 1.5 seconds, the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass through only for 0.075 seconds, so in a game where the ball enters the V winning hole 670a in a small win of 1. The probability that the ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 is 1/20 (0.075/1.5). As mentioned above, in the consecutive game mode, unless you continue to fire the game balls at the shortest firing interval, it will be difficult for the game balls to enter the second ball entrance 6400, so even during the small winning opening period, The player basically continues to fire the game ball at the shortest firing interval. In other words, it becomes difficult to adjust the firing timing of the game ball aiming at the period when the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass, so whether or not the game ball flows down the special discharge channel 670e2 is determined by the second special discharge channel 670e2. It depends only on the variation time of the symbols, the downward direction of the game ball, etc. That is, there is almost no room for the player's skill to intervene, and the expected level of jackpot when winning a small jackpot is always constant (1/20). Therefore, the jackpot probability in the consecutive game mode can be made almost constant regardless of the player's skill, so that even players who are not accustomed to playing on the pachinko machine 10 can play the game with confidence. I can do it.

In addition, in this eleventh control example, when shifting to the consecutive winning mode after the end of the jackpot, the consecutive winning mode continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times or until the jackpot occurs. In addition, in this eleventh control example, the probability of a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 9/10, and the probability of a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is 1/200, so the second special symbol Whether it's a symbol lottery or a small hit, the probability that the consecutive game mode ends without winning the jackpot is about 0.6%. That is, once the player enters the consecutive winnings mode, an extremely advantageous state is formed in which the consecutive winnings mode and the jackpot are almost repeated until the player wins a jackpot of the type in which the pullback mode is given after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game with one goal being to shift to the consecutive game mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 688 and FIG. 689, a description will be given of the effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this eleventh control example and that suggests the degree of expectation for the pullback mode. In the eleventh control example, as described above, after the consecutive winning mode ends, the pullback mode is maintained until the special symbol lottery is executed at least 30 times. That is, when a jackpot is won, an advantageous state is set in which the game always shifts to the consecutive winning mode after the jackpot ends. Therefore, while the pullback mode is set, the player can be made to want to continue playing the game. That is, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for playing the game. However, if the number of draws for special symbols set as the pullback mode is too large, the rate of re-entering the consecutive game mode (the rate of pulling back from the consecutive game mode) will become too high, which may be excessively advantageous to the player. There is a risk that it will become. Therefore, in the present eleventh control example, after providing variations in the number of drawings for which the pullback mode is set (that is, setting either 30 or 100 times), The configuration is such that the number of times selected is not clearly indicated (hidden). And, according to the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is configured to indicate the number of selected lottery numbers (period of pullback mode). With this configuration, it is possible to make it ambiguous whether the pullback mode has ended or is continuing, so even if the minimum number of drawings exceeds 30 when the pullback mode is entered, the game cannot be continued. It can make you want to continue. Therefore, since the game can be played for a longer time after the consecutive game mode ends, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be further improved. Furthermore, since it is possible to realize a gameplay that predicts whether or not the pullback mode has ended based on the type of the back image, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game after the end of the consecutive game mode.

In the eleventh control example, three types of back images are provided as back images that indicate the degree of expectation that the pullback mode continues. That is, a back image with a high degree of expectation (see FIG. 688(a)) where the pullback mode continues, a back image with a medium degree of expectation (see FIG. 688(b)), and a back image with a low degree of expectation (see FIG. 688(b)). 689) are provided. When the number of special symbol drawings exceeds 30 after the pullback mode is set, a process of re-drawing the back image is executed every 10 times the special symbol drawing is performed. Depending on the update status of the back image, the player can predict whether or not the pullback mode continues. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 688(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the back image with the highest expectation level (back image for high expectation level) in which the pullback mode continues is displayed. As shown in FIG. 688(a), when the back image with the highest degree of expectation is set, a display mode in which the character 811 moves through the forest is displayed. Further, in the upper center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a display area HR6 in which the characters "CHANCE!!" are displayed is formed. These display contents can suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the pullback mode will continue.

FIG. 688(b) is a diagram illustrating a state in which a back image with a medium expectation level in which the pullback mode continues is displayed. As shown in FIG. 688(b), when a back image with a medium level of expectation is set, the character 811 is displayed in a descending river mode. Further, the characters displayed inside the display area HR6 become "CHANCE!?". Due to these display contents, the expectation level of the pullback mode is lower than when the back image for high expectation level (back image for medium expectation level) is displayed (it is likely that it has shifted to normal mode) ) can be suggested to the player.

FIG. 689 is a diagram showing a state in which the back image with the lowest expectation level (back image for low expectation level) in which the pullback mode continues is displayed. As shown in FIG. 689, when the back image with the lowest expectation level is set, a display mode in which the character 811 moves through the wilderness is obtained. Further, the characters displayed inside the display area HR6 become "CHANCE...?". These display contents can suggest to the player that expectations for the pullback mode are extremely low (it is highly likely that the game has already shifted to the normal mode).

In this way, in the eleventh control example, it is possible to indicate whether or not the pullback mode is continuing based on the display mode of the rear image. As a result, it is possible to provide a gameplay in which it is possible to predict whether or not the pullback mode is continuing based on the type of the back image, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Note that the pullback mode continues until the special symbol lottery is executed a maximum of 100 times after the jackpot won during the consecutive winning mode ends. Conversely, when the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the mode always shifts to the normal mode. Therefore, after the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the background image (not shown) for the normal mode is set.

<Electrical configuration in the eleventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 690(a), the configuration of the ROM 202, which is also included in the main control device 110 in the eleventh control example, will be described. FIG. 690(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 690(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 585(a)), with the small hit type selection table 202da and the time saving The difference is that a frequency selection table 202db and a regular figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc are added. In addition, in the ROM 202 in the eleventh control example, the contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, and the variation pattern table 202d are partially changed.

First, the first winning random number table 202a in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 690(b). FIG. 690(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 690(b), in the first winning random number table 202a in this eleventh control example, two random numbers (counter values) of “0, 1” are defined as judgment values for determining a jackpot. (See 202a1 in FIG. 690(b)). Note that, similarly to the seventh control example, the determination value for a jackpot is the same for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. In addition, "2 to 399" is defined as the range of judgment values that are determined to be a loss in the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 690(b)), and a judgment value that is determined to be a small win for the first special symbol. The value is not defined (see 202a3 in FIG. 690(b)). In addition, "2 to 40" is defined as the range of the judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is a miss (see 202a2 in FIG. 690(b)), and the range of the judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 690(b)).

In this way, in this eleventh control example, the small winning can be won only in the second special symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier to pass the V winning switch 670e3 in the consecutive winnings mode in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, so that in the consecutive winnings mode, a jackpot is likely to occur again in a short period of time. As a result, the degree of advantage in the consecutive game mode can be further increased, so that when the game shifts to the consecutive game mode, it is possible to give great pleasure to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 691(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 691(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning type selection table 202b in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 691(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in this eleventh control example has two types of jackpots A5 and B5 as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, and the second One type of jackpot C5 is provided as the jackpot type of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 691(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49" is associated with "jackpot A5" and defined. (See 202b1 in FIG. 691(b)). This "Jackpot A5" has 5 rounds, and regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, the jackpot type (5 rounds It's a time-saving jackpot). Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that will be "Jackpot A5", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "Jackpot A5" will be determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" is associated with "jackpot B5" and defined. (See 202b2 in FIG. 691(b)). This "jackpot B5" has 5 rounds, and is a jackpot type (5 round special jackpot) in which the gaming state after the jackpot is variable depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. More specifically, when the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode) becomes "Jackpot B5", the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot. , when the normal symbol time-saving state (pullback mode or consecutive game mode) becomes "jackpot B5", the normal symbol time-saving state A (consecutive game mode) is set as the game state after the jackpot. The correspondence between the jackpot type, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the gaming state to be set is defined in a time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 691(c)), which will be described later. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that become "Jackpot B5", so when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot B5" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 691(a), for the second special symbol, "jackpot C5" is defined in association with all possible values of the first winning type counter C2 (see FIG. 691(a)). (see 202b3 of a)). This "jackpot C5" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type (10 round special jackpot) in which the gaming state after the jackpot is variable depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. More specifically, if the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode) becomes "Jackpot C5", the normal state of the normal symbol (normal mode) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot. , If the normal symbol time-saving state (pullback mode or consecutive game mode) becomes "jackpot C5", the normal symbol time-saving state A (consecutive game mode) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot.

In this way, by making half of the jackpot of the first special symbol into a special jackpot (a jackpot where if you win in the normal mode, the normal mode will be set after the jackpot, and if you win in a mode other than the normal mode, the consecutive mode will be set after the jackpot). In a plurality of game states (normal mode, pullback mode) in which it is necessary to mainly execute the lottery of the first special symbol (it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol), it is possible to provide a difference in the degree of advantage. In other words, if you hit the jackpot with the first special symbol in the normal mode, the consecutive winning mode will be set after the jackpot at a rate of 50%, whereas if you hit the jackpot with the lottery of the first special symbol in the pullback mode, the rate will be 100%. It can be configured so that the consecutive winning mode is set after hitting the jackpot. As a result, while the normal mode and the pullback mode have the same advantage until winning the jackpot (disadvantageous state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400), when winning the jackpot The degree of advantage can be configured to be higher in the pullback mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, at least during the pullback mode, the player can be made to think that it is better to continue playing the game, so the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As mentioned above, in this eleventh control example, when the consecutive game mode ends (a jackpot is won in which a mode other than the consecutive game mode is set after the jackpot ends), the system always shifts to the pullback mode. There is. Thereby, even after the consecutive game mode ends, the player can be made to want to continue playing the game at least until the pullback mode ends. In other words, a player who has won a large amount of prize balls by repeating jackpots and consecutive games in consecutive games mode becomes satisfied with the game and immediately quits the game when the last jackpot in consecutive games mode ends. It is possible to prevent it from being put away. In other words, it is possible to continue the game in a situation where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400 and which is disadvantageous compared to the consecutive game mode (pull-back mode), so the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. can be improved.

Further, similarly to the pullback mode, if a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in the consecutive winnings mode, the consecutive winnings mode can be configured to be set after the jackpot at a rate of 100%. As a result, for example, if you move to consecutive game mode with the reserved ball of the first special symbol remaining and you win a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol, you will be sure to switch to consecutive game mode. It can be continued. In other words, an absurd situation occurs in which, after shifting to continuous winning mode, the first special symbol is won in the lottery and the mode immediately shifts to normal mode or pullback mode (even if you win a small winning even once) Since it is possible to prevent the player from ending the consecutive games mode without playing the game, it is possible to increase the player's motivation for playing during the consecutive games mode. In addition, even if you win a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery in the consecutive game mode, it will be a special jackpot and the consecutive game mode will be set again after the jackpot, so in the consecutive game mode, once for the small hit. It is possible to more reliably eliminate the possibility that the mode ends without winning. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's motivation for playing in the consecutive games mode.

Furthermore, by making all the jackpots of the second special symbols special jackpots instead of making them all time-saving jackpots, it is possible to prevent attempts to execute the lottery of the second special symbols in the normal mode. In other words, if you play an irregular game method in which you play the game by hitting right in the normal mode and letting the game ball enter the second ball entrance 6400, even if you hit a jackpot, you will always be at the most disadvantageous position after the jackpot ends. Since the configuration can be such that a normal mode is set, it is possible to increase the deterrent effect against irregular gaming methods.

Next, the small hit type selection table 202da will be explained with reference to FIG. 691(b). FIG. 691(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small winning type selection table 202da. This small hit type selection table 202da is a data table in which judgment values for determining the small winning type are defined when a small winning occurs in the lottery of special symbols, and the judgment value of the small winning type counter C5 is is defined in association with each small winning type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 691(b), for the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 49", "small win A" is defined in association with the small win type. (See 202da1 in FIG. 691(b)). This "small win A" is a small win type in which a "big win C5" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. As mentioned above, the number of rounds in jackpot C5 is 10 rounds, and if you win during the normal mode, the normal mode will be set again after the jackpot ends. If you win, this is a jackpot type where the consecutive winning mode is set after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 50 counter values that will be "small win A", so if a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, "small win A" will be The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 691(b), for the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "50 to 79", "small win B" is defined as the small win type ( (See 202da2 in FIG. 691(b)). This "small win B" is a small win type in which a "big win D5" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, "Jackpot D5" has 15 rounds, and is a jackpot type that shifts to consecutive game mode after the jackpot ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Among the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 30 counter values that become "small win B", so when a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, "small win B" will be The determined ratio is 30% (30/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 691(b), for the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "80 to 94", "small win C" is defined in association with the small win type ( (See 202da3 in FIG. 691(b)). This "small win C" is a small win type in which a "big win E5" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, "Jackpot E5" has 10 rounds, and the pullback mode is set from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 30 times, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. This is a jackpot type. Among the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 15 counter values that become "small win C", so when a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, "small win C" will be The determined percentage is 15% (15/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 691(b), for the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of “95 to 99”, “small win D” is defined in association with the small win type ( (See 202da4 in FIG. 691(b)). This "small win D" is a small win type in which a "big win F5" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, the number of rounds for "Jackpot F5" is 10 rounds, and the pullback mode is set from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. This is a jackpot type. Among the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 5 counter values that become "small win D", so when a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, "small win D" The determined percentage is 5% (5/100).

In this way, in this eleventh control example, four small winning types are provided, and the type of jackpot that is executed (started) when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed is different depending on the small winning type. It is configured. In the consecutive game mode (and the pullback mode in which the time saving state of the normal symbols is set), the game ball must win the small win A or the small win B and pass the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small win game. As a result, jackpot C or jackpot D is started, and the consecutive game mode is set again as the gaming state (mode) after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it can be said that small win A and small win B are small win types that are relatively advantageous for the player. In addition, since the number of rounds of the jackpot executed when the small win B is passed through the V winning switch 670e3, the small win B is a small win type with a higher degree of advantage than the small win A. I can say that there is. The percentage of winning small win A or small win B is 80% (50% + 30%) in total, and as mentioned above, the continuous game mode ends without hitting the jackpot even once ( The probability is about 0.6% (100 times a short period of time has elapsed), so once the consecutive game mode is activated, the consecutive game mode will be repeated at a rate of about 80% (the consecutive game mode will loop) .

In addition, in the consecutive game mode (and the pullback mode in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set), a small win C or a small win D is won, and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small win game. As a result, jackpot E or jackpot F is started, and the pullback mode is set as the gaming state (mode) after the jackpot ends. Since the pullback mode is a gaming state (mode) that is less advantageous than the consecutive game mode, it can be said that the small win C and the small win D are small win types that are relatively disadvantageous for the player. Note that small win C and small win D are the same in terms of the performance (number of rounds) of the jackpot that is executed when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3, but the period of the pullback mode that is set after the jackpot. (number of times) is configured to be shorter in the pullback mode based on the small win C. Therefore, it can be said that the small win D is a type of small win with a higher degree of advantage than the small win C. The probability of winning either small win C or small win D is 20% (15% + 5%), so if you win a jackpot in consecutive game mode, you will shift to pullback mode at a rate of about 20%. . In addition, if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol lottery in the consecutive winnings mode (when the jackpot is won without passing through the V winning switch 670e3), the game always shifts to the consecutive winnings mode after the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the normal mode, if you win a small win (small win A, C, D) other than small win B and the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3, the normal mode is set as the mode after the jackpot ends. It ends up. That is, if the V winning switch 670e3 is passed in the normal mode, the normal mode will be set after a jackpot 70% of the time, so an irregular game method that attempts to draw the second special symbol in the normal mode is not recommended. If this is done, it will be extremely disadvantageous for the player. As mentioned above, if you hit the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, you will enter consecutive winning mode 50% of the time, but if you hit the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, you will enter the consecutive winning mode 50% of the time. After hitting the jackpot, the game will switch back to normal mode. In addition, even if a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3, the game will shift to the normal mode again after the jackpot in 70% of the cases. Therefore, if a game method is implemented in which the second special symbol is drawn only by performing an irregular game method, the transition rate to the consecutive game mode, which is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, will be reduced. becomes low, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, an irregular game method is performed in which the player is forced to enter the second ball entry port 6400, which is difficult for the game ball to enter in the normal mode, and only draws the second special symbol. Since the advantage can be eliminated, in the normal mode, a game can be performed by hitting the game ball to the left in order to enter the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the implementation of irregular gaming methods from causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hole or, conversely, from causing excessive losses to the player. I can do it.

Next, details of the time saving number selection table 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 691(c). FIG. 691(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time reduction number selection table 202db in the eleventh control example. This time saving number selection table 202db is referred to when the jackpot ends, and sets the number of time saving times after the jackpot ends (the number of drawings for special symbols until switching to the normal mode) according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. This is a data table in which the data for This time saving number selection table 202db defines not only the number of time saving times after the end of the jackpot, but also data indicating the type of time saving state (whether it is time saving state A or time saving state B).

As shown in FIG. 691(c), as the jackpot type, for jackpots A5 and D5, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, 100 times is defined as the time saving number, and as the time saving state type, A time saving state A is defined in association (see 202db1 in FIG. 691(c)). Therefore, either the jackpot A5 is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202b1 in FIG. 691(a)), or the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the opening period of the small win B and the jackpot D5 is won. (see 202da2 in FIG. 691(b)), regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, after the jackpot ends until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, the normal symbol time-saving state A (consecutive winning mode) ) is set. As mentioned above, the continuous winning mode is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, so in the normal mode in which the game needs to proceed mainly by drawing the first special symbol, and in the pullback mode, the jackpot A5 is one type of jackpot that is desirable (pleasant) for players. Further, in the consecutive game mode in which it is necessary to proceed with the game mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot D5 is one of the jackpot types preferred by the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 691(c), as the jackpot type, for jackpots B5 and C5, 0 times is defined in association with the time saving number in the normal state (normal mode) of the normal symbol, and 100 time-saving states A are defined in association with the time-saving states (return mode, consecutive play mode) (see 202db2 in FIG. 691(c)). Therefore, in the normal mode that is set to the normal state of the normal symbols, if the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot B5, the normal mode will be set again after the jackpot, so the jackpot B5 is an undesirable jackpot for the player. It is one of the types. On the other hand, in the pull-back mode, even if the jackpot B5 occurs, the game shifts to the advantageous continuous winning mode after the jackpot ends, so it is one of the jackpot types preferred by the player. In addition, in the consecutive game mode in which the game needs to be progressed mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot C5 in which the game shifts to the advantageous consecutive game mode after the jackpot is one of the jackpot types preferred by the player. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 691(c), as a jackpot type, for jackpot E5, 0 times is defined as the time saving number in the normal state of the normal symbol, and 0 times is defined as the time saving number in the normal state of the normal symbol (pullback mode, 30 time-saving states B are defined in association with the continuous play mode) (see 202db3 in FIG. 691(c)). In addition, in the normal mode where you need to proceed with the game mainly by drawing the first special symbol, or in the pullback mode, you will not basically win the jackpot E5, but if you win irregularly or illegally in the normal mode, Even if the second special symbol is drawn and you get a small hit C, and you win the jackpot E5, you will be transferred to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot, so the jackpot E5 is the most disadvantageous jackpot type in the normal mode. It is one type. Furthermore, if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the pull-back mode and the jackpot E5 is won, the game shifts to the pull-back mode after the jackpot. In other words, even though it will shift to 100% successive winning mode if it becomes a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the pullback mode will be looped in vain, so even in the pullback mode, jackpot E5 is compared. This is one type of jackpot that is unfavorable (disadvantageous). In addition, when a small hit C occurs in consecutive game mode and a jackpot E5 occurs, the player shifts to a pullback mode that is disadvantageous to the player compared to consecutive game mode. This is one type of unfavorable (disadvantageous) jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 691(c), as a jackpot type, for jackpot F5, 0 times is defined as the time saving number in the normal state of the normal symbol, and 0 times is defined in association with the time saving number of the normal symbol (pullback mode, 100 time-saving states B are defined in association with the continuous play mode) (see 202db4 in FIG. 691(c)). That is, when the jackpot F5 is reached, the mode transition is similar to that of the jackpot E5 (see 202db3 in FIG. 691(c)), but the length of the pullback mode to which the transition is made when winning in the consecutive winning mode (number of special symbol drawings) However, compared to the case where the jackpot E5 is won, it will be longer (the number of drawings will be larger). Therefore, the jackpot F5 is an unfavorable (disadvantageous) jackpot type in the normal mode or the pullback mode, like the jackpot E5. In addition, in the consecutive game mode, although it is one of the undesirable jackpot types, it can be said that it is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than jackpot E5 in that the pullback mode continues for a long time after the jackpot.

In this way, in this eleventh control example, by setting the number of time reductions stipulated in the time reduction number selection table 202db (see FIG. 691(c)), the normal mode (normal state with normal symbols) is triggered by a jackpot. ), consecutive winning mode (time-saving state A with normal symbols), and pull-back mode (time-saving state B with normal symbols). This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the mode (game state) after winning the jackpot, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 692. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 202d in the seventh control example (see FIG. 587), this variation pattern selection table 202d is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol. This is the data table that will be used.

FIG. 692(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in this eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 692(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the eleventh control example is different from the structure of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the seventh control example (see FIG. 587(a)). In place of the table 202d2 for missing (normal) and the table 202d3 for special drawing 1 missing (probable variation), a single table 202d11 for missing special drawing 1 is provided, and per special drawing 2 (4 variations or less) In place of the table 202d4 for special figure 2 and the table 202d5 for special figure 2 (5 variations or more), a single table 202d12 for special figure 2 is provided, and the table for special figure 2 off (4 variations or less). 202d6 and the table 202d7 for special drawing 2 missing (5 variations or more), a table 202d13 for special drawing 2 missing (normal/pullback) and a table 202d14 for special drawing 2 missing (consecutive hits) are provided. They are different in that they are Note that the specified contents of the special figure 1 missing table 202d11 are the same as the special figure 1 missing (normal) table 202d2 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 587(c)), so a detailed explanation thereof will be given here. is omitted.

The special figure 2 winning table 202d12 is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern (variation time) when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 692(b), the special figure 2 winning table 202d12 shows the selected variation pattern (variation time) for each mode (gaming state) at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed. stipulated. As shown in FIG. 692(b), when a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode and the pullback mode, the fluctuation time exceeds the winning time of 180 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. A long fluctuation is determined. On the other hand, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol in the consecutive game mode, a middle winning variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined as the variation pattern, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. In this way, in the normal mode or pullback mode in which the game needs to be progressed by drawing the first special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time is set when a jackpot is achieved in the drawing of the second special symbol. Therefore, the gaming efficiency can be reduced when the second special symbol is drawn irregularly or illegally in the normal mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being drawn irregularly or fraudulently.

In addition, the table 202d13 for special symbol 2 loss (normal/pullback) determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when the second special symbol is a loss (including a small hit) in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode and the pullback mode. This is the data table that is referenced to do this. As shown in FIG. 692(c), the table 202d13 for special figure 2 failure (normal/pullback) includes only the deviation super long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. is stipulated. In this way, in the normal mode or pullback mode where the game needs to be progressed by drawing the first special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time is set if the second special symbol is a loss (or a small hit). With this configuration, it is possible to further reduce the gaming efficiency when the second special symbol is drawn irregularly or illegally in the normal mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being drawn irregularly or fraudulently.

In addition, the table 202d14 for special symbol 2 winnings (consecutive winnings) is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation time) when the second special symbol is a winning lottery (or a small hit) in the consecutive winning mode. This is the data table that will be used. As shown in FIG. 692(d), the table 202d14 for special drawing 2 winnings (consecutive winnings) defines a fluctuation pattern that can be determined for each lottery result. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 692(d), when the second special symbol misses, for all possible values of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time is 10 seconds. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the consecutive game mode, if the second special symbol is out of the lottery, a 10 second variation time is always set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 692(d), for the small hit of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time is 5 seconds for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 174". Variations are defined in association with each other, and a small hit middle variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with a range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "175 to 198". Due to these regulations, in consecutive game mode, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, only a relatively short variable time of 5 seconds or 10 seconds is set, so the gaming efficiency in consecutive game mode can be improved. can be increased. Therefore, the superiority of the consecutive games mode can be further enhanced, and the player's joy when shifting to the consecutive games mode can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in playing the game in the consecutive game mode.

In addition, we have increased the proportion of short fluctuation times (5 seconds) in the case of a small win with a high probability of winning in consecutive game mode, and set a relatively low proportion (approximately 1/4) in the case of a small win. ), a relatively long (10 seconds) fluctuation time is set, similar to the case of winning or losing. Thereby, each time a relatively long variable time is selected, the player can be made to think that there is a possibility that he or she has directly won the jackpot by drawing the second special symbol. Therefore, in the consecutive game mode, the game can be played by paying attention to the variable time, so that the player's interest in the consecutive game mode can be improved.

Next, details of the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202dc will be explained with reference to FIG. 693(a). This ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc is a data table that is referred to in order to set the fluctuation time of ordinary symbols when a lottery of ordinary symbols is executed. A gaming state (mode) at the time when a symbol lottery is executed and a normal symbol variation pattern (variation time) are defined in association with each other.

As shown in Figure 693(a), for the normal state (normal mode) of the normal symbol, a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated and prescribed as a fluctuation pattern (Fig. 693(a) (See 202dc1). On the other hand, short variation A with a variation time of 0.1 seconds is defined in association with time saving state A (consecutive play mode) of normal symbols (see 202dc2 in Fig. 693(a)), A short fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is defined in association with the time saving state B (pullback mode) of the normal symbol (see 202dc3 in FIG. 693(a)).

For this reason, when a normal symbol lottery is executed in normal mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely long compared to the time saving state (consecutive winning mode, pullback mode), so if you hit right in normal mode The gaming efficiency when playing a game by aiming at the gate 67 and the second ball entrance 6400 can be extremely deteriorated. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed in the normal mode. In addition, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to 0.1 seconds in the consecutive game mode (time saving state A), if the normal symbol hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 will directly enter the second entry. It can be configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball mouth 6400. Therefore, during the consecutive game mode, simply by continuing to hit the game ball to the right with the maximum firing intensity and the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval), the game ball will be distributed to the left channel R2 (see Figure 685). It is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400 with a high probability (1/1.2, which is the probability of winning a normal symbol).

On the other hand, by setting the variation time of the normal symbols to 0.5 seconds in the pullback mode (time saving state B), even if the normal symbol is won in the drawing, the game ball (through Game balls that have passed through the gate 67) and game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 and are then fired into the second ball entrance guidance area and are distributed to the right channel R1 (see Figure 685). It can be configured such that it is impossible (difficult) for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400. That is, by setting the variable time of 0.5 seconds, in the case of a normal symbol winning, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 passes through the second ball entry port 6400 (i.e., After 0.2 seconds, which is the flow period of the flow path from the through gate 67 to the second ball entry port 6400, has elapsed, the electric accessory 6400 is opened. In addition, since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is 0.2 seconds, after one game ball passes through the through gate 67, other game balls must not reach it within 0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds. It becomes impossible for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400. However, even if the game balls continue to be fired into the second ball entrance guidance area at the shortest firing interval, the game balls following the game ball that passed through the through gate 67 will be distributed to the right channel R1 and Since it takes about 0.8 seconds for the ball to reach the ball entry port 6400, the ball enters the second ball entry port 6400 after the opening period has elapsed. Therefore, even if you hit the game ball right at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pullback mode, it will be impossible (difficult) for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and This is an extremely disadvantageous situation that only reduces the number of balls you have. Therefore, in the pull-back mode, it is possible for the player to perform a gaming method in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 by hitting to the left to proceed with the game (drawing of special symbols is performed). In other words, even though the time-saving state of the normal symbol is given, the game method is not to aim at the second ball entry hole 6400, which is easily opened, but the game method is similar to the normal mode (normal game state) (by hitting left-handed). A novel gaming experience can be realized in which a game method in which a game is played by aiming at the first ball entrance 64 can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 693(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 693(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 693(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 590), with a time saving medium counter 203da and a jackpot type storage area 203db. The difference is that a mode type storage area 203dc, a V passing flag 203dd, and a winning mode storage area 203de are added. Further, the difference is that the probability variation flag 203g, the probability variation setting flag 203h, the probability variation passage counter 203i, the probability variation validity flag 203n, and the probability variation validity timer 203o are deleted.

The time saving medium counter 203da is a counter for counting the number of drawings of the remaining special symbols until the time saving state of the normal symbols ends. If the value of this time saving medium counter 203da is 1 or more, it means that the time saving state of the normal symbol is in effect (either continuous play mode or pullback mode), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203da is 0, it is normal It means the normal state of the design. The initial value of this time saving counter 203da is set to 0, and when the jackpot ends, the number of time saving times specified in the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 691(c)) is set (see S1323 in FIG. 705). ). In addition, the value of this time saving counter 203da is updated by being decremented by 1 in the time saving number update process (see FIG. 700) that is executed at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol (see S2302 in FIG. 700). When executing a normal symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state based on the value of the time saving medium counter 203da, and the normal symbol per random number table for high probability times (FIG. 586(b)) is used. 202c3, 202c4), or the normal symbol random number table for low probability cases (202c1, 202c2 in Figure 586(b)), it is determined whether to draw a normal symbol. (See S608 in FIG. 702).

The jackpot type storage area 203db is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. This jackpot type storage area 203db stores data corresponding to the jackpot type when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot (see S331 in FIG. 699). Further, when a special symbol lottery results in a small win and the V winning switch 670e3 is passed during the small win, data indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the small win type is stored (see S1629 in FIG. 706). The data stored in this jackpot type storage area 203db is held until the end timing of the won jackpot, and is used to select the number of time reductions from the time reduction number selection table 202db at the end of the jackpot (see S1322 in FIG. 705).

The mode type storage area 203dc is a storage area for storing data indicating the current mode (gaming state). If "00H" is stored as data in this mode type storage area 203dc, it indicates that the current mode is the normal mode (normal state of normal symbols), and if "01H" is stored, It shows that it is a consecutive game mode (time saving state A of normal symbols), and if "02H" is stored, it shows that it is a pullback mode (time saving state B of normal symbols). When selecting and setting the fluctuation time of a normal symbol from the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc (see FIG. 693(a)), set the fluctuation time corresponding to the data stored in this mode type storage area 203dc. be done.

The V passing flag 203dd is a flag for indicating whether or not the V winning switch 670e3 has been passed during the execution of the small winning game (whether or not it is certain that the jackpot will be won after the small winning ends). . If this V passing flag 203dd is on at the end of the small hit, the start of the jackpot is set at the end of the small winning, while if the V passing flag 203dd is off, the jackpot will not start and the small winning will start. be terminated. The initial value of this V passage flag 203dd is set to OFF, and it is set to ON when it is detected that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3 during execution of the small winning game (see FIG. 707). (See S2506). Further, it is set to OFF after setting the start of the jackpot based on passing the V winning switch 670e3 (see S1630 in FIG. 706).

The winning mode storage area 203de is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the mode (gaming state) when winning a jackpot. This winning mode storage area 203de stores data in the same format as the mode type storage area 203dc. At the start of the jackpot, the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is transferred to the winning mode storage area 203de, and the data is held until the jackpot ends. At the end of the jackpot, the mode at the time of winning the jackpot is determined using the data stored in the winning mode storage area 203de, and the corresponding time saving number is read from the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 691(c)). is output and set (see S1322 in FIG. 705).

Next, with reference to FIG. 694, a method of shifting the gaming state (mode) in the eleventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 694, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example has three states (modes) that can be roughly divided. That is, the normal mode (normal state of normal symbols) shown in the upper part of Fig. 694, the consecutive winning mode (time saving state A of normal symbols) shown in the lower left part of Fig. 694, and the pullback mode shown in the lower right part of Fig. 694. mode (time saving state B with normal symbols) is provided.

As mentioned above, the normal mode refers to the normal state of the normal symbols, and even if it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400 and there is a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the consecutive game mode is activated. This is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, as mentioned above, the consecutive game mode indicates a game state in which the time-saving state A of the normal symbol is set, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 more easily, so there is a high probability of a small hit. This is a gaming state in which there is a higher possibility of winning a jackpot than in the normal mode because there are more opportunities to pass the V winning switch 670e3. In addition, since the consecutive game mode is likely to be set again after the jackpot is over, it becomes the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, the pull-back mode indicates a game state in which the time-saving state B of the normal symbol is set, and as described above, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, the pull-back mode is similar to the normal mode. Although it is necessary to play the game aiming at the first ball opening 64, if a jackpot is won, the game shifts to consecutive game mode 100% of the time, so the game state is more advantageous than the normal mode.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 694, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another mode only in the case of a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 694, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot and jackpot A5 is determined as the jackpot type, consecutive game mode is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot B5 is determined, the normal mode is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, so the most disadvantageous gaming state is repeated. That is, in the normal mode, unless the jackpot A5, which is determined at a rate of 50% in the case of a jackpot, is won, the game does not shift to another gaming state. In other words, even if you win a jackpot, you will be in an extremely disadvantageous gaming state in which the same state repeats 50% of the time.

As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 694, there is a possibility of transitioning from the continuous winning mode to another mode not only when a jackpot occurs but also when the time saving number of normal symbols ends. Specifically, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 694, a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, and a V win (an event in which a game ball passes through the V win switch 670e3) occurs, and a jackpot E5, F5 occurs. When either of these is determined, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the pullback mode. In addition, when the special symbol lottery ends 100 times without a jackpot, the time saving number of normal symbols has elapsed and the game shifts to the normal mode (falls down). On the other hand, if a jackpot C5 or D5 is determined when winning a V prize, or if a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery, the consecutive winning mode is set again after the jackpot ends. As mentioned above, the probability of completing 100 special symbol fluctuations without becoming a jackpot is about 0.6%, so this is an event that almost never occurs. Therefore, in the consecutive game mode, the mode is shifted to another mode almost when the jackpot E5 or F5 is won. The small wins (small wins C, D) corresponding to jackpots E5 and F5 are determined at a rate of 20% of all small wins, so when it comes to consecutive game mode, the jackpot and consecutive game mode are determined at a rate of 80% or more. This creates an extremely advantageous gaming situation that repeats at a high rate. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game with the goal of transitioning to the consecutive game mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As shown in the lower right part of FIG. 694, there is a possibility of transitioning from the pullback mode to another mode not only when a jackpot occurs but also when the time saving number of normal symbols ends. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 694, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot, whether the jackpot becomes A5 or the jackpot B5, the game after the jackpot ends. The status is set to continuous mode. Further, when the lottery of special symbols for the number of times of time reduction is completed without a jackpot, the mode shifts to the normal mode (falls). In normal mode, even if the first special symbol hits the jackpot, it will only shift to consecutive game mode 50% of the time, whereas in preparation mode, if the first special symbol hits the jackpot, it will always transition to consecutive game mode. Therefore, while the preparation mode continues, the player can play the game with a strong desire to win the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game in the preparation mode.

In this way, the present eleventh control example is configured to be able to switch between three types of modes with different degrees of advantage. This makes it possible to add variety to the game, thereby preventing (suppressing) the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 695. FIG. 695(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 695(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh control example is such that an expectation selection table 222da is added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 592(a)). They are different in that they are This expectation level selection table 222da is used to randomly select the back image during a predetermined period (until the special symbol fluctuates display ends 100 times) after the consecutive winning mode ends (shifts to the pullback mode). This is the data table used. Here, as described above, in the present eleventh control example, the number of drawings of the special symbol in which the pullback mode continues is set to either 30 times (jackpot E5) or 100 times (jackpot F5). That is, if the number of special symbols drawn exceeds 30 after transitioning to the pull-back mode, there is a possibility that the mode will transition (fall) to the normal mode. In this eleventh control example, it is not clearly notified whether the transition has been made to the normal mode or whether the pullback mode is continuing, and whether the pullback mode is continuing or not is determined based on the type of rear image (see Figures 688 and 117). By indicating the level of expectation, a game feature is provided that allows the player to predict whether or not the game will be in the pullback mode.

More specifically, after transitioning to the pullback mode (i.e., after jackpot E5 or jackpot F5 ends), the number of drawings of the special symbol is within 30 (i.e., staying in the pullback mode). When the number of drawings is confirmed (the number of drawings for which the pullback mode is determined), a back image for high expectations is set as the back image, and if the number of drawings exceeds 30 (i.e., the number of drawings for which the pullback mode may have ended) ), the back image is reselected using the expectation level selection table 222da every 10 times the special symbol lottery is executed (the expectation level is updated every 10 times). There is. The details of this expectation selection table 222da will be explained with reference to FIG. 695(b).

FIG. 695(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the expectation level selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 695(b), this expectation level selection table 222da is based on the background image selection table 222da for each mode (gaming state) at the time when the lottery for reselecting the background image (expectation level re-lottery) is executed. The type and the range of values of the performance lottery counter 223da are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 695(b), for the normal mode, when the value of the production lottery counter 223da is in the range of "0 to 4", the back image for high expectation level (see FIG. 688(a) (see Figure 688(b)) is defined in association with the range of "5 to 49", the back image for medium expectation level (see Figure 688(b)) is defined in association with the range of "50 to 99", and the back image for low expectation level is defined in the range of "50 to 99". A back image (see FIG. 689) for each is defined in association with the other.

The production lottery counter 223da can take 100 values from 0 to 99, so when the re-lottery for the expectation level is executed in the normal mode, the rate at which the back image for the high expectation level is set is 5. % (5/100). On the other hand, the rate at which back images for medium expectations are set is 45% (45/100), and the rate at which back images for low expectations are set is 50% (50/100). Therefore, if you have already transitioned (fallen) from the pullback mode to the normal mode (if the pullback mode with a time saving number of 30 times is set after the previous jackpot), the back of the low expectation level will be re-drawn based on the expectation level. While the possibility that the image will be set is the highest, the possibility that the back image for high expectation level will be set is extremely low.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 695(b), for the pullback mode, the back image for high expectation level (see FIG. 688(a)) is displayed when the value of the production lottery counter 223da is in the range of "0 to 9". A back image for medium expectations (see Figure 688(b)) is defined in association with the range "10 to 79", and a back image for low expectations is defined in the range "80 to 99". Images (see FIG. 689) are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the re-lottery of expectations is executed in the pullback mode, the proportion of back images for high expectations being set is 10% (10/100), and the back images for medium expectations are being set. The ratio is 70% (70/100), and the ratio at which the back image for low expectation level is set is 20% (20/100). Therefore, if the pullback mode continues (if the pullback mode with a time reduction of 100 times is set after the end of the previous jackpot), a back image for high expectation level will be set by re-drawing the expectation level. The possibility is doubled compared to the case where the mode has already been shifted to the normal mode, and the possibility that a back image for low expectation level will be set is reduced to less than half. Furthermore, the rate at which a back image for medium expectations is set increases by 25%.

Therefore, when a back image for high expectation level is set, the possibility that pullback mode continues (expectation level) increases, while when a back image for low expectation level is set, pullback mode ends. The possibility (expectation level) increases that the current mode is currently in use (it has already transitioned to normal mode). Therefore, since it is possible for the player to guess the mode according to the type of the back image, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game after the consecutive game mode ends and until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. can.

Next, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 696. FIG. 696 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 696, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example (see FIG. 592(b)) in that the effect lottery counter 223da and the number of fluctuation counter 223db are They are different in that they have been added. Another difference is that the breakthrough performance counter 223g is deleted as the breakthrough performance in the seventh control example is not executed.

The performance lottery counter 223da is a counter used to select one back image (expectation level) from the above-mentioned expectation level selection table 222da. The value of this performance lottery counter 223da is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When selecting a back image, the random value (counter value) defined in the expectation selection table 222da is compared with the value of this performance lottery counter 223da, and the corresponding 1 back image is selected. This performance lottery counter 223da is updated every 1 ms during the main processing (see FIG. 617), for example.

The fluctuation number counter 223db is a counter for counting the number of special symbol drawings (the number of times the fluctuation display is executed) after the end of the jackpot. The initial value of this variation counter 223db is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 when execution of a variation display effect is set based on a new variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. It is updated (see S5601 in FIG. 711). Also, if you win a jackpot, the value will be reset to 0. After the pullback mode is set after the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, this fluctuation number counter 223db is referenced every time the fluctuation display effect is set, and the expectation level selection table 222da is used. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the re-lottery of the expectation level (see S5603, S5605 to S5608 in FIG. 711).

<About the control process of the main controller in the 11th control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 697 to 707. First, timer interrupt processing 5 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 697. This timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 697) is executed in place of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 599) in the seventh control example, and is similar to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 599) in the seventh control example. , for example, is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds.

Of the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 697) in this eleventh control example, each of S101, S102, S105, and S107 to S109 is different from the timer interrupt processing in the seventh control example (see FIG. 599). The same processes as S101, S102, S105, and S107 to S109 are executed. In the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 697) in the eleventh control example, when the process of S102 is completed, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the The 2 win random number counter C4 and the small win type counter C5 are updated (S141). That is, in addition to the various counter values updated in the process of S103 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 599) in the seventh control example, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated. After the process of S141, special symbol variation process 5 is executed (S142) in place of the special symbol variation process (S104, see FIG. 600) in the seventh control example, and the process moves to S105. Details of this special symbol variation process 5 (S142) will be described later with reference to FIG. 698.

In addition, in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 697) in the eleventh control example, when the process in S105 is finished, next, instead of the normal symbol variation process (S106, see FIG. 604) in the seventh control example, The symbol variation process 5 is executed (S143), and the process moves to S107. Details of this normal symbol variation process 5 (S143) will be described later with reference to FIG. 702.

Next, with reference to FIG. 698, details of the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 5 (S142) will be explained. FIG. 698 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 5 (S142). This special symbol variation process 5 (S142) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) in the seventh control example, and is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 600) in the seventh control example. Similarly, this is a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37, the variable display of the third symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81, etc.

Of the special symbol variation processing 5 in this eleventh control example (see FIG. 698), each of the processing in S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221 is performed in the special symbol variation processing in the seventh control example (see FIG. 600). ) The same processes as S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221 are executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 698) in the eleventh control example, when the process in S207 or the process in S212 is finished, the special symbol variation start process in the seventh control example (S213, see FIG. 601) is started. Instead, special symbol variation start processing 5 is executed (S261), and this processing is ended. Details of this special symbol variation start processing 5 (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG. 699.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 698) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the process of S218 (S218: Yes), the mode type storage area 203dc is After storing the data in the winning mode storage area 203de (S262), the counter value of the time saving counter 203da and the data in the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S263), and the process moves to S220. By transferring the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc to the winning mode storage area 203de before returning the jackpot state to the initial state (normal state of normal symbols) in the process of S263. , data indicating the mode (gaming state) at the time of winning the jackpot can be held until the end of the jackpot. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot, it is possible to accurately determine the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot and set the corresponding time saving number.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 698) in the eleventh control example, in the process of S218, it is determined that the lottery result of the current special symbol is not a jackpot (that is, a miss or a small win). (S218: No), when the time saving state is in the time saving state (that is, in the consecutive play mode or pullback mode), a time saving number update process for updating the time saving number is executed (S264). Details of this time saving number update process (S264) will be described later with reference to FIG. 700.

When the time saving number update process (S264) is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S265), and if it is determined to be a small win (S265: Yes), a small win is determined. A small winning start process for setting the start of the opening operation is executed (S266), and the process moves to S221. Details of this small winning start process (S266) will be described later with reference to FIG. 701. On the other hand, in the process of S265, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (that is, a loss) (S265: No), the process of S266 is skipped and the process moves to S221.

Next, with reference to FIG. 699, details of the above-mentioned special symbol variation start processing 5 (S261) will be explained. This special symbol variation start process 5 (S261) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 601) in the seventh control example, and is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 601) in the seventh control example. ), a special symbol lottery (judgment) is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, and a variable performance is performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of .

Of the special symbol fluctuation start processing 5 (see FIG. 699) in this eleventh control example, each of S301 to S312 is different from each of S301 to S312 of the special symbol fluctuation start processing in the seventh control example (see FIG. 601). The same process as the process is executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 699) in the eleventh control example, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the lottery result of the current special symbol is a jackpot (S305: Yes), if the lottery result of the current special symbol is a jackpot (S305: Yes), The data corresponding to the type of jackpot that has been obtained is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db (S331), and the process moves to S306. By storing the data corresponding to the jackpot type in the jackpot type storage area 203db in advance in the process of S331, when the jackpot ends, the jackpot type can be accurately determined based on the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db. can be determined. Therefore, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot can be accurately set.

In addition, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 699) in the eleventh control example, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the lottery result of the current special symbol is not a jackpot (S305: No), then It is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win (S332), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S332: Yes), the small win type determination table 202da and the small win type are determined. The display mode of the first special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the small win type specified from the value of the counter C5 is set (S333), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small win is set in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 692). ) (S334), and the process moves to S310. On the other hand, in the process of S332, if it is determined that the current lottery result for the special symbol is not a small win (S332: No), this means that the current lottery result is a loss, so the process moves to S308. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 700, details of the above-mentioned time saving number update process (see FIG. 700) will be described. As described above, this time saving number update process (see FIG. 700) is one of the special symbol variation processes 5 (see FIG. 698), and is a process for updating the time saving number of normal symbols. As shown in FIG. 700, in the time saving number update process (see FIG. 700), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203da is a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S2301), and If it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203da is 0 (S2301: No), the current state is the normal state with normal symbols (normal mode), and the time saving state is not set (there is no need to update the number of time saving times). ), so this process ends immediately.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203da is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S2301: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203da is updated by subtracting 1. (S2302), and sets a remaining time reduction number command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the updated value of the time reduction counter 203da (S2303). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203da has become 0 (S2304), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203da has become 0 (S2304: Yes), the consecutive game mode or the pullback mode is ended. This means that the mode has shifted to the normal mode, so a status command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that the mode has shifted to the normal mode (S2305), and the normal mode is set in the mode type storage area 203dc. "00H" which is the data indicating this is stored (S2306), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2304, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203da after the update in the process of S2302 is not 0 (S2304: No), each process of S2305 and S2306 is skipped, This process ends immediately. By executing this time saving number update process (see FIG. 700), the time saving number can be appropriately updated in the consecutive winning mode in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set and in the pullback mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 701, the above-mentioned small hit start process (S266) will be explained. As described above, this small hit start process (S266) is one of the special symbol variation processes 5 (see FIG. 698), and is a process for setting the start of the small win release operation.

As shown in FIG. 701, in the small win start process (see FIG. 701), first, the operation pattern of the V winning device 670 corresponding to the small win type is read out (S2401). As described above, in the eleventh control example, when a small win occurs, the opening door 670f1 of the V winning device 670 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the opening period, The special discharge channel 670e2 is set to be passable for a period of 0.075 seconds (see FIG. 687).

When the process of S2401 is completed, data indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the current small win type is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db (S2402). As mentioned above, if it is a small win A, the corresponding jackpot type is jackpot C5 (see 202da1 in FIG. 691(b)), and if it is a small win B, the corresponding jackpot type is jackpot D5 ( (see 202da2 in Figure 691(b)), if it is a small win C, the corresponding jackpot type is jackpot E5 (see 202da3 in Figure 691(b)), and if it is a small win D, the corresponding jackpot type is jackpot. F5 (see 202da4 in FIG. 691(b)).

When the process of S2402 ends, the start of a small win is set (S2403), and this process ends. By executing this small win start process (see FIG. 701), when the variation pattern corresponding to the small win stops changing, it is possible to start the corresponding small win operation pattern.

Next, details of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S143) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 702. This normal symbol variation process 5 (S143) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 604) in the seventh control example in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 697). This is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, similar to the normal symbol variation process in the 7 control example (see FIG. 604).

Of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 702) in this 11th control example, each of the processing in S601 to S613, S617 to S620, and S623 is the same as the normal symbol variation processing in the 7th control example (see FIG. 604). The same processes as S601 to S613, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 702) in the eleventh control example, after setting the display mode according to the lottery result of the normal symbol in the process of S612 or S613, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 693) (S641), and from the read table, read and set the fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the current mode indicated by the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc (S642), This process ends.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 702) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined in the process of S620 that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not in progress (the value of the time saving counter 203da is 0), ( S620: No), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 6400a are set to 0.1 seconds x 1 time (S643), and the process moves to S623.

On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (the value of the time saving counter 203da is 1 or more) (S620: Yes), the opening time and opening of the electric accessory 6400a The number of times is set to 0.2 seconds x 1 time (S644), and the process moves to S623.

By executing this normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 702), the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a when the normal symbol hits are appropriately set according to the mode. be able to. As a result, in the normal mode and the pull-back mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400 during the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a, while in the consecutive game mode Then, a state can be created in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 6400 during the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a. As a result, in the pullback mode, even though the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to create a novel gameplay in which it is more advantageous for the player to aim at the first ball entrance 64 and hit the left ball. It can be realized.

Next, startup processing 5 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 703. This start-up process 5 is a process executed in place of the start-up process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 607), and similar to the start-up process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 607), when the power is turned on. This is a process that is activated accordingly.

In the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 703) in this eleventh control example, each process of S901 to S910 and S912 to S916 corresponds to the steps S901 to S910 of the start-up process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 607), respectively. The same processes as those in S912 to S916 are executed. In the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 703) in the eleventh control example, when the process in S910 is completed, the value of the time saving counter 203da and the data in the mode type storage area 203dc are then read out (S931). , a status command is set for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the gaming status specified from each read data (S912), and the process moves to S913. By executing this start-up process 5 (see FIG. 703), the audio lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the mode when the power is turned on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 704, the jackpot control process 5 (1031) executed in the main process (see FIG. 608) in the eleventh control example will be described. This jackpot control process 5 (S1031) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (S1004, see FIG. 609) in the seventh control example, and is a process for controlling the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a. .

Of the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 704) in this eleventh control example, each process of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109 corresponds to S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 609), respectively. The same processes as those in S1107 to S1109 are executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 704) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the specific winning opening 650a is opened. A round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1142), and this process ends.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 704) in the eleventh control example, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), then the specific winning opening 650a It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S1143). As described above, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of each jackpot round or when 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning hole 650a. In the process of S1143, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning a prize opening 650a is satisfied (S1143: Yes), closing of the specific winning a prize opening 650a is set (S1144), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1143, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning a prize opening 650a is not satisfied (S1105: No), the process moves to S1107.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 704) in the eleventh control example, in the process of S1109, when it is determined that the jackpot end timing has come (the ending production end timing has come) (S1109: Yes ), instead of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 611) in the seventh control example, jackpot ending process 5 (S1145) is executed, and this process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process 5 (S1145) will be explained with reference to FIG. 705.

FIG. 705 is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 5 (S1145). As described above, this jackpot ending process 5 (S1145) is a process that is executed in place of the jackpot ending process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 611), and is a process executed in place of the jackpot ending process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 611). Similarly, this is a process for setting the gaming state (mode) after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot ending process 5 (see FIG. 705), first, the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 691(c)) is read out (S1321), and the number of time saving times and the type of time saving state specified in the read table are read out. Among them, the number of time saving times and the mode (time saving (S1322). When the process of S1322 is completed, the specified number of time-savings is set in the time-saving counter 203da (S1323), and data indicating the mode (type of time-saving state, gaming state) specified in the process of S1322 is stored in the mode type storage area 203dc. (S1324). Next, a status command indicating the set gaming status (mode) is set (S1325), the jackpot flag 203r and the winning mode storage area 203de are reset (S1326), and this process is ended.

By executing this jackpot ending process 5 (see FIG. 705), it is possible to appropriately set the gaming state after the jackpot ends according to the jackpot type and the gaming state (mode) at the time of winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 706, the small hit control process 5 (1032) executed in the main process (see FIG. 608) in the eleventh control example will be described. This small win control process 5 (S1032) is a process executed in place of the small win control process (S1005, see FIG. 614) in the seventh control example, and is a process for controlling the operation of the V winning device 670. be.

Of the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 706) in this eleventh control example, each process of S1601 to S1604 and S1607 to S1610 corresponds to S1601 to S1601 of the small win control process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 614), respectively. The same processes as S1604 and S1607 to S1610 are executed. In addition, in the small win control process 5 (see FIG. 706) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined in the process of S1604 that a small win game is being executed (that is, the small win flag 203s is on) (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing to open the V winning hole 670a (S1621), and if it is determined that it is the opening timing (S1621: Yes), the V winning hole 670a is opened. (S1622), this process ends.

In addition, in the small win control process 5 (see FIG. 706) in the eleventh control example, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1621: No), then at the closing timing of the V winning opening 670a. It is determined whether there is one (S1623), and if it is determined that it is the timing to close the V winning hole 670a (S1623: Yes), the closing of the V winning hole 670a is set (S1624), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1623, if it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the V winning a prize opening 670a (S1623: No), the process moves to S1607.

In addition, in the small win control process 5 (see FIG. 706) in the eleventh control example, if it is determined in the process of S1609 that it is not the end timing of the small win (S1609: No), the game ball for the V winning switch 670e3 A V passage detection process is executed to monitor the passage of the line (S1625), and this process ends. Details of this V passing detection process (S1625) will be described later with reference to FIG. 707.

In addition, in the small win control process 5 (see FIG. 706) in the eleventh control example, when the process of S1610 is completed, it is then checked whether the V passing flag 203dd is on (during the small win, the V winning switch 670e3 is has passed) (S1626), and if it is determined that the V passing flag 203dd is on (S1626: Yes), each process of S1627 to S1630 for setting execution of the jackpot is executed. Execute. Specifically, first, the data in the mode type storage area 203dc is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S1627), and the data in the time saving counter 203da and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S1628). Next, the start of the jackpot of the type corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area 203db is set (S1629), the V passing flag 203dd is set to OFF (S1630), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1626, if it is determined that the V pass flag 203dd is off (S1626: No), the jackpot execution condition was not satisfied during the execution of the small win game (V winning switch 670e3 This means that not a single game ball has passed through), so the process for starting the jackpot (each process from S1627 to S1630) is skipped and the process is ended as is.

By executing this small win control process 5 (see FIG. 706), if a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during execution of a small win game, the start of the jackpot corresponding to the small win type can be accurately controlled. Can be set.

Next, details of the above-mentioned V passing detection process (S1625) will be described with reference to FIG. 707. This V passage detection process (S1625) is one process in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 706), and as described above, is a process for monitoring the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch 670e3.

In the V passing detection process (see FIG. 707), first, it is determined whether or not the V passing flag 203dd is on (S2501), and if it is determined that the V passing flag 203dd is on (S2501: Yes), In this small win, the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 has already been detected, which means that the execution of the jackpot has already been determined after the small win ends, so this process is ended as is. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203dd is off (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3 (S2502), and the V passing flag 203dd is determined to be off (S2501: No). If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through (S2502: No), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2502, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 670e3 (S2502: Yes), then the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 is detected during the regular period (V (valid period) (S2503). Here, the V validity period is 0.075 seconds during which the special discharge channel 670e2 is set to be passable, and the game ball that flows into the special discharge channel 670e2 reaches the V passage switch 670e3 just before the end of the period. A period of 0.2 seconds is set, which is the period that may be required.

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the detection of passage of the V winning switch 670e3 is not during the V validity period (S2503: No), there is a fraudulent act of illegally passing the V winning switch 670e3 to execute a jackpot. Since this may have occurred, an error command is set (S2504) and the process ends. By setting the error command, the display of the error image is set in the audio lamp control device 113, so that the clerk in the hall who visually recognizes the error image can be made to recognize the occurrence of fraudulent activity at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the process of S2503, if it is determined that the passing of the V winning switch 670e3 was during the V validity period (S2503: Yes), the sound lamp control device 113 indicates that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3. A V passing command for notifying the user is set (S2505), a V passing flag 203dd is set to ON (S2506), and this processing ends. By setting the V passing flag 203dd on, it is possible to set the start of the jackpot after the small win ends.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 708 to 711. First, with reference to 136, details of command determination processing 5 (S4141) in the eleventh control example will be described. This command determination process 5 (S4141) is a process executed in place of the command determination process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 618), and similar to the command determination process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 618), This is a process for executing control according to the type of command output from the main control device 110.

Of the command determination process 5 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 708), each of the processes S4201 to S4209 and S4213 to S4215 correspond to the steps S4201 to S4209 of the command determination process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 618), respectively. The same processes as those in S4213 to S4215 are executed. In addition, in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 708) in the eleventh control example, when it is determined in the process of S4209 that a status command is included in the unprocessed commands received from the main controller 110, (S4209: Yes), executes state command processing for controlling according to the gaming state (mode) notified by the state command (S4221), and ends this processing. Details of this status command will be explained with reference to FIG. 709.

FIG. 709 is a flowchart showing the state command processing (S4221) described above. As described above, this status command processing (S4221) is a process for performing control according to the gaming status (mode) notified by the status command. In this status command processing (4221), first, data in the gaming status storage area 223h is updated according to the gaming status indicated by the received status command (S5501). That is, it is updated to data indicating the gaming state notified from the main control device 110.

When the processing in S5501 is completed, it is then determined whether the status command received this time is a status command for notifying that the mode has shifted to the continuous mode (S5502), and the system determines whether or not the status command received this time is a status command for notifying that the mode has shifted to the continuous mode. If it is determined that the command is the one that indicates the command (S5502: Yes), a back image for the continuous shooting mode is set (S5503), and this processing ends. By setting a back image (not shown) exclusively for the consecutive game mode when the game shifts to the consecutive game mode, the player can easily understand that the game is in the consecutive game mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing the transition even though the game has transitioned to the consecutive game mode.

On the other hand, in the process of S5502, if it is determined that the command is not for notifying the transition to consecutive game mode (S5502: No), then it is determined that the command is not for notifying the gaming state when the power is restored. If it is determined that the command is a status command output when the power is restored (S5504: Yes), a back image for the normal mode is set (S5506), and the process ends. The fact that the status command is not a status command for notifying continuous play mode and is a status command output when the power is restored means that it is a command indicating pullback mode or normal mode. By configuring the same rear image in both the pullback mode and the normal mode, this is especially important if the power is cut off when the camera moves to the pullback mode and the number of fluctuations exceeds 30 and falls within 100 times. Furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the gaming state from the rear image when the power is restored (making it difficult to distinguish between the normal mode and the pullback mode). That is, the gameplay that existed before the power was turned off (the gameplay that predicts whether the normal mode has been entered or whether the pullback mode continues) can be carried over even after the power is turned on again. Therefore, when the power supply is cut off due to a so-called instantaneous power outage, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the process of S5504, if it is determined that the current status command is not a command for power recovery (S5504: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a command indicating normal mode (S5505), and the normal mode is changed. If it is determined that the command is the one shown in the image (S5505: Yes), the process moves to S5506 in order to set the back image for normal mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5505, if it is determined that the command is not a command indicating normal mode (that is, the command is a command indicating pullback mode) (S5505: No), the back image for high expectation level (see FIG. 688(a) ) is set (S5507), and this process ends. By setting a back image for high expectations when the pullback mode is notified, it is possible to make the player recognize that the player is in a relatively advantageous state. Therefore, since the game can be continued even after the consecutive game mode ends, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 710, the variable display setting process 5 (S4142) in the eleventh control example will be described. This variable display setting process 5 (S4142) is executed in place of the variable display setting process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 624), and is similar to the variable display setting process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 624). This is a process for executing a variable effect on the 3-symbol display device 81.

In this variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 710), each process in S4801 to S4809 is the same as each process in S4801 to S4809 in the variable display setting process in the seventh control example (see FIG. 624). be done. In addition, in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 710) in the eleventh control example, when the process in S4805 is completed, the rear image indicating the expectation level as to whether the pullback mode continues is then re-drawn. The expectation update process is executed (S4831), and the process moves to S4806. The details of this expectation update process (S4831) will be explained with reference to FIG. 711.

FIG. 711 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned expectation update process (S4831). In this expectation update process (S4831), first, 1 is added to the value of the variation counter 223db to update it (S5601), and then whether the current mode is the consecutive game mode or It is determined whether data indicating the home mode is stored (S5602). In the process of S5602, if it is determined that the mode is continuous mode (S5602: Yes), the possibility of the pullback mode is 0, and there is no need to indicate the degree of expectation by the rear image, so this process ends. .

On the other hand, in the process of S5602, if it is determined that the current mode is not continuous mode (S5602: No), then it is determined whether or not a back image for normal mode is set (S5603), If it is determined that the back image has been set (S5604: Yes), there is no possibility of re-drawing the back image (after the jackpot, the normal mode is entered and the normal mode continues). ), so this process ends immediately. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, if it is determined that the back image for the normal mode is not set (S5603: No), the pullback mode was set after the previous jackpot, and it has already fallen to the normal mode. Otherwise, it means that the pullback mode is continued, so first, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is 101 (S5604). If the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is 101 (S5604: Yes), whether the previous jackpot was jackpot E5 or jackpot F5, it means that the number of fluctuations in the pullback mode has ended and the mode is in normal mode. A back image for normal mode is set (S5605), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5604, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is not 101 (S5404: No), then it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is larger than 30. (S5606), if it is determined that it is 30 or less (S5606: No), whether the previous jackpot was jackpot E5 or jackpot F5, it is the number of fluctuations that confirms that the pullback mode continues, and the expectation level is high. Since there is no need to change from the original back image, this process ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5606, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is larger than 30 (S5606: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is 31. (S5607). In the process of S5607, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223db is 31 (S5607: Yes), each process for re-drawing the expectation level (S5609, S5610) is executed. More specifically, the expectation level selection table 222da is read out (S5609), and from the read table, the back image (expectation level) corresponding to the value of the production lottery counter 223da is specified and set as the back image (S5610). , this process ends. As a result, when the number of fluctuations at which the pull-back mode may have ended has been reached, it is possible to suggest to the player the level of expectation as to whether or not the pull-back mode continues. It is possible to predict whether or not it continues. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the process of S5607, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is not 31 (S5607: No), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is a multiple of 10 (S5608), and the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is determined to be a multiple of 10. Even when it is determined that it is (S5608: Yes), each process for re-drawing the expectation level (S5609, S5610) is executed. That is, after reaching the number of fluctuations at which the pullback mode may have ended, the expectation level can be updated every time the fluctuation display is executed 10 times. Therefore, as the game continues, it is possible to accurately predict whether or not the game is in the pullback mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, in the process of S5608, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is not a multiple of 10 (S5608: No), this process is directly ended.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example, the V-winning switch inside the V-winning device 670 allows the ball to be entered when there is a small hit in addition to a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Even when the game ball passes through 670e3, the jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, while it is not possible to win a small hit in the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to win with a high probability (9/10) in the second special symbol lottery. In other words, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, even if the lottery result is not a jackpot, if the lottery result is a small win, you can expect a big win. It can be said that the special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player. Moreover, in the present eleventh control example, the rate at which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed (the ease of execution) is configured to vary depending on the gaming state. That is, the configuration is such that there are a game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400 and a game state in which it is easy to enter the game ball. More specifically, in the normal mode where the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery becomes lower, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes longer, and the probability of winning the normal symbol increases. In this case, the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a becomes shorter, so even if you continue to aim at the through gate 67 by hitting right, the rate at which the electric accessory 6400a will be released will be extremely low, and the game will be played to the second entrance 6400. It is also difficult to let the ball enter the ball. On the other hand, in the continuous winning mode where the time saving state A of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is high, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and furthermore, if the normal symbol is a hit Since the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a becomes longer, many game balls can enter the second ball entrance 6400 by simply continuing to fire the game balls aiming at the through gate 67 by hitting right. . Therefore, the continuous game mode can create an advantageous situation where it is easier to get a jackpot compared to the normal mode.

Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, in addition to the normal mode and the consecutive winning mode, a pullback mode is provided in which the time saving state B of the normal symbol is set. In this pullback mode, although the probability of winning a normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a when a normal symbol hits are the same as the consecutive winning mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different from the consecutive winning mode. It is configured. In the consecutive game mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set so that the electric accessory 6400a is opened at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second ball entrance 6400. was set, but in the pullback mode, after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has completely passed through the second ball entry port 6400, and before the next game ball reaches the second ball entry port 6400, The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set so that the electric accessory 6400a is released only in the front. As a result, in the pullback mode, it is possible to frequently open the electric accessory 6400a by continuing to shoot the game ball aiming at the through gate 67, but the game ball almost never enters the second ball entrance 6400. Since the ball does not enter the ball, the player is in an extremely disadvantageous situation, which only unnecessarily reduces the number of balls he has. Therefore, in the pull-back mode, it is possible for the player to perform a gaming method in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 by hitting to the left to proceed with the game (drawing of special symbols is performed). In other words, even though the time-saving state of the normal symbol is given, the game method similar to the normal mode (normal game state) is performed instead of the game method of aiming at the second ball entry hole 6400, which is easily opened. It is possible to realize a novel gameplay that allows you to play.

In addition, in this 11th control example, the configuration is such that in the pullback mode, when a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery, there is a higher possibility of shifting to the consecutive winning mode after the jackpot ends than in the normal mode. . In addition, in this eleventh control example, after the consecutive game mode ends, the pullback mode is set until at least 30 special symbol lottery games are completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that it is better to continue playing the game after the end of the consecutive game mode until at least 30 special symbols are drawn. Here, in a gaming machine that is designed to award a jackpot when a special symbol is drawn or when a game ball enters a specific area (a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine), the game state is There are only two types of game states: a normal game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter a specific area, and a time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the specific area. It was common for the game to shift to the normal gaming state, which is the most disadvantageous state. However, with this configuration, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing will be greatly reduced when the game transitions to the disadvantageous normal gaming state, and the player will immediately quit playing when the time-saving gaming state ends. There was a possibility that it would happen. On the other hand, in this eleventh control example, after the end of the consecutive game mode, until the special symbol lottery is executed at least 30 times, a special symbol is used to easily switch to the consecutive game mode in the event of a jackpot. The configuration is such that a state (return mode) is set. This prevents the player's motivation for playing from decreasing even if the consecutive game mode ends and the game enters an unfavorable gaming state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the consecutive game mode ends, and thus the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

The mode transition ratio (ratio of each jackpot type) is not limited to the content of this eleventh control example, but is arbitrarily determined within the range where the normal mode is the most disadvantageous and the consecutive winning mode is the most advantageous. be able to. For example, in the present eleventh control example, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode, the gaming state after the jackpot is either the consecutive game mode or the normal mode. However, it may be configured such that the pullback mode is set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 10%). In addition, in this 11th control example, if a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in the pullback mode, the system is configured to always shift to the consecutive game mode, but the normal mode and the pullback mode are also lower than the consecutive game mode. It may also be configured such that it can be set as a percentage.

In the eleventh control example, only 30 or 100 times are provided as the number of pullback modes, but the number is not limited to this, and the number of times may be more varied. This makes it more difficult to tell whether the pullback mode has ended or not, allowing the player to more seriously predict how long the pullback mode will continue. In addition, some of the jackpots won during consecutive winnings mode will be used to switch to normal mode, and similar to when pullback mode is set, expectations will be suggested based on the type of back image. It may also be a configuration. With this configuration, even if the normal mode is set after the end of the jackpot, the player can be allowed to continue playing the game by trying to determine whether or not the pullback mode is set based on the type of the back image. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the eleventh control example, the state of the distribution member 6600 is such that the game balls are distributed to the right channel R1 and the game balls are distributed to the left channel R2 as the game balls pass (distribute). Although the configuration has been described as switching, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine the firing interval of game balls and electrically switch the state of the distribution member 6600. In this case, for example, in the time-saving state A, the operation may be performed so that the distribution is alternately made to the right flow path R1 and the left-hand flow path R2, and in the time-saving state B, the operation may be performed so that the distribution is made only to the right flow path R1. . With this configuration, even reaching the through gate 67 is prevented in the time saving state B, so that the game can be played more reliably by left-handed hitting.

In this eleventh control example, there are one type of state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400 (consecutive game mode), and two types of state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400. (normal mode, pullback mode). That is, in the consecutive game mode, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second ball entrance 6400, while in other modes (normal mode, pullback mode), the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second ball entrance 6400. The normal pattern is set so that the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 and the game balls that are fired after the game balls that have flowed down the right channel R1 cannot enter the second ball entrance 6400. Although the variable time, the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a, etc. have been set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which two types of game states are provided as game states in which a game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 6400. Specifically, for example, both time-saving state A and time-saving state B are configured as game states in which it is easy for balls to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and in time-saving state A, game balls are fired at the shortest firing interval. If this continues, only the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entry port 6400 (the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 are fired next and pass through the right channel R1). On the other hand, in the time saving state B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and the game ball that is fired after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 are ejected into the right channel R1. The opening period of the electric accessory 6400a may be set so that both the game ball and the game ball that have passed through the electric accessory 6400a can enter. That is, in the time saving state A, the opening period is set such that the electric accessory 6400a is closed before the game ball following the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entrance 6400. , In the time saving state B, an opening period may be set such that the electric accessory 6400a is closed after the game ball following the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entrance 6400. good. With this configuration, in the time-saving state B, when the game ball is continuously hit to the right, the number of wasted balls can be reduced more than in the time-saving state A. Therefore, time-saving state B can be a more advantageous state, so setting time-saving state B can make the player more happy than setting time-saving state A.

In this eleventh control example, by making the fluctuation time of the normal symbol different between time saving state A and time saving state B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 directly enters the second ball entry port 6400 in time saving state A. On the other hand, in the time saving state B, neither the game ball that passed through the through gate 67 nor the game ball that was fired after the game ball that passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entrance 6400. The structure was as follows. That is, in the time saving state A, if you continue to hit the game balls to the right at the shortest firing interval, most of the game balls distributed to the left channel R2 by the distribution member 6600 will enter the second ball entry port 6400. On the other hand, in the time saving state B, neither the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the right channel R1 nor the game ball distributed to the left channel R2 enter the second ball entry port 6400. Although the configuration is such that it is possible, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the variation time of the normal symbol, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a may be varied depending on the type of time saving state, so that the game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 in the time saving state B. It may also be configured to make it difficult to ball. Specifically, for example, in the time saving state A, similarly to the eleventh control example above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.1 seconds, and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a is set to 0.2 seconds. The game ball passing through the through gate 67 directly enters the second ball entrance 6400. On the other hand, in time saving state B, after 0.1 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, has passed, it is released momentarily (for example, 0.01 seconds), and then 0.4 seconds have passed. The electric accessory 6400a may be opened for a relatively long period of time (for example, 0.19 seconds). With this configuration, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 will reach the second ball entrance 6400 before and after the electric accessory 6400a is momentarily opened, so that the game ball will reach the second ball entrance 6400 almost immediately after the electric accessory 6400a is momentarily opened. It becomes impossible for the ball to enter the ball entrance 6400. In addition, since the game balls fired next to the game balls that passed through the through gate 67 can only reach the second ball entrance 6400 after a relatively long opening time (0.19 seconds) has elapsed, Even if the ball is hit to the right, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry port 6400. Therefore, since the same operation as in the eleventh control example can be realized, the game can be played by left-handed hitting in the time saving state B.

In this eleventh control example, in the time saving state A, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is always 0.1 seconds (the fluctuation time during which the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is likely to directly enter the second ball entrance 6400). In the time-saving state B, the variation time of the normal symbol was always set to 0.5 seconds (the variation time that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400). It may be provided. Specifically, for example, in time-saving state A, a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set with a low probability (for example, 10%), and in time-saving state B, a variation time of 0.1 seconds is set with a low probability. It is also possible to have a configuration where . This allows the variation time of the normal symbols to be varied.

In this eleventh control example, the variation time of the normal symbol in the time saving state A is such that when the normal symbol hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second ball entrance 6400. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be determined so that the game ball that is fired after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and is distributed to the right channel R1 can enter the ball. With this configuration, in the time-saving state A, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 6400 simply by passing through the through gate 67, so in the time-saving state A, the game ball cannot be entered into the second ball entrance 6400. You can continue to fire the ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the game.

In this eleventh control example, by biasing the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 toward the lower right side by the biasing portion 6600c of the distribution member 6600, the game ball does not reach the distribution member 6600 for 1.5 seconds or more. In this case, the state of the distribution member 6600 was configured to return to the state of distribution to the right flow path R1, but the biased weight portion 6600c does not necessarily need to be provided. Regardless of the firing interval of the game balls, the game balls that have reached the distribution means may be alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 712 to 728. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example described above, the normal mode in which the normal state of the normal symbols is set is the most disadvantageous state (the state in which the number of balls held is likely to decrease and the lottery of the disadvantageous second special symbol is likely to be executed); The continuous game mode in which the time-saving state A of the normal symbol is set is the most advantageous state (a state in which the number of balls held is difficult to decrease and the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is easily executed). In addition, in the pullback mode, which may shift when a jackpot occurs in consecutive game mode, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the first ball entry hole 64 by hitting to the left as in the normal mode to proceed with the game. However, if a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery in the pull-back mode, the proportion of transition to consecutive winnings mode is higher than in the case of a jackpot in the normal mode. That is, there are two types of disadvantageous modes (gaming states) in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by drawing the first special symbol, a normal mode and a pullback mode, and a predetermined mode after the consecutive game mode ends. The configuration was such that a relatively advantageous pullback mode was set only during the period.

On the other hand, in the twelfth control example, the time-saving state B of the normal symbol is set to the most disadvantageous gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to consecutive game mode even if a jackpot is achieved, and when the normal state of the normal symbol is reached, the time saving state B of the normal symbol It is configured so that the rate of transition to consecutive winning mode is higher when a jackpot is achieved than in time saving state B. More specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in the time-saving state B of the normal symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot is at a high rate changed to the time-saving state B of the normal symbol, and at a low rate it becomes consecutive game mode. On the other hand, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot is 100% in the consecutive game mode. As a result, when the time saving state B of the normal symbol ends and the transition to the normal state of the normal symbol, it will be easier to transition to the consecutive winning mode, so if the time saving state B is set, the time saving state It is possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which the player is forced to play the game with the expectation that the game will end.

Moreover, in this twelfth control example, the first special symbol is also configured to win a small win with a low probability (for example, 1/200). The small hit type of the first special symbol includes a small win type that transitions to consecutive game mode after the jackpot awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3, and a small hit type that transitions to the normal state of the normal symbol. There are different types of hits. Therefore, if you win a small hit and the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3, there is a possibility that it will shift to an advantageous state. It is possible to provide a novel gaming experience in which the game is played with the expectation of a small win rather than a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this twelfth control example, in addition to the case where the number of drawings of special symbols in the time saving state 1 has ended the specified number of times (for example, 100 times), a small win of a specific type (small win A6) in the time saving state 1. Even if the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number (for example, once), the time-saving state is directly shifted to the normal state. In other words, if a specific type of small hit (small win A6) is won in the time saving state B of the normal symbol, the small winning ends without the game ball passing through the V winning switch 670e3, and the remaining time is saved. Regardless of the number of times, you will be directly transferred to the relatively advantageous normal mode. As a result, in the time-saving state B of the most disadvantageous normal symbol, it is possible to have the player play the game in the hope of winning a specific type of small win (small win A6) at an early stage (with a small number of drawings of special symbols). can. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous while the most disadvantageous time-saving state B is set, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, in a specific type of small win (small win A6), it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which it is more advantageous if a V win does not occur.

In addition, in the following explanation of this twelfth control example, to simplify the explanation, the time-saving state B with the most disadvantageous normal symbol will be referred to as the "normal mode", and if the jackpot is greater than the time-saving state B, The normal state of the normal symbols that easily transitions to consecutive winning mode is called "preparation mode." Note that the time saving state A of the normal symbols is the most advantageous state as in the 11th control example, so it will be referred to as the "continuous winning mode" as in the 11th control example.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example is that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the sound lamp The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed. The only difference is that the control processing that is executed has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 7 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 712, the selection performance executed on the third symbol display device 81 when a small hit occurs in the normal mode (normal symbol time saving state B) in the twelfth control example will be described. As described above, in this twelfth control example, when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed during the small winning period and a jackpot occurs, the small winning type (small winning B6, C6 ) and a small win type (small win A6) in which the time saving state ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode by ending the small win without passing through the V winning switch 670e3. In other words, when there is a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol, the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 and the small winning type is advantageous if the jackpot is executed. There is also a small win type in which it is more advantageous to complete the small win without playing. In this selection performance, a performance is performed in which the player is asked to select whether to hit the game ball to the right in order to pass the V winning switch 670e3, or to hit the ball to the left so that the game ball does not pass the V winning switch 670e3. be done.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 712, when a small win is won during the normal mode, "3", "4", and "1" indicating the small win are displayed on the display area Ds2 in the upper right part of the display screen. ” is stopped and displayed. In addition, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into left and right halves, and at the upper center of the display screen is a horizontally long rectangular display area HR7 in which the words "Choose!!" are displayed. is formed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 712, a horizontally long rectangular display area HR8 is formed on the left half of the display screen, in which the words "V avoidance gives you a chance to enter the preparation mode!?" are displayed, and below it , an arrow image YG1 imitating a leftward arrow with the words "left-handed hitter" displayed is displayed. In addition, on the right half of the display screen, a horizontally oblong rectangular display area HR9 is formed, in which the words "V-get a jackpot!! Maybe consecutive winning mode...?" are displayed, and below it is a display area HR9. , an arrow image YG2 imitating a rightward arrow on which the words "Right-handed" are displayed is displayed.

Depending on these display contents, it is possible for the player to shift to the preparation mode by hitting the left hand, but on the other hand, if the player hits the right and a V win occurs, the player will not only hit the jackpot but also enter the consecutive winning mode. You can make them understand that there is a possibility of doing so. This allows the player to decide whether it is better to hit the right hand with the aim of winning a V prize, or whether it is better to hit the left hand in order to avoid winning the V prize, and play the game according to the judgment. Since the game can be played according to the method, the player's interest can be increased every time the player wins a small win. In addition, in this twelfth control example, the percentage of the small win type (small win A6) that shifts to the preparation mode when a V win is avoided is 50%, but the percentage of when a V win occurs is 50%. The rate at which the small win type (small win B6) is determined is 40%, and when a V win occurs, the player shifts to the preparation mode (time saving state B) after the small win. The rate at which the small win type (small win C6) is determined is 10%. Furthermore, when a V win occurs in small win A6, the 100-time normal mode is reset after the jackpot. Therefore, if you play a game with the aim of winning a V prize and the V prize occurs as expected, you will definitely receive a jackpot, but the game will loop in the normal mode rather than the possibility of moving to the consecutive winning mode. more likely. Also, if you avoid winning a V prize, 50% of the time you will go into preparation mode, and 50% of the time you will be in normal mode, so you should be more serious about whether you should avoid winning a V prize or aiming for a V prize. can be made to judge. Furthermore, the judgment as to whether to avoid winning a V prize or aiming for a V prize can be made different depending on the remaining number of time reductions (remaining number of times in the normal mode). Specifically, for example, if there are only a few time savers left in the normal mode, it is better for the player to avoid the V-win than to let the player win the V-win and risk having the normal mode reset. It can make you think that maybe it's better. In addition, if the number of time reductions is large, there is little shock even if the number of time reductions is reset, so it can make the user think that he should actively aim for the V prize. Therefore, the game method when the selection effect occurs can be varied according to the remaining number of time reductions in the normal mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in 12th control example>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 713(a). FIG. 713(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 713(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth control example is such that a small hit specified number selection table 202ea is added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 690(a)). They differ in that they are Also, the difference is that the contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, the small winning type selection table 202da, and the time saving number selection table 202db have been partially changed. The rest of the configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh control example described above (see FIG. 690(a)), so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, details of the first winning random number table 202a in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 713(b). FIG. 713(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning random number table 202a in this twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 713(b), in the first winning random number table 202a in this twelfth control example, five random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 4” are defined as judgment values for determining a jackpot. (See 202a1 in FIG. 713(b)). Note that, similarly to the eleventh control example, the determination value for a jackpot is the same for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Out of the 400 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers determined to be a jackpot is 5, so the special symbol lottery was executed in this twelfth control example. In this case, the probability of hitting the jackpot is 1/80 (5/400). That is, the jackpot probability (1/200) in the eleventh control example is set to be more than twice as high. This makes it difficult to allow the time saving number to elapse before a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode. Therefore, when transitioning from the normal mode (time-saving state B with normal symbols) to the preparation mode (normal state with normal symbols), it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction. Note that the normal mode basically continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. The probability of not hitting the jackpot even once in 100 special symbol drawings is approximately 28.4% (79/80 to the 100th power), so the probability of transitioning from normal mode to preparation mode is 28.4%. It is 4%.

In addition, "5 to 397" is defined as the range of determination values that are determined to be a loss in the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 713(b)), and a determination value that is determined to be a small win of the first special symbol. "398, 399" is defined as the value range (see 202a3 in FIG. 713(b)). Therefore, the probability of a small win in the first special symbol lottery is 1/200 (2/400). That is, in the normal mode, the probability of a small win is set to be lower than the probability of a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In other words, the configuration is such that the possibility of shifting to another mode due to a big hit or the passage of time saving times is higher than shifting to another mode based on a small hit.

In addition, "5 to 40" is defined as the range of the judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is a miss (see 202a2 in FIG. 713(b)), and the range of the judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 713(b)). As a result, as in the 11th control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, there is a high probability (9/10) of winning a small hit, so the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 670e3. More periods will be set. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the time-saving state A (consecutive winning mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed can be increased.

Next, details of the first winning type selection table 202b in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 713(c). FIG. 713(c) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning type selection table 202b in this twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 713(c), in this twelfth control example, jackpot A6 and jackpot B6 are provided as the jackpot of the first special symbol, and jackpot C6 is provided as the jackpot of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 713(c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, "jackpot A6" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 69". (See 202b1 in FIG. 713(c)). This "Jackpot A6" is a special jackpot in which the number of rounds is 5 lands, and the mode after the jackpot is changed depending on the gaming state (mode) at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, when the time saving state (normal mode, consecutive winning mode) becomes "Jackpot A6", after the jackpot ends, the normal mode with the number of time saving times of 100 is set, while the normal state of the normal symbol (preparation mode) ), when the jackpot A6 is reached, a consecutive win mode in which the number of time saving times is 100 is set. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot A6" is 70, so the first special symbol In the case of a jackpot in the lottery, the percentage of "Jackpot A6" being determined is 70%.

In addition, since the consecutive game mode is a game state in which the game is mainly progressed by drawing the second special symbol, in most cases when winning "Jackpot A6", it is necessary to proceed with the game by drawing the first special symbol. It is in some normal mode, or preparatory mode. If the jackpot becomes A6 in the normal mode, the most disadvantageous normal mode will be set again after the jackpot ends, and the number of time savings of 100 times will be reset regardless of the number of time savings at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, "Jackpot A6" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type in the normal mode. On the other hand, if the jackpot A6 occurs in the preparation mode, the most advantageous continuous winning mode (time-saving state A) will be set after the jackpot ends, so if the jackpot A6 occurs during the preparation mode, it will be advantageous for the player. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 713(c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, "jackpot B6" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". (See 202b2 in FIG. 713(c)). This "Jackpot B6" has 5 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the jackpot is set to consecutive game mode, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. That is, in the normal mode, this is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot B6" is 70, so the first special symbol In the case of a jackpot in the lottery, the percentage of "Jackpot A6" being determined is 30%. In other words, in the normal mode, even if there is a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot A6" is determined, in which the normal mode is set again after the jackpot 70% of the time, and only 30% of the time after the jackpot. “Jackpot B6” in which the consecutive game mode is set is determined. In other words, even if you hit a jackpot in normal mode, the expectation of moving to another mode is low (30% rate), so it is more likely that you will hit the jackpot than if you hit the jackpot with the first special symbol lottery in normal mode. It is possible to provide novel gameplay that makes the player want to exit the normal mode (end the time-saving state) and shift to the preparation mode without any delay.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 713(c), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, "jackpot C6" is defined in association with all values of the first winning type counter C2 (Fig. 713 (c) 202b3). This "jackpot C6" has 15 rounds, and is a jackpot that shifts to consecutive game mode after the jackpot ends. Therefore, if a jackpot is achieved in the consecutive game mode in which the game is played mainly by executing a lottery of the second special symbol, the game will definitely shift to the consecutive game mode again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in this twelfth control example, similar to the eleventh control example, it is better to hit the jackpot by drawing the second special symbol than to win the jackpot through a small hit in the consecutive winning mode. There is a high possibility that it will be in sho mode. Therefore, the player can be pleased if the second special symbol is a jackpot in the lottery.

Next, details of the small hit type selection table 202da in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 714(a). FIG. 714(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small winning type selection table 202da.

As shown in FIG. 714(a), as the small win type of the first special symbol, "small win A6" is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 49". (See 202da1 in FIG. 714(a)). This "small win A6" is a small win type in which a "big win D6" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Jackpot D6 has 5 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. In other words, "Small win A6" is a small win type in which if a player wins a V prize during a small win game, the gaming state after the jackpot will be the most disadvantageous. Among the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 50 counter values that become "small win A6", so when a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, "small win A6" is The determined ratio is 50% (50/100). Note that this "small win A6" is a small win that triggers the end of the time saving state, regardless of the remaining time saving number. For this reason, in the normal mode, if the "small win A6" does not occur and a V win does not occur, it will shift to a relatively advantageous preparation mode after the small win, so it is better not to make a V win than to make a V win. However, this is a special type of small win where the gaming state is advantageous.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(a), as the small win type of the first special symbol, "small win B6" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "50 to 89". (See 202da2 in FIG. 714(a)). This "small win B6" is a small win type in which a "big win B6" is awarded when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3. As described above, jackpot B6 is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the consecutive game mode is set after the jackpot ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. In other words, "Small win B6" is a small win type in which the game state after the jackpot becomes the most advantageous state by winning a V prize during the small win game. Among the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 25 counter values that become "small win B6", so when a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, "small win B6" is The determined percentage is 25% (25/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(a), as the small win type of the first special symbol, "small win C6" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "90 to 99". (See 202da3 in FIG. 714(a)). This "small win C6" is a small win type in which a "big win E6" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. This "jackpot E6" has 5 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the preparation mode is set after the jackpot ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. In other words, "Small win C6" is a small win type in which the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous state by winning a V prize during the small win game. Among the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 10 counter values that become "small win C6", so if a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, "small win C6" will be The determined percentage is 10% (10/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(a), as the small win type of the second special symbol, "small win D6" is defined in association with the range of "0 to 29" in the small win type counter C5. (See 202da4 in FIG. 714(a)). This "small win D6" is a small win type in which a "big win C6" is awarded when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3. As described above, this "jackpot C6" has 15 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the consecutive game mode is set after the jackpot ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. In other words, "Small win D6" is a "Small win D6" because by winning a V prize during a small win game, a jackpot with the highest number of rounds and the most advantageous gaming state after the jackpot is awarded. is one of the most advantageous small winning types for players. Among the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 30 counter values that will be "small win D6", so if the second special symbol lottery results in a small win, "small win D6" will be The determined ratio is 30% (30/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small win E6" is defined in association with the range of "30 to 79" in the small win type counter C5. (See 202da5 in FIG. 714(a)). This "small win E6" is a small win type in which a "big win F6" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. This "jackpot F6" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the jackpot is changed depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, when the jackpot F6 occurs in the time saving state (normal mode, consecutive winning mode), after the jackpot ends, the consecutive winning mode with a time saving number of 100 times is set, while the normal state of the normal symbol (preparation) is set. mode), when the jackpot F6 occurs, the time saving number is set to 0 (preparation mode is set). Therefore, if the jackpot F6 occurs in the consecutive game mode, the consecutive game mode will continue even after the jackpot ends, which is advantageous for the player. However, if the jackpot F6 occurs in the preparation mode, the first special symbol will be drawn by lottery. You will be at a disadvantage compared to if you hit the jackpot. This is because if a jackpot is achieved in the drawing of the first special symbol in the preparation mode, the mode shifts to the continuous winning mode, which is advantageous 100% of the time. Therefore, in the preparation mode in which it is necessary to play the game by hitting the ball left-handed and aiming at the first ball entrance 64, when an irregular game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is performed, the degree of advantage for the player is Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular gaming methods. Among the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 50 counter values that will be the "small win E6", so if the second special symbol is a small win in the lottery, the "small win E6" will be The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(a), as the small win type of the second special symbol, "small win F6" is defined in association with the range of "80 to 89" in the small win type counter C5. (See 202da6 in FIG. 714(a)). This "small win F6" is a small win type in which a "big win G6" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. This "Jackpot G6" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. Note that the period of the normal mode set after the end of the "Jackpot G6" (the number of times special symbols are drawn before transitioning to the preparation mode) is configured differently depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the "Jackpot G6" occurs during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the 50 normal mode (time saving state B) will be set after the jackpot ends, while the "Jackpot G6" will occur during the normal state of the normal symbol. When the game reaches "G6", the normal mode is set for 100 times after the jackpot ends. Therefore, if the jackpot G6 occurs in the consecutive game mode, the player will be disadvantaged because the game will shift to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends. However, since the number of times in the normal mode is set smaller than the number of times in the normal mode (100 times) that is set when "jackpot A6" occurs in the normal mode, it becomes easier to exit the normal mode and shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to continue playing the game until the player shifts to the preparation mode or wins a jackpot before shifting to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the consecutive game mode ends, and thus the operating rate of the Pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Among the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 10 counter values that will be "small win F6", so if the second special symbol lottery results in a small win, "small win F6" will be The determined percentage is 10% (10/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small win G6" is defined in association with the range of "90 to 94" in the small win type counter C5. (See 202da7 in FIG. 714(a)). This "small win G6" is a small win type in which a "big win H6" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. This "jackpot H6" has 10 rounds, similar to the "jackpot G6", and is a jackpot type in which the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. Specifically, if "Jackpot H6" occurs during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the normal mode (time saving state B) is set 25 times after the end of the jackpot, while "Jackpot H6" occurs during the normal state of the normal symbol. H6'', a 100-time normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when the jackpot H6 occurs in the consecutive game mode, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends, which is disadvantageous for the player. However, the number of normal mode settings (100 times) is set when the jackpot is A6 in the normal mode, and the number of normal mode settings is set when the jackpot G6 is reached in the consecutive game mode (25 times). ), it becomes easier to exit the normal mode and enter the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to continue playing the game until the player shifts to the preparation mode or wins a jackpot before shifting to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the consecutive game mode ends, and thus the operating rate of the Pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Among the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 5 counter values that will be "small win G6", so if the second special symbol lottery results in a small win, "small win G6" will be The determined percentage is 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(a), as the small win type of the second special symbol, "small win H6" is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99" in the small win type counter C5. (See 202da8 in FIG. 714(a)). This "small win H6" is a small win type in which a "big win I6" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3. This "jackpot I6", like the "jackpot G6" and "jackpot H6", has 10 rounds and is a jackpot type in which the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. Specifically, if "Jackpot I6" occurs during the time saving state of the normal symbol, one normal mode (time saving state B) is set after the end of the jackpot, while "Jackpot I6" occurs during the normal state of the normal symbol. I6'', the normal mode is set for 100 times after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when the jackpot I6 is reached in the consecutive winning mode, if the first special symbol is drawn out after the jackpot ends, you can shift to the preparation mode, so if the jackpot type is set in the normal mode, This is most advantageous for the player (it becomes easier to shift to the preparation mode). Among the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 5 counter values that become "small win H6", so when a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small win H6" The determined percentage is 5% (5/100).

In addition, in the present twelfth control example, in the consecutive game mode, when the game shifts to the normal mode after the end of the jackpot, the number of times the normal mode (time saving state B) continues is not clearly shown to the player. That is, as in the twelfth control example, the type of rear image indicates the degree of expectation as to whether or not the normal mode has transitioned to the preparation mode. With this configuration, for a predetermined period of time after the consecutive winning mode ends (in this 12th control example, 50 times after the end of the jackpot), whether the transition to the preparation mode or the normal mode is maintained. It is possible to provide a game feature that allows you to predict whether or not there will be a child. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the time saving number selection table 202db in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 714(b). FIG. 714(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving frequency selection table 202db. This time saving number selection table 202db, similar to the time saving number selection table 202db in the eleventh control example, selects the number of time saving times after the end of the jackpot (the number of drawings of special symbols until the transition to the normal mode) by the jackpot type and when the jackpot is won. This is a data table in which data to be set according to the gaming state of the game is defined.

As shown in FIG. 714(b), as a jackpot type, for jackpot A6, 100 times of time saving state A is defined in the normal state (preparation mode) of the normal symbol, and time saving state A of the normal symbol ( 100 time-saving states B are defined in association with the normal mode and consecutive play mode (see 202db1 in FIG. 714(b)). Therefore, in the preparation mode which is set to the normal state of the normal symbol, if the lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot A6, the continuous winning mode is set after the jackpot, which is one of the jackpot types preferred by the player. . On the other hand, in the normal mode or consecutive game mode, when the jackpot A6 is reached, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode, which is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player. In addition, since the consecutive game mode is a game state in which the game progresses mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, it becomes disadvantageous if the jackpot becomes A6 (a disadvantageous normal mode is set after the jackpot ends) ) is almost the normal mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(b), as the jackpot type, for jackpots B6 and C6, 100 time saving states A are defined in association with each other, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (Fig. 714(b)). 714(b), 202db2). Therefore, even if you win jackpot B6 or C6 in any of the gaming states of normal mode, preparation mode, and consecutive game mode, the most advantageous consecutive game mode will be after the jackpot ends, so the aspect of the gaming state after the jackpot ends So, jackpots B6 and C6 are one of the most advantageous jackpot types.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(b), as a jackpot type, 100 times of time saving state B is defined in association with jackpot D6, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (FIG. 714(b)). b) 202db3). Therefore, the jackpot D6 is the most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Further, as the jackpot type, for jackpot E6, 0 times is defined as the time saving number (see 202db4 in FIG. 714(b)). Therefore, even if the jackpot E6 is won in any of the gaming states of normal mode, preparation mode, and consecutive game mode, the preparation mode is relatively advantageous after the jackpot ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(b), as a jackpot type, for jackpot F6, 0 times is defined in association with the time saving number in the normal state (preparation mode) of the normal symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol 100 time-saving states A are defined in association with (normal mode, consecutive play mode) (see 202db5 in FIG. 714(b)). Jackpot F6 is a small win E6 in the second special symbol lottery, and is a jackpot type that is won when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed during the small win game, and is basically a jackpot that can only be won in consecutive game mode. . When the jackpot F6 is reached in the consecutive game mode, the consecutive game mode is set again after the jackpot ends, so the jackpot F6 is one type of jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot is the most advantageous. In addition, the reason why the time saving number is set to 0 when winning during the normal state of the normal symbol is to suppress irregular gaming methods in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the preparation mode. . That is, in the preparation mode, when the first special symbol is drawn to win a jackpot, the mode shifts to consecutive winnings mode at a 100% rate, but if the second special symbol is drawn to a small win of E6 and a jackpot of F6 is won. , the preparation mode loops. Therefore, if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed irregularly, it will be disadvantageous, so it is possible to suppress irregular gaming methods.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(b), as a jackpot type, for jackpot G6, time saving state B is defined 100 times in the normal state of the normal symbol, and 50 times in the time saving state of the normal symbol. A time saving state B is defined in association with each other (see 202db6 in FIG. 714(b)). Therefore, if the jackpot G6 occurs in the consecutive game mode, the normal mode will be set a relatively large number of times, which will be disadvantageous for the player. Furthermore, if the jackpot G6 is reached in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set for 100 times, so it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is attempted to be executed in the preparation mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(b), as a jackpot type, for jackpot H6, time saving state B is defined 100 times in the normal state of the normal symbol, and 25 times in the time saving state of the normal symbol. A time saving state B is defined in association with the above (see 202db7 in FIG. 714(b)). Therefore, when the jackpot H6 occurs in the consecutive game mode, the normal mode is set fewer times than when the jackpot G6 occurs, so it is easier to end the normal mode than when the jackpot G6 occurs. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player than when the consecutive game mode ends when the jackpot G6 occurs. In addition, if the jackpot H6 occurs in the preparation mode, the normal mode will be set for 100 times as in the case of the jackpot G6, so it is necessary to suppress irregular gaming methods that try to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation mode. can be achieved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 714(b), as a jackpot type, for jackpot I6, time saving state B is defined 100 times in the normal state of the normal symbol, and once in the time saving state of the normal symbol. A time saving state B is defined in association with each other (see 202db8 in FIG. 714(b)). Therefore, when the jackpot I6 occurs in consecutive game mode, the normal mode is set fewer times than when the jackpot G6 or jackpot H6 occurs, so it is much easier to end the normal mode than when the jackpot G6 or jackpot H6 occurs. I can do it. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player than when the consecutive game mode ends with a jackpot G6 or a jackpot H6. In addition, when the jackpot I6 occurs in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set for 100 times as in jackpot G6 and jackpot H6, so this is an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the preparation mode. It is possible to suppress the

Next, details of the small winning specified number of times selection table 202ea will be explained with reference to FIG. 715. FIG. 715 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small winning specified number of times selection table 202ea. This small hit prescribed number of times selection table 202ea is a data table that is referred to in order to set the end condition of the time saving state for each small win type. As mentioned above, in this twelfth control example, in addition to the number of time-savings (the number of drawings of special symbols), the number of winnings until the time-saving state ends is specified for each type of small win, and the number of wins within the number of time-savings is determined. When the predetermined number of times is reached, the time saving state is terminated regardless of the remaining time saving number of times. Thereby, each time a small win occurs in the disadvantageous normal mode, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the player has reached the prescribed number of times.

As shown in FIG. 715, the small winning prescribed number of times selection table 202ea is associated with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the number of winnings until the time saving state ends for each small winning type (prescribed number of wins) (number of times) is specified. More specifically, for jackpot A6, in the normal state of the normal symbol, 100 times is specified as the number of times for all small winning types. On the other hand, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, 1 time is specified as the specified number of times for small win A6, and 100 times is specified as the specified number of times for small win types other than small win A6 (see Fig. 715). 202ea1). In other words, when setting consecutive game mode, 100 times is set as the specified number of times for all small winning types, whereas when setting normal mode (time saving state B), jackpot A6 is set as 100 times. For other types of small winnings, 1 time is set as the specified number of times, and 100 times is set as the specified number of times for other small winning types. Furthermore, for jackpots B6 and C6, 100 times is defined in association with all small win types, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (see 202ea2 in FIG. 715). That is, when it comes to jackpots B6 and C6 in which consecutive game mode is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, 100 is set as the prescribed number of times for all small winning types.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 715, for jackpot D6 and jackpot G6 to I6, one time is defined as the prescribed number of times for small win A6, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, and for other jackpots 100 times is defined as the specified number of times in association with the small winning type (see 202ea3 in FIG. 715). In other words, when a jackpot D6, G6 to I6, in which the normal mode is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, one time is set as the specified number of times for the small win A6, and for other small win types. 100 times is set as the specified number of times.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 715, for jackpot E6, 0 times is defined as the prescribed number of times for all small win types, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning (see FIG. 715). 202ea4). That is, when setting the normal mode after the end of the jackpot, 0 times is set as the prescribed number of times for all small winning types. In addition, for jackpot F6, in the normal state of the normal symbol, 0 times is specified as the specified number of times for all small hit types, while in the time saving state of the normal symbol, all small hit types 100 times is defined as the specified number of times (see 202ea5 in FIG. 715).

As described above, in the present twelfth control example, when the consecutive game mode is set, 100 times is set as the prescribed number of times for ending the time saving state for all small winning types. In other words, the time saving state is reliably continued until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed because the time saving state is forcibly terminated and the time saving mode is shifted to the preparation mode before the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times in the consecutive game mode. Furthermore, when the normal mode is set, the prescribed number of small wins for ending the time saving state is set to one time for the small win A6. As a result, in the normal mode, if you win the small win A6, you can forcibly end the time saving number and move to the preparation mode, so even if there are many time saving numbers remaining in the normal mode, you can It is possible to have the player play the game in hopes of winning A6. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game in the normal mode from becoming a task of simply continuing to enter the game ball into the first ball entry port 64 until the time saving number of times has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game in the normal mode.

In addition, in this 12th control example, only in the normal mode, the specified number of small winnings A6 is set to 1, and the specified number of times of other small winning types is set to 100, and in the consecutive winning mode, the specified number of small winning types is set to 1. Although the configuration is such that the number of times is 100, it is not limited to this. The correspondence between the predetermined number of small wins and the type (mode) of the time-saving state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the consecutive winning mode, a small winning type with a small prescribed number of times (for example, 5 times) may be provided among the small winnings of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the more you continue to fail to win a V prize of approximately 1/20 in consecutive game mode, the more likely the consecutive game mode will be terminated, so you can create a sense of tension in the game during consecutive game mode. You can have it. Furthermore, in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to determining the prescribed number of small winnings for each type, the prescribed number of winnings may be determined by adding up the number of winnings for one or all of the small winning types. Specifically, for example, the specified number of times of small win A6 may be set to one, and the specified number of times based on the total number of wins of small win B6 and small win C6 may be set to five. With this configuration, even if the event of failing to win a V prize and maintaining the normal mode continues, the player can view the game positively as having reduced the prescribed number of times before transitioning to the preparation mode. It is possible to improve the player's motivation for playing the game.

Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 716. FIG. 716 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 716, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twelfth control example is such that a small winning specified number of times storage area 203ea is added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 693(b)). They differ in some respects.

The specified number of small winnings storage area 203ea is for storing the remaining number of small winnings for each small winning type to end the time saving state (normal mode, continuous winning mode) and transition to the preparation mode. It is a storage area. In the time saving state of the normal symbol, each time a small win occurs, the remaining number of winnings (prescribed number of times) corresponding to the winning type of small win is subtracted and updated (see S2412 in FIG. 722). Then, when the specified number of times corresponding to any small winning type becomes 0 (the specified number of times has been reached), regardless of the remaining time saving number of times (number of drawings of special symbols), the mode shifts to preparation mode. (See S2414 in FIG. 722). In addition, in the present twelfth control example, in the normal mode, the specified number of small winning types other than small winning A6 is set to 100, so the number of small winning types other than small winning A6 is 100 times (or 50 times, There is no possibility that the time saving state is ended before the time saving number (25 times, 1 time) ends. In addition, in consecutive game mode, the specified number of small wins is set to 100 times for all types of small wins, so the specified number of small wins is reached before the time-saving number of 100 times in consecutive game mode ends. There is also no possibility of switching to preparation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 717, a gaming state transition method in the twelfth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 717, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example has three states (modes) that can be roughly divided. That is, the normal mode (time-saving state B with normal symbols) shown at the top of FIG. 717, the continuous mode (time-saving state A with normal symbols) shown at the bottom left of FIG. A preparation mode (normal state with normal symbols) is provided.

As mentioned above, the normal mode indicates the time-saving state B of the normal symbol, in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400, and even if the game ball hits the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will not be possible to win consecutive games. Since it is difficult to shift to the mode, this becomes the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, as mentioned above, the consecutive game mode indicates a game state in which the time-saving state A of the normal symbol is set, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 more easily, so there is a high probability of a small hit. This is a gaming state in which there is a higher possibility of winning a jackpot than in the normal mode because there are more opportunities to pass the V winning switch 670e3. In addition, since the consecutive game mode is likely to be set again after the jackpot is over, it becomes the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, the preparation mode indicates a game state in which the normal state of the normal symbols is set, and as described above, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400, the first Although it is necessary to play the game by aiming at the ball entry hole 64, if the player wins a jackpot, the game shifts to consecutive game mode 100% of the time, so the game state is more advantageous than the normal mode.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 717, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another mode when there is a big hit, when a small hit is won, or when the number of time saving times has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 717, when a jackpot is achieved by drawing the first special symbol and jackpot B6 is determined as the jackpot type, consecutive game mode is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Further, when the number of time reductions has elapsed (the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the number of time reductions has been completed), the mode shifts to the preparation mode (normal state of normal symbols). Further, when the small win A6 is reached and the small win game ends without a V winning, the predetermined number of small wins A6 in the normal mode is reached and the game shifts to the preparation mode. In addition, when the small win B6 occurs and the player hits the right hand with the aim of winning a V prize, and a V prize occurs, after the jackpot based on the V prize (jackpot B6) ends, the game shifts to consecutive winnings mode. . Furthermore, when the small win C6 occurs and the player hits the right hand with the aim of winning a V prize, and a V prize occurs, after the jackpot based on the V prize (jackpot D6) ends, the game shifts to consecutive winnings mode. . On the other hand, when the jackpot A6 is won in the first special symbol drawing, and when the small win A6 is won and a V prize is generated, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Further, when the small winnings B6 and C6 occur and the V winning does not occur, the normal mode is maintained.

Therefore, in the normal mode, when a jackpot is achieved in the drawing of the first special symbol, the game shifts to the continuous winning mode only 30% of the time, and loops the normal mode 70% of the time. In other words, even if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, there is a higher possibility that the player will loop through the normal mode rather than shift to consecutive game mode, so a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is a lottery result that is not very pleasing to the player. becomes. Therefore, in the normal mode, rather than getting a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to make the user want to wait for the number of time-savings and shift to the preparation mode, so every time the special symbol lottery is executed, the jackpot It is possible to provide novel gameplay that makes players wish they would not win. Further, in the normal mode, when a small win is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small win A6 is determined in which the prescribed number of times until the time saving state ends is one at a rate of 50%. Therefore, if the small win is A6 and no V-winning occurs, the machine will move to the preparation mode, so if the special symbol lottery results in a small win with a probability of 1/200, the small win A6 will be determined. It is possible to make the player expect that the player will be there. Note that if a V win occurs in small win A6, the normal mode will be set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, small win A6 can be said to be a small win type in which it is more advantageous not to generate a V win than to generate a V win from the viewpoint of transition to a gaming state (mode). On the other hand, if a small win type other than small win A6 is determined in the lottery of the first special symbol, the gaming state (mode) will be maintained unless a V win is generated. In other words, small win types other than small win A6 are small win types in which it is more advantageous to generate a V win than to not generate a V win.

In this way, there is a small win type (small win A6) that will be advantageous if you do not win a V prize and a disadvantage if you win a V prize, and a small win type that will remain disadvantageous if you do not win a V prize (small win B6, C6), it is possible to provide gameplay that allows the player to decide whether it is better to win a V prize or to avoid winning a V prize when winning a small win. can. As described above, in this twelfth control example, when a small hit occurs in the normal mode, the selection effect (see FIG. 712) is executed regardless of the type of small win. This makes it difficult to infer the type of small win from the display mode, so the player can more seriously decide whether or not to aim for a V-win. Therefore, each time a small win is won, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 717, there is a possibility of transitioning from the continuous winning mode to another mode not only when a jackpot occurs but also when the time saving number of normal symbols ends. Specifically, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 717, a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, and a V win (an event in which a game ball passes through the V win switch 670e3) occurs, resulting in a jackpot G6 to I6. When either one of them is determined, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to normal mode. In addition, when the special symbol lottery ends 100 times without a jackpot, the time saving number of normal symbols has elapsed and the game shifts to the preparation mode (falls). On the other hand, if a jackpot C6 or F6 is determined when winning a V prize, or if a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery, the consecutive winning mode is set again after the jackpot ends. As mentioned above, the probability of completing 100 special symbol fluctuations without becoming a jackpot is about 0.6%, so this is an event that almost never occurs. Therefore, in the consecutive game mode, the game shifts to another mode when the player wins the jackpot G6 to I6. The small wins corresponding to jackpots G6 to I6 (small wins F6 to H6) are determined at a rate of 20% of all small wins, so when it comes to continuous game mode, the jackpot and continuous game mode can be divided into 80% or more. This creates an extremely advantageous gaming situation that repeats at a high rate. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game with the goal of transitioning to the consecutive game mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As shown in the lower right part of FIG. 717, there is a possibility of transitioning from the preparation mode to another mode only when a jackpot is achieved. Specifically, as shown in the lower right corner of FIG. 717, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot, whether the jackpot becomes A6 or the jackpot B6, the game after the jackpot ends. The status is set to continuous mode. Although the preparation mode is basically a mode in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed (it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400), the second entry is possible due to an irregular game method. If the game ball enters the ball mouth 6400 and becomes a jackpot or a small hit and a V prize is generated, the game will fall to the normal mode (when the jackpot reaches F6 to H6). , the preparation mode may be looped (in the case of jackpot D6, E6). Therefore, if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed using an irregular gaming method, it will be more difficult to shift to the consecutive winning mode than if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, so there is an advantage of using the irregular gaming method. can be reduced. This makes it possible to suppress irregular gaming methods.

Next, details of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 718(a). FIG. 718(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 718(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twelfth control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 695(a)), except that the expectation selection table 222da is deleted. The difference is that a rank up lottery table 222ea is added.

The rank-up lottery table 222ea suggests the remaining number of fluctuations until the preparation mode by the rank-up mode of the back image when a jackpot G6 to I6 occurs in the consecutive game mode and the game shifts (falls) to the normal mode. This is a data table that is referred to in order to set the rank-up effect for. The details of this rank up lottery table 222ea will be explained with reference to FIG. 718(b).

FIG. 718(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the rank-up lottery table 222ea. As shown in FIG. 718(b), the rank up lottery table 222ea includes a determination value for determining that the back image should be updated (ranked up) to a more expected back image for each value of the remaining time saving number (J). (Counter value of production lottery counter 223da) is a data table defined in association with each other. Note that the rear image is updated by lottery every time the number of changes is a multiple of 10 within a range where the number of changes is less than 50.

As shown in FIG. 718(b), when the value of the number of remaining time reductions (J) is less than 20, it is determined that there is no rank increase when the value of the performance lottery counter 223da is "0 to 29". On the other hand, when the value of the performance lottery counter 223da is "30 to 89", it is determined that the rank has increased by one, and when the value is "90 to 99", it is determined that the rank has increased by two. Here, one rank up means that when the current back image is a back image for low expectations, it is updated (ranked up) to a back image for medium expectations, and the back image is for medium expectations. Indicates that the back image for high expectation level will be updated (ranked up). In other words, it means raising expectations by one level. Note that if a back image for high expectation level has already been set, the back image for high expectation level remains unchanged. In addition, 2-rank up indicates that the back image is updated (ranked up) to a high expectation level image, regardless of the type of the current back image.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 718(b), when the value of the remaining time reduction number (J) is 20 or more, it is determined that there is no rank increase when the value of the performance lottery counter 223da is "0 to 59", In the case of "60 to 97", it is determined that the rank has increased by one rank, and in the case of "98, 99", it is determined that the rank has increased by two ranks. In this way, when the number of time reductions is less than 20, the rate of increasing by one or two ranks is higher than when the number of time reductions is 20 or more, so it is important to decide whether to rank up or not at each lottery timing. It is possible to have the player play the game while paying attention to the

Next, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 719. FIG. 719 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 719, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth control example has a rank up lottery flag 223ea and an expectation storage area 223eb added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 696). They differ in that they are

The rank-up lottery flag 223ea is a flag indicating whether or not it is the period for lottery for rank-up of the back image using the rank-up lottery table 222ea. This rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to ON at the timing when the type of jackpot that transitions from the continuous winning mode to the normal mode ends (see S5706 in FIG. 726), and is set to ON at the timing when the jackpot of the type that changes from the consecutive winning mode to the normal mode ends (see S5706 in FIG. 726), and is the 51st variation pattern production after the jackpot ends. is set to off at the start timing of (see S5624 in FIG. 728). That is, any of the jackpots G6 to I6 is set to OFF based on the number of fluctuations that determines that the transition to the preparation mode has been reached. Further, although not shown in the drawing, the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is also set to OFF when a jackpot is won. While the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on, a rank-up lottery using the rank-up lottery table 222ea is executed every time the number of changes in the special symbol becomes a multiple of 10. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game feature that allows the player to guess whether or not the mode is transitioning to the preparation mode from the mode of rank up (whether or not the number of time savings remaining until the transition to the preparation mode is less than 20).

The expectation level storage area 223eb is a storage area for storing data indicating the expectation level suggested by the back surface type. When executing a lottery using the rank-up lottery table 222ea (see FIG. 718(b)), the current expectation level is determined based on the data stored in the expectation level storage area 223eb, and the level determined by the lottery is determined based on the data stored in the expectation level storage area 223eb. Identify the back type after reflecting the rank increase.

<About the control process of the main controller in the 12th control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 720 to 723. First, special symbol variation processing 6 (S151) in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 720. This special symbol variation process 6 (S151), similar to the special symbol variation process 5 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 698), includes the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37, This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81.

Of the special symbol variation processing 6 (see FIG. 720) in this twelfth control example, the special symbols in the eleventh control example are The same processes as S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, S221, S261, S262, and S265 of variation process 5 (see FIG. 698) are executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 720) in this twelfth control example, after the process in S262, all data in the time saving medium counter 203da, the specified number of small hits storage area 203ea, and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset. , the process moves to S220 and the start of the jackpot is set.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 720) in the present twelfth control example, if it is determined in the process of S218 that the current lottery result is not a special symbol jackpot (S218: No), the eleventh control Instead of the time saving number update process in the example (see FIG. 700), time saving number update process 6 is executed (S272), and the process moves to S265. Details of this time saving number update process 6 (S272) will be described later with reference to FIG. 721. In addition, in the process of S265, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S265: Yes), instead of the small win start process in the 11th control example (see FIG. 701), the small win start process 6 is executed (S273), and the present process ends. The details of this small hit start process 6 (S273) will be described later with reference to FIG. 722.

Next, with reference to FIG. 721, details of the above-mentioned time saving number update process 6 (S272) will be described. This time saving number update process 6 (S272) is a process executed in place of the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 700) in the eleventh control example, and is a process executed in place of the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 700) in the eleventh control example. Similarly, this is a process for updating the number of time saving times when the mode is set to a time saving state (that is, when the mode is consecutive play mode or normal mode).

Of the time saving number update process 6 (see FIG. 721) in this twelfth control example, the processes S2301 to S2304 and S2306 are respectively S2301 to S2304 of the time saving number update process in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 700). The same processes as those in S2306 and S2306 are executed. In addition, in the time saving number update process 6 (see FIG. 721) in the twelfth control example, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203da has become 0 in the process of S2304 (S2304: Yes), the specified number of small wins is stored. All data in area 203ea is reset to 0 (S2311), and a state command indicating the normal state of the normal symbol is set (S2312). Next, "00H" indicating the preparation mode (normal state of normal symbols) is stored in the mode type storage area 203dc (S2313), and this process is ended.

Next, details of the small hit start process 6 (S273) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 722. This small hit start process 6 (S273) is a process that is executed in place of the small hit start process (see FIG. 701) in the 11th control example, and is similar to the small win start process (see FIG. 701) in the 11th control example. Similarly, this is a process for setting the start of a small winning release operation.

Of the small hit start process 6 (see FIG. 722) in this 12th control example, each process of S2401 to S2403 is different from each process of S2401 to S2403 of the small win start process (see FIG. 701) in the 11th control example. The same processing is performed. In addition, in the small win start process 6 (see FIG. 722) in the twelfth control example, when the process of S2403 is finished, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203da is a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more). It is determined (S2411), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203da is 0 (S2411: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2411, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203da is larger than 0 (S2411: Yes), the specified number of small winnings for each type of small winning stored in the small winning specified number of times storage area 203ea Of these, the specified number of times corresponding to the type of small win won this time is updated by subtracting 1 (S2412), and it is determined whether the specified number of times after the subtraction has become 0 (S2413).

In the process of S2413, if it is determined that the specified number of times after subtraction has become 0 (S2413: Yes), in order to end the time saving state, the data in the time saving medium counter 203da and the small winning specified number of times storage area 203ea are all set to 0. (S2414), sets a state command indicating the intention of the normal symbol to be in the normal state (S2415), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2413, if it is determined that the specified number of times after the subtraction in the process of S2412 is not 0 (S2413: No), this process is directly ended.

By executing this small win start process 6 (see Fig. 722), when a small win A6 (the specified number of times is 1 small win) in the normal mode, the time saving state is started regardless of the remaining time saving number. You can end it and move to preparation mode.

In addition, in this 12th control example, only in the normal mode, the specified number of small winnings A6 is set to 1, and the specified number of times of other small winning types is set to 100, and in the consecutive winning mode, the specified number of small winning types is set to 1. Although the configuration is such that the number of times is 100, it is not limited to this. The correspondence relationship between the prescribed number of small wins and the type (mode) of the time saving state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the consecutive game mode, the prescribed number of times may be set to one. By configuring in this manner, in the consecutive winning mode, a small winning type with a small prescribed number of times (for example, 5 times) may be provided among the small winnings of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the more you continue to fail to win a V prize of approximately 1/20 in consecutive game mode, the more likely the consecutive game mode will be terminated, so you can create a sense of tension in the game during consecutive game mode. You can have it. Furthermore, in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to determining the prescribed number of small winnings for each type, the prescribed number of winnings may be determined by adding up the number of winnings for one or all of the small winning types. Specifically, for example, the specified number of times of small win A6 may be set to one, and the specified number of times based on the total number of wins of small win B6 and small win C6 may be set to five. With this configuration, even if the event of failing to win a V prize and maintaining the normal mode continues, the player can view the game positively as having reduced the prescribed number of times before transitioning to the preparation mode. The player's motivation for playing can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 723, jackpot end processing 6 (S1151) in the twelfth control example will be described. This jackpot end process 6 (S1151) is a process that is executed in place of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 705) in the 11th control example in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 704), and is Similar to the jackpot end process 5 in the example (see FIG. 705), this is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Of the jackpot ending process 6 (see FIG. 723) in this twelfth control example, each process of S1321, S1322, and S1324 to S1326 corresponds to S1321, S1322 of the jackpot ending process 5 (see FIG. 705) in the eleventh control example, respectively. , and the same processes as those in S1324 to S1326 are executed. In the jackpot end processing 6 (see FIG. 723) in the twelfth control example, when the processing of S1322 is finished, the small hit specified number of times selection table 202ea is read out (S1331), and from the read table, the jackpot type storage area 203db The prescribed number of small wins corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the data and the gaming state (mode) at the time of winning indicated by the data in the winning mode storage area 203de is specified (S1332). Next, the specified number of small winnings for each specified small winning type is stored in the specified small winning number storage area 203ea, and the number of time savings specified in the process of S1322 is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203da (S1333), and the process is performed. The process moves to S1324.

By executing this jackpot ending process 6 (see FIG. 723), the number of time reductions and the specified number of small wins can be appropriately set according to the type of jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 12th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 724 to 728. First, command determination processing 6 (S4151) in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 724. This command determination process 6 (S4151) is executed in place of command determination process 5 (see FIG. 708) in the eleventh control example, and is similar to command determination process 5 (see FIG. 708) in the eleventh control example. This is a process for performing control according to the type of command received from the device 110.

Of the command determination processing 6 in the twelfth control example (see FIG. 724), each of S4201 to S4209 and S4213 to S4215 corresponds to the steps S4201 to S4209 in the command determination processing 5 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 708), respectively. , and the same processes as those in S4213 to S4215 are executed. In addition, in the command determination process 6 in the twelfth control example (see FIG. 724), if it is determined that a status command has been received in the process of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the status command process in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 709) ), status command processing 6 is executed (S4231), and this processing ends. Note that details of this status command processing 6 (S4231) will be described later with reference to FIG. 725.

In the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 724) in the twelfth control example, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that no status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209: No), then the It is determined whether a command related to a win (opening command for a small win, ending command for a small win, etc.) has been received (S4232), and if it is determined that a command related to a small win has been received (S4232). :Yes), a small win related process for performing control according to the type of command related to a small win is executed (S4233), and this process ends. Details of this small win related process (S4233) will be described later with reference to FIG. 727. On the other hand, in the process of S4232, if it is determined that the command related to the small win has not been received (S4232: No), the process moves to S4213.

Next, details of the above-mentioned status command processing 6 (S4231) will be explained with reference to FIG. 725. This state command processing 6 (S4231) is executed in place of the state command processing in the 11th control example (see FIG. 709), and similarly to the state command processing in the 11th control example (see FIG. 709), the state command This is a process for performing control according to the gaming state (mode) notified from the control device 110.

Of the state command processing 6 (see FIG. 725) in this twelfth control example, each of S5501 to S5504 and S5506 corresponds to S5501 to S5504 and S5506 of the state command processing in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 709), respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed. Furthermore, in the status command processing 6 (see FIG. 725) in the twelfth control example, if it is determined in the process of S5504 that the current status command is not the command output when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored (S5504 :No), then it is determined whether or not it is the status command output at the end of the jackpot (S5511).

In the process of S5511, if it is determined that the current status command is the status command output at the end of the jackpot (S5511: Yes), after the jackpot is finished to set the back image according to the gaming state after the jackpot ends. The back side setting process is executed (S5512), and this process ends. Details of this post-end back setting process (S5512) will be described later with reference to FIG. 726. On the other hand, in the process of S5511, if it is determined that the status command is not the one output at the end of the jackpot (if the number of time-savings has elapsed or the specified number of small wins has been reached and the normal mode has transitioned to the preparation mode), (S5511: No), this process ends immediately. In addition, in the case of transitioning from the normal mode to the preparation mode without going through a jackpot, notification will be made in the small win related process (see Figure 727) or expectation update process 6 (see Figure 728), which will be described later, or by the rear image. Suggestions are set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 726, details of the above-mentioned post-end back setting process (S5512) will be described. As described above, this post-end back setting process (S5512) is a process for setting the back image after the jackpot ends, depending on the gaming state after the jackpot ends. In this post-end back setting process (S5512), first, it is determined whether the data in the game status storage area 223h updated based on the status command corresponds to the number of time reductions of 100 (S5701) . Here, the back setting process after the end (S5512) is a process that is not executed in the case of consecutive game mode, so if the remaining time saving number is 100, it is only performed when the normal mode is set after the jackpot. be. Also, in the normal mode that is set after the consecutive shooting mode ends, the number of time reductions is set to 50 or less, so if the normal mode is set with a number of time reductions of 100, it means that the normal mode has been looped. It means that it is a case. Therefore, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the remaining time saving number is 100 (S5701: Yes), a back image for normal mode is set (S5702), and this process ends. This allows the player to easily understand that the normal mode is set after the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the remaining number of time reductions is not 100 (S5701: No), then the remaining number of time reductions is 0 (i.e., the preparation mode is after the jackpot is completed). ) (S5703), and if it is determined that the remaining time saving number is 0 (S5703: Yes), a back image for the preparation mode is set (S5704), and the process is immediately terminated. This allows the player to easily understand that the preparation mode is set after the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S5703, if it is determined that the remaining time saving number is not 0 (S5703: No), it is the normal mode after the consecutive game mode ends (any of 50 times, 25 times, 1 time). Therefore, a back image for low expectation level is set (S5705), and the rank up lottery flag 223ea is set to ON (S5706), and this process ends. do. By turning on the rank-up lottery flag 223ea, a rank-up lottery of the expectation level (type of back image) can be executed every 10 times a special symbol lottery is executed. As a result, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the remaining number of time reductions can be predicted from the mode of ranking up, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 727, details of the above-mentioned small hit related process (S4233) will be described. This small hit related process (S4233) is one of the command determination processes 6 (see FIG. 724), and as described above, when a command related to a small win is received, control is performed according to the type of command. This is the process for executing.

In the small win related process (see FIG. 727), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command for a small win has been received from the main control device 110 (S5801), and if it is determined that an opening command for a small win has been received. (S5801: Yes) Next, it is determined from the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223h whether or not the current mode is normal mode (S5802). In the process of S5802, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal mode (time saving state B) (preparation mode or consecutive game mode) (S5802: No), then the rank up lottery flag 223ea is turned on. (S5803), and if the rank up lottery flag 223ea is off (S5803: No), it is the consecutive game mode or the preparation mode, and the background image for the preparation mode has already been displayed. Since this means that the state has been switched, execution of a right-hitting navigation effect that prompts the player to hit right-handed aiming at the V winning device 670 is set (S5804), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5802 that the mode is normal mode (S5802: Yes), and if it is determined that the rank up lottery flag 223ea is on in the process of S5803 (S5803: Yes), the selection effect ( (see FIG. 712) is set to be executed (S5805), and this processing ends. By configuring the selection effect (see FIG. 712) to be executed when the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on even if the transition is to the preparation mode, it is possible to perform the selection effect (see FIG. 712), even if the player wins a small win during the execution period of the rank-up effect. Also, the display mode can be made common between the normal mode and the preparation mode. Therefore, during the execution period of the rank-up production (from the end of the last jackpot in the consecutive game mode until the end of the 50th special symbol lottery), the normal mode may be maintained whether it is transitioning to the preparation mode or not. It is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish what is being done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the rank-up aspect of the rank-up performance and play the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the process of S5801, if it is determined that the opening command for a small win has not been received from the main control device 110 (S5801: No), next, it is determined whether or not an ending command for a small win has been received. It is determined (S5806). In the process of S5806, if it is determined that the ending command for the small win has been received (S5806: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a V win has already been detected in the current small win game (S5807 ), if it is determined that no V winnings have been detected (S5807: No), then check whether the specified number of small wins has been reached (small win regulations for any of the small win types in the game status storage area 223h). It is determined whether the data indicating the number of times corresponds to 0 (S5808).

In the process of S5808, if it is determined that the specified number of small wins has been reached (S5808: Yes), a back image for preparation mode is set (S5809), and the rank up lottery flag 223ea is set to OFF. (S5810), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5808, if it is determined that the specified number of small wins has not been reached (the data indicating the specified number of times in the game status storage area 223h is not 0) (S5808: No), this process is continued. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S5807, if it is determined that the V winning prize has been detected during the execution of the current small winning game (S5807: Yes), notification of the start of the jackpot is set (S5811), and the main Finish the process.

By executing this small hit related process (see FIG. 727), it is possible to set an appropriate performance mode as a performance at the time of a small win depending on the gaming state. Moreover, the content of the notification after the end of the small win can be appropriately set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 728, the expectation update process 6 (S4841) in the twelfth control example will be described. This expectation update process 6 (S4841) is a process that is executed in place of the expectation update process in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 711), and is a process that is performed on the back image showing the expectation level as to whether or not the transition has been made to the preparation mode. This is a process for setting up a rank-up lottery.

Of the expectation update process 6 (see FIG. 728) in this twelfth control example, the processes S5601, S5603, and S5608 are the same as those in the expected policy process (see FIG. 711) in the eleventh control example, respectively. , and the same processes as those in S5608 are executed. In the expectation update process 6 (see FIG. 728) in the twelfth control example, when the process of S5601 is completed, it is next determined whether the rank up lottery flag 223ea is on (S5621), and the rank If it is determined that the up lottery flag 223ea is on (S5621: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223db is 51 (S5622).

In the process of S5622, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223db is 51 (S5622: Yes), the transition to the preparation mode has definitely been completed, regardless of whether the previous jackpot type was jackpot G6 to I6. This means that the number of fluctuations has been reached, so the process for ending the lottery period for the rank-up effect and setting the back image for the preparation mode (processes of S5623 and S5624) is executed. Also, if it is determined in the process of S5603 that the value of the variation counter 223db is not 101 (S5603: No), this means that the normal mode has transitioned to the preparation mode, so the process proceeds to S5623. In the process of S5623, the back image for the preparation mode is set (S5623), the rank up lottery flag 223ea is set to OFF (S5624), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S5622, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223db is not 51 (S5622: No), it is determined whether the current back image is a high expectation back image (S5625). ), if it is determined that a back image for high expectation level has been set (S5625: Yes), the expectation level cannot be increased in rank any further, so the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5625, if it is determined that the currently set type of back image is not a high expectation back image (S5625: No), the process moves to S5608.

In addition, in the expectation update process 6 (see FIG. 728) in the twelfth control example, when it is determined in the process of S5608 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is a multiple of 10 (S5608: Yes), the rank is increased. The lottery table 222ea is read out (S5626), the value of the production lottery counter 223da and the rank-up mode corresponding to the remaining number of time reductions are specified, the identified rank-up mode is set (S5627), and this process is ended. do.

By executing this expectation level update process 6 (see Figure 719), the special symbol lottery will be drawn 10 times during the predetermined period after the consecutive winning mode ends (until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times). Every time it is executed, it is possible to draw a lottery to increase the rank of the rear image. As a result, it is possible to realize a gameplay that allows the player to guess the remaining number of time reductions depending on the ease of ranking up.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example, the time saving state B of the normal symbols is set to the most disadvantageous gaming state (normal mode) in which it is difficult to shift to the consecutive game mode even if a jackpot is achieved, and the normal symbol When the game enters the normal state (preparation mode), the system is configured so that the rate of transition to the continuous winning mode in the event of a jackpot is higher than that in the time-saving state B with normal symbols. As a result, rather than hitting a jackpot in normal mode, if you hit a jackpot after passing the number of time reductions in normal mode and transitioning to preparation mode, it will be easier to transition to continuous winning mode, so in normal mode , it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the player plays the game in anticipation of the end of the time-saving state. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which the player expects successive wins in the special symbol lottery in the normal mode.

In addition, in this twelfth control example, as a type of small win that has a low probability (1/200) of winning when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the normal mode is activated after the jackpot ends due to the occurrence of a V win. The small winning type that will be reset (small winning A6), the small winning type (small winning B6) that will shift to continuous winning mode after the jackpot ends when a V winning occurs, and the jackpot ending when a V winning occurs. There is also a small win type (small win C6) that will later shift to the preparation mode. As a result, in the case of a small win in normal mode, the game state will be disadvantageous due to the V winning (the number of time savings for the consumed amount will be reset and return to 100), and it will be advantageous. (transition to preparation mode or consecutive winning mode), so if you get a small win in normal mode, is it better to make a V-win or is it better to avoid a V-win? It is possible to provide gameplay that allows players to decide whether or not to play the game. In addition, in the normal mode, when a small win A6 is reached, the time saving state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of time saving times. As a result, in the small win A6, it is more advantageous as a gaming state to avoid the V win and shift to the preparation mode than to make the V win and reset the normal mode. Therefore, in the case of a small win, the player can make a more serious decision as to whether to hit the right hand with the aim of winning the V prize or to hit the left hand with the aim of avoiding the V prize. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in playing the game even if the player wins a small win.

In addition, in this 12th control example, only in the normal mode, the specified number of small winnings A6 is set to 1, and the specified number of times of other small winning types is set to 100, and in the consecutive winning mode, the specified number of small winning types is set to 1. Although the configuration is such that the number of times is 100, it is not limited to this. The correspondence between the predetermined number of small wins and the type (mode) of the time-saving state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the consecutive winning mode, a small winning type with a small prescribed number of times (for example, 5 times) may be provided among the small winnings of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the more you continue to fail to win a V prize of approximately 1/20 in consecutive game mode, the more likely the consecutive game mode will be terminated, so you can create a sense of tension in the game during consecutive game mode. You can have it. Furthermore, in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to determining the prescribed number of small winnings for each type, the prescribed number of winnings may be determined by adding up the number of winnings for one or all of the small winning types. Specifically, for example, the specified number of times of small win A6 may be set to one, and the specified number of times based on the total number of wins of small win B6 and small win C6 may be set to five. With this configuration, even if the event of failing to win a V prize and maintaining the normal mode occurs consecutively, the player can view the game positively as having reduced the prescribed number of times before transitioning to the preparation mode. It is possible to improve the player's motivation for playing the game.

In this twelfth control example, the small win type of the first special symbol is small win A, which sets the normal mode after the jackpot when you win a V prize, and shifts to the preparation mode when you avoid the V win, and preparation mode after the jackpot when you win a V prize. is set, but the current mode will be maintained if you avoid a V win, and the small win type will be set after a jackpot if you win a V win, but the current mode will be maintained if you avoid a V win. Although there are three types of winning types, the small winning types are not limited to these three types, and the types may be increased or decreased as desired. For example, by setting the small win type of the first special symbol to only small win A6, it is certain that when a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, if you avoid the V prize, you will be in preparation mode. , it is possible to make the player feel a great sense of satisfaction at the time of winning a small win. Conversely, in addition to jackpots A6 to C6, for example, a relatively advantageous small win type may be provided that shifts to the preparation mode even when a V prize is won or when a V prize is avoided. A relatively disadvantageous small winning type may be provided, in which the mode shifts to the normal mode when a prize is won, and the mode is maintained when a V winning is avoided. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make a more serious decision as to whether to win a V prize or to avoid it when winning a small win, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this twelfth control example, in the normal mode, there are small winning types in which avoiding a V winning is more advantageous than when a V winning occurs, and generating a V winning is more advantageous than avoiding a V winning. Although the configuration includes a small winning type that is also advantageous, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to provide a small win type that is advantageous even if a V win is avoided or a V win occurs. Specifically, for example, a small win type may be provided in which the predetermined number of times is one and the preparation mode is set after the jackpot ends when a V winning occurs. In addition, conversely, even if a V winning is avoided or a V winning is generated, a small winning type may be provided in which the normal mode is set.

In this twelfth control example, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode, either the mode shifts to the continuous winning mode or the time saving state B is set for 100 times. However, it is not limited to this. A case may be provided in which the game shifts to the preparation mode, or a variation may be provided in the number of time reductions in the normal mode after the end of the jackpot. Similarly, for other modes, variations in the transition ratio to each mode and the number of time saving times when a jackpot is achieved can be arbitrarily determined.

In the present twelfth control example, the operation pattern of the V winning device 670 in the case of a small win is the same regardless of the type of small win, but it is not limited to this. For example, the opening/closing door 670f1 may be configured to have an opening pattern in which the opening period is short (it is difficult for game balls to enter) and an opening pattern in which the opening period is long (it is easy for game balls to enter).

In this twelfth control example, the display mode shown in FIG. Any mode can be set as long as the mode can be selected by the person. Further, the selection effect may be executed in a manner that can notify or suggest the type of small win at a predetermined rate in the case of a small win. Specifically, for example, if you win the small win A6 in which it is advantageous to avoid the V prize, the arrow with the words "left-handed hit" attached at the first rate (for example, 5% rate) While image YG1 is displayed in red, if it becomes another small winning type, arrow image YG1 is displayed in red at a second rate (for example, a rate of 1%) that is lower than the first rate. It may be configured so that With this configuration, it is possible to provide a game in which the type of small hit is predicted based on the display mode of the selection effect and the firing direction is determined.

In this twelfth control example, the current mode is not clearly indicated from the end of the consecutive winning mode until the end of the 50th special symbol lottery, and the mode is shifted to the preparation mode depending on the rank-up mode of the back image. The configuration was such that only the number of draws for the remaining special symbols was suggested. In other words, the current mode is not made clear to the player by display format, etc. until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times (which is the number of draws at which the transition to the preparation mode has definitely been completed, regardless of the type of jackpot). However, it is not limited to this. It may be configured to notify the current mode at an arbitrary number of drawings between the end of the consecutive game mode and the number of drawings (50 times) at which the transition to the preparation mode is definitely reached. . More specifically, for example, after the consecutive winning mode ends (that is, after the end of the jackpot G6 to I6), when the special symbol lottery ends 30 times, the normal mode remains or has already shifted to the preparation mode. The configuration may be such that the rear image is changed to a rear image according to the mode (a rear image for normal mode or a rear image for preparation mode). With this configuration, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved because the player can be made to want to continue the game at least until the number of drawings in which the current mode is specified. In addition, even if the normal mode is announced at the end of the 30 special symbol draws, the remaining number of drawings until the preparation mode will be 20, and more than half of the remaining number of drawings until the preparation mode. Since the player has already digested the information, it is possible to make the player feel that ``I can shift to the preparation mode in a little while.'' Therefore, even if the normal mode is notified, the game can be continued with the aim of transitioning to the preparation mode.

<13th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 729 to 745. The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example described above is configured to provide three types of gaming states, specifically, a normal state (normal mode) in which a low probability state for normal symbols is set, a normal mode for normal symbols, and a low probability state for normal symbols. Time-saving game state A (consecutive game mode) in which the game ball enters the second ball entry port 6400 in a time-saving state, and the game ball enters the second ball entry port 6400 in the time-saving state with normal symbols. Three types of time-saving game state B (withdrawal mode) were provided, which are difficult to control.

Then, the normal mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is set to the most disadvantageous state (the state in which the number of balls held is likely to decrease and the lottery of the disadvantageous second special symbol is likely to be executed), and the time-saving state A of the normal symbol is set. The consecutive game mode is set to be the most advantageous state (a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held and it is easy to execute the lottery of an advantageous second special symbol). In addition, in the pullback mode, which may shift when a jackpot occurs in consecutive game mode, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the first ball entry hole 64 by hitting to the left as in the normal mode to proceed with the game. However, if a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery in the pull-back mode, the proportion of transition to consecutive winnings mode is higher than in the case of a jackpot in the normal mode. In other words, there are two types of disadvantageous modes (gaming states), a normal mode and a pull-back mode, in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by drawing the first special symbol. The configuration was such that a relatively advantageous pullback mode was set only during the period.

As mentioned above, when the consecutive game mode, which is the most advantageous state for the player, ends, the game does not immediately shift to the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player, and a relatively advantageous pullback mode is set. With this configuration, it was possible to continue playing the game without losing the player's desire to play even when the consecutive game mode ended.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth control example, similarly to the eleventh control example described above, when the most advantageous gaming state for the player ends, the game is immediately ended and the pachinko machine 10 is started. In order to prevent the rate from decreasing, the configuration is such that four types of gaming states are provided. Specifically, a low probability state of special symbols, a normal state (normal mode) in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, a time saving state (continuous mode) in which a low probability state of special symbols, and a high probability state of normal symbols are set. Chang mode), a high probability state of special symbols, a variable state with a high probability state of normal symbols (super continuous Chan mode), a potential state with a high probability state of special symbols, and a low probability state of normal symbols (pullback) The configuration is such that there are four types: mode).

As mentioned above, in the present thirteenth control example, instead of changing to the continuous winning mode in which a low probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols are set, a variable probability state (super consecutive winning state) that is more advantageous to the player is used. mode). This variable probability state (super continuous chance mode) is a state in which a high probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols are set, and the chance of winning the jackpot is about 1/25, which is higher than the low probability state of special symbols. Since the player wins the jackpot at a high rate, the probability of winning a large number of balls increases, resulting in the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol during this variable probability state (during super continuous chance mode), the jackpot type (jackpot D) is designed to win. Specifically, based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 6400, a second special symbol lottery is executed, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot D, which is a jackpot of 16R, is set, and the probability variable state (super continuous state) is set again. Chang mode) is set. In this way, the player wins a jackpot in which the most advantageous gaming state for the player (chosen-chan mode) is set again 100% of the time, so the player is motivated to continue playing. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, similar to the eleventh control example described above, the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small hit. When a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the variable winning device 670 becomes open so that a game ball can enter the V winning hole 670a. When the V-winning port 670a is opened and the game ball flows down the special discharge channel 670e2 provided inside the variable winning device 670 and passes through the V-winning switch 670e3, a jackpot is awarded. It consists of

The jackpot awarded when this game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 is set to differ depending on the gaming state and the small winning type. 2 If you win a small hit in the special symbol lottery and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3, you will be awarded a jackpot A in which the normal state (normal mode) will be set after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 50%. The system is configured such that a 50% ratio is given to the jackpot B in which the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, if you win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the probability change state (super consecutive chance mode) and the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3, the jackpot type awarded will be a jackpot at a rate of 50%. After the game ends, a jackpot B in which the game state changes to a time-saving state (continuous chance mode) is awarded, and at a rate of 50%, after the jackpot game ends, a jackpot D in which the variable probability state (super consecutive chance mode) is set again is awarded. Ru. In this way, in the thirteenth control example as well, if a small hit is won and the game ball passes through the V winning device 670e3, a jackpot is awarded. During the guaranteed variable state (super continuous winning mode), there are cases where the guaranteed variable state (super continuous winning mode), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, is set again after the end of the jackpot game, and cases where the relatively advantageous time-saving state ( Even when the player is in the most advantageous fixed state (in super continuous mode), there is a possibility that the game state may change, so play the game with a sense of tension. It is possible to execute the game and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this 13th control example, if you win a small hit a specified number of times (25 times) during the time saving state (during continuous winning mode) or the variable probability state (super continuous winning mode), the state changes from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state. It is configured so that the gaming state shifts to the current state. That is, when the number of small wins reaches a specified number during the time saving state (continuous winning mode), the gaming state is configured to shift from the time saving state (continuous winning mode) to the normal state (normal mode), while during the probability changing state ( If the number of small hits reaches the specified number (25 times) in super consecutive chance mode), it will shift to a potential state (pullback mode) where a high probability state for special symbols and a low probability state for normal symbols are set. It consists of When the gaming state shifts to the normal state (normal mode), which is a low probability state of normal symbols, or to the potential state (pullback mode), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400. Therefore, it is an efficient gaming method to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 and execute the lottery of the first special symbol. However, since the lottery (discrimination) of the first special symbol is configured so that small wins are not won, the number of balls that can be won (earnable benefits) decreases, resulting in a disadvantageous gaming situation for the player. It ends up.

In addition, the player aims to win a small hit while in a variable probability state, and win a jackpot in which the variable probability state is set again only by drawing a special symbol without intentionally firing a game ball toward the V winning device 670. When playing a game, there is a possibility that the small win will be won a specified number of times (25 times) and the game state will change. Therefore, during the probability change state (super continuous winning mode), if the player wins a small win, he or she stops firing the game ball to prevent the game ball from passing through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. A gaming method in which a game ball is actively fired toward the V winning device 670, the game ball is passed through the V winning switch 670e3, and a jackpot is expected to be awarded in which the variable probability state is set again. can be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the gaming methods in variable probability states, and it is possible to prevent the gaming from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in this 13th control example, similarly to the 11th control example described above, when the gaming state shifts to the time saving state, variable probability state, and potential state, after the state transition, the special symbol lottery is performed within the specified number of times. If the player does not win the jackpot (for example, 100 times), the gaming state is configured to shift to the normal state again.

As described above, in the present thirteenth control example, four types of gaming states are set, and among the gaming states, the variable probability state (super consecutive chance mode) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, in the fixed state (super continuous mode), the state will not shift to the normal state (normal mode), which is the most disadvantageous state for the player, until the special symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 times). Even if a player wins a small hit and passes through the V-winning switch 670e3 of the V-winning device 670 and is awarded a jackpot, the variable probability state is set again, or the time-saving state (continuous) which is relatively advantageous for the player is set. Chang mode) is set. With this configuration, even if the variable probability state ends, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set, so it is possible to prevent the player from immediately stopping the game. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the subsequent explanation of this thirteenth control example, the description of each gaming state will be expressed as "normal mode" for the normal state, "continuous mode" for the time saving state, "super continuous mode" for the variable probability state, and "super continuous mode" for the variable probability state. It is called "pullback mode."

The pachinko machine 10 in this 13th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the 11th control example in terms of configuration in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 has been partially changed, and the audio lamp The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed. The only difference is that the control processing that is executed has been partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example. Further, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh control example or the twelfth control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 13th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the 11th control example in terms of configuration in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 has been partially changed, and the audio lamp The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed. The only difference is that the control processing that is executed has been partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example. Further, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh control example or the twelfth control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 729, a method of shifting the gaming state (mode) in the thirteenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 729, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example has four states (modes) that can be roughly divided. That is, the normal mode shown in YZ1 of FIG. 729 (low probability state of special symbols: low probability state of normal symbols) and the super consecutive mode shown in YZ2 (high probability state of special symbols: high probability state of normal symbols) , the consecutive mode shown in YZ3 (low probability state of special symbols: high probability state of normal symbols) and the pullback mode shown in YZ4 (low probability state of special symbols: high probability state of normal symbols) are provided. ing.

As mentioned above, the normal mode refers to the normal state, which is a low probability state for special symbols and a low probability state for normal symbols.In the normal mode, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols is a long fluctuation (30 seconds). This is a game state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400 because the probability of the normal symbol being a hit is low. Therefore, it is an efficient gaming method to execute the lottery of the first special symbol.

However, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is difficult (5%) to shift to the super consecutive mode, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, so it becomes the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. . In addition, as mentioned above, the super consecutive chance mode shown in YZ2 in Figure 729 shows a variable probability state in which a high probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols are set, and the probability of hitting the jackpot is about 1/25. It is designed to win. If the player wins the jackpot with a probability of about 1/25, he or she will win the jackpot D in which the super consecutive mode is set again with a 100% probability, so this is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

Further, the consecutive chance mode shown in YZ3 in FIG. 729 is a time saving state in which a low probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols are set. This continuous winning mode is a state with a high probability of normal symbols, and the variation time of the normal symbols is also set short (0.1 seconds), so it is a state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400. , the basic gaming method is to execute a lottery of the second special symbol. Due to the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/200 as in the normal mode, but if a jackpot is won, there is a 100% chance that the player will be able to win after the jackpot game ends. A super continuous mode is set that provides the most advantageous condition. In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the player is configured to win a small prize, so the game state is relatively advantageous compared to the normal mode.

The pullback mode indicated by YZ4 in FIG. 729 is a potential state in which a high probability state for special symbols and a low probability state for normal symbols are set. The normal pattern is in a low probability state, and the normal pattern fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds (the game ball firing interval is 0.6 seconds, and the fluctuation time is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400). Because it is set to Although you cannot expect to win a ball (obtain a benefit), since the high probability state of the special symbol is set, there is a probability of 1/25 that you will win the jackpot with the special symbol. Therefore, when compared with the normal state (YZ1 in FIG. 729), it is an advantageous gaming state.

From the normal mode shown in YZ1 in FIG. 729, there is a possibility of transitioning to another gaming state if a special symbol jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 729, if a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery, there is a 50% chance that jackpot A will be won, and after the end of the jackpot game, the normal mode will be set again. be done. On the other hand, if the jackpot B is won at a rate of 45%, after the jackpot game ends, the continuous winning mode shown at YZ3 in FIG. 729 is set. Then, the jackpot C is won at a rate of 5%, and after the jackpot game ends, the super consecutive winning mode indicated by YZ2 in FIG. 729 is set. In this way, the player wins the jackpot A in which the normal mode is set again 50% of the time, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player.

In the super consecutive mode indicated by YZ2 in FIG. 729, the most efficient gaming method is to execute the game with the second special symbol. As shown in YZ2 in Figure 729, in the super consecutive mode, a high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/25, and in the lottery of the second special symbol, the probability of winning is 100%. Won the jackpot D in which the super consecutive mode is set again. In addition, as shown in FIG. 729, when a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V prize (an event in which a game ball passes through the V prize winning switch 670e3) occurs, a jackpot D is awarded at a rate of 50%, After the jackpot game ends, the super consecutive chance mode is set again. In this way, since the super consecutive winning mode is set again with a high probability, it is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game with the goal of shifting the game state to the super-continuous-chan mode, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when a V win occurs, a jackpot B is awarded at a rate of 50%, and after the jackpot game ends, a consecutive winning mode is set. Also, if you win a small hit 25 times in the second special symbol lottery, the game state will shift from the high probability state of normal symbols to the low probability state of normal symbols, so the game will change to the pullback mode shown in YZ4 in FIG. 729. The state changes. Furthermore, when the special symbol lottery reaches a prescribed number of times (100 times), a normal mode shown as YZ1 is set. In this way, even after the game state shifts to the super continuous mode, there is a possibility that the game state shifts to another game state, so it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, as mentioned above, in the super consecutive chance mode, the high probability of special symbols is set, so it is almost impossible for the number of drawings of special symbols to reach the specified number of times without becoming a jackpot. In addition, when the game state changes other than when the number of drawings of special symbols reaches the specified number of times, the continuous winning mode or the pullback mode is configured. By configuring this way, even if the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the Choren Chan mode, ends, a relatively more advantageous gaming state will be set compared to the normal state, so the player can It is possible to prevent the player from immediately stopping the game, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the consecutive game mode shown in YZ3 of FIG. 729, it is an efficient gaming method to execute the game with the second special symbol. When the special symbol jackpot is won, the jackpot D is won at a rate of 100%, and after the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to a super consecutive chance mode. Furthermore, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V prize is generated, a jackpot B is set at a rate of 50%, and after the jackpot game is over, the continuous winning mode is set again. On the other hand, jackpot A is awarded at a rate of 50%, and after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state shifts to the normal mode. Also, similar to the super consecutive mode, if the number of small wins in the second special symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times (25), a low probability state is set from the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the gaming state shifts to normal mode. Furthermore, the gaming state is configured to shift to the normal state even when the number of drawings of special symbols reaches a specified number of times. Since the game state may shift from a relatively advantageous game state to the most disadvantageous game state in this way, the player can play the game with a sense of tension, and the interest in the game increases.

As described above, the pullback mode indicated by YZ4 in FIG. 729 is a gaming state that is entered when the number of small wins reaches the specified number (25 times) in the super consecutive winning mode. In the pullback mode, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry port 6400, and the game is executed so that the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. This is an efficient way to play. Also, since a high probability state of special symbols is set, it is an advantageous gaming state when compared with the normal mode. In this pull-back mode, when the remaining number of probability variations in the super consecutive game mode reaches a specified number of times, the gaming state shifts to the normal mode.

In addition, in this control example, the game state is configured to shift when the number of small wins reaches 25 when the super consecutive winning mode or the consecutive winning mode is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. The predetermined number of times may be set to 25 or more, or the predetermined number of times may be set by lottery when the gaming state is in the super continuous mode or when the gaming state shifts to the continuous mode. With this configuration, it is possible to set the degree of advantage to be different each time even in the same super consecutive winning mode or consecutive winning mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of small hits reaches a specified number, the configuration is configured so that the state of the normal symbol shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the state of the special symbol may shift. Alternatively, it may be determined by lottery when a specified number of small wins is reached. With this configuration, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation that the game state may be shifted to a more advantageous one than the current one, thereby making the player more motivated to participate in the game. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 730(a), when a small hit occurs in the special symbol lottery during the super consecutive chance mode (probability variable state) in the present thirteenth control example, the execution is executed in the third symbol display device 81. The selection effect to be performed will be explained. As mentioned above, in this thirteenth control example, when a game ball passes through the V prize winning switch 670e3 during the small winning period (probability change state or time saving state) and a jackpot is achieved, the game ball is won based on the small winning type won this time. , the game state changes after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, during the super continuous winning mode, there is a small winning type (small winning C) that transitions to the continuous winning mode by passing the V winning switch 670e3, and a small winning type (small winning D) that transitions to the super continuous winning mode by passing the V winning switch 670e3. ) is provided.

In addition, in the continuous winning mode, by passing the V winning switch 670e3, after the end of the jackpot game, there is a small winning type (small winning B) in which the continuous winning mode is set again, and a small winning type (small winning B) in which the gaming state changes to the normal mode. At least a win type (small win A) is provided. In other words, in any mode, if a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small win type is advantageous if the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 and the jackpot is executed; There is also a small win type in which it is more advantageous to complete the small win without passing through the winning switch 670e3. In this selection performance, a performance is performed in which the player is asked to select whether to hit the ball to the right in order to pass the V winning switch 670e3, or to stop firing so that the game ball does not pass through the V winning switch 670e3. .

In addition, as described above, in this control example, if a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the super consecutive chance mode where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, or the consecutive chance mode, the small hit is The number of times is counted, and when the value reaches the specified number of times, the state shifts from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state. That is, the player shifts to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the current gaming state. Therefore, even if you stop firing so that the game ball does not pass the V winning switch 670e3 when you win a small hit, you must select a gaming method while taking into account the remaining number of small wins that will cause the game state to change. Must be.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 730(a), when a small win is won during the normal mode, "3" and "4" indicating the small win are displayed in the display area Ds2 in the upper right part of the display screen. The third symbol of the combination of "1" and "1" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes a display mode in which it is divided into left and right halves, and in the upper center of the display screen, a horizontally elongated approximately rectangular display area HR7 in which the words "Choose!!" are displayed. is formed. A screen dividing line HR10 is drawn at the center of the main display area Dm, and in the following description, the area to the left of the line will be referred to as a left display area Dm50, and the area to the right will be referred to as a right display area Dm51.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 730, in the left display area Dm50 of the display screen, there is formed a horizontally oblong rectangular display area HR8 in which the words "V-avoidance is a super consecutive chance!?" , a sign image YG5 imitating a downward-pointing triangle on which the words "STOP" are displayed is displayed. Then, at the bottom of the left display area Dm50, a sign image YG5 showing the characters "Uneven" is displayed, and the game ball shown in this left area is more effective than the game method shown in the right display area Dm51, which will be described later. The risk is higher if you choose a gaming method that stops firing. (If you win a jackpot, the most advantageous gaming state will be set again 100% of the time, but It is clearly shown to the player that the gaming state may change based on the number of small wins before winning, and there is a possibility that the gaming state may shift to a disadvantageous gaming state.

On the other hand, in the right display area Dm51 of the main display area Dm, there is formed a horizontally long rectangular display area HR9 in which the words "V Get Jackpot!!" are displayed, and below it there is a display area HR9 with the words "Right Hit". An arrow image YG2 imitating a rightward arrow with characters displayed is displayed. Then, at the right end of the right display area Dm51, a sign image YG4 showing the characters "stable" is displayed, and rather than selecting the gaming method shown in the left area Dm mentioned above, This indicates that there is less risk in the case where a right-handed game is selected (a jackpot is more likely to be awarded, but there is also a possibility that a jackpot type that will shift to a disadvantageous gaming state will be awarded). Furthermore, the characters "20 remaining" are displayed in the display area Ds3 of the right display area Dm51, indicating the remaining number of small wins until the game state is changed. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to judge how many small wins are left, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Although the display of the number of small wins is configured to show the remaining number of small wins, it may be configured to display the cumulative number of small wins. Furthermore, in addition to displaying the number of times, it is also possible to display effects that show the remaining time (for example, an hourglass is decreasing), and an operation means that allows the player to operate various display modes. It may also be configured such that the player can select the display mode. By configuring in this way, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

These display contents allow the player to win the jackpot only by drawing a special symbol by stopping the firing of the game ball to prevent the game ball from passing through the V winning switch 670e3 when winning a small hit. By aiming for , there is a possibility that the game will go back to super consecutive winning mode, but if you cannot win the jackpot within the remaining number of small wins, the gaming state may shift to a disadvantageous state. It can be shown to the person. Also, if you hit the right hand and win a V prize, the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than if you aim for the jackpot only by drawing special symbols, and you can play the game with peace of mind, but the gaming state will shift to a disadvantageous state. It is possible to make the player understand that there is a possibility that the player may lose the game.

This allows the player to decide whether it is better to hit to the right with the aim of winning a V prize, or whether it is better to stop firing the game ball in order to avoid a V prize, and to follow the decision. Since the game can be played using a different game method, the interest in the game can be increased every time a small win is achieved.

In addition, in this 13th control example, when a V winning is avoided during the super consecutive winning mode, the percentage of determining the jackpot type that will switch to the super consecutive winning mode again is 100%, whereas a V winning occurs. By doing so, the percentage of determining the small win type (small win D) that shifts to super continuous mode after a jackpot is 50%, and the small win type that shifts to continuous mode after a jackpot that is awarded when a V win occurs is 50%. The rate at which the winning type (small win C) is determined is 50%. Therefore, if you avoid the V-winning and play a game with the aim of winning the jackpot only by drawing special symbols, there is a high possibility that the super consecutive chance mode will be set again, but if you do not win the jackpot with the special symbol. There is also a risk that the number of small winnings will reach the specified number of times before winning, and the gaming state will shift to the above-mentioned pullback mode.

On the other hand, if you play the game with the aim of winning a V prize, you will be given a jackpot type that will set you back to the consecutive chance mode at a 50% rate due to the winning of the V prize. There is also a risk of transitioning to . Therefore, by executing the selection effect shown in FIG. 730(a), it is possible to make the player more seriously decide whether to avoid winning the V prize or aiming for the V prize.

Next, referring to FIG. 730(b), in the super continuous winning mode (probability variable state) in the thirteenth control example, the number of remaining small winnings (remaining value up to the specified number of small winnings at which the gaming state changes) is small. The selection effect that is executed on the third symbol display device 81 when this happens will be explained. As mentioned above, in the thirteenth control example, in the super consecutive winning mode or the consecutive winning mode, if the number of small wins in the special symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times without winning the jackpot, the normal symbol The gaming state shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state. The example in FIG. 730(b) is an example of a display mode showing that the number of small wins is small until it reaches the specified number of times.

As shown in FIG. 730(b), in the display area Ds3 shown at the bottom of the right display area Dm51 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "5 remaining" and a small number of winnings remaining are displayed. The display contents to indicate the information are displayed in a glowing manner. With this configuration, the remaining number of games is displayed prominently, making it easier for the player to understand the game situation. Note that the display mode is not limited to this, and the number of small wins may be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition, it is configured to change the display mode depending on the value, such as displaying a light-emitting light when the number of small hits is within a certain range, and blinking when it is within a different range. You may do so. By configuring in this way, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the screen dividing line HR10, which was displayed at the center of the screen, is moved to the left area and displayed as the number of winnings remaining decreases. Then, the characters "Choose!!" displayed in the display area HR7 of the main display area Dm are displayed with a variable position on the left side than when there are many remaining winnings, and the screen dividing line HR10 The left display area Dm50 and the right display area Dm51, which were evenly divided at the center of the screen, are displayed variably by moving the screen dividing line HR10 to the left area of the screen. Specifically, by moving the screen dividing line HR10 to the left area of the screen, the left display area Dm50 becomes narrower than when the number of winnings remaining is large (see FIG. 730(a)). The right display area Dm51 is displayed in a variable manner, and as the screen dividing line HR10 moves, the right display area Dm51 is displayed so as to become wider than when the number of winnings remaining is large.

In this control example, the continuous winning mode, which is set after the end of the jackpot game awarded by winning a V prize, is better than the pull-back mode, which is entered when the number of small wins reaches the specified number during the super consecutive winning mode. Since the special symbol lottery can be executed efficiently, if you win a small hit and get the number of prize balls, and if you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, 100% of the time, after the jackpot game is over, Since the super consecutive chance mode, which is the most advantageous state for the player, is set, the game state is advantageous for the player. Therefore, if the specified number of small wins is likely to be reached, it is better to avoid the V-win and play the game while hoping to win the jackpot only by drawing special symbols. In this game, it is more advantageous for the player to actively play the right-handed game and aim for a V prize, thereby aiming for the super consecutive winning mode to be set again.

Therefore, the number of winnings remaining decreases, and the screen dividing line HR10 is variably displayed in the left area, so that the right display area Dm51 that guides the game method aiming for a V prize is displayed widely, and the game aiming for a V prize is displayed. This makes it possible to make the method more prominent. Note that effects such as the screen dividing line HR10 moving and the wider display area lighting up may also be performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more clearly guide the player to an appropriate gaming method.

That is, in the selection performance of this control example, by varying the display mode based on the gaming state and the value of the number of winnings remaining, it is possible to prompt the player to select a gaming method that is advantageous to the player. Note that in this control example, the screen is configured to be divided horizontally by the screen dividing line HR10, but the screen is not limited to this, and may be divided vertically. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a character or the like is displayed and the character guides the game method. With this configuration, it is possible to perform various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In addition, in this control example, the screen dividing line HR10 is configured to be variably displayed on the left side of the screen, but if a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, the It may be configured to perform effects such as pulling the screen dividing line HR10 back to the right side area of the screen when the vehicle is stopped. With this configuration, the player can visually determine that he or she has won a jackpot in a game other than the V-winning game, which can give him great pleasure. In addition, if it is determined that there is a jackpot result in the special symbol lottery to be executed in the future based on the pre-reading result of the special symbol, the jackpot will be won in the special symbol lottery from the fluctuation before the jackpot fluctuation. An effect may be executed in which the guide display for the desired gaming method is displayed in a variable manner so that the display gradually becomes wider. By varying the guidance display mode over a plurality of variable periods in this way, it is possible to give the player an exciting feeling that something is happening, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the above example, when the super consecutive chance mode is set as the gaming state, the selection effect is executed, but in the case of the time saving state, the right hit shown in FIG. 730(b) is executed. It may be configured to execute a selection effect that strongly prompts the user. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly convey to the player the appropriate gaming method, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

<Electrical configuration in 13th control example>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 731(a). FIG. 731(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 731(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 690(a)) by replacing the first random number table 202a with the first random number table 202a. 1 random number 13 table 202la, 1st win type selection 13 table 202lb instead of 1st win type selection table 202b, 13 variable pattern selection table 202ld instead of variable pattern selection table 202d, small win type selection table 202da The difference is that a small winning type selection 13 table 202le and a time saving number selection table 202db are replaced with a probability variable/time saving number selection table 202lf, and a regular pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202lg is provided instead of a regular pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc. The rest of the configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh control example described above (see FIG. 690(a)), so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the first winning random number 13 table 202la in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 731(b). FIG. 731(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table 202la in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 731(b), the first winning random number table 202la in the thirteenth control example includes special symbols common to both the special symbol types, the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When a low probability state is set, two random numbers (counter values) of "0 and 1" are defined as determination values for determining a jackpot. In addition, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, "11 to 35" is defined as the range of the random number value (first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 731(c), the small hit random number table 202lh in the thirteenth control example will be explained. FIG. 731(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit random number table 202lh in this 13th control example. As shown in FIG. 731(c), in the small hit random number table 202lh in the thirteenth control example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the random number that results in a small win is defined in common to all gaming states. Not yet. That is, in the lottery using the first special symbol, there is no chance of winning a small hit. On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, "41 to 399" is defined as the range of random numbers that are considered small wins in common to all gaming states.

In this way, in this thirteenth control example, the small winning can be won only in the second special symbol lottery. This makes it possible to create a state in which it is easier to pass the V winning switch 670e3 in the super consecutive winning mode or consecutive winning mode in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed, thereby making it easier to hit the jackpot again. Therefore, it is possible to give great pleasure to the players.

Next, with reference to FIG. 732(a), the first winning type selection 13 table lb in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 732(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning type selection 13 table lb in this 13th control example. As shown in FIG. 732(a), the first winning type selection 13 table lb in this 13th control example has three types of jackpots A, B, and C as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. , one type of jackpot D is provided as the jackpot type of the second special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, similarly to the seventh control example described above, when a game ball passes through the variable winning switch 650e3 provided in the variable winning device 650 during a jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, A variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols) is set.

As shown in FIG. 732(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49" is associated with "Jackpot A" and defined. . This "jackpot A" has 5 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state again (does not pass through the probability change prize switch 650e3), regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. . Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that will be "Jackpot A", so if the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "Jackpot A" will be determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

In addition, for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 94", and "Jackpot B" is defined in association with it). This "jackpot B" has 5 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which a time-saving state (does not pass through the probability change prize switch 650e3) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 45 counter values that become "Jackpot B", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot B" is determined. The percentage of people who do this is 45% (45/100).

Furthermore, for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "95 to 99", and "Jackpot C" is defined in association with it). This "jackpot C" has 5 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which a variable probability state (passing the variable probability winning switch 650e3) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 5 counter values that become "Jackpot C", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot C" is determined. The proportion of these cases is 5% (5/100).

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "jackpot D" is defined in association with all possible values of the first winning type counter C2. This "jackpot D" has 16 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game (the ball enters the variable probability winning switch 650e3) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning.

In this way, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, after the jackpot game ends, you can enter the consecutive chance mode where you can efficiently execute the special symbol 2 game at a rate of 50%, or the jackpot that shifts to the super consecutive chance mode. is set. In the lottery of the second special symbol, the super consecutive chance mode is set 100% of the time after the end of the jackpot game. The player first plays a game with the goal of winning a jackpot that will change the gaming state to a consecutive winning mode or a super consecutive winning mode. Once you have transitioned to continuous mode or super continuous mode, you can efficiently draw the second special symbol, so you can continue playing at least during continuous mode or super continuous mode. Since the player can be made to think that it is better to do so, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As described above, in the thirteenth control example, when the super consecutive winning mode ends, the game state is relatively advantageous to the player, except for the transition of the game state due to the special lottery drawing reaching the specified number of times. The game state is configured to shift to a consecutive game mode or a pull-back mode. This makes it possible to make the player want to continue playing the game even after the super consecutive winning mode ends, at least until the consecutive winning mode or the pullback mode ends. In other words, a player who has won a large amount of prize balls (benefits) by repeatedly hitting the jackpot and playing the super consecutive mode in the super consecutive winning mode is satisfied with the game and starts playing the game immediately after the last jackpot in the super consecutive winning mode. It is possible to prevent people from quitting their jobs. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in the continuous chance mode or the super continuous chance mode, the configuration can be such that the super continuous chance mode is set after the jackpot at a rate of 100%. As a result, for example, if the first special symbol reserved ball remains and the player enters continuous mode or super consecutive mode and wins a jackpot in the special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol reserved ball, You can definitely continue the super continuous mode. In other words, an absurd situation occurs in which after shifting to continuous mode or super continuous mode, the first special symbol is won in the lottery and the mode immediately shifts to normal mode or continuous mode (small win). Since it is possible to prevent the super consecutive winning mode from ending without winning even once, it is possible to increase the player's motivation for playing in the super consecutive winning mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 732(b), details of the probability change/time saving number selection table 202lf will be described. FIG. 732(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability change/time reduction number selection table 202lf in the thirteenth control example. This probability variation/time saving number selection table 202lf is referred to when the jackpot ends (see S1371 in FIG. 741), and selects the probability variation number and time saving number after the jackpot ends (the number of drawings for special symbols until the transition to the normal mode) as the jackpot type. This is a data table in which data to be set in the time saving medium counter 203da or the probability change counter 203la according to the time saving counter 203da is defined.

As shown in FIG. 732(b), when the jackpot A is won, it is specified that the time saving medium counter 203da and probability variation counter 203la are set to 0 after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the jackpot B is won, a time saving state is set, so the value of the time saving medium counter 203da is set to 100 and the value of the probability variable counter 203la is set to 0. When jackpot C or jackpot D is won, a variable probability state is set, so the value of the time saving medium counter 203da and the value of the probability variable counter 203la are both set to 100.

In addition, in this control example, when the probability variation number and the time saving number are set, 100 is set as the specified number, but the number is not limited to this, and it may be 100 or less, or 100. It may be more than that. Further, after the end of the jackpot game, the value to be set may be determined by lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to irregularly give a fixed variable number of times or a time-saving number of times, and the player can play the game with a feeling of excitement, which improves the interest of the game. I can do it.

Next, details of the small hit type selection 13 table 202le in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 733(a). FIG. 733(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 13 table 202le. This small winning type selection 13 table 202le is a data table that is referred to when a small winning occurs in a special symbol lottery, and defines a judgment value for determining the small winning type, and the gaming state is normal. Or, a normal/time-saving small winning type selection table 202le1 that is referred to when the game is in the time-saving state and a variable/potential small winning type selection table 202le2 that is referenced when the gaming state is in the variable-probability state are defined. There is.

First, with reference to FIG. 733(b), the normal/time-saving small win type selection table 202le1 will be described. The normal/time-saving small winning type selection table 202le1 is a table that is referred to when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode or the consecutive chance mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 733(b), for the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 49", "small win A" is defined in association with the small win type. ing. This "small win A" is a small win type in which a "big win A" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. As mentioned above, the number of rounds for jackpot A is 5 rounds, and if you win during the normal mode, the normal mode will be set again after the jackpot ends (does not pass the probability change switch), and the value of the small winning type counter C5 will be changed. Out of the 100 counter values obtained, there are 50 counter values that result in a "small win A", so when a small win occurs in a special symbol lottery, the percentage of "small win A" being determined is 50% (50%). /100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 733(b), for the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "50 to 99", "small win B" is defined as a small win type in association with the value range of "50 to 99". This "small win B" is a small win type in which a "big win B" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds and shifts to continuous winning mode after the jackpot ends. Out of the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 50 counter values that will be "small win B", so if a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, "small win B" will be The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

Next, with reference to FIG. 733(c), the small win type selection table 202le2 for probable variable/potential probability will be explained. The small win type selection table 202le2 for probability variable/potential probability is a table that is referred to when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol when the gaming state is in the super consecutive mode or the pullback mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 733(c), for the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 49", "small win C" is defined in association with the small win type. ing. This "small win C" is a small win type in which a "big win B" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5, and a consecutive game mode is set after the jackpot game ends. Among the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 50 counter values that become "small win C", so when a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, "small win C" will be The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 733(c), for the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "50 to 99", "small win D" is defined in association with the small win type. This "small win D" is a small win type in which a "big win D" is awarded when the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, "Jackpot D" has 16 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the super consecutive winning mode is set after the jackpot ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Among the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 50 counter values that result in a "small win D", so when a small win occurs in the lottery of a special symbol, a "small win D" occurs. The determined ratio is 50% (50/100).

In this way, in this 13th control example, four small winning types are provided, and depending on the small winning type, the type of jackpot that is executed (started) when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed is different. It is configured. In the normal mode or consecutive chance mode, when the small win A or B is won and the game ball passes the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small win game, the jackpot A or the jackpot B starts. Then, the normal mode or consecutive chance mode is set again as the gaming state (mode) after the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the super consecutive winning mode or the pullback mode, a small win C or a small win D is won, and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small win game, resulting in a jackpot B or a jackpot. D is started and a continuous winning mode or a super continuous winning mode is set as the gaming state (mode) after the jackpot ends. In this way, if a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol remaining during the super consecutive mode or when the mode is shifted to the pullback mode, the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3. After the awarded jackpot ends, the gaming state shifts to an advantageous super consecutive winning mode or a relatively advantageous consecutive winning mode, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the super continuous winning mode changes due to a V winning, the relatively advantageous continuous winning mode is at least set, so it is possible to prevent the player from immediately stopping the game after the state changes. , the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202ld in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 734. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 587) in the seventh control example, this variation pattern selection table 202ld is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol. This is the data table that will be used.

FIG. 734(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 734(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the thirteenth control example is different from the structure of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 692(a)) in the special figure 2 In place of the winning table 202d12, a special figure 2 winning table 202ld2 is provided, and in place of the special drawing 2 winning table 202d13, a special drawing 2 missing (normal) table 202ld3 is provided. The difference is that a table 202ld4 for special drawings 2 winnings (probable variation, time saving, potential probability) is provided in place of the special drawing 2 missing table 202d14. Since the other points are the same as the eleventh control example, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

The special figure 2 winning table 202ld2 is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern (variation time) when a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 734(b), the special figure 2 winning table 202ld2 shows the selected variation pattern (variation time) for each mode (gaming state) at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed. stipulated. As shown in FIG. 734(b), when a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode, a super long winning variation with a variation time of 180 seconds is determined as the variation pattern, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. be done. On the other hand, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variable state, time saving state, and potential probability state, the variation pattern is a winning middle variation with a variation time of 10 seconds, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is determined. In this way, in the normal state where it is necessary to advance the game by drawing the first special symbol, if a jackpot is achieved in the drawing of the second special symbol, by setting an extremely long fluctuation time, it is possible to The gaming efficiency can be reduced when the second special symbol is drawn irregularly or illegally in the mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being drawn irregularly or fraudulently.

In addition, the table 202d13 for special symbol 2 loss (normal/return) is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation time) when the second special symbol is a loss (including a small hit) in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state. This is the data table that will be used. As shown in FIG. 734(c), the table 202ld3 for special drawing 2 failure (normal) only defines a deviation extremely long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. has been done. In this way, in the normal state where it is necessary to proceed with the game by drawing the first special symbol, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a loss (or a small hit), an extremely long fluctuation time is set. By doing so, it is possible to further reduce the gaming efficiency when the second special symbol is drawn irregularly or illegally in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being drawn irregularly or fraudulently.

In addition, the table 202ld4 for special symbol 2 winnings (probability variable, time saving, potential probability) shows a variation pattern when the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a loss (or a small hit) in the probability variation state, time saving state, and potential probability state. This is a data table that is referenced to determine (variation time). As shown in FIG. 734(d), the table 202ld4 for special drawing 2 failure (probable variation, time saving, potential probability) defines a fluctuation pattern that can be determined for each lottery result. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 734(d), when the second special symbol misses, for all possible values of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time is 10 seconds. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the probability variable state, time saving state, and potential probability state, if the second special symbol is out of the lottery, a 10 second variation time is always set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 734(d), for the small hit of the second special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 value is in the range of "0 to 174" and the variation time is 5 seconds. Variations are defined in association with each other, and a small hit middle variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with a range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "175 to 198". Due to these stipulations, in the variable probability state, time saving state, and potential state, only a relatively short variation time of 5 seconds or 10 seconds is set when the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to improve gaming efficiency in the state, time saving state, and potential state. Therefore, since the superiority of the variable probability state and the time saving state can be further enhanced, it is possible to further increase the player's joy when the state shifts to the variable probability state and the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game in the variable probability state and time saving state.

Furthermore, even in the potential state (pullback mode), if the second special symbol is out of the lottery, a 10 second variation time is always set and the second special symbol is quickly drawn. By configuring in this way, even if the second special symbol is reserved and the state shifts from the variable probability state (super consecutive chance mode) to the potential state (pullback mode), the lottery of the second special symbol can be quickly drawn. can be executed. Therefore, even if the player shifts to a potential state, he or she can determine the lottery results of the remaining second special symbols in a short period of time, and even if the player loses, he or she can quickly determine the lottery results of the second special symbol. Since it is possible to switch to a gaming method in which one special symbol is drawn, an efficient game can be provided.

Next, details of the normal figure variation pattern selection 13 table 202lg will be described with reference to FIG. 735(a). This ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern selection 13 table 202lg is a data table that is referred to in order to set the fluctuation time of ordinary symbols when a lottery of ordinary symbols is executed, and as shown in FIG. 735(a), A gaming state (mode) at the time when the normal symbol lottery is executed and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern (variation time) are defined in association with each other.

As shown in FIG. 735(a), a long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the normal state (normal state) of the normal symbol as a variation pattern (FIG. 735(a) 202lg1). On the other hand, short fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is defined in association with the time saving state (probability variable state/time saving state) of the normal symbol (see 202lg2 in Fig. 735(a)). , a short fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is defined in association with the normal state B (potential state) of the normal symbol (see 202lg3 in FIG. 735(a)).

For this reason, when a normal symbol lottery is executed in the normal state (normal mode), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely long compared to the time saving state (super continuous mode, continuous mode), so in normal mode When playing a game by hitting to the right and aiming at the through gate 67 and the second ball entry opening 6400, the gaming efficiency can be extremely deteriorated. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed in the normal mode. In addition, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to 0.1 seconds in the time saving state A (probable variable state, time saving state), if the normal symbol hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 will directly move to the The configuration can be such that the ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 easily. Therefore, during the super continuous mode or the continuous mode, simply continue hitting the game ball to the right with the maximum firing intensity and the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval), and the left flow path R2 (see Fig. 685) The game balls that have been sorted can be allowed to enter the second ball entrance 6400 with a high probability (1/1.2, which is the probability of a normal symbol winning).

On the other hand, by setting the variation time of the normal symbol to 0.5 seconds in the pullback mode (potential state), even if the normal symbol is won in the lottery, the game ball (through Game balls that have passed through the gate 67) and game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 and are then fired into the second ball entrance guidance area and are distributed to the right channel R1 (see Figure 685). It can be configured such that it is impossible (difficult) for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400. That is, by setting the variable time of 0.5 seconds, in the case of a normal symbol winning, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 passes through the second ball entry port 6400 (i.e., After 0.2 seconds, which is the flow period of the flow path from the through gate 67 to the second ball entry port 6400, has elapsed, the electric accessory 6400 is opened. In addition, since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is 0.2 seconds, after one game ball passes through the through gate 67, other game balls must not reach it within 0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds. It becomes impossible for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400. However, even if the game balls continue to be fired into the second ball entrance guidance area at the shortest firing interval, the game balls following the game ball that passed through the through gate 67 will be distributed to the right channel R1 and Since it takes about 0.8 seconds for the ball to reach the ball entry port 6400, the ball enters the second ball entry port 6400 after the opening period has elapsed. Therefore, even if you hit the game ball right at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pullback mode, it will be impossible (difficult) for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and This is an extremely disadvantageous situation that only reduces the number of balls you have. Therefore, in the pull-back mode, it is possible for the player to perform a gaming method in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 by hitting to the left to proceed with the game (drawing of special symbols is performed). Thereby, when shifting from the super consecutive winning mode to the pull-back mode, it is possible to prevent the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from being newly increased, to prevent fraud, and to execute a proper gaming method.

Next, with reference to FIG. 735(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 735(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 735(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 13th control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 11th control example (see FIG. 693(b)), with a variable probability counter 203la and a small hit count counter. 203lb and a pullback flag 203lc are added.

The probability variation counter 203la is a counter for counting the number of drawings of the remaining special symbols until the high probability state of the special symbols ends. If the value of this variable probability counter 203la is 1 or more, it means that the special symbol is in a high probability state (either super consecutive mode or pullback mode), and if the value of the variable probability counter 203la is 0, the special symbol is This means that it is in a low probability state (either normal mode or continuous mode). The initial value of this probability variation counter 203la is set to 0, and when the jackpot ends, the probability variation number specified in the probability variation/time saving number selection table 202lf (see FIG. 732(b)) is set (S1372 in FIG. 741). reference). Moreover, the value of this probability change counter 203la is updated by being subtracted by 1 in the game state update process (see FIG. 737) that is executed at the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols (see S2482 in FIG. 737). When a special symbol lottery is executed, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state based on the value of this probability variation counter 203la, and the first winning random number table for high probability cases (see FIG. 731(b)) ) to draw special designs.

The small winning number counter 203lb is a counter for counting the number of times small winnings are won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the super consecutive winning mode or the consecutive winning mode. In this control example, as described above, when the number of small wins reaches 25 during the super consecutive winning mode or the consecutive winning mode, the state shifts from the high probability state of normal symbols to the low probability state of normal symbols, The determination is made based on the value set in this small win counter 203lb.

The small winning number counter 203lb is incremented by 1 when a small winning is won and the small winning starting process (see FIG. 738) is executed when the special symbol stops changing (see S2496 in FIG. 738). Then, when the value becomes 25, the value of the time saving medium counter 203da is set to 0 (see S2502 in FIG. 743) in the pullback transition process (see FIG. 743), and the gaming state has a low probability of normal symbols. state. In addition, the value of this small winning number counter 203lb is determined by the value of the game ball passing through the V winning switch 670e3 during the small winning game when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and the jackpot game ends (see S1326 in FIG. 741). However, when the jackpot starts (see S1691 in FIG. 742), when the value of the small win counter 203lb becomes 25 (see S2503 in FIG. 743), the value is reset.

The pullback flag 203lc indicates that the number of small wins won during the super consecutive winning mode or consecutive winning mode has reached the specified number of times (25 times), and the gaming state has transitioned from a high probability state with normal symbols to a low probability state. This is a flag to indicate. This pullback flag 203lc is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 203lb becomes 25 in the pullback transition process (see FIG. 743) (see S2504 in FIG. 743), and this pullback flag 203lc is It is referenced in the small hit start process (see FIG. 738) (see S1704 in FIG. 738), and if it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is set to ON (see S2495: Yes in FIG. 738), the number of small wins The configuration is such that the value of the counter 203lb is not added. By configuring in this way, even after the gaming state shifts from the super consecutive winning mode or the consecutive winning mode, the process of adding up the number of small wins is not executed, so that the processing load can be reduced. Then, in the special symbol lottery, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is started, it is set to OFF (see S1193 in FIG. 741), and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the small win game. However, it is also set to OFF when a jackpot is awarded (see S1693 in FIG. 742).

<About the control process of the main controller in the 13th control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 736 to 743. Each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the 13th control example is different from the special symbol fluctuation Special symbol variation processing 13 (see Fig. 736) is executed instead of the processing (see Fig. 698), game state update processing (see Fig. 737), and small hit start processing (see Fig. 701) instead of the time saving number update processing (see Fig. 700). ) instead of small hit start process 13 (see Figure 738), start-up process 13 (see Figure 739) instead of start-up process 5 (see 703), jackpot control process instead of jackpot control process 5 (see Figure 704) Process 13 (see FIG. 740), jackpot end process 13 (see FIG. 741) in place of jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 705), and small win control process (see FIG. 742) in place of small win control process 5 (see FIG. 706). ). It is also different in that a pullback transition process (see FIG. 743) is newly executed. Since other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 736, the special symbol variation process 13 (S191 in FIG. 736) executed by the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 736 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 13 (S191). This special symbol variation process 13 (S191) is a game state update process (S292) in place of the time saving number update process (S264) in contrast to the special symbol variation process 5 (S142 in FIG. 698) of the eleventh control example described above. , is different in that the small hit start process 13 (S293) is executed instead of the small hit start process (S266). Another difference is that when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot, a process is added to reset the values of the variable probability counter 203la and the small win counter 203lb. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 13 (S191), if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S218: No), a game state update process is executed (S292). Details of the gaming state update process (S292) will be described later with reference to FIG. 737. Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S265). If it is determined that it is a small win (S265: Yes), the small win start process 13 is executed (S293), the process of S221 described above is executed, and this process ends. Details of the small winning start process 13 (S293) will be described later with reference to FIG. 738. On the other hand, in the process of S265, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S265: No), the process of S293 is skipped and the process proceeds to S221.

On the other hand, in the process of S218, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot (S218: Yes), the above-mentioned process of S262 is executed, and then the time saving medium counter 203da and the variable probability counter 203la are used for a small win. The number counter 203lb and mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S291). Then, the processes of S220 to S221 described above are executed, and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 737, the game state update process (S292), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 13 (S191 in FIG. 736) executed by the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 737 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gaming state update process (S292). This game state update process (S292) executes a process to update the values of the probability change counter 203la and the time saving counter 203da when a state (mode) other than the normal mode is set as the game state (mode). do.

In the game state update process (S292), first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203la is greater than 0 (S2481). If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203la is greater than 0 (S2481: Yes), the value of the variable variable counter 203la is subtracted by 1 (S2482), and a command indicating the value of the variable variable counter 203la is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. The settings are made (S2483), and the process moves to S2484. On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203la is not a value larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2481: No), there is no need to subtract the value of the variable probability counter 203la. , skips the processing in S2482 to S2483 and moves to the processing in S2484.

In the process of S2484, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203da is greater than 0 (S2484). If it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203da is greater than 0 (S2484: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203da is subtracted by 1 (S2485), and the remaining time reduction count indicates the subtracted value of the working time saving medium counter 203da. A command is set (S2486), and the process moves to S2487. On the other hand, in the process of S2484, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203da is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2484: No), the processes of S2485 to S2486 are skipped, and the process of S2487 is Move to processing.

In the process of S2487, when the value of the variable probability counter 203la or the time saving medium counter 203da is subtracted in the processing of S2481 to S2486, it is determined whether the values of the variable probability counter 203la and the time saving medium counter 203da after the subtraction are both 0. (S2487). That is, it is determined whether it is the timing to shift the gaming state to the normal mode (normal state). If it is determined that the values of the variable probability counter 203la and the time saving medium counter 203da after the subtraction are both not 0 (S2487: No), this process is ended as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the values of the variable probability counter 203la and the time saving medium counter 203da after the subtraction are both 0 (S2487: Yes), a status command indicating transition to normal mode is set (S2488), A status command indicating normal mode is set in the mode type storage area 203dc (S2489), and it is determined whether the pullback flag 203lc is on (S2490). That is, it is determined whether the gaming state before the value of the variable probability counter 203la or the time saving medium counter 203da was subtracted was the pullback mode (potential state). If it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is on (S2490: Yes), the gaming state shifts to the normal state, so the pullback flag 203lc is set to off (S2491), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2490, if it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is not on (S2490: No), the process of S2491 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 738, regarding the small hit start process 13 (S293) which is one process of the special symbol variation process 13 (S191 in FIG. 736) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example. explain. FIG. 738 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit start process 13 (S293). This small win start process 13 (S293) is different from the small win start process 5 (S266 in FIG. 701) of the eleventh control example described above in that a process of adding the value of the small win number counter 203lb is added. do. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit start process 13 (S293), first, the processes of S2401 to S2403 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether the pullback flag 203lc is on (S2495). If it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is off (S2495: No), since the gaming state is the continuous winning mode or the continuous winning mode, the value of the small win counter 203lb is incremented by 1 (S2496), and the main processing is performed. end. On the other hand, in the process of S2495, if it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is on (S2495: Yes), it is the pullback mode, so this process is directly ended.

In this way, the configuration is such that the value of the small win counter 203lb is not added during the pullback mode. With this configuration, after the pullback mode is set, the number of small wins will not reach 25 again, so during the pullback mode, the process of adding up the value of the small win counter can be skipped. Processing load can be reduced.

Next, startup processing 13 executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 739. FIG. 739 is a flowchart showing the contents of startup processing 13. The start-up process 13 in the present thirteenth control example is different from the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 703) in the eleventh control example described above, when there is a power outage and the process of reading out the values of various counters is executed. The difference is that a process is added to read out the values of the variable probability counter 203la and the small hit count counter 203lb. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In start-up processing 13 (FIG. 739), the above-mentioned processing of S901 to S910 is executed, and then the value of the time saving medium counter 203da, the value of the probability change counter 203la, the value of the small hit number counter 203lb, and the mode type storage area 203dc Data reading is executed (S991). Then, the processes of S912 to S913 described above are executed, and the present process ends.

In startup processing 13 (FIG. 739), by reading the values of the small winning number counter 203lb and the fixed variable number counter, even if there is a sudden power outage such as a power outage, it is possible to return to the state before the power outage. Since similar game states can be set, transparent games can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 740, the jackpot control process 13 (S1091) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 740 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control processing 13 (S1091). This jackpot control process 13 (S1091) is different from the jackpot control process 5 (S1031 in FIG. 704) of the eleventh control example described above, and includes a process for determining whether a jackpot has been won during the pullback mode and a jackpot ending process 13 ( The difference is that S1193) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot control process 13 (S1091), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the jackpot (S1101). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot (S1101: Yes), the processing of S1102 to S1103 described above is executed, and then it is determined whether the pullback flag 203lc is on (S1191). That is, it is determined whether the jackpot is won during the pullback mode. Then, if it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is on (S1191: Yes), the pullback flag 203lc is set to off, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1191, if it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is not on (that is, it is off) (S1191: No), the process of S1192 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Then, the processes of S1104 to S1107 described above are executed, and if it is determined in the process of S1107 that it is not the start timing of the ending period of the jackpot (S1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the jackpot ( S1109). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the jackpot (S1109: Yes), jackpot end processing 13 (S1193) is executed, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the jackpot (S1109: No), this process is ended as is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 741, the jackpot end process 13 (S1193), which is one process of the jackpot control process 13 (S1091) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 741 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end processing 13 (S1193). This jackpot ending process 13 (S1193) is a process of setting a value corresponding to the probability variable counter 203la based on the winning jackpot type, in contrast to the jackpot ending process 5 (S1145 in FIG. 705) of the eleventh control example described above. The difference is that a process of resetting the value of the small win counter 203lb before the transition of the gaming state is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot end processing 13 (S1193), first, reading of the probability change/time saving number selection table 202lf is executed (S1371). Then, based on the jackpot type won this time, the corresponding values defined in the probability variation/time saving number selection table 202lf are set in the probability variation counter 203la and the time saving medium counter 203da (S1372). Then, the value of the small win counter 203lb is reset (S1373), the processes of S1324 to S1326 described above are executed, and the present process ends.

In this way, by configuring the value of the small win counter 203lb to be reset before the jackpot game ends and the game state changes, problems such as the number of small wins before winning the jackpot are added. can be prevented.

Next, with reference to FIG. 742, the small hit control process 13 (S1092) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 742 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 13 (S1092). This small win control process 13 (S1092) is different from the small win control process 5 (S1031 in FIG. 706) of the above-mentioned 11th control example to turn off the pullback flag 203lc when there is a V win during the pullback mode. The difference is that it adds processing to move to a destination and pullback migration processing. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the small win control process 13 (S1092), if it is determined in the process of S1607 that it is the start timing of the ending period of the small win (S1609: Yes), the small win medium flag 203s is set to OFF (S1610). Next, it is determined whether the V passing flag 203dd is on (S1626). If it is determined that the V passage flag 203dd is not on (S1626: No), the pullback transition process (S1694) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the pullback transition process (S1694) will be described later with reference to FIG. 743, but a process for determining whether to transition to the pullback mode or normal mode is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1626, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203dd is on (S1626: Yes), the data in the mode type storage area 203dc is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S1627). Then, the value of the time saving medium counter 203da, the probability change counter 203la, the small hit count counter, and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S1691).

Next, the processes of S1629 to S1630 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether the pullback flag 203lc is on (S1692). If it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is on (S1692: Yes), the pullback flag 203lc is set to off (S1693), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pullback flag 203lc is not on (S1692: No), this process is immediately ended.

Next, the pullback transition process (S1964) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 743. FIG. 743 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pullback transition process (S1964). In this pullback transition process (S1964), a process of transitioning the gaming state is executed based on the value of the small hit number counter 203lb.

In the pullback transition process (S1964), first, it is determined whether the value of the small hit number counter 203lb is 25 (S2501). That is, it is determined whether the number of small wins in the super consecutive winning mode or the consecutive winning mode is 25. If it is determined that the value of the small win counter 20lb is not 25 (S2501: No), it is not the timing to change the gaming state, and the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that the value of the small win counter 203lb is 25 (S2501: No), it is the timing to shift the gaming state from the high probability state of normal symbols to the low probability state. Therefore, the value of the time saving medium counter 203da is set to 0 (S2502), and the value of the small winning number counter 203lb is set to 0 (S2503). Then, the pullback flag 203lc is set to on (S2504).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203la is greater than 0 (S2505). If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203la is larger than 0 (S2505: Yes), the gaming state is a state in which the super consecutive game mode is set, and the time saving medium counter 203lb is set to 0 in the process of S2502. Since it is set to , the gaming state shifts to the pullback mode (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). In the process of S2506, a status command indicating transition to the probable state is set (S2506), a command indicating transition to the probable mode is set in the mode type storage area 203dc (S2507), and this processing is ended. do.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203la is not a value larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2505: No), the gaming state shifts from the consecutive game mode to the normal mode, so the next , sets a status command indicating transition to normal mode (S2508), sets a command indicating transition to normal mode in mode type storage area 203dc (S2509), and ends this process.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 13th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 744 and 745. In the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example, the command determination process 6 (FIG. 472 The difference is that command determination process 13 (S4191 in FIG. 744) is executed instead of S4151), and small win related process 13 (S4191 in FIG. 745) is executed instead of small win related process (S4233 in FIG. 727). Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, command determination processing 13 (S4191) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 744. This command determination process 13 (S4191) is executed in place of command determination process 6 (see FIG. 724) in the 12th control example, and when a small win related command is received, the small win related process (see FIG. 727) is executed. The difference is that the small hit related process 13 (S4291 in FIG. 746) is executed instead. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 745, the small hit related process 13 (S4291) in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 745 is a flowchart showing the contents of small hit related processing 13 (S4291). The small hit related process 13 (S4291) is different from the small win related process (S4233 in FIG. 727) in the twelfth control example described above in that the content of setting the selection effect is different. Another difference is that when the number of small wins reaches a specified number in the super continuous mode or the continuous mode, a back image corresponding to the gaming state (mode) after the transition is set. Since other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the small win related process 13 (S4291), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S5801). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S5801), is the current gaming state in the super continuous mode (probable variable state), that is, is the value shown in the mode type storage area 203dc in the variable probability state? (S5891). If it is determined that the gaming state is the super consecutive winning mode (S5891: Yes), then it is determined whether the value indicated by the small win count command included in the received opening command is 20 or more (S5892). If it is determined that the value indicated in the small hit count command is not larger than 20 (less than 20) (S5892: No), a selection effect for the normal area is set (S5893), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S5892, if it is determined that the value indicated by the number of small winnings command is a value larger than 20 (S5892: Yes), if the specified number of remaining small winnings is small as shown in FIG. 730(b), , a narrow area selection effect is set (S5894), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5801 that an opening command has not been received (S5801: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S5806). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S5806), it is determined whether there is a V win in the small winning game (S5807). If it is determined that there is no V winning (S5807: No), it is determined whether the small win is a small win that reaches a specified number of times (S5808). If the small win reaches the specified number of times (25 times in this control example) and it is determined that it is a small win (S5808), the game state will shift, so a back image corresponding to the mode performance after the shift is set. (S5895), this process ends.

In addition, in this control example, in the process of setting the region of selection performance, the narrow area selection performance is executed when the number of small hits is 20 or more, but it is not limited to this, and may be set to 20 or more. However, it may be 20 or less. Further, a small hit count counter may be provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and each time the value is added, the area of the selected effect may be changed. In this way, each time you win a small win, the area of selection effect is changed, so you can visually recognize that the specified number of small wins will be reached, which will gradually change the gaming state. You can play games that are easy to understand. In addition, by changing the selection effect area in a short cycle, it becomes easier for the player to select the playing method in the super continuous mode or the continuous mode at his or her own timing, allowing for more diverse gameplay. can be provided.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth control example, the inside of the V prize winning device 670 that allows the player to enter the ball when there is a small hit in addition to when there is a big hit in the special symbol lottery. In a gaming machine configured to award a jackpot even when a game ball passes through the provided V winning device 670e3 (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine), 4 types of gaming states (modes) are provided. There is. Specifically, these are the gaming states that are set when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and include a normal mode (normal state) that is the most disadvantageous state for the player, and a gaming state that is relatively advantageous for the player. There is a certain consecutive chance mode (time saving state), a super consecutive chance mode (variable probability state) which is the most advantageous state for the player, and a pullback mode that enters when the number of small wins reaches a specified number while playing in the super consecutive chance mode. (potential state).

In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured such that a small win is won. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, even if you do not win the jackpot, you can play a small winning game, so you can expect more prize balls than in the first special symbol lottery. can. Further, based on the game state, a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second ball entry port 6400 and a game state in which it is difficult to enter the second ball entry port 6400 are provided. Specifically, in the normal mode, which is the gaming state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is set low, and the fluctuation time of the lottery of the regular symbol is set to be low. A game in which the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is set to be long, and furthermore, even when winning a lottery with a normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is set to be short, making it difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400a. state. Therefore, it is almost impossible to draw the second special symbol, resulting in the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, as mentioned above, the pullback mode is a gaming state that is set when the number of small wins in special symbol drawings reaches 25 while playing in the super consecutive mode, and the Although the probability state is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set short (5 seconds or 10 seconds), so the lottery of the second special symbol that was suspended before the transition to the pullback mode is Can be executed efficiently. However, since the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is set to 0.5 seconds, even if the player fires a game ball aiming at the second ball entry port 6400 after shifting to the pullback mode, the second entry port 6400 It is difficult to let the ball enter the ball opening 6400, which is a disadvantageous gaming condition for the player. In addition, since the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the game state is more advantageous than the normal mode.

In the continuous mode, which is a gaming state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability of winning the normal symbols is set high, and the lottery time of the normal symbols is also set short. , is a game state in which the game ball can be efficiently entered into the second ball entry port 6400. On the other hand, there is a low probability state with special symbols, and the jackpot awarded by winning a V prize is a jackpot in which the consecutive chance mode is set again after the end of the jackpot game, and a normal state which is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. Therefore, it is a relatively advantageous gaming state for the player.

On the other hand, in the super consecutive mode, which is a gaming state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability of winning a normal symbol is set high, and the lottery time for normal symbols is also set short. , is a game state in which the game ball can be efficiently entered into the second ball entry port 6400. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed efficiently. Furthermore, since a high probability state of the special symbol is set, the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol is high, resulting in the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

Furthermore, if there is a V win during the Super Continuous Win mode, after the jackpot game awarded by the V win ends, the Super Continuous Contest mode will be set again, or the player will be placed in a relatively advantageous gaming state. Shifting to a certain continuous mode. In addition, if the special symbol lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 times in this control example) without winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the gaming state shifts to the normal mode, but the special symbol In the probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/25, so it is almost impossible for the special symbol to reach the specified number of times. Therefore, when the gaming state shifts from the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the super continuous mode, to the continuous mode, which is a relatively advantageous gaming state, or the pullback mode, the super continuous mode is Even if the game ends, the player can be motivated to continue playing until the relatively advantageous state ends, so the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

In addition, the rate of mode transition after the end of the jackpot game in this control example is not limited to this, and it may be configured to shift to the pullback mode (potential state) after the end of the jackpot game at a predetermined ratio. good. With this configuration, the number of mode types that can be set after the end of the jackpot can be increased, and the variety of games can be expanded.

In addition, as mentioned above, the game state is configured to shift when the special symbol is drawn 100 times and the small win is won 25 times from the super continuous mode or the continuous mode, but the number of times is It is not limited to this, and may be diversified. For example, after the end of the jackpot game, the prescribed number of times may be determined by lottery. With this configuration, the player cannot know the prescribed number of times until the jackpot game ends, so he can play the game with excitement. In addition, the conditions for transitioning the game state are not limited to the number of special symbol drawings or the number of small winnings, but a specified number of times will be added when a specific variation pattern is selected in the special symbol drawing. You can. With this configuration, it is possible to perform various presentation modes.

Further, in the present control example described above, one type of variation time of the normal symbol is determined according to each gaming state, but the variation time is not limited to this, and variations may be provided in the variation time. With this configuration, even in the same gaming state, it is possible to provide a state in which it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 6400 and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, and it is possible to provide various gaming properties.

As described above, in this control example, if a small win is won during a period when the second special symbol lottery is easy to be executed (super consecutive winning mode or consecutive winning mode), the game ball is sent to the V winning device 670. Either play the game in the hope of winning the jackpot awarded by passing the V winning switch 670e3, or win the jackpot awarded by drawing a special symbol before the number of small wins reaches the specified number. A selection effect is executed for selecting a gaming method to play a game while desiring the same. Specifically, the third symbol display device 81 is divided by a screen dividing line (HR10), and the left side area Dm50 displays guidance on a gaming method for aiming for a jackpot only by drawing special symbols, and the right display area Dm51 displays guidance on a gaming method that aims to win the jackpot only by drawing special symbols. displays guidance on a gaming method that aims to win a jackpot with a V-winning.By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide easy-to-understand guidance on the gaming method that the player himself/herself desires. can be provided.

Then, when there are few remaining prescribed number of times until the game state shifts based on a small hit win, the display areas of the left display area Dm50 and the right display area Dm51 are variable by changing the screen dividing line HR10. will be displayed. If the stipulated number of winnings remaining is small, it is possible for the player to shift to a more advantageous gaming state by playing the game with the aim of winning a V prize, rather than by playing a game method in which the player only expects a jackpot by drawing special symbols. Therefore, by moving the screen dividing line HR10 to the left area of the third symbol display device 81, the guidance display for the game method aiming at winning V, which is displayed in the right display area Dm51, is displayed more prominently. . With this configuration, when the prescribed number of winnings remaining is small, the player can instantly determine that it is more advantageous to execute the gaming method guided in the right display area Dm51. This allows players to be encouraged to select a gaming method that is advantageous to them.

In this control example, the selection performance of the gaming method is displayed so as to be displayed by drawing the screen dividing line HR10 vertically so as to be divided into the left and right sides, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the screen may be divided into the top and bottom. Alternatively, a character or the like may be displayed and an effect such as that character guiding the user may be executed. In addition, it may be configured such that various types of performance modes can be selected by the player by operating an operable operation means. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a selection effect that is easy for the player to recognize, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Further, it may be configured such that the benefits that can be expected to be obtained by each gaming method are displayed in the display area where the respective guidance is displayed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be started up on that day, such as when the hall starts operating, and then information such as the cumulative amount of benefits that the player has been able to obtain by selecting that gaming method may be displayed. Providing the player with various information in this way makes it easier for the player to think about selecting a gaming method on his own, and allows him to play the game while thinking about it, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, it may be configured such that the lottery results for which special symbols are reserved are read in advance, and the selection performance is performed based on the results. By executing the selection performance based on the pre-read result, the content of the selection performance can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that in this control example, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a specific gaming state, a right-handed game is executed in which a game ball is fired toward the right side area of the game board 13. Even in a specific gaming state, the configuration may be such that the game is executed aiming at the left side area of the gaming board 13. Further, in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is configured so that there is no possibility of winning a small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery of the first special symbol may also be individualized so that a small win is won. With this configuration, the variety of games can be expanded.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the number of reserved balls command is issued. Although a case has been described in which data is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the transmission is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Moreover, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the main controller 110 sends the number of pending commands to the audio lamp controller 113 and the number of times the audio lamp controller 113 receives the number of pending commands, so the main controller 110 and The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the winning of balls into the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings to the first ball entrance 64, can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured as follows.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the control examples described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and displaying the secondary symbol. Moreover, as the structure of the display means, a structure other than a liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the control examples described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (time saving state), and a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 in a normal gaming state. Although the configuration is such that a left-handed game is executed in which the game is aimed at, it is only necessary to change the target area of the game board 13 depending on the game state. You may also have the player execute a right-handed game. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that games can be executed in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the frame button 22 is used to determine that the operation means has been operated when the player presses it. However, other configurations may be used. It may be possible to use a lever-shaped operating means that can determine whether the player has operated the lever by tilting it left or right or forward or backward, or a lever-shaped operating means that can determine whether the player has touched or approached the lever. It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means that can be used, a wireless operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c It may be configured such that part or all of the operation control is executed not by the main control device 110 but by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the control examples described above, the audio lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is controlled by the audio lamp. Although configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The same control device may execute the processing for With this configuration, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which a plurality of levels of probability combinations (commonly referred to as settings) are provided for the jackpot lottery, and the settings can be changed at the game parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, for pachinko machines that have multiple settings, the combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of jackpot probability in a low probability state and jackpot probability in a variable probability state) can be set in one of multiple stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to , but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the pachinko machine is capable of varying the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot depending on the settings. You can. That is, the rate at which jackpots of a type advantageous to the player are determined may be varied, or the rate at which jackpots of a type disadvantageous to the player are determined, may be varied depending on the settings. More specifically, for example, the rate at which jackpots are determined with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied depending on the settings, or the rate at which jackpots are determined with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may also be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting is varied by varying the proportion of each setting. In addition, for example, after the jackpot ends, the ratio at which a jackpot is determined that will give a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) can be varied depending on the setting, or a jackpot that will give a small number of time savings (for example, 0 times). The rate at which this is determined may be varied depending on the settings. Furthermore, the rate at which jackpots are determined to transition (or are likely to transition) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot can be varied according to settings, or may be changed to a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, normal state). ) may be changed depending on the setting. Further, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided which has a significantly higher probability of being determined only in a specific setting (almost never being determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the settings can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to 6. In setting 6, if there is a jackpot, a 6-round jackpot is determined 2% of the time, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only 0.01% of the time. It may also be a configuration. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, there is an extremely high possibility that the most advantageous setting is 6, so the player is forced to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot when playing the game. be able to. In addition, instead of this, or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the proportion of the jackpot type in which 66 time saving times are given after the jackpot ends is higher than in other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the accessory inside the jackpot) operates in a different operation pattern from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is more likely to be determined (the ratio of determination becomes higher) with a specific setting. In addition, when changing the combination of jackpot probabilities depending on the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in the variable probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in the variable probability state, the setting is less favorable to the player. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot probability increases as the number increases. This configuration is particularly suitable for a type of game ball type in which the number of special symbol drawings increases as the number of drawings for special symbols increases (the number of prize balls paid out is easier to increase than the number of game balls fired). Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying this to a type of gaming machine where the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, and where there is a high probability of a small win in the variable probability state, the advantage of high settings can be achieved. You can improve your sexuality. That is, when the probability of a jackpot is low in a variable probability state, the number of drawings until the next jackpot is likely to be increased, so there are more chances to win a small jackpot and win a prize ball. Therefore, when the probability changes, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as the plurality of special symbol types, but the number of types of special symbols is not limited to this, and three or more types of special symbols are used. The special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game feature in which a plurality of special symbols are drawn (varied) according to predetermined rules, and a game feature in which a lottery (variation) is carried out independently of each other are explained. However, the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbol definitively, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as gaming value in a gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

All or part of the embodiments and control examples described above may be combined.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Point for setting the player's pushing direction from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means that is pressed and operated by a player, the operating device has two states: a first state in a normal state, and a second state in which the operating means is placed in a position where the operating means is more protruding from the player than in the first state. 2 states, and includes an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the near side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being oriented toward the side.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a way that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
(See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, since the effect is performed in a manner that increases the expectation of a jackpot for the player at the advance position, it becomes easier for the player to operate the operating means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operation means to be highly strong. In this case, there are problems in that the operating means becomes heavier as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes larger.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when a push operation is performed in the second state, the push direction of the operating means is from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player can easily perform vertical linear motion. By creating a slippage between the player's hand and the operating means that cannot be fully operated, the force of the push can be released.

Also, considering the player's playing posture, if the player presses the operating means mainly with his shoulder or elbow,
Since it becomes difficult to apply force in the forward direction, the force that the player applies to the operating means can be naturally weakened.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft located at a back side relative to the player, is configured to be tiltable up and down around the shaft, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means to face the direction opposite to the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is arranged in a rotary manner, and the operating means is arranged to face the direction opposite to the player in the second state. It is possible to prevent the person from performing an operation of slamming the operating means.

In addition, by placing your hand near the shaft and tilting your hand using that position as a fulcrum, you can easily push the operating means, so you can provide a new method of push-in operation that is less prone to acceleration. , it is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the player's pressing operation.

The new push-in operation method is, for example, by placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operating means with the palm facing up and down, and then pointing the thumb side toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating the device by tilting it down, and a method of operating the device by placing the tip of the middle finger near the shaft with the palm of the hand facing the operating device, then dropping the palm toward the operating device. be done.

A gaming machine A3, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, characterized in that in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is an up-down direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1 or A2, since the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, the second state is maintained while ensuring operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent damage caused by a pushing operation in such a state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is capable of automatic operation, and includes a driving means that generates a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is generated when the player performs a push operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the game machine acts in a direction in which the game occurs, but does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is generated in the direction opposite to the player's operating direction. can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operations.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being subjected to a high load due to being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when retracting the button.

The gaming machine A4 is capable of forming a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and includes a maintenance means operated by the drive means, and the drive means operates the operation device through the eccentric portion. It has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, and the rotating means can change the phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in a maintained state, In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operation means can move when the maintenance state is released is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase,
A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state by the same rotation.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the phase of the drive means can be changed while the maintaining means is in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to cancel the maintained state is rotated. By using the biasing means, the movement width of the operating device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operating modes by the urging means.

In gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , A gaming machine A6 configured in such a manner that the operating means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the movement of the biasing means in the direction of the biasing force was caused only by the biasing force, so that the mode of movement was limited to one. Since the operating means can be added with a movement mode in which it moves by following the maintenance means, the types of movement modes of the operating means can be increased. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 includes a light emitting means disposed inside the operating device and emits light toward the player, and the second state is better than the first state. However, from a player's viewpoint, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machine A7 is provided with a light emitting means, and the light emitting means emits more light from the player's viewpoint in the second state than in the first state. The irradiation range of the light is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the light, improving the performance effect, and making it difficult to press the operating means without aiming. By adopting this aspect, it is possible to reduce the force required by the player during operation.

In gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and when the operating means moves toward and away from the display means, the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes. Features gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves towards and away from the display means, thereby creating a light emitting means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<The key point is to keep the repulsion force small during normal times while being able to respond to repeated hits>
In an operating device having an operating means that allows a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, the operating device has a first state and a second state in which the range of movement for the operation up to the terminal position is wider than that in the first state.
and a first driving means that generates a driving force to move from the second state to the first state, and a biasing means that generates a biasing force to move from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a second driving means that generates a driving force for moving the operating means from a first state to a second state in response to an operation by a player.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a way that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
(See Publication No. 8). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the force to return the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operating means is performed by the drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operating means will be delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means will not be able to follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to perform repeated hitting operations. There was a problem.

According to the game machine B1, by setting the biasing force weakly, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. 2
By pushing back the operating means with the drive means, the return can be made faster, allowing the player to enjoy the repeated hitting operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with a continuous stroke determination means for determining whether or not a continuous stroke operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is activated based on the detection value of the continuous stroke determination means. A game machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive the game machine.

According to the gaming machine B2, it is determined whether or not to drive the second drive means based on the detection value of the repeated hit determination means, so that the player is not performing a repeated hitting operation (for example, a single press operation or a long press). The second driving means operates even when the player is performing an operation, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing his hand back.

The gaming machine B2 includes an end detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether the operating means is placed at the end position, and an end detecting means for detecting whether the operating means is placed at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A moving direction determining means, comprising a positional difference detecting means for detecting a positional difference, and a moving direction determining means for determining the direction of movement of the operating means from the time relationship between the detected value of the terminal end detecting means and the detected value of the positional difference detecting means. A game machine B3 characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of pushing back to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing when the player moves in the away direction, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, thereby preventing a high load from being applied to the player's hand.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is constituted by a voice coil motor that vibrates in a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively utilized to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

Any one of gaming machines B1 to B3 includes a support frame that supports the operating means, and the second drive means includes a drive motor that rotates the eccentric weight, and the drive motor is elastically supported by the support frame. and a supporting means, the supporting means having a driving force that increases the driving force for moving the operating means from the first state position to the second state position as the operating means approaches the terminal position. A gaming machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight abuts the support frame when the operating means is disposed at the terminal position, and generates a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating the drive force separately from the drive force, it is possible to adjust the drive force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means based on the operation means being disposed at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. Game machine B6 is characterized by:

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is utilized. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the supporting means supporting the drive motor is moved in a direction away from the support frame (in a direction toward the operating means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operating means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration production device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near a terminal position of the operating means, the detection sensor comprising a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from a detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means a threshold value determination means for determining whether a measured value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, the threshold value determination means The driving force generated by the repulsive means increases when the measured threshold is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold than when the threshold determined by the threshold determining means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold. Characteristic game machine C1.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a way that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
(See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if emphasis is placed on the ability of the player to operate the device lightly, the operating resistance will be low and there is a risk that the operating device will be damaged by the player's operation, while if it is supported firmly, the movement of the operating device itself will be reduced. Although it is possible to reduce the speed and reduce the possibility of damage to the operating means, there is a problem in that the force required for operation by the player increases, making operating the operating means a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is less than the threshold value can be reduced, and the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repelling means can improve operability and prevent destruction.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, , before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operating means is placed in a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor,
A game machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

A gaming machine C3, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, wherein after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1 or C2, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. While suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact between the voice coil motor and the voice coil motor, the degree of braking of the operating means can be gradually improved, and the discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means using spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation using spring elasticity, so even when the operating speed of the operating means is high, the driving force is generated without time delay. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means determines that when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value, the value measured by the threshold value determination means is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that a movable region of an end of the repulsion means opposite to the side that comes into contact with the operation means is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means that is opposite to the side that contacts the operating means is narrowed, so that the operation of the operating means is reduced. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased.

<Damage to the drive means is prevented by cutting off the transmission of driving force with the clutch>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, and the release means is configured to release the driving force when a load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a way that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
(See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the operating means is automatically operated for production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk of a large load being placed on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the release means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if a player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected) and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and while driving in the first direction, A game machine D2 characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether it is being driven in the second direction.

Here, if it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by a player when driving the driving means in an operating direction in which transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled, a large load may be generated on the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance when operating the operating means to create a performance is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, the locking member that locks the button is moved in the releasing direction, or the locking member that locks the button is moved in the releasing direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, the button can be operated in two ways (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction, regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of movement of the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

An example of a method for releasing the transmission is to move the clutch in a direction that intersects the operating direction of the drive means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the direction of the rotation axis or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state where driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. and engagement teeth that transmit driving force when they are in mesh with each other. A game machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to have a shape that tapers with respect to the abutment surface in a manner that tapers away from the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the releasing means applies the driving force on the pressed contact surface in the engaged state. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the operating direction of the drive means are provided with engagement teeth that taper in a manner that tapers away from the contact surface, the engagement between the engagement teeth causes the transmission means to be separated from the drive means. They can be separated from each other, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied between the drive means and the transmission means, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, the biasing force is applied in the operating direction of the drive means via the engaging teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the drive means between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

Note that the size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not completely disappear by separation, but is periodically restored. Thereby, when the player releases his/her hand, the button can begin to operate within a short period of time.

In other words, when the button is activated "as an effect", if the player is holding the button,
One phase of button operation has passed. If the player releases his/her hand in the middle, if the button moves from the end of that one phase, the period during which the button is stopped will be longer.
This eliminates the feeling that the player's burden has been lifted and they are ready to move on.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his/her hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to create the feeling that the player's load has been lifted and the player has started to move.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is
A game machine D4 characterized in that it is formed of sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage.
That is, when the distal end of the engagement surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means approach and separate, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on that plane, and the transmitting means of the releasing means It is possible to suppress movement in the direction toward and away from the means from being stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means is different depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 featuring the following.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D4, a plurality of operating modes of the operating means are provided, and the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one of the operating modes. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is such that when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operating mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is as follows. Similarly, gaming machine D6 is characterized in that its operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means is the same. Since the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the level of jackpot expectation, the player can be told how to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be watched over.

In addition, this difference in operating mode is caused by the difference in the operating direction of the driving means, so if the operating direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation level etc. without having to watch the operation of the operating means. I can do it. However, the driving means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sounds, etc., so it is not possible to confirm the operating direction of the driving means in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction of the driving means in advance. can be made to monitor the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, a first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; , a biasing device that biases the operating device in a direction from the first position toward the second position, and an operating device that moves from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing device. terminating means for changeably forming a movement end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; a release load means for applying a load to the first means to release the engagement with the operating means, the release load means releasing the engagement, and the termination means at the end of the movement of the operating means; A game machine E characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operation means operated by a cam is fixed at a first position, and the fixation is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the operation means. There is a gaming machine in which the amount of displacement of the extending operation can be changed by a terminating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the amount of displacement of the extending operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam when the lock is released, so the phase of the cam when the lock is released is varied. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation were operated by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. Thereby, the terminating means can serve both as a driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means and as a driving means for moving the release load means, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

A gaming machine E2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the position of the release load means can be caused to change based on the operation of the transmission means, so by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means, the release load means can be changed by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detection means such as a position sensor for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

In addition, as a method for switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, there are two methods: a method of shifting the rotation period of the cam and the protrusion; , a method of de-synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion in other phases, etc.
Illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the load release means is configured to:
A gaming machine E3, which is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means, and whether or not the load release means and the transmission means operate synchronously is switched by the operation of the load release means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not the synchronous operation of the load release means and the transmission means is performed, the synchronous state of the load release means and the transmission means can be changed without adding any members.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotational axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means is provided with a rotating second rotating member. A game machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but the rotation periods are different, so that the second rotating member is operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means at a phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation means is maintained at the first position, the action of the first means is released, and the operation means moves toward the second position. ,
You can expand the scope of your performance. For example, it is possible to realize an effect in which the end position is gradually moved away from the first position or an effect in which the end position is gradually brought closer to the first position using the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device has a first position and a second position which the operating means reaches when the player performs an operation from the first position. In the gaming machine, the operating means is arranged at the first position, and the gaming machine includes a vibrating means having a vibrating part that vibrates, and a receiving means arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the vibrating part. When the operating means is placed in the second position, the vibrating section is in a separated state in which it cannot come into contact with the receiving means, whereas when the operating means is placed in the second position, the vibrating section is in a state where it can come into contact with the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it is in a contact state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include an operating means that can be operated by a player, and a vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
(Refer to Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the vibration means vibrates, regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or, if the vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, then the vibration is transmitted immediately after the player operates the operating means.
It is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the hand from the operating means. In some cases, the vibration may not start in time before the player releases his or her hand, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating section comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is placed in the first position or is operated by the player and placed in the second position. Therefore, even when the vibrating section is made to vibrate continuously, the player can only feel the vibration when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating part is generated before the player presses the button, the vibrating part can be vibrated even before the player releases his/her hand, regardless of the manner of the player's operation. vibrations can be transmitted to people.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means is disposed in the separated state so as to overhang an area occupied by the operating means when it is arranged at the second position, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means changes to the abutting state by being moved out of the occupied area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state, so depending on the degree of movement of the operating means, The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating part can be changed,
The intensity of the transmitted vibrations can also be varied. Therefore, the effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration in response to the player's operation intensity can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same way without any particular change in the driving mode.

A gaming machine F3, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, positioning with respect to the receiving means can be performed while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means by the supporting means. Thereby, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, thereby preventing the transmission of vibrations, and also suppressing the displacement that occurs in the vibrating means during vibration.

A gaming machine F4 in the gaming machine F3, wherein in the contact state, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating section.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating section and the receiving means come into contact. That is, by expanding and contracting the support means, momentum can be gained when the vibrating section moves in a direction approaching the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means has deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operation means,
A game machine F5 characterized in that the deformation resistance is lower than the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, it is possible to finely set the direction in which the supporting means deforms when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means. can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the support means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating section and the receiving means can be made different. .

In addition, methods for varying the deformation resistance include a method in which rubber legs are extended along the operating direction of the operating means when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, and a method in which the supporting means surrounds the vibrating means. In the case of a rubber member, the rubber member is manufactured by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance in each direction, and the supporting means is a rail that guides the operating means to move along the operating direction. , a coil spring that biases the vibration means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like.

A gaming machine F6 in the gaming machine F3, wherein the portion that the vibrating section comes into contact with is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, vibrations are not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but through a receiving means that is a separate means from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmission means, and therefore it is possible to suppress a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

Furthermore, since vibrations can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hands of the player operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation due to being surprised by the vibrations during the operation.

The receiving means may be, for example, the part of the frame of the gaming machine near the upper tray where the game balls are supplied, or the edge of the glass frame, etc. Examples include parts that may be touched by hands, and housing parts that partially enclose operating means.

<One-touch installation between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) possible at the attachment part>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position; It is characterized by comprising: a driving means that generates a driving force for driving; and a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, and the transmission means includes a deformation part that elastically deforms due to overload. Game machine G1.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force to drive the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There are gaming machines equipped with (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2014-144218)
. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player and the driving means generates a driving force to drive the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operating means,
There is a problem in that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmission means and the driving means, and there is a risk that these connecting portions will be damaged.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine G1, when an overload is applied to the operating device, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, and the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the driving means and the transmission means, etc. It is possible to alleviate the load applied to the connecting part.

In the game machine G1, the transmission means includes a rotatably supported cam member, the deformable portion constitutes a connecting portion of the cam member to the rotation shaft, and the elasticity of the deformation portion allows the transmission device to rotate to the rotation shaft. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of .

According to the gaming machine G2, the deformation portion serves as a portion that elastically deforms the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and as a portion that generates a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft.
Equipped with. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified due to the dual use of the function. For example, separate fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a protruding portion that is protruded parallel to the rotation axis, the protruding portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is caused by the cam member. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to configure the cam member and the protruding portion with one member, and there is a possibility that the number of members will increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is such that the rotating shaft is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is attached to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is higher than that of the rotational shaft in comparison with a first rotational direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line connecting the rotational shaft and the convex portion. A game machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which the rotation is made about a straight line that is perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the convex portion and the extending direction of the rotating shaft. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformable part different for each direction, the state after the deformable part is elastically deformed is better when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in a direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. This allows the protruding part of the cam member to be displaced along the direction in which the protruding part is intended to move, thereby alleviating the load generated between the protruding part and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformable part. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deformable portion, A game machine G5 characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformable portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Since they come into contact with each other, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A game machine G6, which is any one of the game machines G3 to G5, and includes a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted relative to the shaft.

Here, in a situation where an overload is applied to the operating device and the operating means is not operating even though the driving means is in operation, for example, the displacement expected due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When detecting the occurrence of an overload based on the deviation between the two, it is necessary to drive the drive means for a predetermined period of time before detecting the occurrence of an overload. This period can be shortened as the interval between the detection means for detecting the displacement becomes smaller, but the smaller the interval between the detection means, the more complicated and expensive the configuration of the detection means becomes. Therefore, there has been a problem in that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of overload at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted relative to the shaft. In this way, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time as the detection means detects at least a portion of the cam member, without requiring the drive means to be driven for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detection means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Ball with thread anti-rattle structure. Game machine H>
In a gaming machine equipped with a foul ball passageway through which foul balls flowing back toward the firing device among the game balls fired into the gaming area can pass, the foul ball passageway not only allows passing of the falling game balls, but also allows the foul balls to pass through. A game machine H1 characterized in that it is equipped with a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the progress of an object flowing backward.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a thread cutting blade is installed inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the firing device, and the game ball connected with the thread is driven into the gaming area. There are game machines that have a function to prevent (cut the thread)
(See Publication No. 4179). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the thread is fired, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth, and the tension generated at that time cuts the thread. However, if the firing strength of the game ball is weak, the game ball may not cut the thread completely. The ball may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
For this reason, for example, a fraudulent tool with game balls connected to both ends of a string is prepared, and one game ball connected to one end of the string is fired at low firing strength, causing it to flow into the foul ball path and being returned to the player. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the playing area while grasping the one game ball that has been played, the string can be removed from the guide path and the ball can be passed through the foul ball path to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball and the other game ball are connected by a thread, an external load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the gaming area is connected to the other game ball. There was a problem that there was a risk that the government could manipulate the government and obtain fraudulent profits.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, even if a fraudulent act is performed that applies a load to the other game ball using the thread guided to the game area through the foul ball path, the one-way obstruction means However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backward direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

A gaming machine H2 in the gaming machine H1, wherein the foul ball passage includes a bending part that bends a falling path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the game ball can rub against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending section is provided with a loading means on the inner corner side of the bend, which does not apply a load to the game ball flowing down, but applies a load to the object flowing backward.
.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H2, the load means can apply a load to an object (for example, a thread-like member) flowing backward.

The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the load means is disposed in a recessed portion having a width less than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. This can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5, which is the gaming machine H3 or H4, further comprising a regulating means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball path.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the regulating means regulates the outward movement of the foul ball path of the loading means, so that the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball path is prevented. When a load is applied, the load applied to the member on the thread can be prevented from weakening due to the load means being deformed outward of the foul ball path.

Any of the gaming machines H1 to H5 is equipped with a receiving tray which is a tray where foul balls first arrive at the front side of the front door, and a payout which is a part that discharges game balls paid out from a payout device to the receiving tray. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that the ball discharge section is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines H1 to H5, the game ball paid out from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that the game ball can pass through the foul ball passage. If a fraudulent act is carried out in which the thread guided into the gaming area is used to apply a load to the other game ball, the player intentionally hits the game ball that is being paid out, applies a load, and reduces the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball ejection part, which is the part that ejects the game balls paid out from the pay-out device, is placed in the receiving tray, which is the tray where foul balls first arrive at the front side of the front door. , a gaming machine H7 characterized in that the foul ball passage is located below the lower end of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act was carried out in which the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball path was used to apply a load to the other gaming ball. In this case, the threads can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Structure of holding the board surface. Game machine I>
It comprises a gaming means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side facing the gaming means and capable of receiving the gaming means from the one side, and the receiving means is configured to accept the gaming means from the one side. The state changing means is capable of changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state, the state changing means changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it comprises an approaching means that approaches the gaming means from the one side.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, the game board can rotate in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine that is equipped with a fixing means to do this (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the game board is pushed into the operating position, so if the game board is not pushed in halfway, it is necessary to push it in again. There is a problem in that it becomes necessary to perform this repetitive work, which may reduce work efficiency.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means is provided with the proximity means that approaches the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is brought into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is only half-hearted, by the proximity means coming into contact with the game board and applying a pushing force,
This has the effect that the game board can be pushed into the position where it is in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side in response to a state change to an unusable state in which the gaming means is disabled. .

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, since the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, it is difficult to remove the gaming means. This has the effect of improving work efficiency.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means in response to setting the gaming means in an unusable state. Game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1 or I2, since the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means, it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the gaming means, and it is possible to Since this is carried out in conjunction with making the means unusable, work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the gaming machine I4 is provided with abutting means that receives a load from the gaming device when the state changing means changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, the state changing means changes to the usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means, so the operation of pressing the gaming means against the state changing means changes the state to the usable state as a series of steps. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means when the other side is approached, and the state changing means is A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is disposed on the other side of the gaming machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, by utilizing the width dimension of the gaming means,
A load can be efficiently applied to the contact means via the game means.

Any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5 is provided with a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the closing means is such that the state changing means makes the gaming means unusable. A gaming machine I6 characterized in that it is provided with a closing regulating part that makes it impossible to close the opening on one side of the gaming means when maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means changes the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means remains in an unusable state.

<An inverted cup and harness band prevents piano wire from getting rattled. Game machine J＞
It is equipped with a gaming means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the gaming means and capable of receiving the gaming means from the one side, and the receiving means is configured to be connected to the gaming means. A gaming machine J1 comprising a placement means disposed on a path communicating with the outside, the placement means being configured to be able to suppress entry of objects from the outside at a plurality of locations.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a fraud prevention part to prevent fraudulent activities such as inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-
(See Publication No. 26573). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the fraud prevention section is located only at one location, and the effectiveness of fraud prevention is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, a placement means is provided in a path where there is a possibility that the piano wire may be inserted, and the placement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at multiple locations, thereby preventing fraud. can improve the effectiveness of

In gaming machine J1, the arrangement means includes a first means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at a first location, and a second means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at a second location.
A gaming machine J2 characterized by suppressing the entry of members from the outside using a different method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means has a different method for suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Compared to the case where the number of members is increased, entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

Note that the method of suppressing intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method may be used to prevent entry by blocking a route, or a method may be used to prevent fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm.

A gaming machine J3 in the gaming machine J1 or J2, wherein the arrangement means includes an intrusion regulating part formed in the shape of a cup that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, thereby making it possible to prevent the intruding member from further invading.

In the gaming machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electrical wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry restriction part in the path from the outside to the gaming means. Features of gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J3, when an unauthorized person penetrates the access control part due to high heat, it is possible to detect changes in the wiring caused by the high heat (such as disconnection due to heat), thereby preventing external damage. The effect of suppressing the entry of members can be easily produced.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means removes the member that has entered from the outside.
A gaming machine J5 characterized in that it is provided with a dissolving means that guides the player to a dissolving area that is far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means guides the member entering from the outside to the elimination area far from the gaming means, so that the entry of the member entering from the outside is prevented. Even if the degree of damage increases, it is possible to prevent members entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of a 5-layer decorative board. It also involves fraud prevention. Game machine K>
a first means and a second means that are arranged opposite to each other along a first direction and connected at least one side; and a first means and a second means arranged along the first direction between the first means and the second means. A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, the connecting direction of the connecting portion being set in a second direction intersecting the first direction. The gaming machine K1 is characterized by the following.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means are arranged opposite to each other and connected by at least one side, and the first means and the second means are disposed along the first direction between the first means and the second means. There is a gaming machine that includes a third means (for example, see Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-26573).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by existing methods such as adhesion or screw fixing, but when the first means and second means are connected, the load along the first direction is There is a problem in that the third means may be damaged because it is applied to three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set in the second direction intersecting the first direction, so that the third means is set in the first direction. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the This can prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes a connected means that is connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that the second means is displaced relative to the first means in an adjacent third direction and connected by fitting into each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the gaming machine K3 includes connected means that are connected to other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to disassembly of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is arranged to be exposed to the outside in the gaming machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K3, since one side of the first means and the second means are arranged so as to be exposed to the outside, it is easy to check the state of the mating parts. be able to.
As a result, even if a fraudulent act occurs in which the fitting portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled, the fraudulent act can be discovered more quickly.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same direction as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction, so that the fastening The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

In any of gaming machines K3 to K5, a light irradiation means that irradiates light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means, and one of the first means or the second means. A gaming machine K6, characterized in that it is provided with a light guide means fixed to the member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation means into the inside.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from being misaligned.

The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that the gaming machine K6 is provided with abutting means that makes surface contact with the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means in a region where they face each other.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K6, a distance equal to the dimension of the abutting means can be maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means. I can do it.
This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by a load in the opposite direction. I can do it.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction when an unauthorized attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Point L of utilizing the curved light guiding means. As for points, not achieved>
comprising a light guiding means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed from the irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projection means disposed opposite to the light guiding means and onto which the light passing through the light guiding means is projected; A gaming machine L1 characterized in that the projection means includes a concave facing portion disposed opposite to the concave surface portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion disposed facing the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a light guide plate that uniformly emits light entering from an end face (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, so in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitted light, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guiding means is constant, the projection target means has the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion. With the department,
The light emission intensity of the projection target means can be changed.

In the game machine L1, the projection means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmissive material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is more difficult to transmit light than the concave facing portion. A gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light that passes through the convex opposing part, the light emitted from the light guiding means is focused on the concave opposing part. It is possible to improve the performance effect of the light production.

The gaming machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is disposed on the opposite side of the projection means with the light-guiding means in between and projects the light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projection means A gaming machine L3 characterized in that a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion facing the convex surface of the light guiding means are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part that is arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means Since they are made of materials with substantially the same transparency, by allowing the same light to enter the light guiding means, it is possible to produce a light effect that is visually recognized through the projection means and a light effect that is visually recognized through the opposite projection means. can be made different.

<Bass reflex speaker arrangement structure. Game machine M>
a first means and a second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to each other and forming an internal space in a fixed state; an acoustic means arranged so as to enter at least a part of the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: a bending means that forms a bending path in an internal space.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of the front frame, and performances are performed using sounds output from the speakers (for example, JP 2016-1
(See Publication No. 6088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration waves traveling toward the back side of the speaker body are made to travel to the left and right center position of the gaming machine, and then are sent out to the outside of the gaming machine.
Although it is easy to create an effect that allows the player to hear bass sounds, there is a problem in that the path length of the vibration wave is determined by the left and right width of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the playing machine By canceling the left and right width restrictions, the vibration waves can travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means has a rib shape extending from at least one of the first means and the second means toward the other. A gaming machine M2, comprising a protruding portion that protrudes from the top, and a tip of the protruding portion comes into contact with the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means By bringing these into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes an opening that connects the interior space to the outside, and the opening is a passage member that is passed between the interior space and the exterior through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passage member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, and, The wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passage member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

A gaming machine M4 in the gaming machine M3, wherein the opening is disposed closer to the sound means than the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, it is possible to prevent the wiring of the acoustic means from being pinched by the protrusion and disconnected. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, there is a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a performance means arranged below the support fastening means and performing a performance accompanying the game. A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the presentation means supports the support and fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support and fastening means is supported from below by the presentation means, so that the support and fastening means can be supported by weight without compressing the space used for presentation. things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in reverse. Petals that stop midway. Game machine N>
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; A second displacement means switchable between a non-following state and a non-following state in which displacement occurs in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means.
and a third displacement means that is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means when at least the second displacement means is in the follow-up state. A gaming machine N1 characterized by comprising:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means is displaced in the direction of the expansion and contraction movement of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. When doing so, there is a game machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the direction of expansion and contraction of the first displacement means (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so the performance is slow and the performance effect is insufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased compared to the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it includes a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the follow-up state and the non-follow-up state. Game machine N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, there is a following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means due to the action of the resistance means, and a non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means relative to the first displacement means can be increased. Thereby, the performance effect can be improved.

The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means using the driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means also serves as the driving means. be able to.

A gaming machine N4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player as having the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that it includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially. Gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, When the attitude of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the attitude of the other members or means changes accordingly, so that the displacement resistance is prevented from increasing excessively. I can do it.

<Use of shell buttons and punch holes. As for points, not achieved>
In a gaming machine comprising a first means and an accommodating means configured to be able to accommodate the first means, the accommodating means is an opening that receives the first means when accommodating the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with operating means that can be operated by the player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that if a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, the foreign object may remain inside and cause malfunction. .

On the other hand, since the gaming machine O1 is provided with a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the storage means and the first means, foreign objects are accommodated through the second opening. Means can be easily removed to the outside. This can prevent foreign matter from remaining inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the storage means includes a support section that supports the first means, and the second opening section is arranged on the opposite side of the support section with the first means interposed therebetween. Game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support section.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the accommodation means includes a low water resistant part having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant part.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance part. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object and for the purpose of discharging liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings have a shape based on a shape projected in a different direction of the solid object. A game machine O4 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
Since the opening has a shape based on the shape of the solid object in a different direction, the solid object can be easily removed through the second opening.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines O1 to O4, when the solid object partially blocks the second opening, the shadow of the solid object is visible to the player. can be done. This makes it possible for the player to notice that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object continues to remain. .

<Points regarding devising the bottom shape of the glass frame (front frame)>
A game machine comprising a first means and a first support means for supporting the first means, wherein the first support means includes a protrusion-shaped portion protruding from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the glass frame (front frame) in which the operating handle is disposed is removable from the outer frame in which the gaming board is disposed (for example, (See Publication No. 2015-159837). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the bottom of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, so there is a risk of slipping when holding the bottom with your fingers, so there is room for improvement from the perspective of ease of handling. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, the protruding shaped portion protruding from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a part on which the finger is hung, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the first support means slips from the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

Note that the arrangement of the protruding shaped portion is not limited at all, and may be any arrangement that protrudes outward from the first support means. For example, it may be provided so as to protrude in the vertical direction, or it may be provided so as to protrude toward the front side.

The gaming machine P1 includes the second support means that removably supports the first support means, and the protruding shaped portion is arranged so that the first support means is separated from a support position where the second support means is supported. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that it is arranged as follows.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1, the protruding shaped portion is provided to protrude downward from the lower bottom surface at a supporting position away from a position where the weight of the first supporting means is mainly applied. This makes it easier to hold the first support means. Thereby, the work of attaching and detaching the first support means to the second support means can be facilitated.

Note that the position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example, the first
In the case where the supporting means is supported on the front side of the second supporting means, the position may be closer to the front side, or in the case where the first supporting means is pivotally supported by the second supporting means at one end, the position closer to the other end. It may be at any position, or it may be at a position on the opposite side of the pivot position with respect to the tray that stores the game balls.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed part recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means supports the recessed part with a gap between it and the recessed part. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it is disposed facing the recessed portion.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the support position between the first means and the first supporting means is a gap formed by the recessed shape, so that the first means Powder that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub against each other due to misalignment (shavings powder, dust)
It is possible to reduce the amount of . That is, it is possible to prevent powder from accumulating and clogging the movable parts, causing malfunctions, and from accumulating powder at the detection location of the detection device, causing erroneous detection.

In this way, the recessed portion is useful not only when not in operation (for example, when opening the glass frame to clear an error, during maintenance, or when replacing the glass frame), but also during operation (for example, when playing games). This is effective even when the player is in the middle of the game or in a game waiting state (demonstration screen display state).

A gaming machine P4 in the gaming machine P3, wherein the recessed shape portion is disposed inside a range in which the protruding shape portion is protruded.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P3, it is possible to prevent the part where the recessed shape part is formed from becoming extremely thin compared to other parts and falling into insufficient strength. can. In addition, by forming the recessed portion on the back side of the protruding portion, the protruding portion can be bent and deformed in the inner and outer directions, so even if a large load is applied to the protruding portion, the protruding portion can be bent. Cracking of the shaped portion can be suppressed.

Note that the load applied to the protruding shaped portion includes, for example, the own weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary storage, the load applied when moving the first support means, and the load applied when moving the first support means.
An example is a load that is applied when something moved by a player or store clerk (such as a senryo box) collides with the support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means outside the recessed shape portion, and is supported in a manner that it abuts an overlapping portion that overlaps the protrusion shape portion in the inner and outer directions. A gaming machine P5 comprising: a contact means; and an operating section positioned on the contact means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine P4, it is possible to maintain the effect of the recessed portion while ensuring sufficient support thickness at the overlapping position that supports the abutment means, so that the operation portion can be It is possible to suppress deformation of the first support means during operation.

In the game machine P5, the contact means includes an impact damping means that is formed continuously between the contact means and the operating section and is configured to be able to damp an impact, and the impact damping means is arranged in the recessed shape section. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width that is shorter than the width.

According to the game machine P6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operation section to the contact means can be attenuated by the impact attenuation means, and in addition, the distance between the impact attenuation means and the overlapping part is increased. In this way, the impact can also be attenuated by deformation (bending) of the contact means.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an impact attenuation means. For example, it may be a block member made of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

In any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed portion includes a first portion facing the first means, and a second portion extending from the first portion, and the recessed portion includes a second portion extending from the first portion. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the second portion is formed with a greater degree of recess than the second portion.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, sufficient space is provided in the first part where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared to the first part. By forming the space of the second portion where the load applied by the recess is expected to be small to be small, the degree of freedom in designing the recessed portion can be improved while maintaining high durability.

In addition, examples of the degree of recess include the depth of recess (the greater the degree of recess, the deeper the recess) and the width of recess (the greater the degree of recess, the wider the recess).

In addition, if the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the part facing the first means is smaller than that of other parts, the concave shape corresponding to the other parts is The portion may be formed with a large degree of recess.

Further, the concave shape portion may be designed based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence of the load, for example, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the gaming parlor, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a gaming state such as a predetermined performance state or a specific gaming state). It is also possible to use the size of .

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the protruding shaped part is formed below the bottom part of the first supporting means along the front-rear direction, and the forming range becomes wider as it goes forward. A gaming machine P8.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, it is possible to improve the load capacity of the front part where the load is concentrated when the first supporting means is stood alone. Even in a storage method in which the first support means is placed alone on the floor, the first support means can be stored for a long period of time without falling down.

Note that what is considered when designing the protruding shape portion is not limited to the own weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the protruding portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated during operation of the first means and the frequency of load generation.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, a gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the lower surface of the first supporting means is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward in a direction away from the second supporting means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily independent on its own, and furthermore, the contact portion with the floor is limited to a protruding shaped portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid soiling of parts other than the protruding shaped part.

<Points regarding deformation based on the support structure and shape of the collar>
A gaming machine comprising an operation means that can be operated by a player, a first support means that supports the operation means, and a second support means that supports at least one of the first support means or the operation means, A gaming machine Q1, wherein the first support means is configured to be deformable in a direction that narrows the gap between the operation means and the second support means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which operating means such as performance buttons are supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, countermeasures against positional deviations occurring in the area around the operating means due to the load when operating the operating means are insufficient. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from this point of view.

For example, when the player's weight is applied to the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second support means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the descending distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the descending distance of the operating means. At this time, due to the difference in descending distance, on the front side,
A gap may occur between the operating means and the second support means.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second support means is lowered excessively, the first support means is deformed, thereby suppressing the generation of a gap between the operating means and the second support means. can do. In other words, since the operating means can be allowed to descend (sink) excessively,
The manner in which the operating means is supported can be simplified.

Note that the operating direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a downward direction, a rising direction, a pushing direction along the front or back, a rotating (rotating) direction, or a combination thereof.

In addition, examples of the manner in which the contact occurs from the operating direction include a case in which the normal line extending from the contact surface coincides with the operating direction, and various other aspects. For example, if the contact surface has a mortar shape in the operating direction,

It may also be formed as a surface that spreads out (with a V-shaped cross section). In this case, the operating direction can be moved closer to the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, the reaction force becomes larger as it moves closer to the center of the bottom, making it possible to effectively support the operating means. It can be done in a specific manner.

Further, a common support means that commonly supports the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the gaming machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material and is configured to be able to hold a support part that supports the operation means and a game ball, and the first support means is configured to support the operation means through the first support means. A game machine Q2 characterized in that it comprises a game ball holding section connected to the game ball holding section.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the generation of a gap between the operating means and the gaming ball holding section.

In addition, if the first support means is made of a flexible member or is connected to the operating means or the game ball holding part in a floating structure, the vibrations generated when the operating means is operated will directly hold the game ball. Since it is possible to prevent the game balls held in the game ball holding part from being displaced each time the operating means is operated, it is possible to prevent abnormal sounds from being generated.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, the first
It may be configured such that vibration transmission is prevented in the direction, while vibration transmission is maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound, and it is possible to perform a sound effect.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operating means includes an operating section configured to be operable by a player,
The first support means is configured such that the farther the connection position with the game ball holding section is from the operation section,
A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being placed on the front side.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2, the gaming machine Q3 has the ability to reduce the absolute amount of positional deviation by moving the connection position closer to the back side around the operation unit, which is a position that is prone to misalignment due to operation. While suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the ball holding part and the first support means, by arranging the connection position at the front side (closer to the player) at the far end of the operation part, which is a position where the position is difficult to shift due to operation. , it is possible to improve the design.

In any of gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operating means includes an operating section configured to be operable by a player, a main body supported by the first supporting means, and an operating section and the main body. a connecting portion that connects, the operating portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first support means is formed from a plurality of divided bodies and is detachable in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. A gaming machine Q4, characterized in that the game machine is configured in such a manner that the connecting portion is surrounded by the connecting portion.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the first support means can be easily assembled while ensuring a sufficient size of the operating section.

Note that various methods of fixing the first support means formed from the divided body are exemplified.
For example, a plurality of divided bodies may each be connected to the operating means, or one divided body among the plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, and another divided body may be connected to the divided body. You can let me.

Moreover, various aspects are exemplified as the fixing position and fixing manner of the divided body. For example, this may be done by fitting or by fastening.

In addition, in the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at multiple positions along the operating direction of the operating section, the impact generated when the operating section is operated can be distributed and received at multiple fixed positions, Since the durability of fixing the divided bodies can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of positional shift of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction in a direction that intersects (for example, perpendicularly) with the operating direction of the operating section, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operating section and the direction of tightening of the fastening screw can be made different. It is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to impact during operation.

A gaming machine Q5 in the gaming machine Q4, wherein the fastening direction of the fastening means for fastening the divided bodies intersects with the operating direction of the operating section.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied in the fastening direction when operating the operation section, so that the fastening by the fastening means becomes loose during the operation.
It is possible to prevent the split body from being unlocked.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as the direction intersecting the operating direction. For example, if the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction that intersects the operation direction is the direction that intersects a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (e.g. (direction along the rotation axis) is exemplified.

Also, for example, if the operating direction is along a predetermined straight line (in the case of a push-in operation or a pull-out operation), the direction that intersects with the operating direction is along a plane that intersects with the predetermined straight line. The following directions are exemplified.

In this case, if a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction with a high proportion (frequency) of operations) are assumed during the game, at least The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or may be set in a direction intersecting a plurality of planes, that is, a direction intersecting any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the split body has a plurality of fastening points, and a first plane including one fastening point and a second plane including another fastening point are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even if a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is applied to the other fastening points at the same time. Since it is possible to prevent the split bodies from being dislocated at the same time at both fastening locations, it is possible to prevent the fastening from loosening.

Note that the fastening locations of the divided bodies may be arranged at locations where the load is concentrated when the operating section is operated. In this case as well, another fastening point will be placed on a plane different from the plane where the load is concentrated, so it is possible to prevent the division body from shifting its position or the fastening from loosening due to the load during operation. can be prevented.

In any of gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operating means includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation of the operating section, and the detecting means is arranged at a position away from the dividing position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient in the divided position, and when the operating part moves in accordance with the operation of the operating part in the divided position, the operating part In areas where there is a risk of dust (dust, etc.) being generated due to friction between the split body and the split body, the detection means is placed away from the split position, which prevents powder (dust, etc.) from being detected by the detection means. can do. Thereby, the occurrence of false detection can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means is an interference means that interferes with the divided body in the dividing direction when the game is possible, on the side of the divided body that is moving away from the divided body in the dividing direction (proximity and separation direction). A gaming machine Q8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the positional shift of the operating means with respect to the dividing body in the dividing direction.

The interference means may be formed so that it interferes with the operating means in the assembled state, but does not interfere with the operating means before entering the assembled state, for example, during assembly work. For example, if the divided body is made of a flexible material, the divided body can be bent during assembly, making it easier to avoid interference with the interference means and maintaining ease of assembly. can do.

Further, for example, even if the divided body is made of a hard material, it may be configured so that it does not interfere with the interference means during the assembly process. That is, it may be formed from a shape that does not interfere with each other when viewed in the direction of assembly before fastening (for example, when viewed in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer together for assembly). In this case, while ensuring ease of assembly, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the divided body when play is possible.

A gaming machine Q9 in any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, wherein the second supporting means includes a receiving recessed part that is recessed so as to be able to receive the first supporting means.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, since the first supporting means is received in the receiving recessed part, the first supporting means is Even if the operating means and the first supporting means are displaced, the repulsive force from the receiving recess allows the operating means and the first supporting means to quickly return to their original positions.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle with a center of a radius of curvature disposed on the operating section side of the operating means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, it is possible to secure a large area in which the operating section can be placed, and in addition, when the player grasps the operating section, it does not feel cramped. It can prevent you from feeling like. Thereby, it is possible to improve the design of the operating section and the operability of the operating section.

In any of gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a striped portion processed into a striped shape for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the striped portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A gaming machine Q11 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, since the extending direction of the striped portion is different for each region, the first support means has anisotropy in rigidity. can be configured.

Note that the design criteria for the extending direction of the striped portions are not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be used to design an extension direction with a high yield, or when the load generated when operating the operating means acts in a different manner in each area, the best way to deal with the load may be determined. The direction may be the direction in which the striped portion extends.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the board>
a vibration means; a light emitting means disposed at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to be able to emit light;
In the game machine R1, the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibration means.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-16088). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emitting effects.

To be more specific, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, etc.) is placed behind the speaker in order to prevent the board from receiving vibrations from the speaker. In the areas where the light is displayed, the light emitting effect cannot be produced and it becomes dark. in this case,
In the front area where the gaming machine is easily visible, the area where a gorgeous presentation can be made is narrowed. In the first place, the approximate size of gaming machines such as pachinko machines is determined by standards.
Securing a light emitting area is recognized as an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, since the light emitting means has a range in which it can be displaced with respect to the vibration means, the light emitting means can receive the vibrations of the vibration device, and the light emitting means can be arranged at the vibration generation point of the vibration means. can be approached. As a result, the front area can be brightly viewed regardless of the location where the vibration of the vibration means is generated, so it is possible to improve the light emission performance.

Note that the form of the vibration means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an acoustic means configured to be able to output sound, or an operating means having a built-in vibration device. Further, the device is not limited to a means that can vibrate actively, but may be a means configured to be able to vibrate (passively vibrate) in response to an external force load.

Various aspects are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, the vibrating membrane included in a speaker,
For example, examples include an exhaust port from which the back pressure of speaker vibrations found in a bass reflex type speaker is discharged, and a path connected from a vibrating part to the exhaust port.

The vibration device may be a rotationally driven vibration device (for example, a vibrator),
A vibrating device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear drive may also be used.

Note that the mode of close arrangement is not limited in any way, and may be any mode as long as the player can visually recognize the light from the light emitting means. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked on the vibration means,
In this case, the stacking direction may be a front-back direction, a direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or a direction inclined inward from the left and right ends to the left and right.

A gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the gaming machine R1 includes a plurality of the vibrating means, a light-emitting substrate on which the light-emitting means is arranged, and the light-emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibrating means. .

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine R1, the light emitting board tends to be displaced (vibration, positional shift, etc.) due to the influence of vibrations generated when the vibration means outputs sound. While it is possible to change the display mode of the light emitting means, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be varied by changing the vibration means that outputs sound. ) can be increased.

Note that the number of light emitting substrates may be one or more. When there are a plurality of substrates, it is sufficient that at least one light emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibration means. In this case, since it is possible to provide a combination of a light-emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibrations generated by the vibration means and a light-emitting substrate that is not displaced, it is possible to further increase the types of changes in the display mode of the light-emitting means.

The gaming machine R2 includes a holding means for holding the vibration means, the light emitting substrate is not fixed in the lamination direction with respect to the holding means, and the holding means holds the light emitting substrate in the lamination direction. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that it is configured to generate a load in a direction that suppresses displacement of a gaming board.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine R2, it is possible to suppress the holding means from being displaced along with the displacement of the light emitting substrate.

Note that the non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected with screws, if no fastening force is applied (for example, the holding means is simply prevented from coming off), it can be said that the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not fixed.

Furthermore, the expression "non-fixed" does not mean that large displacements are allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front and rear positions of the light emitting board to the holding means, the front and rear positions of the light emitting board can be determined (stable front and back position, allowing small vibrations), and the shape of the light emitting board can be By surrounding the direction orthogonal to the front and back with a slightly larger frame-shaped frame member, displacement in directions other than the front and rear directions (up, down, left and right) can be suppressed.

This makes it possible to reduce the influence of vibrations generated from the vibration means on the light emitting board compared to when the light emitting board is fixed to the holding means in the same way as the vibration means, thereby improving the positional stability of the light emitting board. can be increased.

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, a fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, and a fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means; regulating means for regulating the movement direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, the fixing means moving toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction; Gaming machine R4 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the advancing direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the advancing direction is restricted, even if the fixation by the fixing means becomes loose (even if some of the fixing means become loose), the displacement of the fixing means will be less than the displacement of the fixing means. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

Thereby, the positional relationship between the first member and the second member can be easily maintained. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from separating or coming closer than expected.

Note that various modes are exemplified as the mode of progress. For example, a rod-shaped member may be inserted into the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement region whose displacement is suppressed compared to the first displacement region. The gaming machine R5 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines R2 to R4, a change in the light emitting mode when the light emitting board is displaced due to the vibration of the vibration means is changed for each area of the light emitting board. can be done.

Thereby, by designing the light emitting effect in the first displacement area and the light emitting effect in the second displacement area in different ways, it is possible to produce an excellent effect. For example, a surface emitting means that produces uniform light emission by surface emitting is arranged as the first refracting means that receives and refracts the light irradiated from the first displacement region, while receiving and refracting the light irradiated from the second displacement region. As the second refraction means, an edge light emitting means is arranged to show high brightness light to the player by totally reflecting the light incident from one end (edge) and emitting it from the other end (edge). By doing so, it is possible to perform an innovative light emission effect in which the light emission mode (for example, brightness) differs from region to region.

Note that the manner in which displacement is suppressed is not limited at all. For example, the mode of suppression may be determined by the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibration means, or the mode of suppression may be determined by the manner in which the light emitting substrate is held.

For example, in terms of the positional relationship between the plurality of vibration means and the light emitting substrate, the areas located at the same position from each vibration means are such that the influence from one vibration means is canceled out by the influence from the other vibration means. , displacement may be suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines R1 to R5 includes a fastening screw for fastening and fixing, and an opposing part arranged to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw becomes loose, the head of the fastening screw A gaming machine R6 characterized in that the portion and the opposing portion are arranged so as to be able to come into contact with each other.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines R1 to R5, by regulating the progress of the fastening screw by the opposing part, the fastening relationship deteriorates further when the fastening screw becomes loose. This can be prevented.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as to what to do after the fastening screw becomes loose. For example, if a tightening screw becomes loose, it may be configured to be able to detect the loosening electrically, or an opposing portion may be formed on the surface of the vibrating device to detect the loosening of the tightening screw. It may be configured so that if the device is vibrated when the device is loosened, an abnormal noise is generated and the user notices the loosening, or the device may be configured so that the loosened portion is repaired through regular maintenance without providing any special notification.

Any one of gaming machines R1 to R6 includes a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate, and a connecting means fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member,
The connecting means is configured in such a manner that deformation in a direction intersecting the connecting direction occurs more easily than deforming in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. Characteristic gaming machine R7.

Here, if the connecting means is configured in such a manner that it is easily deformed in the connecting direction, the interval between the connecting positions will change in both directions, such as expanding and contracting, and the favorable and unfavorable effects will change periodically. This is not desirable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in a direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that the interval between the connecting positions is changed only to the side that is reduced. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other only in situations where the connecting means is deformed (for example, when a load is applied to the connecting means). While the load in the direction in which the member and the second member face each other is set low, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light emitting substrate is likely to shake due to vibration by the vibration means, and the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed together can be increased. It is possible to suppress the shaking of the printed circuit board.

Note that the manner in which deformation occurs easily in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed such that the thickness differs in each direction, or the size of the load generated on the connecting means may be configured to vary in each direction.

Furthermore, the manner in which the load is switched in the direction of pressing against each other is not limited at all. For example, a drive device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other can be changed at any timing by controlling the drive device.

In any of gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibration means is configured to be able to change the direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. Features gaming machine R8.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of effects of the vibration of the vibration means on the light emitting means.

<Technical philosophy of the side light emitting means. Edge light travels to the side and back of the component>
A light emitting means configured to be able to emit light; and a light guiding means configured to be able to guide light; A gaming machine S1 comprising: a light guide means; and a second light guide means that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are configured so that LED light enters from the end of a plate-shaped member and is emitted from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015
(See Publication No. 159875). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the lighting effect.

To explain in more detail, when creating a light-emitting effect using an LED board formed from a flat plate, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the board can be reduced, which helps in reducing costs, but it is not possible to create a three-dimensional light-emitting effect as is. It was difficult to achieve both.

In other words, differences in light emission (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) occur between near and far positions with respect to the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be dark (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the performance will increase relative to the area of the LED board, which will hinder cost reduction. It turns out. Therefore, it was inevitable to choose between improving production effects and reducing costs.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S1, the light guiding means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different ways, so even if the distance from the light emitting means is different, the performance effect is reduced. (change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light emission performance from the perspective of producing effects while reducing costs.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light guide means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent material, it may be a member that emits light almost uniformly from a surface such as frosted glass, or it may be formed by curing a milky white material such as resin. It may be a white material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen, it may be a material that allows display to be projected onto the material itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or it may be a material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen. It is also possible to use a member according to the above aspect.

A gaming machine S2 in the gaming machine S1, wherein the light guide means is configured so that the way it illuminates changes in stages in accordance with the difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, even if the substrate on which the light guiding means is arranged is formed from a flat plate, the light guiding means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. When
It is possible to perform an effect in which the curved surface emits light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine S1 or S2 includes an accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and a light emitting board on which the light emitting means is arranged, the accommodating means supporting the light emitting board and the light guiding means. a supporting means fixed at least at a first position, and a shielding means configured to be able to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is located at a position outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A gaming machine S3 characterized in that it is placed on the side.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the gaming machine S3 can loosen the fixation at the first position while the shielding means is assembled, so that the position of the light guiding means relative to the supporting means can be easily adjusted. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the misalignment between the light emitting means and the light guide means, and maintenance efficiency can be improved.

Note that the mode of shielding of the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, the light guiding means may be shielded so that the player cannot touch it but still be able to see it, or it may be constructed so that the player cannot touch or see the light guiding means. You may do so.

In addition, when the first positions are formed at multiple locations, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the multiple first positions may be located outside the outer shape of the shielding means. It may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

In the game machine S3, the light emitting board is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means is in the shape of a long plate, and the first position is located at the position of the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 characterized in that it is arranged at an end in the longitudinal direction.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S3, the light guiding means is shaped like a long plate,
Since the first position is arranged at the end in the longitudinal direction, the positional deviation of the light guiding means can be easily corrected by loosening the fixation of the first position and applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guiding means. .

To be more specific, the correction of the positional deviation of the light guiding means is compensated for by deforming the light guiding means in the lateral direction,
By compensating for slippage caused by applying a strong load, the position of the light guiding means can be changed even if the fixation is loosened at one end in the longitudinal direction and the fixation is maintained at the other end. Misalignment can be easily repaired.

Furthermore, in the case of a support mode in which the light-emitting substrate is pressed against the support means by the light-guiding means, the degree to which the light-emitting substrate is supported by the support means can be weakened as the light-guiding means bends and deforms.
Therefore, even without removing the light guiding means from the supporting means, by loosening the fixation at the first position and flexing the light guiding means, the degree of support for the light emitting substrate can be weakened, and in this state, a load is applied to the light emitting substrate. By giving , it is possible to correct the positional shift of the light emitting substrate.

Note that the adjustment width of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, there is a design basis in which the external shape of the light emitting means disposed on the light emitting substrate is mechanically regulated so that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means does not shift to the extent that it completely deviates from the irradiation direction. The adjustment range may be just enough to correct the positional deviation in the area (small adjustment range), or based on a design that secures a large adjustment range in advance, the part to be irradiated by the light guide means can be adjusted in the irradiation direction based on the external shape of the light emitting means. The position of the light guiding means may be adjustable to a position where it is completely out of sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means can remain in the same structure, and the mode of the light emitting effect that is visually recognized during the same effect can be changed. In this case, for example, when preparing gaming machines with the same configuration so that they can be played with different gameplay features (for example, when configuring gaming machines with different specifications),
Since the mode of light emission can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guide means without greatly changing the mechanical configuration of each part, the burden (for example, cost) related to manufacturing the game machine can be reduced.

Note that the non-fixed mode is not limited at all. For example, any aspect other than the case where it is fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixed. Furthermore, the term "edge" is an expression of the intention to avoid being limited to an edge. That is, the first position may be placed at a position including the periphery of the longitudinal end.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guide means and the shielding means are configured to reduce the relative positional deviation as the distance between them is reduced. A gaming machine S5, characterized in that the displacement prevention part includes a fixing part to the support means.

Here, it is necessary to connect wiring that conducts electricity to the light emitting board, and misalignment or chipping of the wiring will directly affect the malfunction of the light emitting means. Preferably, the structure is such that misalignment between the substrate and the support means does not easily occur.

Considering the performance effect, it is preferable that the light guiding means should be able to be easily aligned in case of misalignment with the light emitting substrate, on the premise that misalignment with the light emitting substrate should not occur easily. , it may be better to hold it on the supporting means side. On the other hand, if a positional shift occurs between the light guiding means and the shielding means, there is a risk that the light guiding means and the shielding means will collide with each other, resulting in poor appearance, so it may be better to hold the light guide means on the shielding means side.

Since the shielding means is a part that can be touched by the player, it is preferable to fix it to the support means serving as the base in consideration of strength. In this way, various support modes were expected for each means.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S3 or S4, due to the action of the positional shift prevention section, the mutual positioning of the light guide means and the shielding means can be easily performed during assembly without directly fixing them. Not only this, but also the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means can be easily maintained during the game.

Note that the form of the positional displacement prevention section is not limited at all. For example, the recesses and recesses may have the same shape and can be fitted, the recesses and recesses that can be fitted may have a shape that remains unchanged along the assembly direction, or the recesses and recesses that can be fitted may have a convexity that tapers closer to the mating member. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any one of gaming machines S1 to S5, the light guiding means includes a main body, a separating extending portion extending from the main body toward a side away from the light emitting means, and an outer shape of the extending portion. an opposing extending portion extending toward the light emitting means and having a cross-sectional shape of A game machine S6 characterized in that it is provided with a section.

According to the gaming machine S6, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total internal reflection light emitting section from entering the parts other than the opposing extension part, so that the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting part can be suppressed from entering the part other than the opposing extension part and the part other than the separating extension part and the opposing extension part. It is possible to make a clear boundary between the two and to make it possible to perform an effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) with a short boundary.

Note that the manner in which total reflection is performed is not limited at all. For example, the positional relationship between the light guide means and the light emitting means, the direction of the emitted light, the width of the emitted light, the material and shape of the light guide means,
and a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guiding means is formed from a frame shape that forms a covering part covered by the light emitting board and an outer shape of the covering part, and has a similar shape to the outer shape of the light emitting board. A gaming machine S7 comprising: a frame portion provided with a frame portion, wherein the opposing extending portion extends from the covered portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S6, since light can be made to enter the frame from the connection point, the effect of the light emitting production of the frame can be improved, and the opposing extension part is By functioning as reinforcing ribs, it is possible to improve the strength of the light guiding means.

According to this, if the frame extends to the rear of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect in which the side opposite to the light emitting direction is illuminated.

In the gaming machine S7, the opposing extending portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, is connected to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and is connected to the frame portion at the other end. A gaming machine S8 characterized in that it is spaced apart.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the opposing extension part,
Since it is possible to configure an end portion that allows light to enter the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and an end portion that restricts the incidence of light, the degree of freedom in designing a light emitting effect using the frame portion can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at a projected position of the opposing extending portion and the separating extending portion, and the inclination angle of the tip shape of the separating extending portion with respect to the light irradiation direction is The gaming machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the ends of the cross-sectional shapes of the opposing extending portion and the separating extending portion.

According to the game machine S9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the separation extension part is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emission intensity of the light emitting means is reduced. It is possible to perform a light emission effect without giving a sense of discomfort to a player while keeping the values uniform. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separated extension portion can emit light to the same extent.

<Technical philosophy of top light emitting means. Points for changing the way the light is emitted depending on the distance from the light emitting means>
A light-emitting means configured to be capable of emitting light; and a light-receiving means capable of receiving light, the light-receiving means having a first light-receiving means configured to receive light emitted from the light-emitting means in a first manner; A gaming machine T1 comprising: a second light receiving means that receives light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, LED light is incident from the edge of a planar member,
There are game machines that are configured to emit light from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015
(Refer to Publication No.-159875). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the lighting effects.

To explain in more detail, when creating a light-emitting effect using an LED board formed from a flat plate, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the board can be reduced, which helps in reducing costs, but it is not possible to create a three-dimensional light-emitting effect as is. It was difficult to achieve both.

In other words, differences in light emission (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) occur between near and far positions with respect to the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be dark (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the performance will increase relative to the area of the LED board, which will hinder cost reduction. It turns out. Therefore, it was inevitable to choose between improving production effects and reducing costs.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive light from the light emitting means in different ways, so even if the distance from the light emitting means is different, the performance effect is reduced (change ) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light emission performance from the perspective of producing effects while reducing costs.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light receiving means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent material, it may be a member that emits light almost uniformly from a surface such as frosted glass, or it may be formed by curing a milky white material such as resin. It may be a white material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen, it may be a material that allows display to be projected onto the material itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or it may be a material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen. It is also possible to use a member according to the above aspect.

In the gaming machine T1, the gaming machine T2 is characterized in that the light-receiving means is configured so that the way it illuminates changes in stages in response to a difference in distance from the light-emitting means.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T1, even if the substrate on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed from a flat plate, the light receiving means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. To,
It is possible to perform an effect in which the curved surface emits light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine T1 or T2 includes an accommodation means for accommodating the light emitting means, and a light emitting board on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the accommodation means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting board. The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that it comprises a dividing means for dividing an area into which the light receiving means is divided, and the light receiving means is configured so that the way the light is illuminated changes depending on the area divided by the dividing means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the frame of the dividing means is placed at the boundary where the way the light receiving means illuminates changes, so the way the light receiving means illuminates can be changed rapidly. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player when the game is played. Thereby, even if the number of light-emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the effect of the light-emitting production using the light-emitting substrates.

A game machine T4, in the game machine T3, wherein the light emitting board is aligned by the partitioning means supporting the light emitting board from a direction opposing the biasing force applied to the light emitting board.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3, assembly work can be facilitated by making it easier to align the light-emitting substrate and the partitioning means, and in addition, the light-emitting substrate can be easily aligned during use. It is possible to suppress misalignment between the partitioning means and the partitioning means.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means includes a through hole formed in correspondence with the shape of the light emitting section disposed on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means includes a through hole that is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine T5 characterized by comprising a section.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting part and the light receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the dimensions of the partitioning means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion part can be reduced. Total reflection is facilitated, and it is possible to prevent the intensity of the light emitted from the light emitting means from decreasing.

In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-insertion through hole that is bored corresponding to the shape of the light emitting part disposed on the light emitting board and does not receive the insertion part, and the non-insertion through hole is ,
A gaming machine T6, characterized in that an opening is formed in such a manner that the further away from the light emitting board it is, the opening becomes larger, and the surface thereof is brought into contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting board.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T5, the through hole through which the insertion part is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting the light emitted from the light emitting part at a wide angle, and in addition, the light receiving means Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the two.

In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means has a cross-sectional shape larger on a side farther from the light emitting means than on a side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area where the player visually recognizes the light via the light receiving means is made larger compared to the area where the light emitting means is formed. I can do it.

In gaming machine T7, the light-receiving means includes a light-conducting portion extending from the light-emitting means side, and a cut-out boundary surface that intersects with the light-conducting portion, and the cut-out boundary surface is a part of the light-conducting portion. A gaming machine T8 characterized in that the gaming machine T8 is arranged at a position where the front-rear surface portion in the extending direction is shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger as it moves forward, the punched boundary surface portion is formed. However, the thickness of the light-conducting portion can be easily made uniform. Thereby, total reflection can be easily maintained over the extending direction of the light conducting portion.

In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting section extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting section is formed in a line shape including the base end of the insertion section. Characteristic gaming machine T9.

According to the gaming machine T9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means is made easier to see as line-shaped light (light mixed with light from point light sources). Therefore, the feeling of a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs.

<Point consisting of two directions where the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine comprising a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means includes a first fixing means that generates a fixing force in a first direction, and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means. A gaming machine U1 characterized by comprising: second fixing means that generates a fixing force in a second direction that is inclined with respect to the second direction.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is constructed by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front and rear directions (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). . However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the shape of the structure is determined by the arrangement of the fixing means, resulting in a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the structure is reduced.

For example, when inserting a fastening screw that is inserted into the fixing means in the front-rear direction, a light emitting member such as an LED cannot be placed at a position that interferes with the fastening screw when viewed from the front in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. In other words, the area where the fixing means can be placed actually coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, so the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be placed.

In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting board from the back side needs to be made larger than the light emitting board to accommodate the fixing means. This limits the size of the light emitting substrate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the insertion direction of the fastening screw that fixes the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction that are inclined to each other, so that all the fixing means are inserted along the front-rear direction. Compared to the case where the player is inserted, it is possible to secure a wider performance area on the side that is visible to the player.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that its outer surface includes a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction. Game machine U2
.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine 1, since the external surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, even if the external surface is about to deform due to external force, there is sufficient resistance. A force can be generated, and deformation of the external surface can be suppressed.

A gaming machine U3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine U1 or U2, a suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in fixing force is provided at at least one of the fixing locations of the fixing means.

Here, if the first means and the second means are composed of resin molded products and the cutting direction of the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction and the cutting direction are inclined to each other. Since it is inclined, there is a possibility that the fixing force of the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side may be weakened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine U1 or U2, the reduction in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is a common part. can do.

Note that the structure of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a loosening prevention means that prevents the fixing from loosening, or a loosening regulating means that restricts further loosening when the fixing becomes loose.

The gaming machine U4 is characterized in that the suppressing means includes a reporting means capable of reporting a fixation failure of the fixing means.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine U3, the notifying means notifies the fixing failure of the fixing means, so that loosening of the fastening screw can be detected at an early stage.

Note that the configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically reporting such as a detection means such as a sensor, or it may be a structural means that causes a change in appearance.
Structural means include, for example, a transmission change means that changes the transmission intensity of vibrations generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, a light production change means that blocks light emission from the inside and generates a shadow that can be seen from the outside, An example of this is a vibration notification means that makes contact with a vibrating part of a vibrating device to generate abnormal noise or intensify the vibration to alert the player.

Any one of the gaming machines U2 to U4 includes a third means disposed between the first means and the second means, and the third means is arranged between the first surface and the second surface. A game machine U5 characterized in that it is arranged between.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines U2 to U4, the first means and the second means can generate resistance force in a plurality of directions as component directions of the fixing force of the fixing means. Therefore, the third means can be easily held safely.

Note that the configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may have a configuration in which the first means side is made visible to the player, while the second means side is not made visible to the player. In this case, by setting the side where the gap between the first surface and the second surface is wider as the first means side and the narrower side as the second means side, while ensuring a wide area that is visible to the player, the side that is not visible to the player can be The area occupied by the configuration can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 includes a fourth means disposed on the opposite side of the third means across the first surface, and the first surface is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. A gaming machine U
6.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means can interfere with each other when viewed from the front, so that the third means and the fourth means can interfere with each other. It is possible to secure a large area in which the images can be placed.

A gaming machine U7, in any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, wherein the first fixing means and the second fixing means are each arranged in pairs with predetermined intervals.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, since the first fixing means and the second fixing means are each arranged as a pair with a predetermined interval, the effect of one of the fixing means Deformation along the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be prevented from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, loosening of the fixing means can be avoided.

<The rigidity of the game board compensates for the decrease in rigidity due to the notch (through hole) on the side of the back case>
In a game machine comprising a game board and a facing means whose edges are arranged opposite to the game board, the facing means has proximal parts arranged close to the game board at the left and right edges. , a gaming machine ZA1 characterized in that the formation of the adjacent portion is asymmetrical.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a gaming board that constitutes a gaming area, and a back case in which a movable unit and the like are disposed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-77627). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machines, the internal space of the back case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the game board and the back case, making it difficult to secure enough space for the arrangement of movable units, etc. The problem was that it was difficult.

In particular, in right-handed machines where the game is played with the right hand in a variable probability state (high probability state) or jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight is often concentrated on the right side of the gaming area, so It was required to secure an internal space in the back case on the back side of the flow path (flow path on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the hit game ball flows down.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine ZA1, since the formation of the adjacent portion is asymmetrical,
Since the arrangement of the left and right edges of the facing means with respect to the game board can be made asymmetrical, instead of sacrificing the internal area of either the left or right facing means, the internal area of either the left or right facing means can be secured. It can be made easier. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the means facing the game board can be improved, and sufficient space can be secured for the arrangement of movable units, etc., and the degree of freedom in presentation that can be seen by players through the game board can be improved. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the end of the game board (for example, the right-handed play channel) can be illuminated by a light emitting means of a moving character, or by light emitted from a liquid crystal display device.

Note that the manner in which the proximal portion is formed is not limited at all. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, it may be placed away from the game board, or it may be a combination thereof.

Note that the form of the proximal portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be possible to secure a wide area where the connection part (contact part) used for connection with the game board is not formed.
The connecting portion (contact portion) may be arranged after suppressing the area occupied by the connecting portion (contact portion).

Moreover, the aspect of left-right asymmetry is not limited at all. For example, the area where the proximal part is formed may be asymmetrical, the direction in which the proximal part is formed may be asymmetrical, or the functional part (female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened) disposed in the proximal part may be asymmetrical. The formation position, formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, left-right direction, or other direction), or the number of formed fastening parts may be left-right asymmetrical.

In the gaming machine ZA1, the facing means includes an arrangement part in which the proximal part is formed at an end on the game board side and is disposed opposite to each other in the left-right direction, and the proximal part is formed in a direction in which the proximal part is formed in a left-right direction with respect to the arrangement part. A gaming machine ZA2 characterized by having an asymmetrical configuration.

According to the game machine ZA2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement parts can be configured asymmetrically with respect to the game board. Note that the form in which the formation direction is asymmetrical is not limited at all. For example, the forming direction may be opposite to the left-right symmetrical direction (same direction on both the left and right sides), or may be formed in a direction that intersects the left and right sides (for example, a perpendicular direction).

Examples of the forming direction include the extending direction (installing direction) in which the plate-like portion is extended, the recessing direction (shaving direction) in which the recessed portion is recessed as a notch, and the like.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximal portion includes an opposing surface that is a surface that faces the gaming board, and an opposing side that is a side that faces the gaming board, and is compared to a portion on the left side of the gaming board. The gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that a portion of the right side of the gaming board has a larger proportion of the opposing sides than the opposing surface.

According to the game machine ZA3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZA1 or ZA2, the horizontal width occupied by the adjacent portion can be made narrower on the right side of the game board than on the left side of the game board.

A game machine ZA4, which is any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3, and includes a suppressing means for suppressing displacement of the game board or the opposing means in the opposing direction.

According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. Note that the arrangement of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged at a position away from the game board (including a position where it abuts the opposing means), or it may be arranged at a position away from the opposing means (including a position where it abuts the game board). However, it may be arranged at a position between the game board and the facing means (including a position where it comes into contact with at least one of the game board or the facing means).

In gaming machine ZA4, gaming machine ZA5 is characterized in that the suppressing means is disposed on the gaming board side.

According to the game machine ZA5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength (secure rigidity) of the game unit as a whole without providing a special member to the opposing means.

A gaming machine ZA6 in gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, wherein the suppressing means includes an overlapping part that overlaps the outermost surface of the opposing means in front view.

According to the gaming machine ZA6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the degree of freedom in designing the interior of the gaming board, so while securing the space for the right-handed flow path in the gaming area, It is possible to maintain the strength (ensuring rigidity) of the game unit as a whole.

In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the opposing means may include a non-contacting portion that does not contact the gaming board at an edge of the outermost surface in the predetermined direction on the gaming board side. Characteristic game machine ZA7.

According to the gaming machine ZA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the gaming board and the non-contacting part is used as the location for the drive device of the variable winning opening, and the drive device It can be effectively utilized by making it a path for wiring connected to a winning sensor or a light emitting device, or as a place for arranging a light emitting device.

In any of gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the gaming board is formed from a resin material,
A gaming machine characterized in that the facing means includes a presentation means disposed between the game board, and a front end of the presentation means can be placed in front of a front end of the facing means. ZA8
.

According to the gaming machine ZA8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the space for arranging the presentation means can also be expanded to the front side.

<Various lighting modes for movable accessories>
a light emitting device that irradiates light to a predetermined light emitting region; a displacement device configured such that at least a portion of the displacement section includes a first position that at least partially overlaps the light emitting region when viewed in a predetermined direction;
A game machine ZB1 characterized in that the light emitting area includes a possible area that is configured to be visible in a plurality of types of light emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacing means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured so that a light emitting device and a displacement device overlap when viewed from the front (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there was a problem in that the light emitting means and the displacement means were only visible individually, and the presentation effect using the overlapping was insufficient. That is, the displacement means is arranged in front of the light emitting means so that the light emitting means is hidden by the displacement means,
There was a problem that the production effect was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, the light emitting means is configured to be visible in different light emitting modes depending on the mode of the displacement means, so that it is possible to diversify the presentation modes.

The mode of the displacement means includes, for example, the arrangement mode of the displacement means, the displacement mode of the displacement means, the direction (attitude) of the displacement means, the light emission mode of the light emitting means disposed on the displacement means, etc. Illustrated. Examples of the arrangement of the displacement means include a case where a part of the displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, a case where the entire displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, and the like. The displacement mode of the displacement means is as follows:
Examples include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means, and a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means. The orientation (attitude) of the displacement means may be such that the front surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means, the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means, and the surface between them faces the light emitting means. Illustrated.

Examples of the light emitting mode of the light emitting means include a mode in which the light emitting means emits light toward the displacement means side, and a mode in which the light emitting means emits light toward the displacement means side, and a mode in which the light emitting means emits light toward the side away from the displacement means, lights up, blinks, or turns off. is exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZB1, the possible region includes a first state in which the displacement means is arranged at the first position, and a second state in which the displacement means is arranged at a second position different from the first position. The gaming machine ZB2 is characterized in that it is possible to configure a case in which the light emission mode visually recognized from the predetermined direction is different.

According to the game machine ZB2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine ZB1, the light emission mode can be changed by changing the position of the displacement means, so that the impression given to the player can be improved while the light emission mode of the displacement means alone remains the same. can change suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting means includes a substrate on which a light emitting section is disposed, and a refracting means arranged to be able to refract light emitted from the light emitting section, and the substrate A gaming machine ZB3, characterized in that the refraction means includes a first refraction section that is disposed outside the possible area when viewed from the direction, and the refraction means overlaps the possible area when viewed from the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of the light that is visually recognized through the first refracting section is a combination of the light emitted from the light emitting section and the color and brightness based on the displacement means. It can be expressed by

In addition, by narrowing the area in which the substrate is formed, it is possible to secure a region for arranging other components, such as a drive device that generates a driving force for the displacement means, and a space for the displacement means to be displaced.

In gaming machine ZB3, gaming machine ZB4 is characterized in that the displacement means has a larger displacement at a position overlapping the possible area when viewed in the predetermined direction than at other positions.

According to the game machine ZB4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at a position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at a position where the light emitting means occupies a small space. Therefore, the space occupied by the light emitting means and the displacing means can be suppressed, and the degree of freedom of displacement of the displacing means can be secured to the maximum extent.

Note that the magnitude of the displacement is not limited at all. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, the positive and negative values may be set in opposite directions, or the displacement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction (component) may be compared. The comparison may include the number of members that are configured in the displacement means and that are displaced.

In any of gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes a second light emitting means that emits light in a manner that is visible from the predetermined direction, and a transmitting means that transmits light emitted from the second light emitting means. A gaming machine ZB5, characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which a width in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the displacement means changes along the displacement direction of the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZB5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines ZB1 to ZB4, the width of the light of the second light emitting means that is visually recognized through the possible area is determined by determining at which position in the displacement section the displacement means is arranged. It can be changed by

In any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the gaming machine ZB6 is characterized in that the possible area is arranged at the center of a window portion that is opened so that the liquid crystal display area can be viewed.

According to the gaming machine ZB6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the light emission mode of the possible area can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display area.

Note that the manner in which the possible areas are arranged is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified.
For example, it may be scattered around the window (including the case where the possible area is in one place), or
A circular (arc) shape surrounding the window may also be used.

Any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6 includes a substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed,
The gaming machine ZB7 is characterized in that the board is not provided with fastening means for fastening at the end on the possible area side.

According to the game machine ZB7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure the arrangement space for the light emitting means on the side of the possible area, and also to prevent the shadow of the fastening means from appearing in the possible area. can be avoided.

A gaming machine ZB8, in the gaming machine ZB7, further comprising a covering means that is covered in such a manner as to cover the space between the possible area and the board when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZB7, since the boundary position between the possible area and the board is hidden by the covering means, there is no possibility that the visibility of light may deteriorate near the edge of the board. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

The gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8 includes a board holding means for holding the board, and the board holding means includes a gap forming part for forming a gap to facilitate assembly of the board,
The gaming machine ZB9 is characterized in that the gap forming portion is closed in the assembled state.

According to the gaming machine ZB9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, the gap forming part facilitates the assembly of the board, and it is possible to avoid problems such as light leaking from the gap forming part. . Further, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with other members and for positioning the other members.

In any of the game machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board is provided with a connector portion to which wiring is connected, and the connector portion is disposed at a position away from the end portion on the possible area side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the gaming machine ZB10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, by applying a load to the wiring connected to the connector part, a moment can be generated starting from the end on the possible area side. Therefore, the substrate can be easily taken out even in a situation where the board cannot be taken out directly.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and cutoff>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the drive means to the displacement means in a predetermined state. A gaming machine comprising a transmission means, wherein the transmission means includes a transmission part that transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted part of the displacement means, and in a driving state of the drive means, the transmission part transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted part of the displacement means. A game machine ZC1 characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be able to suppress displacement when the displacement means is not brought into contact with the portion.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided to a recessed part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-234152). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above,
Since the posture of the displacement member is maintained through support by the columnar section, there is a problem in that it is difficult to perform other effects using the columnar section while the posture of the displacement member is maintained.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed even when the transmission section is not in contact with the transmission section, so the transmission section can be used for other effects while the posture of the displacement means is maintained. can be used.

Note that the mode of the transmission means is not limited at all. For example, a single gear or a plurality of gears disposed between the displacement means and the drive means may be used, or a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members influence each other may be used.

Note that the manner in which displacement can be suppressed is not limited at all. For example, it may be biased by gravity or the elastic force of a spring member, it may be locked (engaged) with a claw-like member, or it may be restrained by coming into contact with a member that functions as a stopper. It may also be in a form where it is done. Furthermore, examples of the suppression possible include a mode of reducing the displacement of the displacement means, a mode of preventing (regulating) the displacement of the displacement means, and the like.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmitting means includes a forming part formed along a movement locus of the transmitting part, and the forming part is configured such that the transmitting part is non-aligned with respect to the displacing means in the moving direction of the displacing means. A game machine ZC2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means in a state of contact.

According to the gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacing means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming part and the displacing means, so that the stability of the arrangement of the displacing means against external forces is improved. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the forming part extends from the transmitting part along the displacement direction of the transmitting means, and the distance between the forming part and the displacing means is longer than the distance between the transmitting part and the displacing means. A gaming machine ZC3 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZC2, in the opposing direction between the displacement means and the transmission means, a part where a load is generated when the driving force is transmitted and a part where a load is generated when the displacement is suppressed are partially separated. You can shift the target.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means includes a one-side functional section formed on one side in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted part, and a function part formed on the other side in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted part. the other side functional part is formed on the same plane as the movement locus of the formation part, and the other side functional part is formed on the outside of the movement locus of the formation part. A gaming machine ZC4 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZC3, the movement direction in which movement is suppressed by the forming part can be set to one side.

In any of gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means is configured to move the first displacement means and the second displacement means. A gaming machine ZC5 characterized in that the mode of transmission to the displacement means can be changed for each operation section.

Note that the method of switching the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means or the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be cut off, or the driving force may be transmitted to the first displacement means and the second displacement means. An embodiment may also be adopted in which the ratio of the applied driving force is changed.

According to the gaming machine ZC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, a plurality of displacement means can be displaced in different displacement modes by one transmission means.

A gaming machine ZC6, characterized in that the first displacement means is disposed on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is disposed on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine ZC6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the combination of displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

Note that the combination of displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include a timing in which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are synchronously displaced, or it may be configured such that the transmission or cutoff of the driving force to the first displacement means and the second displacement means is reversed. It is also possible to use one that does not displace.

Furthermore, in the case where the timing includes synchronized displacement, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

A gaming machine ZC7 characterized in that the direction of displacement of the first displacement means and the direction of displacement of the second displacement means are set to be opposite to each other in the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6.

According to the gaming machine ZC7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be mutually visible in a common area, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means Even if the performance area in which the means is displaced is narrow, effective performance can be performed.

Note that the form of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. for example,
A plurality of displacement means laminated in the front and back may be extended to a common area at different timings, or the initial arrangement may be such that the plurality of movable members are laminated in the front and back but pass through a common area during movement of the plurality of movable members. It's okay.

<The load generating part catches up and makes contact, preventing the stop position from shifting>
In a gaming machine comprising a first displacing means configured to be displaceable, and a second displacing means configured to displace the first displacing means by displacing in a predetermined direction, the second displacing means comprises:
The first displacement means includes a load generation section that applies a load along the predetermined direction in order to displace the first displacement means, and the first displacement means includes a loaded section that receives a load from the load generation section, and the first displacement means includes a loaded section that receives a load from the load generation section. The gaming machine is characterized in that the part is configured to be able to separate from the loaded part during displacement along the predetermined direction and come into contact with a predetermined part different from the loaded part of the first displacement means. ZD1
.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided to a recessed part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-234152). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above,
If the cylindrical portion moves excessively due to a defect in drive transmission, the position of the displacement member may deviate from the end of movement, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZD1, the load generating part separates from the loaded part during displacement and comes into contact with a predetermined part different from the loaded part, so that excessive displacement occurs in the second displacement means. Even if the first displacement means is disposed at an unintended position, this can prevent the first displacement means from being placed in an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating section applies a load directed from the other side to the one side in the predetermined direction to the predetermined portion with the first displacement means disposed at one end of the displaceable section. A gaming machine ZD2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to give money to players.

According to the game machine ZD2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is disposed at one end in the predetermined direction, the load generation part moves toward the first displacement means in the predetermined direction. Since a load is applied in a direction from the other side to the one side, the first displacement means can be pressed against the one end in the predetermined direction by the load.

The gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2 includes a driving means configured to be able to drive the second displacement means, and the load generating section is located on the other side in the predetermined direction relative to the loaded section.
A game machine ZD3 characterized in that it comes into contact with a displacement means.

According to the game machine ZD3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generation section and the first displacement means, so that the driving force can be stopped. Even if timing accuracy is low, it is possible to easily maintain the terminal positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means constant. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being displaced from their terminal positions while abruptly setting the first displacement means and the second displacement means to stop.

In addition, the part that takes measures against the rare event that the second displacement means moves excessively is
By providing it at a location different from the loaded part that receives the load each time the driving force is transmitted, the fail-safe function can be achieved without any problem even if the loaded part is deformed.

A gaming machine ZD4, which is one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, further comprising a regulating means capable of regulating the first displacement means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZD4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, while the first displacement means is restricted at one end in a predetermined direction by the restriction means, the second displacement means is It can be independently displaced with respect to one displacement means.

Note that the mode of the regulating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a claw-like member that moves in and out and engages in a direction crossing the displacement direction of the first displacement means, it may be restricted by gravity or an urging force of an elastic member, or it may be a part of the second displacement means. It may be configured by

Any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4 includes a detection means configured to be able to detect that the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, and the first displacement means:
A gaming machine ZD5 comprising a detected part whose position is detected by the detection means, and wherein the load generating part comes into contact with the detected part.

According to the gaming machine ZD5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, it is possible to limit the portion damaged by the load upon contact to the detected portion.

In addition, by linking the life span that can be calculated from the number of displacements (number of drives) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, detection failure based on damage to the detection piece can be determined. It is possible to know when to replace the displacement means (maintenance time).

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the predetermined section intersects the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the loaded section. The gaming machine ZD6 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the first
The displacement means can be operated in a plurality of directions.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded part and the predetermined part are arranged at a predetermined distance apart from each other in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction.
.

According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded part and the predetermined part are arranged at the same position when viewed from a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.
The area required for arranging the loaded portion and the predetermined portion can be narrowed.

<Technical idea to maintain by utilizing the flexibility of tracking means>
In a game machine comprising a displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined area, and a follow-up means that follows the displacement of the displacement means, a prevention that prevents a predetermined part of the follow-up means from entering the predetermined area side. A gaming machine ZE1 characterized by comprising means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured so that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of the displacement means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474).
. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the length of the wiring is set in comparison with the displacement means, which has the advantage that the wiring is less likely to bend when the displacement means is displaced. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to form temporary fixing parts in various parts of the displacement means to temporarily fix the wiring to prevent relative displacement, and in addition, it is necessary to place the displacement means in a predetermined position while running the wiring through the temporary fixation parts. It usually takes a long time to assemble because it has to be assembled one by one.
This poses a problem in that it may lead to a decrease in the degree of freedom in design and a decrease in assembly efficiency.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZE1, the following means, such as wiring, is prevented from being displaced toward the predetermined area by the prevention means, so that the following means is not damaged by rubbing against the displacement means. Can be suppressed. This eliminates the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing parts on the displacement means, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means and improve the assembly efficiency.

In the game machine ZE1, the game machine ZE2 is characterized in that the prevention means supports the following means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a change in distance from the displacement means occurs as the displacement means is displaced.

According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means supports the following means in such a manner that it can be displaced in a direction in which the distance between the preventing means and the displacing means changes as the displacing means is displaced. Compared to the case where the position of the following means is fixed with a fixing member such as a binding band, the load applied to the following means can be reduced.

Note that the form of the prevention means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar part around which the following means can be wrapped, or a claw-like part which can hold the following means. Further, when the prevention means is formed as a columnar part, for example, the columnar part may be formed as a fastening part used for fastening and fixing members together, or used for positioning when assembling members. It may also be formed as a positioning part.

Further, the form of the following means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or it may be a band-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is visually recognized by the player. It may be a band-shaped performance member that assists in the performance, or it may be an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates a biasing force to assist the displacement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine ZE3 characterized in that in the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, the following means is configured to be able to supply electricity to the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE1 or ZE2, electricity can be supplied to the displacement means in a good manner.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the following means is configured to surround the prevention means. The gaming machine ZE4.

According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the following means largely protrudes to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be placed on both sides of the preventing means, the area where it is necessary to avoid interference between the following means and other members can be limited to the range around the preventing means. .

Further, it is not necessary to construct an escape portion for allowing the following means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. Thereby, the displacement means can be arranged in a space-saving manner.

Any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4 is characterized in that it includes a shielding means for shielding at least a part of the displacement means, and the following means is connected to the displacement means at an inner position of the shielding means. The gaming machine ZE5.

According to the gaming machine ZE5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, the shielding means can prevent the connecting portion between the following means and the displacement means from being visible to the player. Note that the term "inward" as used herein means an inward direction when the outer shape is the edge in a front view.

In the gaming machine ZE5, the gaming machine ZE6 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is disposed at the outer edge of the shielding means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZE5, a large amount of protrusion from the external shape (outer edge portion) of the shielding means of the displacement means is ensured while keeping the following means out of the player's field of view. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is a straight line that equally divides a rotatable angle of the displacement means about the first axis, and is disposed on a straight line passing through the first axis. The gaming machine ZE7 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine ZE7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, the gaming machine ZE8 is characterized in that the displacement means includes a guide section that guides the following means in a direction away from the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine ZE8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent friction with the displacement means, and it is possible to improve the durability of the following means.

Gaming machine ZE9 is characterized in that the guide section extends in a direction perpendicular to the outer shape of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE8, the area occupied by the following means in the vicinity of the displacement means can be narrowed, and the area of the gap through which the following means can pass can be narrowed. The rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means can be improved compared to the case where the gap is large.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the following means is formed in a string shape or a band shape, one end is connected to the displacement means, the other end is connected to the gaming machine, and the following means is directed toward both ends. The gaming machine ZE10 is characterized in that the gaming machine ZE10 is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, it is possible to apply a load in a pulling direction from one side of the predetermined area at both ends of the following means. Thereby, the entire following means can balance the load applied from the guide section.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means in a direction in which it loosens when the displacement means is displaced from a pre-displacement position to a post-displacement position. Machine ZE11.

According to the gaming machine ZE11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10,
By absorbing the displacement of the displacement means by the slackness of the follow-up means, it is possible to prevent excessive load from being applied to the follow-up means.

Any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11 is provided with a positioning means in which the following means is arranged between the displacement means and a positioning section for positioning the positioning means, the positioning section being A game machine Z characterized in that it is arranged outside the movement locus of the following means.
E12.

According to the gaming machine ZE12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11,
Since the positioning portion can be prevented from encroaching on the displacement space of the following means, the load applied to the following means as the displacement means is displaced can be minimized.

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means, and the following means has a first displacement part (weak displacement part) and a displacement set larger than that of the first displacement part. a second displacement part (strong displacement part), and the first displacement part is arranged between the second displacement part and the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the locations where damage is likely to occur due to contact with the arrangement means of the following means. Therefore, since it is possible to limit the locations that require reinforcement, it is possible to improve durability at low cost.

Note that the manner of comparing the magnitudes of the displacements of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is not limited at all. For example, the linear distance between the positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacement occurs in multiple directions, the comparison may be limited to the displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined plane).

A gaming machine ZE14 in the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, wherein the preventing means includes a protruding part that protrudes from the arranging means, and the following means is wound around the protruding part.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled from above to the arranging means while the arranging means supports the following means which sag due to its own weight, so that the following means and the arranging means can be assembled from above to the arranging means. And the fixing means can be easily assembled.

<Technical philosophy that changes the displacement mode (transmission mode) with forward and reverse rotation>
A gaming machine comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the drive means, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the drive means to the displacement means, The drive means has a first drive mode that generates a drive force in a first direction, and a drive mode that generates a drive force in a first direction.
and a second drive mode that generates a driving force in a second direction different from the direction, and the displacement means is configured to be operable in a first displacement mode driven in the first drive mode and in the second drive mode. A game machine ZF1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to be displaced in a second displacement mode when driven.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means that are displaced by the driving force of a common drive device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the drive direction of the drive device in forward and reverse directions. There are gaming machines configured as follows (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146413).
. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first
Only the displacement mode of the displacement means and the second displacement means changes, and even if the drive direction of the drive device is switched between forward and reverse, both the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced. Therefore, there has been a problem in that the degree of improvement in performance effect achieved by employing a device that can be driven in forward and reverse directions as a drive device is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZF1, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated. It is possible to sufficiently improve the performance effect used.

The gaming machine ZF1 is characterized in that it includes a light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means, and the displacement means is configured to be able to be displaced in a manner that passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means. The gaming machine ZF2.

According to the game machine ZF2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine ZF1, the position where the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects with the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means, so that the illuminated position of the displacement means can be changed. It is possible to create a glittering performance that changes over time.

The gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2 includes a displacement suppressing means for suppressing displacement of at least a part of the transmitting means, and the transmitting means is configured to suppress the displacement of the driving means in at least one of the first driving mode or the second driving mode. A gaming machine ZF3 comprising a suppression area in which transmission of driving force is suppressed, and wherein the displacement suppressing means is configured to be able to suppress a predetermined displacement in the suppression area.

According to the gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, the transmission means is unintentionally displaced when the transmission of driving force is suppressed by the displacement suppressing means, so that the transmission means is displaced in an unintended manner. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced.

Further, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained higher than when the displacement means is stopped by bringing the displacement means into direct contact with another member. Therefore, it is possible to configure the displacement means with an appropriate displacement mode so that it is easily visible to the player.

Note that the form of the displacement suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, an engagement device that generates viscous resistance, such as a damper device, or a resistance device that generates resistance due to its own weight may be used, or in cases where the resistance due to its own weight is likely to be insufficient (for example, when the displacement of the displacement means In the case where the direction is along the horizontal direction), it is not possible to suppress the idling motion by the force of gravity. Therefore, for example, a device such as a torque limiter whose resistance is variable depending on the displacement mode may be used.

The gaming machine ZF3 includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect the displacement of the displacement suppressing means, and the displacement suppressing means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppressing area is lower than a predetermined speed. , the resistance is suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means detects the detected portion of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates resistance. A gaming machine ZF4 is arranged such that it can be detected.

According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZF3, the detection means is functioning well in detecting the stop position of the displacement suppressing means and suppressing displacement in the suppression area of the transmission means in the displacement suppressing means. It can be used for both detection.

In any of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that rotationally displaces the first displacement means centering on the first axis, and a second displacement means rotationally displaces the outside of the first displacement means centering on the first axis. A gaming machine ZF5 comprising a displacement means, and configured to be able to suppress displacement of the second displacement means in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the first
In the drive mode or the second drive mode, the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed, so in this suppressed state, the second displacement means is disposed between the player and the first displacement means and the field of view is It is possible to configure two performance modes: one in which the second displacement means is placed outside between the player and the first displacement means and does not block the player's field of view; Since the displacement is possible even in a drive mode that does not suppress the displacement of , it is possible to configure performances by the displacement means in a total of three displacement modes.

In any one of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, gaming machine ZF6 is characterized in that the transmission means is provided with a light transmission means formed from a light-transmitting material on the side of the connection position with the displacement means.
.

According to the gaming machine ZF6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the light transmission means facilitates the assembly of the displacement means, and the light emission effect is achieved by conducting light toward the displacement means. It is possible to achieve the effect of making it possible.

In any of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that rotates and displaces about a first axis, and a transmission means of the first displacement means that rotates and displaces about the first axis. and a second displacement means connected to the transmission means outward from a connection position of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is configured to overlap with the first displacement means when viewed in the first axial direction. Characteristic game machine ZF7.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, a second
The first displacement means can prevent the displacement means from coming off. This makes it unnecessary to provide a separate retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 policy 1)>
a first operating means configured to be operable by a player; a second operating means disposed at a different position from the first operating means and configured to be operable by a player; The second
A gaming machine ZG1 characterized in that it includes a load generating means disposed on the operating means side and configured to be able to generate a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a plurality of operating devices and a driving device for driving the operating devices (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-159
(See Publication No. 178). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, each operating device is provided with a vibrating device, which increases the space required to arrange each operating device and tends to limit the number of operating devices that can be arranged. In addition, there are problems in that the cost increases due to the increase in the number of drive devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, so the load generating means is connected to the first operating means and the second operating means (i.e. , a plurality of operating means). Thereby, the space necessary for arranging the first operating means and the second operating means can be reduced, and the upper limit of the number of operating means that can be arranged can be increased. In addition, since the number of load generating means can be reduced, the cost for configuring the gaming machine can be reduced.

Note that the form of the load generation means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means that is capable of vibration (high-speed repetitive displacement), a means that generates a load at a predetermined period like a pump, or a means that is composed of an arm member whose posture changes according to the displacement of a cam. good. Moreover, the aspect of the load is not limited at all. For example, the load may be mechanically transmitted in a contact state, or the load (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.) may be transmitted in a non-contact state.

A gaming machine ZG2 characterized in that the load generating means is disposed between the first operating means and the second operating means in the gaming machine ZG1.

According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZG1, it is possible to transmit the load to both the first operating means and the second operating means to the same extent.

In the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operating means is operated to launch a game ball toward a gaming area, and the load generating means includes a cover that at least partially covers the first operating means from a predetermined direction. A gaming machine ZG3 characterized in that it is disposed in an installation means.

According to the gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is disposed at a position where the hand and fingers of the player who operates the first operating means are sandwiched between the first operating means and the first operating means. In this way, the load generated from the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player's fingers.

For example, the covering means may be placed in a position where the player's fingers can easily pass during the process of movement of the player's fingers, such as bringing the player's finger close to the first operating means and then removing the finger from the first operating means after the operation is completed. (By arranging the covering means so as to cover it from a direction where it is likely to interfere with the fingers), it is possible to easily transmit the load of the load generating means to the player while the fingers are moving.

Further, for example, by arranging the covering means at a position where the player's fingers come into contact with a high probability when operating the first operating means, the load on the load generating means is reduced during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that is easy to convey to the player.

Note that this idea is different from the idea of arranging the load generation means in the first operating means.
That is, since the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is disposed at a different position from the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, intervening means is interposed between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means, and is configured to be able to transmit a load to the first operating means and the second operating means. A gaming machine ZG, characterized in that the intervening means is configured such that the intensity of vibration transmission to the first operating means is higher than the intensity of vibration transmission to the second operating means.
4.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZG3, it is possible to concentrate load transmission to the first operating means side.

A gaming machine ZG5 in the gaming machine ZG4, characterized in that the intervening means is configured to be able to change the intensity of load transmission by displacing the load generating means as the load generating means is driven.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted through the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven compared to when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, while suppressing the degree to which the first operating means and the second operating means operate (vibrate) in conjunction with each other due to the load applied to the pachinko machine by a player, etc., when the load generating means is driven, the first operating means
It is possible to perform an effect in which the operating means and the second operating means are strongly moved (vibrated).

A gaming machine ZG6, which is any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, and is equipped with a holding means that holds the load generating means so as to be displaceable, and the holding means is equipped with a guide section that guides the displacement of the load generating means. .

According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the safety of the player can be ensured by specifying the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent problems such as the displaced member being displaced by the vibration of the load generating means unintentionally colliding with the player.

In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generation means itself, if the load generation means is guided in the desired direction, the load generation means can be displaced in the desired direction. The degree of freedom of means can be improved.

A gaming machine ZG6, wherein the holding means is configured to allow displacement of the load generating means in a direction crossing the direction in which it is guided by the guide section.
G7.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the cross direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state, and the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the cross direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state. It is possible to displace the load generating means in different manners. Thereby, the performance effect of the load generation means can be improved.

Note that various modes are exemplified as modes for allowing displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided, and the guiding direction of the second holding means may be configured to intersect with the guiding direction of the guide section, or the load generating means may be provided between the holding means and the second holding means. It may also be configured such that a flexible member is interposed therebetween, and the displacement occurs due to deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibrating means as covering means (P9 policy 2)>
The covering device comprises a frame means having a frame shape, a covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side, and a vibration means arranged on the covering means and configured to be able to vibrate, The means are
A game machine ZH1 characterized in that it is provided with an allowance part in which displacement is allowed, and is configured to be able to transmit vibrations of the vibration means via the allowance part.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a front frame and a vibration means disposed in front of the front frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-159837). but,
In the conventional gaming machine described above, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means to an extent that vibrations exceeding a predetermined intensity are not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the perspective of vibration production. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZH1, the vibration means is disposed on the covering means and displacement of the covering means is allowed, so that vibrations can be transmitted to the player side via the covering means. On the other hand, by absorbing vibrations by displacement of the covering means, transmission of vibrations to the frame means side can be suppressed.
This makes it possible to increase the permissible vibration intensity of the vibration means.

Note that the form of the permissive portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode that assumes displacement of slides, links, gears, etc., and displacement occurs due to the movement of slides, links, gears, etc., or it may be made of a material or structure that is different from other parts. It may be of a flexible configuration and may be displaced when overload is applied.

In the game machine ZH1, the covering means is configured such that the permissible amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the permissible amount of displacement in the horizontal direction.
.

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZH1, the effect of the allowing part is maintained by horizontal displacement, while the player places a hand on the covering means, etc. in the direction of gravity. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the covering means from being excessively displaced and causing the player's posture to be disturbed. That is, by keeping the permissible amount of displacement in the vertical direction small, it is possible to stabilize the structure of the product.

A gaming machine ZH3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, the covering means is constructed in the shape of a bag with the frame means side open.

According to the gaming machine ZH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the frame means side is configured in the shape of an open bag, the edge of the bag and the frame means are disposed opposite to each other.
It is possible to reduce the contact area between the covering means and the frame means, which contact each other and transmit vibrations. As a result, transmission of vibration to the frame means side can be suppressed, so vibrations can be prevented from being transmitted to the main board, ball passage, and main electrical components arranged on the frame means side.

In any of gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibrating means includes an arrangement section disposed on the frame means side, the frame means includes a support section that supports the arrangement section, and the vibration means includes a support section that supports the arrangement section; The department is
A gaming machine ZH4 characterized in that the support part has a lower deformation resistance than the support part.

According to the game machine ZH4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibration means is limited while suppressing vibration transmission to the frame means side, and furthermore, the arrangement part is Compared to a case where the vibration means is hard, it is possible to cause biting by utilizing the low deformation resistance, and it is possible to secure a large absolute value of the amount of displacement of the vibration means toward the frame means. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy to largely displace the covering means on which the vibrating means is disposed.

In any of gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering part and a second covering part having lower deformation resistance than the first covering part, and the vibrating means A gaming machine ZH5, characterized in that the game machine ZH5 includes an abutting part that is connected to the first covering part and the second covering part and can locally come into contact with the first covering part.

According to the gaming machine ZH5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, by locally abutting the first covered part with high deformation resistance and the abutting part, the abutting position can be changed. can be used as a fixed point (reference point) for vibration. That is, it is possible to increase the absolute value of the displacement of the vibration means and the second covered part with respect to the contact position.

Any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5 is provided with a ball firing operating means operated to fire a game ball toward a gaming area, and the covering means has at least a space between the ball firing operating means and the ball firing operating means. A gaming machine ZH6 characterized by using a predetermined member.

According to the game machine ZH6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines ZH1 to ZH5, it is possible to suppress vibration transmission to the ball firing operation means.

<Points characterized by blocking the light itself by displacing objects>
In a game machine comprising a light emitting means and an irradiated means to which light from the light emitting means is irradiated, the appearance of the irradiated means is changed while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means when viewed in a predetermined direction. Characteristic game machine ZI1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a light-emitting means that is mounted on a movable accessory and is configured to perform a light-emitting effect (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208360).
. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is no disposed member that can be displaced so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emitting effect. However, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in the method of realizing the light emitting effect because the data capacity was compressed and the board became large for the control.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, and the displacement of the displacement means prevents interference with the light emitted from the light emitting means. By configuring this to be possible, the mode of the light emission effect can be switched by the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, the mode of light emission can be changed without controlling the light emitting means, and the size of the board can be reduced by eliminating the need for data for control and the need for a circuit for control. can. Thereby, it is possible to improve the method of realizing the light emission effect.

Note that the mode of displacement is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, rotation, linear sliding, or displacement along a predetermined curve may be used. When the displacement mode of the displacement means is a linear slide, the direction of the slide coincides with a predetermined direction than when the direction of the slide crosses the predetermined direction. The outer shape can be easily maintained.

Note that the form of the irradiation target means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate around a rotation axis that intersects with the optical axis, and the projected area may change depending on the posture, or it may be configured such that the member protrudes from the inside and is scaled up or down even if the posture does not change. The relative projected area may be changed by the displacement.

The form of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate around the irradiation target means, or it may be configured to slide on a plane and enter the side of the irradiation target means (between the light emitting means).

Further, the manner in which the outer shape of the displacement means is left is not limited at all.
For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as being stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be smaller than that of the irradiated means, so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. It may also be the form.

Further, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be fixed in position or may be configured to be movable. In the displaceable state, the light emitting means may be disposed on the displacing means, or the light emitting means and the displacing means may be displaced separately (independently). Further, the irradiation direction may be fixed or the irradiation direction may be variable.

The mode of displacement of the light emitting means may be such that it slides toward and away from the irradiated means with its optical axis directed toward the irradiated means, or it moves around the irradiated means with its optical axis directed toward the irradiated means. It may also be something that rotates.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that always maintains a lighting state, or it may be one that can be switched between lighting and extinguishing.

In the gaming machine ZI1, the gaming machine ZI2 is characterized in that the difference in appearance of the irradiated means is caused by the irradiated means reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZI1, it is possible to immediately recognize the difference in the irradiated means after the light emitting means irradiates the light, so that attention to the timing of light irradiation can be improved. . According to this, even if the irradiated means is a displaceable means,
A means that cannot be displaced may be used.

A gaming machine ZI3 characterized in that in the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

According to the gaming machine ZI3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, it is possible to improve attention to the irradiated means.

Note that the mode of displacement that is the basis for the difference in appearance of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a constant (periodic) displacement that continues at a constant speed, or it may be an irregular displacement. Further, the displacement may be instantaneous, or may be a slow displacement (so slow that it is difficult for the player to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm/min]).

A gaming machine ZI4, which is any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, wherein the irradiation means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the gaming machine ZI4, in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to make different parts illuminated and highlighted by light reflected through the irradiated means while maintaining the external shape of the irradiated means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, a gaming machine ZI5 is characterized in that, while the direction in which the irradiated means reflects light is the same, at least one of the amount of light or the color of the light is different. .

According to the gaming machine ZI5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, attention to the light emitting mode of the irradiated means can be improved.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI5, a non-radiator configured to be able to irradiate the irradiated means with light in an irradiation manner such that the optical axis does not interfere with the movement locus of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means. A gaming machine ZI6 characterized by comprising a shielding light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating light from the non-shielding light emitting means, the irradiated means can be irradiated with light regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. , it is possible to avoid the irradiated means being visually recognized unnecessarily darkly.

In any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiation means includes a first irradiation means;
and a second irradiation means configured to be arranged at a shielding position capable of blocking light emitted from the light emitting means toward the first irradiation means, and the first irradiation means The area of the second irradiated means as viewed in the optical axis direction is smaller when the second irradiated means is disposed at the shielding position than when the second irradiated means is not disposed at the shielding position. A gaming machine ZI7 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the first
It is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the irradiated means. That is, the effect of blocking light can be improved. Note that the change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when light is irradiated from the light emitting means.

In any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate light onto the irradiated means with a plurality of optical axes, and the irradiated means can intersect with the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 characterized by being configured.

According to gaming machine ZI8, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the irradiated means is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, increasing the number of LEDs). can be done.

Any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8 is provided with a driving means configured to be capable of synchronously driving the irradiation target means and a displacement means disposed around the irradiation target means, and the irradiation target means A game machine ZI9 is configured such that a predetermined first surface thereof faces the same side, and the displacement means is configured to periodically displace the first position and the second position.
.

According to the gaming machine ZI9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the light emitting mode of the irradiated means caused by the arrangement of the displacement means ( For example, the switching timing between light and dark can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

Note that the displacement mode of the irradiation target means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a sliding displacement or a rotational displacement. The rotational displacement may be, for example, rotational displacement caused by a rotation axis along the display surface of the display device, or rotational displacement caused by a rotation axis perpendicular to the display surface of the display area.

In any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means arranged around the irradiation means or the irradiation means has a surface facing the light emitting means, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine ZI10 is characterized in that the direction of travel of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed toward the player.

According to the gaming machine ZI10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the light emitting means emits light depending on whether the displacement means is placed in the first position or the second position. The difference in the extent to which light travels toward the player can be increased.

<Features AA group> (Lever UP control)
The game player includes an operation means that can be operated by at least a player in a first direction from a predetermined first position, and a performance execution means that can execute a performance corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means. In the gaming machine, the notification means is capable of notifying an operation suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated in the first direction, and in a state where a release condition is satisfied after the operation means is operated in the first direction, the A gaming machine AA1 characterized in that it has a specific effect setting means that can set a specific effect when the operating means is not located at a specific position.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, before the lottery results are announced, it is possible to execute an operation performance that causes the player to operate the operation means as a suggestion performance to suggest the lottery results, and the period until the lottery results are announced is made possible. There was something to entertain the players. In addition, among the above-mentioned gaming machines, some machines allow the player to operate the operating means in a state where it is moved from the initial position in order to further enhance the performance effect (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, if the player does not operate the operating means even though the operating means has been moved from the initial position, the operating means in the movable state is reset to the initial position regardless of the player's operation. Since it is necessary to perform control to return the player to the original position, there is a problem in that the presentation effect is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AA1, when the operating means is not located at a specific position in a state where the release condition is satisfied, the specific performance setting means sets a specific performance. It becomes possible to provide the player with a performance that would otherwise not be possible. Therefore, even if the operating means is not operated after the operating means has been moved, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect from deteriorating, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AA1, it is possible to include a biasing device that always biases the operating device toward the specific position, and a biasing device that can move the operating device from the specific position to the first position different from the specific position. The gaming machine AA2 has a movement control means, and the operation means is located at the specific position by operating from the first position in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine AA2, by the player operating the operating means located at the first position, the operating means can be moved to a specific position. , and the act of moving the operating means to a specific position can be performed at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation performance can be performed smoothly and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine AA2 has a second operating means that can be operated by a player different from the operating means, and the specific performance includes at least a suggestion mode that suggests operating the second operating means. A game machine AA3 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA2, a specific performance is executed that includes a suggestion mode that suggests operating the second operating means, thereby making it easier to operate the second operating means. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible for the player to release his/her hand from the operating means and move the operating means to a specific position using the biasing means, thereby making it easier to position the operating means at a predetermined position, thereby improving the operation effect. This has the effect of making it easier to execute.

A gaming machine AA4, which is any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, and includes a fixing means for fixing the operating means at the specific position so as to make it difficult to operate.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the operating means is located at a specific position, the movement of the operating means is restricted by the fixing means, so that the operation performance and It is possible to prevent the operating means from being operated without regard to the above. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the operating means from being operated unnecessarily and causing a malfunction.

Any one of the game machines AA1 to AA4 has a firing means capable of firing a game ball based on a player's operation, and the specific performance includes an aspect for prompting a player to fire a game ball. The gaming machine AA5 is characterized by being

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, a mode for encouraging the player to shoot a game ball as a specific effect is included, so when the specific effect is executed, It is possible to encourage the player to actively shoot the game ball. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that makes it easier for the player to take his/her hand off the operating means, thereby making it easier to move the operating means to a specific position, thereby making it easier to position the operating means at a predetermined position. This has the effect of making it easier to perform the operation performance.

<Feature AB group> (Combined control of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. An identification symbol display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation that can perform an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. a presentation execution means; an identification pattern presentation execution means capable of executing an identification pattern presentation that makes it possible to change the mode of the identification pattern displayed by operating the operation means; A gaming machine AB1 characterized in that it has a regulating means for regulating execution in an overlapping period with an identification symbol production.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, before the lottery results are announced, it is possible to execute an operation performance that causes the player to operate the operation means as a suggestion performance to suggest the lottery results, and the period until the lottery results are announced is made possible. There was something to entertain the players. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-090780). Furthermore, in some gaming machines having the above-described configuration, a plurality of conditions are provided for executing the operation performance in order to further enhance the performance effect. In this case, there is a problem in that a plurality of operation performances are executed overlappingly, resulting in a performance that is difficult for the player to understand, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AB1, since the regulating means can restrict that the operation performance and the identification symbol performance are executed in an overlapping period, it is possible to prevent a plurality of operation performances from being executed overlappingly. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, the regulating means is configured to set a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed, for regulating execution of the operation presentation mode, and to execute the identification symbol presentation within that period. A game machine AB2 is characterized in that it is a game machine AB2.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1, during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, a period is set by the regulating means to regulate the execution of the operation performance mode, and within that period, the identification Since the symbol presentation is executed, it is possible to smoothly execute a plurality of operation presentations. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of operation performances in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine AB1 or AB2 is configured to be able to perform a mode variable effect in which the mode of the identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner without the operation means being operated during the period when the operation effect is executed. A gaming machine AB3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, since it is configured to be able to execute a mode variable effect during the period in which the operation effect is executed, it is difficult to identify whether the mode variable effect is executed or not. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the symbol presentation is being executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Electric support termination control due to fall)
A ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter into the ball entering means, and a second state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the first state. a member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball input means, a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the display means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a display means for displaying the particular determination result of the display means. a first probability as a probability of being determined as the specific determination result; and a second probability higher than the first probability. a probability setting means capable of setting a probability; a determination means capable of executing a determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means; and a determination result determined by the determination means as a specific determination result. a probability control means for setting the first probability based on the above; a setting means capable of setting a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than a normal gaming state; In the gaming machine, the setting means is configured to determine whether the second probability is satisfied or not when the special gaming state is set by the setting means. The special gaming state is configured to be able to be set when the special gaming state is set, and the end condition determining means determines the second probability when a predetermined period has elapsed after the special gaming state is set. The gaming machine AC1 is characterized in that it is determined that the termination condition is met based on the fact that the probability is set to the first probability.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, it is possible to set a high probability state in which it is easy to win a winning state and a low probability state in which it is difficult to win a winning state as a gaming state, and to shift the gaming state to a low probability state when the high probability state is set. There was one that ran a lottery (the so-called falling lottery). Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to be able to set a specific gaming state in which a winning lottery for a game is likely to be executed and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-269007). However, in the gaming machine described above, there is no relationship between the timing of transition from a high probability state to a low probability state and the timing of transition from a specific gaming state to a normal gaming state, and the player cannot understand the transition status of each gaming state. There was a problem in that the game became difficult and the interest in the game decreased. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AC1, since the normal gaming state is set when the first probability is set by the probability control means, the setting situation of the probability setting means and the setting situation of the setting means can be varied in association with each other. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the transition situation of the game state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine AC1, gaming machine AC2 is characterized in that the determination means executes the determination when a determination condition for the determination means to execute the determination is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine AC2, since it is possible to cause the determination means to perform the determination when the determination condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress the determination means from performing excessive determination in a state where the second probability is set. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

In the game machine AC2, the determination means executes the determination before dynamic display of the identification information starts based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Machine AC3.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC2, the determination by the determination means is executed before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, so that the determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. It becomes possible to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the result of the determination made based on the determination result of the determining means. Thereby, when the determination means determines a specific determination result, the determination performed by the determination means can be performed with the first probability based on the establishment of the determination condition that triggered the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the probability control means determines the first probability before the start of the dynamic display of the identification information when the determination means determines the specific determination result. A game machine AC4 is characterized in that it is a game machine that allows setting.

According to the game machine AC4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AC1 to AC3, if the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the probability control means starts dynamic display of the identification information. The first probability is set before. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information based on the second probability from being executed after a specific determination result has been determined, and thus it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate game. effective.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the setting means sets the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special gaming state is determined to be the specific determination result. The gaming machine AC5 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the setting means sets the normal gaming state even when the determination result of the determining means is a specific determination result. When the normal gaming state is set by the means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the determination result of the determining means is a specific determination result or whether the determination result of the determining means is a specific determination result. It is possible to provide the fun of making predictions. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AD group> (Burst interruption effect)
A period during which the performance is executed by the performance execution means in a gaming machine having a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a performance period determining means that determines an execution period of the performance executed by the performance execution means. a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect by interrupting at least a part of the effect being executed by the effect executing means; A gaming machine AD1 characterized in that it has a setting means capable of changing and setting the performance to be interrupted in accordance with the state of the performance.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. There is also a system that makes it possible to perform a suggestive performance to suggest the lottery result before the lottery result is announced, allowing players to enjoy the period until the lottery result is announced. Further, there is a gaming machine that further enhances the effect of the suggestion performance by executing various performances at various timings as the suggestion performance (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even when one suggestion effect is being executed, other suggestion effects can be executed, which has the effect of increasing the types of effects that can be executed and increasing the effect of the effect. be. However, since the gaming machine described above is configured to execute other suggestion effects without being concerned with the production status of the one suggestion effect currently being executed, the player may There was a problem in that the player's desire to play the game decreased. Furthermore, if the suggestive effect being executed indicates a predetermined process change (for example, a story development), switching the suggestive effect may cause the predetermined process change mode to end midway. Therefore, there was a problem in that the player was further confused. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestive effects without confusing the player in the above-mentioned game machine.

According to the gaming machine AD1, since it is possible to change the mode of the effect that is interrupted by the execution of a specific effect using the setting means, it is possible to prevent the effect from being interrupted in the middle of execution and to confuse the player. Can be suppressed. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can execute a plurality of performances in an overlapping manner, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player.

In the gaming machine AD1, the performance executed by the performance execution means includes a sound performance, and the setting means is configured to suspend the sound performance depending on the state of the performance, A game machine AD2 is characterized in that it sets a case in which a sound performance is not interrupted.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD1, when the performance is interrupted, it is configured such that it is possible to set whether only the audio continues or when the audio is also interrupted. It becomes possible to change the manner in which the performance is interrupted depending on the content of the performance. Therefore, it is possible to vary the interest level of the players in the interrupted performance, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, it may be determined whether or not to interrupt the audio output based on the performance mode of the specific performance and the performance mode of the interrupted performance, and the audio set as the performance mode of the specific performance may be determined. If the type and the audio type set as the performance mode of the performance to be interrupted are the same audio type, the configuration may be such that the output of the audio is interrupted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the audio of the interrupted performance from being output and being confused with the audio set as the performance mode of the specific performance, thereby preventing an incomprehensible performance from being provided.

Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not to interrupt the output of the audio depending on the timing of interrupting the performance. In this case, if the remaining period of the effect to be interrupted is less than a predetermined period (for example, one second or less), only the audio can be output until the end even if the effect is interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the performance has been interrupted.

In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, a display means dynamically displays a plurality of identification symbols as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, and a case where the identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination on the display means. and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player, and the setting means is configured to dynamically display one of the plurality of identifying symbols while the other identifying symbols are dynamically displayed. The game machine AD3 is characterized in that the effect to be interrupted is changed and set depending on whether or not the reach display mode displayed in the combination that can become the specific combination has been displayed. .

According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the effect can be changed depending on whether the effect to be interrupted is before or after the ready-to-reach display. In other words, it is possible to change the mode of the performance set by the setting means based on the timing of interrupting the performance executed by the performance execution means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the interruption of the performance.

In the gaming machine AD3, the setting means interrupts the audio performance when the performance executed by the performance item means is interrupted before the ready-to-reach display mode is displayed; The game machine AD4 is characterized in that when the audio performance is interrupted after being displayed, the performance is set so as not to interrupt the audio performance.

According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD3, when the production is interrupted before the reach display mode is displayed, the audio is interrupted, and when the production is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed, the sound is interrupted. You can prevent audio from being interrupted. Therefore, even if the production is interrupted after the reach display mode has been displayed, the audio can continue to be output, which prevents players from being confused as to whether the reach display mode has been discarded midway through. This has the effect of being able to prevent this from happening.

<Characteristic AE group> (Button press sound control)
In a gaming machine that has an operation means that can be operated by a player and a performance execution means that changes the performance based on the operation of the operation means, each time the operation means is operated, a first operation is performed. A gaming machine AE1 characterized in that it has a voice control means capable of alternately outputting a sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, before the lottery results are announced, it is possible to execute an operation performance that causes the player to operate the operation means as a suggestion performance to suggest the lottery results, and the period until the lottery results are announced is made possible. There were things that entertained players (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, among the gaming machines described above, when a player operates an operating means, there is one that outputs an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly accepted. In such gaming machines, it was possible to easily determine whether or not the player was able to operate the operating means based on the operation sound output, but it was There has been a problem in that when the next operation is performed during the period, that is, when a continuous hitting operation is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sounds output in response to each operation. Further, there was a problem in that the game became monotonous if only one operation sound was output. To provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by making it easier for a player to hear the operation sound outputted in the above-mentioned game machine and further outputting a variety of operation sounds.

According to the gaming machine AE1, when the player operates the operation means multiple times, the first operation sound and the second operation sound are output alternately, so that when only one type of operation sound is output, This has the effect of being able to output operation sounds with a greater variety of variations. In addition, since different operation sounds are output alternately, even if the operation means is operated at short intervals (intervals shorter than the output period of one operation sound), it is possible for the player to operate the operation means. can be easily identified by the operation sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AE1, the audio control means causes the first operation sound to be output during a first period, and before the first period elapses, an operation that causes the first operation sound to be output is performed next. In the gaming machine AE2, the first operation sound that is being output is stopped and the output of the first operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AE1, if the next first operating sound is output within the first period in which the first operating sound is output, the first operating sound that is currently being output is Since the first operation sound is stopped and a new first operation sound is output, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly notify the player that a new operation has been executed.

In the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, the audio control means outputs the second operation sound during a second period, and before the second period elapses, the next operation for which the second operation sound is output is performed. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that when the second operation sound is output, the second operation sound that is being output is stopped and the output of the second operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, if the next second operation sound is output within the second period in which the second operation sound is output, the second operation sound that is being output is Since the operation sound is stopped and a new second operation sound is output, it is possible to clearly notify the player that a new operation has been executed.

In any of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the performance execution means is configured to be able to execute a continuous operation performance in which the mode of the performance is varied in response to continuous operation of the operating means a plurality of times. The gaming machine AE4 is characterized by certain things.

According to the game machine AE4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AE1 to AE3, the variable situation of the performance mode can be changed by executing a continuous operation performance in response to a plurality of consecutive operations of the operating means. It is possible to notify the player that the operating means has been operated. This makes it possible to determine from the operation sound and the effect that the operation on the operation means has been accepted. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

<Characteristic AF group> (Pending notice)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. An identification symbol display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation that can perform an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. and an identification pattern performance execution means capable of executing an identification pattern performance that makes it possible to change the mode of the identification design displayed by operating the operation means, A game machine AF1 characterized in that the identification symbol performance execution means executes the identification symbol performance for two or more of the identification symbols when a plurality of identification symbols are displayed on the display means. .

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols in a variable manner based on winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, and notify players of the lottery results after the variable display ends. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning hole can be stored multiple times, and the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved symbols are displayed, and the currently displayed reserved symbols are There are some devices that are configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can be used to notify information regarding the corresponding lottery in advance (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the gaming machine described above, by changing the color and shape of the pending symbols, the fluctuating display corresponding to the pending symbol indicates the expectation of a jackpot. This made it possible to raise people's expectations. However, there is a problem in that when a reservation notice performance occurs, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the reservation symbols that are not subject to the reservation notice, and this reduces his or her desire to play. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine AF1, since it is configured to execute the identification symbol presentation for two or more identification symbols as one identification pattern presentation, the target range of the identification pattern presentation can be expanded, and the identification pattern presentation can be expanded. It is possible to reduce the number of identification patterns that are not subject to pattern presentation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AF1 has a prior discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination before the information stored in the storage means is discriminated by the discrimination means, and the identification symbol performance execution means is configured to perform the discrimination according to the previous article. A game machine AF2 characterized in that the mode of the identification symbol is varied based on the determination result by the pre-discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AF1, the mode of the identification symbol can be varied based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, so that the player is not interested in the performance result of the identification symbol performance. can have. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the identification symbol performance execution means changes the mode of the two or more identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition by operating the operating means. Features of gaming machine AF3.

According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the mode of two or more identification symbols can be varied based on the operation on the operating means, so that the effects performed for the player are This has the effect of increasing people's desire to participate.

In any of gaming machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol performance execution means executes the identification symbol performance over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and The gaming machine AF4 is characterized in that it has a restriction period setting means for setting a restriction period in which the operation of the operating means is not valid during a period in which the game machine AF4 is being executed.

According to the gaming machine AF4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol presentation is executed over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times, and furthermore, the identification pattern presentation is During the execution period, a regulation period is provided in which no operation on the operating means is determined to be valid. This has the effect of making it possible for the player to enjoy deciding at what timing to operate the operating means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AF5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF4, a specific presentation is executed in a period other than the regulation period among the periods in which the identification symbol presentation is executed.

According to the game machine AF5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AF4, by executing a specific performance, it is possible to determine whether or not the current period is a regulation period in which the operation of the operating means is not valid during the identification symbol performance. This has the effect that it is possible to carry out performances that are easy for players to understand.

<Characteristics AG group> (Probable fall due to small winning)
A ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter into the ball entering means, and a second state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the first state. a member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball input means, a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the display means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a display means for displaying the particular determination result of the display means. a benefit granting means capable of granting advantageous benefits to the player when the identification information of 2 probabilities, and a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than in the normal gaming state. In the gaming machine, the probability setting means sets the first probability when a first transition condition is satisfied in a state where the second probability is set. The setting means sets the normal gaming state when a second transition condition is established in a state where the specific gaming state is set, and the setting means sets the normal gaming state. and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means. The gaming machine AG1 is characterized by the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, it is possible to set a high probability state in which it is easy to win a winning state and a low probability state in which it is difficult to win a winning state as a gaming state, and to shift the gaming state to a low probability state when the high probability state is set. There was one that ran a lottery (the so-called falling lottery). Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to be able to set a specific gaming state in which a winning lottery for a game is likely to be executed and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-269007). However, in the gaming machine described above, there is no relationship between the timing of transition from a high probability state to a low probability state and the timing of transition from a specific gaming state to a normal gaming state, and the player cannot understand the transition status of each gaming state. There was a problem in that the game became difficult and the interest in the game decreased. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AG1, since performances are performed in different performance modes based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, the current gaming situation is predicted based on the content of the performance to be executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine AG1, the discrimination means is capable of discriminating the special discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, and the second transition condition is that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the special discrimination result. The gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that it is established based on the following.

According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG1, the second transition condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the determining means, so that the determination by the determining means may result in a determination result that is more advantageous to the player. , it becomes possible to provide cases where the determination result is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the determination result of the determining means, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AG2 includes a counting means capable of counting the number of times that the determination result of the determining means becomes the special determination result in the state where the specific gaming state is set, and the second transition condition is the count The gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the second transition condition is satisfied when the counting result by the means is a predetermined counting result.

According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG2, the second transition condition is satisfied when the number of times the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a special discrimination result reaches a predetermined number of times, so that the discrimination of the discrimination means By determining that the result is a special determination result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the period until the second transition condition is satisfied, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the performance mode setting means sets the performance mode based on the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means and the gaming state set by the setting means. A gaming machine AG4 is characterized in that it sets the following.

According to the gaming machine AG4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the performance mode is set based on the set discrimination probability and the gaming state, so based on the performance to be executed, It is possible to provide the fun of predicting the current game situation, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AG4, the performance mode setting means is configured to set a first gaming state in which the first probability is set by the probability setting means and the normal gaming state is set by the setting means; A gaming machine AG5 characterized in that a second probability is set, and the same performance mode is set in a second gaming state in which the normal gaming state is set by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine AG5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG4, there is a first gaming state in which a first probability is set and a normal gaming state is set, and a second probability is set and a normal gaming state is set. Since the same performance mode is set in the second gaming state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the current game situation, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AG5 has a determining means capable of executing a determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means, and the determining means is configured to perform a determination for the determining means to execute the determination. The gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that the determination is executed when a condition is satisfied, and the first transition condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. .

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG5, it is possible to cause the determining means to make a determination when the discriminating condition is satisfied, so that the determining means may perform an excessive determination when the second probability is set. It is possible to suppress the determination from being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the production mode setting means suggests the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means when a predetermined period of time has passed after the benefit is given by the benefit giving means. A gaming machine AC7 is characterized in that it sets a suggestive presentation mode for the game.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the suggestive performance mode is set when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after a privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means, so that the first gaming state is set. Alternatively, when the second gaming state is set, the player can be made to understand the current gaming state based on the content of the suggested presentation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game until the predetermined period has elapsed, and there is an effect that the performance of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics AH group> (Complex control development of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. An identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, in a gaming machine, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation that can perform an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. a presentation execution means, an identification pattern presentation execution means capable of executing an identification pattern presentation that makes it possible to change the mode of the identification pattern displayed by operating the operation device, the operation presentation and the identification pattern presentation; A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the operation of the operating means during the overlapping period when the identification symbol effect is executed in an overlapping period. The gaming machine AH1 is characterized by certain things.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, before the lottery results are announced, it is possible to execute an operation performance that causes the player to operate the operation means as a suggestion performance to suggest the lottery results, and the period until the lottery results are announced is made possible. There was something to entertain the players. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-090780). Furthermore, in some gaming machines having the above-described configuration, a plurality of conditions are provided for executing the operation performance in order to further enhance the performance effect. In this case, there is a problem in that a plurality of operation performances are executed overlappingly, resulting in a performance that is difficult for the player to understand, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AH1, when the operation performance and the identification symbol performance overlap, the specific performance is executed, so even if the operation performance and the identification symbol performance overlap, the player It is possible to perform an easy-to-understand presentation. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AH1 includes a setting means for setting the operation performance or the identification symbol performance that is to be changed when the operation means is operated in the overlapping period, and the specific performance includes the operation AH2 is characterized in that it includes a suggestion mode indicating the operation performance or the identification symbol performance that is to be varied by operating the means.

According to the gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AH1, it is possible to suggest to the player the effects to be varied when the operating means is operated by the effect specific effects produced by the gaming machine AH. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute effects that are easy to understand for players.

In the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, in the overlapping period, the number of operations by which the operation effect or the identification symbol effect is varied is set to be different based on the operation of the operation means. The gaming machine AH3 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the number of operations to be varied is different depending on whether the operation presentation or the variable operation presentation is executed alone or when they are executed overlappingly. It becomes possible to Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect of a specific performance can be enhanced.

In any of gaming machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation performance and the identification symbol performance are executed in an overlapping period, at least one of them is changed by operating the operation means multiple times. A gaming machine AH4 characterized in that it has a switching setting means for setting.

According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, if the operation presentation and the identification symbol presentation are executed in an overlapping period, at least the number of operations corresponding to one of the operation presentations is increased. can be increased, making it easy to understand that a specific performance is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a specific performance from being completed in a short period of time and a performance that is difficult for the player to understand.

The gaming machine AH4 is characterized in that the specific performance includes one in which the execution period of the operation performance mode after being changed is set to be longer than normal.

According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AH4, during the specific performance, the execution period of the operation performance mode is set longer than in normal times, so that the specific performance is executed for the player. This has the effect of increasing the performance effect because the information can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic AI group> (Pending notice development)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. An identification symbol display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation that can perform an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. A presentation execution means, an identification pattern presentation execution means capable of executing an identification pattern presentation that makes it possible to change the mode of the identification pattern displayed by operating the operation means, and an identification pattern presentation execution means. A presentation mode changing means for changing the presentation mode of the identification symbol presentation that is being executed based on a predetermined change condition being satisfied during the period in which the identification symbol presentation is being executed. Gaming machine AI1 is characterized by certain things.

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols in a variable manner based on winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, and notify players of the lottery results after the variable display ends. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning hole can be stored multiple times, and the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved symbols are displayed, and the currently displayed reserved symbols are There are some devices that are configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can be used to notify information regarding the corresponding lottery in advance (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the gaming machine described above, by changing the color and shape of the pending symbols, the fluctuating display corresponding to the pending symbol indicates the expectation of a jackpot. This made it possible to raise people's expectations. However, since it is not possible to make the content of the pending notice performance correspond to changes in the gaming situation after the pending notice performance has occurred, players may not have a sense of expectation regarding the content of the pending notice performance. This poses a problem in that it becomes difficult and reduces the desire to play. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine AI1, if the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the identification symbol performance, the performance mode of the identification symbol performance that is being executed can be changed, so that the performance effect of the identification symbol performance can be enhanced. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AI1, the changing condition is satisfied based on the new information being stored in the storage means during the period when the identification symbol presentation is being executed. AI2.

According to the gaming machine AI2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the presentation mode of the identification symbol presentation can be varied based on new information being stored in the storage means, so that the presentation mode of the identification pattern presentation can be changed during the execution of the identification pattern presentation. Even in this case, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to store new information in the storage means, and there is an effect that the performance of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AI2 has a prior discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination before the information stored in the storage means is discriminated by the discrimination means, and the identification symbol performance execution means A gaming machine AI3 characterized in that the mode of the identification symbol is varied based on the determination result by the pre-discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AI3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AI2, the mode of the identification symbol is varied based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, so that it is possible to create interest in the identification symbol performance that is performed. This has the effect of increasing the production effect.

In the gaming machine AI3, the performance mode variable means is configured to vary the performance mode based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means for the information that triggers the establishment of the change condition. Machine AI4.

According to the gaming machine AI4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AI3, it is possible to change the presentation mode of the identification symbol presentation based on the result of preliminary determination on newly stored information, so that the presentation mode of the identification symbol presentation can be changed at the time of execution. It is possible to target identification symbols in a wider range than the range of identification symbols indicated by the identification symbol presentation in . Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player have a sense of expectation regarding the identification symbol performance, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol performance execution means executes the identification symbol performance over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and A gaming machine AI5 characterized in that it has a regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period during which the operation of the operating means is not valid during a period in which the game machine AI5 is executed.

According to the gaming machine AI5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol presentation is executed over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times, and furthermore, the identification pattern presentation is performed over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times. During the execution period, a regulation period is provided in which no operation on the operating means is determined to be valid. This has the effect of making it possible for the player to enjoy deciding at what timing to operate the operating means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AI6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AI5, a specific presentation is executed during a period in which the identification symbol presentation is executed, except for the regulation period.

According to the game machine AI6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AI5, by executing a specific performance, it is possible to determine whether or not the current period is a regulation period in which the operation of the operating means is not valid during the identification symbol performance. This has the effect that it is possible to carry out performances that are easy for players to understand.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Button continuous press sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player and a performance execution means that changes a performance based on the operation of the operation means, each time the operation means is operated, an operation sound is generated. , a voice control means capable of outputting at least a first operation sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound, and a type of the operation sound outputted by the voice control means can be set. The sound setting means includes a sound setting means and a sound discrimination means capable of determining the type of the operation sound outputted by the sound control means, and the sound setting means is configured to determine the type of the operation sound outputted by the sound control means based on the discrimination result of the sound discrimination means. A gaming machine AJ1 is characterized in that the type of operation sound is set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, before the lottery results are announced, it is possible to execute an operation performance that causes the player to operate the operation means as a suggestion performance to suggest the lottery results, and the period until the lottery results are announced is made possible. There were things that entertained players (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, among the gaming machines described above, when a player operates an operating means, there is one that outputs an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly accepted. In such gaming machines, it was possible to easily determine whether or not the player was able to operate the operating means based on the operation sound output, but it was There has been a problem in that when the next operation is performed during the period, that is, when a continuous hitting operation is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sounds output in response to each operation. Further, there was a problem in that the game became monotonous if only one operation sound was output. To provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by making it easier for a player to hear the operation sound outputted in the above-mentioned game machine and further outputting a variety of operation sounds.

According to the gaming machine AJ1, it is possible to set a new operation sound type based on the type of operation sound that is actually output, so it is possible to output an operation sound that is easy for the player to understand, and the game is improved. It has the effect of increasing interest.

A game machine AJ2 in the game machine AJ1, wherein the sound setting means sets the operation sound of a different type from the type of the operation sound determined by the sound discrimination means.

According to the game machine AJ2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AJ1, it is possible to set a different type of operation sound from the type of operation sound that is actually output, so that various operation sounds can be output. This has the effect of making it possible to perform performances with a wide variety of variations and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, the sound setting means sets the first operation sound when the sound determining means determines that the operation sound is not output. Machine AJ3.

According to the game machine AJ3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, when no operation sound is output, the first operation sound is set by the audio setting means. Therefore, it is possible to output the operation sound with a predetermined regularity for the operation of the operation means, and there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

Any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3 has an operation status determination means capable of determining the interval between the operations performed on the operation means, and the audio setting means is configured to determine whether the determination result of the operation status determination means is A gaming machine AJ4 characterized in that, when a specific situation determination result is obtained, a third operation sound different from the first operation sound and the second operation sound can be set.

According to the game machine AJ4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AJ1 to AJ3, the third operation sound can be set based on the determination result of the operation status determination means, so that the player cannot perform the operation. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of operating the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased.

The gaming machine AJ4 is characterized in that the operation status determination means determines that the operation status determination result is the specific status determination result when the interval between the operations performed on the operation unit is shorter than a predetermined period. Game machine AJ5.

According to the gaming machine AJ5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AJ4, when the interval between the operations performed on the operating means is shorter than a predetermined period, the third operation sound is output. This has the effect of further increasing the player's desire to participate in the game.

In any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, the performance execution means executes the performance during a predetermined performance period, and based on the determination result of the audio discrimination means at the time when the performance period has elapsed. , having a pseudo sound setting means capable of setting a pseudo sound after the elapse of the production period, and the sound control means being capable of outputting the pseudo sound set by the pseudo sound setting means. The AJ6 gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, it is possible to output a pseudo sound based on the type of operation sound output at the end of the production period. No matter what type of operation sound is being output at the time, the effect is that the audio output control can be ended without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In gaming machine AJ6, the pseudo sound setting means sets a pseudo sound corresponding to the second operation sound when the sound discrimination means determines a type of the operation sound that is different from the second operation sound. A game machine AJ7 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine AJ7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AJ6, if the type of operation sound outputted at the end of the production period is other than the second operation sound, a pseudo sound is used to correspond to the second operation sound. Since the sound is output, it is possible to unify the end sound of the sounds output by the sound control means. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

The gaming machine AJ7 includes a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a predetermined display means for displaying the identification information. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a period of time; and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit based on the present invention, wherein the presentation period is set during a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display, The pseudo-audio setting means is configured to set the pseudo-audio setting means to be configured such that when the identification information that is dynamically displayed while the performance is being performed is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, the pseudo-sound setting means is configured to set the pseudo-audio setting means to be configured such that when the identification information that is dynamically displayed while the performance is being executed is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, the pseudo-sound setting means is set to A gaming machine AJ8, characterized in that the pseudo voice is easily set.

According to the gaming machine AJ8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AJ7, a pseudo sound is produced during the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. Since it is made easy to output, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the ending content of the voice outputted by the voice control means.

<Features AK group> (Picture voice)
In a gaming machine that has a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a benefit granting means that grants an advantageous benefit to a player when the particular performance is executed by the performance execution means, the performance is executed. an audio control means capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a first performance executed by the means; an audio information determining means for determining the audio information to be output by the audio output means from a plurality of audio information; A gaming machine AK1 characterized by having a regulating means capable of regulating the type of audio information determined by the audio information determining means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. When announcing the lottery results, a system has been proposed in which a plurality of symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery results are announced based on the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed (for example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013 -090780). Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to add sharpness to the presentation of lottery results by outputting a sound effect when a plurality of fluctuating symbol rows are stopped and displayed. . However, there was a problem in that the repetition of monotonous sound effects made the game monotonous, leading to players getting bored with the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which a player can prevent a player from getting tired of the game early by suppressing repeated output of monotonous sound effects in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AK1, by regulating the type of audio information determined by the audio information determining means, it is possible to easily determine the type of audio information as intended at the time of design, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This has the effect of suppressing defects.

The gaming machine AK1 has a storage means capable of storing the audio information determined by the audio information determining means as history information, and the regulating means is configured to store the audio information determined by the audio information determining means as history information. A gaming machine AK2 characterized in that the type of the audio information determined by the audio information determining means is regulated.

According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK1, the determined voice information is stored in the storage means as history information, and the voice determined by the voice information determining means in accordance with the stored history information. By regulating the type of information, it is possible to control the audio information determined in accordance with the history information, and there is an effect that the type of audio information to be determined can be made suitable.

In the gaming machine AK2, the regulating means regulates that the same type as the type of the audio information stored a predetermined number of times ago is determined.
According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AK2, it is possible to prevent the same type of audio information from being determined consecutively, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous.

A gaming machine AK4 in the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, wherein the regulating means regulates that the type of the audio information determined a specific number of times or more in a predetermined period is determined.

According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, it is possible to suppress the problem that the type of the same audio information is excessively determined in a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, the performance executed by the performance execution means includes a symbol performance in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed, and the first performance is the performance executed by the performance execution means. A game machine AK5 characterized in that one of the identification symbols among the symbols is a display that is stopped and displayed.

According to the gaming machine AK5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, various sounds are output when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the performance when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is varied. This makes it possible to prevent players from getting bored with the game early.

In any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK5, a determining means capable of making a determination, and a benefit granting means capable of granting an advantageous benefit to a player based on the determination result of the determining means being a specific determination result. A gaming machine AK6, characterized in that the audio information determining means is capable of determining the audio information based on a determination result by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine AK6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK5, it is possible to identify the determination result based on the sound output corresponding to the first effect, so the output sound This has the effect of making the players interested in the types and allowing them to play the game.

The gaming machine AK6 includes an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, and an information storage means in which information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the determination means is configured to read the information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine has a preliminary determination means that executes a preliminary determination before the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means; A gaming machine AK7, wherein the audio information determining means is configured to be able to determine the audio information based on a preliminary determination result by the preliminary determining means.

According to the gaming machine AK7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK6, it is possible to identify the result of the preliminary determination based on the type of outputted audio, so it is possible to create interest in the type of outputted audio. There is an effect that it can be done.

<Characteristic AL group> (Image quality control)
Display information determining means for determining the display information of the display mode to be displayed by the display means from a plurality of display information, and the amount of data in at least two or more of the display information determined by the display information determining means. It has a data amount determining means for determining the corresponding information, and a variable control means for varying and controlling the display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the determination result determined by the data amount determining means. Gaming machine AL1 is characterized by certain things.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As an effect for notifying lottery results, a display device configured to display various images and videos has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the preview display mode is displayed randomly, there is a problem in that the amount of image data to be displayed becomes excessive, and the burden on display control and the like increases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the control load can be reduced in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AL1, the display mode displayed is variably controlled based on the result determined by the data amount determining means, so display control can be performed in accordance with the data amount, and the control load can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to reduce

In the gaming machine AL1, the data amount determining means determines whether a specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in a predetermined first period. A game machine AL2 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AL1, it is determined whether the specific condition is satisfied based on the total amount of data of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period. The problem of increased control load can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, a determination means capable of making a determination, a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the determination result of the determination means, and when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means, a benefit granting means for granting benefits advantageous to the player, and the display information determining means determines a display mode displayed in the performance executed by the performance execution means. A gaming machine AL3.

According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the performance notified by the determination result cannot be executed stably due to an increase in the amount of data.

In any of gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the display mode displayed by the display mode determining means is one in which status information corresponding to the data amount is set as information corresponding to the data amount, and The gaming machine AL4 is characterized in that the data amount determining means determines whether the total value obtained by adding the status information is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the status information corresponding to the amount of data is set, so that the amount of data can be easily determined. be.

In any of the gaming machines AL1 to AL4, the variable control means corresponds to the display information determined by the display information determining means so that the total amount of data of the display mode displayed on the display means decreases. A gaming machine AL5 is characterized in that the display mode of the gaming machine AL5 is variable.

According to the gaming machine AL5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines AL1 to AL4, the amount of data is suppressed, so there is an effect that the control load can be reduced. The gaming machine AL5 is characterized in that the variable control means sets a display mode in which the number of pixels of the display mode corresponding to at least one of the display information determined by the display information determining means is reduced. Game machine AL6.

According to the gaming machine AL6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AL5, the amount of data can be suppressed by setting a small number of pixels in the existing display mode, and the problem of excessive display data can be suppressed. There is.

<Characteristic AM group> (Multiple press effects)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. , dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the display means displaying the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result. In the gaming machine, the game machine has a benefit granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player when An operation dynamic display mode is set in which the display mode is changed by operating the means, and when the operation dynamic display mode is set, a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid is set. a valid period setting means to be set; and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the remaining period of the set valid period when the operating means is operated within the valid period. A gaming machine AM1 characterized in that it has the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for notifying lottery results, a system has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the performance by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the timing and period of operation of the operating means are not constant depending on the player, there is a problem in that the interest in performing the performance is reduced. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine AM1, when the operating means is operated, a specific performance can be executed based on the remaining period of the validity period, so that a wide range of games can be played by setting the validity period long. Even if the player is configured to be able to operate the operating means, a specific performance is performed based on the remaining period of the validity period, making it possible to perform a variety of performances and increasing the interest of the game. It has the effect of improving.

In the gaming machine AM1, a suggestion mode setting means for setting a suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means be operated a plurality of times within the validity period set by the validity period setting means; and a suggestion mode setting means set by the suggestion mode setting means. a performance period setting means for setting a predetermined performance period within the validity period for the suggestion mode corresponding to the operation in step 1, and a remaining period of the performance period set by the performance period setting means; A gaming machine AM2 characterized in that it has a notification means capable of notifying a remaining period mode indicating a remaining period.

According to the gaming machine AM2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AM1, it is possible to make the player think that a validity period is set for each of the multiple operations, so that the player can avoid the multiple operations. This has the effect of being able to notify you of what will be done in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, the identification information is configured by combining a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays each of the plurality of identification symbols to show the determination result. The plurality of identification symbols are stopped in combination, and the operation dynamic display mode is displayed in a specific manner by operating the operating means on at least some of the plurality of identification symbols. When the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect after the dynamically displayed identification information. The gaming machine AM3 is characterized in that it executes an effect corresponding to information reflected during the dynamic display of the identification information when the dynamic display is started.

According to the gaming machine AM3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, by operating the operating means so that the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the effect will also be reflected during the dynamic display after the dynamic display in the relevant one. By executing the presentation, there is an effect that the user can be motivated to operate the operating means in a short period of time.

<Characteristic AN group> (Cosmo Up)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored by the storage means; and a determination means thereof. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the display means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information; and a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine, the gaming machine has a benefit granting means for granting benefits, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, and a specific performance executed by the performance execution means. a specific information storage means in which specific information based on is stored; and the effect executed by the effect execution means at the start of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the specific information stored in the specific storage means. A gaming machine AN1 comprising: special performance determining means for determining a special performance as at least a part of the game machine AN1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it has been proposed that a preview performance suggesting the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780 ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. Among the above gaming machines, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine AN1, the special performance is determined based on the specific information stored when a specific performance is executed, so that the performance to be performed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific performance. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by providing different games to each player.

In the gaming machine AN1, based on the suggestion means for suggesting a suggestion mode corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, and the special effect determined by the special effect determining means being executed. and a suggestion mode changing means for changing the suggestion mode, and configured such that when the suggestion mode is a predetermined mode, a residual display period of the identification information is a predetermined period or more. A game machine AN2 is characterized in that it is a gaming machine AN2.

According to the gaming machine AN2, it can be determined based on the suggestion mode that it is not the timing to display the identification information in a mode for indicating the determination result, and there is an effect that the problem of overlooking the determination result can be suppressed.

The gaming machine AN1 or AN2 has an operation means that can be operated by a player, and the performance determined by the special performance determining means is an operation performance whose performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. A gaming machine AN3 characterized in that the number of times the operation performance is executed is set in accordance with the specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

According to the gaming machine AN3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AN1 or AN2, the number of times the operation performance is executed is set based on the stored specific information, so the number of times the player can operate the operating means is set. This has the effect of suppressing problems that result in misunderstandings.

<Characteristic AO group> (operated 3 times)
The player has an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation performance setting means that can set an operation performance that is executed based on the operation of the operation means, and the operation performance setting means can set the operation performance. A multiple operation performance in which a specific operation performance is executed in response to a plurality of operations is set in the operation performance that can be performed, and when the multiple operation performance is set, A gaming machine AO1 characterized in that a number of suggestion modes corresponding to the number of operations set in the operation performance are displayed.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for notifying lottery results, a system has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the performance by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there is a problem in that the interest is reduced when performing the performance based on the operation of the operating means. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine AO1, when a multi-operation performance is set, the number of suggestion modes corresponding to the number of operations is displayed, thereby providing an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine AO1, when the multi-operation performance is set, a valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid; and a valid period within the valid period set by the valid period setting means. A gaming machine AO2 characterized in that it has variable display means for setting a variable display mode that is variably displayed for each of the suggestion modes in response to a decrease in the validity period.

According to the gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AO1, the variable display mode makes it seem as if each suggestion mode has a validity period, and the timing for each operation can be displayed variably. This has the effect that the operation can be performed according to the mode, and the timing at which the operation effects are displayed can be made appropriate.

A gaming machine AO3 in the gaming machine AO1 or AO2, wherein the multiple operation presentation is a preset operation presentation that is executed according to the number of times the operating means is operated.

According to the gaming machine AO3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AO1 or AO2, there is no need to individually set multiple operation performances, and there is an effect that control for multiple operations can be easily performed.

<Characteristic AP group> (Burst Challenge)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, a validity period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, and an operation performance can be executed based on the operation of the operation means within the validity period. An information determining means for determining information corresponding to the operation performance that can be executed within a predetermined period of the valid period; A gaming machine AP1 characterized in that it has an operation mode determining means for determining the mode of the operation performance to be executed based on the remaining period of the predetermined period when the game machine is played.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it has been proposed that a preview performance that hints at the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780 ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine AP1, the information corresponding to the operation performance that can be executed during a predetermined period within the validity period is determined in advance, and the mode of the operation performance is determined based on the remaining period, so the operation means is operated. Even if there are differences in frequency and interval between players, the effect is that by executing operation presentations that match the operations of the players and reporting information, it is possible to make effective use of the validity period and improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine AP1, the operation performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the operation performance each time the operation means operates within the predetermined period, and the information determination means is configured to execute the operation performance within the predetermined period. A gaming machine AP2 characterized in that information corresponding to the final mode of the operation performance that can be performed is determined.

According to the gaming machine AP2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AP1, the final operation effect is determined in advance, so that the player can enjoy the process until the final operation effect is executed every time the operating means is operated. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, when the specific operation performance is executed, it is shown that a benefit that is advantageous to the player will be given, and the operation performance executed in the predetermined period includes: , a process operation effect corresponding to the process until the specific operation effect is displayed is set, and the operation mode determining means determines whether the specific operation effect is selected when the remaining period of the predetermined period is less than or equal to the predetermined period. A gaming machine AP3 characterized in that an operation performance is determined, and when the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, the process operation performance corresponding to the remaining period is determined.

According to the gaming machine AP3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, the process operation presentation can make the player gradually recognize that the final operation presentation will be made, thereby increasing the player's interest. There is an effect that it can be done.

The gaming machine AP3 has an updating means for updating the performance value based on the operation of the operation means, and the updating means updates the value for updating the performance value based on the remaining period of the predetermined period and the current setting. and the operation mode determining means determines the mode of the operation effect corresponding to the effect numerical value updated by the updating means. A gaming machine AP4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AP3, the mode of operation performance can be easily determined based on the performance numerical value, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic AQ group> (Derived from Cosmo Up)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored by the storage means; and a determination means thereof. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the display means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information; and a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine, the gaming machine has a benefit granting means for granting benefits, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, and a specific performance executed by the performance execution means. a specific information storage means in which specific information based on is stored, and a special performance is determined as at least a part of the performance executed by the performance execution means based on the specific information stored in the specific storage means. A gaming machine AQ1 characterized in that it has a special performance determining means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it has been proposed that a preview performance that hints at the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780 ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine AQ1, the special effect is determined based on the specific information stored when a specific effect is executed, so that the effect to be executed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific effect. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by providing different games to each player.

<Characteristic AR group> (Derived from Burst Challenge)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, a validity period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, and an operation performance can be executed based on the operation of the operation means within the validity period. an information determining means for determining information corresponding to the operation performance executable within the validity period; and when the operation means is operated within the predetermined period, A gaming machine AR1 comprising: operation mode determining means for determining the mode of the operation performance to be executed based on the remaining period of the validity period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it has been proposed that a preview performance that hints at the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780 ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine AR1, the information corresponding to the operation performances that can be executed within the valid period is determined in advance, and the mode of the operation performances is determined based on the remaining period, so the frequency and interval of operating the operation means are determined in advance. Even if there are differences among players, the effect is that the validity period can be effectively utilized and the interest in the game can be improved by executing operation performances that match the operations of the players and notifying the information.

<Characteristics BA group> (Game performance where it is advantageous if no pending series occurs)
A first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can easily enter the ball, and first discrimination information is provided based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entering means. The first discrimination information acquisition means to acquire, the first discrimination means to perform the first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the first direction are different from each other. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can easily enter, and second discrimination information is determined based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. a second discrimination information acquisition means to acquire, a second discrimination means to perform a second discrimination based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, and a second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination information is stored up to a predetermined number of pieces of information from the time the second discrimination information is acquired until the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information is executed. a first state in which the game ball enters easily, and a first state in which the ball enters the ball more easily than in the first state; a variable ball entrance means that can be changed to a second state, a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on a game ball entering the variable ball entrance means, and the first determining means, or Variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to a first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result obtained by the second determination means; As a game state after the execution of the variable game by the means is completed, one game state is selected from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. a gaming state setting means for setting a gaming state, the gaming state setting means is configured to set the specific discrimination result by the second discrimination means rather than the specific discrimination result by the first discrimination means. The gaming machine BA1 is characterized in that the higher the rate of setting the first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed, the more the variable game is finished.

According to the game machine BA1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry means, The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination means based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can easily enter, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entering means. The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination is performed by the second discrimination means based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. After the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means until the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information is executed, the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means. A predetermined number of pieces of information are stored as an upper limit. A variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball and a second state in which it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball than in the first state is configured to allow a game ball launched in a second direction to enter the ball. It is placed in a convenient location. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. A variable game in which the variable entry means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on a specific judgment result obtained by the first judgment means or the second judgment means. . The game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. A gaming state from 1 to 1 is set by the gaming state setting means. It is better to obtain a specific determination result by the second determination means than to obtain a specific determination result by the first determination means, so that the first game state is set as the game state after the execution of the variable game is finished by the game state setting means. The proportion of people who set this will be higher.

As a result, when a game ball is launched in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined benefit during execution of a variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the second discrimination information is stored. . If a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information, there is a high probability that the first game state, which is less advantageous than the second game state, will be set, so it will not be stored during execution of the variable game. The second determination based on the second determination information allows the player to play the game with the expectation that a specific determination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that novel gameplay can be realized.

In the gaming machine BA1, the variable patterns of the variable ball entry means include at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. variable pattern setting means for setting any one of the variable patterns, and the variable pattern setting means is configured to set one of the variable patterns more than the second variable pattern when the first discrimination means obtains the specific discrimination result. The proportion of setting the first variable pattern becomes high, and when the discrimination by the second discrimination means yields the specific discrimination result, the proportion of setting the second variable pattern becomes higher than the first variable pattern. A game machine BA2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BA1, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. is set by the variable pattern setting means. When a specific discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination by the first discrimination means, the rate at which the first variable pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when the determination by the second determining means yields a specific determination result, the rate at which the second variable pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the first variable pattern.

As a result, when the second determination means reaches a specific determination result, it becomes easier to set the second variable pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, so during execution of the variable game This has the effect of making it more likely that the second determination based on the second determination information stored in the second determination result will not result in a specific determination result.

In the game machine BA1 or BA2, based on the start of the variable game, a first variable pattern is set as a variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, and a game ball is sent to the variable ball entry means more than the first variable pattern. A variable pattern setting means is provided for setting any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the game ball. The period is at least longer than the period until the predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information are acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means when the fire continues in the second direction. The gaming machine BA3 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the start of the variable game, the variable patterns of the variable ball entry means include a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least the above pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern, if the game ball continues to be launched in the second direction, a predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information are acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. It consists of a period that is at least longer than the period until the end of the period.

As a result, if the player continues to fire the game ball in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined benefit during execution of a variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, the second Discrimination information is obtained. Therefore, after the end of the variable game, the second determination of the upper limit number of times is executed every time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that all the second determinations of the upper limit number of times will not result in a specific determination result.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the second determination by the second determination means is performed with priority over the first determination by the first determination means. Game machine BA4.

According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is performed with priority over the first discrimination by the first discrimination means. Even if the game ball enters the first ball entry means with the second discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, execution of the first discrimination can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination can attract more attention.

In any of the game machines BA1 to BA4, a game ball launched in the second direction is placed at a position that can be reached, and the reached game ball is transferred to a first channel provided with the second ball entering means. and a second channel provided with the variable entry means.

According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA4, the first channel provided with the second ball entry means and the second channel provided with the variable ball entry means are provided. Since the distribution means for distributing the game balls to the second direction is arranged at a position where the game balls fired in the second direction can reach, it is possible to prevent the flowing direction of the game balls fired in the second direction from being biased. This has the effect of being able to prevent this.

In the gaming machine BA5, the gaming machine BA6 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes game balls to the first channel and the second channel.

According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA5, since the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means, the game balls are distributed alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path, so that the game balls are distributed alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path. The ball can be caused to enter the second ball entry means and the variable ball entry means alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game balls launched in the second direction from biasingly entering the second ball entering means or the variable ball entering means.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA6, there is a first position where a game ball enters the first ball entry means more easily, and a game ball enters the first ball entry means more easily than the first position. The first gaming state includes a variable means that can be changed to a second position where it becomes difficult to play the ball, and a variable control means that controls the variable operation of the variable means. The second gaming state is characterized in that the variable means is more easily varied to the first position by the variable control means than the first gaming state. Game machine BA7.

According to the gaming machine BA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA6, there is a first position where it is easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entering means, and a first position compared to the first position. The variable means is variable to a second position where it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first game state, it is difficult for the variable control means to change the variable means to the first position, and in the second game state, it is easier for the variable control means to change the variable means to the first position compared to the first game state. .

Thereby, in the first game state, the variable means is easily changed to the first position, so that the game ball can easily enter the first ball entering means. Therefore, in the first gaming state, the game can be played more efficiently, so there is an effect that the player can play the game with greater expectation that the first gaming state will be reached.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA7, the first gaming state is such that the probability of the specific determination result being determined by the first determining means and the second determining means is set to a first probability. and the second gaming state is such that the probability of the specific determination result being determined by the first determining means and the second determining means is set to a second probability that is lower than the first probability. The gaming machine BA8 is characterized by certain things.

According to gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BA1 to BA7, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the first gaming state, the probability of a specific determination result being determined by the first determining means and the second determining means is set as the first probability. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the probability that the determination by the first determining means and the second determining means will result in a specific determination result is set to a second probability that is lower than the first probability.

Thereby, in the first game state, the probability of a specific determination result is higher than in the second game state, so that after the variable game ends, the variable game is likely to be executed again with a relatively small number of determinations. Therefore, in the first gaming state, it can be expected that more predetermined benefits will be obtained in a relatively short period of time, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic BB group> (Execute a specific performance using the jackpot ending period and the pending consumption period)
A discriminating means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, and the privilege. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as a game state after the execution of the bonus game by the game execution means is finished. a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among the states; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determining means; Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a period until the bonus game ends, and a period until the dynamic display of one or more of the identification information executed after the bonus game ends. and a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance, the specific performance being a performance that can suggest to the player whether or not the gaming state after the specific performance ends is the second gaming state. The gaming machine BB1 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine BB1, a determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. carried out by means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as a game state after the end of the bonus game execution by the bonus game execution means. One gaming state from among the states is set by the gaming state setting means. The identification information indicating the determination result by the determining means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Based on the fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition during the execution of a bonus game, dynamic display of the period until the bonus game ends and one or more pieces of identification information executed after the bonus game ends. The specific performance is executed by the specific performance execution means during the period until the end of the specific performance. The specific performance is composed of a performance that can suggest to the player whether or not the gaming state after the specific performance ends is the second gaming state.

As a result, the specific performance can be executed over the period from when the specific condition is established until the dynamic display of one or more pieces of identification information ends. Or, compared to the case where the specific effect is executed in the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information of 1, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine BB1, the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance based on the fulfillment of the specific condition when the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is set to the second gaming state. A gaming machine BB2 is characterized in that it executes the following.

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB1, when the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is set to the second gaming state, a specific performance is performed based on the fulfillment of a specific condition. Since this is executed by the specific performance execution means, the second game state is suggested in the specific performance unless a specific determination result is obtained during the execution of the specific performance and the game state is shifted to the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the specific determination result will not be obtained during the execution of the specific performance.

In the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, a discrimination information acquisition means acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is a discrimination information storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit until the discrimination condition for the acquired discrimination information is satisfied; determining means for determining whether or not the discriminating information corresponding to the specific discriminating result is included in the discriminating information that is present; and determining the performance mode of the specific performance based on the determination result by the determining means. A gaming machine BB3 comprising a performance mode determining means, wherein the specific performance execution means executes a specific performance of the performance mode determined by the performance mode determining means.

According to gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on a predetermined specific trigger, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used for the discrimination with respect to the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of pieces of information is stored as an upper limit by the discrimination information storage means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the determining means determines whether or not the determining information stored in the determining information storage means includes the determining information corresponding to the specific determining result. Based on the determination result by the determining means, the performance mode of the specific performance is determined by the performance mode determining means. The specific performance of the performance mode determined by the performance mode determining means is executed by the specific performance execution means.

Thereby, since the determination result by the determining means can be determined in advance, it is possible to set the presentation mode in accordance with the result of the determination actually performed by the determining means.

In gaming machine BB3, the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is a first bonus game in which the game state after the execution is finished is set to the first game state by the game state setting means; a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types of bonus games including at least a second bonus game in which the game state after completion of execution is set to the second game state; is to determine whether the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means includes discrimination information corresponding to the first bonus game; Based on the fact that the means determines that the discrimination information corresponding to the first bonus game is included, a production mode that suggests that the gaming state after the specific production is the first gaming state is determined. Game machine BB4 is characterized in that it is a game machine that makes decisions.

According to gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BB3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the types of bonus games executed by the bonus game execution means include a first bonus game in which the game state after the execution is finished is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and a first bonus game in which the game state after the execution is finished is set to the first game state by the game state setting means. One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types of bonus games including at least a second bonus game in which the gaming state is set to the second gaming state. The determination means determines whether the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes determination information corresponding to the first bonus game. Based on the fact that the determination means has determined that the discrimination information corresponding to the first bonus game is included, the performance mode that suggests that the gaming state after the specific performance is the first gaming state is performed. It is determined by the mode determining means.

As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience in which the player is forced to play the game in the expectation that the first bonus game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Gaming machine BB5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines BB1 to BB4, the specific performance is such that a predetermined specific period is set as a performance period regardless of the performance mode.

According to the game machine BB5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines BB1 to BB4, a predetermined specific period is set as the performance period of the specific performance regardless of the performance mode, so the length of the performance period is This makes it difficult to predict the results of a specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the result of the specific performance until the end.

In the gaming machine BB5, a display means for displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the above-mentioned display executed by the dynamic display execution means. dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of identification information based on the determination result by the determining means, and the specific period is such that the bonus game is not executed after the specific condition is satisfied. The period until the end of the period and the period determined by the dynamic display period determining means when all the determinations made by the determining means a predetermined number of times result in different determination results from the specific determination results. The gaming machine BB6 is characterized in that the dynamic display period is the sum of a specified number of times of the dynamic display period.

According to gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BB5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the determination result by the determination means. The dynamic display period is determined during the period from when the specific condition is established until the end of the bonus game, and when all the determinations made by the determination means a predetermined number of times result in different determination results from the specific determination results. The sum of the dynamic display period for the specific number of times determined by the means is set as the specific period.

Thereby, the specific performance can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for a specific number of times ends, so there is an effect that the specific performance can be ended neatly.

In the gaming machine BB6, the dynamic display period determining means is configured to, after the end of the bonus game, if the determination by the determining means within the specific number of times yields a specific determination result, the dynamic display period determining means displays the dynamic display period at least until the specific period ends. The gaming machine BB7 is characterized in that a period longer than or equal to the remaining period is determined as the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine BB7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB6, if a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination means within a specific number of times after the end of the bonus game, at least the remainder until the end of the specific period. A period longer than the specified period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, so if a specific determination result is obtained within a specific number of times, the bonus game will be played before the specific period ends. can be prevented from starting. Therefore, by starting the bonus game before the end of the specific performance, it is possible to prevent the result of the specific performance from being known in advance, which has the effect of attracting more attention to the specific performance.

Any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB7 is provided with an expectation level suggestion performance execution means for executing a performance indicating the degree of expectation that the second gaming state is suggested by the specific performance during execution of the bonus game. The gaming machine BB8 is characterized by

According to the game machine BB8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines BB1 to BB7, the expectation level suggestion performance execution means includes a performance that suggests the degree of expectation for the second game state to be suggested by a specific performance during execution of the bonus game. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the performance mode during execution of the bonus game and the specific performance are a series of performances. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved while the bonus game is being executed.

<Characteristic BC group> (makes it difficult to determine from the attacker's actions whether or not a suspended sequence occurs)
a bonus ball entry means that provides a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball; a first position where a game ball can enter the bonus ball entry means; a variable means for changing the position to a second position where it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball; a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; and a first discriminating result based on the discrimination by the discriminating means and a first variable control means that controls the variable means to vary in a first variable manner, and a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result as a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state different from the gaming state at the time when the determination was executed, and a specific number of times based on the second determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means A second variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode executed the specific number of times when all discriminations by the discrimination means result in the first discrimination result; A gaming machine BC1 comprising: second variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary.

According to the gaming machine BC1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball, and a first position where the game ball can enter the privilege ball entry means; The variable means is variable to a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position. The first variable control means causes the variable means to vary in the first variable manner based on the discrimination performed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination by the discrimination means resulting in a specific discrimination result. controlled by Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means has resulted in the second discrimination result, it is distinguished from the first variable mode of the specific number of times that is executed when all the discriminations by the discrimination means of the specific number of times have resulted in the first discrimination result. The variable means is controlled to vary by the second variable control means in a second variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that gives a difficult appearance.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the first determination result or the second determination result has been obtained from the variable mode of the variable means, so it is difficult to distinguish whether a different gaming state has been set or not. This has the effect of making it difficult for people to distinguish the information.

In the gaming machine BC1, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. and the proportion of setting the second gaming state is set higher than the proportion of setting the first gaming state when the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. Gaming machine BC2 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BC1, the following effects are achieved. That is, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the determination by the determination means results in a second determination result, the rate at which the second game state is set by the game state setting means is set higher than the rate at which the first game state is set.

This has the effect that when the second determination result is obtained, a disadvantageous second gaming state is likely to be set, so that the game can be played in anticipation of the first determination result.

A gaming machine BC3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the proportion of the first discrimination result determined by the discrimination means is set higher than the proportion of other discrimination results.

According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the proportion of the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means is set higher than the proportion of other discrimination results. There is a high possibility that the first determination result will be obtained continuously over a number of times. Therefore, even when the second determination result is obtained and the variable means is controlled in the second variable manner, it can be made to think that the first determination result may have continued a specific number of times. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not a different gaming state has been set.

In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the determining means executes the determination when either a first determining condition or a second determining condition different from the first determining condition is satisfied. , the gaming state setting means sets a high ratio of setting the first gaming state when the second discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition; The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the game, a higher ratio is set for setting a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. BC4.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means when either the first determination condition or the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. When the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the rate at which the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means is set to be high. On the other hand, when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the rate at which the second gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state, is set is set to be high.

As a result, when the second discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, the first gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state is likely to be set, so the first discrimination condition is It is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the game will be successful. Therefore, when a determination is made by the determining means, it is possible to draw attention to the type of determination condition that triggered the execution of the determination.

In the gaming machine BC4, when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the second discrimination result and the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the benefit entry means is set to the second variable mode rather than the second variable mode. A game machine BC5 characterized by comprising a third variable control means that controls the variable means to vary in a third variable mode in which a game ball can easily enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC4, when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the second discrimination result and the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the result is lower than the second variable mode. Since the variable means is controlled by the third variable control means to be variable in the third variable mode in which the game ball easily enters the bonus ball entering means, the second determination is made based on the establishment of the first determination condition. It is possible to increase the degree of advantage when the result is achieved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that the first determination condition will be satisfied.

In the gaming machine BC4 or BC5, a first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a first direction can easily enter the ball, and a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction is provided. a second ball entering means arranged at a position where the ball can easily enter, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, The second determination condition is established based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the bonus ball entering means is established based on the fact that a game ball launched in the second direction enters the second ball entering means. A game machine BC6 is provided in a position where it is easy to play the ball.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BC4 or BC5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, while the second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter. A ball entry means and a bonus ball entry means are provided. The first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, whereas the second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. holds true.

Thereby, when the bonus ball entry means is changed to the first position, when a game ball is fired in the second direction in an attempt to obtain a predetermined award, the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is likely to be performed after the bonus ball entry means is changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine BC6, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means; A gaming machine BC7, characterized in that the gaming machine BC7 is provided with a discrimination information storage means capable of storing at least a predetermined number of pieces of discrimination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means.

According to gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BC6, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is Up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, the information is stored at least by the discrimination information storage means until the discrimination means executes the discrimination.

Thereby, when a ball entering the second ball entering means is detected in a situation where the judgment by the judging means cannot start, the judgment information used for the judgment can be stored in the judgment information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball entering the second ball entering means from being wasted.

In any of the gaming machines BC4 to BC7, the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition is performed with priority over the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. The gaming machine BC8 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BC4 to BC7, the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is better than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. Since the second determination condition is also executed with priority, there is an effect that when a determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is executed, attention can be drawn to the result of the determination.

<Characteristic BD group> (Configuration where special 2 starting winnings are likely to occur during jackpots, and difficult to occur during normal times)
a first discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a first discriminating condition; a second discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition; or a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the second determining means, and the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means. Type determination for determining one type of bonus game from among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game. A first state in which the second discrimination condition is likely to be satisfied is set based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means and the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means. a state setting means for setting a second state in which the second discriminating condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first state, based on the satisfaction of the termination condition; The percentage of determining the second bonus game is higher when the determination by the first determining means yields the specific determination result than when the determination by the determining means yields the specific determination result. Characteristic game machine BD1.

According to the gaming machine BD1, the first determination means performs the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. be done. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the point game execution means based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means. The type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game. The type of one bonus game is determined by the determining means. Based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means, a first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied is set by the state setting means. On the other hand, based on the satisfaction of the bonus game termination condition, the state setting means sets a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied compared to the first state. The type determining means is configured such that the rate of determining the second bonus game is higher when the determination by the first determining means yields a specific determination result than when the determination by the second determining means yields a specific determination result. It is configured.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the second determination condition from being satisfied in a state other than when the bonus game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to limit the opportunities for executing the first bonus game with a low degree of advantage.

In the gaming machine BD1, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information for use in discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. A gaming machine BD2, characterized in that it is provided with a discrimination information storage means for storing a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

According to gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BD1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, discrimination information for use in discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

Thereby, when the second discrimination condition is satisfied multiple times before the discrimination by the second discrimination means is performed, a plurality of discrimination information obtained in response to the fulfillment of the second discrimination condition for the plurality of times. is stored in the discrimination information storage means, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem in which the discrimination is not executed even though the second discrimination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine BD2, the second discriminating means determines, based on the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means during execution of the award game and stored in the discriminating information storage means, after the end of the award game. A gaming machine BD3 is characterized in that it executes discrimination.

According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD2, the second discriminating means determines the privilege based on the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means during the execution of the privilege game and stored in the discriminating information storage means. Since the determination is performed after the end of the game, the opportunities for the determination by the second determining means to be performed can be concentrated after the end of the bonus game. Therefore, after the end of the bonus game, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the expectation that the determination by the second determining means will not result in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines BD1 to BD3, a ball entry means for which the second discrimination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball, and a first position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means. , a variable means that can be changed from the first position to a second position where it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball; a specific determining means for determining whether to change the position from the first position to the second position; and a specific determining means for determining whether to change the position from the first position to the second position. and a variable control means for controlling the variable means so that the specific discriminating means changes in the second state more than when the specific discriminating means determines that the variable means is to be varied in the second state. The gaming machine BD4 is characterized in that when it is determined that the variable means is to be varied, the period during which the variable means is varied to the second position is controlled to be longer.

According to gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the following effects are achieved. That is, there is a first position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter into the ball entry means where the second discrimination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball, and a first position where it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than at the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific determination condition, the specific determination means determines whether the variable means is to be varied from the first position to the second position. Based on the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position, the variable control means controls the variable means to change to the second position. When the specific discrimination means determines that the variable means should be varied in the second state than when the specific discrimination means determines that the variable means should be varied in the second state, the variable means is in the second position. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes longer.

Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, in the first state, there is an effect that the second discrimination condition can be satisfied more easily than in the second state.

In any of the game machines BD1 to BD4, a ball entry means for which the second discrimination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball, and a first position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means. , a variable means that can be changed from the first position to a second position where it is easier for game balls to enter the ball; a specific determining means for determining whether the variable position is to be changed to the second position; and the variable means is configured to change to the second position based on the fact that the specific determining means determines that the variable position is to be changed from the first position to the second position. and variable control means for controlling such that the period from the start to the end of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means is more likely to be shorter in the first state than in the second state. The gaming machine BD5 is characterized by the following.

According to gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BD1 to BD4, the following effects are achieved. That is, there is a first position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entering means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball, and a first position where the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entering means than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific discrimination condition, the specific discrimination means determines whether the variable means is to be varied from the first position to the second position. Based on the fact that the specific determining means determines that the position should be changed from the first position to the second position, the variable control means controls the variable means to change the position to the second position. The configuration is such that the period from the start of the first discrimination by the specific discrimination means to the end is more likely to be shorter in the first state than in the second state.

As a result, the period required for the specific determination means to perform the same number of determinations is shorter in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, since it is possible to obtain an opportunity to change the variable means to the second position more times, there is an effect that it is possible to easily cause the game ball to enter the ball in the first state.

In any of the game machines BD1 to BD3, a ball entry means is provided in a specific flow path and the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball, and a ball entry means is provided in which the game ball is difficult to flow down the specific flow path. an opening/closing means that is variable between a closed state in which the game ball is closed and an open state in which the game ball can flow down; and the opening and closing means is set to the open state based on the first state. , an opening/closing control means for setting the closed state based on the fact that the second state has been reached.

According to gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the following effects are achieved. That is, a ball entering means is provided in the specific flow path, which satisfies the second determination condition based on the game ball entering the ball. The opening/closing means is variable between a closed state in which the specific channel is closed so that the game ball is difficult to flow down, and an open state in which the game ball can flow down. Based on the first state, the opening/closing means is set to the open state by the opening/closing control means, and based on the second state, the opening/closing means is set to the closed state by the opening/closing control means. .

This has the effect of more reliably preventing the second determination condition from being satisfied in the second state.

In the game machine BD6, the opening/closing means is configured to be able to park a specific number of game balls on the upstream side of the opening/closing means when the opening/closing means is set to the closed state. Machine BD7.

According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BD6, when the opening/closing means is set to the closed state, it is configured such that a specific number of game balls can be parked on the upstream side of the opening/closing means. Therefore, when the open state is set, the parked game balls can be allowed to enter the ball entering means. Therefore, in the first state in which the open state is set, there is an effect that the second discrimination condition can be more easily satisfied.

<Characteristic BE group> (Include information according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the specific performance in the fluctuation pattern command from the main to the sub)
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying performance modes, a main control means for performing main control regarding the game, and a slave control means for performing control regarding the game based on commands output from the main control means. , the main control means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a discrimination result by the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. a bonus game execution means; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means; and an operation in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time; information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means; and information corresponding to the dynamic display time that is different from the specific information. command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least information to the slave control means, the slave control means receiving the dynamic display time command output by the command output means. a dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means, and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Based on this, specific effect execution means executes a specific effect that can be executed over one or more of the dynamic display times on the display means, and the specific information included in the dynamic display time command. a specific performance end determination means that determines whether or not to end the specific performance based on the specific performance; It is characterized by comprising a specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect until the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command ends. Gaming machine BE1.

According to the gaming machine BE1, in the main control means, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, the determination is made that is advantageous to the player. The bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. The dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A dynamic display time command that includes at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is outputted by the command output means. It is output to the slave control means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display time command outputted by the command output means is received by the command reception means, and the dynamic display time is dynamically adjusted based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command reception means. It is specified by the display time specifying means. Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, a specific effect that can be executed over one or more dynamic display times is executed on the display means by the specific effect executing means. Based on specific information included in the dynamic display time command, a specific performance end determining means determines whether or not to end the specific performance. When the specific performance end determining means determines that the specific performance should be ended, the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means ends based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination. Until then, the specific effect is ended by the specific effect main hot water quantity means.

This has the effect that the specific performance can be suitably ended.

In the gaming machine BE1, when it is determined by the specific performance end determination means to end the specific performance, the specified performance is determined based on information according to the determination result by the determination means included in the dynamic display time command. A gaming machine BE2 characterized by comprising performance mode determining means for determining a performance mode until the specific performance is ended by the performance ending means.

According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE1, when the specific performance end determining means determines that the specific performance should be ended, the game machine BE2 performs an operation according to the determination result by the determining means included in the dynamic display time command. Based on the information, the performance mode determining means determines the performance mode until the specific performance is ended by the specific performance ending means, so the performance mode can be determined by taking into account the determination result by the determining means. . Therefore, there is an effect that the performance mode of the specific performance can be suitably set.

In the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, the slave control means includes a power-on determining means for determining whether power is turned on to the gaming machine, and a power-on determining means that is included in the dynamic display time command when the power-on determining means determines that the power is turned on. a cut-off time determining means for determining whether or not the specific performance was being executed at the time when the power to the gaming machine was cut off, based on the specific information obtained; and execution of the specific performance by the cut-off time determining means. The gaming machine BE3 is characterized in that it comprises a post-input performance execution means for executing the specific performance based on the fact that it is determined that the game is in progress.

According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, in the slave control means, when the application of power to the gaming machine is determined by the application determination means, and the application of power is determined by the application determination means. Next, based on specific information included in the dynamic display time command, the cut-off time determining means determines whether or not the specific performance was being executed at the time when the power to the gaming machine was cut off. The specific performance is executed by the post-input performance execution means based on the fact that the interruption time determination means determines that the specific performance is being executed.

As a result, even if the power is cut off while the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect can be restarted, which prevents the player from being confused by the effect being different before and after the power is cut off. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine BE3 is characterized in that the specific performance ending means ends the specific performance executed by the post-input performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE3, the specific performance executed by the performance executing means after input is terminated by the specific performance ending means, so that the power of the gaming machine is turned off during execution of the specific performance. Even in the case of being cut off, there is an effect that the specific performance can be suitably ended.

The gaming machine BE5 is characterized in that the specific performance execution means sets a predetermined specific period as a performance period of the specific performance.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE5, a specific period predetermined by the specific performance execution means is set as the performance period of the specific performance, so that a simple process is performed when setting the specific performance. This has the effect of being able to be set.

In any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE5, the main control means includes a discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means. a discrimination information storage means capable of storing at least the determined discrimination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the command output means stores the discrimination information in the discrimination information storage means. The number of information command including information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information being displayed is output to the slave control means, and the specific effect execution means is configured to output the number of information command including information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information included in the number of information command. The gaming machine BE6 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times equal to or less than the number of pieces of information.

According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines BE1 to BE5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored at least in the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means. An information number command including information corresponding to the number of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is outputted to the slave control means by the command output means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times less than or equal to the number of information of the discrimination information included in the information number command.

As a result, the specific performance can be executed within the range of the number of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, so even though the dynamic display of the discrimination information is not executed, the specific This has the effect of suppressing the continuation of the performance.

In the gaming machine BE6, the information corresponding to the number of pieces of the discrimination information is stored during the period from when the specific condition is met until all the discriminations based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means are completed. A gaming machine BE7, characterized in that the gaming machine BE7 is constituted by information corresponding to the number of remaining pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means.

According to the gaming machine BE7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE6, information corresponding to the number of pieces of discrimination information is used to perform all discriminations based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after a specific condition is established. Until the end of the process, the information is composed of information corresponding to the number of remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, so that the specific performance can be more reliably stored in the discrimination information storage means. This has the advantage that it can be executed within the range of the number of pieces of discrimination information or less.

<Characteristic BF group> (Depending on the winning pattern, the ease with which special drawing drawings are executed on the disadvantageous side is varied)
A first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can easily enter the ball, and first discrimination information is provided based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entering means. A first discrimination information acquisition means to acquire, a first discrimination means to execute a first discrimination using the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the first direction. A second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a different second direction can easily enter the ball, and second discrimination information based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entry means. A second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the second discrimination information and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means are used to make a second discrimination that is more likely to result in a discrimination result that is more unfavorable than the first discrimination. a second discriminating means to be executed; a discriminating information storage means capable of storing the second discriminating information acquired by the second discriminating information acquiring means up to a predetermined number of information; and the first discriminating means; A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the second determination means, and a type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means. , a first bonus game in which it is more likely to be advantageous to fire a game ball in the first direction than in the second direction during at least a predetermined period; and a first bonus game in which firing a game ball in the second direction rather than in the first direction during the predetermined period. A gaming machine BF1 characterized in that it is equipped with a type determining means for determining one type of the bonus game from among a plurality of types including a second bonus game that is more likely to be advantageous when fired.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines have advantages, such as by varying the gaming status given after a win or by varying the number of prize balls that can be won in each round, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have different degrees of intensity. However, it has been desired to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the type of hit.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BF1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter the ball. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the first ball input means, and the first discrimination information acquired by the first information acquisition means is used. , the first determination is performed by the first determination means. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction can easily enter the ball. The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Using the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination means performs a second discrimination that is more likely to result in a discrimination result that is more unfavorable than the first discrimination. The second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means. The types of bonus games executed by the bonus game execution means include a first bonus game in which it is more likely to be advantageous to fire the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction for at least a predetermined period of time; One type of bonus game is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including a second bonus game in which it is more likely to be advantageous to fire the game ball in the second direction.

As a result, the first bonus game, which is advantageous by firing the game ball in the first direction, is less likely to perform the second determination, which is likely to have an unfavorable determination result, so the first bonus game and the second bonus game It is possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage compared to games. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player expect that the first bonus game will be determined by the type determining means, the effect is that when a specific determination result is obtained, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the type of bonus game and play the game. There is.

In the game machine BF1, the first game ball is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter the ball, and is variable between a state where the game ball can enter the ball and a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball. a variable ball entry means; a variable ball entrance means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter the ball; 2 variable ball entry means, and a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, The first bonus game is one in which the first variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state where the ball can be entered than the second variable ball entry means, and the second award game is the one in which the first variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state where the ball can be entered. A gaming machine BF2 characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state in which a ball can be entered than in a game.

According to gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BF1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first variable ball entrance means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter the ball, and is variable between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter. has been done. A second variable ball entry means that can be varied between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter the ball. There is. A predetermined privilege is awarded by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. In the first bonus game, the first variable ball entry means is more likely to be changed into a state where the ball can be entered than the second variable ball entry means. In the second bonus game, the second variable ball entry means is more likely to be changed to a state where the ball can be entered than in the first bonus game.

This has the effect that during the execution of a bonus game, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the fired game ball enters the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. be.

In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the gaming state after the bonus game ends is one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. a gaming state setting means for setting a gaming state, and the first gaming state is set after the bonus game executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the second determining means. A gaming machine BF3 characterized in that a ratio set as a subsequent gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state.

According to gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a gaming state after the bonus game ends, one gaming state is selected from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. It is set by the setting means. The first gaming state has a higher rate than the second gaming state of being set as the gaming state after the bonus game executed based on a specific determination result obtained by the second determining means. It is configured to be.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the player is allowed to play the game with the expectation that a specific determination result will not be obtained when the second determination means performs the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BF3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state at a rate where the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the first bonus game or the second bonus game ends. The game machine BF4 is characterized in that the rate is higher than that of the gaming machine BF4.

According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF3, the rate at which the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the first bonus game or the second bonus game ends is that the first gaming status is Since the ratio is configured to be higher than the set rate, the second determination performed based on the firing of the game ball in the second direction during the predetermined period results in a specific determination result, and the first game state It is possible to make the player think that he/she wants to avoid the setting. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that the second determination will not result in a specific determination result after the end of the second bonus game.

In any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting the determination result by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means, and the suggestion executed by the suggestion effect execution means. As the performance, when the first bonus game is determined by the type determining means, either a first suggestion performance or a second suggestion performance different from the first suggestion performance is determined, and the type determination means A gaming machine BF5 characterized by comprising: suggestion performance determining means for determining the first suggestion performance when the second bonus game is determined.

According to gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect that suggests the determination result by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means. As the suggestion performance executed by the suggestion performance execution means, when the first bonus game is determined by the type determining means, either the first suggestion performance or a second suggestion performance different from the first suggestion performance is suggested. It is determined by the performance determining means. On the other hand, when the second bonus game is determined by the type determining means, the first suggestion performance is determined by the suggestion performance determination means.

As a result, when the second suggestion performance is executed, it is confirmed that it is the first bonus game, so it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the second suggestion performance will be executed as the suggestion performance. There is an effect. Furthermore, since the first suggestion effect may also be executed in the first bonus game, when the first suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that it is the first bonus game. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine BF5, when the first suggestion performance is executed based on the first bonus game being determined by the type determining means, the suggestion performance execution means executes the first suggestion performance after the end of the first suggestion performance. A gaming machine BF6 is characterized in that it executes a second suggestion effect.

According to the game machine BF6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine BF5, when the first suggestion performance is executed based on the first bonus game being determined by the type determining means, after the first suggestion performance ends. Since the second suggestion performance is executed by the suggestion performance execution means, when the first suggestion performance is executed, the player plays the game with the expectation that the second suggestion performance will be executed after the first suggestion performance ends. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the game machines BF1 to BF6, when the game ball continues to be launched in the second direction for the predetermined period, the second determination information acquisition means determines that the second information is at least the predetermined number of pieces of information. The gaming machine BF7 is characterized in that the length of the period is such that the discrimination information is obtained.

According to the game machine BF7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines BF1 to BF6, when the game becomes the second bonus game and continues to fire the game ball in the second direction for a predetermined period, the discrimination information storage means Since a predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information, which is the upper limit, is stored, the second discrimination information can be executed a number of times corresponding to the upper limit after the second bonus game is finished.

In the game machine BF7, the game ball launched in the second direction is placed at a position where the ball can easily enter, and is variable between a first state where the game ball can enter and a second state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter. possible second variable ball entry means; variable control means for changing the state of the second variable ball entry means to the first state during the predetermined period; and a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. a benefit granting means for granting a predetermined benefit based on the fact that the ball has been hit; and a second ball entering means that is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can reach, and receives the game ball that has reached the ball. A gaming machine BF8 characterized in that it is provided with a distributing means for distributing the ball to either a first flow path in which the ball is provided, and a second flow path in which the second variable entry means is provided.

According to gaming machine BF8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BF7, the following effects are achieved. A second variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state where a game ball can enter a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter and a second state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter a position. is located. The state of the second variable ball entry means is varied to the first state for a predetermined period of time by the variable control means. A predetermined privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means based on the game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. A first flow path in which a second ball entry means is provided, and a second flow path in which a second variable ball entry means is provided, for transporting the game ball to a position that can be reached by the game ball launched in the second direction. A sorting means is arranged for sorting to one of the two.

This has the effect of suppressing the downward direction of the game balls launched in the second direction from becoming biased.

Gaming machine BF9 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes game balls to the first channel and the second channel.

According to the game machine BF9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BF8, the game ball launched in the second direction during the predetermined period in the second bonus game is sent to the second ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. You can alternate pitches. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the game balls launched in the second direction from biasingly entering the second ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means.

<Characteristic BG group> (Notification of jackpot type based on V winning)
A discriminating means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, and a game ball. A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the ball entry means, a first position that allows a game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a second position that makes entry of the game ball into the ball entry means more difficult than the first position. means, variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a predetermined condition being satisfied during execution of the bonus game, and when the bonus game is finished. As a subsequent game state, a first game state is set that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the bonus game, and a game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball does not enter the means; and a bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means. Type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game; When at least the first bonus game or the second bonus game is determined, a suggestive effect suggesting the type of the determined bonus game is provided when a game ball enters the ball input means. A gaming machine BG1 characterized in that it is equipped with a suggestive performance execution means that can be executed based on the suggested performance.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines are known that are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby awarding an advantageous winning game to the player. In addition, the display device displays various images such as characters and landscapes in addition to the symbols, and attempts to improve the interest of the game by performing a wide variety of interesting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). In addition, some of these conventional gaming machines do not notify the gaming state after winning at the time of winning, but perform a performance that suggests the gaming state after winning during the winning state. Are known. However, in such conventional gaming machines, there is a problem in that after a performance suggesting a gaming state after a winning is completed, the remaining winning games become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result, the bonus game execution means allows the player to A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed. The variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time by the variable control means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the bonus game. As the game state after the end of the bonus game, a first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means when a game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the bonus game. On the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the ball entering means during execution of the bonus game, the game state setting means sets a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. As the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game. Determined by type determining means. When at least the first bonus game or the second bonus game is determined by the type determining means, the game ball enters the ball entering means by the suggesting performance execution means that suggests the type of the determined bonus game. It is carried out on the basis of

As a result, even after the game ball enters the ball entering means and the setting of the advantageous first game state is confirmed, attention is paid to the type of bonus game suggested by the suggestion performance executed by the suggestion performance execution means. You can play the game using Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous after the game ball enters the ball entering means.

In gaming machine BG1, the discrimination means includes a first discrimination means that performs a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition as the discrimination condition, and a second discrimination different from the first discrimination condition. a second discrimination means for performing a second discrimination based on the establishment of a condition, and the type determination means is configured to determine that the first discrimination by the first discrimination means has resulted in the specific discrimination result. As the type of the bonus game to be executed based on, one type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least the first bonus game and the second bonus game, and the second As the type of the bonus game that is executed based on the specific determination result obtained in the determination, the ball landing means is used during execution of the bonus game rather than the first bonus game and the second bonus game. One type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a third bonus game in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball, and the first bonus game is more popular than the second bonus game. The gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that the second determination is more likely to be performed during a predetermined period after the completion of the second determination.

According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG1, the first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The type determination means selects a plurality of types of bonus games, including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game, as the type of bonus game to be executed based on a specific determination result obtained in the first determination by the first determination unit. One type is determined from among the types. On the other hand, as the type of bonus game that is executed based on a specific determination result in the second determination by the second determination means, during the execution of the bonus game than the first bonus game and the second bonus game. One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types including at least the third bonus game in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the ball entering means. In the first bonus game, the second determination is more likely to be executed in a predetermined period after the bonus game ends than in the second bonus game.

As a result, once the first bonus game ends, it becomes more likely that an unfavorable second determination will be made within a predetermined period of time, so there is a strong expectation that the second bonus game will be decided when a specific determination result is obtained. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay more attention to the type of bonus game and play the game.

In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, a specific performance is executed during a period from when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is started until at least a game ball enters the ball entry means. A gaming machine BG3 comprising means, wherein the suggesting performance execution means executes a performance suggesting the type of the bonus game as a result of the specific performance.

According to gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BG1 or BG2, the following effects are achieved. A specific performance is executed by a specific performance executing means during a period from when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is started until at least the game ball enters the ball entering means. As a result of the specific performance, the suggestive performance execution means executes a performance that suggests the type of bonus game.

Thereby, the specific performance and the performance suggesting the type of bonus game can be displayed as a series of performances, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display means for displaying a dynamic display of identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means in the display means, and the dynamic display means. The identification information that is dynamically displayed is identification information that allows one identification information to be determined from among a plurality of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information. and a determination means, wherein the identification information determination means determines the first identification information when the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result, and the type determination means determines the first bonus game. The gaming machine BG4 is characterized in that the first identification information or the second identification information is determined when the second bonus game is determined.

According to gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed by the dynamic display means. As the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one identification information is the identification information from among a plurality of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information. Determined by the determining means. When the determination by the determination means yields a specific determination result and the type determination means determines the first bonus game, the first identification information is determined by the identification information determination means. On the other hand, when the second bonus game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined by the identification information determining means.

Thereby, the dynamic display of the identification information can be confirmed with the expectation that the second identification information, which is determined only in the advantageous second bonus game, will be displayed by the dynamic display. Furthermore, by configuring the first identification information to be displayed even in the case of the second bonus game, it is possible to maintain the player's expectations for the second bonus game when the first identification information is displayed. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine BG4, the suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, The types of the suggestion effects include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information is maintained as the second identification information. The gaming machine BG5 is characterized in that it is provided with at least a second suggestion effect that is variable to identification information.

According to gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BG4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display means, the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. The types of suggestion effects include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information is changed to second identification information. At least a second suggestion effect is provided.

This has the effect that when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player can play the game with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed.

The gaming machine BG5 includes a suggestion effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, The identification information determining means determines the first identification information based on the fact that the suggestive performance execution determining means determines that the suggestive performance is to be performed, and the suggestive performance executing means determines the first identification information based on the fact that the suggestive performance execution determining means determines that the suggestive performance is executed. The first bonus game is determined by, and when the suggestion performance execution determining means determines that the suggestion performance should be executed, the first suggestion performance is executed, and the second bonus game is determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine BG6, characterized in that the second suggestion performance is executed when the suggestion performance execution determining means determines that the suggestion performance should be executed.

According to gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BG5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the type determining means determines the first bonus game or the second bonus game, the suggestion performance execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggestion performance. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the fact that the suggestive performance execution determining means determines that the suggestive performance is to be executed. The first identification information is determined by the type determining means, and when the suggestive performance execution determining means determines that the suggestive performance is to be executed, the first suggestive performance is executed by the suggestive performance executing means. On the other hand, when the type determining means determines the second bonus game and the suggestive performance execution determining means determines that the suggestive performance is to be executed, the second suggestive performance is executed by the suggestive performance executing means.

Thereby, since the second suggestion performance is executed only when the second bonus game is determined, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that the second suggestion performance will be executed.

In the gaming machine BG6, the suggestive performance execution determining means executes the suggestive performance more when the second bonus game is determined than when the first bonus game is determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine BG7 characterized in that the discrimination ratio is high.

According to the gaming machine BG7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG6, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, the suggestion effect execution means provides a better effect than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. Since the percentage of discrimination increases when the suggestion effect is executed, there is an effect that expectations for the second bonus game can be improved at the time when the suggestion effect is started.

In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means in the display means, and the dynamic display. spanning a period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result executed by the execution means and a period from the start of the bonus game until at least the variable means is varied to the first position. and a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance based on the specific performance, and the suggestive performance execution means executes a suggestive performance that suggests the type of the bonus game as a result of the specific performance. Game machine BG8.

According to gaming machine BG8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BG1 or BG2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the display means capable of displaying identification information, the period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the period from the start of the bonus game until at least the variable means is shifted to the first position. The specific performance is executed by the specific performance execution means over the period. As a result of the specific performance, a suggestion performance that suggests the type of bonus game is executed by the suggestion performance execution means.

Thereby, the specific performance and the performance suggesting the type of bonus game can be presented as a series of performances, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BH group> (Depending on the type of jackpot, the ease of predicting the presence or absence of a pending series is varied)
A discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means; Type determination for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game as the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means. a first variable mode and a variable means that is variable in a predetermined variable manner; a first variable control means for varying the variable means in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a second variable mode different from the second variable mode; Based on this, a second variable control means that varies the variable means in a third variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that has an appearance that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode; The first variable control means sets a first variable state in which the variable means is likely to be varied in the first variable mode, and the second bonus game variable state setting means for setting a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be varied in the second variable mode than in the first variable state during the period from when the specific condition is satisfied; A game machine BH1 comprising:

BACKGROUND ART Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines enter a winning state when the result of a lottery, which is conducted based on a game ball entering a starting prize opening, is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the winning type is notified as well as the winning type at the time of the winning, so after the notification is made, it is not just the notification. In some cases, the game becomes a monotonous task because the only task is to win the winnings. In addition, with some conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to distinguish whether a win has occurred or a small win, which is a type of loss, based on the performance mode or the opening/closing operation of a specific prize opening. Gaming machines with this configuration are also known, and gaming machines that can make you expect to win even after the winning game ends are also known. However, in such a gaming machine, it takes too much time to determine whether a win or a small win has occurred, and there is a risk that the player's interest in playing the game may be lost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BH1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination means. As the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, one type is selected by the type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game. It is determined. Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means has resulted in an out-of-order discrimination result that is different from a specific discrimination result, a plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode are determined. In any one of the variable modes, the variable means is varied by the first variable control means. Based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, the second variable control means controls the variable means in a third variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that has an appearance that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode. Variable. During the period from the end of the first bonus game until a predetermined specific condition is established, the first variable control means changes the first variable state in which the variable means is likely to be changed in the first variable mode to the variable state setting means. Set. On the other hand, a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be varied in the second variable mode than the first variable state is set by the variable state setting means between the end of the second bonus game and the establishment of the specific condition. be done.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish the appearance of the variable mode of the variable means between a case where an incorrect judgment result is obtained after the end of the first bonus game and a case where a specific judgment result is obtained, so that at least the specific condition is satisfied. Until then, it may be difficult to identify whether or not a bonus game will be executed based on the variable mode of the variable means. On the other hand, if the result of determination is incorrect after the end of the second bonus game, the second variable mode is set, so the player can relatively identify whether or not the result of discrimination is incorrect from the variable mode of the variable means. It becomes easier. Therefore, it is possible to change the ease of identifying the result of the out-of-play determination until the specific condition is met depending on the type of bonus game, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BH1 is provided with a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and the variable means has a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball that is lower than the first position. and a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and the first variable aspect is such that the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the passage of a first period. The second variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of a second period different from the first period. A gaming machine BH2 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine BH2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BH1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first position. The first variable mode includes a variable mode in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period, and the second variable mode includes a second variable mode that is different from the first period. The variable means is configured in a variable manner in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the passage of time.

This has the effect that the player can easily identify whether the mode is the first variable mode or the second variable mode by checking the interval until the variable means is varied to the first position. There is.

In the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, the discrimination means includes a first discrimination means that performs a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination condition that is different from the first discrimination condition. a second discriminating means for performing a second discriminating based on whether the first discriminating means holds true, and the first variable control means is configured to perform a second discriminating operation based on the determination by the first discriminating means that the first determining means The variable means is made to vary in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least one variable mode and the second variable mode, and the second variable control means is configured to vary the variable means in one of a plurality of variable modes including at least one variable mode and the second variable mode. The gaming machine BH3 is characterized in that the variable means is varied in the third variable mode based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination.

According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The first variable control is performed in any one variable mode among a plurality of variable modes including at least the first variable mode and the second variable mode based on the result of the discrimination by the first discrimination means being incorrect. The variable means is varied by the means. The second variable control means varies the variable means in a third variable manner based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the first discrimination means.

As a result, the variable mode of the variable means is changed in accordance with the type of bonus game in the case where the judgment by the first judgment means results in an incorrect judgment result, so that the first judgment means Each time the determination is performed, the game can be played while paying attention to the variable aspect of the variable means.

In the gaming machine BH3, the type determining means determines the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the specific determination result obtained in the second determination by the second determining means. A game machine BH4 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine BH4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BH3, the type of the bonus game to be executed is determined by the type determining means based on a specific determination result obtained in the second determination by the second determining means. Therefore, when the second determination by the second determination means is performed, it is possible to have the player play the game by paying attention to whether the first bonus game or the second bonus game is determined. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine BH3 or BH4, the first discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second discrimination condition from the end of the bonus game until the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BH5.

According to the gaming machine BH5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BH3 or BH4, the first discrimination condition is satisfied more than the second discrimination condition from the end of the bonus game until the specific condition is satisfied. This has the effect that the game can be played with more attention paid to the variable mode of the variable means until the specific condition is satisfied.

In any of the game machines BH3 to BH5, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter the ball, and a first ball entry means provided in a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can be entered. a second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball can enter; a second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can easily enter; Based on the start of the bonus game, the state of the bonus ball entry means to which the bonus is given is changed from the first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, to the state of the bonus ball entry means, from the first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball. a variable control means for varying the game ball to a possible second state a predetermined number of times, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means; A gaming machine BH6, wherein the second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine BH6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines BH3 to BH5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and the first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. Two ball entry means are provided. A bonus entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter the ball, and a predetermined award is given based on the entry of the game ball. The state of the bonus ball entry means is varied a predetermined number of times by the variable control means from a first state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball to a second state in which a game ball can enter the ball, based on the start of the award game. The first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. It holds true.

Thereby, by firing the game ball aiming at the bonus ball entering means during execution of the bonus game, it is possible to cause the game ball to also enter the first ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination condition can be easily satisfied when a bonus game is executed.

In the gaming machine BH6, a first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means; 1 discrimination information storage means capable of storing the first discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of information, and the specific condition is that the discrimination information is stored at the end of the bonus game. A gaming machine BH7, characterized in that the game machine BH7 is established based on the fact that determinations based on all the first determination information stored in the storage means have been executed.

According to the gaming machine BH7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BH6, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, the first discrimination information used for the discrimination by the first discrimination means is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit. The specific condition is established based on the fact that the determination based on all the first determination information stored in the determination information storage means at the end of the bonus game is executed.

Thereby, the first discrimination information acquired during the execution of the bonus game is stored in the discrimination information storage means, so there is an effect that the first discrimination can be executed efficiently.

In the gaming machine BH7, the gaming state after the bonus game ends is selected from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state determining means determines the game state as the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the first determination. a first type determining means in which the rate of determining the third bonus game for which the first gaming state is determined by the determining unit is higher than the rate of determining the types of other bonus games; A second type of determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least the first bonus game and the second bonus game as the type of bonus game to be executed based on the determination result of determining means, and the game state determining means determines the second game state as the game state after the end of the bonus game when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is reached. A game machine BH8 characterized in that it is a game machine that makes decisions.

According to the gaming machine BH8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BH7, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a game state after the bonus game ends, one game state is selected from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. is determined by the game state determining means. As the type of the bonus game to be executed based on a specific determination result in the first determination, the first type determination means determines a third bonus game in which the first game state is determined by the game state determination means. The rate at which the types of other bonus games are determined is higher than the rate at which the types of other bonus games are determined. As the type of bonus game to be executed based on a specific determination result in the second determination, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game. It is determined by a two-type determining means. When the first bonus game or the second bonus game is reached, the second game status is determined by the game status determining means as the gaming status after the bonus game ends.

As a result, if the first determination results in a specific determination result, there is a high probability that the first game state will be determined after the bonus game ends. Based on the information, the player can play the game in the hope that all the first determinations performed after the end of the bonus game result in wrong determinations. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that makes the player want to avoid a specific determination result, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic BI group> (The ease of occurrence of pending series varies depending on the type of jackpot)
a first discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a first discriminating condition; a second discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means; and the bonus game execution means; The type of the bonus game to be executed is a first bonus game, and the first bonus game is determined by the second determining means between the end of the bonus game and the establishment of the specific condition. a second bonus game that is likely to result in a specific discrimination result; and a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, the first bonus game and the second bonus game. The gaming machine BI1 is characterized in that the first gaming state has a higher setting ratio than the second gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game ends.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines have advantages, such as by varying the gaming status given after a win or by varying the number of prize balls that can be won in each round, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have different degrees of intensity. However, it has been desired to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the type of hit.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BI1, the first determination means performs the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. 2. Discrimination is performed by the discriminating means. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution unit based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination unit or the second determination unit. The type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is a first bonus game, and the second determination unit determines the type of bonus game between the end of the bonus game and the establishment of a specific condition than the first bonus game. The type determination means determines one type of bonus game from among a plurality of types including at least a second bonus game that is likely to have a specific determination result. As the gaming state after the bonus game ends, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. . In both the first bonus game and the second bonus game, the setting ratio of the second game state is higher than that of the second game state as the game state after the bonus game ends.

As a result, depending on whether it is the first bonus game or the second bonus game, the possibility that the determination by the second determining means will reach a specific determination result before the specific condition is established is different. There is an effect that the player can pay more attention to the type of bonus game determined by the type determining means and play the game.

In game BI1, the type determining means selects one of the plurality of bonus games including at least the first bonus game, the second bonus game, and a third bonus game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the other types of bonus games. The type of the bonus game of 1 is determined from 1, and the third bonus game is determined when the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means rather than the discrimination by the first discrimination means. A gaming machine BI2 characterized in that the rate determined by the type determining means is high.

According to the gaming machine BI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BI1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the type determining means selects one bonus game type from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game, a second bonus game, and a third bonus game that is more disadvantageous to the player than other bonus game types. Determined by When the determination by the second determining means yields a specific determination result, the third bonus game is determined by the type determining means at a higher rate than the determination by the first determining means.

As a result, if the determination by the second determination means reaches a specific determination result, the probability that an unfavorable third bonus game will be determined increases, so it is hoped that the determination by the second determination means will not result in a specific determination result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in anticipation of the first bonus game, rather than the second bonus game, which is likely to result in a specific determination result in the determination by the second determining means.

In the gaming machine BI1 or BI2, the first gaming state is the second gaming state in which the probability of the specific determination result is determined when the first determining means or the second determining means executes the determination. , and the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discrimination condition from the end of the second bonus game until the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine BI3 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine BI3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BI1 or BI2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the first gaming state is configured such that when the first determining means or the second determining means performs the determination, the probability of a specific determination result is higher than in the second gaming state. . From the end of the second bonus game until the specific condition is met, the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discrimination condition.

As a result, in the first gaming state, the probability of a specific determination result is higher than in the second gaming state, so it becomes easier to play the bonus games consecutively at relatively short intervals. Therefore, when the first gaming state is entered, there is an effect that the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines BI1 to BI3, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; A discrimination information storage means capable of storing discrimination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, and one piece of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means. , and erasing means for erasing said one discrimination information from said discrimination information storage means, said specific condition being that the number of pieces of said discrimination information stored in said discrimination information storage means has become zero. A gaming machine BI4 characterized in that it is established based on the following.

According to gaming machine BI4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BI1 to BI3, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. Based on the fact that one piece of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means, the one piece of discrimination information is erased from the discrimination information storage means by the erasing means. The specific condition is established based on the fact that the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes zero.

Thereby, until the number of information in the discrimination information becomes 0, the discrimination by the second discrimination means is likely to result in a specific discrimination result, so the game is played while paying attention to the number of information stored in the discrimination information storage means. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the game machines BI1 to BI4, a first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a second ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. a second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball can enter, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The second discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the second bonus game is determined based on the fact that the bonus game is started. A game machine BI5 characterized in that, at least for a subsequent predetermined period, it is more likely to be advantageous for a player to fire a game ball in the second direction than in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine BI5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. The first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, while the second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Established based on. In the second bonus game, at least for a predetermined period after the bonus game is started, it is more likely to be advantageous for the player to fire the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction.

Thereby, in the case of the second bonus game, by firing the game ball in the second direction for a predetermined period of time, the game ball can also be caused to enter the second ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that a state can be created in which the second discrimination condition is likely to be satisfied after the end of the bonus game.

In the game machine BI5, the first switch is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter, and is variable between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter. a variable ball entry means; a variable ball entrance means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter the ball; 2 variable ball entry means, and a benefit granting means for granting a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, The gaming machine BI6 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is capable of changing the state in which a game ball can be entered at least during the predetermined period during execution of the second bonus game.

According to the gaming machine BI6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BI5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first variable ball entrance means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter the ball, and is variable between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter. has been done. A second variable ball entry means that can be varied between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter the ball. There is. A predetermined privilege is awarded by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. The second variable ball entry means is variable so that the game ball can enter the ball for at least a predetermined period during execution of the second scoring game.

Thereby, during a predetermined period during execution of the second benefit game, a game ball can be caused to be launched in the second direction for a player who wants to obtain a predetermined benefit. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be entered into the second ball entry means during a predetermined period of time.

In the gaming machine BI6, the first variable ball entry means is capable of changing the state in which the game ball can enter at least during the predetermined period during execution of the first bonus game. Game machine BI7.

According to the gaming machine BI7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BI6, during the execution of the first scoring game, the first variable ball entry means is variable to a state in which a game ball can enter, at least for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, during a predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game, a player who wants to obtain a predetermined privilege can be caused to shoot a game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second ball entering means during a predetermined period during execution of the first bonus game.

In any of the game machines BI5 to BI7, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means; Discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, the game ball being continuously launched in the second direction for the predetermined period. In the gaming machine BI8, the period is such that the second discrimination information of at least the predetermined number of pieces of information is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means.

According to the gaming machine BI8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines BI5 to BI7, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit. The predetermined period is configured to have a length such that at least a predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information are acquired by the discrimination information storage means when the game balls are continuously shot in the second direction.

Thereby, when the second bonus game is played, there is an effect that the discrimination information can be reliably stored in the discrimination information storage means up to the upper limit of the number of pieces of information.

In the game machine BI8, the game ball launched in the second direction is transferred to a first flow path in which the second ball entry means is provided and a second flow path in which the second variable ball entry means is provided. A gaming machine BI9 is characterized in that it is equipped with an allocating means capable of allocating to either of the following.

According to the game machine BI9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BI8, the game ball launched in the second direction passes through the first channel provided with the second ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. Since the distributing means distributes the game balls to either one of the second flow paths provided, the game balls launched in the second direction may biasly enter the second ball entering means, or vice versa. This has the effect of suppressing the ball entering the variable ball entry means biasedly.

<Characteristic BJ group> (Special 1 provides a state in which the game is played, a state in which it is easy to be given a time saver and a state in which it is difficult to be given a time saver)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed, and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern based on the establishment of a specific variable condition. a variable control means for making the variable pattern variable by one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a variable pattern; a determining means for performing determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means; and a determining means by the determining means. A bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based at least on a specific determination result in the determination, and a game state after the bonus game execution means finishes executing the bonus game. , a first gaming state, a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and a third gaming state different from either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. a gaming state setting means for setting a gaming state, wherein the first gaming state and the second gaming state are set by the variable means in the first variable pattern by the variable control means than in the third gaming state. A gaming machine BJ1 is characterized in that the rate at which the changes are made is low.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Document 1: Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if an advantageous gaming state is not set after the end of a winning state, the player's motivation for playing decreases and it becomes easy for him or her to quit playing. There was a problem.

In particular, in a type of gaming machine that is not equipped with a so-called probability variation function and has only two types of gaming states, a time-saving gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set after the time-saving gaming state. In this case, the player may be satisfied with the game by being able to play the game in the time-saving game state, and there is a risk that it will be difficult to make the player want to continue playing the game in the normal game state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BJ1, there is a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, and a first position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than at the first position. The variable means is configured to be variable at the second position. The variable means controls, based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable pattern. At least one of the plurality of variable patterns includes at least one variable pattern. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means at least based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. be done. The gaming state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is a first gaming status, a second gaming status different from the first gaming status, and both the first gaming status and the second gaming status. One of the plurality of gaming states including at least a different third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The first gaming state and the second gaming state are configured such that the rate at which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than in the third gaming state.

This makes it difficult to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state from the variable ratio of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ1, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are characterized in that the probability of the specific determination result being determined by the determining means is a common specific probability. Machine BJ2.

According to the gaming machine BJ2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BJ1, the probability that the first gaming state and the second gaming state will have a specific discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means is a common specific probability. This has the effect of making it more difficult for players to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

In the gaming machine BJ1 or BJ2, a second ball entering means different from the ball entering means, a second determining means that performs a determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a second bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game based on the specific determination result obtained by the second determination means, and the first game state is determined by the second determination means. When the determination results in the specific determination result, the third gaming state is set at the first rate by the gaming state setting means, and the second gaming state is determined by the second determining means. The gaming machine BJ3 is characterized in that when the specific determination result is obtained, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. .

According to gaming machine BJ3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BJ1 or BJ2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the second determining means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means different from the ball entering means. A bonus game is executed by the second bonus game execution means based on a specific determination result obtained by the second determination means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the second determination means in the first gaming state, the third gaming state is set at the first rate by the gaming state setting means, while the third gaming state is set at the first rate in the second gaming state. When the determination by the determining means yields a specific determination result, the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

As a result, the third gaming state is more likely to be set as the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. This has the effect of making the player play the game with stronger expectations that the game will turn out to be true.

In the gaming machine BJ3, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a third ratio higher than the first ratio when the bonus game is executed. The game machine BJ4 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine BJ4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BJ3, when a bonus game is executed in the third gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets a third ratio higher than the first ratio in the third gaming state. Therefore, when the third gaming state is entered, the bonus game and the third gaming state are likely to be repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when the third gaming state is reached.

In the gaming machine BJ4, a game in which the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition that is at least different from the specific determination result in the second gaming state. A state transition means is provided, and the third game state is set to either the second game state or the third game state by the game state setting means when the bonus game is executed. The gaming machine BJ5 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine BJ5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BJ4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state transition means based on the fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition that is at least different from a specific determination result. When the bonus game is executed in the third gaming state, either the second gaming state or the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

As a result, the first gaming state is not set when a specific determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, so even after the third gaming state ends, at least the gaming state transition means It is possible to make the player think of continuing the game until the second gaming state is transferred to the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ5, the gaming state transition means is based on, as the specific condition, that the discrimination by the discrimination means has consecutively resulted in an out-of-order discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result for a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine BJ6 characterized in that the gaming machine BJ6 is configured to shift from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BJ6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BJ5, the specific condition is based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means has repeatedly resulted in an incorrect discrimination result different from a specific discrimination result for a predetermined number of times. Since the second gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state transition means, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the number of successive failure determination results. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ6, as the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming state is shifted based on the fact that the discriminating result has been obtained over the first number of determinations by the determining means. The first type of game state to be transferred to the first game state by the means and the second number of times which is greater than the first number of times are determined, and the game state transition means causes the first type of game state to be transferred to the first game state based on the fact that the result is the out-of-order determination result. A gaming machine BJ7 characterized by comprising a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a second type to be transferred to one gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BJ7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BJ6, as the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the discriminating result of the first number of discriminations by the discriminating means was obtained. The first type is transferred to the first gaming state by the gaming state transferring means based on the first type, and the second number of times which is greater than the first number of times is determined to be an incorrect result. Since one type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the second type that is transferred to the first gaming state, it is possible to ensure that the second gaming state continues for more determinations. It can make you look forward to it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BJ7 includes a display means capable of displaying a performance mode, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, it is possible to cause the display means to display the first performance mode. When the second game state is set by the first display control means and the game state setting means, it is possible to cause the display means to display a second performance mode different from the first performance mode. The first performance mode is displayed from the time when the second game state is set by the second display control means and the game state setting means until the result of the out-of-order determination is reached for the second number of times. A gaming machine BJ8, comprising: a limiting means for limiting.

According to gaming machine BJ8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BJ7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first performance mode is displayed on the display means by the first display control means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a second performance mode different from the first performance mode is displayed on the display means by the second display control means. The restriction means restricts the display of the first performance mode from the time the second game state is set by the game state setting means until the second result of determination of failure is reached.

As a result, even if an incorrect determination result is obtained for the first number of times after the second game state is set, the first production mode will not be displayed until the second time, so it will be easier for the player to It becomes difficult to identify whether the game is in the second game state of one type or the second game state of the second type. Therefore, regardless of the type of the second gaming state, it is possible to at least make the player want to continue playing the game until the second determination is made, which has the effect of improving the operating rate of the gaming machine. be.

In the gaming machine BJ8, a third display mode for displaying the first production mode based on the fact that the second gaming state has been determined a second number of times since the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine BJ9 characterized by comprising a display control means.

According to the gaming machine BJ9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BJ8, the third display is displayed based on the fact that the second gaming state has been determined to be out of order for the second number of times since the second gaming state was set by the gaming state setting means. Since the first performance presentation mode is displayed by the control means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a period in which it is unclear whether the game is in the first game state or the second game state from becoming too long.

A gaming machine BJ10, characterized in that in any of the gaming machines BJ4 to BJ9, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine BJ10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BJ4 to BJ9, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, so that a specific determination result is achieved in the second gaming state. This has the effect of making you more excited about what will happen.

<Characteristic BK group> (Configuration that makes special 2 difficult to turn while saving time)
Based on the establishment of predetermined setting conditions, a first gaming state, a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state a game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least; a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter; and a first ball into which a game ball can enter the ball entry means. a variable means that is variable between a position and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position; and a variable operation of the variable means to the ball entering means in the first gaming state. controlling with a first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, in the second gaming state, controlling with a second control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, and in the third gaming state, A game machine BK1 characterized by comprising: variable control means that controls with a third control that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first control and the second control.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Document 1: Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if an advantageous gaming state is not set after the end of a winning state, the player's motivation for playing decreases and it becomes easy for him or her to quit playing. There was a problem.

In particular, in a type of gaming machine that is not equipped with a so-called probability variation function and has only two types of gaming states, a time-saving gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set after the time-saving gaming state. In this case, the player may be satisfied with the game by being able to play the game in the time-saving game state, and there is a risk that it will be difficult to make the player want to continue playing the game in the normal game state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, based on the establishment of predetermined setting conditions, a first gaming state, a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state The game state setting means sets one game state from among a plurality of at least a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the third game state. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than at the first position. There is. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means with the first control in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means in the first gaming state, and the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means in the second gaming state. In the third game state, the game ball is controlled by the variable control means in the second control in which it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the ball, and in the third game state it is controlled by the variable control means in the third control to make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball into the ball entering means.

As a result, the degree of advantage is made different between the first game state, in which control is executed to make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball entering means, and the second game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect that it can be done.

Gaming machine BK2, wherein the second control makes it easier for the variable means to be placed in the first position than the first control.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BK1, the second control is configured such that the variable means is more easily placed in the first position than the first control, so the second control has the following effects: Even though the variable means is easier to be placed in the first position than in the first control, it is possible to realize a novel operation in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball entering means, as in the first control.

The gaming machine BK2 includes a passing means through which a game ball can pass, and a determining means that performs a determination based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means, and the variable control means is configured to perform the determination by the determining means. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a specific determination result, and the first gaming state is determined by the determination by the determination means. The specific determination result is determined with a probability of 1, and the second gaming state and the third gaming state are determined by the determining means with a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine BK3 is characterized in that it has a specific determination result.

According to gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BK2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means through which the game ball can pass. The variable control means varies the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means. In the first gaming state, the determination by the determining means yields a specific determination result with a first probability, while in the second and third gaming states, the determination by the determining means yields a specific determination result with a higher probability than the first probability. A specific discrimination result is obtained with a probability of 2.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel operation in which the second game state and the third game state have different easiness of entering the ball into the ball entering means, even though the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is common. There is an effect.

The game machine BK3 is provided with a firing means capable of firing game balls at a firing interval equal to or more than a predetermined interval, and the second game state is determined by the variable means when the determining means reaches the specific determination result. A period from when the variable means is varied to the first position is set as a first period, and a period from when the variable means is varied to the first position until it is varied to the second position is set as a second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the first period, and 1. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the game ball fired by the firing means at the predetermined interval after the passing game ball reaches the variable means is A gaming machine BK4 characterized in that the gaming machine BK4 is likely to be longer than the sum of one period and the second period.

According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BK3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game balls are fired by the firing means at firing intervals of a predetermined interval or more. In the second game state, the period from when the determination means reaches a specific determination result until the variable means is changed to the first position is set as the first period, and the variable means is changed to the first position. The period from when the position is changed to when the position is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means tends to be shorter than the first period. The period from when one game ball passes through the passing means until the game balls fired by the firing means at predetermined intervals after the passing game ball reaches the variable means is the first period and the second period. It tends to be longer than the sum of the two periods.

As a result, even if the game balls are continuously fired toward the passing means in the second gaming state, the game balls can reach the ball entering means while the variable means is being varied to the first position. can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the second gaming state can be made into a special state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means even though the variable means is easily changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine BK4, the third gaming state is such that the period from when the determination means reaches the specific determination result until the variable means is changed to the first position is longer than the first period. and a period from when the variable means is varied to the first position until it is varied to the second position is set to the second period, and the passing The period from when the game ball passes through the means until the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer than the third period, and the third period and the second period A gaming machine BK5 is characterized in that it is likely to be shorter than the sum of.

According to the gaming machine BK5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BK4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the third gaming state, the period from when the determination means reaches a specific determination result until the variable means is changed to the first position is set to a third period that is longer than the first period, The period from when the variable means is varied to the first position until it is varied to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means is longer than the third period, and is equal to the sum of the third period and the second period. It becomes easier to shorten the length.

As a result, in the third game state, if a specific determination result is obtained in the determination performed based on passing through the passing means, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is directly entered into the ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the third game state can be progressed efficiently.

In any of gaming machines BK1 to BK5, a second ball entering means that is different from the ball entering means and into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball entering the ball entering means; a first determination means that performs a first determination; a second determination means that performs a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination or the determination by the second determination means that the determination result is a predetermined first determination result; The setting means is configured to set the first game state at a first rate as a game state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the fact that the first determination result is obtained in the second determination in the first game state. 3 gaming states are set, and the gaming state after the end of the bonus game that is executed based on the fact that the second determination in the second gaming state is the first determination result, the first The gaming machine BK6 is characterized in that the third gaming state is set at a second ratio higher than the ratio.

According to gaming machine BK6, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BK1 to BK5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first determination is performed by the first determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entrance means. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means different from the ball entry means. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution unit based on the determination by the first determination unit or the determination by the second determination unit that results in a predetermined first determination result. As the game state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the first game state, the third game state is set at the first rate by the game state setting means. Set. The gaming state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the second determination resulting in the first determination result in the second gaming state. A third gaming state is set by the means.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game with strong expectations for a specific determination result during the second gaming state.

In the gaming machine BK6, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the first determination result in the third gaming state. A gaming machine BK7, characterized in that the third gaming state is determined at a third rate higher than the first rate.

According to the gaming machine BK7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BK6, as a gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the first determination result in the third gaming state. Since the third gaming state is determined by the gaming state setting means at the third ratio higher than the first ratio, in the third gaming state, the third gaming state is likely to be returned after the bonus game ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when the third gaming state is reached.

In gaming machine BK7, gaming machine BK8 is characterized in that the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine BK8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BK7, the second ratio is configured at a higher ratio than the third ratio, so that the first determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. This has the effect of making the player play the game with stronger expectations.

<Characteristic BL group> (mechanism that allows games to be played using a gaming method that makes it easier to be alternately assigned to two routes by the assigning means and a gaming method that makes it easier to be assigned to one route)
An operating means that can be operated by a player, a firing means that can fire a game ball according to the operation content of the operating means, a first flow path through which a game ball fired by the firing means can pass, and While the first condition that can be established by operating the first operation content on the second flow path different from the first flow path and the operation means is satisfied, the game ball that has reached the second flow path is A second condition is established that can be satisfied when a state is established in which it is easy to alternately distribute the fluid into the first flow path and the second flow path, and an operation with a second operation content that is different from the operation with the first operation content is performed. A game machine BL1 characterized in that it is provided with a sorting means that is in a state where it is easier to sort the arriving game balls to the first flow path than while the first condition is satisfied.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a distribution member that distributes game balls to one of two types of channels provided on the board surface. In such a conventional game machine, the game balls that have reached the distribution member are distributed one by one into two types of channels, making it possible to flow the game balls down the two types of channels in a well-balanced manner. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-231902).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the game balls that reach the distribution member are alternately distributed into two types of channels regardless of the player's playing method, so there is room for the skill of the player to intervene. There was a risk that the player's interest in playing the game would be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BL1, the game ball is fired by the firing means in accordance with the operation details of the operation means that can be operated by the player. A first flow path through which a game ball fired by the firing means can pass, and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided. While the first condition that can be established by performing the operation of the first operation content on the operation means is satisfied, the state of the distribution means is such that the arriving game ball is placed in the first flow path and the second condition is satisfied. This makes it easy to alternately distribute the liquid to the flow path. While the second condition, which can be satisfied by performing an operation with a second operation content different from the first operation content, is satisfied, the state of the distribution means is changed from that while the first condition is satisfied. The game ball that has also reached the state is likely to be sorted into the first flow path.

As a result, the way in which game balls are distributed by the distribution means can be changed depending on the content of the player's operation, so there is an effect that the operation of the operation means can be improved.

In the gaming machine BL1, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, the game ball is fired by the firing means at a first firing interval, and the operation of the second operation content is executed. The gaming machine BL2 is characterized in that the firing means fires game balls at a second firing interval that is longer than the first firing interval.

According to the gaming machine BL2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BL1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, the game ball is fired by the firing means at the first firing interval. When the operation of the second operation content is executed, the game ball is fired by the firing means at a second firing interval that is longer than the first firing interval. As a result, it is possible to easily change the way the game balls are distributed by the distribution means by simply changing the firing interval, which has the effect of increasing convenience for the player.

In the gaming machine BL2, the sorting means at least defines a first movable range in which arriving game balls are more likely to be sorted into the first channel, and a second movable range in which the arriving game balls are more likely to be sorted into the second channel. The distributing means is configured to be movable in a specific movable range including the first movable range, and the distributing means distributes the game balls to the first flow path while being arranged in the first movable range. The game ball is configured to be easily movable in the movable range, and to be easily movable in the first movable range by distributing the game ball to the second flow path while being arranged in the second movable range. Game machine BL3 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine BL3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BL2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the distributing means is movable within a specific movable range that includes at least a first movable range in which arriving game balls are more likely to be sorted into the first flow path, and a second movable range in which the arriving game balls are more likely to be sorted into the second flow path. do. By distributing the game balls to the first channel in a state arranged in the first movable range, the distributing means can easily move to the second movable range. Further, by distributing the game balls to the second flow path while being arranged in the second movable range, the distributing means can easily move to the first movable range.

This has the effect of realizing an operation of alternately distributing the game balls to the first channel and the second channel by causing the game balls to reach the distributing means in succession.

In the game machine BL3, when the distribution means distributes the game balls to the first flow path and moves them to the second movable range, the distribution means is arranged such that when the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and moved to the second movable range, the distribution means is configured to distribute the game balls to the first flow path, and to The gaming machine BL4 is characterized in that it can move up to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the firing interval.

According to the gaming machine BL4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BL3, when the distributing means moves to the second movable range after distributing the game balls to the first channel, the length of the second firing interval is shorter than the second firing interval. , and since the distributing means moves to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the first firing interval, if the game balls are continued to be fired at a firing interval equal to or longer than the second firing interval, the distributing means There is an effect that the movable range of the means can be reliably set to the first movable range.

In the game machine BL4, the distributing means is configured to easily move from the first movable range to the second movable range depending on the mass of the game balls distributed to the first flow path, and distribute the game balls to the second flow path. The game machine BL5 is characterized in that the game ball can easily move from the second movable range to the first movable range depending on the mass of the game ball.

According to the game machine BL5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine BL4, the mass of the game balls distributed to the first flow path makes it easier for the distribution means to move from the first movable range to the second movable range. The mass of the game balls distributed to the two flow paths makes it easier for the distribution means to move from the second movable range to the first movable range, so a power source for moving the distribution means can be eliminated. There is an effect.

In the game machine BL4 or BL5, the distribution means is configured such that a predetermined position in the first movable range is the initial arrangement, and is configured to return to the predetermined position when the game ball does not reach the predetermined period. A gaming machine BL6 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine BL6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BL4 or BL5, the distributing means is configured such that a predetermined position in the first movable range is the initial arrangement, and the distributing means is arranged such that the game ball is placed in the distributing means. On the other hand, since the distributing means is configured to return to the predetermined position when the predetermined period of time has not been reached, the distributing means is maintained in the first movable range unless the game balls are distributed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game balls that first reach the distribution means can be reliably distributed to the first channel.

In any of the gaming machines BL1 to BL6, a passage means provided at a position through which game balls sorted into the second flow path can pass, a passage means through which the game balls that have flown down the first flow path, A ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down a channel can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a position before the first position. a second position in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the entry ball means; a variable means that is variable; a determining means that performs determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means; and the determining means. A gaming machine BL7 characterized in that it comprises variable control means for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination.

According to gaming machine BL7, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BL1 to BL6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the passage means is provided at a position through which the game balls distributed to the second channel can pass. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls flowing down the first channel and the game balls flowing down the second channel can enter. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position. has been done. The determination by the determining means is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means. The variable control means varies the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination means.

This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the result of the determination by the determining means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BL7, based on the establishment of predetermined setting conditions, a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state are established. a third gaming state; and gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state, and the variable control means controls the ball entering means to play the game in the first gaming state. The variable means is controlled to be variable in a first variable mode in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball, and in a second variable mode in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entering means in the second gaming state. In a third variable mode, the variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the third gaming state, the game ball enters the ball entering means more easily than in the first variable mode and the second variable mode. A gaming machine BL8 characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be variable.

According to the gaming machine BL8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BL7, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of predetermined setting conditions, a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from a plurality of gaming states including at least the gaming state. In the first game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is varied in a first variable mode in which it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. In the second game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is varied in a second variable manner in which it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. In the third game state, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means to vary in the third variable mode in which the game ball enters the ball entering means more easily than in the first variable mode and the second variable mode.

Thereby, a plurality of game states are provided in which the ease of entering the ball into the ball entering means is different, so there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine BL8, the first gaming state is one in which the specific discrimination result is determined by the discriminating means with a first probability, and the second gaming state is one in which the discriminating means determines that the specific discrimination result is higher than the first probability. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific discrimination result is obtained with a high second probability, and the three gaming states are those in which the specific discrimination result is obtained with the second probability by the discrimination means. BL9.

According to the gaming machine BL9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BL8, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the first gaming state, the determining means yields a specific determination result with a first probability. In the second gaming state, the determining means yields a specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability. In the third gaming state, the determining means produces a specific determination result with a second probability.

As a result, a novel operation is realized in which the ease of entering the ball into the ball entering means is different between the second and third gaming states, even though the probability of a specific determination result is the same. The effect is that it can be done.

<Characteristic BM group> (It will be advantageous to pass through the time savings)
a discriminating means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to a player based at least on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means yields a specific discrimination result; As a game state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is completed, one of a plurality of game states includes at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state. a gaming state setting means for setting a gaming state, and a specific transition condition that is at least different from the end of execution of the bonus game is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine BM1 comprising: gaming state transition means for shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the above.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Document 1: Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the normal gaming state is set upon the end of a winning state, the disadvantageous state continues at least until the next winning state occurs. However, there was a problem in that it was not possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines have a structure in which, in addition to the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, a third gaming state is provided which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state. By configuring the system so that either the advantageous gaming state or the third gaming state is set after the winning state ends, it is possible for players to continue playing the game at least until the third gaming state ends. There are things that can make people think. However, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined number of drawings are completed in the third gaming state, the third gaming state normally shifts to the normal gaming state; There is a problem in that it becomes difficult to improve the player's interest after the player has played the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BM1, the bonus game execution means provides a benefit advantageous to the player based at least on the fact that the determination by the determination means that is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition yields a specific determination result. The game is executed. As the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is finished, one of the plurality of gaming states includes at least a first gaming status and a second gaming status that is more advantageous than the first gaming status. A gaming state is set by a gaming state setting means. In a state where the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the first gaming state is changed to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific transition condition that is at least different from the end of the execution of the bonus game. The game state is transferred by the game state transfer means.

This allows the player to play the game in the expectation that a specific transition condition will be satisfied in the first gaming state, which has the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game in the first gaming state.

In the gaming machine BM1, the specific transition condition is a determination performed by the determining means after the first gaming state is set, a predetermined specific number of times, and a different determination result from the specific determination result. The gaming machine BM2 is characterized in that it is established when .

According to the gaming machine BM2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BM1, the determination by the determining means executed after being set to the first gaming state is performed for a predetermined specific number of times, and an out-of-order determination that is different from a specific determination result. Since a specific transition condition is satisfied when the result is a negative result, in the first game state, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which each time the determination by the determination means is performed, the expectation is that the result will be a negative determination result. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter into the ball entering means, and a position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means from the first position. a variable means capable of being changed to a second position in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball; and a first variable control in which the variable means is easily changed to the first position in the first gaming state; variable control execution means for executing a second variable control in which the variable means is less likely to be changed to the first position in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state, and the discrimination condition is set for the ball entering means. The gaming machine BM3 is characterized in that this is established based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball.

According to the gaming machine BM3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first position. In the first game state, the first variable control that makes it easier for the variable means to be varied to the first position is executed by the variable control execution means, and in the second game state, the variable means is more variable to the first position than in the first game state. The second variable control, which is difficult to perform, is executed by the variable control execution means. The determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entering means.

This has the effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the variable means will be changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine BM3, the gaming state setting means selects one of a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state. In the third gaming state, the variable control executing means makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than under the first variable control and the second variable control. The game machine BM4 is characterized in that it executes a third variable control.

According to the gaming machine BM4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BM3, the following effects are achieved. That is, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means out of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state. . In the third game state, the third variable control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable control and the second variable control is executed by the variable control execution means.

Thereby, in the third gaming state, it becomes easier for the determining means to perform the determination, so that the game can be played efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in anticipation of entering the third gaming state.

In the gaming machine BM4, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state at a first rate as the gaming state after the bonus game ends. is set, and when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the third gaming state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. Game machine BM5.

According to the gaming machine BM5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BM4, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets the first ratio as the gaming state after the bonus game ends. The third gaming state is set in If a specific determination result is obtained in the gaming state, the third gaming state is more likely to be set as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game. Therefore, in the first gaming state, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the game is played in the expectation that a specific transition condition will be satisfied rather than a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine BM5, the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state at a third ratio higher than the first ratio as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed in the third gaming state. The game machine BM6 is characterized in that it is a game machine that allows settings to be made.

According to the gaming machine BM6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BM5, the gaming state setting means sets a third ratio higher than the first ratio as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed in the third gaming state. Since the third gaming state is set, in the third gaming state, it becomes easy to enter the third gaming state again after the end of the bonus game. Therefore, by entering the third gaming state, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction.

In any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM6, a second bonus game execution means executes the bonus game based on an entry area into which a game ball can enter and a game ball that enters the entry area. A gaming machine BM7 characterized in that it is equipped with the following.

According to the gaming machine BM7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM6, the bonus game is executed by the second bonus game execution means based on the game ball entering the ball entry area. , the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BN group> (Small winnings that are likely to be disadvantageous after the small winning ends if you win during the time saving)
a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition; and a first advantageous game execution for executing a first advantageous game advantageous to the player based on a first determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. and one type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means from among a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. a type determining means for determining the type of the game; and a type determination means for determining the type of the game, and a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game based on a second determination result different from the first determination result determined by the determination means. A second advantageous game execution means for executing a second advantageous game, and a first game state as a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed. is a different second gaming state; and a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a different second gaming state; and a gaming state terminating means for terminating the first gaming state if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the case of the determination result, and the specific condition is determined by the determining means. The first discrimination result is the first discrimination result, and the type determination means determines the first type, and the type determination means determines the first type. The gaming machine BN1 is characterized in that it is configured to be more easily established when two types are determined.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance that allows the ball to enter when the electric accessory is opened (or moved), and the game ball enters the ball entrance. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is released during a specific game (such as a small winning game) that is executed based on the game ball enters a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device. A pachinko machine has been proposed that can award bonus games (jackpot games, etc.) that are advantageous to the player by passing (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, even if a small winning game is executed, if the game ball cannot enter the inside of the V winning device, the bonus game will not be executed. If the player is unable to let the ball enter the ball, there is a risk that the player's interest in playing the game may be lost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BN1, the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player is the first advantageous game based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The advantageous game is executed by the advantageous game execution means. As the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means, the type determination means selects one from among a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. The type is determined. Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means has resulted in a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, the second advantageous game execution means executes a second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game. Ru. As a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed, a game is selected from a plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. One gaming state is set by the state setting means. When the determination by the determination means executed in the first gaming state results in a determination result other than the second determination result, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is the gaming state ending means. is terminated by If the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the first discrimination result and the type determination means determines the first type, the discrimination by the discrimination means yields the first discrimination result, and the type determination means determines the second type. The configuration is such that the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied when .

This has the effect that when the first determination result is obtained, the player can play the game in anticipation that the first type will be determined.

In the gaming machine BN1, the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state ending means terminates the first gaming state if the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BN2 is characterized in that the gaming machine BN2 is configured to cause a transition from the game state to the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BN2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BN1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. If the specific conditions are met, the game state ending means shifts from the first game state to the second game state.

This allows the player to play the game in the first gaming state with the expectation that the specific condition will be met, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine BN1 or BN2 is provided with a ball entry area into which a game ball can enter based on the execution of the first advantageous game, and the second advantageous game execution means executes a game into the ball entry area. The second advantageous game is executed based on the ball entering the ball, and the game state ending means executes the first advantageous game of the first type a first number of times in one of the first game states. The first gaming state is terminated based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the second type has been executed a second number of times less than the first number of times in the first gaming state of one. The gaming machine BN3 is characterized in that the first gaming state is terminated based on the timing.

According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BN1 or BN2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game execution means based on the game ball entering the ball entry area where the ball can enter based on the execution of the first advantageous game. . The first gaming state is ended by the gaming state ending means based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the first type has been executed the first number of times in the first gaming state of No. 1. The first gaming state is ended by the gaming state ending means based on the fact that the two types of first advantageous games have been executed a second number of times smaller than the first number of times.

As a result, during execution of the first advantageous game, it is possible to execute the second advantageous game by letting the game ball enter the ball entry area, or to satisfy a specific condition without making the ball enter the ball entry area. This has the effect of realizing a gameplay that allows you to choose what you want.

In the game machine BN3, the game state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on a game ball entering the ball entry area during execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. The gaming machine BN4 is characterized in that, when the second advantageous game ends, the first gaming state is determined as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game.

According to the gaming machine BN4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN3, the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. In this case, the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game, so it is difficult to determine whether the first advantageous game is of the first type or the second type. Choose whether to make more serious predictions and execute the second advantageous game by letting the game ball enter the ball entry area, or to expect a specific condition to be met without letting the ball enter the ball entry area. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BN4, the game state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on a game ball entering the ball entry area during execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. The gaming machine BN5 is characterized in that, when the second advantageous game ends, the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game.

According to the gaming machine BN5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN4, the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entry area during the execution of the first type of first advantageous game. In this case, the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game, so if the first advantageous game is of the first type, the ball is not allowed to enter the ball entering area. While there is a possibility that a specific condition is satisfied and the transition to the second game state occurs, if it is the second type, the second advantageous game is executed by letting the ball enter the ball entry area, and then the second advantageous game is executed. 2. Transition to gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of the first advantageous game can be predicted more seriously.

In the gaming machine BN5, based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, a common specific performance is executed regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determination means. A gaming machine BN6 characterized in that it is equipped with a specific performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine BN6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN5, the first advantageous game determined by the type determining means is based on the first determination result obtained by the determining means. Since a common specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the first type and the second type based on the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more seriously predict whether it is the first type or the second type.

In any of the gaming machines BN1 to BN6, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The game state setting means sets one game state from a plurality of at least three game states, and the game state setting means sets a game state after the second advantageous game executed in the first game state is completed. As a state, the third gaming state is set at a first rate, and as a gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the second gaming state ends, a second gaming state higher than the first rate is set. The gaming machine BN7 is characterized in that the third gaming state is set at a ratio of .

According to gaming machine BN7, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BN1 to BN6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming state setting means selects one out of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The gaming state is set. As the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the first gaming state ends, the third gaming state is set at the first rate by the gaming state setting means, while the third gaming state is set at the first rate, while the second advantageous game executed in the second gaming state As a gaming state after the second advantageous game ends, a third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

This has the effect that the player can play the game with stronger expectations that the second advantageous game will be executed in the second gaming state.

In the gaming machine BN7, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state at a third ratio higher than the first ratio as the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state ends. A gaming machine BN8 characterized in that three gaming states are set.

According to the gaming machine BN8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN7, the gaming state setting means sets a higher percentage than the first as the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state ends. Since the third gaming state is set at a ratio of 3, when the third gaming state is reached, the second advantageous game and the third gaming state are likely to be repeated. Therefore, when the third gaming state is entered, there is an effect that the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

In gaming machine BN8, gaming machine BN9 is characterized in that the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine BN9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN8, since the second ratio is higher than the third ratio, when the second gaming state is entered, the second advantageous game This has the effect of making the player play the game with stronger expectations that the game will be executed.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for notifying the lottery results, it has been proposed that a preview performance that suggests the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013 -090780).
However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operational means is valid, and a valid period setting means for setting the valid period during which the operation of the operational means is valid and an operation performance execution means capable of executing an operation performance based on the operation of the operation means within the validity period, and information determination that determines information corresponding to the operation performance that can be executed within a predetermined period of the valid period. and operation mode determining means for determining the mode of the operation performance to be executed based on the remaining period of the predetermined period when the operation means is operated within the predetermined period.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the operation performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the operation performance every time the operation means operates within the predetermined period, The information determining means determines information corresponding to the final mode of the operation performance that can be executed within the predetermined period.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, which indicates that when the specific operation effect is executed, a benefit that is advantageous to the player is given. A process operation effect corresponding to the process until the specific operation effect is displayed is set in the operation effect to be executed in the predetermined period, and the operation mode determining means When the remaining period is less than a predetermined period, the specific operation performance is determined, and when the remaining period is more than the predetermined period, the process operation performance corresponding to the remaining period is determined.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, a validity period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, and the operation within the valid period. an operation performance execution means capable of executing an operation performance based on the operation of the means; The apparatus further includes an operation mode determining means for determining a mode of the operation effect to be executed based on the remaining period of the predetermined period when the operation means is operated within a predetermined period.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the operation effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the operation effect each time the operation means operates within the predetermined period, and the information determination means is capable of executing the operation effect within the predetermined period. Information corresponding to the final mode of the operation performance is determined.
Therefore, there is an effect that the process until the final operation performance is executed can be enjoyed.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, it is shown that a benefit advantageous to the player will be given when the specific operation performance is executed, and the operation performance executed in the predetermined period includes the specific operation performance. A process operation effect corresponding to a process until the effect is displayed is set, and the operation mode determining means determines the specific operation effect when the remaining period of the predetermined period is equal to or less than a predetermined period. If the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, the process operation effect corresponding to the remaining period is determined.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic display means)
10340 Lever member (operating means)
S309 Discrimination means S312, S317 Part of dynamic display mode determining means S1004 Part of privilege granting means
S3251 operation effect execution means

Claims (1)

a determination means capable of performing the determination;
a display means capable of displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means;
Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means;
Dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means;
a gaming machine comprising: a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means;
an operating means capable of being displaced into a first state and a second state different from the first state;
It has an operation effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect,
The operating means that has been displaced to the second state is configured to be able to be displaced to the first state in response to not being operated,
In the gaming machine, a predetermined event occurs under a situation in which the operating means is in the first state during at least a specific period in which the operation of the operating means is not determined to be valid, and at a predetermined timing after the occurrence of the predetermined event. When the operating means is in the first state, a first effect of a first operation mode corresponding to the operating means being in the first state is configured to be executable as the operation effect ,
The predetermined event occurs under a situation in which the operating means is prevented from displacing from the second state toward the first state during the specific period, and the predetermined event occurs after the predetermined event occurs. If the operation means is prevented from displacing from the second state to the first state at the timing, the operation effect is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. The second performance of is configured to be executable,
Even if the predetermined event occurs under a situation where the operation means is prevented from displacing from the second state toward the first state, the operation means at the predetermined timing. is in the first state, the first effect is executed;
The first effect can be executed even during a period when the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed,
At the predetermined timing, the operation means is prevented from displacing from the second state toward the first state, and from the predetermined timing until the second effect is executed. Even if the situation in which the operating means is prevented from displacing from the second state toward the first state during the period is resolved, the second effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising :

Images